Oe SU ete Ree? | 4p Tokar. = onde er iphetaertonie “ fit pitt) ae ceri eny ain th hahet cb bi fadcies? Fei iheks a ye eet tag ; { aitehe fects aCe HN edt ee SRGR MALONE heer at Soa sees Be ath niet Bi bt i es i rte i 6% A egy iia ae ti ao ie oe anaes HA A aie ‘ i a Sid hang! ei resk ea ae Ve 3 Prt it “ iM et Ne i yh in} sn (he aa rls if eeiighatenats dsbapee te Mirae HH a tae a Phonak es t/ a ” Hed is fi Raat een ms iS ay EAT ila Meuse 1 ; nt Hehtight ‘ et, HREM APG} bo abe an arn inte CY ts ect Yes "1 ay Mite i JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOLUME 41, 1951 BOARD OF EDITORS * CHARLES DRECHSLER WiiiiaM EF. FosuHaG J. P. E. Morrison PLANT INDUSTRY STATION U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U. S& NATIONAL MUSEUM BELTSVILLE, MD. ASSOCIATE EDITORS J.C. Ewrrs J. I. Horrman ANTHROPOLOGY CHEMISTRY C. W. SABROSKY T. PR. THAYER ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY F. A. CHAce, JR. Miriam L. BomHArRD BIOLOGY BOTANY R. K. Coox PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royau & Guitrorp AVES. BaurimoreE, Mob. ACTUAL DATES OF PUBLICATION, VOLUME 41 No. No. : No. No. No. No. No. No. . 1-48, January 18, 1951 . 49-84, February 23, 1951 _ 85-116, April 3, 1951 . 117-148, April 25, 1951 . 149-180, May 24, 1951 . 181-212, June 22, 1951 . 213-244, July 31, 1951 . 245-276, August 27, 1951 9, pp. . 10, pp. 809-340, October 24, 1951 277-308, September 24, 1951 11, pp. 341-372, November 14, 1951 . 12, pp. 373-404, December 26, 1951 » fi a : i) \ + oF t Pew} Vo. 41 re ee od No. 1 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS Frank C. KRAcEK FREDERICK J. HERMANN WILLIAM F. FosHaG GEOPHYSICAL LABORATORY BUREAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY, U. 8. NATIONAL MUSEUM SOILS, AND AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING ASSOCIATE EDITORS LAWRENCE A. Woop Curtis W. SABROSKY PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY J. P. E. Morrison JAMES 8. WILLIAMS BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY Expert L. Littie, Jr. Joun C. EWERsS BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY JAMES I. HorFMAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Roya & GuILForD AVEs. Bawtimore, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance fo mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925 Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JOURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JoURNAL is issued monthly, on the fifteenth of each month. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints——Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate): Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Harautp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per year.........-......0eee cere e eee $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available.*................ — _ Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 40, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $341.00 Monoerapa No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann. .$4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete..................000-+eeeeeee $25.00 Singlervolumes; unbioundea.e0 eee, hon eee ee oeeenee 2.00 Singlesnumbers:7s2 ... Scat et cos acne Ae OO eee -25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘“‘Washington Academy of Sciences”? and addr ereed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rapriere, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 11, Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoLuME 41 January 1951 No. 1 & AUS TIN HOBART CLARK ISSUE Bd DEDICATION THE PAPERS appearing in this issue of the JouRNAL are written by friends and colleagues of Austin Hobart Clark and form a slight token of their respective authors’ regard for him and tor his work.* As may be seen from their contents, the papers cover a wide range of material and interests. This is eminently as it should be, for few biologists of our time have embraced within the extent of their knowledge and the scope of their sympathies so many and such diverse portions of the fauna and flora of the world. Although his main published works deal with the echino- derms, and particularly with the crinoids, his bibliography includes many and important contributions to our knowledge of birds, of butterflies, of Peripatus, of flowering plants, and even of topics so difficult to classify and pigeonhole as ‘“‘general natural history.’ He was for long a leading figure in the popularization of natural history and a prolific contributor to its literature, as witnessed by his two little volumes of Nature narratives. He was a pioneer in the now widespread use of current scientific data and materials by the newspapers and was one of the first to sense the application of the radio to the dissemination of scientific news and thoughts. For many years he served as the press and publicity official for the American Association for the Advancement of Science, and he did much to build up the techniques of “science reporting” in this country. To his colleagues he was, and is, a man to whom anyone could converse about his own pet specialty or even tangential interest with the assurance not only that he would be understood but also that it would elicit some stimulating and thought- provoking comment from him. An unusually broad acquaintance with the forms of living things and a remarkably retentive memory for the literature about them have given Clark the background for such books as his Animals of land and sea and Animals alive, while his lively curiosity about them conditioned his thinking as expressed in his book on Zoogenesis. When a man attains the age at which his colleagues think of expressing publicly their esteem of him, it is often assumed that he is about to merge gracefully with the ghosts of the forerunners of his particular science. I am confident that none of his many friends have any such thought in mind. Those who know him best are aware that his mind is far too active to assume a passive status and feel that were he to become a ghost he would probably lose no time in organizing among his fellow spirits a new society for the cultivation of scientific interests. Herpert FRIEDMANN. * See note on page 48. san 24 108! AUSTIN HOBART CLARK ZOOLOGIST, BIOLOGIST, NATURALIST AUTHORITY ON ECHINODERMS, PARTICULARLY THE CRINOIDEA SCIENCE WRITER AND AUTHOR Born at Wellesley, Mass., December 17, 1880; prepared for college in the high school and in Cutler’s School, Newton, Mass.; entered Harvard in 1899, graduated with A.B. degree in 1903. Member of the Washington Academy of Sciences since April 8, 1912; has been one of its most indefatigable workers and staunch- est supporters over the years; president in 1941 and before and since that time vice- president representing two of the affliated societies, Archeological in 1922, 1923 and Entomological, 1936, 1939-1944; member of the Board of Managers 1926-28, Committee on Meetings 1920-21, 1938, 1939, Committee on Membership 1934, 1938, Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (first gen- eral chairman) 1940, Subcommittee on Awards in Biological Sciences 1940, 1943, Committee on Policy and Planning 1941-51, Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent 1950-52. Chief interest, animal life. This, he tells us, began about at the age of 10. Already in 1898 he was abroad a year “getting ac- quainted with European creatures,” and in the following summer he learned to know more of the American ones in the mountains of Tennessee. Two years later, at the head of a personally organized expedition, he was investigating the flora and fauna of Marga- rita Island, Venezuela; the published results led to his election as a fellow of the Royal (London) Geographic Society in 1904. Fol- lowing graduation from college in 1903, after a brief sojourn at the then newly established Bermuda biological station, he spent two years exploring the Lesser Antilles. There- after, joining the U. 8. Bureau of Fisheries, he served as naturalist on the 1906 cruise of the Fisheries steamer Albatross to Japan. Professional career: Collaborator (honor- ary), United States National Museum 1908; assistant curator, Division of Marine In- vertebrates 1909-20; curator, Division of Echinoderms 1920-50; retired December 31, 1950; in 1923 established a series of weekly radio talks given in the name of the Smith- sonian Institution. Affiliations: American Association for the Advancement of Science (news manager and director press service, 1924-89 in charge radio programs, centennial meeting, Wash- ington, D. C., 1948); International Com- mittee on Radio (Comité International de la T.S.F.); American Geophysical Union (chairman for Oceanographic Section); Ad- visory Committee on Source Bed Studies of the American Petroleum Institute and Amer- ican Association of Petroleum Geologists; American Association of Museums; Carnegie Corporation and Rockefeller Foundation Conference on Place of Science in Education; Virginia Academy of Science; (2d honorary member; committee on long-range planning and science education) ; Executive Committee of the Southern Association of Science and Industry; Eighth American Scientific Con- egress (press relations officer); National Parks Association (trustee); Navy Oceanographic Conference (1924); National Association of Science Writers (first honorary member); American Society of Naturalists; American Ornithologists’ Union; Lepidopterists So- ciety (vice-president); Biological Society of Washington; Entomological Society; Cam- bridge (Massachusetts) Entomological Club; aide-de-camp to the Prince of Monaco during the latter’s visit to this country in 1921. In 1927 His Majesty, the King of Denmark and Iceland, conferred upon Austin Clark the Cross of a Knight of the Order of Dannebrog. Author of more than 650 papers, treatises, and books, technical and popular, chiefly in the field of zoology, marine biology, ocea- nography, and natural history, ermoids, echi- noderms, birds, and Lepidoptera. Publications especially worthy of mention are: A Monograph of the existing crinoids; The new evolution—Zoogenesis; Nature nar- ratives; Butterflies of the District of Columbia; Animals of land and sea; Animals alive. Married Mary Wendell Upham 1906, de- ceased 932% children, two sons, three daugh- ters; 6 grandchildren. Married, Leila Gay Forbes, 1933. W. LS. a JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 1 PALEONTOLOGY .—New brachiopods from the Lower Cambrian of Virginia. G. ArTHUR Coorrr, U.S. National Museum. The brachiopods described and _ figured herein were collected by several geologists during investigations of the geology about Austinville, Va. The first lot of material was collected by W. Horatio Brown, chief geologist for the New Jersey Zine Co. at the Bertha Mineral Co. in 1929. Later col- lections were made by Charles Butts, E. O. Ulrich, George W. and Anna J. Stose, and Charles E. Resser. Most of the brachiopods were too poorly preserved to be recovered from the matrix in identifiable form, but from the large quantity of material collected it was possible to prepare a few first-rate specimens. The chief obstacle to successful prepara- tion of the specimens was tight cementation to the limestone matrix enclosing them. Several were destroyed in attempting to split them out of the matrix, because the pedicle valve posterior always failed to crack away from the surrounding rock. The same was true after the rock was roasted and plunged in cold water. The anterior and lateral parts of pedicle valves were released, but perfect beaks were never obtained. The reason for this difficulty proved to be a large foramen near the apex through which the filling of the inside was joined to the matrix outside the shell. After this discovery several specimens were cleaned that showed the large apical foramen, which is of con- siderable interest in brachiopod taxonomy. These new genera occur in a reef lime- stone in the Lower Cambrian (Shady) for- mation with the brachiopods Kutorgina, Nisusia, Swantonia, and Yorkia. Character- istic Lower Cambrian trilobites occurring in the same rock are: Kootenia, Rimouskia, Bonnia, and Labradoria. These clearly fix the age of the peculiar forms here discussed. The two species herein described are named in honor of Austin H. Clark in recog- nition of his great contributions to taxonomy and biology. Eoconcha, n. gen. Shell spiriferoid in appearance, strongly and subequally biconvex, with a wide hinge that may 1 Received October 6, 1950. or may not form the greatest shell width; brachial valve sulcate; pedicle valve with a low median fold; surface marked by strong direct and inter- calated costae. Palintrope of pedicle valve well developed, generally apsacline; delthryium covered by a convex pseudodeltidium; foramen moderately large, located at or anterior to the apex as in Nisusia. Teeth small, inconspicuous, forming by their forward growth a marginal thickening along lateral edges of delthryium; dental plates absent. Brachial valve with flattened brachiophores located under the notothyrial edge and without supporting plates as in Nisusza. Seat of diductor muscle attachment a small callosity located at the apex of the notothryial cavity. Muscular (adductor) scar elongate, located in front of no- tothyrial callosity on each side of median line. Genotype: Hoconcha austint, n. sp. Discussion.—The internal characters of this genus are essentially the same as those of Nisusia with the exception that in the latter a trace of dental plates has been detected (Cooper,” p. 213). Thus the generic definition of this peculiar bra- chiopod is based mainly on the external features. Although the nature of the pseudodeltidium and palintropes is like that of Niswsia the ornamen- tation, profile and folding are different. The ornamentation of Hoconcha consists of simple, strong costae that extend from the beak to the anterior margins or may be intercalated at the front or middle of the shell. The characteristic spines of the Nisusia exterior are not present in this new genus. The brachial valve is provided with a fairly deep median sulcus while the pedicle valve has a more or less well-defined fold. The presence of a sulcus on the brachial valve is a feature common to geologically early or immature brachiopods particularly those of the Orthacea. The brachial sulcus is here regarded as a primitive character. The actual apical foramen in the specimen on which this genus and species is based was not seen except in one specimen. It is inferred in the others from the fact that the beaks of all pedicle valves are broken away. This is a common fea- ture also of specimens of Nisusia similarly pre- served. > Cooppr, G. A. New Cambrian brachiopods from Alaska. Journ. Paleont. 10 (3): 210-214, pl. 26. 1936. JANUARY 1951 Eoconcha austini, n. sp. Biconvex, wider than long, with the hinge forming the widest part or narrower than the midwidth; cardinal extremities acutely or ob- tusely angular. Surface costate with 9-13 costae. Pedicle valve moderately convex to subpyram- idal in lateral profile, strongly and somewhat narrowly rounded in anterior profile; median fold originating posterior to the middle, not greatly elevated above the surface of the valve and composed of one to three costae. Lateral slopes convex and moderately steep. Beak ob- tuse; interarea moderately long, apsacline. Brachial valve moderately convex in lateral profile and more broadly convex than the pedicle valve in anterior profile. Sulcus shallow, narrow, extending from beak to anterior margin and us- ually occupied by one costa which is depressed below the two strong costae bounding the sulcus. Flanks with moderately steep slopes to the car- dinal extremities. Measurements in mm.—Pedicle valve (U.S.N. M. no. 111691-a), length 9.2, midwidth 12.0, hinge-width 11.7; (111691-e) length 10.3, mid- width 12.9, hinge-width 12.7, thickness about 5. Brachial valves (111691-i) length 9.8, mid- width 15.4, hinge-width 13.9, thickness 3.9?; (111691-k) length 9.4, midwidth 13.7, hinge- width 15.4?, thickness 4.1? Types—Holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 111691-a; fig- ured paratypes, U.S.N.M. nos. 111691-d, f, g, h, k, m; unfigured paratypes, U.S.N.M. nos. 111691- ID) GG th tly Ie Horizon and locality.—Shady formation, 1 mile east of Austinville, Max Meadows quadrangle, Va. Discussion.—The strong costae of the exterior distinguish this from any known species of Nisusia. No other species of Hoconcha is now known. Matutella, n. gen. Shell fairly large, syntrophoid in profile and outline; brachial valve strongly uniplicate, pedicle valve deeply sulcate; hinge wide; ornamenta- tion consisting of irregular intercalated and bi- furcating costellae. Pedicle umbo pierced by a large longitudinally oval foramen; palintrope short, delthyrium mod- erately wide, covered by a convex pseudodeltid- ium. Dental plates absent. Diductor sears flabel- late. COOPER: NEW BRACHIOPODS FROM VIRGINIA iS) Brachial valve with long flat palintrope with exceptionally broad interarea; notothyrium wide, other details of the interior uncertain. Genotype: Matutella clark, n. sp. Discussion.—This genus is quite unlike any other known Paleozoic brachiopod in the extent to which the foramen is developed. This wide foramen existing with a delthyrium covered by a convex pseudodeltidium suggests relationship to the members of the Nisusiidae. Matutella differs from Nisusia and FHoconcha in the ex- ceptionally large foramen and the syntrophoid shape and form of the valves. It differs further from Hoconcha in having the high fold on the brachial valve and the deep sulcus on the pedicle valve. This unusual brachiopod combines primitive and advanced characters to form a paradoxical genus. The external form is that of one of the later brachiopods such as Syntrophina, Platystrophia, or a narrow-hinged spiriferoid. Casual inspection has led observers to regard specimens as of later age than the Cambrian, so unusual is its form. The strong convexity of both valves is an unusual feature for an early brachiopod. Along with the convexity, as an advanced character, is the deep folding of both valves and the localization of the foldtothe brachial valve. In contemporary Nisusia the folding is not standardized as it is in Matutella, the same species often showing a faint fold or suleus on the pedicle or brachial valve. This lack of stability in folding is a primitive character whereas the strong localization of the fold to the brachial valve is a feature that has become fixed in most of the advanced members of the Pro- tremata. Although the folding is that of an advanced brachiopod the ornamentation of Matutella is primitive in its lack of standardization and the wavy character of the costellae. The most unusual feature of the genus is the large foramen that occupies nearly or all of the stronely convex umbo. The beak is located at the narrow end of the oval and is thickened and strengthened at this point. The foramen varies in size on four specimens from 8 by 2 mm to 5 by 84mm. So far as can be observed the shell is not noticeably thickened around the margins of the foramen except in the vicinity of the beak. The interarea of the pedicle valve of Matutella is like that of most brachiopods having this form and convexity. It is short, curved generally orthocline or anacline. The teeth are small and 6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES located at the basal angles of the delthyrium as usual in most brachiopods. The pseudodeltidium is narrowly elevated and considerably thickened from the inside and very effectively covers the delthyrium. The latter obviously did not serve as a pedicle opening in this genus. Much of the shell of Matutella was so thin that mere traces of the musculature occur on any of the specimens where the valves have been exfoliated. Faint markings that are possible flabellate diductors occur on internal impressions on the antero- lateral extremities on each side of the foramen. The thin shell and poor preservation combine to make preparation of internal characters of the brachial valve almost impossible. The palintrope of this valve is quite unusual in its length and breadth. It is usually deeply striated parallel to the hinge-line by interruptions in growth. The notothyrium is wide but on its margins the characteristic thickenings of brachiophores were not seen on any of the specimens nor were any well-defined sockets seen. One specimen indicates the rudiments of a chilidium in an upward wave of the palintrope at the beak. The musculature is as indefinite as the rest of the structures of this valve. Several exfoliated specimens show vague markings suggesting the musculature of the bra- chial valve of Nisusia. Matutella clarki, n. sp. Shell large for a Cambrian genus, wider than long, with the hinge slightly less than the greatest shell width, which is located a short distance voL. 41, No. 1 anterior to the middle. Cardinal extremities ob- tuse or nearly rectangular with small ears on pedicle valve. Sides moderately convex; anterior commissure strongly uniplicate. Surface marked by narrowly rounded radiating but irregular costellae which fade out on the cardinal extrem- ities. Costellae increasing by bifurcation and in- tercalation. Fine concentric growth lines over the entire shell. Pedicle valve moderately convex in lateral profile but with the umbonal region truncated by the foramen; anterior profile deeply suleate; sul- cus originating slightly anterior to the foramen, deepening and widening rapidly to equal about half the width of the valve; sulcus extended to- ward the brachial valve into a long and sharply pointed tongue bent nearly at right angles to the lateral commissure. Flanks bounding sulcus nar- rowly rounded in anterior profile with steep slopes to the cardinal extremities. Interarea short, about orthocline in position. Beak small incurved; foramen large and longitudinally elliptical. Brachial valve gently convex im lateral pro- file, most noticeably convex in the umbonal region; anterior profile almost semicircular but with flattened top; fold origmating less than one- third the length from the beak, narrowly rounded to subcarinate and most strongly elevated at anterior. Flanks bounding fold gently rounded and with steep slopes to the sides and cardinal extremities. Interarea long, orthocline (?). Measurements in mm.—Holotype, pedicle valve, length 13.4, width at middle 17.6, hinge- Fias. 1-38.—Nisusia borealis Cooper: 1, Apical view of young pedicle valve showing elevated pseudo- deltidium and large foramen, X38, U.S.N.M. no. 91903-a; 2, 3, respectively posterior and apical views of an incomplete adult pedicle valve, X4, showing elevated pseudodeltidium, hypotype, U.S.N.M. no. 111692. Introduced for comparison with Hoconcha and Matutella. Frias. 4-7, 9-14.—Hoconcha austini Cooper, n. gen., n. sp.: 4, Posterior view of an impression of the interior of a pedicle valve showing convex pseudodeltidium and thickening along delthyrial edge rep- resenting growth track of teeth, X2, paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 111691-d; 5, impression of apex of pedicle valve showing convex pseudodeltidium, 2, holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 111691-a; 10, 11, posterior and apical views of a wax replica of the pedicle valve prepared from impression illustrated in Fig. 5 (shows pseudo- deltidium and foramen, the latter imperfectly, <2); 6, 7, respectively posterior and brachial views of the impression of a brachial valve, X2, X14, showing impression of brachiophores, paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 111691-g; 9, posterior view of an internal impression of a pedicle valve showing fractured apex in- dicating presence of open foramen, X1, paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 111691-m; 12, wax replica of interior of a brachial valve showing primitive brachiophores, X2, paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 111691-h; 13, impres- sion of a brachial valve showing costae, X2, paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 111691-k; 14, impression of brachial interior showing probable adductor muscle impressions, <2, paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 111691-f. Fras. 8, 15-27.—Matutella clarki Cooper, n. gen., n. sp.: 8, Pedicle interarea showing rounded pseudo- deltidium, X2, paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 111689-c; 19, 25, exterior of two pedicle valves, X1, respectively holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 111689-a, and paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 111689-d; 15, 29, 24, respectively anterior, exterior, and posterior views of the pedicle valve, X2, paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 111689-d; 16, exterior of a large but imperfect brachial valve, X2, paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 111689-k; 17. Imperfect brachial valve showing ornamentation, X2, paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 111689-g; 18, 23, respectively posterior and exterior views of the holotype, X2. showing foramen and ornamentation; 22, fragment of exterior en- larged to show details of costella, X3. paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 111689-e; 21, 26, 27, respectively side, 1, internal impression, and exterior views of a brachial valve, X2, paratype U.S.N.M. no. 111689-n. (Fig. 27 is a wax replica of the exterior taken from an impression of the exterior.) JANUARY 1951 width 13.1, width of sulcus 9.6, thickness 3.7. Brachial valve (U.S.N.M. no. 111689-n) meas- ured on half specimen, then doubled to obtain approximate measurements, length 13.2, mid- width 17:2, thickness 9.2. Types.—Holotype, U.8.N.M. no. 111689-a; fig- > ee 1g eu Reset fae COOPER: NEW BRACHIOPODS FROM VIRGINIA 7 ured paratypes, U.S.N.M. nos. 111689-c, d, e, g, k, n; unfigured paratypes, U.S.N.M. nos. 111689-b, f, h, i,j, 1, m, o. Horizon and locality.—Shady formation (reefs), Buddle Branch, ? mile northeast of Austinville, Max Meadows quadrangle, Va. Fias. 1-27.—(See opposite page for legend). 8 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADMEY OF SCIENCES DISCUSSION OF THE GENERA The brachiopods discussed herein are of considerable interest because they are ob- viously highly specialized along certain lines, yet they are among the earliest of known articulate brachiopods. They are thus primi- tive but highly specialized brachiopods. Paterina was regarded by Beecher and Schu- chert as the most primitive brachiopod and the one nearest the theoretical brachiopod progenitor. Inasmuch as these peculiar shells from Virginia occur with the primitive Paterina, they have an interesting and sig- nificant importance in brachiopod taxonomy and phylogeny. They help to emphasize the fact that in the articulates the pseudodelti- dium is a primitive feature, whereas the unmodified delthyrium is an advanced char- acter. They also indicate that the articulates must have a long ancestry in the pre-Cam- brian. Paterina itself must be considered as an early but highly specialized brachiopod. Its structure is so unusual that it must be ruled out as near the progenitor of the brachiopods. The most primitive shelled brachiopod is yet to be found. Although the presence of a pseudodelti- dium is an accepted primitive character in articulate brachiopods, it has not been suffi- ciently emphasized that an apical foramen is also a primitive character. The foramina of the genera herein described and of Nisusza differ from those of later genera having an apical foramen in the size and location of the opening. In these early Cambrian genera such as Nisusia the foramen is excavated VOL. 41, No. 1 in the pedicle umbo rather than in the apex, a position that is seldom occupied by a foramen other than the type produced by anterior pedicle migration in the later bra- chiopods. This is especially true of Matutella with its strongly arched beak the umbo of which is truncated by a large oval foramen. This foramen is quite unlike any other known and is not produced by resorption of the beak due to pedicle pressure as often takes place in the Terebratulacea. A foramen like that of Nisuwsza occurs in later brachi- opods in the young of many Strophomenidae such as Leptaena, Strophomena and Christi- ania in which extremely youthful shells have the apex occupied by a large foramen. Although the young of the Strophomenidae are often Nisusza-like in their appearance it is not at present possible to derive this group out of Nizsusva for the simple reason that the first unquestioned strophomenid, Taffia, occurs in the Upper Canadian. No forms are known that bridge the long time gulf between the two. Cambrian Articulate brachiopods are too poorly known to state whether or not Nz- susta and allies disappeared without issue. The known later Cambrian brachiopods are- either without apical foramina, have an open delthyrium (Hoorthis) or have the foramen confined to the deltidium (Billing- sella. For the present it is best Just to em- phasize the fact that the earliest known _ Articulates had a more or less large foramen situated on the pedicle umbo anterior to the apex of the pseudodeltidium or trun- cating the apex because of pedicle pressure. PALEONTOLOGY .—Two new guide fossils from the Tallahatta formation of the Southeastern States.! JULIA GARDNER, U.S. Geological Survey. Though the name of Austin Hobart Clark is most closely associated with echinoderms, butterflies, and birds, most of us who have frequented the United States National Mu- seum for the past few decades have, from time to time, sought Mr. Clark’s aid on problems in our own particular fields, and not in vain. All animals alive are his interest, even Homo sapiens. The two species about to be inscribed to him are long since dead, 1 Published by permission of the Director, U.S. Geological Survey, Received October 6, 1950. to be sure, but the inscription does not seem inappropriate, for as Mr. Clark has served as our guide, philosopher, and friend, helping us to orient ourselves and to check our posi- tions in the world about us, so wavering students coming upon these fossils may find them dependable guides to the Tallahatta formation of the middle Eocene, usually to the upper part of the Tallahatta. Genus Anodontia Link, 1807 Anodontia Link, Beschreibung der Naturalien- Sammlung der Universitit zu Rostock, pt. 3: 157. 1807. JANUARY 1951 GARDNER: GUIDE FOSSILS Type by monotypy: Ancdontia alba Link = Venus edentula Linnaeus. Link styled his genus the Glattmuschel and briefly characterized it as: Equivalve, the valves closed, without ears; the hinge without teeth; the anterior muscle scar much longer than the posterior; the ligament external. He cited two references—Chemnitz’s Conchylien-Cabinet 7: pl. 39, figs. 410 and 411, which illustrate a venerid; and the Gmelin of Linnaeus, p. 3286. Figures 408 and 409 of plate 39 of Chemnitz illustrate the “Venusof Jamaica’ and figures 427 to 429 on plate 40, Venus edentula. The mechanics of the typo- graphical error that resulted in the reference as it appeared in Link are difficult to reconstruct. The explanation suggested by Stewart (pp. 179- 180) forced him to the unhappy necessity of 2? Stewart, Raupu B., Gabb’s California Creta- ceous and Tertiary type lamellibranchs, Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia Spec. Publ. no. 3, 314 pp., 17 pls. 1930. Fic. 1.—Anodontia? augustana Gardner, n. sp.: @ i view of double valves of holotype; c, hinge of incomplete paratype (U.S.N.M. no. 560588); d, fragment of hinge of paratype (U.S.N.M. no. 560590); e, exterior of broken anterior dorsal margin (U.S.N.M. no. 560590). All natural size. FROM TALLAHATTA FORMATION 9 designating Lucina jamaicensis Lamarck as the genotype. A simpler interpretation was offered in a discussion with Dr. Harald A. Rehder, Cura- tor of mollusks in the United States National Museum. He suggested that Link may never have even seen the Conchylien-Cabinet, that he took the reference to Chemnitz directly from Gmelin, but that in so doing his eye slipped up the page and he copied the notation under the preceding snecies, V. scripta (pl. 39, figs. 410-411) in place of that under Venus edentula (pl. 40, figs. 427— 429). That solution is here accepted. Anodontia? augustana Gardner, n. sp. Fig. 1, a-e Shells large, most commonly represented by globose molds of the interior, broader than they are high and subject to distortion by a shortening along the vertical axis; in the normal shells, the distance from the beaks to the ventral margin is , Side view of right valve of holotype; 6, umbonal 10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES only a little more than the diameter. In place of a lunule, a flaring anterior margin, reflected over the umbones somewhat in the manner of the pholads. Shell flattening toward the posterior dorsal margin but no defined escutcheon. Hinge edentulous. Ligament groove deep, the ligament conspicuous, and in some of the larger specimens arching above the escutcheon; ligament and re- silium may have been partially separated. Muscle scars not traceable in any of the shells available. Obscure radiating lines, about six to the centi- meter, evident on molds of interior. No defined sculpture pattern on exterior of shell but an ir- regular concentric wrinkling over the entire outer surface. Dimensions of holotype, an interior mold of paired valves with fragments of shell adhering: Height, 60 mm; width, 78 mm; diameter, 57 mm. Paratypes too fragmentary to measure. Holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 560587, from Lisbon Bluff, Alabama River, 3 feet or less below the contact of the Tallahatta and Lisbon formations, Monroe County, Ala. Paratype (Fig. 1, c), U.S. N.M. no. 560588, from U.S.G.S. station 15159, Fort Gaines-Abbeville road just south of the bridge over McRae Creek, Henry County, Ala. Paratype (Fig. 1, d-e), U.'S.N.M. no. 560590, from US.G.S. station 15475, south slope to Little Choctawatchee River, on State Highway 66, Houston County, Ala. The upward flare of the anterior dorsal margin is unlike that of any known Recent or fossil lucinoid and probably is a character of more than specific value. But the material is so limited and so fragmentary that, awaiting further evidence, the species is referred to Anodontia sensu lato. Anodontia? augustana must have been a fragile shell and in need of protection through the en- vironment. It probably lived on soft muddy bottoms near the mouths of rivers and in sheltered bays in water of shallow or only moderate depths sheltered from strong current action. Such bot- tom conditions are reflected in the fine silicified clays of the so-called Buhrstone of the Tallahatta formation. Anodontia augustana has been recorded from the following U.S.G.S. stations: No number. NW3 sec. 34, T. 11 N., R.2 W., east of Toxey, Choctaw County, Ala. 17919. Little Stave Creek, directly below Talla- hatta-Lisbon contact; about 44 miles north of Jackson, Clarke County, Ala. 14785-g. Little Stave Creek, between 5 and 10 feet voL. 41, No. 1 below Tallahatta-Lisbon contact; about 44 miles north of Jackson, Clarke County, Ala. 15924. Contact of siliceous clay and overlying greensand, 3 miles northeast of Chilton on Thomasville road, Clarke County, Ala. 15925. Long slope leading down to Silver Creek about 6 miles west-southwest of Chance on Dickenson road, Clarke County, Ala. 15920. About 13 miles west of Chance on Dickenson road, Clarke County, Ala. 17090. Lisbon Bluff, Alabama River, 3 feet or less below the Tallahatta-Lisbon contact, Monroe County, Ala. Type locality. 13442. Lisbon Bluff, Alabama River, within 10 feet of. Tallahatta-Lisbon contact, Monroe County, Ala. 13441. Lisbon Bluff, Alabama River, within 10.5 feet of Tallahatta-Lisbon contact, Monroe County, Ala. 15132. Railroad cut in south center of sec. 14, T. 8 N., R. 8 E., Monroe County, Ala. 15480. East bank of Conecuh River about 200 yards above highway bridge at River Falls, Covington County, Ala. 11091. Hays Creek at Bedsole’s old mill road from Elba to Kinston, S} sec. 15, T. 4 N., R. 19 E., Coffee County, Ala. 15159. Road cut on Fort Gaines-Abbeville road just south of the bridge over McRae Creek, center sec. 12, T. 17 N., R. 29 E., Henry County, Ala. 15475. South slope to Little Choctawhatchee River in road cut on new State Highway 66, SE} sec. 34, T. 4 N., R. 24 E., Houston County, Ala. Shells silicified. 7728. Warley Hill, 7 miles southeast of Fort Motte on Lonestar road, Calhoun County, 8. C. A mold 92 mm wide from Bed No. 8 of Cooke section. No number. Road cut on South side of Halfway Swamp Creek about 2; miles northwest of Creston,’ Calhoun County, S. C. A mold 140 mm wide from the Congaree clay of Sloan. Genus Spiratella de Blainville, 1817 Spiratella de Blainville, Dictionnaire des sciences naturelles 9: 407. 1817. = Limacina Lamarck, 1819. Type by original designation and monotypy: Clio helicina Phipps (exceedingly abundant in Arctic waters). Spiratella augustana Gardner, n. sp. Fig. 2, a-c Shell very small. Whorls 4 to 43, sinistrally coiled in a nearly horizontal plane, the body em- bracing the whorls of the spire as in Planorbis. The aperture higher than it is wide, the body ex- panding at the aperture both vertically and hor- JANUARY 1951 izontally ; the outer surface of the preceding whorl forming the inner wall of the aperture; posterior margin of the body folded into the suture. The visible surface of the apical whorls rounded, searcely elevated above the plane of the body. Umbilical area narrowly funicular. No sculpture other than obscure incrementals and the cording of the adult margin of the outer lip. Dimensions of holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 560589: Maximum diameter, 3 mm; diameter at right angles to the maximum diameter, 2.6 mm; min- imum diameter 2.3 mm; height, 1.5 mm. Type locality: U.S.G.S. station 17911, between 15 and 20 feet below the contact of the Tallahatta and Lisbon formations and 4 feet above the stream bed of Little Stave, 43 miles north of Jackson, Clarke County, Ala. Eyen the ordinal relationships of these shells resembling small sinistral Planorbis and locally common in the marine faunas of the upper Talla- hatta baffled me. I sought the guidance of that dean of malacologists, Dr. Henry A. Pilsbry, and to good purpose. I am grateful to him for his never-failing aid. The species I described in 1927 as Planorbis andersoni? is doubtless closely related, though not identical. The Texas form is smaller, which may or may not be significant. It is also more com- pressed and is more regular in form. The outer lip is less expanded, and the body whorl, both on the apical and umbilical surfaces, is rather sharply keeled. The locality, U.S.G:S. station 9264, three- fourths of a mile south of Elkhart, Anderson County, Tex., is in the Weches greensand member of the Mount Selman formation, which correlates roughly with the Tallahatta formation. * The range of variation in these small forms is difficult to establish. They vary in size, in the height of the spire, and, owing largely to warping, in the outline of the outer lip. The type individ- ual is one of the largest collected, the apical whorls are less elevated than in many, and the margin of the outer lip is broken, destroying the minutely elliptical outline of the aperture, which is characteristic of the species. Probably the fossil pteropods have a much wider distribution than the literature indicates, for the shells are all small and easily overlooked. 3 GARDNER, JuLIA A., New species of mollusks from the Eocene of Texas. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci., 17 (14): 362-383, 4 pls., 44 figs. 1927. GARDNER: GUIDE, FOSSILS FROM TALLAHATTA FORMATION 11 Among the related forms are Limacina inflata (d’Orbigny), 1835, a warm-water Recent species, Seen Lim @) Fre. 2.—Sprratella augustana Gardner, n. sp.: a, Apical view of holotype; 0, profile of holotype; c, umbilical view of holotype. 12 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES and Limacina elevata Collins,* described from the middle Miocene of Santa Rosa, Veracruz, Mexico. . Many of the Recent species, possibly the majority, are to be found in the plankton of the Arctic. The distribution of Spiratella augustana, like that of other planktonic forms, is independent of the character of the bottom except as bottom conditions affect the preservation of the dead shell. The species is contained in glauconitic sandy clays, glauconitic sands, and blocky si- liceous clays. Except for a few interruptions by oyster reefs, Spiratella augustana is disseminated through almost the entire upper 57 feet of Talla- hatta exposed along Little Stave Creek, at Lis- bon Bluff and in a few nearby localities. The species seems also to lightly overstep the Talla- hatta-Lisbon contact and may be recorded by a few closely related if not identical individuals in the lower 10 feet of the Lisbon formation. Disrripution: Tallahatta formation. Little Stave Creek, 43 miles north of Jackson, Clarke County, Alabama; U.S.G.S. station 14785 b-c, from 10 to 20 feet below the Ostrea johnsoni bed; 4Conuins, Ropert LEE, A monograph of the American Tertiary pteropod mollusks. Johns Hop- kins Univ. Stud. Geol. no. 11: 137-234, pls. 7-14. 1934. VOL. 41, No. I U.S.G.S. station 14431, 40 feet below the top of the Tallahatta formation; between the Ostrea johnson bed and the Tallahatta-Lisbon contact, U.S.G.S. stations 14785 f-h, 17910, 17911, 17918, 17907, 17909, 17912, 17926, 17927, 17916 a-b, 17919 a: Lisbon Bluff, Lisbon Landing, Ala- bama River, Monroe County, Ala.; U.S.G.S. station 13430, bluish-black clay at base of sec- tion; U.S.G.S. stations 13440 and 134438, in- durated layer about 8 feet below the Tallahatta- Lisbon contact; and U.S.G.S. station 13442, dense blue-gray clay with lucinoid molds directly be- low the fucoidal layer and not more than 5 feet below the Tallahatta-Lisbon contact; U.S.G.S. station 14799, 3.8 miles east of Silas on Bladen Springs road, Choctaw County, Ala. Within the area, Spiratella augustana is most common at the stations on Little Stave Creek between the Ostrea johnsoni bed and a level a little below the Tallahatta-Lisbon contact. It is present, however, up to the very contact, to the blocky siliceous clays of the contact specimen itself. Closely related though possibly not specifi- cally identical individuals have been recovered from levels not more than 10 feet above the contact at U.S.G.S. stations 17917, 17923, and 17924. PALEONTOLOGY .—Nucula austinclarki, n. sp., a concentrically sculptured Nucula from the Lisbon formation of Alabama. F. Srrarns MacNett, U.S. Geological Survey. Strong concentric sculpture, although not unknown, is so unusual among the Nuculidae that the question arises as to whether the few species that possess it are closely re- lated and constitute a natural generic or subgeneric group. The ribs on different species are so dissimilar in cross section, however, that this close relationship seems doubtful. In some species the ribs are in- clined steps with the high, sharp edge on the dorsal side, as in Nucula austinclarki, here described. In other species the high sharp edge is on the ventral side. Still other species have more symmetrical ribs with either sharp cr rounded crests. 1 Published by permission of the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. According to Schenck,’ the primary di- vision of the Nuculidae should be on the presence or absence of denticulations of the ventral margin. All the species with con- centric sculpture except one have denticula- tions on the ventral margins, and all these are referred to Nucula s.s. on the basis of shape, teeth, and ligament. Only one form, the. genus Nuculoma of Cossmann, with concentric sculpture and no marginal dentic- ulations is known. Nuculoma, which is known only from the Jurassic, appears from the figures to have concentric ribs that are gently inclined on the dorsal side and sharp on the ventral side, just the reverse of the condition in the species here described. * Scuenck, Hupert G., Bull. Mus. Royal Hist. Nat. Belgique 10 (20): 18. 1934. JANUARY 1951 Three species of Nucula with concentric sculpture were listed by Schenck. They are: N. haesendonckii Nyst and Westendorp, from the Anversian (upper Miocene) of Holland, a species with [noceramus-like con- centric ribs, NV. compressa Philippi, from the Chattian (upper Oligocene) of Belgium, de- scribed as having ‘‘distinct concentric undu- lations,” and N. duchastelii Nyst, from the Rupelian (middle Oligocene) of Belgium, a species with strong but very irregular con- centric ridges that converge and diverge across the shell. In addition to these Oligocene and Mio- cene species, two other Miocene and a Re- cent species have been described. Nucula (Nucula) njalindungensis Martin, from the lower Miocene of Java and Borneo, like NV. duchasteli1, has concentric lines that freely converge and diverge. Nucula prunicola, Dall, from the middle Miocene of Maryland has concentric ribs that are highest and sharp at the dorsal edge and gently sloping on the ventral side. They are thus of the same type as those of the new species but are developed at the anterior end of the shell only. The chondrophore of NV. prunicola is also much narrower than that of the species here described. Nucula exigua Sow- erby is living from California to southern Mexico. It has concentric lirations that are more or less symmetrical and are highest along a central crest. From the Eocene three species with con- centric sculpture have been described. The new species is also of Eocene age. Two of these are from the Calcaire grossier of France, N. capillacea Deshayes and JN. minor Deshayes. The third was described from the London clay of England as N. MACNEIL: NUCULA AUSTINCLARKI 13 regnorum Wrigley. All these species are small, the largest specimen of NV. regnorum measuring 8.0 mm, and both of Deshayes’s species being less than 5.0 mm in length. A description of the new Eocene species follows: Genus Nucula Lamarck, 1799 Type: Arca nucleus Linnaeus. The species here described is characterized by its very unusual concentric sculpture. The shell is large for the genus, but on the basis of its shape, teeth, ligament, and marginal denticulations it appears to be a typical Nucula. Nucula austinclarki MacNeil, n. sp. Figs. 1, 2 Shell large and medium inflated, subovate; anterior dorsal margin gently curved; anterior extremity blunt but straighter along the dorsal margin; lunular area subrostrate; posterior margin gently curved; posterior extremity sub- angulate; escutcheonal area truncate, with the posterior ridge curving gently in a direction opposite to thecurveof the posterior margin; outer surface sculptured by strong concentric ribs that are inclinded and low on the ventral side, but with a sharp, usually undercut edge on the dorsal side; most of the ribs continuous around the shell but an occasional one is partly covered or over- lapped by the next younger one; ribs with faint radial lines at some points; ventral margin with well developed denticulations; teeth on the an- terior side regular and nesting within each other, about 22 in number, posterior teeth less regular, not forming a uniformly chevroned series, about 10 in number; interior smooth, muscle scars impressed, pallial line strong and entire. 9 x14 Fics. 1, 2.—Nucula austin clarki MacNeil, n. sp., Middle Mocene, Lisbon formation, Clarke County, Ala.; holotype (U.S.N.M. no. 560585): 1, Exterior; 2, interior. 14 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Holotype (a left valve) (U.S.N.M. no. 560585) measures: Height 22 mm, length 27 mm, diam- eter of single valve 7.8 mm. Type locality and only known occurrence: A gully in the west center of sec. 10, T. 9 N., R. 4 B)., Clarke County, Ala. The gully lies on the south side of the county road. This species is closely related to Nucula mag- nifica Conrad, a species described from the Gos- port sand in the upper part of the Claiborne group of Alabama, and also present in the Lisbon formation of Alabama and the equivalent por- tion of the McBean formation of eastern Georgia and South Carolina in the middle part of the Claiborne group. In shape, size, and dentition the two species are nearly identical. Nucula magnifica has a smooth surface, but occasional specimens show a slight. tendency for the de- vou. 41, No. 1 velopment of concentric markings similar to those of N. austinclarki at a point or two along the posterior ridge. Nucula austinclarki is from the Lisbon forma- tion, the middle part of the Claiborne group in Alabama. Its association with Ostrea sellaefor- mis indicates that it is from the middle or upper part of the Lisbon and not from the lowest part, which carries Ostrea lisbonensis, the apparent forerunner of O. sellaeformis. From the general field relations it appears to occur in the lower part of the range of Ostrea sellaeformis. Nucula magnifica 18 apparently a younger species than N. austinclarki, bemg known from the upper part of the range of Ostrea sellaeformis and from the Gosport sand, which is stratigraphically higher than the upper limit of the range of Ostrea sellaeformis. MALACOLOGY.—New stenothyrid gastropods from the Philippines (Rissoidae). R. Tucker Assort, U.S. National Museum. (Communicated by H. A. Reh- der.) During a survey of fresh-water mollusks in 1945 on the Island of Leyte, Republic of the Philippines, ecological and morphologi- cal notes were made on living specimens of a species of Stenothyra Benson, 1856, which has subsequently proved to be undescribed. An undescribed subspecies from Mindoro Island of this polytypic species was found in the U. 8. National Museum. It was col- lected in the 1880’s by J. F. Quadras and bore the manuscript name of “‘philippinica Moellendorff.”” These two gastropods are named in honor of Austin H. Clark, retiring curator of echinoderms, United States Na- tional Museum, who has given me great encouragement and help. Stenothyra austini, n. sp. Figs. 1, 3-7 Description.—Shell small, about 3.0 mm in length, ovoid, relatively thick-shelled, compressed ventrally, with a small circular aperture, and with unevenly developed whorls. Spire blunt and some- what rounded. Nuclear whorls 13 in number, transparent. Postnuclear whorls 3 to 4 in num- ber, increasing irregularly in size (so that the 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received October 6, 1950. ventral face is flattened) until the last whorl, when they then decrease in size and form the relatively small, circular aperture. Periphery of early whorls well-rounded; last whorl moderately rounded. Suture finely and sharply impressed. Base of shell set at 45° to the axis of the shell, slightly convex, and thickened slightly in the area near the very small umbilicus. Aperture almost circular, with a slightly thickened con- tinuous peristome. Behind the lip, on the exterior of the body whorl, there is a slightly thickened, smooth varix. Axial sculpture absent. Spiral seulp- ture consists of 10 to 15 rows of microscopic pits on the upper two-thirds of the whorl. The pits may be round, squarish or oblong. Umbilicus reduced to a minute chink. Color of shell from yellowish tan to light brown. In living specimens, the shell is translucent and the pits appear as tiny bubbles embedded in the shell. Periostracum thin, light tan. In living specimens, it covers the small pits. It is often covered with a blackish film of organic detritus. Operculum almost cir- cular, chitinous, paucispiral, with the nucleus near the center. There are two raised, oblong lamellae of chitin reinforcing the surface of at- tachment. The anterior, inner edge is reinforced by a low, curved ridge (see Fig. 4). In adults, the operculum is often slightly larger than the aper- ture and incapable of being withdrawn into the shell. JANUARY 1951 ABBOTT: NEW STENOTHYRID GASTROPODS 15 la 1c att Figs. 1, 3-7.—Stenothyra austini austini: 1, Holotype shell (X10) (a, apertural view; 0, apical view; c, side view); 8, immature shell; 4, operculum (a, outer view; b, side view; c, inner view); 5, living ani- mal (a, lateral view; b, ventral view; c, dorsal view of head region); 6, male genitalia (verge); 7, radula (a, rachidian; b, lateral; c, inner marginal; d, outer marginal). Fig. 2.—Stenothyra austini clarkt, holotype shell (X10). 16 JOURNAL OF THE Measurements of shell (mm) Length Width Aperture Whorls 4.0 2.2 1.2 by 1.2 5.3 (holotype) 4.0 21 123) by; 1-3 5.5 (paratypes) S365 21 1.0 by 1.1 5.0 (U.S.N.M. No. 603670) ae) 1.8 0.9 by 1.0 5.0 U.S.N.M. 2.8 1.7 0.8 by 0.9 4.9 U.S.N.M. 3 1.6 1.1 by 1.0 4.0 U.S.N.M. (young) Measurements of 97 adult paratypes from San Joaquin Estuary, eastern Leyte Island (U.S. N.M. no. 603671) were made to a tenth of a milli- meter and grouped in the following classes: Number of Length (mm) specimens 2.6-2.9 13 3.0-3.3 47 3.4-3.7 35 3.8-4.2 2 Animal.—Small and capable of being com- pletely retracted into the shell. Foot relatively long, flat, with the anterior corners produced laterally, and with a transverse division across the sole about halfway back and at a point coin- ciding with the anterior edge of the operculum. Anterior edge of foot with a deep, narrow, trans- verse mucus slit which bears minute cilia. A bulbous pedal gland may be seen at the anterior end from a ventral view. At the posterior end and dorsal side of the foot there is a long, slender, fleshy rod. Proboscis large, swollen in the middle, with two circular color bars of black-brown near the anterior end. The posterior bar fades poste- riorly into anarea of dark reddish brown. Between the bars the flesh is bright, straw-yellow. Ten- tacles long, slender, flecked with bars of black and an occasional internal granular clump of yellow. Area about eye dark gray, posteriorly with a heavy concentration of embedded light- straw granules. Mantle light gray with heavy mottlings of black. Verge located on the midline of the ‘“‘back”’ of the animal. It is in the form of a coiled, single prong. The distal end bears a minute calcareous spine. The radula is taenio- glossate (see Fig. 7). The typical subspecies austini austini is char- acterized by the weak pits in the shell and the irregular spacing of the spiral rows of pits. Type locality —Bridge at Kaboynan, near the mouth of the north fork of the Guinarona River, Leyte Island, Republic of the Philippines. R. T. Abbott, legit, June 18, 1945. Types.—Holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 603669. Para- types from the type locality, U.S.N.M. no. 603670, and in the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass. (the latter collected by M. 8. Ferguson). Paratypes also from San WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voL. 41, No. 1 Joaquin Estuary, eastern Leyte Island, R. T. Abbott, legit, June 29, 1945 (U.S.N.M. no. 603671); Abuyog, eastern Leyte Island, R. T. Abbott, legit, August 14, 1945 (U.S.N.M. no. 603672). Ecology and habits.—These mollusks are very active but shy creatures and were collected in three estuarine localities on Leyte Island. At the type locality they were found in 6-inch-deep, stagnant, brackish-water pools under the shade of floating palm fronds. The bottom was black ooze. Syncera and Neritina ziczac Linnaeus were found in the same neighborhood. At San Joaquin they were found under similar conditions where the water temperature was 81° F. and the pH 7.6. Several species of Syncera, a Cerithidea, and Clenchiella victoriae Abbott, 1948, were collected with them. These Stenothyra are rapid crawlers. At the slightest disturbance they snap back into their shells with remarkable speed. Remarks.—The only other described species of Stenothyra in the Philippimes that possesses spiral rows of pits is S. quadrast Moellendorff, 1895, which, however, is a much larger shell (7 mm in length), much thicker, with a very thick, flattened, and spirally lirated base, and with distinctly angled early whorls. S. austini ap- parently has a wide range throughout the Philip- pines but appears to be broken up into geographi- cal, insular races or subspecies. We have a single specimen from Bacoor Bay, Luzon (U.S.N.M. no. 603674), but we hesitate to describe it as a new race until additional material is at hand. Stenothyra austini clarki, n. subsp. Fig. 2 Shell similar to S. austini austint but differing in having deeper and larger pits and in having the spiral rows evenly spaced. In austini there are often three or four rows missing. The shells of our specimens of S. austini clarki are reddish brown in color, but this may be due to ecological condi- tions. Holotype: Length, 3.4; width, 1.9 mm. Type locality—The holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 603673, is from Manglares, between Bacoy and Calapan, Mindoro Island, Republic of the Philip- pines. J. F. Quadras, legit, circa 1880. Two para- types from the same locality, U.S.N.M. no. 303387, are probably from the same collector. The difference in shape between these sub- species, as seen in Figs. la and 2, is not specifi- cally significant. Some specimens of austini are similar to those of clarki in shape and size. JANUARY 1951 MORRISON: NEW PULMONATE MOLLUSKS 12/ MALACOLOGY .—Two new Western Atlantic species of pulmonate mollusks of the genus Detracia and two old ones (family Ellobidae).1 J. P. E. Morrison, U.S. National Museum. The molluscan genus Detracia Gray, 1840, is represented in the Western Atlantic re- gion by four known species. They divide evenly: Two have been previously named; two are new. Two are continental; two are island species in their geographic distribu- tion. I wish to thank particularly Dr. H. A. Pilsbry and the authorities of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia for the opportunity to borrow freely and study all specimens of this genus in the Academy collections. Without such study of many specimens additional to those in the United States National Museum collections, the zoogeographic picture here presented could not have been so complete. Detracia floridana (Pfeiffer), 1856 Figs. 4, 7 This manuscript name of Shuttleworth was first validly published in Pfeiffer’s Monograph auriculaceorum, p. 35, no. 35, 1856. W. G. Binney, the first subsequent American author to study the group, unfortunately selected the wrong speci- men for figuring in 1859 in his Terrestrial mol- lusks of the United States 4: pl. 75, fig. 30, from the mixture of species brought back from the Florida Keys by Bartlett for his father, Amos Binney. This figure represents the smallest (dwarf) form of Melampus bidentatus Say we know from the Florida Keys, instead of floridana. Because every succeeding illustrator of the group has copied this earliest figure of Binney, this species, the only one of the family confined to United States shores, has, up to the present time, almost a century later, not yet been fig- ured! The presence in the literature of an incor- rect figure makes the generic confusion that has so long surrounded this species easy to under- stand. D. floridana may be easily distinguished by its small size and, even in the youngest individuals seen (1.5 mm long), by the more regularly biconic shape. The aperture is markedly constricted be- 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received October 6, 1950. low (anteriorly) by the columellar lamella. There is a single palatal lamella, which is horizontal and approximately equal in height to the columel- lar. Between these two the palatal wall is well rounded and usually heavily calloused. The parie- tal wall is usually furnished with about 10 sub- equal, low lamellae, as in most species of the genus Melampus. These minute lamellae are sometimes present posteriorly along almost the full length of the parietal wall. In many young specimens their inner extensions are visible through the translucent penultimate whorl. The specimens figured (U.S.N.M. no. 473892) are part of a lot collected on August 26, 1938, from the salt marsh at Chesapeake Beach, Cal- vert County, Md. The adult (Fig. 7) has 10? whorls and measures: Height 7.9 mm; diameter 4.8 mm; aperture height 5.8 mm; aperture diameter 2.2 mm. The younger individual (Fig. 4) has 11 whorls and measures: Height 6.6 mm; diameter 3.6 mm; aperture height 4.5 mm; aperture diameter 1.9 mm. D. floridana is entirely continental in geo- graphic distribution. It is recorded only from Delaware and Chesapeake Bays, east and west Florida, and the Gulf coast of Alabama, Mis- sissippi, and Louisiana. The present lack of local- ity records from the Carolinas and Georgia is probably due to the fact that no collecting has been done in the transitional estuarine (fresh- water—brackish-salt) marshes of those coastal areas. In the Chesapeake Bay area, where it is perhaps now best known, it seems to prefer or tolerate a lower degree of salinity in the salt- marsh habitats than does its neighbor and rela- tive Melampus bidentatus lineatus Say. Under estuarine conditions this species is sometimes astoundingly abundant. With an observed con- centration of more than one individual per square inch, it was estimated on June 28, 1950, that in just 1 square mile of the estuary marshes of the Pocomoke River (Accomack County, Va.) there were twice as many individuals of Detracta flort- dana as there are human beings in the entire world. In other words, more than 4 billion of these small snails inhabit this one particular square mile! 2 Apex eroded. Number of whorls indistinct. 18 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Detracia clarki, n. sp. Figs. 2, 6 Shell large (for the genus), obovate, smoothish, of 10-12 whorls, with moderate spire somewhat variable in height but usually about one-third the height of the aperture. Body whorl tending to be subcylindrical, smoothly sculptured with minute growth lines only, except for a few in- cised spiral lines above the shoulder and near the base. Aperture sublinear, conspicuously ob- structed by two heavy, upturned (posteriorly dished) axial lamellae, which are continuous from the plane of the aperture to about three-fourths of a whorl within. The columellar, the most prom- inent of the two, usually extends more than half- way across the aperture to the parietal wall. The outer lip (parietal wall) bears a variable number (a few) of well-spaced lamellae essentially al- ternating with the axials basally (anteriorly). In addition, the aperture of adults shows a greater number of low parietal lamellae interpolated on an internal ridge or varix along the parietal wall, behind which ridge the parietal lamellae are much reduced in height and prominence. The holotype U.S.N.M. no. 594588 (Fig. 6), has 11 whorls and measures: Height 12.5 mm; diameter 6.7 mm; aperture height 9.8 mm; aper- ture diameter 3.2 mm. It and 14 paratypes, U.S.N.M. no. 36062, were collected at Key West, Fla., by Henry Hemphill previous to 1884. It is not absolutely certain that these specimens were taken on Key West, as the older custom was to give general localities only. They may have come from either Stock Island or Boca Chica Key nearby, where it seems evident the species is still living. The younger specimen (Fig. 2) (U.S.N.M. no. 594589) comes from Stock Island, Fla. It has 10 whorls and measures: Height 6.5 mm; diameter 4.0 mm; aperture height 4.7 mm; aper- ture diameter 2.3 mm. The geographic distribution as recorded for the 532 specimens at hand includes the Bahamas (?), the Florida Keys, and Cuba, as follows: BAHAMAS: 1 specimen (U.S.N.M. no. 594592) from Great Abaco Island, perhaps drifted to this locality. Fioripa: “Miami” (8. N. Rhoads, 1899); a key near Chokoloskee; Virginia Key (Biscayne Bay); Pumpkin Key (Card Sound) ; Middle Key (Barnes Sound); Tavenier Key and Key Largo; from Indian, Lower Matecumbe, Bahia Honda, New Found Harbor, Windley’s, Torch, Geiger’s, Sugar Loaf, Big Pine, and Boca Chica Keys; Stock vou. 41, No. lL Island; and. Key~ West. An old record of “St. Augustine” is doubtful, except as a possible drift specimen. Cusa: Recorded at present from only two widely separate localities: Punta Cajon, Pinar del Rio (U.S.N.M. no. 492571), and Cayo Perro, Cardenas Bay (U.S.N.M. no. 594590). In other words, Detracia clarki is at present known only from a restricted area in the Western At- lantic along the Straits of Florida. Of the size and general shape of Melampus bidentatus bidentatus Say, with which it occurs, and Pira monile Bruguiére, D. clarki is readily distinguished on apertural characteristics. The extra-heavy columellar lamella, higher than the palatal, and by far the most prominent of the aperture, reaching nearly to the parietal wall in some individuals, is turned upward within, to form a cup-shape structure whose rim approaches a parallel to the columellar axis. This extreme constriction of the basal part of the aperture by the columellar lamella will separate it from Mel- ampus bidentatus, while the absence of cuticular setae or the remaining scar-pits of the same on the spire will easily separate it from Pira monile. D. clarki is distinct from all others by the con- spicuously posteriorly dished or upeurved direc- tion of the columellar lamella. It is twice the size, when adult, of any other known member of the genus Detracia. | This species is named in honor of Austin H. Clark, retiring curator of echinoderms of the United States National Museum, in some small recognition of his outstanding faculty for spiring others in the solution of problems of the zooge- ography of invertebrate animals of all types from every corner of the world. Detracia bullaoides (Montagu), 1808 Figs. 1, 5 This the genotype species was first described from shells recovered from ballast discarded along the coast of England. For many years, however, it has been well known as a characteristic species of the West Indies. It is figured here to complete the picture of West Atlantic forms, so that future students will not have to search elsewhere for comparable illustrations. D. bullaoides is easily distinguished by the more elongate shape of most adults, as well as by the heavily buttressed palatal lamella. The few low parietal lamellae are present only on the basal (anterior) portion of the parietal or outer JANUARY 1951 wall of the aperture. In most adult shells the aperture is posteriorly exceedingly narrow and linear. The adult specimen, U.S.N.M. no. 466289 (Fig. 5), has 12 whorls and measures: Height 9.5 mm; diameter 4.3 mm; aperture height 5.6 mm; aperture diameter 2.2 mm. It is one of many specimens collected on the edge of the mangrove swamp on Shell Key, off St. Petersburg, Fla., April 24, 1936. The younger specimen (Fig. 1) has 10 whorls and measures: Height 6.2 mm; diameter 3.2 mm; aperture height 4.3 mm; aper- ture diameter 2.0 mm. It comes from the same lot. D. bullaoides is apparently primarily Greater Antillean in its geographic range. The United States National Museum collections include speci- mens from the Bermudas; from Fernandina to Key West and to Cedar Keys, Fla.; the Bahamas; Cuba; Jamaica; and Hispaniola. There are also records of this species in the collections of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia from St. Croix, Virgin Islands; and Tampico, Mexico. MORRISON: NEW PULMONATE MOLLUSKS 19 Detracia parana, n. sp. Fig. 3 Shell small, obovate-biconic, smooth, of about 10 whorls. Spire moderate, equal to about one- fourth the total length of the shell. Body whorl well rounded, smoothly sculptured with minute growth lines only, with the very low, rounded shoulder about midway of the shell height. Aper- ture moderately narrow, constricted by a prom- inent horizontal or downwardly (anteriorly) di- rected columellar lamella, which extends forward to be continuous with the base of the outer lip. The palatal wall is furnished with a single low horizontal lamella a little below the middle of the aperture. This is inconspicuous and in specimens seen extends only about one-fourth of the way to the parietal wall. The parietal wall is not fur- nished with lamellae but appears smooth. The holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 594591 (Fig. 3), and three paratypes, U.S.N.M. no. 32090, were collected from the Amazon River at Pard, Brazil, by J. B. Steere, previous to 1885, when they were catalogued at the United States National 7 Fires. 1, 5.—Detracia bullaoides (Montagu), young and adult, U.S.N M. no. 466289, from margin of mangroves on Shell Key, off St. Petersburg, Fla., April 24, 1986, J. P. H. Morrison. Fie. 2.—Detracia clarki, n. sp., young paratype, U.S.N.M. No. 594589, from Stock Island, Fla., P. Bartsch. > Fig. 3.—Detracia parana, n. sp., holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 594591, from the Amazon River, Para, Brazil, J. B. Steere. Fias. 4, 7.—Detracia floridana (Pfeiffer), young and adult, U.S.N.M. no. 478892, around grass rocts in salt marsh at Chesapeake Beach, Md., August 26, 1938, J. P. I). Morrison. ’ Fic. 6.—Detracia clarki, n. sp., holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 594588, Key West, Fla., H. Hemphill. 20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Museum. The holotype has 10% whorls and measures: Height 6.8 mm; diameter 3.9 mm; aperture height 5.2 mm; aperture diameter 2.0 mm. This new species is almost exactly like the North American continental species floridana in general appearance but differs considerably in the detail of lamination of the aperture. It lacks any marked callosity of the aperture above the columellar lamella. The columellar wall below 3 Apex eroded. Number of whorls indistinct. voL. 41, No. 1 (anterior to) the palatal lamella is rather flat, not markedly arched and calloused in this region as it is in floridana. Though the number of speci- mens of parana at hand is very small, the ob- served differences, together with the observed similarities, of a molluscan species purporting to come from an absolutely comparable estuarine habitat on South American West Atlantic shores lead me to advance Detracia parana as a species that has developed completely parallel to its close relative D. floridana of North America. MALACOLOGY .—A new species of glycymerid from the Philippines.t Davip Nicou, U.S. National Museum. This is a report on a new species of gly- cymerid collected by the U. S. Fish Com- mission steamer Albatross on the Philippine expedition of the years 1907 to 1910. It is my intention to give a complete account of the Glyeymeridae of this collection at a later date. Genus Axinactis Mérch, 1861 Genotype (subsequent designation by Hertlein and Strong, 19438, p. 153): Pectunculus inaequalis G. B. Sowerby, 1833; Recent; Pacific coast of Panama and Nicaragua. Axinactis is the earliest generic name avail- able for the raised-ribbed species of glycymerids, which are nearly always confined to warm waters. This large group of glycymerids has had an in- dependent history as far back as Oligocene time and is certainly not closely related to Glycymeris glycymeris (Linné). Subgenus Melaxinaea Iredale, 1930 Genotype (original designation): Melaxinaea labyrintha Iredale, 1930; Recent; Albany Passage, Queensland, 9-12 fathoms. Axinactis (Melaxinaea) clarki Nicol, n. sp. Figs. 1-3 Description—Valves compressed, ratio of con- vexity to height about 0.50; dorsal margin long and straight giving shell an eared appearance, anterior, ventral, and posterior margins rounded; light reddish-brown spots on ribs, interior usually colorless, occasionally reddish-brown spots on 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received October 6, 1950. margins; beaks contiguous, orthogyrate; umbos flat and inconspicuous, located approximately at center of dorsal margin; ligament narrow and elongate, made up of four or five chevron-shaped parts; hinge teeth 23 to 28 in number, averaging 25, arranged in a broad arch on a large flat hinge plate, teeth tending to disappear at center of hinge plate in mature specimens; crenulations on interior ventral border well-marked, usually pointed at end, though sometimes rounded, de- pressed at center, 15 to 21 in number, averaging 17, not divided as is common in some species of Melaxinaea; adductor muscle scars approximately equal in size; radial ribs raised but not prominent, 24 to 28 in number, averaging 26, ribs on central part of shell flat-topped, often with a shallow central groove, occasionally with two or three small ridges; at either end of shell ribs split into fine, slightly nodulose, crooked, riblets, occasion- ally a small radial rib added in interspaces, the latter almost as wide as ribs at ventral margin; ribs and interspaces crossed by fine, closely spaced, concentric striae which are more prom- inent on interspaces. Measurements in mm Convexity of both Specimen Leng Height valves Holotype 236879 34.6 34.0 18.1 Paratype 293039 20.6 20.0 10.0 Paratype 293039a 17.0 16.8 8.0 Paratype 293039b 17.0 16.6 8.4 Paratype 293039¢ 16.4 16.4 8.6 Paratype 293039d 15.9 15.8 7.8 Paratype 293039e 15.0 14.4 7.8 Paratype 293039f 15.4 15.4 7.6 Paratype 293039¢ 11.6 12.3 6.4 Type specimens.—The holotype and paratypes are in the collection of the U. 8. National Mu- seum, Division of Mollusks: Holotype no. 236879, paratypes nos. 293039 and 296058. Thirty-nine JANUARY 1951 specimens of the species were studied, but only the holotype is a mature shell. Many of the remainder, however, show the adult rib character and outline of the valves. Locality data—Station 5192, Jilantangan Is- land between Bantaydn Island and the north- west end of Cebu (E., N. 13°W., 3 miles 11°09’ 15”N., 123°50’E.), 32 fathoms, green sand. Sta- tion 5277, Malavatuan Island, Lubang Islands northwest of Mindoro (N., 8. 56°E., 8 miles 13°56/55”7 N., 120°13'45” E.), 80 fathoms, fine sand. Comparisons.—Axinactis (Melaxinaea) clarki most nearly resembles Pectunculus maskatensis Melvill, 1897, from Maskat, on the Gulf of Oman. The latter species has larger and more prom- inent ribs and greater length in comparison to its height. Pectunculus vitreus Lamarck has a more angular arrangement of teeth and beaded or granulose ribs. Pectwnculus nova-guineensis Angas has nodulose ribs and a shorter dorsal margin than Azinactis (Melazinaea) clarki. Melaxinaea labyrintha Iredale, the genotype of Melazxinaea, is from Albany Passage, Queensland. It has nodulose ribs that are more numerous, narrower, and more closely spaced on the adult shells. Melaxinaea litoralis Iredale from Townsville, Queensland, has a more rounded outline and has finer and more numerous radial ribs. Glycymeris planiuscula Chapman and Singleton from the Pliocene of Australia has more closely spaced rounded ribs. Glycymeris uzimiensis Cox from the Pliocene of Zanzibar has tuberculated ribs and a rounded or subtrigonal outline. Glycymeris dautzenbergi Prashad (1932, pp. 65, 66) is a homonym of Pectunculus dautzen- bergz Gregorio (1892, p. 109). Glycymeris dautzen- bergi Prashad is herewith renamed Glycymeris prashadi. This species from the Arafura Sea has nodulose ribs on all of the shell and a shorter dorsal margin than Axinactis (Melaxinaea) clarkv. NICOL: A NEW SPECIES OF GLYCYMERID 21 REFERENCES Aneas, G. F. Descriptions of ten new species of Axinaea and Pectunculus in the collections of Mr. Sylvanus Hanley and the late T. L. Taylor. Proc. Zool. Soc. London for 1879 (3): 417-420, pl. 35. 1879. CuapMaN, F., and Srncieton, F. A. A revision of the Caenozoic species of Glycymeris in southern Australia. Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria (n.s.) 37 (pt. 1, art. 2): 18-60, 4 pls. 1925. Cox, L. R. Neogene and Quaternary Mollusca from the Zanzibar Protectorate. Extracted from the report on the Paleontology of the Zanzibar Protectorate, published by the Government of Zanzibar, pp. 13-180, pls. 3-19. 1927. GreGorio, ANTONIO DE Marcu. Sul genere Pec- tunculus precipuamente sulle specie viventi mediterranee e fossili nel Terziario superiore. Il Naturalista Siciliano 11 (5): 106-114. 1892. Hertiein, Leo G., and Srrone, A. M. Mollusks from the west coast of Mexico and Central America, pt. 2. Zoologica 28 (3): 149-168, 1 pl. 1943. TrEDALE, Tom. Queensland molluscan notes, no. 2. Mem. Queensland Mus. 10 (1): 73-88, pl. 9. 1930. . Australian molluscan notes, no. 1. Rec. Aus- tralian Mus. 18 (4): 201-285, pls. 22-25. 1931. . Mollusca. In Sci. Rep. Great Barrier Reef Exped. 1928-29, 5 (no. 6, pt. 1): 209-425, 7 pls. British Museum, 1939. Lamarck, J. B. P. A. pre. Histoire naturelle des animaux sans vertébres... 6 (1): 343 pp. 1819. Metvitt, JAMES Cosmo. Descriptions of thirty- four species of marine Mollusca from the Ara- bian Sea, Persian Gulf, and Gulf of Oman.Mem. and Proc. Manchester Lit. and Philos. Soc. 41 (7): 25 pp., pls. 6, 7. 1897. Morcu, O. A. L. Bevtrdge zur Molluskenfauna Cen- tral-Amertka’s. Malakozool. Blatter 7: 170-218. 1861. Prasuab, B. The Lamellibranchia of the Siboga Ex- pedition, Systematic Part II, Pelecypoda (ex- clusive of the Pectinidae). Siboga Monogr. 58¢: 353 pp., 9 pls., 1 map. 1932. Figs. 1-3.—Azinactis (Melaxinaea) clarki, n. sp.: 1, Exterior view of holotype, left valve, U.S.N.M. no. 236879; 2, exterior view of paratype (young specimen), left valve, U.S.N.M. no. 298039a; 3, interior view of holotype, left valve, U.S.N.M. no. 236879. All figures natural size. 22 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 41, No. 1 MALACOLOGY.—Two new Recent cone shells from the Western Atlantic (Conidae). Harautp A. Reaper and R. Tucker Assort, U.S. National Museum. Two species of the genus Conus were re- ceived by the United States National Mu- seum a few years ago from two dredging expeditions off southeastern United States. It appears that both species are undescribed, and we take pleasure in naming them for Austin H. Clark, retiring curator of echino- derms, United States National Museum. The first of these species, collected by the U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service trawler Pelican in 1938, is strikingly different from any known Recent species in the Western Atlantic. The second, dredged off southern Florida by the Anton Dohrn, is somewhat like the well-known species Conus stimpsoni Dall. Conus clarki, n. sp. Figs. 1-6 Description —Shell 36 mm (13 inches) inlength, relatively heavy, broadly fusiform, strongly spi- rally sculptured, and chalk-white in color. Whorls 12, the last whorl with a beaded carina at the shoulder, rounded at the periphery, and concave toward the base. Spire extended, pointed, con- cave, and slightly more than one-third of the entire length of the shell. Angle of spire about 70°. Nuclear whorls 13, glassy-smooth. Aperture ob- lique, long and narrow, with a deep, rounded sinus at the top. Outer lip sharp, thin, and weakly crenulated. The lip is sinuate with the middle portion being advanced, and the lower portion retracted enough to make the end of the siphonal canal considerably open. Spiral scultpure con- sists of 27 to 30 very strong, raised, squarish, and beaded cords. The topmost spiral cord bears the largest beads, which in previous whorls may be seen just above the impressed wavy sutural Ime. The surface of these beads is obliquely scratched by fine irregular lines. Top of the whorls slightly concave and with three to five unequal fine spiral threads. Axial sculpture consists of numerous fine, sharply raised, arched threads which cross the spiral threads on the tops of the whorls (anal fasciole). Color of shell chalk-white. In one paratype specimen there are very weak reddish squares of color between the beads on the 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received Oetober 6, 1950. spiral cords. Periostracum thin, deciduous, light brown, and axially striate. Animal (Figs. 1-5) typical of the genus Conus, with a rather long siphonal extension of the man- tle, which is flecked with fine black striations. Side of foot suffused with gray along the lower border. Verge large, 7 mm in length, shaped like a meat cleaver, with a slender, curved point at the end. Verge has fused lamellations on its sides and base. Poison gland and radular sheath typical of the genus. About 30 harpoonlike teeth were found in the sheath. Tooth short with one small barb at the end, two on the side and one at the base (see Fig. 3). MEASUREMENTS (MM) Number of Length Width Whorls 36.0 16.0 11.0 (holotype) 36.0 16.0 11.0 (paratype male) 34.4 15.5 10.8 Types.—The holotype is U.S.N.M. no. 485740; one paratype, U.S.N.M. no. 488465; and another paratype is in the Museum of Comparative Zoology. Type locality —50 miles south-southwest of Marsh Island, Iberia County, La. (lat. 28° 27.0'N.; long. 92° 14.0’W.). Dredged by the U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service trawler Pelican, station 94-1, November 13, 1938, in 29 fathoms. Range.—Known only from the type locality. Remarks.—There is no living species described from the Western Atlantic that approximates C. clarki in the characters of heavy, raised, square, spiral cords, rounded periphery, attenuated basal portion (giving it a turniplike shape) and the prominent sharp axial, striae between the spiral cords. It is nearest in characters to the middle © Miocene fossil Conus (Leptoconus) multiliratus Bése, 1906, from Tuxtepec, Oaxaca, Mexico, and its subspecies gaza Johnson and Pilsbry, 1911, from the Dominican Republic, Jamaica, Panama, and Colombia. However, the Recent C. clarki is much more turnip-shaped, and its cords at the shoulder of the whorl are strongly beaded. Conus austini, n. sp. Fig. 7 Description Shell 56 mm in length, heavy, spirally sculptured, and dull-white in color. Whorls 14, almost straight-sided, but very slightly JANUARY 1951 concave toward the base. Shoulders of whorl slightly rounded in adults but carinate in younger specimens. Spire extended, pointed, slightly con- cave, and about one-quarter the entire length of the shell. Angle of spire about 80°. Nuclear whorls 13, glassy-smooth. Next five whorls sculptured by a single, beaded carina, which in the succeed- ing whorls becomes smooth and located just above the suture. Aperture oblique, long and narrow, with a deep, rounded sinus at the top. Outer lip thin, sharp, and weakly crenulate. Spiral sculp- ture consisting of about 40 fairly well-developed, irregularly sized, rounded cords, which become more prominent basally. Three to five low, weak, spiral threads present on the top of the whorls, which are obliquely crossed by the arched growth REHDER AND ABBOTT: TWO NEW RECENT CONE SHELLS 23 lines of the anal sinus. There is a tendency in some specimens to produce alternately small and large cords. Between the cords the axial sculpture consists of fine, distinct, raised striae. Periostra- cum moderately thick, when dry becoming axially striate and light brownish yellow in color. Ani- mal and operculum unknown. MEASUREMENTS (mM) Number of Length Width Whorls 55.5 25.3 14 (holotype Tortugas) 43.1 22.0 13 (paratype, Tortugas) 51.0 25.5 13 (paratype, Antigua) Types.—The holotype is U.S.N.M. no. 603017; a paratype from the same dredging haul, U.S. N.M. no. 421721; a third paratype, U.S.N.M. no. Fras. 1-5.—Conus clarki, n. sp.: 1, Side view of male animal showing siphon (s?) and position of verge (ve) (X83); 2, side view of verge and vas deferens (X10); 3, single tooth (X50); 4, radular sac showing arrangement of unused tecth (X25); 5, semidiagrammatic drawing of anterior alimentary system and poison apparatus, bu, buccal mass; rs, radular sac; pg, poison gland (<5): 24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 603018, was dredged by the Holis, Jr. by J. B. Henderson at the entrance of English Harbour, Antigua, Lesser Antilles, June 21, 1918. Type locality.—Southeast of Loggerhead Key, Dry Tortugas, Florida. Dredged in 40 to 46 fathoms by W. L. Schmitt from the Anton Dohrn, June 21, 1932. Fic. Fie. 6.—Conus clarki, n. sp., holotype. 7.—Conus austini, n. sp., holotype. (Both natural size.) vou. 41, No. 1 Range-——From Dry Tortugas, Fla., south to Antigua Island, Lesser Antilles. Remarks.—This species is similar to C. stimp- sont Dall but differs in being larger, having raised spiral cords instead of incised grooves, having numerous fine but distinct axial striae between the cords, and lacking any color markings. A young specimen of C. austin displays a number of axial wrinkles in the middle of the body whorl, a variable character common to some Miocene fossil species. A similar species exists in the Gurabo forma- tion, Dominican Republic (Miocene). Specimens of this fossil are in the U. 8. National Museum, mixed in with lots labeled C. planiliratus Sowerby. It is apparently undescribed and differs from the Recent C. austini in having a slightly shorter spire, being half as high and rarely showing the tiny, angled keel on the shoulder of the whorls in the spire. Otherwise the shape and sculpture are extremely similar. C. stenostoma Sowerby, a Miocene fossil from the Domican Republic, is also very close but has a very low spire and a sharper shoulder. MALACOLOGY.—A new scaphopod mollusk, Cadulus austinclarki, from the Gulf of California.1 Witt1AM K. Emmrson, Research Fellow, Allan Hancock Foun- dation. (Communicated by Harald A. Rehder.) A recent visit to the United States Na- tional Museum provided me an opportunity to examine the Scaphopoda contained in the vast collection of the division of mol- lusks. A previously unrecognized species of Cadulus from the Gulf of California is here described. I am indebted to Dr. Harald A. Rehder, curator of mollusks, for access to the facilities of the division, and to Frederick M. Bayer, assistant curator of marine invertebrates, for providing the camera-lucida drawing and the photograph. I take pleasure in dedi- cating this new species to Austin H. Clark, retiring curator of echinoderms in the United States National Museum. Family SIPHONODENTALIIDAE Genus Cadulus Philippi, 1844 * Genotype (by monotypy): Dentaliwm ovulum Philippi, 1844, Recent; Mediterranean Sea. 1 Received October 6, 1950. Subgenus Platyschides Henderson, 1920 Subgenotype (by original designation): Cadu- lus grandis Verrill, 1884; Recent, West Atlantic, north of Cape Hatteras. Shell small to relatively large, moderately curved, greatest swelling between the middle and oral aperture, posterior portion and aperture slightly flattened dorsoventrally; surface without sculpture, smooth and polished; apex possessing four rather broad, but shallow notches; white. This group differs from the subgenus Poly- schides in having the apical notches greatly re- duced. The slits vary in size from small indenta- tions, which appear as chipped-out portions of the margin, to minute features requiring con- siderable magnification in order to ascertain the structure. There are many Recent and Tertiary species. Cadulus (Platyschides) austinclarki, n. sp. Figs. 1, 2 Shell is minute, fairly solid, vitreous, semi- transparent, very slender, moderately curved, JANUARY 1951 Fic. 1.—Cadulus (Platyschides) austinclarki, n. sp.: Holotype, approximately X20. with the greatest diameter approximately two- fifths the distance from the oral aperture. The swelling is gradual and approaches uniformity, the equator not being conspicuously bulbular and the convex face forming a nearly uninterrupted arc. The outline of the concave side is very regu- lar except for the area of slight equatorial swell- ing. The oral (anterior) aperture is constricted, slightly compressed dorsoventrally, but nearly circular in section; apertural margin is slightly oblique. Apex is not much attenuated, relatively large, circular in outline, with a rather oblique margin. The apical characters are minute but well defined. The apex has four shallow notches separated by as many lobes of nearly equal size. The slits are subtriangular in shape, very shallow, with concave pair slightly deeper; the lobes are subconical, with the greatest height of the lobe composed of the inner shell layer, the outer mar- gin being beveled so as to provide a thin edge to the lobes (Fig. 2). The prominence of the lobes varies with individuals. In some specimens the vitreous shell is clouded by semiopaque circular zones producing alternate rings of more or less translucency. EMERSON: NEW SCAPHOPOD MOLLUSK 25 Measurements.—Holotype, 4.4 mm long; diam- eter of apical orifice 0.35 mm; apertural diam- eter 0.55 mm. None of the paratypes measures more than 5 mm in length. Remarks.—The extremely small size, narrow- ness, and distinctive apical characters serve to distinguish this species from all other Eastern Pacific forms. No living species thus far described from the Eastern Pacific approaches this species. The most similar living species appears to be Cadulus (Platyschides) nitidus Henderson (1920) from Mayagiiez Harbor, Puerto Rico, in 25 fathoms. Though this West Atlantic species has similar apical features, it is longer and more at- tenuated and possesses even less equatorial swell- ing than Cadulus austinclarki. Cadulus (Platy- schides) parvus Henderson (1920) from the Florida keys and off Barbados possesses nearly the same general outline but has a longer shell with more prominent apical features. Cadulus (Platyschides) amiantus Dall (1889) from off Bahia Honda, Cuba, is a larger more curved species with a greater equator. Cadulus (Platyschides) miamien- sis Henderson (1920) from off Fowey Light, Fla., in 209 fathoms, is a much larger, more curved species with entirely different apical char- acters. The National Museum records indicate that this new species is limited to the warm waters of the Panamic province. This is the first representa- tive of the subgenus Platyschides reported from the Eastern Pacific region. Intensified collecting in this area will undoubtedly reveal the presence of other species belonging to this group. Fra. 2.—Cadulus (Platyschides) austinclarki, n. sp.: Holotype, apical features greatly magnified, a $-oblique view with the concave face on the left side: line represents 0.5 mm. 26 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Type locality—Santa Inez Bay, Baja Califor- nia (Gulf of California), west around Santa Inez Point, dredged in 6-12 feet of water in fine black sand; J. Hawkins, Jr., collector, March 30, 1940. Range.—Santa Maria Bay, lat. 24°45’W, west coast of Baja California, Mexico (in Gulf of California: Santa Inez Bay, 27°N), to Panama City, lat. 8°50’N., and the Galdpagos Islands, 1°N. Types.—Holotype: U.S.N.M. no. 564527. Para- types: 39 in number, U.S.N.M. no. 602347. Records (latitudinal data approximate) .— West Coast of Baja California, Mexico Santa Maria Bay, 24° 45’ N., boat dredge, Bartsch (8). Cape San Lucas, Bartsch (1). East Coast of Baja California, Mexico Fraile Bay, 23° 23’ N., 10-30 feet, coarse, gray sand, Hawkins (5). Pichilinque Bay, 24° 13’N., Bartsch (18); 24° 13’N., 20-30 feet, Hawkins (2). La Paz Bay, 24° 15’/N., all Hawkins: Between La Paz and El Mogote, 4-6 feet, on gray sandbar (2); north of east end of El Mogote, 1 fm., black sand (2); east point of El. Mogote, low tide on sandy beach (dead) (4); 4 mile southeast of Prieta Point, 2 fms., gray sand (1); 2% miles north of La Paz, 1-2 fms., on bar off Caruanito Rock, gray sand (1). VOL. 41, No. 1 San Carlos Bay, 25° 18’N., 2-3 fms., fine black sand bottom, Hawkins (1). Conception Bay, west end of Coyote Bay, 26° 53’N., 10-12 feet in cove, Hawkins (1). Santa Inez Bay, 27° N., Hawkins: 2 miles west of Santa Inez Point, 44 fms., 4 mile offshore in coarse gray sand (6); west around Santa Inez Point, 6-12 feet in cove, fine black sand (40), types. Republic of Panama Panama City, 8° 50’N., Zetek (5). Panama, Zetek (9) [tips broken]. Galdépagos Islands Near Galdpagos Islands, 1° 21’N., 89° 40’W., U.S.F.C. 2813, 40 fms. (25+) [tips broken]. REFERENCES Dati, W. H. Reports on results of dredging... by the U. S. Coast Survey steamer Blake ..., XXIX: Mollusca; pt. 2: Gastropodaand Sca- phopoda. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 18: 492 pp., 40 pls. 1889. HENDERSON, JoHN B. A monograph of the East American scaphopod mollusks. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 111: 177 pp., 20 pls. 1920. Puteri, R. A. Enwmeratio molluscorum Siciliae 2. 1844. VerRRILL, A. E. Catalogue of Mollusca recently added to the fauna of the New England coast and the adjacent parts of the Atlantic... Trans. Connecticut Acad. Arts and Sci. 6: 139-294, 5 pls.; 395-452, 3 pls. 1884. ZOOLOGY .—The brittle-stars of the United States Navy Antarctic Expedition 1947— 48.1 AusTIN H. Ciarx, U.S. National Museum. In a previous article (this JouRNAL, 40: 330-337, 1950) the Crinoidea, Echinoidea, and Asteroidea of the Navy’s Antarctic Ex- pedition of 1947—48 were described. The col- lection includes 11 species of Ophiuroidea, none of them new although several are of much interest. The literature on the Antarctic echino- derms has recently been brought up to date by the magnificent series of Discovery reports based upon the work of the Discovery, Dis- covery II, and William Scoresby from 1925 to 1935. In this series the report on the Hchin- oidea and Ophiuroidea by Th. Mortensen was published in 19386; on the Crinoidea (with bibliography) by D. Dilwyn John in 1938; and on the Asteroidea (with bibliog- raphy) by Walter K. Fisher in 1940. 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received September 5, 1950. A detailed account of the faunal relations of the Asteroidea, Ophiuroidea, and Echino- idea was published by René Koehler in 1912 (Deuxiéme Expédition Antarctique Fran- gaise, 1908-1910, Echinodermes, pp. 186- 253), and of the Crinoidea by the present author in 1915 (Die Crinoiden der Antark- tis). OPHIUROIDEA OPHIACANTHIDAE Ophicantha disjuncta (Koehler) Ophiodiplax disjuncta Koehler, British Antarctic Expedition 1907-9, 2, Biology, pt. 4: 48, pl. 6, figs. 9, 10, 11, pl. 7, fig. 13. 1911. Localities—Lat. 66° 35’ S., long. 90° 40’ E.; 150 fathoms; water temperature (surface) 29° F.; December 30, 1947 (1 specimen, U.S.N.M. no. E.7689). Marguerite Bay; 35 fathoms; water temper- JANUARY 1951 ature 30° F.; February 20, 1948 (1 specimen, U.S.N.M. no. E.7690). Notes——In the specimen from lat. 66° 35’ S., long. 90° 40’ E. the disk is 12 mm in diameter and the arms are 80 mm long. Jn the specimen from Marguerite Bay in 35 fathoms the disk is 7 mm in diameter; the arms are 35 mm long. AMPHIURIDAE Amphiura algida Koehler Amphiura algida Koehler, British Antarctic Expe- dition 1907-9, 2, Biology, pt. 4: 46, pl. 7, figs. 14, 15. 1911. Locality —Off Cape Royds, Ross Island; 58 fathoms; January 29, 1948 (20 specimens, US.N.M. nos. E.7687, E.7688). Notes—In the largest specimens the disk is 5 mm in diameter and the arms are 25 mm long. The radial shields are in contact from only at their outer ends to about their whole length, and are slightly broader than is shown in Koeh- ler’s figure. The arm spines at the base of the arms are 5, sometimes 6. Amphiura belgicae Koehler Amphiura belgicae Koehler, Resultats du voyage de S. Y. Belgica en 1897 1898-1899, Rapports Scientifique, Zoologie, Echinides et Ophiures: 27, pl. 7, figs. 46-48. 1901. Localities—Off -Cape Royds, Ross Island; 58 fathoms; January 29, 1948 (3 specimens, U.S.N.M. no. E.7683). Marguerite Bay; 35 fathoms; water temper- ature 30° F.; February 20, 1948 (2 specimens, U.S.N.M. no. E.7682). Notes——One of the specimens from off Cape Royds has the disk 8 mm in diameter and the arms 40 mm long. One basal side arm plate has 5 arm spines; the others have 4 spines. The two specimens from Marguerite Bay have the disk 10 mm in diameter and the arms about mm long; the first four side arm plates beyond the disk have 5 arm spines. OPHIOLEPIDIDAE Ophiomastus tudwigi Koehler Figs. 1, 2 Ophiomastus ludwigi Koehler, Resultats du voyage de 8S. Y. Belgica en 1897-1898-1899, Rapports Scientifique, Zoologie, Echinides et Ophiures: 23, pl. 3, fig. 22, pl. 4, figs. 27, 28. 1901. Locality.—Marguerite Bay; 35 fathoms; water temperature 30° F.; February 20, 1948 (2 speci- mens, U.S.N.M. no. E.7979). CLARK: BRITTLE-STARS OF NAVY ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION 27 Notes.—Although there is considerable dif- ference in some details, there can be no doubt that the larger specimen (Fig. 1) represents the same species as the single specimen described as Ophiomastus ludwigi, which was dredged near Peter Island (lat. 71° S., long. 88° 02’ W.) in 600 meters. It is smaller than the type with the disk 3 mm in diameter and the arms 7 mm long and, like the type, is immature without genital slits. The plates of the disk are somewhat irregular. On the first tentacle pore there are three scales on the interradial side, one on the radial; on the second pore there are two or three scales on the outer side, none on the inner; on the four or five following pores there is a single small scale at the base of the lower arm spine; there are no scales on the following pores. There are two arm spines, rather widely spaced. A smaller specimen (Fig. 2) with the disk 1.7 mm. in diameter and the arms 5 mm long probably belongs to the same species. The primary radial plates are in contact, and portions of the radial shields are visible beyond them, as in Koehler’s specimen. As in the larger speci- men the disk is thick, but not domed. The first five upper arm plates, which are not in contact and decrease in size outwardly from the disk, are greatly swollen. The arms are more slender than those of the larger specimen with much elongated and narrow side arm plates and very small upper and under arm plates. There are two arm spines and no tentacle scales. Ophiura serrata Mortensen Figs. 3, 4 Ophiura serrata Mortensen, Discovery Reports 12, Echinoidea and Ophiuroidea: 334, fig. 47, a-d, 335. 1936. Locality.—Marguerite Bay; 35 fathoms; water temperature 30° F.; February 20, 1948 specimens, U.S.N.M. no. E.7980). Notes—These specimens undoubtedly repre- sent the species called Ophiura serrata by Morten- sen, though they differ from that species as described in having fewer and more regular plates on the dorsal side of the disk and in the ventral interradial areas, in having only two well-separated arm spines, and in lacking any evidence of arm combs, all features presumably due to immaturity. The upper arm plates are high and roundedly carinate, separated from each other by a con- spicuous notch. In the smaller specimen they are 28 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES especially high at the arm bases where they are separated by a rather broad V-shaped notch. Distally they become gradually lower and smaller, more and more widely separated, and minute in the distal half of the arm. In lateral view the basal part of the arm appears swollen. In the larger specimen the disk is 5 mm in diameter and the arms are 13 mm long; in the smaller the disk is 3 mm in diameter and the arms are 10 mm long. Ophiura rouchi (Koehler) Ophioglypha roucht Koehler, Deuxiéme Expédition Antarctique Frangaise (1908-1910), Echinoder- mes (Astéries, Ophiures et Echinides): 107, pl. 9, figs. 11, 12. 1912. Localities —Off Cape Royds, Ross Island; 58 fathoms; January 29, 1948 (2 very small speci- mens, U.S.N.M. no. E.7707). vou. 41, No. 1 Marguerite Bay; 35 fathoms; water temper- ature 30° F.; February 20, 1948 (4 specimens, U.S.N.M. no. E.7684). Notes.—The specimens from Marguerite Bay have the disk 5 mm. in diameter and the arms 30 mm. long. Ophiurolepis gelida (Koehler) Ophioglypha gelida Koehler, Bull. Acad. Belgique, 1900: 819; Resultats du voyage du 8. Y. Belgica en 1897—1898-1899, Rapports Scientifiques, Zo- ologie, Mchinides et Ophiures: 17, pl. 1, figs. 6-8. 1901. Localities —Off Cape Royds, Ross Island; 58 fathoms; January 29, 1948 (27 specimens, U.S.N.M. nos. E.7679, E.7680, E.7685). Marguerite Bay; 35 fathoms; water tempera- ture 30° F.; February 20, 1948 (2 specimens, U.S.N.M. no. E.7678). Fies. 1-4.—1, 2, Ophiomastus ludwigi: 1, Specimen with the disk 3 mm in diameter; 2, specimen with the disk 1.7 mm in diameter. 3, 4, Ophiura serrata, aboral (3) and oral (4) surfaces. JANUARY 1951 Notes.—The largest specimen from off Cape Royds has the disk 11 mm. in diameter and the arms 35 mm long. One specimen is 4-rayed. The largest specimen from Marguerite Bay has the disk 12 mm in diameter and the arms 35 mm long. Ophiurolepis martensi (Studer) Ophioglypha martensi Studer, Jahrb. wiss. Anst. Hamburg 2: p. 161, pl. 2, figs. 8, a, b. 1885. Localities—Off Cape Royds, Ross Island; 58 fathoms; January 29, 1949 (11 specimens, U.S.N.M. nos. E.7705, E.7706). Marguerite Bay; 35 fathoms; water tempera- ture 30° F.; February 20, 1948 ( 5 specimens, U.S.N.M. no. E.7704). Ophionotus victoriae Bell Ophionotus victoriae Bell, Report Coll. Nat. Hist. .. . Southern Cross: 216. 1902—Koehler, Deu- xiéme Expédition Antarctique Frangaise (1908- 1910), Echinodermes (Astéries, Ophiures et Echi- nides): 114, pl. 10, figs. 2-4, 12, 13, pl. 11, fig. 8. 1912. Localities —Lat. 65° 25’ S., long. 101° 13’ E.; 100 fathoms; water temperature 30° F.; January 14, 1948 (10 specimens, U.S.N.M. no. E.7676) Peter Island; 30 fathoms; water temperature 29.6° F.; February 15, 1948 (124 specimens, U.S.N.M. nos. E. 7658, E.7659, E.7660, E.7663, E.7664, E.7665, E.7666, E.7669, E.7670, E.7671, E.7672, E.7673, E.7674, E.7675). Peter Island; 60 fathoms; February 15, 1948 (1 specimen, U.S.N.M. no. E.7668). Marguerite Bay; 35 fathoms; water tempera- ture 30° F.; February 20, 1948 (22 specimens, U.S.N.M. nos. E.7661, E.7662). Marguerite Bay; 40 fathoms; water tempera- ture 30° F.; February 22, 1948 (8 specimens, U.S.N.M. no. E.7667). Notes.—The specimens from lat. 65° 25’ §., long. 101° 13’ E. with the disk up to 27 mm in diameter have the disk less rounded and more pentagonal than the others; the arm spines are more slender and delicate and the mouth papillae less stout and more sharply pointed. The arms are longer and more slender, a specimen with the disk 23 mm in diameter having the arms 120 mm long, and one with the disk 16 mm in diameter having the arms 80 mm long. The specimens from Peter Island in 30 fathoms have the disk from 4 to 25 mm in diameter. The specimen from Peter Island in 60 fathoms has the disk 20 mm in diameter. In the specimens from Marguerite Bay in 35 fathoms the disk is up to 27 mm in diameter. CLARK: BRITTLE-STARS OF NAVY ANTARCTIC EXPEDITION 29 One of those from Marguerite Bay in 40 fathoms has the disk 28 mm in diameter. Ophiosteira senoqui Koehler Ophiosteira senoqui Koehler, Deuxiéme Expédition Antarctique Frangaise (1908-1910), Echino- dermes (Astéries, Ophiures et Echinides): 110, pl. 10, figs. 8-11. 1912. Locality.— Off the Knox Coast (lat. 66° 31’ S., long. 110° 26’ E.); 100 fathoms; January 19, 1948 (1 specimen, U.S.N.M. no. E.7681). ‘B Note.—In this specimen the disk is 20 mm. in diameter and the arms are 120 mm long. Ophiocten megaloplax Koehler Ophiocten megaloplac Koehler, Bull. Acad. Bel- gique, 1900: 819; Resultats du voyage du 8. Y. Belgica en 1897-1898-1899, Zoologie, Echinides et Ophiures: 22, pl. 6, figs. 38, 39. 1901. Localities —Lat. 66° 35’ S., long. 90° 40’ E.; 150 fathoms; water temperature (surface) 29° F.; December 30, 1947 (1 specimen, U.S.N.M. no. E.7692). Lat. 65° 25’ S., long. 101° 13’ E.; 100 fathoms; water temperature 30° F.; January 14, 1948 (2 specimens, U.S.N.M. no. E.7693). Off the Knox Coast (lat. 66° 31’ S., long. 110° 26’ E.); 100 fathoms; January 19, 1948 (1 specimen, U.S.N.M. no. E.7691). Notes—The specimen from lat. 66° 35’ S., long. 90° 40’ E. in 150 fathoms has the disk 5.5 mm in diameter and the arms 25 mm long. The specimen from off the Knox Coast has the disk 8 mm. in diameter, with the circular central plate 3 mm in diameter, and the arms 35 mm long. ASSOCIATION OF SPECIES (CRINOIDEA, EcHINOIDEA, ASTEROIDEA, AND OPHIUROIDEA) Ross Island; caught along the beach near Cape Royds; January 29, 1948. Odontaster validus. Off Cape Royds, Ross Island; 58 fathoms; January 29, 1948. Sterechinus antarcticus, Odontaster validus, Amphiura algida, Amphiura belgicae, Ophiura rouchi, Ophiurolepis gelida, Ophiurolepis martenst, Amphiurid. Marguerite Bay; littoral; February 22, 1948. Labidiaster annulatus. Tide pools along shore on an island in Marguerite Bay; February 21, 1948. Sterechinus antarcticus, Acondontaster elon- gatus, Lysasterias perrierit, Lysasterias joffret, 30 ‘JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Adelasterias papillosa. Dredged at 35 fathoms; temperature 30° F.; February 20, 1948. Pro- machocrinus kerguelensis, Sterechinus antarcticus, Leptychaster magnificus, Psilaster charcot:, Odon- taster meridionalis, Odontaster validus, Acodon- taster elongatus, Perknaster aurantiacus, Remaster gourdoni, Adelasterias papillosa, Ophiacantha disjuncta, Amphiura belgicae, Ophiomastus lud- wigi, Ophiura serrata, Ophiura rouchi, Ophiuro- lepis gelida, Ophiurolepis martenst, Ophionotus victoriae. Dredged at 40 fathoms; temperature 30° F.; February 22, 1948. Promachocrinus kerguelensis, Sterechinus antarcticus, Odontaster validus, Cuenotaster involutus, Lysasterias perriert, Ophionotus victoriae. Dredged at 35-105 fath- oms; temperature 30.2° F.; February 19, 1948. Sterechinus antarcticus. Dredged at 115 fathoms temperature 30.2° F.; February 18, 1949. Sterechinus antarcticus, Ondontaster validus. Off Peter I Island; 30 fathoms; temperature 29.6° F.; February 15, 1948. Psilaster charcott, Ophionotus victoriae. Same, 60 fathoms; February 15, 1948. Ophionotus victoriae. ua Lat. 66° 35’ S., long. 90° 40’ E.; 150 fathoms; December 30, 1947. Ophiacantha disjuncta, Ophiocten megaloplax. Lat. 65° 25’ S., long. 101° 13’ E.; 110 fathoms; temperature 30° F.; January 14, 1948. Floro- metra mawsoni, Ophionotus victoriae, Ophiocten megaloplax. vou. 41, No. 1 Lat. 66° 31’ S., long. 110° 26’ E.; 100 fathoms; January 9, 1948. Promachocrinus kerguelensis, Ophiosteira senoqui, Ophiocten megaloplaz. It is interesting to compare the representation of the different classes of echinoderms (exclusive of the holothurians) in the Antarctic and the Arctic. The number of species in each region is as follows: Antarctic Arctic @rinoidea sire ei se coer a ecteniclias 24 3 Mchinoldeateeses-caeh eo eee 30 2 Asteroids 35 )5 che ciss, oe ene OE 114 23 OyomeriClr, sccosacosascwescdsouepsdnc 50 12 This enumeration does not include the fauna of the subantarctic islands or the Magellanic region, which support many additional species mostly related to Antarctic types. The strictly Antarctic species are almost wholly confined to the immediate vicinity of the Antarctic continent, while the majority of the Arctic species range for a greater or lesser distance southward in the north Atlantic, a few also in the north Pacific, and there is an isolated Arctic colony in the very cold water of the eastern part of the Seas of Okhotsk and Japan. A few Antarc- tic types range northward along the west coast of South and North America. Thus among the erinoids Ptilocrinus reaches British Columbia, Ilycrinus occurs off southeastern Alaska and westward to the Commander Islands, and Florometra extends northward to the Aleutian Islands, and south in the west Pacific to southern Japan. ZOOLOGY.—A new genus and species of notodelphyoid copepod from Japan.: Pau L. Inte, U. S. National Museum. In the course of assembling a series of notodelphyoid copepods for revisionary stud- ies, a fruitful source of material has been found in the yet unclassified collections of tunicates in the National Museum. The distinctive form here described has been selected for immediate treatment as a testi- monial to the retiring curator of echino- derms, United States National Museum, Austin Hobart Clark. It is considered an appropriate token of Mr. Clark’s significant connections with the United States Fish Commission steamer Albatross, the collecting vessel, and of his pioneer interest in the zoogeographic features of Japanese waters. 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received October 6, 1950. The generic name here proposed is derived as an anagram of Mr. Clark’s given name. Family NoroDELPHYIDAE Subfamily NoropELPHYINAE Schellenberg, 1922 Ustina, n. gen. The description below of the characters of the genotype and only species, Ustina clarkt, n. sp., provides the generic definition. Ustina clarki, n. sp. Specimens examined.—23 females, 18 males, all adult; from branchial cavities of numerous specimens of a small species of solitary ascidian. Albatross station 3698, off Manazuru Zaki, N.8°, W. 4.5 miles, inside Sagami Bay, Honshu Island, Japan, 153 fathoms, May 5, 1900. JANUARY 1951 Types—Holotypic female, U.S.N.M. no. 91090; allotypic male no. 91091; paratypes no. 91092; all from the one known collection; scien- tific name of ascidian host not known. Description —FEMALE (Figs. 1, a-o): General aspect (Fig. 1, a) marked by the heavy chitiniza- tion of the body, with resultant characteristic rigidity of the major body units, and, in addition, an extremely notable compression of the meta- some. The heavy body cuticle is densely set with perforating conical pores which reach from wide bases to much diminished surface apertures. There seem to be no structures projecting beyond the apertures. The metasome is 5-segmented. The fused cephalothoracic portion includes the somites of all the mouthparts. The segment of the first swimming legs is free and much shorter than the other thoracic segments. The somite of the fourth legs almost equals in bulk the remain- der of the metasome by reason of its voluminous dorsal and posterior expansion to accomodate the characteristic incubatorium. The eggs are large and rather few in number. They form a compact mass which somewhat intrudes anteriorly into the third free somite. The urosome (Fig. 1, 6) is 5-segmented, some what elongate and cylindrical. The very short somite of the fifth legs is succeeded by three long, subequal segments and a very short, but highly characteristic, terminal segment. The anal somite bears a greatly enlarged ventral projection, pear- shaped in lateral view, wide and faintly bilobed from ventral aspect. This prominence is further marked by a very thick cuticle, densely set with the porelike structures described above. The caudal rami are widely spaced and project ventro- laterally from the sides of the segment. An axis through the body measures over-all 2.2 mm. The separate lengths of the metasome and urosome, as measured along their major axes, are respectively 1.75 mm and 1.15 mm. The head (cephalothorax) is triangular in side view. The ventral margin of the notal shield is markedly indented subapically at the point of emergence of the antennular bases. The notum is produced ventrally and posteriorly over the bases of the antennules as a wide-based, roughly triangular rostrum, with rounded apex. The antennule (Fig. 1, c) is 8-segmented and densely setiferous. The base is more or less en- veloped by the ample rostrum. The typical pos- ture would appear to be that resulting from a sharp elbow bend of the third segment upon the second. The basal two segments are much the ILLG: NEW GENUS OF NOTODELPHYOID COPEPOD Ball widest, the six distal to the flexure taper grad- ually to the narrow tip which is about one-seventh. the basal width of the first sezment. The setation has not been depicted fully in the figure nor was an exact count attempted. All the segments are heavily chitinized and the setae are consistently long, slender and profusely plumose. The antenna (Fig. 1, d) is 3-segmented. The basal segment is much the longest, almost equal- ing the combined lengths of the distal segments. It bears distally a well-developed, elongate, plumose seta. The two terminal segments are subequal. Segment 2 bears a short slender seta subapically. Segment 3 has the usual stout, curved, tapered hook, articulated on the distal surface. Set in relation to this terminal jointing are 5 setae. More proximally there is a trio of sub- equal setae which lie closely appressed to the surface. Still more proximal is a short slender seta. The basal segment bears a characteristic marginal row of very long, fine cilia. The masticatory plate of the mandible (Fig. 1, e) is best presented by illustration. The mandib- ular palp (Fig. 1, f) shows some tendency to suppression of the endopodite. Some of the setae are stout, elongate and plumose, but several are reduced to relatively short and slender dimen- sions. The two segments are subequal. The basal segment bears 4 setae at the distal medial corner. The terminal segment bears 8 setae arranged across the truncate end and along the medial margin. The basipodite bears a relatively small subapical seta. The exopodite is a flattened, rigid plate with no remaining evidence of segmentation other than its 5 graduated, long, plumose setae. The maxillule (Fig. 1, g) is ornamented with relatively long, profusely plumose setae. The principal endite of the coxopodite bears a row of nine stout, short, tapered setae. The next distal medial process (a second endite?) is directly prolonged as a sharply tapering, flattened seta, profusely set with marginal ciliation. The basipodite bears medially three long, graduated setae, all plumose. The shortest is proximal and equals about two-thirds the length of the distally placed longest. The middle seta is intermediate in length. The endopodite bears four long, plu- mose setae, two borne terminally and two on the medial margin. The exopodite is slightly more ex- panded than the endopodite and has three setae widely spaced somewhat truneate margin. The epipodite is set with a long plumose seta, directed basally and with a more distally placed, very short, sharply tapered auxiliary seta. along its 32 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES The maxilla (Fig. 1, h) is seemingly of primitive construction. It is 5-segmented; each segment bears one or more profusely ciliated, elongate setae. The basal segment bears a proximal trio of long setae, set more or less transversely to the main axis of the appendage on a well-developed protuberance. The next distal medial prominence bears a single long, plumose seta. The third prominence has a pair of equal, long, plumose setae. The terminal prominence of the segment bears two equal plumose setae; set at the base of these is a very short auxiliary seta. The second segment bears a pair of setae with an accompany- ing, basally placed, short auxiliary seta. The more proximal of the principal setae is equivalent in length to those of the basal segment. The distal seta is about two-thirds as long as the other, of about the same thickness; it is the homologue of the heavily developed claw that occurs in many closely related notodelphyoids. The third seg- ment bears one plumose seta; the fourth segment is distinctively set with one long, plumose seta and ‘a second, much shorter and slenderer seta. The terminal segment bears a distally arranged trio of plumose setae, one of which is equivalent in dimensions with the majority of the setae of the appendage, the remaining two shorter and slenderer by about one-third. All are plumose. The maxilliped (Fig. 1, 7) is a flat, unsegmented plate, preserving, however, indications of direct derivation from a 2-segmented condition. A distal pair of subequal, long, plumose setae is set on a well demarcated projection of the appendage. The medial margin bears two quartets of roughly equal, short, plumose setae. The swimming legs are distinctive as indicated in the figures and in the following tabulation of arrangement of setae and spines. Setae are desig- nated in Arabic numerals following designation of spines in Roman. The segments of each ramus are accounted for in order from the basal segment distally. First exopodite I-1; I-1; IV-3; first endopodite O-0; O-6. Second exopodite I-1; 1-1; V-4; second endopodite O-1; O-8. Third exopodite J-1; I-1; IV-4; third endopodite O-1; O-8. Fourth exopodite I-1; I-1; IV-3; fourth endopodite O-1; O-7. All the legs are heavily chitinized. None bears medial setae on the coxopodite. All bear a seta, variously developed, at the lateral edge of the basipodite. The endopodites are all 2-segmented. The lengths of the exopodites are graduated, the fourth being at least twice as long as the first. The elongation is mainly due to increased produc- VoL. 41, No. 1 tion of the terminal segment of each exopodite. In the first legs (Fig. 1, 7) the rami are sub- equal. The lateral seta of the coxopodite is very long, stout and plumose. The basipodite bears medially a stout, curved, tapered spine which reaches to about the beginning of the distal third of the terminal segment of the endopodite. The setae of the terminal segment of the exopodite are short, exceeding the inner terminal spine by about half its length. The endopodite (Fig. 1, k) is highly distinctive; it is heavily chitinized. The elongate, terminal segment curves laterally and distally. The setae are all very long and profusely plumose. In the second legs (Fig. 1, 1) the endopodite reaches slightly beyond the second segment of the exopodite. The terminal exopodite segment is slightly shorter than the combined lengths of the two proximal segments. The third endopodite reaches just beyond the second segment of the third exopodite. The terminal segment of the latter exceeds the combined lengths of the proxi- mal two segments by about one-third. In the fourth legs (Fig. 1, m) the endopodite does not quite reach to the distal margin of the second segment of the exopodite. The length of the distal segment of the exopodite exceeds the proximal segments by half again their combined lengths. The setae of these swimming legs are in the main very long and plumose. Notably excepted are the setae of the third and fourth exopodites. These are short and slender; their consistency ap- proaches more or less that of the spines and they lack the usual plumose ciliation. The fifth legs (Fig. 1, n) are much reduced. In general aspect they are reminiscent of those in Botachus. The basal portion is more or less coalesced with the substance of the somite. A plumose lateral seta is borne on a slightly elevated basal prominence. The free segment is short and narrow. It bears a medial subapical spine and a relatively short terminal seta. The basal plate and free segment are heavily chitinized. The terminal seta is seemingly lacking in ornamentation. The caudal rami (Fig. 1, 0) are flat, heavily chitinized plates. The armature consists of a long, terminal, articulated claw, a more proximal, short, heavy, spinelike claw, and 3 short setae. Mate (Figs. 1, p, g): a more or less generalized notodelphyoid type, possibly tending somewhat to compression of the metasome. The integument is of normal aspect, lacking the marked sclerotiza- tion seen in the female. There are no cuticular pores detectable in the specimens seen. The meta- JANUARY 1951 ILLG: NEW GENUS OF NOTODELPHYOID COPEPOD 33 Fre. 1.—Ustina clarki, n. sp. Female: a, Habit, lateral view; b, urosome, ventral view; ¢c, antennule; d, antenna; e, masticatory plate of mandible; f, mandibular palp; g, maxillule; kh, maxilla; ?, maxilliped; J, first leg; k, first endopodite; 1, second leg; m, fourth leg; n, fifth leg; 0, caudal ramus. Male: p, First leg; q, fourth leg. The scale, referring only to the figure of the habit of the female, represents 0.5 mm. To avoid complication of detail the plumose ciliation of most setae depicted has been omitted; this de- tail can be supplied from the description. 34 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES some is 5-segmented, comparable, except for the lack of the inflated incubatory structures, to the tagmosis in the female. The urosome is 6-seg- mented, modified in its thoracic component by the complicated male reproductive structures. The first urosomal somite is short and bears at its posterior margin fifth legs entirely comparable with those in the female. The second segment is twice as long and bears the usual sixth leg lappets, each terminating in a prolongation bear- ing two subequal setae. The succeeding three segments are subequal; the first of these is half again as long as the combined lengths of the first two segments. The terminal somite is comparable to that in the female, heavily chitinized, but lacking the elaborately developed cuticular struc- ture of the other sex. None of the cephalic or thoracic appendages, other than the sexually modified sixth legs ex- hibits specialization toward copulatory prehen- sion. The head appendages and maxillipeds are comparable to those in the female, although of smaller absolute dimensions and with somewhat less substantial structure. The swimming legs are not so modified as those in the female, retaining a more generalized aspect. The segmentation differs by the fact that the endopodites of the second, third and fourth legs preserve the basic 3-segmented condition. The ornamentation differs from that in the female in the following particu- lars: second endopodite O-1; O-2; O-6. Third endopodite O-1; O-2; O-6. Fourth exopodite I-1; J-1; IV-4; fourth endopodite O-1; O-2; O-5. The first legs (Fig. 1, p) exhibit segmentation and ornamentation comparable to that in the female, but with over-all reduction in size and substance. The exopodites in the second through fourth legs exceed the endopodites by about the length of the terminal exopodite segments. These terminal segments in each case are shorter than the combined lengths of each two basal segments. The fourth leg (Fig. 1, g) is depicted to show the departure in configuration of segments and degree of ornamentation from the condition in the female. The length of the male is 1.1 mm. Remarks.—The copepod here described raises some difficulty when an attempt is made to place it in the scheme of classification of the notodel- phyoids. The existing generic definition most aptly accommodating its characteristics would be Notopterophoroides Schellenberg, 1922. However, when characters of the present species, those of Botachus, the species of Notopterophorus, Pachy- voL. 41, No. 1 pygus and the two species of Notopterophoroides are compared, it would seem as though a set of variations around a basic ground plan is dis- cernible. Unifying characters would be: con- siderable similarity of antennule; general simi- larity of construction of mandibular palp; more or less graduated reduction in maxillular ormamen- tation, in structure of maxilla, and of maxilliped; individual but more or less consistent modifica- tions of swimming legs; reduction of fifth legs; and great similarity of construction of urosome with markedly consistent modification of the anal somite and caudal rami. It seems supportable that here among the notodelphyoids is still another series of related forms comparable to the groups varying around the Notodelphys mode and the Doropygus mode respectively. The present series exhibits characters (structure of antennule, for instance) which might be considered more primitive than those of Doropygus; others in- disputably are more highly derived. By compari- son with Notodelphys some of this group display a possibly more basie condition in having the somite of the first swimming legs a free segment. Since very probably there are yet undiscovered a considerable number of notodelphyoids which might furnish elucidation of the so far seemingly random distribution of the basic characters, it seems best at the present level of knowledge to indicate supraspecific identity as strongly as pos- sible. Accordingly separation is here recognized of all the aforementioned genera, and for the newly described form generic status is proposed. The species of Notopterophoroides seem to be rather arbitrarily united in the generic delimitation. Since Lang, 1949, by designation of N. armadillo Schellenberg as genotype has fixed the generic concept, the second species, NV. malacodermatus Schellenberg, seems only questionably appropri- ately referable to the genus. However, until the discovery of other species and clarification of the characters of the latter species, it seems prefer- able to refrain from attempting further generic separation. REFERENCES Lane, K. Copepoda ‘‘Notodelphyoida’’ from the Swedish west-coast with an outline on the sys- tematics of the copepods. Arkiv. for Zool. 40A (No. 14): 1-36, 1 pl., 17 figs. 1949. ScHELLENBERG, A. Neue Notodelphyiden des Ber- liner und Hamburger Museums mit einer Uber- sicht der ascidienbewohnenden Gattungen und Arten. I. Teil. Mitteil. Zool. Mus. Berlin 10 (2): 217-274, 43 figs. 1922. JaNuARY 1951 CHACE: GRASS SHRIMPS OF GENUS HIPPOLYTE By) ZOOLOGY .—The grass shrimps of the genus Hippolyte from the west coast of North America.! FENNER A. CHace, Jr., U. 8. National Museum. Two species of Hippolyte have been de- scribed from the Pacific coast of North America. One, Hippolyte californiensis, has been recorded from several localities be- tween Sitka, Alaska, and Santa Inez Bay, Baja California. The other, H. mexicana, was described by me from a series of muti- lated specimens from the latter locality. I am now convinced that H. mexicana repre- sents the previously undescribed male of H. californiensis. Examination of material in the collections of the U.S. National Museum indicates, however, that specimens from the northern part of the recorded range of H. califormiensis are very distinct from those from the southern part and that they be- long to a hitherto undescribed species. It is a pleasure to name this species after Austin H. Clark, retiring curator of echino- derms, U. 8S. National Museum, in recog- nition not only of his outstanding contribu- tions to our knowledge of many groups of animals but, especially, of his even broader influence on natural history through the assistance and encouragement he always has ready for biologists whose major goals still lie ahead. Hippolyte californiensis Holmes Figs. 1, a-e Hippolyte californiensis Holmes, 1895, p. 576, pl. 20, figs. 21-26 (type locality, Bodega Bay, Calif.; cotypes, U.S.N.M. no. 18697) ; 1900, p. 193. —Rathbun, 1904, p. 56 (part).—Schmitt, 1921, p. 48 (part), figs. 26, a-b (not fig. 26, c); 1924a, p. 165 (part); 1924b, p. 387.—Chace, 1937, p. 126. Hippolyte mexicana Chace, 1937, p. 127, fig. 6 (type locality, Santa Inez Bay, Baja California, Mex- ico; holotype, no. 361076, Department of Trop- ical Research, New York Zoological Society) . Female.—Carapace not inflated. Four pairs of subequally spaced tufts of plumose setae on dor- sal part of carapace. Supraorbital spine reaching forward about as far as, or slightly beyond, hind margin of orbit. Antennal spine small, separated by a U-shaped notch from suborbital angle; the latter is blunt, but produced nearly or quite as 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received October 6, 1950. far as the antennal spine. Branchiostegal spine prominent and set far back from anterior margin of carapace, the tip falling short of the margin by at least half the length of the spine. Rostrum reaching not quite as far as, or a little beyond, end of antennal scale. Upper mar- gin straight, or a little concave, and armed with three or four teeth behind the tip. The tip is usually bifid, the upper tooth overreaching the lower. Lower margin set on a very narrow crest, slightly wider than the dorsal one, and armed with three to five teeth behind the tip. Supporting ridge on each lateral face of rostrum very sharp posteriorly, becoming blunt and finally indistinct on the anterior half. Third somite of abdomen produced in a very low, rounded cap over anterior portion of fourth somite. There is a tuft of plumose setae on each side of the cap near the margin, and another pair near the middle. Fifth somite unarmed. Sixth somite one and three-fourths times as long as fifth. Telson as long as sixth somite, flattened dorsoventrally, and armed with two pairs of lateral spines, the anterior pair inserted not quite half way from the base to the tip of the telson, and the posterior pair about midway be- tween the first pair and the tip; there are six or seven terminal spinules, the two submedian pairs about subequal in length and longer than the lateral pair. Cornea of eye wider than stalk and not reach- ing as far forward as tip of stylocerite. Stylocerite slender, sharp, and separated from main portion of segment by a narrow emargination. First antennular segment armed with an outer distal spine (and sometimes a smaller spine mediad to the first}. Second segment about twice as long as third. Inner flagellum made up of 18 to 22 segments, the outer one of 9 to 11 segments the first 6 to 8 of which are somewhat inflated. Antenna with a lower spine on basis. Scale nar- row with subparallel sides, the inner angle of the blade strongly produced far beyond the outer spine. External maxillipeds rather stout and reaching somewhat beyond the tip of the spine on the basis of the antenna. The exopod is well de- veloped. First legs robust, unarmed; carpus dis- tinetly longer than palm. First joint of carpus of second legs a little over twice as long as second, 36 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES which is about three-fourths as long as third (one specimen examined has the second joint fully as long as the third); chela usually shorter than combined lengths of second and third joints of carpus. Third leg reaching forward nearly as far as end of antennular peduncle; merus with three to five lateral spies; carpus with one; propodus very slender, armed ventrally with about seven spines, increasing in size distally; dactyl long and slender, with three stout spines at tip and ten to thirteen on lower margin, in- creasing in size distally. Fourth leg extending forward about as far as end of antennal peduncle; merus armed with three lateral spines; carpus VOL. 41, No. 1 with one; propodus and dactyl as in third leg. Fifth leg reaching forward to terminal third of basis of antenna; merus and carpus armed with one spine each; propodus and dactyl as in leg 3. Male.—Rostrum slender, reaching about to middle of second antennular segment, and straight or slightly downcurved throughout its length. Rostral margins subparallel, armed dor- sally with two to four, usually three, teeth, and ventrally with one to three, usually two, teeth near the tip. Sixth abdominal somite about one and three- fourths times as long as fifth, as in female, but telson is slightly longer than the sixth somite. \\ \ \' \ ‘ t 8 s Fig. 1.—a, Hippolyte californiensis, frontal part of female from Dillon Beach, Calif., X8.3; b, dorsal view of right ‘antennule of female cotype, X8.3; c, second right leg of same specimen, x8. 3; d, third right leg of same specimen, X8.3; e, dactyl of same, X17.4; f, Hippolyte clarki, n. sp., frontal part of female holotype, X8.3; g. dorsal view of right antennule of "holotype, X8.3; h, ‘second | right leg of hol- otype, X8.3; 7, third right leg of holotype, 8.3; 7, dactyl of same, X17. 4: k, anterior view of second right pleopod of holotype, X17.4; 1, frontal part ‘of male paratype from Friday Harbor, Wash., X8.3; m, second right leg of same specimen, X8.3; n, third right leg of same specimen, X8.3; 0, dactyl of same, X17.4; p, anterior view of second right pleopod of same specimen, 17.4. JANUARY 1951 Eyes reaching forward about to end of stylo- cerite. First antennular segment armed with row of three spines on distal margin. Outer antennular flagellum composed of about 16 segments, the proximal 10 of which are inflated. External maxillipeds reaching beyond tip of antennal scale. Legs proportionately longer than in female; third legs reach well beyond end of antennal scale. Propodi of last three pairs very broad and flat in distal half. Dactyls of these legs armed with about 16 spines on lower margin and two large apical spines, which are followed on the distal end of the upper margin by a row of five spines which become progressively smaller proximally. Color.—Green (Holmes); green with pink mar- gins (Hilton). Measurements.—Carapace lengths of smallest ovigerous female and largest female examined, 4.9 and 6.8 mm, respectively. Carapace lengths of males, 2.7 to 3.8 mm. Range.—West coast of North America from Bodega Bay, Calif., to the Gulf of California. Material examined.—Bodega Bay, Calif.; from University of California; 2 females (1 ovigerous), cotypes (U.S.N.M. no. 18697). Dillon Beach, Marin County, Calif. (tide flats in eel-grass area); June 8, 1941; G. M. Scheibner; 1 female (U.S.N.M. no. 89716). Mugu Bay, Ventura County, Calif.; May 31, 1923; E. P. Chace; 5 females (3 ovigerous) (U.S.N.M. no. 89710). Balboa, Calif. (in eel grass); December 26, 1917; W. A. Hilton; from Pomona College; 2 females (1 ovigerous) (U.S.N.M. no. 50659). San Diego, Calif.; March 9, 1898; Albatross; 5 females (2 ovigerous) (U.S.N.M. no. 23403). Ensenada, Baja California, Mexico; Novem- ber 28, 1936; S. A. Glassell; 1 female (U.S.N.M. no. 89678). Off Cape San Lazaro, Baja California, Mexico (in kelp); March 28, 1936; Zaca Expedition; 1 specimen (D.T.R., N.Y.Z.S. no. 361072). Santa Inez Bay, Baja California, Mexico (in stomach of American eared grebe); April 9, 1936; Zaca Expedition; 27 specimens (D.T.R., N.Y.Z.S. nos. 361073, 361077). Same (in stomach of Amer- ican eared grebe); April 11, 1936; 105 specimens (D.T.R., N.Y.Z.S. nos. 361074, 361078, and M.C.Z. no. 9501). Same; 1 fathom; April 15, 1936; 1 male (holotype of H. mexicana, D.T.R., N.Y.ZS. no. 361076). Same; 3 fathoms; April 15, 1936; 1 female (D.T.R., N.Y.Z.S. no. 361075). CHACE: GRASS SHRIMPS OF GENUS HIPPOLYTE 37 Hippolyte clarki, n. sp. Figs. 1, =D Hippolyte californiensis Rathbun, 1904, p. 56 (part).—Schmitt, 1921, p. 48 (part), fig. 26, ¢; 1924a, p. 165 (part). Not H. californiensis Holmes, 1895. Female.—Carapace not inflated. A pair of tufts of plumose setae on cardiac region and another on anterior gastric region. Supraorbital spine not large, reaching forward slightly be- yond hind margin of orbit. Antennal spine small, separated by a U-shaped notch from suborbital angle; the latter is blunt, but produced about as far as the antennal spine. Branchiostegal spine prominent and set well back from anterior mar- gin of carapace, the tip falling short of the margin by nearly half the length of the spine. Rostrum extending well beyond end of an- tennal scale. Upper margin concave in the prox- imal third and straight and ascending distally, or concave throughout, and usually armed with two teeth above the eye; occasional specimens are found with one or three teeth on the dorsal margin behind the tip. The tip is usually trifid, a small tooth being placed on each margin just back of the apex; occasionally either the dorsal or ventral subapical tooth may be absent (one specimen examined has two subapical teeth on the upper margin, causing the tip of the rostrum to appear quadridentate). Lower margin with a narrow crest, deepest at about the end of the proximal third, and armed with one to five teeth. Supporting ridge on each lateral face of rostrum blunt, not sharply carinate, although prominent proximally. Abdomen with a pair of tufts of plumose setae on posterior parts of first and second somites and two pairs of such tufts on third. Third somite produced in a low, blunt cap over anterior part of fourth somite. Fifth somite unarmed. Sixth somite nearly twice as long as fifth. Telson slightly shorter than sixth somite, flattened dorsoven- trally, and armed with two pairs of lateral spines, the anterior spine inserted at a point not quite halfway from the base to the tip of the telson, and the posterior one about midway between the first pair and the tip; there are from six to eight terminal spines, of which the submedian pair is the longest. Cornea of eye wider than stalk, forming a rather bulbous tip to the stalk, and reaching for- ward about to the end of the stylocerite. Stylo- cerite sharp, separated from first segment of 38 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES antennular peduncle by a narrow emargination. First antennular segment unarmed distally. Sec- ond and third segments slender, the second seg- ment fully twice as long as the third. Inner flagel- lum made up of 16 to 22 segments, the outer one of 8 to 11, of which the first is usually very long and all but the last three or four moderately in- flated. Antenna with a lower spine on basis. Scale narrow with subparallel sides, the imner angle of the blade angular and produced far be- yond the level of the outer spine. External maxillipeds rather slender, reaching nearly as far as end of antennal peduncle. There is a fairly well developed exopod. First legs ro- bust, unarmed; carpus distinctly longer than palm. First jomt of carpus of second legs nearly three times as long as second, which is slightly shorter than the third; chela a little shorter than the combined lengths of the second and third joints of the carpus. Third leg reaching forward about to end of antennal scale; merus with two to five lateral spines; carpus with one; propodus slender with subparallel sides and armed ventrally with five to seven pairs of spinules increasing in length distally, the inner spine of each pair being much shorter than the outer; dactyl broad and short, armed with six to eight ventral spines and a double row of eight longer ones crowded onto the distal half of the upper margin. Fourth leg extending forward nearly to end of second seg- ment of antennular peduncle; merus armed with up to five lateral spines; carpus with one; pro- podus and dacty] as in third leg. Fifth leg reach- ing forward about to end of first antennular seg- ment; merus armed with up to four lateral spines; carpus with one; propodus and dacty] as in third leg. Male.—Rostrum slender, reaching about to end of antennular peduncles, and somewhat up- curved distally. Rostral margins subparallel. Ros- tral armature roughly as in females (one male examined has no ventral tooth); the tip is often more obscurely trifid than in the female, because either the dorsal or ventral subapical tooth may be placed farther from the tip. Third segment of abdomen lower than in the female, the cap over the proximal portion of the fourth somite less pronounced. Eyes reaching forward well beyond end of stylocerite. Outer antennular flagellum composed of 8 to 16 segments, all but the terminal 3 to 5 voL. 41, No. 1 of which are somewhat more noticeably inflated than in the female. External maxillipeds reaching well beyond end of antennal peduncle. All of the legs are longer than in the female; third legs overreach antennal scale by length of dactyl and most of propodus. Propodi of last three pairs very broad and flat in distal half, the inflated portion being armed with seven pairs of large spines. Dactyls of these legs elongate, ending in a strong spine, with a row of about 14 spines on lower margin and five or six pairs of close-set spines on distal third of upper margin. There is but one appendix on the endopod of the second pleopods, but that is strongly setose, unlike the stylambys in the female. Age variation.—In small specimens the rostrum is Shorter, reaching just to the tip of the antennal scales in females, and the cornea is no wider than the eyestalk. As in other species of the genus, the younger the specimen, the fewer are the seg- ments in the antennular flagella. Measurements.—Carapace lengths of smallest ovigerous female and largest female examined 3.0 and 6.0 mm, respectively. Carapace lengths of males 1.7 to 3.2 mm. Range.—West coast of North America from Sitka, Alaska, to Puget Sound. A lot of 47 speci- mens collected by the Anton Dohrn is labeled “Southern California,” but this locality seems doubtful. Material examined.—Sitka, Alaska; 10 fath- oms; June 15, 1899; station 1; Harriman Ex- pedition, W. E. Ritter; 1 female (U.S.N.M. no. 25846). Barclay Sound, British Columbia; September 27, 1888; Albatross; 1 ovigerous female (U.S.N.M. no. 28330). Nanaimo, British Columbia; C. H. O’Don- oghue; 2 males, 1 female (U.S.N.M. no. 54720). Friday Harbor, Wash.; in eel grass; August 5, 1928; K. L. Hobbs; 1 ovigerous female holotype (U.S.N.M. no. 91089); 18 males, 13 females (7 ovigerous) (U.S.N.M. no. 63089). Quarantine Rock, Port Townsend, Wash.; June 27, 1903; Albatross; 2 males, 1 ovigerous female (U.S.N.M. no. 31866). Puget Sound; 1895; T. Kincaid; 7 ovigerous females (U.S.N.M. no. 25835). “Southern California’; Anton Dohrn; from Venice Marine Biological Station; 1 male, 46 females (28 ovigerous) (U.S.N.M. no. 50428). January 1951 LITERATURE CITED CuacE, FENNER ALBERT, JR. VII. Caridean decapod Crocker Expedition. The Templeton Crustacea from the Gulf of California and the west coast of Lower California. Zoologica 22 (pt. 2): 109-138, 9 figs. 1937. Homes, Samurt Jackson. Notes on west Amert- can Crustacea. Proc. California Acad. Sci. 4: 563-588, pls. 20-21. 1895. Ratusun, Mary JANE. Decapod crustaceans of the northwest coast of North America. Harriman CHACE: GRASS SHRIMPS OF GENUS HIPPOLYTE 39 Alaska Exped. 10: 1-190, 95 figs., pls. 1-10. 1904. Scumitr, Watpo LaSaunur. The marine decapod Crustacea of California. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 23: 1-470, 165 figs., pls. 1-50. 1921. —. The Macrura and Anomura collected by the Williams Galapagos Expedition, 1923. Zoologica 5 (15): 161-171, 3 figs. 1924. ———. Expedition of the California Academy of Sciences to the Gulf of California in 1921. Crustacea (Macrura and Anomura). Proc. Cali- fornia Acad. Sei. 13 (24): 381-388. 1924. TaBLE 1— DISTINGUISHING CHARACTERS OF THE WESTERN Nortu AMERICAN SPECIES OF HIPPOLYTE Hippolyte californiensis Hippolyte clarki Female Male Female Male Rostrum: Reaching not quite as far as, or a little beyond, end of antennal scale. Nearly horizontal or faintly upcurved. Armed with 3-4 dorsal and 3-5 ventral teeth in back of ter- minal set, tip usually bifid. Lateral supporting ridge sharp above eye, becoming blunt distally. ABDOMEN: Cap on third somite very low. Sixth somite about 1{ times as long as fifth. Eye: Not reaching forward as far as tip of stylocerite. ANTENNULAR PEDUNCLE: First segment armed with 1-2 outer distal spines. SECOND LEG: First joint of carpus little more than twice as long as second. THIRD LEG: Reaching forward nearly as far as end of antennular pe- duncle. Dactyl slender, nearly half as long as propodus, and armed with 10-13 ventral and 3 distal spines. Falling short of end of second segment of antennular pe- duncle. Horizontal or slightly down- curved. Armed with 2-4 dorsal and 1-3 ventral teeth in back of ter- minal set, tip usually bifid. Same. Same. Same. Reaching forward about to tip of stylocerite. First segment armed with 3 outer distal spines. First joint of carpus barely twice as long as second. Reaching forward well be- yond end of antennal scale. Dactyl moderately slender, about half as long as pro- podus, and. armed with about 16 ventral and 7 dis- tal spines extending onto dorsal margin. Reaching well beyond end of antennal scale in adults. Distinctly upeurved or ascend- ing. Armed with 1-3 (usually 2) teeth above eye and 1-5 ven- tral teeth in back of terminal set; tip usually trifid. Lateral supporting ridge blunt throughout its length. Cap on third somite slightly higher and more prominent. Sixth somite nearly twice as long as fifth. Reaching forward about to tip of stylocerite. First segment unarmed dis- tally. First joint of carpus nearly three times as long as second. Reaching forward about to end of antennal scale. Dactyl very stout, less than a third as long as propodus, and armed with 6-8 ventral and 8 — 9 distal spines ex- tending nearly to midpoint of dorsal margin. Reaching about to end of an- tennular peduncle. Slightly upcurved distally. Same. Same. Same. Same. Reaching forward nearly to end of first antennular seg- ment. Same. Same. Overreaching antennal scale by length of dactyl and most of propodus. Dactyl slender, less than half as long as propodus, and armed with about 14 ventral and 5 — 6 distal spines ex- tending a short distance on dorsal margin. 40 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 1 ZOOLOGY —Two new primnoid corals of the subfamily Calyptrophorinae (Coelen- terata: Octocorallia).1 FREDERICK M. The vast collections of marine animals obtained by the United States Fish Com- mission steamer Albatross are still yielding new species, two of which are described below. Among the octocorals this is not surprising for a considerable part of the collection has not yet been studied. The first species herein described, taken by the Albatross during its Hawaiian cruise (1902), was erroneously included with a previously described species in the original report on the Hawaiian Alcyonaria (Nutting, 1908); the other is from the incomparable collec- tion assembled during the Philippine cruise of the Albatross (1906-1910). No complete report upon the collections of the latter expedition has yet been made. It is a great pleasure indeed to dedicate these two species to Austin H. Clark, retiring curator of echinoderms, U. 8S. National Museum, and his charming wife, Leila Forbes Clark, librarian of the Smithsonian Institution. Genus Calyptrophora Gray Calyptrophora J. E. Gray, 1866, p. 25. Diagnosis—Primnoids with branching dichoto- mous, in one plane or bushy; or lyrate, in one or two parallel planes; or partly in whorls, partly dichotomous. Zooids arranged in whorls, with their mouths directed upward or downward; body scales reduced to two pairs of large, curved plates which are either fused to form two solid rings, or are separate; adaxial buccal (marginal) scales present or absent;;no more than one pair of in- frabasal scales between the basal body pair and the rind scales. The operculum is well developed, consisting of eight large scales. The spicules of the stem rind are more or less elongate, flattened scales or plates, in one layer. Genotype.—Calyptrophora japonica Gray (by monotypy). Calyptrophora clarki, n. sp. Fig. 1 Calyptrophora japonica Gray, Nutting, 1908, p. 578 (part). Not Calyptrophora japonica Gray, 1866, p. 25, fig. 1. 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Received October 6, 1950. Bayer, U.S. National Museum. Diagnosis—Branching dichotomous, in one plane. Zooids facing apically; both pairs of body scales fused to form solid rings; basal ring with a pair of long, slender, finely serrate spines; buccal ring with two broad, bladelike, finely serrate processes, which are occasionally bifid or trifid, sometimes completely divided to form four or six separate processes. A pair of well-defined infra- basal scales is present. Description —The colony is branched dichoto- mously, in one plane; the axis is longitudinally grooved and has a golden luster. The zooids (Fig. 1, D), which are 2.25-2.50 mm long including the buccal spines (measured parallel to the branch), occur in whorls of four or five (Fig. 1, A), and face upward; in 3 em of branch length there are from 12 to 14 whorls. The zooid body is surrounded by two pairs of large sclerites fused to form rings. The basal ring (Fig. 1, #) bears on its free edge a pair of long, slender, finely serrated spines; the buccal ring (Fig. 1, F) has two broad, bladelike processes which are sometimes divided more or less completely into two or three points or separate spines. A pair or narrow, curved infra- basals connects the basal ring with the stem scales. Adaxial buccal (marginal) scales are absent. The operculum is high and projects prominently from the buccal ring. The abaxial operculars are the largest, roughly triangular in shape and with a moderately strong inner keel; the adaxials are about half as large and more nearly perfect triangles; the outer lateral and inner lateral operculars are intermediate in size and more or less asymmetrical in outline due to the broadly rounded inner margin which overlaps the edge of the adaxially adjacent scale. The apical margins of the operculars are usually serrate, and in some zooids are divided into several lobes or low points (Figs. 1, B, C). The spicules of the stem rind are elongate scales without external ridges. Type.—U.S.N.M. no. 25370. Locality —Hawaiian Islands: Ukula Point, Kauai Island, bearing north 65° 30’, west 7.4 miles, 508-557 fathoms, gray sand and Foramini- fera, bottom temperature 40° F., June 17, 1902 (Albatross station 4007). Paratype.—U.S8.N.M. Islands. Remarks.—In habit, Calyptrophora clarki is no. 43139; Hawaiian JANUARY 1951 readily distinguishable from C. japonica Gray by its regularly dichotomous instead of lyrate branching. Most zooids of C. clarki are at once separable from those of C. japonica by the two broad processes of the buccal ring; there is, how- ever, much variation among individuals, even of the same colony, in the character of the buccal spines, and though there are ordinarily but two broad processes, there may occasionally be four, and sometimes even six. None of the specimens of C. japonica I have examined show six buccal spines. Both the buccal and the basal spines of C. clarki are proportionally much longer than those of C. japonica, except perhaps for Versluys’ spect- men no. 3 of his ‘form B” (1906, p. 118, figs. 166-168), which is probably not C. japonica at all but something close to the present species. BAYER: TWO NEW PRIMNOID CORALS 4] Genus Narella Gray Narella J. E. Gray, 1870, p. 49. Stachyodes + Calypterinus Th. Studer [and E. P. Wright], 1887, p. 49; IX. P. Wright and Th. Studer, 1889, pp. xlviii, 53, 54. Diagnosis.—Primnoids mostly branched di- chotomously, in one plane or bushy. Zooids arranged in whorls, with their mouths directed downward; body scales three pairs of large, curved plates, of which the basal pair may meet adaxially to form a closed ring (in one species the buccal pair also); adaxial buccal (marginal) scales are frequently present in one or more pairs. The operculum consists of eight large scales. Spicules of the stem rind variable, elongate or scalelike, in one or two layers. Fic. 1.—Calyptrophora clarki n. sp.: A, Two distalmost whorls from the type specimen; &, three opercular scales, abaxial, inner lateral and adaxial, of the large, lacimiate type; C, the same, of the small type; D, typical zooid, side view; H, basal scale ring: art, articulating ridge; /’, buccal seale ring: art, articulating ridge which rides on that of the basal ring. Fic. 2.—Narella leilae n. sp.: A, Adaxial view of zooid showing adaxial buccal scales; B, a whorl of normal zooids; C, opercular view of zooid; D-M, opercular scales: ’, K, M, apical, inner face, and side view of major abaxial opercular scale; NV, O, adaxial buccal scales (scale at J applies to all opercular scales); P, small flattened rods from the tentacles (scale applies only to P); Q, zooid whorl from above, showing worm tunnel (scale applies only to Q); R, zooid whorl from side, showing ‘‘arcade polyps”’ with abnormally expanded basal scales (scale apples to A-C, R, 8S); S, normal zooid from the side, showing: dor, ‘‘dorsal”’ and lat, lateral regions of basal scale; and bla, the basolateral angle which sepa- rates the two. JANUARY 1951 Genotype.—Primnoa regularis Duchassaing and Michelotti, 1860 (by monotypy). Remarks.—As Miss Deichmann (1936, p. 168) points out, Narella clearly has priority over Stachyodes. The genus Calypterinus was estab- lished for a specimen with abnormal polyps due to a polychaete commensal. Calyptrophorines, es- pecially Narella, are frequently infested with worms which cause adjacent polyps along one side of the stem to form greatly expanded basal scales which produce a sort of arcade in which the worm makes its home (Fig. 2, Q, R). Narella leilae, n. sp. Fig. 2 Diagnosis-—Branching lateral-dichotomous, i2 one plane. Zooids small, 2.0-2.5 mm long, facing basally; only basal scale pair meeting adaxially to form a ring; free margins of all three body-scale pairs broadly expanded but not forming long, projecting points; free lateral border of each basal scale with a downward and forward projecting angle; basal scale distinctly divided into dorsal and lateral regions by a basolateral angle. Oper- - culum low, the individual scales broad, with a high inner keel. Description—The type consists of three frag- ments, the largest of which is about 70 mm tall and twice branched dichotomously. In the proxi- mal part the axis is a little flattened in the plane of branching, oval in the lowest part of the type specimen, becoming almost round in the distal- most tips; it is longitudinally grooved, and of a brownish-yellow color with moderate luster. The downward facmg zooids (Fig. 2, S) are 2.0-2.5 mm long (measured parallel to the branch), arranged in whorls of four to six (Fig. 2, B), of which 10-12 occur in 3 cm of axial length. The zooid body is surrounded by three pairs of large scales, of which only the basal pair meet adaxially to form a ring; the free edges of all three pairs are broadly expanded, those of the basal and medial pairs more or less reflexed while that of the buccals is curved a little inward; basals bent along a definite basolateral angle which divides the scale into dorsal and lateral regions; the free lateral edge of the basal scale has a forward and down- ward projecting angle (Fig. 2, S). The operculum is very low; the scales are broad, the largest abaxial almost pentagonal in face view (Fig. 2, K), and each is furnished with a very high keel on the inner face and corresponding groove on the outer (Fig. 2, D-M). One pair of adaxial buceals is present (Fig. 2, A, V, O). The tentacles contain very small (0.04-0.07 mm) flat rods (Fig. 2, P). BAYER: TWO NEW PRIMNOID CORALS 43 The coenenchyma scales are irregular, rather elongate plates, those nearest to zooids often with a high, thin longitudinal crest. Type.—U.S.N.M. no. 49724. Locality.—Off Kapoposang Light, Straits of Macassar, lat. 4° 43’ 22” §., long. 118° 53’ 18” E., 400 fathoms, hard bottom, bottom temperature 43.3° F., December 28, 1909 (Albatross station 5664). Additional record.—Oft Gomomo Island, Pitt Passage, lat. 1° 53’ 30” S., long. 127° 39’ 00” E., 400 fathoms, coral, rock, soapstone, (no te: pcr ature data), December 3, 1909 (Albatross staticn 5635). Remarks.—Narella leilae, n. sp., shows a certain resemblance to NV. clavata (Versluys) in its closed basal scale pair and definite basolateral angles; the development of abnormal “arcade polyps” (Fig. 2, Y, R) induced by polychaete commensals is similar to that of Narella allmani (Wright and Studer). Narella leilae differs from N. clavata in its smaller zooids and exceptionally low oper- culum, its thinner and more delicate body scales, and in absence of a high dorsal crest on the basals; from N. allmani it differs in having adaxially’ closed basal scales, the buccals not being drawn out into projecting points, and in the much broader opercular scales. LITERATURE CITED DetcuMann, Evisaperu. The Alcyonaria of the western part of the Atlantic Ocean. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 58: 1-317, pls. 1-37. 1936. DucHassaInG DE Fonsressin, P., and Micur- Lottr, J. Mémoire sur les coralliaires des Antilles. Mem. Accad. Sci. Torino (2) 19: 279-365, pls. 1-10. 1860. Gray, Joun Epwarp. Description of two new forms of gorgonioid corals. Proc. Zool. Soe. London 1866: 24-27, figs 1-2. 1866. . Catalogue of lithophytes or stony corals in the collection of the British Museum. 2 lvs. + 1-51, figs. 1-14. 1870. Nurtine, CHARLES CLEVELAND. Descriptions of the Alcyonaria collected by the U. S. Bureau of Fisheries steamer Albatross in the vicinity of the Hawarian Islands in 1902. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 34: 548-601, pls. 41-51. 1908. Sruppr, THéorHt1ne [and Wriaur, Epwarp Prerceva].. Versuch eines Systemes der Aley- onaria. Arch. fiir Naturg. 538 Jahrg. (1): 1-74, pl. 1. 1887. Vmersiuys, J. Die Gorgoniden der Siboga Expedi- tion. II. Die Primnoitdae. Siboga Exped. 18a: 1-187, 178 figs., pls. 1-10, chart. 1906. Wricut, Epwarp Prrcevar, and Sruprer, Tuko- PHILE. Report on the Alcyonaria collected by H.M.S. Challenger during the years 1873-1876. Challenger Reports, Zool., $1: i-lxxi + 1-814, pls. 1-48. 1889. 44 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. | ZOOLOGY .—A new species of polychaete worm of the family Polynoidae from Point Barrow, Alaska.1 Martan H. Prerripone, Arctic Research Laboratory, Johns Hopkins University. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) The new species of Polynoidae herein described is part of a collection of poly- chaetes from Point Barrow, Alaska, collected by George E. MacGinitie, of the Arctic Re- search Laboratory. The types are deposited in the United States National Museum. I take pleasure in naming it after Austin H. Clark, retiring curator of echinoderms, United States National Museum. Family PoLyNoIDArE Genus Eunoé Malmgren, 1865 Eunoé clarki, n. sp. Fig. 1, a-e Measurements—The type (U.S.N.M. no. 21984), of 41 segments, is 838 mm long, 8 mm wide excluding setae, and 12 mm wide including setae. The paratype (U.S.N.M. no. 21985), of 40 seg- ments, 1s 36 mm long and is of the same width as the type. Description.—The body is linear-oblong, widest in segments 9 to 27, narrowing slightly anteriorly and slightly more so posteriorly; it is oval in cross section. The middorsum is transversely banded with grayish green; the ventral surface is without color except for the grayish-green coloration an- terior and lateral to the mouth. Fifteen pairs of elytra nearly cover the dorsum; they are large, imbricated, arranged on segments 2, 4,5, 7,9... 23, 26, 29, and 32. The elytra (Fig. 1, a) are oval to subreniform in shape, greenish gray in color, with a darker mottled pattern on most of the exposed parts of the elytra, and with a darker spot medial to a lighter area over the elytrophore —giving the appearance of paired “‘ocelli”’ (similar in this regard to Halosydna brevisetosa Kinberg). The elytral border is smooth except for scattered clavate micropapillae (Fig. 1, e). The elytral surface, although appearing smooth, is furnished with numerous chitinous bluntly conical micro- tubercles (up to 30u in height, Fig. 1, e). The prostomium (Fig. 1, a) is bilobed, wider than long, somewhat pigmented, with a deep anteromedian notch; cephalic peaks are lacking. The four eyes aresmall, the posterior pair situated dorsal and slightly posterior to the widest part of 1 This study was aided by a contract between the Office of Naval Research, Department of the Navy, and Johns Hopkins University. Received October 6, 1950. the prostomium, the anterior pair are antero- lateral. The median antenna has a large pig- mented ceratophore; the style is about 1.5 times the length of the prostomium, with a pigmented proximal part, and with very short scattered clavate papillae. The lateral antennae are in- serted ventral to the median antenna on the prostomium; the ceratophores are short, darkly pigmented; the styles are short—about half the length of the median antenna—and furnished with short papillae. The palpi are about 2.5 times the length of the prostomium, with longitudinal rows of fine papillae. The tentacular segment (Fig. 1, a) has the basal lobes elongated, pigmented on the basal half, with one seta; the tentacular cirri are longer than the median antenna, about 2.5 times the length of the prostomium, with a wide pigmented zone basally and a narrow darker pigmented ring below the subterminal slightly bulbous enlarge- ment, with a filamentous tip, and with short scattered clavate papillae. The dorsal cirri (Fig. 1, a) have elongated cirrophores, bulbous basally and narrower distally; the styles are similar to the tentacular cirri, with or without the basal pig- mented zone, and extend beyond the tips of the setae. The dorsal tubercles, corresponding to the elytrophores on the cirrus-bearing segments, are short and bulbous. The ventral cirri are subulate, enlarged basally, tapering distally to filamentous tips (Fig. 1, 6). The anal cirri are missing. The segmental or nephridial papillae begin on segment 6 and continue posteriorly; they are rather long and cylindrical, especially in the segments of the middle third of the body. The parapodia (Fig. 1, 6) are biramous. The notopodium is a rounded lobe on the anterodorsal face of the neuropodium, extending out into a narrower acicular lobe from which the aciculum projects. The notosetae (Fig. 1, 6, c) are amber- colored, moderate in number (about 40), forming a spreading bundle; they are slightly arched, slender to stout (20-80 in greatest diameter), with long spinous regions extending over half of the exposed length, and short bare pomted to blunt tips. The neuropodium is obliquely truncate distally, with a longer dorsoanterior acicular lobe. The neurosetae (Fig. 1, 6, d) are amber-colored, moderate in size (80-50 in diameter in the stem 4 JANUARY 1951 PETTIBONE: NEW SPECIES region, 36-62y in greatest diameter in the en- larged distal region), with transverse spinous rows (9-24 or so rows), and rather long bare entire tips. Remarks.—Eunoé clarki resembles in superficial appearance Halosydna brevisetosa Kinberg—the common Pacific coast polynoid—particularly in its linear shape and mottled elytral pigmentation with paired “‘ocelli.” It differs from Hunoé nodosa (Sars) and Hunoé oerstedi Malmgren in lacking macrotubercles and fringes of papillae on the b Fig. 1.—Eunoé clarki, n. sp.: a, Dorsal view prostomium, first three segments, and second right elytron and parapodium of fourth segment (first ely OF POLYCHAETE WORM 45 elytra, in the smaller eyes, and in the location of the anterior pai of eyes—anterolateral and not anterodorsal. It might well prove to be commensal in habit, as shown by the small eyes, absence of elytral macrotubercles, and elytral fringes of papillae. Locality—Two specimens were collected at Point Barrow base, Alaska, by George HE. Mac- Ginitie, October 17, 1949. They were washed ashore after a storm along with many other animals, including numerous polychaetes. tral pair and second left elytron removed); b, thir teenth right parapodium, posterior view; c, tip of notoseta; d, tip of middle subacicular neuroseta; e, few microtubercles and papilla from eighth elytron. 46 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 1 ENTOMOLOGY .—4A new genus and species of North American Olethreutidae (Lep- idoptera: Laspeyresiinae).! J. F. Gates CiarKe, Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine. The new species of olethreutid moth de- scribed herein, which becomes the type of a new genus, I take pleasure in naming for my friend Austin H. Clark, retiring curator of echinoderms of the United States Na-~ tional Museum, who, among his other ac- complishments, is a lepidopterist of long- standing and world-wide repute. Corticivora, n. gen. Figs. 1-le Typus generis.—Corticwora clark, n. sp. Head rough; labial palpus not exceeding front, third segment about one-fifth the length of second. Thorax without posterior tuft. Forewing smooth; termen nearly straight; 12 veins, all separate; vein 2 remote from 3; 3, 4, and 5 approximate at bases; 8 and 9 approximate basally; 11 from before middle; upper internal vein of cell from between 10 and 11, very weakly developed. Costal fold absent. Hindwing with normal pecten on lower median vein; 8 veins; 3 and 4 stalked; 6 and 7 stalked; termen slightly concave. Male genitalia with cucullus narrow and sac- culus broad without spine clusters; soci well- developed, fleshy, haired pads; uncus absent. Female genitalia with signa developed as scobinate-dentate cones. Structurally Corticivora is similar to Gypsonoma (Eucosminae) though remaining clearly laspey- resiine. As in Gypsonoma all veins of the forewing are separate in Corticwora and in the hindwing 3 and 4 and 6 and 7 are stalked. The upper internal vein of Gypsonoma arises between 9 and 10 and that of Corticivora between 10 and 11. In the hindwing vein 5 of Gypsonoma is approximate to 4, whereas that of Corticivora is remote from 4. In both genera the socii are present, a character seldom found in the Laspeyresiinae. Corticivora appears to be most nearly related to 1 Received October 6, 1950. Laspeyresia but differs from it by the stalking of veins 6 and 7 of the hindwing, the presence of soci, and the form of the signa. Corticivora clarki, n. sp. Alar expanse, 10-11 mm. Labial palpus sordid whitish; second segment suffused and sparsely irrorate with gray; second segment almost wholly gray externally, except apex. Antenna dark grayish fuscous with narrow, paler annulations. Head creamy white. Thorax grayish fuscous. Ground color of forewing cinere- ous, the scales narrowly white-tipped; basal patch and other dark markings grayish fuscous as illustrated; narrow subbasal line of cilia black, cilia leaden. Hindwing light grayish fuscous; cilia, except subbasal band, paler. Legs creamy white suffused and banded with grayish fuscous. Ab- domen grayish fuscous above, creamy white beneath. Male genitalia.—As figured. Cucullus with strong, long setae along ventral edge; aedeagus broad and flattended dorsally and distal two- thirds abruptly narrowed, cylindrical, pointed. Female genitalia.—As figured. Signa conical, studded with sharp scobinate-dentate processes; posterior portion of ductus bursae lightly sclero- tized, slender. Type—U.S.N.M. no. 60582. Type locality.—North Guilford, Conn. Food plant—Red pine (Pinus resinosa Ait.). Remarks.—Described from the type male and four male and three female paratypes from the type locality, all reared by G. H. Plumb and J. V. Schaffner. Emergence dates range from June 24 to July 2, 1944. Paratypes in the U. 8. National Museum and British Museum (Natural History). G. H. Plumb, who submitted the above ma- terial for identification, will publish the life history _ of this mteresting species. The photographs for the accompanying fig- ures were taken by Floyd B. Kestner, pnouoge aq pher of the Smithsonian Institution. JANUARY 1951 CLARKE: NEW SPECIES OF OLETHREUTID MOTH 47 (se . ~ & “sy, ld : le Figs. 1-le.—Corticivora clarki, n. sp.: 1, Left wings; la, venation of right wings; 1b, ventral view of male genitalia with aedeagus in situ; lc, enlarged view of signa; ld, detail of genital plate and ostium; le, ventral view of female genitalia. 48 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 1 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 441ST MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 441st meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club on November 20, 1950, was called to order at 8:03 p. m. by the Presi- dent, F. B. Stusper. Also present were: N. R. Smita, W. N. Fenton, C. L. Gazin, A. T. McPuerson, W. A. Dayton, H. W. Hempte, Marcarer Prirrman, F. M. Serzuer, and, by invitation, L. W. Parr. The President announced the appointment of the following Subcommittee for the Teaching of Science of the Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement for 1950: B. D. Van Evnra, chair- man, R. P. Barnus, F. E. Fox, T. Koppanyt, M. H. Martin, A. T. McPHERSON. Twenty-six persons were elected to member- ship in the Academy. The following report of the Nominating Com- mittee was presented: The Nominating Committee, consisting cf the Academy’s Vice-presidents, met in the library of the Cosmos Club on November 6, 1950. The meet- ing was called to order at 5 p.m. by F. C. Kracex, who presided. Others present were: C. F. W. MuversersBeck, J.S. Wriiiams, W. A. Dayton, F.M. Deranporr, E. W. Price, MARGARET PITTMAN, H.W. Hempue, and H. G. Dorsry. F. M. Srrzter acted as secretary but took no part in the bal- loting. The nominees selected for the offices to be filled by the balloting of the membership in December were as follows: For President-elect, WALTER RAM- BERG; for Secretary, FRANCIS M. DrraNnporp; for Treasurer, Howarp 8. Rappirye; for Board of Managers to serve 3 vears (two to be elected), Sara E. Branuam, Mivron Harris, C. F. W. Murse- BECK, JOHN A. STEVENSON. The Secretary reported the death on June 18, 1950, of Frank W. Scuwas, of the National Bureau of Standards (elected October 15, 1945). The meeting adjourned at 8:40 p. m. 442D MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 442d meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club on December 18, 1950, was called to order by the President, F. B. SILSBEB, at 8:02 p. m. Also present were: N. R. SmitH, H. 8. Rappieys, J. A. Stevenson, F. M. Derranporr, W. R. Wepext, W. A. Dayton, C. A. Brerts, E. W. Price, Marcarer Pirrman, F. M. Srerzuer, and, by invitation, R. G. Bass. The President announced the plans for the Encouragement of Science Talent and the Sci- ence Fair, indicating that he had requested the customary contributions from the various Affili- ated Societies for the support of these activities. The Chairman of the Committee on Meetings, F. M. DeranporrF, announced that there would be no regular meeting of the Academy in Decem- ber. He reported, however, that he had arranged for Dr. Per K. Frouicu, former director of re- search and now vice-president of Merck & Co., to serve as guest speaker at the annual meeting and dinner of the Academy to be held at the Kennedy-Warren on January 18, 1951. The Chairman of the Committee on Member- ship, R. G. Bares, presented the names of 14 resident and 3 nonresident candidates for mem- bership in the Academy. One nonresident candi- date previously presented was elected. Two members, Howarp P. Barss and Victor Bircx- NER, were placed on the retired list, effective De- cember 31, 1950. The Treasurer, H. 8. RappLeyn, reported on purchases of office furniture that had been made for the Treasurer’s office and requested that an increased allotment of $25 be made to the budget of the Treasurer. The request was unanimously approved. The Archivist, J. A. StevENSON, reported that he and former Archivist, N. A. Smirx, had made a final reorganization of all records of the Acad- emy in the office of the Archivist and that he had prepared a detailed inventory of this material to be presented as his report at the annual meet- ing of the Academy in January. Mr. STEVENSON also gave an interesting report on the Seventh International Botanical Congress, held in Stockholm, Sweden, July 12-20, 1950, at which he represented the Academy as delegate. The meeting adjourned at 8:55 p. m. Frank M. Serzumr, Secretary. Ge fe bay NOTE Those whose pleasant task it was to bring together the contents of this number of the JouRNAL of the Washington Academy of Sciences, honoring Austin H. Clark, have endeavored to reflect Mr. Clark’s wide interest in the natural sciences, although they did not attempt to include papers in all fields in which he has specialized. Mr. Clark’s own paper, on ‘The Brittle-stars of the United States Navy Antarctic Expedition 1947-48,” which he submitted to the editors of the JouRNAL last Sep- tember, was included in this issue without, of course, the author’s knowledge. It seems not unfitting, however, that this example of Mr. Clark’s work should appear here in an array of scientific papers by those who seek to do him honor. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences [PROSTGIGURS Rete TOO Bp BEE ORE Francis B. Siuspex, National Bureau of Standards PR ESSUCTI LHC LECL my Salesian ee eA Ae eee Naraan R. Smitu, Plant Industry Station SGERAAETO) s CaO a Be a cet OR Ore Roe ee Frank M. Srerzumr, "U.S. National Museum INRODSURER Sb geo eke ae PS one Howarp 8. Raprieye, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey PAR CIEULS ERR eM ithe cnet hnse enc eis Joun A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haraup A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Philosophical Society of Washington.......................... Frank C. Kracek Anthropological Society of Washington......................... Waxpo R. WEDEL Biolocicallsocietyson Washington he. saauct acces sce e cee one @hemicall Society,of Washington. 2222 5...--..2c-- 4.6 suse ccee James I. Horrman Entomological Society of Washington........................ C. F. W. MursEBECK INatronalli'Geographic!Society,.....0.......60000..0s sense cee: ALEXANDER WETMORE Geological Society of Washington........................ JAMES STEELE WILLIAMS Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................... FREDERICK O. CoE ColumbiayeistoricaliSocletyar-re soc. es cece een a. GILBERT GROSVENOR Botanical sociebyzon Washington’. yo.-55.--2 20.0 oe. eseee one FrRreEeMAN A. WEIsSs Washington Section, Society of American Foresters...... .... Witi1AM A. Dayton Washington Society Olalingineershet se ee ee ee Cuirrorp A. Brerts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers Francis M. DeranporF Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp 8. Dinu Helminthological Society of Washington........................ Emmett W. PRIcE Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists..... Marcarer PirrMaNn Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Henry W. HemMeLe Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers........... Hersert G. DorsEy District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers wren B. FRENCH Elected Members of the Board of Managers: PRoramnuUany LOOM. Seite ce eee cece Francis M. Deranporr, WILLIAM N. FENTON Wha VEmineryy OGY 7e Noe eae aan ae Cee eee Witutam F. Fosuaa, C. Lewis Gazin PROM AIAUT AI yee L OGM erane leie: start asc chee si nisise eked syne Howarp P. Barss, A. T. McPHEeRson 2@GRG) Off WOT AR a aoe oe ae Oe All the above officers plus the Senior Editor Batranojmuaicojsiand Aissocvate Haitons .. o.ssek cess eee eee ee (See front cover) Executive Commitiee.............. Francis B. SinsBEe (chairman), NatHAN R. SMITH, Witiiam N. Fenton, Howarp S. RappLerye, Frank M. Serzuer Committee on Membership........... Rocer G. BaTEs (chairman), M=RRILL BERNARD, Cuirrorp A. Berrs, WILBUR BuRBANK, Rosert C. Duncan, REGINA FLANNERY, A. B. Gurney, E. H. KENNARD, C. L. LEFEBVRE, C. W. REEs, Donatp C. Smita, L. A. SPINDLER Committee on Meetings....... Francis M. Drranporr (chairman), FREDERICK O. Con, Mitton Harris, Luoyp G. Hensest, Byron J. Otson, Frank B. ScHEETz Commuitiee on Monographs: MRowanwary 1951). o2 \..escc0 9: Emmett W. Price (chairman), Wittiam N. FENTON Mordamiary LISD! se etek sas ets cus eisai Pau H. Oruser, JASON R. SWALLEN Mow amitrariyiel DHS eperse sets: le crores le sragsseiswianevels Rauew W. Imuay, Paut W. Oman Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (T. DALE STEWART, general chairman): For the Biological Sciences........................ T. Date STEWART (chairman), Enotse B. Cram, AUREL O. Foster, Expert L. Littits, Jr., Haroip H. McKinney, JosErn S. WaDE For the Engineering Sciences...................... Water RAMBERG (chairman), Louis W. Currier, Rospert C. Duncan, Outtver S. Reapine, Harry W. WELLS Homthe Physical Scitences).-.................... Rosert D. Huntoon (chairman), Wituiam Buum, Micuart GoLtpBErG, Raymonp J. Seecer, Urnest H. VESTINE Commitiee on Grants-in-aid for Research: J. Lron SHERESHEFSEY (chairman), Cornetius J. Connouiy, L. Epwin Yocum Committee on Policy and Planning: PRoJamuaryal OMe. see ccc ciiestel: LELAND W. Parr (chairman), Austin H. CLark wR ORNs ODD) «he. cc mes wecacueevervee shei ces sep tus James I. Horrman, Martin A. Mason IL@ diana ICE ine qee saneeeas cone mmee ge Wiuiram A. Dayton, Natuan R. Smita Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: PRoWanwanyalOol ae vcr yaaa eis ts: B. D. Van Evra, JossepH M. CALDWELL Morantanyal G52i en ee eee. Martin A. Mason (chairman), A. T. McPHERSON ORAM UaTyal Ooo me tienen clttcrerente ov nanccruaratls Austin H. Cruarx, Frep L. Monier ligepiasaaanag (ce (Coomera Oy F\o Fle Ale Sion bp oon cuecodanGuescenaucece Frank M. Serzuer CommittecnofpAUaulors. snciiae ene do sean nade. oe Water D. Surciirrs (chairman), C. Lewis Gazin, Raymonp L. SANFORD Committee of Tellers............ Fenner A. Cuace, JR. (chairman), Haroup F’. Stimson, Easert H. WALKER CONTENTS Page Dedication — HBRBERTHRIBDIANN| ieee ee eee eee “i es Jeanna Of Aoi lelOoaps CUM Bccose6 2 cesecns0cn06. ob 2 Biographical Resumé — WALDO) In) SCHMITT 944-2) 22-20 44 ae 3 * * * PaLEONTOLOGY.—New brachiopods from the Lower Cambrian of Virginia. GARTHUR: COOPER: 2.0.0) cA ain Boe to ee 4 PaLEONTOLOGY.—Two new guide fossils from the Tallahatta formation of the Southeastern States. JuLIA GARDNER...................... 8 PaLEontToLocy.—Nucula austinclarki, n. sp., a concentrically sculptured Nucula from the Lisbon formation of Alabama. F. Srmarns Mac- INGOT Neer Bos, Sacdot hia ald lege eB eto igen tack te: ~— 4 | ¢ SONS | \ Lagarpampa S Quichuibamba Rae 2 oP \ p ae, RN oS \i \ ofp Orova la Ving S Sees 4 A140 > = x GS \ nN & ~ SIF \ == BSe \Shahuindo | \ ae Piruro : S > \ a SX Hda. Alpamarca ~ on \ \ SS S ~ Coy = . Hda. el a Cito Ne 4 ax G S Trapiche S -~ X \ ‘ d ‘Sj SU N \\ Rumatambo~ ~\. Uv (a \ Ni R QE! Huayo r Sa [P= / < \ a jl Fase O Deliciana ~ —_ \ Liacuabamba _1 Sa BS . @, \ ) \ ( / ve ) 4 y) Sten oe . — \ Vaan \ VE = Ns Li Bees See as SK . . SSet= SS \ NS % S 27% RUINS \ _GBX_BURIAL CAVES ZUL ROADS << TRAILS ‘ i ~ y XY SS =>— > Allen. Fic. 1.—Map showing archeological sites in central Pataz, Peru. Frsruary 1951 the town of Chilia and its rich valley. Al- though this region is not large, there are enormous climatic variations. In the high puna within the triangle Chilia-Parcoy-Bul- dibuyo the cold high grasslands are used principally for sheep raising. Lower down transportation animals are grazed. Still lower in the valleys of Chilia, of the Parcoy, the de la Playa, the Parcoycito, and the Queros the normal Andean crops of maize, wheat, potatoes, and alfalfa are grown. In the canon of the Marafion there are no crops below the altitude of 2,500 meters because of ex- treme aridity. Only desert vegetation is found from that altitude to the bottom of the cafion. Along the banks of the river it- self small areas are irrigated and planted in coffee, oranges, mangoes, and bananas. Sur- plus agricultural products are mainly sold to the two mining centers at Retamas and La Paecha, but a small amount is also ex- ported across the Marafion. CHILIA The present village of Chilia, at 3,170 meters in the center of the arable area, was not an ancient habitation site. It was formed, according to local legend, under the Viceroy Toledo in the late sixteenth century from the two older villages of Chilia and Charcoy located on opposite sides of the valley. The tradition of the two separate villages is still strong and has a part in many local rivalries. Nevertheless, the patasinos generally have forgotten Quechua and any precedent lan- guages and speak only Spanish. Casual ob- servation seems to indicate that the popu- lation is almost entirely mestizo. In spite of its relatively recent origin, Chilia has come to have more stone sculp- ture than any site found in Pataz. The motif, Fig. 2.—Stone relief slab with feline Chilia Village. CURTIN: NEW ARCHEOLOGICAL SITES IN PATAZ, PERU 51 ~ I) ec ae OVO Fic. 3.—Warrior figure 86 cm high from stone relief slab, Chilia village. ancient citadel of Nunamarea. is close to the village and has supplied almost all of the building stone used in its construction. The inhabitants have also gathered a number of stone slabs carved in relief. These are kept as decorative pieces for door sills or for decora- tion within the houses. Twenty-four pieces were examined, though there are surely many more in the vicinity.” These fell into moder- ately well-defined motif catagories. Of the 24 examples, eight had designs depicting felines. These are carved in relief 5 to 10 mm high on one side of stone slabs about 20 em wide by 50 cm long and 10 em thick (Fig. 2). These figures showed no particular orientation of the head to the right or the left of the slab, but all faces were shown full- face and had a strong tendency toward an- thropomorphic features. All tails were curved upward. The number of toes shown on the feet varied from one to four, with several examples having two very birdlike toes. In addition to the eight slabs showing a single * The National Museum at Pueblo Libre has a collection of stone sculpture from Chilia and Nunamarea made by Dr. Julio Tello in the late thirties. Unfortunately, Dr. Tello did not pub- lish a report on this expedition before his death, and the National Museum does not indicate the exact provenance of these exhibits. In addition to the sculpture types found in 1949, this exhibit includes head-tenons from the Chilia area. Fie. 4.—Figure 35 em high from stone relief slab, Chilia Village. feline, two slabs showed two feline figures. One of these had two typical felines with their heads together at the center of the slab. The other was similar, except that the two felines shared a single head, having one body on either side. Next to the feline, the most common figure on relief slabs was a warrior figure, occurring on five slabs of the 24. Typically this is a full-length figure of a man holding a club in one hand and a trophy head in the other. The only clothing commonly shown is a 3-element crown on the head, ear plugs, and an ornament resembling wings projecting on either side of the body from the hips. Genitals are often shown (Fig. 3). Third in frequency of occurrence is a full- face anthropomorphie figure with both arms and legs in the air, occurring in four of the 24 examples. The arms are shown straight out from the shoulders and then upward at a right angle from the elbow (Fig. 4). The legs are bent outward from the hips and upward from the knees The only cloth- ing shown on this type of figure is a three- element crown worn by two of the four examples. The remaining stone sculpture is not clearly classifiable by groups. Three of the five remaining designs were geometric in character (Fig. 5) and showed no recog- nizable naturalistic motif. Of the remaining two, one showed a monkey in sitting posi- tion (Fig. 6). The other was a human head 52 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 2 in the round, very roughly carved in the natural rock about 26 em high and 13 em in diameter. NUNAMARCA Closely associated with Chilia village there are two archaeological sites. The more im- portant of these is Nunamarca, the largest site discovered in Chilia Valley. It is located at the top of a rocky promontory jutting into the center of Chilia Valley at an alti- tude of about 3,500 meters, or 300 meters higher than Chilia itself (Fig. 7, b). These ruins can be reached from Chilia by following the mule trail toward Buldibuyo for about 4 km and then turning off sharply to the right at the farm of Augusto Dominguez. This house roughly marks the northern limits of the site. To the south and west the site is bounded by the steep sides of the bluff. At present Nunamarca is in a very bad state of preservation. It has been cultivated for some generations as well as being used as a quarry for building stones over the last several hundred years. Few of the former walls can be traced, but large numbers of cut stones are now piled up or built into walls to clear them from the fields. The remains of walls and building stones, how- ever, still cover an area about 500 meters in length by 200 meters in width, an area considerably larger than the present village of Chilia. At the southern border of the site area, overlooking the bluff and cliffs, there is an extensive retaining wall about 150 meters in length and 10 meters to 12 meters in height, the total height being broken by a terrace about 1 meter wide some 5 meters from the top of the wall. This wall is con- Fic. 5.—Latticelike design in low relief on slab 67 by 47 em, Chilia Village. Frpruary 1951 structed of rows of faced stones 30 cm or more in height broken by alternate rows of stones no more than 5 cm in height. An adobe mortar was used and the rows are somewhat irregular. Toward the eastern end of this wall about 2.5 meters from the top there is the entrance to a gallery about 1 meter square faced with stone and covered with a single stone lintel at the opening. According to local informants this was for- merly open for some distance under the site, but a second shaftlike entrance at the top of the ruin was filled a few years ago. The dirt from this fill now blocks the gallery a meter or so beyond the entrance. Although the sculptured stones in Chilia village origmally came from Nunamarca, only one piece of sculptured stone was found at the site itself. This was a slab about 60 em in diameter, having a design of six concentric semicircles cut into it to the depth of about 1.5 em. The entire site area was rich in pot- sherds on the surface. CERRO DE LA CRUZ DEL ORCA The second site associated with Chilia village is Cerro de la Cruz del Orca, located about 1 kilometer to the west of Chilia on the ridge slightly below the village. It can be reached by trail on foot in a few minutes. At present the visible remains are undistinguished, being nothing but a single platform constructed on a small point. of land. This platform is 10 meters to 15 meters in diameter and is supported by a stone re- taming wall about 5 meters in height, now largely fallen down. A great deal of ceramic material was found on and around the plat- form and at places where the sides were badly eroded sherds were found in the earth and rubble fill of the platform at a depth of about 2 meters. The people who farm the site area informed the author that there is a cave nearby which is associated with the ancient inhabitants and is now inhabited by evil spirits. THE CANTA DISTRICT In the Canta district of Chilia three pre- historic habitation sites were examined. For lack of definite local names, these have been called Canta I, II, and III. All three are located within a few hundred meters of the easterly of two mule trails from Chilia to- CURTIN: NEW ARCHEOLOGICAL SITES IN PATAZ, PERU D3 0.9/, ee, Fic. 6.—Monkey figure 18 em high from relief slab, Chilia village. ward Hacienda “‘Deliciana.” Canta I is about 5 km from the village, while Canta II and Canta III are about 2 km farther along. From the distance Canta I appears to be a low hilltop covered with brush. Beneath the underbrush and extending down into the cultivated area below there are three large concentric terrace levels, varying in width from 15 to 40 meters and following the conformation of the hill. In the middle of the highest terrace level there are remains of a truncated pyramid rising in small steps and faced with stone. The site area, es- pecially the upper levels where walls have not been disturbed by cultivation, is covered with houses and the remains of walls in varying states of preservation. Two prin- cipal types of wall construction were ob- served. The most common, especially for retaining walls, was ordinary pirca using stones of medium and uniform size and faced on the outside. A more elaborate form makes use of alternating rows of thick and thin stones, similar to the type described in con- nection with Nunamarea. Because of the heavy cover of vegetation it is impossible to estimate accurately the number of house outlines, but the extent of the site area now covered with stone work indicates that it Was once occupied by a moderately large population. Clearmg and excavation would be necessary to show the ground plan ‘and the true extent of the site. 54 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Canta II also consists of a series of con- centric circular terraces around a natural hilltop about 60 meters in height. It is much smaller than Canta I, the lowest terrace level being only about 300 meters in diameter. The retaining walls of the terraces are of ordinary uniform pirca faced on the outside only, but a large number of completely finished rectangular building stones were ob- served on the various levels, presumably the remains of structures that have since been torn down to provide stones for more recent building. The only remaining structures on the terrace levels were circular walls 3 to 4 meters in diameter and about 1 meter in height. These are the outlines of the house type most commonly found in Central Pataz. Canta III is a slightly smaller version of Canta IT, occupying another hilltop on the same ridge. PUEBLO VIEJO SOBRE PARCOYCITO On the ridgetop dividing Chilia drainage from the Parcoycito and Queros valleys there is a suecession of habitation sites, fortresses, and pyramids. Seven of these sites were ex- amined in 1949. The highest and most east- erly is Pueblo Viejo, located at an altitude of about 3,800 meters on the ridge between the headwaters of the Rio Quishuar and the Rio Parcoycito. It can be reached from Chilia by taking either of the northern mule trails toward La Vina, since these trails rejoin in order to cross the pass into the valley of the Parcoycito. At this pass, about 15 km from Chilia by either trail, a rough path can be seen branching off to the eastward and fol- lowing the height of land up the ridge. This trail passes through the site of Pueblo Viejo after a climb of about 3 km from the pass. The site consists of a dwelling area on the high puna surrounded by defense works. As the ridge rises eastward from the pass the ascent is steep and unbroken until a small pot of land is reached. From this point eastward for about 1 km the ridge ceases to climb and swings in a wide semicircular bow to the south. Within the bow to the north of the ridge and about 20 meters below it at its lowest pomt there is a relatively flat sheltered area measuring perhaps 400 by 200 meters and covered by the remains of the principal dwelling area. The point at the western limit of the site is terraced in the style of Canta II, and the ridge top is ter- raced and covered with house outlines of the round type met at Canta II as well as rect- angular houses about 2 meters in width by 4 meters in length. In the dwelling area itself there are two principal types of structure. The most com- mon are circular enclosures about 20 to 30 meters in diameter having outside walls 1 to 2 meters in height (Fiz. 7, d). Within these enclosures there are stone walls outlining smaller circular buildings 3 to 4 meters in diameters. These are irregularly placed, oc- casionally having part of a wall im common or partly depending on the wall of the larger enclosure, but in general there is a small court or plaza in the center. In all there are 10 to 14 enclosures of this type. The second type of structure in the dwelling area is a larger rectangular building with thick walls now 2 to 3 meters in height in some of the better preserved examples. The exact ground plan of these remains could not be discovered without removing the fallen rock and rubble that covers most of their location. It is also now impossible to tell whether this struc- ture represents a group of buildings or a single large one. To the north of the dwelling area and a little below it, there is a single wall running from east to west enclosing the area on the single side not enclosed by the ridge. This wall is about 800 meters in length and about 2 meters high. Eastward along the ridge about 1 km from the dwelling area there are further defense walls. These cross the ridge transversely, protecting the site from attack directed down the ridge from the heights (Fig. 8, d). From west to east this system contains three elements—a wall 1.5 meters high, a wall 4 meters high followed by a ditch 3 meters deep, and a wall 2 meters high followed by a ditch 2 meters deep. Unlike the northern defense wall nearer the dwelling area, the southeast walls are em- bankments perhaps 2 meters wide made of the earth piled up in the construction of the defense ditches or moats associated with them. The embankments are faced with a vertical retaining wall on the west. side, away trom the village. These walls are rough pirca faced on the outside. Of the three walls, vou. 41, No. 2 ‘ofatA Ofgeng ‘xadu1oo -ssnoy Punod es jo uonaod ‘(p) 7yb1u wamo) soanaig ‘(9) 7fa) Wamo] {ysaMy{IoU oy} WoIF (10900) BorvUIBUNN puR Ao[[e A atte) “(q) Wy bus waddn S9dU10D SUIMOUS ‘Sa]Olag SOT JO Jods, zeddn ‘Twa ysaaq ‘(M) 7fa7 vaddQ :z2e4Vq [wAyU. JO SMOIA PUB dINJooIYoIy—L “DIA 5D PATAZ, PERU Lo SITES ARCHEOLOGICAL NEW CURTIN Fespruary 1951 56 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES only the middle one extends for any distance down the sides of the ridge, in this case for about 1 km to the south. Within the site proper three types of con- struction were observed. Some of the houses on the ridgetop are made of uncut, unfaced pirca. The round groups within the dwelling area are similar except for facing and more careful workmanship. The rectangular build- ings within the dwelling area and the north- ern defense wall are constructed of large stones 30 cm or more in diameter inter- spersed with smaller flat stones. The large stones are not laid in regular courses, but placed evenly through the smaller construc- tion. In spite of the similarity of this stone work to the alternate courses of large and small stones found at other sites, only the uncoursed type was found at Pueblo Viejo. LOS PEROLES DE HUAMPO Passing from the site of Pueblo Viejo sobre Parcoycito to the westward along the ridgetop, the next site is Los Peroles de Huampo. Los Peroles occupies a position to the west of the pass between Chilia and the valley of the Parcoycito corresponding to that of Pueblo Viejo to the east. Leaving the mule trail between Chilia and La Vina and following the ridgetop to the west the site is found at about 3,400 meters after a brief continuous ascent. Beyond Los Peroles the ridge drops again and splits into two branches. One fork swings to the southward around Chilia Valley, while the other forms the south watershed of the Parcoycito rising to the heights of Huayan. Between the two forks the Queros River drains a small valley and empties into the Marafion. At Los Peroles the most important ele- ments are two structures on the open sum- mit of the ridge, a platform (structure I) and a pyramidal group of concentric terraces (structure II). In addition there are a num- ber of defense works, house frames, and ter- races. Approaching the site from the east along the ridge a defense ditch about 1 meter deep lies transversely across the ridge. From this point three sloping terraces partially covered with round house frames of the familiar type rise to structure I, the more easterly of the two. This is a square stone- vou. 41, No. 2 faced platform about 7 meters high and 14 meters square. The sides of the square are oriented so that they face directly toward the four points of the compass, but this 1s not necessarily intentional, since the north and south sides are parallel to the line of the ridgetop. On the top of the square platform there are six round house outlines of the usual type. In addition, toward the north- west corner of the structure there is a vertical shaft about 1 meter square, the sides of which are lined with faced stone work. At present this is about 2 meters deep, but the bottom is loose earth and rubble mdicating that it may have been deeper. Structure II lies about 130 meters to the west of structure I. The two are separated by a dip in the ridgetop about 30 meters lower than the top of either. At the bottom of this dip a second transverse ditch about 2 meters deep crosses the ridge. Above the dip to the west structure II rises in a series of three wall-supported terraces. The three retaining walls are each about 7 meters high, giving the whole a uniformity with the 7- meter height of structure I. Since the low- est of the retaining walls rises from a ter- race cut into the natural slope of the hill, there are four terrace levels in all. The three lower levels are concentric and elliptical be- ing roughly accommodated to the shape of the ridge—the fourth and highest alone be- ing nearly round. The whole structure meas- ured at the lowest level is 95 meters in length by 25 meters in width. The terraces are not completely symmetrical. Since the eastern slope is less steep than the western, the ter- raced levels on that side average 16 meters in width, while the same levels to the west measure only 11 meters each. The three lower terraces are uniformly 3 meters in width toward the north and south, giving the structure its elliptical shape. The central round level is 13 meters in diameter. All the retaining walls are constructed of faced stone, roughly rectangular, coursed, and hav- ing alternate courses wider than the rest. About 50 cm below the top of the highest wall there is a cornice formed by one course of stones that projects about 10 em from the wall (Fig. 7, a). As with structure I, all the terrace levels show the remains of house circles varying FEBRUARY 1951 CURTIN: NEW ARCHEOLOGICAL SITES IN PATAZ, PERU a7 Fic. 8.—Architecture and views of central Pataz: Upper left (a), North wall of principal strue- ture, Chareoy; wpper right (b), west side, upper story, Matibamba chulpa; lower left (ec), house rem- nants at Chareoy looking north, heights of Huayan in the distance; lower right (@), eastern faced earthworks and defense ditches at Pueblo Viejo. 58 JOURNAL OF THE in number from four on the highest level to about 14 on the lower levels. No rectan- gular house outlines were observed. In the middle of one of the house circles on the third terrace level there is a vertical shaft similar to that observed on structure I. At first this was taken for a treasure-seekers’ hole, since it was not lined with stone. A closer examination, however, showed that it connects with the remains of a horizontal gallery entering the base of the retaining wall just above the second level. Associated with these two principal struc- tures there is a small village of round houses on the side of the ridge a few hundred meters to the southwest as well as a number of house circles on the ridge itself to the east and west of the site. In addition a large group of terraces and houses were observed farther to the west between Los Peroles and Charcoy, indicating that virtually the entire ridge top was once occupied. The center of this group is a terraced hilltop about 3 kilometers west of Los Peroles. There is no known local name for this site. CHARCOY Continuing along the crest of the ridge past this last site, the ridge drops steeply forming a pass. Through this pass there is a trail connecting Chilia village with the valley of Queros. Beyond the pass the ridge rises very steeply for about 3 km. There is no trail, but animals can travel fairly easily along the treeless summit, forcing riders to dismount only occasionally in especially steep or rocky slopes. Over this rise the ridge slowly bends to the south, until its direction is almost north and south. Charcoy occupies the highest point after the new ascent, being at about 3,700 meters, or al- most as high as Pueblo Viejo and a good deal higher than Los Peroles. The site is clearly visible from Chilia village, since the higher walls stand out against the skyline. The remains of Charcoy are very exten- sive, though many of the walls are now noth- ing but scattered pieces of cut stone (Fig. 8, c). Along 500 meters of the ridgetop, which is 500 to 100 meters wide and relatively flat at this point, there are about 60 houses in good condition. Of these around 80 percent are of the round type. The remainder are rectangular of the type found on the ridge WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 2 at Pueblo Viejo. Some of the house circles are arranged within enclosures on a plan similar to that at Pueblo Viejo. At the center of the ruined area the cor- ner of one structure shows the most careful stone work observed in Pataz. The only remains of a larger building, however, are a corner and two side walls extending about 7 meters in one direction and 12 meters in the other. The longer of these two sides is oriented in a general north-south direction, but again this is the direction of the ridge. Inside this building there are the remains of two rooms, each about 1.3 meters square. These are side by side along the east wall with doorways opening toward the inside of the building toward the west. In this area the stone and rubble of fallen walls make it impossible to trace the ground plan without excavation. At one time the stand- ing portion must have been part of a much larger building. Even at present the wall is higher than 5 meters at its highest point. The construction of inside and outside walls is identical. The walls are between 68.5 and 76 em thick constructed of a red clay and rubble fill faced on both sides with cut rock in alternate courses of large and small stones (Fig. 8, a). A cursory survey of the site revealed only three examples of decorated stone, but among many thousands of cut stones in the area there are probably a number of others. Two of these stones were slabs about 10 em thick and 70 cm square bearing an in- cised rectilinear geometric design. They could have been either an individual decora- tion or a portion of a larger motif running along a number of facing slabs. The third decorated stone bore a single incised ser- pentine line having nine reverses of direc- tion. This might represent a snake or be a merely decorative line. CORRALES DE PIEDRAS Six kilometers farther south along the same ridge from Charcoy is the site of Cor- rales de Piedras. This can be reached either by the ridgetop route, or by going directly from Chilia to Hacienda ‘“‘Hallaca,” where a guide can be secured to point out a more direct route up the ridge. The latter route is more difficult, but shorter. Fespruary 1951 Corrales de Piedras has a general appear- ance and location similar to Charcoy. It is also situated on the top of the ridge, and its principal features are a number of terraced hilltops and dwelling areas scattered along the ridge for about 1,500 meters. The area is larger than that of Charcoy, but settle- ment does not seem to have been as dense. Corrales de Piedras’ altitude of 3,300 meters is also sufficiently lower than Charcoy to be out of the completely treeless area. Parts of the site are covered by thick underbrush, although this sort of vegetation does not normally grow so high. The site is clearly visible from Chilia village and is especially marked by the brush, the only vegetation other than grasses that appears on the sky- line to the northeast. Approaching Corrales de Piedras from the north, the first evidence of former habita- tion is a very elaborate system of defense walls and ditches constructed in the same manner as those to the east of Pueblo Viejo. The principal difference at Corrales de Piedras is the remains of a portal through one of the walls. Here there is an opening about 1 meter wide with an upright stone jamb about 50 cm in diameter and | meter high on either side. Immediately beyond the wall system is the first of two points of land terraces in the usual manner. Between these the brush covers a slight saddle in the ridge, obscuring the layout of a large number of partially ruined structures of faced prrca. Beyond the saddle the ridge rises again through a series of four well-preserved ter- races to the second high point. The levelled top of this point, as well as the terraces and the hillsides to the east and west of the ridge show the remains of a number of round houses similar to those at Charcoy and Los Peroles. Beyond the second point the ridge slopes down rather steeply through a series of nine terraces to a very small platform about 5 meters in diameter. These terraces also have the remains of house circles. From the last platform the ridge slopes downward so abruptly that it is only passable by ani- mals with the greatest difficulty. After about 2 km this slope breaks into an impassable series of cliffs, marking the end of the ridge to the south. CURTIN: NEW ARCHEOLOGICAL SITES IN PATAZ, PERU 59 HALLACA A small point of land just above the cliffs to the south of Corrales de Piedras is the site of a number of concentric stone faced terraces at about 3,000 meters altitude. This small point is so isolated on the steep hill- side that the use of its terraces for purely agricultural purposes seems unlikely. It may have served as an outpost for Corrales de Piedras or as a small fortress to control traffic over one of the trails passing from the valley of Chilia to the Marafion. This trail now passes through a small natural gateway between the site and the main slope of the ridge. The site is clearly visible from the Hacienda “‘Hallaca’”’ buildings which lie about 2 km to the northwest directly below Corrales de Piedras. Hallaca is reached from Chilia in two hours by mule by turning off the westerly trail to La Vifia about 6 km from Chilia. LOS REPRESOS Los Represos is much lower in altitude than the ridgetop sites discussed above, but its general characteristics are the same. It is located at about 2,000 meters on a short ridge extending into the Marafion Valley between the Rio de Ruyabamba on the south and the Maranon itself on the north and west. Los Represos is reached from Chilia in about four hours by mule over a good trail that follows the northern side of the Ruyabamba Cafion to the orchards of Matibamba at the bank of the Maranon. At the point where this trail crosses a ridge from the drainage of the Ruyabamba to that of the Maranon the site is seen on the trail itself and toward the west down the ridge. The local name, Los Represos, comes from the site’s distinctive feature. There are two depressions or plazas in the top of the ridge about 16 meters in diameter and lined with stone to the depth of about 1 meter. These are thought to be water reservoirs connected with an irrigation system for the Maranon Valley, especially for the site of Matibamba, which lies directly over the ridge to the north. They seem rather small to store any considerable quantity of water, and no other irrigation works were noticed in the area. At present there are no sources of water within 5 or 6 km of the site. 60 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES In addition to the two “represos”’, there are three other structures on the ridge. Two of these are single level square stone faced platforms about 3 meters in height. The third is a large rectangular platform a little more than 3 meters high with a square plat- form of the same height on the top, giving a pyramidal effect. All retaming and lining walls are of average uniform pzirca. The double platform contains a large treasure- seekers’ hole in the middle of the highest level. On the second level there was a small round low platform about 3 meters in diame- ter with a square shaft about 15 meters in width in the center. MATIBAMBA Following the trail over the ridge and down into the Maranon to the north of Los Represos there are a series of hairpin turns leading to the canon floor. Here, along the edge of the river at 1,320 meters, is the small settlement of Matibamba and an ir- rigated area in which tropical fruits are raised. Above the irrigated area for about 500 meters and extending along the valley for the same distance are the ruins of Mati- bamba. Throughout the site area there are the remains of low walls and terraces cover- ing the arid hillside. Beeause of lack of water en route from Chilia, the presence of veruga, very high temperatures, and other special problems imposed by the location of. the site, we were unable to make the full survey that the area deserves. The most interesting structures at Mati- bamba are the remains of five chulpas in the western part of the site area about 250 meters from the Maranon. One of these is almost perfectly preserved, although any burials it may once have contained are now gone. The well-preserved chulpa is a small two-story building—a square room or tower set on top of a round base. The base is constructed in the form of a semi-circle on the very steep hillside, the top being flush with the hill while the lower northern side is about 3 meters high. The diameter from east to west is approximately 6.2 meters, while the radius from north to south is 4.3 meters. The con- struction of the lower walls is a rubble and earth fill with stone facing. The facmg stones are of varying size and are not vou. 41, No. 2 coursed. This wall varies in thickness from a little more than 1 meter to more than 2 meters. Within the round lower structure there are two chambers entered from a small opening at the west corner. The northern and larger of these is in the shape of a half- moon about 3.4 meters in length and 1.7 meters in width having a maximum height of 1.25 meters. An opening into the smaller southern chamber is found at the northeast side of the larger, opposite the opening to the outside. The inner chamber is rectangu- lar, about 3.2 meters in length by 96 em in width with a maximum height of about 75 cm. At the eastern end of this chamber there is a window roughly 60 em square. Both of the lower chambers have corbelled roofing which provides the floor for the structure above, additional support for this roof being supplied by the wall separating them. The upper story of the chulpa is a boxlike building 2.84 meters square (Fig. 8, b), hav- ing a single window on the eastern side 58 em square about 60 em above the ground. The walls of this building are roughly 37 cm thick, being constructed in a pattern of three courses which repeats itself three times in the 2-meter height of the walls. This begins at the bottom with a course of very large faced stones in the neighborhood of 30 em in height placed side by side but filled with smaller. stones where necessary because of their irregular shape. Above this course 1s an area of flat stones, also faced, typical of the small stone layers of the alternating large and small courses found at Charecoy. This layer fills in and around the large lower layer making a relatively level surface on which there is a course of large flat stones measuring about 12 em by 40 em. The pat- tern is then repeated with a new layer of the very large irregular stones. The placement of the window and the height of the pattern are so arranged that the bottom of the window and the lintel over it are supplied by consecutive courses of the long flat va- riety. On the whole the pattern is followed consistently on all four sides, but there are occasional irregularities. The roof of the upper level is also corbelled, bemg 70 cm thick and constructed of large flat stones very irregularly placed without mortar. FEBRUARY 1951 CURTIN: NEW ARCHEOLOGICAL SITES IN PATAZ, PERU 61 Farther to the west there are three ad- ditional chulpas in a very bad state of dis- repair. These are placed in a row on the hill- side, one below the other. A fifth chulpa lies some distance up the hill to the south of the well-preserved example, and a closer exami- nation of the ruins will probably reveal more. Although the well-preserved chulpa is on the unterraced hillside, 8 meters up hill there is an artificially leveled area about 10 by 3 meters protected by a stone retaining wall on the upper side. On this level there are the remains of a rectangular structure. The only remaining wall in good condition is in the shape of an “‘L”’ about 2.7 meters high at the corner and 2 meters long toward either arm. This wall has a projecting corbel about 40 em from the top. At the eastern end of the Matibamba ruins there is another wall in excellent pres- ervation. This appears to be the remains of a rectangular building about 6 meters high standing on an artificial terrace. This ““glesia,”’ or temple, as it is called locally, appears to have once had two stories and in many respects to be similar to the large central structures at Charcoy and Pueblo Viejo. SITES SOUTH OF CHILIA VALLEY Matibamba is the last of the seven sites examined along the north rim of Chilia Valley. According to local reports and exami- nation from the distance there are fewer sites along the corresponding ridge to the south. The most prominent of these is Ush- cun (see map, Fig. 1), lying on the southern ridge overlooking the Ruyabamba opposite Corrales de Piedras on the north. Some stone sculpture and burials are reported there. Still farther to the south, the extensive ruins of Colpan are found at the height of a pass between the valleys of the Aullobamba and the Nahuinbamba. These ruins consist of buildings and terraces similar to those examined in detail. Another similar group of ruins is Huancuy, found about 15 km south of La Paccha on a high point ringed with concentric terraces. This ruin is located just above Cachipicza on the valley floor and seems designed to protect the pass where the present trail crosses the shoulder of the mountain into the valley of the Nahuin- bamba. This site was visited by Raimondi in 1860.° PIRURO To the north of the valley of Chilia, the site of Piruro presents a classic example of the hilltop structures found in Pataz (Fig. 7, c). It les about 500 meters to the north- .west of the mule trail from La Vina to Alpamarea at the height of a small pass about 3,200 meters in elevation immediately before the final descent into the Parcoy valley. The situation is very striking for its location, giving a clear view up the valleys of the Ariabamba and Yurayaca as well as a large part of the valley of the Parcoy. Ap- proaching by way of La Vina, Piruro is visible from the trail for several hours before actually arriving at the site. The structure itself consists of a large oval platform about 90 meters long by 50 meters wide. The sides of the platform now slope down to the hilltop about 8 meters below, but they may once have been faced with stone. On top of the platform there is a truncated pyramid about 8 meters high, being roughly 12 meters in diameter at the top. There are some sections of former re- taining walls, but i most places these have been removed for modern buildings or walls. On the west side of the pyramid, where the walls are best preserved, there are indications that the sides once rose in four steps about 3 meters wide. All the remaining walls are of normal pirca construction with no pattern of large and small stones. Although a large number of well-cut rectangular stones were found near the site, none of these were in place. On the eastern side a treasure-seekers’ excavation has completely removed a large part of each level. PARCOY VALLEY In addition to Piruro there are other sites in the vicinity of the Parcoy valley, though they were not examined in detail by the ex- pedition in 1949. Rumatambo, overlooking the Parcoy near the Hacienda “El Tra- 3 Rarmonpr, ANronro. Hl Peru 5: 125. Lima, 1874-1913. 62 piche,” is one of these. The portion visible from the valley below is a retaming wall system circling a hilltop at about 3,100 meters in elevation. Santisteban is reported on the ridge between the rivers Yurayaca and Ariabamba but was not examined. Along the south bank of the Lagarpampa or Sauce River, which empties into the Marafion 1 km north of La Vina, there is a series of parallel agricultural terraces, for- merly watered by an irrigation canal bring- | ing water from the upper Lagarpampa. In- all, about 40 levels can be distinguished along the slopes above the Maranon. These are not only the most extensive system of terracing observed in the Pataz area but also the only system of parallel terraces, the others being only the concentric type. They are, perhaps, noteworthy as the only possible remains of Inca occupation, the other fea- tures of architecture, ceramics, and sculpture being clearly non-Inca in character. HUILCAYACO CAVES In addition to the ceremonial and habita- tion sites visited, investigations were made at two burial sites, both caves. The largest of these was visited by Raimondi (loc. cit.) at the same time he visited Huancuy. Continu- ing beyond Huancuy on the trail toward Nahuinbamba the cave is located between the mule trail and the Rio de Nahuinbamba about 2 km past the site of Huancuy. It lies on the side of a very steep bluff about 3 km in a direct line from Huaylillas at an eleva- tion of about 2,800 meters. Although the cave 1s difficult to find without local assist- ance, a guide can be secured in any nearby village by asking for the cueva de los gentiles. At the mouth the cave is only 1 meter wide by 50 cm high, the entrance slopmg down- ward at an angle of about 20 degrees. Once inside it is somewhat bigger and finally at the depth of about 15 meters there is a room large enough for standing upright. Various side passages open in several directions from the central tunnel. In all parts of the cave, but especially in the first large room, there are numerous human skeletons. The cave shows signs of having been frequently entered in the past, but some of the skeletons were still partly articulated. No artifacts were found. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 2 SHAHUINDO The second burial caves examined are located on Hacienda “El Trapiche” not far from the site of Piruro. The caves are in the steep cliffs of Shahuindo about 1 km north- west of the hacienda buildings and 100 meters higher in elevation. They can be reached from the hacienda without the aid of ropes. Three caves open from a narrow off-set in the cliffs, bearing 308° magnetic from Trapiche Viejo. From south to north they have been numbered I, IJ, and III. Cave I has an entrance | meter in width by 20 cm in height. The floor is covered with un- articulated human bones mixed with earth. The whole has the appearance of having once been excavated and later replaced. At pres- ent the cave can be entered about 3 meters. No artifacts were found, but a thorough ex- cavation of the floor might uncover much more than our brief examination revealed. Caves IT and III are similar in size and con- dition. They are located 10 and 12 meters respectively to the north of cave I. Other burial caves were reported in the Pataz area but were not visited. The burial caves at Ushcun are mentioned above. Caves were also reported near the headwaters of the Quishuar about 10 km to the north- northeast of Chilia village. Other caves are supposed to exist in the southeast slope of Nunamarea bluff, but could not be found in 1949. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS Within the area under consideration the following types of structure occur: (a) Series of concentric terraces ringing a hill- top. (b) Artificial platforms with sloping sides and with vertical stone faced sides. (c) Artificial platforms superimposed in the form of a stepped truneated pyramid three or four layers in height. (d) Earth embankments faced with stone ac- companied by moats. (e) Rectangular houses. (f) Round houses about 1 m. high and 3 to 4 m. in diameter. 3 (g) Large rectangular buildings up to 5 m. in height. (h) Depressed plazas or reservoirs. (7) Galleries. (7) Stone lined shafts. FEBRUARY 1951 CURTIN: NEW ARCHEOLOGICAL SITES IN PATAZ, PERU 63 (k) Large circular enclosures surrounding jn Pataz, but this type, though uncommon, groups of circular houses. (l) Chulpas. Five general types of masonry were ob- served in the Pataz region: (@) Unfaced rough pirca. (6) Faced pirca built with average uniform stones. (c) Faced pirca built with large and small stones in alternate courses. (d) Faced pirca of large stones placed at ran- dom throughout a wall of smaller stones. (e) Faced pirca having a three-course repeti- tive pattern. These masonry types are used either in walls completely of stone or as facing for clay and rubble walls or in retaining walls. Two additional features of the local stone- work are the use of decorative corbels near the top of walls and of the corbeled roof. Although a reconnaissance survey of this sort can not be comprehensive, even for an area as small as central Pataz, it allows limited conclusions about the type of archi- tecture and the extent of archaeological re- mains to be found in the trans-Maranon region of Peru. But these conclusions must be very tentative, since the areas immedi- ately surrounding Pataz on all sides have not been explored by archaeologists, even at the survey level. Particularly the southern part of Pataz, the provinces of Maranon and Pomabamba, and the general area between central Pataz and Chavin de Huantar merit a careful examination. Large ruins are re- ported at Tarrija and Uchos in southern Pataz and at Llayno near the town of Poma- bamba. Even surveys in these areas would help to clear up many problems connected with the appearance in Pataz of traits associ- ated with the cultures of the Callejon de Huaylas. Among these traits, only to mention the most obvious, are stone-lined galleries, houses that were probably two-storied, and emphasis on the feline motif in stone sculp- ture.’ The preponderance of round house out- les about 1 meter high and 3 meters in diameter as the ancient dwelling-house type in Pataz calls for special mention. The author observed nothing of this sort in current use 4 BENNETT, WENDELL C. The North Highlands of Peru. New York, 1944. is still used in parts of the Callejon de Huaylas. In these present-day buildings, the base is a rough stone wall approximately the same height and diameter as those in Pataz, while the roof is a conical thatching sup- ported by a vertical pole in the center, 4 to 5 meters high. On the other hand, the Matibamba chul- pas present a problem that must be left till further exploratory work is done. This type of square boxlike structure on a round base is striking, yet no examples have been re- ported in the surrounding regions, that is to say, at Chavin, in the Callejon, at Marca Huamachuco, or in the region of Cajamarca. On a more general plane, the whole area of Pataz seems to have been formerly more heavily populated than it is today, even if it is assumed that all sites in the valley of Chila were not occupied at the same time. Of the sites visited only Matibamba and Lagarpampa are not equipped with defense works or located in easily defensible posi- tions. Several of the sites, notably Charcoy and Pueblo Viejo and Huayan, are located at almost 4,000 meters elevation, far above the arable area and far above any visible source of water. This raises the question of the prehistoric political situation. Against whom were these defenses built? A tentative answer is suggested by Garcilaso’s state- ment that the pre-Incaic boundary between Huacrachuco and Chachapoyas was found just to the south of Pias.° If this is true, the long valley of the Parecoy and Alpamarea Rivers forms a natural frontier. The heights to the south and west of the Parcoy, then, would be the natural defense line of Huacrachuco. It is possible that the chain of fortifications to the north of Chilia valley housed only garrisons. This would explain both the relative density of population on this ridge and the inaccessibility of the sites. Following this hypothesis only the sites on or near the valley floor like the Canta sites and Nunamarea would be economically sup- ported by the production of Chilia valley. The garrison sites could have been sup- ported by a much larger area. 5 pp LA VEGA, Garcruaso (El Inca). Comen- tartos reales: pt. 1, bk. 8, chap. 1. Buenos Aires, LO45. 64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 2 PALEONTOLOGY .—Check list of salinity tolerance of post-Paleozoic fossil Ostra- coda.! I. G. Sonn, U.S. Geological Survey. (Communicated by J.S. Williams.) Among microfossils Ostracoda are con- sidered second only to Foraminifera as hori- zon markers. Their utilitarian value is en- hanced by the fact that they occur in both fresh and salt water, whereas the Forami- nifera are confined to salty waters. Although certain genera of ostracodes show remarkable tolerances to variation in salinity, none of the species belonging to those genera has to date been recorded as tolerant to both strictly fresh and strictly marine environments. Some species can live in water that grades 1 Published by permission of the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. from fresh to brackish; others tolerate brack- ish to marine water. Many genera and species are reported to be confined to each one of the several types of salinity environments. The following table records the inferred salinity tolerance of 80 forms included in 36 genera. The species are those for which salinity habitat is specifically mentioned in the literature. The table is compiled as an aid to interpreting the depositional environ- ment of sediments containing post-Paleozoic Ostracoda. It is the result of an objective survey of the literature and consequently may include some erroneous inferences, which future investigations will rectify. LIST OF POST-PALEOZOIC FOSSIL OSTRACODES FOR WHICH A DEFINITE SALINITY HABITAT HAS BEEN INFERRED Type of Water Ostracode Remarks Reference | Fresh Brackish | Marine | A\TOMOCHLOCTOs ctdecosccdcecesgwe oo | x 21 AVS HORUAONO Ahr Se RRS | x | 21 JXOORCWG WUCVORMUUS: 65% 66 656+ 556555% x | Shallow warm water. 20 - IZHMOCHOUS a's dosdesboedaooesaobot x | 17, 24 1B, SOMMUGHO > coreccddevcgocgoou0s 6 x Shallow water. 6 Bythocythere stmplex.............. x 19 COO CUNO). 5 o%000cbbcos8Sb6> x x 22 Ci, WOROMCNSIScs sheabenssabouses xX 22 One ONDESTU Naame ee te REE oe x x 11 CUT CUL OR Pn aR aE | x 4 Capridea eS ireee e e xK x | Thin shells fresh, thick shells) 4, 10, 15 | brackish (10). CECUN net ce eee x x | Shghtly saline (1). a2?) Cs. GROOWOSO 9. secc0coscobeadsadoc x 1 C. ganulosa var. fasciculata.......| x More saline than next below.) 1 C. granulosa var. paucigranulata. . x Less saline than above. 1 OF (NOM ic s dees ool Aga oaten x 22 Cpu ClOhd ei eee aa eee ree>< x | Slightly saline (1); fresh 1, 22 ; } | water (22)> Cu prudevseernine cee ee | >< 15 Cypridopsis compressa............ lee | 8 Cuprionenbiustoviia eee |< 1 Cionsepunbeckenstse ener ex 22 Co DUGG so oeaddasbocadasdsooh 5 hoes | 22 (SL MIRG saccurs oeamitets ao Oein Ae wre ae eae | x x | Marine-brackish (3, 7); By Oy UA, | marine (12, 23). 23 CM CON UGS AE eee x | Shallow sea. 18 CRIicrUs pAtane Aerie ene 2 x < 7 (OE GMPOY ONAL. Sra maaes Cas cae O ETS OE xX | Shallow water. 6 Go OUC HUGS re eprhereals aac hole meee < 19 (Ol, POMUPUG Ohno be Y aN bee SHS 5 bes SK | Sk 29 OCRULANISUCNS ee er ee x | 22 Ci, WUDOROCOUGHG ss bonsteb sogacessods | 19 GR niscenalisten tere srry Ce ee Sey: | a 22 CONOR GIS He Gene nye fae nena ott Sk x << | | 16 C. convexa var. sarmatica......... x | | 138, 24 CO, OPMGWISSOME 0000600 ec00ceb0er08 | | | > | Shallow sea. | 18 C', GOPDAUWM MGs wcocsccob nace. oral | ex | 22 Ciythereula esaa rue Caer re teenie | | XX | Typical marine. 17 (O15 TRUCHWSUCTO 5) oS ecobe oa eda esate < | | x | Shallow sea. 18 | | \ Fepruary 1951 SOHN: SALINITY TOLERANCE OF OSTRACODA 65 LIST OF POST-PALEOZOIC FOSSIL OSTRACODES FOR WHICH A DEFINITE SALINITY HABITAT HAS BEEN INFERRED—Continued Type of Water Ostracode Remarks Reference Fresh Brackish Marine Cytherelloidea williamsoniana..... x< Shallow sea. 6 COMCOPUCEDS SoC aOR EERE cee x x Shallow marine, estuarine. Be, Wy We, 1 z C'-. QUID DTROUC AS oerais Hels Oe cio ae x 22 CO. CUBGFEDss0 25 pa ee x< x< 29 Co. HUE eee x< 14 C' LUACORED Les SES | x 24 GPR GUGOMGGLG «4-0 Pa a Se. | x | Shallow water. 6 Ce URUINGPE 55 Ce ee x x phalley sea, temperate zone | 11, 20 20) C's enlits (CO), OOH aaa ere ne eae x Fresh-water influence. 9 C. (PONG. soe ee eee ee x 29 C's. IOPOSG. 5 Re ee a ee ee < 5 C. (ORISO Ware, (MUOMANPSS 75a s len ee x 13 C'. WON CCSOMICHIOS 2S Hahn oe olen oe x x 14 CCH LCPUCTARS ES = i ete ant nae en x | Typical marine. 17 (Ci. WiMiCDTQUS coed a oS a Ces x x Fresh or slightly brackish. 11 Cl, UACSUUCT. 1nd eee ee ote ate x Fresh or slightly brackish. 11 COMMCTODICROR. o 5% besa ee ere | x x Marine-brackish (3); typical | 3, 17 marine (17). C's SDocere’s A Gentes eae eee x < | Marine or estuarine. 22 C. elongata-concentricum.......... x Shallow water. 6 Cl. BURGCMCULD ¢. oS ene oad Hei ae x Shallow sea, temperate zone. | 20 CWEUOCPUPG» cic 2.ava cle eR aes meee x x 16 Darwinula leguminella............ x 1 1D), USGSSCOD c % ace Shea Ee x x Hither fresh or brackish. 12 Bii COVA Oas cp cme eee o ore ae be eee x iG Herpetocypris aequalis............ x 7 INT OURG 0-2 act, 55 cubes ER ee x x Shallow marine or estuarine. | 7, 24 Inmnicythere zindorfi............. x x 14 ococonchapelluptca... 5.42. 4.5. x 5 Macrocypris horatiana............ x 22 MT =. SCG DIGE 3.6 siete Sed ee ee x Shallow water. 6 Waciodentumapecce) seyae os atcra in x x 10 INICSUG COMPARE POU hc ooe ne Gc eee, x Typical marine. 17 Onthonoiacyinene. x 15 IPO CCUFOUPIS ssa es SoA ee x Typical marine. 17 WACO GUUREGRON Meer ieleas cs Ne Bia x Typical marine. 7 Pseudocythere. . ee a Tae x Typical marine. 17 Rhinocypris scabra var. hamata...| X 22 Scabriculocypris acanthoides...... x 22 ISMECCTASTE SHI Nal iay sure ma tt x ) 2 So URGUTLOUUDS . cE dease>debeagses Js x 22 SOMGOGIWWS s2 5 .000505e000000b 50 x Shallow lagoon, approaching | 24 littoral. Thaumatocypris bettenstaedti...... x Up to 200 meters deep. lees WT 5 WEG x8. ae sie ia Rae eee x Shallow water. | 2 LITERATURE CITED (1) Anprerson, F. W. Phasal deposition in the (4) Bosqurt, J. A. H. Description des entomos- middle Purbeck beds of Dorset. Ann. Rep. tracés fossiles des terrains tertiaires de la Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sei. 99 (for 1931): 3878-380. France et de la Belgique. Mém. Cour. et 1932. Sav. Etrang. Acad. Roy. Belg. 24 (pt. 3) (2) Bartenstern, Heitmutru. Thaumatocypris 142 pp. 1852. bettenstaedti n. sp. aus dem nordwestdeut- (5) Brapy, G.S.; Crosskny, H. W.; and Roserr- schen Lias zeta. Senckenbergiana 30: 95-98. SON, Davin. A monograph of the post-Ter 1949. tiary Entomostraca of Scotland (including (3) Bont, AtBerr. Beitrag zur Stratigraphie species from England and Treland). Paleon- und Paleontologie der Tertiaren ablagerungen togr. Soe. London: 232 pp., 15 pls. IS74. in Ostlichen Mainzer Becken. Abh.Seneckenb. (6) CaarpmMan, Frepertck. Foraminifera and naturf. Ges. 41: 65-113. 1928. Ostracoda from the Cretaceous of East Pon- 66 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES doland, S. Africa. Ann. South African Mus. 4: 221-237. 1904. Report on samples of surface Ter- tiary rocks and a bore sample containing Ostracoda from Queensland. Proc. Roy. Soc. Queensland 46 (6): 66-71. 1935. (8) CorNvuEL, J. Description des nouveaux fos- siles microscopiques du terrain inférieur du département de la Haute-Marne. Mém. Soc. Géol. France, sér. 2, 3 (pt. 1): 241-246. 1848. “(9) Grint, R. von. Mikropaldontologie wnd Stratigraphie in dem Tertiaren Becken und der Flyschzone von Osterreich. Proc. 18th Int. Geol. Congr. Pal. Union for 1948, pt. 15: 51-60. 1950. (10) HitrERMANN, HEINRICH. nattirlichen Brackwasser. Erdél und Kohle, Jahrg 2 (1): 4-8, 8 figs. 1949. (11) Jones, T. R. Notes on the Entomostraca. In E. Forbes’ ‘On the Tertiary Fluvio-ma- rine Formation of the Isle of Wight.’? Mem. Great Britain Geol. Suryv.: 157-158. 1856. On the Rhaetic and some Liassic Ostracoda of Britain. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soe. London 50: 156-169. 1894. (13) KapraRENKO-CHERNOUSOVA, O. K. Upper Tertiary microfauna of the Nicopol manganese ore district (Ukraine). Journ. Geol. (Acad. Sci. Ukr. SSR. Inst. Geol.) 6 (1-2) : 199-223. 1939. [In Russian; English summary, pp. 221-223.] (14) Lirenenkiaus, E. Die Ostracoden des Main- zer Tertiarbeckens. Ber. Senckenb. naturf. Ges. 2: 3-70. 1905. Klassifikation der VoL. 41, No. 2 (15) Martin, G. P. Ostracoden des norddeutschen Purbeck und Wealden. Senckenbergiana 22 (5-6) : 275-361. 1940. (16) Méues, Gyuua. Die eozdinen Ostracoden der Umgebung von Budapest. Geologica Hunga- rica, ser. pal., 12: 3-56. 1936. Die ostracoden der Oberoligozéns der Umgebung von Budapest. Geologica Hunga- rica, ser. pal., 16: 95 pp. 1941. (18) Moreman, W. L. Fossil zones of the Eagle Ford of north Texas. Journ. Pal. 1: 89-101. 1927. (19) Munroe, H. Studier of ner Gotlands sen- quartare historia. Sver. Geol. Unders., ser. Ca, no. 4: 213 pp. 1910. [English summary, pp. 181-206.] (20) StapNicHENKO, M. M. The Foraminifera and Ostracoda of the Marine Yegua of the type sections. Journ. Pal. 1: 221-248. 1927. (21) StzpHEenson, M. B. Miocene and Pliocene Ostracoda of the genus Cytheridea from Flo- rida. Journ. Pal. 12: 127-148. 1938. (22) SytvesteR-BRapLey, P. C. The Purbeck beds of Swindon. Proc. Geologists’ Assoc. London 51 (pt. 4): 349-872. 1940. (23) Terqurm, Oury. Les foraminiferes et les ostracodes du Fuller’s earth des environs de Varsovie. Mém. Soc. Géol. France, sér. 3, 4: 91-107. 1886. (24) Zauanyt, B. Biosociologische Zusammen- hdnge im Neogenbecken des grossen Ungaris- chen Tiefebene. Jahresb. Ungar. Geol. Anst., 1933-35, 4: 1621-1699. 1940. (17) BOTANY.— Peter Wilhelm Lund’s pequi tree at Lagoa Santa and pilgrimages to his cemetery.| ANNA HK. JENKINS, U.S. Department of Agriculture, A. A. Brran- court, Instituto Biologico, Sado Paulo, K. S1nperscumip7, Instituto Biologico, and W. ANDREW ARcHER, U.S. Department of Agriculture.” “Trees by their very nature are land- marks and memorials. They are therefore identified with human happenings. Also, trees, having more than the alloted span of 1 Among the desiderata we assembled mostly in 1941 for the preparation of this. article is a letter (Dec. 6, 1941) from James A. G. Rehn, correspond- ing secretary of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, in which he wrote as follows: “T have your letter of the 3rd about Peter Lund, whose name of course was reasonably familiar to me on account of his work on the fossil deposits at Lagoa Santa. He was elected a Correspondent of our Academy January. 29, 1850, and our records give his death as having occurred May 25, 1880. Correspondents of the Academy are elected from scientists non-residents of Philadelphia, who have achieved outstanding distinction in work in the natural sciences. A very considerable part of all the great workers in our field in the last century and a quarter were Correspondents of the Acad- emy, although the number in this class at any one time is naturally limited, and rarely has ex- man, carry their associations through genera- tions of men and women. Thus they often figure not only in biography but also in ceeded 150.’’ This article therefore commemorates the centenary of Dr. Lund’s election as a Corre- sponding Member of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. We are indebted to Dr. Elisabeth Deichmann, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard Uni- versity, for a critical reading of the manuscript. Miss Deichmann’s mother was P. W. Lund’s grand-niece. She was 11 years old when he died, but her whole childhood was flavored by stories about this distant uncle who kept up the contact with his family in Denmark until his death. 2 In 1935-36 the first writer was on a mycolog- ical mision to Brazil, at the invitation of the gov- ernment of the State of Sdo Paulo, and was work- ing cooperatively with the second writer at the Instituto Biologico. The fourth writer was com- pleting a plant exploration mission to South Amer- ican Fespruary 1951 history.”” So wrote Randall and Edgerton (76)° in their Famous trees. Of trees associated with ‘notable persons, events, and places” is the beautiful pequi (Caryocar brasiliense Camb.)* growing beside the tomb of Peter Wilhelm Lund (1801- 1880)° at Lagoa Santa, Minas Gerais, Brazil. The actual existence of this tree and its role in the life of this noted Danish scientist may well have been disclosed to many read- ers only through brief mention of it in one or another of Prof. Anibal Mattos compila- tions of 1935 (9-12). These mark the cente- nary celebration of the savant’s arrival at Lagoa Santa. In 1930 the original tomb had been replaced by a monument ‘‘which would signify the gratitude of the people of Minas for the valuable works of the great scientist.” This was erected under Professor Mattos’ direction at the commission of the governor of the State. In his address at the unveiling of the new 3 Reference is made by number (italic) to Liter- ture cited. p. 74. 4 Described in Saint-Hilaire (78, p. 322, pl. 67 bis). The illustration is reproduced in Jenkins’ “Introductory Hssay’? accompanying Saint- Hilaire’s ‘‘Esquisse de mes Voyages au Brésil et Paraguay”’ (20, fig. 4). 5 For an extended biography of Lund cf. Rein- hardt (17). A brief obituary notice (1) is quoted below: “On May 25th died, at Lagoa Santa, in Brazil, the Danish philosopher and zoologist, Dr. P. V. Lund, aged nearly 79. Born in Copenhagen he grad- uated at the Copenhagen University, and was intended for the medical profession. He was soon diverted from this pursuit, however, by his inter- est for natural science, and when, in 1825, he gained a double golden medal for some zoological prize essays, he made a definite choice between the two. Ill health made him seek a milder climate in South America; and after a short stay in Rio Janeiro he returned to Europe, travelled to Italy with J. F. Schouw, the Danish botanist, and Mr. Harewood, and spent some years in France, where he became a friend of Cuvier. In 1832 he went out again to Brazil, and thenceforward lived in the small town of Lagoa Santa, in the province of Minas Gerais. The remarkable caves near this place, containing fossil remains of the Brazilian fauna from the Tertiary period, were discovered by Dr. Lund; and the paleontological collections he made in them were presented by him in 1854 to the Danish State, and now form a separate and much appreciated section of the Zoological Mu- seum of Copenhagen. ‘Dr. Lund also transmitted to Copenhagen many specimens of birds from the vicinity of Lagoa Santa. Prof. Reinhardt’s well-known essay on the bird-fauna of the Campos of Brazil was based mainly upon Lund’s collections.’’ (Cf. also Pinto, 185.) JENKINS ET AL.: PETER WILHELM LUND’S PEQUI TREE O7 monument to Lund, the representative of Denmark stated that the site of the monu- ment is the same as that acquired by the savant and that the parcel of cerrado® is entirely enclosed (1/1, p. 22). “‘At one side of the monument,” he continued, “is the ‘frondoso pequy’ under the shade of which the scientist used to study.”’ Mattos (/7, p. 28) wrote that during the course of its construction a vase of flowers and a branch of the pequi were deposited in the tomb by Sra. Carlos Correa and Sra. Mattos. Because of its location and its low, broad head, the tree forms an important part of the com- position in two of Mattos’ photographs taken within the cemetery (9, opposite p. 57, also reproduced in /0, opposite p. 32; 9, opposite p. 80). Our introduction to the pequi by Lund’s monument was in 1936, when we were privi- leged to make a pilgrimage to his grave. As guests of Dr. José de Mello Soares de Gouvea, director of the Department of Agri- culture of Minas Gerais, the first three of the writers made the tour from Belo Hori- zonte on February 2. We had attended the “First Meeting of the Plant Pathologists of Brazil’’ held in Rio January 20-25, then visited the Escola Superior de Agricultura at Vicosa,” Minas, and were returning to Rio and Sdo Paulo, via Belo Horizonte. The fourth writer’s pilgrimage to the ceme- tery was made on August 3, as the guest of Dr. Henrique L. de Mello Barreto, botanist of the State Agricultural Department.® As an introduction to Lagoa Santa we are here quoting from the preface of Warming’s (22, p. 455) Lagoa Santa, as well as repro- ducing the map (Fig. 1) there cited. Lagoa Santa est un petit village de l'état brésilien de Minas geraés. Il est situé 4 19° 40° de latitude Sud, au Nord-Nord-Ouest de Rio de Ja- neiro (voir la vignette du titre et la carte p. 267). C’est 1A qu’habitait, depuis 1835 jusqu’en 1880, annee de sa mort, le zoologiste et paléontologue 6 A recent description of “campo cerrado’? is that by Bezerra dos Santos (2, pp. 41-144). 7Our host on this occasion was Prof. A. 8. Muller, then plant pathologist and acting director of the Escola, now on the staff of the Escuela Agricola Panamericana at Tegucigalpa, Honduras. 8’ We are pleased to express our thanks and appreciation to Dr. Soares de Gouvea and to Dr. Mello Baretto for the hospitality they so gener- ously extended. CS JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES danois trés connu, P. W. Lund, et c’est de 1a qu’il dirigeait la publication de ses belles et fort importantes recherches sur les animaux fossiles des cavernes calcaires du Brésil (comp. |’index bibliographique). Lagoa Santa fut visité trois fois par le zoologiste danois, M. le Prof. Joh. Rein- hardt, qui y passait chaque fois un temps assez long. Moi-méme, étudiant, au début de mes études de botanique,—il y aura bienté6t trente ans,—j’y ai vécu, dans la maison de Lund, trois belles années de ma jeunesse (1863-1866). Je rappelle ma jeunesse afin qu’on veuille bien ne pas coter trop haut les imperfections des observa- tions que j’ai faites et que je communique dans ce mémoire. Lagoa Santa fut visité également par plusieurs autres explorateurs et savants, venus notamment pour voir Lund et lui rendre visite (v. p. 162), de sorte que ce misérable hameau est devenu en quelque sorte un endroit classique dans Vhistoire des sciences. On February 2, upon reaching the out- skirts of Lagoa Santa, our host halted a few moments in order that we might view the lake for which the hamlet is named (Fig. 2, A) and concerning which there are so many legends (cf. 10, pp. 19-25). The story of Lund’s taking up his abode in Lagoa Santa and of his owning a piece of cerrado in the neighborhood was recounted by Mrs. Agnes Chase (5) following her pil- erimage to the old tomb. ‘‘A few hours north of Bello Horizonte is Lagoa Santa,” she began, and continued: Lund was a consumptive who went to Brazil [1825] for his health. After a few years he re- turned to Denmark cured, but the disease again attacked him and he returned to Lagoa Santa to die. Being a Protestant he could not be buried in the cemetery, so he bought a piece of ground about 5 kilometers from the village for his grave. He lived 40 years after that, and buried Claus- sen,? and another friend and his two Danish servants in his little cemetery before he himself was buried there in 1880 at the age of 79. The few acres inclosed form a precious preserve of the original campo. Except for four immense clumps ®Lund’s three secretaries were the Norwegian Brandt, his own countryman Warming, and the German Berens, and Brandt and Behrens were buried in Lund’s cemetery (9, p. 91). Claussen returned to Europe and died in London in 1855 (ef. 21, p. 11). We are making this correction here at Mrs. Chase’s suggestion. The names were not clear on the old tomb, she explained to us, and she understood that Claussen was buried in Lund’s plot. NORTON cf SOUND V7 3 Aor Witt ayyeR U NUNIVAA 1S. A RANGE ) LAKE NATVAKRUAK NM ANAKTUVUK PASS FAIRBANAS aA sea Fic. 1.—Map of northern Alaska showing the locations of Cape Denbigh and Lake Natvakruak. Marcu 1951 SOLECKI AND HACKMAN: tundra, at a depth of about 5 to 10 inches, that the majority of the specimens resem- bling the Denbigh Flint Complex artifacts were found. Even though most of the data were recovered closer to the 10-inch depth, this shallowness of deposit contrasts with the approximately 7-foot depth at Cape Den- bigh where Giddings (op. cit.) recovered (00) ~J DENBIGH FLINT COMPLEX ik, which are typologically similar to the Denbigh « c Flint Complex. Representative archeological specimens found at Lake Natvakru 1D) ia. his flints. Assuming that there had been no time lag in occupation, we can only believe that the mechanics of soil formation may have been slower in progression north of the Brooks Range. Of the 97 artifacts submitted to the senior author for study, 80 are identifiable with Giddings’ early flint horizons. All these arti- 88 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES facts are of locally derived chert, with the exception of 11 lamellar flakes of obsidian. Among the finds are the following: one semi- polyhedral core from the forward end of which were struck lamellar flakes (Fig. 2, a), lamellar flakes represented by (Fig. 2, b) and (Fig. 2, c), the latter being of obsidian, thin curved spawl detached from a finished flint edge (Fig. 2, d), a large convex blade of ovate shape (Fig. 2, ec), convex end blades (Fig. 2, f), finely worked side and end blades (Fig. 2, g, h), a convex stemmed blade which shows attritional wear (Fig. 2, 7), a long- stemmed blade with a broken point showing attritional wear on the blade (Fig. 2, 7). Fig. 2, k, illustrates a group of 4 out of 13 artifacts classifiable as burins—a diagnostic trait of the Denbigh Flint Complex. Only one of the burins recovered shows wear from purposeful use as a burin. These artifacts were originally side and end scrapers, show- ing attritional wear on one or more edged sides. Their preparation for use as burins was therefore a new functional adaptation. Flakes were expertly struck off parallel to the long axis at the distal end, forming a series of steplike niches in one corner. Among the remainder of the illustrated artifacts are a serrated flake (Fig. 2, /) which was found at site 1, two end scrapers (Fig. 2, m), and the poit end of a projectile point, fluted on both surfaces (Fig. 2, 7). It is to be recalled that Giddings (MS.) has also found a fluted projectile point in his recent excavations at Cape Denbigh associated with vou. 41, No. 3 artifacts of this complex. At present the associations of Folsom with the Denbigh Flint Complex are not clear. Although Fol- som points do occur in Alaska, no actual sites of Folsom occupation like those on the western plains of the United States have yet been found in the north. Of considerable importance is the fact that we have another stepping stone in the chain of evidence of an ancient trail leading from the Bering Straits area into the heart of North America. This trail is now more literally than figuratively true, since Anaktu- vuk Pass is one of the few good through routes connecting the Colville River drain- age on the north with the drainages flowing on the south side of the Brooks Range. This evidence, consolidated with other as yet un- published archeological data on the north slope, bids fair to making this area one of the better archeologically known parts in Alaska. LITERATURE CITED > New age for American Man. Sci- (16): 243. Oct. 14, ANONYMOUS. ence News Letter 58 1950. Gippines, J. L., Jr. Early flint horizons on the north Bering Sea coast. Journ. Washing- ton Acad. Sci. 39 (3): 85-90. 1949. Recent finds at Cape Denbigh. Paper presented at annual meeting of American Anthropological Association, New York, 1949. MS. SoLEckI, Rateu §S. New Eskimo of northern Alaska. ton Acad. Sei. 40 (5): 137-157. data on the Inland Journ. Washing- 1950. ENTOMOLOGY.—Dinoponera gigantea (Perty), a vicious stinging ant. H. A. ALLARD, Washington, D. C. From late October 1949 until the second week in March 1950 I was in Tingo Maria and other points in eastern Peru collecting herbarium specimens, insects, and other natural-history material for the Smithsonian Institution at Washineton, D. C. Tingo Maria is a small jungle-town in the rain-forest region on the east slope of the Andes. It is situated in a most beautiful and picturesque little mountain-enclosed tropical valley through which the Huallaga River flows, forming one of the important tribu- taries of the great Amazon. During my botanical explorations of the area I spent much time in the dense tropical jungles and deep ravines along the high ridges just east and west of Tingo Maria. Hardly had I arrived there when I made the acquaintance of the huge, black stinging ant Dinoponera gigantea. | found it wandering about everywhere on the trails and through- out the jungle generally. It is a handsome, shining black insect an inch or more in length and fears no one. My first actual - contact with this vicious ant was a most painful one. Early one afternoon I attempted Marcu 1951 to pick one up as a specimen to transfer it to my killing bottle by using several folds of my handkerchief. In spite of this I received a severe thrust of its powerful sting into the end of my index finger. The pain was soon excruciating and lasted until well into the night, So severe was the pain that at times my hand trembled. The next day there were redness and swelling, but no other local symptoms were present. The redness and swelling soon subsided, but a small black spot penetrating deep into the tissues re- mained at the site of the puncture for a week or more. Some weeks later I had a far more painful experience with this ant. I had been explor- ing the jungle away from the trail, trudging through the humus and herbage of the prim- itive forest, wearing a pair of low canvas tennis shoes of Peruvian manufacture. Some- how I had stepped into or disturbed a colony of these huge ants as I sank into a bed of humus and fallen leafage beside an old decay- ing log. Two of the ants stung me at the ankle, and in a short time I was in the throes of an agony of burning pain—a pain such as I have never experienced before, nor ever care to repeat as an experience. This was early in the afternoon and at suppertime, 6 p.m., the pain was so intense that I could not keep my foot quiet for any length of time but was forced even to walk about. It had become a most excruciating, throbbing, burning pain and lasted far into the might until sleep intervened. Next morning the pain was nearly gone, but redness, swelling, and tenderness of the ankle persisted for some days. As in the former instance there was no evidence of any local effect on the punctured tissues. Weeks later while attempting to gather blossoms of a liana on a tree trunk about 6 feet from the ground I placed my right hand on another of these ants and received a sting in the end of my middle finger. As usual the pain was intense and persisted for many hours with redness and swelling, but no local effects developed as in the two previous cases. Some months later my son’s little boy, not much over three years old, accompanied by his father, was paddling in the little brook near the house and playing in the sand on ALLARD: DINOPONERA GIGANTEA 89 the bank. Suddenly there was a piercing shriek, for he had spied one of these big ants and with a child’s curiosity had picked it up, with a resulting severe sting. His suffer- ing was most intense, for he had been stung in the bali of the thumb. There was nothing one could do to quiet him, and he screamed until far into the evening when sleep finally dulled his sensibilities. Next morning there was some redness but no local effects were noticeable. He had, however, learned a most painful lesson, and these ants and other insects were regarded with great suspicion thereafter. The next victim was my son’s cocker spaniel, Rusty. This friendly little animal often accompanied me into the deep jungles. On the day in question we had followed nearly a mile up a steep trail, the little dog trotting along contentedly just ahead of me. Suddenly it gave a Jump and assumed a most crestfallen air, rolling around and biting at a hind foot. It had stepped upon one of these stinging ants and at once showed signs of great pain. It no longer had any interest in the trip and suddenly bolted down the trail for home on three legs. I felt responsible for its welfare, so turned back to the house. I found the dog lying on the grass in the backyard and in great pain. It held its hind foot in the air and kicked and bit at it from time to time. The animal was whining and trembling like a leaf and could not remain still. This behavior continued until well into the evening, hours after it had received the sting. Next day some swelling was evident, but no further effects were noticeable. Neal A. Weber has published accounts of his experiences with the sting of another large ant, Paraponera clavata (Fabricius), in Venezuela, first in 1937 in the paper ‘‘The Sting of an Ant” (Amer. Journ. Trop. Med. 17 (5). 1937) and later in ‘‘The Sting of the Ant, Paraponera clavata” (Science, Feb. 10, 1939, pp. 127-128). In the first mstance he was stung on the knee, and blisters formed at the site. These local effects persisted for at least a week and the area was red 19-20 days after the sting was received. In my own ase there were no local disturbances such as blisters and no systemic effects, as in Weber’s experiences. It is probable that dif- ferent individuals may show marked ditfer- 90 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ences in their physiological reactions to these stings. Throughout the tropical rain forests the natives are very familiar with both ants, and are very fearful of their vicious stings. In his book Ant Hill Odyssey (1948, p. 91), Dr. Wiliam M. Mann says that to the natives in Brazil Dinoponera grandis (a syn- onym of gigantea) is known as ‘‘tocandero,”’ and they claim that its sting causes a fever. I was told by natives at Tingo Maria that the sting of Dinoponera gigantea has put people in bed and that it can prove fatal. It is much dreaded in this area, as well as else- where in those regions where its range extends. According to Weber, in the papers cited, the sting of Paraponera clavata is con- sidered to be fatal, and it is designated by the natives as “vente cuatro hormiga,” or 24-hour ant, because one is thought to die in 24 hours after being stung. As is usual in such instances, the native mind is prone to gross exaggerations, although it is possible that allergic individuals may sometimes suf- fer very severe reactions, both local and systemic, for this actually occurs in the case of simple wasp and bee stings in our own country. My son has two small, white-faced native monkeys in a large cage outdoors at Tingo Maria, and these are mortally afraid of the large stinging ants. Often I have seen these ants wandering about on the ground in the ‘age. The little monkeys take to their perch at once and eye the ants below them with every evidence of profound fear, and well they may. The workers and larger queens are equip- ped with a sting. Both Dinoponera gigantea and Paraponera clavata are ground-inhabit- ing species, and I have never seen them very far from the ground on tree trunks in the jungle. They are usually seen wandering singly over the trails and jungle floor, and can be met with almost anywhere in such situations. These ants appear to be predaci- ous hunting species, for on several occasions I have seen individuals of Dinoponera gigan- vot. 41, No. 3 fea roaming about with grasshoppers, spiders, and other arthropods in their mandibles which, presumably, they had captured. It would be a nice problem for a good organic chemist ‘to study the nature of the venom injected by such ants, as well as that of various bees and wasps. It is known that the venom of different poisonous snakes is far from being of identical composition, and such may be the case with the stinging ants and bees. It may well be something more than a mere quantitative difference con- cerned with simple formic acid. Perhaps there are qualitative differences as in the case of the complex venoms of different species of snakes. In my own experience the effects of the sting of Dinoponera gigantea have differed somewhat from the stings of bees and wasps in our own country and in the Tropics, and I have been stung by many species of our larger wasps, hornets, and bees and have been bitten by some spiders. Usually there is a more localized puffing up or swelling at the immediate site of the puncture or bite, and this may assume a paler or whiter appearance than the normal skin shows. These ants have never produced such effects in my own experience, but only a generalized redness and swelling, with an intense pain of quite different character. There is one differ- ence in the nature of the puncture of this ant. Its stinging organ is exceedingly long and consequently it appears to be thrust more deeply into the tissues. From the ex- ceptional intensity of the pain one must conclude that a relatively large dosage of venom is present, though the constituents are unknown. Whatever the character of the venom may be, Dinoponera gigantea! is an ant that brooks no familiarity and is one to avoid, owing to the excruciating pain of its powerful sting. 1 Students of the species have recognized vari- etal forms, but I am using the name in a broad sense. I am indebted to M.R. Smith, U.S. Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, for ant identifications and for suggesting references to Dr. Weber’s observations. Marcy 1951 BAYER: REVISION OF NOMENCLATURE OF GORGONIIDAE 91 ZOOLOGY .—A revision of the nomenclature of the Gorgoniidae (Coelenterata: Octo- corallia), with an illustrated key to the genera. Frepertck M. Bayer, U. S. National Musuem. A superficial inquiry into the nomencla- ture of the Gorgoniidae was sufficient to reveal a state of confusion in the systematics of that family. Thorough search was there- fore begun in order to discover the origin of this confusion and means of its clarifica- tion. Apparently, the principal source of error has been the acceptance of incorrect genotypes, without considering the earliest valid designations. The latest revision of the Gorgoniidae was undertaken by Miss Eva Bielschowsky, a student of the noted zoophytologist Willy Kuikenthal. Her preliminary study, prepared as a doctoral dissertation, was published in 1918; considerably expanded, it appeared again in 1929. In these works, Miss Biel- schowsky unfortunately overlooked the early type designations of Milne Edwards and Haime and A. E. Verrill. These oversights were in some cases of little consequence, but the correction of two of them will greatly affect modern concepts of gorgoniid nomen- clature. The classification proposed in Miss Biel- schowsky’s thesis has been accepted without question in late years, and the incorrect name combinations used therein have be- come familiar. However, I feel that asking for a suspension of the International Rules of Zoological Nomenclature to preserve these combinations resulting from superficial re- search is not warranted by the limited’ zoo- logical interest and importance of the gor- gonids. The two changes necessary are the sup- pression of Rhipidigorgia Valenciennes, 1855, as a synonym of Gorgonia Linné, 1758, the genotype of both being Gorgonia flabellum Linné; and of Xiphigorgia Milne Edwards and Haime, 1857, as a synonym of Ptero- gorgia Ehrenberg, 1834, the genotype of both being Gorgonia anceps Pallas. The disappearance of the name Rhipidi- gorgia could have been prevented had Miss Bielschowsky taken the proper precautions in her revision. Furthermore, the name Xiphigorgia could have been synonymized before it had an opportunity to become well established in the modern literature. To summarize the history of this con- fusion: Linné’s genus Gorgonia, 1758, was a heterogeneous collection of nine species: G. spiralis, ventalina, flabellum, antipathes, cera- tophyta, pinnata, aenea, placomus, and abies. Of these, three (spiralis, aenea, and abies) are antipatharians and do not concern us here; one (antipathes) is a plexaurid and one (placomus) a muriceid, and were removed from Gorgonia by Lamouroux and Ehren- berg respectively. In 1834, Ehrenberg created Pterogorgia for eight species includ- ing Gorgonia acerosa Pallas, G. fasciolaris Hsper (var. of cztrina) and G. anceps Pallas. In 1850, Milne Edwards and Haime desig- nated G. anceps as the type of Pterogorgia. In 1855, Valenciennes proposed the genus Rhipidigorgia tor those species with anasto- mosing branches, but failed to designate a type species. Then, in 1857, Milne Edwards and Haime established Xzphigorgia for one species with trialate and another with whip- like branches, Gorgonia anceps Pallas and G. setacea Pallas, the first of which they had already selected as the type of Ptero- gorgia. At the same time these authors erected Leptogorgia for several species of slender-branched gorgoniids, but, as in Xiphigorgia, tailed to indicate a type species. Prof. A. E. Verrill in 1868%established with- out a type species the genus Litigorgia for several species of gorgoniids including two with anastomosing branches and five with free branches. In a later paper in the same year, he designated G. flabellum Linné as the type of Gorgona, G. acerosa Pallas as the type of Pterogorgia (overlooking Milne Edwards and Haime’s selection of G. anceps as the type of that genus), L. florae Verrill as the type of Lategorgia, and Gorgonia vimi- nalis Pallas sensw Milne Edwards and Haime as the type of Leptogorgia. A status quo obtained until 1918, when Miss Biel- schowsky stated in her revision that G. fla- bellum was the type of Rhipidigorgia, thereby making it an absolute synonym of Gorgonia. Had she realized that Verrill already had used that species as the type of Gorgonia, she might have preserved Rhipidigorgia by a judicious choice of genotype species. vou. 41, No. 3 SCIENCES ACADEMY OF JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON 92 two lateral rows along stems and branches; low verrucae present or absent. Anthocodial arma- ture usually a weak crown of small, more or less GORGONIIDAE Diagnosis.—Holaxonians with branching usu- ine, lateral or pinnate, alternate or ully in one pl flattened rods or spindles which are either warted « c ‘ c opposite; anastomosis of the twigs present or or practically smooth. Spicules of the coenen- chyma are spindles with regular transverse belts of warts, reaching 0.3 mm in length; spindles illy infrequent or absent at « c Zooids usu ubsent. the b ‘ c in o fo} « te ise of colony, and ordinarily occurring = Gs} Ss & = a S s = S e) a S “4 1 — 2 ins n | = re) fo) =I fo) 4 +~ Gs} ~ n =} = o 1) S Gy n nD =| o a » w ) ror or ~ n S o a oo ca = os) pe) a ory Nn = 2) a co N isy) Pie I — ” ' 2 2 LS = 2 Av) SS = & SY 5 = S LY S = 8S ) — <= 3 iS ~~ L S nH Ss La n 4 =) ~ =| _— my S faa eH a j= 5 Po a ie} o 1 5 Q je) U so = 5] = SS SS & SO 8 2 8 Ss = > S — a r Hy Marcu 1951 with the warts fused to form disks, and peculiar bent spindles (scaphoids) occur in certain genera. Axis horny, with little or no loculation of the cortex. Remarks.—The genus Swiftia Duchassaing and Michelotti, 1860 (monotype Gorgonia exserta Ellis and Solander) [=Stenogorgia Verrill, 1888 (S. casta Verrill) =Callistephanus Wright and Studer (C. korent Wright and Studer)| should be trans- ferred to the family Muriceidae. Genus Gorgonia Linné Gorgonia (part) Linné, 1758, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, 1: 800. [Type G. flabellum L., subs. des. Verrill, 1868, Trans. Connecticut Acad. 1; 386.] not Gorgonia Bielschowsky, 1918, Revis. Gorg.: 32; Kiikenthal, 1919, Wiss. Ergeb. deutschen Tiefsee-Exped. 13 (2): 852; Kiikenthal, 1924, Das Tierreich 47: 338; Deichmann, 1936, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 53: 174. Rhipidigorgia (part) Valenciennes, 1855, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 41: 13. [Type, G. flabellum L., subs. des. Bielschowsky, 1918, Revis. Gorg.: 49] Rhipidogorgia [sic] Duchassaing and Michelotti, 1860, Mém. corall. Antill.: 33; Kiikenthal, 1916, Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. 11: 485; Bielschowsky, 1918, Revis. Gorg.: 49; Kiikenthal, 1919, Wiss. Ergeb. deutschen Tiefsee-Exped. 13 (2): 853; Kiikenthal, 1924, Das Tierreich 47: 350; Deich- mann, 1936, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 53: 192. Diagnosis—Colonies with branching in one plane developed as one or more flat fans; twigs closely anastomosed to form a regular network. Zooids in two lateral rows on the twigs, either with very low verrucae or retracting flush with the coenenchyma surface; anthocodial armature of weakly sculptured rods. Coenenchyma spicules as girdled spindles and stout scaphoids. Genotype —Gorgonia flabellum Linné, (subsequent designation: A. E. Verrill, Trans. Connecticut Acad. 1: 386). 1758 1868, Gorgonia flabellum Linné Fiz. 1 Frutex marinus elegantissimus Clusius, 1605, Exo- ticorvm: 120 fig. Planta marina retiformis Olearius, 1674, Gottorf. Kunst-Kamm.: 69, pl. 35, fig. 2. Planta retiformis maxima + Frutex marinus major Lochner, 1716, Rar. mus. Besl.: 78, 79, pl. 24 Flabellum Veneris Ellis, 1755, Essay nat. hist. corallines: 61, pl. 26, fig. K. Gorgonia flabellum Linné, 1758, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, 1: 801; Esper, 1791, Pflanzenthiere 2: 23, pls. 2-3a; Verrill, 1869, Amer. Journ. Sei. 48: 424; Hargitt and Rogers, 1901, Bull. U. S. Fish. Comm. 20 (2): 287, pl. 3, fig. 3. Rhipidigorgia flabellum Valenciennes, 1855, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 41: 13 BAYER: REVISION OF NOMENCLATURE OF GORGONIIDAE 93 Rhipidogorgia [sic] flabellum Duchassaing and Michelotti, 1860, Mém. corall. Antill.: 33; Ki- kenthal, 1916, Zool. Jahrb., Supp. 11: 485; Kiikenthal, 1924, Das Tierreich 47: 350, fig. 180; Bielschowsky, 1929, Zool. Jahrb., Supp. 16: 194. The name by which this species was known for many years is hereby restored. Gorgonia flabellum was among the first objects of curiosity brought back from the New World, and pub- lished records of it date back well over 300 years. The accompanying illustration of it, perfectly recognizable, was published in 1622. Valenciennes’ genus Rhipidigorgia was origi- nally proposed to include’ all gorgonians with anastomosing branches. The characters used for generic distinction in the time of Valenciennes were necessarily the gross morphological fea- tures which could be observed without complex optical devices. The importance of the calcareous spicules had not even been guessed, and as a result it can now be recognized that the original concept of Rhipidigorgia included at least three genera as distinguished by modern methods. The three groups of species include (1) Rhidipt- gorgia umbraculum [now in Gorgonella]; (2) R. stenobrochis, arenata and cribrum [usually placed in Gorgonia|; and (3) R. flabellum, coarctata and occatoria [considered to be Rhidipigorgia s.s.]. An eighth species, R. laqueus Valenciennes (a nomen nudum), is still unrecognizable even as to genus, although according to Milne Edwards and Haime (1857) it may be Gorgonia sasappo var. reticulata Esper (=Echinogorgia pseudo-sa- sappo Kolliker). Verrill in 1864 shifted R. wmbra- culum to the genus Gorgonella, and in 1868 made R. flabellum (.) the type of the original Lin- naean Gorgoma. This procedure left Rhipidigorgia with only three species, R. stenobrochis, arenata and cribrum. When Bielschowsky in 1918, ap- parently unaware of Verrill’s earlier action, con- sidered R. flabellum as the type species of Rhipi- digorgia, she restricted the generic concept to include only those forms with reticulating branches and secaphoid spicules and made _ it synonymous with the Linnaean Gorgonia as re- stricted by Verrill. Valenciennes’ remaining spe- cles, R. and ‘eribrum have therefore been excluded from all deseribed gor- gontid genera. Although R. stenobrochis at various times has been placed in Leptogorgia, Litigorgra and Hugorgia, as limited by the designation of their type species cannot include stenobrochis, arenata those genera these three orphan species and the related forms subsequently described by Verrill and Hiekson. 94 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES These reticulate gorgoniids lacking scaphoid spic- ules therefore require a new genus, for which the name Pacifigorgia is here proposed. Pacifigorgia, n. gen. Rhipidigorgia (part) Valenciennes, 1855, C. R. Aead. Sei. Paris 41: 13; Verrill, 1864, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 1: 32 (part). Litigorgia (part) + Eugorgia (part) Verrill, 1868, Amer. Journ. Sei. 45: 414. Leptogorgia (part) Verrill, Sei. 48: 420. Gorgonia Bielschowsky, 1918, Revis. Gorg.: 32; Kiikenthal, 1919, Wiss. Ergeb. deutschen Tief- see-Exped. 13 (2): 852; Kiikenthal, 1924, Das Tierreich 47: 338; Bielschowsky, 1929, Zool. Jahrb. Supp. 16: 141; Deichmann, 1936, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 53: 174. 1869, Amer. Journ. Diagnosis.—Colony flabellate, branched in one plane; the twigs regularly anastomosing to form a close network. Zocids retracting within low verrucae or flush with the surface of the coenen- chyma; anthocodial armature of more or less flattened rods usually present. Spicules of the coenenechyma are girdled spindles, including: long, more or less pointed forms with several belts of warts; and short, blunt forms with only 2-4 belts of warts (‘“‘double heads”’). Genotype—Gorgonia stenobrochis Valencien- nes =Pacifigorgia stenobrochis (Val.), n. comb., here designated. Fic. 2.—Pacifigorgia irene, n. gen., n vou. 41, No. 3 Remarks.—This genus includes all those retic- ulate forms from the west coast of Central and South America previously known as Gorgonia. Except for one species from Trinidad and Brazil (P. elegans (Duch. & Mich.) =Gorgonia hartti Verrill), Pacifigorgia is confined to the eastern Pacific, from the Gulf of California to Peru. The generic name is chosen to indicate this predominantly Pacific distribution of the genus. Pacifigorgia irene, n. sp. Figs. 2,3 Leptogorgia adamsii (part) Verrill, 1868, Trans. Connecticut Acad. 1: 391. Gorgonia media? Bielschowsky, 1918, Revis. Gorg.: 38; 1929, Zool. Jahrb., Supp. 16: 147. Gorgonia media Galtsoff, 1950, Special Sei. Rep. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Serv. 28: 27. Diagnosis —The colonies form large, broad, finely reticulate fans crossed by several very stout main branches which can be followed to within 2 or 3 cm of the free edge. Zooids occur chiefly along the outer edges of the anastomosed twigs, and are retractile with small, often bilabiate verrucae. Spicules of the coencenhyma are long, pointed spindles 0.1—0.13 mm long, and short, blunt “double heads” up to 0.075 mm long; these sclerites are red, yellow or color- less. Anthocodial armature a weak crown of flat “rods” with broadly scalloped edges, reaching . sp. The holotype, about one-fourth natural size. Marcu 1951 BAYER: REVISION OF NOMENCLATURE OF GORGONIIDAE 95 Fic. 3.—a-p, Pacifigorgia irene, n.gen., n.sp.: a, Detail of branching; b-f, long spindles; g-k, short spindles or ‘‘double heads’’; [-o0, flat, anthocodial sclerites; p, small capstan from anthocodia. Pacifigorgia adamsi (Verrill): Anthocodial sclerites. to p only; 0.1-mm scale to all others. 0.05 mm in length, and small, spindly capstans about 0.04 mm long; these spicules are usually colorless, but a few may be tinted pink. Color of colony rusty purplish red. Description.—The type is a broad, flat fan about 35 em high and 63 em broad. (A part of the colony has been cut away, and its total width probably exceeded 70 em.) The twigs are very slender, closely and regularly anastomosed to form a network of small, squarish meshes 1.5-2.0 q-u, 3.0-mm scale applies to a only; 0.03-mm scale mm in diameter. Several stout main branches flattened in the plane of ramification arise from the base and radiate outward across the fan, branching occasionally and diminishing in diam eter slowly, losing themselves in the meshwork only 2 or 3 em from the edge of the colony. Zooids do not occur on the flat outer faces o! the midribs, but are found in a row along the line where the twigs are given off on either side The anastomosing twigs are flattened at right 96 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF angles to the plane of the fan, and along their outer edges the zooids form small, hemispherical, often bilabiate verrucae; two zooids usually occur on the tips of the free, unanastomosed twig ends, which are up to 5 mm in length. The color of the colony is a rusty purplish red, fading to an ochre yellow in some places along the edge of the fan. The spicules of the coenenchyma are of two types: (1) long, pointed spindles with a promi- nent naked girdle and 4-6 belts of warts, reach- ing 0.13 mm in length; and (2) short, blunt spindles or “double heads” also with a median naked space, but with only two belts of warts and terminal tufts, reaching about 0.075 mm. The coenenchyma spicules are usually red, but a few are colorless. In the yellow areas of the colony they are mostly pale yellow. The spicules of the anthocodia are flat rods with widely scalloped margins, reaching about 0.05 mm in length. These spicules are almost always color- less, but a few may be tinted with pink. There are also a few weak, long-armed capstans, which are colorless. Holotype—U.8.N.M. no. 49365. Punta Paja- ron, Panama, lat. 7° 55’ N., long. 81° 38’ W.; March 11, 1948, Paul S. Galtsoff, collector. Records.—Golfo de Nicoya, Costa Rica; March 1927, M. Valerio, collector (49379); Costa Rica no definite locality (383611). Remarks.—Pacifigorgia irene is perfectly dis- tinct from P. adamsii (Verrill), with which it was originally meluded. Verrill’s remarks about “adult specimens” (1868, Trans. Connecticut Acad.1:391) refer to thisspecies. Theseveral speci- mens of P. adamsu in the Museum of Compara- tive Zoology and those in the U. 8. National Mu- seum are uniformly small colonies, as are a number of the original specimens in Verrill’s collection in the Peabody Museum at Yale Uni- versity. Unfortunately, the latter have not been available for spicular examination, but all are of such uniform outer appearance that I have no hesitancy im considering them the same. The mesh of P. adamsti is about the same as that of the new species, but it lacks any trace of strong midribs, and the color is purple or yellow rather than the rusty purplish red charac- teristic of P. irene. In addition, the anthocodial spicules of the two species are distinct. Those of P. wrene are flat, broad, and almost always color- less; those of P. adamsti are round or but little flattened, slender, longer than those of P. irene, and almost always clear, pale yellow. Figures of the anthocodial spicules from both species SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 3 . are given in order to make the differences clear. The coenenchymal spicules differ less, but seem to be a little longer in P. adamsii. The specific name is chosen from the Greek word eipnvn, peace, in keeping with the deriva- tion of the generic term Pacifigorgia. Genus Pterogorgia Ehrenberg Gorgonia (part) Pallas, 1766, Elench. Zooph.: 160. Pterogorgia (part) Ehrenberg, 1834, Abh. Kénigl. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1832 (pt. 1): 368. [Type G. anceps Pallas, subs. des.: Milne Edwards and Haime, 1850, Brit. Foss. Corals: Ixxx.] Xiphigorgia (part) Milne Edwards and Haime, 1857, Hist. nat. corall. 1: 171; Kiikenthal, 1916, Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. 11: 491 (part); Bielsechow- sky, 1918, Revis. Gorg.: 62; Kiikenthal, 1924, Das Tierreich 47: 357 (part); Deichmann, 1936, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 53: 200. [Type, G. anceps Pallas, subs. des.: Bielschowsky, 1918, Revis. Gorg.: 62.] Diagnosis—Colonies more or less richly branched, mostly laterally; branches strongly compressed, triangular, or square; zooids in longi- © tudinal furrows on the edges of rather high, thin coenenchymal ridges running along two, three or four sides of the stems and branches. Zooids small; anthocodial armature a weak crown con- sisting of 8 tracts of flattened rods. Coenen- chyma with stout, strongly warted spindles and blunt scaphoids. Genotype—Gorgoma anceps Pallas (by sub- sequent designation: Milne Edwards and Haime, 1850, Brit. Foss. Corals: Ixxx). Remarks.—This genus includes three’ certain and one doubtful species, all Antillean. The valid species are: Pterogorgia anceps (Pallas) Corallina fruticosa, ramulis & cauliculis compres- Sis, quaquaversum expansis, purpurers elegantiss- imis Sloane, 1707, Voyage to Jamaica: 57, pl. 22, fig. 4. Gorgonia anceps Pallas, 1766, Elench. Zooph.: 183; Verrill, 1869, Amer. Journ. Sei. 48: 425. Pterogorgia anceps Ehrenberg, 1834, Abh. Koénigl. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1832 (pt. 1): 369. Gorgonia (Pterogorgia) anceps Dana, 1846, U. 8. Expl. Exped. 7: 648. NXiphigergia anceps Milne Edwards and Haime, 1857, Hist. nat. corall. 1: 172; Kikenthal, 1924, Das Tierreich 47: 357 (part); Deichmann, 1936, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 53: 201. This is the common, large, purple or yellowish species with branches square or triangular in cross section. Its branches are never so broad ~ and flat as in P. guadalupensis Duchassaing and Michelin. Marcu 1951 Pterogorgia citrina (Esper) Gorgonia citrina Esper, 1792, Pflanzenthiere 2: 129, pl. 38; Verrill, 1869, Amer. Journ. Sci. 48: 425. Pterogorgia fasciolaris + P. Sancti Thomae Ehrenberg, 1834, Abh. Konigl. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1832 (pt. 1): 369. Gorgonia (Pterogorgia) citrina Dana, 1846, U. 8S. Expl. Exped. 7: 648. Pterogorgia citrina Duchassaing and Michelotti, 1860, Mém. corall. Antill.: 30. Xiphigorgia citrina Verrill, 1864, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 1: 33; Kikenthal, 1924, Das Tier- reich 47: 358, fig. 182; Deichmann, 1936, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 53: 201. This is the familar, small Pterogorgia with flat branches, usually yellow with purple edges, sometimes all purple. Pterogorgia guadalupensis Duchassaing and Michelin Pterogorgia guadalupensis Duchassaing and Michelin, 1846, Rev. Zool. Soc. Cuvierienne 9: 218. Xiphigorgia guadalupensis Duchassaing and Michelotti, 1860, Mém. coral]. Antill.: 33. Gorgonia guadalupensis Verrill, 1869, Amer. Journ. Sei. 48: p. 425. Xiphigorgia anceps (part) Kiikenthal, 1924, Das Tierreich 47: 357. Specimens collected in the Gulf of Mexico during the first and second University of Miami Marine Laboratory Gulf of Mexico Sponge In- vestigations 1947 and 1948, by Dr. F. G. Walton Smith and J. Q. Tierney, have convinced me that Duchassaing and Michelin’s species is per- fectly distinct and worthy of recognition. I have been unable to find specimens of P. anceps which grade into it, either in the large series in the U. S. National Museum or among speci- mens in the field. A complete redescription will be published at a later date. The specimens of P. guadalupensis examined agree perfectly with Duchassaing and Miche- lotti’s figure. The species is readily distinguished from P. anceps by its very much broader, flat branehes which are never trialate. Part of a specimen is shown in the accompanying key- figure 9, compared with P. anceps. A situation similar to that involving Gorgonia and Rhipidigorgia exists between Pterogorgia Ehrenberg and NXiphigorgia Milne Edwards and Haime. In short, the genus Pterogorgia of Khren- berg, like many other early genera, was a poly- phyletic assemblage, and its species can now be divided into at least two modern genera, ap- BAYER: REVISION OF NOMENCLATURE OF GORGONIIDAE 97 portioned as follows: (1) P. setosa Esper, acerosa [Pallas?] Ehrenberg, stricta Ehrenberg, turgida Ehrenberg; and (2) P. fasciolaris Ehrenberg (=citrina Esper, var.?), sancti-thomae Ehrenberg (2? =citrina Esper), anceps Pallas, and violacea Ehrenberg non Pallas [? =anceps]. Ehrenberg also assigned questionably Gorgonia americana Gmelin, sanguinolenta Pallas [both fide Cuvier], and pinnata L. [fide Gmelin] to his Pterogorgia, without having seen specimens. Milne Edwards and Haime in 1850 designated P. anceps (Pallas) as the type species of Pterogorgia, thereby restric- ting the genus to the second group mentioned above. Completely disregarding the restriction which they themselves had imposed, these authors created in 1857 a new genus, Xvphigorgia, which included Gorgonia anceps, and this usage became generally accepted. This was undoubtedly due in no small part to the fact that the latter arrangement was proposed in their well-known Histoire naturelle des coralli- aires, whereas the earlier restriction of Ptero- gorgia was made in the introduction to their Monograph of the British fossil corals, a work holding little interest to the student of recent Gorgonacea. Consequently, Verrill overlooked the delimitation of Pterogorgia and proposed P. ace- rosa (Pallas) as the type species of Ehrenberg’s genus; this procedure, which applied the name Pterogorgia to the first of the two groups men- tioned above, subsequently came into general acceptance. The generic limits of Xitphigorgia were established by Miss Bielschowsky when she designated (1918) X. anceps as its type, but she failed to perceive that it was then absolutely synonymous with Pterogorgia s.s. and that half of the original Pterogorgia species were not re- ferable to any deseribed genus. This situation has remained unchanged, and the species elimi- nated from Pterogorgia still require a genus to include them, for which I propose the name Antillogorgia. Antillogorgia, n. gen. Pterogorgia (part) Ehrenberg, 1834, Abh. Konig. Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1882 (pt. 1): 868; Milne Ed- wards and Haime, 1857, Hist. nat. corall. 1: 167 (part); Bielschowsky, 1918, Revis. Gorg.: 52; Kikenthal, 1924, Das Tierreich 47: 351; Bielschowsky, 1929, Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. 16: 197; Deichmann, 1936, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool, 53: 193. Diagnosis.—Colonies mostly bushy, with the secondary branching in one plane; numerous 98 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES twigs arranged along the main branches in close pinnate order, sometimes with secondary twigs; stem and branches round or flattened; twigs round, or more frequently somewhat compressed. Zooids small, not producing verrucae, usually arranged in two rows along the edges of the twigs; they sometimes occur in rows on the large branches and main stems. Anthocodia either unarmed or with small, more or less flattened rods arranged in 8 triangles to form a weak crown. Coenenchyma spicules are scaphoids and spindles in the outer layer, spindles alone in the inner. Genotype.—Gorgonia acerosa Pallas =Antillo- gorgia acerosa (Pallas), n. comb., here designated. Remarks.—This genus is apparently confined to the Antillean region. Its species form one of the most conspicuous elements of the littoral marine fauna along the reefs of Florida and in the West Indies. The most abundant species, at least on the Florida coast, is Antillogorgia acerosa (Pallas). For a description, see Deich- mann, 1936, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 53: 198. It is usually dark purple when alive. A. ellisiana (Milne Edwards and Haime) and A. americana (Gmelin) are not uncommon in the same re- gions. The living colonies are usually brownish purple. Genus Phyllogorgia Milne Edwards and Haime Gorgonia (part) Esper, 1791, Pfanzenthiere 2: 1. Gorgonia (Pterogorgia) (part) Dana, 1846, U. 8. Expl. Exped. 7: 647. Phyllogorgia Milne Kdwards and Haime, 1850, Brit. Foss. Corals: Ixxx. [Type, Gorgonia dila- tata Esper.] Hymenogorgia Valenciennes, 1855, C. R. Acad. Sei. Paris 41: 13. (Type, Gorgonia quercus folium Ehrenberg = Gorgonia dilatata Esper.| Phyllogorgia Verrill, 1912, Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia (2)15: 393. Diagnosis—Colonies branched in one plane, the branches anastomosing. forming broad, flat leaves; axis Zooids small, without verrucae, on all surfaces of the leaves. The spicules are stout spindles and seaphoids. Genotype.—Gorgonia dilatata Esper (by origi- nal designation). Remarks.—The single species, P. dilatata, is found on the coast of Brazil. The single early record of its occurrence at Guadeloupe has not been confirmed. vou. 41, No. 3 Genus Leptogorgia Milne Edwards and Haime Gorgonia (part) Pallas, 1766, Elench. Zooph.: 160; Milne Edwards and Haime, 1857, Hist. nat. corall. 1: 157 (part). Leptogorgia (part) Milne Edwards and Haime, 1857, Hist. nat. corall. 1: 163. [Type, G@. vimina- lis Milne Edwards and Haime = G. viminalis Esper = Leptogorgia longiramosa Kikenthal 1924; subs. des.: Verrill, 1868, Trans. Con- necticut Acad. 1: 387.| Lophogorgia (part) Milne Edwards and Haime, 1857, Hist. nat. corall. 1: 167. [Type, @. flam- mea Ellis and Solander.]} Litigorgia (part) Verrill, 1868, Amer. Journ. Sci. 45: 414. (Type, ZL. florae Verrill; subs. des.: Verrill, 1868, Trans. Connecticut Acad. 1: 387.| Eugorgia (part) Verrill, 1868, Amer. Journ. Sci. 45: 414. ?Pseudopterogorgia Kiikenthal, 1919, Wiss. Ergeb. deutschen Tiefsee-Exped. 13 (2): 854. [Type, Leptogorgia australiensis Ridley, 1884.] Asperogorgia Stiasny, 1943, Vid. Medd. Dansk naturh. Foren. 107: 92. [Type, L. radula (Mo6bius).] Diagnosis.—Colonies mostly branched in one plane, lateral or pinnate, occasionally dichoto- mous, rarely bushy; branches and twigs some- what flattened but never greatly expanded to form lamellar ridges. Zooids in two lateral tracts along the sides of twigs and branches, fully re- tractile or forming low verrucae; anthocodial armature of small rods or spindles usually pres- ent. Coenenchyma with girdled spindles but no modified forms. Genotype.—Gorgonia viminalis Milne Edwards and Haime (by subsequent designation: Verrill, 1868, Trans. Connecticut Acad. 1: 387). Remarks.—Bielschowsky’s designation of G. petechizans Pallas as the type of Leptogorgia could have no standing even if it had priority, since that species was not included within the genus as originally constituted. Leptogorgia contains many species in temperate and tropical waters, and although it is represented practically around the world, the center of dis- tribution seems to be in the neighborhood of the west coast of Central America. The characters ordinarily used for separating Lophogorgia from Leptogorgia, the flattened branches and arrangement of zooids all around the branches and tiwgs, are so variable as to be useless for generic distinctions. Round as well as. flattened branches may occur in the same colony, and the biserial zooid distribution can Marcu 1951 be found with little difficulty, Furthermore, speci- mens of Leptogorgia which are typical in all other respects may have zooids distributed all around the twigs. The presence of distinct verru- eae, the feature used by Stiasny to distinguish his Asperogorgia species from the other Lopho- gorgias (which he considered as part of Lepto- gorgia), is no more reliable. I have therefore placed both these genera in the synonymy of Leptogorgia. Kiikenthal’s Pseudopterogorgia (1919) was cre- ated on the strength of some supposed ‘‘klam- mern” in four Indo-Pacific species. An examina- tion of the original description and figures of the type species, P. australiensis (Ridley), suggests that Ridley’s original generic assignment of the species (Leptogorgia) was correct. The spicules are all described as fusiform, and while one of the individuals figured is a little curved, it is not a very convincing scaphoid. I am therefore tentatively synonymizing the genus and refer- ring its species back to Leptogorgia. Genus Phycogorgia Milne Edwards and Haime Gorgonia Valenciennes, 1846, Voyage of the Venus, Atlas of Zool., Zoophytes: pl. 11, fig. 2. Phycogorgia Milne Edwards and Haime, 1850, Brit. Foss. Corals: Ixxx. [Type, Gorgonia fucata Valenciennes. | Phycogorgia Kikenthal, 1924, Das Tierreich 47: 359. Diagnosis.—Colonies bushy, the stems and branches strongly flattened and frondose, aris- ing from a spreading base. Axis lamellar. Zooids small, completely retractile and without arma- ture, on the fronds and on the base. Spicules are small, blunt, girdled spindles. Genotype—Gorgonia fucata Valenciennes, 1846 (by original designation). Remarks.—Only one species is known, occur- ving in shallow water from Mazatlan to Chile. Genus Eugorgia Verrill Lophogorgia (part) G. Horn, 1860, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 12: 233. Gorgonia (part) Verrill, 1864, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 1: 33. Eugorgia (part) Verrill, 1868, Amer. Journ. Set. 45: 414. (Type, H. ampla Verrill; subs. des.: Verrill, 1868, Trans. Connecticut Acad. 1: 386.| Eugorgia Verrill, 1868, Trans. Connecticut Acad. 1: 406; Bielschowsky, 1929, Zool. Jahrb., Supp. 16: 170. BAYER: REVISION OF NOMENCLATURE OF GORGONIIDAE 99 Diagnosis.—Branching chiefly in one plane, lateral or dichotomous, sometimes bushy. Zooids in biserial longitudinal rows, usually without anthocodial armature, with or without low ver- rucae. The spicules are ordinary spindles, to- gether with disk spindles produced by the more or less complete fusion of the warts of the median 2 or 4 belts to form disks. Genotype.—Leptogorgia ampla Verrill (by sub- sequent designation: Verrill, 1868, Trans. Con- necticut Acad. 1: 386). Remarks.—Although Eugorgia is now an ex- clusively west American genus, two Atlantic gorgoniids are apparently related to it. Lepto- gorgia virgulata Lamarck and L. setacea (Pallas) have spicules identical with the poorly developed disk spindles and intermediate forms to be found in a number of Hugorgia species. They may be relict species of a once widespread Hugorgia, or only Leptogorgias developing along Eugorgia lines. It remains for future study to determine which is actually the case. ILLUSTRATED KEY TO THE GENERA OF THE FAMILY GORGONIIDAE A!, Spicules as spindles of various forms, some of which may occasionally be slightly bent, but never as true scaphoids, or moon’’-shaped spicules: “half- B'. Branches and twigs not coalescent, but free and usually slender: Lepro CO!, Spicules only regular spindles: GORGIA, 100 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, NO. 3 A®. Scaphoid spicules present in addition to simple spindles: C2. Spicules include spindles with warts more or less completely fused to form disks: Evueoretia. B’, Branches and twigs not coalescent, but free and usually slender: C1. Branching closely pinnate, the twigs slender, round or only slightly com- pressed: ANTILLOGORGIA. B?. Branches and twigs coalescing to form a regular meshwork: PacirrgorGIA. C®. Branching not closely pinnate; branches and twigs with two, three, or four longitudinal, thin, coenenchymal lamel- lae, causing them to be flat and blade- like, triangular, or square in cross section: PreROGoRGIA. B%. Branches and twigs flat, foliate: Puyco- GORGIA. ] _ B®, Branches and twigs coalescing to form a regular network: GoRGONIA. Marcu 1951 B’. Branches and twigs flat, foliate: Payiuo- GORGIA. LITERATURE CITED BrevscHowsky, Eva. EHine Revision der Familie Gorgoniidae. Inaugural-Dissertation zur Er- langung der Doktorwiirde der Hohen Philo- sophischen Fakultiét der Schlesischen Fried- rich-Wilhelms-Universitat zu Breslau: 1-66. Breslau, 1918. Die Gorgonarien Westindiens. Kap. 6, Die Familie Gorgoniidae. Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. 16, Heft 1: 63-234, 40 figs., pls. 2-5. 1929. Cuusius, Carouus. FExoticorvm libri decem: qui- bus animalium, plantarum, aromatum, alio- rumque peregrinorum fructuum historiae discri- buntur: [10] 1-378 [5], illus. Antverpiae, 1605. Dana, JaMes Dwiaut. Zoophytes. U. S. (Wilkes) Exploring Expedition during the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842, 7: i-vi+ 1-740, 45 figs., atlas of 61 col. pls. 1846. DeicuMann, Evtsapetu. The Alcyonaria of the western part of the Atlantic Ocean. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zo6]. 53: 1-317, pls. 1-37. 1936. DucHASSAING bE FonsBREsSIN, PuacipE, and MicHetin, Harpouin. Note sur deux poly- piers de la famille des coraux appartenant aux genres Solanderia ef Pterogorgia. Rev. Zool. Soc. Cuvierienne 9: 218-220. 1846. and Micuexortr, Jean. Mémoire sur les coralliaires des Antilles: 1-88, pls. 1-10. Mem. Reale Accad. Sci. Torino, ser. 2, 19: 279-365, pls. 1-10. 1860. BAYER: REVISION OF NOMENCLATURE OF GORGONIIDAE 101 EHRENBERG, CHRISTIAN GorTrRIeD. Bettrdge zur phystologischen Kenntniss der Corallenthiere im allgemeinen, und besonders des rothen Meeres, nebst einem Versuche zur physio- logischen Systematik de selben. Abh. Konigl. [preussischen] Akad. Wiss. Berlin 1832 (pt. 1): 225-880. 1834. Euuis, Joun. An essay towards the natural his- tory of the corallines, and other marine produc- tions of the like kind, commonly found on the coasts of Great Britain and Ireland: i-xvii + [5 lvs] 1-103, pls. 1-37 [38]. London, 1755. Esper, Eucentus JoHANN CuristorH. Die Pflanzenthiere in Abbildungen nach der Natur mit Farben erleuchtet nebst Beschreibungen 1-3: i-xii + 1-320; 1-220; 1-285+; Fortset- zung 1-2: 1-230; 1-48, 428 pls. Niirnberg- 1788-1850. [The parts dealing with gorgo- nians were published as follows: Vol. 2, pp; 1-96, 1791; pp. 97-180, 1792; pp. 181-220, 1793. pp. 221-304, 1799; Fortsetzung, vol. 1, pp. 117-168, 1796; pp. 169-230, 1797.] Gautsorr, Paut Simon. The pearl oyster re- sources of Panama. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service Special Scientific Report: Fisheries no. 28: 1-53, 28 figs. 1950. Horn, Greorce. Descriptions of three new species of Gorgonidae, in the collection of the Academy, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 12: 233. 1860. KiKentuan, Witty. Die Gorgonarien Westindi- ens. Kap. 2, Uber den Venusficher; Kap. 3, Die Gattung Xiphigorgia H. M. Edw. Zool. Jahrb., Suppl. 11, Heft 4: 485-503, 13 figs., pl. 23. 1916. Gorgonaria. Wissenschaftliche Ergeb- nisse der deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition auf dem Dampfer Valdivia 1898-99, 13 (2): 1-946, 318 figs., pls. 30-89. 1919. Gorgonarta. Das Tierreich 47: i-xxyviii + 1-478, 209 figs. 1924. Linnf, Kart von. Systema naturae, ed. 10, 1: [2] 1-824. Holmiae, 1758. LocHNER VON HUMMELSTEIN, JOHANN HEINRICH. Rariora muset Besleriani quae olim Basilius et Michael Rupertus Besleri collegerunt: [12] 1-112, pls. 1-40. Norimbergae, 1716. Mrine Epwarps, Henri, and Haims, Juues. A monograph of the British fossil corals. Part 1. Introduction; corals from the Tertiary and Cretaceous formations: i-Ixxxv + 1-71, pls. 1-11. London, 1850. ———. Histoire naturelle des coralliatres ou pol- ypes proprement dits: 1-8, pp. i-xxxjv + 1-826; 1-633; 1-560; atlas of 36 pls. Paris, 1857. Oueartus, ApAM. Gottorfische Kunst-Kammer: {5 Ivs.] 1-80, pls. 1-87. Schlesswig, 1674. Pauias, Peter Srmon. Llenchus zoophytorum sis- tens generum adumbrationes generaliores et speciterwm cognitarum succtnctas descriptiones selectts auctorum synonymis: i-xvi + Hagae-Comitum, 1766. A voyage to the islands Madera, Nieves, S. Christophers and Ja- clu 1-451. SLOANE, Hans. Barbados, 102 maica, with the natural history of the herbs and trees, four footed beasts, fishes, birds, in- sects, reptiles & c. of the last of those islands . 1: [7 lvs] i-cliv + 1-264, pls [4] 1-156. London, 1707. Sriasny, Gustav. Gorgonaria von Panama. Vi- densk. Medd. Dansk naturh. Foren. 107: 59- 103, figs. 1-16. 1943. VALENCIENNES, AcHitip. In A. Dupetit- Thouars, Voyage autour du monde sur la frégate la Venus, pendant les années 1836-1839. Atlas de Zoologie: Zoophytes: pls. 1-15. Paris, 1846. Extrait dune monographie de la famille des Gorgonidées de la classe des polypes. Comptes Rendus Séances Acad. Sei. Paris 41: 7-15. 1855. VerRILL, Appison Mery. List of the polyps and corals sent by the Museum of Comparative Zoblogy to other institutions in exchange, with MALACOLOGY .—Recent species of the U.S. National Museum. The study represented by this paper is the third in a series on living relict peleeypods. In comparison with Fimbria and Cucullaea, the living species of Arctica is well known, and many good studies have been made on it in several northern Atlantic regions. The shellfish surveys of Rhode Island and Mas- sachusetts have recently obtained valuable information on the ecology of the genus, and it is possible that Arctica will soon assume commercial importance as an edible clam. There have, however, been few attempts to make a complete study of the living species. The latest review of Arctica is that of Lamy (1920, pp. 260-265). Arctica, first appearing in the early Creta- ceous, has apparently always been confined to temperate waters. Since the Cenozoic the genus has been confined to Europe and the north Atlantic regions. At present there is one living species, confined primarily to the north Atlantic. Arctica has been placed in many different superfamilies. On the basis of shell characters Arctica most closely resembles some of the brackish water genera, as for example Batissa. Among the living marine pelecypods Arctica resembles the veneraceans. The lack of a pallial smus and the development. of ‘Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 3 annotations. 60. 1864. Review of the corals and polyps of the west coast of America. Trans. Conn. Acad. Arts and Sciences 1: 377-567, pls. 5-10. 1868- 71. [Actual dates of publications are: pp. 377-390, April 1868; pp. 391-398, June 1868; pp. 399-414, July 1868; pp. 415-422, December 1868; pp. 423-454, January 1869; pp. 455-478, February 1689; pp. 479-502, March 1869; pp. 503-518, April 1870; pp. 519-534, Nov. 1870; p. 567, February 1871.] Critical remarks on halcyonoid polyps in the museum of Yale College, with descriptions of new genera. Amer. Journ. Sei. 45: 411— Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 1: 29- 415. 1868. ———. Critical remarks on halcyonoid polyps, no. 8. Amer. Journ. Sci. 48: 419-429. 1869. The gorgonians of the Brazilian coast. Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia (2) 15: 373-404, 1 fig., pls. 29-35. 1912. veneroid pelecypod Arctica.! Davip NIcoL, posterior lateral teeth are morphologic char- acters present in Arctica but not in the ven- eraceans. Family Arcricipar Newton, 1891 Genus Arctica Schumacher, 1817 Venus Linné, 1767 (in part). Pectunculus da Costa, 1778 (in part)? ~ Cyclas Link, 1807, not Cyclas Bruguiére, 1798. Cyprina Lamarck, 1818. Armida Gistel, 1848, not Armida Risso, 1826. Cypriniadea Rovereto, 1900. Genotype: Arctica vulgaris Schumacher, 1817 = Venus islandica Linné, 1767 (monotypy). In 1752 Moehring used the name Arctica for a genus of birds, but this work and the translation published in 1758 have been suppressed (see opinion 5, vol. 1, pt. 14, 1944, pp. 115-126). Schumacher’s genus name Arctica, published in 1817, can thus be used. Lamarck applied the French vernacular term Cyprine in 1812 but did not use the name Cyprina until 1818. Arctica islandica (Linné), 1767 Figs. 1-3 1767. Venus islandica Linné, Syst. Nat., ed. 12, 1 (pt. 2): 1181. 1777. Venus mercenaria Linné, Pennant, British zoology 4, Mollusca: 94, pl. 53, fig. 47. 78. Pectunculus crassus da Costa, British con- chology: 188, 184, pl. 14, fig. 5. Marcu 1951 1778. 1818. 1830. 1903. 1910. Venus buccardium Born, Rerum naturalium Musei Caesarei Vindobonensis, pt. 1, Tes- tacea: 49, 50. . Venus bucardium Born, Rerum naturalium Musei Caesarei Vindobonensis, pt. 1, Tes- tacea: 63, pl. 4, fig. 11. . Venus islandica Linné, Roding, Museum Boltenianum: 180, no. 284. . Venus ferréensis Réding, Museum Bolteni- anum: 180, no. 285. .Cyclas islandica (Linné), Link, Beschrei- bung Rostock Sammlung: 150. . Arctica vulgaris Schumacher, Essai nouveau systéme habitations vers testacés: 145, 146, pl. 13, figs. 3a, b. Cyprina islandica (Linné), Lamarck, Ani- maux sans vertébres 5: 557, 558. Cyprina vulgaris (Schumacher), James Sowerby, Genera of Recent and fossil shells, Cyprina: pl. 67. Cyclas islandica (Linné), Dall, fauna of Florida: 1500-1502. Cyprina islandica var. inflata Odhner, Ark. for Zool. 7 (4): 19, figs. 33, 34. Tertiary NICOL: RECENT SPECIES OF ARCTICA 103 1920. Cyprina islandica (Linné), Lamy, Journ. Conchyl. 64 (4) : 262-265. A more complete synonymy is given by Lamy (1920, pp. 262-264) and need not be repeated here. Description.—Shell porcellaneous, often chalky, periostracum black, light brown, or rarely red- dish-brown in color, light brown on small shells, smooth except for raised concentric lines; orna- mentation consists of concentric lines of growth; valve outline subcircular, equivalve, subequi- lateral, not gaping; beaks prosogyrate; ligament opisthodetic, parivincular, external, connected : : AI AIII 3a 1 3b PI to the periostracum, hinge formula “179, 95 46 PIT” eyrenoid; pallial line integripalliate, adductor muscle scars subequal; interior ventral border smooth. Measurements in mm.— Frias. 1-3.—Aretica islandica (Linné),U.S.N.M. no. 128966a: 1, Interior, lett valve; 2, valve; 3, exterior, right valve. All figures >? interior, right 3° natural size. 104 Convexity U.S.N.M. no. Length Height (both values) 201566a 106.4 100.5 61.9 34431 99.1 95.5 51.3 201566 97.3 92.2 59.1 102047 96.1 92.0 56.3 34431a 92.9 86.2 42.5 461553 85.4 78.0 47.0 27256a 82.6 76.7 41.4 304728a 81.7 76.5 48.3 201577 80.0 78.0 43.3 128966a 77.5 70.2 37.0 225762 76.9 68.7 39.5 225764a 75.3 67.6 40.1 128966b 74.6 69.5 34.8 461553a 67.8 62.5 34.0 128966¢ 67.8 62.4 33.7 128966 62.3 56.5 30.6 27258b 61.2 55.8 33.7 225764¢ 58.8 54.3 30.3 225764b 52.8 46.5 24.8 272258a 45.9 40.0 23.7 499954a 44.4 40.3 22.3 45985 44.3 41.1 22.6 45991 42.1 38.2 22.8 181970a 41.4 36.7 19.8 35666 39.6 36.2 21.4 158995 23.9 21.3 13.3 40146b 21.0 19.4 10.0 40146a 17.8 16.1 9.0 153164a 12.0 10.4 5.9 153164 8.4 8.0 4.5 The above measurements seem to indicate no tendency toward more convex shells in northern waters or cooler bottom temperatures. There may be, however, some relationship between the type of substrate and convexity, the more convex shells being found on the muddier bottoms. More data are necessary to ascertain whether any relationship exists between living conditions and shape of shell. Number of specimens—There are approxi- mately 1,000 specimens of Arctica islandica in the collection of the United States National Museum. Many of the specimens are small shells obtained by dredging. Locality data.—Specific localities are so nu- merous that it is not practical to list each one, and general information on geographical distribu- tion is sufficient for this problem. GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION and ECOLOGY of ARCTICA ISLANDICA (LINNE) This species has been mentioned in most faunal lists of mollusks taken from northern Atlantic localities. Despite these consider- ably extensive observations, the distribution of living Arctica islandica is not well known. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 3 There have been several great temperature fluctuations in the northern Atlantic durmg the Pleistocene and post-Pleistocene, and col- lectors have taken shells and recorded them in faunal lists, although Arctica islandica might not be living in some of those areas to- day. Accurate locality information on living specimens, furthermore, is the most impor- tant criterion for interpreting climatic condi- tions during Pliocene, Pleistocene, and post- Pleistocene times. Arctica occurs as far south as Cape Hat- teras, N. C., but is quite rare from there northward to Long Island Sound. Along the coasts of Rhode Island, Massachusetts, and Maine, Arctica is abundant. It is frequently found in the Bay of Fundy, Halifax Harbor, and Northumberland Strait. There are a few records of Arctica in Chaleurs Bay and off the southern coast of Newfoundland. A few valves of Arctica have been collected off the coasts of Labrador and Greenland, but these are believed to be subfossil (Jensen, 1912, p. 90). The genus is abundant on the coasts of Iceland, the Faroes, the Shetlands, the British Isles, and the coast of Norway. Arc- tica also occurs off the Kola Peninsula and in the White Sea. There are a few records of shells collected north and east of the White Sea as far as Novaya Zemlya, but these shells are probably also subfossil. There are reports of Arctica occurring as far as Born- holm Island in the Baltic Sea, but shells from the Baltic are generally rather thin, and the reduced salinity probably prevents the genus from living farther north and east i. the Baltic region. Arctica islandica 1s abundant along the coast of northern France. South of Brittany Arctica is rarely reported, but it has been found as far south as the Bay of Cadiz. Occurrences in the Mediter- ranean are probably all subfossil. Arctica is a boreal but not an arctic genus. It can not live for probably more than a few hours in waters which go below 0°C. Arcisz et al. (1945, p. 15) recorded Arctica living at 0.7°C. Perhaps for this reason the genus is not circumpolar and is not found in the coldest waters of the Atlantic Ocean. On the other hand, the highest temperature which Arctica can withstand is about 19°C. 105 RECENT SPECIES OF ARCTICA . NICOL Marcu 1951 ‘Spi1ooe1 poysijqnd uo puv sumnesnul 10440 ul Suautoeds uO paseq vyBp AZI[BdO] ‘A ‘Suowmtoeds wnesnyy [BUOIBN “Gg “() UO paseq BQep AyI[BOOT ‘A : (9UULT) DILpUD)S2 D91}91 7 Jo SudUITOOdS BUTAT] JO UOTYNGLAYSIp Surmoys dupy—p “OT N ee ne Sey, \Wowaotv) vgiats yaawnans ove, Lee y y r 4, \ 4 de fiers, anuiae VAS WN ice Puy \ Peg te My SA /Viunxs ne ; a ff cea 1 os eT IW AY Lilt, V SE \ \ TY \ x) » Pup, Ae a *\L ° umye oh RY Abuoao : wiiees vruvoToig / He ih a O: ~iNe Oe ead Pana b famazins! INVA ~—wanuzee , aN Ria | © agzavone Soa TEAS * aS Rene y _(Sinoqsung ore Ig Ve 1 SRE Gy ne eat Mist paca Fhe a Wane AaNIvVuyNn aH | eR AUOG Ee Le ~yczen OS A: Pe Seas ee nary , eT 5 COS RS i NG NI NG Sass nue LU \ % daangry ho i Weg: MRS DeELOTTSI ES A. ‘ avsuvae Yat mena (EerCeNEvaaeonaae! W898 aaa vissnu aD ad ura LIM | y; a 5 ‘fe SL Oat 31 5 RE[OS9H OTR 3 rags: any WKS ‘ J swnnvn © mOoSOn Sie ri 1 v: (Seen TPIS, \ Tag Fett HLUON x; ' ~ weyfisy \pu a onn2o%e4 y BY “ee ¢ Wedd | Agee Pent) oe i 67s0 A a1599, x ° zt y= yn! N ny TASTY |) = + a am yy hermaspans | A ya i web Qhason <1 VdS NVISAMUYON gHYT ONITHIIIN~ “s NISVE 3X0L ys ie a son) AP iwakeyy wee GxXVT Ne ({reareeg OL} QqNVINGAAUD 106 Recent observations on living specimens by Turner (1949, pp. 15, 16) have shown that Arctica is always found on sandy mud or mud bottoms, although Madsen (1949, p. 50) claimed that in Iceland the genus is found on ooze, mud, clay, sand, gravel, and shell bottoms. It can be said with certainty, however, that Arctica is nearly always found on sandy mud or mud bottoms, and this statement is based on many observations by many workers. I have recorded 98 dredging stations, rangmg from Halifax to Cape Hatteras, where Arctica was taken by the U.S. Bureau of Fisheries. The greatest depth from which Arctica was dredged was 482 meters; the next greatest depth was 360 meters. The remaining 96 stations were at depths of 281 meters or less, and one station was only 13 meters in depth. Contrary to some observa- tions made in the past, the small shells were not found at the greater depths, and large and small shells seemed to be found at all recorded depths. In the Firth of Forth the genus has been collected alive at the lowest of low tides (Forbes and Hanley 1853, p. 445). Generally, however, it is most com- monly found at depths from 10 to 280 me- ters, but it is occasionally found as deep as 500 meters. Off the coast of Rhode Island, Arcisz et al. (1945, p. 9) found the greatest concentration of the genus at depths ranging from 25 to 45 meters and did not find living specimens in less than 18 meters of water. In colder water Arctica apparently is abun- dant at shallower depths. Reports of young shells of Arctica having been taken m more than 1,000 meters of water should be reinvestigated. A specimen from the Jeffrey’s collection (no. 201564) is labeled Cyprina islandica L. (fry), taken fron the northwest coast of Ireland at a depth of 1,215 fathoms. This tiny specimen is almost impossible to identify, but it does not appear to be Arctica. Acknowledgments —I am greatly indebted to William J. Clench, of the Museum of Comparative Zoédlogy at Harvard College, for information on geographical distribution, and to Harry J. Turner, Jr., of the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution, for valuable data on the ecology of Arctica. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 3 REFERENCES Arcisz, W., Nevitite, W. C., DeEWo tr, R. A., and Loosanorr, V. L. The ocean quahog fishery of Rhode Island: 31 pp., 10 figs. Dept. Agriculture and Conservation, Rhode Island, 1945. Costa, E. M. pa. The British conchology: 254 pp., 17 pls. London, 1778. Datu, W. H. Contributions to the Tertiary fauna of Florida. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci. 3 (pt. 6): 1219-1654, pls. 48-60. 1903. . Note on Cyprina islandica. Proc. Malacol. Soc. London, 10 (pt. 4): 286 1913. Forses, K., and Hanuey, 8. A history of British Mollusca and their shells 1: 486 pp., 64 pls., London, 1853. GisteL, J. Naturgeschichte des Thierreichs fiir hohere Schulen: 216 pp., 32 pls. Stuttgart, 1848. Hemmina, F. Opinions and declarations rendered by the International Commission on Zoological Nomenclature (Opinion 5, The status of certain pre-Linnean names reprinted subsequent to 1757) 1 (pt. 14): 115-126. London, 1944. JENSEN, A. S. Studier over nordiske Mollusker. IT, Cyprina islandica. Naturh. Forening Kjoben- havn Vid. Medd. 1902: 33-42. . Lamellibranchiata (part 1), The Danish Ingolf-Expedition 2 (5): 119 pp., 5 figs., 4 pls. Copenhagen, 1912. Lamarck, J. B. Histoire naturelle des animaux sans vertébres 5: 612 pp. Paris, 1818. Lamy, I. Révision des Cypricardiacea et des Iso- cardiacea vivants du Muséum d’Histotre natu- relle de Paris. Journ. Conchy]. 64 (4) : 259-307. 1920. Link, H. F. Beschreibung der Naturalien-Samm- lung der Universitat zu Rostock: 1-165, 1-30, 1-38, 1-88. Rostock, 1806-1808. Linné, K. von. Systema naturae, ed. 12, 1 (pt. 2): 5383-1327. Holmiae, 1767. Mapskn, F. J., The zoology of Iceland 4 (pt. 63, Marine Bivalvia) : 166 pp., 12 figs. Copenhagen and Reykjavik, 1949. Opuner, Nius. Marine Mollusca in the collections of the Swedish State Museum, Ark. for Zool. 7 (4): 31 pp., 1 pl. 1910. Rovereto, G. Lllustrazione det molluschi fossili Tongriani, ete. Atti Reale Univ. Genova 15: 31-210, 9 pls. 1900. ScHuMACHER, C. F. Essai d’un nouveau systéeme des habitations des vers testacés: 287 pp., 22 pl., Copenhague, 1817. Smitu, . A. On the generic name to be applied to the Venus islandica, Linn. Proc. Mal. Soe. London 10 (pt. 2): 105, 106. 1912. Turner, H. J., Jr. Report on investigations of methods of improving the shellfish resources of Massachusetts: 22 pp., 5 figs. Commonwealth of Massachusetts, 1949. Marcu 1951 WELANDER AND SCHULTZ: CHROMIS ATRIPECTORALIS 107 ICHTHYOLOGY .—Chromis atripectoralis, a new damselfish from the tropical Pa- cific, closely related to C. caeruleus, family Pomacentridae. ARrHUR D. We- LANDER and LEONARD P. ScHULTZ. During our studies of some Bikini fishes at the University of Washington, Seattle, we were surprised to observe that the blue-green damselfish, which occurs so abundantly in shallow waters of the reefs throughout the tropical Indo-Pacific faunal area, was a com- plex of two species. This paper describes one of these as new and presents data for the separation of the two species. Chromis atripectoralis, n. sp. Chromis caeruleus (in part), Jordan and Seale, Bull..U. S. Bur. Fish. 25 (1905): 290, pl. 46, ? fig. 1. 1906 (Samoan Islands; color descriptions for specimens numbered 2, 4, and 6, with péc- toral axil black appear to be this new species) ; Montalban, Pomacentridae of the Philippine Islands, Monog. Bur. Sci. Manila, no. 24: 35, pl. 8, fig. 2. 1927 (Philippine Islands). Heliastes lepidurus Giinther, Fische der Siidsee, Journ. Mus. Godeffroy 15 (pt. 7): 238 (in part), pl. 128, fig. C.1881. es) Holotype —U.S.N.M. no. 112397, Bikini Atoll, Eman. Island, channel reef, July 17, 1947, S-46- 405, Schultz, Brock, Hiatt and Myers, standard length 67 mm. Paratypes.—The following paratypes are from Guam in the Marianas Islands: U.S.N.M. no. 124104, Tumon Bay, July 10, 1945, R. H. Baker, 48 specimens, 9 to 25 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 152557, Tumon Bay, December 10, 1945, L. Gressitt, 2 specimens, 48 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 152558, Tumon Bay, January 8, 1946, Gressitt and Ingram, 35 specimens, 37 to 60 mm. The following paratypes are from the Marshall Islands: U.S.N.M. no. 141041, Bikini Atoll, Eman Island, July 17, 1947, S-46-405, Schultz, Brock, Hiatt, and Myers, 5 specimens, 61 to 76 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 112395, Rongerik Atoll, Latoback Island, June 28, 1946, S-46-238, Schultz and Herald, 11 specimens, 23 to 44 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 112396, Rongelap Atoll, Naen Island, July 30, 1946, 8-46-3802, Herald, 33 specimens, 30 to 70 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 1410388, Eniwetok Atoll, Aaraanbiru Island, June 3, 1946, S-46-198, Schultz, 8 specimens, 28 to 67 mm; Chicago Nat. Hist. Mus. no. 44703, Bikini Island, August 14, 1946, S-46-349, Herald, 20 specimens, 22 to 65 mm; C.N.H.M. no. 44704, Rongelap Atoll, mi- aetok Island, July 20, 1946, S-46-267, Herald and Brock, 11 specimens, 31.5 to 61 mm; C.N.H.M. no. 44705, Rongerik Atoll, Latoback Island, Aug- ust 14, 1946, 8-1041, Schultz, Brock, and Donald- son, 2 specimens, 31 to 49 mm. The following paratypes are from the Philip- pine Islands, collected by the Albatross: U.S.N.M. no. 96435, Langao Point, Luzon, June 24, 1909, 1 specimen, 70 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 152552, Little Santa Cruz Island, May 28, 1908, 2 specimens, 69 to 74mm; U.S.N.M. no. 152551, Dodepo Island, Celebes, November 19, 1909, 1 specimen, 49 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96455, Tamahu Island, December 12,1909, 1 specimen, 71 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96427, Tara Island, December 14, 1908, 2 specimens, 52 and 64 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 152549, Alimango Bay, Burias Island, March 5, 1909, 1 specimen, 63 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 152550, Makyan Island, November 29, 1909, 1 specimen, 69 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96460, Port Palapag, June 3, 1909, 2 specimens, 61 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 152553 Bubuan Island, Jolo, February 14, 1908, 2 speci- mens, 47 and 57 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 152548, Langao Point, Luzon, June 24, 1909, 4 specimens, 47 to 66 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96423, Port Palapag, June 3, 1909, 1 specimen, 49 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96410, Pararongpang Island, June 11, 1909, 5 specimens, 47 to 65 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96473, Mactan Island, Cebu, March 25, 1909, 1 speci- men, 82 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96440, Limbones Cove, February 8, 1909, 1 specimen, 49 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96484, Candaraman Island, Jan- uary 4, 1909, 1 specimen, 64 mm; U.S.N.M_ no. 96477, Biri Channel, June 1, 1909, 1 specimen 59 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96437, Biri Channel, June 1, 1909, 2 specimens, 59 and 61 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96432, Philippines, | specimen, 50 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96447, Guntao Island, December 20, 1908, 1 specimen, 52 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96453, Ligpo Point, Belagam Bay, June 18, 1908, 1 specimen, 31 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96469, Maculabo Island, June 14, 1909, 1 specimen, 48 mm; U.S.N AM. no. 96452, Sabalayan, Mindoro, December 12, 1908, 1 specimen, 47 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 96468, Port Langean, Palawan Island, April 8, 1909, 1 speci men, 38 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 152547, Candaraman Island, Balabac, June 4, 1909, 1 specimen, 47 mm. The following paratypes were collected in var 108 ious localities: U.S.N.M. no. 152554, Fiji Islands, 1 specimen, 37 mm.; U.S.N.M. no. 72715, Java, collected by Bryant-Palmer, 1 specimen; U.S.- N.M. no. 65463, Manga Reva, February 4, 1905, Albatross, 26 specimens, 38 to 70 mm; U.S.- N.M. no. 152555, Samoan Islands, Jordan and Kellogg, 5 specimens, 43 to 80 mm; U.S.N.M. no. 152556, Samoan Island, Tutuila Island, Pago Pago Bay, June 2, 1939, 11 specimens, 39 to 59 mm. The following paratypes were collected by the University of Washington group in the Marshall Islands: Eniwetok Atoll, Rigili Island, July 24, 1948, 1 specimen, 47 mm; Eniwetok Atoll, Rigili Island, August 10, 1949, Welander, 1 specimen, 53 mm; Bikini Atoll, Ion Island, August 7, 1947, 1 specimen, 62 mm; Bikini Atoll, Airy Is'and, August 14, 1947, 1 specimen, 57 mm; Bikini Atoll, Amen Island reef, July 31, 1947, 1 speci- men, 77 mm; Bikini Island, August 1, 1946, 5 specimens 60 to 77 mm, Bikini Island, July 24 1947, depth 33 feet, 13 specimens, 36 to 83 mm; Likiep Atoll, Likiep Island, August 22, 1949, 11 specimens, 27 to 52 mm; Rongerik Atoll, Latoback Island, August 16, 1947, 1 specimen, 28 mm. Fie. 1.—Chromis atripectoralis, n. sp., a black and white print of a kodachrome picture taken of the holotype at Bikini. Description —Dorsal fin rays XII, 9 or 10 (usually 10); anal II, 9 or 10 (usually 10); pee- torals u, 16 to 19 (usually 17 or 18); pelvies I, 5; branched caudal rays 7 + 6; transverse scale rows 24 to 27 from upper edge of gill opening to base of caudal rays; 2 between lateral line and origin of dorsal, 9 between lateral line and origin of anal; dorsal lateral line with 15 or 16 tubular scales; gill rakers on first gill arch, 6 to9 + 1 + 19 to 22, total 28 to 31. Depth of body 2.0 to 2.2, length of head 3.1 to 3.6, both in standard length (tip of snout to base of middle caudal rays); snout 3.5 to 4.0, eye 2.8 to 3.3, least preorbital width 7.0 to 8.0, length of upper jaw 2.5 to 2.9, postorbital part of head (hind margin of eye to upper edge of gill opening) JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 3 2.2 to 2.5, interorbital width 2.9 to 3.1, least depth of caudal peduncle 2.0 to 2.3, length of pectoral fin 1.2 to 1.3, length of pelvic fin 1.2 to 1.3, length of second dorsal spine 2.0 to 2.3, length of upper caudal rays 0.6 to 1.0, lower 0.7 to 0.9, all in length of head (tip of snout to pos- terior margin of opercular membrane); depth of caudal peduncle into length of caudal peduncle 1.1 to 1.4; angle of upper profile with lengthwise axis of body 33° to 48°, profile straight to convex. Teeth of jaws conical, widely spaced, an outer row enlarged teeth, in lower jaw these projecting anteriorly near symphysis, a few teeth at sides near tip of lower jaw curve out posteriorly; inner teeth minute in single row in upper jaws, forming small patches of very minute teeth on either side of symphysis in lower jaw; snout scaled to tip, line from eye, including nostril and along upper edge of preorbital naked; preorbitals and sub- orbitals scaled, lower margin of latter almost en- tirely obscured; preopercle produced at angle, its posterior margin entire with some irregular crenu- lations observable at angle in many specimens; no scales on bases of soft dorsal and anal; upper and lower caudal rays filamentous, 3 free spines on upper and lower caudal base; profile angle, meas- ured with one side of angle lying along closed lower jaw to tip of snout and the other side from snout to nape directly above gill opening, 80° to 96°. Color vn alcohol.—Head and upper half of body bluish gray to brown; lower sides and_ belly lighter, pale to silvery; a narrow dark to bluish line from eye, just under nostril toward middle of snout along naked area; iris faintly bluish; spiny dorsal membrane more or less dusky, this some- times accentuated basally and distally, spines dusky; lips, especially at tips of jaws dusky to black; soft dorsal and anal rays dusky, membranes lighter; upper and lower caudal rays brownish, middle rays dusky basally, pale distally; pelvics pale to dusky; pectorals pale except at base where upper rays are dusky to blackish, axil of pectoral with large black blotch, this broadest on dorsal portion and usually not extending to lower rays; in young less than 40 mm in standard length axil of pectoral dusky to black. Color when alwwe.—Top of head and back bright bluish green; a narrow blue-green line across upper part of eye to snout and a second line from an- terior margin of eye just below nostril to snout; lower half of head, sides of body and belly pure white or grayish white; spiny dorsal smoky pur- Marcu 1951 plish; soft dorsal and anal rays dusky, membranes faintly yellowish; upper and lower caudal rays greenish, outer margins blackish, middle rays greenish on scaled portion, yellowish on naked portion, pelvics greyish; pectorals clear hyaline except upper ray dusky. Remarks —This new species may be differ- entiated from C. caeruleus on the basis of two striking characters: The black axil of the pectoral fin and by more branched pectoral rays (see table of counts) usually 17 or 18 in atripectoralis, whereas caeruleus usually has 15 or 16. The pec- toral axil of caeruleus is pigmented with black dots forming a dusky area only along the dorsal part, thence fading ventrally where no pigment cells occur or only a few, whereas atripectoralis WELANDER AND SCHULTZ: CHROMIS ATRIPECTORALIS 109 has a black axil and the individual black pigment cells are not isolated when viewed under mag- nification, the outer edge of this black axil sharply contrasts with the pale distal part of the axil. On specimens shorter than about 30 mm. in stand- ard length the axil is not quite as black as in longer specimens. We note that the distal margin of the spiny dorsal fin of atripectoralis may have a dusky to blackish line whereas that of caeruleus is pale. Although most of the descriptions in the litera- ture for these blue-green damsel fishes fail to mention the colorations of the pectoral axil, a few do so and show the spiny dorsal fin with a dark margin. We have listed a few such references in the synonymy. TaBLe 1.—Counts MabE On Two Species or CHROMIS | Number Number of fin rays of Number of gill rakers on first arch vertical Species and locality Soa | Dorsal | Anal | Pectoral Thaoail pee eae Below angle line | XII) 9 |10 IT 9 |10/ ii 15 16 17/18 19 24 25 26 27| 6 7/8|9| 1 |19'20 21 22 23/24 Ileal | ie C. caeruleus: Marshallpliclands erate crr sci eee ra aac cer - | 18°) 3)15)18;—)18'42} 832) 2—— —/ 3 19; 8—|/ 4) 7] 1) 12) |——| 5} 6) 1j— MamiamastIslands. 2s. 022.2 ees sbsne sade: | aS 1 a Lo = ehilippinedslan dss ans stevia a eerie: = ———— —16 Fh} il jst le Phoenix and Samoan Islands........ eae ae -....{ 6 | 1) 5} 6] 1) 5) 38} 1) 2———|— —— — — — | § 6 |—|—| 2] 2} 1 DG alo ao gaa eiiece acepiy claire Se 24 | 4 20 24] 1 23 83:14 62) 7— ——| 3.19 8—| 412! 2) 18 |—|—| 7| 8) 2) 1 C. atripectoralis: | Mars hallBislandsteerrvatace sais site cuter ee 16 | 1:15 16) 1 15 31 —| 2.11/21] 1] 4,10 10] 7] 1| 3,10, 1| 15 1| 4) 7) 3—|— Marianas Islands................-..-0-0020000005- Se i ol Se = PS Pivibpoype® WOhyNClS: soanueseecoconscqcadacescuseen — -—-———— 16——| 8} s—— — ——————|) — -—— eel Phoenix and Samoan Islands..............-...-. 4 || 4] 4) 2] 2} 5 4) 1 1 1 | = a ANOLIANL 2: 2 So Ot eel re ee noe Pl 20 119 20 317,73 — 3 2349) 2| 4 1110 1) 3,10} 1} 15 1| 4 a Si TABLE 2.—MEASUREMENTS RECORDED FOR Two SPECIES OF CHROMIS (EXPRESSED IN THOUSANDTHS OF THE STANDARD LENGTH) C. atripectoralis C. caeruleus Measurements BanWAeall Bikini Atoll eee ji eee Paratype Paratype | Paratype | Paratype Holotype | Standard length in millimeters...........2... 30.2 45.0 58.7 31.1 46.1; 52.3 | 67 | 40.5 Greatestiaepthroimbod yards nieaanee 464 449 477 | 462 | 475 | 470 455 458 rene thvoigheadipn newer asic: he oricg ie vers 301 298 303iiae aS 09m mee293) 311 SN 1 | SHG La iygiin @ Seb iaadacatnaumoemeouonece secHee bon 79 84 83 73 76 79 87) 80 MYaAMeEteniol Cyercusevacomurs sy a eseMm omenieae 96 96 85 112 93 101 100 113 Least preorbital width.......................- 20 24 29 29 24 fo 8 31 31 Weng tiMomup perry awena-ce ce ascrieneu neces 99 113 114 116 117 122 112 120 Postorbitalapantiotmhead ssn. seen ceeeiee 129 120 126 | 119 abet 127 136 137 EO OM AW Ve pe eongeensob abe paneee hada 86 84 99 | 108 | 91 105 90 101 Least depth of caudal peduncle............... 129 122 131 138 | 143 | aR 130 142 Deng thiofipectoral fins. . 2. sse seen: 242 249 266 270 | 269 | 249 251 265 Length of pelvie fin..................... 268 240 267 251 | 256 | 281 230 251 Length of third to sixth dorsal spine......... 162 140 150 | 182 154 135 149 147 Length of upper caudal rays.................. 331 — 341 | - 360 -- 298 362 Length of lower caudal rays.................. 331 — 310 338 321 324 103 386 Length of caudal peduncle.....+.............. 145 160 170 170 182 183 221 222 110 To the recognized Chromis caeruleus (Cuvier and Valenciennes) we refer the following named species: Heliases caeruleus Cuvier and Valen- ciennes, Histoire naturelle des poissons 5: 497. 1830 (New Guinea; Ulea); H. frenatus, ibid.: 498 (Guam); H. lepisurus, ibid.: 498 (New Guinea). Heliases frenatus, Sauvage, Histoire naturelle des poissons 16: 486, pt. 28, fig. 1. 1887 (Madagasear); Chromis lepisurus Bleeker, Atlas Ichthy. 9: pl. 408, fig. 7. 1877, and Nat. Verh. Holland. Maatsch. Wet. 2 (6): 164. 1877 (Hast Indies; Zanzibar; Andamans; Guam; Ulea). Heli- astes lepidurus Giinther, Catalogue of the fishes in the British Museum 4: p. 63, 1862 (Amboina; emended spelling for H. lepisurus Cuvier and Valenciennes); Day, Fishes of India 2: 389, pl. 82, fig. 1. 1877 (Andamans); Giinther, Fische der Siidsee, Journ. Mus. Godeffroy 15 (pt. 7): 238 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 3 (in part), pl. 128, fig. D (only). 1881. Glyphiodon anabatoides Day, Proc. Zool. Soc. London 1870: 696. Glyphisodon bandanensis Bleeker, Nat. Tijdschr. Ned. Indie 2: 248. 1851 (Neira, Banda). Chromis caeruleus (in part), Jordan and Seale, Bull. U.S. Bur. Fish. 25 (1905): 290. 1906 (Sa- moan Islands; in a letter to Dr. Jordan, see p. 291, from Dr. Vaillant who examined the types of caeruleus, frenatus and lepisurus, all three are referred to a single species by him); Aoyagi, H., Biogeographica, Trans. Biogeog. Soc. Japan 4 (1): 186, fig. 14. 1941 (Japan). Remarks.—Fowler and Bean, U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 100, 7: 31, 61. 1928, have proposed the sub- genus Hoplochromis for C. caeruleus, characterized by having the ‘front edge of lower jaw with 6 short conic teeth flaring outward.” ICHTHYOLOGY .—A new genus and species of anacanthobatid skate from the Gulf of Mexico. Henry B. BranLow and WILLIAM C. SCHROEDER.* (Communicated by L. P. Schultz.) In 1924 von Bonde and Swart! proposed a new genus Anacanthobatis for Leiobatis marmoratus von Bonde and Swart, a curi- ous batoid from the Natal coast; skatelike in that its pelvic fins are so deeply concave outwardly that they are entirely subdivided with the anterior subdivision limblike, but differing from all typical skates in their perfectly naked skins and in lacking dorsal fins. A second new species, dubia, agreeing with marmoratus in naked skin and in fila- mentous prolongation of the snout, but dif- fering from it in that the outer margins of the posterior subdivision of its pelvic fins are fused along their anterior one-half with the inner margins of the pectorals, was also referred to Anacanthobatis by von Bonde and Swart.? But the unique specimen seems to have lost most of its tail, so that the presence or absence of dorsal fins remains to be learned. Anacanthobatis is included among the Dasyatidae by Barnard,’ by Fowler,! and * Contribution no. 554 from the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution. ‘Mar. Biol. Surv. South Africa Rep. 3, spec. Rep. 5 [1922]: 18, pl. 23, and accompanying errata slip. 1924. FILO, Chiiss j9s 19). ’ Ann. South African Mus. 21: 79. 1925. 4U. 8S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 100, 13: 448. 1941. by Smith.’ But the nature of its pelvic fins seems to us to place it among the rajoids, as a separate family, Anacanthobatidae, be- cause of its naked skin and lack of dorsal fins. No batoid resembling Anacanthobatis was seen again until the autumn of 1950, when trawlings by the U. S. Fish and Wild Life Service vessel Oregon in the northern side of the Gulf of Mexico, off the Mississippi, yielded two specimens that agree with the South African A. marmoratus von Bonde and Swart in structure of pelvics, wholly naked skin, and long slender tail without dorsal fins, but with A. dubia von Bonde and Swart in the fact that the outer margins of the posterior subdivision of the pelvic fin is fused along the anterior two-thirds with the inner margin of the pectorals, which is not the case in marmoratus. But the Gulf of Mexico form differs from both marmora- tus‘and dubius in that the end of the snout is expanded in leaflike form (Fig. 1). The marginal fusion of pelvic fins with pectorals now established for two species is so unusual a character as to justify a new genus, for which we propose the name Springeria, in recognition of Stewart Spring- ° Sea fishes of southern Africa: 71. 1949. Marcu 1951 BIGELOW AND SCHROEDER: er’s productive studies of the elasmobranchs oi Florida and the Gulf. And the curious shape of the snout equally necessitates a new species, which we name /folirostris for obvious reasons. Springeria, n. gen. Genotype.—Springeria folirostris, n. sp. prolonged as Generic characters.—Snout either ANACANTHOBATID SKATE 111 a simple filament, or expanded terminally in shape shown in Fig. 1, terminating in a soft filament; firm rostral cartilage extending to base of filament; outer margins of posterior lobes of pelviecs united along first two-thirds of their length with inner margins of pectorals; inner margins of posterior pelvic lobes attached nearly to tips to sides of tail. Tail without lateral folds, its lower side as well as its upper side with caudal membrane. Pelvic transverse, its anterior Fic. 1.—Springeria folirostris, n.sp., male, 400 mm long, holotwpe(U. S. N. M. no. 152546); \, End of tail, about X1.8; B, mouth and nasal curtain, about X1.8; C, three rows of teeth, upper, about X10. 112 profile slightly concave rearward, a long slender process at either end, directed forward, no radial cartilages along anterior half of basipterygial cartilages of pelvic fins. Species—Two species known, 8S. folvrostris, n. sp., from the Gulf of Mexico, and probably also dubia von Bonde and Swart, 1924, South Africa. Springeria folirostris, n. sp. Study material—Immature male, 400 mm long to base of terminal filament; northern Gulf of Mexico off the Mississippi River, lat. 29° 02’ N., long. 88° 34’ W.; 232-258 fathoms; holotype,U. 8. N. M. no. 152546; and very young male, 125 mm long, same general locality, lat. 29° O01’ N., long. 88° 30’ W., paratype, Museum of Compara- tive Zoology. Distinctive characters —Springeria folirostris differs from all other known batoids in the peculiar leaflike expansion of the end of its snout. Specimens with this and the tail damaged would still be easily separable from all other rajoids of the Atlantic by their perfectly naked skins; from all dasyatid and myliobatid rays by the nature of their pelvic fins. Description of type (proportional dimensions in percent of total length).—Disc: Extreme breadth 51.6; length 55.3. Length of snout in front of orbits 21.8; in front of mouth 24.3. Orbits: Horizontal diameter 2.9; distance be- tween 2.6. Spiracles: Length 1.0; distance be- tween 5.1. Mouth: Breadth 4.5. Nostrils: Dis- tance between mner ends 5.8. Gill openings: Lengths, first 0.75, third 0.75, fifth 0.50; distance between inner ends, first 9.2, fifth 4.8. Caudal fin: Length, base, upper 6.0, lower 5.0. Pelvies: Anterior margin 12.7. Distance from tip of snout® to center of cloaca 47.6; from center of cloaca to tip of tail 52.4. Dise from base of terminal filament about 1.1 times as long as broad; maximum anterior angle from level of base of terminal expansion of snout to level of spiracles about 85°; end of snout ex- panded in leaflike form as shown in Fig. 1, terminating in a slender filament about as long as distance between spiracles. Margins of dise rearward from terminal expansion weakly con- cave about to level of spiracles, then altering to continuously and strongly convex around to very short inner margins without definite outer 6 Exelusive of rostral filament, which is 23 mm long. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 3 or posterior corners. Tail very slender, laterally compressed, increasingly so rearward; its width at axils of pelvic fins (where thickest) about as great as length of eye; its length from center of cloaca to tip about 1.1 times as great as distance from cloaca to base of terminal filament of snout. Skin perfectly naked everywhere, without dermal denticles of any sort. Snout in front of eyes about 8.4 times as long to base of terminal filament as distance between orbits, its length in front of mouth about 6.5 times as great as distance between exposed nostrils. Orbit about 1.1 times as long as distance between orbits, and nearly 3 (2.9) times as long as spiracle which is noticeably small. Nasal curtain con- spicuously fringed, each side with 10-11 lobelets; outer margin of nostril only slightly expanded with irregular edge. Exposed nostril noticeably minute. Mouth on immature males a little arched forward, probably also on females, its shape not known for mature males. Teeth 33 on young male, low, with obscure cutting edge but no cusp, and arranged in quincunx. Teeth of mature males not seen. Gill openings minute; first about one-sixth as long as breadth of mouth; fifth about two-thirds as long as first; distance be- tween inner ends of first gills about 1.6 times as long as between exposed nostrils, and between fifth gills about 1.9 times. No dorsal fins. Base of upper caudal fin-membrane about 1.0 times as long as distance between exposed nostrils, of shape illustrated (Fig. 1), its maximum width about one-tenth (about 9 percent) as great as length of its base; lower caudal membrane about half (55 percent) as wide as upper, its origin a little posterior to origin of upper; the two lobes discontinuous at tip of tail. Anterior leglike subdivision of pelvics nearly as long (95 percent) as from pelvic origin to rear corners, broader than thick, fleshy, with one articulation about midway its length, inner edge of the terminal segment scalloped, corresponding to tips of the three radial cartilages. Posterior lobe of pelvics with narrowly rounded rear corner reaching rear- ward only about as far as rear limits of disc; outer margin joined for about two-thirds its length to margin of pectoral, inner edge joined nearly to tip to side of tail. Anterior rays of pectorals extending forward to a little posterior to base of terminal expansion of snout; firm rostral cartilage reaching about to base of terminal filament. Marcu 1951 Color: Ash gray above, except unpigmented and translucent in spaces between rostral ridge and anterior rays of pectorals; orbits dusky, terminal expansion of snout narrowly and ir- regularly margined with black, also the posterior part of the back with a sooty blotch on one side near midline, perhaps the result of injury. Lower surface pale grayish white, the outer posterior belt of pectorals sooty gray, terminal expansion of snout narrowly and irregularly edged with black; tail sooty at base. Development stages—Presumably Springeria is oviparous like other rajids, but its eggs have not been seen yet. Size.-—How large this skate may grow is not PITELKA: RACE NAMES IN CENTRAL AMERICAN JAY 113 known, for the larger of the two specimens seen so far, 400 mm long to base of terminal filament, is an immature male, its claspers not yet reach- ing as far as the tips of its pelvies. Habits—The two specimens seen so far were trawled at 232-258 fathoms, this with the im- probability that this skate would have been overlooked if it occurred in shallow water, sug- gests that it is confined to depths greater than about 200 fathoms. Nothing else is known of its habits. Range.—So far known only in the northern side of the Gulf of Mexico off the Mississippi River, at the localities listed on page 112 under Study material. ORNITHOLOGY .—Race names in the Central American jay, Cyanolyea argenti- eula. FRANK A. PrrELKa, Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University of Cali- fornia. (Communicated by H. G. Deignan.) The silver-throated jay, Cyanolyca argen- tigula, is a species of restricted distribution in montane forests of Central America, and at present two rather well marked races are recognized, C. u. argentigula (Lawrence) in central Costa Rica and C. a. blandita Bangs in northern Panama. When Bangs (Proc. Biol. Soe. Washington 19: 109. 1906) de- scribed the latter from the Volc4n de Chiriqui, he evidently did not see Lavrence’s type of argentigula and assumed from Law- rence’s description (Ann. Lye. Nat. Hist. New York 11: 88. 1875) that the latter re- ferred to specimens with white throats rather than to those with violet-gray throats. Speci- mens of the white-throated form, represent- ing argentigula as now known, were then and are now more numerous in collections than specimens of the gray-throated form, blan- dita. Reading of Lawrence’s description in the light of current knowledge of the two races will reveal that the original descrip- tion, rather vague as regards critical details, suggests argentigula more than it does blan- dita. Ridgway’s description (Birds of North and Middle America, pt. 3: 319. 1904), based on specimens from both northern Panama and central Costa Rica, applies to and in- cludes both races as now recognized. From these considerations Bangs, in 1906, evi- dently deseribed blandita on the assumption that Lawrence’s name applied to the best- known population, that of central Costa Rica. The type of argentigula, however, which I examined in Washington, D. C., in December 1949, so closely resembles the type of blandita, examined in Cambridge two months earlier, that both evidently rep- resent one and the same race. Interestingly enough, the basic facts con- cerning the type of argentigula were pub- lished in 1889 by Ridgway (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 11: 541), when he compared it with specimens from the Volcan Irazti and stated: “Compared with the type [four adults] all have the throat-patch decidedly paler, its color being silvery white with a very faint purplish tinge, instead of light silvery grey, with a very strong tinge of purplish blue.” Differences in the crown-band are also fully and correctly described by Ridgway. These are the differences used by Bangs to dis- tinguish blandita. There is ample evidence to support that provided by the types themselves. In the specimen register of the United States Na- tional Museum, the information on the type of argentigula, no. 67963, is as follows: Orig- inal number 320, female {inverted Venus’s mirror sign on original label indicates female, as collector used usual sign for male|, Ta- lamanca, Costa Riea, received from William M. Gabb. In a subsequent entry, C. W. Richmond added the details that the speci- 114 men was collected by Juan Cooper, in May or June 1874. In Cooper’s original catalogue, field numbers 315-320 are listed under the locality heading “En Camo,” a phrase of unclear meaning (see beyond). Immediately following 320, however, is the locality head- ing “Cipurio” [=Sipurio]. Cooper’s cata- logue carries no dates, but the listing is chronological. It seems clear that the type was obtained near Sipurio in southeastern Costa Rica, near the Panama border, and on the Carib- bean slope of the Cordillera de Talamanca. From present-day knowledge of the altitu- dinal distribution of C. argentigula, we can say that the type was collected well above that lowland town. From a brief account published by Gabb in 1874 (Amer. Journ. Sei. 108: 388-390), it is known that in the course of a four months’ journey into Ta- lamanea, he reached the summit of Pico Blanco, a major peak above and south of Sipurio, on June 13 of that year. In another account, also written in 1874 (see pp. 267— 286, Geografia de Costa Rica, by F. Mon- tero Barrantes, Barcelona, 1892), Gabb out- lines the route of his ascent between the rios Urén and Lari, thence across the latter and upward to the summit. The descent was apparently made between the rios Lari and Depari, or at least to the northwest of the ascent. Gabb was accompanied in Talamanca by Juan Cooper, and from Cooper’s catalogue and probably other clues, Richmond de- duced that the specimens listed under the heading “‘En Camo” were obtained in May or June 1874. “En Camo” probably means “en camino.” The former is the only local- ity heading used by Cooper other than ‘‘Ci- purio,’ which precedes and follows “En Camo.” Tt thus seems very likely that Lawrence’s type was collected near and more or less north of Pico Blanco, above Sipurio and probably in the drainage of the Rio Lari. This may be considered the restricted type locality of Cyanocitta argentigula Lawrence. The geographic details are given on a map 1 Gabb was a paleontologist, and I do not know of any evidence clearly indicating that some of the specimens credited to him (for example, by Good- win, Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 87: 455. 1945) were collected by him personally. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 3 accompanying Carriker’s report on Costa Rican birds (Ann. Carnegie Mus. 6: 314— 915. 1910), on which trails leading above Sipurio are indicated. According to Goodwin (Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 87: 279. 1945), the major faunal break in the highland faunas of Costa Rica appears to follow the valley of the Rio Reventazon, which, with the Rio Grande de Tarcoles, separates the Cordillera Cen- tral Gncluding Volean Irazi and Volean Tur- rialba) from the Cordillera de Talamanca. Faunal affinities of the latter range are to the south with Panama, at least among mammals (Goodwin, loc. cit.). We now have these facts: The type of argentigula shares with blandita the pale vio- let-gray throat and crown-band coloration which Bangs used to distinguish the latter race from the former. Cooper obtained the type of argentigula in montane highlands continuous with those inhabited by blandita but separated from mountains inhabited by the white-throated race to the north. Cy- anolyca blandita Bangs is thus a synonym of Cyanocitta argentigula Lawrence, and the name formerly applied to the northern race unfortunately must now be anplied to the southern race, including, as it has not here- tofore, the population of southern Costa Rica. The northern race, left without a name, may be known as— Cyanolyca argentigula albior, n. name Type.—Adult male, U. 8S. N. M. no. 209407, Voledn Turrialba, 9,680 feet, Costa Rica, March 28, 1908, collected by R. Ridgway and J. C. Zeledén, original number 582. \easurements of the type: Wing (chord), 118 mm; tail, 126; bill length (from nostril), 17.6; bill depth (at nostril), 10.1; tarsus, 35.3. Racial characters—Compared with C. a. argen- tigula of northern Panama and southern Costa Rica, throat lighter and less purplish (silvery white); transverse band on crown also lighter (silvery white), tinged marginally with pale lay- ender, but less brightly; supraauricular stripe lighter; wings and tail less purplish (Nigrosin Blue); size probably smaller (see table 1). Geographic distribution —Cordillera Central of Costa Rica [Voledn Irazu, Voledin Turrialba, La Hondura, Puente de Tierra, Retes, San Isidro de San José, and San Pedro (de Péas?)]. Marcu 1951 PROCEEDINGS: THE So far as I can determine now, other than Lawrence’s type, none of the specimens of a total of 87 examined by me comes from the mountains of southern Costa Rica, south of the rios Pirrfs and Reventazén. Six specimens bearing the lo- eality “Limon,” a Caribbean seaport, were not obtained there but elsewhere and possibly in the province of Limén, which includes the Tala- manea district and the Caribbean slopes of the Talamanca Range. But the specimens from “Li- mon” resemble those from the Cordillera Central and are assigned to C. a. albior. Nevertheless, the possibility remains that intergradation of characters occurs at the north end of the Cor- dillera de Talamanca. Acknowledgement is gratefully made to H. G. Deignan, United States National Museum, for ACADEMY 115 critical assistance in the preparation of this paper. Helpful suggestions were also received from J. L. Peters, Museum of Comparative Zoology. Speci- mens from the following collections were ex- amined: American Museum of Natural History, British Museum, Carnegie Museum, Chicago Natural History Museum, H. O. Havemeyer, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Royal On- tario Museum of Zoology, United States National Museum, University of California (Dickey col- lection), and University of Michigan (Museum of Zoology). I am indebted to the curators and owners of these collections for their kind co- operation. This paper results from researches supported by a John Simon Guggenehim Fellow- ship held im 1949-50. TaBLE 1—MEASUREMENTS OF ADULTS OF CYANOLYCA ARGENTIGULA i} Y o ~ Race | Sex pees | Range See Ne eee | C. a. albior | ; Maleseeee eee 31 112-123 118.2 + 0.5 3.0 NUBD se. osseaze apnea onal 15 111-120 115.4 + 0.8 3 emales 5 =: 0: 3.0 : Males........... 30 118-134 124.5 + 0.8 £1 UGH occ vos oo ssancon ede Females........ 14 116-126 121.4 + 1.0 3.7 ere Malesea)s- ee: 31 16.2-18.6 17.42 + 0.10 0.57 Pea peH aaa e eae Females........ 15 15.8-18.7 16.80 + 0.25 0.95 i VMalesseeee eee 31 §.8-10.1 9.31 + 0.07 0.38 Bill depth... Females........ 14 8.3- 8.9 9.14 40.11 0.42 Tes Males........... 32 32.7-35.7 34.15 + 0.13 0.76 e Temales........ 15 32.0-34.5 33.24 + 0.18 0.70 C_ a. argentigula ee Males........... 6 119-127 121.8 + 1.2 2.9 WEIN. coy oom se sion ozeenas Females....... 4 116-125 119.7 3.6 rae Males... 6 122-141 129.5 + 2.7 6.5 TS ee Females...... 4 125-132 128.5 3.5 Bill, length Males ........ 6 17.1-18.6 17.80 + 0.26 0.63 : Females........ 4 16.4-18.1 17.95 0.83 E Males 5 9.6-10.6 9.85 + 0.17 0.39 JED, COUN oes lnlternalesy 20. A 9.0-10.2 9.70 0.55 ai Males......-... 6 33.8-37.3 35.35 + 0.62 1.52 apy Iemales ... 4 32.1-35.2 33.95 nee 1 In samples of less than 30 specimens, N-1 was used in calculation of standard deviation. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 443d MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 443d meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club on January 16, 1951, was called to order at 8:07 p.m. by the President, F. B. Sirspen. Also present were: N. R. Surrx, H. S. Rappieye, J. A. Srevenson, H. A. Reyprer, A. T. McPurrson, W. R. WEDEL, J. S. Wititams, F. O. Con, F. A. Weiss, W. A. Dayton, C. A. Berrs, R. S. Dinu, E. W. Price, Marearer Pirrwan, H. W. Henrie, F. M. SETZLER, and, by invitation, R. G. Bares, T. D. Stewart, M. A. Mason, Waurer RaAMBeEerG, and B. D. Van Evera. The Committee on Membership submitted the names of four individuals proposed for resident membership. Seventeen persons previously pro- posed were elected, 14 to resident and 3 to non- resident membership. The President announced that all ments had been completed for the Annual Meet- ing to be held at the Kennedy-Warren on Janu- ary 18, 1951, at which time Dr. Per IK. Frouicu would address the Academy. arrange- 116 The General Chairman of the Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement, T. Dat Srewarr, called upon WALTER RaMBERG, Chair- man of the Engineering Sciences, to read the re- port of his Committee recommending SAMUEL Levy, National Bureau of Standards, for the annual award in recognition of his distinguished service in the structural analysis of aircraft. Dr. Stewart then read the report by the Comittee on Physical Sciences, which recommended Puxitip H. Asetson, Department of Terrestrial Mag- netism, in recognition of his distinguished service in the fields of chemistry, nuclear physics, and the physies of living organisms. Dr. Stewart read the report of the Committee on Biological Sciences, which recommended Davin H. Dunxup, U. 8. National Museum, for recognition of his dis- tinguished service in paleontology, especially by researches on early arthrodiran and teleost fishes. The Board of Managers unanimously accepted and approved the recommendations of the Com- mittee on Awards for Scientific Achievement. B. D. Van Evera, Chairman of the Com- mittee for the Teaching of Science, indicated that his Committee had decided that no award be made this year. Considerable discussion fol- lowed with regard to the difficulties in connection with the age limit as set by the rules of the Board and the advisability of increasing the number of recipients for these awards. The Chairman of the Committee on the En- couragement of Science Talent, M. A. Mason, read a report summarizing the work of the Com- mittee during the past year. Report will be pub- lished in the Proceedings of the Annual Meeting. The Special Committee on Joint Secretariat, consisting of Harvey L. Curtis, chairman, H. 8. RappLEYE, and NoRMAN BEKKEDAHL, submitted the following report: The following is a report to the Board of Man- agers of the Washington Academy of Sciences of a special committee appointed in March 1950 to ex- amine the desirability of establishing a central secretarial office to be used jointly by the various scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. This committee [has] sent a circular letter to all the afhliated societies on May 25, 1950, and a fol- low-up letter on November 20. Replies have been received from all but three of the societies. Six societies stated categorically that they were not interested. Eight societies have sent rather evasive replies. Not one of them indicated anything more than lukewarm interest in the matter. One society suggests that the Academy handle the meeting notices of all societies by means of a monthly pub- lication. Another society indicates that the Engi- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 3 neers’ Club has a project similar to that suggested by the Academy and that they are awaiting more complete information from that group before giv- ing a definite reply. As a result of the information summarized above, this committee does not feel that the Acad- emy would be justified at the present time in es- tablishing a central secretarial office for the scientific societies of Washington. In discussions concerning the central secre- tariat the question arose concerning the desir- ability of having an executive secretary to handle many of the affairs of the Academy now entrusted to the elected secretary and treasurer of the Acad- emy. It may be possible to have office space in the new building of the Cosmos Club and to have a retired member of the Academy serve as executive secretary on a part time basis. This question, how- ever, is considered outside the field of this special committee and no recommendations concerning it are intended. A summary of the activities of the committee is attached hereto. The Board expressed their gratitude for the work of the committee in completing its assign- ment. The following members, having retired from the gainful practice of their professions, were placed on the retired list: Atice C. Evans, Luoyp D. Friron, Maurice J. Smirx, JosepH S. WaprE. The Secretary reported the following deaths: Epwarp A. Briree, University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis., on June 9, 1950 (elected May 15, 1906); CHEsTER Srock, California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, Calif., on December 6, 1950. (elected February 6, 1942); JoHn F. En- BREE, Yale University, New Haven, Conn., on December 22, 1950 (elected June 28, 1943); H. EK. Ewinc, formerly of the U. S. Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, on January 5, 1951 (elected May 15, 1934). The Secretary read a report by W. N. Fenton, Chairman of the Committee on the 40-Year Index of the JouRNAL, indicating that the index had now been completed and the cards are marked for the printer. The Treasurer, Howarp 8. RappLeyE, out- lined the financial transactions for the year and submitted the report of the Auditing Committee. Details of this report will be printed as part of the Proceedings of the Annual Meeting. The President expressed his thanks to the Board and to the various committees for their active cooperation during the year. The meeting was then adjourned at 9:30 p.m. to partake of some refreshments offered by the outgoing President. F. M. Serziumr, Secretary. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences IP ROSCCICTI Be tae eee ose Cee cnet ae te ate eee Natuan R. Smitru, Plant Industry Station PARESTOENE CLE CEs See ts cron ea? Water RamBerc, N ational Bureau of Standards SCORAGD Us Saee ole ad eee SO ee F. M. DEFANDORF, National Bureau of Standards LSAT SOURGRS Goan aaCe eI Howarp 8S. Rappi5ys, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey LEE COTOSE ho 6 okt Senta oes renee ee eee eae Joun A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haraup A. Rexper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Philosophical Society of Washington......................... Epwarp U. Connon Anthropological Society of Washington......................... Watpo R. WEDEL Brologicallsocietyzof Washineton..5...0..5.+.4.004-5.--4s450eeees ee ChemicalisocietyofWashinetonyys sss ane es ee vee ne Josep J. FAHEY Entomological Society of Washington........................ Frepmrick W. Poos NatronsliGeographie Society: 4.002520. c-eceeses ones. ALEXANDER WETMORE GeoloricallSocietyzoh Washineton...ee) 0. 05s) see enone Lreason H. ApAms Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... ColumbraviistoricaliSocietya-- 2) 4chs5 sco ses ooo eos eee GILBERT GROSVENOR oumicalysocietyaon Washington. 475940) 4see0h le onesee sete e- EK. H. WALKER Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wiuuiam A. Dayton Washington Society of Engineers............................- Currrorp A. Betts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers Francis M. DreraNnDORF Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp S. Dinu Helminthological Society OH! WAINIORIOIN, son voncdecesancoooebancs L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Aneus M. Grirrin Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers....H=nry W. HempiE Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......... Hersert G. Dorsny District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers.... Elected Members of the Board of Managers: ANG) IBTAUTTEN NGPA ie ee een er ea ne W. F. Fosuaa, C. L. Gazin MRopdamWarye G03, 08 cee cess ced aes so oe C. F. W. Mursesecn*, A. T. McPHERSON To Jammer eYe Seige sae eo aeee een ae eee Sara E. Branuam, Mitron Harris* IB OURORO/MUIONOGENS sole tess ca kes san All the above officers plus the Senior Editor BoojisojmuditorsvandsAlssocvate, Havtonsn. 9-2-4 4eeese ea - aah eee [See front cover] Executive Committee....N. R. SmitrH (chairman), WatrprR RampBere, H. 8. RappLeye, J. A. Stevenson, F. M. Drranporr Committee on Membership............... L. A. SprnpLER (chairman), M. S. ANDERSON, MERRILL BERNARD, R. E. BLACKWELDER, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. HANSEN, D. B. Jones, Dorotuy Nickerson, F. A. Smiru, Heinz Specut, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings......... MarGaret Pittman (chairman), NorMAN BEKKEDAHL, W. R. Cuaruine, D. J. Davis, F. B. Scuenrz, H. W. Weis Committee on Monographs: To January 1952.....................J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), Pau H. OEHSER Momsen yp G 3h ey, ycmed vate eek cts asap homos at thelse Sold se naweness R. W. Iunay, P. W. OMAN AN@ diaiameniyy JOEL ca cee ae ae eee eae ern esa eee EIR eee 8. F. Buaxs, F. C. Kracek Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (GEoRee P. Watton, general chairman): For the Biological Sciences............ G. H. Coons (chairman), J. E. FaBeEr, JR., Myrna F. Joness, F. W. Poos, J. R. SwALLEN For the Engineering Sciences......... IR, (So IDE, (chairman), ARSHAM AMIRIKIAN, J. W. McBurney, Frank Neumann, A. H. Scorr For the Physical Sciences............. G. P. Wauron (chairman), F. a BRACKETT, G. E. Hoi, C. J. Humpureys, J. H. McMriien For Teaching of Science............ B. D. Van Evera (chairman), R. P. Barnes, F. E. Fox, T. Koppanyr, M. H. Martin, A. T. McPuerson Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research...................... L. E. Yocum (chairman), M. X. Suniivan, H. L. WairremorEe Committee on Policy and Planning: PRomamm arya O52 eestor sare ces sie aloes ede J. I. Horrman (chairman), M. A. Mason ING Lieemineieye MOVERS, Beis saree eee a eke eine ORR ER etce eae ae W. A. Dayton, N. R. Sarre Bop yemmmamyalO OA, cic elise ccna sls clare bose ee salads H. B. Couns, Jr., W. W. Ruspny Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: Ie denamenyy IQGH. -sccceccoobneoooode M. A. Mason ane A. T. McPHERSON PRO amr arayael 9 Dotan ees eeey Aaeratsiasbouc) sraianae oretans echoes ANG CLARK, F. L. Mower omanuanyel 954% n rane tian saree esi tins saeciees Jo Wile Gasca W. L. Scamirr Ikxgrorasgaaioe Op Counc OF As Als Alc Soanncocconunaccsdsdgccuecusonren F. M. Serzuer Committee of Auditors...... J. H. Martin (chairman), N. F. Braaren, W. J. YouDEN Committee of Tellers...W.G. BRoMBACHER (chairman), A. R. Merz, Lovisr M. Russeuu * Appointed by Board to fill vacancy. CONTENTS ArcHEOLOGY.—Additional data on the Denbigh Flint Complex in north- ern Alaska. RatpHS.Sotecki and RopertJ. HACKMAN.......... ENTOMOLOGY.—Duinoponera gigantea (Perty), a vicious stinging ant. H. Ay ADUARD 94 co. Oh5 84 tea diere 6 ala kee oe ee Zootocy.—A revision of the nomenclature of the Gorgoniidae (Coe- lenterata: Octocorallia), with an illustrated key to the genera. FREDERICK Mi. sBAYER. 00... 5.2. 0c 0) one) MatacoLtocy.—Recent species of the veneroid pelecypod Arctica. Davin IcutHyoLtoey.—Chromis atripectoralis, a new damselfish from the tropical Pacific, closely related to C. caeruleus, family Pomacentridae. Ar- THUR D. WELANDER and LeoNnARD P. SCHULTZ.................- IcHTHYOLOGy.—A new genus and species of anacanthobatid skate from the Gulf of Mexico. Henry B. BigeLow and WiuuiaM C. ScHROE- OrNITHOLOGY.—Race names in the Central American jay, Cyanolyca ar- gentigula.. BRANK AL PITeLKA.. 0.0.2 ...-.4... 905 oe PROCEEDINGS: Tam ACADEMY... 60 odes cae. esc) eee This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals Page 85 88 91 102 107 110 a Kf) mePAF UP, |} P2w2eD (~~ ¥ af Vot. 41 Aprit 1951 No. 4 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS CHARLES DRECHSLER WILLIAM F. FosHac J. P. E. Morrison PLANT INDUSTRY STATION U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BELTSVILLE, MD. ASSOCIATE EDITORS J. C. EWERS J. I. HorrMan ANTHROPOLOGY CHEMISTRY C. W. SABROSKY | T. P. THAYER ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY F, A. CHace, JR. Mirtam L. BomHARD BIOLOGY BOTANY R. K. Coox PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royau & GUILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28 , 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JoURNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- ouymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excesg of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. 8. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JOURNAL.—Per year.................000ceeeeeeeee $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl_—not available.*................ — — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, inel. (21 numbers per vol.).......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 40, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $341.00 MonoerapH No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’”’ by Herbert Friedmann. .$4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete......................00..000. $25.00 Single volumes; unboundlis:c oa ccs gees s-o see cece an dee eee 2.00 Single: numbers) 3. Seasons cone seeetae «oo ere oe Eee eee .25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOLUME 41 April 1951 No. 4 MATHEMATICS.—The theory of group representations.! Francis E. JOHNSTON, George Washington University. The modern theory of groups began with what are called permutation groups in the attempts of Lagrange, Ruffini, Vander- monde, and Galois to solve the general alge- braic equation of degree greater than 4. To- day we usually define a group abstractly by a set of postulates. Suppose we have a finite or infinite set of distinct elements s, t, u, --- and a rule of combination of these elements such that two of them may combine to pro- duce a unique element of the set, or such that an element may combine with itself to produce a unique element of the set. We shall call this process of combining ‘‘multi- plication” and shall write the two combining elements in juxtaposition as is done in ordi- nary algebraic multiplication; the result of their combination we shall call their “‘prod- uct”’. We assume the following four postu- lates satisfied (the first of which has already been included in the above description) : 1. The product ts is a unique element wu of the set u = ts. 2. The associative law holds: w(ts) = (ut)s. 3. There exists in the set an element e such se = s for all s of the set. (e is the right identity.) 4. To every element s of the set there corre- sponds an elements denoted by s! such that ss! = e. (s_1 is the right inverse of s with regard to e.) Such a set of elements is said to constitute a group. It can be shown that the assumed right identity is unique and that it is also a unique left identity. It can be shown also that the right inverse of an element is unique and is also a unique left inverse for that ele- ment, so that we have se = es = s and sts=sslt=e. If it happens that st = ts the group is 1 Address of the retiring president of the Philo- sophical Society of Washington, January 14, 1950. said to be abelian. We may define the inte- gral powers of an element: s? = s-s, and by induction s” = s-s”1. Also s-” = (s—!)” and s°? = e. All the elementary algebraic laws of exponents immediately follow. If the number of elements in the group is finite the group is a finite group, otherwise infinite. For a finite group the number of elements is the order of the group. Evidently the powers of a single element constitute a group, called a cyclic group. If this group is finite, that is, if s* = e and s” ¥ e, where m is less than n, then n is said to be the order of the element s. A cyclic group of infinite order is said to be a free group. Elementary examples of groups are nu- merous. If the rule of combination is ordi- nary arithmetic multiplication, then the set of all positive rational numbers is a group, in which one is the identity and the inverse of eZ is 1 Tf the rule of combination is ordi- nary algebraic multiplication then the four numbers 1, —1, 7, —7 (22 = —1) constitute a cyclic group of order 4, since the elements are the powers of 7. Sets of nonsingular square matrices con- stitute groups, the elements of the matrices being numbers of the complex number field and the rule of combination being ordinary matrix multiplication. That is, if 11 A213 * + * Ain bi biz bis > ++ bin A ee Ani An2An3z*** Ann bri One bns* ++ Onn C11 Ci2 Cig ** * Cin c see and AB = C Cni Cn2 Cn3*** Cnn n c= 1] 2s then c;; = > Aix De; where k=1 J=1, 117 MAY 1 - 1951 118 The identity matrix for a group of matrices each with n rows is the matrix I 22 @ GQ) kaa @ (0) @ oo il and methods of computing the inverse of a nonsingular matrix are well known. The three groups below are simple examples of groups of matrices. The first set of six ma- trices constitutes a group of order six. Be- neath each matrix I have written a letter which may serve to designate the element, since the same group is used as an illustra- tion later. H is the identity element; A, B and C are of order two, while D and F are of order three. The second set of six matrices likewise constitute a group of order six, w representing a complex cube root of unity. The same letters as before may be associated with these elements for later identification, E again being the identity, A, B, and C of order 2, and D and F of order 3. The third set of matrices constitute a group of order 8. owe! E A (3 Or 3 1 HVS 33 Jy NERS a As B ¢ ( 4 Ny ( a) Vs 3/43 =4 J, D F ( ) j ae where w + w =0 0 0 0 -1 Gceete) i @ Oa we js =n). tO 0 Q =i, Vil course arose from Matrices of “linear transformations” and the groups of matrices are really the groups of the linear trans- formations which give rise to these matrices. In a mathematical system involving certain JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 4 variables, 11, %2,-°-:, %,, 1t may be con- venient to replace these variables by new variables, x1, 2, --- x, through the me- dium of a linear transformation: y ah = (eet =p 00° SP Cigdin Dp = Oni) ea A / Un = AniLy ap te a Ohodte A second linear transformation may replace A the a1, ,° > ta by once Nu / v1 = buar + 555 Se hint WY / / 2 = Dota 4° - = ate Uondn B » &R o WS tn = Dati + --> + Danba By the ‘‘product”’ of two such linear trans- formations we mean simply their sequential performance and the result of first operating on the system by the transformation A and then by the transformation B will be the same as if we operated by the single trans- formation C, where C = BA, which replaces the vee variables Thewily Dy? aA 5 a 5 . In practice, however, we generally use Ati the unaccented sarmatblles on the right in a given transformation and simple accented ones on the left, imagining the process to start anew each time. I said that group theory began with per- mutation groups in the attempt of mathe- maticians to solve algebraic equations of higher degree. If we have a set of letters or symbols which appear in a mathematical system, and each of them is replaced by a distinct one of the set then we effect a ‘‘per- mutation” on the letters. This process may be denoted by writing them in any con- venient order on one line (the “natural”’ order if they seem to possess one) and then writing below each letter the one by which it is replaced. Usually large parentheses are used to enclose the array. Thus if the sym- bols are the letters a, b, c, d, four such per- mutations are the following: aca) Gee) eee) eee) abecd/, beda/, cdab/, dabec}. The first of these represents the identity per- mutation wherein each letter remains un- changed; in the second permutation a is re- placed by b, b by c, c by d, and d by a; in the third a is replaced by c, b by d, c by a, EW al Society of Washington, 1949. 1c Francis E. Jounston, President of the Philosoph “ ni 1 + j 4 7 - ¥ r = . : Ae \ 1 Aprint 1951 and d by b; in the last a is replaced by d, b by a, c by b, and d by c. The product of two permutations is their sequential per- formance; thus the product of the second of the above permutations followed by the third is the last. It is not difficult to verify the fact that the above four permutations satisiy the requirements for a group and hence constitute a permutation group. Sometimes it is convenient to represent a permutation by a sequence of letters in which each letter is replaced by the letter to its right, the rightmost letter in the ‘‘cycle’’ be- ing replaced by the letter at the beginning of the cycle. If when the cycle is thus “closed”’ all letters have not been accounted for, a new cycle is begun, and so on until all letters have been taken care of. In this scheme, letters which are replaced by them- selves constitute cycles of a single letter and when there is no danger of confusion such cycles are frequently omitted. When a per- mutation is written in its simplest form as a product of cycles no two cycles will have a common letter, and hence they will be com- mutative and may be written in any order. Thus hee ) = abe-cd = bea-cd = bea-de = de-bea edca Indeed there are 12 ways to represent the above permutation in the manner under dis- cussion. Denote by a; the number of unary cycles, by a: the number of cycles with two letters each, by a3 the number of cycles with three letters each, etc. Then ai + 2a. + 8a3 + --- + na, =n Such a permutation is said to belong to the “class” (a1, @2,°°* , Qn). When a permutation on n letters is written in the 2-row form the letters of the top row may be written in an arbitrary order and those of the lower row may then be written in any one of n! orders; hence there are n/ permutations on n letters and the aggregate will constitute a group, the ‘‘symmetric”’ group on n letters. It is not difficult to see (as brought out in the next paragraph) that the number of classes of elements in the symmetric group equals the number of parti- tions of n with regard to addition into non- negative summands. This is a very old prob- JOHNSTON: THEORY OF GROUP REPRESENTATIONS 119 lem in number theory and we tabulate the number of partitions for some values of n: Value of n Number of partitions of n 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 7 6 11 7 15 8 22 9 30 10 42 16 231 20 627 200 3,972,999 ,029 388. For example, the partitions of 5 are 5, 4 + 1, Oa ae qe dl oe Il SS oy ele iho) ae a te 1+1,1+1+1+ 1+ 1,a total of seven. If we write a2 +--+: + an =o An = An then Ait A2+ee? An = MM She SAS --- > dA [OO and CN, ey = Debden Qn—1 = An-1 — Any an = dp A partition of » will thus be in the form (Ar, A2, As, °°: , An). For example if n is 10 we have the partition (3, 2, 2, 1, 1, 1, OO; 0, O) SG, 4, 4 Uy lo) S&B. WO). We have omitted unnecessary zeros at the end and also have used exponents to avoid duplication. Here at =) 3h 2 — lh ant =62) 210 aj =2—-—1=1, ay=1—-1=0 az = as = ag = an = 0. Hence the above partition corresponds to a class of elements having the structure: one unary cycle, one ternary cycle, one cycle of six letters. For n = 3 and n = 4 we list the partitions, the number of elements in the corresponding class, and the actual permu- tations: 120 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 4 x Number of List of Partition Class permutations permutations p= 3} (Ab, Ish) a, = 0 a= 0 a;= 1! 2 abc, acb (2, 1) a, = 1, a = 1 3 ab, ac, be (3) a, = 3 1 identity be a EX abcd, adcb, abdc, acdb n=4 (,1,1,1) ao =a.=a;=0, ay =] 6 Gebel: ae (@, 10) a, = 2, a = 1 6 oy ole, Corel, (oe, lol, al (22) a, = 0, ap = 2 3 ab-cd, ac-bd, ad-be . be acb abd adb 2 = nS = 8 ave, ? 7 eS Bilieg Te see) ieee acd, ade, = tocdMammbrie® (4) a, = 4 1 identity Without stopping to advance an argument we note that the number of permutations on n letters in the class (a, a2, a3, °°" is given by n! (1**- cx!) (27? -arq!)(3°* -axg!) - + - where as usual 0! = 1. This formula is veri- fiable in the simple cases above. A permutation group may be interpreted as a group of matrices. Thus, if we write the permutation in the 2-row form and accent the symbols in the lower row we have a transformation, which is given by its matrix. For example, on three letters the per- a X1 Xo X3 OMOANIKOI || 7 7 Lo X3 X1 is essentially the transformation / U1 = x3 r= % t= ee 001 with the matrix | 1 0 0 J. It will be observed 010 that matrices corresponding to permutations have in each row every element zero except one element, which has the value 1, and like- wise in each column they have every element zero except one element which has the value 1. If A, E (the identity element), A, , A3,:::, A, constitute a finite group of matrices and M is a matrix, then the set of matrices MA,M™, MA,M—4, MA3M—, - -- , MAgM“* likewise constitute a group; a group which is s¢mply isomorphic with the original group. This means that if A;A; = A; then (MA;M—™)(MA,M—) = MA,M~—. The sec- ond group is said to be conjugate with the first and is said to be obtained from it by transforming the first group by M. It may happen that the second group will be identi- cal with the first group, perhaps because the individual matrices of the group are un- changed when transformed by M, or because the set of matrices as a whole is identical except for order after it is transformed by /. When this is the case the group is said to be invariant under M. A matrix WM is obtained from the matrix M by replacing each of the elements by its conjugate number is the conjugate of M. In symbols M = (G,;) A matrix obtained from M by interchanging the roles of the rows and columns of M is called the transposed of M and is denoted by M’. That is, M’' = (ai;) ‘where aj; = aj; A matrix is said to be Hermitian if it equals the transposed of the conjugate of itself, that is H is a Hermitian matrix if Sie or the = Ox A matrix is said to be unitary if it equals the inverse of the transposed of the conjugate of itself, that is U is unitary if U = (U’)-. It follows at once that the necessary and sufficient condition that a matrix be unitary is that the relations hold: Aprit 1951 JOHNSTON: k=n Ss Ani Any = 85; k=1 3 2 eee (4 if w=7 ON eae wei Tey jen nl - 5, 1 "10 if oj This condition may also be expressed in the equivalent form k=n Do Ged = 81; kK A matrix is said to be orthogonal if it equals the inverse of the transposed of itself, that is 0 is orthogonal if 0 = 0/7 Evidently for a real matrix the terms orthog- onal and unitary mean the same thing. Suppose we have a group G consisting of the elements A,, A2,--- and to each ele- ment A; of G we make correspond a non- singular matrix D(A;) such that if D(A;) corresponds to A; and D(A;) corresponds to A; then D(A;A;) corresponds to A;A;. Then the set of matrices 1s said to be a representa- tion of G. We have not said that distinct matrices must correspond to distinct group elements; if that is the case the representa- tion is said to be a faithful representation and the matrices will themselves form a group, a group simply isomorphic with the given group. It is evident that we shall al- ways have a representation in which every group element corresponds to the identity matrix with one row, that is, every element corresponds to the matrix (1). Equally well we might make every element correspond to the identity matrix with two or three or more rows. Now it may happen that we can find a matrix M such that if we transform simul- taneously all the matrices of a representation by it they will all take the form DAD 0 cca (0) 0 DPR) cos ONelwilvieretelicleleliellesi es) Tf this is true, the original representation is said to be reducible and it has the constit- THEORY OF GROUP REPRESENTATIONS 121 uents D™(A,;), D®(A,;), --- . Each of these constituents (not necessarily assumed to be all distinct) is also a representation of the given group. If a constituent is such that it cannot be further reduced then it is said to be an irreducible representation; and we assume the transforming matrix so chosen that each D(A;) is irreducible. Then if the original representation of the group G under discussion is denoted by I, T is said to be expressed in terms of its irreducible con- stituents and we write T(A;) = D®(A,;) + D®(A,) + --- + D®(A,). A matrix of IT is thus the direct sum of matrices, one from each of the irreducible representations. Note that this is a different concept from the sum of two matrices. The direct sum means that they are strung out down the main diagonal with zeros else- where. If we have a group s, t, u, --- and if we transform an element by one of the group elements we obtain the transform or con- jugate, thus ¢st is the transform of s by f. If s and ¢t are commutative, that is if st = ts, then tst-! = s and s is said to be invariant under ¢. In any group an element and all the elements into which it may be transformed by all the elements of the group constitute a class of elements. In an abelian group each element is invariant and constitutes a class by itself; hence if the group is finite the number of classes is the order of the group. In the symmetric permutation group all elements with the same cyclic structure are in the same class as noted above. In a non-symmetric group elements with the same cyclic structure may not be all in the same class. It is a fact that the number of non-equiva- lent irreducible representations of any finite group equals the number of its classes. Thus the symmetric group on three letters has three classes and three irreducible repre- sentations. We show this in the table below: ° 122 o 0 axe (il) - @ ( F 0 w @: al ab (1) (—1) ( A 1 O 0 w be (1) (1) ie ) B wo O a ac (1) (-1) ( C w O The first of these representations is of dimension one and is the representation in which every element corresponds to the identity matrix. The second is of dimension one also and three of the elements correspond to the identity matrix, three to the matrix (—1). The third is of dimension 2 and is a faithful representation It is a fact that every finite group may be made simply isomorphic to a permutation group, indeed in many ways. In particular it may have a faithful representation as a regular permutation group, that is a group in which every letter is replaced by every other letter of the group by one and only one permutation, which means that no permuta- tion (except the identity) leaves any letter invariant. In this procedure the number of letters is the order of the group. Thus the symmetric group on three letters is of order 6, and hence may have a faithful represen- tation as a regular permutation group on six letters. It is also a fact that there always exists a matrix which will transform this representation into the sum of its irreducible constituents and that in this reduced form every irreducible representation will appear and that the number of times it appears is equal to its dimension. We saw above that the symmetric group on three letters (whose order is six) had exactly three irreducible representations, two of dimension one and one of dimension two. In the reduced form the representation of dimension two should therefore appear twice, as is indeed the case. From this we conclude that the sum of the squares of the dimensions of the irreducible representations should equal the order of the group. That is, in the case under con- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 4 sideration: 1? + 1? + 2? = 6. To give the notion a little concrete reality we exhibit the above mentioned symmetric group and the transforming matrix and the reduced form. As a regular permutation group the group is as follows: FE = identity, A = x :%4-Xore- tats, Bo = W405 - Lola 3e, Ca — weet n U3t4, D = x0 3to-Xstets , F = Wor 3-VslsLe . Interpreted as a group of linear transforma- tions (whose matrices give the regular repre- sentation) we have: Pgs Nor: eae BORIS Se. ee A eens andes fae Pe oes sctoc i saat vegeta eR ic oc RGR ste A PRPC Peete cc fs ee are Lae Zeno pile payne 7 ee ree pb ak illtiie a = ee ere eh omanecs pile eee zeae Somes PE epson: Bia ce eh see ee Bee he een a pads a et cata ree Nusa oses a Katie ee ines eae The matrix (i a i tse 11 1 -1 -1 -1 T = tae OU, @, @ ~~ 100 0 i oP @ lo 0 0 lo@ @& iiveas® © 0) with the inverse (ito. OO. 2 | 1 12070 O 2 piaill 120.0 0 2? Sab Sahoo 9 2: oO 1-10 2 2? 0 {1-10 26726 0 | will transform the regular representation in this fashion TET? = EB, TAT = Ag - piesa where the matrices for the primed represen- tation are as follows: oorceced & Sn Ss OROROrS) 0 0 0 0 0 1 oorod & ooorco = — J — a) ik @ = ® @ ALSO 0 0 ) 0 & f] Soooor cooorno eocooroo Aprit 1951 JOHNSTON: THEORY items Oke OF OK 0) 20 yl OO OF UO O5— 1510-0), (0) 10 H=t 0 O © 0 O 0.0 @ WO Oo OO ce oO 0 eee Ome O82 210) 910) 0 Cr=\""0 06 © 0 © Cc O00 O UV @ Oo OO 0-0. @ 0 -O- OO: GE 0 O 0 O60 LO 0 0 OO lL OO. 0 O GQ ie OD Or Oe O ao O 0-0 Yo 0 oe OW OD Oo O PO OO Da—sj70 0) 0) 20) 0 bY =\"\0 0 O wo O O eo 0 0 CO eo 0 OO O FO o 0 @ @ eG Yo O00 OO It is a simple matter to verify this result by a little computation. Indeed it is only neces- sary to verify it for two of the “generators,” say A and B. We note a few simple and interesting facts about the representations of a finite group. In the first place there always exists a matrix which will transform all the matrices of a representation of a finite group into unitary matrices. This is also true of many infinite groups. All the representations we have noted so far have been unitary representa- tions and we shall always assume that our representations are unitary. When two equivalent representations are unitary, the transforming matrix which carries one repre- sentation into the other may be chosen to be unitary. For convenience the transforming matrix 7 above was not so chosen, but it could have been. If we have an zrreducible representation of dimension 1; of a group of order g and we construct the /j vectors in the g-dimensional space of the group elements, then we have a set of orthogonal unitary vectors (except that the “Hermitian length” of the vectors is \/q/l,). Thus for the two dimensional rep- resentation of the symmetric group on three letters we have the four vectors (1, w, w’, ‘Us, 0, 0), (0, 0, 0, lt w, w”), (0, 0, 0, 1, w, w), (1, w?, w, 0, 0, 0). If we add to this system Is , 13 etc. vectors corresponding to other non- equivalent irreducible representations in the g-dimensional space of the group elements we then have asystem of /j + + 13+ --- unitary orthogonal vectors, with the same assumptions as to the Hermitian length of the vectors. Thus in the case of the three rep- resentations of the symmetric group above we should have to add to the four vectors above the two vectors (1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1), and (1,1,1, —1, —1, —1). These last two vectors OF GROUP REPRESENTATIONS 123 each correspond to representations of dimen- sion one so that the Hermitian length in each case would be 1/6. We write the six vectors together so that the relation is more clearly discernable. ik it a arb 1 blot =1—1 =1 lwo 0 O 0 00 0 lo & w? 00 0 I Pw 1 wo w 0 O 0 If D(R) is the matrix corresponding to the element F in any particular representation I of the group G then the sum of the ele- ments in the main diagonal of D(R)—that is, the trace of D(R)—is the characteristic of Rk for that particular representation; it is usually denoted by the symbol x(R). When R runs through all the group elements there results a set of g numbers, which may be interpreted as a vector in the g dimensional space of the group elements. As is well known the trace of a matrix is invariant under transformations. Hence it is a fact that every element in the same class will have the same characteristic in any particular representa- tion, and it is customary therefore in general to write x(C;) in lieu of x(R) where C; rep- resents the class of elements to which R belongs. If therefore G contains k classes, Ci, C2,---, C., containing g;, go, -:- , gx elements respectively, where of course g. + go + --- + gs = g, we shall have for a particular representation the k numbers x(Ci), x(C2), --- , x(Cx), and these may be interpreted as a vector in the k dimensional space of the classes. This vector is sometimes called a character of G. G would thus have a character for each representation, but we shall reserve the term for what are sometimes called simple characters, that is the char- acters of the k irreducible representations D®(A), D®(A), --- , D® (A). Characters of other representations can be called com- pound characters or generalized characters if it is necessary to refer to them. It is evi- dent that two equivalent irreducible repre- sentations have the same character. We shall use a superscript to denote the particular representation which gives rise to a character and a subscript to denote the particular class to which a characteristic belongs, thus x'(C;) represents the characteristic of each 124 element in the class C; for the representa- tion D(A). Evidently if we are in possession of all the irreducible representations of G the process of writing down a table of characters, es- sentially a matrix of k columns, will be a trivial one. To obtain the irreducible repre- sentations may except for elementary cases be a tedious process. However, there are ways by which the characters may be obtained directly. These too may become laborious if we proceed to too complicated groups. Methods of simplifying and improving such processes will delight and inspire or vex and impede the pure mathematician, as the case may be. However, the physicist frequently makes use of only those characters which are most readily obtainable and so his case is not a hopeless one. For the symmetric group in particular the necessary characters are easily obtainable. We make a few general observations con- cerning the characters of the symmetric group. We observe first that the permutations of the symmetric group may be divided into two equal sub-sets, the even permutations and the odd permutations. The even permu- tations are those which leave invariant the alternating function IP = Gh = Ga = aa) > a) 290 Gh > aa) (Gy = ae) (Ga = 47) 20° The odd permutations are those which re- verse the sign of P. Evidently the even per- mutations form a group, the alternating group on n letters. We have noted that there is a representation of the symmetric group cor- responding toeach partition of n. Let usmake a diagram corresponding to a partition, say the partition (A;, A», A3, °°: ). Let us put di dots equally spaced in a horizontal row. Immediately below let us place \» dots the leftmost one immediately below the leftmost one in the top row and put each dot below one in the line above. We place \; dots in a similar manner in the third row and so on. We have thus constructed a sort of triangu- lar matrix of dots, and to every partition there will correspond such a diagram. If we transpose one of these matrices about its main diagonal, we will change it into another JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 41, No. 4 one of the diagrams. Two partitions whose diagrams are so related are called associated partitions. Thus the partition (5, 2) of 7 with the diagram is associated with the partition (2, 2, 1, 1, 1) of 7 which has -- as its diagram. In case the dot matrix is sym- metric about the main diagonal, the partition is said to be self-associated. Thus (4, 1, 1, 1) with the diagram ---- is a self-associated partition of 7. The representations corre- sponding to associated partitions are associ- ated representations; a characteristic of an even class in a representation is the same as the characteristic of that same class in the associated representation, while a character- istic of an odd class is the negative of the characteristic in the associated representa- tion. We thus see that when we know the character of a representation, we at once know the character of the associated repre- sentation. We observe also that it follows that the characteristics of the odd classes in a self-associated representation are all zero. We observe that we always let Ci repre- sent the class consisting of the identity alone and that hence x‘(C;) is always the dimen- sion of the representation D™(A), being the trace of the identity matrix. We tabulate below the tables of characters for the sym- metric group on four symbols and on five symbols: “Partition Na \ er 0 was é (4 |(, 1)| 2, 2)] @.1| rt) ele || Partition \ + tt * ) ments| &iving ris S itil ea aa to class Class NS class S (4, 0,0, 034 | 1 3 2 3 1 1 (4) (251 080)= 1 1 0} —1 | -—1 6 (G3, 1) (1.0,1.0), 1 0} —1 0 1 8 (@, il, 1) (0.2.0. 0)4 1 —1 —1 1 3 (2, 2) (0, 0. 0, 1)_ 1 —1 0 |) 1 6 (Qis il, we 3) j associated partitions. tt associated partitions. * self associated partition. Aprin 1951 JOHNSTON: THEORY OF GROUP REPRESENTATIONS 125 Partition (5) (4, 1) (3, 2) (3, 1, 1) | (2, 2,1) (2, ib, 5, (Gl, wat No. of Partiti yee 2 t IM | ARE oa Sa meal ah tae PS) ce erases re ee (5, 0, 0, 0, 0), 1 4 5 6 5 4 il 1 (5) (Sante 0.0) 0)- 1 2 1 0 =i =9) =i 10 (4, 1) (290s 10.0) 1 1 =a Oval sat 1 i 20 @, i, 1) (ls 2, 05 ONO) 1 0 I —2 il 0 i 15 (3,2) Bi@iev0.50; 1,0). i 0 = 0 1 0 1 30 @, il, wt, il) (Oma 10: 0) 1 = i 0 =i 1 =i 20 (Os D iby (OF080. 0:1), 1 = 0 1 0 = 1 24 (yi, Hs in) 7 associated partitions. Tj associated partitions. Tit associated partitions. * self-associate partition. We observe that if g is the order of the group and g; is the number of elements in the Class C; and that if we multiply the char- acteristic in each box by 4 / 7‘ then the result- g ing matrix will be a unitary matrix—that is we shall have k=n ~ Ors Uj k=1 I 8:3 theory of the solution of the fourth degree equation), the alternating group on four letters, the simple group of order 168, and the non-cyclic group of order 21, Asa permu- tation group the octic group may be repre- sented as follows. identity, ac-bd, abcd, adcb, ab-cd, ad-be, ac, bd. C1 Ce 03 C3 C4 (OF C; Cs There are thus five classes and the classes may be enumerated as shown above where the and : d il class to which the element belongs is indi- PT EM a cated immediately below the class. The table yk Aj = 03; ° a= of characters follows: So far we have discussed the symmetric \ ee | F group, and that is what primarily interests us \_ tation Lee here. It so happens that the characteristics Tr \| Te | ts | Ts | Te | elements here are all real so that the unitary property a of the matrix of the characters does not be- =~" = come evident. By way of contrast and com- C, 1 2 1 1 ie ae pleteness we give the table of characters for C2 ihe ECA Uo heed : . : Y as 23 | 2 some simple nonsymmetric groups, in par- ee : ‘ oe ; | a ie ticular the “‘octic” group (a group of order a ‘ i tala ae coats eight which plays an important role in the # Sallis Representation Num- ber of T1 T2 T3 Ty Ts Ts ele- ments Class in class identity 1 6 7 8 3 3 elements of order 2 1 2 —1 0 —1 --1 21 elements of order 4 1 (0) —1 0 1 1 2 elements of order 3 1 0 1 —1 0 0 F 2 24 elements of order 7 1 —1 0 1 a(—1 Av 7) ea = tv 7) = inverses of elements 1 —1 0 1 $(—1 — 7vV7) 4(—1 + 2V 7) { in above class 126 The alternating group on 4 letters (also known as the tetrahadral group) is as follows: iden; ab-cd, ac-bd, ad-be; abc, acd, adb, bdc; ach, adc, abd, bed C1 C2 C2 Che Ch Oy OB Gh On Gs GG The table of characters: Nes senta- No. of ME © (3, 1) (2, 2) (2, 2)’ | elements \ in class Class Ne Ch if 3 1 1 1 C2 1 =i 1 1 3 G3 1 0 w w? 4 Gs 1 0 w? w 4 The simple group of order 168 is tabulated at the foot of page 125. The noncyclic group of order 21: eae | Num- tation ber of \ T1| T2| Ps TX Ts lee in Class Class \ identity iL aby al 3 3 1 seven ele- | 1 | w| w? 0 0 7 ments of order 3 inverses of | 1 | w?/ w 0 0 7 above ele- ments E three ele- | 1 | 1 | 1 |4(—1+iv/7)|4(-1—iv/7)| 3 ments of order 7 : inverses of |1]1|1 |4(-1—iV/7)|4(-1+iv/7)| 3 above ele- ments So far we have dealt with finite groups. We consider infinite groups, in particular con- tinuous groups. The set of all nonsingular n-rowed matrices with elements in the com- plex number field constitutes a group, the full linear group of dimension n. We shall be concerned with certain subgroups thereof. In particular we shall consider those groups in which the elements are continuous func- tions of one or more parameters, whose do- main of variability may be disconnected or simply or multiply connected. If the domain is connected, the group is a simply continu- ous group, otherwise a mixed continuous group. We assume that the elements of the matrices possess derivatives of all necessary orders with regard to the parameters. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 4 Moreover, we shall consider groups whose matrices are unitary—the unitary groups; and also we shall consider groups whose de- terminants are all 1—the unimodular groups. If we consider groups whose matrices are both, we have the unimodular unitary groups. Ever since we studied elementary analytic geometry we have been familiar with therota- tions of the Cartesian plane about the origin. This group is the two dimensional pure rota- tion group. The matrices are all real orthog- onal (hence unitary) and have determinant one. Hence the pure rotation group is real, unimodular and unitary. It is a fact that the real unimodular orthogonal group of dimen- sion n will always have exactly in(n — 1) independent parameters; hence in the pres- ent case a single parameter. (If we add the real orthogonal transformations of deter- minant —1, we have the rotation reflection group and we now have two parameters.) The familiar transformation / x’ =xcosd?—ysng / y =xsingdg+yecos¢d - cos gives us the rotation group the parameter being ¢ where —7 < ¢ < wasimply con- nected domain. There is only one parameter and it appears additively in the group, that is, if{¢} represents the element whose param- eter is ¢ then {¢ + ¢’} = {¢}{¢’}. The parameter appears additively and the group is abelian, every element thus being in a class by itself. We seek the non-equivalent irreducible representations of the two-dimen- sional pure rotation group. They are (e*”®) where ¢ is the parameter and m is a rational mbteger, 7 —) 2 — 2) ele This time we are concerned with the actual representations rather than merely with the characteristics, though of course the char- acteristic can immediately be read off. If we extend the pure rotation group te include also the matrices of determinant —1 we have the entire “rotation-reflection”’ group, the aggregate of all real orthogonal cos with the matrix sing Aprit 1951 matrices. We may get them by adding to the above matrices the matrices —cosd me sing cosd We now have two parameters, the continu- ous parameter ¢ as before and the discrete parameter d which may take either of the values 1 or —1; and the set of matrices may be included in the formula ie cos dcosé — (o, d} = ( sing The group is no longer abelian—the set of matrices which constitute the pure rotations no longer consists of matrices each of which is a class by itself, for {¢, 1} and {—@, 1} now constitute a class. Also all elements —cosd “a sin@ cosd are in a class. The group is now a mixed continuous group since the domain of vari- ability of the parameters is no longer connected. We have of course the trivial representa- tion of the rotation reflection group in which every element corresponds to the matrix (1) and also the one-dimensional representation in which the matrices cos@ —singd ( )sormspond to (1) while the sing coso z —cosd sind\ — matrices ( correspond to(—1). sing cosd The other irreducible representations are two dimensional and in them we have the cor- respondence cos@ —singd gH.) => sing cosd 0 eine —cosd sind 0 ee oe sin@ cosd Ge () for all properly positive integral values of m. We now consider the irreducible represen- JOHNSTON: THEORY OF GROUP REPRESENTATIONS 127 tations of the three dimensional pure rotation group and of the three dimensional rotation- reflection group. As we have observed the three dimensional pure rotation group (real orthogonal ma- trices with determinant +1) has $3(8 — 1) = 3 parameters. There is a very close rela- tion between the representation of this group and the representations of the unimodular unitary group in two dimensions. From the latter we may get the former; it is also true that from the latter we may get what are called the “ambiguous” representations of the pure rotation group-—they are not truly representations but they play an important role in the theory of the spin of the electron. We have an irreducible representation of the pure rotation group for each zero or positive integral value of 7 as given by the expression below. The rotation is here given by its Kulerean angle {a, 8, y} the three parameters of the group. The dimension is 27 + 1, and uw’ and uw take on the 27 + 1 values —y, —j+1,---,—2, —1,0,1,2,---,7-—1,7. u’ gives the row of the matrix, u the column, so that the element in the upper left-hand corner is in the position —j, —J; the element in the upper right corner is in the position —j, j7. The representation is denoted by D® ‘a, B, y\. The element in the yp’, » posi- tion is given by the expression = eS 1) atv GE eIG= WIG we )G=2)! Gf = OlGa-e—a@)wli@-are =~)! -e"'“(cos3p)* “ “(sindB)* *e™ DE {apy Yur an where ‘ao / larger of J 0 Peterhead Gas SD “oy 3 ‘Aberdeen Kristia?® ) Hone?’ NORTH hey Tenaende hey Oca i a IRELAND BERLINe < f PO Me as \S WARS Nelenc RAVENHAGUE be? NL. wo exp 5 \. FpELOSBRUSSELS a BO x Dye y if $ 3 £ Yay Lie o 1 Cera \ aad DeMotesn ne CHo, Oy ae s ~ PARIS ? Sa a A Brest, t. Strasbourg) Munich ~/ a SuNasa a me, euneete if antes 7 oBERNE 7X _. [ : 2 FRANCE fewirze is Ser GY) 6 Rochelle} | L . Ae = oie NCR € Sate se ¥ oni Grek Be | Q aq Qo o Ferry sare o\Spayonne can Nie ANDOREAY~ A nna a ~~ B ies Ss eo) ie Tortosay E : MADRID ‘ORES Se | 5 2 ea Graci Ase Sglepoeira LISBONG g \ icante} »San Jo: i Alican’ w5. Miguel Beh Cortagex Che A ¥, 2 apr 8 ae ps C me ee Feso PA sina ay Mi ae. * (French) Fic. 1.—Distribution of living specimens of Glossus humanus (Linné): W, Locality data based on U.S. National Museum specimens; V, locality data based on specimens in other museums and on a p ’ ) . published records. 144 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 4 1798. ae ou ae ritum Roding, Mus. Bolt.: rior adductor muscle scar deeper and_ better , no. J. a , yar ITOOMT OLEH CoR (LE nG) 2 Da ON Coe marked but smaller than posterior adductor mus- Hist. Nat. Paris 1: 86. cle sear 1801. Isocardia globosa Lamarck, Syst. animaux Measurements in mm.—Only specimens with sans vert., etc., 1: 118. both valves were measured: 1811. Buccardium commune Megerle von Mihlfeld, Mag. Ges. Nat. Freunde Berlin 5 (1), art. \ Convexity 2: 52. U.S.N.M. no. Length Height (both values) 1815. Glossus cor (Linné), Oken, Lehr. Nat., Teil 2S WOE 98.3 83.2 3. Zool.: 235. 201292 100.8 95.4 88.4 z 5 , ie 6 131658 93.0 89.2 Utetl 1817. Bucardia communis (Megerle von Mihlfeld), 304792 93.7 74.7 65.5 Schumacher, Hssai nouv. syst., ete.: 144, 201294 81.7 79.6 59.0 pl. 13, figs. 2a, b. 201299 81.2 80.0 60.0 1845. Isocardia hibernica Reeve, Conch. Icon. 2, 186122 79.3 74.7 69.5 : Tsocardia: pl. 1, sp. 4. 201295 75.1 75.6 59.1 1853. Cardita humana (Linné), Mérch, Cat. Conch. 201302 70.3 64.1 59.7 Yoldi 2: 38. 304782 69.6 65.1 59.0 1855. Isocardia cor var. hibernica Reeve, Hanley, vee GiBS Wao DoS 5 6 9 ri 201298a 60.4 59.6 53.2 Ipsa Linnaei Conchylia: 84. 201296 52.6 55.8 iOS 1858. Bucardiw cor (Linné), H. and A. Adams, Gen. 201300 45.9 48.8 36.2 Rec. Moll. 2: 461, pl. 112, figs. 5a, b. 201294a 45.6 48.2 35.7 1869. Isocardia (T'ychocardia) cor (Linné), Romer, 131658a 45.6 45.6 38.6 in Martini und Chemnitz, Conch.-Cab., 201296a 44.1 48.0 34.4 ed. 2,10 (2), Cardiacea: 5-7, pl. 1, figs. 1-3. 201297 38.9 43.0 29.0 1900. Isocardia humana (Linné), Dall, Tert. fauna 201297a 32.8 35.0 24.3 Florida 3 (pt. 5): 1064. 201337 26.8 27.0 20.5 1903. Isocardia cor var. valentiana Pallary, Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Marseille, Zool., 8, mém. ile Wes; jolly sakes, IG}. Glossus humanus (Linné), van Regteren Al- tena, Bijdrage tot de kennis der fossiele, subfossiele en Recente Mollusken, etc.: WO swe 1937. Description.—Shell porcellaneous, thin, exterior ornamented only by growth lines; small speci- mens often have two small folds separated by in- cised lines extending from the ligament obliquely downward toward the posteroventral margin; a poorly defined, broad depressed area in front of beaks, better defined in small specimens and often delimited by two incised lines; periostracum dark reddish brown to black on large specimens, lighter on small specimens, attaining a light greenish yellow on smallest specimens; periostracum nearly smooth in appearance on large speci- mens; on small ones fine, closely spaced, radiat- ing lines composed of darker-colored ridges of periostracum; valves without gape, equivalve; interior ventral margin smooth; beaks spirally enrolled and strongly prosogyrate, umbones swollen; hgament external, weak, parivincular, split into two parts anteriorly and dragged under spirally enrolled beaks, opisthodetic; hinge teeth sehen 3a, 1, 3b, PI ceyrenoid, hinge formula 5,55, ap, prp all teeth lam- inar and nearly horizontal, 2a and 2b in left valve almost completely fused, 1 and 3b in right valve somewhat fused; pallial line integripalliate, ante- One trend is quite apparent from the measure- ments: small shells are longer than they are high, whereas large shells are higher than they are long. The ratio of convexity to height was computed. All seven shells from the Mediterranean Sea had ratios ranging from 0.90 to 0.84. The ratios of 12 shells from the British Isles ranged from 0.80 to 0.72 except for one large shell from Dublin Bay which had a ratio of convexity to height of 0.88. Reeve (1845, vol. 2, p. 2, Isocardia) claimed that the specimens from Ireland were less globose than those from the Mediterranean Sea. On the basis of this difference and some other minor features, he proposed the new species name hibernica for the Irish specimens. To my knowl- edge no other conchologist has considered hiber- nica a distinct species, but Reeve’s contention that the Mediterranean specimens are more glo- bose is borne out by the few specimens I have measured. Number of specomens.—There are 32 specimens of Glossus humanus in the collection of the United States National Museum. Locality data —The following localities are rep- resented by specimens in the National Museum: Zara, Yugoslavia; Tunis; Cette, France; Algiers; Cape de Gata, Spain; Cape Sagres, Portugal; Falmouth, England; Plymouth, England; Dublin Bay; Isle of Man; Oban, Scotland; Hebrides; Shetland Islands. Aprit 1951 GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION AND ECOLOGY OF GLOSSUS HUMANUS (LINNE) This study is encumbered by two diffi- culties. Glossus humanus is not a common species, except for a few scattered localities, and observations on its habitat are meager. The more serious difficulty results from an error by J. Gwyn Jeffrys, who mistook species of Kelliella for the young of Glossus. Some of the Jeffreys’ material collected on the Porcupine and Valorous expeditions is in the National Museum collection. Specimens identified as “‘Isocardia cor” by Jeffreys are not that species, a point upheld by Sars and much later by other conchologists. The exact northern limit of distribution of Glossus is worthy of much additional investi- gation. Only one living specimen of Glossus humanus has been found off the southern coast of Iceland thus far (Madsen, 1949, p. NICOL: RECENT SPECIES OF GLOSSUS 145 49), although the molluscan fauna of the island has been extensively collected and studied. The genus has not been reported from the Faroes. The report of Glossus from the Lofoten Islands off the coast of Norway was based on a misidentification by Jeffreys. The genus is rare from Trondhjem Fjord southward and eastward into the Kattegat. Glossus is fairly common in certain places along the coasts of the British Isles and is also found in the Shetlands. It has been re- ported all along the coasts of France, Portu- gal, and Spain. In the Mediterranean, Glossus is frequently found as far east as the Adriatic Sea. The fact that it has not been found east of there may be due to lack of careful collecting. It apparently is not present on the west coast of Africa, even near the entrance to the Mediterranean Sea. Jeffreys has reported Glossus from the Azores, but this report is Fras. 2-5.—Glossus humanus (Linné): 2, Interior of left valve, X 1; 3, interior of right valve, X 1; 4, exterior of right valve, X 1; 5, enlarged portion of exterior surface of shell showing fine radial ridges of periostracum, X 6. (All figures are of a young specimen from Falmouth, England; U.S.N.M. no. 201800.) 146 JOURNAL OF THE thought to be based on a misidentification. Further collecting will no doubt more accur- ately delimit the distribution of the genus. Additional ecological data are greatly needed on Glossus humanus. The species apparently is found on sand, sandy-mud, or mud bottoms. It has been thought by some to have a wide bathymetric range, but this idea is now believed to be incorrect. Jeffreys has reported Glossus from more than 2,000 meters of water, but the specimens found at that depth are probably all Kelliella. Glossus apparently is found in depths ranging from about 5 to 150 meters. The probable temper- ature of the bottom where the genus thrives ranges from 8° to 15°C. Acknowledgments.—The following persons gave me data on geographical distribution of specimens of Glossus: William J. Clench, Museum of Comparative Zoology at Har- vard College; Leo G. Hertlein, California WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 4 Academy of Sciences; A. Myra Keen, Stan- ford University. I am greatly indebted to them for their assistance. REFERENCES Datu, W. H. Contributions to the Tertiary fauna of Florida, etc. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci. 3 (pt. 5): 949-1218, pls. 36-47. 1900. Datt, W. H., Bartscu, P., and RenprErR, H. A. A manual of the Recent and fossil marine pelecy- pod mollusks of the Hawaiian Islands. Bernice P. Bishop Mus. Bull. 153: 233 pp., 28 figs., 58 pls., 1938. Lamy, E., Révision des Cypricardiacea et des Iso- cardiacea vivants du Muséum d’ Histoire Natu- relle de Paris. Journ. Conchyl. 64 (4) : 259-307. 1920. Mapsen, F. J. The zoology of Iceland 4 (pt. 63, Marine Bivalvia): 116 pp., 12 figs. 1949. REEVE, L. A. Conchologia iconica 2, Isocardia: 2 pp., l pl., 1845. SroxiczKA, F. Cretaceous fauna of southern India 3, The Pelecypoda, etc. Palaeontologica Indica (Geological Survey of India memoirs) : 537 pp., 50 pls. 1871. MALACOLOGY.—More new urocoptid mollusks from Mexico. Patt Bartscu, U.S. National Museum. To the indefatigable efforts and the stimu- lating influence that Miss Marie Bourgeois, of Mixcoac, exerted upon her friends to help make known the molluscan fauna of Mexico, the U. S. National Museum is indebted for the following new species of urocoptid land snails transmitted to us for report. Coelostemma anconai, n. sp. Figs. 1, 3 Shell cylindroconic, pale horn-colored when living, dead shells white. The nucleus consists of about two turns, which are somewhat inflated and strongly rounded and form a slightly bulbous apex. The nuclear turns are finely granulose. The first seven postnuclear whorls increase gradually in width, rendering this part of the shell elongate- conic. Beginning with the eighth turn the shell becomes cylindric in form, contracting slightly on the last three whorls. The postnuclear whorls are slightly rounded and separated by a moder- ately impressed suture. They are marked by decidedly retractively curved axial riblets, which are slightly less strongly developed on the eylin- dric portion of the shell than on the two ends. Of these riblets about 40 are present on the second postnuclear turn, 80 on the tenth, and 62 on the penultimate whorl. On the last turn behind the peristome the riblets become; fine, hairlike, and crowded. The spaces separating the riblets aver- age about double the width of the ribs. The last turn is solute for about one-fifth of a turn, the solute portion bearing the rib sculpture of the rest of this portion of the shell. The aperture is subcircular and is somewhat sinuous on the parie- tal wall where the peristome is a little less ex- panded than on the rest of the aperture where it widens in a gentle curve. The columella is hollow, broad, about one-third the width of the shell, and shows fine axial markings; it gradually nar- rows in the last two turns. The holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 595018, has 19 whorls and measures: Length 26 mm; diameter of the cylindric portion 6 mm. U.S.N.M. no. 595019 comprises the paratype, of which we have figured the columella and some fragments. We are naming the species for Prof. I. Ancona, who collected the specimens at Ixcatiopan, Guerrero, Mexico. Of the known species of Coelostemma this species resembles most nearly C. igualaensis Bartsch, fro.i Iguala, Guerrera, Mexico, from which it is easily distinguished by its smaller size, more cylindric outline, narrower shell, and stronger ribbing. Aprit 1951 Holospira wilmoti, n. sp. Fig. 2 Shell cylindroconic, white with the interior of the aperture pale chestnut-brown. The nucleus consists of about 23 strongly rounded whorls that form a mucronate apex. The first four post- nuclear whorls increase rapidly in width, while the succeeding turns are cylindric, contracting again toward the base. The postnuclear whorls are flattened and separated by a slightly im- pressed suture. On the conic portion feeble de- cidedly retractively curved axial riblets are in- dicated, while on the cylindric portion the axial markings are reduced to mere lines of growth. The last whorl and a little of the penultimate turn bear distantly spaced somewhat sinuous axial ribs, which extend undiminished over the slightly angulated periphery and the base into the umbilical chink. These ribs are about one-third as wide as the spaces that separate them. The last whorl is solute for about one-eighth of a turn. Aperture obliquely pear-shaped; peristome broadly flatly expanded and thickened. Colu- mella hollow, about one-fourth the diameter of the whorls, bearing a feeble obsolete fold in the cylindric portion of the shell which expands into a thin slightly curved blade in the penultimate whorl, where it extends over three-fifths of the width of the chamber bending slightly upward toward the parietal fold. In the last turn the colu- mellar fold becomes much. reduced and _ thick- ened, being scarcely noticeable in the aperture. The parietal fold is well developed and is con- fined to the penultimate turn. The basal fold in the same turn is poorly developed, while the labial fold is about one-half as strong as the parietal fold. The type, U.S.N.M. no. 595020, was collected by George Wilmot on Cerro del Fraile, near Villa Garcia, Nuevo Ledén, Mexico. It has 14 whorls and measures: Length 20 mm; diameter of cylindric portion 7 mm. This species most nearly resembles H. orcutti Bartsch, which Orcutt collected on a limestone BARTSCH: NEW UROCOPTID MOLLUSKS 147 paredon in Coahuila, Mexico. Its much smaller size and more cylindric form readily distinguish it. We take pleasure in naming it for its dis- coverer. Fras. 1-3.—1, 3, Coelostemma anconat, n. sp.; 2, Holospira wilmoti. n. sp. 148 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 4447H MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS Representative on Council of A.A.A.S.: F. M. The 444th meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club on February 12, 1951, was called to order at 8:05 p.m. by the President, NarHan R. Smiru. Also present were: W. Ram- BERG, H. S. Rappieyn, J. A. STEVENSON, C. Drecuster, A. T. McPHrerson, W. R. WEDEL, J. J. Fanny, E. H. Watker, W. A. Dayton, R. 8. Diu, L. A. Spinpuer, A. M. Grirrin, F. M. Deranporr, and, by invitation, MARGARET Pirtman, G. P. Watton, and L. E. Yocum. The President announced the following ap- pointments: Appointed Members of Executive Committee: W. Ramberg, H. S. Rappleye, J. A. Stevenson, and F. M. Defandorf. Board of Editors of the Journal: Charles Drech- sler, to replace Frederick J. Hermann, designated Senior Editor. J. P. E. Morrison to replace F. C. Kracek. T. P. Thayer (Geology) was appointed an Associate Editor for a term of two years; R. K. Cook (physics and mathematics), F. A. Chace (biology), and M. L. Bomhard (botany) were ap- pointed Associate Editors for a term of 3 years. Committee on Membership: L. A. Spindler (Chairman), M. S. Anderson, Merrill Bernard, R. E. Blackwelder, R. C. Duncan, George T. Faust, Ira B. Hansen, D. Breese Jones, Dorothy Nickerson, Francis A. Smith, Heinz Specht, Alfred Weissler:~ 3 Committee on Meetings: Margaret Pittman (Chairman), Norman Bekkedahl, W. R. Chapline, Dorland J. Davis, F. B. Scheetz, Henry W. Wells. Committee on Monographs: J. R. Swallen (Chairman). To January 1954: 8. F. Blake, F. C. Kracek. Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement: George P. Walton, General Chairman. For the Bio- logical Sciences: G. H. Coons (Chairman), J. E. Faber, Jr., Myrna F. Jones, F. W. Poos, J. R. Swallen. For the Engineering Sciences: R. 8S. Dill (Chairman), Arsham Amirikian, J. W. McBurney, Frank Neumann, A. H. Scott. For the Physical Sciences: G. P. Walton (Chairman), F.S. Brackett, G. E. Holm, C. J. Humphreys, J. Howard MeMillen. For Teaching of Science: B. D. Van Evera (Chairman), R. P. Barnes, F. E. Fox, T. Koppanyi, M. H. Martin, A. T. McPherson. Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Research: L. E. Yocum (Chairman). M. X. Sullivan, H. L. Whitte- more. Committee on Policy and Planning: J. 1. Hoff- man (Chairman). To January 1954: Henry B. Collins, Jr., W. W. Rubey. Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: M. A. Mason (Chairman). To January 1954: J. M. Caldwell, Waldo L. Schmitt. Setzler. Committee of Auditors: J. H. Martin (Chair- man), N. F. Braaten, W. J. Youden. Committee of Tellers: W. G. Brombacher (Chairman), A. R. Merz, Louise M. Russell. The Secretary reported a meeting of the Exe- cutive Committee at 6:30 p.m., February 12, 1951, at the Cosmos Club with the following members in attendance: N. R. Smrra, W. Ram- BERG, H. 8. Rappieyn, J. A. STEVENSON, and F. M. Dreranporr. At this meeting the budget presented by the Treasurer for 1951 was dis- cussed in some detail and approved for sub- mission to the Board of Managers. The following budget was presented to the Board, discussed by the Treasurer, and adopted by the Board without change: RECEIPTS Estimated 1951 1950 1951 Budget Dues..... ; oo $3985.00 $4200.00 Journal Subscriptions... . 1339.50 1600.00 Interest & Dividends 1521.50 1950.00 Sales)... .. 93.43 100.00 $6939.43 $7850.00 DISBURSEMENTS Journal & Journal Office ........ $6435.74 $6500.00 $6500.00 Secretary's office 481.26 550.00 550.00 Treasurer’s office. . oe 304.59 300.00 300.00 S.M. &C. of Publications....... 30.67 50.00 50.00 Meetings Committee 244.30 500.00 500.00 Membership Committee.......... 1.50 20.00 20.00 Science Fair.......... 100.00 100.00 100.00 Sciences Calendar. . . 10.00 50.00 50.00 Archivistie ta: cero aoe ee — 75.00 75.00 $7608.06 $8145.00 $8145.00 Hstimated) Deficiten- ake tree eee eee $ 295.00 A letter from J. A. Stevenson was read in which he submitted his resignation as an Elected Member of the Board of Managers because he is at present Archivist of the Academy. The Board accepted the resignation and in Mr. Ste- venson’s place appointed Milton Harris. The Board appointed C. F. W. Muesebeck to fill the vacancy created by the resignation of H. P. Barss as an Elected Member of the Board of Managers. The meeting adjourned at 8:55 P.M. F. M. Drranporr, Secretary Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences [2 ROS EUG D so ele Gig Oo ER OS CTEO BOD aE ee NatHan R. Smitu, Plant Industry Station PEARESTALENUL-CLECES ater Fae She Oe WattTEeR RAaMBERG, National Bureau of Standards SCGIRATPO) SED CT Here F. M. Dreranporr, National Bureau of Standards RECUSUN ODM A ce kena ke Howarp 8. Rappers, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey ARTO Sea oe cle oR AS AND eer eRe Oe JouHN A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haraup A. Resper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Philosophical Society of Washington......................... Epwarp U. Connon Anthropological Society of Washington......................... Watpo R. WEDEL Brolozicalusociety, of Washinetone sce asso dans jess ee oe Chemical Society of Washington........... eee tose a yv rate Scns JosprH J. FAHEY Entomological Society of Washington........................ FREDERICK W. Poos National Geographic Society...... 20.0... 0.060. c eee eee ee ALEXANDER WETMORE Geological Society of Washington......................0...005- Leason H. Apams Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... ColumbrayElistoricaliSocletyaee. 20 esses eee ees GILBERT GROSVENOR Botanicals socictyjomWwashingtonuenne le 44s eee niece ean E. H. WALKER Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wiuiiam A. Dayton Sawashineton)oociety of Mngineers: ...... 5-0-0600... 00s000k os: CuirrorpD A. Betts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers Francis M. DeranDorF Washington Section, American Society of Mechanioal Engineers. .R1cHarp S. Dinu Helminthological Society ofpWashington, eee eee one eae L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Ancus M. GrirFrin Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers....Hmnry W. HempPLeE Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......... Herpert G. DorsEy District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers. . Elected Members of the Board of M anagers: PIR ATINT UTS OD Bee ene vei ses ose eee: Nee ale Whtevejesss aeniaeies W. F. Fosuaa, C. L. Gazin pRoManT ary) MOS8E jae Ss crepes ee a Seer ae es C. F. W. Munszesecs*, A. T. McPHERson I® dipiatneney7? 3G Ue es Senne een eee Sara E. Branuam, Mitton Harris* GOR OMOMUUGNAGETS ye crcc yes corinne esos: All the above officers plus the Senior Editor Roaianopuautorsiand Assocrate HQUOTs, 22.52.42. +0250 .0 45522. 0ge. seas [See front cover] Executive Commitiee....N. R. SmrrH (chairman), WALTER RamBERG, H. S. RAPPLEYE, . A. Stevenson, F. M. Deranporr Committee on Membership............... L. A. SprInpLER (chairman), M. 8. ANDERSON, MERRILL BERNARD, R. E. BLACKWELDER, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. HANSEN, D. B. Jonzs, DoroTuy NICKERSON, F. A. SMITH, Hetnz SPECHT, ALFRED WEISSLER Commiitee on M. eetings dekh in cba Marcarer Prirrman (chairman), NorMAN BEKKEDAHL, W. R. CuHapuine, D. J. Davis, F. B. ScHEETz, H. W. Weus Committee on u onographs: Ronanwary G52. esa. jee sean. J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), Paut H. OnHSER Ovary al OD Smee sae ee ice remit beiacic, oeeyois J aicieee ss a/Sees R. W. Imuay, P. W. OMAN IPG) dicot rareie WDaY Ges ayecta 6 6 orl etn cara rcnpe nen ne one en S. F. Buaxs, F. C. Kracex Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (GRORGE P. WALTON, general chairman): For the Biological Sciences............ G. H. Coons (chairman), J. E. FABER, JR., Myrna F. Jonss, F. W. Poos, J. R. SWALLEN For the Engineering Sciences......... 185 (So Davy, (chairman), ARSHAM AMIRIKIAN, J. W. McBurney, Frank Neumann, A. H. Scorr For the Physical Sciences............. G. P. Watton (chairman), F. 8S. BRacKErt, G. E. Hom, C. J. Humpureys, J. H. McMILien For Teaching of Science............ B. D. Van Evera (chairman), R. P. BARNEs, F. E. Fox, T. Koppanyir, M. H. Martin, A. T. McPHERSON Committee on Grants-in-aid for Researched em ea L. E. Yocum (chairman), M. X. Suuiivan, H. L. WaitTeMoRE Committee on Policy and Planning: Ate) demain ICG oo wa po aubeskaesduoonote J. I. Horrman (chairman), M. A. Mason ROR anwaryl9 OS ners. cess ccs a tion teersdan be mae. Ws Atouete W. A. Dayton, N. R. Suita PROMI Ua ae lO OA ey) eh ce, ae ca vugce, acoso afuaucare H. B. Couns, Jr., W. W. Rupny Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: Le Uaminens? IOEY, Jo ooeachcacenseocnun M. A. Mason cree A. T. McPHERSON MOT ANUAL Ye OOSt cena aceon s seee cl tuectcs a eosvetais A. H . CLARK, F. L. Mounier POR ANU aT yO D4 wets Rance ey ey yens sake souste a aieitersiarsiavens J.M. CALDWELL, W. ee Scumitr JOST Op Coonocd) OF Bo Fla Als Sonooc6000 ssg04sbnb0090Ks00Gd00RE F. M. Serzur Committee of Auditors......J. H. Martin (chairman), N. F. Braaten, W. i YOUDEN Committee of Tellers. . _W. G. BRoMBACHER (chairman), A. R. Merz, Lovrsn M. RussELu * Appointed by Board to fill vacancy. CONTENTS Page Maruematics.—The theory of group representations. Francis E. JOHNSTON - 6 y:d56 dale Wloscis eeidlecs 6s oe yanie wt alt we ae ly MatTHEMATICS.—On an equation of Neményi and Truesdell. D. S. MaITRINOVITOH. (sg. ccc ests gh age ene ones se ee 129 ARcCHEOLOGY.—Notes on aboriginal pottery from Montana. Waupo R. Botany.—A new species of Portulaca from Okinawa. Eeprert H. WALKER and SHINJUN LAWADA] (e550. 522 4 0-0 138 EntTomMoLocy.—New species of Gelechiidae from Argentina (Lepidoptera). J. FF. Gawns @raRKB.... $0.0066 00. clon oe ole, ie os | 140 Matacotoay.—Recent species of the cyrenoid pelecypod Glossus. Davaip NICOL:.;...Aglat aiccei 2 Bodies Bee ac hs too Oe 142 Matacotocy.—More new urocoptid mollusks from Mexico. Pau BARTSCH (iy Romie oie ei ghs ence: a oenyelthe mie oan 146 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals Vot. 41 May 1951 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS CHARLES DRECHSLER WILLIAM F. FosHacG J. P. E. Morrison PLANT INDUSTRY STATION U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM BELTSVILLE, MD. ASSOCIATE EDITORS J.C. EwErs J. I. HorrMan ANTHROPOLOGY CHEMISTRY C. W. SABROSKY T. P. THAYER ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY F. A. CHace, JR. Miriam L. BomHaArRD BIOLOGY BOTANY R. K. Cook PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Rorau & GUILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (8) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourRNALis issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- ouymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints——Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PrRocrEDINGs should be sent to HARALD A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JourNaL.—Per year..............20+-eee cere eee $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available.*................ — = Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 40, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $341.00 Monoerapu No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,” by Herbert Friedmann. .$4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.......................0000005 $25.00 Single:volumes; unbound’: 2/0 Je. cocci cn een ee OEE eee 2.00 Single snumbers? i.) 5-2. eee av eee ee eee .25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences” and addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rapeieye, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoLuME 41 May 1951 No. i) PHYSICS.—The limitations of the principle of superposition: II. Pauu R. Heyu, Washington, D. C. The first paper on this subject was pub- lished in this JouRNAL 40: 345, 1950, wherein the discussion was confined to the case of the resultant of components with equal fre- quencies. The present paper discusses the case where the frequencies are different. Here we find some rather unexpected results, all of which originate in one fundamental propo- sition—that with components of different frequencies the resultant does not obey Hooke’s law. Consider first the case of equal frequencies: A sin nt + B sin n(t — 6) —n*[A sin nt + B sin n(t — 6)] y d*y/dt? Assuming a vibrating element of unit mass, we see that the force acting on the element is proportional to the displacement, obeying Hooke’s law. With components of different frequencies, A sin nt + B sin m(t — 6) —An? sin nt — Bm? sin m(t — @), Ye= *y/d? = where the force acting is not proportional to the displacement but is a variable function of the displacement. To see what results this brings we shall consider a very simple case: sin ¢ Yo = sin 2¢ = sin¢ + sin 2t Yi Resultant y (1) Table 1 gives numerical values of dis- placement, force acting and ratio of force to displacement for a number of points in the first half cycle. The ratios at t = 0° and ¢ = 180° are of an indeterminate form which, when evalu- ated, give the limits to which the ratios ap- proach at the neighboring points. It will be seen that the curve has a point of inflexion when ¢ = 97° 10/ 50”. Here the force acting is zero, while the displacement 149 is not zero. A case of opposite kind is found when ¢ = 120°. Here the curve crosses the axis and the displacement is zero, but the force is not zero. A more readily understandable case of this latter kind is found if we consider a flexible string of length z, fixed at both ends and vibrating in its first and third harmonies (see Fig. 1). Here we have, at maximum dis- placement, y = sin x + sin 3x, with the middle point of the string on the axis of x. At this moment let the points B and C be held stationary. The middle point A will then snap upward and finally come to rest on the straight line between B and C, show- ing that it had a force acting on it when its displacement was zero. Another unexpected result appears also in this table. The displacement has a maximum when ¢ = 53° 37’ 29”, but the greatest force occurs at t = 47° 25’ 33”. A similar result is found for the minimum value of y at ¢ 147° 27’ 37”, with the maximum force at t ISA Sey WM Let us now consider the question of energy. The components y; = sin ¢ and ys = sin 2 have respectively total energies of 5 and 2, whose sum is 2.5. What will be the energy of their resultant? Kinetic energy = 3(dy/dt)? 4(cos t + 2 cos 2¢)? 1 cos? ¢ + 2 cos? 2¢ + 2 cos ¢ cos 2é...(2) MAY 2 9 1951 150 The first two terms of (2) represent the kinetic energies of the original components yi and yo. The third term is an excess (or deficiency) of kinetic energy which is intro- duced by adding amplitudes, since the square of a binomial may be greater or less than the sum of the squares of its two terms. If t = 7/4 or 7/2 there will be no excess or deficiency, and only in such cases will super- position be valid. To determine potential energy we must know the force necessary to balance the force of restitution. d*y/d?? = —sint — 4 sin 2¢ = —F, the force of restitution, nega- tive when displacement is positive. Therefore F will be the force we need to determine po- tential energy. Both F and y are functions of t. Yy t Potential energy = [ F dy = [ F dy/dt dt 0 0 t = [ (sin t + 4 sin 2¢)(cos ¢t + 2 cos 2¢) dt 0 This splits up into four integrals. t [sin te0s ae = § sine een a an nd ne ee (3) 0 t 2f sin ¢ cos 2t dt = cos t — 4. cos 3t — 3 ... (4) 0 t | sin 2tcos tdt = — % cos 3t —2cost+3.. (5) 0 t 8 i Sind 7; COS A Cs = YF Sie WE Os soacnccaccce s (6) 0 Here we see that with more than two com- ponents the mathematical labor rapidly mounts up. With two components we have four integrals to handle; and with ten com- ponents we would have a hundred integrals. But, as was mentioned in the first paper on this subject, there are a number of cases of practical importance where the traditional addition of amplitudes gives correct results. The sum of these four integrals will be the potential energy of the vibrating element at displacement y. Of these four, (3) and (6) will be the potential energies of the components yi, and yo. The sum of (4) and (5) will be the excess (or deficiency) of potential energy in JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 5 the resultant. Adding the kinetic energy (2) to the sum of these four integrals we have Total energy = 4 + 2 + 2 cost cos 2t — cost — cos 3¢ + 2, in which the trigonometric terms cancel out after a little reduction,! and we have Total energy = } + 2 + 2 = component energies + 2 units excess (7) which is constant for all values of f. This violation of the conservation of en- ergy can be avoided by applying modifying factors to the original components y, and y2 before adding their amplitudes. Let these factors be M, and M,. The modified com- ponents will be Y, = Misint and ys = M, sin 2, and their resultant y = M, sin t + Mz sin 2t (8) Working with (8) as we did with the re- sultant of the original, unmodified compo- nents, we obtain Total energy of (8) = $M, + 2M?,+ 2M, Me (9) TABLE 1 t y d?y/dt? Ratio 0° 0 0 0/0 = —3.00 20° 0.98481 —2.91318 —2.95 40° 1.62670 —4.58203 —2.81 47° 25’ 33” 1.73280 —4.72200 —2.73 50° 1.75085 —4.70528 —2.69 58°'3774 297 1.76014 —4.62520 —2.53 60° 1.73206 —4.33)15 —2.48 90° 1 —1 —1.00 97° 10’ 50” 0.74412 0 0 100° 0.64279 0.38327 0.60 110° 0.29690 1.63147 5.49 IGS? 0.14027 2.15785 15.39 120° 0 2.59809 co 125° —0.07946 2.93961 —37.00 130° —0.21877 3.21732 —14.69 IBY ah —0.32206 3.30922 —10.28 140° —0.34202 3.29645 —9.64 147° 27/ 37” —0.36901 3.08944 —8.37 150° —0.36603 2.96412 —8.10 170° —0. 16837 1.19443 —7.11 180° 0 0 0/0 = —7.00 1 The terms in question are: 2 cos t cos 2t — cos t — cos 3t (1’) cos 3t = cos(t + 2¢) = cost cos 2¢ — sin é sin 2t Substituting this, the terms in question become cos ¢t cos 2t — cost + sin ¢ sin 2¢ (2B) Now cos t cos 2¢ + sin t sin 2¢ = cos(t — 24) = cos (—t) = cost Substituting in (2’), the terms all cancel out. May 1951 Equating this to the sum of the energies of the original components we have one equa- tion for M, and Ms. iM?, + 2M?,+ 2M, M, =1+4 2 (10) A second equation for M, and M, is needed. It is physically reasonable to suppose that the original components yj; and y» should con- tribute to their resultant in proportion to their respective energies. Therefore the co- efficients of y; and y» should be proportional to the square roots of the energies of the original components. which gives M, = 24/,. Eliminating WM, be- tween this and equation (10) we get M,=54 My, = 2(5)-3 and the resultant becomes HEYL: PRINCIPLE OF SUPERPOSITION 151 whose total energy for all values of ¢ is equal to 2.5, the sum of the energies of the original components. For more than two components the fore- going 1s easy to generalize. For n components there will be n modifying factors. In addition to the generalized form of (10) there will be (n — 1) ratios between the n modifying fac- tors, giving n equations for their deter- mination. Table 2 gives for the resultant (11) values of displacement, force acting and ratio of force to displacement for points in the first half cycle, as in Table 1. In addition this table gives energy values. It will be seen in this table that while the total energy remains constant the kinetic and potential energies fluctuate, the poten- tial energy having maxima corresponding to the maximum and minimum values of y; and at these points the kinetic energy is zero. The same peculiarities found in Table 1 occur here; potential energy and d?y/dé? do not have the same maxima, and the values of the ratios at 0° and 180° are indeterminate y = 5-4sin t + 2(5)-4 sin 2¢ (11) and the evaluated values are given. TABLE 2 t y d?y/dt? Ratio aces Kinetic energy Total energy 0° 0 0 —3.40 0 2.5 2.5 20° 0.727883 —2.45319 —3.37 0.896899 1.60309 2.49999 40° 1.168301 —3.81081 —3.26 2.28665 0.21335 2.50000 46° 14’ 20” 1.216580 —3.89735 —3.20 2.47308 0.026908 2.49999 49° 39’ 25” 1.223492 —3.87154 Slit 2.50000 0 2.50000 50° 1.223424 —3. 86594 —3.16 2.49973 0.00027 2.50000 70° 0.995171 —2.73027 —2.74 1.75899 0.74101 2.50000 90° 0.447214 —0.447214 —1.00 0.9 1.6 2.5 93° 35/ 0.334754 0 0 0.87490 1.62510 2.50000 100° 0.134506 0.78323 5.82 0.95361 1.54639 2.50000 104° 28’ 39” 0.000001 1.29904 re) 1.09875 1.40625 2.50000 110° —0. 154683 1.88978 —12.22 1.33978 1.16023 2.50001 130° —0.538252 3.18076 —5.91 2.32114 0.17886 2.50000 136° 17’ 42” —0.584481 3.26856 —5.60 2.47062 0.02939 2.50001 140° —0.593375 3.23589 —5.45 2.49948 0.00051 2.49999 140° 34’ —0.593533 3.22632 —5.42 2.5 0 2.5 150° —0.550992 2.87464 —5.22 2.37141 0.12859 2.50000 170° —0. 228255 1.14599 —5.02 1.73051 0.76948 2.49999 180° 0 0 —5.00 1.6 0.9 2.5 152 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 5 ETHNOLOGY.—Some medical beliefs and practices of the contemporary Iroquois Longhouses of the Six Nations Reserve. MarcrenL Rioux, National Museum of Canada, Ottawa, Canada. (Communicated by William N. Fenton.) A member of an Iroquois Longhouse is considered to be an individual who dces not belong to any of the Christian sects and is regarded by his fellow members as a believer in the doctrine of Handsome Lake, a native prophet who, at the beginning of the nine- teenth century, established a new religion among his people. Although this doctrine is strongly influenced by Christian beliefs and practices, it has served to preserve and consolidate many traditional Iroquois ideas and customs. The name ‘‘Longhouse”’ also designates the building where the adherents of the Handsome Lake cult hold most of their religious rituals and ceremonies. The percentage of the Longhouse worshipers is about one-fifth of the Iroquois population— approximately 5,500—of the whole Six Nations Reserve. The majority are located on the “‘lower’” end of the reserve and form a homogeneous group; the Christians in this area are very few. Three of the four Long- houses on the reserve are located there, and the fourth, the Upper Cayuga Longhouse, stands just beyond the boundary of what could be considered the Longhouse district. The affairs of both the Pagans and the Christians are taken care of without dis- crimination by the Indian Affairs Branch of the Canadian Government. Between the two groups no other frontier exists but the cultural, and both have practically the same historical background. Every Iroquois tribe is represented on the reserve, but unevenly. Almost all the Mo- hawks, Oneidas, and Tuscaroras, who repre- sent more than three-fifths of the entire population, are Christians; the next fifth of Christians consists of Senecas Kanedagas, Onondagas Bearfoot along with some Upper Cayugas, and a few Lower Cayugas. The Cayugas form the bulk of the Longhouse 1T spent part of the summers of 1949 and 1950 among the Long-house Iroquois of the Six Nations Reserve near Brantford, Ontario, with the view of determining the degree and rhythm of accultura- tion of this social group. The survey was sponsored by the National Museum of Canada, Ottawa. 2 This designation appears to be not merely geographical; it connotes a value- judgment, when uttered by Christian Troquois of the ‘“‘upper’’ end. believers; among them, the Lower Cayugas, who are more numerous than the Upper, are the most coherent Longhouse group. The Upper Cayugas alone are located outside of the Longhouse area. This group has shown signs of disintegration in recent years, and members are not so staunch in their outlook and practices as they used to be. Whereas the Mohawks, Cayugas, Oneidas, and Tus- caroras constitute homogeneous religious groups, the Senecas and Onondagas are divided among themselves. Should we follow in our analysis the paternal line of descent, as is done officially by the Indian Affairs office, and increasingly by the Longhouse themselves who abandon the traditional maternal line, we will find that no Long- house worshiper is found among the Bear- foot Onondagas, while there are not more than two or three among the Senecas Kanedagas. On the other hand, most of the Onondagas Clearsky and the Senecas Wharondas or Aughanagas are Longhouse supporters. Are the roots of this divergent religious evolution historical or could this split be explained in terms of the present location of the various tribes and subtribes of the Reserve? We note that most of the Senecas and Onondagas who live among the Cayugas belong to the Handsome Lake religion, and those living with the Mohawks are Christian. Although a full explanation of the actual state of the beliefs and practices of the Longhouse people concerning medicine could not be reached before other aspects of their culture are taken into account and discussed in relation to one another, a brief outline of some of the points under study is given here. A cultural trait, it seems, may be re- placed only when the borrower finds in a new trait an advantage over the one being discarded, and when the new trait can be readily assimilated by the old culture. To - explain the diffusion of technical traits from one society to another, one has to find out whether the dominated society is at a favour- able enough technical level to make use of the traits which are offered to it. Leroi May 1951 Gourhan’ states that diffusion does not take place when (1) the ethnical group, being in a state of technical infericrity cannot un- derstand the principles of the new technical traits, (2) when an ethnical group, being in a state of technical inertia, does not see the need of making any effort to assimilate the new traits, and (8) when the ethnical group, being in a state of intensive technical development, neglects what other groups have to offer. Could we not add that there are cases of partial diffusion when a group, for pragmatic reasons, accepts certain new traits and still keeps the older complex be- cause its ideological culture, which dees not follow the same rhythm of acculturation as the technical and social cultures, is still linked with the older technical traits? These principles cculd explain the adop- tion by the Iroquois of a vast amount of European technical traits and the abandon- ment of practically all their technical culture. The few native traits still retained mostly appertain to medicine. In the old Iroquois culture, medicine formed a focus of impor- tance, secondary only to political organiza- tion and to the agricultural complex, and for this reason, it should subsist longer than other complexes of lesser importance. Medic- inal beliefs and practices, intimately linked with their traditional rituals and mythology, remain in accord with the structure of their personality, which has not changed as fast as the external aspects of their culture. Their great mechanical ability has enabled them to grasp the intricacies of much of the European technology and to assimilate it; yet, on the whole, some of their cultural postulates or themes have prevented them from discarding magical beliefs and prac- tices. As we shall see later, native medicine and European medicine can coexist, while some practices cannot continue to exist in the presence of others and have, as a matter of fact, disappeared or are regressing con- stantly. For instance, the folk are still very fond of corn bread, yet they do not as a rule take the trouble to use it because their modern habits do not leave them enough time to prepare it. 3 Leror-GourHan, ANDRE, Miliewx et tech- niques: 398-399. 1945. RIOUX: MEDICAL BELIEFS OF IROQUOIS LONGHOUSES 153 Their medicine may be divided into two parts: the first rests on their traditional knowledge of the curative properties of herbs and other plants; it is empirical. The other may be called magical; it consists of beliefs and practices in which, from the point of view of the observer, no logical link is apparent between the means taken for a cure and the results expected. As Murdock! points out, magical beliefs and practices are characterized, among other things, by effort to produce effects ‘‘in fellow- ing out some mystical principle or associa- tion of ideas.’”’ For instance, a fortune-teller says to a dyspeptic person: ‘““You must hold an Eagle dance because your mother when alive, used to put on an Eagle dance from time to time. But since she died nobody has ever given one.”” We may now ask whether the Iroquois make a distinction between these two types of medicine, em- pirical and magical. Observations to be given here presently, tend to show that they make a distinction between the two kinds of medicine but that it is not made at the intellectual but at the affective level; they seem to yield to different kinds of sentiments when, on the one hand, they go to the hospital and when, on the other hand, they resort to the fortune-teller or to the witch. On the whole, they are inclined to resort to the white doctor or to their medicinal plants whenever their ailment appears to them as being well localized and easy to diagnose; but they turn to a fortune-teller and sometimes to a witch when their trouble seems mysterious. As an informant stated, some diseases are for the white doctor to cure and others for the fortune-teller. Their basic criterion for establishing a distinction between the various ailments they suffer appears to be the element of mystery lacking in the first and present in the others; their emotions rise in intensity in proportion with the mystery involved; they soon pass from fear to anguish. If we call empirical that part of Iroquois medicine which is based on the knowledge of the curative properties of plants and herbs, we can state that this practice does 4Murpock, G. P., in Dictionary of sociology, Fairchild, H. P. (ed.): 180. 154 not belong exclusively to the Longhouse worshipers; for some of the Christians still use Iroquois medicine. But, as every- thing traditionally Iroquois, it has a tend- ency to be identified with Longhouse people and culture. In a few cases of passage from Christianity to the Handsome Lake religion, the reason given to me for the conversion was the good effect Iroquois medicine had on some people who were very ill. Because the whites often express their confidence in and admiration for Iroquois medicine, the ‘Christian Iroquois still keep a verbal, if not a practical, attachment to their own tra- dition. As this does not conflict with their Christian faith, it has been kept as a com- pensatory element; there is a strong inclina- tion to retain it in both Christian and Long- house groups, because it belongs to them and for that reason, has become a source of pride. To overcome the complex of inferiority they have towards the white, they are apt to boast that they had and still have a power- ful medicine. If empirical Iroquois medicine is idealized more than practiced among the Christians it is still in use among the Longhouse people who link it with the Handsome Lake religion and native beliefs and customs. Today medi- cine has gathered around itself other traits which formerly were not so intimately linked with it. If the Iroquois institution of giving personal names is still maintained by a good many Longhouse adherents, it is done, so some chiefs say, to keep the medicine prac- tices functioning. In some rituals, especially where a tobacco offering is made, the name of the person for whom the ritual is per- formed must be mentioned; as the rituals are conducted in the Indian dialect, the name itself should also be mentioned in that tongue because if the name were uttered in English (Christian name) the Great Spirit would not know the person concerned. Medicine appears to be one of the last Indian ecmplexes the Longhouse will aban- don; it is of great importance in keeping their culture functioning as distinct from that of the whites. As early as in 1912, Goldenweiser wrote: ‘“‘The Societies of the Iroquois, whatever their history may have been, are at the present time medicinal in JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 5 their functions.’”®> Most of the societies he mentions have kept functioning today de- spite the increasing pressure of the white culture; it is mostly arcund this medical complex that the cultural resistance to as- similation has centered and _ erystallized. At the Green Bean Festival of last summer, I met a young man who had moved out of the Longhouse district scme years ago and is now working among the Christian Mohawks. As he belcngs to a family of Longhouse believers, he comes back to the Longhouse for seasonal festivals, and came this year as usual. But he stayed in his car instead of joining the dance inside. He was on the verge, so he confessed to me, cf abandon- ing that religion and of becoming a Chris- tian; the only reason which kept him from making this meve, said he, was the Iroquois medicine. ‘If I quit, I will lose all the bene- fits of our good medicines, and these I don’t want to give up.” : The economic aspect of medicine, which in peasant societies plays an important role in the retention of folk practices, works here in the opposite way. In French Canada, fer example, the physician lives ordinarily far from the farms and charges his customers for his services; these factors influence the peasant to cling to his old ways. At the Six Nations Reserve the doctors and hospital are located near Indian homes and _ their medical services to the natives are given free. On this same question of empirical medicine, there exists ancther difference between the practices of the peasant and the Iroquois. As the plants and herbs of the Iroquois belong to the past when the tribes lived in the woods in the midst of an un- disturbed native flora they are now scarce and difficult to find. The peasants, on the contrary, use plants and herbs usually domesticated and close at hand. When it comes to magical medicine, the split between Christians and Longhouse people becomes more accentuated. Although there are instances in which Christians have, in desperate cases, resorted to the fortune- teller, they are becoming rarer every year. 5 GOLDENWEISER, A. A. ‘“‘On Iroquois Work,” in Summary Report of the Geological Survey: 464-475. Department of Mines, Ottawa, 1912. May 1951 The Christians, as a whole, have forsaken the rituals and observances connected with medicine and even if a fortune-teller told one of them to put on a Buffalo dance, he would not be able to perform it or to have it performed by his neighbour. The Chris- tians have been under the influence of the church for so many years—about 300—that they have lost even the idea of the fortune- teller or the witch. The beliefs and practices of the Longhouse are not altogether uniform. Various degrees of acculturation prevail here. Some people are more conservative than others; some are becoming open to outside influences. But, on the whole, they have a corpus of beliefs and of conscious and unconscious attitudes which lnk them together very strongly. Among them, we find three categories of medical practioners. The Indian doctor proper is the best known among the whites, as he often dresses in ceremcnial garments, takes part in exhibitions, county fairs, and sells medicine outside the Reserve; he acts like an emissary of Iroquois culture. There are now two or three Indian doctors of this type cn the Six Nations reserve. Though their journeys and association with the whites have won them some prestige among their Longhcuse compatriots, they do not enjoy the same esteem among their people as does the fortune-teller or even the witch. The folk are inclined to talk about them with a little disdain and to remark that this kind of a doctor is primarily a moneymaker; they do not consult him as often as the others; they may be proud of his successes at large but as he does not often associate with them, their preference goes to the fortune-tellers and the witches who join them in all cere- monies and rituals. The fortune-teller, 2 man or woman, is not outwardly different from the other Longhcuse people. But he or she is a person “Who knows a lot of things” and this knowl- edge carries great prestige among the con- servative elements of the population. He does not usually ask for money in payment for his services, but tells his patients to give him what they consider fair compensaticn. His ways of finding cut what is good for a patient are many: dreams, leaves of tea, cards, the absorption by himself of certain medicines, RIOUX: MEDICAL BELIEFS OF IROQUOIS LONGHOUSES 155 simple questioning, and the summary ex- amination of the patient. His prescriptions are varied: herb and bark medicines, mixed plant and magical recipes, or just magical devices. He stands midway between the European doctor who resorts only to em- pirical medicine and the witch who resorts to magic. At times, the fortune-teller intro- duces preventive medicine by ordering, at the beginning of summer or winter, a remedy which keeps away the diseases common in that season of the year; this practice is dying out. Most of his efforts, however, are directed to mysterious and difficult cases, where he will ordinarily prescribe a ritual dance, a feast or a game with or without the use of herbs and plants. The third group of practitioners ccncerned with health is more«exclusive and very secretive. It takes a long time for an outsider to learn their names and to get any informa- tion about their black art. People ordinarily resort to the witches® when all other means have been exhausted. As it is admitted, witches are becoming rare and their activities are hidden even to the Longhouse believers themselves. According to some informants, those who aspire to become witches must try their power on a member of their own family by bewitching this person to death. For this very reason even their names re- main secret. No witch can denounce another witeh without denouncing himself. The feel- ings of the people in regard to witches and to witcheraft are ambivalent. On the one hand, the witch is feared and reprobated for his malefie power; and the code of Handsome Lake is very severe for witches. But, on the other hand, the people cannot help being fascinated by his great powers and they try to know their names and to get in touch with them. The best and the worst are often intimately linked, and excessive admiration and reprobation are sometimes merged in the minds and reactions of the people. Maleficious witchcraft and benevolent medi- cine are closely connected and the same plant may at times be used for both medicine and witcheraft, depending on the intentions of the person who collects the reots from which the powerful medicine or magic is 6 “Witch’’ is used on the reserve for both male and female practitioners of witeheraft. 156 extracted. The more beneficial a medicine is, the worse it can be if used to bewitch. Their most powerful medicine today, according to my informants, is Niganéga’a‘, a powder extracted from a plant which is said to grow only at Salamanca, in New York State. Those who go there to collect the plant from which the “good medicine” is extracted observe strict rules; they must follow the plant with their hands from the top to the tips of the rccts, deep in the soil. If the plant breaks during the operation, the search for another must start all over again as only plants pulled up in their entirety without being broken in any of their parts are suit- able. Even when the ends of the roots have been reached without accident the only roots that are brought are those which grow from the east to the west—in the direction that the sun follows. Those growing from the North to the South must be avoided. How- ever, somebody whose ambition it is to become a witch can pick these roots; they are used for the most powerful witch- eraft. It 1s admitted, however, that the younger generation knows very little now about witchcraft; beliefs and practices are being lost; the idea of witcheraft is still entertained by a good many people but the witches themselves seem to be less active and less numerous. Of the medicine men enumerated above, the fortune-teller is today the most active among the Longhouse people of the Six Nations Reserve. Of them Parker says: “Diviners of mysteries have always been prominent among the Indians. Their office was to tell their clients the proper medicine society that would be more efficacious in curing the sick, to discover the whereabouts of lost children and articles, to discover what witch was working her spells, and to tell fortunes, as well as to interpret dreams.’” The function of the fortune-teller is similar nowadays, except that the first function described by Parker is much more to the fcre than the others. The only other com- ment to be made on Parker’s quotation is that witches may be male or female, not only female as he seems tc imply. Indeed, the best-known witches now are mostly men. 7 PaRKER, ArnTHUR. The code of Handsome Lake: 49-50. 1012. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 5 A question comes up as to a possible parallel between the switching of this function from women to men and the constant regression of what was known as the Iroquois matri- archate. The people usually resort to the fortune-teller for illnesses which appear mysterious to them, mostly internal diseases with many symptoms. Although I know of a man having gone to a fortune-teller for appendicitis, diagnosed as such by a white doctor, and another one for an abscess in the leg, it seems that in such cases most Long- houses would have gone to the hespital. Acculturation processes* have been in oper- ation for so long that it is safe to state that in most instances where the diseases are ex- ternal and well diagnosed, the patients consult the doctor first before going to the fortune-teller or to the witch. The wife of one of my informants came back from the fruit country where she had been “picking” for about two months and complained about her health. She had a poisoned tooth and felt other symptoms that made her “very sick.’”? She had lost her appetite, was dizzy at times, and in the morning had a funny taste in her mouth; she also had pains in the abdomen. As she was going to the hospital to have her tooth extracted, I advised her to consult the doctor about her other troubles. She answered that it was not a case for the doctor but for the fortune-teller. She went to the hospital, came back three or four days later, and called the fortune-teller who told her that her dead husband was hungry and she must “put up” a feast for him. Obviously, there was in her mind a clear distinction between various illnesses: the ones which can be cured by the doctor, the others by the fortune-teller. In another family I often visited, the mother told me she was not feeling well; she had about the same symptoms as the other woman just mentioned: loss of ap- petite, dizziness, pains in the head. She went to the fortune-teller who recommended a Bear dance; she was very grateful to him because she got better a few days after. Some time later, her oldest son was hit when stepping off a truck, and was bleeding 8 Fenton, W. N. Contacts between Iroquois herbalism and colonial medicine. Ann. Rep. Smith- sonian Institution, 1941: 501-526. May 1951 heavily; her first thought was to call for a doctor and to take her son to the hospital. As in the previous instance, the woman believed that one disease was to be cured by the fortune-teller, another by the white doctor. Many people, however, do not take chances and go to both the doctor and the fortune-teller for the same illness. It some- times happens that having gone first to the physician they stop seeing him and consult a fortune-teller, particularly when a long treatment is required; very soon they get discouraged and revert for help to their magical practices and medical societies. In many cases when they call the doctor, it is reaily too late. Seeing that their medicine has failed, they call for the doctor and some- times go the the hospital just to die. This practice does not improve people’s confidence in the hospital. I have studied the life of a Lower Cayuga of the Handsome Lake faith who, in many respects, is typical of his culture; he has spent all his life on the reserve, in the Long- house area, and has undergone the same influences as the majority of his fellow- believers. But even among the Longhouse believers, the effects of acculturation, as I have been able to observe them, are not uniform. Some people are very conservative on certain points while partial to new beliefs and practices. It seems that idiosyncrasies have much to do with the picking up of traits within a certain range. The informant just referred to, in matters of rituals and religious beliefs, is very strict while he could not help laughing at some of the Iroquois folk tales and myths; his wife, on the con- trary believed in all myths and tales while she did not care very much for the rituals. In all matters of health and medicine, he was a very good informant because, being sick himself, he was personally interested. At various periods of his life, he had consulted the doctor for himself and for his family. As the doctor usually was successful, he had developed a high opinion of him and of his medicine. But I found that on serious matters, he had not taken chances, and he has used both the doctor and the fortune- teller. He is a member of the Bear, Otter, Eagle, and False Faces societies, all of them RIOUX: MEDICAL BELIEFS OF IROQUOIS LONGHOUSES 157 concerned with health. From time to time he “puts up” a dance to prevent any illness caused by negligence in not keeping the rules of the societies. In going over the various illnesses he and his family suffered, I am unable to detect the reasons he had gone to the doctor in certain cases and to the fortune-teller in others; except for face distortion and nose bleeding which are ailments for the False Faces to cure, I could not ascertain on what grounds the distinction between illnesses was made. Some of the illnesses began while the family was out in the fruit country where a fortune- teller was not available; had they happened on the reserve it might have been different; in other cases, the doctor or the fortune- teller was called, when one or the other failed to give satisfaction. About five years ago, Pat fell from a barn, and although no bone apparently was broken he called for the fortune-teller to administer him some ‘“‘Niganéga ’a‘”’, the good medicine.”’ As it did not work—nothing was broken—he called a doctor, because he still felt very sick. After a thorough exami- nation the doctor said that nothing was wrong with him and gave him some pills. Since that day, however, he has not been able to work; he always complained about headaches and stomach and _ intestinal troubles. Once in a while he ealls on a doctor—every time a new one comes on the reserve—and now and then he sees a fortune- teller. When he finds that the prescription of the fortune-teller does not cure him, he is apt to think that he has not enough con- fidence in the traditional dances and feasts and blames it on himself for not being cured. One day, after discussing his problems, he told me that the only answer was that he had been bewitched; the more he thought of it, the more he believed that he had all the symptoms of a bewitched person. ‘‘When nobody knows the cause of headaches, pains, loss of appetite, it is sure that the one who suffers these ailments has been bewitched.” It was the first time he mentioned this suspicion to me, yet it had oecurred to him long ago, as soon as the doctor he had con- sulted first had told him he did not know what was wrong with him. For a year now his conviction had grown firmer; his wife had 158 then consulted a fortune-teller who was picking berries with her and told her that she knew that Pat, my informant, had been bewitched by a relative of his who had reasons to compalin about his behaviour. From that time on he was busy with his wife trying to find out the person who had caused harm to him. Every possibility was examined patiently and finally the conclusion was reached that 1t was a woman with whom he had had some trouble about a horse and a succession. This particular woman seemed to fit the words of the fortune-teller: she was a relative, she might have had some reasons to be angry at him and she was thought by many to have practiced magic in the past and still to practice it. But his trouble did not end there. Pat had then to find another witch who could counterbalance the influ- ence of the first. As the activities of the witches are secret and are known only by hearsay, finding a stronger one was by no means easy. The only one in sight, powerful enough, was not on good terms with him. At the time he took sick, five years ago, this witch, who is also a fortune-teller refused to give him ‘‘good medicine,”’ under the pretext that he did not have enough of it; my in- formant had to beg the Onondaga keeper of the medicine for it, which he did not like to do. This medicine is all the same whether it comes from an Onondaga or from a Cayuga, but the portion that the Cayuga keeper has should be used for Cayugas. Since that time, he has hardly talked to him, and now feels hesitant to ask any other favours. As a result of this, my informant was getting more and more perplexed, and the idea that he was bewitched never ceased to grow with him. An example of the use of both empirical and magical medicine is that of a young man lying in bed with fever. One morning he told his parents that he had seen many little men going up and down on his bed. The parents decided that, on account of this vision, he should be made a member of the Pigmy Society; the same day, the doctor, who had been called previously, decided to bring the lad to the hospital; and the parents, who had JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 5 decided to put up a “Dark dance,” had to have this done the night after his departure. As he was away, his shirt was placed on a chair to signify that the ceremony was con- ducted for him, in his absence. , The activities of Iroquois practitioners do not keep their people from going more and more to their own hospital on the reserve. As they are generally less aggressive than the Christians, they are prone to take advantage of the facilities which the whites have placed at their disposal. Yet, in many cases, their stubborn conservatism prevents the Long- house people, and for that matter the Christian Iroquois as well, from going away from their relatives and friends; they fear any new contacts they may have to make at the hospital. As in peasant societies the in- group-belonging remains strong, despite the constant pressure urban culture exercises on both societies. Fheir use of both empirical and magical medicine appears to be a double-security system for the individual. Just because the white medicine succeeds in many cases they do not lose confidence in their own medicine. The differences between these two systems do not bother them very much. They see the white medicine with their own eyes. Not knowing the principles of this medicine, they are apt to think of the white doctor as another kind of fortune-teller. The latter at times mixes empirical and magical medicine and they are not astonished at the practices of the white doctor. It is probably because they make no clear distinction between the two that they also expect from the white doctor a quick cure. Examples of rapid cures are quoted with great admiration and a long cure is no cure. ‘“‘Next day he was better and went to work” is the happiest solution and the only one worth mentioning. In further studies on this subject, I will try to show that if some of the old beliefs and practices concerning medicine are still enter- tained among the Iroquois Longhouse it is because their personality has not been ac- culturated at the same rhythm as the rest of their culture and that there is still room for faith in magic. May 1951 GRYC ET AL.: CRETACEOUS NOMENCLATURE OF NORTHERN ALASKA 159 GEOLOGY.—Present Cretaceous stratigraphic nomenclature of northern Alaska Grorce Gryc, W. W. Patron, JR., and T. G. Payng,? U. S. Geological Sur- vey. (Communicated by W. F. Foshag.) Until 1944, geologic investigations in northern Alaska were of a reconnaissance nature and few stratigraphic units were recognized and named. Since 1944 the U.S Geological Survey in cooperation with the U.S. Navy has been investigating the pe- troleum possibilities of Naval Petroleum Re- serve No. 4. These investigations have covered nearly all northern Alaska from the Jago River west to the Kukpowruk River and from the Arctic Ocean south to and in eee places into the Brooks Range (Fig. This work has resulted in much more iousted information on the geology of the region. Rocks ranging in age from ques- tionable pre-Cambrian to Pleistocene have been mapped and drilled. Cambrian, Ordo- vician, and Silurian rocks are not known to crop out north of the crest of the Brooks Range, but all other systems are represented (Fig. 2). To date the Cretaceous rocks have been studied more intensively than the rocks of any other age, and as a result a more de- tailed classification has been achieved (Fig. 3). The Cretaceous rocks in the Anaktuvuk (Anaktoovuk) River area of northern Alaska were first described by Schrader.’ Smith and Mertie* redefined the age of some of these rocks and added descriptions of their dis- tribution and lithology. The present study has resulted in many changes in the stratigraphic classification. It is not always possible to tell from the literature what rocks have been included in previously described stratigraphic units and therefore these units may not be strictly comparable to the stratigraphic units introduced here. The ap- parent relationship of past and _ present stratigraphic nomenclature is shown in Table 1. 1 Published by permission of U.S. Geological Survey. 2 Authors listed in alphabetical order. 3 ScHRADER, F. C., Geological section of the Rocky Mountains in northern Alaska. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 13: 247. 1902. 4Suitru, P.S., and Merrin, J. B., and mineral resources of northern Alaska. U.S. Geol. Surv. 815: 196-232. 1930. the Director, JR., Geology Bull. The new classification is here presented and discussed. This classification is based on geologic field studies of the outcrop areas and on laboratory studies by the U.S. Geo- logical Survey during the period 1944 to 1951. CRETACEOUS ROCKS Lower Cretaceous OKPIKRUAK FORMATION (NEW) The Ckpikruak formation (new) is typically exposed along the Okpikruak River, from which it is named. The type section les in the middle of a major syncline and is exposed on a small tributary of the Okpikruak River at about lat. 68°34/30’N. and long. 153°38’W. The formation crops out in the southern part of the Arctic Foothills province from the Itkillik River west to the Kukpowruk River. In the Arctic Foothills province, as far as known, it rests on Jurassic or Triassic rocks with little or no angular discord- ance. At its type locality it is about 2,400 feet thick. To date this is the greatest thickness meas- ured, but an erosion surface between it and the overlying Torok formation indicates that it may be thicker elsewhere. It is predominantly fine- grained greenish-gray sandstone of the gray- wacke type, dark clay, and silt shale with minor amounts of conglomerate near the base. On the Siksikpuk River, where part of the formation is well exposed, it is 1,850 feet thick. Here it is characterized by a rhythmic alternation of fine- grained sandstone, silt shale, and clay shale. This alternation is not well developed in the formation along the Okpikruak River, although there is a suggestion of it. The pelecypod Aucella crassicollis Keyserling,° which is characteristic of early lower Cretaceous (Neocomian) is found throughout this formation in the area of the type locality. The ammonite Lytoceras sp. also been collected in the Siksikpuk River area. In the Nimiuktuk-Kugu- rurok Rivers area on the south side of the De Longe Mountains Auwcella Pavlow and Aucella crassa Pavlow have been collected. These has okensis 5 Tdentifieation of macrofossils from the Okpik- ruak and Torok formations have been made by Dr. Ralph W. Imlay. 160 forms are characteristic of the very earliest Lower Cretaceous and would presumably mark a zone lower than that of Aucella crassicollis Keyserling. TOROK FORMATION (NEW) The type locality of the Torok formation (new) is Torok Creek, a tributary to the Chan- dler River in the vicinity of Castle Mountain. At Castle Mountain the Torok formation in the lower part comprises 2,000 feet of dark silt and clay shale with limestone concretions, and in the upper part about 8,500 feet of dark shale and marine conglomerate and sandstone of gray- wacke type. In exposures on the Chandler and Kiruktagiak Rivers, in the vicinity of Tuktu Bluff about 11 miles north of Castle Mountain, the Torok formation in the upper part consists of 4,500 feet of dark clay and silt shale, which includes 500 feet of sandstone and some con- glomerate, and in the lower part, of 1,500 feet of dark silt and clay shale. Thus at Tuktu Bluff the Torok formation is 6,000 feet thick as com- pared with 10,500 feet at Castle Mountain. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 5 The Torok formation is widely exposed in an east-west belt in the Southern Foothills section of the Arctic Foothills province. This belt is characterized topographically by irregular, iso- lated hills and ridges of sandstone and con- glomerate, which rise above low-lying areas of little relief developed on the shale. Structurally, many of these isolated hills, such as Castle Mountain and Fortress Mountain, are synclines. At most places the Torok formation overlies the Okpikruak formation, but at one place has been found overlying Triassic rocks, indicating warp- ing and erosion of the Okpikruak formation and Jurassic rocks in post-Okpikruak time. The de- gree of angular unconformity is unknown, as the contact is poorly exposed. The fauna of the Torok formation is very scarce but includes some characteristic Aptian and early Albian forms. There are a few species of Inoceramus, Beudanticeras sp., Cleoniceras sp., Lemuroceras sp., Lemuroceras cf. L. belli Me- Learn, Lemuroceras cf. L. aburense Spath, and Aucellina cf. A. dowlingi. The ammonite Cleo- niceras sp. also ranges into the overlymg Tuktu TABLE 1.—COMPARISON OF PAST AND PRESENT STRATIGRAPHIC NOMENCLATURE OF THE CRETACEOUS AND TERTIARY OF NORTHERN ALASKA Schrader, 1902 Smith and Mertie, 1930 Gryc, Patton, and Payne, 1951 Goobie (Gubik) sands Quaternary > Gubik formation & 3 Tertiary Colville Tertiary S series | 2 | a ; ‘ | +S Sagavanirktok formation* o bis 5 Prince Creek Schrader Bluff Upper Cretaceous w | oo : : : Oo) 5 formation formation ae a | oe (nonmarine) (marine) Dp |S n Upper Cret S er Cretaceous ° : we paeny: S jaw | Chandler for- | Umiat forma- Nanushuk series S ; ey ; : a || “a 2 mation tion 5) 3 z = (nonmarine) (marine) ee Lower Cretaceous Lower Cretaceous m Torok formation Anaktoovuk series | z (Anaktuvuk) series A Okpikruak formation * Sagavanirktok formation is not equivalent to rocks previously called Tertiary and is not be- lieved to be present in areas studied before 1944. 161 May 1951 Gryc ET AL.: CRETACEOUS NOMENCLATURE OF NORTHERN ALASKA °e ‘Sty JO UOT}VOO]T SULMOYS BVYSL[V ULoyjI0U Jo deur xopuy—'][ ‘91 089 \ureyunow ye mysnuD N Saag aq mhow r seyjng uoboyein ugi}22¢ yu) d \. syn °° 2 Heanl Hniquepestos ) SIH + } “2HUM" "L ‘ON LSAL aos rT LH TANILNAS sth Nerf SHY TwUpavbog J 0UV 742 ai a os - fe /\ 4p: o0L F | ; ahh OY yo J ‘ON 174M lsat i s Magu HSI4 obhl o8V I cal 9G 0091 oF9l 162 member of the Umiat formation. Arenaceous Foraminifera dominate the microfaunal assem- blage. Lower Cretaceous and Lower (?) Cretaceous NANUSHUK GROUP (REDEFINED) The Nanushuk “series”’ was named by Schra- der® from the Nanushuk River which joins the Anaktuvuk River at about the midpoint of the type section. The type section was described by Schrader as the belt of rocks beginning 5 miles north of the junction of the Colville and Anak- tuvuk Rivers and extending south for 30 miles. These rocks were described as sandstone, lime- stone, shale, quartzite, chert, black slate, and coal. Schrader’ states that the series is best ex- posed “in the north (northeast) bank of the Anaktuvuk about 5 miles above the mouth of Tuluga River.”’ This exposure is redescribed here as the type locality of the Schrader Bluff forma- tion (new) of the Colville group (redefined). It is now apparent that rocks described by Schra- der as the Nanushuk “series” of Upper Creta- ceous age included beds of both Upper and Lower Cretaceous age and possibly older. The name Nanushuk is here applied to a group of rocks of Lower Cretaceous and Lower (?) Cretaceous age. These are exposed along the Nanushuk River where the river cuts across the Arctie Foothills province of northern Alaska. Rocks of this group are known to crop out throughout the foothills north of the Brooks Range from the Sagavanirktok River west as far as the Kukpowruk River. The contact between the Nanushuk group and the Torok formation is believed to be gradational, but the contact zone generally is not well exposed because of the nonresistant nature of the Torok formation. In the Nanushuk River area the Torok formation appears to dip regionally more steeply than the Nanushuk group, but this is apparently due to a difference in competence. In the Kukpowruk River area the contact appears to be lithologi- cally gradational. The Nanushuk group includes shale, sand- stone, conglomerate, and coal beds with little or no bentonite or tuff. It is estimated to be 5,750 feet thick in the outcrop area, but it thins slightly northward. Nonmarine and marine sedi- mentary rocks intertongue, as a result of re- 6 ScuHRADER, F. C., A reconnaissance in northern Alaska. U. 8. Geol. Surv. Prof. Pap. 20: 79. 1904. 7 ScHRADER, F. C., Idem. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 5 peated marine transgressions and regressions in Nanushuk time. Thus the Nanushuk group in- cludes two intertonguing formations—the Chan- dler (nonmarine), which tongues into the Umiat (marine) to the north. Fig. 3 shows the relation- ship of the formations, members, and tongues. Umiat formation (new).—The Umiat forma- tion of the Nanushuk group is named from the marine part of the section below 750 feet in Umiat Test Well No. 1. (See Fig. 3.) In the vicinity of Umiat the inshore facies of the forma- tion consists of relatively clean sandstone that grades northeast through argillaceous sandstone into shale of the offshore facies. The formation is estimated to be about 5,000 feet thick; the lower part is marine shale similar to shale of the Torok formation, which it overlies. Its fauna is almost exclusively mollusks and arenaceous Fo- raminifera. The lower part of the Umiat forma- tion is Lower Cretaceous (mid-Albian), as deter- mined from the scarce but distinctive mollusks. The upper part of the Umiat formation is prob- ably also Lower Cretaceous (upper Albian), but the fossil data are inconclusive. The Foraminif- era show a marked resemblance to those of the Ashville formation of Canada. The Umiat forma- tion has been divided into two members—the Tuktu and the Topagoruk. The Tuktu member is the basal member of the Umiat formation. Its type locality is on the Chandler River where this river cuts through Tuktu Bluff, a continuous south-facing escarp- ment that can be traced for many miles. At the type locality the member is about 1,000 feet thick and underlies the Hatbox tongue of the Chandler formation (see below). Here it consists almost entirely of marine sandstone. Northward from Tuktu Bluff to Umiat the member thickens progressively to about 2,500 feet and includes part of the marine equivalent of the Hatbox tongue of the Chandler formation, as this tongue changes to a marine facies. The characteristic fossil is an undescribed Lower Cretaceous Ino- ceramus. The ammonite Cleoniceras ranges from the Torok formation into the Tuktu member of the Umiat formation. The base of the Tuktu member coincides with the base of the Umiat formation and the base of the Nanushuk group. The Topagoruk member of the Umiat forma- tion is named from the section in Topagoruk Test Wel! No. 1, from 50 to about 3,100 feet. The top 1,000 feet includes nonmarine units of the Niakogon tongue of the Chandler formation and May 1951 consists of coal, shale, sandstone, and minor amounts of ironstone. The bottom 2,100 feet is entirely marine clay shale, silt shale, silt, and sandstone. Fossils found in this member are Fo- raminifera, the scaphopod Laevidentaliwm, and Inoceramus prisms. It is suggested that these fossils are of Lower Cretaceous age but this is QUATERNARY UPPER LOWER (?) ~< SOUTH GROUP Prince Creek formation (nonmarine) COLVILLE CRETACEOUS formation Qa =) ) a O x =) ae ee) =) Zz Sentinel Hil! member Schrader Bluff formation ( marine) Topagoruk member Umiat formation (marine) fOr mat | © fm (local intraformational unconformities) EARLY LOWER UPPER MIDDLE LOWER JURASSIC MISSIS- S1P- PIAN CARBONIFEROUS DEVONIAN PRE- CAMBRIAN (?) Sin ul ii k S@dadlear oc it \ disconformity Lisburne Noatak Unnamed Neruokpuk (local unconformity) Okpikruak VOrmoatt © i TOr may i © in disconformity(?) Suidhnedrsehlomnce limestone frOhtamMeGh oun formation unconformity PO te tad Chit To) i Fig. 2.—Diagrammatic columnar section of the Arctic slope of northern Alaska. 164 Chandler formation (new).—The Chandler for- mation (nonmarine) is exposed in the Northern Foothills section of the Arctic Foothills province of northern Alaska. It is the age equivalent of the Umiat formation, with which it intertongues northward in two major tongues (named) and several minor tongues (unnamed). Its type lo- cality is on the Chandler River where the river crosses the Northern Foothills section. Litho- logically most of the formation in the southern exposures 1s nonmarine sandstone and conglom- erate. To the north it grades into shale with inter- bedded sandstone and coal; it contains a few fresh- to brackish-water mollusks in its northerly exposures. Along the Chandler River the forma- tion is about 4,700 feet thick but includes minor units of marine strata of the Umiat formation. The Chandler formation overlies the Tuktu mem- ber of the Umiat formation in the southern part of the outcrop area. The Hatbox tongue (new) at its type locality, Hatbox Mesa in the Chandler River drainage, is approximately 3,000 feet thick and wedges out northward. It is the lower part of the Chandler formation and lies between the marine Tuktu and Topagoruk members of the Umiat formation. The Niakogon tongue (new) represents the upper part of the Chandler formation. Its type locality is Niakogon Buttes, between the Chan- dler and Anaktuvuk Rivers. In the southern part of its outcrop area it is about 1,700 feet thick; it wedges out northward. A persistent conglom- erate bed, characterized by a greater percentage of white quartz pebbles than is found in other conglomerates in the region, forms the top bed of the Niakogon tongue. Upper Cretaceous COLVILLE GROUP (REDEFINED) The Colville ‘“‘series’”’ was named by Schrader from exposures along the Colville River north of the junction with the Anaktuvuk River. On the basis of lithology and scanty floral evidence Schrader® concluded that these rocks were of Tertiary age. Smith and Mertie® concluded that “from the fossil evidence obtained in the appar- ent continuation of these rocks farther west” the lower part of the Colville “series” was of Upper Cretaceous age. It is now evident from 8 SCHRADER, F. C., Op. cit.: 81-83. *Smitx, P.S., and Merrie, J. B., JR., op. cit.: 232-233. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 5 microfaunal and macrofaunal evidence that these rocks are all of Upper Cretaceous age. The ex- posure on the west side of the Colville River 1 mile north of the 70th parallel was considered to be Tertiary by Smith and Mertie!®. It is now believed that this exposure is of the same age as the Gubik formation, which is Pleistocene. This is apparently substantiated by the lack of any Tertiary beds in the many core tests and test wells in the Barrow-Simpson and Fish Creek areas to the west of the Colville River. The Colville series is here redefined as the Colville group, applied to type exposures along the Colville River from approximately the junc- tion with Prince Creek east and north to the 70th parallel. Rocks of this group are well ex- posed in river cuts; on the Colville River these cuts form bluffs that are nearly continuous from Umiat north to Ocean Point. These rocks extend west to about the longitude of the Ikpikpuk River and east to the Canning River, and per- haps beyond. The Colville group is separated from the un- derlying Nanushuk group by a major uncon- formity. Rocks of lower Upper Cretaceous age (Cenomanian) appear to be missing. Beds of middle Upper Cretaceous age (Turonian) in the Colville group overlie beds of probable upper- most Lower Cretaceous age (Albian) in the Na- nushuk group. The basal member of the Colville group is a distinctive unit consisting of black shale with limestone interbeds that can be read- ily identified in the field. The Colville group is divided into the nonmarine Prince Creek forma- tion and the marine Schrader Bluff formation, which are approximately of equivalent age. In most of the outcrop belt the two formations intertongue and are not always readily distin- guishable. Lithologically the group includes clastic rocks ranging from shale to conglomerate, limestone, low grade oil shale, and coal. The total thickness of the group is about 5,200 feet. Schrader Bluff formation (new).—The name Schrader Bluff formation (marine) is given to exposures at Schrader Bluff on the Anaktuvuk River just south of the junction with the Tuluga River. This bluff exposes the three members of the formation in over 3,000 feet of continuous outcrop. The formation has been identified in 10 SmitH, P.S., and Merri, J. B., JR., op. cit.: PRS. ae 165 CRETACEOUS NOMENCLATURE OF NORTHERN ALASKA . May 1951 Gryc ET AL. pUv SUOT}RULIOT oULIvUIUOU pue ou S48J/UIWOJOJ sncas0>/09 ewos Rue spedojpyde> ewos Buipnjoui ‘sa!zeds asow Avow BuIUIo{U0> Ul $21904 jo “#5005 244 JO OUND, a4) WOH} S194/P j] '$42J/UIWOJOJ SNOaI0UAJO PUD s2snjjoW 40 4j8610) pesodio> si ounoy ays saquiow aaqoas ay Jo 9/045 ulyj-sedod ¥P2/F 2Y) ul {de2x@ ‘spaq and UI sn320 jou.sa0p puo jols9OW 2450)2 48440 Yum Paxiuipo eq oj spua} jo119}0W >s0)2014g “0910 By) JO sod WaYyjJoU SYF U) SuONIeS JOM OF payiwuy Ajjsow 1 o}1U0INO|6 ‘ay1J0/4> D1UeBIYINO auy ©} @np swaas 40/09 ysiuaai5, °s1940} |3)]0J0d ul $1 Buippag ssou2 ‘40j20s04> P@ppaq-jjam st! (E) joausad puo Ayisosod Mo} Buyjnsas yim xi4yow Appnw puo Buysos 100d sy (Z) ‘s0j09 uaes6 ysido46 oj uaes6 Aysnp sy! (|) ul wosyasayy ssayip yng se1204 esoysuj ay; Jo 424) Y4IM JOUO}jOPO64e]Ul $1 auo}spuDs joJ2UEB U) -sjueWIPas ay) Jo @Dun0S 24) Of [DUxosd 240m suo}!puo> a104syo a12yH dnosB yAYsnUON, ay) Jo pod saddnayj ui sai20y 5: jwasesd 810 $94012W0/5u0> “sa120y B44 4o ¥/Nq Ys sus04 Y>1YM ‘ajDYs A (seisueBD Buimouuim jsow JO 4y20e1 ey) puodeg $81] IDY) WOKJoq Des eYy jo yJOd ayy uo Pestsodeq) S3IDV4 JYOHSIIO ju! psomysoayjsou Buipos6 auojspuos 40 51515U0> “ LIBUL SUTMOYS "S190 SIYY JO $yD0I u Aypdiauusd ein sajdwos dossyno yo uoypunjos pun ‘sdaas ||9* Ul SMoYs $0 yans 10 40 suBIS “spodA2ajad payjays-Aanay ’@B10) ewos 104 daoxe ‘Aso -vawBouy Ajulow 240 pup 221035 210 sulowes j)s504 ‘BUIMOULIM papUaxo jiu) -180 0) yBnoua Buo) pasnod puosjs ay) asym pauisoy U2aq eAdy 0) puo adh, Bursysaoys Jo 2q 04 waas j10 404 a/qOJOADy JOU $2148140)20I049 s10AJ0591 Buravy asoy ‘ajouoqo> Aq pajuawe> eso sujosB e1eym ydaoxo ’ ‘snorased Puo snosod 41104 j019U26 u! 210 spuos YBnoysjy ‘puo.4s oy) Jo sjuoWaAcU 2aisse6as pup oa'ssasBsuoy pooiq 40 esn0>aq pooidsepim 210 59/204 iY) JO Sjuaupas sojn>1ua AjyBIY 810 sj1Un jDsnjxay ‘pappaq $5019 oq Low $PIYM Syiun eAIssoW UL puD ‘pafJ0s |J9M Of pajsos Kjejo/2poW ’40j09 ul AOsB Yysimoyjad of Moyad ysidosG ‘ayosawojBu02 ewos Pub auoyspups yo s4s1su0> (jO4eue6 ur S1!s0dep esoys-iDeu puDd ‘pq ‘yopeg) S3IDV4 JYOHSNI —— BYSBTY UloyJOU url sdnois af[IAjoO pur ynysnue Jw s0/904 S14) JO 54304 UI UMOUY 010 sdaas 506 OMY ‘UBIO Jeuucy> yo A\qoqoid 210 juasesd as0yy puo ‘uowWo2uUN 910 spuos snorA Jad pun snosog ‘puny Jay}o 84) Uo $9/904 puDjU) 1951002 ey) oyu! puo puoy UO Yj UO 59/204 as0YsU) 4051009 a4 O4U/ SepO4B $aI204 S14) °(04AydosDY>) syunjd }/s804 puo ‘ss04UJWOs0y snoar0UaLD ‘sepor0450 ‘spodArajad 4a4j0 Pun o1up of payiu) 210 pun ‘sadAy J8j0M-Ys1x201q PUD -ysaxy JO 310 5/5504 “$9/20J B40YSYO AY4 UI! SyuaWIpas JO UOIOjNWN220 pidos BsOW ey) yO asNDD -9q Ajqoqod ‘sainy as0ysyO ey) Ul UDYy (Sa12eds jou) sjonpiaipul oj s0 jvopungqn esow eq 04 puaj sajoys A0)> ayy U! sjissoyouIW ay) ‘OS/y “54II5 puD Pus YIM paxiwpo 210 sadAy 4201 asayy 4o syuanjy4su0> say40 puD 9,0U0q +409 /2y)80)201Ad oy YD1YA UI ‘SaID04 asOYSYO a4) WO, 39/904 1048005 24) Buyjoyuassyip 404 uo1se112 0 s1 spaq aseyy yo ssauaind ayy ‘suIsoq Padsoq UI (00> ym sayjaBo, pawsoy y>1ym ‘euo4sU0s) puo ‘au04saW/ 2ydosBoyyiqns ‘Aoj> ‘yny ‘oy1uojuaq yo spaq suinjuor seirny siyy “suoy -285 JO ul juasesd you yng 21451494204049 @10 jauUD> poayBoq PUD {002 40 5p eq 's]14u9] jeuOY> juasasdes Aqoqosd puo peppaq 55019 A|yBIy 240 Y>1ym 2/010W0/Bu0> pud audjspuos 4954002 40 saipoq suinju0> ynq /euo4spuos euy puo e0Ys ‘sjuawipes pappaq-jjam ‘pauios6-auy yo Ajsowlsd 54515405 (81!80d ep s1Dj}ep sepnjouy "S$@4D] pud ‘succBp; ‘skog ‘seysiow —suisog Pess0g 18jDM-Ys19>9DIq O4-YSe44 JO 48g peyDpuNu! AjeBs0y UL Peiisodeq) SdlDV4 TWLSVOD \\Y “S1OQGUIOUL pue sendu04 Ilayy N 94} JO WOlJoos ssor1d salovy paroysoy—'e “pry uorj2as aU// ay, Joau 3Yf) Of! pejzelosd veeq soy 5//9M uO sdos2{no0 Wo1y voYoWwJosuF CLTTEL A /u91q0 9/0 sujowas jounoy pul ‘may 210 spaq Joo> “o2!s fq pajuawar 9/0 speq Auow “spaq ulyjim Uouuio> 910 sedhy josnjxa4 yo Ayuojnaijusy puo Buippeq 35012 9/093-2B10) ‘juaysissed puo aarssow aso speq ayj YBnoyyy “ajos0 -woj6u02 pus suojspuos payson-\jam “moyjah ysihos68 yo Aysowud 48007 ([P4aj0W UDoy [DIAN||O Buipny> cul Alqissod ‘s\isodap ulojdpooy Pup jeauuny>) S3IDV4 GNVINI SINAWIGAS JNIYWW < HLYON yoann oe yaa 4 = TNOILUWHOS LVIWA w wnuoovdo:: A “aul! ynsobodo) ui buimosb uaaq an OY AOW aul/2/{UO joiWA “Bulssiw. Ayqogosd Jaqwow ynsobodo) jo {04 aa arias ee aul oy) WIGWIN 338VaS Ses SSeS maa ST SST NOILVNV1dXJ SLINAWIGAS INIYVYWNON oc o2 co)] S ie) 31V9S 1VLNOZIYOH oe Menor ANSNAAANNANRANAANAARNS ee wane ; AD vonind a) NOJLVWYO4 YIPWIW Jd ld ———— NNN 15V09 DILOY ro us 1ON 773M LS3L 3549 HSId TTIH JANILNIS eS SQRSSSS Rg 1ON 1531 3409 TIIH T3NILN3S 1ON 173M 4is3i 1vIWn fofelo}} 0002 000¢ 000b 1334 NI 31V9S 1V9I1LY3A T 45N18 NLANL T 39ONVY SHOOUB JO 1NOY¥3 HLYON 166 well cores from the Umiat, Fish Creek, Sentinel Hill, and Cape Simpson areas. North of Umiat the Schrader Bluff formation is bounded below by the Umiat formation, and in the Umiat area and to the south by the Niakogon tongue of the Chandler formation. Lithologically it is similar to the Umiat forma- tien, consisting largely of marine sandstone to the south and shale to the north, but it has a much larger percentage of bentonite and tuff, which increases upward through the formation. At Fish Creek Test Well No. 1 it is 2,600 feet thick. The Schrader Bluff formation contains more megafossils, mostly mollusks, than the Umiat formation. The characteristic megafossils are spe- cies of Inoceramus and Scaphites. Foraminifera are somewhat rarer than in the Umiat formation, but local zones of planktonic forms are present. The Seabee member is the lowest unit of the Schrader Bluff formation. In the outcrop area it is bounded below by the Niakogon tongue of the Chandler formation. The top part of the Seabee member contains a very distinctive 150-foot unit of fossiliferous paper shale, which is a low-grade oil shale and contains a characteristic fauna. Index fossils are Scaphites delicatulus Warren, Watinoceras n. sp., Borissjakoceras n. sp., and Inoceramus labiatus Schlotheim, which indicate that this unit is the equivalent of the Greenhorn limestone of Upper Cretaceous age of the western interior United States. The member is well ex- posed along a tributary of the Colville River, Seabee Creek, for which it is named. It is also well exposed along Maybe Creek, a tributary of the Ikpikpuk River. The Seabee member is 450 feet thick in the type locality. The Tuluga member is named from the Tuluga River, which enters the Anaktuvuk River at the north end of Schrader Bluff. Schrader Bluff is the best exposure of this member and is its type lo- cality. The member is also well exposed on the Chandler River near the confluence with the Ayiyak River and on the Colville River in the Umiat area. The maximum thickness is esti- mated to be 2,200 feet in the outcrop belt, but this thickness includes minor units of the Tulu- vak tongue of the Prince Creek formation. In Fish Creek Test Well No. 1, from 1,195 to 2,350 feet, this member is almost entirely marine ex- cept for one thin coal bed and associated sand- stone. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 5 Lithologically the Tuluga member is distin- guished by abundant bentonite and tuff inter- bedded with a light-colored sandstone, and shale. The Tuluga member contains the largest number of individuals and species of macrofossils of any unit in the Cretaceous cf northern Alaska. Fos- sils are commonly distributed throughout sand- stone zones a few hundred feet thick. The diag- nostic macrofossils are Inoceramus lundbreckensis McLearn and an undescribed Scaphites. The Sentinel Hill member is named from the section in Sentinel Hill Core Test No. 1 in which a little over 1,100 feet of marine beds of this member and nonmarine beds of the Kogosukruk member of the Prince Creek formation were penetrated. In the outcrop belt along the Col- ville River equivalent intertonguing marine and nonmarine beds total 2,340 feet. Lithologically the Sentinel Hill member is characterized by volcanic glass shards, abundant bentonite, and tuff. In outcrop the beds are less consolidated than the underlying members. Fau- nally this member is distinguished by abundant radiolaria, fish bones, and diagnostic Foraminif- era. Macrofossils are rare and consist of long- ranging generalized types of pelecypods. Prince Creek formation (new).—The Prince Creek formation of the Colville group includes all the nonmarine beds above the top of the Niakogon tongue of the Chandler formation and intertongues with the Schrader Bluff formation. The type locality is Prince Creek, a tributary to the Colville River. The Prince Creek formation, like the Chandler formation, is made up of sand- stone, conglomerate, shale, and coal, but con- tains considerably more bentonite and tuff than does the Chandler formation. Its fauna consists of a few fresh- to brackish-water mollusks. The Prince Creek formation has been separated into two major tongues. The Tuluvak tongue, the lower part of the Prince Creek formation, is best exposed in the Tuluvak Bluffs on the Chandler River where it is 1,200 feet thick. It overlies the Seabee member (marine) of the Schrader Bluff formation. The Kogosukruk tongue is the age equivalent of the Sentinel Hill member of the Schrader Bluff formation. It is named from the Kogosuk- ruk River, along which it is well exposed. Equally good if not better exposures which are more readily accessible are along the Colville River from near its confluence with the Anaktuvuk May 1951 River to Ocean Point just north of the 70th parallel. The total thickness along the Colville is 2,340 feet but this includes marine units of the Sentinel Hill member of the Schrader Bluff for- mation. The Kogosukruk tongue is distinguished from the older units by its poor consolidation, finer texture and somewhat brighter colors. It consists largely of clay, silt, and shale. Bony coal and bentonitic beds are common. Sandstone is rare, and only one conglomerate, 15 feet thick, has been mapped. Macrofossils are very rare and consist of fresh-water and brackish-water pelecy- pods and gastropods. In the outcrop belt this tongue overlies the Tuluga member of the Schrader Bluff formation and is covered by a thin mantle of the Gubik (Quaternary) formation. TERTIARY ROCKS Sagavanirktok formation (new) The Sagavanirktok formation crops out in the Franklin Bluffs, its type locality, along the lower part of the Sagavanirktok River and is also well exposed in the White Hills area. It consists mainly of red-bed-type, poorly consolidated silt- stone, sandstone, conglomerate, and lignite. No fauna has been found, but the formation does contain an early Tertiary flora: The Sagavanirk- tok formation is structurally conformable with the underlying Colville group and no large ero- sional break is indicated by the field data. The rocks here named the Sagavanirktok formation have not been previously mapped or described. They apparently do not crop out west of the Ttkillik River and are not definitely known in the Canning River area. Thus the formation lies in an area that was unmapped and unexplored by geologists before 1944 GRYC ET AL.: CRETACEOUS NOMENCLATURE OF NORTHERN ALASKA QUATERNARY ROCKS Pleistocene GUBIK FORMATION The Gubik formation of Pleistocene age man- tles the older rocks in much of the Arctic Coastal Plain of northern Alaska. The name Gubik sand was first applied by Schrader! to a “surficial deposit of brownish sand or loam about 10 to 15 feet in thickness” which is exposed along the Colville River in the Coastal Plain province. The name is from the Eskimo name of the Col- ville River. Leffingwell’? points out that the Eskimo name for the lower river is Kupik or “big river.” Gubik, now the accepted spelling, is apparently a misspelling of Kupik. The Gubik formation, as here redefined, ranges in thickness from a few feet to 150 feet, but in most exposures is 10 to 30 feet thick. It is largely marine and consists predominantly of loosely consolidated, cross-bedded, brown or buff gravel, sand, silt, and clay. The microfauna is somewhat similar to recent faunas and is more diversified than any of the older microfaunas of northern Alaska. The Gubik fauna differs from living Arc- tic faunas in that no pelagic forms have been found. The bluffs along the west bank of the Colville River from the mouth of the Anaktuvuk River to Ocean Point expose the Gubik formation lying unconformably on the upper 1,500 feet of the Colville group. This is the original type locality as defined by Schrader. A maximum thickness of 30 feet is exposed along the Colville River, but a thickness of 150 feet has been mapped on the Kikiakrorak River, 15 airline miles upstream from its confluence with the Colville River. 11 ScHRADER, F. C., op. ecit.: 98. 12 LeEFFINGWELL, E. DE K., The Canning River region, northern Alaska. U. 8. Geol. Surv. Prof. Pap. 109: 95, 109. 1919. 13 ScHRADER, F. C., op. cit.: 98. 168 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 5 ZOOLOGY .—A new subgenus of Diaptomus (Copepoda: Calanoida), including an Asiatic species and a new species from Alaska. MitpDRED STRATTON WILSON, Arctic Health Research Center, Public Health Service, Federal Security Agency, Anchorage, Alaska. (Communicated by F. A. Chace, Jr.) This paper is part of a projected survey of the fresh-water Copepoda of Alaska. It includes the description of a new species of Diaptomus that has zoogeographical im- portance because of its close relationship to one from the Asiatic portion of the U.S.S. R. This latter species (D. rylovt Smirnov, 1930) has been assigned by Kiefer (1938a) to his genus Neutrodiaptomus. Since it and the new Alaskan species exhibit distinct differences from all the other members of this group, a new division is proposed to include them. This is given the status of subgenus, as I agree with Light that the structural range of variation among the species of Diaptomus (sensu lato) is not great enough to allow the full rank of genus to most of the subdivisions of the so-called Diaptominae proposed by Kiefer (1932, 1936a-d, 1937, 1938a-b) and himself (1938, 1939). Family DrapToMIDAE Genus Diaptomus Westwood The broad definition of Diaptomus used here excludes only the species delegated by Kiefer to genera of the Paradiaptominae and to Acantho- diaptomus, which is characterized by features common to his two subfamilies. Such a definition must include Hemidiaptomus Sars, 1903, because it is naturally a part of the large series of sub- genera into which it is possible to divide Diapto- mus. Kiefer’s studies have drawn attention to the highly significant, but hitherto largely ne- glected characters of the left exopod of the male fifth leg. The structure in Hemidiaptomus of this and of other appendages of systematic import- ance, do not depart from the basic patterns found in Diaptomus. One of the remainder of Kiefer’s groups, Psychrodiaptomus (1938b), is a synonym of Lepto- diaptomus Light. These names were both pro- posed in 1938, but the publication date of Leptodiaptomus, March 9, precedes that of Psychrodiaptomus, April 20. It is felt that detailed reexamination of many species, particularly of those of North America, is needed before an evaluation of Kiefer’s system of classification is possible. Therefore, a rediagno- sis of Diaptomus is deferred for the present. Nordodiaptomus, n. subg. Subgenotype—Diaptomus siberiensis, new name for Diaptomus rylovi Smirnov, 1980. Diagnosis. —Of moderate size, length of females between 1.6 and 2.4 mm; of males between 1.4 and 1.7 mm. Metasome without bizarre protru- sions, the wings of last segment in female only moderately developed; last segment distinct in male. Urosome of female with 3 well-defined segments, the genital a little asymmetrical, the sensilla not grossly developed; urosome of male asymmetrical or not. Antennules short in both sexes, only reaching to near the end of the metasome; that of the female with a stout, very elongate seta on the first segment, and with segments 11 and 138 to 19 usually with 2 setae. The left antennule of the male differmg from that of the female in having the seta of segment 1 not so well developed and only a few of segments 13 to 19 with more than 1 seta. Right antennule of male with the spines of segments 8 and 12 not enlarged, those of 10, 11 and 13 much enlarged, with dissected ends, that of 13 not reaching beyond segment 14; segments 14-16 very tumid, 14 without a process or spine; segments 15-16 with short cuticular processes; the antepenultimate segment without armature of any kind. Maxilliped not enlarged; the endopod about half the length of the basipod, its setae slender and nonprehensile. Outer spines of the exopods of legs 1-4 normal, those of leg 1 not at all enlarged. Leg 2 of female lacking the dorsal cuticular lappet (Schmeil’s organ) of the second endopod segment; absent or not in the male. Fifth leg of female with exopod symmetrical, the third segment distinct, its setae and that of the second segment not elongate but very stout and subequal to one another. The endopod usually. shorter than the first exopod segment, normally with a single, subapical, more or less well developed spiniform seta. The endopod and its armature symmetrical or not, the whole ramus sometimes subject to considerable variation within a single population. May 1951 Fifth leg of male without bizarre armature. The right leg having the apical claw very elon- gate, its length about equal to that of the rest of the ramus; the lateral spine of exopod 2 stout and near the terminus of the segment; posterior face of exopod 1 with very small but heavy lamel- lae. Exopod 2 with or without imner cuticular spine. Both pads of the distal segment of the left exopod well defined, about equal in length, the distal narrower than the other, postero- medial in position; the proximal bulging a little medially, and with a narrowed portion extended across the top of the segment on the anterior side; both pads armed conspicuously with slender to stout hairs. The processes closely set, both distally directed; the distal short, its length not more than one-half that of the outer margin of the segment, digitiform, continuous with but more or less demarcated from the segment, with or without spinules on its inner margin; the proximal process a subterminal, stout, curving spine, reaching to the end of the other process or beyond, armed laterally with spinules. Endo- pods not grossly developed. Included species: Diaptomus siberiensis, n. name; Diaptomus alaskaensis, n. sp. Diaptomus siberiensis, n. name Diaptomus rylovt Smirnov, 1930, pp. 79-82, fig. 1; 1931, pp. 627-634, figs. 12-21; Kiefer, 1932, p. 478. Neutrodiaptomus rylovi Kiefer, 1938a, p. 46. The description given in German by Smirnov (1931) has been largely used in this study. The diagnostic characters of D. siberiensis are given herein in the section in which it is compared to the new Alaskan species. Occurrence.—The type locality is a small lake at Bonmak, on the bank of the River Zeya, in the Amur region of southeastern Asiatic U. 8. S. R. This is apparently in the area of the head waters of the River Zeya, which according to Berg (1988) les in the Stanovoy mountain range. Smirnov does not give the altitude, but it ap- pears to be in the secondary southern chain having peaks of relatively low elevation (1,400 meters). The species was also found in a collection from Kjusjur, toward Bulun, which is a little south of the delta of the Lena River on the Arctic coast. This is in tundra area where the subsoil is permanently frozen and superficially at least, represents a contrast to the mountain lake habitat wf the Amur locality. Variation —Smirnoy mentioned no variation WILSON: NEW SUBGENUS OF DIAPTOMUS 169 in the specimens from the type locality, except for the division of the claw of the fifth leg in some males. In the Lena River specimens, the male was wholly typical, but the female was much smaller in size, 1.7 mm as opposed to the 2.4 mm of the Amur specimens, and had only one seta instead of two on the thirteenth segment of the antennule. The endopod of the fifth leg differed in being shorter, and in having its first segment longer than the second. No statement was made as to whether these variations charac- terized a single individual or several. Nomenclature—The specific name rylovt was used by Charin (1928) for a species of Hemi- diaptomus. As pointed out above, this group exhibits no differences from other groups of Diaptomus sufficiently distinct enough to warrant other than subgeneric status; Charin’s species should therefore be known as Diaptomus (Hemi- diaptomus) rylovi. This necessitates the renaming of Smirnov’s species; the name siberiensis is proposed as a geographic contrast to that of the related Alaskan species. Diaptomus alaskaensis, n. sp. Figs. 1-29 Specimens examined.—30 2 , collected in a mountain top pool, Eagle Summit, on the Steese Highway between Fairbanks and Circle, Alaska; elevation 3,880 feet; July 4, 1947. Collector, Charles 8. Wilson. Types.—In the United States National Mu- seum. Holotype male, no. 90711; allotype female, no. 90712. Description.—Length of preserved specimens, middorsal line, female, about 1.65 mm; male, about 1.44 mm. FEMALE Metasome (Fig. 7).—Approximately twice the length of the urosome in middorsal line. In dorsal view, the greatest width occurring just behind the cephalic suture, tapering from there to the beginning of the second segment, beyond that of rather uniform width to the wings of the last segment which are a little expanded. The cephalic segment a little longer than seg- ments 2-4 combined (proportions approximately 37:32); its suture distinct; the anterior portion roughly triangular in dorsal view. The last seg- ment imperfectly separated by a short lateral suture, the wings well rounded at the sides, reaching posteriorly to about the middle of the 170 genital segment; the tips only shghtly drawn out, the asymmetry not distinctly pronounced. Each side armed with two types of sensilla, that of the wing tip a small peglike seta; the other a shorter seta set on a small rounded tubercle and arising on the inner rounded portion of the wing (Fig. 10). The marginal hyaline area of the wing (demarcated in Fig. 11 by dotted lines) very narrow. Urosome (Fig. 11).—All three segments dis- tinct. Genital segment not markedly inflated, but noticeably asymmetrical; the left side with a gently rounding lobe above the middle; the anterior half of the right side produced into a large backwardly directed lobe, behind which laterally is another narrowly rounded area. Each side armed on the anterior lobe with a sensillum very like that of the inner lobe of the thoracic wing. The rest of the urosome symmetrical; the third segment longer than the second (proportions about 3:2); the caudal rami only a little longer than the third segment, their length about twice their greatest width; with hairs on the mner margins from near the proximal portion to the tip; caudal setae normal. Most females of the sample were ovigerous; the eggs comparatively large and few in number (6 to 10). Rostral filaments (Fig. 8) attenuated and very slender. Antennule (Fig. 5)—Comparatively short, reaching to near the tips of the thoracic wings. The elongate seta of segment 1 (measured from its base) reaching to between the end of segment 11 and the middle of segment 12; very stout basally and throughout much of its length, arising from a well defined and large cuticular base. (In Fig. 5 for convenience in arrangement of drawings, this seta has been ‘“‘pulled in” towards the body of the antennule; in all the preserved specimens, both before and after dissection, it is held out more or less perpendicular to the seg- ment; the stoutness of the proximal portion sug- gests that this is the natural position in life.) The number of setae on segments 1-10, 12 and 20-25 as usual: 3 on segment 2, 2 on 9 and 22-23, 5 on 25, 1 on the others. Segments 11 and 13-19 with 2 setae each. Aesthetes normal in distribution. Macxillined (Fig. 6).—First basal segment with all 4 lobes well developed, their setation normal; the distal seta of lobes 2-8 much longer than the others accompanying it, subequal to each other JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 5 and to that of lobe 1; the four setae of the ex- tended distal lobe all shorter than the longest seta of lobes 1-3, the proximal the shortest, the others subequal. Second basal segment a little shorter than segment 1, its distal seta the longer, about equal to the longest setae of lobes 1-3 of the second segment. The partially suppressed segment bearing two setae. The endopod about as long as basal segment 2, of five distinct seg- ments, all of its setae slender and setiform, those of the inner side all shorter than the 3 terminal outer setae of the apical segment. Leg 1 (Fig. 4) —The ventral surface of basipod 2 with a patch of long fine hairs on its outer portion just above the exopod, the remainder unarmed. Outer spines of exopod segments 1 and 3 only moderately stout; subequal to one another, that of segment 3 being only a little longer than that of 1 (approximate proportions 11:10); both tipped apically with a very slender sensory hair; their marginal spinules minute (see detail, Fig. 4), hardly distinguishable except at very high magnification. The spine of segment 1 reaching only to about the middle of the second segment, bent, with a resultant inner marginal notch proximally. The elongate terminal spinelike seta of segment 3 stout, broader basally than the outer spine, its Inner margin indented, bearing fine marginal hairs below the point of indentation; the outer margin, beginning at a corresponding point, armed with a very narrow, finely serrate flange (see detail, Fig. 4). The other setae of the seg- ment all reaching considerably beyond the apex of this outer seta (proportional lengths, about 70:54). The outer margins of the exopod seg- ments without hairs. Leg 2.—The second segment of the endopod lacking a cuticular lobe on the dorsal face. Leg 5 (Figs. 1 and 2).—The posterior side of the first basal segment tumid; the sensillum short and spinelike, mounted on a small tubercle. Second basal segment not tumid, considerably prolonged on the anteromedial side to the pot of attachment of the endopod (Fig. 2); no sensory hair apparent, a cuticular depression observed in the place of its normal location on one specimen. The exopod (to tip of claw) only a little longer along its inner margin than the basipod.. The inner margin of the first segment roughly about two-thirds of the length of the outer (proportions 25:35); its width about three-fourths of the length of the mner and about one-half of that S) Frias. 1-16.—Diaptomus alaskaensis, n. sp., female lo. 1-3, Leg 5:1, Left side, posterior view, specimen no. 7; 2, left, anterior view, specimen no. 2; 3, exo- pod setae, specimen no. 5. 4, Leg 1, exopod. 5, Antennule, segments 1-20. 6, Manilliped. 7, Dorsal out- line of body. 8, Rostral filament. 9, Lateral outline of body. 10, Detail metasome wing and sensilla. 11, Last metasome segment and urosome. 12-16, Leg 5, endopods: 12, Specimen no. 2, anterior view; 13, specimen no. 6, posterior; 14, specimen no. 8, posterior; 15, specimen no. 7, posterior; 16, specimen no, 3, posterior. 171 172 of the outer margin. The inner margin of the second segment (to tip of claw) a little shorter than the outer margin of the first segment (32:35), about one-third longer than the inner margin; its greatest width a little less than one- half its length. Claw moderately stout, curving inwards on both margins a little above the middle, with a distinct notch on the outer margin; armed on both sides with 6-10 spinules; some specimens showing a faint crosswise line of divi- sion at the position of the notch. Lateral seta stout and spiniform, unarmed, a little more than half the length of the outer margin of the seg- ment. Third segment (Fig. 3) distinct, short and broad, its width almost twice the length of its outer margin which is a little longer than the inner. The outer seta similar in length and stout- ness to that of the second segment, the inner more slender and a little longer; both unorna- mented. The endopods of a pair asymmetrical in length and in armature; showing extreme variability within the available sample. Usually 2-segmented and shorter than the first exopod segment; un- armed terminally or with a short spiniform seta. Variation in leg 5—Measurements of eight specimens showed slight differences in the pro- portional lengths and widths of the exopod. The greater number attained that shown in Fig. 1, in which the inner margin of exopod 2 (to tip of claw) is subequal to the outer margin of the first segment and about one-third longer than the inner. Two specimens had the inner margin of segment 2 proportionally a little shorter (Fig. 2), and in one specimen they were a little longer, approaching D. siberiensis. The widths of exopod 1 and 2 in diaptomids are never precisely measurable, but even with allowances made for the differences in position and flattening of the mounted appendages by the. cover slip, it is apparent that the specimens with the shorter claws (the inner margin of exopod 2) are also proportionally broader in both segments 1 and 2. So far as could be judged, no significant differ- ence was apparent in the relative length and width of the third exopod segment. There is some slight difference in the proportional strength of the setae from specimen to specimen, but the relation of the two to each other is rather con- stant. The endopod is extremely variable, differing JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 5 in each of the specimens studied. The differences are shown in Figs. 12 to 16, and in Table 1, where the total length is also compared to the length of the inner margin of the exopod. Of the eight examined, four have a terminal spini- form seta; one of these differs from the others in having in addition a small abortive seta (Fig. 12). The endopods also show an unusual asym- metry. This is evident in the relative lengths of the right and left ramus of a pair, the left being always the longer; this difference considerable in some specimens (Table 1, nos. 4 and 7); negligible in others (nos. 1 and 8). The asym- metry is further expressed in the relative lengths of the terminal setae, that of one side always longer than that of the other (Figs. 13 and 15). The spinule pattern of the terminal portions also differs (Figs. 12 and 16). Variability in the endopod of the female in Diaptomus is not at all rare, but it is more com- monly expressed in differences in segmentation, and small differences in proportional length of the endopod to the exopod. In subgenera in which 2 setae are normally present, one may sometimes be lacking. In general, the endopod is much more variable in the males of the genus, but in this species the opposite is true. As noted above, Smirnov found a geographical variation in the female of D. siberiensis. We do not, of course, know how variable that species is, as he gives no indication of whether he found the condition illustrated in Fig. 15 (Smirnoy, 1931) to be true of one or several specimens. Actual comparisons between the two species as regards this variability is therefore not now possible. The asymmetry of the endopod, as of the rest of the appendage, is an invariable rule in the male diaptomid, but it is usually not expressed in the other sex. Only in recent years has such a condition been noted in the fifth legs of females of certain south Asiatic groups (Allodiaptomus Kiefer, 1936a—b, Mongolodiaptomus Kiefer, 1937, 1938a) and some South American species (D. azevedoi. Wright 1935, D. paulistanus Wright, 1937). Though this asymmetry appears to be a well established character, it may also be that in some cases so few specimens of a given species have been examined that what is actually anoma- lous has been described as normal. For my part, I should like to reserve judgment on the condition in D. alaskaensis until more individuals from both the type and other localities in which it may occur are available for study. May 1951 MALE Metasome-—About one and a half times the length of the urosome. More slender than the female, the greatest width in dorsal view occur- ring at the middle of the cephalic segment, from there the whole body tapering gradually to the terminal part. The anterior portion of the cephalic segment somewhat narrowed, the rather broad triangular appearance of the female only in- distinctly suggested. The last segment separated, its lateral tips not drawn out, but asymmetrical (Fig. 21), the left side straight, the right angular, its distal half directed inwards; each side armed at the lateral tip with a single sensillum, very small and spiniform, mounted on a tubercle having rather straight sides (Fig. 20), the tubercle of the right a little larger than that of the left side of the segment. The hyaline area as demar- cated in Fig. 20. Urosome (Fig. 21).—Not conspicuously asym- metrical. The genital segment with the right side a little inflated and irregular in outline; the left side with the lateral st conspicuous, the back- wardly produced proximal lobe not covering it; neither side with apparent sensillum. Segment 4 a little longer on the right than the left side, the other segments symmetrical. Caudal rami nor- mal, with the inner margins hairy. Rostral filaments ——Relatively as long as those of the female, but a little stouter throughout most of their length. Antennule—The right reaching to the end of the second urosomal segment, the left a little shorter; both relatively longer than those of the female. The left (Fig. 17) differing also from that of the female in having the seta of segment 1 not so enlarged or lengthened; stretched out it reaches from its base only to about the middle of the fourth segment. Setae of the second segment also unlike those of the female. The setal pattern differmg in that only segments 11, 16 and 19 of the midportion of the antennule have 2 setae; the others with oné each. In addition to that of segment 1, rather long setae found on segments 7, 9, and 14. Those of 7 and 9 subequal and a little longer than those of 1 and 14 which are also subequal to each other. The approximate pro- portions of these setae to one another are: segment 7—55 segment 9—54 segment 1—41l segment 14—40 Aesthetes of normal distribution as in female. WILSON: NEW SUBGENUS OF DIAPTOMUS 173 The right antennule with segments 14-16 con- spicuously swollen (Fig. 18). Spines of 8 and 12 not enlarged; those of segments 10-11 and 13 very stout; that of 10 not as long as the width of its segment; that of 11 longer, reaching to the middle of segment 13; that of 13 strongly bent distad, incompletely demarcated from the seg- ment, a little stouter but scarcely longer than that of 11, reaching to the middle of segment 14; the tips of all 3 spines dissected as indicated in figure 19. Segments 15-16 each with short cuticular processes of similar size; modified setae, with subterminal lateral tongue-like processes (Fig. 18), accompanying them and the depressed process of segment 17, all subequal to one another. Antepenultimate segment without process or lamella. Setae of terminal segment all weakly developed. Maxilliped and leg 7 as in female. Leg 2 also lacking a cuticular lobe on the dorsal face of the second segment of the endopod. Leg 5 (Figs. 22-23) —The left leg a little more slender than that of the right side; reaching almost to the end of its second exopod segment. Right leg: The outer portion of the first basal segment very tumid, overhanging the second segment considerably on the postero-lateral side; the inner side also expanded with a large distally directed hyaline lamella on the anterior face (Fig. 22); the sensillum a seta without apparent tubercular base, in a distal medial position on the dorsal side. The outer margin of the second TABLE 1.—CoMPARISON OF THE ENpDopops or Lee 5 In E1aut PARATYPE FEMALES OF DIAPTOMUS ALASKAENSIS Right endopod Left endopod Exo- Speci- |pod 1 “a gen Inner men Naas Asta | 25 o: mai lenath pas Armature jenethl 26 Armature ments a2” Z | | 1 78 39u 2 Spinules 42u | 2 | Spinules Ol e75)0 45 2 | 2setae+ | 57 2 | 2 setae + spi- | spi- nules | nules 3 81 45 1 None 57 2 | Spinules 4 81 42 2 Spinules 60 2 | Spinules 5 75 36 2 None 45 2 Spinules 6 75 | 54 2 |1seta+] 66 2 | 1 seta + spi- | spl- nules nules 7 69 42 2 | 1 seta + 57 2 1 seta + | spi- spi- nules nules 8 60 42 1 Terminal | 45 1 Terminal hairs hairs 174 basal segment rounded, the hair at the distal fourth; the inner margin a little longer than the outer, prolonged a little to the point of attach- ment of the endopod; the medial portion some- what expanded and having attached to its pos- terior face a hyaline membranous lamella that bulges upward. Exopod (exclusive of claw) subequal in length to the basipod. The first segment having the length of its outer margin greater than that of the inner (proportions about 27:17) and about equal to its greatest width; ending in a distally directed, rounded lobe; on the posterior face, near the extreme distal margin, two small, rather heavily chitinized lamellae (Fig. 24), that near the outer edge V-shaped, the other having a thick, pointed edge that is produced a little be- yond the inner distal corner of the segment and extended more or less toward the other as a bar. The second segment with both margins nearly straight; the inner a little less than twice the greatest width (relative proportions 40:25); the outer curving inwardly at the point of attach- ment of the lateral spine; the inner distal edge membranous and somewhat crenulated. This seg- ment bearing the characteristically rounded, small, heavy lamella on the proximal inner edge of the posterior side; somewhat distad to this and very near the margin, a minute and thin cuticular spine. Lateral spine near the terminus of the segment, stout and long, a little longer than the outer margin of the segment above its base, coarsely dentate on its inner edge. Claw very long, its length about equal to that of the ramus, strongly curved beyond its middle, en- larged at its base, with a small tubercle on the anterior side (Fig. 22), dentate below this bulbous enlargement to near the tip; in some specimens a fine division into two parts noticeable near the middle of the claw. Endopod a little shorter than the inner margin of the first segment of the exopod; 2-seemented, the first broadened basally and only about half the length of the distal segment. Left leg: The first basal segment not expanded on the outer margin, but extended inwardly to a well rounded lamelliform edge; sensillum a mi- nute, curved spinule, mounted on a small tubercle. The second segment having its outer margin shorter than the mner, concave at its center; the sensory hair at the distal fifth; the imner distal margin considerably prolonged medially to the point of attachment of the endopod; a JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES distinct jog in its margin just in front of the middle. Exopod narrowed to about half the width of the basipod, its length along the outer margin somewhat less (about one-sixth). The first seg- ment about two-thirds of the total length, pro- vided on its anterior inner side (Fig. 25) with a narrow flattened pad armed with very short fine hairs. Both pads of the distal segment in a medial position, the proximal the more tumid, bulging a little on the anterior side with a nar- rowed portion carried across the proximal part of the segment so that it appears to fit tightly into the segmental suture (Fig. 26); on the pos- terior side only a small lengthwise portion of the pad visible (Figs. 27-28); armed with fine hairs that are longer than those of the pad of the first segment. The distal pad reduced in breadth, largely postero-medial in position, dis- tally not reaching to the base of the terminal process; its apical portion sagging somewhat and forming a notch with the main body of the seg- ment, as visible in posterior profile (Fig. 27); pad set with very short, stout hairs. On the mar- gin of the segment between the apex of the pad and the inner base of the terminal process there may be 1-3 minute spinules, but these not always present. The processes of the distal segment closely set (Fig. 29). The digitiform distal process de- marcated from the segment, its length a little less than one-third that of the outer margin of the segment; very broad throughout most of its length, but its tip slightly drawn out; its mner margin without teeth. The proximal process spini- form, curving toward the terminal process and reaching to its apex or a very little beyond it; attached on the anterior side of the segment, distally directed; a little enlarged basally, the width at its middle about one-third that of the distal process; with coarse teeth on its imner margin, and a similar row on the posterior side near its outer edge. Endopod reaching a little beyond the first exopod segment, 2-segmented, the distal seg- ment about one-third the length of the other, with a few fine hairs on the apex. COMPARISON OF D. SIBERIENSIS AND D. ALASKAENSIS Smirnoy’s description of D. siberiensis is precise and detailed so that a fairly exact comparison of the two species can be made. vou. 41, No. 5 Zo Fiaes. 17-29.—Diaptomus alaskaensis, n. sp., male 17, Left antennule, segments 1-20. 18, Right antennule, segments 8-17, with detail of modified seta. 19, Right antennule, segment 13. 20, Detail, left metasome wing. 21, Last metasome segment and uro- some. 22-29, Leg 5: 22, Anterior view; 28, posterior view; 24, detail lamellae, right exopod; 25, left exo- pod and endopod, anterior; 26, detail exopod 2, anteromedial view; 27, exopod 2, posterior; 28, exopod 2, posteromedial view; 29, exopod 2, detail of processes, posterior view. 175 176 He did not describe the maxilliped or leg 1, and the characters of these appendages given in the subgeneric diagnosis are from D. alaskaensis. No basic differences can be ex- pected to occur in two such closely related species, so that only knowledge of minor specific differences is lacking for these appendages. The resemblance between the two species is great. They appear to have the same general body form; the antennules of the females are alike; there is no apparent difference in the right antennules of the males, though those of the left side differ in the setation of some segments. Comparison of the fifth legs of the females is difficult because of the great variability found in certain characters of D. alaskaensis, and because it cannot be told whether or not those of D. siberiensis are also extremely variable. The form of the appendage is similar in the two species, and the setae of the second and third segments of the exopod are alike; certain differences which may be well defined and stable are discussed below. The male fifth legs are strikingly similar in general appearance, in the relative lengths of the two rami, and of the claw and lateral spine of the right exopod, in the form of the lamellae of the right leg, and in the arrange- ment and form of the pads of the left exopod. Careful observation shows some well-defined differences which coupled with the setation of the left antennule, were constant in the available sample of D. alaskaensis. Smirnov found that the characters of the male of D. sibervensis did not vary geographically, and this makes it appear that the males are not subject to the same variation that affects the females of the subgenus. The two species have been herein separated on the basis of the following important differences which appear to be characters of stability, and are apparently carefully de- scribed by Smirnov for D. szberiensis, so that comparison is possible: Rostral filaments short and stout in siberiensis; slender and attenuated in alaskaensis. Left antennule of male with 2 setae on segments 11 and 18 in svberiensis; with 2 setae on segments 11, 16 and 19 in alaskaensis. Leg 2 with a cuticular lappet on segment 2 of JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 41, No. 5 the endopod of the male in siberiensis; lacking in both sexes in alaskaensis. Urosome of female having the genital segment in stberiensis apparently less produced on the right side than that of alaskaensis and with seg- ments 2 and 3 equal in length; in alaskaensis segment 2 is much shorter than segment 3. Urosome of male in siberiensis is wholly sym- metrical; in alaskaensis segments 1 and 4 are a little asymmetrical. Leg 5 of female has two measurable characters that appear to vary but little in alaskaensis and are sufficiently different from siberiensis, as shown by Smirnov’s drawing (1931, fig. 15) to permit relative comparison and separation of the two species. In svberiensis the inner margin of the second exopod segment (including the “claw’’) is apparently longer than the outer margin of the first segment; in alaskaensis it was usually found to be shorter. A more important difference lies in the third exopod segment, which, if cor- rectly delineated by Smirnov, is as wide as it is long in stberiensis; its width in alaskaensis is about twice its length. Other differences which may or may not be real, lie in the greater slender- ness of the appendage in szberiensis, the larger number of spinules on the “claw”, the lack of much variability in the endopod, absence of asymmetry in the length and armature of a pair, and the stouter development of its single, apical seta. Leg 5 of male. Right side: In siberiensis the first exopod segment has its outer margin only a little longer than its inner and greater than its width; in alaskaensis it is considerably longer than that of the inner and equal to its width; the armature of this segment appears to be very similar in form, but the lamellae of siberiensis are both placed above the distal margin of the segment, while those of alaskaensis are very close to it, so that of the inner edge is produced beyond the corner of the segment. The second exopod segment of siberiensis lacks a cuticular spine which is present in alaskaensis. Left side: In siberiensis the proximal process of the terminal segment reaches considerably beyond the end of the distal process; in alaskaensis this process reaches to the end of the distal process, or at most a very little beyond it; the distal process of siberiensis is armed on the inner margin with a few spinules; that of alaskaensis is unarmed. The distal pad of siberiensis appears to be a little more developed than that of alaskaensis, and is armed with slender instead of thick, short hairs. May 1951 DISTINCTIONS BETWEEN NORDODIAPTOMUS AND NEUTRODIAPTOMUS Ttiefer (1932) placed D. szberzensis in a list of species that he could not assign to any of his newly erected genera; in 1938 he referred it to Neutrodiaptomus. It is therefore neces- sary to compare the characters of this sub- genus with Nordodiaptomus. In establishing Neutrodiaptemus in 1937, Kie- fer included the species twmidus Kiefer, pachy- poditus Rylov, amurensis Rylov, and mariadvigae Brehm. To these he added (1938a) incongruens Poppe, siberiensis (as D. rylovi Smirnov), and lobatus Lilljeborg, the synonymy of the latter with incongruens appearing to him to be an un- certain matter. Hu (1943) described a new species alatus. Of these species, D. svberiensis and D. mari- advigae appear to differ sharply from the con- sistently developed characters that hold the others together. D. siberiensis has been referred above to the new subgenus Nordodiaptomus. D. mariadvigae is apparently closely related to, if not conspecific with, the species hsichowensis recently described by Hsaio (1950). This species occurs in Yunnan, the same Chinese province in which Brehm’s collection was made (Brehm, 1921, 1930). Hsaio considers that the lack of terminal setae on the endopod of the fifth leg of the female and the ‘‘pincerlike”’ structure of the processes of the left male fifth leg, though reduced in length, indicate relationship to Arcto- diaptomus. He therefore made his new species the type of a subgenus Pararctodiaptomus. In the definition of Diaptomus used here, Arcto- diaptomus is considered as a subgenus; the status of the various subgroups that have been proposed for it can be evaluated only when the whole of this subgenus is reinvestigated. It is possible that Pararctodiaptomus may be found to be of separate subgeneric status within the genus Diaptomus. This is particularly so if the distal pad of the male left fifth exopod is as well developed as is suggested by Hsaio’s illustration; its loss or extreme reduction is highly characteristic of Arc- todiaptomus. So far as it is possible to ascertain from pub- lished descriptions, the remaining species of Neutrodiaptomus agree with one another very closely in several significant characters. From these, the species of Nordodiaptomus depart rather noticeably. Though agreeing in certain patterns, WILSON: NEW SUBGENUS OF DIAPTOMUS 177 these two subgenera are naturally set apart by these differences. A brief comparison makes this clear. The female fifth leg of Neutrodiaptomus has two short, equally developed setae on the termi- nus of the endopod; the pattern of the setae of exopod segments 2 and 3, identical in all the species, consists of a minute seta on 2, while on 3 there are a similar small outer and a much longer inner seta. Nordodiaptomus with the single spinelike seta of the endopod, and the stout, subequal setae of the exopod, is in sharp contrast. Indeed, these differences are among the most significant in separating the two groups, par- ticularly the structure of the exopod setae which in Nordodiaptomus are of uncommon form for the whole genus. The male right antennule has the pattern of segments 13-15 similar in both groups, but the spines of 10 and 11 are very short in Neutrodiaptomus, while they are of considerable stoutness in Nordodiaptomus; all species of Neutro- diaptomus have a hyaline lamella on the ante- penultimate segment, in Nordodiaptomus this seg- ment is unarmed. While these are characters that may vary within a group of related species, ap- parently their nonvariability may also distinguish a subgenus. This last seems especially true in Neutrodiaptomus; in our present knowledge there are no intermediate forms between it and Nordo- diaptomus. In the male right fifth leg of Neutrodiaptomus, the apical claw is never longer than the exopod, and the lateral spine, located at the proximal to the distal third, is usually less than the width of its segment. Both are of exceptional stoutness and length in Nordodiaptomus. Any comparison between the patterns of the terminal segment of the left exopods is not wholly satisfactory because of the incompleteness of the descriptions of Neutrodiaptomus. The only enlarged drawings in literature are those of fwm- dus (Kiefer, 1938a) and amurensis (Rylov, 1930), and of these only twmidus is well enough des- eribed verbally to permit real comparison. The similarities of the two groups are: both pads are well defined and subequal to one another; the terminal process is short and digitiform; the proximal process is subterminal in position and about equal to or reaching a little beyond the distal. The differences between the two groups are more difficult to define; where it is possible to compare, the following are suggested. 178 The proximal pad in Nordodiaptomus is not merely a medially bulging structure, but is car- ried well across the anterior side of the segment and its shape is thus distinctly asymmetrical; it appears as a simple, medially placed pad in Neutrodiaptomus. The distal pad is conspicuously armed with slender to short, stout hairs in Nordo- diaptomus; in Neutrodiaptomus there may be little or no armature of this pad. Kiefer (1938a) has described that of twmidus as a “lobus’’ and shows no ornamentation, as is also true of Rylov’s (1930) figure of amurensis. The proximal process of Nordodiaptomus is stout and spiniform; Smirnov describes that of siberiensis as a “‘spine’’ and my observations in alaskaensis confirm this. Kiefer speaks of those of tumidus and pachypoditus as “setae” and his illustrations picture this process as exceedingly slender. The difference between seta and spine is undoubtedly one of degree and is not always easy to determine. In this case it may merely be one of interpretation. The degree of stoutness and the form of this process, however, distin- guishes other subgenera of Diaptomus, and it is necessary in the absence of any other evidence, - to consider that these two groups are separable by the spiniform character of this process in Nordodiaptomus as opposed to its setiform de- velopment in Neutrodiaptomus. It is unfortunate that for the species of Neutro- diaptomus no information is available concerning the highly important details of the maxilliped, the first leg, the cuticular process of the endopod of the second leg, the setation of the female antennule and its comparison to the male left antennule. Until taxonomists also include in- formation about these points in their descriptions of diaptomid copepods, we will not be able to arrive at any satisfactory comparison of species or of subgenera. My study of North American species suggests that the development of the maxilliped, particularly of the setae of the endo- pod, the characters of the first leg, the presence or absence of Schmeil’s organ on the endopod of the second leg, and the setation of the female antennule, are often as characteristic of sub- genera as the modifications of the left exopod of the male fifth leg or the termimal setae of the endopod of the female fifth leg. They are in any case a part of the whole picture, and must be considered before any comprehensive evaluation JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 5 of subgeneric or generic characters can be made. In addition to its distinctions from Neutro- diaptomus, Nordodiaptomus departs in some char- acters from the usual condition found in Diapto- mus. One such instance is that Schmeil’s organ may be either present or absent, and interestingly is exhibited as a case of sexual dimorphism in one species. The numerical difference in setation of the antennules of the female and that of the left side of the male is the only one known to me in literature or in fact; investigation may show it to be more common than suspected. The contrast in the size of the setae of the first and second segments is not confined to Nordodiapto- mus; Smirnov (1928) has noted the same sexual dimorphism in D. (Arctodiaptomus) dentifer which has a similarly elongate seta on segment 1 of the female. The structure of the exopod setae of the female fifth leg in Neutrodiaptomus is common throughout the genus; that of Nordodiaptomus, as suggested, is rather unusual. The asymmetry of the endopod of Nordodiaptomus alaskaensis is likewise a rare condition, impossible now to evaluate. It thus appears that there occur in the two species of Nordodiaptomus, characters that differ naturally from consistently developed structures in Neutrodiaptomus, and in addition, that they have certain distinctive features which set them apart from other subgenera of Diaptomus. The inclusion of the two species in Neutrodiaptomus could be only provisional and would make the definition of that subgenus ambiguous in many parts. It seems best in my judgment to delimit the two groups as has been done herein. It is probable that these two subgenera may be safely assumed to be closely related. This cannot now be proved, however, due to our lack of complete knowledge of some structures of Neutrodiaptomus, and our present inability to evaluate characters as subgeneric or otherwise. The species of Neutrodiaptomus extend from subarctic into southeastern Asia. Nordodiaptomus is in our present knowledge limited to Arctic and subarctic regions of Asia and North America. The discovery of an Alaskan species closely re- lated to one from the Asiatic U. 8. S. R. adds to the growing list of examples that disprove the old concept that North American diaptomids are distinct from those of Eurasia. It is to be expected that further study of Alaskan collections will increase the number. May 1951 DURBIN LITERATURE CITED Bere, L.S8. Natural regions of the U.S.S.R., ed. 2. 1938. (Translation by Olga Adler Titelbaum, 1950.) BreuM, VINCENZ. Diagnosen neue Entomostraken. I. Teil. Anz. Akad. Wiss. Wien. 58: 194-196. 1921. . Uber stidasiatische Diaptomiden. Arch. fiir Hydrobiol. 22: 140-161, 14 figs., 1 map. 1930. Carin, N. N. Uber eine neue Hemidiaptomus-Art aus dem Gouvernment Woronesch. Zool. Anz. 76: 323-328, 6 figs. 1928. Hsrao, SipNey C. Copepods from Lake Erh Hai, China. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 100: 161-200, figs. 20-30. 1950. Hu, Y. T. Notes on fresh-water copepods from Pehpet, Szechwan. Sinensia 14: 115-128, figs. A-C. 1948. KGErer, Frrepricu. Versuch eines systems der Diaptomiden (Copepoda Calanoida).- Zool. Jahrb. (Abt. Syst.) 63: 451-520, 88 figs. 1932. . Indische Ruderfusskrebse (Crustacea Cope- poda). Zool. Anz. 113: 136-142, 11 figs. 1936a. . Indische Ruderfusskrebse (Crustacea Cope- poda). III. Zool. Anz. 118: 321-325, 17 figs. 1936b. ———. Indische Ruderfusskrebse (Crustacea Cope- poda). IV. Zool. Anz. 114: 77-82, 14 figs. 1936c. . Uber die systematick der stidamerikanischen Diaptomiden (Crustacea Copepoda). Zool. Anz. 116: 194-200. 1936d. . Stisswassercopepoden aus Ostasien. IT. Newe Diaptomiden und Cyclopiden von der Insel Formosa. Zool. Anz. 119: 58-64, 17 figs. 1937. Freilebende Ruderfusskrebse (Crustacea Copepoda) von Formosa. Bull. Biogeogr. Soc. Japan. 8: 35-73, 38 figs. 1938a. AND HONESS: NEW ROUNDWORM 179 ———.. Freilebende Sirisswassercopepoden von den Nordkurilen. Bull. Biogeogr. Soc. Japan. 8: 75-94, 30 figs. 1938b. Lieut, 8S. F. New subgenera and species of diapto- mid copepods from the inland waters of Cali- fornia and Nevada. Univ. California Publ. Zool. 43: 67-78, 23 figs. 1938. ———. New American subgenera of Diaptomas Westwood (Copepoda, Calanoida). Trans. Amer. Mier. Soc. 58: 473-484, 24 figs. 1939. Ryuov, W. M. The fresh-water calanoids of the U. S. S. R. In: “Keys to Determination of Fresh-water Organisms of the U. S. S. R.: A, Fresh-Water Fauna.: Pt. I’: 1-288, 88 figs. 1930. Sars, GEorG Ossian. On the Crustacean fauna of Central Asia. Pt. IIT. Copepoda and Ostracoda. Ann. Mus. Zool. Acad. Imper. Sci. St.-Peters- bourg 8: 195-232, pls. 9-16. 1903. Smirnov, S. 8S. Uber eine neue Diaptomus-Art (Copepoda) aus Zentralrussland. Zool. Anz. 78: 27-34, 11 figs. 1928. ——.. Sur une espéce nouvelle du genre Diaptomus Westw. (Crustacea, Copepoda), provenant de la region de ’v Amour. Comptes Rendus Acad. Sci. U.S. 5S. R. for 1930: 79-82, 1 fig. 1930. Ein Beitrag zur Copepoden-Fauna des Amur-Gebietes. Arch. fiir Hydrobiol. 23: 618- 638, 21 figs. 1931. WriGcut, STittman. Three new species of Diapto- mus from northeast Brazil. Ann. Acad. Brasil Sei. 7: 213-233, pls. 1-4. 1935. . A review of some species of Diaptomus from Sdo Paulo. Ann. Acad. Brasil Sci. 9: 65-82, pl. 1-3. 1987. HELMINTHOLOGY.—A new roundworm, Nematodirus rufaevastitatis (Nema- toda: Trichostrongylidae) from domestic sheep, Ovis aries, in Wyoming. CHARLES G. Durpin, U. 8. Bureau of Animal Industry, and Rauew F. Honuss, Uni- versity of Wyoming. (Communicated by E. W. Price.) The nematodes described in this paper were collected by one of the writers (R. F. H.) from domestic sheep in the area of the Red Desert, Wyo., and western Wyoming during 1948 and 1949. The specimens were for- warded for identification to the Zoological Division, Bureau of Animal Industry. A study of them by the senior writer shows that they belong to the genus Nematodirus. They differ, however, from the known species of the genus in certain characters and they are, therefore, described as new. Nematodirus rufaevastitatis, n. sp. Description. —Maun: 11.5 to 15.8 mm long and about 0.1 mm wide just anterior to the bursa. Esophagus 0.430 to 0.500 mm long and about 0.030 to 0.040 mm wide at its base. Head 0.025 to 0.030 mm wide, as measured with the cuticle slightly inflated (Fig. 1, 4). Spicules 1.0 to 1.15 mm long and united for about the posterior two- thirds of their total length; the tips have a slight membranous inflation (Fig. 1, B). The bursa consists of two large lateral lobes and a dorsal lobe which is indicated only by a slight indenta- tion of the margin of the bursa lateral to the dor- sal ray. The length of the bursa from its base to tip is 0.25 to 0.84 mm. Each lateral lobe of bursa is supported by six rays, two ventral, three lat- eral, and one externodorsal (Fig. 1, C, D). The two ventral rays arise from a common trunk and are long and slender. The three lateral rays like- wise arise from a common trunk and are also long and slender. The mediolateral and postero- 180 lateral rays are close together. The externo- lateral branch curves ventrally away from the other two branches. The two dorsal rays arise separately. The externodorsal ray is long and very slender when compared with the other rays of the bursa. The dorsal ray is shorter and thicker than the externodorsal ray; the tip of the dorsal ray is not bifid as in the other de- scribed species of the genus. Female: Unknown. Host: Ovis aries. Location: Small intestine. Distribution: Wyoming, U.S.A. Specimens: U.S.N.M. Helm. Coll. no. 46922 (type) and 46921 (paratypes). This species closely resembles NV. spathiger in the termination of the spicules (Fig. 1, B). It differs, so far as the writers are aware, from that ll) Fie. 1.—Nematodirus rufaevastitatis, n. sp.: A, Head; B, spicules; C, D, lateral lobes of bursa. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 41, No. 5 species and from all others of the genus Nemato- dirus occurring in ruminants by the size of the bursa and the nonbifid tip of the dorsal ray. These species may be differentiated by the fol- owing key. KEY TO MALES OF THE SPECIES OF NEMATODIRUS IN RUMINANTS 1. Terminal portions of dorsal rays undivided N. rufaevastitatis, n. sp. Terminal portions of dorsal rays divided.....2 2. Terminal portion of spicules bent N. tarandi Hadwen Terminal portion of spicules straight........3 3. Small gubernaculum present N. uricht Cameron Gubermaculum absentia e- sane eee 4 4. Mediolateral and posterolateral rays well sepa- PAteC rene ae ee ae N. roscidus Railliet Mediolateral and posterolateral rays close to- gether no... hs os ee ee 5 5. Spicules differing in length, terminal portion ‘twistedie Mi pes tees N. abnormalis May Spicules equal in length, terminal portion Straight. e...0%...isienss Dane eee: 6 6. Cuticular expansion of terminal portion of spicules spatulate..... N. spathiger (Railliet) Cuticular expansion of terminal portion of spicules sharply pointed................... a . Cuticular expansion of terminal portion of spicules 0.1 mm long..... N. helvetianus May Cuticular expansion of terminal portion of spicules 0.06 to 0.08 mm in length......... 8 8. Terminal portion of each spicule divided into two rodlike structures united at the tips N. otratianus Rajewskaja Terminal portion of each spicule not divided N. filicollis (Rudolphi) “I REFERENCES Rasewskasa, 8. A. Zur Charakteristik der Nema- toden der Gattung Nematodirus Ransom 1907 (Versuch einer Monographischen Bearbeitung). Zeitschr. Infektionskr ...Haustiere Berlin 40 (2-3): 112-136. 1931. Ransom, B. H. The nematodes parasitic in the ali- mentary tract of cattle, sheep, and other rumi- nants. U.S. Dept. Agr. B.A.I. Bull. 127. 1911. Price, E. W. A new nematode, Nematodirus anti- locaprae, from the prong-horn antelope, with a key to the species of Nematodirus. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 71 (art. 22): 1-4, pl. 1, figs. 1-4. 1927. Travassos, L. Contribuicées para o conbecimento da fauna helmintolojica brasileira. XIII: En- saio Monografico do familia Trichostrongylidae Leiper, 1909. Mem. Inst. Oswaldo Cruz 13 Q): 1-135. 1921. . Revisdo do familia Trichostrongylidae Lei- per, 1912. Monogr. Inst. Oswaldo Cruz, 512 pp., pls. 1937. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences [PRESUUTOR cae C ASSO OOS URC OTE BOE aoa onee NatHan R. SmitrH, Plant Industry Station IPRESOU TD EHIGG read SUNOS nee OO aor Water RamBERG, National Bureau of Standards SOGRAIGIO) Sere so ee ee Oe ee Beto ere F. M. Deranvorr, National Bureau of Standards PECOSUTET eo eee asin chores Howarp S. Rappuere, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey AURA CEST reine bla acne oe bec Beene Joun A. Stevenson, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haratp A. Resoer, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: EhilosophicaliSocietysot Washingtonis-. 4-5. ....5-4 0.305056. Epwarp U. Connon Anthropological Society of Washington........................- Wa.po R. WEDEL Biolocicalisocietysor Washington sce sce e ee desea eine C@hemicaliSocietyzoh Washingetone jes. sss es sade sesso cuness JosEPH J. FAHEY Entomological Society of Washington........................ FREDERICK W. Poos NationalsGeographic| Soclety---k meses 22... ee. case ce ae ALEXANDER WETMORE GeoloricalSocietyzot Washington. 5.502 5s65+ nesses sss sence Lrason H. ADAmMs Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... Columbjagtistoricallsocietyanemeecsesceee ee eee eae. eee GILBERT GROSVENOR Boumicalpsocienyohmwashingtonnesest ss tenes oes ee ac oo: E. H. WALKER Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wiu.iam A. Dayton Washington Societysot Hngineers)..4........-..+.-4-.5.5s8000- CuirrorpD A. BreTTs Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers Francis M. DeranDoRF Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp 8. D1LL Helminthological Society of Washington.......................05. L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Aneus M. GrirFIn Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers.... HENRY W. HEMPLE Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......... HeErBeErt G. Dorsry District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers.... Elected Members of the Board of Managers: To demirnnniy UGh9 6 be aria G Aektiee Gracie ae ee eee rare eae W. F. Fosuaae, C. L. Gazin PROM aM aT ye QH Ss, ee ekiciee ns.cans eee ciate. cites C. F. W. Mursreseck*, A. T. McPHERSON Ito Jamun Oi eononaen de cee tic eee Sara E. Branuam, Minton Harris* owre Of MACHU edec aodenes oe seo one All the above officers plus the Senior Editor OCT GRO /MEIGULOT SLANG -A\ssocvate HQUtors... 0.02. ...0ssee ence coe denees [See front cover] Executive Committee....N. R. Smrru (chairman), WaLTER RampBere, H. 8S. RAPPLEeryeE, J. A. Stevenson, F. M. DEFANDORF Committee on Membership............... L. A. SPINDLER (chairman), M. S. ANDERSON, Merrit Bernarp, R. KE. Bhackwewper, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. HANSEN, D. B. Jonzs, Dororuy Nickerson, F. A. SmitH, Hernz Specut, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings......... Marearet Pittman (chairman), NorRMAN BEKKEDAHL, W. R. Cuapuine, D. J. Davis, F. B. Scuentz, H. W. WELLS Committee on Monographs: I@ damuterny IOhyeepesasopousadoecooen J. R. Swauuen (chairman), Paut H. OBHSER POM ATAUT Tay eel ODM iva te i eeenence en untae e ays ves cos ieuceaye eitane tad R. W. Imtay, P. W. Oman ‘@ diinwiary MOBY. a accer oo eevee cae Bn coere cate ean eae ices S. F. Buaxe, F. C. Kracex Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (Groner P. WALTON, general chairman): For the Biological Sciences............ G. H. Coons (chairman), J. E. FABER, JR., Myrna F. Jonzs, F. W. Poos, J. R. SWALLEN For the Engineering Sciences.........R. 8. Dinu (chairman), ARSsHAM AMIRIKIAN, J. W. McBurney, Frank Neumann, A. H. Scorr For the Physical Sciences............. G. P. Watton (chairman), F. 8. BrRackert, G. E. Hou, C. J. Humpureys, J. H. McMiILLen For Teaching of Science............ B. D. Van Evera (chairman), R. P. BARNES, F. E. Fox, T. Korppanyi, M. H. Martin, A. T. McPHerson Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research..................000- L. E. Yocum (chairman), M. X. Suutivan, H. L. WaITTeEMORE Committee on Policy and Planning: MOK amuanyal O52 cea cecriecees: J. I. HorrmMan (chairman), M. A. Mason “IN@ djenmnnenreyie OES. te 2 8 Morr Secrets et oe ier ces eee W. A. Dayton, N. R. Smita Ro ydamuarvalO DAG. eases ane eee eltiesaa ee. deeyensenete H. B. Couuins, Jr., W. W. RuBey Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: ANG denamepay UEP, J osc00os0c0ccso00G0e M. A. Mason (chairman), A. T. McPHrson Io damien; MGR. 525 col dome deeb ooo atte peer e na A. H. Cruark, F. L. MouLer RoR anuanygl 954 eames aide cere ae sew eeeisoes J. M. CaupweE Lu, W. L. Scumirr lioporescauacae bi Counc! OF Als Als Als Son ooceconobongnopeascasconopeane F. M. Serzuer Committee of Auditors...... J. H. Martin (chairman), N. F. Braarsen, W. J. YOUDEN Committee of Tellers...W.G. BRoMBACHER (chairman), A. R. Merz, Lourss M. RussELL * Appointed by Board to fill vacancy. CONTENTS Puysics.—The limitations of the principle of superposition: I]. Pau ErHNOLOGY.—Some medical beliefs and practices of the contemporary Iroquois Longhouses of the Six Nations Reserve. Marcrn Riovux.. GroLtocy.—Present Cretaceous stratigraphic nomenclature of northern Alaska. GEORGE Gryc, W. W. Patton, JR., AND T. G. PAYNE.... Zootocy.—A new subgenus of Diaptomus (Copepoda: Calanoida), in- cluding an Asiatic species and a new species from Alaska. MuiLpREpD STRATTON WILSON |e 005 b.2 00 .ale ee cee cane ot clere «eee ad er HELMINTHOLOGy.—A new roundworm, Nematodirus rufaevastitatis (Ne- matoda: Trichostrongylidae), from domestic sheep, Ovis aries, in Wy- oming. CHARLES G. DuRBIN AND Rap F. Honmss........... This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals Page 149 152 159 168 JUNE 1951 No. 6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS CHARLES DRECHSLER Wiuiam F. FosHae PLANT INDUSTRY STATION BELTSVILLE, MD. J. P. E. Morrison U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U. 8. NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS J.C. EwrErs J. I. HorrMan ANTHROPOLOGY CHEMISTRY C. W. SABROSKY T. P. THAYER ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY F. A. Cuace, JR. Mrriam L. BomMHARD BIOLOGY BOTANY R. K. Coox PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Rorau & GuILFoRD AVEs. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second ¢lass matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md, Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- ouymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprinis.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.2 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the ProcEEDINGS should be sent to Haraup A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub-, scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JoURNAL.—Per year..................0e0eeeseeee $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available.*................ — _ Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 40, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $341.00 Monoerapa No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann. .$4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.......................0.0000. $25.00 Single volumes, unbound Single numbers Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappieye, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoLtuME 41 June 1951 No. 6 ETHNOLOGY .—Was the California condor known to the Blackfoot Indians? CuaupE E. ScHAEFFER, Museum of the Plains Indian, Browning, Mont. (Communi- cated by John C. Ewers.) Elderly Blackfoot Indians, in recounting the faunal lore of a now vanished past, some- times refer to an immense bird, which visited the eastern foothills and adjacent plains of the Montana-Alberta region. Nearly half a century has elapsed, at least, since it was last sighted in this region. As a result, few living Indians claim to have seen the great winged creature; most know it only through traditions handed down from previous gen- erations. Agreement is general among mod- ern Blackfoot, however, that it was an uncommon, if not rare, migrant to their territory. The species, despite the infrequency of its appearance, seems to have found a niche in native nomenclature, as well as mention in their ceremonial rites, folklore, and procurement practices. If we have evaluated correctly Blackfoot descriptions of its appearance and habits, the bird in question can scarcely be other than the California condor, Gymnogyps californianus (Shaw). Although apparently thus known to the Blackfoot of an earlier day, the con- dor, strangely enough, has eluded the sight (and gun) of all but one white observer in this area. Accordingly, the wanderings of this “greatest of all flying birds of the earth”’ so far north of its recognized range have largely gone unnoticed by modern orni- thologists. It seems advisable, then, to re- cord here existing information on the condor from Blackfoot oral chronicles, in the hope that a new paragraph may thereby be added to the wildlife annals of the northwestern Plains. The possibility of the condor’s movement northward into the northwestern margin of the Plains was first brought to the writer’s at- 181 tention in connection with a study of Black- foot ornithology. As part of this inquiry, iden- tification of various local bird species was established with Indian informants and their respective native names recorded (Schaeffer, 1950). After the terms for the golden eagle (pitaw), bald eagle (ksixkikini), and turkey vulture (pikokz) were collected, coverage of the largest Raptores was deemed complete. However, informants volunteered the term omaxsapitau, “big pitau,” and proceeded to describe the bird’s appearance and habits. A new term was thus unexpectedly added to the check list of Blackfoot avifauna. In- quiries were accordingly instituted among a number of the oldest Indians of the Brown- ing region, and their knowledge of the topic was explored. My sources of information are largely Piegan, and the data obtained refer primarily to Montana. A few traditions of Blood provenience are localized in the Calgary-Edmonton section of Alberta. Na- tive testimony is presented here essentially as it was secured from the Indians. Distor- tions of fact arising from what appear to be errors of observation or lapses of traditional continuity are indicated as such in the text. As a background against which to assay Blackfoot testimony on the condor, orni- thological data on that species’ range and incidence to the north are summarized be- low. The condor, reduced in numbers! and 1 According to information based upon research by Dr. Carl B. Koford and communicated (11/ 28/50) to me by Dr. Alden H. Miller, Museum of Vertebrate Zoology, University of California, the number of surviving wild specimens of the condor is estimated at about 60. I am also indebted to Dr. Miller for his reading of the first draft of the present paper and for pointing out certain dis- erepancies in the data insofar as reference to the condor is concerned. 28 1989 182 distribution in recent times, is now confined to “California west of the Great Basin and desert regions, and northwestern Lower California.’’ Casually or formerly, the same authority (A.O.U. Check-list, p. 62) adds, it was reported from southeastern California, Oregon, and Washington. It may now be nearly if not actually gone from its former range in Baja California. In Oregon the presence of the condor on the lower Colum- bia River is attested by observers from the time of Lewis and Clark (1805-06) down to that of David Douglas (1825-27). There, it came in summer and fall to feed upon the spawned-out salmon, which lined the banks of the stream. For the State of Washington, the range is given as “north irregularly (west of Cascades) to northern boundary” (Dawson and Bowles, vol. 2, p. 548). A specimen was recorded at Fort Vancouver in 1827 (Bent, p. 12, citing Fleming). In 1826 Douglas stated that it was a common species as far north as the 49th parallel (Macoun and Macoun, p. 239). In southwest British Columbia, the Macouns (p. 239) characterize the condor as “a rare visitant at the mouth of the Fraser River... ap- parently attracted by the dead salmon.” In 1880 J. Fannin reported seeing two birds at Burrard Inlet, while Rhoads, in 1893, stated that condors were reported on Lulu Island as late as “three or four years ago”’ (Bent, p. 12). The consensus of ornithologists in re- spect to the condor’s status on the Pacific coast north of California would seem to represent it as an extralimital wanderer in the region, particularly after the first quar- ter of the last century. Even on the lower Columbia, Harris (p. 21) remarks, “there is no valid evidence that it was ever an abundant species,’ and by the time of Townsend’s visit (1834-35) “it was already beginning to frequent this northern ex- tremity of its range in fewer numbers.”’ Similarly, Gabrielson and Jewett (pp. 180- 181) conclude that the condor, “if ever common in this state [Oregon], seems to have become rare or almost extinct between Douglas’ first visit [1825-27] and the time of the Pacific Railway Surveys” (1855-59). Farther north, Dawson and Bowles (2, p. 548) agree that ‘“‘on the whole it appears improbable that the California condor was JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 6 ever resident in Washington, certainly not within the memory of the white man, and that its northern appearances are to be regarded solely as the fishing excursions of a Southerner.”’ Taverner (p. 115) regards the reported occurrences in southwestern British Columbia as having an uncertain basis. Turning now to the eastern limits of the condor’s range, Dawson and Bowles (vol. 2, p. 548) remark that it formerly extended to Arizona and Utah. Bent (p. 12), on the basis of cave remains, notes that the species occurred in Nevada and New Mexico. It is recorded also in cave deposits from the Chisos Mountains. Certain “dubious’’ rec- ords report the condor in 1877 from Fort Sanders, southeastern Wyoming, and from some point in the mountains of Colorado (Harris, p. 46). There are perhaps other references from this southeastern area which have escaped my attention. Farther to the north and more pertinent to our study, J. Fannin (p. 89), on Septem- ber 10, 1896, observed two fine specimens between Calgary, Alberta, and the Rocky Mountains. This represents the sole orni- thological record of the condor’s presence within the purview of the Blackfoot.? Fannin admits in his report that he was not aware “that this bird was found east of the Rocky Mountains, or so far north as the point above mentioned.” Later writers, such as the Macouns (vol. 2, p. 239), are inclined to doubt this occurrence so far east, es- pecially since no specimen was collected. Although accepting the same student’s sight record in southwestern British Columbia, Bent (p. 12) omits reference to the Alberta 2 In this connection an entry from the diary of David Douglas (Harris, pp. 19-20), written at Fort Vancouver in 1827, may be quoted: ‘‘Ob- tained the following information concerning this curious bird from Etienne Lucien, one of the hunters who has had ample opportunity of observ- ng them. ... During the summer they are seen in great numbers in the woody parts of the Co- lumbia, from the ocean to the mountains of Lewis and Clark’s River, from four hundred miles in the interior”’ (italics mine). The region referred to here presumably is the drainage basin of the upper Snake River in present day Idaho. Since the source of this information is “the waggish Canadian voyageur who imparted to Douglas fantastic and highly imaginative misinformation regarding the nidification of the condor,” the reference is scarcely taken seriously by ornithologists. JUNE 1951 observation. Harris (p. 54) comments that the latter “would have been less startling had it been reported from this region seventy-five years earlier.” And thus the case stands from the ornithological view- point. A brief ornithological description cf the condor may be included here, as comparative data against which to check Blackfoot ac- counts of the omaysapitau. “Length, 4 to 4+ feet; spread of wings, 9 to 11 feet. Wings, long folding beyond end of square tail; head and neck, bare; skin, smooth, yellow or yellowish-orange and red; plumage, sooty-blackish commencing over shoulders with a semi-ruff of linear feathers, those underneath of similar character but less closely defined; the feathers of upper parts with browner tips; wings and tail black; outer webs of greater wing-coverts and sec- ondaries grayish; wing-coverts and outer secondaries edged with whitish; wnder wing- coverts, pure white; bill, dark brown changing gradually to dull reddish on cere; iris, deep red; feet, horn with a patch on knees” (Pear- son, p. 54). Parenthetically, while literature assigns a maximum wing spread of 11 feet the largest definite records range from 9 feet 9 inches to 10 feet. We may next turn to the data representa- tive of Blackfoot oral sources. The omaxsapitau is believed by some Indian informants to have visited the Browning area as recently as the early 1900’s. Two or three very large birds are said to have ap- peared on the plains in various parts of the reservation about the year 1908. George Bull Child, one of those who saw them at the time, described the birds as dark in color and about 4 feet high. Since they took flight when approached closer than several hundred yards, he was unable to distinguish other salient features. At the time, however, older Piegan identified the species by its native name and recalled that it had visited the region at an earlier period. A different version of possibly this same occurrence was obtained from Louis Bear Child. He stated that about the period 1907-08 some Gros Ventre Indians of the Fort Belknap Reservation, wrote Piegan friends that a great bird had been sighted in their part of north-central Montana. The Gros Ventre, although aware that it SCHAEFFER: CALIFORNIA CONDOR AND BLACKFOOT INDIANS 183 was a migrant from the south, were con- cerned over the significance of the bird’s appearance in their country. The Black- foot watched for it that year, but so far as Bear Child was aware, no one saw it. The following year an earthquake is said to have shaken the Fort Belknap region, an event which Bear Child, and perhaps the Gros Ventre, were inclined to associate with the visit of the “‘big eagle.” The incident best known to contemporary Piegan involving the omaxsapitau is that related of the deceased Raven (Hairy Face). Raven, or as he is more commonly known among bilingual Blackfoot, Big Crow, was born on the Blood Reserve in Canada but reared on the Montana reservation. Ac- counts of his experience vary somewhat in detail, but the following version is one told by Richard Sanderville (age 82). Big Crow and his wife were returning from Old Agency to their home on Little Badger Creek. In a coulee near the latter place, Big Crow noticed a large object some distance off, which he at first believed was a cow. Upon approaching closer, however, he saw that it was an immense, dark-colored bird, with a feathered ruff and a bald head. The strange creature took wing and flew off to the mountains. Sanderville remarked that Big Crow was not familiar with the species or with its native name. Further, upon hearing of his experience later, several of his friends are said to have evinced incredulity. The year in which this occurrence took place, so far as Sanderville could date it, was 1897. Thereafter, in accordance with the Black- foot year count, the year became known as “that in which Big Crow saw the oma- xsapitau.” Another episode of this character was re- called by Sanderville. Mary Jane, daughter of the Piegan Red Paint, married a white man named Pfemster or Phemister. One summer she and her husband moved into the Chief Mountain district of what is now Glacier National Park to hunt and _ fish. While in camp one day they saw four very large birds. Two of them appeared to be immature, just learning to fly, while the others, believed to be the parent birds, soared overhead. The observers considered that the adult pair had nested (sic) on Chief Mountain that summer. From mem- 184 ory Sanderville placed the date of this oc- currence in 1879. Mary Jane died in 1942 at the presumed age of 89. Rides at the Door (age 87), one of the few surviving Piegan with a record in inter- tribal warfare, is said to have seen a “big eagle’ while raiding for horses somewhere to the south. Handicapped by deafness, this aged warrior was unable to supply further details of his experience. An incident related by Chewing Black Bones (age 83) also involved an encounter by a group of Piegan raiders with a “big eagle.” The narrator’s father, Brocky (Tail Feathers Coming Over a Hill), a prominent Piegan warrior, was a member of the party. Led by Heavy Runner, the warriors set out to steal horses from the Crow Indians. They had traveled as far as “Bear Creek,” an unidentified stream located west of the present Crow Reservation in southeastern Montana. Heavy Runner, who was in the lead, looked up to see a very large bird flying directly before them. Its wingspread and length of tail, the raiders noted, ex- ceeded those of the eagle. The sight was so unusual that Heavy Runner immediately accepted it as a portent bearing upon the success of their venture. Accordingly he warned his companions, saying, “I have never seen a bird of this kind. Now that it has appeared before us, I am afraid. It seems to be trying to head us off. The out- come of our raid is now in doubt. We had better turn back.”’ Most of the party agreed, and they and Heavy Runner returned home. Of the six who continued on, five were killed by the enemy. Since Heavy Runner was killed in the Baker Massacre of 1870, the date of this raid may be set in the 1860's. Chewing Black Bones believed that the bird’s appearance upon this occasion and others was prophetic of misfortune. In sup- port of his contention, he cited the death of the five raiders and the extinction of the previously mentioned Big Crow’s family line. Dog Takes a Gun (age 85) was born on the Blood Reserve in Alberta but spent most of his hfe among the Montana Piegan. He recalls his parents’ account of an oma- xsapitau sighted near Calgary shortly be- fore the time of his birth. The date is to be placed in the early 1860’s. Again the great JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 6 size of the bird was emphasized. While feeding, it was said to lean forward so far that its breast nearly touched the ground. A tailfeather, described as about 2 feet in length, was dropped by this particular bird in flight and picked up by native ob- servers. My informant added that the wing of another “big eagle” killed in this region equaled, when fully extended, the distance from a man’s shoulder across his chest to the fingertips of his opposite outstretched arm.* The next incident involves an encounter with the omaysapitaw by an Indian eagle trapper, now deceased. It was the practice of the Blackfoot, as with other tribes of the Northern Plains, to secure the feathers used in their costumes and ceremonial equipment from the golden eagle taken in concealed traps. Briefly, the procedure involved dig- ging a shallow pit upon some eminence, covering it with brush and grass, and plac- ing a stuffed coyote skin on top as bait. As the eagle alighted to feed, the hunter con- — cealed within the pit, seized both legs of the bird, drew it down towards him, and dis- patched it. Some degree of hazard was in- volved in this activity, in that failure to hold the captive securely often resulted in inflic- tion of painful wounds from its talons. The supernatural powers attributed to the eagle evoked a series of conciliatory rites on the part of the trapper preceding and following its seizure. White Bear, a conjuror and eagle trapper,* was a Cree by birth but intermarried among and lived with the Blood tribe of Black- foot most of his life. He was said to have been about 83 years old at the time of his death in 1995. About 1850 White Bear was taking eagles in the region south of Edmon- ton, when an omaxsapitaw visited his trap. > Dog Takes a Gun claims to have seen this wing in the possession of a curio dealer in Calgary some 10 years ago. 4 White Bear is noteworthy because of another practice attributed to him by his grandson. To tie himself up in the Houdini trick preliminary to a conjuring performance, he employed the leather thong, which also served as his ceremonial pack line (See Speck, 1935, p. 203, for the nimaban or ceremonial game carrying string of the Naskapi). The multiple functions thus assigned to the pack line opens up an interesting topic of investigation. So far as 1am aware, the ceremonial game carrying string has never been reported among the Plains ree. June 1951 Looking through the brush screen, he saw an immense bird soaring high in the air. After circling several times, the bird de- scended to the ground near the pit. It was quite wary, and only after considerable hesitation did it approach the bait. By this time White Bear had observed its size and concluded that it would be too difficult to capture, except at the risk of injury to him- self. Seizing the stick used to frighten off the bald eagle, he thrust it through the pit cover and frightened the intruder away. Later he described it as the largest bird he had ever seen. It was dark in color with brown-striped tailfeathers (sic). Its head and hooked beak were large and its legs coarsely scaled. This incident was narrated by the grandson of the trapper, Harry Under Mouse. Traditional information from a more distant past was secured from Yellow Kid- ney (age 80), whose knowledge of the earlier life and customs of the Piegan is extensive. In this connection he described the ap- pearance and habits of the omaxsapitaw in some detail. He referred to the character- istics of immense size and dark color, the great wingspread, and the elongated tail. He drew attention to the white underparts of the wings (sic) and, in contrast to the bald and immature golden eagle, the dark spots in the tailfeathers (sic). He described the large, hooked beak as dark blue, shading to yellow at the base. The head plumage (sic) was characterized as brownish in color. Yellow Kidney was aware that the “big eagle’s”” home range lay far to the south and that it appeared infrequently in sum- mer as far north as Montana and Alberta. Long ago he had been told by elderly Piegans that the great birds were attracted to this northern country by the remains of bison slain by the Indians on the plains. Richard Sanderville, it should be noted, also recalled traditions of their being seen feeding upon bison careasses. At other times the omax- sapitaw were sighted high in the air above the Blackfoot camps in the foothills. They would soar in wide circles and suddenly dart off at great speed towards the moun- tains to the west. There, early in the evening, the great birds sought rest atop some pre- cipitous cliff, “where they slept with their heads tucked beneath their wings.”’ SCHAEFFER: CALIFORNIA CONDOR AND BLACKFOOT INDIANS 185 Yellow Kidney believed that long ago the Blackfoot succeeded, upon rare occa- sions, in capturing the “big eagle.” At that time the conciliatory practices and disposal rites ordinarily associated with the young golden eagle were transferred to the omax- sapitau. The former bird, with its predom- inantly white tailfeathers, was considered a prize catch by all native trappers and special ceremonial treatment was accorded its remains. The informant went on to say that occasionally the nest (sic) of the omaysapttau was so situated that hunters were able to make their way to it. Then the fledglings were removed, reared in captivity, and killed at maturity for their feathers. Seven primaries were detached from one wing and put aside for ritual disposal. The remaining wing primaries, the outer tailfeathers, the claws, and the wing-bones—humeri or ulnae—were then utilized for decorative and other purposes. The best feathers were employed for headdresses, the claws drilled for necklaces, and the wing-bones worked into whistles. The flight powers of the “big eagle” enabled it to mount far into the sky and thus approach more closely to the Sun, the great celestial being of Blackfoot worship. As a result, the bird was believed to acquire a degree of the Sun’s sacred character. The golden eagle, the white bison, the mountain lion, and a number of other birds and ani- mals, by virtue of this or other attributes, were considered endowed with the same solar power. Hence to justify taking the life of one of these sacred creatures, as well as to avert subsequent misfortune, the Black- foot sacrificed, whole or in part, its flesh and skin to the Sun. Accordingly, the seven wing primaries of the omaxsapitaw were at- fixed to the tanned hide of a bison ealf. They were arranged so that the quills came together at a point, with the distal ends spaced equidistant about a semicirele.® The ° Offerings thus made to a supernatural being appear to represent an old practice in Northern Plains cultures. Some years ago Wissler (p. 106, fn. 1) observed on the Blackfoot reservation a group of such offerings near a stone shelter used in the vision quest. They consisted of ‘tan old coat, a shirt tied to a stick, and a peculiar fan-shaped object of twigs distended by being bound to a hoop of the same material. On the projecting ends of the twigs were eagle feathers. ... We were told that such fanlike objects were often used when making 186 robe thus adorned was placed on top of a sweatlodge built for the occasion. Four medicine bundle owners of advanced age were then invited to enter the lodge, and while sweating, they prayed to the Sun for good fortune in various activities of life. At the conclusion of the observance, a youth carried away the decorated robe and placed it on a hilltop as a gift to the Sun.® Previously an episode was given that involved an unexpected and possibly un- welcome visit of the omaysapitau to the eagle trap. According to Yellow Kidney, however, it was the practice of an earlier generation of Blackfoot to take the great bird occasionally by this method, despite its wariness and size. In this case the im- mediate purpose was procurement of spirit- ual rather than material benefits. The trapper, it was explained, vowed to the Sun that if permitted to capture a “big eagle,”’ he would, in the native idiom, “place fine pemmican’ in its mouth.” It was now ex- pected that the normally shy bird, perhaps directed by the Sun, would circle the trap in flight and descend to the bait. The sup- pliant would then grasp its legs, immediately thrust forward a wooden billet for its talons to embed themselves (sic), pull it into the pit, place his knee upon its back and dis- locate its neck. No part of the dead bird would be taken for the trapper’s use. In- stead, he removed the skin and mounted it in a lifelike manner, placed a morsel of pemmican in its beak, and abandoned it upon a hill as an offering to the Sun. In return for his sacrifice, the trapper antici- pated that the spirit of the dead bird would appear to him in a dream and offer its super- natural power. The visitant would then say, “My name is omaysapitau. I am known over all the earth. I am glad that you have treated me so well and offered me to the Sun. I will help you in any way that you may desire.’”’ Again it should be pointed out that sun offerings.’’? The Kutenai similarly attached a small gift to a wooden hoop made of a twig as an offering to one of their supernatural spirits. 6 For an account of Blackfoot sweat lodge rites and the disposition of offerings, see Wissler, pp. 259-62. 7 A choice item of Blackfoot diet made from the tenderloin and marrow fat of the bison, mixed with berries and, for ceremonial purposes such as the above, divided into small pieces. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 6: these rites were ordinarily associated with the young golden eagle. In a dream revelation of this kind it was: not unusual for the spiritual benefactor to. bestow its name upon the human suppliant. The term omaxsapitau thus appears to have entered the Blackfoot system of individual names some generations ago. According to Yellow Kidney, a Piegan named Bird Flying High (pikstpodnsin) was blessed in this way by the ‘‘big eagle.” He belonged to a group of the Fat-roasters band, which intermarried among the Blood Indians and went to live with them in Canada. The great bird, it is stated, appeared to him in a dream and said, “T will give you my name. You will be called omaxsapttau. You will become chief of your band and live to a very old age.” Bird Flying High thereupon adopted the name of Big Eagle, and the dream vision was consummated by his later rise to the position of band chief. Yellow Kidney claims that when he was a small child he saw Big Eagle, who was already advanced in age at that time. Hence the latter’s dream experience may be placed some time in the period be- fore 1850. Big Eagle, following his dream experience, wore suspended from his hair two tail- feathers of the omaxsapitau, to which a medal was attached as a support. The former were a symbolical representation of his spiritual power from the “big eagle’; the latter, his power from the Sun. Yellow Kidney, in his early childhood, saw the supernatural token and recalled that the feathers surpassed those of the eagle in length. At times, our informant stated, Big Eagle would demonstrate his spiritual gifts. through the use of his feather token. He would direct his friends, “Look up at the Sun. Do you see anything around it?” They would look and fail to see anything unusual. Then Big Eagle would begin the power song given him by the Sun, “When I come up to the top of the hill, I shall see all about me.” As he sang, he motioned with one of the feathers as if marking out a spot above the Sun. A sun dog (parhelion) would there- upon appear beside it. In this way, accord- ing to Yellow Kidney, who witnessed the feat in his youth, Big Eagle could produce as many as four sun dogs about the Sun at one time. JUNE 1951 Information regarding another Black- foot, who more recently bore the name of Big Eagle, was given by Harry Under Mouse. The source of the latter’s data was Small Eyes, a prominent native ritualist on the Gleichen Reserve, Alberta. This Big Eagle, it appears, was a member of the All- Short-People band of the Blackfoot proper. He married a Blood woman and lived for some years among the members of that tribe. Big Eagle fasted for power in the region northwest of Calgary. On the top of Deyil’s Head Mountain, he sacrificed a piece of his flesh to the Sun. On nearby Bald Butte he then offered up to the “big eagle,’ a Cree foeman, whom he had killed at the spirit bird’s request. In return he received supernatural power for use in war- fare from both spiritual beings. As a symbol of his aerial protector, Big Eagle carried a tailfeather of an omaxsapitau. Before start- ing out upon a raid, he would stick the feather upright in the ground by the cere- monial altar. The direction in which it fell during the night indicated the way he must travel to obtain horses from the enemy.*® The skill of the second Big Eagle as a raider was said to have depended, in part, upon his use of a root with soporific power. After rubbing some of it upon the feather token, he would chew a small piece and spit upon both his hands. Then, taking the feather, he would motion with it in a peculiar way and thereby cause an enemy sentry to fall into a deep sleep. By this means he is said to have stolen 200 horses from the Assiniboine and driven them safely home. Through his power to put the occupants of an enemy lodge asleep, Big Eagle is also credited with acquiring from adjacent tribes one or more pipe bundles, which were later passed down among the Blackfoot. On one oceasion, it was narrated, he was surrounded by hostile Cree on the top of Devil’s Head Mountain. Through use of his supernatural power Big Eagle rendered himself and his party invisible and safely passed through the enemy lines. When the Cree advanced to the summit, the only living thing seen 8 On the basis of preliminary results of a study now in progress, the Blackfoot iniskim or buffalo stone was employed in an analogous manner to determine, at certain times, the direction in which to hunt buffalo and, at others, to predict the out- come of the hunt. SCHAEFFER: CALIFORNIA CONDOR AND BLACKFOOT INDIANS 187 there was a great, dark-colored bird, which flew away. Big Eagle is said to have died in 1925, advanced in years. His son, Steven Fox (Short Crow or Thunder Chief), who now resides on the Blood Reserve, is said to have borne the name of Big Eagle during his younger years. The feather token of the elder Big Hagle came into possession of Small Eyes, but its present whereabouts are now unknown. Harry Under Mouse informs me that other tangible remains of the omaysapitaw sur- vived as late as a decade ago among the Cree Indians of Hobbema, south of Ed- monton. He had been told by a Cree from that place that the ceremonial regalia of a performer in the Grass Dance consisted of the stuffed body, wings, and tail of one of these birds. The regalia was designed to be tied to the dancer’s back, so that the con- dor’s head rose above that of the wearer, the body and spread tail hung downward nearly to the ground, and an extended wing was attached to each arm. During the dance the wearer imitated the flight and other actions of the “big eagle.’’ The bird that supplied this skin was presumably killed in this area by the Cree at some period in the past. Native testimony in respect to the “big eagle” may be concluded by reference to its place in Blackfoot folklore. It will scarcely come as a surprise to learn that the omax- sapitau has become identified with the myth- ical roc in a Blood version of that tale.’ The protagonist of the legend, according to Harry Under Mouse, is the aforementioned White Bear, “who first learned what and where the omaxsapitaw was.” As a result of his encounter with the bird, White Bear is said to have borne for a time the name of °The Roe legend is perhaps widespread in North America. I have made no effort to trace its distribution in the Plains or adjacent areas in connection with this study. It may be noted in passing that a generalized version of the Blackfoot tale was obtained in 1947 from the Upper Kutenai, of Elmo, Montana, who assign its origin to the Sarsi. Fisher (p. 253) refers to the myth of an eagle or mythieal bird abductor among such Algonkian- speaking groups, as the Miemac, Passamaquoddy, Malecite, Montagnais-Naskapi, Cree, Ojibwa, Menomini, Gros Ventre, and Cheyenne. Future folklorists, who trace the distribution of the myth, may well consider the condor as a possible influence in its western diffusion. 188 Big Eagle. The tale, it may be pointed out, conforms, in general, to the Blackfoot pat- tern of an individual’s experience in the power quest. The Blood tribe was encamped in the vicinity of moder Edmonton. Food was scarce and parties of hunters scattered out in different directions to search for game. Upon their return at night, one member of a party would be missing. Men continued to disappear in this way for some time. Finally a party of four went out a long way to hunt. Near the place called Devil’s Head, they put up a brush shelter for several days’ stay. That night they sang their supernatural power songs for good luck in the next day’s hunt. The following morning the four men started out, each in a different direction. All agreed to meet at camp that night. A light snow fell that day. One of the hunters killed a deer. He butchered it and tied the meat in a pack upon his back. Then he started back for camp, using his bow as a cane to support the load. Walking along with his head bowed, he suddenly saw the shadow of a great bird upon the snow. He felt the bird grasp at the meat on his back, and the next instant realized that he was rising in the air. Too frightened now to look down, he closed his eyes. After a brief period he felt solid ground beneath his feet and lay back with the pack still in place. He opened his eyes to see that he was in a large nest surrounded by the bones of deer, bison calves and even human beings. It came to him then that the last repre- sented the remains of those hunters recently lost. He sat up and looked around. The nest was located upon a high cliff, from which escape seemed impossible. Nearby was an immense bird, which cried in a strange way. The hunter realized this was the creature that had carried people away. He called upon the Sun for aid. Beside him were two young birds, scarcely able to fly. He began to pray to them for help. Untying his pack, the hunter threw bits of meat to them, which they ate. He continued doing this in order to bring them closer. Finally, he pushed the whole chunk of meat over. The feeding birds were now within reach. He quickly grasped their legs in each of his hands. They began to flap their wings, nearly jerking him into the air. Still retaining his hold, he inched over to the edge of the cliff. Then he pushed the birds off into space, throwing himself JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 6 off at the same instant. Again he closed his eyes. He found that the flight power of the birds, although insufficient to support his weight, served to check his descent to the ground. It seemed a long way down. Finally he landed in safety. Before releasing his rescuers, he detached the longest feather from the tail of each bird. Then he started to make his way home. It was late in the evening when he arrived at camp. He recognized the cries of his wife and parents, who were mourning atop a nearby hill. As he listened, someone went over and led them back to their lodge. He looked inside the lodge and saw that his people had cut off thei hair and gashed their arms and legs. Only then did he realize that they were mourning his death. Going inside, he greatly surprised the occupants. They could scarcely believe that he was alive, but he convinced them that he was not a ghost. The hunter then asked his wife to invite the old men of the camp to his lodge. His mother be- gan to prepare food for them. After all had eaten, he related his experience and as proof displayed the tail feathers of the young birds. As the old men examined the trophies, they noted that they were nearly the length of a grown person’s arm. The hunter’s companions, who had also returned by this time, told how they had followed his tracks to where they ended in the snow and picked up his bow nearby. In this way it became known what creatures had caused the people to disappear. As a result of this incident, the hunter later received supernatural power from the “big eagle.” Accounts from Blackfoot oral sources previously set forth in respect to the omax- sapitau and its place in the ethno-ornithology of that group may now be summarized. The identification of the omaxsapitau as the condor and the latter’s occurrence in Blackfoot territory rests upon three types of traditional evidence: (1) a series of native sight records made over a period of half a century or more, (2) reflections of identity and presence in various aspects of Black- foot culture, and (3) notions of modern Indians regarding the bird’s size, habits, and appearance derived from (1) and (2). The second of these types of data has been adequately treated in the body of this study. Hence, it will suffice to summarize in some detail the remaining two. As a rough measure of the validity of our JUNE 1951 data, we may comment briefly here upon the degree of interest manifested by the Blackfoot in the avian world. In general, it may be said, wildfowl represented a seg- ment of the local fauna and flora, which, together with the Blackfoot and their cul- tural structure, constituted a closely knit biotic community of the northwestern Plains. The place of the Blackfoot in such an ecological system may be epitomized by Speck’s characterization (1921, p. 349) of the Algonkians of the northeastern forests, a comment that applies equally well to their linguistic congeners of the plains: “The native Indians live much closer to Nature than most white people could hope to do. Their knowledge of wildlife is therefore in- exhaustable in quantity, though it is often far from being scientifically correct.” The Blackfoot, dependent predominantly upon the bison for subsistence, were better mam- malogists, perhaps, than ornithologists. Nevertheless, the group built up over gen- erations an extensive body of knowledge based upon observation of the local avifauna, the influence of which pervaded such varied fields as hunting and trapping, material crafts and decorative arts, curing practices, folklore, and ceremonial rites, songs, and dances. As a result, most Blackfoot became acquainted from childhood with the appear- ance, habits and culturally defined attri- butes of the avian species within their ken. It is against this background of familiarity that native testimony on the omaxsapitau should be evaluated. In respect to the physical features and habits of the omaxsapitau, nearly all Black- foot traditions stressed the factors of great size and dark color. Other elements cited by one or more informants, include the naked head, the feather ruff, the dark, hooked beak, the length and power of the wings, the white area underwing, the ex- tended tailfeathers, and the coarsely scaled legs. Reference was also made to the bird’s wariness, its habit of soaring in great cir- cles and suddenly darting off at great speed, and the inclined posture in feeding. Certain of these traits, such as the feathered ruff, bald head, great size, ete., are sufficiently distinctive of the condor to suggest identity. In contrast to the preceding list of char- acteristic traits must be set others atypical SCHAEFFER: CALIFORNIA CONDOR AND BLACKFOOT INDIANS 189 of the condor. Such discrepancies in our data have been noted wherever recognized. Some, no doubt, represent errors introduced unconsciously into the flow of Blackfoot traditions. Others appear to be traits trans- ferred by native observers from the golden eagle to the omaxsapitau. Nidification in the eastern foothills of the Rockies, undoubt- edly, represents one such case. The pred- atorial habit assigned in the Blood legend to a scavenger species is another. It may be recalled that the Indians classified the omaxsapttau, both taxonomically and _ ter- minologically, with the golden eagle. Only one informant, Jim White Calf, seemed aware of the former’s genetic relationship to the turkey vulture. The confusion evi- dent in the minds of native ornithologists may have been the result of the condor’s infrequent appearances in this area, in modern if not in earlier times. Few Black- foot during the last century have ever seen the species at close hand or over a period of time. In view of this unfamiliarity, it is surprising that greater errors have not been introduced in native descriptions. Such, then, represents the traditional evidence upon which identifications of the condor must, at the moment, rest. Turning next to the reported occurrences of the omaxsapitau in Blackfoot territory, we find that they are placed by native ob- servers, both living and dead, at irregular intervals from the early 1900’s back to the middle of the previous century. Of such ap- pearances, the least credible, perhaps, is that of 1907-08, a date posterior to the final sight record (Rhoads) of the condor on the north Pacific coast!? by more than a decade. Raven’s reported observation of the omaxsapitaw in 1897 comes within a year of Fannin’s sight record near Calgary. Preceding these appearances is the Phemister occurrence of the 1870’s; those of Takes a Gun’s parents and Brocky’s of the 1860’s; and White Bear’s of the 1850’s. The testi- mony of Yellow Kidney in respect to the Indian named Big Eagle and to other topies, seems referable to a still earlier period. From these data, scanty and unsatisfactory 1 Gabrielson and Jewett (p. IS1) report, on the basis of what appears to them good authority, the presence of two or more condors in southern Oregon in 1903 and again in 1904. 190 as they are, it would seem that the condor appeared in the Montana-Alberta region prior to the 1850’s sufficiently often to leave a definite impress upon Blackfoot institu- tions and thus give rise to the traditions related by Yellow Kidney. Such seasonal movement of the condor northward along the Continental Divide may, perhaps, paral- lel its observed wanderings (1805-34) up the west coast to the lower Columbia and the Fraser. In subsequent decades the species was seen less frequently in Montana and Alberta, as well as along the coast, until its terminal appearance in both regions Just before the close of the century. A final point already mentioned in our study calls for elaboration here. The histor- ical sources indicate that the condor was attracted to the lower Columbia and lower Fraser Rivers by the multitude of dead, migrant salmon, which in autumn lined the banks of those streams. What comparable food resource, it may be asked, served to draw the species to the northwestern margin of the Plains? The black-tailed deer!! im- mediately comes to mind, the range of which has been shown to closely overlap that of the condor (Elliott, p. 122). However, it seems more probable, as native traditions suggest, that the bird’s major item of sub- sistence in this region lay in the readily ac- cessible remains of bison killed by the Black- foot and their neighbors. As Ewers (p. 358) has recently pointed out, the impounding of bison at drive sites was largely carried on by the Blackfoot late m fall and early in winter, a period which found the condor absent from the north. However, a plentiful supply of meat in this area was assured dur- ing the warmer months of the year. Then the hunt was also organized on a coopera- tive, group basis in the form of the sur- round on horseback, or at an earlier period, on foot. The abandonment by hunters of bison bones and offals at this season, which in fall supplied tallow and meat for the man- 1 One authority believes that the condor pre- ferred deer meat to any other. He observes that “they can make hash of a dead deer, sheep or other small animals; yet it seems that they have not the power to cut through the skin of a horse, cow or other large animal until the meat is somewhat de- composed”’ (Elliott, pp. 123-24, quoting Pem- berton). JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 6 ufacture of pemmican, afforded a source of diet for the condor and other carnivorous creatures. In conclusion, information gathered from Blackfoot traditionalists suggests, in the writer’s opinion, the condor’s former move- ment northward, as a casual and infrequent visitant, along the eastern slopes of the Rockies as far as Montana and Alberta. The evidence for this statement 1s scarcely of a nature as to win acceptance from mod- ern ornithologists, whose standards of proof require something more tangible than sight records or native traditions. The present study, however, is designed to stimulate further investigation of the topic. Inquiries should be carried out among Canadian Blackfoot and adjacent Cree, from whom significant information, and, even more concrete evidence of the species’ identity and presence may still be obtained. If such data are forthcoming, it will be possible to add, in the words of one student, ‘“‘another section to the jigsaw puzzle of Gymnogyps’ extra-limital wanderings.”” Until that time, memories of the ‘‘big eagle’ will continue to be preserved among the descendants of those bison-hunting tribesmen, who long ago observed its great, sweeping flights from out of the fastnesses of the Rockies. BIBLIOGRAPHY AMERICAN ORNITHOLOGISTS’ Union. Check-list of North American birds, ed. 4. 1931. Bent, Artuur C. Life histories of North American birds of prey, part 1.U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 167. 1937. Dawson, Won. L., and Bowtks, Joun H. The birds of Washington, 2 vols. Seattle, 1909. Exiiorr, Cuarues (ed.). Fading trails: The story of endangered American wildlife. New York, 1943. Ewers, Joun C. The last bison drives of the Black- foot Indians. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 39: 355-360. 1949. Fannin, J. The California vulture in Alberta. Auk 14: 89. 1897. Fisoer, Marcaret W. The mythology of the north- ern and northeastern Algonkians in reference to Algonkian mythology as a whole. In ‘Man in Northeastern North America,’’ Frederick Johnson (ed.). Pap. Robert S. Peabody Foun- dation for Arch. 3: 226-262. 1946. GaABRIELSON, IRA N., and Jewrrr, STANLEY G. Birds of Oregon. Corvallis, 1940. Harris, Harry. The annals of Gymnogyps to 1900. Condor 48: 3-55. 1941. JUNE 1951 Macotn, JoHn and James H. Catalogue of Cana- dian birds. Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, 1909. PEARSON, Grupert T. (ed.). Birds of America. Garden City, 1936. ScHAEFFER, CiLaupE E. Bird nomenclature and principles of avian taxonomy of the Blackfeet Indians. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 40: 37-46. 1950. Speck, FRANK G. Bird-lore of the Northern Indians. STRIMPLE: NEW DESMOINESIAN CRINOIDS 191 Public Lectures by Univ. of Pennsylvania Faculty, 1919-20, 7: 349-380. 1921. . Naskapi: The savage hunters of the Labrador Peninsula. Norman, Okla., 1935. TAVERNER, P. A. Birds of Canada. Dept. of Mines, Nat. Mus. Canada, Bull. 72, biol. ser. 19. Ottawa, 1934. Wisster, Cuark. Ceremonial bundles of the Black- foot Indians. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. Anthrop. Pap. 7 (2). 1912. PALEONTOLOGY .—New Desmoinesian crinoids. HARRELL L. Srrmpxe, Bartles- ville, Okla. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) Glaukosocrinus, n. gen., 1s here proposed with G. parvisculus (Moore and Plummer), n. comb. as the genotype species. Descrip- tion of Aeszocrinus erectus, n. sp., Acrocrinus expansus, n. sp., Lecythiocrinus optimus, n. sp., and Schistocrinus ovalis, n. sp., 1s given. All figured specimens are from exposures of the Oologah limestone formation, sometimes referred to the Altamont limestone of Kan- sas, Des Moines series, Pennsylvanian, lo- cated east of Tulsa, Okla. Glaukosocrinus, n. gen. Dorsal cup moderately low truncate, semi- globular with deep basal invagination. Columnar sear small, round, occupying the median portion of a relatively large IBB circlet. Five small IBB are restricted to basal concavity. Five moder- ately large BB form a part of the lateral calyx walls and flex strongly inward to form sides of the basal concavity. Five large RR have short articulating processes which are directed mildly outward. Outer surfaces of RR curve in to form adsutural slopes between articulating facets. Anal X is large, pentagonal and does not extend into the interbrachial region. RA is pentagonal and rests on r. post. and post. BB. It supports a small pentagonal RX, which extends only slightly into the interbrachial area. Genotype.—Malaiocrinus parvisculus and Plummer (1940). Known range.—Des Moines series; Pennsyl- vanian; North America. Discussion.—This form was referred to Mala- tocrinus Wanner (1924) by Moore and Plummer (1940). It has certain characteristics superficially similar to that genus and may represent a trend of specialization leading to the genus but certain factors seem sufficient to warrant separation. Malaiocrinus has anal plates of normal structure Moore in normal (primitive) arrangement. Anal X is hexagonal. In Glaukosocrinus the anal plate is pentagonal and does not extend above the normal cup height. The radial articulating facets of Malaiocrinus are long, directed strongly outward and the columnar scar is very large, almost en- tirely covering the IBB plates. Glaukosocrinus has short radial articulating facets directed only slightly outward and the columnar scar is small. Glaukosocrinus parvisculus (Moore and Plummer), n. comb. Figs. 13-16 This species has been adequately described. The specimen figured herein was collected by the author in the stone quarry some 7 miles east of Tulsa, Okla. Genus Aesiocrinus Miller and Gurley, 1890 Aesiocrinus erectus, n. sp. Figs. 9-12 Dorsal cup is broad, truncate bowl-shaped. Five IBB form a large pentagonal-shaped disk with slightly depressed median section. Five large BB curve into the subhorizontal basal area but also comprise a good portion of the lateral cup walls. Five large RR have arm articulating facets directed slightly outward and not entirely filling the distal faces of the plates. Outer liga- ment furrow is shallow but well defined. Liga- ment pit furrow is shallow and ligament pit is sharply impressed. Transverse ridges are sharply defined, narrow lateral furrows are backed by unusually long oblique ridges. Muscle sears are limited in area and are deeply impressed. Inter- muscular notches and furrows are broad and short. The right shoulder of 1. post. B is extended and has an extra facet for reception of an anal tube plate. R. post. R and the anal plate are 192 missing in the holotype but measurements leave no doubt as to the existence of only one anal plate in the posterior interradius, which plate was in broad contact with the post. B. The entire surface of the dorsal cup is mildly granular in appearance. Depressions occur at the apices of RR and BB. Columnar scar is decidedly pentagonal in outline. Maximum width of dorsal cup is 18.5 mm, height 8.2 mm. Remarks.—The general contour of the dorsal cup of A. erectus is very similar to that of several species of Plummericrinus Moore and Laudon (1943) and is quite unlike that of any other spe- cies of Aestocrinus. Characteristics, other than general appearance, in common with Plummeri- crinus are the depressions at the angles of BB and RR and the extension of the outer surfaces of RR into the adsutural area between the arm articu- lating processes. However, Plummericrinus has three anal plates in the posterior interradius and a round stem. Occurrence.—Stone quarry some 7 miles east of Tulsa, Okla. Holotype.—Collected by the author. To be deposited in the U. S. National Museum. Genus Acrocrinus Yandell, 1846 Acrocrinus expansus, n. sp. Figs. 1, 17-20 Dorsal cup is of moderate height, wide at the base and mildly constricted at the distal ex- tremity. Two BB of equal size are confined to a shallow basal concavity. The walls of the basal depression are composed of two circlets of small e.g 010 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 6 plates. Five RR are hexagonal and are adjoining except where interrupted by the large anal X in the posterior interradius. Articular facets are small, horse shoe shaped. The BB and RR are separated by about six circlets of plates which are designated as inter- calaries (11). In the first circlet below the RR and anal X series, there are 12 hexagonal ii', 14 ii?, 16 ii’, and 14 ii*. Exact placement of succeeding series is difficult owing to slight irregularities and the incipient nature of those nearest the BB. Plates of the posterior interray continue un- broken to the BB disk and also in the anterior ray. In other rays the series are broken. Con- sidering the large number of plates the arrange- ment is remarkably symmetrical. The columnar scar is very small and round. Arms and tegmen have not been observed. Cup plates are devoid of ornamentation. Greatest width of dorsal cup (basal) is 11.0 mm, width at distal extremity is 6.5 mm, height 9.0 mm. Remarks.—Acrocrinus worthent Wachsmuth (1882), Acrocrinus pumpkensis Strimple (1949), A. brentwoodensis Moore and Plummer (1937), and A. pirum Moore and Plummer (1937) have calices similar to the present species in general outline. They have broad basal areas and tend toward constriction in the distal extremities of the cup. A. pirum is elongated and has.a greater number of plates than other species. A. wortheni has fewer plates and a different arrangement of intercalaries than found in A. expansus. A. pump- kensis has a limited number of intercalaries and the cup does not constrict so noticeably at the Fic. 1.—Diagrammatic sketch showing arrangement of plates in the holotype of Acrocrinus expansus, n. sp. 2-5.—Holotype of Schistocrinus ovalis, n. sp., from below, anterior, summit, and posterior, —Holotype of Lecythiocrinus optimus, n. sp., from posterior, summit, and base, € gS, Fras. 9-12.—Holotype of Aestocrinus erectus, n. sp., from base, summit, anterior, and pos Fics. < IS, Figs. 6 Fias. 13-16.—Typical representative of Glaukosocrinus parvisculus (Moore and terior, X 1.6. Fras. 20. Holotype Plummer), n. comb., from anterior, posterior, summit, and base, X 1.8. of Acrocrinus expansus, n. sp., from summit, base, anterior, and posterior, X 3 194 distal extremity. In A. brentwoodensis all RR are in contact with four plates in addition to lateral contact with adjoining RR, whereas in A. ex- pansus only the two posterior RR have contact with four plates and the three anterior RR are each in contact with three plates. The only other described Pennsylvanian spe- cies is A. elegans Strimple (1949) which has a slender, elongated cup. Occurrence.—Stone quarry about 7 miles east of Tulsa, Okla. Holotype.—Collected by Melba Strimple. To be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. Genus Lecythiocrinus White, 1880 Lecythiocrinus optimus, n. sp. Figs. 6-8 Dorsal cup is elongated, more or less spherical in outline. Three unequal IBB form a mildly up- flared, broad base. The smaller IB is right pos- terior. Five BB are long, hexagonal plates with proximal portions curved to join IBB plates. Five RR are small pentagonal plates with promi- nent, wide arm articulating facets. There is a pronounced reduction in width of RR as the upper edge of the cup is approached. An oval shaped opening is in the upper extremity of post. B and lower lateral portions of |. post. and r. post. RR. When the cup is viewed from above or below there is a mildly pentagonal outline due to slightly raised median areas in the proximal por- tions of BB. Columnar scar is small, round. Arms and teg- men are unknown. The greatest width of dorsal cup is 10.4 mm, height 10.6 mm. Remarks.—L. optimus differs from other de- scribed species in having broad, rather distended articulating processes. The outline of the cup is somewhat comparable to those of L. adamsi Worthen (1883) and L. olliculaeformis White (1880). Occurrence.—Road cut on eastward extension of thirty-first Street, southeast of Tulsa, Okla. Holotype.—Collected by Frank Crane. To be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. Genus Schistocrinus Moore and Plummer, 1940 Schistocrinus ovalis, n. sp. Figs. 2-5 Dorsal cup is shallow, bowl-shaped. In the median portion of a broad, shallow basal con- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 6 cavity there is a sharply impressed, small, round columnar sear. Five IBB form a cog shaped disk surrounding the impressed area. Five small BB are more or less triangular shaped plates with the exception of post. B which is rather elongate and is truncated for reception of anal X. Five large RR are in solid contact with the IBB plates and prevent lateral contact between BB. Three anal plates are in normal (primitive) arrange- ment. RA is a narrow, elongate plate supporting the narrow proximal face of RX above and is in contact with anal X to the left. RX expands noticeably as it enters the interbrachial region. Anal X is a large, long plate. All cup plates are unornamented. Arms and tegmen are unknown. The dorsal cup has a width of 16.6 mm, height of 3.5 mm. Remarks.—S. ovalis is more comparable with S. torquatus Moore and Plummer (1940), the genotype species, than with other described forms. S. torquatus has more prominent IBB plates, the impressed basal area is entirely oc- cupied by the columnar scar, BB have more angular proximal facets and the plates of the posterior interradius are more advanced in ar- rangement. Occurrence.—Stone quarry about 7 miles east of Tulsa, Okla. Holotype.—Collected by the author. To be deposited in the U. S. National Museum. REFERENCES Miurter, S. A., and;Gururny, W. F. E. Journ Cincinnati Soe Nat. Hist. 13: 14. 1890. Moors, R. C., and Laupon, L. R. Geol. Soe. Amer. Spec. Pap. 46: 56, 58. 1943. ——— and Priummenr, F. B. Bull. Denison Univ., Journ. Sci. Labs., 32: 218-244, pl. 12, figs. 1-3. 1937. ———.. Univ. Texas Publ. 3945: 98-101, pl. 14, fig. 6; pp. 217-222, pl. 2, fig. 6. 1940. Srrimeie, H. L. Amer. Journ. Sci. 247: 900-904, pl. 1, figs. 1-6, 1949. WacusmutH, C. Illinois State Mus. Nat. Hist. Bull. 1: 41. 1882. WANNER, J. Perm. Krin. Timor, 2° Nederl. Ex- ped.: 177-188. 1924. Wurst, C. A. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 2: 256, pl. 1, figs. 4-5. 1880. WorrtueEn, A. H. Illinois State Mus. Bull. 1: 37. 1883. YANDELL, L. P. Amer. Journ. Sci., ser. 2, 20: 135-1387. 1846. JUNE 1951 COOPER AND MUIR-WOOD: BRACHIOPOD HOMONYMS 195 PALEONTOLOGY .—Brachiopod homonyms. G. ArrHuR Cooprrr, U.S. National Museum, and Heten M. Murr-Woop, British Museum (Natural History). While preparing a list of the brachiopod genera for the forthcoming ‘Treatise on Paleontology,” the authors found a number of homonyms, which are adjusted below. In addition to these, three names previously thought to be homonyms proved to have been incorrectly replaced. Substitutions for these erroneously displaced names are also included herein. Argentiproductus nom. nov. for Thomasella Paul, 1942, Zentralbl. Min. Geol. Paliaont., Abt. B, 6: 191 (non Fredericks, 1928, Bull. Com. Géol. Leningrad 46 (7): 778, 789, Brachiopoda). Type species: Producta margaritacea Phillips, 1836. Callispirina nom. nov. for Mansuyella Reed, 1944, Palaeont. Indica (n. s.) 23, mem. 2: 505 (non Endo, 1937, Bull. Manchurian Sci. Mus. 1: 353, Trilobita). Type species: Spiriferina ornata Waagen, 1887. Capillirostra nom. nov. for Rhynchonellopsis Bose, 1894, Palaeontogr. 41: 57, 77, 78, footnote (non Vincent, 1893, Ann. Soc. Malac. Belge 28, mém.: 51, Brachiopoda). Type species: Rhynchonellina? Bose, 1894. Elinoria nom. nov. for Elina Fredericks, 1924, Bull. Com. Géol. Petrograd 38 (3): 320, 321 (non Blanchard, 1852, in Gray, Hist. Chile 7: 28, Lepidoptera; or Ferrari, 1878, Ann. Mus. Stor. Nat. Genova 12: 84, Hemiptera; or Houl- bert, 1918, in Oberthuer, Etude Lép. 15: 325, Lepidoptera). Type species: Spirifer rectangulus Kutorga, 1844. Equirostra nom. nov. for Isorhynchus King, 1850, Mon. Permian Foss., Palaeont. Soc.: 81, 112 (non Schoenherr, 1833, Gen. et Sp. Cure. 1 (1): 22; 1836, 3 (2): 631, Coleoptera). Type species: Terebratulites aequirostris Schlo- theim, as represented by DeVerneuil in Geologie de la Russie d’Europe 2, pl. 3, fig. 1. 1845. Hirsutella nom. nov. for Hirsutina Kirchner, 1934, Neues Jahrb. Geol. Paliont. 71, Abt. B (1): 106 (non Tutt, 1909, Brit. Butterfl. 3: 154, Lepidoptera). Type species: Spirifer hirsutus Alberti, 1864. Jinkelsteina Labriproductus nom. nov. for Worthenella Girty, 1938, Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 28 (10): 442 (non Walcott, 1911, Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 57 (5): 125, Vermes). Type species: Productus wortheni Hall, 1858. Marionites nom. nov. for Marionella Bancroft, 1928, Mem. Manchester Lit. Phil. Soc. 72: 181 (non Cobb, 1922, Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 11: 504, Vermes). Type species: Marionella typa Bancroft, 1928. Nudirostra nom. nov. for Letiorhynchus Hall, 1860, Ann. Rep. New York State Cab. Nat. Hist. 13: 75 (non Liorhynchus Rudolphi, 1801, Archiv Zool. [Wiedemann] 2 (1): 49, Vermes). Type species: Orthis quadricostata Vanuxem, 1842. Phymatothyris nom. nov. for Pallasiella Renz, 1932, Abh. Schweiz. Paliont. Ges. 52: 40, 41 (non Sars, 1895, Crustacea Norway 1: 505, Crus- tacea; or Kirby, 1910, Synon. Cat. Orthopt. 3: 168, Orthoptera). Type species: Pallasiella kerkyraea Renz, 1932 Pirgulia nom. nov. for Pirgula DeGregorio, 1930, Ann. Géol. Paléont. Palermo 52: 30 (non Tessmann, 1921, Mitt. Zool. Mus. Berlin 10: 215, Lepidoptera). Type species (by monotypy): Lyttonia ? (Pir- gula) pedicula DeGregorio, 1930. Plectorhynchella nom. nov. for Monticola Naliv- kin, 19380. Mem. Com. Géol. Leningrad 180: 86, 188 (non Boie, 1822, Isis [Oken] 1822: 552, Aves). Type species: Athyris collinensis Frech, 1902. Sphaerirhynchia nom. nov. for Wilsonella Niki- forova, 1937, Palaeont. U.S. 8. R. Mon., Lenin- grad, 35: 33 (non Carter, 1885, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) 15: 320, Spongiae). Type species: Terebratula wilsont J. Sowerby, 1816. Struspirifer nom. nov. for Schuchertia Fred- ericks, 1926, Bull. Acad. Sei. U. R.S. 8. 20 (5-6): 406 (non Gregory, 1899, Geol. Mag. (n. s.) dee. 4, 6: 351, Echinodermata). Type species: Delthyris niagarensis Conrad, 1842. Sulcirostra nom. noy. for Rhynchonellopsis De- Gregorio, 1980, Ann. Géol. Paléont. Palermo 55: 6 (non Vincent, 1898, Ann. Soe. Malac. Belge 28, mém.: 51, Brachiopoda). 196 Type species: Rhynchonellina seguenzae Gem- mellaro, 1871. Tunarites nom. nov. for Tunaria Hoek, 1912, Neues Jahrb. Min. Geol. Stuttgart, Beil. Bd. 34: 247 (non Link, 1807, Beschr. Nat. Samml. Univ. Rostock 3: 165, Coelenterata). Type species. Tunaria cochambina Hoek, 1912. SUBSTITUTIONS FOR EXISTING NAMES Aetheia Thomson, 1915, Geol. Mag. 2: 389 (non Aethia Merrem, 1788, Vers. Grundr. Gesch. Vogel I, Tent. Nat. Syst. Av.: 7, 13, 20, Aves; and Huebner, 1825, Verz. bekannt. Schmett.: 340, Lepidoptera.). Substitute Thomsonica Coss- mann, 1920, Rev. Crit. Paléozool. 24: 137. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 6 Type species: Terebratula gualteri Morris, 1850. Megerlia King, 1850, Mon. Permian Foss., Palaeont. Soc.: 81, 145, not preoccupied by Megerlea Robineau-Desvoidy, 1830, Mem. Prés Acad. Roy. Sci. Inst. France 2: 266, Diptera. Miihlfeldtia Bayle, 1880, Journ. Conch. 28: 240, proposed for Megerlia King, 1850, is a synonym. Type species: Anomia truncata Gmelin, 1767. Yakovlevia Fredericks, 1925, Rec. Geol. Com. Russian Far East 40: 7 (non Jakowleffia Puton, 1875, Petites Nouvelles Ent. 1 (128): 512, He- miptera). Substitute Mwirwoodia Licharew, 1947, C. R. Acad. Sci. Moscow (n. s.) 57 (2): 187. Type species: Productus mammatus Keyser- ling, 1846. PALEONTOLOGY—Substitution for the preoccupied brachiopod name Hystricina. Merrity A. SraInBrook, Brandon, Iowa. (Communicated by G. A. Cooper.) Dr. G. Arthur Cooper has recently in- formed me that Dr. Helen Muir-Wood and he have discovered that the name Hystricina, proposed by me in 1945 for a genus of atry- poid brachiopods, is preoccupied by Hystrz- cina Malloch, 1932 (Rec. Canterbury [N. Z.] Mus. 3: 433). To replace it Iam suggesting Spinatrypa (Hystricina Stainbrook, not Hys- tricina Malloch, 1932). The type species is Atrypa hystrix var. occidentalis Hall. BOTANY .—A contribution to the lichen flora of Alaska. Grorar A. LLANo, Arctic, Desert, Tropic Information Center, Maxwell Air Force Base, Alabama. (Com- municated by John A. Stevenson.) The following new species, varieties, forms, new names, and distributions have been taken from a manuscript prepared as a report! of field work carried out in Alaska by the author in the summer of 1949 and by P. F. Scholander in 1948. The final report will contain a record of all macrolichens col- lected in Alaska including the Aleutians. All Stereocaula and Cladoniaceae were deter- mined, respectively, by Dr. I. M. Lamb and Dr. A. W. Evans. 1. Stereocaulon glareosum (Sav.) H. Magen. in G6teborgs Kgl. Vet. och Vitterh.- Saml. Handl. 30: 60. 1926. var. brachyphylloides M. Lamb, var. nov. A specie typica differt phyllocladiis subper- sistenter graniformibus aut subdigitato-con- crescentibus, passim tantum papillae-formiter excrescentibus; cephalodia magna, conspicua, ut in forma typica. Forming caespitose-pulvinate, low clumps with uneven surfaces. Podetia firmly attached to the soil, short and stout, up to 1.5 em long and 1-2 mm thick, congested, irregularly branched, + upright or various intricated, not dorsiventral; + terete, clothed down to the base with a thin, smooth, adpressed, pale rosy-subochraceous to- mentum; rigid but not markedly ligneous. Phyllocladia lateral on podetia, scanty in lower parts, congested and numerous in upper parts, cinereous-whitish, matt, unicolorous, mostly concrescent grainlike or concrescent-subdigitate, 1 Studies on the lichen flora of Alaska. The North Slope of the Brooks Range, with Appendix. The work on which this report is based was sup- ported by the Arctic Institute of North America with funds provided by the Office of Naval Re- search and was conducted under the auspices of the Smithsonian Institution. JUNE 1951 small (0.1-0.2 mm jdiam.), only rarely and in a few places becoming + distinctly elongate- papillate. Cephalodia abundant, conspicuous, laterally sessile on podetia, smoothly subglo- bose, well constricted at base, 0.4-1.5(—3.0) mm diam., pale roseate-brownish (+ flesh colored), matt, the surface smoothly continuous or often rhagadiose-fissured; the larger ones (8 em diam.) becoming irregularly pulvinate and dividing into several irregular convex por- tions. Reactions: phyllocladia KHO + green- ish-yellow, Pd + (slowly) sulphur-yellow. Anaska: 151-152°W., 68°20’N., Anaktuvuk Pass, 1,000 m.s.m. on naked soil, coll. G. A. Llano & Neil Weber 527 (no. 1161, Lamb, Tyee), sterile. 2. St. paschale (L.) Hoffm. Deutsch. Fl. 130. 1796. var. erectum (Frey) M. Lamb, comb. nov. Podetia developing in a compact or loose manner, erect to suberect, about 4 cm high, somewhat branched. Anaktuvuk Pass, Llano 4026, in a dry aggraded stream floor, among mosses and _ Peltigera. 3. Peltigera venosa (L.) Baumg. Fl. Lipsiens. 581. 1790. f. tartarea Llano, forma nov. Superficies superior sordida, pruina pulver- ulenta vel squamosa tecta, inferior tomentosa, alba usque pallide bruneola, venis carentibus vel inconspicuis; sporae aciculares, 2-3 septatae, hyalinae, 36-40 X 4-6.6u. A typo differt dis- crepatione superficierum durarum. Upper surface dull, covered with a powdery to scaly white pruina; lower surface tomentose, white to pale brownish without veins, or veins indistinct. Lake Schraeder, 145°W., 69°20'N., on soil, P. F. Scholander, 1948. 4. Parmelia birulae Hlenk. in Ann. Berlin 4(1): 36. 1906. var. grumosa Llano, var. nov. Thallus imbricatissimus, acervis valde arcuatis compositus, lobis latis e lobulis minoribus fimbriatus; cortex superior ceraceo-furfuraceus. Thallus strongly imbricated in strongly arched heaps, lobes broad with sharp to rounded sinuses and fringed with smaller lobelets, upper cortex waxy-furfuraceous. Mycol. 2 Wdith K. Cash, Plant Industry Stat ion, Belts- ville, Md., kindly provided all Latin descriptions except for Sterocaulon. LLANO: LICHEN FLORA OF ALASKA 197 Anaktuvuk Pass, at the summits of lower mountains in protected depressions over mosses or other lichens Llano 236, 485d. 5. Cetraria scholanderii Llano, sp. nov. Thallus foliaceus, 10-15 cm in diam., lobato- crenatus, 4-6 mm latus, rugulosus, lobis valde imbricatis, ascendentibus, inflexis vel canalic- ulatis praeditus; cortex superior isidiis dense congregatis, simplicibus vel bifurcatis, albis obscurisve, verruciformibus vel vermiformibus ad apices obscuras tectus, pallide griseolus vel pallide griseo-vinaceus, interdum atro-strigosus vel marginibus olivaceis vel viridi-nigris, nitens; cortex inferior atro-piceus, deinde atro-brunneus vel interdum pallide brunneus in apicibus lo- borum, subnitidus, Jeniter venato-bullatus rugo- susque, areis rhizinarum tenuium fibrosarum vel velrucis conspersis praeditus; cortex superior K 4, intense viride-flavus, medulla K—, K(C) —, J—-. Apothecia raria, lateralia vel subterminalia, subpedicellata, 5-6 mm. lata; discus planus usque subconvexus, carneo-pallidus, glaber usque sub- rugulosus, margine albe, isidiis numerosis brevi- bus atro-apiculatis ornatus vel albo-crenulatus; ascl saccato-clavati, 42.9 > 22y, ad apices incrassati, octospori; paraphyses plus minusve distineti, septati, simplices, 1.43 XX 38y; sporae eloboso-ellipsoideae, incolores, 9.9-11 (—13) x 3.3—5.7 (—6.6) «; spermogonia non visa. Thallus foliaceous, 10-15 em in diam., lobate- crenate, 4-6 mm wide, rugulose, with strongly imbricated, ascending, inflexed or canaliculate lobes, upper cortex obscured by densely growing simple or bifureate, white to dark, verruciform to vermiform isidia with darka pices, color light grayish, or light grayish-vinaceous with oc- casional streaks of black, with olive-green margins, or dull greenish black, shiny; lower cortex pitch-black becoming dark brown to pale shiny brown on occasional lobe tips, subshiny, weakly veined-bullate and wrinkled, with scat- tered patches of thin, stringy rhizinae, or warts; upper cortex K+ bright green-yellow, medulla Kk—, K(C)—, J (subsection Glauscentes). Apothecia rare, terminal or marginal, sub- pedicellate, 5-6 mm wide, disk plane to sub- convex, flesh-colored, smooth to slightly ridged, thalline margin white, with numerous black-tipped isidia or white crenulate; 42.9 xX 22u, with thick hyaline apices, para- physes more or less distinct, septate, simple, 1.43 X 38x, spores 8 in ascus, globose to ellipsoid, short asel 198 with distinct wall, 9.9-11 (-138) x 3.3-5.7 (6.6) pn. This species differs from C. chrysantha by its erayish coloring and densely isidiate upper surface; it differs from C. norvegica in cclor as well as in the type of isidia. C. norvegica is described with isidia cylindrical to coralloidea- ramose developing from furrows or lobe margins; these are relatively fine, brown-tipped isidia. The isidia of C. scholanderia are coarse, robust, tipped with black, simple to bluntly bifurcate, densely growing over the thallus, not from furrows and less so on the margins of lobes. Named after Dr. Peter F. Scholander, who first brought it to my attention, in appreciation of his many collections from the Brooks Range. A ubiquitous species along the Brooks Range, around Anaktuvuk Pass growing on rocks, over mosses and other lichens, along talus slopes up to 3,000 feet (154, 323, 330, 341, 390, 406). Type, Lake Schrader, July 20, 1948, P. F. Scholander and W. Flagg. 6. Alectoria irvingii Llano, sp. nov. Thallus subcaespitosus, depressus, subrigidus; rami 8 (—10) em longi, dichotome divisi, axilibus late-angularibus, ad apices attenuati, subfibrillosi, fibrillis ad axes rectos vel recurvos rectangulariter dispositis, ad bases robusti, 1-2 mm lati, torti, cortice interdum rimoso et aperto, in hemi- cychis volventes, intertexti, sulcati, interdum foveolati, demum cylindricales vel angulares, subcompressi vel ad locum ramorum plani, deinde cylindricales, nitidi, olivaceo-brunnei vel in partibus umbratis pallidiores, vel atro-brunnei, ramis vetustioribus et basibus subnigrescentibus; apothecia, spermogonia, soredia, et pseudo- cyphellae carentes. Thallus subcaespitose, depressed, subrigid, branches 8(10) cm long, dichotomously branched, with wide-angling axils, apically attenuate, sub- fibrillose, with fibrils at right angles to main straight or recurved axis, at base robust, 1-2 mm wide, twisted with cortex occasionally split and gaping, winding in half-circle loops, inter- tangled, furrowed, with occasional depressions, becoming cylindrical or angular, subcompressed or plane at point of branching, and then cylindri- eal, shining, olive-brown (or pale brown in shaded portions), dark brown, older branches and base somewhat blackened; apothecia and spermogonia absent, subsection Sulcatae. Anaktuvuk Pass, over exposed gravel and thin soil with P. birulae, C. scholanderti, S. globosus, P. omphalodes, growing in mats 15-20 em wide, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 6 on upper slopes (4,000 feet) of quartzite moun- tain. This species looks somewhat like A. niti- dula but more robust. Named after Dr. Lawrence Irving, first director of Arctic Research Labor- atories, Point Barrow, Alaska, through whose encouragement Alaskan lichen studies were made possible. 7. Usnea scholanderii Llano, sp. nov. Thallus rectus aut subpendulus, ca. 4-6 em altus aut flocci-formis (1-38 em) et flaccidus, stramineo- vel pallide viridis, ad basim leniter pallide fuscescens, subconstrictus, dense et ir- regulariter, dein subsympodialiter ramosus; rami primarii usque ad 0.5-1 (—2) mm crassi, teretes,. creberrimi, sat attenuatim subfibrillosi, cortice non rimoso, plerumque ad _ basim_papillati, papillis minutissimis, ad ramos tenuiores rariori- bus, ad apices subpapillati vel glabri, valde sorediati; soredia primum parva, fariosa, mani- ciformiter unita, dein soraia magna (1-2 mm. lata) numerosa, globosa alba vel albo-flava. fibrillulis multis radiantibus praedita efforman- tia; apothecia et spermogonia non visa; medulla. K—, cortex K-—, soralia K + ferrugineo- brunnea. Thallus erect to somewhat pendulous, 4-6 em long, somewhat flaccid, tuft-like (1-8 em high), straw- to yellowish-green, base somewhat stained rusty-brown, somewhat constricted, densely irregularly branched, cylindrical, becoming sub- sympodial, apically attenuate, subfibrillose, cortex usually papillate at base, subpapillate to smooth apically, not cracked, strongly sorediate, at first small, farmose, uniting to maniciform type, then forming numerous, large (1-2 mm wide), globose soralia, white- to white-yellow, with many radiating fibrils; apothecia and sper- mogonia not seen; medulla K—, cortex K—, soralia K + rusty-brown. On rocks, with P. sulcata, common, Lake Peters (ca. Lake Schrader) leg. P. F. Scholander, July 1948. Not to be confused with U. soredifera, U. glabatra, U. vainioi, or others listed by Motyka under stirps U. sorediiferae. Usneaceae are ap- parently scarce on the North Slope. In accordance with the Rules of Inter- national Nomenclature, the following new names are proposed: 1. Cetraria magnussonii Llano, nom. nov. Cetraria arctica H. Magn., in Svensk Tidskr. 30: 251. 1936, is a later homonym of Cetraria arctica (Hook.) Tuck. Magnusson’s species is JUNE 1951 described from material collected in the Yenisei region of Siberia and is quite distinct from the Tuckerman species which is now referred to the genus Dactylina Nyl. 2. Evernia perfragilis Llano, nom. nov. Alectoria arctica Elenk. & Sav. Acta Horti Petrop. 32: 73. pl. 1, fig. 1-3. 1912. Evernia arctica (Klenk. & Sav.) Lynge in Lich. Nov. Zemlya 209. 1928. The type material and subsequent collections from Novaya Zemlya, as well as Alaska, are all sterile. The author concurs with Lynge and Du Rietz®? in believing that this species is, mor- phologically, more closely allied to the genus Evernia. However, the specific epithet is a later homonym of Hvernia arctica (Hook.) Tuck., i.e., Dactylina arctica (Hook.) Tuck. The distribution of lichen species in Fenno Seandia, in the Arctic islands north of Europe, and on the east and west coasts of southern Greenland are better known than those of Siberia, Alaska, and the Canadian Arctic Archipelago. Even so, the work of Scandinavians on occasional collections from the Canadian Archipelago and similarly of the Russians from rare Siberian collections has given some hints of the probable distribution of lichen species throughout the cireumpolar area. Northern Alaska has long represented a vacuum in our understanding of even the commoner species, and has contributed little to add to continuous distributional studies of lichens. For this reason, collections from Arctic Alaska invariably contain new distributions, mainly northern extensions of species. The following anomalous distributions are of unusual interest since they would indicate a geographical pattern of Siberian species extending into North America. Parmelia birulae Elenk., described from material collected in Novaya Zemlya, is a common element of the north slope of the Brooks Range. Material described to the author by N. Hale from his Baffinland col- lections of 1950 would indicate that this species extends throughout this range, and possibly to northern Greenland. An equally ubiquitous species is Cetraria chrysantha Tuck. with a similar extension. Cetraria si- birica H. Magn., first described from the Yenisei Region,’ Siberia, was collected at 3 Du Rierz, G. E., Ark. Bot. 20(11). 1926. LLANO: LICHEN FLORA OF ALASKA 199 Umiat, although it was not seen in the Brooks Range proper. A close relative, C. magnussoni, also from the Yenisei, should be looked for in Arctic Alaska. EHvernia per- fragilis, reported only from Novaya Zemlya, is represented in Alaska from two collec- tions at Anaktuvuk Pass. Ramalina alm- quist Vain., first described from St. Law- rence Island, later reported by Degelius from Hulten’s Aleutian collections, is a common species on the North Slope. This suggests that it may be noted inland or on the Si- berian coast. A further example of this type of distribu- tion and also of disrupted range is Umbili- caria carolimiana Tuck. Originally described from Grandfather Mountain, N. C., it is now known to exist on Mount Mitchell and Roan Mountain, N. C. Later, it was reported from Japan, and then from the Amur Dis- trict, Siberia. In a recent publication by the author,‘ it is reported a common element of the lichen flora on conglomerate, sandstone, and quartzite throughout the north slope of the Brooks Range. Its eastern North Ameri- can terminus is recognized as a classical re- lict plant area; its eastern Asiatic terminus represents a weakly, if at all, glaciated area, The Alaskan finds are from a similarly poor ornonglaciated region from Kiana (collections of L. J. Palmer) and the Seward Peninsula east along the north slope of the mountain ranges to Lake Schrader. The intervening absence of the species from northern Alaska to North Carolina would appear to have been the direct result of the last exten- sive glaciation. The absence of records from localities in North Carolina north along the Appalachians to about the southernmost ex- tension of the ice sheet, about Jatitude 40°N., does not remove the possibility that it may yet be found to have a more general dis- tribution in eastern United States. It may possibly be reported from areas between Alaska and North Carolina but the exami- nation of hundreds of specimens of Umbili- cariaceae from these areas would appear to exclude this assumption. 4A monograph of the family Umbilicartaceae tn the Western Hemisphere, 281 pp., 30 maps, IS pl., and additional figures. Office of Naval Research, Department of the Navy, October 1950. Copies may be requested from the Department of Botany, Smithsonian Institution, Washington 25, D.C. 200 Dr. Evans will report more fully upon the Cladoniaceae. However, three new records include Cl. metacorallijera Asahina, Cl. go- necha (Ach.) Asahina, and Cl. pseudomaci- lenta Asahina. Among the Physciaceae collected, the fol- lowing species were aJl noted from the North Slope: P. aipolia (Ehrh.) Hampe, P. tenella (Seop.) Bitt., P. czliata (Hoffm.) DR., and P. teretiuscula (Ach.) Lynge. Scholander in 1948 collected two species of Lobaria at Bethel on the Kuskokwim River, L. scrobiculata (Scop.) Gartner and JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 6 L. hallii (Tuck.) Zahlbr. These are new but expected distributions on the northwest coast of Alaska. However, he also collected the first species at Lake Peters and the sec- ond species at Lake Chandler about 30 miles from Anaktuvuk Pass. The distribution of L. halla is most interesting, for since it was first described by Tuckerman from material sent him by the Rev. Hall from Oregon, it has also been recorded in rare instances from southernmost Greenland and northern Scandinavia. BOTANY.—New or critical Euphorbiaceae from eastern Asia. HStan Kena, De- partment of Botany, National Taiwan University, Taiwan, China. (Com- municated by Egbert H. Walker.) This paper consists of descriptions of some new species and varieties and a new genus from eastern Asia, as well as critical notes and new records, reductions, and combina- tions. The types of the forms herein de- scribed are all preserved in the herbarium of the National Taiwan University, Taiwan, China. Specimens designated “FRI” belong to the Taiwan Forestry Research Institute. Phyllanthus Linn. 1. Phyllanthus indicus (Delz.) Muell. Arg. in Linnaea 32: 52. 1863; Merr., Enum. Phili- pine FI. Pl. 2: 392. 1923; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed., 355. f. 311. 1936. Glochidion longipedicellatum Yamamoto in Journ. Soc. Trop. Agr. 5: 178. 1933; S. Suzuki in Masamune, Short Fl. Formosa 121. 1936. (New synonym.) Taiwan: Lutung, Taipei, Yoshimude 27128 (FRI); Shinrin-chun, Kaoshiung, S. Sasaki 27137 (type of G. longipedicellatum), November 1927. Glochidion Forster 1. Glochidion fortunei Hance var. longistylum, var. Nov. A typo speciei stylo longiore, 4-5 mm longo, differt. Leaves elliptic-ovate, the apex caudate-acute, apiculate, the base cuneate or acute, 3-5 cm long, 2-38 em wide. Capsules 8-10 diameter, 5-6-celled; persistent calyx about 5 mm in diameter; calyx-lobes oblong, acute; style-column 3-4.5 mm long, thickened and mm in 5-6-lobed at the apex; pedicels 5-6 mm long. TatwaNn: Chisan, Kaoshiung, Yamamoto & Mori 760, August 14, 1936. A variety characterized by the much longer styles. 2. Glochidion fortunei Hance var. megacarpum, var. nov. A typo speciei capsula majore, 12-14 mm diametro, differt. Leaves rounded-ovate, 2-5.5 cm long, 1.5— 2.5 cm wide, the apex rounded or obtuse, mucro- nate, the base cuneate, acute. Capsules 12-14 mm in diameter, 5-6 mm long; persistent calyx 4—5 mm in diameter; pedicels 3-5 mm long, rather stout. Taiwan: Kaoshiung-wan, Kaoshiung, Kudo & Suzuki 96. April 8, 1929. A variety characterized by the much larger capsules, about 5-6 mm in length and 12-14 mm in diameter. Agyneia Linn. 1. Agyneia taiwaniana, sp. nov. Agyneia bacciformis A. Juss. misapplied by Hayata, Icon. Pl. Formosa 9: 95. 1920; Suzuki in Masamune, Short Fl. Formosa 118. 1936. Herba prostrata, glabra; rami et ramuli compresso-angulati. Folia parva, alternata, el- liptica vel oblongo-elliptica vel lanceolata, 1-2 em longa, 0.4-1 em lata, apice obtusa vel acuta et mucronata, basi obtusa vel acuta; costae secundariae subdistinctae; petioli vix 1 mm longi. Flores # 1.5 mm _ diametro, sepalis JUNE 1951 oblongo-ovatis 0.8-1 mm longis apice albo-mem- branaceis cincti, glanduloso-striolati; stamina 3, filamentis omnino in columnam connatis; pedicelli 1.5 mm longi. Flores 9 4.5-4.5 mm lati, sepalis oblongo-lanceolatis, 2 mm longis, acu- minatis; ovarium cylindrico-obconicum, 1-1.2 mm longum, 1 mm latum, apice latum, obscure depressum; styli 3, liberi, divergentes, bifidi. Capsula subglobosa vel ovoidea, 4-4.5 mm longa, 3-4 mm lata. Taiwan, abundant on the west coast of the south-central part of the island, near Chiayi, Tainan, and Hengchun. TarwaNn: Peimen-chiian, Tidi-liu, Tainan, K. Mori 110 (type), December 26, 1940; Anpin, Tainan, Soma 14420 (FRI); Peimen, Chi-gou, Tainan, K. Mori 530; Chiayi, Tainan, H. Keng 1875; Hengchun, H. Keng 322. A species formerly identified by Hayata as A. bacciformis, which is a species widely dis- tributed over southern China (?), Java, Ceylon, India, and Maritius. No authentic Indian specimens have been examined, but when com- pared with the descriptions of A. bacciformis by Hooker (FI. Brit. Ind. 5: 285. 1890) and Pax and Hoffman (in Engler, Pflanzenr. 81: 213. 1922) and with the illustrations by Wight (Ieon. Orien. pl. 1992. 1852) and Pax and Hoffman (l.c. 213. f.18), this new species appears to differ chiefly in the cylindrico-obconical ovary and the smaller fruits. The ovary of A. bacciformis is broadly ovoid and the fruit is about 6 mm long and 5 mm wide. The sizes of the floral parts of both sexes also do not agree in these two species. 2. Agyneia goniocladus (Merr. & Chun), comb. nov. Phyllanthus goniocladus Merr. & Chun in Sunyatsenia 2: 260. f. 51, 1935; Tanaka & Odashima in Journ. Soc. Trop. Agr. 372.1938; Masamune, Fl. Kainan. 169. 1943. Hainan: Tung-koo-shan, H. Fung 20418 (paratype of P. goniocladus); Masamune & Fukuyama 4, November, 1940. In this species the male sepals are thick, with white margins, and the styles are small on the excavate top of the ovary. These are critical characters of Agyneta, rather than of Phyl- lanthus. This species can also be separated from the Formosan A. taiwaniana in the subcylindrical ovary and the much shorter filament columns. The Agyneia of southern China, as cited by Pax KENG: NEW OR CRITICAL EUPHORBIACEAE 201 and Hoffman from Kwangtung and Hongkong (I. c. 214), is very probably referable to this species. Liodendron, gen. nov. Arbores vel frutices. Folia alterna, crenulato- serrulata vel integerrima, membranacea vel coriacea, tenuiter pennivenia et reticulato- venosa. Flores axillares, dioici, apetali, disco nullo, o racemosi vel spicati, brevissime pedi- cellati; @ longius pedicellati, solitarii. Fl. @: calyx tenuis, 4-6-partita, segmentis inequalibus, imbricatis; stamina 2, filamentis compressis; antherae globoso-ellipsoideae, erectae, extrosae, loculis distinctis, parallelis, longitudinaliter de- hiscentibus; ovarii rudimentum O. Fl. ¢@: calyx tenuis, 5-partita, segmentis augustis; ovarium oblongo-ovoideum, 3-lcculare; ovula in loculis gemina; styli longiusculi, in ramos ubique carnosos papillosos expansi. Drupa oblongo-ovoidea, endocarpio duro, fere osseo, abortu 1-locularia, 1-sperma. Semina oblongo- ovoidea; testa crustacea, albumen carnosum; embryo rectus, cotyledonibus latis, planis. Type species: Liodendron matsumurae (Koid- zumi), comb. nov., infra. This new genus is very near Putranjiva, from which it differs in the male flowers being in axillary racemes and in the definitely 2 stamens, while in Putranjiva, the male flowers are solitary or in axillary clusters, never in racemes or in spikes, and the number of stamens is 2-4. The arrangement of flowers in spikes or racemes, especially in the staminate plants, is an important character in the classification of the Euphorbiaceae. Bentham, for instance, in his treatment of the Australian Euphoribiaceae, divides this family into 5 tribes, tribe 3 (Anti- desmeae) differing from tribe 4 (Phyllantheae) merely in the “flowers small, in catkin-like spikes or in racemes”’ in one, and the “flowers in axillary clusters or solitary” in the other (cf. Bentham, Fl. Austral. 6: 42. 1875). Again, Pax and Hoffmann, in their monograph of the Euphoribiaceae, divide the tribe Phyl- lantheae into 22 subtribes, the first subtribe (Antidesminae) being distinguished from the other 21 subtribes (Putranjiva is contained in the second subtribe Glochidiinae) only in the character of the inflorescence being spicate, racemose or paniculate (cf. Pax & Hotfman in Engler & Prantl, Pflanzenfam. Ed. 2, 19c: 31. 19381). The systematic position of this new genus is an 202 interesting one, as it agrees with the Antidesminae of Pax in the male flowers being in spikelike racemes, yet it differs from it in the total absence of disks or glands in flowers of both sexes. Formerly the genus Putranjwa contained four species and was considered as occupying a dis- continuous area (cf. Pax & Hoffmann in 1. ec. 19c: 59. 1931). Putranjiva roxburghit Wallich is found in India, P. zeylanica Muell. Arg. in Ceylon, P. matsumurae Koidz. in the Liukiu Islands, and P. integerrima Koidz. in the Bonin Islands. In the present treatment the latter two species are transferred to Liodendron, as L. matsumurae (Koidz.) and L. wntegerriomum (Koidz.), respectively. In addition there is the Formosan species L. formosanwm. These species show that Putranjiva and Liodendron occupy two separate natural phytogeographic — regions, namely, Putranjiva in India and Ceylon and Liodendron in the Bonin and Liukiu Islands and in Formosa. The establishment of this new genus confirms the phytogeographical relationship be- tween Formosa-Liukiu and the Bonin Islands. The genus is named in honor of Dr. Hui-Lin Li, of the National Taiwan University, in ap- preciation of his extensive contributions to our knowledge of the flora of eastern Asia. 1. Liodendron matsumurae (Koidzumi), comb. nov, Putranjiva roxburghii Wallich, misapplied by Matsumura in Bot. Mag. Tokyo 12: 61. 1898; Hayata in Journ. Coll. Sci. Univ. Tokyo 20(8): 25. pl. 2H. 1901. Putranjiva matsumurae Koidzumi in Bot. Mag. Mag. Tokyo 33: 116. 1919, not Suzuki in Sylvia 4(3): 129. 1930, in Masamune, Short Fl. Formosa 122. 1936. A species known only from the Liukiu Islands. 8. Suzuki reports the presence of it in Formosa. Two of his cited specimens were examined, one, Taroko, Ariko-banti, Matsuda 1184, is a fruiting specimen of Hleocarpus decipiens Hemsley; the other, Kwasyoto, Kudo & Mori 1784, is nothing more than a sterile specimen of Lioden- dron formosanum. Liuxiu Isuanps: Herb. No. 22377 (fruiting fragment presented by the herbarium of Tokyo Imp. Univ., collector and date unknown); Amami-Osima, Tashiro 27737. 2. Liodendron integerrimum (Koidzumi), comb. nov. Putranjiva integerrima Koidzumi in Bot. Mag. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 41, No. 6 Tokyo 33: 117. 1919; Nakai in Bull. Bio- geogr. Soc. Japan 1: 259. 1930. A species known only from the Bonin Islands. 3. Liodendron formosanum (Kanehira & Sasaki), comb. nov. Putranjiva formosana Kaneh. & Sasaki in Sasaki, Cat. Gov. Herb. Formosa 312. 1930, nomen; Simada in Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Formosa 24: 83. 1934; Suzuki in Masamune, Short Fl. Formosa 122. 1936. Drypetes formosana (Kaneh. & Sasaki) Kane- hira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed., 336. f. 929. 1936. Putranjwa roxburghit Wallich, misapphed by Hayata, 1. ce. 25. 1904, as to Formosan plants. Putranjiva matsumurae Koidzumi misapplied by Suzuki in Sylvia 4(2): 129. 1933 in Masamune, Short Fl. Formos. 122. 1936, as to Formosan plants. Small tree, the branches slender, terete, glabrous, the branchlets suleate, obscurely pubes- cent. Leaves elliptic to oblong-ovate, 5-8 cm long, 3-5 cm wide, the apex acuminate, the base obliquely acute, membranaceous at first, later coriaceous, the margins entire to crenulate-serru- late; petioles 7 mm long. Male flowers spic- ate-racemose, axillary, 6-8 cm long, velutinous; bracts 2-3-flowered. Female flowers in bud el- liptical, shortly pedicellate, 1 mm long; sepals 4-6, unequal, hispid, imbricate; stamens 2; ma- ture female flowers not seen. Drupe ovoid-ellipsoid, 10-13 mm long, 7-8 mm across, appressed white-pubescent, 1-locular, 1-seeded. A species known only from Formosa. TatwaNn: Sinchashek, Sinchu, Kanehira & Sasaki 27130 (syntype of Putranjwa formosana Kaneh. & Sasaki); Sasaki 7292, September 21, 1927; Chukong, Sinchu, Sasaki 7291, January 1927; Komo, Sinchu, Kudo & Sasaki 140 (type of @ inflorescence), April 9, 1929. The following specimens are sterile, the size of the leaves being larger than the normal forms, and they are probably taken from the lower branches or basal sprouts: Sizangan, Taipei, Nonaka & Kudo 2391; Kizan, Taipei, Masa- mune & Suzuki 2393; Hoshautau, Kudo & Mort 1784; Botel Tobago, Hosokawa 3186. Kanehira and Sasaki first proposed this species as Putranjiva formosana. Six years later Kanehira transferred it into Drypetes formosana, but such characters as the two stamens in the male flower, the 1-celled, 1-seeded fruit, and the male JUNE 1951 flowers being in spikelike racemes readily separate it from Drypetes. In the latter, the stamens are 2-4, the fruits are 2-4-celled, 2- seeded, and the male flowers are clustered and axillary. This species is clearly related to Liodendron matsumurae, yet it may be readily separated by the larger leaves and smaller fruits. The latter species has elliptic-oblong leaves, 4-6 cm long, 2-3.5 em wide, and ovoid fruits, 1.5-2 cm long, 0.8-1.3 em wide, and is confined to the Liukiu Islands. Drypetes Vahl. 1. Drypetes falcata (Merr.) Pax in Engler, Pflanzenr. 81 (VI.147.XV): 250. 1922. Cyclostemon falcatus Merr. in Phillippine Journ. Sci. 3: 415. 1908; Enum. Philippine FI. Pl. 2: 406. 1923. Drypetes yamadai Kanehira & Sasaki in Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Formosa 21: 145. 1931, nomen seminud.; Kanehira, Formos. Trees, rev. ed., 339. f. 293. 1936; Suzuki in Masamune, Short Fl. Formosa 119. 1936. (New synomym.) Taiwan; Hengchun Peninsula, in thickets and forests along the seashore. Tatwan: Kuraru, Yamada 14573 (syntype of D. yamadai, FRI); Konishi 14574 (FRI); Matuda 112; Olungbi, Hibino & Suzuki 12586, 12702; Kimiya 14575 (FRI); Kudo & Suzuki 15815; H. Keng 1394. There is not sufficient difference between D. yamadai and D. falcata to treat them as distinct species. Kanehira states (in Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Formosa 21: 145. 1931) that the former is “very near Cyclostemon falcata Merr., but differs in having glabrous fruits.’”’ However, after ex- amining the syntype and a fruiting specimen from the type locality, Matuda 112, I find that the fruit is appressed-pubescent, rather than glabrous. In Merrill’s original description, it is stated: “Fructus axillares, solitarii, pedicellis 5-7 mm longis.” In Formosan plants the fruits are solitary or rarely 3-4-clustered and the fruit-stalks are usually 1 em long, sometimes up to 1.5 cm long. D. falcata in the Philippines is known only from Camiguin, a small island of the Babuyan group, situated between Taiwan and Luzon. Daphniphyllum Blume 1. Daphniphyllum crispifolium, sp. nov. Folia elliptica vel oblongo-elliptica, 8-10.5 KENG: NEW OR CRITICAL EUPHORBIACEAE 203 em longa, 2.5-4 em lata, apice obtusa, apiculata, basi obtusa vel acuta, spura nitida, subtus papillosa, subglauca, margine valde crispa. Racemi fructiferi 7-8 em longi. Fructus oblongo- ellipsoideus, 7-8 mm longus, 5-6 mm _ latus, rugosus, stigmatibus valde circinatis, pedicellis gracilibus 1-1.5 cm longis. Tatwan: Nichigetzutan, Taichung, Kudo & Sasaki 15336a, 15336b (type), September 19, 1929. This species is near D. oldhamii Rosenth., differing in the strongly cripsed leaf-margins, the longer and more slender fruiting inflorescences and the smaller fruits. 2. Daphniphyllum reticulatum, sp. nov. Folia tenuiter coriacea, obovato-elliptica vel elliptica, 8-9 cm longa, 3-3.5 cm lata, apice cuspidato-obtusa, basi acuta, supra nitida, sub- tus papillosa, nervis lateralibus untrinsecus 10-20, angulo circiter 60° ortis, rete venularum subtus insigniter prominulo, nervis venisque supra impressis vel prominulis, subtus pro- minentibus. Racemi fructiferi 6 cm_ longi. Fructus ellipsoideo-ovideus, circiter 8 mm longus et 5 mm latus, basi et apice rotundatus, apice stigmatiferus, revolutus, pubescens; pedicellis 4—5 mm longis. Tarwan: Taroko, Hualien, S. Suzuki 9880 (type), December 30, 1931; Hengchun, Mount Hiirasan, HE. Matuda 919; Kuskus, Kudo & Suzuki 15947. A species characterized by the finely reticulate veinlets very prominent on the lower surface of the leaves and by the very short fruiting stalks. 3. Daphniphyllum formosanum, sp. nov. Frutex, ramulis subgracilibus. Folia coriacea, oblonga vel oblongo-elliptica, 4-7 em longa, 2-2.5 em lata, apice acuta, apiculata, basi late cuneata, supra nitida, subtus papillosa, costa plana, subtus prominente elevata, nervis later- alibus untrinsecus 12-15, margine subintegra, revoluta vel crispa, petiolis 1.2-2 em _ longis, supra leviter canaliculatis. Racemi fructiferi 4-5 em. longi, graciles. Fructus ovideus, 7-9 mm longus, apice rotundatus, basi acutus, stigmatibus circinatis, persistentibus, calyce basi adnata, 5-dentata, lobis lneari-lanceolatis, crenatis, saepius persistentibus. Tatwan: Hikizangan, Taipei, 7. Suzukt 4814, July 26, 1932; Gukutu, Hualien, BP. Matuda 1155 (Type), August 5, 1918; Nai- buntoge, Kaoshiung, Kudo & Suzuki 1615, April 10, 1980. 204 This is the only known species in Formosa with persistent calyx in the fruiting stage. All its characters agree well with that of D. marchadii Croizat and Metcalf Gm Lingnan Sci. Journ. 20: 117. 1942) or D. salicifolium Chien (in Contr. Biol. Lab. Sci. Soc. China 8: 242. 1933) of southwestern China, except the much smaller fruits and the longer, circinate stigmas. No authentic specimens of the latter species have been seen. This new species may also be readily separated from D. oldhamii by its smaller leaves with prominent apicules at the apex and by the persistent calyx at the base of the fruit. Mercurialis Linn. 1. Mercurialis leiocarpa Sieb. & Suce. var. transmorrisonensis (Hayata), comb. nov. Mercurialis levocarpa Sieb. & Zuec., mis- applied by Hayata in Journ. Coll. Sci. Univ. Tokyo 25: 194. 1908. 5. Suzuki in Sylvia 4: 148. 1933, in Masamune, Short Fl. Formosa 122. 1936. Mercurialis transmorrisonensis Hayata, Icon. Pl. Formosa 5: 199. f. 75. 1915. Taiwan; throughout the island, more common in the central mountain regions. Tatwan: Mount Kanin, Fukuyama 34; Mount Taiping, S. Suzuki 383, 3839; Mount Tentana, Simada 14992 (FRI); Mount Arisan, Sizmada 796; Mount Dabusan, Sasaki 2144, Matuda 1500; Ariko-banti, Matuda 1199; Pintung, Hosokawa 5408; Taroko, S. Suzuki 9684; Mount Nokosan, Fukuyama 4682. The typical form of the species is distributed in Indo-China, Siam, southern China (Yunnan to Hupeh), and Japan. Hayata describes this variety as an independent species and states that it is “‘very near M. leiocarpa Sieb. & Zucc., but differs from it in having less verrucose ovary with the much spreading stigma and the less vetru- cose or nearly smooth capsules; the distinction of this plant from M. leiocarpa is even more clear in the living specimen.” The actual dis- tinctive characters of this Formosan plant are probably in the stamens. The stamens in the typical form are 16-20 (cf. Muell. Arg.) or 14-20 (cf. Pax), whereas in this variety there are only about 10. Furthermore, in this variety the filaments are usually 2-3-connate at the base, showing the tendency to monadelphy. Alchornea Swartz 1. Alchornea trewioides (Benth.) Muell. Arg. var. formosae (Muell. Arg.) Pax in Engler, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 6 Pflanzenr. 63: (IV. 147. VIII) 248. 1914. Alchornea kelungensis Hayata, Icon. Pl. For- mosa 9: 103. 1920; Kanehira, Formosa Trees, rev. ed., 329. 1936; S. Suzuki in Masamune, Short Fl. Formosa 118. 1936. (New synonym.) Tatwan: Taipei, Sasaki Matuda 1144, Simada 1145. This variety differs from the typical form of the species from southern China chiefly in the shorter (6-8 mm long) and usually 2-3-lobulate styles. In the typical form, the styles are longer (8-12 mm) and entire at the apex. 14423; Keelung, 2. Alchornea trewioides (Benth.) Muell. Arg. var. loochoensis (Hayata), comb. nov. Alchornea loochoensis Hayata, Icon. Pl. For- mosa 9: 103. 1920. Alchornea trewioides Muell. Arg., misapplied by Hayata in Journ. Coll. Sci. Univ. Tokyo 23: 47. pl. 4A. 1904. Livuxiu Isuanps: Guo-teu, Kanestro 195; Yu-na-guo-tau, Simada 14424 (FRI). This variety can be distinguished from var. formosae by the following characters in the female flowers: the lanceolate-acuminate sepals, the globose ovary and the much shorter styles (8 mm long); whereas in the Formosan plants, the sepals are triangular-acuminate, the ovary is depressed globose, and the styles are somewhat longer (6-8 mm long). Acalypha Linn. 1. Acalypha (Sect. Capillipes hontauyuensis, sp. nov. Frutex; ramuli sericeo-tomentosi, censperse sulcati. Folia tenuiter chartacea, longe petiolata, cordato-orbiculata, 12-18 em longa, 12-16 cm lata, apice cordato-acuminata, basi oblique truncato-cordata, margine crenato-serrata, 5- nervia, utrinque subglabra et ad costam nervos- que dense hirsuta, petiolis 8-20 em _ longis, gracilibus, sericeo-tomentosis. Spicae fl. o@& ignotae. Spicae fl. @ gracillimae, axillares, solitariae, 6-10 cm longae, pedunculis 0.5-2 cm longis, hirsutis, floribus remotis spicatis, sessilibus, lanceolatis, 3-4 mm longis, hirsutis. Fl. 2: bractea unica minuta, triangularis, 1 mm longa, extus densissime hirsuta; sepala 3, ovata, 1 mm longa, intus concava, subglabra, extus hirsuta; styli 2.5-3 mm longi, graciles, glabri. Tatwan: Hontauyu (Botel Tobago), Hoso- kawa SO47 (type), July 4, 1935; Hosokawa 8165, July 16, 1935. Muell. Arg.) JUNE 1951 This species and A. swrenbiensis Yamamoto are characterized by the sessile female flowers with very minute and nonaccrescent bracts, while in the other species of the genus the female flowers when sessile are generally provided with large and showy bracts, usually enclosing the mature capsules. Euphorbia Linn. 1. Euphorbia (Sect. Tithymalus Boiss.) shou- anensis, Sp. nov. Caules villosi, crassi, erecti. Folia sessilia, membranacea, uninervia, lineari-oblonga vel lineari-lanceolata, 2-5 em longa, 8-14 mm lata, apice acuta, basi attenuata, subtus pubescentia. Umbellaria primaria ovato-lanceolata, 2.5-5 em longa. Triplo cymae terminales. Involucrum centrale campanulatum, stipitatum, 3.5 mm longum, 2.5-3 mm diametro, extus glabrum, intus hirtellum, lobis 4 (5 2), ovato-oblongis, ciliatis, giandulis 4, transversis, reinformibus, stipitatis. Flores #@ 12, bracteolis spathuli- formibus, insertis, margine apicem versus densis- sime pilosis. Flores @ pedicellis elongatis, ex- serti; ovarium ovoideo-globosum, 2 mm longum, trisulcatum, glandulis verrucosis compressis bre- vibus conicis obtusissimis obsitum, stylis 3, 2 mm longis, basi brevissime connatis, apice breviter bifidis, stigmatibus subincrassatis. In- volucrum sterile 2 mm longum, 1.5 mm dia- metro; ovarilum minutum. TatwaNn: Shashan, Shouan, Chiayi, Tainan, altitude 1,500 m, 7. Suzuki 20910 type), Novem- ber 10, 1940. This species is distinctly characterized by the triplo-cymose inflorescence and the involucral structures. In primary cymes, the umbellate _ leaves are 5, ovate-lanceolate, 2-5 cm long, 1.5 em wide and with acute apex; the umbellate branches are 5, the central one being much shorter. In secondary cymes, the umbellate leaves are 3, ovate-rounded, 1.5 em long, 1 em wide and with very abtuse apex; the umbellate branches are 3. In tertiary cymes, the umbellate leaves are 3, subrounded, 8 mm long and 7 mm wide. The central fertile involucre is single, naked, campanulate, stalked, 3.5-4 mm long KENG: NEW OR CRITICAL EUPHORBIACEAE 205 and 2.5-3 mm in diameter. Lateral sterile in- volucres are 3, turbinate, 2 mm Jong, 1.5 mm in diameter and short-stalked, each concealed in 2 clasping floral leaves (or bracts) opposite to the tertiary umbellate leaves. In the central fertile involucre, the lobes are 4 (5 2?) ovate-oblong, the glands are 4, trans- versely reniform, and substalked. Male flowers are about 12. The ovary is ovoid-globose, ex- serted, and the styles are nearly free except at the very base. In lateral sterile involucres, the lobes and glands are not very distinct, the rudimentary flowers are numerous and_ the rudimentary ovary is included. 2. Euphorbia prostrata Ait., Hort. Kew. 2: 136. 1789; Bernard, Icon. Bogor. 4: 51. pl. 816. 1916; Merr., Enum. Philippine Fl. Pl. 2: 463. 1928. Huphorbia liukiuensis Hayata, misapplied by Sasaki, Cat. Gov. Herb. Formosa 305. 1930; Suzuki in Sylvia 4: 155. 1933, in Masamune, Short, Fl. Formosa 119. 1935. Chamaesyce liukiuensis (Hayata) Hara in Journ. Jap. Bot. 14: 356. 1938. Taiwan, distributed nearly throughout the whole island, pantropical. Tatwan: Northern part, S. Suzuki 12414, 12257, Masamune & Suzuki 1742, Mori 8379, Simada 1738, 1736, 3211, Sasaki 1741; southern part, Simada 14678 (FRI), Mori 101, Hosokawa 1939, 1941; eastern part, S. Suzuki 1277, 1667, 10607; Pescadores, Kudo & Mori 3070, Cheng 5071. This is a new record for the flora of Formosa. This species is similar in general appearance to EL. thymifolia, but it may be distinguished from the latter by the longer stalks of the involucre, the more prominent persistent columnella of the cocci, the shorter stalks of the glands, and the less hirsute cocci. I have not seen the type of Hayata’s #. liukiuensis, a species of Liukiu. However, the four specimens deposited in the herbarium of the Taiwan Forestry Research Institute, i.e., Hira- tuka 14676, Soma 14677, Simada 14678, and Yasukawa 14679, all from Taiwan and de- termined by 8. Sasaki as doubtfully of this species, agree exactly with EF. prostrata. 206 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 6 ZOOLOGY .—New distributional records for two athecate hydroids, Ccrdylophora lacustris and Candelabrum sp., from the west coast of North America, with revi- sions of their nomenclature. Cappt Hann, Mills College, Oakland, and Univer- sity of California, Berkeley, and G. F. Gwiuuiam, University of California, Berkeley. (Communicated by F. M. Bayer.) I. CorDYLOPHORA In August 1950 an unidentified hydroid was found in a collection at the University of California at Berkeley. The label bore no collection date or collector’s name, but it did report the locality from which the ani- mal was taken as Antioch, Calif., which is located on the San Joaquin River 5 miles upstream from its Junction with the Sacra- mento River.The hydroid was subsequently identified as the widely distributed fresh- and brackish-water form, Cordylophora lacustris Allman. On August 26, 1950, the writers found this hydroid growing on pieces of old manila rope suspended from a floating dock in the San Joaquin River at Antioch. The ropes were literally covered with colonies of vary- ing sizes. A sample of the river water taken at this time showed a chlorinity of 1.02 parts per thousand (5.4 per cent of sea water). What appears to be the first recognizable description of this hydroid was that of All- man (1844), who found it in the docks of the Grand Canal, Dublin, Ireland. Roch (1924) ina paper dealing with many aspects of the biology of this hydroid reviewed its distribution, listing the followimg general localities in which Cordylophora occurred: Germany, Holland, Denmark, Sweden, Fin- land, Esthonia, Courland (now part of Lithuania), Russia, France, Belgium, Eng- land, Ireland, United States, Brazil, Egypt, Australia, Tasmania, New Zealand, China. In North America, Leidy (1870) first de- tected this hydroid at Newport, R. I., and later in the vicinity of Philadelphia, Pa. Since that time C. lacustris has been found in several localities in North America, some of them a considerable distance inland. Fraser (1944, p. 35) reports the American distribution as: ‘“Newport, R. I. (Leidy); St. Andrews, Gaspé, Seven Islands (Staf- ford); New England (Kingsley); Woods Hole (Nutting); several ponds near Woods Hole, Marthas Vineyard (Hargitt); Mira- michi estuary, Frenier Beach, La. (Fraser); Gatun locks, Panama canal.” In addition, Ward and Whipple (1945) list the follow- ing: Illinois River at Havana, Ill.; Miss- issipp1 River at Granite City and at Hast St. Louis, Ill.; Arkansas River at Little Rock, Ark.; and the Red River at Shreve- port, La. The present report is the first record of the existence of this organism on the west coast of North America. This was not en- tirely unexpected, as Fraser (1946, p. 101) stated: ‘It has not yet been reported from the eastern Pacific, but it has extended along the whole length of the North American Atlantic, and as it has entered the Panama canal as far as the Gatun locks, it may show up in the Pacific before long.” Several varieties of C. lacustris have been described. Schulze (1921) mentions the forms albicola, transiens, and whiteleggev. Fyfe (1929) described a new subspecies (otagoensis) from New Zealand. Earlier Leidy (1870) gave to what he recognized as a small variety of C. lacustris the name C. americana. Briggs (1931) points out that C’. lacustris is extremely variable in growth form and that growth form may depend upon salinity. It appears that all the named subspecies and forms of C. lacustris are nothing more than variations inhabit. The present writers have found such ex- tensive variation in the specimens studied that the recognition of named varieties seems to have no taxonomic significance. There is some doubt as to whether the proper specific name of Cordylophora is lacustris or caspia. Pallas (1771) described a hydroid from the Caspian Sea as Tubularia caspia. This is said by some to be identical with C. lacustris Allman (Roch, 1924; Cordero, 1941). Other writers feel that Pallas’ description is too vague to permit an exact diagnosis (Briggs, 1931; Bedot as quoted by Briggs) and prefer to retain C. lacustris. The present writers have studied the Pallas description and find it so generalized that it might as well refer to many other JUNE 1951 hydroids as to C. lacustris. Further, there seem to be no valid records of this hydroid from the Caspian Sea since the time of Pallas. Because of this, coupled with the fact that C. lacustris Allman has had such wide usage, the present writers choose to retain Allman’s name until it can be clearly shown that Tubularia caspia Pallas is iden- tical with Cordylophora lacustris Allman. Another nomenclatural problem is brought up by Finlay (1928). Finlay declares that the family Clavidae to which Cordylophora belongs is an invalid name due to preoc- cupation by the gastropod genus Clava Martyn (1784) over the hydroid genus Clava Gmelin (1791). Finlay suggests that the name Clavidae be replaced by the name Cordylophoridae, Cordylophora being the next available generic name. This solution changes the type genus of the family, an action for which there is no valid taxonomic reason, and, further, Finlay fails to reassign the species of Clava (the hydroids) to any other genus. In considering this matter it has been pointed out to us by Dr. H. A. Rehder, curator of mollusks, U.S. National Museum, that the system used by Martyn in his “Universal Conchologist” is non- Linnaean, and that Martyn’s names are therefore not available and do not preoc- cupy. The change suggested by Finlay (op. cit.) was therefore unnecessary, and the hydroid genus Clava Gmelin (1791) stands as the valid type of the family Clavidae. Material from the University of California collection (U.S.N.M. no. 49727), the San Pablo Reservoir, and fresh material from Antioch (U.S.N.M. no. 49726) has been carefully examined and compared and no characters separating these from C. lacustris have been found. Family CLavipaE Genus Cordylophora Allman, 1844 Cordylophora lacustris Allman Colony: Growth form variable. Sometimes a main axis with hydranths given off alternately, sometimes more diffuse and irregular, or colony branched, lacking a main axis. Hydrocaulus aris- ing from creeping hydrorhizae. Perisare well de- veloped. Longest hydrocaulus observed approxi- mately 6 cm. Trophosome: Hydranth clavate, pedicellate, HAND AND GWILLIAM: TWO ATHECATE HYDROIDS 207 with up to 30 scattered, filiform tentacles. Peri- sare at bases of pedicels often annulated, but occasionally smooth or “corrugated” on one side only. Perisare extending only to base of hydranth. Tentacles quite extensile, mouth terminal. Nemat- ocysts; desmonemes (4.0-6.0 by 3.0-4.0u) and microbasic euryteles (7.5-11.0 by 4.0-4.5y). Gonosome: Dioecious. Sporosacs sessile or borne on short pedicels which may or may not be annulated at their bases as in trophosome. Gonophores enclosed in a thin perisarc, and arise from hydrocauli or pedicels. In the female the eggs are extruded from the generative tissue into a jelly-like mass. The generative tissue re- gresses as the eggs are extruded, finally leaving a variable number (approximately 1-8) of recog- nizable ova. At this site the ova develop into planulae and are then released. In general, the female gonophores tend to be more spherical than the male. In life female gonophores pinkish, male whitish. Habitat and distribution: On sticks, ropes, float- ing docks, ete. in fresh or brackish water. In California, C. lacustris occurs at Antioch, and has been reported from Lake Merced, San Fran- cisco (Dr. R. C. Miller, California Acad. Sci., personal communication) and from the San Pablo reservoir system, E] Cerrito, California (Dr. H. Kirby, Jr., Univ. California, Berkeley, personal communication). Also, according to Dr. T. Kin- caid, Univ. Washington, Seattle (in litt.) this species occurs in the Puget Sound area. It has evidently been in California for a number of years. The old University of California specimen mentioned above is thought to be 20 to 40 years old. II. CANDELABRUM On May 6, 1950, three specimens of Candelabrum sp. (= Myriothela sp.) were collected from a pholad hole on the under- surface of a rock at approximately the zero foot tide level (mean lower low water) at Pigeon Point, San Mateo County, Calif. The authors do not feel that this is sufficient material to warrant specific identification, especially since none of the polyps bear mature gonophores. Several attempts were made to obtain more material, but thorough searching has failed to reveal the presence of further specimens. It may be that it is a stray in the intertidal zone and exists in numbers subtidally. Some indication of this may be gained from the fact that several 208 of the known species of Candelabrum are subtidal forms. Of the generic identification, we feel that there is no doubt. As nearly as the authors have been able to determine there are now nine valid species of this genus. The first was described as Lucernaria phrygia by Fabricius (1780). This was later redescribed by Sars (1850), apparently unaware of Fabricius’ descrip- tion, as Myriothela arctica. De Blainville (1830; reprinted, 1834) realized that Fabri- clus’ animal was not a Lucernaria and pro- posed the name Candelabrum for it. He in- dicated at the same time that it was related to the Sipunculids. Allman (1872, p. 381) states: ‘‘De Blainville, seeing that Fabri- cius’s animal had no relation with Lucer- naria, constituted for it, in 1834, his genus Candelabrum, and as this name has priority over Myriothela, it 1s accepted by Agassiz as the legitimate name of the genus.” All- man goes on to explain that De Blainville did not recognize its true affinities, while Sars did. He chooses to retain Mvyriothela Sars in spite of the law of priority, an action that the present authors do not deem justi- fied. The replacement of the name M/yriothela by Candelabrum necessitates the renaming of this monogeneric family, which we now designate as the Candelabridae (= Myrio- thelidae Allman). In addition tc Candelabrum phrygium, the other known species and the localities from which they were taken are: C. mitrum (off coast of Norway near Bergen, deep water, Bonnevie, 1898); C. minutum (near Troms6, Nerway, intertidal?, Bonnevie, 1898); C. verrucosum (locality not given, Bonnevie, 1898); C. gigantewm (Greenland Sea, deep water, Bonnevie, 1898); C. austro- georgiae (cff Cumberland Bay, South Geor- gia Island, deep water, Jéaderholm, 1904); C. cocksii (Falmouth, England, intertidal, Cocks, 1849, as a nomen nudum; Cocks, 1853, name validated); C. harrisoni (New South Wales, Australia, intertidal, Briggs, 1928); C. australe (New South Wales, Australia, intertidal, Briggs, 1928). Fraser (1946, p. 168) reports that only one species is known from North America (C. pyrygium) and states concerning it: “The only American location so far reported is off Grand Manan Island, at. the mouth of the bay of Fundy, but its range extends JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 6 eastward by way of Greenland and Iceland to Great Britain, Norway, Nova Zembla, and the Siberian Polar Sea.” Family CANDELABRIDAE, nom. nov. Genus Candelabrum de Blainville, 1830 Candelabrum, sp. ind. U.S. N. M. no. 49725. Hydranth: Not branched, solitary, naked and arising from a creeping hydrorhiza or possibly a disc. Hydrorhizae invested with perisare. Ex- clusive of hydrorhizae, polyp divisible into two zones; a distal tentacle-bearing zone and a proxi- mal tentacle-free blastostylar zone. The tentacle- bearing zone composes five-sixths or more of the polyp length and bears approximately 500 tenta- cles in the adult; cylindrical, approximately the same diameter throughout. Tentacles densely packed, short, capitate and not arranged in any discernible pattern. Mouth terminal. Blastostylar zone swollen, of a slightly greater diameter than the tentacle bearing zone. Sometimes separated from tentacle-bearing zone by a constriction; at the proximal end tapering sharply to hydrorhiza. Structures referred to by Allman (1875) as “clas- pers” not present on specimens examined. Blasto- styles giving rise to more than one gonophore. Largest specimen (preserved) 2.5 em long by 0.15 em. in diameter (including the tentacle .) Of the known species of Candelabrum, the species described above most closely resembles Candelabrum harrisoni Briggs. In fact there are no obvious differences, but in view of the unusual distribution which Briggs’ species would then have, plus the paucity of material available, it does not seem wise to make the two conspecific at this time. LITERATURE CITED AuumMAN, G. J. Synopsis of the genera and species of zoophytes inhabiting the fresh waters of Ire- land. Ann. Nat. Hist. (1) 13: 328-333. 1844. . A monograph of gymnoblastic or tubularvan hydroids 2: 381-383. 1872. . On the structure and development of Myrio- thela. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London 165 (2): 549-572. 1875. Buainviuie£, H. M.D. ve. Dictionnaire des sciences naturelles 60: 284. 1830. . Manuel d’actinologie. Paris, 1834. BonnEvIE, K. Zur Systematik der Hydroiden. Zeit- schr. fiir Wiss. Zool. 63: 465-493. 1898. Briaes, EH. A. Studies in Australian athecate hy- droids. Rec. Austral. Mus. Sydney 16: 305- 315. 1928. JUNE 1951 . Notes on Australian athecate hydroids. Rec. Austral. Mus. Sydney. 18: 279-282. 1931. Cocks, W. P. Contributions to the fauna of Fal- mouth. Ann. Rep. Roy. Cornwall Polytech. Soc. 17: 38-102. 1849. . Contributions to the fauna of Falmouth, 1853. Ann. Rep. Roy. Cornwall Polytech Soc. 21: 28-36. 1853. CorpErRo, E. H. Observaciones sobre algunas es- pectes sudamericanas de género Hydra. II. Hydra y Cordylophora en el Uruguay. Ann. Acad. Brasil. Sci. 13: 173-184 figs. 1-26. 1941. Fasricius, O. Fauna Groenlandica. 1780. Fintay, H. J. Notes on New Zealand and Aus- tralian gymnoblastic hydroids. Austral. Zool. 5: 257-261. 1928. Fraser, C. M. Hydroids of the Atlantic coast of North America. Toronto, 1944. . Distribution and relationship in American hydroids. Toronto, 1946. Fyre, M. A new fresh water hydroid from Otago (New Zealand). Trans. Proc. New Zealand Inst. 59 (4): 813-823. 1929. Gein, J. F. In Linnaeus, Systema naturae, ed. 13, 4(@)¢ silsil, Wahl. HOFFMAN: DIPLOPOD FAMILY CAMPODESMIDAE 209 JApernHoim, I. Mitteilungen tiber einige von der Schwedischen Antarctic-Expedition 1901-1903 eingesammelte Hydroiden. Arch. Zool. Exp. et Gen. Notes et Revue, ser. 4, 3 (1): i-xiv. 1904. Letpy, J. [The Proceedings, Oct. 18, 1870.] Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 22: 113. 1870. Martyn, T. Universal conchologisi 1: fig. 12. 1784. Pauuas, P. 8. Reise durch verschiedene Provinzen des Russischen Reichs 1(5): 1-504, 24 pls. St. Petersburg, 1771. Rocu, F. Experimentelle Untersuchungen an Cordylophora caspia (Pallas) etc. Zeitschr. Morph. und Okol. Tiere. 2: 350-426; 667-670. 1924. Sars, M. Beretning om en i Sommeren 1849 fore- tagen Zoologisk reise 1 Lofoten og Finmarken. Nyt. Mag. Naturvid. Christiana 6: 121-211. 1850. Scuuuze, P. Die Hydroiden der Umgebung Berlins mit besonderer Bervicksichtigung der Binnen- landformen von Cordylophora. Biol. Zentralbl. 41: 211-237. 1921. Warp, H. B., and Wutreein, G. C. Fresh water biology. New York, 1945. ZOOLOGY .—The diplopod family Campodesmidae (Polydesmida). RicHarp L. HorrMan, Clifton Forge, Va. (Communicated by E. A. Chapin.) The name Campodesmidae was proposed in 1895 by O. F. Cook. Appearing in a key to the tropical African families of polydesmoid millipeds, the original description was rather inadequate. Subsequently, in several publica- tions cited below, additional information (of a fragmentary nature) was given about the family and its two genera, but later workers have never been able to derive a very satis- factory idea of the nature of the group. It is a matter of some interest that campodesmids have never been encountered by other workers, who have managed to come across most of the other West African genera described by Cook. Since the great majority of Cook’s Liberian species have never been adequately described and have been mostly ignored by later workers, it appears necessary to re- describe them. Through the unfailing co- operation of Dr. EK. A. Chapin, I have been able to study the Cook collection now in the U.S. National Museum. The present paper, the first of a planned series, is concerned with the campodesmids and with the system- atic position of the family. Family CampopEsMIDAE Cook Campodesmidae Cook, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 18: 82. 1895; Amer. Nat. 30: 414. 1896. Diagnosis.—Male gonopods large, prominent, protruding from a large oval sternal aperture. Coxae subcylindrical, attached loosely to each other, largely concealed within the aperture. Pre- femur small, with a large unbranched laminate prefemoral process. No distinction between femur and tibiotarsus, the latter distally elongate, slen- der, forming nearly a complete circle. Gnathochilarium and mandibles typical of the usual polydesmoid form. Antennae of moderate heaviness, with a few scattered hairs. Four sensory cones, concealed within the seventh article. Head finely granular, with a well-defined verti- gical groove. A prominent ovoid longitudinal swelling immediately under each antennal socket. Clypeal area much swollen, raised above level of frons, glabrous. Collum rather small, not concealing the head and much exceeded in width by the keels of the second segment. Keels of midbody segments well developed, wide as body cavity but narrow and widely 210 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 6 Fias. 1-5.—1, Campodesmus carbonarius, dorsal view of head and first three segments; 2, same, antenna, much enlarged; 3, ventral view of last two segments; 4, left male gonopod, mesial aspect; 5, Tropidesmus jugosus, dorsal view of head and first three segments. Figures drawn to different scales. JUNE 1951 separated from each other. Keels strongly de- pressed causing tergites to be highly arched. Repugnatorial pores small, not on special stalks, occurring only on segments 5 and 7. Anal segment large, not concealed by nine- teenth, with three large tubercules on each side, distally bent slightly downward. Preanal scale small, trapezoid, with two elon- gate setiferous tubercules. Anal valves nearly plane, each with a median tubercule. Sternites rather broad and smooth, without special modifications. Legs of moderate length and size, without spines, lobes, or tarsal pads. Pleurites without carinae or large tubercules. Range-—Known only from Liberia. Genera included—Two, which may be sepa- rated as follows: 1. Tergites each with a cluster of three elongate upright tubercules on each side of middle. Campodesmus Tergites each bearing two transverse rows, each of six short longitudinal carinae. Tropidesmus Genus Campodesmus Cook Campodesmus Cook, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 18: 82. 1895. Generotype—C. carbonartus Cook, by mono- typy. Diagnosis.—With the characters of the family, particularly distinguished by the ornamentation of the tergites. Collum with a row of 10 small tubercules on the anterior margin; a second row of eight larger tubercules across the middle. On the caudal half are two still larger tubercules with a small one laterad to each. Tergites of midbody segments with a cluster of three tubercules on each side of middle, these largest at midbody and diminishing towards the ends. Each keel bears three rounded tubercules near the outer end and two small ones at the base. Campodesmus carbonarius Cook Type specimen.—U. 8. Nat. Mus., adult male, collected at Mount Coffee, western Liberia, by O. F. Cook. Diagnosis.—With the characters of the genus. Dorsal color dark brown, underparts whitish. Length, from 28 to 38 mm. Male gonopods of the form represented in Fig. 4. HOFFMAN: DIPLOPOD FAMILY CAMPODESMIDAE 211 Genus Tropidesmus Cook Tropidesmus Cook, Amer. Nat. 30: 414. 1896. Generotype.—T. jugosus Cook, by monotypy. Diagnosis.—Differing from Campodesmus chiefly in the nature of the ornamentation and in size and shape of the collum, as illustrated. Also, the second segment is not as wide and is somewhat more bent anteriorly. Collum with six tubercules along the front margin; eight in the second row (of which those at the ends are rounded, the others elongate); and six tubercules in the third row, of which the middle two are much enlarged. Second segment with keels pro- duced forward, partially embracing and sub- tending the collum; dorsally with four short middorsal carinae and smaller indistinct tuber- cules laterad. On following segments the dorsal carinae increase to 12, in two transverse rows of six each. A single large swelling at the end of each keel. Tropidesmus jugosus Cook Type specimen.—U. 8. Nat. Mus. (adult male?)! collected at Mount Coffee, Liberia, by O. F. Cook. Diagnosis.—W ith the characters of the genus. Size and color about the same as in Campodesmus. The male gonopods may be expected to present additional specific and generic characters. SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF THE CAMPODESMIDAE The campodesmids seem not to be closely related to any other of the African poly- desmoid millipeds. The family clearly falls into the group for which Brolemann in 1916 proposed the name “Leptodesmina.” This ensemble is characterized by the fact that the coxae of the male gonopods are only shghtly attached together, are not attached to the sternal aperture, and are generally con- cealed within the body when at rest. In Attems’ most recent key to the poly- desmoid families (1937), Campodesmus runs down to the family Leptodesmidae (properly Chelodesmidae, jide Hoffman, 1950). The 1The original description mentions an adult male. The vial of material sent to me was labeled “Type”’ but contained only immature specimens. Presumably the mature specimen was taken out and is for the present misplaced in the body of the Museum collection. 212 configuration of the gonopod certainly vindicates this allocation, as the large pre- femoral process occurs in nearly all of the South American chelodesmid genera. In other characters, however, no particular relationship can be observed. Rather some similarity is seen with the Platyrrhacidae, a family occurring in the East Indies and in Middle America but unrepresented in the Ethiopian region. The chief platyrrhacid features obtain in the broadened anal seg- ment, subantennal swellings, and general appearance of the sternites. The shape of the preanal scale and the dorsal sculpture are very reminiscent of certain genera (notably Orodesmus) of the Oxydesmidae, a small family occurring in Central and West Africa. Considering the various developments of campodesmids which are duplicated in other families in different parts of the world, and the absence of any specialization such as pronounced sexual dimorphism, modifica- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 6 tion of the legs of males, etc., I am for the present inclined to regard the Campodes- midae as representative of a generalized ancestral chelodesmoid stock, a supposition not unsupported by the present areal distribution of the families concerned. LITERATURE CITED ArrreMs, Cart Grar. Fam. Strongylosomidae. In Das Tierreich, Lief. 68: 1-300. 1937. BroLeMANN, Henri W. Essai d’une classification des Polydesmiens. Ann. Soc. Ent. France 84: 523-608. 1916. Coox, Orator F. Hast African Diplopoda of the suborder Polydesmoidea, collected by Mr. William Astor Chanler. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 18: 1-111. 1895. . A new diplopod fauna in Liberia. Amer. Nat. 30: 413-420. 1896. . Summary of new Liberian Polydesmoidea. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia for 1896: 257-267. Horrman, Ricwarp L. The status of the milliped Chelodesmus marxi Cook, and of the family name Chelodesmidae. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash- ington 63: 185-188. 1950. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences IPROSIGIAD ind 0 BE GRO BROOD R Oo Re NatHan R. Smito, Plant Industry Station Herestdent=electemm nian tae oa ee WALTER RaMBERG, National Bureau of Standards SCORARTEE Boe Beh Gite BEE F. M. Dreranporr, National Bureau of Standards Rx CGSUTET MCE arn eke oe Howarp 8. Rappueye, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey MRA GIOE S oeeete bh AAS HOE es Blea coe eae Joun A. Stevenson, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Harautp A. Reaper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidenis Representing the Affiliated Societies: philosophical Society, of Washingtoma 2. 0.....04s0. 42520. 0- Epwarp U. Connon Anthropological Society of Washington......................... Wa.po R. WEDEL Biolovicalysocietysolmwashingtonesnaecaccee cede cce ed ee eee ce eee. @hemicallSociety of Washingtone..-2255.....050555.58.50 eae JosrepH J. FAnEY Entomological Society of Washington........................ FREDERICK W. Poos NatronalaG@eorraphic societya-paeeeree sesh oe een. ALEXANDER WETMORE Geological Society of Washington....................-.+++s+s+s Leason H. Apams Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... ColumbiayHistoricallSocietyanjsssceeeasocce oe deceiasenen GILBERT GROSVENOR Botanicalusocietysomwashingtoneen eran nee ene: E. H. WaLKER Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wiuuiam A. Dayton Washington Society of Engineers........................-005- Cuirrorp A. Betts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers Francis M. DEFANDORF Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHaRp 8. D1Lu Helminthological Society of Washington.........................- L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Angus M. GriFriIn Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers.... Henry W. HEMPLE Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......... HeErBert G. DorsEy District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers.... Elected Members of the Board of Managers: pov errUataygel O52 aa ees Mees eRe oc 4-2 Dah OE ee W. F. Fosnaa, C. L. Gazin Ito deste; OER Ae ans een ene ae eae eee C. F. W. Mussreseck*, A. T. McPHERson Iho diem nay- 1G aise aon one cameo cine cmap Sara E. Branaam, Mitton Harris* (Soar Of MACHOVER: 6cocsc5n00000004000055 All the above officers plus the Senior Editor BOOnGOjmACILOTSNONG Assocvate FGUOnS. 0.0.00 sen sess ees. ode. .e [See front cover] Executive Committee....N. R. Smiru (chairman), WALTER Rampera, H. S. Rappers, J. A. Stevenson, F. M. DrEFANDORF Committee on Membership............... L. A. SPINDLER (chairman), M. 8. ANDERSON, MERRILL BERNARD, R. HE. BLACKWELDER, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. HANSEN, D. B. Jones, Dorotuy Nickerson, F. A. SmitH, Hetnz Specut, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings......... Marcaret Pittman (chairman), NorMAN BEKKEDAHL, W. R. CuHapuine, D. J. Davis, F. B. Scunerz, H. W. WELLS Committee on Monographs: To January 1952.....................J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), Paut H. OEHSER PROM MAW Arye O53 eee eu ces Sema ee eam ine, aarti R. W. Imuay, P. W. OMAN IND) AIEWORDE TEN LOG. Us vies be IRSA Yoon ec RISI be le tee oe S. F. Buaxe, F. C. Kracex Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (GrorcE P. WALTON, general chairman): For the Biological Sciences............ G. H. Coons (chairman), J. EK. FaBerr, JR., Myrna F. Jonzs, F. W. Poos, J. R. SwaALLeN For the Engineering Sciences......... R. S. Dru (chairman), ARsHAM AMIRIKIAN, J. W. McBurney, FranK Neumann, A. H. Scorr For the Physical Sciences............. G. P. Watton (chairman), F. S. BRACKETT, G. E. Hom, C. J. Humpureys, J. H. McMILien For Teaching of Science............ B. D. Van Evera (chairman), R. P. BARNEs, F. E. Fox, T. Koppanyi, M. H. Martin, A. T. McPHERSON Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research..................+.-: L. E. Yocum (chairman), M. X. Suniivan, H. L. WHitreMoRE Committee on Policy and Planning: MoanuanyalLO OZ werm a cee a rie cv tt: J. I. HorrmMan (chairman), M. A. Mason AS ORAM ayo 19 OO Rene es eee e Ee oyun aces octets tena W. A. Dayton, N. R. Smita Rogar aryl DOA ee ea ca ertee eks. cies oanahe SER H. B. Couuns, Jr., W. W. Rupey Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: Ite Uarorraiay NOE, iooconcascvooootdens M. A. Mason (chairman), A. T. McPHERSON PRO Varn anygel OOS) suse ee cenit etca eet neiay eens sic aysucvslonae A. H. Cuarx, F. L. MouLer ERopamurarygel D4, facies Haein cyan gs cectueudaoisversioes J. M. CaLpweE 1, W. L. Scamirr LC DRESCTULALIVENO NN OOUNCUNOT PAGE ALE Atm IS seers etereeieierc eictaereistiteieriitcttetcl: F, M. Serzter Committee of Auditors...... J. H. Martin (chairman), N. F. Braaren, W. J. YOUDEN Committee of Tellers...W.G. BROMBACHER (chairman), A. R. Mmrz, Lovuiss M. RussELL * Appointed; by Board to fill vacancy. CONTENTS ErHnNoLocy.—Was the California condor known to the Blackfoot Indians? CLAUDEVE. SCHABFFER: 0 .0o.c058 oo ae oe ee. eee PaLEONTOLOGY.—New Desmoinesian crinoids. HarreiLu L. STRIMPLE. PALEONTOLOGY.—Brachiopod homonyms. G. ARTHUR CooPER and HepEn Mi. Mutr-Woob. «$52.6 f.. ea 8% clus an. does er PALEONTOLOGY.—Substitution for the preoccupied name Hystricina. Merritu A. STAINBROOK Botany.—A contribution to the lichen flora of Alaska. GrorcGE A. Botany.—New or critical Euphorbiaceae from eastern Asia. Hstian KENG ZooLocy.—New distributional records for two athecate hydroids, Cordylo- phora lacustris and Candelabrum sp., from the west coast of North America, with revisions of their nomenclature. CaprT HANp and G. F. GwItLiam Zootoey.—The diplopod family Campodesmidae (Polydesmida). Ricu- ARD L. HorrmMan This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals Page 191 i. t~ r| >= for a square and the OV 2) : tab area of a rectangle becomes -—>= hexagonal OV 3 222 inches. The triangle with three sides is surely “simpler” than the square with four. Both the triangle and the hexagon, like the square can be fitted together to measure an area by the straightforward process of filling it with small tiles, each of unit area and counting the number thereof. One of these alternatives is not a mere whimsey. In the electric cable industry, the cross-sectional areas of wires are always expressed in terms of the circular inch or the circular mil, these units being defined as the areas of circles having diameters of 1 inch and 0.001 inch, respectively. To a workman in a wire factory the use of square inches seems obviously clumsy and unnatural, nor is he at all concerned by the fact that unit circular tiles can not be fitted together to fill and thus measure an area even if it is circular. I have stressed the arbitrariness of the choice of the square inch as opposed to the equally possible circular inch, not so much because of the industrial utility of the latter as because of the close analogy of this choice to the question of ‘rationalization’? which has wracked the electrical art with prolonged and sometimes violent discussion for 60 years. Evght electrical systems—The field of electromagnetism has suffered perhaps more than any other branch of science from a plethora of “‘simple, coherent, logical” systems of measurement, and I shall try to outline some of the reasons for this unhappy situation. In the early days the simplest way to define a unit electric charge seemed to be to specify that when placed unit distance away from an equal charge the force of mutual repulsion should be unity. In other words, it seemed simplest to let k. = 1 in the Coulomb force equation f= k.QQ'/?? (4) You will see that this process is exactly analogous to that of our imaginary as- tronomer who set up a derived unit of mass coherent with length and time. Starting from the unit charge thus defined, the whole system of centimeter-gram-second electro- static units has been built up by a process which welds the electrical units firmly to JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 41, No. 7 those of the older mechanical system, and which requires no introduction of any additional new fourth unit. It is unfortunately equally easy to write ee minnie ne (5) for two unit magnetic poles m and m’ and to choose k,, = 1. This gives (Gf 7 is in centimeters and F’ in dynes) the egs electro- magnetic system which is a perfectly good alternative system. Maxwell used both systems in his famous treatise. It can be deduced that if one sticks to either system alone, the relation kk, = c? holds. Here ¢ is the velocity of propagation of an electro- magnetic disturbance in empty space. This is experimentally found to be ¢ = 3.10!° em/sec 1.e., the velocity of lght. Other authors of theoretical treatises combine these two systems using electrostatic units for electrical quantities and electromagnetic units for magnetic quantities. This hybrid third system is called the ‘‘Gaussian Sys- tem” and its use requires that the parameter -c be inserted explicitly in Maxwell’s field equations at the proper places. Practical electricians, however, found it inconvenient to use units so small that it took 100,000,000 of them to equal the voltage of a voltaic cell and 1,000,000,000 of them to equal the resistance of a wire of reasonable dimensions. Under the wise guidance of Maxwell and his colleagues on a committee of the British Association for the Advancement of Science there was set up a fourth group of units called “practical”? in which the units were exact decimal multiples of the corresponding units of the egs electro- magnetic system. The electrical units of this group were given individual names— coulomb, volt, ampere, ohm, henry, farad— thus immortalizing the honored pioneers of electrical science. The experimental process by which the electrical resistance of a wire standard is determined in terms of length, mass and time is exceedingly difficult and laborious. Hence, it was only natural that our forefathers should set up ‘‘as a system of units repre- senting the above and sufficiently near to them” still a fifth system in which the unit of resistance was defined as the resistance of a column of mercury of specified dimensions JuLy, 1951 at a specified temperature and the unit of current was that which would deposit silver from a solution of silver nitrate at a specified rate. This fifth system was christened the “International System of Electrical Units” and had legal status from 1894 to 1947. As far back as 1908 it was recognized that the “International” units differed by small but significant amounts from the practical multiples of the cgs electromagnetic units. Experimental techniques for evaluating with adequate accuracy the “‘true”’ or “‘absolute”’ values to assign to standards of resistance or of electromotive force were gradually de- veloped; and effective January 1, 1948, the world shifted its basis back to the units of the absolute practical group. The ‘“‘Inter- national System”’ has therefore now been a dead issue for three years. ‘“May it rest in peace.” (6.) The six electrical units of the absolute practical group are simply and coherently related to each other and to the mechanical joule and watt, but the powers of 10 by which they are related to the cgs electro- magnetic system are arbitrary, so that the system as a whole is not coherent. As a result, an experimenter normally makes his measurements in practical units. Then he applies the proper factors to convert his results to units of the self-consistent cgs electromagnetic system. The insertion of these values in the theoretical equations enables him to predict future phenomena quantitatively. A reconversion back to the practical units then shows him what values to expect in his later verification measure- ments. By a happy coincidence there is a possi- bility of avoiding the necessity for these repeated conversions and for memorizing a plurality of numerical conversion factors. This was pointed out at the turn of the century by Giorgi (7). If one takes for the basic mechanical units the meter, the kilo- eram and the second, and if one assigns arbitrarily to the coefficient /,, in equation (5) the value 10’ instead of unity, it turns out that the practical absolute electrical units automatically show up as members of the resulting self-consistent system. This sixth system in our list is labelled the ‘‘Meter- kilogram-second-ampere”’ or ‘“‘Giorgi’’ sys- SILSBEE: MEASURE FOR MEASURE 223 tem. Most writers who use this system prefer to consider it as based on four independent fundamental quantities rather than .on the classical three. This is equivalent to con- sidering that the coefficient /,, 1s not a pure number but that it has dimensions. In terms of length, mass, time and electric current as fundamental quantities, the di- mensions of k,, turn out to be [J (? M! [| Thus in equation (5) the arbitrary assign- ment of a numerical value to k,, fixes the magnitude of the unit of m and hence of the ampere and other electrical units. On the other hand, the arbitrary choice of an electrical quantity, for instance current, as fundamental, fixes the dimensions of mag- netic pole strength and by way of equation (5) fixes the dimensions of k,,. The assignment to k,, of dimensions and a value other than unity has brought forcibly into the limelight a very disgraceful situa- tion which has existed for a long time in the field of magnetic units. The trouble shows up clearly in an equation, which can be found in almost any textbook more than fifteen years old, and which relates the magnetic induction, B, to the resultant magnetizing force, H, and the intensity of magnetization, J, at any point in a bar of iron, B=H + 4rJ (6) This equation may profitably be considered the definition of J. If k,, is dimensionless, B, H, and J all have the same dimensions, whether or not they are quantities of the same physical nature, and, if the magnitude of k» is unity, then numerical values are correctly indicated by equation (6) as written. However, if /,, has dimensions and is equal to 107 we must write either B LOSE Ard (7) or B= 107 @ + 47) (8) According to the former “intensity of magne- tization” is defined as a quantity having the same dimensions as magnetic induction. According to the latter “intensity of magne- tization” has the same dimensions as magnetizing force. There is nothing in the equations of the earlier literature which used k,, = 1 to indicate which concept the 224 writer preferred. In recent textbooks some authors use one and some the other meaning for the words “intensity of magnetization,” while still others dodge the issue. The same ambiguity exists in the related concepts of magnetic moment and magnetic pole strength. Because of the differences in current usage, national and international standardizing bodies hesitate to decide the issue and in the meantime the volume of ambiguous and conflicting literature grows apace! Still another question regarding electrical units which had been left unanswered for some 60 years is ‘‘to rationalize or not to rationalize’. The word “rationalize” is here used with a highly specialized meaning which perhaps can be best understood by an analogy with the case of the circular inch as a unit of area. In passing from length to area by choosing k = 1 in equation (2) for the case of a circular shaped unit area the simple equation (3) resulted for circular areas in general, and as a consequence of this, the factor 7 appeared in the formulas which involved rectangular shapes. Similarly the electric or magnetic field around a point charge or pole has a spherical symmetry. Hence, the setting of k. = 1 in equation (4) or of k, = 1 in equation (5) which relates to point charges and poles insures that a will not appear in the re- sulting equations for arrangements having spherical or circular symmetry such as those for the capacitance of a sphere of radius 7, C= & (9) or for the magnetizing force at a radius r from a long straight cylindrical conductor carrying a current J Jel = PAY AP (10) On the other hand, the factor 7 appears instead in many other formulas where it would not be expected, as in that for the capacitance between rectangular plates of area A and separation ¢ (11) or for the magnetizing force inside a long JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 7 solenoid of square cross section wound with n turns per unit length H = 4nnl (12) Heaviside pointed out that ‘‘the unnatural suppression of the 42 in the formulas of central force, where it has a right to be, drives it into the blood, there to multiply itself, and afterward break out all over the body of electromagnetic theory.” As a “yadical cure for this eruption of 47’s” he urged a shift to what he labelled a more “rational” set of units, and himself consis- tently used a ‘‘rationalized” system in which k Was set equal to 1/472. This system of units, the seventh in our list, has been used in a number of theoretical treatises and is usually designated the ‘‘Heaviside-Lorentz” sys- tem. Its units differ by various powers of the incommensurable factor ~/4z from those of the absolute practical system and for this reason have never come into general use. A related procedure applicable to the MKSA system and sometimes referred to as “sub-rationalization” or “total rationaliza- tion” involves writing equation (5) in the form i = alle é ) mn An \4r r where the quantity in the parentheses is the reciprocal of what is usually called the “permeability of space.’’ The resulting sys- tem of units, the eighth on our list, is designated the “‘rationalized MKSA” or the “rationalized Giorgi’ system. The Inter- national Electrotechnical © Commission, which in 1935 had voted its approval of the Giorgi system, took the further step in July 1950 of adopting this form of rationali- zation. Recent developments in the radio field have brought the practical engineer and laboratory worker into much closer contact with the theorist and pedagogue than ever before, to the great benefit of both. The rationalized MKSA system offers advantages to both, which I believe will suffice to bring it into very general use in the electrical field in the not very distant future. It can (13) Juny 1951 easily be extended to cover all branches of physical science. A name, ‘‘newton,’’ has been assigned to its unit of mechanical force, but I have seen no indication that it is displacing the entrenched cgs units in theoretical mechanics or those of the mechanical engineers’ units based on the kilogram force. CLASSIFICATION OF STANDARDS The various ways that have been or are currently in use for defining units of measure- ment fall naturally into a number of clas- ses. In early work, individual or personal standards were used such as Galileo’s pulse, with which he timed the pendulous swings of the chandelier in the cathedral of Pisa; Fahrenheit’s body temperature, which fixed the 100° point on his original temperature seale; the pieces of iron and brass wire used by Ohm; the foot; the pace; and, all too often even in current publications, a milli- meter deflection of an undefined galva- nometer of unspecified sensitivity. Following these, came particular artifacts such as bronze cubits, intended to embody the length of the king’s arm, and perhaps some dimensions incorporated in the Egyptian pyramids. The supreme examples of such artifacts are the standard prototype meter and kilogram, which now repose in the vaults at the International Bureau of Weights and Measures. To secure reproducibility, however, defi- nitions based on natural objects have frequently been used. Examples of such are the barley-corn, and at the other extreme, the earth-quadrant, which was originally used in the definition of the meter, and our present time standard, the rotation of the earth. In a slightly different category are definitions based on the physical or chemical properties of specific substances. In this class were the definition of the International Ohm as the resistance of a specified column of mercury and that of the International Ampere as the electric current which would produce electrochemical action at a specified rate. The fixing of the kilogram by the density of water and the setting up of a thermometric scale by the relative thermal expansion of mercury and glass and by the use of standard melting and boiling points SILSBEE: MEASURE FOR MEASURE 225 are other examples. The old definition of the curie as the unit of radioactivity also comes in this category, because it was the activity of a specified amount (1 gram) of a specified aggregation of substances. A still different category is the use of the properties of individual atoms as distinct from the properties of matter in bulk. Thus, the new curie and the rutherford, defined as the activity corresponding to 3.700 * 101° and 10° atomic disintegrations per second respectively are philosophically distinct from the old curie. In this atomic class are the use of the wave lengths of cadmium radiation or more recently of that from the mercury 198 isotope as standards of length, and the frequency of oscillation of the ammonia molecule in the “atomic clock”’ (8). EVOLUTION OF UNITS In all fields there have been in progress evolutionary shifts in the choice of units. The parallel developments of the electrical units and that of the temperature scale illustrate this. In both fields, the early workers used measuring schemes based on properties of matter such as thermal ex- pansion of mercury in glass on the one hand, and the electromotive force of particular voltaic cells on the other. Theoretical relations were then worked out and resulted in the Kelvin thermodynamic temperature scale and the egs electromagnetic and elec- trostatic unit systems of Maxwell. In each field, however, the need for higher precision than could be obtained in the experimental realization of the theoretical units forced the introduction of an auxiliary system based again on the properties of matter in bulk. These auxiliary systems, the ‘“‘International”’ electrical units and the ‘International Temperature Seale” formed the basis for all precise scientific measurements as well as for commercial operations, although the theo- retical unit systems continued to be recog- nized in parallel with them as being of an even higher echelon. The electrical art has finally reached a level where the theoretical system can be realized experimentally with an accuracy at least comparable with that attainable with the auxiliary system and has therefore sloughed off the latter. The tem- perature scale has not yet reached this 226 enviable position, but perhaps will do so in the not too distant future. The evolution of the units of length and mass have followed a somewhat different pattern. At the introduction of the metric system, the earlier arbitrary units embodied in artifacts were displaced by the units based theoretically on the earth-quadrant and the density of water. As in the other fields, the demand for ever increased ac- curacy forced the abandonment of the theoretical values for an auxiliary system which in this case consisted of two simple artifacts, the prototype standard meter bar and the prototype kilogram mass. There is now pending a shift of the unit of length to an atomic basis, the wave length of radiation from Heg!**, but it will probably be a long time before techniques for counting indi- vidual atoms can be developed to their logical climax of enabling the mass of the proton to be used as a practical standard. The measurement of time has shown a still different history. The habits of mankind are so closely geared to the astronomical perio- dicities that from earliest antiquity the unit of time has been based on the rotation of the earth. The recent development of “atomic’”’ clocks, the unit of which is based on some natural molecular frequency, such as that of ammonia, offers the first sig- nificant departure from this basis. However, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, NO. 7 it seems safe to predict that no matter how rapid and successful the evolution of a laboratory time system based on atomic units may be, and no matter what vagaries it may show to exist in the motion of the earth, there will always be, in common use, an astronomical time system based on the mean solar day. I hope that I have shown that the process of measurement is, after all, a very human activity; that in it may be found illustrations of the foibles as well as the wisdom of Homo sapiens; that units are unfortunately not fixed, immutable creations of nature, but merely human constructs; that there is a real progression in the evolution of systems’ of measurement; and that their present im- perfections should be a challenge to the scientists of the future. REFERENCES (1) Stpvens, 8. 8S. Science 103: 677. (2) THomson, W. Phil. Mag. 33: 313. 1848. (8) GrauquE, W. F. Nature 143: 623. 1939. (4) Stimson, H. F. Journ. Res. Nat. Bur. Stand- ards 42: 209. 1949. (5) WensEL, H. T. Journ. Res. Nat. Bur. Stand- ards 22: 376. 1939. (6) Stusper, F. B. Nat. Bur. Standards Cire. 1946. 475. 1949. (7) Gtora1, G. Trans. Int. Elec. Congr. St. Louis 1: 136. 1904. (8) Huntoon, R. D., and Fano, U. Nature 166: 167. 1950. MATHEMATICS.—A problem in geometric probability. JEROME CORNFIELD and Haroup W. CHauktry, National Cancer Institute. (Communicated by Richard K. Cook.) 1. INTRODUCTION We have recently published a description of a method for estimating volume-surface ratios for closed 3-dimensional figures of arbitrary shapes (/). The method involves throwing a line of fixed length, 7, at random im a space containing the figure. We count the number of times either of the two end points fall in the interior of the figure, and denote it by h for hits, and the number of times the line intersects the surface of the figure and denote it by c for cuts. The method depends upon the fact that ido) ee Gat) r Wey oS where V is volume and S is surface and FE stands for expected value. We note that (1.1) holds for reentrant as well as nonreentrant figures and is conse- quently more general than the nonpara- metric relationships of this type, such as Crofton’s (2), that have been previously established. This note is devoted to a proof of (1.1). 2. A DEFINITION OF A RANDOMLY THROWN LINE In what follows we assume that in throw- ing a line of length r at random (a) there is a uniform probability that one end point, P, will take on any position in the space and Juny 1951 (b) there is a uniform probability that the other end point, P!, will take any position on the surface of a sphere with center at P and radius r. This is an obvious generaliza- tion of the assumptions usually made in problems of geometric probability in two dimensions, e.g., in Buffon’s needle problem. We have presented evidence elsewhere (/) which indicates that this appears to provide a satisfactory description of the physical process of throwing a line at random. 3. THE EXPECTED VALUE OF THE NUMBER OF HITS We shall show 2Vn (3.1) ale J) = where X is the volume of the space in which the line segment falls and n is the number of throws. Because there are difficulties in visualizing the necessary three dimensional figure, we shall begin with the two dimen- sional problem. We start with a closed figure, Ff’, of area A in a square of side X1/?-2r (Fig. 1). The end point of the line segment, P, will occupy with uniform probability all positions in the square of side X'/?. Since the angle that the line segment makes with the X axis, 9, varies from 0 to z, the point, P!, will occupy all but some corner positions in the square of side X!/2 + 2r. If we consider fixed values of y and 6, the probability that the point P will fall inside the figure is f(y)/X"?, where f(y) is the width of the figure at ordinate y. (For values of y falling outside the figure f(y) = 0.) Similarly, the probability that for fixed values of y and @ the point P! will fall inside the figure is f(y, 6)/X1?. If we now let y vary from 0 to X12, but hold 6 fixed, we have xe Prob: (26h) = = || f(y) dy < 0 (3.2) eas Rolo. G2 ell) = =f f(y, @) dy. Each integral, obviously, is an expression for the area of the figure, A, and is conse- quently independent of @. In n throws, therefore, the expected number of hits by CORNFIELD AND CHALKLEY: PROBLEM IN GEOMETRIC PROBABILITY WAT Fie. 1 either the point P or the point P! is An/X. Since the expected value of a sum is the sum of the expected values, the expected number of hits counting both end points is 2An/X. The proof for three dimensions is iden- tical except that for the point P we must consider the probability that it is included in F for fixed values of z, the additional dimension, as well as y. Similarly for the point P! we must consider the probability that it is included in F for fixed values of ¢@, the angle with the ¢ axis, as well as 6. We then have il Exes Xe Prob. (Pef) = ml i f(z, y) dy dz XI Shp (3.3) oak 1 Xg XG Prob. (Per) == i | f (2, y, ¢, 0) dy dz XS, Sy where each integral is an expression for the volume of the figure, V, and is consequently independent of ¢@ and @. In that case the expected number of hits in n throws by either the point P or P! is Vn/X, while the expected number of hits by both is 2 Vn X. 4. THE EXPECTED VALUE OF THE NUMBER OF CUTS We may without loss of essential general- ity consider the surface of / as composed of m quadrilaterals of area Sy, Sy +--+ S, with (4.1) SSP ISS 228 If we denote the number of cuts on the 7» quadrilateral by c;, we have c= 2; E(c) = DEC) Furthermore, since a straight line and a quadrilateral can intersect at only one point, H(c;) is equal to the probability of intersection times the number of throws. (4.2) Fig. 2 If we consider the 2** quadrilateral, with surface area, S;, the probability that a random line of length r will intersect it is the probability that the end point P will fall inside the parallelepiped with vol- ume S,r cos 6 (Fig. 2). From the preceding section this probability is = Sir cos 6 for a fixed value of 6 and (4.3) =o r ie f (8) cos 6 dé for 6 varying from 0 to i according to the density function f(6) dé. We show in the next section that the assumptions of section 2 imply (4.4) (0) dd = — sin 6 dé. This is the probability that a random line will form the angle 6 with any other fixed line in the space. In that case JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 7 Prob. (P « parall.) gor fo cos 6 sin 6 dé 1 = ax "i (4.5) and E(e) — oh DSi Xan (4.6) rns Den Combining (4.6) and (8.1) we obtain (1.1). 5. THE PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION OF 0 We wish the probability that a random line, defined as in 2, will form angle 6 with a fixed line. We may take this fixed line as a radius of the sphere with center at P and radius r (Fig. 3). The probability that the line with end points P and P! will form an angle 6 with a radius of the sphere is the probability that the end point P! will fall in the circumferential belt of area 2rvV/r — y? ds where y/r = cos 6. Hence (5.1) Prob. (P’ € circum. belt) 2Qr JP = y? ds Qrr® : = f(0) do = Fie. 3 JuLy 1951 It is easy to show, however, that (6.2) a 2 Ese) o.4 SS = Py? . so that (5.3) f(0) do = — sin 6 dé. When y varies from 0 to r, 6 varies from CARR: EASTERN INDIAN PRACTICES 229 Tv 5 to 0. If we permit @ to vary in the reverse direction, i.e., 0 to us we may delete the minus sign. REFERENCES (1) CHaLKiey, H. W., CornrieLp, J., AND PARK, H. A method for estimating volume-surface ratios. Science 110: 295-297. 1949. (2) Crortron, W. Probability. Encycl. Brit., ed. 9. ETHNOLOGY .—Interesting animal foods, medicines, and omens of the eastern Indians, with comparisons to ancient European practices.1 Luoyp G. K. Carr, Hendrix College, Conway, Ark. (Communicated by W. N. Fenton.) At this time when attention is turned to- ward emergency foods and medicines, those little-known foods and medicines of the In- dian such as insects, turtles, frogs, sala- manders, fishing worms, and grubs may be considered. In time of great need one can make a fairly wholesome supplementary meal on these creatures, securing in turn a supply of minerals and possibly vitamins. Turning to the reptile lore of the North? we note that the Montagnais really have so little to do with snakes that the only use to which they are put is as a cure for rheu- matism, for which the skin of a snake is necessary. Dr. Speck tells us, ‘‘These people of the north do not fear snakes. They some- times put them inside their shirts and carry them about.” From Speck we get further impressions of reptile lore among these northern Indians. It is found that northern Algonkian herpe- tology teaches that sympathetic influences are active through things and ideas and names. He says: Hence in the practice of therapeutics, a snake- skin, according to Penobscot belief, becomes a cure = 1The author expresses great appreciation for the association he was able to enjoy with the late Dr. Frank G. Speck, professor of anthropology at the University of Pennsylvania, under whose guidance this study was begun, and for a grant received through Hendrix College from the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching, which enabled the author to bring to a conclusion a preliminary report on the ethnozo- ological phase of his studies. 2 Speck, FraNK G. Reptile lore of the northern Indians. Journ. Amer. Folklore 36: 273-280. 1923. for rheumatism when bound around the infected part. Such a skin must have been taken from a living snake. The idea is no doubt derived from the feeling in the native mind, that a creature with so pliable a frame is not only free from stiffness him- self, but that contact with him can cure stiffness in others. Similarly, a snake-skin, the Malechite say, worn around the head or hatband, will ward off enemies. A snake’s tongue taken from a living snake, dried and carried about, will both cure and prevent a toothache. Further south the Mohegan and the Iroquois believe that a toothache can be cured by gently biting the body of a living Green snake. Josselyn,’ writing from voyages made in America, 1638 and 1663, speaks of the em- ployment of reptiles and batrachians by the Massachusetts Indians. In speaking of the ‘tortous” (land turtle) he states, ‘“They are good for the Ptisick, Consumption and some say the Morbus Gallicus (venereal disease).”’ Josselyn records that the ‘“‘Green-turtle is the best for food, and that it is affirmed that the feeding upon this turtle for a twelve- month forbearing all other kinds of food will cure absolutely Consumptions, and the Great Pox (syphilis); They are very delicate food, and their eggs are very wholesome and restorative.” Also “‘the ashes of a Sea-turtle mixed with oyl or Bearsgrease causeth hair to grow; the shell of a land-Turtle burnt and the ashes dissolved in wine and oyl healeth sore legs: the flesh burnt and the ashes with wine and oyl healeth sore legs: the ashes of the burnt shell and the whites of eggs com- 3 JosspLYN, JouHn. New Englands rarities dis- covered. London, 1672 230 pounded together healeth chaps in women’s nipples and the head pulverized with it pre- vents the falling of hair, and will heal the Hemorrhoids, first washing of them with white wine, and then strewing on the pow- der.” With respect to the rattlesnake he orders this usage. ‘“They have Leafs of Fat in their Bellies, which is excellent to anoint frozen Limbs, and for Aches and Bruises wondrous soveraign. Their Hearts, swallowed fresh, is a good Antidote against their Venome, and their Liver (the Gall taken out) bruised and applied to thier Bitings is a present remedy.” Also their skins were said to be of value, “Their skins likewise worn as a garter is an excellent remedie against the cramp.” Gladys Tantaquidgeon,* in her study of the Delaware formerly of the Pennsylvania area, makes interesting comments with re- spect to the use of snake oil by the Delaware. “Rattlesnake oil is valuable in treating stiff joints. It is very powerful and should be used sparingly. Only a few drops on the finger tips, and applied to the affected parts. The skin may be bound on the wrists and ankles to strengthen them.’”’ Among the Wampanoag of Cape Cod, however it is believed that if the oil is used alone, ‘it will unjoint you.” Likewise, the eastern Cherokee Indians have a snake oil remedy. In the tradition of the Powhatan Tribes of Virginia some odd animal medicines and foods stand out. Mott Byrd, a Rappahan- nock Indian in his seventies, told that a snake shell ground up was highly prized as it causes boils to come to a head. Snakes play another important part in the medicines of the Rappahannock Indians. Speck® relates that the blacksnake skin wrong side out is worn as a belt around the waist to relieve backache or rheumatism. This is somewhat similar to the Massachusetts Indians use of the rattlesnake skin for cramps. Turtles have been used by the Indian tribes of Virginia from early times. Gabriel Archer, writing in 1607, speaks of an Indian of the town of Arahatec on the James River below the falls, ““He made ready a land turtle 4 TANTAQUIDGEON, Guapys. A study of Dela- ware Indian medicine practice and folk beliefs: 67. Pennsylvania Historical Commission, 1942. 5 Loe. cit. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 7 which he ate.’”’ Today the Pamunkey use the terrapin and turtle as incidental foods. The terrapins (Chrysemys spp.) are dredged in wintertime in mud bottoms of rivers and creeks with net and iron drag in 5-8 feet of water. The shells are cut apart and the flesh is made into soup. If eaten out of season it is said that they will cause eye swelling and a tickling in the throat as they go down. From the time of Josselyn the Virginia Indians have used their Indian word ““Terra- pin” for the designation of the turtle that occupies rivers, ‘“The Turtle that lives in Lakes and is called in Virginia a Terrapin.”’ The snapping turtle (Chelydra serpentina serpentina) is taken by metal hooks baited with salt eel or catfish, tied to arrowwood (Viburnum sp.) stick, the bait being allowed to rest on the bottom. The use of cane stalks is employed by the Chickahominy. They are caught during January and may be cooked, boiled or roasted in their own shells as a “turtle shell dish.” The terrapin (Terrapene carolina carolina) called highland skillpot by the Virginia Indians is found in fields, woods or highlands, occasionally also by rivers from April through the fall months. It is rarely eaten, but sometimes it may be roasted; the legs only may be eaten or made into soup. The flesh is said to smell strongly. Terrapin eggs (various species of Chrys- emys) are considered a wholesome delicacy among the Pamunkey and are eaten as a part of a meal. Clutches of 10 to 20 eggs are found in sand banks along swamp and river edge, where signs betray recent laying. Hawks, eagles, crows, owls, skunks, and opossums know the time and place to hunt them, and one can often locate the eggs by observing the hunting habits of these creatures. They are gathered from the end of May through the summer months. They are boiled, the tough skin being peeled off. Salamander eating is not absent in the in- cidental diet of the Cherokee. It is especially interesting to find that the “spring lizard” (probably Gyrinophilus danielsi danielsz), which inhabits the mountain streams, has been eaten by the Indians, as Jesse Lambert informs us. Also the water dog, or ‘“hell- bender” (Cryptobranchus alleganiensis), is utilized by the Cherokee for soups and stew. JuLy 1951 CARR: EASTERN Turning to the Nanticoke reptile lore we find the belief that if hogs eat ‘‘ground puppies,” the large Ambystoma salamanders, they will die. This is no doubt true, for toxic principles are present in the skin of the salamanders, as in the toads. Lincoln Harmon told that if one swallows a scorpion, which is the designation of the blue-tailed skink (Humeces fasciatus) and also the fence lizard (Sceloporus undulatus) “in going down it will eat your heart, thereby killing you. Also death will ensue if they make a complete circle around your body.” Winona Wright advises that placing a blacksnake on the fence was sure to bring rain. She had observed this to have been true a number of times. Another interesting omen of the Indians, this time of the Massa- chusetts Indians, concerns the use of the Rattlesnake skin for cramps. Insects are also an important part of the diet of the Indian. Speaking with Dr. Speck discloses that the Malechite Indians have a knowledge of eating ants. Sapiel Paul, over 60, born at French Village on the St. John River, New Brunswick, relates that his father took him to the woods continually on trapping, hunting, and woodcutting trips. Occasionally, when a dead tree was found swarming with black ants, he would crush some of the ants and give them to him to eat as a medicinally beneficial tidbit in the spring. Gabriel Polchis, another Malechite Indian, also indulged in this delicacy. In connection with the medicinal proper- ties of ants we learn some striking points. The London Pharmacopaeia of 1696 reveals. “Ants are hot and dry; excite lust, and by their sharp scent wonderfully refresh the spirit: the greater, or winged, with a little salt, cure the psora, or scab, and leprosie.”’ Savarof, once addressing the Russian Sol- diers, told them to “have a dread of the hos- pital! German Physic stinks from afar; is good for nothing and rather hurtful; but take care of your health; a soldier is in- estimable! Your messmates will know where to find roots, herbs, and pismires (red ants) for your cure.” Indeed, the ant is known to contain formic acid, which is used for medici- nal purposes. With respect to the Massachusetts In- INDIAN PRACTICES 231 dians,® there is an interesting reference to lice-eating. During the time of John Eliot around 1646 a law was passed: “If any shall kill their lice between their teeth, they shall pay five shillings.” It is obviously intimated that they were eaten, as they are very sweet and form, therefore, a tasty tidbit. Among the Montauk Indians of Long Island the oak gall, produced by a wasp cynipid, is known as a food delicacy, the spongy inside fiber usually being eaten under the name ‘‘sour jugs.” The sour nature of the fiber probably indicates vitamin-C con- tent. Investigations along this line would be worth while. Known to the Nanticoke Indians is the use of wasp nests, as well as cobwebs. Oscar Wright knows of their making use of the nests of the southern paper wasp (Polistes annularis). The papery pulp is allowed to soak in vinegar, in turn being applied to boils. Asbury Thompson relates that spider web will stop bleeding, while Oscar Wright mentions this story: ‘“A man was very lazy and one day was chopping wood. He stuck his ax in the wood and went to sleep. In the meanwile the ax fell down, cutting his foot badly. It was thought that he was going to bleed to death, but spider web stopped the blood.”” Among the Delawares of Oklahoma also the spider web is applied to fresh wounds as a styptic. Both Asbury Thompson and Oscar Wright speak of the employment of the bee sting for rheumatism. Indeed, the use of bee venom for this ailment has attracted much attention by the medical profession, some of whom hold it efficacious.’ Dr. A. G. Richards writes me in this connection: “Bee venom was held in high repute during the Middle Ages and stressed by homeopathists in the 19th century. You will find it listed with directions for preparation in the ‘Ameri- can Homeopathic Pharmacopoeia’ (under the name of ‘Apium Virus’). There are per- sistent claims of use in the treatment of rheu- matism both in the popular and medical literature. Also it has been used in skin 6 Drake, SAMUEL G. The book of Indians: 118. 1841. 7 Beck, B. F. Bee venom, its nature and effects on arthritic and rheumatoid conditions. New York, 1935. 232 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES diseases, inflammation of the bladder and uretha, etc.” From Mott Byrd comes information on the value of the bee sting. He described how as children they used to be friendly with bees. They would ‘“‘lobolly with them” in the grass. In his early life they would stick five or six bees or wasps under a cloth, making them sting as a cure for stiff Jomts and rheumatism. He states that the bees “know enemy and clamp down.” It would seem as though the bee sang, ‘“‘Let me go.” Mott’s reply was, ‘‘Put it to us.” He re- marked that the stiff iomts were already hurting so badly that one didn’t really feel any pain from the sting. His ideas were that the bee carried away with it some of the poison in the stiff jomts, ““‘When the bee went down, the pain went down.” To the Rappahannock the thousandlegs (milliped) has been a worth-while item. It was found to be expert in cleaning out ears. The 17-year locust (Tibicen septendecim) is a choice delicacy among the Cherokee. They dig them when they are just ready to emerge from the ground. For preparation, the legs are removed. Then the locusts are fried in hot fat, according to Jessie Lambert. Mrs. Moses Owl gives a method by which they are preserved. They are so highly prized that during years of abundance they are salted down and pickled for canning. Mrs. McClain knows of another method of prepa- ration by the Cherokee; she states that they often concoct a locust pie from them. From the extensive periodical on the Cicada by Marlatt* comes an early reference on the use of locust by the Indians: That the Cicada was eaten by the red men of America, both before and after the coming of the Colonists, is indicated in a memorandum, dated 1715, left by the Rev. Andreas Sandel, of Phila- delphia, who, referring to the use of locusts as food in eastern Asia, states also that the Cicada is so used by the Indians. Dr. Asa Fitch corroborates this statement, giving as his authority Mr. W. S. Robertson, who informs him ‘that the Indians make the different species of Cicada an article of diet, every year gathering quantities of them and preparing them for the table by roasting in a hot oven, stirring them until they are well browned’. 8’ Maruarr, C. L. The periodical cicada. U. 8. Bur. Ent. Bull. 71: 103-104. 1907. ~ VoL. 41, No.7 Marlatt’s remarks on its value are fitting here: Theoretically, the Cicada, collected at the proper time and suitably dressed and served, should be a rather attractive food. The larvae have lived solely on vegetable matter of the cleanest and most wholesome sort, and supposedly, there- fore, would be much more palatable and suitable for food than the oyster with its scavenger habit of living in the muddy ooze of river bottoms, or many other animals which are highly prized and which have not half so clean a record as the peri- odical Cicada. Among the insect clan, young wasps and yellow-jackets are eaten. These are found to be very sweet and luscious and should satisfy anyone’s hunger for sweet, as they are readily available. When rambling around old barns in the country, one is certain to find wasp and yellow-jacket nests filled with the sweet white grubs, comprising a feast that is not forgotten. Hear what Vincent Holt® has to say about them in his admirable little book: ‘‘From bees, we derive a delicious sweet in the form of golden honey; from wasps we may, if we choose, derive an equally delicious savoury. What disciple of Old Izaak Walton, when he has been all the morning enticing the wily trout with luscious grubs baked to a turn has not sus- pected a new and appetising taste imparted to his mid-day of bread and cheese or a sand- wich?” Again the Indian is far ahead of modern civilization in his knowledge and exploration of the value not only of insects, but also the other living things that comprise the organic environment. Close contact with it and keen observation has made the Indian the greatest interpreter of nature’s secrets and patterns. Also, by the Cherokee, Lottie Jenkins tells us, grubworms were formerly employed as food. She states that they can be made into a delicious thick soup. She told that her husband once sat down to a meal of grub- worm soup, but he had no knowledge of what he was eating. He thought the soup very good until his Indian host advised him to “dig deep and get grubs.”’ When he pulled up a fat grub, the thought of it was too ° Hour, Vincent. Why not eat insects? London, 1885. JuLy 1951 much; he was unable to finish the meal. Another insect delicacy of the Cherokee is roasted cornworms. It is only appropriate to relate here what Vincent Holt!? has to say in general on insect-eating: Whilst confident that the caterpillars, the grubs, the chafers, and the butterflies will never eondescend to eat us, I am equally sure that on finding out how good they are (and what excellent virtues they possess), we shall right away gladly determine to cook and eat them! Moreover, what a welcome change it will be to the labourer’s meal of bread and bacon day after day for him to get a savoury mess of fried cockchafers, or of dainty grasshoppers done on toast! In these respects the birds are much more sensible than ourselves; they well know the value of the fat chafer as food. With that joy the jaunty rooks pounce upon its luscious grubs when they follow the plough with long strides over the upturned lea! What a feast the wise creatures obtain when aloft on the wing, by devouring the fledged beetles swarming in the tall tree tops! Sally Gordon told that the daddy-longlegs if swallowed would break up chills and that lice had been swallowed for yellow jaundice. This is apparently a parallel to an English usage recorded in the London Dispensatory (1695), ““They are eaten by rustics for the jaundice and consumption; put alive into the meatus they provoke urine; Vivis in penis organum intimissis ad ciendam urinam.” Josselyn has several comments on frogs." One alludes to the pond frog. ‘“They are of a glistening brass colour, and very fat, which is excellent for Burns and Scaldings, to take out the Fire, and heal them, leaving no scar; and is also very good to take away any Inflammation.” The other to the tree frog. “There is also many times found upon the leaves of the Oake a creature like a frog, being thin as a leaf, and transparent, as yellow as gold, the English call them Tree- Frogs or Tree-Toads ... they are said to be venomous, but they may be safely used, being admirable to stop women’s over-flow- ing courses hung about their necks in a Taffetie bag.’’ Are we to suppose that this is pure fancy or “superstition”? Let us now stop at this point and explore deeper into the 10 Thid. 1 Op. eit. CARR: EASTERN INDIAN PRACTICES 233 significance of what might be listed as heathen practice. Indeed the skin glands of the batrachians are known to contain toxic compounds of medicinal value and oddly enough some of the substances from these glands are known to possess astringent and hemostatic properties. A word from a lead- ing authority on the chemistry and proper- ties of these substances is pertinent :”” That there is present in the toad an active, ‘poisonous principle has been recognized since antiquity, and although the nature of the poison was endowed with various legendary beliefs throughout the middle ages, it has long been recognized that the venom of the toad has definite medicinal qualities. For centuries the Chinese have employed as a drug a dried preparation from a common toad. The remedy is known as Ch’an Su in China and as Senso in Japan. Ch’an Su is sold in the form of hard, dark brown cakes which were applied externally in the treatment of toothache, sinusitis, and hemorrhages of the gums. Dried and powdered toad skins were commonly used as a remedy for dropsy until Withering introduced the use of the foxglove drug. It has been known for nearly a century that the poison of the toad has a specific, digitalis-like action on the heart, the intravenous injection of very small doses in frogs promptly inducing a systolic standstill. With respect to the drawing or astringent effect. which would be of value on burns, and also to the bleeding-stopping effect, we have this note: “It is interesting that the Chinese drug Ch’an Su has been found to contain, in addition to the cardiotonic agents, this pressor substance of recognized astringent and hemostatic properties.” To this day the value of the frog as a medicinal agent is apparent to the Cherokee of western North Carolina. Consider the in- formation contributed by Moses Owl. He reveals that the ‘toad frog is good for goiter. The live toad is held against the chest until you sweat.” A jellow juice is thereby pro- duced which is supposed to relieve the goiter. The Cherokee also eat the pond frogs, using them for soup after they are suitably dressed. Jesse Lambert relates that frog soup has been administered for whooping cough— “one half glass every day before breakfast until cough ceases.”” Moses Partridge, an 2 Pinsnpr, L. F. Chemistry of natural products related to phenanthrene. Monogr. Ser. No. 70: 302 303. 1936. 234 older member of the Cherokee group, has used this remedy effectively. In connection with whooping cough, pole- cat (skunk) grease has been found effective. Nicker Jack George advises that one take a few drops internally. It is thought to cure a rattle cough. Dropping into the southeastern area brings to view a number of food and medici- nal oddities of an animal nature. In working here among the Indians, numerous notable items have emerged. Lincoln Harmon, a Nanticoke Indian of Indian River, Del., tells of the use of salt herring applied to arms, hands, or feet for fever. He states that he has known people to “get rid” of colds or grippe. The procedure is to go to a neighbor, in the language of Lincoln Harmon, to ‘‘get bait on. Put on hands or any part of body. One sits near a fire. Fish is considerably dried or parched when you take it off. Better not let one application be all, better put new ones on as fish dry up.” One is intrigued to find that similar usage was employed in Queen Elizabeth’s time in England. The Rich storehouse (1596) con- tains this information, ‘For the swelling of the legs that comes on by cold or otherwise, take white herrings out of their pickle, and open them, and then lay the insides of the same herrings to the soles of your feet when you go to bed, and so let them remain all night; in the morning apply new ones again. Use this five or six times and the same will help you, probatum est.” For ague also it includes, ‘“Take a herring that is well pickled, and split it on the belly side, and warm the same very hot, and lay it to both soles of the feet of the party grieved, and this will help immediately.” This makes one wonder whether this is an Indian or an English prac- tice. It may have been discovered independ- ently by both groups or the Nanticoke may have learned it from early contact with the English. Among the Nanticoke again, but this time from Asbury Thompson, an old herbalist of the group, the use of fish eyes is men- tioned. He tells that fish eyes are good for bowel movements. “Take as pills, the cheap- est kind,” is his advice. Asbury Thompson also told of a well- known remedy for rheumatism which is em- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 7 ployed by the Nanticoke Indians. He ad- vises, ‘Put fishingworms in bottle, let die, apply oil for stiff joints and rheumatism. Smells bad, but sure helps stiff joints.” The Cherokee Indians of western North Carolina appreciate also the virtue of the earthworm. They take the flesh of ‘“‘redworms” and apply to the body to draw out thorns. It is worth noting that biochemists' have given atten- tion to the lipids (fats) of the earthworm, discovering fatty acids that enter into thera- peutics. Furthermore, a bronchial (lung) di- lating principle has been isolated.* So here again the Indians have made discoveries anciently known to them in their medical lore, but known only recently to the medical world at large. Living in the shadows of the Great Smoky Mountains of North Carolina, the Cherokees have a high regard for the singular animal foods and animal medicines such as fishing worms, locusts, grubs, and salamanders. Mrs. Moses Owl has seen the red worm (eath worm) poultice employed in drawing out a thorn. “Just make your poultice of chopped up worms. Draws so powerfully, have to take off soon.” According to Lottie Jenkins, the red worms have been used in making soups. She states that they are really not bad and form a gelatinous soup that is quite palatable and healthful. So in the econ- omy of the Cherokee the earthworm is valu- able both as a medicine and as food. Another food item which is valuable to the Pamunkey is the mussel. Mussels are gathered from March to February in shoal water along shores of rivers, where, ina rising tide in about ten inches of water, they he open. They are stewed or boiled or eaten raw; not gathered to last over or be preserved. Another mollusk utilized by the Pamunkey is the Kahonk (Conch), found only in the York River, 12 miles east of the present reservation, from West Point to the bay. They are found in low water, by feeling with the bare feet on sand below the low-tide line. They are roasted by being put on sticks of fire. They are never dried or smoked for preservation. 13 Lovern, JoHN A. Biochem. Journ. 34: 709- 711. 1940. 14 Cuou, T. G., CHanp, C. C., and Cuu, H. P. Chinese Journ. Physiol. 12: 147-153. 1937. JuLty 1951 A curious weather attribute is given to the “fever-ague’’ worm (woolly-bear) by the Nanticoke. By reading the color pattern one can predict the severity of the weather. The months represented in succession from head to tail of the worm are December, January, and February. Elwood Wright tells if there is much black on the head, cold weather is meant, if short black more moder- ate; of much tan, open month is signified. If it appears black on the head end, brown on other, December will be rough, January and February open. If reversed, December will be open, while January and February will be rough. If totally colored, he explained, “It hasn’t fully got its stripes yet.” SCHULTZ AND SIMOES DE MENEZES: A NEW ANCHOVY 235 One wonders whether this is native to the Indian, for I have obtained from the English settlers in the Blue Ridge of Augusta County, Va., a knowledge of the ‘‘feeble worm” as they call it, foretelling the weather. Mrs. Jack Kelly, of Stuarts Draft Com- munity, has observed that if the feeble worm is black on either end a cold winter will follow, but if black in the middle, a mild or in-between season will invariably occur. The Nanticoke, who, as their name implies, were great fishermen, called the spring peepers (Hyla crucifer) herring frogs because they would always announce the “running”’ of the herring in the spring. ICHTHYOLOGY .—A new anchovy of the genus Anchoviella from the Poti and Parnaiba Rivers of Brazil. Lnonarp P. ScHutrz and Rui SimOES DE MENEZES. Since Hildebrand (Bull. Bingham Ocean- ogr. Coll. 3 (art. 2): 1-165, figs. 1-72, 1948) published ‘‘A Review of the American An- chovies (Family Engraulidae)” four other papers have appeared or were not included in Hildebrand’s revision that deal with South American Anchovies. These are: Fow- ler, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 93: 124, fic. 2, 1941; ibid. 95: 311, fig. 1, 1943; Hildebrand and Carvalho, Copeia, 1948, no. 4: 285-296, figs. 1-4; and Schultz, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 99: 37-54, figs. 4-8, 1949. After comparing the specimens of anchovies which form the basis of this contribution with the species described in the above papers and with related material in the U.S. National Museum collections, we have con- cluded that our specimens represent an un- named species. Anchoviella potiana, n. sp. Fig. 1 Holotype—U.S.N.M. no. 112081, from Poti and Parnaiba Rivers, Teresina, State of Piaui, Brazil, collected in September 1949 by Rui Simoes de Menezes, standard length 113.7 mm, total length 136.5 mm. Paratypes.—U.S.N.M. no. 112082, collected along with the holotype and bearing same data, 7 specimens, 107 to 118 mm in standard length. Also 8 specimens in collection of Servico de Piscicultura, Fortaleza, Ceard, Brazil. Description Detailed measurements were made on the holotype and 15 of the paratypes and these data are expressed in thousandths of the standard length in Table 1. Counts for the new species are recorded in Table 2. Body compressed, deep, greatest depth at about dorsal origin, 3.1 to 3.4, and head 3.6 to 3.7, both in standard length; head shorter than greatest depth of body; snout bluntly pointed, projecting about # its length beyond tip of man- dible, about 3 eye, only a little longer than pupil; eye about 4.0 to 4.2 m head; maxillary ending posteriorly in a truncate to a broadly rounded tip that reaches to but not past joint of mandi- ble, contained about 1.3 to 1.4 in head; mandible pointed, slightly curved dorsally at tip, reaching a vertical line a little behind rear edge of posterior nasal margin; teeth minute, very numerous, along edges of both jaws, cheek 7.0 to 8.2 and postor- bital length of head 5.5 to 5.8 m standard length; angle of cheek varies from 35° to 44°; gill rakers long, slender, the longest about 3 times in post- orbital length of head, each gill raker on the first four arches with two rows of numerous minute spinules on the inner or posterior side; no gill rakers on the posterior side of the first three arches, but short rakers occur on posterior side of fourth gill arch; depressed length of dorsal fin 1.4 to 1.5 in head; the first branched rays of dorsal fin reaching to opposite or not quite to tip of last dorsal ray when fin is depressed; distal margin of dorsal slightly coneave when 236 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voL. 41, No. 7 TaBLE 1.—MErAsSUREMENTS Mapr oN SPECIMENS OF ANCHOVIELLA POTIANA, N. Sp., RECORDED IN THOUSANDTHS OF STANDARD LENGTH Measurements Standard length in millimeters............. Greatestidépthsfuceercin- aie Seer ae Length of head.............. pts Ae ieee Postorbital length of head.................. Mongestizillirakenepeee eee eee eee Interorbital (bony) space................... Tip of snout to: Rear edge of maxillary.... Dorsaltoriginwerr eer eee eee AnalKorigin' tere cep eee ence isength' of anal fin base ass). s2s-s eee Length of dorsal fin base................... Wenzthtofspectoraletines seer eene sere eeeeer hengthuofapelyicstiny eee eer ere Length of pectoral axillary seale............ Least depth of caudal peduncle............. Measurements by Schultz! Measurements by Menezes! lone Paratypes Paratypes 113.7 113 | 107 | 111 | 109 |111.4) 118 | 103 | 112 | 115 | 104 | 109 | 104 | 109 | 109 321 315 | 302 | 313 | 323 | 303 | 316 | 320 | 303 | 296 | 308 | 312 | 308 | 321 | 321 282 286 | 278 | 270 | 278 | 278 | 263 | 252 | 259 | 252 | 250 | 248 | 260 | 239 | 239 175 186 | 171 | 173 | 179 | 170 | 178 | 145 | 161 | 156 | 154 | 147 | 168 | 147 | 147 46 44| 51] 43 | 44] 45 | 47] 58] 45] 43) 48) 55] 58) 46] 46 73 65 | 70| 75 | 72) 73) 69] 68] 62] 61) 67) 64} 67) 73] 64 187 192 | 192 | 186 | 189 | 186 | 191 | 155 | 152 | 156 | 144 | 156 | 173 | 156 | 165 64 63 | 69 | 59] 62) 60| 64 67 59) || 65!) 62) 62") 65.) 58) | 78 | 80) |) 78) Waite aioe ein encon| = 73) 219 217 | 221 | 203 | 211 | 209 | 210 |"214 | 205 | 213 | 221 | 206 | 221 | 211 | 211 519 514 | 500 | 504 | 517 | 516 | 508 | 534 | 518 | 513 | 519 | 514 | 519 | 541 | 514 627 638 | 650 | 624 | 657 | 605 | 624 | 640 | 625 | 617 | 673 | 624 | 654 | 642 | 642 282 269 | 280 | 266 | 279 | 269 | 267 | 281 | 285 | 278 | 288 | 275 | 288 | 284 | 284 121 127 | 118 | 122 | 127 | 135 | 131 | 136 | 125 | 139 | 135 | 138 | 144 | 128 | 138 180 165 | 171 | 173 | 185 | 168 | 176 | 175 | 179 | 178 | 178 | 183 | 173 | 183 | 183 102 99 | 106 | 106 | 114 97 | 105 97 | 107 | 104 | 111 | 101 | 111 | 106 | 106 104 89 | 106 | 110 84 | 114 93 97 98 96 | 106 | 101 96 83 | 101 123 124 | 125 | 117 | 125 | 124 | 119 | 116 125 | 113 | 115 | 119 | 125 | 119 } 119 1 Differences between the two sets of figures such as head length, postorbital length of head, length of mandible, interorbital space, and length of dorsal fin base are probably caused by different methods of measuring. , TaBLEe 2.—Counts RECORDED FOR ANCHOVIELLA POTIANA, N. Sp. Number of fin rays Branched caudal Dorsal Anal Pectoral Pelvic Dorsal lobe | Ventral lobe iii 10 11 ili 22 23 24 25 we bl 1) i 5 6 9 8 16 7 9 16 2 5 1 iS eb 3B} 23 2 21 15 15 Number of scales Vertical rows from gill opening Dorsal origin to mid- to caudal base ventral line 41 42 43 8 9 10 5 1 10 5 Number of gill rakers on first arch Above angle Below angle 47 48 49 50 51 52 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 2 3 2 2 4 3 1 = 1 1 3 2 3 4 = = 1 Juty 1951 distended; caudal fin deeply forked; distal mar- gin of anal fin concave anteriorly, first anal rays longest; first dorsal ray of pectoral fin longest; tips of_pectoral fins reaching to or not quite to insertion of pelvics; pelvic fins reaching about 4 to 2 the way to the anal origin; dorsal fin origin about equidistant between tip of snout and base of caudal fin; origin of anal fin about under base of last or next to last dorsal ray; axillary scale of pectoral fin extending one-half to two-thirds the way along length of pectoral fin; intestine with one main loop. Color in alcohol_—Straw-colored in alcohol dor- sally, sides and belly silvery; dorsal side and tip of snout with black pigment, predorsal area of back with dark pigment intensified just behind occiput to form a blotch and then another just in front of dorsal origin; rear margin of caudal fin dusky; upper sides and back with some dusky pigmentation. Remarks—This new species is chiefly char- acterized by its numerous gill rakers on both limbs of the arches in conjunction with other characters which make it referable to the genus Anchoviella, such as lack of gill membranes across isthmus, presence of very numerous minute teeth on edges of both jaws; origm of anal behind that of dorsal fin; long, slender, numerous gill rakers on both limbs of gill arches; vertebrae about 41; one main loop of intestine; anal origin under rear of base of dorsal fin; maxillary broadly rounded or truncate posteriorly and not reaching past joint of mandible; dorsal origin about equi- SCHULTZ AND SIMOES DE MENEZES: A NEW ANCHOVY 237 distant between tip of snout and base of caudal fin. The occurrence of 47 to 52 + 51 to 61 gill rakers on the first gill arch of any species refera- ble to the genus Anchoviella might cause one to cast doubt on our generic allocation, but com- paring this new species with various members referred to the other genera of American an- chovies leaves no doubt in our mind that potiana is an Anchoviella. The details of the gill rakers, long, slender, with the two rows of fine spines on inner edge, and shape of maxillary among other characters remove it from the genus Anchovia, which also has species with very numerous gill rakers, but a posteriorly pointed maxillary. A. potiana would run down through Hilde- brand’s key to the species of Anchoviella on pp. 109-111 closest to A. pallida but does not agree with that species because pallida has 28 to 34 + 36 to 45 gill rakers and potiana has 47 to 52 + 51 to 61 on first gill arch. Fowler (1941, l.c.) described Anchoviella theringt from the Rio Jaguaribe, Brazil, and this was not included in Hildebrand’s revision but it has only 14 + 19 gill rakers, far too few to be close to potiana. Hildebrand and Carvalho (1948, lc.) described two new species of Anchoviella from Brazil, A. victorae and A. nitida, with 21 to 23 + 29 to 33 and 18 to 20 + 238 or 24, respectively, on first gill arch of both species. Thus victorae and nitida are not close to potiana. We have not noticed any other species of Anchoviella in the literature. Named potiana after the Poti River of Brazil. Fra. 1.—Drawing of one of the paratypes of Anchoviella potiana, new species, by Mario Dias-Maia, Servico de Piscicultura, Fortaleza, Ceara, Brazil. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 7 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 53D ANNUAL MEETING The 53d Annual Meeting, concurrently with the 376th monthly meeting of the Academy, was held as a dinner meeting in the Ballroom of the Kennedy-Warren on the evening of January 18, 1951. President F. B. SruspEe presided. After the dinner, Dr. Silsbee called the meeting to order. The minutes of the 52d Annual Meeting were approved as published in the Journal 40: 198-205. 1950. The following reports by the various officers, committe? chairmen, auditors, and tellers were read and approved: REPORT OF THE SECRETARY During the Academy year—January 29, 1950, to January 18, 1951—125 persons were elected to regular membership, including 114 to resident and 11 to nonresident (56 were elected last year). Of these, 84 resident and 7 nonresident qualified for membership. Ten resident members elected to membership in the preceding Academy year qualified during the present Academy year just ended. The new members were distributed among the various sciences as follows: 24 in physics, 21 in chemistry, 12 in entomology, 7 in zoology, 5 in mathematics, 4 in engineering, 2 each in bacteriology, geophysics, biochemistry, and mam- malogy, and 1 each in paleontology, electrical engineering, geology, anthropology, mineralogy, botany, medicine, geodesy, mechanical engineer- ing, and astronomy. Nine resident members and one nonresident member, having retired from the gainful practice of their professions, were placed on the retired list of members to enjoy the privileges of active membership without further payment of dues. Eight resident members and one nonresident member resigned in good standing. The deaths of the following members were re- ported to the Secretary: GerorGE S. Ricr, Alexandria, Va., on January 3, 1950. CLARENCE A. REED, Takoma Park, Md., on Janu- ary 14, 1950. Henri F. Pirripr, Caracas, Venezuela, on Janu- ary 27, 1950. CarRLos DE LA Torre, Habana, Cuba, on February 19, 1950. Oakes Ames, Cambridge, Mass., on April 28, 1950. L. O. Howarp, Washington, D. C., on May 1, 1950. Howarp S. Reep, Berkeley, Calif., on May 12, 1950. HeRBeERT 8. Barper, Washington, D. C., on June 1, 1950. Epwarp A. Brree, Madison, Wis., on June 9, 1950. FraNK W. Scuwas, Washington, D. C., on June 18, 1950. M. A. Rarnes, Washington, D. C., on July 1, 1950. C. W. Warsurton, Washington, D. C., on Sep- tember 22, 1950. CHESTER Srock, Pasadena, Calif., on December 6, 1950. Joun F. Emprer, New Haven, Conn., on Decem- ber 22, 1950. H. E. Ewrnc, Takoma Park, Md., on January 5, 1951. Henrt F. Prrrrer, CarLos DE LA Torre, and L. O. Howarp were honorary members. On January 18, 1951, the status of member- ship was as follows: Regular Retired Honorary Patron Total Resident...... Het ee OS 57 0 0 630 Nonresident........... 173 34 10 0 217 SRotalcamsoscetcee 746 91 10 0 847 The net changes in membership during the past year are as follows: Patron Total Regular Retired Honorary Residentien-ee 2-1 ee-) si08 +7 —1 0 +64 Nonresident........-... +14 +1 —2 0 +13 Mo tallitesretetiasten cers Siar +8 —3 0 +77 During the Academy year 1950 the Board of Managers held 9 meetings, with an average at- tendance of 18 persons. The followmg important matters were considered: At the 485th meeting, held on February 20, 1950, the Board approved the sale of 818 shares of Washington Sanitary Improvement Co. stock. {On June 20, 1950, the stock was sold at a price considerably higher than what the Academy paid for it many years ago.] The Academy was represented at the Seventh International Botanical Congress, held at Stock- holm, Sweden, July 12-20, 1950. At the 439th meeting, September 25, 1950, the Board instructed the Secretary to prepare and mail to the membership a request for changing Article II, Section I, of the bylaws, increasing the number of active members from 750 to 1,000, and resident membership from 600 to 800. In Juny 1951 all, 389 ballots were returned, of which 374 voted in favor of the amendment, 11 opposed, 3 were unsigned, and 1 did not vote. The need for this increase in membership was due to a large extent to the very active Committee on Membership, as indicated by the election of 125 scientists to regular membership. During the Academy year, eight meetings of the Academy were held, as follows: On February 16, 1950, Frank H. H. Roserts, Jr., Bureau of American Ethnology, delivered his retiring presidential address on Archeology and the modern world. On March 16, 1950, the 1949 Academy Awards were presented to Epwarp G. Hampp, National Institutes of Health, for work in the biological sciences; RicHarD K. Coox, National Bureau of Standards, for work in the engineering sciences; and to Joun A. Hippie, National Bureau of Standards, for work in the physical sciences. The Academy awarded Certificates of Merit to six outstanding local high-school science students: Mites Davis, Central High School; Wiui1am Epwarbp DrisseL, Gonzago High School; Pun SrratrorD Work, Western High School; Patri- c14 Morse Frprerico, Woodrow Wilson High School; Donatp Jason Byrrs, Woodrow Wilson High School; and Paut DovuGuas Saeats, Wood- row Wilson High School. On April 20, 1950, THomas WaLLeR GrorGs, Naval Research Laboratory, addressed the Aca- demy on Dynamical aspects of plastic flowing in solids. On May 18, 1950, Frank M. Srerzunr, U.S. National Museum, addressed a joint meeting of the Academy and the Anthropological Society of Washington on Aboriginal Australia. On October 19, 1950, CHARLES ARMSTRONG, National Institutes of Health, addressed the Aca- demy on Poliomyelitis: Its occurrence and behavior in our population. On November 30, 1950 James A. Van ALLEN, Johns Hopkins University Applied Physics Labo- ratory, addressed the Academy on New Experi- ments in the upper atmosphere. On January 18, 1951, Per K. Frouicy, Merck & Co., gave an after-dinner talk to the Academy on Medicinal chemicals. Six of the meetings were held in the Cosmos Club. The joint meeting with the Anthropological Society of Washington was held in the auditorium of the U. S. National Museum. The meeting on PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 239 January 18, 1951, was held at the Kennedy- Warren. The Academy sponsored the annual Science Fair for high school students and the weekly issue of the Science Calendar in the local news- papers. Frank M. Sprzier. REPORT OF THE TREASURER The Treasurer submits the following report concerning the finances of the Washington Aca- demy of Sciences for the year ended December 31, 1950: RECEIPTS ~ Dues, 1949545 $73.00 L950 sak eee 3,788.00 LQ Filenccunete 124.00 $3 , 985.00 Journal, Subscriptions, NOE eo ec 6.00 MQ eae ee 7.50 IQS eckecooe 7.50 NQAQ es ers Ge 21.75 IO RS errr: 611.24 AOS ee Arp. 680.45 O52 eae eae 5.06 1,339.50 Reprints, QAO Bitte ar. 201.57 O50 GN 568.53 770.10 Sales, LO SOR B ee een esthetics 93.43 Interest and dividends............. 1,521.50 Directory (33d ed.)................ 6.00 Monographenon la aes sees eee aoe 189.67 Transferred from invested funds... 1,000.00 Transferred from Savings Account. 25,000.00 Annual dinner (1950).............. 294.00 Refund, service charge, A. 8S. & T (Sho ae erg NE NM RL SAN AE ee ee ane 7.43 Sale Washington Sanitary Improve- WHIM COs WOCMS 2c dono ccosaccoe 26,114.65 $60,321.28 1,635.53 $61,956.81 Total receipts, 1950............ Cash balance, January 1, 1950. . DISBURSEMENTS 1949 1950 Total Secretary’s Office. $110.87 $370.39 $481.26 Treasurer’s Office. 304.59 304.59 Subscription Man- ager & Custodi- an of Publica- HOME sano cncse ce 8.95 PA SO 30.67 Meetings Commit- TOGA roonmsek esne 35.50 208 . 80 244.30 240 Membership Com- THITtEes hse cere: 1.00 50 Journal Printing & mail- MOWER eaneetons Bt 613.28 4,887.38 Illustrations. ... 68.76 521.91 IRJOVAUNUS., 5 od aos 246.66 673.16 Office Editorial Asst. 25.00 275.00 Miscellaneous. 1.58 42.83 $1,111.60 Annual Dinner (1950) Tickets and programs..... 25.00 Rehund sips eo cote trae 10.50 opel 2400) ery: mee eee: 274.20 Projection Service........ 18.50 Monograph no. 1 Postage, wrapping, etc.... 3.08 A) Sve arming exaenare eee 1,000.00 Sclencewh aise. err nee 100.00 Science Calendar.......... 10.00 Fireproof records cabinet. . . 263 .00 and material for base..... 1.66 George Banta Publishing Co. Cartage on overcopies .... 69.93 Deposited in Savings Ac- COUNGE eae are ae 26,114.65 Stock Massachusetts Investors Trust, 400 shares @ $33.62. Investment Co. of America, 13 , 448 .00 400 shares @ $11.61....... 4,644.00 State Street Investment Corporation, 100 shares (Qy ANG ae gee ten te 6,125.00 Debit memos: 1378 A $0.89 (exchange) 1388 A 7.43 (service charge ) JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON 1.50 5, 500.66 590.67 919.82 300.00 44.41 24,217.00 1423 A 0.56 (exchange)... 8.88 8.88 Total disbursements. .....$59,422.68 60,534.28 Cash book balance as of December 31, NO SOME Siesta a ice Ne Se ees 1,422.53 FTRG elles acter Gem pe Neeep ay UBER Oy JME tn ergs $61,956.81 RECONCILIATION OF BANK BALANCE Balance as per cash book, Dee. 31, NO HO eet een ee reN er ements one yea mebeneg te BE Balance as per Amer. Sec. & Trust Co. Statement of Dec. $1,373.36 Receipts undeposited.. 1,227.18 $2,600.54 Checks outstanding, as of Dec. 31, 1950 No. 1018 $5.41 1263 5.00 1429 1,144.02 1430 23.58 1,178.01 $1,422.53 $1,422.53 ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, NO. 7 INVESTMENTS Potomac Electric Power Co. Certificate No. TAO 1977—40 shares BAI) 1s BONN 6 ouacscc0ces se $2,000.00 City of New York—8% (Transit Unification ) Due—June 1, 1980 Certificate No. D 20186........ $500.00 CMO sSiaeereee 100.00 C8). oe soca < 100.00 C 710405 100.00 $800.00 First Federal Savings & Loan Assn. Investment account book.......... $1,000.00 Northwestern Fed. Savings & Loan Assn. Certificate No. 1380... $4,500.00 1441... 500.00 $5,000.00 United States Government Series G Bonds— No. M 332990 G.... 1,000.00 M 332991 G.... 1,000.00 M 332992 G.... 1,000.00 M 332993 G.... 1,000.00 M 1808741 G... 1,000.00 M 2226088 G... 1,000.00 M 2982748 G... 1,000.00 M 4126041 G... 1,000.00 M 5141346 G... 1,000.00 M 5141347 G... 1,000.00 $10,000.00 Massachusetts Investors Trust 400 shares at $33.62. ....-. 5.02... $13, 448.00 Investment Co. of America A00ishanesraitnpllll Gliese $4,644.00 State Street Investment Corp. 100kShanesrat $6125. see eee $6, 125.00 American Security & Trust Co. SavanespAccountinaes 1 steer $1, 161.52 Total ioe. ane er $44,178.52 Cash balance 12/31/50....... 1,422.53 Mo bali. swe ie a eewn ee $45 , 601.05 Total as of Dec. 31, 1949 Nero cien ape titan $29 , 662.40 Total as of Dec. 31, IMG Y ORE cieeadle tueeeate tS Slee 45,601.05 Increasehen= see $15,938.65 At the close of business on December 31, 1950, there were 52 members of the Academy in arrears, 34 for 1 year, 8 for 2 years, 2 for 3 years, 7 for 4 years, and 1 for 5 years. Howarp 8S. RappLeye®. REPORT OF AUDITING COMMITTEE The accounts of the Treasurer of the Washing- ton Academy of Sciences for the year 1950 were JuLy 1951 examined by your auditing committee on Jan- uary 10, 1951. A copy of the Treasurer’s report was checked and found to be in agreement with the records. All disbursements had been previously author- ized and are supported by vouchers or cancelled checks. The securities of the society were imspected on January 11, 1951, and found to be in agree- ment with the list given in the report and to have all coupons attached that are not yet due. The work of the committee was greatly sim- plified and lessened by the excellent manner in which the records have been kept and by the systematic and orderly arrangement of the books and of the report. Your Treasurer deserves the commendation of the Society for another year of service to the Academy. : (One member of the auditing committee, Dr. C.-L. Gazin, was unable to assist in the audit because of his absence from the ciy.) Raymonp lL. SANFORD. Water D. Surcuirre, Chairman REPORT OF THE BOARD OF EDITORS Volume 40 of the JourNaL, for the year 1950, contained 424 printed pages, 4 less than volume 39 for 1949, despite which the cost of issuing the JOURNAL has again increased. The higher costs in 1950 are caused by the inflationary spiral of prices which began in July with the start of the war in Korea. The increases reflect the higher prices of paper and materials for which the con- tract specifies a cost plus basis. Reluctantly, the printer, Waverly Press, Inc., has requested per- mission to increase by ten per cent the rates on items specified by price in the contract, the in- crease to go into effect in January 1951; it is made necessary by higher wages and other cost increases. Waverly Press is to be commended for the equitable treatment it has given the JouRNAL in this matter. During 1950 the JourNnau published 81 sub- mitted papers and 12 obituaries, together with proceedings of the Acaprmy and of two affiliated societies. The submitted papers comprized 66 in biological sciences, 6 in mathematics and the physical sciences, and 9 in other sciences. In ad- dition to these, there were 16 abstracts of papers in the Proceedings of the Philosophical Society of which 10 were in physics, 2 in astrophysics, 1 in biophysics, 1 in medicine, 1 in mathematics, and 1 in fuel research. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY O41 The disbursements for the JourNaL during 1950 were: Printing, mailing, engraving, etc................... 6,011.95 leva) OU LISBie Samael cad aoe Ree SO eR Ere tha rcie: A 822.00 Office—Editorial assistant...............-.-.+..+-+- 300.00 Office—Miscellaneous........ AS AAP CeO He ET BIE 30.79 otaleemrenes BL Se eemetn tae nhs Bennie a . 7,164.74 C@hargeshtorauthorsteneeeerae ere enc re le aR OD Alalo. Ne cost of the JourNAL to Academy.............. 6,210.01 In 1949 the net cost to the Academy was $6,013.84, $196.17 less than for the current year. The Board of Editors wishes to acknowledge the cooperation of the Board of Managers and the officers of the Academy. Special thanks are due to Mr. Paut H. Oruser who efficiently handles all matters pertaining to the technical side of printing and make-up of the JouRNAL. The Editors also wish to thank Mr. Francis C. Harwoop, of Waverly Press, for his helpful sug- gestions. Frank C. KRaAceK. FREDERICK J. HERMANN. WiuiramM F. Fosuaa. REPORT OF CUSTODIAN AND SUBSCRIPTION MANAGER OF PUBLICATIONS Subscriptions Nonmember subscriptions in the United States and possessions............... 145 Nonmember subscriptions in foreign coun- LELGTUSIS Nees Lae, AURA SO en Meee POE Ti tect 82 ARO tallies centes once sete Sl eeu eM ans we AR 227 This represents a gain of 4 subscriptions over last year’s total. Inventory of stock as of December 31, 1950 Reserve sets of the Journal Complete sets, vols. 1-40.............. 4 sets Volumes: 40 eras scien ceo ewe tre 6 sets NG HAO Pini tae) pate (ee earn ue Sea 9 sets SN ests 10) SER a MN rH in ra eA RAC 5 sets Total sets more or less complete....... 25 sets Back numbers of the Journal Numbers held in complete sets (4)..... 2,652 Numbers held in reserve for complete SOUS HI tik ie eemen NNR ES (RAN ANRC LEA plu yehnn eK 8,263 Numbers held for sale separately... - Total numbers on hand.............. * A count of these separate numbers has not been made recently, pending a rearrangement of the back stock and a subsequent recount and audit. 242 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Proceedings Complete sets, volumes 1-13 (1899-1911) 48 sets (The copies of the separate articles that ap- peared in the Proceedings have not been counted. ) Monograph no. 1 @niginaltisswer hae, Cates ee ney 1,010 Copies sold or otherwise distributed. ... 141 Number of copies on hand.......... 869 Sales During the year 1950, sales of the JourRNAL and Procreepines fell well below the sales re- corded in 1949. No complete sets of the Pro- CEEDINGS were sold, and only 115 numbers of the JouRNAL were sold either separately, or as vol- umes. Seven numbers of the PrRocrrpines and three copies of the 1947-48 Directories were sold. The sales of the Monograph fell off from those the previous year. This year 47 copies were sold. It was not possible to circularize prospective buyers during 1950 but it is expected to do this early in 1951. This it is hoped will increase the sales of the Monograph. A gift of an almost complete set of the JouURNAL from the estate of the late Joseph A. Cushman and numerous other very welcome gifts of early numbers of the JourNaL, have given us a good start toward making up another complete set. It is hoped that the older members who are con- sidering the distribution of their library will re- member the needs of the Academy in this respect. The income from sales of copies of the Jour- NAL, Proceedings, and Directory was $93.43, while sales of the Monograph yielded $189.67. This is a total income of $283.10. Expenditures Supp pl GSketeirca cera. wera eerie arate nN ae $6.50 Stamped Emvelopes..............-+..-+.. 91 Postage expended in connection with the TOWRNIAT: MOL C neti ate soc cei onaeaieeep eee 6.60 Postage expended in connection with the Monorrapbasaarr eres ease 5.53 PRO Pall een pecker ea eet reeeiter ane wemec ae ars $19.54 Storage Tn last year’s annual report it was mentioned that a rearrangement of the storage facilities that we have in the Smithsonian Institution Building was in progress. It was impossible to finish this in the limited free time at the disposal of the custodian, but it is expected that this work will vou. 41, No. 7 be finished during 1951. At that time it will be possible to have a count made of the stock on hand. Haratp A. REHDER. REPORT OF THE ARCHIVIST During the year the present incumbent with the active cooperation of his predecessor worked over all Academy materials heretofore turned in for deposit in the Academy’s Archives. Much material of an ephemeral nature has been dis- carded and the remainder reorganized and re- arranged so that it is hoped that the files will be readily usable hereafter. An itemized inventory of the materials in hand follows: Scrapbook containing miscellaneous printed mat- ter of the Academy, including notices of meet- ings, 1898-1922, inclusive. Folder containing similar material since 1922. Very far from complete. Presumably a complete collection from 1923 to date is in Secretary’s possession. Red Books: Vol. 1 (1892, 1895, 1897, 1898, 1900). Unbound 1899, 1901, 1903, 1905, 1907, 1909. Vol. 2 (1911-1919) Red Books only, Nos. 18-22. Vol. 3 (1921-1935) Red Books Nos. 23-29 with Academy lists 1914, 1916, 1918, 1920, 1922, 1926. Unbound 1937, 1939, 1941, 1947-8 with Academy lists 1916, 1918, 1920, 1922, 1924, 1926. Membership records, 1898-1948. Includes all perti- nent records available on all members, including applications, acceptances, resignations, declin- ations, ete. The Benjamin Franklin Medal presented to the Academy by the American Philosophical Society, commemorating 200th anniversary of his birth. Original ballots with tally sheets, covering selec- tion of charter members of the Academy, 1898. In wrapped package. Personal data (names, addresses, degrees, etc.) of Academy members, 1901. In wrapped package. Recording Secretary’s minute book from January 1908 (48th meeting) to January 1936, inclusive (268th meeting) (10th-38th Annual meetings). Bound. Minutes of the meetings of the Board of Managers, January 31, 1911-December 19, 1929, inclusive (165th-301st meetings). Bound. Same. January 29, 1930-December 16, (302nd-349th meetings). Bownd. Same. February 10, 19389-October 18, 1943 (350th— 385th meetings). Bownd. Same. Ist, 198, 287-399, in folder (unbound). Treasurer’s books: Membership dues, 1898-1907, alphabetically by names. Treasurer’s cash books (receipts and disburse- ments ). 1938 Juny 1951 PROCEEDINGS: (1) Feb. 1898—Dec. 1909. (2) Jan. 1910-—Dec. 1915. (3) Jan. 1916—Dec. 1935. (4) Jan. 1916—-Dec. 1918 (receipts only) (5) Jan. 1919-Dec. 1921 ub ef (6) Jan. 1922—June 1925 i Be (7) June 1925-Sept. 1933 “a i (8) Oet. 1933—Dec. 1936 oe iy (9) Ledger 1917-1928 (10) ‘‘Cash book’’ 1915-1927. A mess: (11) . ug 1928-1934 Letterpress books (nos. 2-7) Nov. 1, 1900-Jan. 17, 1922. Volume 1 is missing. Journal Washington Academy of Sciences Volumes 1-30. Bound 1912-1940. 31-38. Unbound 1941-1948, 1949, 1950. Proceedings Washington Academy of Sciences Volumes 1-13 (1899-1911). Bound. Proceedings The McGee Memorial Meeting. Washington Academy of Sciences, Dec. 5, 1913. 1916. (2 copies) Unbound. Lectures on heredity. Reprints from Journal Washington Academy of Sciences, Bound in boards. 1917. Lectures on scientific and engineering aspects of the war. Reprints from Journal Washington Academy of Sciences. Bound in boards. 1918. Photographs, Past-Presidents, Washington Academy of Sciences. Halftone cuts used for portrait illustrations in Red Book, 1947-48 (4 boxes). Original photographs as above, mounted on large cards (one large package). Facsimile copy of the charterbook and signatures in the first journal book of the Royal Society of England. 1912. Folio. Presented to the Academy by the Royal Society. Reports of officers: Archivist, Auditors, Custodian of Publications, Editors, Recording Secretary, Secretary and Corresponding Secretary, Tellers, Treasurer. Reports of Annual Meetings. Academy awards, Miscellaneous records of. Records of academy delegates to scientific con- gresses, etc. Correspondence in re publication of Proceedings of the Academy, 1901-1912. Correspondence in re publication of Red Book. Correspondence in re publication of JoURNAL. Applications for affiliation of scientific societies and action taken thereon. Membership lists. Lists of past officers. Formation and early history of the Academy. Amendments proposed to bylaws. Scientific societies of the Washington area (1936 questionnaire ). Committee reports, attendance at scientific meet- ings, Botanic Garden, honorary foreign mem- berships, executive, finance, JOURNAL, meetings, meeting places, membership, nominating, publi- cation, miscellaneous. Miscellaneous folders on District of Columbia, THE ACADEMY 243 Kober lectureship, presentation of medals, direc- tions for operating Hare system, American Association for the Advancement of Science, American Metric Association, popular books in science, engraving Academy notification forms. Miscellaneous unsorted correspondence. Joun A. STEVENSON. The President then announced the recipients of the Academy Awards for 1950 as recommended by the Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement and approved by the Board of Managers: Biological Sciences: Davin H. Dunks, U.S. National Museum, in recognition of his distin- guished service in paleontology, especially by re- searches on early arthrodiran and teleost fishes. Engineering Sciences: SAMUEL Livy, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his dis- tinguished service in the structural analysis of aircraft. Physical Sciences: Puitip H. ABELSON, in re- cognition of his distinguished service in the fields of chemistry, nuclear physics, and in the physics of living organisms. REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE ON MEMBERSHIP During the Academy year, the Committee on Membership held six meetings and processed 124 nominations for membership. Seventy of these represented the physical sciences, 44 the biologi- cal sciences, and 10 the engineering sciences. One hundred and twelve of these nominations were for resident membership and 12 for nonresident. The scientific background and achievements of each nominee were abstracted and presented to the Board of Managers at its regular meetings. The Chairman wishes to express his thanks to all the members of the committee for their kind cooperation in the work, and to the President, Secretary, and members of the Board for their many helpful suggestions. Roger G. Bates, Chairman. REPORT OF COMMITTEE SCIENCE ON ENCOURAGEMENT OF TALENT The Committee arranged for the participation of the Academy in the Ninth Science Talent Search of the Westinghouse Educational Founda- tion, as sponsor of the Second Annual Talent Search in the District of Columbia. In continu- ance of this custom the committee has also started preliminary work for the Tenth Science Talent Search. 244 Last year’s search resulted in the recommen- dation by the committee of six local participants in the national search to the Academy’s Board of Managers for the award of a Certificate of Merit from the Academy. The awards were pre- sented by the Academy at its Annual Honors Meeting in March 1950. Letters of reeommenda- tion from the Academy for scholarship awards were sent to the universities of choice of the award recipients. The Academy, through the medium of the committee, again sponsored the Annual Science Fair for local high and junior high school stu- dents, in cooperation with the Science Depart- ments of the Public Schools of the District of Columbia. The fair was held May 15-19, 1950, in the lobby of the Department of Commerce Building, with 564 exhibitors selected from about 1500. Thirty-six winners were presented Certifi- cates of Award by the President of the Academy, after selection by a group of judges from the Academy. The expenses of the committee consisted of $115 representing the Academy’s contribution to support the Fourth Annual Science Fair. The membership of the Committee during the year was: Dr. B. D. Van Evnra; Dr. A. T. McPuHerson; Dr. Frep Monier; Austin H. CuarK; JosepH M. Catpwetn, and Dr. M. A. Mason, Chairman. Martin A. Mason, Chairman. After acceptance by the members of the report read by the Chairman of the Committee of Tell- ers, the President declared the following individ- uals elected to the given offices: Water RAamBerG, President-Elect Francis M. Deranporr, Secretary Howarp 8. RAppueye, Treasurer Sara E. Branuam and JoHn A. STEVENSON, Board of Managers to January 1954 The following members of the Academy, nom- inated by the Affiliated Societies, were duly elected Vice-Presidents of the Academy: Philosophical Society of Washington—Epwarp U. Condon Anthropological Society of Washington—Watpo R. WepEL Biological Society of Washington—[Vacancy] JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 7 Chemical Society of Washington—JospprH J. FAHEY Entomological Society of Washington—FREpD- ERICK W. Poos : National Geographic Society—ALEXANDER WETMORE Geological Society of Washington—LxEason H. ADAMS Medical Society of the Distriet of Columbia— [Vacancy] Columbia Historical Society GILBERT GROs- VENOR Botanical Society of Washington—E. H. WALKER Washington Section, Society of American Foresters—WiLi1amM A. Dayton Washington Society of Engineers—Currrorp A. Betts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers—Francts M. D5ran- DORF Washington Section, American Society of Me- chanical Engineers—Ricuarp 8. Dinu Helminthological Society of Washington—L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bac- teriologists—ANeus M. GRIFFIN Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers—Hrnry W. HEemMpPLE Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engi- neers—HERBERT G. DorsEY District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers—[Vacancy] The President introduced the speaker, Per K. FrouicH, Vice-President of Merck & Co. Dr. FRouicH gave an illustrated talk on Medicinal chemicals. He outlined the various procedures followed in producing, under rigid requirements of purity, the various antibiotics, vitamins, and other life-saving chemicals. He reviewed the vari- ous steps required to produce these medicinal compounds, from the minute quantities obtained in the original fundamental research laboratories to the very large scale production of many tons per day. These operations require great team work on the part of many related disciplines. The retiring President, F. B. Stmspen, ex- pressed his appreciation to the officers, to the Board of Managers, and to the various committee chairmen for their work and cooperation through- out the year. He then introduced the new Presi- dent, NarHan R. Smiru, who had served as Presi- dent-Elect during 1950. After a few interesting remarks the new President adjourned the meeting at 10:15 P. mM. Frank M. Snrzimr, Secretary. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences I PRON ATT TIS 2s aiid Boe I eRe Ree a Natuan R. SuiruH, Plant Industry Station PARESTILETL-CLECEN AP retevayac seine eae WaLTER RAMBERG, National Bureau of Standards IS EGRELOMUM SR in Me te Seeman t Arse F. M. Deranvorr, National Bureau of Standards TEDSTER A ee Howarp S. Rappieye, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey PAR CHINES CAPT Nt ee eae evens yt ees Joun A. Stevenson, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Harrap A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Philosophical Society of Washington......................... Epwarp U. Connon Anthropological Society of Washington......................... Wapo R. WEDEL BiolozicaliSociety of Washingtony fas... .5.20c¢ss5-ossns es ecenet oe C@hemicalesociety, offs Washingtonver sse cee dee aes ee JosEpH J. FAHEY Entomological Society of Washington........................ FREDERICK W. Poos NationalyGeographiciSocietyz--aane sae saath ses eee ALEXANDER WETMORE Geolorical Societyzof Washingtoniass.socese secs eee sess sss ean Leason H. Apams Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... Columbiastistoricalisocietyae seen eee eee enero: GILBERT GROSVENOR Bovmicallsociebyson washington... elec. sleet ees EK. H. WaLKER Washington Section, Society of American Foresters...... .... Witi1am A. Dayton Washington Society of Engineers............................- Cuirrorp A. Betts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers Francis M. DEFrFANDORF Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp 8. DILL Helminthological Society of Washington.......................... . A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Aneus M. GriFriIn Washington Post, Society of American Military Hngineers....Hmnry W. HempLe Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......... HeErRBert G. Dorsey District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers. . Elected Members of the Board of M anagers: par amniiatsyell 952 eres Boks oie ea tekshssosrcs toa: enone yet W. F. Fosuag, C. L. Gazin MoOwaniaryel QO8e ea an nasa s 2: C. F. W. Mugseseck*, A. T. McPHErRson Moma atay 9 DA creda « cues he torvenss cvs: secon ee Sara E. Branuam, Mitron Harris* GORONO eVUGGGETS) 9h oe ees a All the above officers plus the Senior Editor Boon ojpebiaitors and Aissocvate Hatters, 0.4.06. .2..55s5)5.565 0s) nese [See front cover] Executive Committee....N. R. Situ (chairman), WALTER RamBere, H. 8. RapPpLeye, . A. Stevenson, F. M. DEFANDORF Committee on Membership............... L. A. SPINDLER (chairman), M. 8. ANDERSON, MERRILL BERNARD, R. HE. BLACKWELDER, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. Hansen, D. B. Jones, Dorotuy Nickerson, F. A. Smita, Heinz Specut, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings......... MarcGaret Pittman (chairman), NoRMAN BEKKEDAHL, W. R. Cuaptiine, D. J. Davis, F. B. Scurretz, H. W. WELLS Committee on Monographs: omanwanyalOs2eG vers sss es as J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), PauL H. OBHSER Ie Jarman IOGR his Satneeee tanh tan cee ook EE ce ries R. W. Imuay, P. W. Oman MOMMA reyasl GOAN aes Sires. tee ahi sen tke eens at 8. F. Buaxe, F. C. Kracex Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (GrorcE P. Watton, general chairman): For the Biological Sciences............ G. H. Coons (chairman), J. E. FaBmr, JR., Myrna F. Jonus, F. W. Poos, J. R. SWALLEN For the Engineering Sciences......... R. 8. Diu (chairman), ARSHAM AMIRIKIAN, J. W. McBurney, FrRanK Neumann, A. H. Scorr For the Physical Sciences............. G. P. WALTON (chairman), F. S. Brackett, G. E. Horm, C. J. Humpureys, J. H. McMILien For Teaching of Science............ B. D. Van Evera (chairman), R. P. BaRNEs, . EK. Fox, T. Koppanyr, M. H. Martin, A. T. McPHERSON Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research...................... L. E. Yocum (chairman), M. X. Suutivan, H. L. WuirremMore Committee on Policy and Planning: R@ daimany? IEP, . oan sccsoson dopsousdsae J. I. Horrman (chairman), M. A. Mason PRoRMamiarsygil QO Sir hae a: Seip cus betwen ose oxtavere 8 W. A. Dayton, N. R. Smita ROR Nam atyeil O54, 5.65.0. smarts cova nee sieistinie wane H. B. Couns, Jr., W. W. Rusey Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: Lo Verein WEY, -ocoocnscoccccocv0ca M. A. Mason (chairman), A. T. McPHERson ‘They Uevatieneae OB eel, oleate o Gee ona ee oe A. H. CLARK, F. L. Mouuer Ropamusrys LO a4 co hevecocror fcsck ars ate e piclacciegaeersia one J. M. CaLpwe .u, W. L. Scamirr Ieeproscrinose Cn Cove OF As Als Bho Soncooccnccosnsconposcnconcunaucs F. M. Serz_er Committee of Auditors...... J. H. Martin (chairman), N. F. Braatren, W. J. YOUDEN Committee of Tellers...W.G. BRoMBACHER (chairman), A. R. Merz, Loutss M. RussELL * Appointed by Board to fill vacancy. CONTENTS Puysics.—Measure for measure: Some problems and paradoxes of pre- cision. FRANCIS B.. SIESBER.... 2.04. je. 02 lc 0 ee Martuematics.—A problem in geometric probability. JmERomME Corn- FIELD and HAROLD W. CHALKLEY....%............. 4). eee ErxunoLocy.—Interesting animal foods, medicines, and omens of the eastern Indians, with comparisons to ancient European practices. Lauown'G: Ky CARR ni) es Bak oboe ed etn) IcutTHyoLocy.—A new anchovy of the genus Anchoviella from the Poti and Parnaiba Rivers of Brazil. Lronarp P. ScuHunttz and Rui SIMGES DE: MENEZESW:,. 2.05. 02 dee Ode a en so PROCEEDINGS: DHE ACADEMY) 40 eee oes cn This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals Page 213 226 229 Vou. 41 Aueust 1951 No. 8 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS CHARLES DRECHSLER Wiuuiam F. FosHac J. P. E. Morrison PLANT INDUSTRY STATION U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U. 8. NATIONAL MUSEUM BELTSVILLE, MD. ASSOCIATE EDITORS J. C. EWERS J. I. HorrmMan ANTHROPOLOGY CHEMISTRY C. W. SABROSKY T. P. THAYER ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY F. A. Cuace, JR. Miriam L. Bomnarp BIOLOGY BOTANY R. K. Coox PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ; Coe ats Mount Ri -aAL & GUILFORD AVEs. , , BALTIMORE, MARYLAND \ Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md, : Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- ouymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 p 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13, i $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the JouR- NAL or the ProceEepines should be sent to Harautp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per year..................--.-----+++- $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available.*................ — — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 40, inel.) available for sale to libraries at $341.00 Monoerapu No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann. .$4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete...........................--- $25.00 Single volumes, unbound Single numbers Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided “heb claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and ad srossed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, D.C. Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoLuME 41 MATHEMATICS.—Information theory. Standards. Information theory deals with the com- munication of information without regard to any psychological or semantic ‘‘value”’ assigned to messages. The value measure of a message is ignored from necessity, not from choice. We are forced to assign a numerical measure to a message with reference to a class of messages. For example, a sentence can be considered as a member of a class of messages consisting of all possible sequences of letters and spaces of the given length. Most of these permutations would be mean- ingless as English text but could be assigned arbitrary code meanings in general. We shall assign a mathematical measure of the information in each that completely dis- regards any assigned meaning. We could define the information content of a message in terms of its length, Le., the number of letters or telegraph symbols it requires for transmission. This turns out to be inappropriate, for most messages con- tain redundancy and can be uniquely communicated by fewer characters. This suggests using the minimum sufficient char- acter count as a measure of the information. To standardize this idea, let all messages be thought of as coded into binary form, so as to be transmitted by a sequence of dots and dashes, heads and tails, or zeros and ones. The information measure of a message in “bits” (binary digits) will be taken as the number of binary digits absolutely needed to distinguish this particular mes- sage from all others of the class considered. One such class might be all 50 character sequences of the 27 symbols of English (26 letters and space). Let us deal with an ex- ample. 1A lecture delivered before the Philosophical Society of Washington, December 15, 1950. 245 August 1951 No. 8 CuesTER H. Pacr, National Bureau of For simplicity, reduce the alphabet to 16 characters (including space) and consider all possible messages of 35-character length. One member of this class is: THIS IS CER- TAINLY A TRIVIAL EXAMPLE. Hach of the characters of our short alphabet can con- veniently be represented by a unique com- bination of four binary digits, since there are exactly 24 = 16 such combinations. This requires 4 X 35 = 140 binary digits to repre- sent the whole message. The message can, however, be coded for more efficient transmission. Instead of using four binary digits for each character, con- sider using only three for each of the more frequent characters, at the expense of using five for those less frequent. There is a net gain, aS we Shall see. Let us tabulate the characters in the order of their frequency. An efficient coding is given in Table 1. When the message is coded by four digits per letter, the sequence of digits (no spaces!) can be uniquely decoded by dividing it into groups of four, and decoding each group. TABLE 1 Character Count Representation| Total digits Space 5 000 15 I 5 001 15 A 4 010 12 E 3 O11 9 L 3 1000 12 aT 3 1001 12 R 2 1010 8 Ss 2 1011 8 Cc 1 11000 5 A 1 11001 5 M 1 11010 5 N 1 11011 5 iP 1 11100 5 V 1 11101 5 x i 11110 5 We ul Liiit i) Average = 3.74 binary digits/letter | ms AUG 9 0 1QBF 246 With our more efficient coding, the message starts as follows: 1001110010011011 How are the digits to be grouped for de- coding? An examination of the representa- tions in Table 1 will show that the decoding is unique, for no shorter group forms the first part of any longer group. If it is desirable actually to transmit the message in terms of the literal characters rather than binary characters, the sequence of 131 binary digits can be arbitrarily divided into ‘fours’? and each of these groups coded as one of the 16 letters by an arbitrary assignment of the combinations. The 131-digit message can then be trans- mitted by 383 characters of the original alphabet, instead of the 35 characters needed for straight transmission. At the receiving end these characters are replaced by the 4- digit groups, and the resulting sequence decoded by Table 1. The digit code that we set up as efficient for our particular message will, of course, be very inefficient for certain other messages. We really wish the coding scheme that is most efficient on the average for the whole class of messages considered. This can be found by using the relative frequencies, or probabilities, of the letters in the whole class of messages, rather than in a particular message. For example, consider the class of messages made up of our 16-letter alphabet, with the individual letters having the prob- abilities given in Table 2. The total prob- ability is 1. In fact, these percentages are the same as in Table 1, intentionally. Thus if Table 1 represented the relative occurrence of the letters in the whole class of messages considered, the corresponding code would be efficient and would allow the use of 3.74 digits/letter averaged over all messages of the class, weighted by the probabilities of the various possible messages. With reference to a particular class of messages, we can define the information measure of any particular message as the number of binary digits needed to code the particular message, using the code that is most efficient for the class as a whole. The average information per message of this class will be the average number of digits per message, using this code. There is a for- mula for this average information. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 8 To arrive at the general formula, consider a ‘“‘perfect”’ case, one in which each succes- sive binary digit of the code distinguishes between equally likely alternatives. Such is illustrated by a 5-letter alphabet, with the probabilities and representations shown in Table 3. The average number of digits per char- acter is 2 le @ «2 ale situa cmeeee assets = Il Note that this expression is 1 1 jo NOs = a2 70> Ops; —— sie 32s : Pi P2 1 = Dip: log as — Lip: log pi where the logarithms are taken to the base 2. It can be shown that this is a best pos- sible case, and that for any scheme, the average number of digits per character satisfies the relation n> —)> plog p = H. In our example of Table 2, we have n = 3.74 binary digits/character compared to H = 3.71. The average information per message in this case is 3.71 bits/character. For any given transmission rate of elements, the information rate can be expressed in- bits per second. Consider the ensemble of all messages composed of these 16 letters with the given TABLE 2 Character Probability Space 0.143 I 0.148 A 0.114 1D, Ae 0.086 each R,S | 0.057 each (Op, JEES ME INI, IP Wy OS, NO 0.0285 each TABLE 3 Character Probability Code A p=4 0 B pe=+} 10 C p= 110 D pi = is 1110 E Ds = ds 1111 Aveust 1951 relative frequencies; 1.e., successive letters independently chosen with the respective probabilities. In a long message of N charac- ters, the first letter will occur p,N times (on the average), the second p.N times, etc. The probability of any particular sequence of this length is Bee p82 ==) igh 8 which can be simplified by taking loga- rithms: log P = p.N log p: + p.N log pp + --- + pieN log pic = Np; log p; = —NH. Since H was earlier found to be the average information per character, the total informa- tion for N characters is J = NH = —log P = log 1/P. Thus the information in a message is measured by (minus) the loga- rithm of the probability of sending this par- ticular message of the ensemble. This result has a certain intuitive justi- fication. If the Archbishop of Canterbury tells you that he believes in God, he con- veys little information. You expect him to say this. That is, this “message” is much more probable than its opposite. If, how- ever, he should tell you that he doesn’t be- lieve in God, you would attach considerable weight to his statement. It is a very im- probable statement, so he must have thought about it carefully before making it! Let us return to the information formula I = —log P and apply it to a very short message of one character. If this is the 2 character, it carries the information I; = —log p; The average information per character is then the average value of J; weighted by the probability of the 7 character, or WE pil: = —DE pi log pi = H as before. It is easily shown that the average information per character (#7) is maximized by making all p; equal, with the result Elena = log (number of characters in alphabet). It has been said that “one picture is worth a thousand words.” This can be roughly analyzed mathematically. Consider PAGE: INFORMATION THEORY 247 for simplicity all possible 5-letter words made up of 26 characters chosen with equal probability. This is a very crude approxi- mation to English but will serve for the illustration. The average information per letter will be H = log 26 = 4.7 bits/letter. A thousand words will carry on the average 23,500 bits of information. Now consider the picture as consisting of 10,000 square elements (100 xX 100) independently dark- ened to different shades of gray. How many shadings must be available for the picture to carry our 23,500 bits of information? Each element must carry 2.35 bits, or the logarithm (to the base 2) of the number of available shades must be 2.35. This yields 5.1 shades, a physically absurd answer. We conclude that five shades will carry almost enough information, six will give more than needed. The general theory of communication is based on the probability concepts we have been discussing. To an engineer a communi- cations ‘“‘source”’ might mean a broadcasting station, a phonograph record, or some other physical entity. In the mathematical pic- ture, the source is the ensemble of messages to be handled, that is, a class of messages with assigned probabilities. A communica- tion system is not designed to handle par- ticular messages, but to handle a whole class of messages with the best average re- liability. The class of messages may be of infinite number, with the probabilities de- scribed in terms of a random process for generating successive elements of a message. With the element probabilities given, and the elements independently chosen, the average information per element, H = —p; log p;, can be thought of as the aver- age uncertainty of the generating process. If the elements are generated at the rate of N per second, we can speak of the average uncertainty rate, —NZp; log p;, as the aver- age rate at which information is generated and transmitted. By analogy with statis- tical mechanics, the average uncertainty is called the “entropy” of the source. Hence we describe a source in terms of its entropy rate. We shall denote this by H(x), the x referring to the source. If the generated by the source are received as sent, the rate at which information is received or communicated is obviously the same as the messages 248 rate at which it is sent. This can be ex- pressed by the fact that reception has com- pletely removed the uncertainty as to what message was sent. If, on the other hand, messages are corrupted in transit, some in- formation is lost. We can say that there is a residual uncertainty not removed by recep- tion, or that the reduction of uncertainty is less than the original uncertainty. A natural definition of the amount of informa- tion received is “the reduction, due to re- ception, of the original uncertainty of what was sent.’’ Dividing by the time for com- munication, we obtain the rate of communi- cation of information. Letting H(x) denote the original uncertainty of the source, and H,(x) the residual uncertainty, ie., the uncertainty when the recetved message (y) is known, we have for the rate of commu- nication: Jin = 1E(@e) = Jeb (@)- This can also be interpreted as: (Average rate of sending information) minus (Average rate of losing information). Similarly let H(y) denote the uncertainty of the corrupted message to be received, and H,(y) the irrelevant uncertainty intro- duced by the source of corruption, the noise on the communication channel. The symbol H,(y) indicates the uncertainty of the re- ceived message (y) when the sent message (x) is known. We can consider H,(y) as the “false information” in the received message, so that the net rate of receiving (intended) information is: k = Hy) — H,(y). The two expressions for R can be com- bined to yield the following expression for the loss of information, or residual uncer- tainty of the message: lelo{Ge) == Jeh@) a= JeL@) — 18@). The three terms on the right are, respec- tively: (1) The uncertainty of the source; (2) the uncertainty of the perturbations; and (3) the uncertainty of the result. It can be shown that H(x) + H,(y) > H(y), the inequality arismg when some of the uncertainty of the changes duplicates some of, the original uncertainty. Hence the loss JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 8 of information equals the loss of uncer- tainty or lack of additivity in the mixing process. This effect is similar to the increase of entropy occurring in the mixing of iso- topes. For a given communication channel, that is, given corruption effects H,(y), the statis- tics of the source can be adjusted to maxi- mize the rate of communication. This is the statistical analog of impedance matching. The maximum rate so obtained is called the capacity of the channel. It was shown by Claude Shannon, of the Bell Telephone Laboratories, that any source generating information at a rate R < C ean be so encoded as to be communicated over any channel of capacity C with an arbitrarily small error. A special example will serve to illustrate this remarkable theorem. Consider a channel handling binary digits and making not more than one error per block of seven digits. We shall see how to encode a message so as to transmit it over this channel with absolutely no errors. Associated with each block of seven digits are eight error possibilities: no error, and seven possible error locations. These eight cases can be identified by three binary digits. Let the case of no error be arbitrarily called an error in position zero. Then the possible error positions can be identified by the fol- lowing code: Identification 000 Error Position o Noone wnd rh = So o The last four error positions are distin- guished by an initial 1 in the code. A scheme for automatically generating a 1 in case the error is in one of these positions would eliminate half the possibilities. Similarly, automatic schemes for determining the other two binary digits would result in complete location of the error. Since the information is being transmitted by binary characters, location of the error allows correction of the error, since there are only two different characters. Such a scheme has been devised. Let the seven digits of the Aveust 1951 message block be denoted by 2%, ®, --- 27. If these digits are such that te oe @ 4= G6 oe & = O (ance! 2), that is, if there is an even number of 1’s among these four, then changing any one of these will make the sum = 1 (mod 2). Thus if the error occurs in position 4, 5, 6, or 7, the distinguishing 1 will be generated. Similarly, the second digit of the error iden- tification can be found if the transmitted digits x2, 3, %—, v7 are so related that XM + x3 + xe + x; = 0 (mod 2). The last digit is determined by initially specifying X + x3 + x25 + 2; =O (mod 2). In these three conditions, the digits x, 2, XY, appear singly and separately, so these three digits can be chosen to satisfy the conditions, no matter what 23, @5, v., and x; may be. The latter four can be chosen arbitrarily, 1.e., used to carry information, and the other three adjusted to meet the conditions. For example, suppose we wish to send the message 1011. Then xz; = 1, +; = 0, % = 1, 7 = 1, and we must make x = 0, x2 = 1, vs = O to satisfy the three conditions. The sequence transmitted is 0110011. Now suppose the fifth digit is changed in trans- mission; we receive 0110111. What was sent? Testing by the first condition, we find X4 + X5 + x5 + 27 = 1 (mod 2), 1.e., an odd number of ones among the last four digits. The first digit of the error identification is therefore 1. The second condition gives ip 3F Gp ap 2g 4p éfy = Ih ap ISP ib Sp ihe] 0 (mod 2), and the third one gives a t+atata=O+t14+14+1=1 (mod 2). The error is therefore identified by 101, which refers to position five. We change the PAGE: INFORMATION THEORY 249 fifth digit and have the original message. In practical communication, we are more concerned with information represented by continuous functions than by discrete se- quences. Telephony utilizes a voltage wave, for example, and direct speech an acoustic pressure wave. Unfortunately the statis- tical mathematics dealing with ensembles of random functions is very complex. I can do no more here than to present. briefly some of the results in this field. The characteristics of an ensemble of continuous functions are described partly by a statistical term, and partly by the power spectrum, or distribution of the power versus frequency by Fourier analysis. It has been found that the worst kind of noise has a so-called Gaussian statistical distribution, and that the best source for combatting such noise has also a Gaussian distribution. My remarks will therefore be confined to this case. Analysis shows that the best power spectrum for the source, 1.e., the best distribution versus frequency of the total source power, is such that the received signals have a “flat”? spectrum. That is, the received power should be uniformly dis- tributed over the frequency range used. This means that the source spectrum should be complementary to the noise spectrum, we try to send more message where there is less noise, and vice versa. This result agrees with the familiar pre-emphasis tech- niques of frequency modulation and some recording processes. With this complemen- tarity satisfied, we achieve a _ channel capacity that can be expressed as : IP Css Welog: (1 +7) where W is the width of the frequency band used, P is the total signal power in this band, and N the noise power. This funda- mental relation shows how bandwidth may be traded for power, or vice versa, and has had engineering applications. 250 ETHNOLOGY — JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 8 Utilization of animals and plants by the Micmac Indians of New Brunswick.! FRANK G. SprecK,? University of Pennsylvania, and Ratpu W. Dexter, Kent State University. (Communicated by John C. Ewers.) In the summer of 1949 the writers went in search of further information on the utiliza- tion of animals and plants by American In- dians, continuing the studies already pub- lished (Speck and Dexter, 1946, 1948). We were fortunate in finding near Limington, Maine, Mr. and Mrs. Louis Francis, who had come from the Micmac band at Richi- buecto, New Brunswick. They are familiar with the hunting and fishing activities in their native region from their own experience and through contacts with older people there, and to them we are greatly indebted for their unstinted cooperation in this ethno- ecological study. We were able to learn from them the principal animals and plants that have been utilized, especially those used for food. Most of such practices have been handed down from ancient days. This in- vestigation centered around food and its procurement, but other uses were brought out incidentally, particularly the multiple uses of certain food organisms, and such in- formation is included in this report. Informa- tion from our informants has been correlated with the archeological, ethnological, and bio- logical publications on the region. Medical use was not investigated, since that is a special study in itself and some material has already been published on that subject (Hagar, 1896; Speck, 1917; Wallis, 1922; Stone, 1932). The culture of these Northeastern Indians has always tied them close to nature, since originally they depended almost entirely upon the harvest of natural resources. Even 1 Acknowledgment is made to the Faculty Re- search Fund (Grant no. 594), University of Penn- sylvania, for Scat assistance in this project. 2 In the course of preparing this study for pub- lication, Dr. Speck passed away on February 6, 1950. Through the kindness and efforts of Mrs. Frank G. Speck and John Witthoft, Pennsylvania Historical Commission, Harrisburg, it was pos- sible for the junior author to complete the manu- script very nearly as it was originally planned. Mr. Witthoft is responsible for the transcription of the phonetic forms from Dr. Speck’s field notes, and any errors present are due to misinterpreta- tions of his handwriting, which suffered with his failing health. Valuable suggestions were made by Mr. Witthoft and by Ernest 8. Dodge and Wendell S. Hadlock, of the Peabody Museum, Salem, Mass., all of whom read the manuscript critically. today this relationship persists. Modern eco- nomic life still consists largely of fishing, trapping, hunting and serving as hunting guides, lumbering, and _— splint-basket weaving. Agriculture has developed exten- sively only within historic time. Undoubt- edly two important reasons why agriculture did not develop to a high degree were the poor soil and the short growing season which imposed limitations (Hadlock, 1947a). This is a good example of the way in which en- vironment determines economic develop- ment. Wissler (1926) has pointed out that “students of culture are well agreed that the objective forms taken by aboriginal tribal cultures are determined by the features of the environment to which native life has been adjusted.” Sears (1932), writing about the environment of the Northeast in general, has explained that ‘‘the vigorous growth of forest, abundance of fish and game, rigorous winters, and tendency of much of the land when cleared to become acid were in no sense, at any time, a stimulus to agricul- ture.”’ Native animal life, on the other hand, permeated the entire life of the Micmac culture. Their rich folklore, of which much has been recorded, is largely concerned with hunting and fishing activities, or involves animals of the chase, and their magico-reli- gious beliefs centered around animal spirits. Art was expressed chiefly on the skins, bones, and teeth of animals. A significant portion of their social organization was concerned with the family hunting territory system. Their housing and clothing at one time were made largely from animal skins. Some of their native medicines were derived from animal products. Their food consisted chiefly of the spoils of fishing, hunting, and trapping pursuits of the men. Such activities took place along the seashore, in the tidal imlets and saltwater ponds, rivers, marshes, bot- tomland swamps, and in the forests of mixed conifers and hardwoods and their glades. This animal diet was supplemented by the gathering of fruits, berries, nuts, seeds, roots, and similar plant products by the women. Little, if any, cultivation was practiced, al- Aveust 1951 SPECK though in protohistoric times planting of maize, squash, and beans was carried out. Let us enumerate, then, the principal wild animals and plants which have been utilized by the Miemac for food with special refer- ence to the coastal band at Richibucto. Ad- mittedly, a complete study can not be made with the information from two informants, but certainly the most important natural food products would come to the attention of those who have lived in the community under investigation. Our own notes have been supplemented with gleanings from pub- lished accounts. Originally it was planned to prepare a table of organisms known to be used by the Micmac with a column for the native names used by this group of Indians. This was not completed before the death of Dr. Speck. John Witthoft has since tran- seribed the phonetics recorded by Dr. Speck in the field for use by the writer. We dis- covered that a complete list of names was not made, as Dr. Speck undoubtedly de- pended upon memory for those Indian words well known to him. For this reason, Table 1 was not completed as planned, but in each case where the Indian name was recorded, it is given in the text. This investigation was approached through a synthesis of the special interests of the collaborators. The ethno- logical phases were handled by the senior author, who often conversed with the in- formants in their native dialect, while the biological and ecological phases were handled by the junior author. A similar report on the Malecite Indians of the St. John River Val- ley of New Brunswick, investigated at the same time, will be published at a later date. THE COASTAL MICMAC INDIANS OF RICHIBUCTO The Micmac Indians of coastal Nova Scotia and eastern New Brunswick have long attracted the attention of anthropolo- gists. The prehistoric culture of these north- eastern shore dwellers, so far as it is known, has been described through the archeological papers of Jones (1864), Patterson (1889), Piers (1895, 1912), and Smith and Wintem- berg (1929). Ethnological descriptions have been given by the early travelers, visitors, and clergymen who lived among the Micmac, particularly in the writings of Maillard AND DEXTER: UTILIZATION OF ANIMALS BY THE MICMAC 251 (1758), Rand (1850), Elder (1871), Hagar (1895), Chamberlain (1904), Denys (trans- lated by Ganong, 1908), Le Clereq (1910), and Lescarbot (translated and reprinted, 1928). Modern scientific studies have con- tinued to chronicle the culture of the sur- vivors of these neolithic hunting and fishing people in such publications as those of Speck (1922), Flannery (1939, 1946) and Cooper (1946). Miemae folklore has been recorded by Leland (1884), Rand (1894), Alger (1897), Prince (1906), Speck (1915a), Parsons (1925), and Michelson (1925). The Micmac Indians long depended upon marine resources for food, especially during the summer months. Probably the great majority of this tribe lived on or near the coast; Le Clercq (1910) pointed out that the summer months were spent at the seashore where fish and meat were dried and smoked for winter use. Those living at Richibucto at the mouth of the Richibucto River obtained much of their subsistance from the marine resources of Big Cove. Marine life played a very important part in the economy of these seashore dwellers. The mollusks, particu- larly, were utilized. Ganong (1889) many years ago wrote that “the most valuable to man by far, in all the groups of mvertebrates, is that of the Mollusca. In all parts of the world, savages and civilized men have utilized its members.”’ In his monograph Ganong gives a complete list of mollusks that have been used by the inhabi- tants of Acadia. Further information is available in the reports on shell heaps which have been excavated in the region. These give mute evi- dence that the shelled animals especially were harvested by the Micmac over a long period of time, and that they formed the great bulk of the diet of these Indians during the warm months of the year. In the mud flats during periods of low water the soft-shell clam (¢s) is easily available. Its tenderness and flavor have made it a favorite as a food mollusk by all groups of mankind living within its range. Shells of this species make up a large percentage of the shell mounds. The razor clam was also dug from the mud and sand flats although not in such abundance as the soft-shell clam. In mussel beds over the tidal sediments and on rocky shores the blue mussel erows in abundance. Lescarbot, writing in 1609, is quoted by Ganong saying, “The Miemae have a superstition, not to wish to eat mussels (1, 252 edulis), yet they cannot give a reason for it— nevertheless, in our company, seeing us eat them, they did likewise.”’ The number of blue mussels in kitchen middens, however, would indicate that at one time it was a popular item of food. Attached to these mussel beds, and on the rocks of the lower shore line, live the boat shells or slip- per shells, which have long been considered a delicacy by the North American aborigines of the Atlantic coast. Along the exposed shore at times of perigee tides, the sea clams or hen clams were gathered. These were boiled and made into a stew. The shells have been used in recent times for decoration about homes and gardens. In the shallow waters of the inlets and salt-water ponds the quahog has been collected in abundance. Besides being an important item of food, the shells were used as a source of purple wampum. Piers (1912) quoted Lescarbot making the claim that wampum was obtained by barter with the New England Indians. How much actual manu- facture of wampum beads (Kwayo’psu) was car- ried out by the Micmac is not known although the quahog shells were available to them. Today, however, the quahog is only rarely found be- tween Cape Cod and the Gulf of St. Lawrence. Wampum among the Micmac was used for orna- ments and ceremonies rather than money. Denys (1908) mentions that the wampum beads were originally strung on tendon removed from the spine of a moose. A Micmac wampum belt is described and illustrated in Bulletin 4 of the Free Museum of Science and Art of the Uni- versity of Pennsylvania (author not given). This belt is an example of the use of wampum for symbolic purposes and is believed to commemo- rate the friendly alliance of two Christian commu- nities among the Indians. This type is sometimes called a “missionary belt.’’ Another valuable shellfish is the oyster (ma’nd- amu(-x pl.)). Again, oysters are no longer found in any significant abundance between Cape Cod and the shores of eastern New Brunswick on the Gulf of St. Lawrence, although they are abundant in many prehistoric shell heaps in the intermediary area. With the coastal Micmac, how- ever, this bivalve mollusk was nearly as impor- tant as it was to the Wampanoag of southern Massachusetts. Quantities of oyster shells have been found in refuse heaps in both places. Ganong (1889) places this mollusk first m importance although shell heap studies in Micmac territory do not always indicate this to be true. Often, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 8 shells of the soft-shell clam are far more numer- ous. Ganong probably based his appraisal on the use of the oyster over a long period of time, with special reference to use in recent times. Besides being an important item of food, oyster shells were used to polish wood for their bows, accord- ing to Denys (1908). Scallops are listed by Gan- ong as the third most important group of mol- lusks utilized in the New Brunswick area. The horse mussel and two snails, the sand-collar snail and the English whelk, were also used according to the findings in refuse heaps, al- though Mr. Francis did not know of their being used in recent times. Shellfish at one time were a very important part in the economy of the coastal Micmac. They were used for food, bait, orna- ments, and for temper in the manufacture of pottery. Pottery was often made by these people, but their efforts were very crude. Sea shells were powdered for use as temper in some of the pottery they did make. Piers (1895) has described the use of seashells as ornaments fastened to the ears, neck, bodies, arms, and legs of the Indians. Shells of all species mentioned above have been found in refuse heaps excavated in Micmac territory except the razor clam. Mr. Francis did not know of its use, but Cooney (1832) and Denys (1908) listed it among others eaten by these people. Shells of several small species of snails (e.g., Thais lapillus and Urosalpinx cinereus) have also been identified, but probably these were gathered incidentally, especially the latter species which is the oyster drill, a predatory snail, commonly found feeding on the oyster. Fowler (1871) has called attention to the fact that many shell heaps have been washed out by the sea. Undoubtedly many such deposits have been destroyed in the past. Smith and Wintem- berg (1929) found many shells that had been used for food but did not discover any imple- ments made from the shells nor did they find any wampum. They found three shells of Cepaea hortensis, a land snail (mi‘ktcick). This species has been thought by some zoologists to be a European introduction. Its discovery in Indian shell heaps is, therefore, of notable interest. Its use by the Indians, if any, is questionable. Also, the snails may have burrowed or been carried underground by animals in recent times. Squids were at one time commonly eaten. Denys (1908) described the method of capturing them as follows. Duringa rising tide (we’tckaba‘x) a bonfire was built on the shore. Squid, attracted Auveust 1951 by the light, swam into shore and were stranded on the beach as the tide went down. Other inver- tebrate foods from the sea (ek*ta’?an) include the lobster, the rock crab (indjindja‘ges), and shrimp (tea‘gadji-tc). The lobster was captured with a spear. According to Denys (1908) lobster claws were used as pipes. The crabs and shrimps were used as bait as well as food. Lescarbot, writing in 1606, and Cooney (1832) both list sea urchins and Cooney also mentions starfish among food items, but no other evidence is avail- able on the use of these echinoderms by the Mic- mac. No evidence was uncovered from any source that the horseshoe crab had any part in the econ- omy of these maritime people although it is known to have been used along the New England coast for many purposes. Marine vertebrate animals were also of great importance. Seals (wa’spux) were hunted for food, hides, and oil. The oil was used in cooking, for fuel, and to grease the hair. Seal oil was a delicacy at their feasts. Seal skins spread over needles of the fir tree were used for bedding. While the walrus is now extirpated in this region, it was hunted in former times as indicated by tusks found in the refuse heaps. The ivory was used in the manufacture of such objects as harpoon points and the dice used in the game known as “Indian Dice,” according to Piers (1912). It is believed that the Micmac traded ivory to the Penobscot tribe in Maine. Whales (po’dep) and porpoises (mospe’tc) were obtaimed whenever found stranded on the shore or were harpooned from drift boats. In addition to the use of the oil and meat, the ribs were used for bark peelers and wedges (Smith and Wintemberg 1929). Sea turtles (miktci*te) were similarly captured and utilized. The marine fish were of special impor- tance and have continued so to the present day. Smelt (ga’xpesaw) is the first to appear in the spring followed by the herring (Denys 1908). Smelt were captured by the placing of hurdles across a brook to trap the fish in the head waters (Lescarbot 1928). According to Mr. Francis they were also taken on a fishing line. The herring and their young, known as sardines, were eaten in large quantities. They were also used for fer- tilizer. Mackerel (hdmana’n), capelin, and a spe- cies known to Mr. Francis as the salt-water sun- fish (nago’sit name’te) (which the writers do not recognize), were similarly obtained for use. Fish of the sea bottom which have been utilized are the flounders (ana’gwetc), halibut (psa’nak™), cod SPECK AND DEXTER: UTILIZATION OF ANIMALS BY THE MICMAC 253 (pe’dju), haddock, Norway haddock (now known as rose fish or redfish), cunner, sculpins (me’n- dowe néme’tc), skates (tekana’lowi‘tc), and dog- fish (a’‘lamute name’tc). These demersal fish were obtamed by spearing in shallow water as well as by nets and hook and lines. Oil from the liver of codfish and the flesh of redfish were of economic importance to the Indians long before these became of commercial importance to white man. Jones (1864) suggested that the opercular spines of redfish found in shell heaps were used as an awl for punching holes. Mr. Francis does not know of the dogfish or sculpin being used for food in recent times. The Micmac employed many devices for ob- taining aquatic resources. These included spears (ni-gok), harpoons with points made from bone or walrus ivory, hook and line (m?ki-gana’tk°) made from hemp with fishhooks (m°ki’gan) of bone, fish nets (abi-) with stone sinkers, dip nets (n?ha’ni-ganabi), and fish weirs with a bag net. Fish pounds (haluda’?an) were made to trap the ocean fish in an enclosed basin where they could more easily be captured. Entering the rivers are a number of anadro- mous fishes that were sought by the Indians. Included were the sturgeon, Atlantic salmon (nigo’k), shad (apsa’mu), striped bass (elta’Xte), white perch (wa’pet dja’xtedji-te), tomcod, and the sea lamprey. Most of these were speared at night with the aid of a birch-bark torch. This was particularly true of the sturgeon and salmon. There is only one species of salmon on the Atlantic coast. Our informant spoke of three different types, the “black,” “bright,” and ‘hooked-bill salmon.’’ It is clear that what he believed to be different species were merely variations in color and a difference in sex. The male Atlantic salmon has a protruding lower jaw which has given the name hooked-bill salmon to this sex. Salmon were pursued particularly in June. The method of torch fishing is vividly described in the words of Dr. Speck as follows: “Of equal importance in the taking of fish is a method known as ‘torch fishing’ in use among peoples throughout the forest area of the entire Northeast. Torch fishing (Seksi-gwe’) is resorted to at night by two men who man a hunting canoe (kwi’:den) which is driven to the base of waterfalls where in the North salmon congregate in the spring-run ready to ascend to their spawning beds. The canoe is managed by the steersman whose job is to direct the boat where the man in 254 the bow tells him. The bowman is the actor in this night drama of food getting and sport—for sport it also distinctly is in the minds of the Northern Indians. The bowman is armed with a double bracketed fish spear or leister. With this type of spear he is able to impale large fish which swim within range of his ight. Now let us exam- ine this light which gives the distinct character to this method of taking fish. It consists of a bundle of folded birch bark several feet in length and some inches in thickness tied firmly with splints of basswood and fastened into the cleft of a pole fastened in the bow of the canoe. The torch pole is tilted over the water. When ignited this torch, or flambeau, illuminates a wide space at the side of and at the head of the canoe in which swimming fish can be seen as they rise to the surface apparently attracted by the flare. Then comes the thrust, and the impaled fish is lifted out of the water passed toward the stern and released from the harpoon by the steersman where its flopping carcass is deposited in the bottom of the craft. When the salmon run is on a little flotilla of fishing canoes may be afloat in the pool engaged in this combined sport and food procurement.” Besides the true anadromous fishes, the salt- water trout (me’gwe adogwa’su) enters the mouth of rivers for the winter and spring seasons after the breeding season is over, and there they are captured by the Indians. Salmon, shad, herring, and gaspereau (the fresh-water herring) were formerly smoked for preservation, using the hard- woods for fuel. Very little of this is done today although fish are frequently salted. According to Denys (1908) the fishing canoes were made of slats of cedar covered with birch bark. The bark was sewed with roots of black spruce, and seams were sealed with spruce gum. Paddles were made of beech wood and a sail made from the skin of a moose calf. The fish were brought to shore and dried on gravel beaches and flakes. In winter time hook-and-line fishing was accomplished through holes cut in the ice. In the fresh waters a number of aquatic ver- tebrates were also obtained. Eels (ga’dan) were pursued at night with spear and hook and line. Wallis (1922) mentions the use of the skin of this catadromous fish as a bandage. Whitefish and suckers (kem‘kwet tu’pkwani) were also caught. Our informant never heard of the use of the bow (ha'bi:) and arrow (mate ?‘teli‘gan) in catching fish such as are commonly employed by the Ca- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 8 tawba Indians of South Carolina. In the ponds, frogs (Xato’walan tcko'ltck = bullfrog; itcko’ltck = green frog) and toads of the larger species were gathered for eating the legs. Turtles (mikt- cist), especially the snapping turtles, and their eges were collected for food. The shell of the snapping turtle served as a container. Wallis (ibid.) lists turtle fat as a lubricant in the treat- ment of rheumatism. Reptile lore of the North- eastern aborigines has been treated in an earlier paper (Speck 1923) The fresh-water clams were not eaten to the best knowledge of our informants. Neither is there any evidence from excavations that such ever played a part in the diet of coastal Indians. As the writers found to be the case with the Wam- panoags of Massachusetts, the less desirable fresh- water clams did not attract the Indians because of the abundance and ease of obtaining salt- water shellfish. Waterfowl, especially the ducks and geese (si’nam = Canada goose; md?elewi:te = brant), and their eggs were taken for food. Other birds, listed by our informants from which the eggs were gathered, are the gulls, loons, shorebirds, and the great blue heron. Denys (1908) claimed that the Micmac ate all large birds and their eges except the cormorant, and he added further that the feathers from the Canada goose were used in the making of robes. Water birds were hunted at night im a canoe with a birch-bark torch much as described for salmon fishing. Needles and awls were manufactured from the bones of birds, and bird feathers were used for ornamentation, such as the headdresses made of a few eagle feathers. The aquatic mammals were of especial impor- tance. Muskrat (ki’-wesu), otter (gi:unik), and beaver were trapped for food and hides. Robes were made from the fur of these three especially. Some were painted with a red dye extracted from the roots of small bedstraw (Galiwm tinctorium) (Denys 1908). Speck and Eiseley (1939) and Cooper (1939) described the conservation of beaver by the Northeastern Indians. By proper management they maintained a rather stable population of beaver at selected sites. In the late fall and winter seasons hunting and trapping pursuits claimed the attention of the Micmac. At these times the game was in the best condition, and the pestiferous insects so severe in the summer season are not present. The Indians went inland for hunting at this time Aveust 1951 (Piers, 1912). The physical and b ological en- vironment of the mixed hardwood and coniferous forests of the Northeast is succinctly summarized by Byers (1946), who pointed out that nearly all animal life available was taken in the hunting and trapping activities of the Northeastern area in early times. Denys (1908) has related that hunting was the chief occupation of men and the main source of food in the winter time, and at the funeral of a hunter mourners recited the animals which the hunter had killed in the chase. The upland hunting economy was based upon the family hunting ground system and an under- standing of ecological principles of game popu- lations, their relationship to the environment, and the balance of nature (Speck, 1915b; Speck and Eiseley, 1939; Cooper, 1939; and Hallowell, 1949). Authorities agree that this system is pre- Columbian in origin. At one time the woodland caribou was of special importance in the life of the Northeast Indian. It was an important source of both food and hides. According to Byers (1946), the stomach contents of the caribou as well as the flesh were eaten by the Indians. Dice used in their games were made from the bone of cari- bou (Hagar, 1895); scrapers and knives were pre- pared from the ribs (Elder, 1871). The caribou was hunted on snowshoes made with frames of ash or beech, corded with moose skin or animal intestines, and bow and arrows made from rock maple. Trumpets for calling the animals were made of birch bark. Dogs were used in hunting in which the object was to drive the caribou into deep snow so that the Indians could easily cap- ture and kill them. Ward (1878) has described in detail this method of caribou hunting. The cari- bou is now extirpated from the New Brunswick region, but is still remembered by the older In- dians. Next to the caribou, moose was the most important big game animal. The tongue and nose of the moose were considered a_ special delicacy for food. Grease was boiled out of the bones. The hides were used in the manufacturing of moccasins. According to Denys (1908) cloth- ing, stockings, shoes, and bed coverings were made from moose hide, and the bones were made into pipes. Le Clereq (1910) mentions that the dew claws were used for rattles. Smith and Win- temberg (1929) deseribed chisels made from the antlers, pendants from the incisor teeth, and per- forated toe bones that were probably used in games. The skins of these large animals were used for tent coverings as well as for clothing. Some of SPECK AND DEXTER: UTILIZATION OF ANIMALS BY THE MICMAC 259 the meat was dried and stored and the intestines were stuffed. The meat was cooked in the trough of a log filled with water into which hot stones were dropped for heating. Apparently all parts of these large game animals were used for some- thing. Some believe that the white-tailed deer or Virginia deer (li’‘ntuk) was not present in New Brunswick when white men arrived, but after the woodland caribou was decimated, the deer came into this area (Byers, 1946). However, Smith and Wintemberg reported deer bones (pos- sibly caribou mistaken for deer?) in shell heaps of Nova Scotia which had been adapted by the Indians for use as awls. In any case, this large game animal has taken the place of the caribou in modern times. The black bear (mu’win) was another one of the large forest animals pursued by the prehistoric Micmac for both food and hides. Pendants were made from bear’s teeth. The bear was one of the most popular animals mentioned in the folklore of these people. Hagar (1896) stated that this animal was believed to possess the greatest magical powers of all the animals known to the Indians. Of the smaller forest game, the porcupine (ma’- dawes) was one of the most useful from the point of view of the variety of its contributions to the economy of these Indians. The flesh was eaten and the quills were used for decoration on birch- bark vessels and on clothing prepared from ani- mal skins. The quills were dyed red with a dye obtained from the roots of small bedstraw. Pot- tery has been found (Smith and Wintemberg, 1929) which is believed to be impressed with woven porcupine quills. Wallis (1922) claims that urine from the porcupine bladder was used in the treatment of hearing defects, and the fatty oil of this animal was used as a physic for newborn children. The importance of this animal easily explains why the Malecite referred to the Mic- mac as the “Porcupine Indians” (Matu-es-wi skitchi-nu-uk), according to the statement of Piers (1912). Other important upland game ani- mals were the raccoon (amatei’-ewite), snowshoe rabbit (wabus), woodchuck (mo’namkwete), and the red and grey squirrels (a’dudwete), all of which were used for food and fur. The skunk (abiktcilu), red fox, pine marten, fisher (ap%e- mp’k), mink (dica‘ge’ute), weasel (sk°us), wolf (ba’Xtezem), wolverine (ki’gwadju), and lynx were hunted for their pelts. Grease from many of these was also used in medicine (pirsun); awls were 256 made from the ulna of the red fox and pendants from the teeth of the wolf (Smith and Wintem- berg, 1929). Our informant spoke of five kinds of foxes, but they are all color phases of the red fox. According to Chamberlain (1884), the wolf was common between 1840-60, but it has since disappeared, and the wolverine was not found after the middle of the nineteenth century. In recent times these large carnivores, when they were extant, were killed largely as vermin. Per- haps the most important of the upland game birds was the Canada ruffed grouse (pala’wetc). Our informants were not familiar with the spruce grouse. In modern times the ring-necked pheas- ant has been introduced as it has been elsewhere in North America as a game bird. Denys (1908) included the crow and the robin in his listing of edible birds. The greak auk and the passenger pigeon were also hunted before they became extinct. Hunting and trapping devices used by the Micmace are as follows: Bow and arrow, with the arrowhead of stone or bone; snare traps (nabo- t’a?an); the spring pole (haboawegan); dead falls (ni‘sitaXlo’Xtegan); wooden clubs; stone axes; and knives made from the teeth of beaver. Snowshoes were used in winter hunting. The snowshoe cording frequently was made of the intestines of animals as were the strings on the bows. Dogs were regularly used in hunting. All observers seem to agree that all these primitive neolithic people of Northeastern North America probably utilized, especially for food, almost any animal that could be captured and that all edible portions were consumed, even the marrow of bones obtained by cracking open the large bones. Flannery (1946) claims that even can- nibalism was practiced at one time by the eating of captives taken in war. In spite of their variety of diet and their practice of what we regard as conservation measures (MacLeod, 1936; Speck, 1938), there were times of famine among these hunting and fishing people. Animal remains found in Micmac refuse heaps at various times and at various horizons include the following: Moose Raccoon Rabbit Dog Fisher Caribou Porcupine Seal Wolf Deer? Bear Squirrel Whale Red fox Muskrat | Woodchuck Walrus Lynx Also, the bones of many unidentified fish and birds have been found. Animal bones, however, are not nearly as common as the shells. Smith JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES and Wintemberg (1929) believed that the rela- tively small number of fish bones was explained by the late development of fishing. Loomis and Young (1912), on the other hand, found fish bones in heaps on the Maine coast at the bottom. This was interpreted as a case of the Indians coming to the shore originally for fish, and later acquired the habit of eating shellfish. However, Witthoft (personal communication) has pointed out that fish do not leave such bulky waste as shellfish do, and actually fish bones occur through- out the Maine heaps. Plant resources for the most part were second- ary in importance, although plant products were of particular value in the diet during certain seasons. Halliday (1937) and Morison (1938) have outlined the forest types and enumerated the tree species of New Brunswick. The latter also gives a very good general description of the topography, geology, and climate of the region as well as the forests. From the standpoint of food, the sugar maple or rock maple tree is of greatest interest. Maplesugar (sna’wi-si-smo’gan) and maple syrup (sna’wi-mlas-is) were prepared from this tree dating back to prehistoric times. Denys (1908) explains that the sap was drawn off through porcupine quills. Henshaw (1890) has traced the early history of maple sugar manu- facture by the American Indians. It has already been pointed out that wood from this tree was used in the manufacture of bows, polished with oyster and others shells. From the standpoint of general utility, the canoe birch was undoubtedly of greatest sig- nificance. The wood was used in the manufacture of snowshoes and toboggans (Cooper, 1946) and the bark (ma‘skwes) for the manufacture of canoes, house coverings, boxes, baskets, con- tainers of various kinds, dishes, cooking utensils, and even coffins. It has been mentioned above that the bark was sewed with the roots of black spruce and often ornamented with porcupine quills. It will also be remembered that birch bark was used as a torch in night fishing and a birch-bark trumpet used for calling caribou and moose. Arrow shafts and canoe slats often came from white cedar. Black ash, more commonly called brown ash by the Indians, has been the most common source for basket splints in the manufacture of basketware. Red maple has simi- larly been used. In modern times sweetgrass has been introduced for the weaving of baskets and mats to take the place of rushes which were for- vot. 41, No. 8 Aveust 1951 merly used. White ash was used in the manufac- ture of axe and knife handles. The bark of alder, eim, and hemlock was used in the preparation of dyes. Stone (1932) described the chewing of alder bark for the treatment of wounds, frac- tures, and dislocations. Wood from the conifers was used for kindling and the hardwoods for fuel. Cooper (1946) stated that the wood of birch and conifers was preferred for cooking. Beds were made from the boughs of spruce and fir covered over with animal skins. The leaves of willow trees served as tobacco (tama’wi), and pipe stems were manufactured from willow twigs (Denys, 1908). The bark of certain trees was utilized in the making of drums, and inner bark of some trees (probably the pectin-rich bark of hemlock and pines) served as a famine food (Lescarbot 1928) and as a cure for scurvy. Had- lock (1947b) reported on woven mats which were probably made from bark of either red cedar (juniper) or arbor vitae (white cedar). Wild fruits and berries known to have been gathered during the late summer and early fall SPECK AND DEXTER: UTILIZATION OF ANIMALS BY THE MICMAC 257 seasons were as follows: Blueberry Elderberry Crab apple Huckleberry Cranberry Wild cherry Strawberry Partridgeberry Choke cherry Raspberry Bearberry Blackberry Black and red currants (gooseberries) Acorns (siste’gawet) and nuts were gathered from hazelnut, butternut, beech (beech nuts = swo’mussip*han), and oak trees. Lescarbot (1928) mentions the gathering of peas along the sea- shore. Beverages were prepared from partridge- berries, labrador tea, muskrat root, sarsaparilla, and the bark from hemlock, white pine, black spruce, white spruce, balsam fir, rock maple, moosewood, and wild-cherry trees. Most of these beverages or teas were employed as medicines. Tubers of the wild potato (tab’adank), called artichokes by the Indians, were dug up for food. The dandelion (si-smo’ni mia’tckewe), since its introduction from Europe, has been gathered for greens just as it has been used by white man for the same purpose. The roots of gold thread and muskrat root or sweet flag (ki-we’swapsk°) were chewed for their medicinal value. TABLE 1.—ANIMALS AND PLANTS UTILIZED BY THE Micmac INDIANS, CHIEFLY FOR Foop or Foop PRocUREMENT Scientific Class fication English Name Scientific Classification English Name PELECYPODA: Ostrea virginica Pecten grandis Pecten islandicus Modiolus modiolus Mytilus edulis Spisula solidissima Mercenaria mercenaria Ensis directus Mya arenaria GASTROPODA: Cepaea hortensis Polinices heros Crepidula fornicata Buccinum undatum CEPHALOPODA EcHINODERMATA: Asteroidea Echinoidea CRUSTACEA: Cragonidae Homarus americanus Cancer trroratus PiscEs: Petromyzon marinus Squalus acanthias Raja spp. Acipenser oxyrhynchus Anguilla bostoniensis Clupea harengus Alosa sapidissima Coregonus clupeaformis Salmo salar Salvelinus fontinalis Oyster Deep-sea scallop; giant scallop Scallop Horse mussel Blue mussel; edible mussel Sea clam; hen clam Quahog; hard-shell clam Razor clam Soft-shell clam; long-neck clam Sand-collar snail Boat shell; slipper shell English whelk Squid Starfish Sea-urchins Shrimps Lobster Rock crab Sea lamprey Spiny dogfish Skates Sturgeon Eel Herring Shad Whitefish Atlantic salmon Salt-water trout; brook trout Pisces (Continued): Mallotus villosus Osmerus mordax Scomber scombrus Roccus saxatilis —? Morone americana Sebastes marinus Tautogolabrus adspersus Cottidae Microgadus tomcod Gadus morhua Melanogrammus aeglifinus Hippoglossus hippoglossus Lophopsetta aquosa Pseudopleuronectes ameri- canus Catastomidae Perca flavescens AMPHIBIA: Rana catesbiana Rana clamitans Reprivia: Chelydra ser pentina Chrysemys picta Cheloniidae; Dermocheli- dae Aves: Gavia immer Ardea herodias Branta canadensis Branta bernicla Anatinae; Nyrocinae Capelin Smelt Mackerel Striped bass Salt-water sunfish White perch; sea perch Redfish; Norway haddock Cunner Seulpins Tomeod Cod Haddock Halibut Sand flounder Winter flounder Suckers Yellow perch Bull frog Green frog Snapping turtle Painted turtle Sea turtles Loon | Great blue heron Canada goose Brant Surface ducks feeding and diving 258 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON TABLE 1.—(Continued) ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vot. 41, No. 8 Scientific Classification English Name Scientific Classification English Name Aves (Continued): Bonasa umbellus Charadrioidea Larinae Plautus impennis Ectopistes migratorius Corvus brachyrhynchos Turdus migratorius MAMMALIA: Euarctos ameri anus Procyon lotor Martes americana Martes pennanti Mustela cicognani Mustela vision Gulo luscus Lutra canadensis Mephitis mephitis Vulpes fulva Canis lycaon Lyn canadensis Phoca vitulina Phoca groenlandica Odobenus rosmarus Marmota monax Sciurus carolinensis Castor canadensis Ondatra zibethica Erethizon dorsatum Lepus americanus Odocoileus virginianus Alces americana Rangifer caribou Cetacea GyYMNOSPERMAB: Pinus strobus Larix laricina Picea glauca Picea mariana Abies balsamea Tsuga canadensis | Ruffed grouse Shorebirds Gulls Great auk Passenger pigeon | Crow Robin Black bear Raccoon Marten Fisher Weasel Mink Wolverine Otter Skunk Red fox Wolf Lynx Harbor seal Greenland seal Walrus Woodchuck Gray squirrel Beaver Muskrat Poreupine Snowshoe rabbit; varying hare White-tailed deer; Virginia deer Moose Woodland caribou Whales and porpoises White pine Tamarack White spruce Black spruce Balsam fir Hemlock GyYMNOsPERMAE (Continued): Thuja occidentalis Juniperus spp. ANGIOSPERMAE: Zostera marina Hierochloé odorata Acorus calamus Salix spp. Juglans cinerea Corylus sp Betula spp. Betula papyrifera Alnus spp. Fagus grandifolia Quercus spp. Coptis groenlandica Ribes spp. Pyrus coronaria Crataegus spp. Fragaria virginiana Rubus, spp. Prunus spp. Apios americana Acer pennsyluanicum Acer saccharum Acer rubrum Aralia nudicaulis Ledum groenlandicum Arctostaphylos alpina Gaylussacia spp. Vaccinium spp. Fraxinus americana Frazinus nigra Mitchella repens Sambucus canadensis, S. pubens Helianthus tuberosus Taraxacum officinale White cedar; arborvitae Red cedar; juniper Eelgrass Swee‘grass Muskrat root; sweet flag Willows Butternut Hazelnut Birches Canoe birch; paper birch Alder Beech Oaks Goldthread Currants; gooseberries Crab apple Hawthorn Strawberry Raspberries; dewberries Wild cherries; black cherries; beach plum; sand plum Wild bean; groundnut Moosewood; striped maple Sugar maple; rock maple Red maple Sarsaparilla Labrador-tea Bearberry Huckleberries Blueberries; cranberries White ash Black ash; brown ash Partridgeberry Elderberries blackberries; Artichoke; wild potato Dandelion ANON. CHAMBERLAIN, Cooney, Brunswick and Gaspé. Coorrer, J. M. Is the Algonquian family hunting ground system pre-Columbian? 1939. LITERATURE CITED Aucer, A. L. In Indian tents; stories told by Penobscot, Passamaquoddy, and Micmac In- dians: 139 pp. Boston, 1897. Micmac wampum belt. Free Mus. Science and Art, Univ. Pennsylvania Bull. 4: 184-187. 1898. Byers, Douaras 8. east. The environment of the north- In: ‘Man in Northeastern North Amer- ica.’’ Papers Robert 8. Peabody Foundation for Archeology 3: 3-32. son. 1946. Brunswick. wick 1(3) art. 4: 37-40. The Indians in New Brunswick in Cham- Acadiensis 4: 280-295. History of northern New plain’s time. ROBERT. throp. 41: 66-90. MonvraGueE. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. New Bruns- Edited by F. John- Mammals of New 1884. 1904. Halifax, 1832. Amer. An- The culture of the northeastern Indian hunters: A reconstructive interpretation. In: “Man in Northeastern North America.” Papers Robert S. Peabody Foundation for Archeology 3: 272-306. 1946. Denys, Nicouas. Edited by F. Johnson. The description and natural history of the coasts of N. A. (Acadia) trans. & ed. by W. F. Ganong. 1908. The aborigines of Nova Scotia. Soc. 2: 625 pp. Evper, WILLIAM. North Amer. Rey. 112: 1-30. An analysis of coastal Al- Catholic Univ. Amer. An- FLANNERY, REGINA. gonquin culture. throp. Ser. no. 7: 1-219. Publ. Champlain 1871. 1939. The culture of the northeastern Indian hunters: A descriptive survey. In: ‘‘Man in Northeastern North America.”’ Papers Robert S. Peabody Foundation for Archeology 3: 263- 271. Edited by F. Johnson. 1946. Aueust 1951 Fower, JAMES. On shell heaps. Ann. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. for 1870: 389. 1871. Ganone, W.F. The economic Mollusca of Acadia. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. New Brunswick no. 8 (art. 1): 3-116. 1889. Hapiock, WENDELLS. War among the Northeast- ern Woodland Indians. Amer. Anthrop. 49(2): 204-221. 1947a. The significance of certain textiles found at Redbank, New Brunswick, in relation to the history of the culture area. Acadian Nat. 2(8): 49-62. 1947b. HaGar, STANSBURY. Micmac customs and tradi- tions. Amer. Anthrop., o.s., 8: 31-42. 1895. Micmac magic and medicine. Journ. Amer. Folk-lore 9: 170-177. 1896. Hauiipay, W. KE. D. A forest classification for Canada. Canada Dept. of Mines and Re- sources. Lands, Parks and Forests Branch. Forest Service Bull. 89: 50 pp. Ottawa, 1937. Hapowe it, A. 1. The size of Algonkian hunting territories: A function of ecological adjustment. Amer. Anthrop. 51(1): 35-45. 1949. Hensuaw, H. W. Indian origin of maple sugar. Amer. Anthrop. 3: 341-351. 1890. Jones, J. M. Communication concerning Kitchen- middens at St. Margaret’s Bay, Nova Scotia. Ann. Rep. Smithsonian Inst. for 1863: 370- 371. 1864. LECLERCQ, CHRISTIEN. New relation of Gaspesia. Trans. and ed. with reprint of original by W. F. Ganong. Publ. Champlain Soe. 5: 452 pp. 1910. Lrenanp, CHarites G. The Algonquin legends of New England, or myths and folk-lore of the Micmac, Pasamaquoddy, and Penobscot tribes. Boston, 1884. Lescarsot, Marc. Nova Francia, a description of Acadia, 1606. Trans. by P. Erondelle 1609 with intro. by H. P. Biggar. 346 pp. New York, 1928. Loomis, F. B., anp Youne, D. B. On the shell heaps of Maine. Amer. Journ. Sci., ser. 4, 34: 17-42. 1912. Macigop, W. C. Conservation among primitive hunting peoples. Sci. Monthly 43(6) : 562-566. 1936. Mariuarp, A. 8S. Account of the customs and manners of the Micmakis and Maricheets: 138 pp. London, 1758. Micurerson, Truman. Micmac tales. Amer. Folk-lore 38: 33-54. 1925. Morison, M. B. The forests of New Brunswick. Canada Dept. of Mines and Resources. Lands, Parks and Forests Branch. Forest Service Bull. 91: 112 pp. 1988. Parsons, Euste C. Micmac folk-lore. Amer. Folk-lore 38: 55-133. 1925. Journ. Journ. SPECK AND! DEXTER: UTILIZATION OF ANIMALS BY THE MICMAC 259 Partrerson, G. The stone age in Nova Scotia, as illustrated by a collection of relics presented to Dalhousie College. Proc. Trans. Nova Scotian Inst. Sci. 7: 231-252. 1889. Piers, Harry. Relics of the stone age in Nova Scotia. Proc. Trans. Nova Scotian Inst. Sci. 9: 26-58. 1895. Brief account of the Micmac Indians of Nova Scotia and their remains. Proc. Trans. Nova Scotian Inst. Sci. 13: 99-125. 1912. Prince, Joun D. A Micmac manuscript. Proc. 15th Int. Congr. Americanists, Quebec: 87- 124. 1906. Ranp, Stuas T. A short statement of facts relating to the history, manners, customs, languages, and literature of the Micmac tribe of Indians. Halifax, 1850. Legends of the Micmacs. London, 1894. Sears, Paut B. The archeology of environment of eastern North America. Amer. Anthrop. 34: 610-622. 1932. SmitH, Hartan A., AND WINTEMBERG, W. J. Some shell-heaps in Nova Scotia. Canada Dept. Mines, Nat. Mus. of Canada, Bull. 47: 1-192 (anthrop. series, No. 9). Ottawa, 1929. Speck, Frank G. Some Micmac tales from Cape Breton Island. Journ. Amer. Folk-lore 28: 59-69. 1915a. The family hunting band as the basis of Algonkian social organization. Amer. An- throp. 17: 289-305. 1915b. Medicine practices of the northeastern Al- gonquans. Proc. 19th Int. Congr. American- ists, Washington, 1915: 303-321. 1917. Beothuk and Micmac. Indian Notes and Monographs, no. 22. Heye Foundation, 1922. Reptile-lore of the northern Indians. Journ. Amer. Folk-lore 36: 273-280. 1923. New York and . Aboriginal conservators. Bird-lore 40: 258-261. 1988. Speck, FRANK G., AND DextER, RatpH W. Mol- luscan food items of the Howma Indians. Nau- tilus 60(1):34. 1946. Utihzation of marine life by the Wampan- oag Indians of Massachusetts. Journ. Wash- ington Acad. Sei. 38(8): 257-265. 1948. Speck, Frank G., anp E1setny, L. C. Signifi- cance of hunting territory systems of the Al- gonkian in social theory. Amer. Anthrop. 41: 269-280. 1939. Stone, Eric. Medicine among the American In- dians: 139 pp. 1932. Wauurs, W. D. Medicines used by the Micmac Indians. Amer. Anthrop. 24: 24-380. 1922. Warp, C. C. Caribou-hunting. Seribners Month- ly 17(2): 234-247. 1878. Wissupr, Chark. The relation of nature to man in aboriginal America: 248 pp. New York, 1926. 260 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES PALEONTOLOGY .—New crinoids from the Pitkin of Oklahoma. HaRrrewu L. STRIMPLE, Bartlesville, Okla. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) A prolific crmoid fauna has been dis- covered by Claude Bronaugh, of Afton, Okla., in the upper few feet of the Pitkin limestone formation in outcrops of the Cookson Hills southeast of Fort Gibson, Okla. Specimens have subsequently been collected by Mr. Bronaugh, Mrs. Hazel Bronaugh, Mrs. Melba Strimple, and the author on several field excursions. Several of the new forms are described below. Telikosocrinus, n. gen. Description —Crown is of moderate length, ex- pands rapidly. Dorsal cup composed of five small, upflared IBB, five large BB, five large RR, and three anal plates in normal (primitive) arrange- ment. Forty or more biserial arms are indicated. First bifurcation with the first primibrachial in each ray and a second branching with, or about, the fifth secundibrachial in all rays. Thereafter, the outer rays usually, but not always, continue to their termination without further bifurcation and the inner rays branch again. The next bi- furcation normally takes place in only the outer arms and the fourth dichotomy, when present, occurs only in the ensuing inner rays. Column is moderately pentagonal, pierced by a small pentalobate lumen. Anal tube terminates with a few irregular, upwardly or outwardly di- rected spinose plates. Genotype.—Telikosocrinus caespes, ni. sp. Known range.—Chester, North America. Remarks.—This genus has certain character- istics in common with Pelecocrinus Kirk (1941) and Hydreionocrinus de Koninck (1858). All three genera have more or less erect, cone-shaped dor- sal cups with three anal plates in normal (primi- tive) arrangement. Pelecocrinus is readily sepa- rable in having a round stem, articulating facets which fail to fill distal faces of RR, uniserial arms, and 10 or more primibrachials above an- terior radial. Hydreionocrinus is more difficult to distinguish and is probably closely related. The dorsal cup is shallow, interbasal sutures exceed- ingly short, or absent, and the biserial arms branch only in the inner rays after the second dichotomy. The form described by Laudon (1941) as Pele- cocrinus stereosoma from the middle Pitkin is reported to have uniserial arms with sporadic biserial development. Since the articulating facets of this species fill the distal faces of RR, and as there is no evidence of numerous PBrBr in the anterior ray, the species does not appear to be- long with Pelecocrinus. It seems better assigned as Teltkosocrinus stereosma (Laudon), n. comb. Telikosocrinus caespes, n. sp. Figs. 1-4 Description—Crown moderately expanded, curving slightly inwardly at distal extremity and devoid of ornamentation. Dorsal cup high cone- shaped with a tendency toward a spherical out- line. Sutures are mildly impressed giving cup plates a tumid appearance. Five IBB extend be- yond the columnar scar and are visible in side view of the dorsal cup. Five BB are fairly large and five RR are wide, substantial plates. Three anal plates occupy the broad posterior interradius and are in primitive arrangement. There are approximately 50 biserial arms. First PBrBr are wide, low, axillary and fill distal faces of RR. A biserial arrangement is rapidly attained by the SBrBr and second bifurcation takes place with the fifth to tenth SBrBr. In the holotype and most paratypes the outer rays remain unbranched and the next division of the inner rays takes place normally with about the ninth TBrBr. When another dichotomy occurs it is in an outer ray. A young paratype branches in either the outer or inner rays after the second dichotomy. Pinnules are delicate and not often preserved in place. Anal sac is elongate, extending almost to the distal extremities of the rami. Several spinose, irregular plates mark the termination of the sac. Proximal columnals are mildly pentagonal and are alternately expanded. The lumen is pentalo- bate and small. Measurements in mm.—As follows: Holo- Figured Para- type paratype type Heightvof/crown senesced eee = 21.5 29.6 Heightiofdorsslicup. seer Eee eeee 3.9 Ger 2.8 Maximum width of cup............... 10.2 Tha? Darl Width of 1BBicirclet...-.:......25-.--- Sz) Pat 2.8 Diameter of proximal columnal........ Pat 1.9 2.0 Meng thiotel- poste e eee eee eer ee one 1.5 Ail WidthiofalspostsBusae ee ereeent acres 3.7 2.3 2.4 Length of interbasal suture!........... 1.2 0.5 0.9 engthiofelianteh oe een 2.8 2.0 2.5 Widthiofelwantwkre enkeeeereerereae 5.8 Bot! 4.6 Length of interradial suture!.......... 1.4 13 1.4 Heightiotee Br ee eee eee Eee ee eerre 2.9 2.2 2.8 WidthiofiP Brasco enehke wee: 5.9 3.8 4.5 1 Excluding consideration of surface curvature. vou. 41, No. 8 meh \\ E i Frias. 1-4.—Telikosocrinus caespes, n. gen. and sp.: 1, 2, Holotype from posterior and anterior, X 1.8; 3,4, small paratype from anterior and posterior, X 1.7. Fias. 5-9.—Phanocrinus trreqularts, n. sp.: 5-7, Small paratype from posterior, anterior, and base, X 1.7; 8, 9, holotype from posterior and base, x 1.4. Fras. 10-12.—Phanocrinus modulus, n. sp., holotype from posterior, base, and anterior, X L.8. Fie. 13.—Telikosocrinus residuus, n. sp., holotype from posterior, X 1.7. 262 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 8 Remarks.—This species has a dorsal cup some- : i Holeipe eka 2 Diameter of proximal columnal................-.-.-.-. 3.8 what similar to that of 7. stereosoma (Laudon); Length of 1. post. B..........-..-2+e0ceeeeeeeeeeceees Bell however, the IBB of the latter species are more Width of 1. post. B..... 1... nae 4-8 F Length of interbasal suture........-...-----3-5----- = ile? pronounced and the cup is more elongate. 7. Lensthof loan, Rea 5.0 stereosoma has primarily uniserial arms and a Width of 1. ant. R pie 5.5 stronger tendency toward bifurcation in the outer as eS eee SOLUTE oo ee Re i i eight o De bine slineteie sem Oo eS ee eee 5 rays alter the second mains dichotomy. Onlyone) wiaihionPBm yee 55 of six observed specimens of 7. caespes showed any decided tendency toward bifurcation in the outer main rays after the second branching and all arms were biserial. T. residuus has a more evenly expanded dorsal cup and the arms have a flattened exterior not found in 7’. caespes. Occurrence and horizon.—Approximately 4 miles southeast of Greenleaf Lake, Cookson Hills, Okla.; upper Pitkin limestone formation, Chester, Mississippian. Types.—Holotype and one paratype collected by Melba Strimple. Figured paratype collected by Claude Bronaugh. To be deposited in the U.S. National Museum. Telikosocrinus residuus, n. sp. Fig. 13 Description.—Crown is devoid of ornamenta- tion, expands rapidly and evenly from columnar attachment. Dorsal cup cone-shaped, composed of five IBB, which are visible in side view of cup, five large BB, five large RR, and three anal plates. Posterior interradius is broad and plates are in normal (primitive) arrangement with RA resting obliquely against r. post. B and post. B, supporting RX above. Proximal edge of anal X is in broad contact with post. B and RA to the right. There are approximately 50 arms indicated, exteriors flattened, biserial. First PBrBr low, axillary, fill distal faces of RR. Second bifurea- tion takes place with fourth or fifth SBrBr, there- after, outer rays remain unbranched and inner rays branch with about the nmth TBrBr. After the third bifurcation the inner rays remain un- branched but the outer rays branch again on about the tenth or eleventh QBrBr. Pinnules are rather delicate and of moderate length. Proximal columnal is large, pentagonal. Anal sac has not been observed except for the spinose terminating plates. Measurements 1n mm.—As follows: Holotype Heizhtrofiidorsalicup ree etree EEeeE nee eee re erenrrne 5.4 Maximumbiwidthvotecupareeer nicer nerricininrrr nat 13.9 Widthrof DB Bicincletseenseeee erence cee ree 5.8 Remarks.—Comparison with T. caespes and T. stereosoma have already been given. T. residuus is closely comparable to Hydretonocrinus woodi- anus de Koninck (1858) in some respects. The dorsal cup of the latter species is shallower and the arms have a slightly different pattern in that after the third dichotomy the arms continue to bifurcate only in the innermost rays. Occurrence and horizon—Approximately 4 miles southeast of Greenleaf Lake, Cookson Hills, Okla.; upper Pitkin limestone formation, Chester, Mississippian. Holotype.—Collected by Claude Bronaugh. To be deposited in the U. 8S. National Museum. Genus Phanocrinus Kirk, 1941 Phanocrinus irregularis, n. sp. Figs. 5-9 Description —Crown elongate, tubular-shaped. Dorsal cup shallow, broad, base shallowly con- cave. Five IBB are small, confined to the basal concavity; five BB are large, distal extremities curved into basal concavity where they have broad median grooves; five RR are large, wide; and two small anal plates in posterior interradius. RA is in oblique but broad contact with post. B and supports the slightly larger anal X above. Arms are 10, stout, uniserial, slow tapering. PBrBr are axillary, low, wide. First SBrBr are rather large tall plates but subsequent brachials are low broad plates. Pinnules are of moderate size. Proximal columnals are round and pierced by a small pentalobate lumen. Tegmen is unknown. Entire crown is devoid of ornamentation. Measurements in mm.—As follows: Holo- Figured type paratype Heishtroficrowneereeeeeernteteeeen 2 eee 48.6 28.4 iHeightrofidorsallicups-ereee EEE reenter eer 5.9 3.0 Maximumiiwidthioficuppssee screen se ceeeee 16.8 11.2 Diameter of proximal columnal................ 2.1 1.7 ene thiotels post > eee rere ere Ere errr 6.0 ? Widthtofelsinos tag ase neat ert see eee sae 5.1 3.7 Length of interbasal suture!................... 3.4 ? IbeyeyANN Ot ie, at, To os on osocmeoscocoensuenso> ~ Goll 3.8 \Wisiok doy ores Ghote Ivo Ceoceacovsounvondscboonneo 8.8 6.0 Aveust 1951 Holo- Figured type paratype ISG @i LEB} ea oaooanangapecoonsocoocoeduadacdc 4.1 4.4 IWintkejLimen aly Eee tes cisiciciescre siereaitates eneveiotsrs fetes 8.9 6.0 1 Measurements along curvature of plates. Remarks.—Only five specimens of Phanocrinus have been found in the horizon under study. Of these four are readily identified as P. irregularis and have the advanced arrangement of anal plates wherein RA has migrated to the dominant posterior position with anal X resting on the upper surface of RA, and RX has been entirely eliminated from the cup. It is considered sig- nificant that RA has also become small, thus indicating probable resorption. Such modification of the plates of the posterior interradius has been termed “Developmental Trend A” by the au- thor (1948). Phanocrinus cooksoni Laudon (1941) is closely comparable but has a higher cup with BB par- ticipating strongly in the outer walls of the dorsal cup. Occurrence and horizon——Approximately 4 miles southeast of Greenleaf Lake, Cookson Hills, Okla.; upper Pitkin, limestone formation, Mis- sissippian. Types——Holotype and figured paratype col- lected by Melba Strimple. To be deposited in the U.S. National Museum. Phanocrinus modulus, n. sp. Figs. 10-12 Description —Crown of moderate length, tubu- lar-shaped, with distal extremity tapered to a point. Dorsal cup truncate bowl-shaped, with erect lateral sides. Five IBB are minute, confined to basal concavity and almost entirely covered by proximal columnals. Five BB large, curve strongly out of basal concavity to form a good portion of the lateral walls of the cup. Five RR large, only slightly wider than high. Three anal plates occupy the posterior interradius. RA is large, elongate, rests obliquely on post. B and STRIMPLE: NEW CRINOIDS 263 r. post. B. Anal X is in contact with post. B but is strongly encroached upon by RA to the right. RX is in narrow contact with distal face of RA. There are ten uniserial arms. PBrBr are large, axillary. SBrBr have strongly curved exteriors and are rather stout plates. Proximal columnals are round, small, heavily crenulated. Tegmen is unknown. Measurements in mm.—As follows: Holo- type Height soft crowimasen qicractaccrcke eee eee eee ee 20.1 Heightiofidorsalicup erreeteneiirii enteric cence 3.6 Maximum) wid thioticupsenenieierieeenniee oemiericer. 8.3 Diameter of proximal columnal........................ 1.5 Tengsthrofil: post irB asses eeecaqci sen Geeta ey eee 4.8 Width ofslipostsvBi ce eceeen eee ones eee 3.8 Length of interbasal suture........ SB OU Ciao Ata GR OURS 2.7 engthyofiryanty-Ries ences eee ee aT ea Path Widthrofimvantaih jsateaicriects see inetiet senna 4.0 Length of interradial suture................6.....0000 1.8 HeightrofeR Briss sacs oie eee a Sar iain 2.7 WidthyofsP Bre sasieeseecn nigh coc sien ret ae neta lene nea 4.0 Remarks.—P. modulus is a small species readily distinguished from other described species by the large RA, short stout arms and the outline of the dorsal cup in side view. The nature of the plates in the posterior interradius indicates modi- fication toward ‘Developmental Trend B” as outlined by the author (1948), and is almost identical to figure 4 of that study. Occurrence and horizon—Approximately 4 miles southeast of Greenleaf Lake, Cookson Hills, Okla.; upper Pitkin limestone formation, Chester, Mississippian. Holotype —Collected by the author. To be de- posited in the U. S. National Museum. REFERENCES pE Konincx, L. G. Bull. Acad. Roy. Bruxelles (2) 4: 93-97, pl. 2, figs. 5, 5a. 1858. Kirxk, Epwin. Journ. Pal. 15: 82. 1941. Laupon, L. R. Journ. Pal. 15: 385-386, pl. 56, figs. 1,2. 1941. SrrimeLe, H.L. Journ. Pal. 22: 491-492, figs. 1-8. 1948. 264 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 8 ENTOMOLOGY .—Jordanopsylla allredi, a new genus and species of flea from Utah (Siphonaptera).! Ropert Traus, Major, MSC, and Vernon J. Tipton, Ist Lt., MSC. Under a research grant of the U. 8. Public Health Service, Dr. D. E. Beck and Dorald M. Allred, of the Department of Entomo- logy, Brigham Young University, have been conducting a survey of arthropods of poten- tial medical importance in Utah. In the ex- cellent collection of ectoparasites obtained by these workers is a remarkable flea here described as a new genus of the family Hystrichopsyllidae, subfamily Anomiopsyl- linae. Jordanopsylla, n. gen. Diagnosis.—Unique in that the maxillary lobe is reduced, almost inapparent. Separated from all other genera in the family by the following com- bination of characters: Pronotal and genal combs both absent; unmodified terga with two rows of bristles. The only genus in the subfamily in which any of the following characters is present: A well-developed lateral metanotal area; a striarium on the second abdominal sternum; metatibiae with mesal bristles extending from base to apex; pleural arch distinct. Description.—Clypeal tubercle absent. Pre- antennal region of head with one row of bristles. Postantennal region with but one row of bristles, and that marginal. Eye reduced. Apex of gena subangulate or somewhat rounded, not acumi- nate. Maxillary lobe (Fig. 1, MX.) weakly scle- rotized, reduced, not acuminate. Apical segment of maxillary palpus about 34 times as long as broad. Labial palpus (Z.P.) very long, with apical segment arising distad of trochanter of forecoxa (TR.). Distal segment of labial palpus apically symmetrical, rounded. Pedicel of antenna normal, not ensheathing clavus. Bristles of pedicel longer than clavus (at least in female). Pronotum with one row of bristles; spines completely ab- sent. Lateral metanotal area (Fig. 4, L.M.) broader than long. Pleural ridge of metasterno- some fitting into a well-sclerotized socket (pleural arch) (PL.A.). Metanotum (MTN.) dorsally as long or longer than mesonotum (MSJN.). Mesepi- sternum (MPS.) with anteroventral angle some- what acuminate; without bristles. Metepisternum 1 Published under the auspices of the Surgeon General, Department of the Army, who does not necessarily assume responsibility for the profes- sional opinions expressed by the authors. (MT'S.) broad; dorsally convex; anterior margin evenly arcuate; with a long bristle; squamulum absent or vestigial. Metepimere (M7'M.) free, not fused with metanotum; slightly broader than long. Procoxa with only approximately twelve lateral bristles (including marginals). Mesocoxae and metacoxae with thin mesal submarginal bristles scattered from base to apex. Tibial comb absent. Profemur with a few thin mesal bristles. Metatibia with approximately five dorsomarginal notches bearing paired bristles (including apical clump of three). First segment of metatarsus about two-thirds length of metatibia. All tarsi with but four pairs of plantar bristles on apical segment. Unmodified abdominal terga with first row of bristles distinct but reduced, not reach- ing spiracles. Striartum on second abdominal sternum well developed. Spiracles of metepimere subeylindrical, lacking a distinct ring; those of unmodified abdominal segments similar, but only about one-half the diameter. Some terga with apical spinelets. Female with one antepygidial bristle. Anal stylet with an apical long bristle; others greatly reduced. Female eighth sternum reduced, but with a few very small bristles. Ventral anal lobe (Fig. 3, V.A.L., and Fig. 7) not angulate. Eighth sternum with submarginal mesal bristles. Bursa copulatrix (Fig. 3, B.C.) apically subspherical. Spermatheca (SP.) with tail longer than the subovate head. Genotype: Jordanopsylla allredi, n. sp. The genus is named for Dr. H. E. Karl Jordan, F. R.S., who, in his ninetieth year, is as coopera- tive and helpful as ever, and whose present con- tributions to the systematics of fleas are as out- standing as those which firmly established his reputation as dean of students of Siphonaptera. Jordanopsylla allredi, n. sp. Figs. 1-7 Types.—Holotype female ex Peromyscus eremi- cus. Utah: Washington County, Grafton, coll. D. E. Beck and D. M. Allred, Dec. 17, 1950. Deposited in collections of U. S. National Mu- seum. Paratype female zbid., but from Springdale, Nov. 4, 1950. In collection of senior author. Both specimens somewhat distorted. Male unknown. Description—Herap (Fig. 1): Frontoclypeal region evenly rounded. Anteroventral angle some- Aveust 1951 TRAUB what acuminate, resembling a diminutive snout. Micropunctations or pores scattered from margin to preantennal row of bristles; extending over most of postantennal region. Preantennal row with lowest bristle on genal margin just behind insertion of maxillary palpi (W.P.); middle bristle apparently of variable length but shorter than other two, inserted near uppermost, which is at level of reduced eye. Maxillary lobe (MX.) weak, apparently not extending beyond base of pre- mentum; apically subrounded or subtruncate. Labial palpus (Z.P.) with the last two segments completely extending beyond apex of procoxa. Pedicel of antenna with some short submarginal or marginal bristles, but with most marginals extending beyond apex of subovate club. Clavus almost twice as long as broad. Antennal fossa Se uci eeaiee Bite [Pe —- : a f a) . Va Go C U S f° : . 8 ae. . 0 ’ . a os fe) : E i, SSS ‘ ‘ oF as / Frias. 1-3.—Jordanopsylla allredi, n. gen., n. sp. 3, modified abdominal segments. AND TIPTON: JORDANOPSYLLA ALLREDI — ae 265 with five or six tiny dorsal hairs near caudal margin of head. Postantennal region with a fairly long ventromarginal bristle above middle of club; lowest bristle of marginal row at ventro- caudal angle, above vermiform vinculum; rest of row consisting of three fairly long bristles. THorRAXx: Pronotal row with about five bristles on a side; with very small intercalary bristles between bases of larger ones. Mesonotum (Fig. 4, MSN.) with one complete row of bristles, with intercalaries and two subdorsal, more an- terior, bristles; with about eight mesal pseudo- setae on a side. Mesepisternum (MPS.) with ventral margin much broader than dorsal margin. Mesepimere (MPM.) caudally rounded, with a bristle in anteroventral region and two subcaudal ones. Metanotum (MTN.) with three bristles —S—__— i— O K Hy / LE ——— Y : 1, Head and prothorax of female; 2, spermatheca; 266 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 8 Fias. 4-7.—Jordanopsylla allredi, n. gen., n. sp.: 4, Mesothorax, metathorax, and first tergum; 5, metatibia; 6, anal stylet; 7, ventral anal lobe. 267 TRAUB AND TIPTON: JORDANOPSYLLA ALLREDI Auveust 1951 3YyNSIS YO STVNISUVW ONIGNIONI= 5k ATBLYWIXOUddY ‘LYHM3WOS= F LN3S8V YALIVYVHD = O NOILIGNOD 3LVNU3LIV NV=C ) NVHL Y3LV3Y9 ‘GNOAZE= < 318VvV9liddv LON= - S3liddV YO LN3S3Ud YALIVYVHO= + + WNLONOS3W NO 3¥1L3SO00N3ZSd (SdW) WNNYSLSIDSSIW JO NISUVW TIVYINSAOUZLNY alvonnuiens | aLVONNULEns aaannoyens a3qnnousns aLVONNYLENS ainovens G30NNO YENs 3LVONNULENS | GZGNNOYENAS 3LV1NONVENS C3LVONNULENS) ee ee ee eo Se ee eee eee 3VxX09 X3dVv F 3VX09 X3dVF SYZLNVHOOUL SYSLNVHIOML [ Siemens | Syeote ie | Ragen ee (MOU MOU-1) “IWWYON WWUON WWYON | agonaay | SNAV19 2/1 ; eee ee LYUOHS LYOHS SNAVI9 2/1 snav19< (a39nGay) AVISILSSA AWISILSSA (NISYYW 1VSYO00) WNLONVL3W OL WNLONOS3W -Ollvy (F)yVxX090Ud NO S37LSING IVW¥31V71 30 YASWNN al o = = as SYBLNVHOOUL SYBLNVHIOUL OL + < uv S3171LSING TVNN3LNV3Yd JO SMOY YSEWNN SLVNINNOV GV3H JO STONY TWYLNSAOYUSLNY WYOJINIdS S31LSIN8 GV3H 3WOS + SLVLIDIDSYSSILNI intent er 319y¥3EGNL 1W3dA19 fo] rm 2 & = + + = WwW = ty) (SWIVING |) AVNITIASAOINONY 40 VUANAD :ATAV], TAILVUVANODO—T ATAV], vou. 41, No. 8 WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES JOURNAL OF THE 268 3YNSIs YO STVNISUVW ONIGNIONI= %K AIZLVWIXOUddY ‘LVHMSWOS= = LN3SEV Y3LIVYVHI= O NOILIGNOD ALVNYSLIV NV= C2) NVH1 ¥3LV3"5 ‘GNOAZE= < 3718VIINddv LON= — S3IlddV YO LN3S3Y¥d Y3LOVYVHO= + (3) S3TLSIYS TVIGIOAdSLNY JO YSEWNN 0-2-(2)¢ II-IVv9¥3L—-SLIIINIDS IWIIldv(F) ON TVLOL ° 0 Om t ft S311S!I¥8 JO SMOY 1V9N31 JO Y3GWNN ID LN3W93S IVNIWOGSY NO WNIMVINLS LN3S6V S31LSI¥S YVLNV Id 4O Ylvd LSYIS — HX ISUVL CIT NO LN3seV) aQ39v1dSI0 a39v1dSI0 a39v1dSI0 039v1dSI0 a30v14s10 UNdS ALVNINNIVY IWNISUVWOGNVS HLIM I 8 IL 3VX09 | ze X3dV OL 3SVE WOYS‘S3TILSINE IVS3W HLIM IT 8 I 3VX09 T SASYVLVLAW OL HLON3ST WIGILVLSW :OlLVY S31LSI¥S IWY3LVIOSYOO JO GWOD HLIM VIGILOSIN WNLONVL3W HLIM NOISNS — 3Y3WId3L3W Te WALI (OE WALI ‘S319VYIdS JO Y3LIWVIG :OlLVY “G3AWAOD. = [ WERERED SERDAR] SDE Sa] ALES 1N3W93S IWNINOGSV GNOD3S JO 370VuIdS 40 3dvHS Eatyagoo | Towanss * | aivieo | ToluaHas | Twowwanas + | WOIMGNITAD=| (odS ‘> 91d) 3YSWId3L3W JO 310VuIdS JO 3dvHS Reeder ee ee ae (WNINWYNDS). 319YIENL IWNYZLNI TWNISUVW HLIM SLA WNLONVL3W OL WNANYSLSIDSLIW NISYVW 1VSYOO :Ollvy 22 SAVINOD (SLW) WANYZLSIdSLIW NISUVW YOINZLNY Y3ddN _SI6SHLON = Sigur {Oeil luvmais [_ siehuer | poeiuanva | ‘AON'N3D _ eee ee es ee on | VUBWOISINSLS | SNTTASdOLSITIV)| VITASONIHYONOD |SNSSOTSONHLYVOSN| SNTIASKOINONY | VTTASdONVaNOr ponuryu0)—(SaIVWa |) AVNITTASCOINONY 40 VUANTD :A1AV], FAILVUVANOQ—Z ATAVY, Aveust 1951 preceding a row of four long bristles; the row with intercalaries. Lateral metanotal area (l.M.) with margins well sclerotized; subcordate (in- cluding region overlapping pleural arch); pitched or inclined slightly forward and upward; with two large bristles. Metepisternum (MT'S.) slightly broader than long; with a long bristle near posterodorsal angle. Pleural arch (PL.A.) well developed, approximately twice as broad as long. Metepimere (M7TM.) with about three bristles. Lees: Procoxa with about 12 lateral bristles, including marginals. Mesocoxae and metacoxae with fewer such bristles, but with one and two rows, respectively, of thin mesal bristles near anterior margin. Metatibia (Fig. 5) without mesal bristles. Femur with one or two lateral median bristles and a mesal row of thin bristles. None of bristles of hindtibia longer than length of seg- ment. Measurements of tibiae and segments of tarsi (petiolate base deleted) of holotype shown in microns: Tarsal Segments Leg Tibia I II III IV Vv Pro- 150 55 55 50 45 105 Meso- 275 90 110 70 50 120 Meta- 375 255 150 90 50 130 Second segment of metatarsus with two apical bristles extending distad of apex of fourth segment. ABDOMEN: First tergum (Fig. 4, 77.) with two or three bristles preceding a full row; with one or two apical spinelets per side. Basal sternum with four bristles, the uppermost above the striarium. Unmodified terga with lowest bristle of first row not inserted below third bristle of second row; the second row with intercalaries. Unmodified sterna with about two ventral bris- tles. Seventh sternum (Fig. 3, 7S.) with caudal margin broadly and shallowly concave; with about five longish bristles in an oblique row and three ventromarginal ones in a line with lowest of oblique row; with a few smaller submarginal bristles above first of the ventral row. Eighth tergum (87'.) with only about three short bris- tles above the vermiform spiracle; with three irregular but vertical rows of bristles below the ventral anal lobe, some of those of the first two rows actually mesal; the marginal bristles the longest; with four long median bristles and about five subventral. Highth sternum reduced, but ap- parent, with two short apical hairs. Anal stylet TRAUB AND TIPTON: JORDANOPSYLLA ALLREDI 269 (A.S. and Fig. 6) somewhat more than twice as long as broad; with a long apical bristle and per- haps a vestigial dorsal and ventral one. Ventral anal lobe (V.A.L. and Fig. 7) not heavily scle- rotized; caudally shghtly concave; with long thin marginal bristles and submarginals which are usually shorter. Spermatheca (SP. and Fig. 2) with head ovate, broader than long; tail up- turned but not extending beyond head. Bursa copulatrix (B.C.) angled subapically, the apex subglobose, the proximal portion quite straight and fairly well sclerotized. Comment.—The species is named for one of the collectors, Dorald M. Allred, who is contributing a great deal toward our knowledge of the Utah ectoparasite fauna. AFFINITIES OF JORDANOPSYLLA Many of the features that this genus possesses in common with certain other genera in the family, e. g., the marked reduction in chaetotaxy and the elongate stylets, are probably due to convergent evolution. It has been pointed out elsewhere (Traub, 1950; Traub, in press) that some of these features are considered charac- teristic of fleas which ordinarily are restricted to the nests of the hosts. Holland (1949) is also of the opinion that certain of these genera are nest- inhabiting forms. The reduction of the maxillary lobe in Jordanopsylla is probably an evolutionary step for a parasite which feeds when the host is sleeping, just as “‘sticktight” fleas with stout teeth on the hyperdeveloped stylets (e.g., Hecto- psylla and Rhynchopsyllus) tend to have poorly developed labial palpi. This new genus differs in a number of respects from other members of the subfamily Anomio- psyllinae. Further, these differences are of a greater degree than those between the other genera. Tables 1 and 2 list and compare salient generic characters found in females of Anomio- psyllinae (Jordanopsylla, Anomiopsyllus, Me- garthroglossus, Conorhinopsylla, Callistopsyllus, and Stenistomera). It will be seen that, in addi- tion to the characters presented in the generic diagnosis above, Jordanopsylla is the only mem- ber of the subfamily in which: the metepimere is free; the pleural arch is present; the upper margin of the metepisternum is convex; and the internal marginal tubercle of the metepisternum is ves- tigial. It is felt that this genus represents a new tribe, which may be characterized as follows: i) os | S Jordanopsyllini, n. tribe Clypeal tubercle absent. Integrecipitate. Max- illary lobe reduced. Labial palpus elongate, ex- tending beyond trochanter. Bristles on procoxa reduced in number; mesocoxa and metacoxa with a full vertical row of mesal bristles. Mesonotum subequal to metanotum in breadth. Lateral metanotal area prominent, well demarcated. Metepisternum with anterior and dorsal margins convex, not reduced. Typical spiracles subeylin- drical. Metepimere not fused with metanotum. With a striarlum on basal sternum. One ante- pygidial bristle in female. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Dr. Karl Jordan, of the British Museum, Tring, kindly verified the tribal and generic status of this flea. We are indebted also to Miss Phyllis Johnson, Army Medical Service Gradu- ate School, Washington, D. C., for critical review of the manuscript. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS A.B. Antepygidial bristle A.S. Anal stylet B.C. Bursa copulatrix JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 41, No. 8 L.P. Wabial palpus L.M. Uateral metanotal area MX. Maxillary lobe M.P. Maxillary palpus MPM. Mesepimere MPS. Mesepisternum MSN. Mesonotum MTN. Metanotum MTM. Metepimere MTS. Metepisternum PL.A. Pleural arch of metathorax SP. Spermatheca SPC. Spiracle TR. Trochanter V.A.L. Ventral anal lobe of proctiger 7S. Seventh sternum 17. First tergum 87. Eighth tergum LITERATURE CITED Houuanp, G. P. The Siphonaptera of Canada. Canada Dept. Agr. Techn. Bull. 70 (Publ. 817). Ottawa, 1949. Traus, Ropertr. Siphonaptera from Central America and Mexico: A morphological study of the aedeagus, with descriptions of new genera and species. Zool. Mem. Chicago Nat. Hist. Mus. 1 (1): 1-127, 54 pls. 1950. Records and descriptions of fleas from Peru (Siphonaptera). Proc. Ent. Soe. Washington [in press]. ZOOLOGY .—A luminescent new xystodesmid milliped from California. H. F. Loomis, Coconut Grove, Fla., and Dremorest DAVENPORT, University of California, Santa Barbara College, Santa Barbara, Calif. A luminescent milliped has been dis- covered in central California. While lumines- cent chilopods have been reported, the ques- tion of self-luminous diplopods is still uncertain. There are several references in entomological literature to luminescent crea- tures that may or may not have belonged to this group or that may have been infected with luminous bacteria. In 1949 a field party of plant ecologists in the mountains of Tulare County, Calif., first observed this handsome species at night near their camp and gathered living specimens, which were turned over to the junior author, who made various observa- tions on them and sent preserved specimens to the senior author.! Unfortunately, all specimens were females and impossible to identify beyond placement in the family 1 Our thanks are due Dr. E. N. Harvey, Prince- ton University, Princeton, N. J., for being instru- mental in bringing about the collaboration on the present paper. Xystodesmidae, but a collection made a year later for the purpose of gathering males was successful. Taxonomic study of these speci- mens shows they unquestionably represent an undescribed species and genus with several outstanding structural peculiarities in addition to the phenominal one of being the first authenticated luminescent milliped. Luminodesmus, n. gen. Gentotype.—Luminodesmus sequotae, 0. sp. Diagnosis—Obviously related to the genus Motyxia Chamberlin but with more compli- cated gonopods, there being a fourth ramus, whereas Motyxia has but three; the dorsal tu- berculation shows the greatest development of any known xystodesmid. A tendency to tubercu- lation has been observed in a few of the other species but the majority of them lack this form of sculpture. Description—Body of average size for the family or larger; both sexes strongly convex above. Segments 2, 3, and 4 with lateral carinae Aveustr 1951 directed forward, those of segments 5 to 15 pro- jecting outward, while on segments 16 to 19 they are caudally produced; posterior corners of all segments rounded except those of segment 19, which has them reduced in size but bluntly acute. On segment 1 a few scattered raised pus- tules usually are evident, but they are more evident and numerous on the succeeding seg- ments, and from segment 9 or 10 backward dis- tinct scattered pustules are present on the sides of the dorsum and in a continuous series close to the posterior margin, on segments 17 to 19 there being 14 to 20 tubercules in this series. First joint of legs produced distally below into a short, blunt, conic lobe; second joint with a distal, slender, very acute, spinelike lobe half as long as the joint. Males with a pair of high conic sternal processes between the fourth legs, these lacking in the female, but on the sterna of both sexes thereafter a process is present adjacent to each coxa, the posterior pair of each sternum being most prominent especially on the posterior segments. Gonopods with long basal joint, the outer half of the terminal jot composed of four very dissimilar divisions or branches. Claws on anterior legs of the males not differing from those of the female, being neither enlarged nor abruptly curved beyond middle. Luminodesmus sequoiae, n. sp. Two males, one the type, and several females collected May 12-14, 1950, at campground di- rectly above Camp Nelson at the juncture of Belknap Creek and the south fork of the middle fork of Tule River, Sequoia National Forest, Tulare County, Calif., at an altitude of approx- imately 5,000 feet. Paratype females from same locality collected in mid-May 1949. The species was found at the lower limits of the Sequoia zone, where these giant trees were associated with Pinus, Libocedrus, Quercus, and Acer. The hardwood lower story of this association pro- vided a relatively moist leafy litter in which many of the animals were collected. Male type and paratype females deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. Male and female paratypes deposited in the University of Cali- fornia, Berkeley, and female paratypes in the California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco. Description—Width of the largest specimen, a female, 7.5 mm; the living color light pinkish tan, more pronounced on lateral carinae, a dark internal structure showing through the body-wall LOOMIS AND DAVENPORT: XYSTODESMID MILLIPED Dia down the center of the dorsum. Opening through which the gonopods project transversely lentic- ular-triangular in shape, the posterior margin broadly and evenly rounded from side to side and thinly elevated high above the adjacent surface; anterior margin on each side oblique, meeting at a distinct angle at the midline of the body, the margin flat, not elevated above the adjacent sur- face. Gonopod as shown in the accompanying figure except that none of the basal hairs have been drawn. Remarks.—This interesting species may occur in great numbers; it was possible to collect dozens of animals in the immediate vicinity of the camp- ground at the type locality where, at night, they provided a striking display of luminescence. The appendages of the head, the legs, the margins of the terga, and the thin intersegmental junctures gave a pale greenish fire, the undulations of which were particularly striking when the ani- mal was in motion. The source of the luminescence has not as yet been determined. The light is under no voluntary control on the part of the animal; it persists in daylight (subjection to dark- ness is not necessary for its appearance), and its source is fluorescent, as subjection of animals during daylight to ultraviolet light has demon- strated. The function of luminescence in most creatures is to attract either the opposite sex or food. Since it appears that neither of these objectives can apply to this milliped, the members of its order being blind and all diplopods subsisting only on vegetable matter, the part luminescence plays in the life history of this species is problematical. Fia. 1.—Luminodesmus sequotae, n. gen. and sp.: Distal joint of left gonopod. 272 In the winter of 1932, W. B. Murbarger, of Kaweah, Calif., (in Tulare County about 30 miles north of Camp Nelson), sent specimens of a xystodesmid milliped to the Smithsonian In- stitution for identification, with the note that the animals were luminescent. Dr. O. F. Cook ex- amined them and found all to be immature, im- possible to identify, and requested additional specimens of Mr. Murbarger. These were sent, with a letter, on March 31, 1932, but apparently they also were young, for Dr. Cook, who was greatly interested in identifying the first known luminescent milliped and discussed it with the senior author, made no notes or comments on them, and no further attempts seem to have been made to secure adults. Following identification of the foregomg Camp Nelson species, it now seems quite likely that Murbarger’s specimens were L. sequotae, and ex- tracts from his two letters are of special interest. In his letter of February 24, 1932, he states that “these worms were taken beneath an oak tree and apparently were under no other trees in this locality (Kaweah, Tulare County, Calif.) Elev. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 8 about 3,000 feet. Their one peculiarity is that at night they are luminous and visible for some distance.’’ When Dr. Cook requested additional specimens he mentioned that the emission of light by the animals might be limited to a par- ticular season, but in replying on March 31, Mur- barger wrote: “As to their emission of light being confined to certain seasons, I cannot say. I first noticed them the past December. At no time since then have they failed to be luminous in the dark. During the daytime they can only be found under moist boards, logs and the like but at night they seem to roam about in the leaves, under trees and like retreats. Regarding the color of living specimens, I have sketched the accom- panying crude diagram. Younger ones are of a whiter, more transparent color, no yellow being present, but in all sizes and ages the dark line down the back is noticeable.” In his very credit- able sketch the first segment is indicated as being buff colored and the ‘“‘back gray-yellow, shading to bright yellow on the serrated edge.” If Mur- barger’s specimens actually were L. sequovae, it appears that this species remains luminescent from December to mid-May at least. ZOOLOGY .—A new crayfish of the genus Procambarus from Louisiana, with a key to the species of the Spiculifer growp. Horron H. Hosss, Jr., Miller School of Biology, University of Virginia. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) Three species of the Spiculifer Group (Hobbs, 1942:119) of the genus Procambarus have been described from the southern United States, and their combined ranges extend from eastern Louisiana to the Al- tamaha River drainage in Georgia; of the three, P. spiculifer (LeConte, 1856:401) has the largest range, having been reported from Mississippi, Alabama, Georgia, and northern Florida; P. versutus (Hagen, 1870:51) from Mississippi, Alabama, and Florida; P. vioscar Penn (1946:27) from Louisiana and Missis- sippl. The species belonging to the Spiculifer group may be readily distinguished from the other members of the genus by possessing the combination of an areola less than 28 per cent of the entire length of the carapace, and two lateral spines on each side of cara- pace immediately caudad of the cervical groove. Members of this group are all inhabitants of streams and are more abundant in those having a moderate current. Although there are few data available to indicate what fac- tors in the environment limit their distribu- tion to lotic situations, there is evidence that it is their inability to live in waters in which oxygen content is low. All these species have a broad areola (thus presumably a proportionally smaller gill chamber than do those species having a narrow one), and in American crayfishes, exclusive of the mem- bers of the genus Cambarellus, this feature is correlated with a lotic habitat. There is no evidence to suggest that the limiting fac- tors in their ecological distribution are con- cerned with type of bottom, size of stream, pH, or hardness of the water, for both spzculz- fer and versutus have been taken from widely different types of streams. The first specimens I saw of the species described below were collected by Percy Viosca from Talisheek, St. Tammany Parish, La., and have been deposited in the United States National Museum. Additional speci- Auveust 1951 mens were sent to me by Dr. Edward C. Raney, of Cornell University, and I wish to thank him not only for these specimens but also for the many fine additions he has made to my collection. I take great pleasure in naming this species in honor of Dr. George H. Penn, Jr., a mutual friend of Mr. Viosea’s and mine, who has contributed much to our knowledge of the crayfishes of Louisiana. Procambarus penni, n. sp. Holotypic male, form I—Body subovate, com- pressed laterally; abdomen longer than carapace (35.6-32.1 mm). Height of carapace slightly greater than width in region of caudodorsal mar- gin of cervical groove (13.9-13.2 mm); greatest width of carapace a little cephalad of caudodorsal margin of cervical groove. Areola relatively broad (4.2 times longer than wide) with four or five punctations in narrowest part. Cephalic section of carapace about 3.2 times as long as areola (length of areola about 23.6 per cent of entire length of carapace). Rostrum long, excavate; sides subparallel to base of acumen which is set off by acute lateral spines. Acumen almost half as long as remainder of rostrum (5.0-11.4 mm). Margins of rostrum not swollen or conspicuously elevated. Upper sur- face bearing numerous small setae. Subrostral ridges poorly developed and not evident in dorsal aspect. Postorbital ridges prominent, grooved laterad and terminating cephalad in acute spines. Sub- orbital angle almost obsolete, branchiostegal spine strong. Two strong acute lateral spines present on each side of carapace; upper surface of carapace punctate; lateral portion caudad of cervical groove granulate. Cephalic section of telson with three spines in left and four im right caudolateral corners. Epistome with a small cephalomedian spine (see Fig. 8). Antennules of the usual form with a strong acute spine present on ventral side of basal segment. Antennae reaching caudad to middle of telson. Antennal scale long, of moderate width; widest cephalad of middle; outer distal margin with a strong spine. Chela subovate, somewhat depressed, long and slender. Hand entirely tuberculate; tubercles beset with conspicuous plumose setae. Inner HOBBS: A NEW CRAYFISH 273 margin of palm with a row of six tubercles, a prominent tubercle present on lower surface of palm at base of dactyl. Opposable surface of dactyl with four rounded tubercles on basal third, otherwise with crowded minute denticles; upper surface of dactyl with a few small setiferous tubercles at base, otherwise with setiferous punc- tations; lower and mesial surfaces similar to up- per. Opposable margin of immovable finger with four tubercles on basal third and one large tu- bercle on lower opposable margin at midlength, otherwise entire opposable margin with minute denticles; other surfaces of finger with setiferous punctations. Both fingers with weak submedian ridges on upper and lower surfaces. Carpus of first right pereiopod longer than wide (7.8 -4.3 mm), shorter than inner margin of palm of chela (10.3 mm), with a shallow oblique groove above. Surface mesiad of groove with two longitudinal rows of five subsquamous tubercles; surface laterad of groove with setiferous punc- tations; mesial surface with two spike-like tuber- cles and a few additional small and scattered ones; lateral and lower surfaces with setiferous punctations; distal margin of lower surface with two prominent spines. Merus of first right pereiopod punctate laterad and proximomesiad; mesiodistal surface with small tubercles; laterodistal surface with an acute spine; upper surface with small tubercles, and near distal end with two spikelike tubercles. Lower surface with an outer row of nine tuber- cles, only three of which are conspicuous, and a mesial row of 15; a few additional small tubercles flank these two rows. Hooks present on ischiopodites of third and fourth pereiopods; hooks on third long and slen- der and only slightly recurved; hooks on fourth somewhat more stocky and strongly recurved. Basipodite of fourth pereiopod with a swelling opposite hook on ischipodite. Coxopodites of fourth and fifth pereiopods with caudomesial projections: that on fourth heavy and inflated, that on fifth considerably smaller and somewhat compressed cephalocaudad. First pleopod reaching cephalic side of coxo- podite of third pereiopod when abdomen is flexed. Tip terminating in four distinct parts. Mesial process spiculiform and directed caudodistad. Cephalic process lying cephalomesiad of central projection, and extending — slightly cephalomesiad. Caudal element consisting of three parts: caudal knob in lateral aspect acute subacute, 274 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 8 Fias. 1-11.—Procambarus penni, n. sp.: 1, Mesial view of first pleopod of holotype; 2, mesial view of first pleopod of morphotype; 3, dorsal view of carapace of holotype; 4, lateral view of ‘first pleopod of morphotype; 5, lateral view of first pleopod of holotype; 6, basipodites and ischiopodites of third and fourth pereiopods of holotype; 7, lateral view of carapace of holotype; 8, epistome of holotype; 9, antennal scale of holotype; 10, annulus ventralis of allotype; 11, upper view of carpus and chela of holotype. (Pubescence removed from all structures illustrated except in Fig. 11.) Aveust 1951 and noncorneous; caudal process slender, sub- lanceolate, and excavate caudad; accessory process extends across the proximocaudal face of the caudal process and central projection as a thin corneous ridge. Central projection corneous truncate distad, with fusion line of its two com- ponents clearly marked. Paratypic male, form II.—Similar in most respects to the holotype, except in the reduced secondary sexual characters and in the distri- bution of a few spines. First pleopod with all processes reduced and noncorneous; caudal and adventitious processes not distinguishable in the caudal element; caudal knob very prominent (see Fig. 4). Allotypic female—This specimen, although badly mutilated, is the only specimen in this collection in which the annulus ventralis con- tained a sperm plug. The annuli of the more perfect specimens appear somewhat under- developed; therefore I have chosen this specimen with the ‘mature’ annulus as the allotype. Annulus ventralis with a submedian depression; sinus originates slightly dextrad of midventral line about one-third of the length of the annulus from cephalic margin, extends dextrad and makes a hair-pin turn to the midventral line where it turns caudad and terminates directly caudad of its origin Just cephalad of caudal margin of an- nulus. Sternum cephalad of annulus deeply cleft along median line; on each side of median cleft is a swollen tuberculate prominence which ex- tends caudoventrad and obscures extreme ce- phalolateral margins of annulus. Measurement.—As follows (in millimeters) : Holotype Allotype Morphotype Carapace helghtaeereecs scl ae wes 13.9 11.6 12.8 TAG: .oéooonNeorad oeede 13.2 11.6 12.1 Iein¥iq80\ ORs eotadoe nanos 32.1 27.6 30.0 Areola eng thee eh iivscnrhcjeres 7.6 6.3 UB SWIG tA ere eciiclslasieieisie rie 1.94 1.6 2.2 Rostrum IGE cobmdates Se camOnee 11.4 10.3 10.7 SOUL GEM rere terete: aie asia mievayerave 5.1 4.7 5.1 Abdomen lem gt linytesrersctersiaie! isle ele vaxs 35.6 30.8 32.2 Right chela length of inner margin Oi Ub ncoodacasoeaco ls} 5.1 7.0 width of palm.......... 6.0 3.7 4.8 length of outer margin ofshandeseeereeririccr 25.0 13.5 18.3 length of dactyl......... 12.8 7.1 10.0 Type locality.—Talisheek Creek, at Talisheek, St. Tammany Parish, La., a tributary of the HOBBS: A NEW CRAYFISH 275 Pearl River. The creek is small (not more than 20 feet wide), spring-fed and sand-bottomed and rises in the longleaf-pine hills a short distance north of Talisheek. Here, for the most part, it is shallow with a few deep holes (4 or 5 feet deep). Vegetation is sparse, but debris collects in the holes and on the lee side of sandbars and behind logs. The above information was kindly communi- cated to me by Dr. Penn, who consulted Mr. Viosea, the collector of the type specimens. Disposition of types.—The holotypic male, the allotypic female, and the morphotypic male (nos. 91662, 91663, 91664) together with paratypes consisting of 67o" II, 3299, 2c immature, and 8° 2 immature from the type locality are deposited in the United States National Museum. A series of paratypes (17 I, 3° @ II, 19, and 12 immature) collected from a tributary of Black Creek, 7.9 miles west of Hattiesburg, Lamar County, Miss., by Dr. E. C. Raney are in the collection of Dr. George H. Penn, Jr., Tulane University. The following paratypes are in my personal collection at the University of Virginia: HHH no. 3-3048-5a (17 I, 2¢@ Il, 722, 107% immature, and 7? ? immature) from a tributary of the Pearl River, 8 miles north of Angie, Marion County, Miss., on Route 7 [E. C. Raney, coll.]; HHH no. 6-1549-1 (274 1), 9.6 miles east of Franklinton, Washington Parish, La. [R. D. Suttkus, coll.]. Range.—Insofar as is known at present. this species is confined to tributaries of the Pearl and Pascagoula Rivers in eastern Louisiana and south-central Mississippi. Relationships.—Procambarus penni has _ its closest affinities with P. vioscat but may readily be distinguished from it by the more acute caudal process of the first pleopod of the first form male. KEY TO THE SPECIES OF THE SPICULIFER GROUP (Based on the first-form male) 1. Cephalic process of first pleopod rudimentary OL aching. qian eee insist spiculifer Cephalic process of first pleopod well devel- (OF Oso laaieea cer whose NSA, saline ee yee eae nie 2 2. Mesial process of first pleopod terminating proximad of tip of caudal element; rostrum with median carina. . .versutus Mesial process of first pleopod extending be- yond tip of caudal element; surface of ros- WEDbI COMVEENTEY o alos vied anomano duets woeneee 3 3. Mesial process extending caudolaterad; caudal knob rounded distally in lateral aspect. vioscar Mesial process extending caudodistad; caudal knob subacute in lateral aspect ..pennt 276 LITERATURE CITED Hagen, H. Astacidae. Illustr. Cat. Mus. Comp. Zool. no. 3: 1-109, pls. 1-11. 1870. Hosss, H. H., Jr. The crayfishes of Florida. Univ. Florida Publ., biol. sci. ser., 3 (2): 1-179, 3 figs., 11 maps, 24 pls. 1942. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Monograph of the North American vou. 41, No. 8 LreConte, Joun. Descriptions of new species of Astacus from Georgia. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia 7: 400-402. 1856. Penn, G. H., Jr. A new crawfish of the genus Procambarus from Louisiana (Decapoda, Asta- cidae). Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 36 (1): 27-29, 1 fig. 1946. BOTANY.—\A new fern of the genus Danaea from Colombia.1 C. V. Morton, U.S. National Museum. The small genus Danaea, of the family Marattiaceae, is one of the few genera of ferns confined to the Western Hemisphere. It prefers to grow in moist, dark, tropical forests, where it is often one of the most conspicuous terrestrial plants. Because of the lack of clear morphological characters, the species are not well understood. One of the plants collected in Colombia by Kjell von Sneidern represents a new species, described below. Danaea tenera Morton, sp. nov. Rhizoma crassum, breviter repens, ca. 3.5 cm longum, | cm diam.; stipulae magnae, crassae, latae, integrae. Folia sterilia pari- pinnata, 22-30 cm longa, stipitibus crassis, 8-11 cm longis, 2-4 mm diam., inconspicue 2-nodosis, ubique dense paleaceis, paleis brunneis, minutissimis, suborbicularibus, denticulatis; rhachis compressa, supra nuda, subtus dense et minute brunneo-paleacea, utrinque perspicue viridi-alata, gemma ter- minata; pinnae tenuiter membranaceae, 12— 14-jugae, breviter petiolulatae (1-2 mm), anguste oblongae, 4-6 cm longae, 10-15 mm. 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. latae, apice gradatim acuminatae, basi obli- quae, basi superiore cuneatae, inferiore ro- tundatae, apicem versus perspicue et argute uncinato-serratae, deorsum paulum undula- tae; venae simplices vel plerumque geminae (raro furcatae), 12-14 per em; lamina supra glabra et epaleacea, subtus mesophyllo et praecipue in costis paleacea, paleis valde diversis, alteris mediocribus, orbicularibus vel deltoideis, alteris minutissimis, dissectis vel piliformibus. Folia fertilia ignota. Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1742723, collected at La Costa, Department of El Cauca, Colombia, April 1937, in virgin forest, at 1,000 meters elevation, by Kjell von Sneidern (no. 1578). In its very thin texture D. tenera suggests the genus T'richomanes, and in this character recalls only D. crispa Endres and D. tricho- manoides Moore. It may be related to the latter, but that species differs (from descrip- tion) in having smaller, obtuse, merely un- dulate pinnae; in D. tenera the pinnae are long-acuminate and remarkably sharply ser- rate toward apex. It is not certain whether the leaves of D. trichomanoides are abruptly pinnate (as in the present species) or impari- pinnate. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences HAR CSULGTULM OS ree Ard Sere Poi sci DR ee ei: NatHan R. SmitH, Plant Industry Station EAROSTCLENURCLOCE anata pavaicis 9 ores eee WALTER RamMBERG, National Bureau of Standards NEELOLATU errs incre citar ie ties s Geate ee F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards LOT SUA Pseosen eon enone Howarp S. Rappieyg, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey ALT OC IOS AS Be ae SR fee Crete ee Ea ae tS Joun A. Stevenson, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haratp A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Pinlosophical Society; of Washington.-..2.....2-2-56.---+.46-- Epwarp U. Connon Anthropological Society of Washington.....................005: Waxpo R. WEDEL Broloricalasociety) of Washington jee sec ns cs cece cote se cireciya si eenieece a: Whemicalisocierys of Washingtoneyaaaanne se aecnee see eee se JosmepH J. FAHEY Entomological Society of Washington........................ FREDERICK W. Poos Nationale Geocraphic Sociebyaq-sauceor «tee c ee obec dene cee ALEXANDER WETMORE Geolocicaly society of Washingtonk eeen eee seasasdenes see aa Lrason H. Apams Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... ColumbiavHistoricaliSociety, (00.0. oes ae ene ceils pe ase e GILBERT GROSVENOR BOuvamicalSoclenynom Wiashingtonnen-o-- eos. ceen ee oe rece: E. H. WALKER Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wiuiram A. Dayton Mashinatontsociety, of ingineers: 2.) 0.0.2 cee eee eh cee a anoe Cuirrorp A. Brerts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers Francis M. DeranpDoRF Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp 8. Dru Helminthological Society OfaWiashin ctoneamerin ter tree ere ere eee L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Aneus M. Grirrin Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers.... Henry W. Hempie Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......... Hrrsert G. DorsEy District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers.... Elected Members of the Board of Managers: NG) Lai EYE aioe te pl ghe Gomera icine bent een eee ae nS W. F. Foswaa, C. L. Gazin Ponvamuany 958) os cvckute ceca dens oak ne Cc. F. W. Mursnpeck*, A. T. McPuErson sow Mamata GOA. 5. aac sic) ceive a Sasche sets cue nes Sara E. BranHam, Mitton Harris* SDC ndeO MIVGNOAGETS <2 866) ea ee All the above officers plus the Senior Editor oanaojeHiattors and Associate HAUOTS. .-.5..-. 01st ee es eens. [See front cover] Executive Committee....N. R. SmitH (chairman), WALTER RamBerG, H. 8. RappLeyeE, . A. Stevenson, F. M. DeranpoRF Committee on Membership............... L. A. SprInpLER (chairman), M. S. ANDERSON, MERRILL BERNARD, R. EK. BLACKWELDER, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. HANSEN, D. B. Jones, Dorotuy Nickerson, F. A. Smita, Heinz Specut, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings......... MarGarert Pittman (chairman), NorMAN BEKKEDAHL, W. R. Cuapiine, D. J. Davis, F. B. Scunerz, H. W. WELLS Committee on Monographs: Movanuany, 19520. 565. e menace J. R. SwALLeNn (chairman), Paut H. OEHSER Momence yO SS se seer. rere ta ee ryan Leip on nue A) R. W. Imuay, P. W. OMAN MRO AMAT Eye ODA erly Sith re: pects, dear sls why etatba tase al 8. F. Buaxg, F. C. Kracek Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (GEoRGE P. WAuTON, general chairman): For the Biological Sciences............ G. H. Coons (chairman), J. E. Fapsr, JR., Myrna F. Jonss, F. W. Poos, J. R. SWALLEN For the Engineering Sciences......... R. 8. Dizi (chairman), ARSHAM AMIRIKIAN, J. W. McBurney, Frank Neumann, A. H. Scorr For the Physical Sciences............. G. P. Wauron (chairman), F. 8. Brackerrt, G. E. Hom, C. J. Humpureys, J. H. McMiLien For Teaching of Science............ B. D. Van Evera (chairman), R. P. BAaRNEs, F. E. Fox, T. Koppanys, M. H. MARTIN, A. T. McPHERsoN Committee on Grants-in-aid for Rosca che Ce aN L. E. Yocum (chairman), M. X. SULLIVAN, H. L. WuHitTEMORE Committee on Policy and Planning: Io) Uaioe ISP. Gsgaoococdnuenhneoeens J. I. Horrman (chairman), M. A. Mason IG anaes MOR as 8 Aleecigtees Gn eats eee elena eee W. A. DAYTON, N. R. Smite PROM ATT ye G D4 ak ah sere Tacs aitclar starrer h nant cick H. B. Couns, JR., W. W. Rusey Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: At) dimismennye IG © cos cnscsoanasanue M. A. Mason (chairman), A. T. McPHprRson PROP amUaTyel OSS ee Ce re Neen teen ener oh A. H. Cruarx, F. L. Monier PRO gan Wsiiysl OOF Mane Amey gre acess: Gls dcectewiars J. M. Caupwe tu, W. ue ScHMITT Laairescqnianee on. Cone! OF A Als Als Sosaconcoonesnnoossoeneashocseuse F. M. Serzuer Committee of Auditors......J. H. Martin (chairman), N. F. BRaatEen, W. i YOUDEN Committee of Tellers. . _W. G. BromBacuEr (chairman), A. R. Merz, Loutsr M. RusseLL * Appointed by Board to fill vacancy. CONTENTS Page Martuematics.—Information theory. CHrstpr H. PaGn............ 245 Erunotocy.—Utilization of animals and plants by the Micmac Indians of New Brunswick. Frank G. Speck and Rautpa W. DEextTeR.... 250 PALEONTOLOGY.—New crinoids from the Pitkin of Oklahoma. HARRELL Ti AS TPRIMPTBS os.) s\n aie cosh ck scission Stas Sa eee 260 EntomoLocy.—Jordanopsylla allredi, a new genus and species of flea from Utah (Siphonaptera). Roprerr TRAuB and VERNON J. Tipton 264 Zootogy.—A luminescent new xystodesmid milliped from California. HE. Loomis and DrEmorrsT DAVENPORT... 22...) eee 270 Zooutoay.—A new crayfish of the genus Procambarus from Louisiana, with a key to the species of the Spiculifer group. Horton H. Hopss, Jr. 272 Borany.—A new fern of the genus Danaca from Colombia. C. V. Morton 276 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals <)> \W) “ly Vot. 41 SEPTEMBER 1951 No. 9 JOURNAL aes Op pane WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS CHARLES DRECHSLER WILLIAM F. FosHaG J. P. E. Morrison PLANT INDUSTRY STATION U. 8. NATIONAL MUSEUM U. 8. NATIONAL MUSEUM BELTSVILLE, MD. ASSOCIATE EDITORS J.C. EwERs J. I. HorFMAN ANTHROPOLOGY CHEMISTRY C. W. SABROSKY T. P. THAYER ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY F, A. Cuace, JR. Miriam L. BomuarD BIOLOGY BOTANY R. K. Coox PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royat & GUILFORD AVEs. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JournaL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNALis issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- ouymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400. 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per year...............-.20+2e+--ee0ee $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Voll. 1 to voll. 10; incl.—not available.*................ _ _— Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 40, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $341.00 MonoeraPH No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann. .$4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899=1911) complete....................--)-sseeee $25.00 Single volumeés;junbound... 22.8 .he second. cat nancial se See eee eee 2.00 Single pumbersies 4. y. £25 ef Batak ot hd eee ee ee .25 Missing Numbers will be ee laced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’’ and addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappiere, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, D.C. Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoLuME 41 September 1951 No. 9 MEDICINE.—Disaster and disease.! Victor H. Haas, National Microbiological Institute, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, Md. (Communicated by Margaret Pittman.) Accounts of epidemics associated with wars and disasters constitute a major part of recorded history. They form a somber and often mysterious background that frequently overshadows the intermittent brilliance of military and political glory. In times past, these pestilences seemed pitiless and inescapable. Ignorant and often terrified, men did the very things that pro- moted the spread and severity of communi- cable diseases. Modern scientific knowledge has changed this situation: epidemics can be faced in an orderly manner; their dangers can be assessed from the sound basis of proved facts; specific measures to limit their threat can be taken with confidence. Properly interpreted, the lessons of the past can give us confidence to meet the challenge of another world war capable of imposing catastrophe beyond anything here- tofore known in history. So far as disease is concerned, we can expect to survive even the shambles of an atomic war if we use our knowledge and our resources properly. But we shall have to exert ourselves to do it; we cannot take it for granted. EPIDEMICS OF ANCIENT TIMES Medical historians have long been fas- cinated and somewhat puzzled by a Biblical account of an epidemic following a military campaign. In I Samuel, it is told how the Philistines overcame the Jews and carried off their sacred Ark. This act so angered’ Jehovah that ‘‘He smote the men of the city, both small and great, and they had emerods in their secret parts... the hand of 1 Address presented before the Washington Academy of Sciences, April 19, 1951. 277 God was very heavy there. And the men that died not were smitten with the emerods.”’ The difficulty in understanding just what happened to the Philistines is that—as one historian puts it—‘‘the Lord only knows what an emerodis”’ (7). Etymologically it is a hemorrhoid, but—as this same writer puts it—‘‘it is hardly likely that even the Philis- tines could have had a fatal epidemic of hemorrhoids.’ Omitting the learned disser- tations that have developed around this puzzling term, we may say that all medical historians come out with the conclusion that what Jehovah had dealt out to the Philistines was probably an epidemic of bubonic plague. This uncertainty as to the exact identity of ancient pestilences is a prominent feature of medical history. The ‘‘plague of Athens”’ recorded by Thucydides is an example of this confusion. In 430 B.C. the Peloponne- sians were attacking the cities of Attica, and the refugees from the hinterlands swarmed into Athens, which became greatly over- crowded. Suddenly a disease struck the city: “Athenian life was completely demoralized ... there was no fear of the laws of God or man” (7). The Peloponnesians were so afraid of the disease that they withdrew from Attica. At the same time, Athenian naval action against the Peloponnesos was frus- trated by the epidemic in the fleet. No one knows what this epidemic, which undoubt- edly had an important role in Greek history, really was, or whether it represented one disease or several. In the second year of the epidemic more than 55,000 Athenians were said to have died of it, including Pericles himself. SEP 2 8 195) 278 In the time of Marcus Aurelius there was an epidemic that appears to have resembled in many respects the plague of Athens. This is known as the “plague of Antoninus”’; it began in A.D. 165 in the Roman army of Verus, in the East. The army scattered the disease; it eventually spread over the entire Roman world, lasting 14 years. In Italy cities and villages were abandoned and fell into ruin; in A.D. 169, Roman armies cam- paigning against the Germanic tribes found many of the barbarians dead on the field from the epidemic. Marcus Aurelius died of it, too. The great “plague of Cyprian”’ fell upon the whole known world in A.D. 250—Roman and barbarian alike. This epidemic (again its identity is uncertain) was spread by the active warfare of the time. According to one historian “‘men crowded into the larger cities; only the nearest fields were cultivated; the more distant ones became overgrown... farm land had no value” (7). A contemporary writer said the human race had been “‘all but destroyed” (1); the earth was returning to desert and forest. It is claimed that Chris- tianity got a good start as a result of this pandemic, because of the great popularity of St. Cyprian as an exorciser of evil spirits. Disaster and disease swept the Roman world for centuries: earthquakes, floods, wars, famine, and epidemics. The greatest of all pandemics of those times was the “plague of Justinian.” It followed a succes- sion of disasters, such as the earthquake that destroyed Antioch, killing more than 200,000 persons. This ‘“‘plague of Justinian”? began in A.D. 540. According to a contemporary writer, “it spread over the entire earth and afflicted all without mercy ...it spared no habita- tions of men, however remote” (/). The paramount historian of Rome, Gibbon, says that ‘no facts have been preserved to sustain an account or even a conjecture of the num- bers that perished in this extraordinary mor- tality. I only find that, during three months, five and at length ten thousand persons died each day at Constantinople; and many cities of the East were left vacant, and that in several districts of Italy the harvest and the vintage withered on the ground. The triple scourges of war, pestilence, and famine JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 9 afflicted the subjects of Justinian; and his reign is disgraced by a visible decrease of the human species which has never been regained in some of the fairest countries of the globe” (1). The plague of Justinian lasted from 540 until 590. During this time, Italy was con- quered by the Lombards; a contemporary writer said they “‘resemble in figure and in smell the mares of the Sarmatian plains”’ (UD) This pandemic is believed by many to have been bubonic plague, though some descrip- tions of the time are considered suggestive of smallpox. PLAGUE The most devastating epidemic recorded in history was certainly one of bubonic plague: the “Black Death,” which occurred exactly 600 years ago. This terrible affliction owed its inception to war. In 1346 the Tar- tars besieging the Don Cossacks in the Cri- mea were attacked by plague that is supposed to have been indigenous in the native rodents of the region. From them it spread to the besieged populations, and thence to China and India on one hand, and to Europe and Africa on the other. This was a true pandemic: an outbreak of disease that spread over most of the old world. It overran Europe from 1348 to 1352. It has been conjectured that 13,000,000 Chinese died of the Black Death. The population of England is estimated to have fallen from about 5 million to 23 million. Somewhere from one-fourth to three-fourths of the population of Europe is said to have died in the three years beginning in 1348 (2). For three centuries following the Black Death, plague smoldered in London, to break out into a furious epidemic in 1665. The population of London had suffered an un- usually severe winter; plague began in the slums as winter ended. In this one year, it is believed to have killed nearly 110,000 out of London’s 460,000 population. Defoe said, “London might well be said to be all in tears ... The shrieks of women and children at the windows and doors of their houses, where their dearest relatives were perhaps dying, or just dead, were so frequent to be heard as we passed the streets, that it was SEPTEMBER 1951 enough to pierce the stoutest heart in the world to hear them... Whole families, and indeed whole streets of families, were swept away together” (2). Following this epidemic, plague dis- appeared from England and was not seen there again for nearly two and a half cen- turies. In Continental Europe, however, there were two major epidemics—one in 1770 and one in 1826. Both were generated by wars between Russia and Turkey. The first of these outbreaks is said to have caused 300,000 deaths in Hungary, the Ukraine, and Poland, and 50,000 deaths in Moscow— more than one-fourth of the population. The second epidemic killed 4,000 persons in three months in the city of Varna. The last pandemic of plague began in southwest China about 1894. Reaching Bom- bay in 1896, it spread over India and by 1904 was responsible for 1,000,000 deaths annually in that country. Within six years every continent had become infected from this outbreak; in 1900 the disease was rec- ognized in North America for the first time in history. Some writers refer to the situa- tion now existing as the ‘“‘present pandemic of plague,” for the disease still lingers in many parts of the world to which it came with the great recrudescence around the be- ginning of the present century. But there was only one Black Death. TYPHUS The disease most frequently associated with war is typhus. Hirsch says, ‘‘The history of typhus is written in those dark pages of the world’s story which tell of the grievous visitations of mankind by war, famine, and misery of every kind” (3). The role of this specific disease in earlier times is obscure. It has been suggested that the epidemic that destroyed the army of Frederick Barbarossa in 1157 might have been typhus. Four days after the disease struck, the army, which had occupied Rome, abandoned the city and departed northward; the greater part of them died on the march. Perhaps the first clear instance of a de- cisive role played by typhus in war occurred in 1566. An epidemic, quite evidently of this disease, broke out in the German army of Maximilian II, who was forced to abandon HAAS: DISASTER AND DISEASE 279 his entire campaign against the Turks in Hungary. This epidemic, called at the time “morbus hungaricus,” spread over Austria, Germany, the Netherlands, and Italy, car- ried by returning troops. The 30-years’ war (1618-1648) was domi- nated by pestilence, of which typhus was a major cause. One historian says, ‘““The suf- ferings of the German people during these thirty years are beyond telling” (7). When both plague and typhus struck, ‘in some villages the populations perished en masse ... half the inhabitants of Munich died in 1634 ...the population (of Germany) de- creased by more than one-half” (7). In 1632, at Nuremberg, typhus and scurvy together killed 18,000 soldiers, and the op- posing armies of Gustavus Adolphus and Wallenstein left the field without battle. Throughout the eighteenth century wars were followed by typhus. Hirsch says of this time, ‘“‘As the oppression of war spared no country in Europe...so did the pestilence of war, particularly typhus, following at the heels of the conquerors and the conquered, spread all over Europe and rise to a terrible height in those places where the visitation of war had been most severe ...in the uni- versal distress caused by the war (it had) a very favorable soil in which to flourish” (3). Of the many misfortunes that befell Napoleon’s army in the Russian campaign, none had more effect than disease, particu- larly typhus. On the march to Moscow in 1812 the French were infected at Vilna; by the time the retreat had begun there was so much sickness in the Army that thousands had to be abandoned. ‘‘French soldiers .. . spread the contagion (typhus) over a large part of Central Europe. Almost naked... they marched through Poland and Germany. Typhus and other diseases associated with it marked their course. The inhabitants of the country were forced to house the sick; but teamsters also conveyed the infection to villages which the soldiers did not visit” WW). “The number of persons who succumbed to typhus in Germany during the years 1813-1814 must be estimated at least as high as 200,000 or 300,000 ...the number that contracted it would amount to 2,000,000,” according to Prinzing (/). This would be 280 about 10 percent of the total German popu- lation. Typhus was widespread among troops in the Crimean War (1854-1856), but there was no great amount of troop movement in this campaign, and civilian outbreaks did not develop. The troops in Crimea were severely stricken with an almost unprecedented vari- ety of diseases, including—in addition to typhus—cholera and dysentery. In 1855, there were 48,000 casualties from sickness in 4 months. For the whole war—all armies —there were about 63,000 deaths from bat- tle, compared with 104,000 from disease. The greatest typhus epidemic of record accompanied World War I on the southern and eastern fronts. In 1915, about 120,000 Serbs died between January and March, out of a population of 4,000,000. In 1920, there were more than 3 million cases of typhus reported in Russia, and as many cases of relapsing fever. Between 1917 and 1923, there are believed to have been 30,000,000 cases of typhus in Russia, and 3 million deaths. All of this was brought about by war, revolution, famine, and the wanderings of homeless, unsupervised refugees, followed by movements of troops during the civil wars of 1919-1920. SMALLPOX Another epidemic disease that has ap- peared in military history is smallpox. Some believe that it may have been responsible for the plagues of Athens and of Justinian. Many medical historians seem agreed that smallpox was absent from Greece and Rome during most of the classical period. It is supposed to have reached the middle east from Ethiopia in the fourth century A.D., during what was called the ‘Elephant War,” and to have been carried into Spain by the Saracens, spreading thus over Europe. It had permeated Europe by A.D. 1009 and was repeatedly reintroduced by the Crusaders, and later by the Mongolians. Smallpox is supposed to have facilitated conquest of the New World by the Span- iards: a Negro from a ship of Narvaz carried it ashore and over 3,000,000 Indians eventually succumbed. “The most furious epidemic of the 19th century” (4) was one of smallpox generated JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 9 by the Franco-Prussian war of 1870-1871. At that time Germany was almost free from smallpox, but it was epidemic in Paris and elsewhere in France. Thousands of French prisoners, scattered throughout Germany, disseminated the disease which was then “conveyed from place to place ... by the moving population itself,... by marching troops, and... by the removal of prisoners from one place of detention to another.” From 1870-1874 there were 140,000 small- pox deaths in Prussia; in France 200,000 deaths in 2 years; in England 43,000 in the same period. In Austria 167,000 died in 6 years. The epidemic reached Scandinavia, Italy, and North America. ‘“‘But the further the disease was removed from the seat of war the easier it was to control” (4). DYSENTERY AND TYPHOID Dysentery and typhoid have been as- sociated with wars of recent times. Napo- leon’s troops spread dysentery over Europe. In the American Civil War the diarrheal diseases—called ‘“‘alvine fluxes” (5) by the medical writers of the time—accounted for 1,700,000 casualties and 45,000 deaths in the Union Armies, compared with 44,000 killed in battle and 49,000 dying of wounds. “No district in which troops were massed for war purposes was exempt from the scourge”’ (5). In the Spanish-American war (1898) ty- phoid caused more casualties (20,904 cases, 2,188 deaths) than military action, and in the Boer War (1899-1902) it was a major problem. But though ‘‘troops in war time have suffered heavily from enteric fever (typhoid) the evidence of its introduction by them into civilian populations is small” (4). CHOLERA Another of the great pandemic diseases, cholera, ‘‘is much more involved with pil- grimages than the movements of armies” (4). In India, which is the endemic home of cholera, it is spread by festivals and fairs; its importation to the West in times past has often been initiated by Muslim pilgrim- ages to Mecca. There are said to have been six pandemics of cholera in the past century or so. In four of these cholera reached the United States, the last time in 1911. SEPTEMBER 1951 In 1833 it struck New York. A physician of the time said, “Our citizens had heard and read so much of this Asiatic scourge, and all we knew of it had impressed us with a sense of its mysterious character, its rapid and erratic course, its unmanageable and incurable nature, and its certain and dread- ful fatality. Its fearful devastation in India and elsewhere had filled the mind with hor- ror at the bare recital of its ravages, and the rumor of its appearance on the shores of the St. Lawrence threw our population into consternation ... which, in some in- stances, became so intense as to dethrone reason itself and impel to suicide” (2). In 1849 cholera crossed the continent with the emigrant wagons, and in 1850 half the popu- lation of Sacramento fled from it; one-fourth of those who remained died. YELLOW FEVER Yellow fever is not usually associated with war and disaster. It has tended to spread with peaceful commerce. But in one instance it played a critical part in military action. In 1801 Napoleon sent Leclere with 25,000 French troops to Haiti to suppress the revolt. After defeating the Haitian Army, the French were struck by yellow fever. Of the Army of 25,000 Frenchmen, 22,000 died. In 1803 there were only 3,000 left to evacuate the Island. SYPHILIS The spread of syphilis over Europe ap- pears to have been the result of a specific military campaign. In 1494 Charles VIII of France invaded Italy and occupied Naples. The city was defended by Spanish soldiers, and it is believed that the latter had brought syphilis to the Neapolitan women. Charles’s soldiery ran wild through the city, and con- tracted the disease. Then the invaders with- drew and scattered over Europe. Wherever they went, syphilis appeared: France, Ger- many, England, Scotland, Russia—even to far-off China, and Africa. Why did it spread in such sudden and dramatic fashion? Per- haps we shall never know entirely, but two important factors were: 1. It was a time of great floods, drouth, and excessive heat. Plague, ergot poisoning, HAAS: DISASTER AND DISEASE 281 and other illnesses had decimated the popu- lation and weakened resistance. 2. It was a period of unprecedented li- centiousness. Says Hirsch: ‘‘The corruption of morals had at the time reached a height which even contemporary writers tell us was without parallel in ancient times” (3). INFLUENZA The greatest pandemic of modern times was that of influenza in 1918-19. ‘While all Christendom bent its energies to the killing of young men, nature outstripped the states- men: influenza killed more victims in a few months than all the armies in 4 years” (2). In the United States there were 20 million cases and around a quarter of a million deaths. ‘In India 6 months of influenza ac- counted for nearly as many deaths as 20 years of cholera” (2). It is estimated that there were 200 million cases in the world, and more than 10 million deaths. ‘‘The pandemic of 1918 and 1919 ranks with the plague of Justinian and the Black Death as one of the 3 most destructive outbreaks of disease that the human race has known’’ (2). “Yet we are struck by the absence, in 1918, of the degree of panic and desolation which is reported for comparable waves of death in earlier years... it seems that hu- man composure was not so shaken by this disaster as it had often been before by those of smaller compass . . . disease was no longer so mysterious, so portentous an experience as it had once been. After a generation of research, infection was comprehensible, even though this particular infection still proved baffling” (2). In the United States “‘one person in every 4 fell sick.... The Black Death killed 9 out of 10 whom it attacked, cholera some- times 4 out of 5; influenza in 1918, only 2 or 8 out of a hundred”’ (2). WORLD WAR II These brief glimpses of medical history illustrate the importance of disease—partic- ularly communicable disease—in the de- velopment of civilization. They show how epidemics are generated by wars and by the disastrous conditions which accompany and follow wars. The greatest war of all time is still fresh in our memory. And one of the most amazing features of this war is the fact that, catastrophic as it was, beyond any- thing known to history, it produced no major epidemics. World War II was distinguished by all the conditions which appear to have facili- tated the dissemination of epidemics in all previous major wars, such as: 1. Movements of great bodies of troops over long distances. In World War II there was con- stant interchange of troops among all the major regions of the earth. They passed through or sojourned in areas where such diseases as plague, cholera, yellow fever, and smallpox were preva- lent. 2. Displacement of civil populations, with great masses of wandering, homeless refugees. This occurred in the Orient and in Eastern Europe—both regions where epidemic diseases are indigenous—as well as in the relatively health- ier countries of the West. 3. Breakdown of civil authority, with conse- quent failure to maintain the sanitary practices of normal times. 4. Tremendous destruction of cities, with dis- ruption of water supplies, sewage systems, food sanitation, and the like—all because of irreplace- able losses in plant and equipment. The “‘epidemic potential”? must have been high. There were indeed numerous epidem- ies of circumscribed extent. Plague broke out several times in North Africa; there was a serious epidemic of typhus in Italy, centering around Naples; cholera caused our military authorities some concern in the Orient. Smallpox repeatedly presented a challenge: it got out of hand for a time in Japan, and spread to the United States and to England among returning troops. Hun- dreds of thousands of soldiers acquired malaria, bacillary dysentery, and amebiasis. There were a number of outbreaks of in- fectious jaundice. Diseases like ‘‘mite ty- phus” and filariasis were important military medical problems. But there were no pandemics, nor threats of any. The explanation for this failure of epi- demics to get out of control in World War II relates to our modern knowledge of the 74 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 9 factors which favor the dissemination of specific communicable diseases, and our ability—because of such knowledge—to alter these factors to our advantage. At the time of World War I we under- stood a great deal about the method of spread of epidemics, and could control most of them, but our methods were either cum- bersome or not efficient. Between World Wars I and II, and during World War II, there were many improvements in knowl- edge and resources: 1. The sulfonamide drugs and the antibiotics for treatment of many communicable diseases (e.g., plague, dysentery). 2. D.D.T. for the control of vermin (e.g., lice, fleas). 3. Better and more accurate methods of diag- nosis (e.g., extension of the complement fixation test, advances in virology). 4. Better vaccines, to provide more reliable immunity (e.g.; yellow fever, typhus). PRESENT PROSPECTS FOR EPIDEMIC CONTROL Since World War II, even more advances have been made. There are several new antibiotics (such as chloramphenicol and aureomycin) that give us the upper hand over many more diseases than we ever had before. There are new rat poisons, impor- tant in reducing the hazard of plague. The virus that causes influenza, unknown during the pandemic in 1918, has been studied with increasing thoroughness, and better vaccines are being developed. Better methods of water purification appear possible, not that we need any safer water than we have now in our cities; but these methods might be more adaptable to emergencies. If there should be a World War III, we all know that it would be terrible. We expect that our cities would suffer enormous de- struction. Water supplies, sewage systems, and other sanitary mechanisms would be destroyed or disrupted for long periods. Hos- pitals would be jammed with casualties, as indeed would many other buildings which would have to be converted to shelter the injured. Medical and allied professional people would be tremendously burdened. Civil authority would have to exert its ut- most effort to meet such catastrophes. Un- SEPTEMBER 1951 der such conditions, what must we expect in regard to epidemics? My answer is that we would have epi- demics. We always have them. They are going on right now. There was an epidemic of influenza last winter—several of them if you care to look at it with great exacti- tude. There will be epidemics of poliomye- litis this summer. In India there will prob- ably be epidemics of cholera in a month or so—there always are. There will be out- breaks of yellow fever in South America this year, as there have been at intervals for generations. There was a case of bubonic plague in New Mexico in January; last year there were five cases in the United States as a whole. (In 1925 there was an epidemic of pneumonic form of plague in Los Angeles, and 33 people died of it.) During the past four years there have been apprehended at various quarantine sta- tions 8 ships infected with cholera, 88 with smallpox, and 1 with plague. Epidemics of such diseases as influenza, cholera, plague, and typhus and outbreaks of yellow fever and smallpox scarcely come to the notice of the general population nowa- days, although there is no attempt to con- ceal them. Indeed, there is rapid exchange of such information all over the world (6, 7). But since the outbreaks either do not get out of hand or, if they do, are brought under control with confidence and dispatch, the general public is not too concerned about them. If war should come, outbreaks of this sort would have to be regarded with more concern than they merit in times of peace. We should have to take them quite seri- ously and apply our knowledge and our resources as quickly and thoroughly as pos- sible to bring them under control or to keep them from getting out of hand. The important point is that we do have the knowledge to make it possible to do this. To the extent that our physical plant is damaged, and our supplies of medicines, vaccines, insecticides, and the like may be destroyed, it will be more difficult to apply that knowledge. But no matter how many difficulties of this sort may develop, we still have the knowledge—which is where we differ basically and completely from our HAAS: DISASTER AND DISEASE 283 predecessors of earlier times, who had re- course only to guesswork, superstition, and flight. We do not expect to escape any war without suffermg and death. That is the price of war. Part of that price will be paid in increased communicable diseases, in epi- demics, and in deaths from epidemics. We must face this, just as we must face the appalling destruction that would come from atom bombs. Why not hedge against this danger of disease by immunizing everyone in advance? We can vaccinate against influenza, cholera, plague, typhus, and so on. The Armed Forces are immunized against quite a vari- ety of diseases, as everyone remembers who has stood in line for ‘‘shots.”’ But what we need to meet the threat of atomic war is careful judgment, based on assessment of all the factors—not rule-of- thumb, or an “‘easy way out.” To immunize 150,000,000 people against all the diseases for which we have vaccines would consume tremendous resources in terms of manufacturing capacity, trained personnel to administer the injections, main- tenance of records, and general administra- tive arrangements. Even were we willing to make such a commitment, many of our immunizations could not be relied upon to protect every person inoculated. And since nearly all give only temporary protection, they would have to be repeated—for who knows how many times? This does not mean that all immuniza- tions are impractical—far from it. Speaking only for myself, I believe that we should immunize as many people as possible against smallpox and try to keep them immunized. I also feel that we should immunize all children against diphtheria, whooping cough, and tetanus. But this is nothing new at all; it is part of our regular peacetime public-health program. In addition, I think that if war is anticipated we ought to im- munize everyone who is likely to be in a target area against tetanus. That is as far as I should go in im- munizing the population generally. Beyond that, I should rely on our scientific knowl- edge, our medicines and chemicals, and our judgment, to pull us through. We can boil 284 our water if we have to, or put tablets of disinfectant in it. We can bury our excreta and food wastes. We can treat patients with drugs and antibiotics to reduce res- ervoirs of infection. We can attack insects and rodents with established methods. Above all, I believe we should diligently encourage research. We must base our plans for defense upon the most thorough con- sideration of the knowledge we have; mean- while we must continue with utmost vigor to increase and improve our knowledge and understanding. BIOLOGICAL WARFARE We have been told that another war might bring into use a new weapon—one never before tried—biological warfare. This means the intentional use of disease-pro- ducing microorganisms or their products to cause casualties in a target population. We must consider this possibility in our plans for defense. Biological warfare may never be used, but if it is we want to be ready to defend ourselves. The same principles that apply to control or prevention of diseases of natural origin apply to defense against biological warfare. Our knowledge of the biology of disease, our medicines and techniques, and our ex- perience in public-health operations will be brought to bear on any problem that might arise in this manner, and we can expect them to be effective. If biological warfare is used against us, it may be anticipated that the agents em- ployed will be those we meet in regular public-health practice. It is not expected that strange new organisms would be em- ployed, or that mysterious or unpredictable outbreaks of disease would be produced. In fact, most of the organisms that would appear to possess the qualifications that one would regard as essential for use in biological warfare would not spread from person to person. Self-perpetuating epidemics would be most unlikely. It is well to remember that JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, no. 9 it has never been shown that an epidemic could be started intentionally. In fact, it is not known just how or why an epidemic starts or fails to start in nature. Greenwood says, “In plague, as in other sicknesses. something more is needed to generate an epidemic than even widespread and quite uncontrolled means of infection’ (4). What has been said about disease arising from atomic disaster applies to the pos- sibility of biological warfare. We would ex- pect casualties—and deaths—but we would also expect to be able to bring the situation under control. In regard to immunization, the same principles would apply as for atomic warfare and general disaster. For biological warfare, we might consider broad- ening a bit the scope of immunization, but only on the basis of careful assessment of all the factors—not an over-all procedure to provide what might superficially appear to be an easy answer. REFERENCES Statistics have been compiled from the sources given below, but only direct quotations are spe- cifically documented. Extensive bibliographies and basic references are contained in the sources listed here. (1) Zinsser, Hans. Rats, lice, and history. Boston, 1935. (2) SmrrH, GeppEs. Plague on us. The Common- wealth Fund, New York, 1941. : (8) Hirscu, Aueust. Handbook of geographical and historical pathology. (Translated from the German by Charles Creighton.) The New Sydenham Society, London, 1883. (4) SrautyBrass, C. O. The principles of epidemi- ology. New York, 19381. (5) Barnes, JosppH K. (Surgeon General, U. S. Army). The medical and surgical history of the War of the Rebellion (1861-1865). Wash- ington, 1870. (6) U.S. Pusric Hpauru Service: National Office of Vital Statistics. Weekly Communicable Disease Summary. Washington, D. C. (7) Wortp HratrH ORGANIZATION: Regional Of- fice. Weekly Epidemiological Report. Wash- ington, D. C. (8) Rospnau, Mitton J. Preventive medicine nad hygiene, ed. 6. New York, 1935. SEPTEMBER 1951 CAMPBELL: MEDICINAL PLANTS USED BY INDIANS 285 ETHNOLOGY .—WMedicinal plants used by Choctaw, Chickasaw, and Creek Indians in the early nineteenth century. T. N. CAMPBELL, University of Texas. (Com- municated by Frank H. H. Roberts, Jr.) What is known today about medicinal plants used by the Indians of the South- eastern United States is based largely on information accumulated by ethnologists within the present century. Most of this has been summarized by Taylor (1940), who has compiled data on 185 plants used by eight Southeastern groups—Cherokee, Catawba, Creek, Alabama, Koasati, Chickasaw, Choc- taw, and Natchez. The literature on these Indians prior to the period of enforced re- moval (cirea 1830-1850) contains very little specific information on medical ethnobotany. For this reason the material presented below is of special interest. It was obtained by Gideon Lincecum, a self-taught physician and naturalist, from Choctaw, Chickasaw, and Creek Indians in the States of Missis- sippi and Georgia during the years 1800-— 1835. It is a partial but acceptable record of medicinal plants used by these three Indian groups in the early nineteenth century. The comparatively early date of this record makes it possible to note changes that have taken place in the herbal medicine of these Indian groups over a period of approximately one hundred years. The names and medicinal uses of the plants presented on the following pages have been taken from Lincecum’s medical herbar- ium of plants native to the Southeastern United States. This herbarium, which con- sists of 305 pressed plants, is now in the possession of the University of Texas Library in Austin. The plants were collected by Lincecum in eastern Mississippi and south- eastern Texas over a long period of time, but principally between the years 1830 and 1868. On the outside of each folder, in Lincecum’s handwriting, is the scientific name of the plant, the English name or names, occas- ionally an Indian name, along with data on the part or parts of the plant used for medicinal purposes, the method of prepara- tion, the medicinal properties (based on Lincecum’s own clinical observations), and the disease for which the prepared drug was used in Lincecum’s practice. Twenty-two of the folders include miscellaneous remarks on the medical use of the enclosed plants by Choctaw, Chickasaw, and Creek Indians. The plants from these 22 folders have been examined and identified by Dr. Benjamin C. Tharp, Department of Botany, University of Texas, whose assistance is gratefully ac- knowledged. Published biographic materials afford some basis for evaluating the reliability of Lincecum’s ethnobotanical notes. (Geiser, 1948, pp. 199-214; Lincecum, 1904a) Lin- cecum was not medically trained in the orthodox manner of his day, 1.e., by study at a medical college or with a licensed prac- titioner. He learned medicine by reading medical literature. He learned systematic botany in the same way, and it is of interest to note that the specimens in his herbarium are, with few exceptions, accurately classified for his time. This lack of formal training probably explains some of Lincecum’s readi- ness to adopt Indian herbalism. Of more importance is the biographic evi- dence of close association with the three Indian peoples in question. The first 25 years of Lincecum’s life (1793-1818) were spent on the outer fringe of the Georgia frontier, where he had ample opportunity to observe the Creek Indians. For a period of 30 years (1818-1848) he lived in eastern Mississippi near the present town of Columbus. Until the period of removal, this was near the boundary that separated the Choctaw and the Chickasaw. For several years Lincecum operated two trading posts, one patronized principally by the Choctaw, the other by the Chickasaw. He spoke the languages of both groups. During the early 1820’s he recorded—in the Choctaw language, using the Roman alphabet and various diacritical marks—a long traditional history of the Choctaw as related by an old and learned Choctaw man. A translation of this survives and a portion of it has been published (Lin- cecum, 1904b). It is very clear from his autobiography that Gideon Lincecum had a detailed knowl- edge of Choctaw medicinal plants. In the early 1830’s, having lost a number of pa- 286 tients, he became dissatisfied with the medicines he was using and decided to in- vestigate Choctaw herbal medicine. He got in touch with the leading doctor (alikchi chito, “big doctor’) of the Southern or Six- towns group of Choctaw. This Indian doctor was evidently much disturbed by the ad- vanced stage of Choctaw acculturation at that time, for he sent word to Lincecum that he would be “willing to teach what he knew about medicine before he died to some- body, and to a white man in preference to his own people, because the white man would place it on paper and preserve it” (ibid., 1904a, p. 494). The pay for his services as an informant was to be 50 cents a day and his food. The Choctaw doctor met Lincecum at a certain bluff on the Noxubee River, and the two men lived in the woods for six weeks. The Choctaw collected plants alone during the day, and in the evening before a fire ‘‘he unrolled his specimens of medicinal plants and laid them in order on his right hand where he was sitting. He then took them up, one by one, described the kind of soil they were found in, their use, the season to collect them and what other plants they were some- times combined with” (ibid., pp. 495-496). Using his system for recording Choctaw, Lincecum wrote down everything that the doctor told him, and he also preserved small specimens of each plant. At the close of the 6-week period the doctor had Lincecum read back to him everything that he had dictated. At this time errors were corrected and addi- tions made. Unfortunately this remarkable record of Choctaw medicinal plants does not seem to have survived. It is not among the Lincecum manuscripts in the University of Texas Li- brary, and the living descendants of Lince- cum do not know of it. Nothing remains but the scattered remarks in Lincecum’s medical herbarium. Undoubtedly many other plants in the herbarium were used by the Choctaw, but the present record does not permit them to be specified. In the sections that follow only such pas- sages have been taken from Lincecum’s herbarial notes as seem to be pertinent to Indian medicinal usage. Lincecum’s state- ments are enclosed in quotation marks. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 9 When Lincecum gives Chickasaw or Choe- taw names, the nearest equivalents in By- ington’s Choctaw dictionary (Byington, 1915) have been inserted in brackets. Aside from simplifying the spelling of a few words, such as “‘Chocktaw” and ‘‘Chickesaw,” no further editorial changes have been made. CHOCTAW Cushman (1899, pp. 228-229) has given the English names of seven medicinal plants used by the Mississippi Choctaw, presum- ably in the middle of the nineteenth century. Fifty-three medicinal plants have been re- ported in the literature of the current century. From the Choctaw of Bayou Lacomb in southeastern Louisiana Bushnell (1909, pp. 23-24) collected 25 plants in 1909. All these are identified by scientific name as well as by Choctaw name, and only one appears on Cushman’s earlier list (its use is not given by Cushman). About 1918 Swan- ton (1931, pp. 237-238) obtained a list of 12 medicinal plants from a Choctaw informant in eastern Mississippi. These plants are iden- tified only by Choctaw and English names, but they do not appear to duplicate any plants on the Cushman and Bushnell lists. Taylor (1940, passim) does not make use of the Cushman and Swanton lists, but she incorporates the Bushnell list of 25, to which are added plants collected in her own field work among the Choctaw in the 1930’s. She does not state whether her field work was done among the Mississippi or the Louisiana Choctaw. Her contribution to Choctaw medical ethnobotany consists of new uses for six plants on the Bushnell list and 16 plants previously unreported from any Choc- taw group. To this may be added the Lince- cum record, which provides data on 16 plants used by the Choctaw early in the nineteenth century: Polygonum aviculare L., deerweed, knotgrass, pinkweed. ‘‘Whole plant. A strong tea of this plant drunk freely, is the Choctaw remedy to prevent abortion. They have the utmost confi- dence in its powers; they all know it, and conse- quently abortion is a circumstance of very uncommon occurrence.” Heuchera americana L., alum root, rock gera- neum. “The root. Astringent, tonic. This is a SEPTEMBER 1951 valuable remedial agent, useful in all cases re- quiring powerful astringents; it has been noticed and used by all the different aboriginal tribes with whom I have become acquainted in the South [Choctaw, Chickasaw, and Creek].” Tephrosia elegans Nutt. Lincecum does not link this plant with any specific Indian group, but in view of certain remarks in his autobiog- raphy it is most likely of Choctaw origin. “The root of this plant is an excellent article in bad coughs. The method of using it, is, to carry it about you, and chew it frequently through the day, swallowing juice. If the bowels become loose, you have swallowed a little too much; diminish the quantity so as to properly regulate the bowels, and continue its use for a long time.-This is an Indian remedy...” Geraneum maculatum L., spotted crane’s-bill. “Root. Powerful astringent. The Choctaws con- sider it as the most effectual of their remedies for the cure of the venereal.” Vitis aestivalis Michx., summer grape. “Re- frigerant, tonic, acid. I was witness to a case while I resided with the Choctaw Indians, which to me was very singular. There was a woman between 14 and 15 years of age, who died in childbed, leaving her infant child to the care of its grandmother. This old woman was 55 years of age when she took the child, and had not nursed a child since the mother of the infant in question was weaned. She took the infant and as is the custom with Indian women, she cried and grieved over it, sympathizing with and strongly desiring that she might give nourishment to it, and be able to raise up the infant to fill the place of its deceased mother; and all the time, as often as five or six times a day she washed her breast with and drank freely of the water of the grape vine. The result was that in the course of a week she began to secrete milk, and very soon her breasts were full and plump, and she nourished the child sufficiently to keep it healthy and fat. She told me that it was the custom of her country women.” Sida hederacea Torr., round-leaved sida. ‘“‘Choc- taw name: Shaka oakheesh [probably sheki, buz- zard; okhi"sh, medicine]. The root. Mucilaginous. It is used by the Choctaws in dysentery, diarrhea, inflammation of the bowels, burns, etc. The root when dried is easily pulverized. . . ’”’ The Choctaw, like the Creek and Chickasaw, believed that many diseases were caused by animals. (Sawnton, 1931, pp. 235, 237). Sheki okhi"sh, “buzzard medicine”, may indicate that certain intestinal disorders were ascribed to this bird. For reference to an- CAMPBELL: MEDICINAL PLANTS USED BY INDIANS 287 other animal, the fox, see Eryngium aquaticum below. Aralia racemosa L., American spikenard, Indianroot. “Choctaw name: tally thla,po,la [pos- sibly tala, name of a certain root; lopoli to pass through slowly]. The berries, the root. Stimulant, expectorant. The Choctaws use it for many complaints among their children. In all cases where we use paregoric, Bateman’s drops, God- frey’s cordial, ete., they use the spikenard. . . For this purpose they boil a little of the root in clear water, sweeten the decoction, and give it pretty freely to children of any age, who are troubled with gripes, colic, etc...In bad cases of putrid sore eyes, the Choctaws boil up a quantity of the root, and while it is boiling, hot- steam their eyes over it. Two or three applica- tions generally cure them.’ Eryngium aquaticum U., bitter snakeroot, rattlesnake master. ‘Choctaw name: Pis, hok, chu, la [pishuk, name of a weed used in dying red; chula, fox]. The root. Powerful diuretic, ex- pectorant, stimulant, and anti-poison—good for snakebite. The Choctaw cure gonorrhea with this plant.” Asclepias verticillata L., milkweed. ‘The root. Sudorific, stimulating. The Choctaws esteemed it among their most valuable remedies for snake- bite. They administered it in strong decoction, and chewed the root, swallowing the saliva while chewing.” Cephalanthus occidentalis L., buttonbush. “Bark of the root and of the tree. Tonic, febri- fuge. A strong decoction of the bark of the tree . is a favorite medicine with the Choctaw Indians for dysentery.” Galium asprellum Michx., bedstraw. ‘Whole plant. Diaphoretic, diuretic. The Choctaw cure measles with it—and go in the rain, water, and cold all the time.” Galium boreale L., bedstraw. “Choctaw name: Ahoyo oakheesh [ohoyo, woman; okhi"sh, medi- cine]. The whole plant. Diuretic, diaphoretic, and deobstruant. This is the article [decoction made from the whole plant] used by the Choctaw- women for the purpose of preventing impregna- tion. They told me that it proved uniformly successful, without injuring the health! I have abundant testimony of this statement.” Galiwm uniflorum, Michx., bedstraw. ‘*Whole plant. Astringent, good dye weed. The Choctaws made frequent use of this family of plants, in all cases requiring diuretic, and diaphoretie action.” 288 Nabalus asper (Michx.) T & G, rough white lettuce. “‘Secernant, stimulant, anodyne. Elect- chee Chitto [Alikchi Chito], the Six Town doctor, used a decoction of the roots and tops of this plant as a stimulating diuretic and anodyne, taken occasionally, according to its effects on the patient.’’ Reference is made here to the Choctaw doctor who met Lincecum in the woods and taught him Choctaw herbal medicine. Eupatorium ageratoides L. f., white snakeroot. “Choctaw name: noota ikheesh [noti, tooth; ikhe"sh, medicine]. Warming stimulant and tonic. The Choctaw and Chicka8aw Indians use it, by chewing and holding the roots in the mouth, for toothache.”’ Echinacea purpurea (L.) Moench, purple cone- flower. “‘The tincture of the roots of this plant has been used with success in bad cough, and dyspepsia attended with a bad cough...The Choctaws use it for the above purposes, by chewing and swallowing the saliva. They keep a small piece of the root in the mouth nearly all the time, continuing its use for a long time.” One notable fact emerges when Lincecum’s early nineteenth century list of Choctaw medicinal plants is compared with lists of the twentieth century. Only one plant, Cephalanthus occidentalis, is found in the later lists (Bushnell, 1909, p. 24), and it is reported as used for sore eyes and toothache, not for dysentery, as indicated by Lincecum. The recent lists of plants and their uses do not show a very large number of corres- pondences, which is probably best explained by incompleteness of data and by individual and local group variation. But the corres- pondences between nineteenth-century lists and recent lists are practically nonexistent. It thus appears that Choctaw herbal medi- cine changed considerably during the hun- dred-year period and that the plants in use in more recent times are not especially rep- resentative of those used in aboriginal times. This conclusion is also supported by the plaintive remark of the Sixtowns Choctaw doctor in the early 1830’s about the lack of interest in medicinal plants among his own people. Lincecum mentions no plants that were used as emetics, an absence that agrees with all later lists. The Choctaw are said to have induced vomiting by inserting a finger or a JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES feather in the throat (Swanton, 1931, p. 233; Taylor, 1940, p. 70). Taylor (1940, p. 70) has called attention to the absence among the Choctaw of any plants effectively used as antiperiodics and counterirritants. Lin- cecum’s data do not conflict with this observation. Some uses of these plants by the Choctaw are either unique or of rare occurrence in the Southeastern area. According to Lincecum, the Choctaw used the sap of Vitis aestivalis to induce lactation, which is the first report from the Southeast of a plant used as a lactagogue. The same is true regarding Poly- gonum aviculare, a decoction of which Choc- taw women used to prevent miscarriage. The Choctaw used Galiwm boreale as a con- traceptive, a usage that thus far has been reported only among the Cherokee, who used Cicuta maculata for this purpose (Mooney and Olbrechts, 1932, pp. 117-118; Olbrechts, 1931, p. 19). Olbrechts (ibid.) has stated his belief that the use of Cicuta maculata as a contraceptive among the Cherokee was prob- ably derived from European settlers. He cites the resemblance of Cicuta maculata to parsley, especially in the early growth phase, and points out that parsley is still popular as an abortive in several European countries. The use of Galiwm boreale by the Choctaw suggests that herbal contraceptives may have been aboriginal in the Southeast. CHICKASAW At present very little is known about Chickasaw medicinal plants. Adair (1775, pp. 122, 164-167), writing in the latter part of the eighteenth century, refers to only two medicinal plants that can be attributed safely to the Chickasaw Indians. Swanton (1928a, pp. 266-268) has published a list of 25 medicinal plants he obtained from a Chickasaw doctor in Oklahoma sometime between the years 1915 and 1924. Most of these plants are identified by Chickasaw — names, and sixteen are also identified by common English names. Taylor (1940, pas- sim) has assigned scientific names to eight of the latter. To Swanton’s list may be added the following six plants reported by Lincecum: Botrychium virginianum (L.) Sw., Virginia grape-fern. “Chickasaw name: hoeta hocksish, vou. 41, No. 9 SEPTEMBER 1951 puke weed [Choctaw: hoeta, vomit; hakshish, root]. Emetic, diaphoretic, expectorant. I saw a Chickasaw Indian using the decoction of the root of this plant for an emetic; it operated finely. After the operation was over, he took some Tomfulla water [liquid from a pot of hominy] ’ and said, ‘I was sick but I am now well.’ ” Heuchera americana L. See Choctaw list. Chaerophyllum procumbens (L.) Crantz, spread- ing chervil. “Chickasaw name: shuah hokshoop, stinking root [Choctaw: shua, stinking; hakshup, bark, husk, ete.]. The root. Emetic, poisonous. The Chickasaw use this article as an emetic, and it seems to operate very kindly, carrying off the morbid very well, always giving relief to the patient very similar to the lobelia.” Dasystoma pedicularia (L.) Benth., fern-leaved false foxglove. ‘“‘Anti-scorbutic, emetic. The Chickasaw Indians use this plant for an emetic. Tt resembles in its action the lobelia. The Chick- asaw use it with impunity.” Eupatorium ageratoides L. f. See Choctaw list. Verbesina virginica L., Virginia crownbeard. “Deobstruant, stimulant, diuretic, antivenereal. A tea of the root of this plant, is, with the Chick- asaw Indians, a very certain cure for Fluor Albus, and in almost all cases of uterine weakness... I found the Chickasaw Indians using this article 20 years ago. This article was written in 1846, after experimenting with it.” Lincecum’s list of six Chickasaw medicinal plants does not appear to duplicate in any way the 25 plants on the Swanton list. Adair’s two eighteenth century Chickasaw medicinal plants do not appear on Swanton’s list either. As in the case of the Choctaw, it seems that there has also.been much change in Chickasaw materia medica since the early nineteenth century. In a chart Taylor (ibid., p. 74) has indicated the absence of herbal emetics among the Chickasaw. Adair (1775, pp. 122, 164-167), Speck (1907b, pp. 55, 56), and Swanton (1928a, p. 268) all refer to specific ceremonial emetics, and Lincecum gives three additional plants used for this purpose. CREEK Creek herbal medicine is much better known. In 1904-05 Speck (1907a, pp. 118- 119, 124-133, 144) obtained a list of 17 medicinal plants from the Oklahoma Creek. Eleven of these are identified by scientific CAMPBELL: MEDICINAL PLANTS USED BY INDIANS 289 name, the remainder by English or Creek names. Swanton (1928b, pp. 639-663) has published data on 79 medicinal plants ob- tained from Creek informants in Oklahoma during the years 1911-12. Thirty-four of these plants are identified by scientific names; the others are identified by English and Creek names. Swanton calls attention to the fact that four of these plants are men- tioned in late eighteenth century sources and that one is mentioned in an early nine- teenth century source, but there are no cor- respondences in usage. Seven plants on the Speck list also occur on Swanton’s list, but in only one instance are the uses similar. Taylor (1940, passim) has listed 29 Creek medicinal plants, most of which are derived from Swanton. To this we can add _ Lince- cum’s meager list of three plants: Persea pubescens (Pursh) Sarg., swamp bay. “The root. Diaphoretic, hydragogue, alterant. The Muscogee, and nearly all the tribes of Southern Indians, use this article [a decoction] as a diaphoretic in fevers of all descriptions. It is also extensively used by them in dropsy...”’ Heuchera americana L. See Choctaw list. Manfreda virginica (1.) Salisb., false aloe. “The root. Mucilaginous. The root of this plant boiled in sweet milk and taken freely, or chewed and swallowed is a certain cure for the bite of the rattlesnake. I have known it done several times. It is a Muscogee remedy.” Of these three plants only Manfreda vir- ginica appears on later lists (Swanton, 1928b, p. 645). The uses of this plant are approxi- mately the same for both early nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, although Lin- cecum reports its use internally for snakebite, whereas Swanton indicates an external use. Among Lincecum’s Choctaw, Chickasaw, and Creek plants, this is the nearest identity of both plant and use that occurs in early and late times. SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS Twenty-two medicinal plants used by Choctaw, Chickasaw, and Creek Indians in the early nineteenth century have been iden- tified on the basis of the actual plants in Lincecum’s surviving medical herbarium and his recollections of their uses by these Indians. Of these, 16 were used by the Choe- 290 taw, 6 by the Chickasaw, and 3 by the Creek. Although divorced from myth and ritual, this list of plants and the accompanying data on usage add to our knowledge of folk medi- cine among these Muskhogean-speaking peoples. Lincecum’s list of 22 plants contains only 6 that have hitherto been reported for any specific Southeastern Indian group. Two of these have previously been reported for the same group—Cephalanthus occidentalis for the Choctaw, Manfreda virginica for the Creek. Only for the latter are the reported uses similar. The following five plants on Lincecum’s list are now recorded for these Southeastern Indian groups: Botrychtum vir- gimianum, Chickasaw and Cherokee (Mooney and Olbrechts, 1932, p. 177); Vatzs aestivalis, Choctaw, Creek (Swanton, 1928b, pp. 645, 660), and Cherokee (Mooney and Olbrechts, 1932, p. 660); Eryngium aquati- cum, Choctaw, Alabama (Taylor, 1940, p. 45), Koasati (ibid.), and Cherokee (Mooney and Olbrechts, 1932, p. 245); Cephalanthus occidentalis, Choctaw (Bushnell, 1909, p. 24), Chickasaw (Taylor, 1940, p. 58), and Koasati (ibid.); Verbesina virginica, Chickasaw and Choctaw (Bushnell, 1909, p. 23). Identity of usage occurs only in the case of Botrychiwm virgimanum, which both Chickasaw and Cherokee used for an emetic. Two plants on Lincecum’s Choctaw list were used for purposes not previously re- ported among Southeastern Indians—V itis aestiwalis to induce lactation and Polygonum aviculare to prevent miscarriage. The abo- riginal use of herbal contraceptives in the Southeast, reported in recent times for the Eastern Cherokee and doubted by Olbrechts, may now be reexamined in the light of Lin- cecum’s report of a similar use among the nineteenth century Choctaw. Such evidence as we have—and the Lince- cum record is about all that we do have— indicates that herbal medicine among the Choctaw of Mississippi and Louisiana changed markedly after the early nineteenth century. The principal changes were in plant species and their uses rather than in methods of drug preparation. It should be noted that these Choctaw did not remove to Indian JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 9 Territory but remained in their aboriginal area. Although less evidence is available, similar and probably even more extensive changes occurred in Chickasaw and Creek medicine, for these two groups emigrated to a different natural environment. Few will doubt that much change did occur in the herbal medicine of all these people. The point is that heretofore very little concrete evidence of change has been available. LITERATURE CITED Apair, JAMES. The history of the American In- dians. London, 1775. BusHNELL, Davin I., Jr. The Choctaw of Bayou Lacomb, St. Tammany Parish, Louisiana. Bur. Amer. Ethnol. Bull. 48. 1909. ByIneTon, Cyrus. A dictionary of the Choctaw language (edited by John R. Swanton and Henry 8. Halbert). Bur. Amer. Ethnol. Bull. 46. 1915. CusuMAN, H. B. History of the Choctaw, Chicka- saw, and Natchez Indians. Greenville, Tex., 1899. GrIsER, SAMUEL Woop. Naturalists of the fron- tier. Dallas, 1948. Lincecum, GrmpEoN. Autobiography of Gideon Lincecum. Publ. Mississippi Hist. Soc. 8: 443-519. 1904a. Choctaw traditions about their settlement in Mississippi and the origin of their mounds. Publ. Mississippi Hist. Soc. 8: 521-542. 1904b. Mooney, JAMES, AND OLBRECHTS, FRANS M. The Swimmer manuscript: Cherokee sacred for- mulasand medicinal prescriptions. Bur. Amer. Ethnol. Bull. 99. 1932. Oxprecuts, Frans M. Cherokee belief and prac- tice with regard to childbirth. Anthropos 26: 17-33. 1931. Speck, Frank G. The Creek Indians of Taskigi town. Amer. Anthrop. Assoc. Mem. 2. 1907a. ———. Notes on Chickasaw ethnology and folk- lore. Journ. Amer. Folk-lore 20: 50-58. 1907b. Swanton, Joun R. Social and religious beliefs and usages of the Chickasaw Indians. 44th Ann. Rep. Bur. Amer. Ethnol.: 169-273 1928a. Religious beliefs and medical practices of the Creek Indians. 42d Ann. Rep. Bur. Amer. Ethnol.: 473-672. 1928b. Source material for the social and cere- monial life of the Choctaw Indians. Bur. Amer. Ethnol. Bull. 103. 1981. Tayuor, Lypa AvreRILL. Plants used as curatives by certain Southeastern tribes. Cambridge, Mass., 1940. SEPTEMBER 1951 STRIMPLE: PHANOCRINUS CYLINDRICUS 291 PALEONTOLOGY .—Notes on Phanocrinus cylindricus and description of new species of Chester crinoids. HARRELL L. SrrimpieE, Bartlesville, Okla. (Com- municated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) In this paper I present notes on the Fayetteville’ formation manifestation of Phanocrinus cylindricus and describe the following new species of Chester crinoids: Eupachycrinus modernus, Aphelecrinus planus, Aphelecrinus exoticus, and Scytalo- crinus aftonensis. Genus Phanocrinus Kirk, 1937 Phanocrinus cylindricus Miller and Gurley Fig. 11 The species was well defined by Miller and Gurley (1894) and is readily distinguished from other described species by the full deep calyx and the 10 long, slow-tapering, uniserial arms. The surface of the dorsal cup was said to be granular. Horizon was given as “Kaskaskia group,” of Pulaski County, Ky. Kirk (1937) referred the species to Phanocrinus and has been followed by Sutton and Hagan (1939) and Sutton and Winkler (1940). The later authors described and figured a specimen of the Walker Museum collection as a syntype from the ‘Chester series of Pulaski County, Ken- tucky.”’ They specified that no granulations were present. Bassler and Moodey (1943) gave a more spe- cifie horizon for the species as ‘“Chester-Glen Dean” but did not give a more specific locality. The author considers it a matter worth re- cording that specimens readily identified as P. cylindricus have been collected from the Fayette- ville formation, Chester, of Craig County, Okla., which decidedly show not only granulations on the surface of the cup plates, but also along the lateral sides of the axillary first primibrachials and the first secundibrachials. On the dorsal cup, granules are more prevalent on the RR and plates of the posterior interradius than elsewhere. On occasions the granules tend to become confluent and form irregular shaped narrow ridges. Ap- parently weathering, or possibly rolling about on the bottom of the ancient ocean, or both, had a tendency to obliterate the granulations except where protected along the impressed sutures and the lateral sides of the brachials. In many in- stances the granulations are difficult to discern except with the aid of low-powered magnification. Two well-preserved crowns of P. cylindricus from the Fayetteville formation of northeastern Oklahoma are being deposited in the U. 8. Na- tional Museum. The figured specimen was col- lected by Claude Bronaugh, of Afton, Okla. Genus Eupachycrinus Meek and Worthen, 1865 Eupachycrinus modernus, n. sp. Figs. 6-8 Dorsal cup is bowl-shaped, with broad basal concavity. Five small IBB are almost entirely covered by the large proximal columnal, but the triangular shaped extremities are visible. Five large BB form a good portion of the cup walls and curve sharply under to form also the sides of the basal invagination. Five large RR are slightly wider than long. Three large anal plates are present in the broad, mildly protruded pos- terior interradius. Anal X is hexagonal, with lower edge in broad contact with the truncated upper extremity of post. B. RA is pentagonal and lies obliquely on the right shoulder of post. B and a left facet of r. post. B. The hexagonal RX is directly above RA and to the right of anal X. All cup plates are tumid and are devoid of ornamentation. First primibrachials are wide, axillaryinallrays and fill the upper faces of RR. A second bifurea- tion takes place with the first secundibrachials in the anterior rays of the 1. post. and r. ant. rami and in the posterior ray of the r. post. ramus. Both the left anterior and anterior rays have only two arms. In proximal portions of the arms the arrangement is uniserial but quickly becomes biserial. Delicate pinnules are present. The proximal columnal has a mildly pentagonal outline and is pierced by a small pentalobate lumen. The anal sac is partially exposed and is small, round, composed of thin hexagonal plates, probably five to a circlet. Measurements in mm.—As follows: Holotype TAA, OF ClO OiOacoososesosancoamancosoaescsonx . 6.0 Maximum width of cup..... MRI M RS © 13.5 Heng thiotdle poston vantateatact ter dseisteircetas cctarsrare 7.7 Widthtotalemosts2Bingnccecemmenairion en sitiecttiauntater 6.21 Length of interbasal suture.................... ore ILE RY AHO OR MW, Byes Us bosoosoocanoococacr Seo ARE 4.61 WG har Oelly Bholtty Jats 6 congcooos SunAtaNwoonoeRouCOCuSS Say Thength of anterradial Suture. cc. cls ccc e nee clenes ces 2:7 Diameter of proximal colummal................... ace 1 Measurements taken along normal curvature of plates. Remarks.—This species is different from nor- mal representatives of the genus as interpreted by Kirk (1937) in several respects. Typical species have a second bifurcation of the arms in the right and left anterior rays, and in the anterior radius only two arms are developed. In EH. mod- ernus the second bifuraction is in the posterior ray and the left anterior radius is restricted to two arms. Another characteristic of normal Hu- pachycrinus is the unusual height of the basal concavity and a weakness of IBB plates dis- closed by their normal absence. In the present species IBB are in place, albeit almost entirely covered by the proximal columnal, and the inner height of BB is 1.5 mm. lower than their outer height. Occurrence and horizon.—Unnamed limestone formation below the Fayetteville formation, Chester, Mississippian; railroad cut about 3 miles southwest of Locust Grove, Okla. Holotype.—Collected by the author. To be de- posited in the U.S. National Museum. Genus Aphelecrinus Kirk, 1944 Aphelecrinus planus, n. sp. Figs. 9-11 Dorsal cup is low cone-shaped. The holotype is slightly distorted by lateral compression. Five IBB extend only slightly beyond the large, round columnar scar, and are upflared. Five BB are large and form a good portion of the calyx walls. They have a pentagonal outline but actually possess six sides with the exception of the pos- terior and right posterior which each have an extra facet for contact with plates of the anal interradius. Five RR are distinctive pieces. Out- wardly directed articulating facets do not fill the width of RR and the outer faces of RR are ex- tended along the interradial sutures to the inner- most extremities of the plates. Posterior inter- radius is composed of three plates in normal (primitive) arrangement. All cup plates are un- ornamented. There is an isotomous division of the long, slender arms in all rays on the somewhat elongate first primibrachials. Another bifurcation is known to occur in some rays at a considerable distance from the cup. Nonaxillary brachials are alter- natingly extended as short spines so’ that one lateral side of each brachial is long and carries a stout pinnule, and the opposite side of the suc- ceeding brachial is elongate and pinnular bearing. Tegmen has not been observed. Measurements in mm.—As follows: JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 9 Holotype Theng thiofi crown sace.ceescr aero eee eee eas 55.5 iHeightiofadorsalicupye er aes ees eee eee 4.3 Maximumiswid throfecupre essen ats ene eee 10.7! Diameter ofscolummnar' scare. - ee eee 2.4 Height: of lsposty Bilis. socriecslnccen le eee eC ee Ball Widthsof lspost-JB3. --5 iceate one eee Cee 3.2 Icength’ of interbasal’suturey..- a )-- ere ilar Height oflant.iRiy.ccjo0. sc acento bee ee eRe 2.7 Widthiofilsant. Re 28 5) Sel eee eee ee Ane @ Height/ofl. ants, PBr: 2. h2scet actos se ee 4.9 Widthof l-vant: PBr: ).052552 24s. eee eee eee 4.0 1 Distorted. Remarks.—A. planus appears to be more closely related to A. limatus Kirk (1944) than other described species. The latter is a smaller species, with more exposed IBB plates, less ornate arm structure and less pronounced indentation of the interradial areas in the upper extremity of the cup. Occurrence and horizon.—Approximately 5 miles southwest of Afton, Okla.; Fayetteville formation, Chester, Mississippian. Holotype.—Collected by the author. To be de- posited in the U.S. National Museum. Aphelecrinus exoticus, n. sp. Fig. 5 Dorsal cup is shallow, cone-shaped. Five IBB extend slightly beyond the large, round columnar sear and are upflared in attitude. Five BB are of modest size. Five RR are rather large. Articular facets are directed outwardly and fail to fill the distal faces of RR. Lateral sides of RR are curved sharply inward and recurve to form a flat narrow surface along the interradial sutures, which sur- face continues into the interarticular areas. Outer ligamental areas are strongly impressed, trans- verse ridges are prominent and intermuscular notch is pronounced. The muscle scars are shal- low, lacking in definition. Three anal plates oc- cupy the broad, protruded posterior interradius. Arrangement of these plates is normal (primitive) and RA is the most prominent. A small but well defined depression occurs at the proximal tip of each RR and extends into the interbasal areas. All cup plates are covered with narrow, irregular, elongated ridges or pustules. Arms and tegmen have not been observed. Measurements in mm.—As follows: Holotype Heightofseupy. isch. nese eo ee eee 2.5 (distorted) Width of dorsal cup (right post. anterior to left anteriomragius) sess eee eee eee 11.7 iHeightiotel posts ee eeee eee eee rere ee erer ee 2.5 Widthiofelsiposts2B assesses ears 3.0 eich tiofsltsposter keer ree ee sere rere seer 2.71 Widthioflipost-pR separ eet ee renner ere 4.6 Width of articulating facet..................... 3.6 Diameter of colummar scar....................- 202 1 To outer lip of ligamental furrow. SEPTEMBER 1951 STRIMPLE: PHANOCRINUS CYLINDRICUS 293 Fies. 1-4.—Scytalocrinus aftonensis, n. sp.: 1, 2, Paratype from basal and posterior; 3, 4, holotype from right posterior and anterior, X 2. Fie. 5.—Aphelecrinus exoticus, n. sp.: Holotype from base, X 1.8. Fias. 6-8.—Ewpachycrinus modernus, n.sp.: Holotype from base, anterior and posterior, x 2. Fias. 9-11.—Aphelecrinus planus, n. sp.: Holotype from base and anterior (Figs. 9 and 10 are enlarged X 1.8 and have been separated from the distal portions of the arms; Fig. ll is X 1.4, show- ing the entire specimen). Fra. 12.—Phanocrinus cylindricus (Miller and Gurley): Left posterior view of specimen from the Fayetteville formation, X 1.8. 294 Remarks.—A. exoticus differs from other de- scribed species in the unusual depression of inter- radial sutures, dimplelike depressions at the proximal extremities of RR and in having spec- tacular ornamentation of cup plates. Occurrence and horizon.—Approximately 5 miles southwest of Afton, Okla.; Fayetteville formation, Chester, Mississippian. Holotype.—Collected by the author. To be de- posited in the U.S. National Museum. Genus Scytalocrinus Wachsmuth and Springer, 1880 Scytalocrinus aftonensis, n. sp. Figs. 1-4 The crown is slender, long, and compact. Dor- sal cup is truncate cone-shaped. Five IBB form a subhorizontal plane about the columnar scar with distal extremities curved upward to slightly participate in lateral walls of the cup. Five BB are wide, hexagonal except for posterior and right posterior BB, which each have an extra facet for contact with anal plates. Five RR are wide, pentagonal plates with subhorizontal articulating facets filling their distal faces. Outer ligamental notches are deep and wide. Transverse ridges are well defined and the muscle scars are moderately deep. Adsutural slopes are steep. The posterior interradius is rather narrow and the three rela- tively small anal plates are in normal (primitive) arrangement. There are 10 cuneiform arms branching isot- omously with the first primibrachial in all rays. The surfaces of the arms are well rounded, and there is no sharp angulation between the outer areas and the lateral sides. Each secundibrachial bears a pinnule. The columnar scar is circular in outline, slopes strongly to the lumen and is heavily crenulated. The lumen appears to be pentalobate. The entire crown 1s devoid of ornamentation. Measurements in mm.—As follows: Para- Holo type type Heishtroridorsaltcupiecs-ere terete ene eee 6.5 4.5 WERSIEN HIN Ve). OC? ObVDadosoccangsancccassounss 11.6 8.7 Jataany OF, joGNs Wy -scescscasscapdedsoae Siena x's 2.8 2.5 Widthio fale posta) Dasa ses rrr errr rr eee 3.5 2.8 Length of interbasal suture..................... 1.6 1.5 Hleiehtio flan teak eee er ere reer 3.1 2.8 Vilsiokiey OF 1G Ghetin We no oe coccoas Wy Sa 6.0 4.2 Length of interradial suture.................... 2.2 2.0 Diametenotcolummariscany jc eee eee 2.8 2.8 Remarks.—S. aftonensis is most readily sepa- rable from other described species in the nature of the IBB plates, which form a subhorizontal platform about the concave columnar scar, then JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 9 flex sharply upward in distal portions to partici- pate in the lateral calyx walls. S. validus, the genotype species, has IBB that do not participate in the lateral cup walls and often the anterior ramus fails to bifurcate. Hypselocrinus Kirk (1940) has upflared IBB, but they rise directly from the columnar scar. In the shape of the cup, therefore, the Fayette- ville species appears to occupy an intermediate position between the two genera. _ The irregular length of the axillary PBrBr is comparable to that found in Apographiocrinus typicalis Moore and Plummer as presented by the author (1938) under the name Graphiocrinus carbonarius. The height of these plates in mm is: l. ant. 3.8, 1. post. 4.3, ant. 4.7, r. ant. 3.5, and r. post. 4.6. Occurrence and horizon—Approximately 5 miles southwest of Afton, Okla.; Fayetteville formation, Chester, Mississippian. Types.—Collected by Mrs. Hazel Bronaugh, of Afton, Okla. To be deposited in the U. S. National Museum. REFERENCES Basser, R.S., and Moopry, MARGARET W. Bzib- liographic and faunal index of Paleozoic Pelma- tozoan Echinoderms. Geol. Soc. Amer. Spec. Pap. 45. 1943. Kirk, Epwin. Eupachycrinus and related Car- boniferous crinoid genera. Journ. Pal. 11. 1937. Seven new genera of Carboniferous Crnot- dea Inadunata. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 30: 321-334. 1937. Aphelecrinus, a new inadunate crinoid genus from the upper Mississippian. Amer. Journ. Sci. 242: 190-203, pl. 1. 1944. Merk, F. B., and WortHEN, A.H. Descriptions of new crinoids from the Carboniferous rocks of Illinois and some of the adjoining States. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 1865: 159. Mriuer, 8. A., and Guruny, Wn. F. E. New genera and species of Echinodermata. Llinois State Mus. Bull. 5: 38-39, pl. 3, figs. 19-21. 1894. StrRimPLE, Harrett L. A group of crinoids from the Pennsylvanian of northeastern Oklahoma. 4-6, pl.1, figs.1-11. Priv. Publ., Bartlesville, Okla. 1988. Surron, A. H., and Hacan, WaAtiace W. In- adunate crinoids of the Mississiuppian—Zea- erinus. Journ. Pal. 13: 83. 1939. , and WINKLER, VirGIL D. Mississippian Inadunata—Eupachyecrinus and related forms. Journ. Pal. 14: 553-554, pl. 66, figs. 11-12. 1940. WacusmucH, C., and Sprineer, F. Revision of the Palaeocrinidae, pt. 1. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 1879: 226-378, pl. 15-17. 1880. SEPTEMBER 1951 REEDER: NEW SPECIES OF POA 295 BOTANY.—A new species of Poa from Peru. JoHN R. ReepER, Yale University. (Communicated by Jason R. Swallen.) In the spring of 1947 a small bundle of grasses was received from Dr. O. P. Pearson, now at the University of California. They were part of a collection of plants made by Dr. Pearson and his wife, in the region of Lake Titicaca in southern Peru. Among them were two collections of a species apparently undescribed. A description of this species is given below. Specimens are deposited in the Herbarium of Yale University, with dupli- cates in the United States National Herbar- jum and the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. The type is at Yale. Poa pearsonii sp. nov. Perennis, dense caespitosa; innovationibus et basibus culmorum vaginis vetustioribus subcor aceis fuscis vel fulvis dense vestitis; culmis- erectis ad 50 cm altis gracilibus teretibus vel subcompressis scabris circiter 0.8 mm diametro, binodis, nodis in 4 inferiore culmi sitis; vaginis artis quam internodiis plerumque longioribus sub- compressis scabris; ligula lanceolata acuminata, 10-15 mm longa; laminis anguste linearibus in- volutis setaceis vel subjunceis, 0.8-1 mm diametro, eis innovationum culmis subaequalibus, eis summum culmi versus circiter 5-8 cm longis scabris sectione transversa ovalibus 7-nerviis, nervo mediano solo prominente; paniculis pyra- midalibus subpatentibus, 10-12 cm longis, axi scaberula, ramis capillaribus nutantibus, inferi- ore 7-8 cm longo, ad 2 longitudinis nudis, apicem versus spiculis instructis, ramis secundariis simi- libus sed solo 4-3 longitudinis nudis, omnibus 4—6-spiculatis, pedicellis brevissimis clavatis scab- ris; spiculis ellipticis confertifloris 5-6 mm. longis praecipue 3-floris (raro 2-floris), flore basali hermaphrodito, floribus superiorbus femineis cum staminodiis minutis (raro floribus omnibus femi- neis), rachillae internodiis brevissimis, flore se- cundo a basali vix separato; glumis acutissimis membranaceis laevibus, margine hyalinis; gluma prima 4—4.5 mm longa, uninervia, gluma secunda circiter 5 mm longa, quam flore contiguo paullo breviore; lemmatibus omnino similibus ovato- lanceolatis acutis, infimo 4.5 mm longo, superi- oribus decrescentibus, dorso et latere scaberulis, Fra. 1.—Ligules and spikelets, X 5: A, Poa asperiflora; B, Poa pearsonti. Note that in A the ligule is short, the lemmas are prominently nerved, and the florets are separated by rather long rachilla joints. In B, the ligule is very long, the lemmas are obscurely nerved, and the rachilla joint between the first and second florets is so short that these florets appear to be borne at about the same level. 2 296 5-nerviis, nervis lateralibus obscuris quam lem- mate brevioribus, callo glabro, carina basim versus puberula; palea quam lemmate paullo breviore, minute bidentata, carinis scabris; an- theris in flore basali circiter 3 mm longis. DEPARTMENT OF PuNo: Cerro Ichuasi, Cocca- chara, southwest of Llave, alt. about 4850 m, O. P. & A. Pearson 91 (TYPE), November 22, 1946 (growing in gravelly soil at bottom of cliffs and alongside boulders; plants erect, in clumps, 25-50 em tall). The new species is apparently closely related to Poa asperiflora Hack., the type of which was collected in Bolivia on Titicaca Island at some- what lower elevations. It differs from that species in having a much longer ligule, 2-noded culms and 3-flowered (rarely 2-flowered) spikelets in which the rachilla joints are very short, the sec- ond floret being scarcely raised above the basal one, the joint between the second and third floret somewhat longer. In P. asperiflora the ligule is about 4 mm long, the spikelets are pre- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 9 dominantly 4-flowered (rarely 3-flowered), and the florets are separated by distinct rachilla joints, these 1-34 the length of the florets. A further difference is seen in the florets, those of P. pearson tending to be somewhat larger and with obscurely nerved lemmas. The lemmas of P. asperiflora are very prominently nerved. A second collection, 0. P. & A. Pearson 93, from about the same location as the type but on a dry slope, appears to represent the new species. The spikelets are identical except that the florets are pistillate rather than perfect. The leaves are all distinctly shorter than the culm, and the culm seems to be 1-noded rather than 2-noded as in the type. I wish to thank Jason R. Swallen, head curator, Department of Botany, United States National Museum, who kindly lent a type duplicate of Poa asperiflora Hack., and who also examined the Pearson specimens and confirmed my opinion that they represent an undescribed species. ENTOMOLOGY .—New species of Olethreutidae from Argentina (Lepidoptera). J. F. Gates Cuarke, U.S. Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine. The following species of olethreutid moths are described from specimens submitted by Dr. Kenneth J. Hayward, Institute Miguel Lillo, Tucuman, and Mr. Fernando Bour- quin of Buenos Aires, Argentina. This is the fourth! in a series of papers dealing with Microlepidoptera from Argentina. The photographs for this paper were taken by Robert Bonde, U.S. Department of Agri- culture. Drawings by the author. Anchylopera plumbata, n. sp. Figs. 1, 7, 8. Alar expanse, 11-13 mm. Labial palpus with second segment greenish gray, with a sordid whitish transverse band exteriorly and a spot of the same color interiorly; apex of second and third segment rust color. Antenna rust color. Head, thorax, and ground color of forewing greenish gray; dorsal half of 1 Notes on South American Tortricidae. Acta Zool. Lilloana 7: 579-588, 3 pls. 1949. Two new genera and three new species of Micro- lepidoptera from Argentina (Gelechiidae). Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 40: 285-289, illus. 1950. New species of Gelechiidae from Argentina (Lepi- doptera). Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 41: 140- 142, illus. 1951. wing from base to tornus rich dark brown, the area narrower at base and tornus than at middle, entire costa marked with short, oblique, dark- brown streaks alternating with similar metallic ones; from center of costa an accentuated dark- brown streak continuing to and confluent with a narrow triangular dark-brown area, the latter bounded by a narrow metallic lime; on costa, before apex, a white lunate streak; inner contour of apex and termen fuscous edged interiorly with a narrow, broken, white line; cilia from pale grayish in tornal area to fuscous at apex with the central portion metallic. Hindwmg lght brown; cilia slightly lighter. Legs whitish, the fore- and midlegs strongly suffused with fuscous. Male genttalia.—As figured. Female gentalia.—As figured. Type.—U.S. N. M. no. 61080. Type locality —Tigre, Argentina. Remarks.—Described from the type male and four male and female paratypes from the type locality, all reared by Fernando Bourquin, who will publish the life history. Paratypes in the U. S. National Museum and Mr. Bourquin’s collection, Buenos Aires. The pattern of plumbata is similar to many other species in this genus, but there are no known close relatives. SEPTEMBER 1951 Episimus unguiculus, n. sp. Figs. 2, 11, 12. Alar expanse, 15-17 mm. Labial palpus with second segment purplish fuscous basally, brownish distally; third segment purplish fuscous. Antenna fuscous, scape brown. Head mixed brown and purplish fuscous, gray posteriorly. Thorax brown anteriorly followed by CLARKE: NEW SPECIES OF OLETHREUTIDAE 297 a gray transverse band, the latter followed by brown and purplish fuscous mixed. Forewing with purplish-fuscous ground color crossed basally with obscure brown, transverse lines; costa, from base to slightly before middle, marked with small fuscous spots; from slightly before middle of costa to apex a series of leaden-metallic, tawny- edged, oblique streaks, the second, third, and e . . . . . . . Frias. 1-6.—1, Anchylopera plumbata, n. sp., right wings; 2, Hpisimus unguicutus, n. sp., right wings; 3, Cryptophlebia carpophagoides, n. sp., right wings of male; 4, same, right wings of female; 5, C. carpo- phaga Walsingham, right wings of male; 6, same, right wings of female. 298 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 9 fourth confluent and continuing as a single streak to termen just below apex; alternating with the metallic streaks narrow triangular fuscous spots along costa; from dorsum, before middle, a fus- cous line extending toward fold where it broadens q 5 up i by SS into a rectangular, tawny-edged, fuscous patch; at outer third a fuscous shade, mixed with tawny scales, extending from tornus to middle of wing where it broadens and then becomes attenuated toward costa and apex; this shade followed by a Fries. 7-13.—7, Anchylopera plumbata, n. sp., ventral aspect of male genitalia with right harpe re- moved; 8, same, ventral view of female genitalia with ovipositor removed; 9, Cryptophlebia carpopha- goides, n. sp., ventral view of male genitalia with right harpe removed; 10, same, ventral view of female genitalia with ovipositor removed; 11, Hpistmus plumbata, n. sp., ventral view of male genitalia with right harpe removed; 12, same, ventral view of female genitalia with ovipositor removed; 13, Crypto- phlebia carpophaga Walsingham, ventral view of female genitalia with ovipositor removed. SEPTEMBER 1951 CLARKE: NEW transverse band of leaden-metallic scales, the latter followed by tawny; at upper angle of cell a leaden-metallic spot bounded by white; ocel- loid area consisting of two short, black longitudi- nal dashes followed by a small transverse patch of silvery-metallic scales; the silvery-metallic patch bounded exteriorly by white scales; cilia tawny except those opposite veins 3-5, which are leaden. Hindwing fuscous; cilia light fuscous ex- cept those between vein two and apex, which are tawny with a light fuscous subbasal band. Legs ocherous-white strongly suffused and banded with fuscous. : Male genitalia. —As figured. Female gentalia.—As figured. Type.—U. 8. N. M. no. 61082. Type locality —Tigre, Argentina. Remarks.—Described from the type female and three male and female paratypes (the para- types are in poor condition), from the type locality and all reared by Fernando Bourquin, who will publish the hfe history. Paratypes in the U. 8. National Museum and Mr. Bourquin’s collection, Buenos Aires. This and the North American species E. argu- tanus (Clemens) are very closely related. The harpe of wngwiculus is broader and more robust, and the spine cluster is nearly twice as large as that of argutanus. The female genitalia demon- strate extremely close affinity, the chief differ- ence being that the ostium of argutanus is rec- tangular. The color and markings of the two are strikingly similar, but wnguiculus differs from argutanus by the strong dorsal mark, the tawny terminal area, and the reduction of the white scaling before termen. Cryptophlebia carpophagoides, n. sp. Figs. 3, 4, 9, 10 Alar expanse 20-24 mm. Labial palpus brownish buff to fuscous usually edged with blackish fuscous above. Antenna fuscous with slightly paler, narrow annulations. Head and thorax brownish buff to blackish fus- cous; tegula warm buff to grayish buff, apex blackish fuscous. Forewing light grayish buff; in male costa suffused with fuscous with faint sug- gestion of alternating small fuscous and semi- metallic spots; from costa at four-fifths a slightly curved fuscous line, mingled with black and semimetallic scales, extending to slightly beyond middle of termen, this line less pronounced in the female; between this line and apex two ob- SPECIES OF OLETHREUTIDAE 299 scure, short brownish lines; dorsum _ blackish fuscous from base to middle; on tornus a short, oblique black dash, more pronounced and larger in female than in male and edged with brown below and above in female; apical half of ground color sparsely irrorate with black. In the female the whole pale ground color obscured by brown and dark fuscous with a patch of gray-tipped scales before the tornal dash, and dull leaden patches scattered in apical half; cilia leaden. Hindwing fuscous, paler basally; cilia pale fus- cous with darker subbasal line. Legs buff more or less suffused and banded with fuscous. Abdo- men brownish above, buff beneath suffused with fuscous. Male genitalia.—As figured. Female genitalia.—As figured. Type.—U. 8. N. M. no. 61081. Type locality —Tucuman, Argentina. Food plant.—Seeds of ‘“pacard.”’ Remarks.—Described from the type male and six male and female paratypes from the type locality, all reared by Dr. Kenneth J. Hayward of Tucumdn. Emergence dates are not indicated on the pin labels. Paratypes in the U. 8. National Museum and the Instituto Miguel Lillo, Tucu- man, Argentina. This is the first record of the occurrence of the genus Cryptophlebia in the New World, and, although this species differs in several respects from the type of the genus, C. carpophaga Wal- singham, there is no doubt about the relationship. The male genitalia of both species are strik- ingly similar, and both bear the three large, strong setae on the harpe, as figured, but carpo- phaga lacks the smaller setae between the three large ones. In the female of carpophagoides there is a strongly sclerotized area on the anterior edge of the seventh sternite, but in carpophaga (Fig. 13) it is longitudinal and divided as illustrated. Female genitalia figured from a Guam specimen. The male of carpophagoides lacks the special- ized sex-scaling of the hindwing found in car- pophaga and also lacks the ridge of long dorsal hairlike scales of the abdomen; also the tufting of the hindleg is less pronounced in carpophag- oides than in carpophaga. Both species feed in the seeds of their hosts. NOTE In my article New species of Gelechiidae from Argentina (Lepidoptera), Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 41: 140, 1951, I omitted the type locality for Parastega hemisigna Clarke, which should have been given as “Tigre, Argentina.” 300 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 9 ENTOMOLOGY .—Ficalbia minima (Theobald) in South Indochina, with descrip- tions of the larva and pupa (Diptera: Culicidae).! Harry D. Prarr. (Communi- cated by C. W. Sabrosky.) About 25 years ago Dr. Emile Borel began a mosquito survey of South Indochina, which culminated in the publication of his mono- graph ‘‘Les Moustiques de la Cochinchine et du Sud-Annam.”’ Although Borel reported some 89 species and 16 genera of mosquitoes from South Indochina, neither he nor later French entomologists appear to have col- lected mosquitoes in the genus Ficalbia in South Indochina. Similarly neither Barraud (1934) nor any of the World War II mos- quito control workers appear to have figured all stages of Ficalbia minima (Theobald), the type species of the genus Ficalbia, al- though Iyengar (1935) and his coworkers did collect and rear all stages of this mosquito in India. F. minima is reported from India, Assam, Borneo, and Hong Kong by Barraud (1934) and from Tonkin (or North Indo- china) by Galliard and Ngu (1949). The finding of minima at Saigon now extends its southeastern distribution considerably. The present paper gives a description of the pupa, which hitherto was undescribed, together with a redescription of the larva and notes on the breeding habitat. Pupa.—The pupa of F. minima is quite dis- tinct from the other species in the genus. The pupal trumpet (Fig. 1, F) is normal, with a cleft on one side slightly more than halfway to the base. It is not modified at all for piercing the roots of aquatic plants to obtain air as in Ficalbia chamberlaint. Unlike most species in the genus, the first segment of the abdomen (Fig. 1, G) has a well-developed pair of dendritic tufts or “float hairs.’ The paddles at the tip of the ab- domen have the usual spines along the latero- posterior margin. The paddles are of rather normal shape, not long and narrow as the Ficalbia fusca or Ficalbia luzonensis (cf. figures 24b, c¢, e, and g in Barraud, 19384). Larva.—The larva of F. minima is very dis- tinct on a number of characters. The preclypeal spines of the head (fig. 1, A, B) have a number of fine denticles at the base, a character found in _ | From the Communicable Disease Center, Pub- lic Health Service, Federal Security Agency, Atlanta, Ga. only a few other mosquito larvae, such as Aedes (Howardina) walkeri Theobald, and certain other species of mosquitoes breeding in bromeliads. The antenna (Fig. 1, A) is rather unusual in having the two long subapical hairs placed a considerable distance from the tip of the antennal shaft. In this respect the antenna is rather inter- mediate between the antenna of a typical Culex and a typical Mansonia. The air tube (Fig. 1, D) has the hair tuft inserted near the base rather than near the middle as in the other species of Ficalbia. This causes the species to run to Theobaldia or Hodgesia in the key of Barraud (1934, p. 33) even though the larva agrees in all other significant details with Bar- raud’s figure of minima. There are only two pecten spines on the air tube itself (Fig. 1, D, FE) and six comb scales. The comb scales (Fig. 1, C) of the Saigon specimens do not show the fine lateral denticulation of Barraud’s figure (1934, fig. 27C). The Saigon specimens therefore agree better with the specimens from Tonkin reported by Galliard and Ngu (1949) in having smooth comb scales than they do with those from Hong Kong described by Barraud (1934) which have the comb scales with fine lateral denticles. Biology —On November 23 and 24, 1950, lar- vae and pupae of F. minima were found in the Botanical Garden in Saigon, Indochina, by the author and Dr. Le Du. The larvae were found in a densely shaded pool of cool, clear water con- taining large amounts of submerged aquatic vege- tation, which appeared to be Ceratophyllum and floating duckweeds similar to Lemna. No water- lettuce (Pistia) was in the pool, although Lyengar (1935) and Galliard and Ngu (1949) have re- ported that in India and in Tonkin this species is found only in pools with that plant. They attributed this restricted habitat to the fact that F. minima lays its eggs on parts of the leaves of Pistia that overhang the water surface. The larvae were not abundant, averaging about one in every ten dips. Associated mosquito larvae were Anopheles barbirostris, Culex (Mochthogenes) malayt, and a species of Culex near vishnut. None of the larvae could be reared to the adult stage, but two of the pupae produced females that agree with the description of F. minima in Barraud (1934). SEPTEMBER 1951 PRATT: FICALBIA MINIMA 301 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Cooperation Administration. He wishes to . : . acknowledge the kind assistance of Dr. H. The collections in Saigon were made while 4 “ 5 . B Marneffe and M. P. Martin, of the Pasteur the writer was assigned as a malaria con- — Institute of Saigon, for the privilege of work- = Q C Nava oe F 5p! . : : : sultant with the Special Technical and Eco- ing in their excellent library and laboratory. nomic Mission to Vietnam of the Economic Dr. Alan Stone, of the U. 8. Bureau of TE Fia. 1.—Structures of Ficalbia minima (Theobald): A, Head of larva, dorsal view; B, preelypeal spines of larva, dorsal view; C, comb seale of eighth abdominal segment, larva; D, terminal abdominal segments of larva; E, pecten tooth of arva; F, pupal trumpet; G, abdomen of pupa. 302 Entomology and Plant Quarantine, has checked the determination of the adult fe- male and larva of Ff. minima. One adult, one pupa, and one larva have been deposited in the collections of the U.S. National Museum and the Communicable Disease Center, At- lanta, Ga. The drawings were made by C. J. Stojanovich. LITERATURE CITED Barraup, P. J. The fauna of British India: Diptera 5 (family Culicidae, tribes Megarhinini and JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 9 Culicini): xxviii + 463 pp., illus. London 1934. Borex, Emrue. 1930. Les moustiques de la Cochin- chine et du Sud-Annam. Coll. Soc. Pathologie Exotique Monogr. III: 423 pp., illus. Paris, 1930. GauuiarD, H., and Neu, D. V. Culicines du Ton- kin, les genre Ficalbia et Mochtogenes. Ann. Parasit. Humaine et Compar. 24 (5/6): 495- 502. 1949. Iyencar, M. O. T. Biology of Indian mosquito lar- vae that attach themselves to the roots of water plants. Proc. Roy. Ent. Soc. London 10 (pt. 1): 9-11. 1935. ZOOLOGY .—Bostrichobranchus digonas, a@ new molgulid ascidian from Florida. Donatp P. Assorr, Hopkins Marine Station, Stanford University. (Com- municated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) The common American east-coast as- cidian Bostrichobranchus pilularis (Verrill), 1871, has a single gonad, situated on the left side of the body. Van Name (1921) re- ported examining a single specimen of this species, taken in St. George Sound, Fla., which was “unique in having a gonad on each side of the body.” This unique speci- men has been commented on (but not re- examined) by Hartmeyer (1923), Arnback (1928), and Van Name (1945), all of whom have regarded it either as a reversion to an ancestral 2-gonad condition or as an indi- vidual aberration. Were it not for new evidence, presented below, the present writer would concur with the above treatment of this specimen. Recently an opportunity arose to examine a series of specimens found stranded on the sandy beach along the Peace River estu- ary, Charlotte Harbor, Fla., about 20 miles from the Gulf of Mexico. According to the collector, J. C. Galloway, of Punta Gorda, Fla., the stranded ascidians formed a belt on the shore 4 to 6 inches wide and about 100 yards long, and included many thou- sands of individuals. Twenty-one speci- mens of the collection, as well as supple- mentary and comparative materials, were placed at my disposal for study through the kindness of Dr. Fenner A. Chace, Jr., of the Division of Marine Invertebrates, United States National Museum. Investigation of the 21 individuals from Charlotte Harbor, all of which bore two gonads, and re-examin- ation of Van Name’s unique specimen from St. George Sound show that these ascidians represent a previously undescribed species of Bostrichobranchus, closely related to B. pilu- laris but unequivocally distinct from it. Class ASCIDIACEA Order STOLIDOBRANCHIA Family MOLGULIDAE Forbes and Hanley, 1848 Bostrichobranchus digonas, n. sp. Bostrichobranchus pilularis Van Name, 1921, p. 478 (only the specimen from St. George Sound, Fla., with a gonad on each side of body); 1945 p. 441(only the specimen from St. George Sound, Fla., with a gonad on each side of body). Dimensions.—For 12 well-expanded, turgid specimens the external dimensions of the tunic (here, as elsewhere, the mean is followed by the range in parentheses) were: Height 17 (12-20) mm; length 18 (15-20) mm; width 7 (4-10) mm. External appearance—Body oval and some- what laterally compressed, the siphons rather short and contracted in most specimens; tunic almost completely free of sand, mud, and other debris, its surface relatively smooth and bearing scattered small tendrils, or minute papillae prob- ably representing broken tendrils (specimens were washed ashore and probably somewhat worn externally); tunic membranous and free of wrinkles in most areas, somewhat thicker and bearing circular wrinkles on and about the bases of the siphons. Apertures.—Oral aperture with six lobes, atrial aperture with four. Mantle——Thin, delicate, and transparent in most areas; muscle fibers arranged into con- spicuous bundles only on the siphons, where they constitute the radial and circular muscles (Fig. 1); SEPTEMBER 1951 radial or siphon retractor muscles consist of stout bundles running along the siphons to termimate at or slightly below their bases; a single individual out of 22 examined bore radial muscles grouped into thick bands corresponding with the lobes of the apertures; circular or siphon constrictor mus- cles present, these, when contracted, creating one or more distinct circular grooves around each siphon; a short series of transverse bundles over- lies the dorsal intersiphonal area; occasional bundles occur elsewhere, laterally and ventrally, but these are generally so small, few in number, ABBOTT: BOSTRICHOBRANCHUS DIGONAS 303 widely separated, and inconspicuous as to be easily overlooked. Tentacles —Compound to branches of the third order on the largest tentacles; two-thirds of 18 individuals examined showed only three orders of tentacles, one-third possessed small fourth order tentacles as well; total numer of tentacles, count- ing all four orders = 23 (17-34), counting only three orders = 20 (13-29); basic number of tentacles of each order apparently either 5-5-10 or 6-6-12, the alternatives appearing in about equal numbers; distribution pattern basically 5.0 mm. 5 BS 6 Fras. 1-4.—B. digonas, n. sp.: 1, With the tunic removed, viewed from the right side; 2, dorsal tuber- cle; 3, medial view of digestive tract, left gonad, and atrial aperture; 4, medial view of right gonad. ’ 304 -|-3-2-3-1- where three orders are present, and -|-4-3-4-2-4-3-4-1- where four orders occur; regu- larity of this pattern varies from perfect to rather poor, but pattern is regular in at least parts of the tentacular rigs of all specimens. Dorsal tubercle-—In 21 specimens examined the aperture was a U-shaped slit, with the horns sufficiently inrolled to form approximately a full circle at either end of the slit (Fig. 2); open interval directed anteriorly and usually inclined slightly toward the left. Dorsal lamina.—Rather narrow anteriorly, gradually broadening posteriorly and _ passing some distance to the left of the esophageal open- ing to terminate near the “hepatic” region of the stomach; free margin smooth or slightly undulat- ing; internal longitudinal vessels of the left side curve medially and join the base of the lamina. Pharynx.—Without folds, but always with seven ribbonlike internal longitudinal vessels and five transverse vessels on each side; pharyngeal wall bearing many spirals varying from small, flat coils to very elongate, conical infundibula; each infundibulum’ composed of two uninter- rupted, spirally intertwined stigmata separated at the apex; each stigma on the more elongate infudibula coiled six to eight turns; spirals gener- ally about 15 (7-29) per mesh for the central fields between fifth and seventh internal longi- tudinal vessels (based on 85 fields counted in 17 specimens) ; infundibula numerous and irregularly distributed in all individuals examined, making it very difficult to distinguish primary and acces- sory spirals with any certainty. Digestive tract—Hsophageal aperture situated about halfway posteriorly on the pharynx; esophagus short; stomach in two divisions, an upper globular portion communicating with esophagus and intestine and bearing seven or eight doubled and somewhat irregular folds as seen from its medial surface, and a lower portion, twisted posteriorly to form a small, blind “he- patie” sac ventral to the main gastric chamber; intestine forms a rather small, open primary loop, the descendmg hmb returning to contact the proximal intestine and the rectum rising in contact with the stomach; rectum terminates near the branchio-esophageal junction im an anus whose margin bears numerous small and often irregularly distributed teeth. Renal organ.—Bean-shaped, lying posteroven- tral to the gonad on the right side, its posterior end contacting the stomach wall. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 9 Gonads——Each of the 22 specimens examined bore a complete set of reproductive organs on each side of the body, the left gonad lying largely in the primary intestinal loop (Fig. 3); ovary on either side tubular in outline, narrowing at its posterior end into a short oviduct directed to- ward the atrial aperture; inner surface of mantle in the vicinity of the oviducal aperture bears a conspicuous circular path of delicate tendrils (Figs. 3, 4) probably aiding in the retention of eggs and embryos which are brooded in the atrial cavity; male glands arranged about the margin of each ovary, in a series of two to twelve clusters of lobulate testes; clusters may be clearly separated or sufficiently closely placed to form a more or less continuous border about the more anterior portions of each ovary; efferent ducts.from each cluster of testes join those of adjacent clusters and run centripetally to the base of the single, large common spermatic duct which rises from near the center of the medial wall of each ovary to project freely as an erect, elongate, finger-like process into the atrium (Figs. 3, 4); in a single specimen the common spermatic duct of the left side was bifurcate; eggs present in the atria of all specimens from Charlotte Harbor (collected January 29, 1938), lying free or enmeshed in the mantle tendrils about the oviduct; eggs encased within 12- or 14-sided polyhedral membranes (whether this shape is natural or the result of preservation is uncertain); diameter of egg within polyhedral casing 0.19 (0.17-0.21) mm; atria in a few individuals contain embryos and other stages up to young prefunctional oozooids; tadpole stage absent in development. Specimens examined and compared (all depos- ited in the U. S. National Museum), as follows: B. digonas: 1 type and 20 paratypes, found stranded on the beach along the Peace River estuary, Charlotte Harbor, Fla., about 20 miles from the Gulf of Mexico, roughly at lat. 26°58’ N., long. 82°02’ W., U.S.N.M. nos. 10976 (holo- type) and 10977-10978 (paratypes). One speci- men, from St. George Sound, Fla., U.S.N.M. no. 7242 (this is the specimen with two gonads referred to by Van Name, 1921 and 1945). B. pilularis: 11 specimens, from off Marthas Vineyard, 63 fathoms, U.S.N.M. no. 4940. Seven specimens, from Long Island Sound, 8 fathoms, U.S.N.M. no. 5014. One specimen, from off north- west end of St. Martins Reef, Florida banks, near lat. 28°50’ N., long. 83° W., U.S.N.M. no. 7229. One specimen, from off Georgia, 10 fathoms, lat. SEPTEMBER 1951 Mantle musculature Dorsal tubercle Gonads Feature B. digonas Muscle bundles absent laterally and along endostyle, or if present very sparse, weak, and incon- spicuous. With the horns of the slit inrolled approximately one full turn at each end. Always present on both sides of body. Anterior closed end of left ovary reaching only half to two-thirds of the way up to inner peak of pri- mary intestinal loop. Testes usually arranged in separate clusters; these are sometimes closely apposed to form a more or less continuous series about the more anterior portions of ovi- duct. Inner surface of mantle surround- ing oviducal aperture bearing a conspicuous circular patch of fine tendrils. Efferent ducts from clusters of testes run centripetally and unite to form a single, erect, fingerlike common spermatic duct project- ing freely into atrial cavity on each side. ABBOTT: BOSTRICHOBRANCHUS DIGONAS 305 B. pilularis A row of short, stout, numerous, and conspicuous muscle bundles present on each side of body along endostyle and running at right angles to latter; a series of short muscle bundles running parallel with the circular muscles of the siphons extends downward on each side of body from atrial siphon. With horns of the slit not incurved save in large individuals, and here not inrolled a full turn at each end. Present only on left side of body. Anterior closed end of left ovary reaching to, or almost to, inner peak of primary intestinal loop. Testes arranged in a continuous row about whole margin of ovary, never grouped into distinct clus- ters. Mantle in area adjacent to ovidu- cal aperture smooth and unmod- ified. Efferent ducts from testes extend across tubular ovary to join a long common spermatic duct, which runs prostrate along whole length of ovary and lies em- bedded in its medial wall; along its length this common duct bears about 10 (7-15) minute pa- pillae, each of which terminates in an aperture for the discharge of sperm. 32° N., long. 80°25’ W., U.S.N.M. no. 10501. Specific diagnosis.—The specific features dis- tinguishing B. digonas from B. pilularis, the only other member of the genus, are tabulated above. In nearly all other respects, and particularly in regard to the detailed structure of the pharynx, the two species are so similar as to be nearly indistinguishable. The majority of differences concern the gonads, and the simplest method of distinguishing the species is by the presence or absence of a gonad on the right side. Both spe- cies have direct development without a tadpole larva. Discussion.—Bostrichobranchus belongs to a small group of molgulid species sometimes called “eugyrids,” which have the following characters in common: a branchial sac lacking folds, and bearing five transverse vessels and five to seven ribbonlike internal longitudinal vessels on each side; a branchial wall bearing large spirals, often infundibulate, each of which is formed by two intertwined stigmata which are uninterrupted throughout their entire lengths but are generally separated apically; the left gonad, when present, is always placed largely or wholly in the primary intestinal loop. Attempts to subdivide this group into genera have centered around two features: the number and position of the gonads, and the presence and degree of development of secondary spirals on the pharynx. On the basis of the number and location of the gonads alone, three eugyrid genera are sometimes recognized: Gamaster, with a single gonad on the right side of the body; Hugyra, with a single . 306 gonad on the left side; and Hugyroides, with two gonads, one on each side of the body. Hartmeyer (1911), Huntsman (1922), and Arnbick (1928) recognized all three genera. Huus (1937) recog- nized the three groups as subgenera under the genus Hugyra. Michaelsen (1915), Hartmeyer (1923), and Van Name (1945) united the three genera under Hugyra. (Van Name, 1945, actually made no mention of Gamaster, but by implica- tion this group would not receive generic status in his classification.) Michaelsen (1915) and Hart- meyer (1923) were unable to find other characters to justify segregating Hugyra (sensu lato) imto three genera, and concluded that differences in mere number and position of the gonads were of specific rather than generic caliber. This conclu- sion appears to be reinforced by the finding of the new Bostrichobranchus which differs from B. pilularis most conspicuously in its possession of a gonad on the right side. The second character that has been used in subdividing the eugyrids into genera is the pres- ence and degree of development of secondary spirals on the pharynx. In molgulids, stigmata arranged in spirals which lie on the pharyngeal folds or are crossed by and closely associated with the internal longitudinal vessels are called primary spirals. Any spirals which may develop on the flat areas between folds, or, where folds are absent, between the internal longitudinal ves- sels and their rows of associated primary spirals, are termed secondary or accessory spirals. Acces- sory spirals are known to occur in some species of the molgulid genera Molgula, Rhizomolgula, Paraeugyroides, Bostrichobranchus, Hugrya (= Eu- gyra + HEugyroides + Gamaster), and probably Paramolgula. In all these genera except Bostri- chobranchus the accessory spirals, when present at all, are small, even in older individuals, though in Rhizomolgula they may form small conical in- fundibula. The single feature which clearly dis- tinguishes Bostrichobranchus from other eugyrids is the relatively tremendous development and multiplication of the accessory spirals, such that in all but very young individuals it is nearly impossible to distinguish primary from secondary spirals with any certainty. This condition is not even remotely approached in any other species possessing secondary spirals. In its development, however, the pharynx of B. pilularis passes through a stage which closely resembles the adult condition of most Hugyra species (Van Name, 1912), suggesting the derivation of Bostrichobran- chus from an ancestral Hugyra-like form. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 9 Hartmeyer (1911) recognized two species of Bostrichobranchus, B. manhattensis Traustedt, 1833, and B. molguloides Metcalf, 1900. Van Name (1912) showed these to be conspecific with Molgula pilularis Verrill, 1871, but retaimed Trau- stedt’s genus Bostrichobranchus for this species. Since this work, Bostrichobranchus has received recognition as a full genus by Hartmeyer (1923), Huus (1937), and (with some reluctance) Van Name (1945). Huntsman (1912) poimted out the similarities of this genus with Hugyra and in- cluded it in the latter with the reservation that ‘it might be well to retain Bostrichobranchus as a subgenus, if there prove to be species more closely related to H. pilularis than to the typi- cal members of the genus...” Arnbiick (1928) pointed out that secondary infundibula were not unique in B. pilularis, and included this species in Eugyra. Van Name, who has studied B. pilu- laris more thoroughly than any other worker, concluded (1945) that Bostrichobranchus “is so close to the latter [Hugyra] that Huntsman’s course has much to recommend it, but neverthe- less the remarkable development of the accessory infundibula in the present group represents a dis- tinct advance step in the evolution and speciali- zation of the branchial sae which seems worthy of recognition in classification.” He lists Bostri- chobranchus as “‘Genus or Subgenus,” giving pref- erence to the former. If segregation of Bostrichobranchus as a sepa- rate genus Is suggested on the basis of one species, B. pilularis, such action appears to be much more strongly indicated with the discovery of the sec- ond and closely allied species B. digonas. Were the system of subdividing the eugyrids into genera. on the basis of number and position of gonads followed here, it would be necessary to place B. pilularis in the genus Hugyra and B. digonas in Eugyroides. In view of the close structural similarity of the two species, such a generic sepa- ration would be untenable. LITERATURE CITED ARNBACK-CHRISTI#-LINDE, A. Northern and Arc- tic invertebrates in the collection of the Swedish State Museum: IX, Tunicata. 3, Molgulidae and Pyuridae. Wungl. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl. 4 (9): 1-101, figs. 1-14, pls. 1-8. 1928. HarrmMeyer, R. Ascidien. In Bronn, H. G., Klassen und Ordnungen des Tierreichs 3 (Sup- pl.): 1281-1773. Leipzig, 1909-1911. Ascidiacea. In Danish Ingolf Expedi- tion 2 (pt. 6): 1-368, figs. 1-35, pl. 1. Copen- hagen, 1923. SEPTEMBER 1951 Huntsman, A. G. Canada. Trans. Can. Inst. 9 (1911): 111-148. 1912. ——. The ascidian family Caesiridae. Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, ser. 3, 16: 211-234. 1922. Hews, J. Ascidiaceae. In Kiikenthal und Krum- bach, Handbuch der Zoologie 5 (pt. 2): 545- 692, figs. 454-581. Berlin and Leipzig, 1937. Mercatr, M. M. Notes on the morphology of the Tunicata. Zool. Jahrb., Anat., 13: 495-602, figs. A-K, pls. 34-40. 1900. MicHartsen, W. Tunicata. In Beitraige zur Kenntnis der Meeresfauna Westafrikas 1: 312- 518, figs. 1-4, pls. 16-19. 1915. PROCEEDINGS: ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 307 Ascidians from the coasts of Trausrept, M. P. A. Vestindiske Ascidiae Sim- plices. Anden Afdeling. Molgulidae og Cyn- thiadae. Vid. Medd. Nat. For. Kjgbenhavn, ann. 1882: 108-136, pls. 5, 6. 1883. Van Name, W.G. Simple ascidians of the coasts of New England and neighboring British prov- inces. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 34 (13): 439-619, figs. 1-48, pls. 48-73. 1912. Ascidians of the West Indian region and southeastern United States. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 44: 284-494, figs. 1-159. 1921. The North and South American ascidians. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., Vol. 84, 1-476, figs. 1-327, pls. 1-31. 1945. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY The Anthropological Society of Washington at its annual meeting on January 16, 1951, elected the following officers: President, Watpo R. WE- DEL; Vice President, GrorGE M. Foster, Jr.; Secretary, WiLt1am H. Giupert Jr. (reelected); Treasurer, Marcarer C. Buaker (reelected); Councilors to the Board of Managers, CORNELIUS J. Connouty (reelected), Mark Hanna War- Kins (reelected), Marton L. VANDERBILT, Sip- neEY ADAMS, GEORGE TRAGER, JOHN C. EWERs; Representative to the Washington Academy of Sciences, WaLtpo R. WEDEL. A report of the membership and activities of the Society since the last annual meeting follows: Life members, 1; Active members, 75; Associate members, 14; Total, 90. This represents a de- crease of 7 since last year. _ The members elected during the year were: Active members; Dr. Gorpon Macerecor. As- sociate members; Dr. Davip F. Aspprir, Roy G. Buanck, JospPH B. CasaGRranpn, Miss ANNE FORBES. The report of the Treasurer for the year ended December 31, 1950, follows: Credit: (Caigln ito lool eye tes aealecy nace ane oaes eialcraiars Income: Dues collected.......... Interest, Perpetual Building Association. . Dividend, Washington Sanitary Improvement $282.31 $60.60 $10.50 Dividends, Washington Sanitary Housing Co.. Interest, U.S. Savings $16.00 Sales of old series Anthro- DOLOGUStS an eae ee $213.31 HIRO Gallant cite antes ROAR en oie a $495.62 Debit; Expenditures: AAA dues paid for Secre- tary, Treasurer, and one life member....:....... Dues forwarded to AAA... Dues check returned for lackcof funds sss nee 4: $6.00 Speakers’ expenses........ $119.00 Printing and mailing MOLICES Maen weanocleee ee Secretary’s expenses (post- EY iqs}) | Wag) & teraisinamteteeara suahecaaiaer $15.00 $10.00 EN Vr ehkcRteL pare oi geen se $202.36 Balance) Gnbanke) eee eerie sae $293 . 26 Assets: Funds invested in Per- petual Building Asso- CIMUMOM aa eee ee $2,000.00 2 shares Washington Sanitary Housing Co. (par value $100 per SHAE) a aaeo eer Sale of 42 shares @ $32 per share, Washington Sanitary Improvement Co. (less $3.15, ex- penses) authorized by Board of Managers February 14, 1950..... U.S. Savings Bond, SeriesuG:) ance eos $500.00 @ashvimib anikeyqemeenere $1,634.11 Total as of Dec. 31, 1950......... $5,674.96 Total as of Dec. 31, 1949......... $2,272.65 $200.00 $1,340.85 308 All regular meetings were held at the US. National Museum. Programs throughout the year were arranged by-Dr. EugeNr C. WorMAN, Jr. Speakers and the titles of papers presented before the regular meetings of the Society in 1950 were: January 17, Grorce P. Murpock, A field study of the people of Truk. February 21, RaupH 8. Soxeckt, On the trail of Ancient Man in northern Alaska (slides). March 21, DuNcAN Emricu, Folklore, an attempt at definition. April 18, Ropert M. Wuirsr, Some practical applications of physical anthropology. May 18, Frank M. Serzuer, Aboriginal Aus- tralia (in conjunction with the Washington Academy of Sciences, motion pictures). October 19, CorNELIUS Oscoop, The Koreans and their culture. November 21, ScoHuyLER CAMMANN, Tvbet, the land and its people (slides). December 19, Grorcre M. Foster, Jr., Ethno- graphic impressions of Spain (slides). A new set of bylaws for the Society was pre- sented by the Committee consisting of Dr. W1L- uiaM N. Fenton, Dr. Regina FLANNERY, and Dr. T. Date Stewarr at a meeting of Board of Managers on October 31, 1950. The suggested revisions were adopted at the annual meeting of the Society on January 16, 1951, and are as follows: 1. Membership is reduced to one class, active, in place of the former life, associate, correspond- ing, honorary, and active. 2. Annual dues of all members are fixed at $1.50 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, no. 9 a year, and provisions for subscription to the American Anthropologist are eliminated. 3. The officers plus six councilors and the chair- man of the program committee take the place of of officers plus five councilors and ex-presidents of the Society as Board of Managers. 4. The President is limited to a 2-year term and the Vice President shall serve concurrently, with the same limitation. 5. Custodial duties of the Secretary are elimi- nated. : 6. The Treasurer is exempted from payment of dues and from submitting quarterly lists to the editor of the American Anthropologist of members entitled to receive this periodical. 7. Councilors to the Board of Managers shall serve three years, each year two being replaced. 8. Prescription of exact time for meetings of Board of Managers is dropped. 9. The President is to appoint a Program Com- mittee. 10. The President is to appoint a Nominating Committee of three in advance of the annual business meeting. 11. At the annual meeting two councilors to be elected or reelected, other officers to be elected or reelected. 12. Bylaws may be amended by all members without distinction of class of membership. A report on possibilities for reinvestment of funds resulting from the sale of 42 shares of Washington Sanitary Improvement Co. stock was submitted to the Board of Managers at the regular November meeting of the Society. At the January 16 meeting in 1951 the Treasurer was authorized to invest said funds as suggested. Wituiam H. Ginpert, Secretary. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences [PORCH TUS? ES ae eG CER NatHan R. Smitu, Plant Industry Station PALES LENE CVC CU san sharers aes Sian ees WALTER RAMBERG, National Bureau of Standards INCOCREROLIT eee ee ee x ua ear acue e F. M. DEFANDORF, National Bureau of Standards PRE USUNET NT ae ete eres en ty Howarp 8. Rappueys, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey PANG IULUUS EARS NAc eT Coe cole cyst cosas Joun A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Harrap A. Renper, U.S. National Museum Vice- pene sidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Philosophical’Society, o1 Washington....2...--+-+........---. Epwarp U. Connon Anthropological Society of Washington........................- Watpo R. WEDEL Brolozicalusocietys ofaWashingtonu nase cde cers soae cece eens cleaner Chemical! Society, of Washington... .5..0.5.......000-- sess nee JospPH J. FAHEY Entomological Society of Washington......................-. FREDERICK W. Poos National’ Geographicnsoclety...-ces.c+ sass sess cater soe. ALEXANDER WETMORE Ceolocicalisocietyaon Washington. sree ue cues ae eee ae Leason H. Apams Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... WolumpbraseistoricaliSocietysanss.. 0-4-2202 eee eee eee: GILBERT GROSVENOR Bovanicalusociety,of Washington. ..-5-...4----0eq0ss0ese-e eae se E. H. WALKER Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... WiuuiamM A. Dayton Washington Society or Hngineers..-...-......-..-.---.--0--+- Cuirrorp A. BETTS Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers Francis M. DreranDorF Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicnHarp 8. D1ruu Helminthological Society of Washington.......................... L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Aneus M. GRIFFIN Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers....Hmnry W. HemPLE Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......... Hersert G. Dorsry District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason Elected Members of the Board of Managers: PROM ATNU ATA BOD os oes ste eige, soaNenteeelire ec iehede lus wile Aoxtasn W. F. Foswaa, C. L. Gazin Io Janmarny WOE socecedpoopscecsdeceeds C. F. W. MureseBeck*, A. T. McPHERSON BRO Taya O DAS eens oe oe in co oleos alae eptesabseaue Sara E. Branaam, Minton Harris* WZOUROSOPMVIGMOQENS. 20.055 cake cess ns All the above officers plus the Senior Editor Boardropbditors and Alssociate Hdivtors... 0.0.2... see ee ts [See front cover] Executive Committee....N. R. SmrtH (chairman), WALTER RamBERG, H. 8S. Rappers, J. A. Stevenson, F. M. Deranporr Committee on Membership............... L. A. SPINDLER (chairman), M. 8S. ANDERSON, R. E. BhacKWELDER, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. Hansen, D. B. Jonges, DorotHy Nickerson, F. A. Smita, Hernz Specut, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings......... MarGaret PitrMan (chairman), NoRMAN BEKKEDAHL, W. R. Cuaprine, D. J. Davis, F. B. Scpperz, H. W. WELLS Committee on Monographs: Rowantary 952: . 5.055051 .55ceosns J. R. SwWALLeNn (chairman), Paut H. OEHSER MoM anUany IO Stes ee nae cry onions Sia tieisott a teh attt R. W. Imuay, P. W. Oman POR Uaeyal O54 ae ee eran es eusha she: Ome eevee eee S. F. Buaxs, F. C. Kracek Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (GEORGE P. WALTON, general chairman): For the Biological Sciences............ G. H. Coons (chairman), J. E. Fasur, Jr., Myrna F. Jonss, F. W. Poos, J. R. SwALLEN For the Engineering Sciences.........R.S. Diu (chairman), ARSHAM AMIRIKIAN, J. W. McBurney, Frank Neumann, A. H. Scorr For the Physical Sciences............. G. P. WatTon (chairman), F. 8. BRacKETT, G. E. Hom, C. J. Humpureys, J. H. McMILurn For Teaching of Science............ B. D. Van Evera (chairman), R. P. BaRNgEs, . E. Fox, T. Koppanyr, M. H. Martin, A. T. McPHERSoN Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research..................0.-. L. E. Yocum (chairman), M. X. Suuiivan, H. L. WarrremMore Committee on Policy and Planning: Moy Samay QOD yoo Gite eee shenelosgpereseceuen exces J. I. Horrman (chairman), M. A. Mason PRO Wa Ua wl OOS terri m snowy ie Maree yet. tele. nyse is W. A. Dayton, N. R. Surre OVI ATMA NO DA. ON Rune yin sla dees eel tua cse H. B. Couns, JRr., W. W. Rusey Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: Pow ianuanyelGo2s0 sae as ees M. A. Mason (chairman), A. T. McPHERsoNn PROPIA AT pl GOS ree ees stn ares cite eicheiortiorere ones ahere = ci A. H. CLARK, F. L. MouLer MRO VINA Tay asl OAs meted. eee Peery deectess cycieielecetescrclsrstccets J. M. CanpweE .t, W. L. Scumirr MEDRESENLALIVCLOTNGOUNCUNOIPARPARA MES areas sate eileen asieiias cca F. M. SErzLer Committee of Auditors..... J. H. Martin (chairman), N. F. Braaten, W. J. YoUDEN Committee of Tellers...W.G. BRoMBACHER (chairman), A. R. Merz, Loutsr M. RussELL * Appointed by Board to fill vacancy. CONTENTS Page Mepicinr.— Disaster and disease. Victor H. Haas................. 277 Erunotoey.—Medicinal plants used by Choctaw, Chickasaw, and Creek Indians in the early nineteenth century. T.N.CAMPBELL........ 285 PaLEONTOLOGY.—Notes on Phanocrinus cylindricus and description of new species of Chester crinoids. HarreLu L. STRIMPLE.......... 291 Botany —A new species of Poa from Peru. JoHn R. REEDER........ 295 EntTomo.Locy.—New species of Olethreutidae from Argentina. (Lepidop- tera). Ji. Bi Gates CLARKE... 6.05) 6.6/0. ne oe oe ee Entomo.tocy.—Fcalbia minima (Theobald) in South Indochina, with descriptions of the larva and pupa (Diptera: Culicidae). Harry Dy BRAPTE of Sot F002 i eo dem soa ots oa nke oa 300 ZooLocy.—Bostrichobranchus digonas, a new molgulid ascidian from Florida.. Donatp °P;, ABBOTT... 2.0.0.0... 40.... 5 302 PROCEEDINGS: Anthropological Society.:........-....-. 2.0 eee 307 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals Vou. 41 OctoBErR 1951 No. 10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS CHARLES DRECHSLER WILLIAM F. FosHaG J. P. KE. Morrison PLANT INDUSTRY STATION U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U. 8. NATIONAL MUSEUM BELTSVILLE, MD. ASSOCIATE EDITORS J. C. EwERS J. I. HorFMAN ANTHROPOLOGY CHEMISTRY C. W. SABROSKY T. P. THAYER ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY F. A. Cuacsn, JR. Miriam L. BomuarD BIOLOGY BOTANY R. K. Coox PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Roya & GUILFORD AVES. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNALis issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- ouymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full- -page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PrRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per year...................-+e+ee00-- $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available.*................ — — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 40, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $341.00 Monocrapu No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,” by Herbert Friedmann. $4.50 PrRocEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete..................... BS na % $25.00 Singlesvolumes unbounderahw ore ne ere eae eee cc ormneeO0 Singlesnumberss! ogee co. ee ees sce gets cis eR een nee beeen eee .25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and ad dreeed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rapeieye, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VouuME 41 October 1951 No. 10 ASTRONOMY .—The birth of stars from interstellar clouds.! LYMAN Sprvzer, JR., Princeton University Observatory. (Communicated by Richard K. Cook.) The diversity of the stars is seemingly infinite. Even a superficial study shows enor- mous differences in stellar sizes, brightnesses, and surface temperatures. More detailed ex- amination reveals also differences in speeds of motion and of rotation, in constancy of brightness and shape, in the intensity of magnetization, and in chemical composition. If all this complex yet partially ordered het- erogeneity resulted from differences in the process of star formation, the task of the cosmogonist would be indeed staggering. Fortunately the problem is much simpli- fied by an important discovery made by W. Baade. Broadly speaking, all stars can be divided into two types, named by Baade population types I and II, respectively. Ac- cording to the hypothesis we shall consider here these two types of stars have had rad- ically different origins, with those of type I formed relatively recently from interstellar clouds, and type II formed at the beginning of the universe, some 3 billion years ago. Stars of population type I we shall call “cloud stars’; these stars may be forming continuously, and we can hope to investi- gate in some detail the manner of their birth. Stars of population type II we shall call “primeval stars’’; conditions may well have changed so much since these stars were created that a reliable and detailed theory of their formation may not yet be possible. OBSERVED DIFFERENCES BETWEEN TWO TYPES OF STARS Velocities.—The evidence for these two distinct types of stars may be reviewed 1The twentieth Joseph Henry Lecture of the Philosophical Society of Washington, delivered at the 1344t meeting of the Society on March 23, 1951, and presented under the title ‘“The Forma- tion of Stars.” briefly. As poimted out in the pioneer work by Oort, stellar velocities provided the first indication for this separation of stars into two categories. As soon as radial velocities could be determined with the spectrograph it became evident that the velocities of stars in the line of sight were distributed over a wide range. Quite unexpectedly, the phys- ical properties of stars turned out to be correlated with their radial velocities. For example, the random radial velocities of Cepheid variable stars, whose light varies regularly with a period of some 2 to 50 days, have a root mean square radial velocity of some 10 km/sec in the galactic plane. These stars are of population type I. On the other hand, the RR Lyrae variable stars, whose period of light variation is only a day or less, but which are otherwise rather similar to Cepheid variables, show radial velocities with a root mean square value of 120 km/sec in the galactic plane. These are type II stars. This large difference in radial velocity was readily detected, especially since no elab- orate techniques were required to identify a variable star in either of these two cate- gories; simple photometric observations can determine if a star is variable and, if so, fix the nature and period of the variability. More recent work has shown similar dif- ferences between various types of stars, and the primeval type IT stars are now thought to be high-velocity stars generally, while the cloud stars of type I are moving more slowly. For example, there are many stars which are considerably less luminous than the aver- age for their surface temperature, and which must be considerably smaller than the aver- dwarf star. These are called Their radial velocity relative to age “sub- dwarts.”’ 309 OCT 2 5 1951 310 JOURNAL OF THE the other stars has a root mean square value of about 150 km/sec in the galactic plane, and these may also be regarded as primeval stars. On the other hand, most stars in the neighborhood of the sun, like the sun itself, have random motions of some 10 to 20 km/sec, and these are stars of population type I, or cloud stars. Luminosity.—A second major difference between the high-velocity primeval stars and the low-velocity cloud stars is the distribu- tion of luminosity among stars of these two types. The lack of low-velocity subdwarfs has already been noted. More striking yet the brightest stars have low velocities, with no high-velocity stars more luminous than about 2,000 suns. By contrast, the super- o BS) = aS e D is) = 2 _ = o = 2 iS) (1) Absolute Bes 30,000°K WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 10 giant low-velocity star Betelgeuse sends out as much light and heat as about 25,000 suns, while the luminosity of certain O-type supergiants must exceed 100,000 suns. The absence of primeval supergiant stars is a striking fact. This particular difference between cloud stars and primeval stars is presented in more detail in Fig. 1, which shows somewhat sim- plified Russell-Hertzsprung diagrams for these two stellar types. The bolometric lu- minosity, in units of the solar luminosity, is plotted on a logarithmic scale against the spectral type, which measures the surface temperature. The bolometric luminosity of a star is simply the total amount of energy which it radiates per second. The diagona in units of Solar Luminosity) Luminosity ( 0.01 Mo 3,000 K Fre. 1.—Russell-Hertzsprung diagram for both types of stars. OcrToBER 1951 SPITZER: STARS FROM INTERSTELLAR CLOUDS dll TaBLe 1.—LIfETIME OF STARS OF DIFFERENT Mass Mass M (in solar masses) 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 | 1.5 Mean Luminosity L | (in solar luminosities)............ | 044 | 034 1.4 4.4 34 Pifetrmeumy years)... ccs anew sees 7x10 1.4x10!! 4.4x 1010 1.8x 1010 3.5x109 | Mass M 2 6 | 8 10 Weanw Mum iNOsity oly... 022.6 05 sce. sok 140 4,400 34,000 150, 000 440,000 LAN GURIING U6 See ee eee ee 1.1x 109 7x 107 14x 107 4.4x 106 1.8x 108 hatching indicates areas of the diagram where the cloud stars appear, while primeval stars are found primarily in the dotted re- gions. Many of the differences between the Rus- sell-Hertzsprung diagrams for these two stel- lar types are not yet explained. However, the lack of supergiant primeval stars has a very simple physical explanation. Accord- ing to our present theory of internal con- stitution, a star liberates energy by the combination of four hydrogen nuclei to form helium. When all the hydrogen is gone, the star cannot go on; it may collapse to form a white dwarf or possibly explode to form a supernova. A very luminous star burns its nuclear fuel so rapidly that it cannot shine very long, and the very brightest stars can- not have been shining at their present rate for anything like three billion years. To compute the age of these very lumi- nous stars we may start with the mass- luminosity relation derived from the theory of stellar interiors, L = AMyiT 2? (1) where L, M, and T, are the luminosity, mass, and central temperature of the star and yw is the mean molecular weight. The quanity A depends on a number of physical constants and on the distribution of density within the star. This equation is valid only for stars built according to the same model as the sun; 1.e., with the same relative vari- ation of density with depth. However, it may give at least the order of magnitude for other stars. In applying this formula we shall assume that the central temperature, 7’., is the same in all stars. To discuss the age of a star we must take into account the change of uw with time, re- sulting from the conversion of hydrogen into helium. The rate of this conversion, which liberates the energy radiated by the star, is readily determined from the observed lumi- nosity, yielding the equation du _ Bu L dt > 42M’ (2) where ¢ is the fraction of mass liberated When four hydrogen atoms combine to produce 2 helium atom, and c is the veloc- ity of light. The star, when formed, will be composed mostly of hydrogen, with some helium, and with » equal to about 0.6. When all the hydrogen is gone, » increases to 4/3. From equations (1) and (2) the change of uw and L with time may be computed. Table 1 gives the age required for exhaustion of the hydrogen for stars of different mass, together with the average luminosity LZ dur- ing this period. In the computation of this table the constant A in equation (1) has been chosen to give the observed luminosity for the sun, with » equal to its assumed initial value, 0.6. Toward the end of a star’s life, the luminosity rises far above the aver- age, and Table 2 gives the fraction of time that a star’s luminosity exceeds the average luminosity by various factors. It should be noted that the values given for large p in Table 2 are probably too great, especially for the more massive stars. Stars that have exhausted most of their hydrogen may be composite, with a helium core, a surround- ing envelope of hydrogen, and a different luminosity from that obtained from equa- tion (1). In addition, radiation pressure, which was neglected in the derivation of equation (1), will become important when Mw? exceeds about 10; seatterine of radi- ation by free electrons will also be important in this range, and both these effects will tend to decrease the luminosity. For these reasons, the masses given in Table 1 for 312 stars of short life and high L are somewhat too small, although the values of the lifetime for different values of the ratio L/M do not depend on equation (1) and should be ac- curate. From these results let us compute the greatest possible age for a star 2,000 times as luminous as the sun, about the maximum observed for the primeval stars. If the star is Just exhausting its last hydrogen, its lu- minosity will exceed its mean value for that star by a factor of 60.9. If the mass of the star 1s 1.5 times the solar mass, its mean luminosity will be about 34 suns, giving the required terminal luminosity of 2,000 suns and an age of 3 X 10° years. Actually these particular stars are giants, with probably an inner region mostly of helium surrounded by an atmosphere of hydrogen, and more detailed computations for such configura- tions would doubtless change the age some- what. However the general agreement be- tween the age of the high-velocity type I stars and the probable age of the universe certainly suggests strongly that these stars are, in fact, primeval. By contrast, the age of a supergiant star with a spectral type O whose luminosity exceeds 100,000 suns, is less than about 2 X 10° years even if these stars are mostly composed of helium. Such stars are unquestionably young. Location.—A third major difference be- tween cloud stars and primeval stars is in location. Primeval stars are found in almost all types of stellar systems—in globular clusters, in spherical, elliptical and _ spiral galaxies. Cloud stars are found only where interstellar clouds of gas and dust are pres- ent, which means primarily in the arms of spiral galaxies. In particular, the supergiant cloud stars are a characteristic feature of spiral arms, but are completely absent from other stellar systems, where gas and dust are lacking and where only primeval stars are found. Composition.—A final difference between primeval stars and cloud stars is in chemical composition. These differences are not strik- ing but seem definitely real. The atmospheres of high-velocity giants, of types G and Kk, show considerably weaker bands of the molecule CN than do the corresponding low- velocity giants. The CH bands, on the other hand, are strengthened; a recent analysis JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 10 TABLE 2.—INCREASE OF STELLAR LUMINOSITY with TIME p |) 251| 23) |) 4 oa ens yan ae nn Fraction of star’s life in which L exceeds pL 8 10 20 40 |= | | | p Wee 6 ‘87 |.70 |.52 1.33 24) V8) | | | | | | Fraction of star’s life in which Z exceeds pL | O81 .036 .021 |.015 |.012 |.0043 .0011 The total range of p is from 0.228, when uw equals 0.6, to 60.9, when « equals 1.33. indicates that CH molecules are more abun- dant by a factor of about 2 in the “reversing layer” of a primeval star than in the cloud stars, while the iron atoms are less abundant by about the same ratio. These effects seem rather complicated at first sight, but 1t now appears that these differences may all follow from a greater preponderance of the some- what heavier elements in the cloud stars as compared to the primeval stars. It has been known for some years that most stars are almost entirely composed of hydrogen and helium. In fact, a chemist would regard stellar material as a mixture of ‘‘chemically pure’ hydrogen and helium, since all the other elements together are present to less than one part in a thousand, by volume. The difference in composition between cloud stars and primeval stars seems to be that the former have perhaps twice as many of these impurities present as do the latter. Moreover, in the cloud stars, the ratio of iron to the carbon-nitrogen-oxygen group may. be somewhat greater—perhaps by a factor of two again—than the corre- sponding ratio in the primeval stars. The greater abundance of those heavier atoms in the cloud stars has two effects. Firstly, it increases the opacity in the stellar atmosphere, since it is the electrons from the easily ionized metals that do the absorbing and emitting in the atmosphere of a star whose spectral type is G, KX, or M. Secondly, it increases the number of absorbing mole- cules per gram of matter, the merease in CN being twice as great (on a logarithmic scale) as the increase in CH. These two effects tend to offset each other, with the increase in the number of molecules winning out in the case of CN, but the increase in the continuous opacity, with a consequent decrease in the amount of matter above the OcToBER 1951 visible stellar surface, winning out in the ease of CH. It should be emphasized that these results refer to stellar atmospheres, rather than to stellar interiors. In a primeval giant star the hydrogen is mostly gone from the interior but the star is not well mixed and the atmospheric layers still retain their original composition. In fact it may be just this difference in composition between the inner and outer layers of a giant star that accounts for the large radius of such a star. The differences outlined above between these two types of stars are summarized in Table 3. While some of the most important differences between primeval stars and cloud stars can apparently be explained, at least in a preliminary way, there are others which are less well understood. Why do planetary nebulae occur only around primeval stars? Why are the periods of variable stars so different in these two types of stars? Why do the rotational velocities of the cloud stars depend so sharply on spectral type, with low rotational speeds for stars cooler than type F5? When we know how a planetary nebula is formed, why stars pulsate, or how their rotation changes with time, perhaps we can then hope to understand these and other characteristics of cloud and primeval stars. BIRTH OF PRIMEVAL STARS Now that these two broad types of stars have been uncovered, what can we say about the origin of stars in each type? Concerning the formation of primeval stars we have relatively lttleanformation. The problem is complicated by the fact that the density of matter in the universe may have been much greater several billion years ago than it is now. If we believe the observed velocity of recession of distant galaxies, all the galaxies were close together a few billion years ago, and what the phys- ical conditions of matter were at that time is rather conjectural. The chief clue is that the random velocities of these stars have now high average values. Since no mechanism has ever been suggested by which stellar velocities could increase up to a hundred kilometers per second during a few billion years, we must assume that SPITZER: STARS FROM INTERSTELLAR CLOUDS 313 these stars were formed with essentially their present velocities. One may envisage a turbu- lent gas, more distended than our present galaxy, and perhaps at a considerably higher temperature than the 60° K characteristic of the typical interstellar gas cloud at present. Condensations in this gas might then produce high-velocity stars of various types. As time progressed, the brightest of these stars would exhaust their hydrogen and dis- appear. After a life of several billion years only the less luminous stars would be still shining. If we look ahead through time, we may foresee that in the next ten billion years more and more of these primeval stars will run out of atomic fuel and disappear. Gal- axies without gas and dust will grow dimmer and dimmer, and gradually go out entirely. Except for any cloud stars still being formed in spiral galaxies, the Universe will gradually grow dark. BIRTH OF PROTOSTARS FROM CLOUDS We have seen that young stars are present in and only in those regions of space where interstellar matter is also found. The cir- cumstantial evidence for the generation of these stars from clouds seems very strong, and the formation of all low-velocity type I stars from interstellar clouds is a natural working hypothesis, which explains imme- diately the difference in location between high-velocity and low-velocity stars. TABLE 3.—DIFFERENCES BETWEEN CLOUD STARS AND PRIMEVAL STARS ) Type I Type II | Cloud stars Primeval stars | Low, 10-30 km /see (velocities of clouds) Range up to 10° suns (young stars) Velocities High, 60-180 km/sec (turbulence in pri- meval nebula?) Luminosities Brightest are 108 suns (old stars, formed 3 X 10° years ago) In spiral arms of gal- | In almost all systems, Location axies with gas and | Z ; | dust (forming con- tinually) | including globular clusters and ellipti- cal galaxies with no gas or dust. (Stars have no relation to present interstellar matter.) Composition of | 10,000 H 1000 He 10,000 H 1000 He atmosphere 20 C—N—O 10 C—N—O 4 metals (concentra- 1 metals (original tion of grains rela- composition of tive to gas) primeval matter) 314 JOURNAL OF THE Can we strengthen the net of evidence by showing in detail how a star can be formed out of “‘star dust’’? Can we show that this theory explains the velocities and compo- sition of these cloud stars? A detailed and rigorous demonstration of these points would be very difficult, and our present knowledge is insufhicient for the task. However, the theory described here seems consistent with present evidence, and offers qualitative ex- planations of the various observational fea- tures already described. Let us consider how a prestellar globule, or ‘“‘protostar’’ might form from a gaseous medium between the existing stars. The cri- teria for condensation of a gas under gravita- tional forces were discussed by Jeans sev- eral decades ago. Jeans showed that a shght condensation would continue to contract un- der its own gravitational self-attraction if the initial size of the condensation exceeded a critical value /, given by the equation p= (3) Gomou where 7 is the gas temperature in degrees Kelvin, & the Boltzmann gas constant, G the gravitational constant, p the material density, mp the mass of unit atomic weight, and uw the mean molecular weight. This equa- tion is derived on the assumption that the contraction is isothermal. If the diameter of a cloud is less than /, the cloud cannot hold itself together by gravitational forces. With equation (3) in mind, we may survey briefly existing information on interstellar matter, to see whether regions exist in which gravitational contraction is possible. From measurements of the Balmer lines of hydro- gen near hot stars, we know that a hydrogen gas pervades interstellar space, with a mean density of about one atom per cubic centi- meter. Helium is probably also present but cannot be observed. As in the stars, the other elements are present only as_ slight impurities. If this deduced mean density is substituted into equation (3), the tempera- ture is set equal to 10,000° Ix, and yp is set equal to 0.5, corresponding to the nearly complete ionization of hydrogen in those regions where the Balmer lines are observed, lis found to be 2,300 parseecs (a parsec, the WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 10 standard measuring rod in astronomy, is 3.26 times the distance travelled by light in one year). This distance is some ten times greater than the thickness of the galaxy, and no initial condensation of this sort can possibly occur. This calculation should not be taken too seriously, since it is known that the distribu- tion of interstellar matter is far from uni- form. We can not observe interstellar hydro- gen in detail in most regions, but we can observe certain of the impurities in the gas. Neutral sodium and ionized calcium atoms have strong absorption lines in the accessible part of the spectrum, and absorb light from distant stars: if these stars are of early spectral type (high surface temperature), the star’s own atmosphere does not produce these particular lines. Observations of these inter- stellar absorption lines show that the inter- stellar matter is distributed in separate clouds, and that these clouds have appreci- able random velocities, with a root mean square value of about 10km/sec in one co- ordinate. In addition, many of the atoms other than hydrogen and helium stick to- gether to form molecules of greater and greater size, which finally become tiny solid particles, or grains, about 3 & 10~° cm in radius. These grains, composed mostly of the hydrogen compounds ice (HO), am- monia (NH;) and methane (CH,), absorb and scatter starlight, the effect being much more pronounced for light of shorter wave lengths. Although their temperature is only 10° to 20° above absolute zero, the grains can- not retrain much hydrogen, since this element will rapidly evaporate or sublime at such temperatures. Study of the absorption and scattering by these clouds confirms the ir- regular distribution of interstellar matter, and gives important information on the sizes of the clouds. These range from small dense nebulae less than a parsec in size to enor- mous clouds, or rather cloud complexes, stretching over about a hundred parsecs. The density in these clouds is rather un- certain, as is also the “‘kinetic temperature” which characterizes the random motions of the atoms in the gas. Theoretical computa- tions indicate that the random motions of the neutral hydrogen atoms in a relatively dense cloud correspond to a gas at a tempera- OcToBER 1951 SPITZER: STARS FROM ture of about 60° K, somewhat above the temperature of the grains, but considerably less than the 10,000° obtained for the pre- dominantly ionized hydrogen near a hot star. The chief reason for this drop in temperature is that the hydrogen is completely neutral in these clouds and there is no supply of kinetic energy resulting from the absorption of ultraviolet light by hydrogen atoms and the ensuing expulsion of photoelectrons. The density in one of these clouds is probably in the neighborhood of 20 times the mean den- sity in interstellar space, or about twenty hydrogen atoms per cm*. Outside the clouds the densities are probably less by a factor of about 100, and the temperatures may be greater by the same factor. Thus it appears that the gas pressure may be the same in and out of clouds, and, indeed, the drop of temperature in certain regions may be the primary reason for the formation of clouds, the gas contracting as its temperature falls. If we take these values for a typical cloud, (3 X 10-*? grams cem~™ for p and 60° K for 7), and insert them into equation (1), we find that / is 28 parsecs. This value is greater than the diameter of the typical small cloud. The vast cloud complexes are larger than 28 parsecs across, but in these the density is less, and the rotation of the galaxy will hinder the formation of a condensation. In fact, it is readily shown that in a system rotating with the angular velocity w a con- densation cannot contract gravitationally, regardless of its temperature, if the density is less than the hmiting value w?/2a G. In the galaxy, w is about 107, and the limiting density is about 2.5 X 10-4 gm/cm*, or about one and a half hydrogen atoms per cm’. There is another condition that a cloud must fulfill if it wishes to condense. It now ap- pears that a magnetic field is present in inter- stellar space. The plane polarization of leht from distant stars can be explained only if a field B of about 10~° gauss is present to orient the grains so that their long axes are oriented in one direction or in one particular plane. With this field the magnetic energy density B?/87 is about equal to the material energy density. Since the conductivity of the interstellar gas is relatively high, the mag- netic lines of force are ‘‘frozen in” to the material. Any contraction of a cloud will INTERSTELLAR CLOUDS 35 bring the lines of force together and increase the magnetic field strength and this requires additional energy. Thus the gravitational force must be strong enough to overcome not only the gas pressure but also the mag- netic field, both of which resist contraction. It may be shown that this effect will not modify equation (3) provided that the mag- netic “pressure” B?/87 is small compared to the gas pressure n#k7T, where nx is the num- ber of hydrogen atoms per cubic centimeter in the gas. This eriterion will be satisfied in a typical cloud if B is less than 2 * 10-6 gauss, considerably less than its average value. Evidently a typical cloud cannot condense into stars. This is fortunate for the theory, since we know that clouds are still present, uncondensed, some three billion years since the universe was formed. Somewhat unusual conditions of low temperature, high density, and low magnetic field, such as only an oc- casional cloud might experience, are neces- sary to permit condensation to proceed. This review of the evidence gives us no reason to doubt the conclusion suggested by the ob- servations; 1.e., that new stars form con- tinuously from interstellar clouds. CONCENTRATION OF GRAINS We have seen that the development. of clouds suitable for star formation is theoreti- cally reasonable and in accord with obser- vations. Next we may inquire whether the composition of the cloud stars may reason- ably be expected to differ from that in the primeval stars. We start with the plausible assumption that interstellar matter has the same composition as the primeval stars, an assumption which cannot as yet be checked with any precision. Then we have available an important mechanism for altering the distribution of heavy elements relative to H. This mechanism is the alteration of the ratio grains-to-hydrogen through the action of radiation pressure, a process which we shall now consider. The existence of a pressure on any object absorbing or scattering light waves has been known for some time. This force is usually quite negligible in the laboratory, but in the space between the stars the effect becomes important, especially on tiny particles that 316 absorb vastly more light per gram than large objects do. The interstellar grains have a diameter about equal to the wave length of light, and for this size radiation pressure has the greatest effect. On the average the light in a galaxy is traveling in all directions. While a single grain will be knocked this way and that by the many photons it ab- sorbs, it will not be pushed in any one direc- tion. This picture changes when many grains are considered. Now each little grain pro- duces a shadow, and in this shadow there is no radiation to produce a force. If only two grains are considered, they will be pushed together by the radiation field, since in the shadow between them there is no light to push them apart. As the grains approach closer and closer, the shadow between them becomes blacker and blacker, and the force pushing them together goes up. As a result, radiation pressure produces a net attractive force between two interstellar grains which varies as the inverse square of the distance between them, exactly as the gravitational force, but which is several hundred times the erevitational force acting between the two grains. Calculations by Whipple show that if a cloud already contains a large number of grains, the radiation pressure attracting other grains outside the cloud will drive these grains through the gas and into the cloud, doubling the number of grains in the cloud within an interval of some 107 years. An important result is apparent immedi- ately. The grains are composed of compounds of the heavier elements with hydrogen; within a grain the ratio of hydrogen to other elements is only about 3 to 1, as compared with 1,000 to 1 in the gas. An increase in the ratio of grains to gas therefore results in a decreased ratio of hydrogen and helium to heavier elements within a cloud. Moreover, the effect is likely to be even ereater for metal atoms such as iron than for the carbon-nitrogen-oxygen group. Ac- cording to the theory of Oort and van de Hulst, the grains occasionally collide with each other at high speeds, are raised to a very high temperature and evaporate. The evaporation of iron and other refractory sub- stances will be much less rapid than that of water (H.O), methane (CH,), and ammonia JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 10 (NH;). Thus there will be a tendency for atoms of iron and the other metals to con- centrate in the grains, with relatively less metal than carbon, nitrogen, or oxygen re- maining in the gas. Only a moderate increase in the ratio of grains to gas is needed to explain the differ- ence in composition between primeval and cloud stars. If half of the iron atoms and a fourth of the carbon, nitrogen, and oxygen atoms are locked up in the grains, then an increase by five in the ratio of grains to gas will double the ratio of carbon, nitrogen, and oxygen to hydrogen and triple the ratio of iron to hydrogen, in rough agreement with the preliminary observational evidence on the differences between cloud stars and pri- meval stars. Since most of the interstellar matter is in the form of hydrogen, this con- centration would not change the total den- sity appreciably. It is probably not sufficient for the grains to be entirely concentrated in the clouds of gas observed by Adams and analyzed by Strémegren; since these clouds already contain at least half the mass of the interstellar medium, a concentration of all the grains there would increase the ratio of grains to gas by at most a factor of two. We shall assume that within the various clouds the grains are pushed into the denser, cooler regions which subsequently condense into stars. At one time I believed that the relative number of grains might become so high in this process of concentration that the value of / for gravitational condensation might be decreased. In view of recent evidence on the relatively shght difference in composition between primeval and cloud stars, this view is no longer tenable, and we must assume that the relative concentration of grains never becomes very large. Probably turbu- lent motions within a cloud prevent the grains from concentrating entirely in the densest region of the cloud under the in- fluence of radiation pressure. FROM PROTOSTAR TO STAR It might be supposed that once the theo- rist has produced a prestellar globule, with a sufficient gravitational field to hold itself together, his task is over, and that the sub- sequent contraction of this protostar will OcTOBER 1951 SPITZER: STARS FROM follow as a matter of course. While this supposition can perhaps be defended, in view of the strong circumstantial evidence for star formation, a detailed study shows that the possibility of this last stage is in fact very difficult to establish. In particular there is one major obstacle that the protostar must somehow circumvent if it is to con- tract into a star. This obstacle arises from the rotational momentum of the protostar. The conservation of angular momentum will make the rotational velocity inversely proportional to the radius of the condensa- tion. If the radius decreases from about a parsec down to a few solar radii, this decrease amounts to a factor of about 10’. Unless the original rotational velocity were no greater than a centimeter per second, a remarkably low value for a cloud moving through space at several kilometers a second, the con- tracting protostar would spin so fast that it could never contract all the way into a star. Von Weiczacker has suggested that turbu- lent motions may carry most of the angular momentum out to infinity, leaving much of the mass behind. The present author has suggested that rotation of a protostar in a weak magnetic field (about 10-” gauss) would generate eddy currents that would slow down the rotation, transferring the an- gular momentum to other regions of the Gal- axy. It is possible that either of these processes, or some combination of both of them, may provide the solution to the angu- lar momentum problem. Magnetic fields, if unimportant initially will not impede the condensation at any subsequent stage. Since the magnetic lines of force are frozen into the material, the magnetic flux m’B through the protostar will remain constant throughout the contrac- tion, where r is the radius of the condensa- tion, and B is the average field in the con- densation. Hence 6 will vary as 1/r?, the magnetic energy density, as 1/r*, and the total magnetic energy, as 1/r. The negative gravitational energy also varies as |/r. Thus if the gravitational energy much exceeds the magnetic energy at the beginning, a neces- sary condition for the gravitational contrac- tion of the protostar to begin, the magnetic energy will be unimportant at all stages in the contraction. INTERSTELLAR CLOUDS 317 If the conductivity of the protostar re- mained high throughout the contraction, B would increase by a factor of about 10! giving a field strength in the neighborhood of 10° gauss for the resultant star. However, it seems likely that at some intermediate stage in the contraction the conductivity will decrease sharply. Ionization produced by ultraviolet radiation will fall off markedly as the protostar becomes opaque, and until the kinetic temperature rises above 1,000° K there will be negligible thermal ionization. Cosmic rays will produce some fre electrons, but it is still uncertain whether cosmic rays have an appreciable abundance in interstel- lar space, and they might fail to penetrate the strong magnetic field of the protostars. In view of these uncertainties no definite calculations seem appropriate, but the oc- currence of smaller magnetic fields in stars need occasion no surprise. There is one last evolutionary stage to be considered. After the protostar has con- densed to the stellar state, with its internal temperature increasing under continual com- pression until atomic energy begins to be released, the process of evolution slows down. The gradual conversion of hydrogen into helium we have already discussed. This is a relatively slow process, except for the very brightest stars. Another gradual change, whose importance has recently been pointed out by Schwarzschild, is‘the increase of the star’s velocity produced by encounters with interstellar clouds. It appears that this effect may explain the systematic observed increase of velocity with age among the cloud stars. As pointed out by Jeans and Chan- drasekhar, encounters between separate stars have a neghgible effect on stellar velocities within 10° years. It does not seem to have been generally realized that the imdividual clouds, with a typical mass much greater than a stellar mass, have a much greater effect, even though the total amount of mat- ter in the clouds is about the same as in the stars. Essentially, the effect of a few encoun- ters with clouds of large mass is much greater than the effect of many encounters with less massive stars. While the detailed analysis of this effect is complicated, the essential results may be summarized briefly. Let a group of stars 318 formed at a certain time have a root mean square radial velocity v, in the galactic plane. This velocity may be identified with the root mean square radial velocity of the denser interstellar clouds, about 10 km/see. The few clouds of very high velocity are gen- erally less dense than the slower clouds and are presumably much less likely to condense into stars. If equipartition existed, the stars and clouds would have the same kinetic energy, and the stars, with much smaller masses, would be moving more rapidly. Col- lisions will attempt to approach this equi- partition, and while they cannot go very far in this direction in the time available, they will increase v, the root-mean-square cloud velocity at any time. If we make the simpli- fying assumption that the velocities of clouds and stars are both Maxwellian, then the change of v with time is given by 9 Ve v(v? + v2)8/? where n, 1s the number of clouds per cm°, m, the mass per cloud, v, the root-mean- square cloud velocity (in three dimensions), G the gravitational constant, and log 6 is a somewhat uncertain parameter which we may set equal to 3. On the basis of this equation the small interstellar clouds, whose mass is perhaps a hundred suns, do not have an important effect. However, large cloud complexes are observed in the Milky Way, each with an individual mass possibly as great as 10° suns. If the mean distance between these cloud complexes in the galactic plane is assumed to be about 350 parsecs, then v will increase from 10 to 20 km/sec in about 10° years according to equation (4). For comparison with this result, observed root mean square radial velocities for stars of different spectral types are listed in Table 4, taken from recent (4) — = (6r)” (log B)n. mG JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 10 results by Vyssotsky and Nordstrém. The table lists the root mean square velocities in one coordinate in the galactic plane (aver- aged over both directions in this plane). It is evident from these data that stellar ve- locities do in fact increase from type B (young stars) to type F (stars of all ages) in about the manner predicted by theory. The further increase of velocity for later spectral types cannot be explained on this basis, since stars of type F and later can shine for 3 X 10° years, and stars of all ages should be present equally in these late spectral types. It appears that the greater velocity of the cooler, less luminous stars on the main se- quence results from the admixture of prime- val high velocity stars, which cannot readily be ehminated from the data, and which begin to outweigh the cloud stars at these low luminosities. Evidently the present picture is uncertain in many respects, and many details will un- questionably be changed within the next few years. However, the broad difference in origin between cloud stars and primeval stars which has been sketched here seems a useful working hypothesis. One may hope that addi- tional research will soon indicate how far this present view of star formation may be ac- cepted as an adequate description of reality. TaBLeE +—Roor Mean SQuaRE RaApIAL VELOCITIES IN THE GALACTIC PLANE Spectral type Velocity in km/sec Main sequence 0-B5 9.7 B8-B9 12.0 A0-A9 14.9 F0-F9 19.9 F5-GO 22.6 G0-K6 25.3 K8-M5 31.6 Giant stars K0-K9 20.5 MO0-M9 23.3 OcTroBER 1951 DRAKE: NEW AMERICAN 319 CHINCH BUGS ENTOMOLOGY.—New American chinch bugs (Hemiptera: Lygaeidae). Caru J. Drake, Iowa State College. The members of the genera Blissus Klug, Neoblissus Bergroth, and Parablissus Barber are commonly called chinch bugs. So far as known they are entirely grass-feeding insects. Several of the species are serious pests of grasses, small grain, and corn. Blissus leu- copterus (Say) of North America ranks very high among the most injurious insect pests of corn and small grain, particularly in the States of the Midwest where corn and small grain are extensively cultivated. Grasses in United States, West Indies, and Central America are attacked by four or five different kinds of chinch bugs. Serious outbreaks of Blissus occur at irregular intervals, depend- ing largely upon weather conditions. The present paper contains the descrip- tions of two new species of Blissus, one new Neoblissus, and notes on several other species. The genera Neoblissus and Para- blissus are peculiar to the Americas, whereas Blissus is represented in most of the major land divisions of the world. So far as known the species of Neoblissus are myrmecophilous, feeding and breeding on grasses growing in- side of chambers of the nests of the vicious ant Solenopsis saevissima Sm. N. wetseri, a new species described herein, also inhabits the nests of the same species of ant in Argentina. Both species live as guests in the nest and receive no apparent care from their host. The bugs are free to wander about in the chambers, or even to leave the nests. The nymphs are not known to occur outside of the nests. The species of Neoblissus are widely dis- tributed and fairly common in ant nests; more than 1,000 nymphs and imagoes have been collected in a single nest. Nymphs of all stages and adults are found in large num- bers in the nests during the growing period, whereas adults are most abundant late in summer and in winter. The adults overwin- ter in large numbers in the lower chambers cf the nests. The late Dr. Carlos Brueb (loc. cit.) of La Plata has published an interest- ing account of Neoblissus in the nests of Solenopsis saevissima. Unless otherwise stated, the types of the new species are in my personal collection. Apterous and macropterous forms of two chinch bugs, Blissus mixus Barber (Fig. 2) and B. cowensis Andre (Fig. 1) are illustrated. The latter is found on the crown of bluestem grasses, often slightly below the surface of the ground. Blissus hirtus Montandon Blissus hirtus Montandon, Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. 37: 405. 1893. In Montandon’s collection there are no exam- ples of this chinch bug from the type locality, Hazleton, Pa., M. Dietz. However, his collection contains two specimens of this insect from ‘‘Can- ada, L. Provancher,”’ which are as hairy as typical hirtus. Specialists in Hemiptera are not fully in accord regarding the status of B. hirtus Mon- tandon. Some workers consider it as a longly hairy variety of B. leucopterus (Say), whereas others treat it on the species level. It is at least a good geographic race or subspecies and not nearly so widely disseminated as typical B. leucopterus. At irregular intervals B. hirtus is a serious pest of grasses in lawns and golf courses in the northern States from Minnesota east clear across Pennsylvania and New York, and then north deep into Canada. Blissus pulchellus Montandon Blissus pulchellus Montandon, Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. 37: 406. 1893. The type series of B. pu'chellus in Montandon’s collection contains only two specimens, each varded on a separate rectangular card and mounted on separate pins. The first pin bears (1) carded brachypterous female, (2) locality label “Costa Rica, Buenos Aires, A. Pittier,”’ and (3) species label “Blissus pulchellus Montd.”’ in Montandon’s own handwriting. The other pin bears (1) a carded long-winged female and (2) the same locality label and coilector. It seems that Buenos Aires is the name of a small village in Costa Rica. The apterous female is designated here as the type and the other female as a paratype. Both specimens are in fairly good condition and deposited in the Muzeul National de Istoria Naturala “egrigori antipa,’”’ Bucuresti. The following notes are based on the brachyp- terous type. 320 Short-winged female: Length, 2.75 mm; width, 0.88 mm. Head black, slightly pruinose, with some short, pale, decumbent hairs; width across eyes, 0.60 mm;. wider across eyes than median length (48:42). Antennae moderately long, shortly pilose, yellowish brown with apical segment dark fuscous; formula—I, 12; II, 25; III, 21; IV, 35. Pronotum black with pruinose in front, nearly flat above, almost rectangular in outline with sides becoming a little narrower anteriorly and more rounded on front corners, wider at base than median length (68:43). Abbreviated hemely- tra almost attaining middle of abdomen, whitish with dark fuscous patch beyond middle, rather broadly rounded at apex, the veins with some erect pale hairs; membrane short, pale. Scutelum black. Abdomen above brownish, beneath bluish black. Legs yellowish brown, clothed with short pale hairs. In the alate paratype the hemelytra do not quite reach to the apex of the abdomen, leaving most of the connexiva exposed. Length 2.90 mm. Specimens of B. pulchellus from La Ceiba, Hon- duras, taken on Panicum, by F. 8. Dyer, U.S. National Museum, agree very closely with the type and have been labeled by Dr. R. I. Sailer and the writer as “comp. with type.” Others in a LN JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 41, No. 10 the National Museum were taken on the roots of Panicum purpurea, Los Sabanas, Panama, James Zetek. Blissus brasiliensis, n. sp. Fig. 3 Elongate, rather densely longly pilose, moder- ately shaggy, blackish, with abdomen reddish brown, the head, anterior part of pronotum and abdomen beneath bluish. Head a little wider across eyes than median length (56:45), with pale hairs more or less erect; tylus fuligmous; eyes small, reddish, with a few short hairs. Antennae moderately long, rather densely shortly pilose, yellowish brown with the terminal seg- ment (also sometimes third and apex of second) dark fuscous; formula—I, 10; II, 22; III, 30; IV, 37. Rostrum testaceous, extending between middle coxae. Venter reddish brown, bluish. Macropterous form: Pronotum subquadrate, slightly narrowed anteriorly, widest across hu- meralangles, anterior prumose part finely punctate: hind part black, punctate, width at base much wider than median length (95:65). Abdomen almost parallel-sided. Hemelytra not quite reach- ing apex of abdomen, whitish, the apical angle of corium black-fuscous. Length, 3.60 mm; width, 1.00 mm. Fic. 1.—Blissus iowensis Andre: a, Macropterous form; b, brachypterous form. OcToBER 1951 DRAKE: NEW AMERICAN CHINCH BUGS 321 Fie. 2.—Blissus mixus Barber: a, Macropterous form; b, brachypterous form. Brachypterous form: Abbreviated hemelytra about three-fifths as long as abdomen, whitish with dark patch a little smaller than in long- winged form. Entire insect also smaller than macropterous form. Length, 3.00 mm. Type, macropterous maleand paratype brachyp- terous male, Corumba, Brazil. Allotype, macrop- terous female, Santarém, Brazil. The much shorter antennae separate this species at once from M. penningtoni Drake, and it is distinctly smaller with much longer pubes- cence or short hairs than B. richardsont Drake. Blissus yumana, n. sp. Elongate, black, moderately shaggy, the ab- domen reddish brown; hairs whitish, erect or partly decumbent; head, anterior half of pro- notum and abdomen beneath bluish. Head wider through eyes than median length (60:60), the tylus brownish. Antennae long, longly pilose, testaceous, the fourth and sometimes the fifth segment dark fuscous; formula—I, 20; II, 40; III, 32; IV, 52. Rostrum testaceous, extending between hind coxae. Legs testaceous, clothed with short pale hairs. Pronotum much wider than long (100:62), finely punctate, the sides with front corners more rounded; hind lobe consider- ably flattened. Macropterous form: Hemelytra not quite at- taining apex of abdomen, the dark fuscous spot in apical angle of corium extending a little into membrane; membrane with veins distinct. Length, 4.40 mm; width, 1.24 mm. Brachypterous form: Hemelytra about three- fifths as long as the abdomen, with dark spot in apical angle of corium about the same size as in long-winged form; membrane short, subtrans- parent, narrowly rounded apically. Length, 4.20 mm. Type (macropterous male), allotype (brachyp- terous female), and 6 paratypes, Yuma, Ariz., BE. D. Ball. The longer antennae and longer body separate this species at once from B. other North American members of the genus. leucopterus and Blissus richardsoni Drake Blissus richardsoni Drake, Notas Mus. La Plata 5: 224, fie. 1. 1940. e Described from a single specimen, collected 322 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES gi vo. 41, no.&10 af ( " Fie. 3.—Blissus brasiliensis, n.sp.: a, Macropterous form; b, brachypterous form. near Buenos Aires, Argentina. The larger and more robust size and clothing of very short hairs separate this insect at once from other Brazilian and Argentine species. The fourth antennal seg- ment is also much longer and stouter. In addition to the type, there are two females (long- and short-winged) from Chapada, Brazil. The brachyp- terous form is shorter than the macropterous, and the abbreviated wings do not quite reach the middle of the abdomen. The short hemelytra are moderately long, obliquely rounded at apices, reaching almost to the apex of third visible tergite, whitish testaceous on basal half, thence dark fuscous; membrane is short, fumose; veins are moderately prominent. The pronotum is con- siderably flattened. Antennal formula: I, 12; II, 32; III, 26; IV, 60. The eyes bear a few short hairs. Neoblissus hygrobius (Jensen-Haarup) Mendocina hygrobia Jensen-Haarup, Ent. Medd. 13: 210, fig. 1. 1920. This chinch bug was described from a brachyp- terous male, taken in the Province of Mendoza, Argentina, by A. C. Jensen-Haarup, who wrongly treated it as a member of the ‘‘shore bug” family Aeophilidae and thus found it necessary to erect a new genus for its reception. A study of the description and figures shows that hygrobia belongs to either the genus Blissus or Neoblissus of the family Lygaeidae. At the moment it seems advisable to synonymize the genus Mendocina Jensen-Haarup with Neoblissus Bergroth. N. hygrobius (Jensen-Haarup) is very similar and closely related to N. parasigaster Bergroth. An examination of the type of the former may prove that the two names apply to the same species. Size, shape, length of brachypterous wing pads, and color seem to be identical. There may be a little difference in the antennal formula. However, it will be necessary to examine the type of N. hygrobvus to establish its true specific status. OcroBER 1951 DRAKE: NEW The genus Neoblissus Bergroth was erected for the reception of a myrmecophilous chinch bug found feeding and breeding in the nests of ants (Solenopsis saevissima) in Brazil. The genus is very closely allied to the genus Blissus and is distinguished largely by the very short wing pads with wide and stbtruncate apex in the brachyp- terous form. So far as known the species of Neoblissus feed and breed on grasses grown in the chambers in the nests of ants. Until more is known about myrmecrophilous chinch bugs, it seems best to leave Neoblissus stand as a valid genus. Another species of chinch bug found inhabiting ant nests in Argentina is described below as new to science. Neoblissus parasigaster Bergroth Neoblissus parasigaster Bergroth, Entom. Zeit. Wien 23: 253. 1903. Neoblissus parasigaster Bruch, Physis 3: 146. 1917. Neoblissus parasigaster Bruch, Physis 4: 53. 1918. Neoblissus parasigaster Drake, Notas Mus. La Plata 5: 226, fig. 3. 1940. In the macropterous form the hemelytra are whitish, with apical angle of corium blackish fuscous, and do not reach the apex of the ab- domen. The dark fuscous patch varies in size, sometimes including as much as one-half of the corium. It is widely distributed in Argentina and Brazil, where it lives as a guest in large numbers (both nymphs and adults) in the under- ground chambers of vicious ant nests (Solenopsis saevissima). It feeds and breeds on the grasses growing on the inside of the chambers and hibernates during winter in the lower chambers. It is apparently undisturbed by the ants and is free to move in the cavities and to leave the nest. Bruch reports finding more than 1,000 chinch bugs in a single nest. The nymphs (all stages) are extremely abundant during summer, the adults during the winter months. Dr. Bruch’s preliminary (loc. cit) account of the relationship is very interesting, and it is unfortunate that he was never able to complete his studies. AMERICAN CHINCH BUGS 323 Neoblissus weiseri, n. sp. Brachypterous form: Moderately large, moder- ately shaggy, head and pronotum brownish black to black; abdomen reddish brown; hairy clothing moderately long fine, dense, whitish testaceous. Legs yellowish brown, clothed with short pale hans. Antennae moderately long, shortly pilose, the terminal segment often dark; formula—lI, 12; I, 25; III, 20; IV, 40. Head across eyes and median length almost subequal; tylus brownish. Rostrum testaceous, its tip reaching to base of abdomen. Orifice brownish, with large canal. Seutellum brownish to black, twice as wide as long, punctate. Hemelytral pads short, reaching on the outside to hind margin of third visible tergite; posterior margin subtruncate, very strongly oblique (or feebly rounded), within being whitish, dark in apical corner or corium, with veins brownish; veins testaceous or brownish and hairy. Pronotum finely punctate, much wider than long (92:52), with sides becoming slightly nar- rower anteriorly and more rounded at antero- corners. Abdomen moderately shaggy, clothed with pale hairs, beneath being reddish brown to black, moderately hairy. Length, 3.20 mm.; width, 1.25 mm, Macropterous form: Hemelytra variable in length, generally a little shorter than abdomen, sometimes considerably shorter leaving the last two tergites exposed; apex of corium with blackish spot. Length, 3.00-3.15 mm.; width, 1.25 mm. Type (male) and allotype (female), both bra- chypterous, Province of Entre Rios, Fives Lille, Santa Fé, Argentina, taken by Weiser, in La Plata Museum, Argentina. Paratypes, apterous and macropterous forms, taken with types, in the nests of the vicious and almost vicious omnivorous ants, Solenopsis saevissima. Easily distinguished from B. parasigaster Ber- eroth by its smaller size and shorter antennae; and the hemelytral pads are slightly and obliquely truncate apically. The wing-pads of B. parasigas- ter are shorter and feebly obliquely truncate and very wide at apex. 324 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OS SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 10 ENTOMOLOGY .—WNew species of chrysomelid beetles of the genera Trirhabda and Disonycha. Doris H. Buakr, Arlington, Va. The following new species of Trirhabda and Disonycha form an addition to my re- visions of those genera in 1931! and 1933,° respectively. The specimens from which they were described, with one exception, had been set aside from the regular collection by H. 8. Barber as new and came to light only after his death. Trirhabda geminata Horn Figs. 2, 4, 6,9 Trirhabda geminata Horn, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. 29: 68. 18938. Trirhabda nigrohumeralis Schaeffer, Bull. Brook- lyn Inst. Arts and Sce1., 1: 170. 1905. In my revision of the genus Trirhabda I stated that the “pale forms of geminata are sometimes difficult to distinguish from nigrohwmeralis” but “in general nigrohumeralis is smaller... and the aedeagus quite unlike that of geminata, being small, tapering and rounded at the tip.” At that time I did not have specimens of Schaeffer’s types of nigrohumeralis and did not realize that the aedeagus that I was describing was from a specimen outwardly like nigrohwmeralis but quite unlike that species in its genitalia. From labels in the collection I have found that H. 8. Barber, on acquiring Schaeffer’s collection and dissecting a male of that species, at once saw that what I described was really a new species. However, he does not appear to have suspected that nigro- humeralis itself is simply a color form of geminata. I am forced to this conclusion after examining specimens from many localities in California, Arizona, New Mexico, and even Texas. Horn gave as type localities “San Diego, California and Arizona.” Specimens from near the coast are darker in their markings than many inland specimens, although some from Nogales and Tucson, Ariz., are fully as dark. Others from those localities are of the coloring that Schaeffer described for mgrohumeralis with “unicolorous pale elytra” having “an elongate narrow black humeral spot.” Dissection of these specimens reveals an aedeagus like that of geminata. A still paler and smaller series of specimens from near Presidio, Tex., taken on Brickellia shows a similar 1 Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 79 (art. 2): 1-36. 1931. 2 Proc, U.S. Nat. Mus. 82 (art. 28): 1-66. 1933. aedeagus. It appears that this species as it oc- curs eastward across the country grows smaller and paler in coloring. Specimens were taken by Hubbard and Schwarz at St. Rita and Nogales on Brickellia, and also in 1945 by an unknown collector on this food plant at Nogales. Other specimens at Nogales were taken on lettuce (collector unknown). At Cataline Springs, north- east of Tucson, they were taken by Hubbard and Schwarz on EHncelia, and on guayule, near Tucson, by an unknown collector. The localities for T. geminata (including the paler forms) in the U.S. National Museum are: California: Clare- mont, Baker Coll.; Arizona: Bright Angel, Camp Verde, H. Brisley; Cataline Springs, Hubbard and Schwarz; Huachuca Mountains, Schaeffer Coll.; Nogales, Oracle, Hubbard and Schwarz; Palmerly, Cochise County, Schaeffer Coll.; Sta. Rita Mountains, Hubbard and Schwarz; New Mexico: Jemez Mountains, John Woodgate; Las Vegas, Barber and Schwarz; Texas: Near Pre- sidio, collector unknown. Trirhabda schwarzi, n. sp. Fig. 7 Trirhabda nigrohumeralis Blake (not Schaeffer, 1906), Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 79 (art. 2): 30, 31. 1931. Between 4.5 and 7.5 mm in length, elongate oblong, pale yellow-brown, finely pubescent, the head with an oblong dark spot, mouthparts pale; three dark pronotal spots; scutellum bicolored, the elytra with a dark humeral streak, body beneath entirely pale, antennae usually pale, claw joimt sometimes a little darker. Head with a dark oblong spot down the occi- put, mouthparts pale, densely and obsoletely punctate down to tubercles with a depressed median line, from tubercles down shiny and im- punctate. Antennae usually pale brownish, not at all piceous. Prothorax about twice as wide as long, depressed on each side, alutaceous, with coarse punctures, pale brown with three small spots. Scutellum partly dark. Elytra pale brown with a darker humeral streak fading out down the side. Body beneath entirely pale, legs pale, except sometimes the claw joint a little darker. Length 4.6-7.4 mm; width 2-3 mm. Type male and 41 paratypes, U.S.N.M. no. 61126. 2 paratypes in M.C.Z., collected at Ash- ww i) Ct OcroBER 1951 BLAKE: CHRYSOMELID BEETLES 2. Tegem inata Horn Presidio,Texas > »@ e ; \ 4.T. geminata Horn Nogales, Nrizona 7 Trirhabda schwarzt 6. T. geminataHorn Type nidrohumeralis Schaeff. 9. T:deminataHorn < 8. Disonycha arizonae Casey dark form Nogales, trizona \O. Disonycha barberi Fias. 1-10.—Species of Trirhabda and Disonycha 326 fork, Ariz., by H. 8. Barber and E. A. Schwarz on June 17, 1901. Other locality—Prescott, Ariz., collected by Barber and Schwarz on June 19, 1901. Remarks.—This species is outwardly well-nigh indistinguishable from the pale forms of 7’. gemi- nata Horn (nigrohumeralis Schaeffer) and was the species figured and erroneously believed to be nigrohumeralis in my revision of the genus in 1931. The aedeagus is not at all like that of geminata, and there are a few minor color differ- ences that appear to be constant—the antennae and mouthparts are pale, not piceous, and the claw joint alone is dark, whereas in geminata, except in palest forms, the last two tarsal joints are usually dark. Trirhabda pubicollis, n. sp. Rigel: About 7 mm in length, elongate oblong, densely and somewhat rugosely punctate, head, pro- notum, and elytra with fine short pubescence; pale yellow-brown, the head with a deep metallic- green band extending from occiput to tubercles except for a narrow pale area about eyes; pro- notum with three large irregularly shaped piceous spots, elytra metallic dark green except for a narrow yellow border, body beneath, legs and antennae pale, claw joint deeper brown. Head densely and rather shallowly punctate over occiput and upper front with a median impressed line, finely pubescent, area above tu- bercles except for a narrow area about eyes entirely dark metallic green, labrum _ piceous edged. Antennae pale reddish brown except for a deeper brown basal joint, unusually long and slender, fourth joint about twice as long as third. Prothorax about twice as wide as long with nearly straight sides (viewed from above); de- pressed across the middle, especially on the sides, and coarsely punctate, surface shining, not at all alutaceous and with moderately dense pale pu- bescence, pale with three large, irregularly shaped piceous spots. Scutellum dark. Elytra deep metal- lic green with a pale yellow brown border, densely and moderately coarsely punctate and covered with fine pale pubescence. Body beneath and legs pale, the claw jomts alone deeper brown. Length 7 mm; width 2.4 mm. Type male U.S.N.M. no. 61127, collected at El Paso, Tex., May 2, collector unknown. Remarks.—Only a single specimen is at hand, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 10 but this one is distinctly unlike any other de- seribed from north of Mexico. It may well be a Mexican species but apparently is not described. The prothorax is unusual in bemg conspicuously pubescent and short. The aedeagus too is dis- tinctive with its long tapering tip. Trirhabda gurneyi, n. sp. Fig. 3 Between 6 and 7.5 mm in length, elongate oblong, faintly shining, especially on the pro- thorax, with finely pubescent elytra, pale yellow- brown, the head with a wide, dark, occipital band curving down front, prothorax with the usual three dark spots, scutellum dark, elytra with piceous sutural and lateral vittae, not united at the apex, body beneath, antennae and legs pale. Head coarsely punctate over occiput and down to frontal tubercles, with a median impressed line, pale with a dark band across occiput, curv- ing down the front, mouthparts usually dark. Antennae as a rule pale, never deep piceous. Prothorax not quite twice as broad as long, with slightly angulate sides, depressed on either side, shining, not at all alutaceous, and more or less coarsely punctate, pale with three medium sized black spots, the middle one often shield shaped. Seutellum usually entirely dark, in 2 of the 14 specimens somewhat paler toward apex. Elytra densely and moderately coarsely punctate, the punctures not confluent, and with short fine pubescence; pale yellow brown with a narrow sutural and not very wide lateral vitta, these not uniting at apex, the sutural one becoming narrow at apex so as to darken only the sutural edges, in one specimen the lateral vitta fading out from the middle to apex. Body beneath and legs pale, the claws somewhat deeper in coloring. Length 6-7.5 mm; width 2.6-3 mm. Type male and 11 paratypes, U.S.N.M. no. 61128. Two paratypes in M.C.Z., collected by A. B. Gurney at Indian Springs, Nev., June 5, 1949, on Franseria. Remarks.—In coloring this species resembles somewhat 7’. adela Blake, except that it is always pale beneath and smaller with less densely pu- bescent elytra. It has also a shiny, not alutaceous prothorax. It differs from T. mtidicollis im not having the vittae joined at the apex and in the differently shaped prothorax. OcToBER 1951 Trirhabda nigriventris, n. sp. Fig. 5 Between 6 and 9.5 mm in length, elongate oblong, finely punctate, with short, fine pubes- cence, head with a broad black plaga curving down over front, thorax shiny, 3-spotted, elytra with narrow sutural and lateral vittae almost always uniting at apex, frequently the lateral vitta having a paler trace of vitta as an offshoot near the apex, breast and abdomen dark. Head with a median impressed line, densely and not very coarsely punctate over front, a broad dark occipital band curving down front, mouthparts with dark edgmg. Antennae long and siender, the basal joints with pale edging, distal jomts entirely dark. Prothorax not quite twice as broad as long with slightly arcuate sides, depressed across, especially on the sides, shiny, more or less coarsely punctate, with three black spots, the middle one tending to be shield shaped. Seutellum usually entirely dark. Elytra densely but not very coarsely punctate, with short fine pubescence, sutural dark vitta nearly always uniting at apex with lateral vitta, the lateral vitta frequently having at apex a decurrent paler brown vitta running up, sometimes to the middle of the elytra. Body beneath with breast and abdomen, except at the tip, dark, legs pale, except the darker claw joint. Length 6-9.5 mm; width 2.6-3.5 mm. Type male and 90 paratypes, U.S.N.M. no. 61129. Four paratypes in M.C.Z.; 5 paratypes in British Museum, taken on sagebrush, Artemisia tridentata, August 1, 1938, by O. V. Smith at Aztek, N. Mex. Remarks.—The dark ventral surface and shiny prothorax distinguish this species from 7’. lewisii Crotch. It is one of the few larger western species with a dark undersurface. Disonycha barberi, n. sp. Fig. 10 From 5.4 to 6.6 mm in length, oblong oval, shining, pale yellow, the head with a broad dark occipital band extending in a point down the front and about the eyes and sides, the elytra with a sutural and marginal dark vitta uniting at apex and a median vitta, legs dark at apex of femora and the tibiae and tarsi entirely dark, beneath with the breast dark. Eyes unusually large, antennae dark with the tip paler. BLAKE: CHRYSOMELID BEETLES 327 Head shining, the polished dark occipital band finely punctate on the occiput and front and extending in a peak down to tubercles, also about the eyes and down the side of the head, the mouthparts dark; eyes unusually large, the inter- ocular space being less than half the width of the head, a fovea on each side near eye composed of punctures; tubercles pale and well marked, carina between antennal sockets not very wide or pro- duced but rounded. Antennae dark with the three basal and 2 apical joints more or less pale. Prothorax about twice as wide as long at base with rounded sides, somewhat depressed over the scutellum, entirely pale with very faintly punctate surface, shining. Scutellum dark, tri- angular. Elytra shining, more distinctly punctate, pale with a moderately wide sutural and marginal vitta jomed at apex, median vitta moderately wide, epipleura wide and dark but diminishing and vanishing before the apex. Body beneath with the breast more or less darkened, the apices of the anterior pairs of femora narrowly and those of the posterior femora more widely dark, the tibiae and tarsi dark. Length 5.4-6.6 mm; width 3-3.3 mm. Type male and 20 paratypes, U.S.N.M. no. 61130. Two paratypes in M.C.Z., 1 paratype in British Museum, collected at Brownsville, Tex., four specimens on September 16, 1939, on Con- dalia obovata and the rest in June 1945 and Sep- tember 1944 by J. D. Smith, who reared them from Phaulothamnus spinescens. Other localities—San Bonito, Tex., on corn foliage, March 27, 1945; Sebastian, Tex., April 24, 1945; 1 specimen trapped at airport, Browns- ville, June 6; 1 specimen taken from the cabin of a plane ‘in Mexico,” June 26, 1947. Remarks.—This species had been labeled by Mr. Barber with two different new specific names, the first one from its resemblance to D. glabrata (Fabricius), the second from its food plant. Both names are somewhat awkward-sounding, and so I propose to name it after Mr. Barber whose glee on discovering it I well remember. In general markings it resembles closely D. glabrata, but the unusually large eyes and different pattern of the head markings at once distinguish it. None of the specimens has any pronotal dark spots such as are usual in D. glabrata. Both larvae and eges were sent in by J. D. Smith, who reared it from Phaulothamnus spinescens. 328 Disonycha arizonae Casey Fig. 8 Some years ago Dr. E. C. Van Dyke sent me four specimens (three females and one male) of a Disonycha from the collection of the California Academy of Sciences, with the label Elmwood, Tenn., Fenyes Coll. At first sight it seemed to be something new, but the label reminded me of a series in the U. 8S. National Museum with the JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 10 same locality label that were typical specimens of D. arizonae Casey, and on comparison I found these four to be simply a dark color form of that species. This was corroborated by examination of the male genitalia. In all four specimens the elytra were deep reddish brown or piceous with a narrow pale margin, and in all four there was a faint trace of vittation at the apex, in the darkest specimen, only a tiny pale spot but in the others, showing very faintly, two pale vittae. ZOOLOGY .— Geographical distribution of the nemerteans of the northern coast of the Gulf of Mexico as compared with those of the southern coast of Florida, with de- scriptions of three new species. WESLEY R. Cor, Scripps Institution of Oceanog- raphy.! (Communicated by W.: L. Schmitt.) Up to the present time no published in- formation has been available relative to the nemerteans of the areas covered by this report. Consequently it has been uncertain whether the nemertean fauna might be found to consist principally or wholly of species identical with those of the Atlantic coast or whether the more typically tropical or sub- tropical species would be included. Nor was it known whether any or many apparently endemic forms might be present. Twenty-two species have now been identi- fied. Sixteen of these are found on the north- ern coasts of the Gulf and six others in southern Florida. Only two specimens from the deeper, off-shore waters of the Gulf have been obtained by the writer. Both of these belong to either Lineus or Micrura, but the specimens were not sufficiently well pre- served to allow specific analysis. No infor- mation is yet available for all that portion of the western Gulf coast south of the Mexi- can border, or for any locality on the west coast of the Florida peninsula between Franklin County and Key West. The presumable explanation for the small number of species at present known is that only sporadic efforts have been made toward a complete survey of the littoral fauna of the Gulf. On the Atlantic coast of North Amer- ica there are 53 known species of nemerteans and on the Pacific coast 95 species. Hence it seems probable that there are many more 1 Contribution from the Seripps Institution of Oceanography, new series, no. 539. species now actually living in the Gulf than can be included in this report. Even on the Atlantic coast the nemerteans have been studied extensively only as far south as New Jersey, and our knowledge of the species living between that State and Florida is based on collections madeat widely separated localities. It may therefore be assumed that some, perhaps many, addi- tional species remain to be discovered there. All except two of the species known from the northern part of the Gulf are also found on the Atlantic coast. Therefore, it seems probable that the nemertean fauna of the northern Gulf coast has in’the past been a continuation of that of the Atlantic coast and that it is now a separate fauna that was isolated in Pleistocene times by the Florida Peninsula. To determine whether any of the populations of the two areas are at present continuous, it 1s essential to obtain addi- tional collections on both sides of the south- ern half of that peninsula. It is already known that the species found at Pensacola, on the Gulf side, are similar to those found by the writer personally at St. Augustine, on the Atlantic side. The following lists, however, Indicate that these two nemertean faunas are separated by an area in which other species predominate. Because the nemerteans of the northern Gulf coast are generally of different species than those at present known from southern Florida, the species of the two areas will be listed separately. OcToBER 1951 I. GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF SPECIES AT PRESENT KNOWN FROM THE NORTHERN | COAST OF THE GULF OF MEXICO {Abbreviations indicate: A, Atlantic coast of North America; E, coasts of Europe; G, North- ern coast of the Gulf of Mexico; P, Pacific coast of North America; 8, southern Florida; W, West Indies; X, at other localities.| Order 1, PALEONEMERTEA Family Tubulanidae Tubulanus pellucidus (Coe), 1895. A, G, P. Family Carinomidae Carinoma tremaphoros Thompson, 1900. A, G. Order 2, HrTERONEMERTEA Family Lineidae Zygeupolia rubens (Coe), 1895. A, G, P. Lineus socialis (Leidy), 1855. A, G. Micrura leidyi (Verrill), 1892. A. G.S. Cerebratulus lactews (Leidy), 1851. A, G. Order 3, HOPLONEMERTEA Family Emplectonemertidae Paranemertes biocellata Coe, 1944. G. Family Carcinonemertidae Carcinonemertes carcinophila (Kélliker), 1845. A, EK. G. Carcinonemertes carcinophila imminuta Humes, 1942. G, S, W. Family Prosorhochmidae Oerstedia dorsalis (Abild.), 1806. A, E, G, P, X. Family Amphiporidae Zygonemertes virescens (Verrill), 1879. A, G, P. Amphiporus cruentatus Verrill, 1879. A, G, P. Amphiporus ochraceus (Verrill), 1873. A, G. Amphiporus texanus, n. sp. This new species represents one of the larger and broader forms of this extensive genus. The type specimen was about 60 mm in leneth and 6 mm in width after preservation. The length of this specimen is therefore only 10 times the greatest width. The head is narrow, about 2 mm in width, with subterminal mouth and trans- verse or oblique lateral grooves. There are many small ocelli on each side of the head, although the exact number and arrangement could not be determined in this specimen. The proboscis is large and extends nearly the entire length of the body. The central stylet is moderately slender and about two-thirds of the length of the relatively massive basis. The latter is nearly rectangular in outline, about four times as long as its diameter, tapering but. slightly toward the anterior end and is truncated pos- COE: GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF NEMERTEANS 329 teriorly (Fig. 1). In this type specimen the basis measured 0.185 mm in length and from 0.027 to 0.035 in diameter. One of the two accessory pouches contained two well-formed stylets and the other had three, two of which were not yet completed. In this specimen there were 10 rather large proboscidial nerves. No record is available regarding the color in life, but the specimen preserved in formalin in- dicated a pale, reddish-brown epidermal pig- mentation. The cerebral sense organs are com- paratively larger than in most species of the genus. They are situated lateroventrally and a short distance anterior to the brain. This specimen (U.S.N.M. no. 22965) was col- lected by B. Earp at Port Aransas, Tex. All the other species of nemerteans at present known from that locality are found also on the North Atlantic coast. Consequently it is uncertain whether this new species is limited to the Gulf of Mexico or whether it may occur also. on the Atlantic coast, although it has not yet been found there. Family Tetrastemmatidae Tetrastemma candidum (Miller), 1774. A, E, G, IP ose Tetrastemma vermiculus (Quatr.), 1846. A, E, G. Order 4, BDELLONEMERTEA Family Malacobdellidae Malacobdella grossa (O. F. Miller), 1776. A, G, P. 7 Fic. 1.—Amphiporus texanus n. sp.: Outline of stylet apparatus of proboscis. 330 II. SPECIES AT PRESENT KNOWN FROM SOUTHERN FLORIDA Order 1, PALEONEMERTEA Tubulanus floridanus, n. sp. In the collections from Biscayne Bay, Fla., was one specimen of T'ubulanus that evidently represents a previously undescribed species. This specimen is very slender, about 40 mm in length and only 1 to 2 mm wide. The color in life is brown, with a series of about 30 very narrow rings of lighter color. Nearly all the rings com- pletely encircle the body. Anteriorly the rings are separated by a distance about equal to the diameter of the body but more posteriorly they are generally more widely separated and irregu- larly spaced. The lateral sense organs can be distinguished externally but are not conspicuous. Transverse sections show a rather thick outer epithelium, with a thin, but dense, basement layer and an unusually large median dorsal nerve. The cerebral sense organs are large and highly specialized, with a sensory canal leading laterally to the surface of the epithelium. Individuals of this species have a superficial resemblance to those of JT. annulatus (Mon- tague), 7’. capistratus Coe, and T. nothus (Birger) but are without longitudinal lines of contrasting color. One individual of this species was collected by F. M. Bayer among algae on dock piling on the County Causeway at Miami, Biscayne Bay, Florida. U. S. Nat. Mus. Cat. No. 22251. Order 2, HetTERONEMERTEA Family Lineidae Lineus ater (Girard), 1851. 8, W. Lineus stigmatus n. sp. The collections contained fragments of an undescribed species of this genus, but unfor- tunately the head was not among them. Never- theless the markings on the body are so distinctive as to indicate that these fragments could not have belonged to any of the numerous described species. It seems necessary therefore to give as complete a diagnosis of a new species as is pos- sible in the absence of the head. The fragments have a maximum width of 5 mm, tapering to about 2 mm at the posterior end, indicating that the entire individual would have had a length of 150 mm or more. The color in life was slaty brown on both dorsal and ventral surfaces, with paired transverse white JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voOL. 41, No. 10 markings at intervals of 1 to 2 mm on the dorsal surface. Each narrow marking is about one-fifth the diameter of the body in length and the two members of each pair are separated from the margin and from each other by about the same distance (Fig. 2). The markings are limited to the dorsal surface and become irregular and indistinct toward the posterior end of the body. The colors are retained after preservation in alcohol. Since the anterior end of the body was not obtained, nothing can now be said as to the presence of ocelli, the character of the cephalic grooves or other sense organs or the peculiarities of the nephridia. Transverse sections of the body show an unusually thick cutis with many spiral muscular fibers and a heavily pigmented layer externally. Fic. 2.—Lineus stigmatus n. sp.: Outline of posterior portion of body, showing position of white markings. The markings appear to be ir- regularly spaced, onan to differences in state of contraction. The paired markings in this species have a superficial resemblance to those of some individ- uals of L. geniculatus (D. Chiaje) in which the white rings are interrupted in the mid dorsal line but in the latter species the rings continue laterally and ventrally. There is also some re- semblance to L. albocinctus Verrill, recorded from Bermuda and Puerto Rico, although in that species the transverse lines are continuous on the dorsal surface and the ventral surface of the body is whitish. The species is at present known only from the fragments of one individual collected by G. S. Posner on the shore of Biscayne Bay, Fla. U.S.N.M. no. 22252. Micrura leidyi (Verrill), 1892. A, G, S. Cerebratulus fuscus MeIntosh, 1873. E, 8, X Cerebratulus leucopsis (Coe), 1902. 8S, W. OcToBER 1951 TIMM: NEW SPECIES Order 3, HopLONEMERTEA Family Amphiporidae Carcinonemertes carcinophila var. tmminuta Humes, 1942. G, S, W. Family Drepanophoridae 1846. Drepanophorus crassus (Quatr.), 19, 12, (Ss Wrex: SUMMARY The preceding lists show that many of the species have a remarkably wide geographical distribution already recorded and it may be expected that they will later be found else- where. Of the 16 species at present known from the northern Gulf coast, all except Paranemertes biocellata and Amphiporus tex- anus are widely distributed on the Ameri- ean Atlantic coast, and four of them, namely, Tubulanus pellucidus, Zygeupolia rubens, Zy- gonemertes virescens, and Amphiporus cruen- tatus, occur also on the Pacific coast but not in Europe; two others, Carcinonemertes car- cinophila and Tetrastemma vermiculus, are found on American Atlantic and European coasts but not in the Pacific; Oerstedia dor- salis and Tetrastemma candidum are circum- polar, being distributed along both the east and west Atlantic and Pacific coasts; Mala- cobdella grossa occurs on both American coasts and in Europe; while the remaining five species, Carinoma tremaphoros, Lineus socialis, Micrura leidyi, Cerebratulus lac- teus, and Amphiporus ochraceus are known only from the Atlantic and Gulf coasts. OF MARINE NEMATODE 331 Paranemertes biocellata and Cerebratulus tex- anus have been found only on the northern Gulf coast and may possibly represent en- demic species. Of the seven species herein recorded from southern Florida, only two are known to oecur both on the northern Gulf coast and in southern Florida, while Lineus ater and Cerebratulus leucopsis have been previously reported from Puerto Rico and Curacao. Cerebratulus fuscus occurs also in northern Europe and South Africa, while Drepano- phorus crassus has an almost world-wide distribution. Tubulanus floridanus and Lineus stigmatus are at present known only from Biscayne Bay, Fla. For comparison, it may be noted that 11 of the 53 species found on the North Amer- ican Atlantic coast are identical with species in European waters, while 12 of the Atlan- tic coast species occur also on the Pacific coas' and 2of these extend also to Japan. No less than 18 of the species found on the Pacific coast are thought to be identical with well-known European species and others are closely similar. REFERENCES Con, W. R. Biology of the nemerteans of the Atlantic coast of North America. Trans. Connecticut Acad. Arts and Sei. 35: 129-328. 1943. ———. Geographical distribution of the nemerteans of the Pacific coast of North America, with de- scriptions of two new species. Journ. Washing- ton Acad. Sei. 24: 27-32. 1944. ZOOLOGY .—A new species of marine nematode, Thoracostoma magnificum, with a note on possible ‘‘pigment cell” nuclei of the ocel. R. W. Timm, The Catholic University of America. (Communicated by E. G. Reinhard.) The species of nematode described in this paper was collected from rocks at Point Barrow, Alaska, and sent to Dr. B. G. Chit- wood at The Catholic University of Amer- ica, Department of Biology, for identifica- tion. It is here described and figured as ¢ new species of the family Enoplidae, sub- family Leptosomatinae: Thoracostoma magnificum, n. sp. Fig. 1 Description.—Large worms with an elongate filiform body. Well-developed cephalic helmet (38 long); slits in the posterior grooves of the helmet not jomed. Amphids pocketlike, open— within a ring formed by the helmet; 7.54 wide in both male and female, one-ninth as wide as the cephalic diameter. Ten cephalic setae in the external cirele, four of which are double; six setae in the internal circle. Dorsal tooth very incon- spicuous. Dentiform projections in front of the helmet. No excretory pore or subventral excre- tory gland cell. Ocelli 19” im diameter) with red-pigmented “‘retina’’ and crystalline lens. Cuticle 12u at the head and tail, Su at the mid- body. Nerve ring 30 percent of the esophageal length from the anterior in both sexes. 332 Male.—24 mm long; a, 98.4; 8, 9.3; y, 189. Length of spicules 264,; length of gubernaculum: corpus 125y, crus 82.54. Total length of testes 33 percent of the body length. One preanal tuboid supplement situated ventrally and nine pairs of accessory papilloid supplements situated subventrally; nine pairs of submedian preanal and two pairs of submedian postanal papillae. —Ten | itl | | JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 10 Female.—24 mm long; a, 98.4; 8, 9.3; y, 190. Vulva 64.4 percent from the anterior; both ova- ries 31.5 percent of the body length; ovaries reflexed. Two eggs in the uterus, 224u by 780x. Habitat—Marine. Locality —Point Barrow, Alaska. Specimens.—U.S8.N.M. no. 1318838 (cotypes). Remarks.—Filipjev (1916) separated the new Fie. 1.—Thoracostoma magnificum, n. sp.: A, anterior end; B, male tail; C, cross section through first two marginal nuclei of esophagus. OcToBER 1951 genus Deontostoma from Thoracostoma on the absence of “large dentiform projections in front.” He characterized the genus Thoracostoma as hav- ing “a hollow ventral tooth.” Although Thora- costoma magnificum does not have conspicuous teeth as seen in totomount preparations, yet in eross section a definite dorsal tooth, through which the dorsal esophageal gland duct opens, is found to be present. There are also dentiform projections in front. The genus Deontostoma has not been generally accepted. A NOTE ON POSSIBLE ‘‘PIGMENT CELL” NUCLEI OF THE OCELLI Nothing has ever been observed on the inner- vation of the ocelli of nematodes. Schulz (1931) described a formative cell (‘“Bildungszelle”) di- rectly behind the ocellus of Parasymplocostoma formosum |? syn. of Enchelidium marinum (Mul- ler, 1783) Ehrenberg, 1836]. He also described a canal (‘“Augenkanal’’) opening from the lens to the exterior. These observations have never been confirmed. In Thoracostoma magnificum there are two large nuclei (11u by 18x) of the esophagus located a short distance behind the ocelli, which are half-embedded in the lateral walls of the esoph- agus (Fig. 1, A). These nuclei lie in accessory subventral gland ducts, which are filled with ocellus pigment granules, and lead to the eyes. They are the first two nuclei of the esophagus and BERKELEY AND BERKELEY: POTAMETHUS ELONGATUS 333 represent marginal nuclei (My, and Mz); they are surrounded by concentrations of ocellus pigment (Fig. 1, C). In Leptosomatum elongatum var. acephalatum Chitwood, 1936, and in Thoracostoma figuratum (Bastian, 1865) de Man, 1893, we have found these nuclei either in direct contact with the ocelli or a short distance behind them. Since the esophagus is a syncytium, the cytoplasmic boundaries of the cells producing the pigment have not been determined. However, since the regions in which the ocellus pigment extends throughout the esophagus are the same regions in which the marginal nuclei lie, it is suggested that the latter may function as the nuclei con- trolling pigment production. Possibly the two anteriormost marginal nuclei are specialized for activating the surrounding cytoplasm to produce the ocelli, while the others control the production of the diffuse pigment of the esophagus. However, nothing final can be stated at the present time about definite “pigment cell’? nuclei which direct formation of the ocelli. LITERATURE CITED Finiesev, I. Les nématodes libres contenus dans les collections du Musée Zoologique de l’ Academie Impériale des Sciences de Petrograd. Ann. Mus. Zool. Acad. Sei. Petrograd 21: 59-116, pls. 1-2. 1916. (Russian text; French title.) Scuuuz, E. Betrachtungen tiber Augen freclebender Nematoden. Zool. Anz. 95 (9/10): 241-244. figs. 1-8. 1931. ZOOLOGY .—A _ second record of the polychaetous annelid Potamethus elongatus (Treadwell). E. and C. BrRKELBY, Pacific Biological Station, Nanaimo, British Columbia. (Communicated by F. A. Chace, Jr.) The only specimen hitherto recorded of the polychaetous annelid Potamethus clongatus (Treadwell) is in the collection of the U.S. National Museum (no. 5221). It was taken by the steamer Albatross in the Hawaiian region in 1902 and briefly described by Treadwell (1906) under the name Potamilla elongata. The specimen was later re-exam- ined by Hartman (1942) and attributed to the genus Potamethus. It was said to be fragmentary, but the essential details were described. We have recently been fortunate enough to acquire three specimens of the species, sent to us by Dr. Clifford Carl, of the British Columbia Provincial Museum, Victoria, to whom they had been given by H. E. Wyeth, of the cableship Restorer. They were found on sections of the San Francisco to Ma- nila cable brought up for repair. The length of cable involved hes in depths varying from 840 to 1,600 fathoms, about 1,000 miles east of Guam. The specimens are all in good con- dition and complete, though much _ con- tracted, particularly in’ the peristomial region. One was preserved completely en- closed in its tube, the others partially enclosed. The lengths are, respectively, 50 mm, 51 mm, and 45 mm, the width about 2 mm in each case. The branchial plume, the filaments of which are twisted together in all the specimens, makes up half, or a little more, of the over-all length. The general appearance agrees with that 334 of the type species of the genus, P. spathi- ferus Ehlers, the outstanding characters be- ing the high, oblique collar, unbroken dor- sally or ventrally, but rising to a high, thickened and grooved, lobe on the dorsal side, the slender body, and the very long branchial filaments (Ehlers, 1887, pl. 54). The dorsal collar lobe varies considerably in appearance in each of the three specimens and is evidently mobile. The long peristomial region, which Ehlers shows for P. spathiferus and Hartman says is present in P. elongatus, is not apparent in our specimens, but this region is much wrinkled because of contrac- tion and would, no doubt, appear as shown by Ehlers in extension. The branchial bases are slightly, but definitely, involute on the ventral side. As Hartman points out, P. elongatus is definitely differentiated from P. spathiferus by the form of the spatulate setae, those of the former species having long mucrons, whereas in the latter they are very little developed. The asymmetry of the blades of these setae in P. elongatus, which she stresses, is not invariably present in our specimens; some correspond closely with her figure 15d, others are as symmetrical as shown in our Fig. 1 and by Treadwell (fig. 74), and every intergrade is represented. The form of the thoracic uncinus in our specimens is also not completely in accord with that shown by Hartman (fig. le) or by Treadwell (fig. 75). As we find them the stems curve very little or not at all and taper very slightly and gradually, the crests are somewhat higher, and the angle between the beak and neck is rather smaller (fig. 2). These differences may well be within the limits of variation. The abdominal setae are of two kinds, long capillaries with very narrow blades and others much shorter with wide, flat terminal blades set at a slight angle to the shafts (fig. 3). The abdominal uncini are as shown in Fig. 4. The tubes are quite smooth, the walls very thin and fragile and coated with very fine mud. Four species have been ascribed to the genus Potamethus, all from considerable depths. Of these P. mucronatus (Moore), P. spathiferus (Ehlers), and P. elongatus (Treadwell) seem to be sufficiently clearly differentiated (see Hartman, 1942). There JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vouL. 41, No. 10 Fias. 1-4.—Potamethus elongatus (Treadwell) : 1, Spatulate thoracic seta; 2, thoracic uncinus; 3, short abdominal seta; 4, abdominal uncinus. remains P. scotiae Pixell. The only notable difference between this species and P. elonga- tus (Treadwell) appears to be in the form of the thoracic uncinus, particularly its very long stem and curious crest (Pixell, 1913, figs. 7a, 7b). Having regard to the variabil- ity of the setae in P. elongatus we have indicated, we consider it not improbable that the two species are synonymous. One of the three specimens dealt with in this note is deposited in the U. S. National Museum (no. 22752); the others remain in the authors’ collection. LITERATURE CITED Exnuers, Ernst. Florida-Anneliden. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. 15: 335 pp., 60 pls. 1887. Hartman, Ouaa. The identity of some marine annelid worms in the United States National Museum. Proce. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 92: 101-140, 8 figs. 1942. Prxett, Henren L. Polychaeta of the families Serpulidae and Sabellidae collected by the Scot- tish National Antarctic Expedition. Trans. Roy. Soe. Edinburgh 49 (pt. 2): 347-358, 1 pl. 1913. TREADWELL, AARON L.: Polychaetous annelids of the Hawaiian Islands collected by the steamer Albatross in 1902. Bull. U. S. Fish Comm. 28 (for 1903; pt. 3): 1145-1181, 81 figs. 1906. OcroBEeR 1951 ABBOTT AND LADD: BRACKISH-WATER GASTROPOD 339 MALACOLOGY.—A new brackish-water gastropod from Texas (Amnicolidae: Lit- toridina).. R. T. Asgsort, U. S. National Museum, and H. 8S. Lapp, U. 8S. Geological Survey. (Communicated by Julia Gardner.) During the summer of 1940 the junior author made a study of the brackish-water and marine assemblages of the coasta! waters in the vicinity of Rockport and Aransas Pass, Tex. Dredging was done from the bay-head areas near the mouths of streams, where the waters are nearly fresh, through the bays and passes to the Gulf of Mexico, where the waters are of normal marine salinity. The assemblages of mollusks and other benthonic organisms changed radically with the salinity gradient, and it was possible to recognize several distinct facies.2 The fauna of the bay-head areas was found to be poor in numbers of species but, locally at least, rich in numbers of individuals. One of the most abundant forms is the species of Littoridina described in the present paper as the type of a new subgenus, Texadina. This new species was found alive only in water of low salinity, but a few worn or broken shells were dredged at intervals from more saline waters all the way to Aransas Pass at a point less than a mile from the open gulf. Family AMNICOLIDAE Genus Littoridina Eydoux and Souleyet, 1852 Texadina, n. subg. Shell very small, minutely umbilicate, ovate- conic, with about five whorls, thin but strong. Whorls moderately convex, increasing regularly in size until the last third of the last whorl, which descends more rapidly, becomes constricted and in many specimens detached. Peristome oval to round. Surface smooth, except for fine growth lines. Suture fine, moderately impressed. Periostracum very thin, translucent gray. Oper- culum chitimous, paucispiral, thin, translucent. Radula and animal amnicolid-like. Type: 7. sphinctostoma Abbott and Ladd. Recent, Texas. The subgenus Texadina differs from Littoridina s.s. in having the peristome constricted and ‘Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution and the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. 2 A report on this work has been prepared and will be published by the Institute of Marine Science, University of Texas. more rounded, and in having the last third of the last whorl more rapidly descending. Littoridina (Texadina) sphinctostoma, n.sp. Figs. 1-12 Description—Shell small (adults 2.0 to 3.3 mm in length), solid, ovate-conic to fusiform, very narrowly umbilicate, 53 to 64 whorls, trans- lucent gray in fresh material to opaque white in dead specimens. Despite its rather fragile appearance, the shell is thick and strong. Apex moderately pointed, with smooth, glossy nuclear whorls not distinguishable from the postnuclear whorls. Sides of whorls moderately well rounded. Last third of the last whorl in most shells de- scends more rapidly and becomes constricted to form a relatively small, more rounded aperture than is seen in immature specimens. Peristome adnate or in some shells free from the parietal wall, usually thin and strong, but may be thick- ened either internally or externally. Umbilicus variable in size and shape, frequently deeply rimate or narrowly rounded. Suture sharp, well impressed. Spiral scultpure absent, except for a weak keel on the periphery of the last whorl in young specimens. Axial sculpture of very weak, widely spaced growth lines. Interior of shell highly polished. Periostracum very thin, smooth, translucent grayish to yellowish, lost in dead specimens. Operculum very thin, chitinous, transparent yellowish, of size and shape of the aperture, and paucispiral. Radula taenioglossate with denticle 3-1-3 formula: aa ; 2-1-3 or 3-1-3; 15 to 16 for the inner marginal; 9 to 10 for the outer marginal. Animal with moderately short proboscis, moder- ately long tentacles, with the eyes located at the bases on slight swellings. Color unknown, but black pigment clusters seen above the eye, a vertical band of black-gray on the side of the foot, and a weak dusting of black along a wide band of the mantle edge. Verge unknown. MEASUREMENTS (mm) Length Width Aperture Whorls U.S.N.M. no. 3.0 1.4 0.9x 0.7 6.0 (holotype, 596722) 3.0 1.4 1.0x 0.8 5.8 (paratype, 596723) 3.0 1.6 0.9 x 0.8 Hall (paratype, “ ) 2.7 kes} 0.7x 0.6 5.5 (paratype, 2.4 1.2 0.7 x 0.6 5.0 (paratype, “ ) 336 The accompanying graphs represent the shell lengths of adults from random samplings of three dredging stations. Shells in which the last part of the body whorl is constricted and descending are considered adult. Means: Station 2, 2.35 mm; station 3, 2.78 mm; station 6, 2.72 mm. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 10 The number of individuals measured at the three stations is respectively 75, 104, and 101. Types.—The holotype is U.S.N.M. no. 596722 from station 6. Paratypes from station 2 are in the U. S. National Museum (no. 596724), the Museum of Comparative Zoology (Harvard Col- Fries. 1-3.—Littoridina (Texadina) sphinctostoma, n.sp.: 1, Operculum; 2, radula, a, central, b, lateral, c, inner marginal, d, outer marginal (all greatly magnified); 3, dorsal view of animal (X 20). NO. ADULTS 20 STATION SHELL LENGTH (MM,) Fic. 4.—Graph of the shell lengths of adults from three population samples. OctToBEeR 1951 9 10 ABBOTT AND LADD: BRACKISH-WATER GASTROPOD 337 7 12 Fies. 5-12.—Littoridina (Texadina) sphinctostoma, n.sp.: 5, Holotype; 6-12, paratypes. Fig. 12 is an immature specimen. (All x 15). lege), the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila- delphia (no. 187519), the Museum of Zoology at the University of Michigan, and the Institute of Marine Science, University of Texas. Para- types from the other stations are in the U. 8. National Museum. Type locality—14 miles north of Webb Point, northwest side of San Antonio Bay, 27 miles northeast of Rockport, Tex. H. 8. Ladd, col- lected July 15, 1940, station 6. Locality records.—See Table 1 for Texas ma- terial. At Grand Isle, La., four specimens were collected by A. G. Humes (U.S.N.M. no. 535757). Remarks.—The size, texture, and general shape of the shells of Littoridina sphinctostoma are not unlike those of L. tenurpes Couper from the brackish waters of the Atlantic coast of south- eastern United States. Our Gulf of Mexico species, however, is unique in the apertural constriction and the degree to which part of the last whorl descends and becomes detached. The small, oval peristome is rather like that found in Stenothyra and Amphithalamus (Floridiscrobs) dysbatus Pils- bry. However, Littoridina sphictostoma does not have the dorsal-ventral flattening of the body whorl of those two groups. Young specimens are of a normal littoridinid shape, although a few have a weak ridge at the periphery of the whorls. As shown in Figs. 5 to 12, there is con- siderable variation in the convexity of the whorls and the degree to which the last whorl descends or becomes detached from the body whorl. In many specimens the unusual change in the last part of the whorl is preceded by injury in some manner to the shell. In some adults, the spire may be slightly concave, giving the shell a fusiform shape. The shells from station 6 are much more variable in shape and are smaller in average size than those from other stations (see graph). Ecology.—Living examples of L. sphinctostoma were recovered only at station 6, a locality at the head of San Antonio Bay about 40 miles from the open gulf at Aransas Pass. The salinity of the water at this locality, according to Galt- soff’s map, is between 7 and 8 parts per thousand (Galtsoff, Paul S., Survey of oyster bottoms in Texas, Investigational Report No. 6, Bureau of 338 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 10 TaBLp 1.—Locatity Recorps (PARATYPES) | ee Locality (all exes) pee Bottom Bee | Noterl 2 2 miles northeast of Austwell, head of 2-2.5 Soft mud 596724 150+ Hynes Bay 3 34 miles east of Austwell, Hynes Bay 3.5-4 Mud, sand, and shell | 596725 200+ 4 2 miles west of Seadrift, San Antonio 2 Sand 596729 2 Bay 6 14 miles north of Webb Point, San An- 1.5 Muddy sand 596723 200+ tonio Bay (type) 20 South side of mouth of Copano Bay 3.6 Shell and muddy sand 596730 1 28 Southwest corner of San Antonio Bay 4 Muddy sand and shell 596731 2 39 East-central part of Copano Bay 15 Muddy sand and shell 596726 15 48 14 miles east of Mud Island, Aransas 7 Muddy sand and shell 596727 1 Bay 61 North side of main Aransas Pass 1-2 Rock jetty 596728 1 Fisheries, fig. 9, p. 15, 1931). Fresh shells were also dredged at three other localities. Two of these are in Hynes Bay, an arm of San Antonio Bay, at points (stations 2 and 3) where the salinity does not exceed 4 parts per thousand. The third locality where abundant shells were collected is in the exposed part of an oyster reef in Copano Bay (station 39), about 20 miles by airline southwest of the type locality. The salinity at this station may be as high as 19 parts per thousand; though abundant, the shells are not as fresh as those dredged in San Antonio and Hynes Bays. At the type locality in San Antonio Bay the living snails were dredged from a bottom of muddy sand under 14 feet of water. Associated with the snails are numerous living specimens of Rangia cuneata Gray (with attached barnacles), a few of razor clams (Hnsis minor Dall), and Mulinia lateralis Say; also present are numerous Foraminifera: Rotalia beccarv (Linnaeus) was the most abundant, with a few tests of R. beccarti var. tepida Cushman, Nonion pauciloculum Cush- man, Elphidium gunteri var. galvestonensis Korn- feld, and Miliammina fusca (Brady).* The living faunas at stations 2 and 3, where abundant fresh shells of Littoridina sphinctostoma were found, are very similar to the living fauna of the type locality with the addition of cstracodes and numerous specimens of the thin-shelled Tellina texana Dall. The bay bottom at stations 2 and 3 is of soft mud under 2 to 34 feet of water. One or two shells were dredged from a third locality in Hynes Bay, and from localities in Copano Bay, Aransas Bay, and Aransas Pass. None of these was very fresh and most of them were worn or broken; they appear to have been transported appreciable distances from the place where they lived. ’ Tdentifications of Foraminifera by Rita Post, of the U.S. Geological Survey. ORNITHOLOGY.— Observations on the genera of the swans. ALEXANDER WETMORE, Smithsonian Institution. The white species of swans superficially are so alike that there has been difficulty in the identification and application of the older generic names. It is now accepted that the type of the genus Cygnus Bechstein, 1803, is Anas olor Gmelin, the mute swan, not Anas cygnus Linnaeus, the whooper swan, as stated in the fourth edition of the A.O.U. Check-list.! In view of this change it is desirable to review the whole question of generic allocation in these interesting 1 See Permrs, Check-listtof birds of the world 1: 143. 1931; and Wrrnersy et al., Handbook of Brit- ish birds 3: 168. 1939. birds. The latest comprehensive treatment of the living swans, that of James L. Peters, to which reference has been made, divides the seven living species between two genera, viz., Chenopsis for the black swan of Austra- lia and Cygnus for the six remaining forms, of which five are found in the Northern Hemisphere, and one, the black-necked swan, ranges in the southern part of South America. To outline the discussion, the fourth edi- tion of the A. O. U. Check-list? recognized > Check-list of North American birds, ed. 4: 35. 1931. OcToBER 1951 Sthenelides as the genus for the introduced mute swan, native in the Old World, found now in a feral state in the lower Hudson Valley and on Long Island, ranging in winter south to the coast of New Jersey and east to Massachusetts. The Twentieth Supplement to the Check-list® reduced Sthenelides to sub- generic status, thus placing all North Ameri- can swans in one genus. Hildegarde Howard? has reopened this allocation by using Sthe- nelides as a genus for the fossil species named Cygnus paloregonus by Cope from the Pleis- tocene deposits of Fossil Lake, Oreg. (It may be observed that Chenopis atratus of Aus- tralia seems marked generically from other swans mainly by the shorter tail, which is shorter than the middle toe with claw, and the naked lores in the downy young.) Externally the species of white swans are so similar that the student of study skins has difficulty in separating them. The compara- tive anatomist, however, working with skele- tons, has no trouble whatever in dividing them into two principal groups on charac- ters so evident that they cannot be disre- garded. The differences are most apparent in the form of the trachea, sternum, and furculum. Following is a summary of these anatomical characters, with indication of the allocation of the species of the Northern Hemisphere and South America: a. Trachea passing directly into thorax, not entering sternum; furculum simple; tail GUINEA CC BPMN eee en et genus Cygnus Cygnus Bechstein, Orn. Taschenb., pt. 2, 1803: 404. Type, bymonotypy, Anas olor Gmelin. Sthenelus Stejneger, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 5: 184, 185. Aug. 5, 1882. Type, by monotypy, Anas melancoripha Molina. (Not Sthenelus Marschall, 1873, emendation for Sthelenus Bu- quet, 1860, for a genus of Cole- optera. ) Sthenelides Stejneger, Auk 1 (3): 235. July 1884. Type, by monotypy, Anas melancorphia Molina. New name for Sthenelus Stejneger (pre- occupied). Euolor Mathews and Iredale, Austr. Avian Rec. 3 (5): 117. Dec. 28, 1917. Type, by original designation, Anas olor Gmelin. 3 Auk, 1945: 488. 4 Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 551: 160-165. Jan. 25, 1946. WETMORE: GENERA OF THE SWANS 339 Species included: Cygnus olor amined). Cygnus melancoriphus (Molina) (skele- ton examined).° (Gmelin) (skeleton ex- aa. Trachea making a loop that enters the ster- num; furculum especially modified at sym- physis to accommodate this loop; tail MOUNT CLC ey OM ae seen oueya ...genus Olor Olor Wagler, Isis, 1832: 1234. Type, by subsequent designation, Cygnus musicus Bechstein = Anas cygnus Linnaeus (Gray, 1840). Clangocycnus Oberholser, Emu 8 (pt. 1); 3. July 1, 1908. Type, by mono- typy, Cygnus buccinator Richard- son. b. Trachea entering anterior end of sternum smoothly, without a dorsal loop. subgenus Olor. Species included: Olor columbianus (Ord) amined). Olor cygnus (Linnaeus) amined). Olor bewickii Yarrell.® (skeleton ex- (skeleton ex- bb. Trachea making a dorsal loop as it enters sternum, protected by a bony case that projects into the anterior end of the body cavity..... subgenus Clangocycnus Species included: Olor buccinator (Richardson) (skeleton examined). The shape of the furculum and the loop- ing of the trachea in the sternal keel are de- veloped in the growing young, the loop lengthening and expanding to the end of the sternum as the individual becomes fully adult. This change with age has led to mis- understanding of the characters by some not familiar with it. The arrangement of the genera above, it may be noted, is identical with that of Stej- neger in his Outlines of a monograph of the Cygninae, published in 1882.7 In checking over the nomenclature con- cerned for the species in our list a curious 5 Also the fossil species Cygnus paloregonus Cope. See Howarp, Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 551: 160-165, Jan. 25, 1946, where Cygnus matthewi (Shufeldt) is placed as a synonym of paloregonus. 6 See YARRELL, History of British birds 4: 320- 322. 1884-85. 7 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 5: 174-221. 1882. 340 circumstance that does not seem to have been noted in ornithological literature has come to light relative to the generic name proposed by Stejneger for the black-necked swan. Stejneger in 1882 set up the generic name Sthenelus with a proper diagnosis of its characters. Apparently then his atten- tion was drawn to Secudder’s Nomenclator zoologicus, published in the same year where the following citation is found (p. 303): “Sthenelus Buq., col. 1859, M.” Following this, two years later Stejneger,* in a discus- sion of Scudder’s Nomenclator, in which he pointed out some of its shortcomings, wrote: “T find that the name Sthenelus, which I ap- plied in 1882 to the black-necked swan from South America was preoccupied. It conse- quently requires a new one, and I propose in future to call the species Sthenelides melan- corypha.”’ Mainly through curiosity I checked the earlier use of Sthenelus to find that the refer- ence is to Lucien Buquet in his ‘“‘Mémoire sur deux genres nouveaus de Coléoptéres de la famille des Longicornes (Oxilus et Sthe- lenus) suivi de la description appartenant aux genres Platyarthron, Oeme (Sclerocerus Dej.), Clytus, Apriona, Cerosterna et Acan- thoderus.”’* The generic name in which we are interested is found on p. 621, where it has the same form as in the title, viz., Sthelenus, with the footnote “Nom mythologique.”’ The subsequent history of Buquet’s name so far as I have followed it is interesting. 8 Auk, 1884: 235. ’ Ann. Soc. Ent. France 7: 619-636. 1859 (1860). JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 41, No. 10 Scudder, quoted above, took the name Sthenelus from Marschall’s Nomenclator zoo- logicus of 1873 as indicated by the initial “MM? in his citation. Marschall, on page 245, writes ‘“Sthenelus, Buquet,”’ with a reference to the original publication, but with no ex- planation for the emendation. On a little further research it is found that there is no mythological character from whom Buquet might have taken the term Sthelenus, while Sthenelus was a well-known name for several ancients of importance, among them a son of Perseus who became King of Mycenae, also a Kang of the Ligurians whose son Cyenus was reputed to have been changed to a swan, and further one of the warriors who entered the wooden horse at the siege of Troy. It is not apparent whether Marschall recognized what we may consider Buquet’s error consciously or unconsciously, but in either case he made the emendation. The matter 1s correctly set forth by Neave, in his Nomenclator zoologicus,!° where he includes Sthenelus of Marschall, 1873, as a new name for Sthelenus Buquet, 1860. While it seems curious that neither Stejneger nor Richmond valled attention to these matters in their notes on nomenclature, it 1s fairly certain that the circumstance must have been known to them because of their extensive knowledge and of their careful work in verifi- cation of references. In any event, Sthenelus of Marschall, 1873, antedated Sthenelus of Stejneger, 1882, so that the new name Sthe- nelides Stejneger of 1884 was in order. 10 Nomenclator zoologicus 4: 309. 1940. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences PALE STOCTUL PEM Nena ec Rose crete care Sion ete Natuan R. SmitH, Plant Industry Station EPEStCETE-CLECL a en Noni ree WALTER RAMBERG, National Bureau of Standards INCCTCLO TU Mapeeer Sera es ee oe F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards IR CUSUT ET ee Ae Niort ae Howarp 8S. Rapputeye, U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey PA CILLUCS EO Ty i Se NSS SIS eS Be ise Joun A. Stevenson, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haraup A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: PhilosophicallSocrety, of Washington:.935.5---s.4--s00s+5- 5° Epwarp U. Connon Anthropological Society of Washington......................05- WaLpo R. WEDEL BiolozicaliSociety,of washington) es spcee eo dscect- cess sace cee: ChemicallSociety: of Washingtome.-ssstsaesesesosce needs se eee JosEPH J. FAHEY Entomological Society of Washington........................ FREDERICK W. Poos INationalyGeographiclSocietyas-nsceee. codes ener sae ne a ALEXANDER WETMORB CeolocicaliSocietyaotaWashingtontee ee eneeee seen eee: Leason H. Apams Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... ColumbiayHistoricaliSocietyz 25-7 - eee eee ee ee eee GILBERT GROSVENOR Batanicalasocietyzon Washingtone sss. 2 eee sss ace caine cece a: E. H. WaLKER Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wiutiam A. Dayton Washington Society) of Hngineers..-..-.----250--+2 22255-0604: Cuirrorp A. Betts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers Francis M. DEFANDORF Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp S. DILL Helminthological Society of Washington.......................... L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Aneus M. GRIFFIN Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers....Henry W. HemePieE Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......... Hersert G. Dorsty District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason Elected Members of the Board of Managers: PROM amtrareye OG Deh Mek AS es OCD il eae Sheen ie W. F. Fosuaa, C. L. Gazin UO dain? IOs oops esse de sop eenoe ton C. F. W. MursnseEck*, A. T. McPHERSON Mop amuaryel O54 os cess. Aecoe dese aes Sara E. Brannam, Mitton Harris* BoardnojmVGnagens. 2. 4.0.5 soe secc eek All the above officers plus the Senior Editor BourdrojpHattorsiand Alssocvate Haitors.. . 0.2.6 08 ee eee eee de ea [See front cover] Executive Committee....N. R. SmitH (chairman), WALTER RamMBERG, H. S. RAPPLEYE, é J. A. Stevenson, F. M. DreranporF Committee on Membership............... L. A. SPINDLER (chairman), M. 8. ANDERSON, R. E. BuackweEper, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. Hansmen, D. B. Jonrs, Dorotuy ; Nickerson, F. A. SmitH, He1Inz Specut, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings......... MarcGaret Pittman (chairman), NoRMAN BEKKEDAHL, W. R. Cuapuine, D. J. Davis, F. B. ScHretz, H. W. WELLS Committee on Monographs: pRopanuarye 9525 eee tse cae J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), Paut H. OBHSER PROM am Wary al OOS Meane amin sent cae Re aoe ne ae Aa Rie Se R. W. Imtay, P. W. OMAN PROTA Ty el ODA ce, CPA cca ns easton aura ous Gletelie eeesth uate eis dna a 8. F. Buaxs, F. C. Kracexk Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (GEORGE P. WALTON, general chairman): For the Biological Sciences............ G. H. Coons (chairman), J. E. FABER, JR., Myrna F. Jonss, F. W. Poos, J. R. SwALLEN For the Engineering Sciences.........R. S. Diu (chairman), ARSHAM AMIRIKIAN, J. W. McBurney, Frank Neumann, A. H. Scorr For the Physical Sciences............. G. P. Watton (chairman), F. S. Bracksrt, G. E. Horm, C. J. Humpeureys, J. H. McMILLen For Teaching of Science............ B. D. Van Evera (chairman), R. P. Barngs, F. E. Fox, T. Koppanyi, M. H. Martin, A. T. McPHrrson Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research...................--. L. E. Yocum (chairman), M. X. Suuiivan, H. L. WairremMore Committee on Policy and Planning: IO .dienaninay Ih Gee cenoodosuee sn booobe J. I. Horrman (chairman), M. A. Mason PR ORT ATA el ODS i pipe ia Ares soe re eens hana pera ees W. A. Dayton, N. R. SmitH RoR aman al GOA ys Monae Rs eect nts ays svat cles sok H. B. Couns, Jr., W. W. Rusey Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: Ake diemaienay WOR. ssccopnoonoaneendoo M. A. Mason (chairman), A. T. McPHERSON ‘oy diana OSB). oer aka od baie aeido oo ae Coes 6 anomie ae A. H. Crark, F. L. Monier MORAN UAT valoda were cre ener yA Asie J. M. CaLpweE.u, W. L. Scamitr Jp ReBeCKOIE 010 Covad) OF 4a Alo Ala Soraccsncsog0oncssesosngocedo0cs- F. M. Serzuer Committee of Auditors..... J. H. Martin (chairman), N. F. Braaten, W. J. YOUDEN Committee of Tellers...W.G. BRoMBACHER (chairman), A. R. Merz, Lourss M. RussBLL * Appointed by Board to fill vacancy. CONTENTS Page AstronomMy.—The birth of stars from interstellar clouds. Lyman DPIDZMR, UR ests Cac eeicae tora iegs Semele n, 0 Gktaheoheh, spe 309 EntomoLtogy.—New American chinch bugs (Hemiptera: Lygaeidae). CARES) DRAKE i505 es Se she Olav nd Sytner 319 ENToMoLoGy.—New species of chrysomelid beetles of the genera T7r1- rhabda and Disonycha.. Doris A BrAkn: 92.7.) .-- 2) eee 324 Zootogy.—Geographical distribution of the nemerteans of the northern coast of the Gulf of Mexico as compared with those of the southern coast of Florida, with descriptions of three new species. WESLEY ZooLtocy.—A new species of marine nematode, Thoracostoma magnificum, with a note on possible ‘‘pigment cell’’ nuclei of the ocelli. R. W. ALSTINUNE sfoseon Ste kee shor cu de date Sea rap reRoiceeseukl ie feet ye coker hooves eee 331 Zootocy.—A second record of the polychaetous annelid Potamethus elongatus (Treadwell). E. and C. BERKELEY...................5 333 Matacotogy.—A new brackish-water gastropod from Texas (Amni- colidae: Littoridina). RR. f.Assorm and HS: LADD... ase 335 ORNITHOLOGY.—Observations on the genera of the swans. ALEXANDER WT MORE yrs hc ceshecesoientue cuseseuecae es ae Sea tee to en 340 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals we. (3 I ant Ae ewes Vou. 41 NovEMBER 1951 No. 11 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS Wiuiiam F. FosHac J. P. E. Morrison U. 8. NATIONAL MUSEUM CHARLES DRECHSLER PLANT INDUSTRY STATION U. 8. NATIONAL MUSEUM BELTSVILLE, MD. ASSOCIATE EDITORS J.C. EwEers J. I. HorrMan ANTHROPOLOGY CHEMISTRY C. W. SABROSKY T. P. THAYER ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY F. A. Cuace, JR. Miriam L. BomHARD BIOLOGY BOTANY R. K. Cook PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Roya & GuILFoRD AVEs. BALtTIMoRE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912,at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JoURNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- ouymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double- spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate): Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the JouRr- NAL or the PrRocEEDINGS should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per year..................2002+---0-+ $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vole iitonvolat0sincl—notavailable: To) OoOr a or) ow Dore (hermit bo — ~I Lithodidae (king 15 53 Family Hippidae Tribe Brachyura (true crabs) 638 Family Raninidae 10 30 Genera Species OrpER DECAPODA—Continued. Suborder Reptantia—Continued. Family Homolodromiidae Family Dromiidae Family Dynomenidae Family Thelxiopeidae Family Latreillidae po WWOW Oe — [or Family Hapalocarcinidae 12 (coral gall crabs) Family Dorippidae 10 77 Family Calappidae (box 10 65 crabs) Family Leucosiidae (purse 40 338 crabs) Family Euryalidae 6 Family Portunidae (swim- 38 297 ming crabs) Family Potamonidae (fresh- 13 520 water crabs) Family Atelecyclidae 13 30 Family Caneridae (rock 2 22 crabs) Family XNanthidae 133 928 Family Goneplacidae 54 170 Family Pinnotheridae (pea 26 222 crabs) Family Retroplumidae I 4 Family Cymopolidae 3 39 Family Grapsidae 40 333 Family Gecarcinidae (land 6 20 crabs) Family Ocypodidae (ghost 19 231 crabs, fiddler crabs) Family Hymenosomidae 9 53 Family Majidae (spider 145 673 crabs) Family Parthenopidae 21 150 Order Stomatopoda 8 178 Family Squillidae (mantis 8 178 shrimps) The total of approximately 8,321 recog- nized species of decapods agrees almost ex- actly with the estimate of ‘‘over 8,000 living species” cited by Pratt in 1935.2 However, 2 Pratr, H.8., A manual of the common inver- ate atebrnimals exclusive of insects, rev. ed.: 447— 467. 1935. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. I] the numbers of genera and species assigned by Pratt to several of the subordinal groups do not correspond as closely with the figures in the preceding table. The Decapoda make up by far the largest order of the Crustacea; very nearly one-third of the accepted recent crustaceans belong to this group. It is likely that the number of species of decapods will increase by 30 or 40 percent when all living forms are recognized. Some of the other crustacean groups which have received attention for shorter periods of time possibly contain more undescribed species, but the position of the decapods as the largest and most diversified order of the class will probably never be seriously challenged. It may be of interest that the number of decapods now known approximates Mayr’s eount of the number of full species of birds (8,616). The numbers of bird families (160) and genera (1,800—2,600), however, are fully twice as large as those of the decapods. The average genus of birds therefore contains only 3.3 to 4.75 species, whereas the average decapod genus is made up of 8.3 species This discrepancy probably does not reflect any great dissimilarity between the specific relationships of birds and decapods. Because of the extreme diversification of the decapods, it would seem safe to assume that intense systematic attention to that group, similar to that which has been focused on birds for so long, would result in an even larger proportionate number of families and genera among the decapods than among the birds. 3 Mayr, Ernst, The number o° species of birds. Auk 63: 64-59. 1946. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences IPROSICI dsc Se SOAR ROO ne eee NatrHan R. SmirH, Plant Industry Station HAPESUCLETUL=CLECL Staak cast Saniora Water RamsBeErG, National Bureau of Standards SGRIGTU oe oe oe en ee F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards TOTS URAR eakaine Cae ae aro Howarp 8. Rappieye, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey PAR CI UUS LP eee aye cya aia latte ea scars suet cose Joun A. Stevenson, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Harrap A. Renper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Philosophical Society of Washington.......................-. Epwarp U. Connon Anthropological Society of Washington....................-.... Watpo R. WEDEL Brolopicalgoocietyzormwashingtoneeneeacacaneeeooeeccem cece ne ChemicallSociety, of Washington. )y-506 00.02 s- cose eee eee ee ee JosrErH J. FAHEY Entomological Society of Washington........................ FREDERICK W. Poos National’ Geographic Society... ...045-eesees+ eset saci sence ALEXANDER WETMORE CeolocicaliSocietysot Washingtone esse aasessosssssee eee ose Lreason H. Apams Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... CoalumibiayEistoricaliSociety: -.5-0 09506 os sae6 oe eee GILBERT GROSVENOR Bovanicalesocietyz ob Washing tonencss. saeco ade aoe ee eee nae E. H. WALKER Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... WiuuraM A. Dayton Washington Society) of Mngineers)2-54.55.-...-422-5-05-00e=- CurrrorD A. BETTS Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers Francis M. DEFANDORF Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp S. D1Lu Helminthological Society. of Washington.......................... L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Aneus M. GriFrrin Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers....H=Nry W. HemPieE Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......... Hersert G. Dorsey District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason Elected Members of the Board of Managers: Iho Unione? OS PA SS ae eigen aia ot ier ure ee a ee ee W. F. Fosuaag, C. L. Gazin pRomdomuranyal O53. )7.6 6: arden cme aie oe cess C. F. W. Murseseck*, A. T. McPHERSoN PROMI ATMA 1954S cose shacae toons vale s ew ees Sara E. Branuam, Mitron Harris* IROGROMOWMVIGNOQENS. ose. soc ss sen ee aa All the above officers plus the Senior Editor BOC AIO MU OILOTSICIUd “A'\SSOCUALE EIQULOT Sheen wuce ts See cee ono sone [See front cover] Executive Committee....N. R. SmitH (chairman), WALTER RamMBERG, H. S. RAPPLEYE, J. A. Stevenson, F. M. Dreranporr Committee on Membership.......... E. H. Waker (chairman), M.S. Anprerson, R. E BLACKWELDER, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. Hansen, D. B. Jones, Dorotuy Nickerson, F. A. Smita, Hernz Specut, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings......... MARGARET PITTMAN (chairman), NoRMAN BEKKEDAHL, W. R. CuHapuine, D. J. Davis, F. B. Scunerz, H. W. WELLS Committee on Monographs: Rowantany 19525 sess s cent eee. J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), Paun H. OBHSER PRom aU aTay PLO DSi. x2) G Hee esd cacnevsbe ad Ns IR taee eos ea rane aM eae R. W. Imuay, P. W. Oman ING) UEDA Te ae Nee ae nS Ta a 8. F. Buaxs, F. C. Kracrex Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (GroRGE P. WALTON, general chairman): For the Biological Sciences............ G. H. Coons (chairman), J. E. Fassr, JR., Myrna F. Jonus, F. W. Poos, J. R. SwALLEN For the Engineering Sciences......... R. 8. Dit (chairman), ARsHAM AMIRIKIAN, J. W. McBurney, Frank Neumann, A. H. Scorr For the Physical Sciences............. G. P. WattTon (chairman), F. 8. Brackett, G. E. Hom, C. J. Humpureys, J. H. McMILLen For Teaching of Science............ B. D. Van Evera (chairman), R. P. BARNEs, F. E. Fox, T. Koppanyr, M. H. Martin, A. T. McPHEeRson Committee on Grants-in-aid for Rescancieee eas BY ro L. KE. Yocum (chairman), F M. X. Suunivan, H. L. WarrremMorEe Committee on Policy and Planning: Lo damuininy WOE) concnsnocnbsoosooossos J. I. HorrmMan (chairman), M. A. Mason Roam anyelOOSn yee ccs Scene eds ede esis W. A. Dayton, N. R. Smite Ron JamU arya lO OAs ele eaammenlc Sean ae as H. B. Couuins, Jr., W. W. Rusry Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: ING diame NOG, sckaccccaaansoanne M. A. Mason (chairman), A. T. McPHERSON MoPanuanyel 9 boing corm ntons Sacra Kaars oir encase A. H. Cuark, F. L. MoHLer Mo ManUaryal OL pointe eee trabieaecnce eis howees J. M. CaLtpwe tu, W. L. Scamrrr Representative on Council of A. PARPARS Seectrchte ee int iant sloonie Greene ate F. M. Serziuer Committee of Auditors......J. H. Martin (chairman), N. F. Braaten, W. J. YOoUDEN Committee of Tellers. . _W. G. BRoMBACHER (chairman), A. R. Marz, Loutss M. RussBLu * Appointed by Board to fill vacancy. CONTENTS Page Erunotocy.—Linguistic history and ethnologic history in the South- west. GORGE L. TRAGER). 3 6205.6. 00sec es oe eee 341 PALEONTOLOGY.—New Western Hemisphere occurrences of fossil sela- chians:, (DAyip: Hi. IDUNKLE 44. 4...)..)..265.0-+.-- eee 344 EntTomMoLtocy.—Phylogeny and biogeography of the caddisflies of the genera Agapetus and Electragapetus (Trichoptera: Rhyacophilidae). JIWRBERT Ha JROSSA.< 62: sigeiese sca. 22196 + cee er 347 HERPETOLOGY.—Studies on the lizard family Xantusiidae, II: Geograph- ical variation in Xantusia riversiana from the Channel Islands of California. JAY M. (SAVAGH)....:2..5..2....-+<).- ee eee 357 MaAMMALOGY.—Six new mammals from the state of San Luis Potosi, Mexico.. Water W. DALQUEST.................... 7.08 361 OrniTHOLOGY.—The systematic relationships of the fox sparrows (Passe- rella iliaca) of the Wasatch Mountains, Utah, and the Great Basin. Witttm H. Beate and Roperr K. SELANDER..........).3eeeee 364 ZooLtogy.—Two new species of incrusting ctenostomatous Bryozoa from the Pacific... JonNn D.;SoULE™: . 2255. 3...5045..44 .4ne oe 367 ZooLocy.—The number of species of decapod and stomatopod Crustacea. WENNER WAY (CHACE (URas. cca bts cnet oe See Peas > 3 370 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals Vou. 41 DEcEMBER 1951 No. 12 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS CHARLES DRECHSLER WILLIAM F. FosHaG PLANT INDUSTRY STATION U. 8. NATIONAL MUSEUM BELTSVILLE, MD. J. P. E. Morrison U. 8. NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS J. C. EwERS J. I. HOFFMAN ANTHROPOLOGY CHEMISTRY C. W. SABROSKY Ob, 12, Abies ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY F. A. Cuace, Jr. Mrirtam L. Bomyarp BIOLOGY BOTANY R. K. Coox PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS “ \ \ 1 2 Q) N lA, . ~*~ . > PD NS Se ah foaNy \ JAN 11 1952. }) j PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Roya & GuiILForD AVEs. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND vorore sae Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912,at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925 Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JoURNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JoURNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to HaRALD A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per year................-.--+--++-++-e- $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available.*................ — _ Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 41, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $348.50. Monoerapu No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’”’ by Herbert Friedmann. .$4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete......................... ..... $25.00 Single'volumes; unbound! 223. ascu ases once cae eciee ce aiess ele cin eee ee eee 2.00 Single numbers: set ke, Pe Bae ee. Capt) al 25 Missing Numbers will be Be ec without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappieyre, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, D.C. Hxchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoLumE 41 December 1951 No. 12 PETROLOGY —Thermochemistry of mineral substances, I: A thermodynamic study of the stability of jadeite. F. C. KRacrxK, K. J. Nsuvonern,! and GorpDoN BuRLEy, Geophysical Laboratory. The sodium alumino-silicate compound NaAl(Si03)2, which in its natural crystalline form is known as the mineral jadeite, has not yet been crystallized in the laboratory. All attempts to devitrify a melt of this com- position to jadeite, as well as attempts to produce the compound by more elaborate methods, have failed. The various experi- mental trials, both dry and hydrothermal, are discussed in detail, together with refer- ences in a paper by Yoder (1950). Earlier it was shown in a paper by Greig and Barth (1938) that a dry melt of jadeite composition crystallizes to nepheline and albite, with a solidus at 1068° C. and a nepheline liquidus at 1138°. It was further shown that a natural jadeite from Burma (U.S.N.M. no. 94803) began to melt metastably as low as 800° and yielded nepheline and melt at.1015°, with the conclusion that jadeite was unstable un- der the conditions of the experiment. Schairer and Merwin (unpublished, 1948) showed that the melt crystallizes into albite and nepheline with a liquidus at 1128° C. (Yoder, 1950, p. 319). Jadeite could conceivably be formed by the following solid-state reactions: NaAlSi,05 albite = NaAl(Si0O3). + SiO» jadeite quartz NaAISiO, nepheline + NaAlSiz0; = 2 NaAl(SiOs;). albite jadeite Reaction A Reaction B 1 Visiting investigator of the Carnegie Institu- tion of Washington associated with the staff of the Geophysical Laboratory. Member of staff of the Geological Survey of Finland. Present address, Department of Geology, University of Helsinki, Helsinki, Finland. Reaction D NaAIlSiO; nepheline + SiO» = NaAl(SiO3;)o quartz jadeite In all three of these reactions, advance from left to right, as written, would proceed with a decrease in volume, and hence would be favored by increase of pressure. However, experiments at pressures up to 3,000 bars were not successful in producing jadeite. It will be shown below that reaction A tends to proceed in the reverse direction, from right to left, at ordinary temperature and pres- sure, but becomes favored in the forward direction (left to right) by the application of high pressure, while reactions B and D tend to advance from left to right at all pressures at 25° C. in the direction of producing jadeite. Deductions based on reaction B have led to establishing in the minds of petrologists the hypothesis that jadeite is a mineral formed under high pressures without the adequate realization that (a) even in a highly favorable ease the application of high pressure pro- duces only a relatively small contribution to the affinity of the process, as measured by the decrease in the free energy for the re- action; and (b) although the progress of a reaction may be favored by a decrease in the free energy, the advance may be hampered by the existence of passive resistances to change, more specifically, of high energy barriers (insufficient energies of activation) to such an extent that no advance may be possible. Such factors especially play a large role in reactions of silicates, as is well known. The influence of the kinetic factors men- tioned has been clearly discussed in a recent. text on petrology (Turner and Verhoogen, 373 JAN 3 195% O74 1951) to which reference may be made for the literature on the subject. The above observations make clear the existence of a need for a thermodynamic study of reactions by which jadeite could be formed. It is the purpose of this paper to present the results of a study leading to the evaluation of the free energy changes for the reactions mentioned, A, B, and D, as well as for a fourth reaction C NaAlSiO, + 2 SiO. = NaAISi;0s, nepheline quartz albite Reaction C with the aim of establishing the possibility of the formation of jadeite in the absence of passive resistances to change, under the standard thermochemical conditions of 25°C. and atmospheric pressure. Included are con- siderations dealing with the influence of high pressure on the free energy changes, founda- tions for which were laid by the measure- ments of Yoder and Weir (1951), who, how- ever, considered the effect of pressure on the formation of jadeite solely by reaction B. The four reactions are interrelated as follows: Reaction C = Reaction B — 2 Reactions A Reaction D = Reaction B — Reaction A These interrelations will be considered in some detail in a later section. It is appropri- ate to mention that the discussions of the four reactions are confined throughout to the solid phase reactions, wherein the passive resistances to change play a preponderant role. It is well known that no difficulties arise in the preparation of homogeneous melts of the composition of any of constit- uents of these reactions nor in the mixing of such melts to produce melts of intermedi- ate composition. Difficulties are, however, encountered in the crystallization of such melts to produce the crystalline compounds, not only in the case of jadeite, as indicated, but with albite and quartz as well. The high energy barriers which are effective in delay- ing the crystallization of the melts are com- pounded in solid-phase reactions, and hence it is plausible to expect that the rate of reaction in such systems as are here con- sidered would be exceptionally low. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, VOL. 41, No. 12 OUTLINE OF THE THERMODYNAMIC TREATMENT For reactions at constant temperature and pressure, combination of the first and second laws of thermodynamies yields as the funda- mental criterion for equilibrium in a chemi- cal reaction the condition that a function of state of the system called the free energy, F, in the nomenclature of Lewis and Randall (1923), be at a minimum. According to the adopted conventions a reaction not at equi- librium may tend to advance toward equilibrium with a decrease in the free energy. The quantity F is defined as PISO = WS S77 = IS (1) where # is the internal energy, V the vol- ume, S the entropy, and P and 7’ the ab- solute pressure and temperature, respec- tively. The quantity H, called the heat content or enthalpy, is also a function of state of the system, like F, #, and S. Other definitions of F are employed for chemical systems to relate changes in F’ to the equi- librium constant of a reaction, or to the electromotive force of a galvanic cell in which the reaction may occur. For the present discussion other such definitions are not found to be suitable. At constant temperature and pressure, the change in the standard free energy of a reac- tion, 1.e., AF’°, for a reaction in which all the constituents are in their standard states (Rossini, 1951), is given by AF°® = AH® — TAS” (2) where A signifies a finite Increment in the value of the quantity to which it is applied. According to (2), AF° may be evaluated from the separate measurements of AH® and AS°. AH* represents the quantity of heat which . would be absorbed per mole of reaction if the reaction occurred at constant tempera- ture and pressure in a calorimeter. Since none of the reactions considered will advance at an appreciable rate, a resort 1s made to dissolving each of the reaction constituents in a suitable common solvent, which in this case 1s hydrofluoric acid of 20.0 percent DECEMBER 1951 strength, and measuring the heat of reaction for each of the solution reactions. AH® is then determined by a conventional com- bination of the separate thermochemical processes in accordance with the law of Hess. The entropy change AS®° is evaluated through application of the third law of ther- modynamics to the low temperature heat capacities measured for each of the reaction constituents. The methods of evaluation are outlined by Kelley (1950). THE CALORIMETER AND METHODS OF MEASUREMENT A solution calorimeter designed for use at temperatures near 75° C. with hydrofluoric and other strong acids has been described by Torgeson and Sahama (1948). The calo- rimeter used in this investigation is of sim- ilar construction except for certain details. It is shown in Fig. 1, and a preliminary description of it with photographs of the parts has been given by Adams (1947, 1948, 1949). The calorimetric assembly is im- mersed in oil in a thermostatic bath to the level indicated at UU. The thermostatic bath is held at a temperature near 75° C. with a sensitivity of ca. + 0.02°. It is con- trolled by a “metastatic” mercury thermo- regulator; the exact value of the mean bath temperature depends on the setting of the particular thermoregulator in use at any given time. During the course of this study the mean temperature of the bath was 74.7°. The gold calorimeter vessel K of about 900 ml capacity is filled with 760 ml of 20.0 percent (by weight) reagent grade hydro- fluoric acid, which is obtained by dilution of 48 per cent acid as received from the supplier in plastic bottles. All the acid used in the measurements reported here came from the same lot and was analyzed from time to time by titration with standard NaOH. The calorimeter vessel has four chim- neys in its cover, one of which serves for dropping in samples through a bakelite tube, not shown in the diagram, and the other three for holding the stirrer CL and the resistance thermometer and _ calibrating ‘heater, M and N, contained in the protect- ing gold wells F and G. The resistance thermometer and the cali- brating heater M and N are wound on thin- KRACEK ET AL.: THERMOCHEMISTRY OF MINERAL SUBSTANCES 379 walled, hollow copper spools, which fit their protecting wells F and G very closely. Good thermal contact is secured by filling the intervening annular space with vacuum pump oil. One advantage of separate loca- tions for the two coils is that the tempera- ture of the calorimeter may be observed while the calibrating current is turned on. The resistance thermometer is a coil of enameled and single silk-covered B. «& S. gauge no. 40 copper wire. The calibrating heateris wound of double silk-covered B. & 8. gauge no. 35 manganin wire. Both coils are adjusted to have resistances of ca. 100 ohms at the operating temperature. The calorim- eter stirrer housing is made of Teflon; the A Y B ¢ Han D Ba N E Sie | F Se G ‘onl eid I H Be |= J =} | f | —— |] K EH =|= L ee | M = | aa || N Pao 4 | YS a | | 4 cred Fie. 1.—A solution calorimeter for use with hydrofluoric acid. A, B, leads from the resistance thermometer and calibrating heater; C, stirrer assembly; D, EK, chimneys in the cover of the calorimeter jacket; F, G, protecting gold wells for the measuring instruments; H, calorimeter jacket; I, centering supports (three) for the ealor- imeter and radiation shield; J, radiation shield; K, gold calorimeter vessel; L, stirrer propeller shaft; M, N, resistance thermometer and calibrating heater; U, U, level of immersion in thermostat bath filled with oil; O, insulating support for calorimeter and shield. 376 shaft C rotates on two ball bearings as indicated and supports at its lower end the platinum propeller L by means of a Teflon coupling, which serves to block heat con- duction. Measurements with the resistance ther- mometer are made by means of a constant current ‘‘fixed arm’ Wheatstone bridge cir- cuit connected to a potentiometer for meas- uring the e.m.f. unbalance of the bridge. The bridge has two very nearly equal ratio arms of 2000 ohms each and a third arm adjustable in steps of 0.1 ohm; the ther- mometer is connected as the fourth arm with current and compensating leads. An accurate plug-type resistance box, made by Otto Wolff, Berlin, was used for the bridge arms. Provision is made in the connections for observations in either the N or R posi- tion, according to the code of the Mueller resistance thermometer bridges. The current through the bridge is maintained at 0.004 amp. with a sensitivity approaching 0.001 per cent. In practice the adjustable arm is pre-set at a resistance of ca. 0.3 ohms lower than the resistance of the thermometer at the temperature at which the cooling rate of the calorimeter is zero. This is done in order that the e.m.f. unbalance of the bridge be always positive in a selected direction, and that it be reasonably small (usually less than 1000 uv [uv = microvolts]). Unbalanced e.m.f.’s of this order of magnitude are cal- culated to be a linear function of the tem- perature difference to within 2 parts in 100,000, which is quite adequate since the calorimetric rises in the solution experiments have been usually less than 500 uv. With a particular thermometer coil 1° temperature difference corresponded to 634 uv in the bridge-unbalance e.m_f. The electrical energy for calibration is supplied to the calorimeter at a rate which is comparable with the rate of generation of heat by the dissolving samples. The calibrat- ing current is determined by measuring the potential drop across the terminals of a 0.1 ohm standard resistor in a circuit arrange- ment recommended by White (1910). In our set-up this involves shunting the heater coil by a series combination of a 10-ohm stand- ard resistor and an accurate resistance box of 10,000-ohm range adjustable in steps of JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, VOL. 41, No. 12 0.1 ohm. By means of this circuit a known fraction of the potential drop through the heater may be measured, and thereby the resistance of the heater determined at the calorimeter temperature while the heater is carrying current. Energy input times in eal- ibration were measured by reference to the time-signal clock of this Laboratory, with the energizing switch operated manually. A calibration is performed before or after each heat of solution experiment. A White double potentiometer of 100,000 uv range is used for the potential measure- ments. This is carefully shielded against electrical leakage, which would produce sig- nificant errors in the measurements. The potentiometer is calibrated in international units, and is frequently standardized against a calibrated standard cell in terms of int. volts. We have for this reason retained the use of the international units in all the meas- urements and express the results in terms of the defined thermochemical calorie, 1 cal. = 4.1833 int. joules. The samples to be dissolved in the calo- rimeter are contained in gelatine capsules (size 000), weighted down for rapid immer- sion in the acid by a platinum weight at- tached to the outside by means of a platinum wire hook. The capsules after weighing are kept at room temperature in a metal-lined box provided with a sensitive thermometer. Weights of the samples are corrected to weight in vacuum. The heats of reaction are adjusted to correspond to the process Reactants (state specified, 25°) — Products (state, 74.7°), by applying corrections to the observed heat of reaction per capsule and contents (a) for the heating up of the platinum sinkers from room temperature to 74.7°, (b) for the de- parture of the capsule and contents from 25°, and (ec) for the heat of the process Gelatine (amorph., 25°) — Gelatine (HF soln., 74.7°). The heat capacity of platinum is taken as Cp = 0.032 cal/g and that of gelatine as 0.5 cal/g. The heat of reaction of gelatine in the above process was measured and found to be AH = 22.2 + 0.4 cal/g. The purpose of these corrections is to obtain heats of DECEMBER 1951 reaction which by the addition of thermo- chemical equations will yield values for com- bination reactions at the conventional ther- mochemical reference temperature of 25° C. The measurements of the calorimeter tem- perature were corrected for heat exchange with the surroundings by a procedure based on Newton’s law. Corrections for the impurities in the sam- ples were applied as demanded by the indi- eations of the analyses. In preparation for making corrections for plus water (water not driven off at 110°) measurements were made of the process Water (1., 25°) — Water (HF soln., 74.7°); AH = 788 +5 cal/mole and 1438 cal/mole added for the heat of melting, to result in Water (ice, 25°) — Water (HF soln., 74.7°); AH = 2226 cal/mole. The ice correction was employed on the assumption that plus water is retained in the minerals as a solid. THE MATERIALS The materials used in this study are de- scribed below: KRACEK ET AL.: THERMOCHEMISTRY OF MINERAL SUBSTANCES 377 Albite, Amelia, Va. Supplied by the U. S. National Museum, no. 5390. This could be ob- tained of good purity by hand picking. Albite, Varutrask, Sweden. Supplied by Th. G. Sahama. This contained numerous inclusions which were separated after crushing by magnetic separation, flotation, and centrifugation in heavy liquids. Jadeite, Burma. Supplied by the U.S. National Museum, no. 94829. A cylinder from the sample was used in compressibility measurements, Adams and Gibson (1929), Yoder and Weir (1951). H. KE. Merwin found the material to be practically pure jadeite. Crushed rock was puri- fied by flotation in heavy liquids by L. H. Adams for use in measurements of low temperature heat capacities and heats of solution. Jadeite, Japan. Specimen from Kotaki, Japan. USNM no. 105860. This specimen contained liquid inclusions, analcite, tremolite, and albite. Crushed rock was purified by centrifugation in Clerici solution, followed by further separations in Clerici solution with high frequency low ampli- tude agitation. Quartz, Lisbon, Md. Collected by C. N. Fenner and J. W. Greig. Crushed and treated with hydrochloric acid by General Chemical Co. Residue of 0.03 percent after evaporation with HF + HSOsz. TaBLe 1.—RESULTS OF CHEMICAL ANALYSES OF THE MATERIALS + Results of spectroscopic analysis in terms of the elements. Material | Albite Albite 5 | Jadeite Jadeite Nepheline Varutrisk Amelia Burma Japan Synthetic Analyst* Zies Chad. Zies K. B. M. BPOnsoiaconced see e eee oe 68.76 67.84 59.51 58.96 42.42 WO: & ca sean CoE Se Ee eae 0.00 0.00 0.0) 0.00 0.01F INIKO3. so dead on DOOR DOTBE Cea e Reena 19.50 19.65 24.31 24.10 35.92 NefOne: odadee Sete b] TOU aes te eee 0.13 0.03 0.25 0.21 0.05f NEO); ooo GAN DOS DISS OIC S DENG EIEN Rts n.d 0.02 0.03 0.00 RICO) 6 abo co cSt ease Bea nea een 0.00 0.04 0.58 0.82 0.057 CHO) nosso Slebes Ree EO: Cone eect 0.13 0.00 0.77 1.12 0.05 WHO). Jade ce CUB e EE cee aE eraren 115) 11.07 14.37 14.41 21.40 IKAO): 6, Cou nO SUOCe UR ene reine 0.13 0.29 0.02 0.11 0.1F ISO", ces cncb et oo mcue aca n Boren ae neem 0.08 0.56 0.06 0.28 TiIAO odd o poduo ned ae Ode ae aR Er EononS — 0.30 — 0.02 | Other 0.02 P20s 0.01 MnO | 0.01 CrOxs ‘Wepre: adousuoSuecancesmonccoonans th 100. 26 99.80 100.03 100.03 100.00 * Names of ana!ysts indicated by abbreviations: Zies = KE. G. Zies, Geophysica! Laboratory Chad. = E. Chadbourn, University of Minnesota KS = Oleg von Knorring, University of Leeds B.M. = Bureau of Mines, analysis furnished by K. K. Kelley 378 Quartz, S.I. Probable source, Sycamore Island in Potomac River. A bottle of this was furnished by E. S. Shepherd. Residue 0.06 percent after evaporation with HF + H»S0O,. Nepheline, synthetic. Prepared by J. F. Schairer. Analyses of the purified materials are collected in Table 1. The purified materials were prepared for dissolving in the solution calorimeter by erinding for about three hours in a power erinder, using either agate or mullite mortar and pestle. The resulting impalpable powder was then elutriated in distilled water, usually three times, with 10 minutes allowed for settling of the coarser particles. The finest fraction for use was then filtered off under suction on a heavy paper in a Buechner funnel and air dried before a final drying in an oven at 120° C. The elutriated powder tends to agglomerate into tiny fragile lumps. It was found that particularly jadeite and nepheline when elutriated tend not to dis- solve smoothly in the calorimeter. In later experiments with unelutriated preparations it was found that these materials dissolved sufficiently rapidly for calorimetric deter- minations and, hence, elutriation was avoided. This helped to eliminate not only the uneven solution rates, but other troubles as well. Thus, in some of the early experi- ments, residual lumps of a material which may have been undissolved sample, but which were identified as chiolite, 5NaF- 3AlF3, were found in the calorimeter. No such precipitates were found when unelu- triated samples were used. The molecular compositions of the mate- rials were computed from the results of the analyses in the usual manner for the calcu- lation of the norm, and the observed heats of solution corrected for the heats of solution of the small amounts of impurities found in the manner indicated by Torgeson and Sa- hama (1948). MEASUREMENTS AND RESULTS The heats of reaction AH 193.16. The stand- ard heats of reaction AH 593.14. for the four chemical reactions A to D are obtained as resultants of summations of the heats of reaction of the individual solution reactions presented in skeleton form in Table 2. Con- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, VOL. 41, No. 12 ventionally, they represent heats of the for- mation reaction of the products on the right from the reactants on the left of the reaction as written. Thus, for reaction B, AH°s9s 16 represents the heat of formation of two moles of jadeite from one mole of nepheline plus one mole of albite, the heats of formation of which are taken as zero. Heats of forma- tion from the elements are derivable from these heat values by addition of the heats of formation of the reactants from the ele- ments. Measurements are in progress which will permit such computations to be made. The reader may be reminded that solution reactions are destruction reactions for the constituents dissolved and hence that, in order to evaluate heats of formation of reac- tions A to D as indicated in the second part of Table 2, the summations must be per- formed as there outlined; that is, by sub- tracting the sum of the heats of solution of the products on the right from the sum of those of the reactants on the left of the chemical equation as written. For other ex- amples, see Torgeson and Sahama (1948) and King (1951). The uncertainties are stated in terms of the standard deviation according to the rec- ommendations of Rossin. and Deming (1939). Attention may be directed to the two values given for the heat of solution of Japanese jadeite. These represent values for the material ground in agate in the one ease, and ground in mullite in the other. A value for the average of the two is given with its consequent very great uncertainty. It is possible that the two individual values represent jadeite made impure by the grind- ing; however, the loss of weight of the mor- tars and pestles was not determinable, and no reasonable computation could be made to allow for the silica and mullite presuma- bly introduced as impurities. Hence only the average value is used in the computations. The heat of solution value obtained for S. I. quartz, —33,300 + 40 cal/mole in 20.0 percent HF acid at 74.7°, may be compared with values for quartz obtained recently by others. Torgeson and Sahama (1948) ob- tained —33,000 + 20 cal/mole in 20.1 per- cent HF acid at 73.7°; King (1951) got — 33,290 + 80 at 73.7° and —32,810 + 90: at 50° in 20.1 percent HF acid; and Sahama. DECEMBER 1951 and Neuvonen (1951), —33,240 + 50 in 20.1 percent acid at 75.1°. Our value for quartz, Lisbon, Md., is —33,130 + 30 cal/mole in 20.0 percent acid at 74.7°. The difference in the values for the Lisbon and the 8S. I. quartz is apparently a characteristic of the substances, just as differences are found for the two albites and the two Jadeites, all after correction for impurities. The individual heat of reaction values, AH 59s 16, for the four reactions A to D, ob- tained by combinations of the thermochem- ical equations (1) to (4) of Table 2, are given in the first column of Table 4. The entropies—The values of the entro- pies S°93.16 of the four materials for this problem were determined from measure- ments of the low temperature heat capacities at the Pacific Station of the Bureau of Mines by Kelley and Todd, who will publish the detailed measurements. We are permitted to KRACEK ET AL.: THERMOCHEMISTRY OF MINERAL SUBSTANCES BY Ay) use the results through the courtesy of Dr. Kelley. The data and their resultants for the reactions A to D are given in Table 3. The free energy changes.—Combinations of the heat of reaction values AH°593 16 with the corresponding — 7AS°s95 16 values from Tables 3 and 4 according to the thermody- namic relation (2) yield the values of the free energy changes AF'°s93 15 for the reac- tions A to D as given in the last column of Table 4. Because of the smallness of the resultant heats of reaction for all of the reactions in question and the rapid accumu- lation of thermochemical errors, the uncer- tainty is In some cases greater than the net value of the heat of reaction AH°293 16. Nevertheless, it appears clear that within the relatively large error the combinations of the heat and entropy terms result in free energy decreases for reactions B, C, and D, and in an increase for reaction A. The re- TaBLE 2.—HeEaTs OF REACTION OF THE MATERIALS STUDIED NEAGIOD neuer (1) NaAISi;Os (c, 25°) + 22HF (soln., 74.7°) > NaF (soln., 74.7°) Albite -+ AIF; (soln., 74.7°) + 3H2SiF’s (soln., 74.7°) + 8H2O (soln., 74.7°) Amelia —149.79 0.11 Varu. —148.12 0.21 (2) NaAlSiOs (c, 25°) + 10HF (soln., 74.7°) = NaF (soln., 74.7°) + AIFs (soln., 74.7°) Nepheline -+- H2Sil’s (soln., 74.7°) + 4H2O (soln., 74.7°) synthetic = 87.33 0.21 (3) NaAl(SiOs)2 (¢, 25°) + 16HF (soln., 74.7°) = NaF (soln., 74.7°) Jadeite -+ AIF; (soln., 74.7°) + 2He2SiFs (soln., 74.7°) + 6H2O (soln., 74.7°) Burma —114.96 0.35 Japan, ground in agate —114.35 0.09 Japan, ground in mullite —115.93 0.17 Japan, av. —115.14 0.79 (4) SiOz (e, 25°) + 6HF (soln., 74.7°) = HeSiFs (soln., 74.7° i Quartz Lisbon, Md. —33.130 0.030 -+ 2H20 (soln., 74.7°) S.I. — 33.300 0.040 Reaction A NaAlSi;Os (c, 25°) = SiOz (c, 25°) + NaAl(SiOs)2 (¢, 25°) Albite quartz jadeite AH, = AH, — AH; — AH, Reaction B NaAlSisOs(e, 25°) + NaAlSiOu(c, 25°) = 2NaAl(SiOs)o(e, 25°) Albite nepheline jadeite AH, = AM; + AH2 — 2AH: Reaction C NaAlSiO,(c, 25°) + 2SiO2(c, 25°) = NaAlSisOs(e, 25°) Nepheline quartz albite AHoc = AH2 + 2AHy— AH, Reaction D NaAlSiO,(e, 25°) + SiOx(e, 25°) = NaAl(SiOs)e(c, 25°) quartz jadeite AH p = AH2 + AHs — AH; Nepheline 380 TaBLE 38.—ENTROPIES Data supplied by K. K. Kelley Material S°o9s.16 eu/mole NaAISizOs (albite, Varutriisk) 49.2 +0.3 NaAISiOxs (nepheline, synthetic) 29.1 =+0.2 NaAl(SiOs)» Gadeite, Burma) 31.8 +0.2 SiOz (quartz) 10.0) 0.1 Reaction AS°038.16 A. NaAlSisOs = NaAl(SiOs)z + SiOz —7.4 +0.4 B. NaAISiOs + NaAlSisOs = 2NaAl(SiOs)e —147 +0.5 C. NaAISiOs + 2SiOs = NaAlSisOs 0.1 +0.4 D. NaAlSiO.s + Side = NaAl(SiOs)2 —7.3 +0.3 sults signify that in the absence of passive resistances to change, reactions B, C, and D would advance as written, from left to right, whereas reaction A would advance in the opposite direction, from right to left, and would result in combining jadeite and quartz to form albite. The decrease in free energy for reaction C is in good accord with petrological deduction from systems studied at higher tempera- tures, and also with field evidence in nature, where nepheline and quartz appear not to be found in intimate association. INFLUENCE OF PRESSURE ON AF For an isothermal reaction the influence of a change in pressure on the change in the free energy of reaction is given by dAF 7 = AVdPr (3) where the subscript 7 denotes constancy of temperature. The equation (3) can be inte- grated if the volumes of the reaction constit- uents are known as functions of pressure. For reaction B the data on jadeite, nephe- line, and albite have been secured and evalu- ated by Yoder and Weir (1951) who in- cluded in their discussion the effect of thermal expansion in addition to that of compressibility. For the other three reac- tions, A, C, and D, discussed in this paper, there are needed, in addition, data for quartz, which are already available in the literature. The density of quartz at 25° may be taken as 2.647 g/cm* from the work of Johnston and Adams (1912). From the data on the compressibility of quartz the vol- ume compression at 20°, AV/Vo = —2.70 X 10-§P + 20.4 X 10-”P? as evalu- ated by Birch (1942) for pressure P in bars JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, VOL. 41, No. 12 from the measurements of Adams and Wil- liamson (1923). Accordingly, Vo5° = 22.69 em’/mole and the molar volume at 25° and the pressure P bars is Vp = 22.69 —0.613 < 10“P + 0.463 < 10m9R2%em?/ mole. From this datum and the data of Yoder and Weir for jadeite, nepheline, and albite, converted to express P in bars in- stead of atm, we obtain the following volume changes for reactions A, B, C, and D: AVa = — 17.28 + 1.083 XK 10-42 — 180 X< We-wr” (4) AVz = —33.66 + 2.369 X 10-4P — 278 X 102R2 (5) AVc = + 0.90 + 0.200 x 10-4P ae Ol XK IGP (6) AVp = —16.38 + 1.283 & 10-4P == Wists) << Ores (7) | and the corresponding free energy changes in thermochemical calories at 25° and at the pressure P in bars: AF, = AFo4 — 0.4130P + 1.294 X 107*P? — 15.1 K 1054P3 (8) AFz = AFog — 0.8045P Sp Asse >< MOO — 2 < O-Pe (9) AF¢ = AFoc + 0.0215P + 0.239 10°§P2 + 8.1 X 10°2P3 (10) AFp = AFop — 0.3915P + 1.53 X 10°§P2 — 7.0 x 10 °2P3 (11) where the AFf’o> terms, the constants of inte- gration, are the free energy changes AF'°s93 16 at the pressure of 1 atm (effectively zero pressure in considering effects of high pres- sures) given in the last column of Table 4 for the different reactions. It will be noted that the AF for reactions B and D, already negative at 1 atm, will become more negative with the application of high pressures. Reaction C, which is not directly concerned with the stability rela- tions of jadeite, is of interest in that its AF is almost uninfluenced by pressure. For reaction A, AF'4, which is positive at | atm, becomes negative at pressures ranging from ca. 1600 to ca. 6000 bars, depending upon the value chosen at 1 atm. This suggests the possibility that Japanese jadeite, often found in association with quartz, may have been formed at depth, but does not agree with field evidence, according to which Jap- anese jadeite may be a hydrothermal prod- uct, in which case depth is not critical (Yoder, 1951, personal communication). DECEMBER 19951 INFLUENCE OF TEMPERATURE ON AF For an isobaric process the influence of a change in temperature on the change in the free energy for a reaction is given by d(AFp/T) = — (AH/T?)dTp (12) where the subscript P denotes constant pres- sure. The equation (12) can be integrated if the heat contents of the reaction constit- uents are known at different temperatures. For the reactions studied here only data on albite and quartz are available (Kelley, 1949) and hence the evaluation of the AF’s as KRACEK ET AL.: THERMOCHEMISTRY OF MINERAL SUBSTANCES 381 functions of temperature can not yet be made. It is planned to make the needed measurements on jadeite and nepheline in the near future. DISCUSSION The data presented in this paper lead to the conclusion that under favorable kinetic conditions—that is, in the absence of passive resistances to change—jadeite could be formed at 25° C. and atmospheric pressure by either reaction B or D. In nature, an exact ratio of the reactants such as is de- Taste 4.—Mouau Heats or Reaction, Enrropy, AND Free ENrrRGyY CHances* AF 598.16 = AFT °098.16 — 298.16 AS °098.16 A Ab = Jd + Qu kcal/reaction Ab Jd | Qu AH ° 598.16 —TAS° 298.16 AF “193.16 Var Bu S.I. 0.14 + 0.41 2.21 + 0.11 2.35 + 0.42 Var Jp av Sele 0.32 + 0.83 2.214 0.11 2.53 + 0.83 Am Bu S.I. —1.53 + 0.37 2.21 + 0.11 0.68 + 0.39 Am Jp av S.I. —1.35 + 0.81 2.21 + 0.11 0.86 + 0.81 B Ab + Ne = 2Jd Ab Ne Jd Var synth Bu —5.53 + 0.43 4.38 + 0.15 —1.15 + 0.45 Var synth Jp av —5.17 + 1.61 4.38 + 0.15 —0.79 + 1.62 Am synth Bu —7.20 + 0.41 4.38 + 0.15 —2.82 + 0.43 Am synth Jp av —6.84 + 1.60 4.38 + 0.15 —2.46 + 1.62 Cc Ne + 2Qu = Ab Ne Qu Ab synth S.I. Var —5.81 + 0.30 —0.03 + 0.15 —5.84 + 0.34 synth S.L. Am —4.14 + 0.24 —0.03 + 0.15 —4.17 + 0.29 D Ne + Qu = Jd Ne Qu Jd synth S.I. Bu —5.67 + 0.41 2.18 + 0.09 —3.49 + 0.41 synth Se Jp av —5.49 + 0.82 2.18 + 0.09 —3.31 + 0.82 * Abbreviations used: Ab Am = Albite, Amelia, Va. Var = Albite, Varutriisk, Sweden Jd Bu = Jadeite, Burma Jp .v = Jadeite, Japan, average value Ne synth = Nepheline, synthetic QuS.I. = Quartz, S.I. 382 manded by D would not likely obtain, and it may be instructive to consider a more de- tailed analysis of the possibilities. The free energy decreases for the three reactions B, C, and D range in the order —AFc > —AFp > —AFz according to Table 4. There- fore, in the absence of passive resistances to change, reaction C would occur first in a reaction mixture of nepheline and quartz. This reaction would continue until one of the reactants was used up. If nepheline were exhausted first, the reaction would stop with albite and unused quartz remaining behind. The only possibility for further reaction now would be reaction A, but since AF’°, is posi- tive at 25° and 1 atm, no further reaction would occur at atmospheric pressure. If, on the other hand, quartz were exhausted first, reaction C would come to a stop with albite and the unused nepheline remaining behind, and this mixture would react by reaction B to produce jadeite until finally the nepheline or albite was exhausted. At the end the residue would contain jadeite and albite or quartz, or jadeite and nepheline, depending upon whether the original molar ratio of quartz to nepheline was greater than | or less than 1, respectively. These reactions as outlined would go in the sequence: C fol- lowed by B. If for some reason reaction C were hindered, but not reaction D, the prod- uct of reaction D would be jadeite and un- used quartz for any molar ratio of quartz to nepheline in excess of 1, and jadeite with unused nepheline for a ratio of less than 1. In the case of both reaction B and D, the tendency to form jadeite would be increased by the application of high pressure, the cor- responding changes in the free energy being represented by equations (9) and (11). High pressure, likewise, would favor the advance of reaction A from left to rght, according to equation (8). For this reaction AF’, is positive at 25° and | atm, and changes sign to become negative at pressures of ca. 1,600 bars to ca. 6,000 bars, depending upon the particular materials which are reacting. At pressures higher than these a tendency would accordingly exist to dissociate albite and to form jadeite and quartz. Because of the interrelations among the four reactions in question, reaction A could not occur at any pressure in the presence of nepheline in the reaction mixture. It will be noted from equa- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, VoL. 41, No. 12 tions (8), (9), and (11) that even in the most favorable case, that of reaction B, pressure produces only a small change in the free energy of the reaction, in this case the change being roughly —0.8 kcal/mole per 1000 bars. As was mentioned previously, reaction C is almost uninfluenced by pres- sure, the small effect, as represented by equation (10) being to favor the reverse reaction. The reactions investigated in this study present an unusually severe test of thermo- chemical data in that the net heats of reac- tion and the corresponding free energy changes are small numbers, values of which in many instances are comparable with the accumulated errors of the summations of the heats of solution from which they are derived. The net result of this study may be sum- marized in the statement that the formation of jadeite is thermodynamically feasible at. 25° C. without the application of pressure. While it is true that pressure favors the process, its effect in any case is relatively small. The failure to produce jadeite in the laboratory cannot accordingly be ascribed to unfavorable energy relations, but must be due rather to non-thermodynamic fac- tors, such as we have loosely termed passive resistances to change, and the problem of synthesis of jadeite becomes again essentially a problem in reaction kinetics of the solid state. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS The writers wish to acknowledge the sup- port and encouragement which Dr. L. H. Adams, director of the Geophysical Labora- tory, has given to this work, and the kind cooperation of Dr. K. K. Kelley and Dr. 8. S. Todd, both of the Pacific Station of the Bureau of Mines, especially their permission to quote the entropy values given in this paper. They also wish to thank Dr. J. F. Schairer for preparing the sample of syn- thetic nepheline in sufficiently large quantity to be used in low temperature heat capacity work as well as for the heats of solution reported here; Dr. H. 8. Yoder, especially for critically reading the paper, and for his pertinent and helpful comments; I. Michael, formerly of this Laboratory, for making some of the measurements; Dr. Th. G. Sahama, of DECEMBER 1951 the University of Helsinki, for help in assem- bling and purifying some of the materials; and M. R. Vollmer, instrument maker, for his careful construction of the various parts of the calorimetric apparatus. REFERENCES Avams, L. H. Annual report of the director of the Geophysical Laboratory. Carnegie Inst. Wash- ington Yearbook 47: 27; 48: 29; 49: 27. 1947, 1948, 1949. ——— and Grsson, R. E. The elastic properties of certain basic rocks and of their constituent minerals. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sei. 15: 713-724. 1929. ——— and Wiuiramson, B. D. The compressibility of minerals and rocks at high pressures. Journ. Franklin Inst. 195: 475-529. 1923. Bireu, F. Handbook of physical constants. Spec. Pap. Geol. Soc. Amer. 36: 55. 1942. Greic, J. W., and Barty, T. F. W. The system i NasO-Alb03;-2Si0. (nephelite, carnegieite)— © NavO-Al,0;-6SiO2 (albite) Amer. Jour. Sci. * 35-A: 93-112. 1938. JOHNSTON, J., and Apams, L. H. On the densiiy of solid substances with special reference to perma- nent changes produced by high pressures. Journ. Amer. Chem. Soc. 34: 563-584. 1912. Kewiey, K. K.: Contributions to the data on the- orelical metallurgy. X. High temperature heat content, heat capacity and entropy data for inorganic compounds. Bur. Mines Bull. 476. 1949. BIGELOW AND SCHROEDER: THREE NEW SKATES 383 Contributions to the data on theoretical metallurgy. XI. Entropies of inorganic sub- stances. Bur. Mines Bull. 477. 1950. Kine, E. G.: Heats of formation of crystalline cal- cium orthosilicate, tricalcium silicate and zinc orthosilicate. Journ. Amer. Chem. Soc. 73: 656-658. 1951. Lewis, G. N., and Ranpaun, M. Thermodynamics and the free energy of chemical substances. New York, 1928. Rossini, F. D. Chemical thermodynamics. New York, 1950. (Pp. 3, 249.) —— and Demine, W. E. The assignment of uncertainties to the data of chemistry and physics, with specific recommendations for thermochemistry. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 29: 416-440. 1939. Sanama, Tu. G., Neuvonen, K. J. Personal com- munication. 1951. Toraerson, D. R., and Sanama, Tu. G. A hydro- fluoric acid solution calorimeter and the deter- mination of the heats of formation of Mg2Si0z, MgSiO; and CaSiO;. Journ. Amer. Chem. Soc. 70: 2156-2160. 1948. Turner, F. J., and VerHoocen, J. Igneous and metamorphic petrology. New York, 1951. Wuite, W. P. A test of calorimetric accuracy. Phys. Rev. 31: 686-701. Yoprer, H. 8. The jadeite problem. Amer. Journ. Sci. 248: 225-248; 312-334. 1950. ——— and WerrR, C. E. Change of free energy with pressure of the reaction nepheline + albile = 2 jadeite. Amer. Journ. Sci. 249: 683-694. 1951. ICHTHYOLOGY —Three new skates and a new chimaerid fish from the Gulf of Mexico. Henry B. BiagkLow and Wruiiam C. SCHROEDER. (Communicated by Leonard P. Schultz.) The U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service vessel Oregon, while engaged in a shrimp investi- gation in the Gulf of Mexico during the winter of 1950-51, caught a number of fishes that prove to be new to science. Stewart Springer, knowing of our interest in elasmo- branchs and holocephalids, kindly sent us the specimens which we here describe. The holotypes and some of the paratypes are in the collection of the U. S. National Mu- seum, while a representative of each species is in the collection of the Harvard Museum of Comparative Zoology. : Raja lentiginosa, n. sp. Study materval—Male, 402 mm in total length, holotype, U.S. N. M. no. 153552, from the Cam- peche Bank, lat. 22° 32’ N., long. 88° 47’ W., in 29 fathoms, Oregon station 222; also four males 1 Contribution no. 555 from the Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution. and three females from the latter region and from the northern part of the Gulf of Mexico, lat. 28° 10’ to lat. 29° 11’ N. and long. 85° 00’ to 86° 52’ W. in recorded depths of 85, 112, 165, and 305 fathoms, including Oregon stations 256, 257, 278, and 279. Distinctive characters.—Raja lentiginosa closely resembles R. garmant but may be distinguished by the color pattern of its upper surface, which is densely freckled with very small dark, lght- brown, and whitish spots (sparse in garmani and mostly grouped in a distinct rosette pattern). Description of holotype.—Proportional dimen- sions in percent of total length: Dise.—Extreme breadth 60.0; length 46.5. Snout length.—In front of orbits 9.2; in front of mouth 11.2. Orbits.—Horizontal diameter 4.2; distance be- tween 2.9. Spiracles.—Leneth 2.1; distance between 6.2. Mouth.—Breadth 6.5. 384 Exposed nostrils.—Distance between inner ends 6.0. Gill openings.—Lengths, first 2.0; third 1.9; fifth 1.2; distance between inner ends, first 13.9; fifth 7.0. First dorsal fin—Vertical height 3.0; length of base 5.6. Second dorsal fin.—Vertical height 3.0; length of base 5.5. Pelvics.—Anterior margin 12.2. Distance from tip of snout to center of cloaca 39.2; from center of cloaca to first dorsal 45.3; to tip of tail 60.8; from rear end of second dorsal base to tip of caudal 2.9. Interspace between first and second dorsals 1.2. Dise about 1.3 times as broad as long, maxi- mum angle in front of spiracles about 120°; an- terior margins weakly convex from just posterior to tip of snout to opposite orbits, thence gently concave between spiracles and outer corners which are broadly rounded; posterior margins and corners and inner margins all rounded. Axis of greatest breadth about 68 percent of distance back from tip of snout to axils of pectorals. Tail with a lateral fold, low down on each side, begin- ning abruptly posterior to axils of pelvics a dis- tance about equal to space between spiracles and continuing almost to extreme tip, width of fold about the same throughout its length; length of tail from center of cloaca to origin of first dorsal fin 1.15 times as great and to its tip 1.54 times as great as distance from center of cloaca to tip of snout. Five prominent thorns along anterior edge of orbit, one opposite inner central margin and three along posterior margin, the last opposite spiracle, with an additional thorn inward from this one; a row of thorns over margins of rostral process; prickles and very small thorns are present over anterior third of disc in advance of nuchal region and extend along outer margin rearward to about axils of pectorals; a triangular patch of about 17 thorns on shoulder region, five of which extend along median line from nuchal to scapular region; a naked area behind these for a distance about equal to distance between spiracles. A band of three to five rather regular rows of thorns along median zone of back and on tail beginning in ad- vance of axils of pectorals a distance about equal to that. from eye to snout and ending at origin of first dorsal, the lowermost row reaching nearly to tip of tail; the median row, counting from nuchal region, consisting of 33 thorns, in most cases alternating large and small; most all the thorns on tail with sharp points, directed backward; one JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, VOL. 41, No. 12 prominent thorn in space between dorsals; prick- les on dorsal fins and caudal; skin over eye naked ; a band of alar spines on outer part of each pec- toral, in one to three rows, with 19 spines in longest row. Lower surface naked except for a. small median patch of spines at extreme snout tip. Snout in front of orbits 2.2 times as long as or- bit, its length in front of mouth about 1.8 times: as great as distance between exposed nostrils. Distance between orbits about 0.7 as great as. length of orbit. Orbit twice as long as spiracle. Nasal curtain fringed; expanded posterior (outer) margins of nostrils frmged. Upper and lower jaws: rather strongly arched centrally. Teeth 23 close set, mostly in straight rows rather than in quin- cunx, with small base, circular or oval, those in median sector of mouth with slender sharp cusp pointing toward symphysis or inward toward throat, those in outer sector with triangular cusp pointing toward corner of mouth, one row of teeth at symphysis in upper jaw, pointing straight. downward. Distance between first gill openings. 2.3 times as great as distance between exposed nostrils; between fifth openings 1.2 times; first gill openings 1.6 times as long as fifth and 0.3 as: long as breadth of mouth. First and second dor- sals similar in size and shape. Interspace between dorsals 0.22 as long as base of first dorsal. Caudal membrane from rear end of base of second dorsal about half as long as base of first dorsal. Pelvics. deeply concave, strongly scalloped along anterior side of excavation but only weakly so rearward; anterior margin only 0.55 as long as distance from its own origin to rear tip of pelvic; anterior lobe slender, including four radial cartilages besides the first stout one; posterior lobe moderately convex along its forward half, thence nearly straight to its narrowly rounded tip, extending a little more than one-fifth the distance from axil of pelvics toward first dorsal; imner margin straight. Claspers reaching beyond tips of pelvics by a distance about equal to diameter of orbit. Rostral cartilage firm, extending nearly to tip of snout. Anterior pectoral rays reaching about seven-tenths the distance from front of orbits toward tip of snout. Color —Upper surface everywhere sprinkled with very small light to dark brownish and whit- ish spots, including the tail, pelvics and claspers; many groups of about 30-50 dark spots scattered everywhere, the most prominent marking being the group of spots at axil of pectoral, some of the spots on tail grouped in form of bars, there being DECEMBER 1951 BIGELOW AND SCHROEDER: THREE NEW SKATES 385 about five prominent bars; light and dark spots blotches, mostly fused, on each pectoral, and an present on anterior part of each dorsal finand on elongate blotch along the ner part of the clasp- caudal. Below whitish with a group of grayish _ ers anteriorly. COOLEY Ord ff 4 ~ = ‘“s * RecA) ware Rey Pitt peo tae Ra RE Fie. 1.—Raja lentiginosa, n.sp., male, 402 mm long, holotype (U.S.N.M. no. 153552): 1A, Upper teeth, about X 10; B, thorns on midrow of tail, about X 2; C, mouth and nostrils, about X 1.5; D, pos- terior part of tail, about The point of origin of the lower caudal fin is not evident. DECEMBER 1951 Trunk opposite dorsal spine about as high as distance from snout to posterior margin of eye; about one-half as high close behind pelvies, taper- ing evenly thence rearward and terminating in a long filament which, when complete, is about two-thirds the length of body from snout to termination of caudal fin; strongly compressed laterally posterior to head, creasingly so rear- ward, its thickness about three-quarters as great as its height opposite bases of pectoral fins and one-half as great opposite bases of pelvic fins. Skin perfectly smooth on immature specimen. Head about 21 percent of length of trunk to upper origin of caudal fin. Snout conical with blunt tip. Eye oval, sloping a little rearward, its horizontal diameter about 1.3 times its vertical diameter; distance from tip of snout to front of eye about two-fifths length of head to origin of pectorals; pupil one-half vertical diameter of eye; BIGELOW AND SCHROEDER: THREE NEW SKATES 391 height of eye about two-fifths of height of head, its length about one-third length of head to origin of pectorals. Exposed subdivision of nostrils crescen- tic on inner edge, about 13 times as long as broad, its length about 15 percent as great as length of eye; distance from its own rear edge to free edge of upper lip about as long as its own length. Width of mouth, when closed, a little less than length of eye. Lateral mucous canal with a short and abrupt wave opposite the anterior part of first dorsal fin, after which there is a long low dip opposite origin of second dorsal fin, thence continuing nearly straight along the upper part of the caudal axis, descending at origin of caudal fin to follow out along lower edge of caudal axis. Junction of cra- nial canal with aural canal somewhat more acute than a right angle; anterior course of cranial canal nearly straight, loopmg down in front of eye; D Fig. 4.—H ydrolagus alberti, n.sp., male, 275 mm long to origin of upper caudal fin, holotype (U.S.N.M. no. 153558): A, Posterior part of second dorsal fin and upper and lower caudal fins, about X 1; B, ventral view of head and body; C, mouth, with left lip folded aside to show nostrils and dental plates, about X 2; D, tip of dorsal spine, about X 2.5. 392 jugular and oral canals running downward from suborbital as a joimt canal for a short distance before separating. About 10-12 medium size pores close in front of occipital canal; about 12 pores in area bounded by suborbital and joint oral-jugular canals; about 10 large openings along angular canal to front of snout; a single row of about 15 small pores parallel to descending oval branch and continuing in front of it; about 8 or 9 large openings along anterior part of suborbital canal from its descending wave to front of snout; jugular canal continued downward onto throat as a series of short slits. Skin closely pock-marked on top and on upper sides of head abreast of mouth and nostrils and toward tip of snout, with many rounded depressions of different sizes. Anterior upper (vomerine) dental plates quad- rate, their outer anterior outlines convex, with six radial ridges. Posterior upper (palatine) plates about 2.75 times as long as anterior plates, tri- angular, the posterior margin about two-thirds as long as outer margin, surface lumpy, with four prominent ridges running longitudinally. Lower (mandibular) plates nearly as long as posterior upper plates, each plate with a double concavity and central ridge on inner surface, the cutting edge uneven, highest at center of mouth. Gill openings nearly one-half as long as distance from tip to snout to front of eye, distance across throat between their lower ends about one-half as long as eye, fold across throat strongly marked. Dorsal spine about as long as distance from tip of snout to rear edge of pupil, reaching slightly beyond apex of first dorsal fin; outer part free from first dorsal fin, the rear face with two rows of low sharp thorns pointing toward base. First dorsal fin with sharp angle at apex and straight posterior margin; its base (from origin of spine to bottom of inter-dorsal notch) nearly as long as height along anterior margin of fin. Distance between first dorsal (when slightly depressed) and first noticeable elevation of second dorsal about two-fifths as long as anterior margin of first dorsal. Second dorsal with horny rays easily distin- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, VOL. 41, No. 12 guishable, upper margin nearly straight; height at midlength about one-fifth as great as length of anterior margin of first dorsal; about equally great at rear end and slightly greater toward anterior end; posterior outline of second dorsal curving abruptly downward. No definite inter- space between second dorsal and upper origin of caudal. Caudal lanceolate, prolonged into a long filament about four-fifths as long as distance from snout to rear end of second dorsal; maximum height of caudal above axis about two-thirds height of second dorsal at posterior end; its ex- treme length to most posterior ray about 9 times as great as its height; caudal below axis about four-fifths as wide as above; the most posterior rays of both upper and lower sides of caudal terminate almost imperceptibly and about oppo- site each other; origin of lower side of caudal indefinite in position, preceded by a low fleshy ridge distinguishable forward to a pomt above and opposite beginning of last third of second dorsal fin. Pelvic fins with weakly convex ante- rior and distal margins, subangular outer corners and gradually rounded posterior (inner) corners; length of pelvics along anterior margin about as great as distance from tip of snout to middle of eye; origin posterior to axils of pectorals by a dis- tance about equal to that from tip of snout to origin of pectorals. Pectoral fins about three- tenths as long as distance from tip of snout to opposite rear part of second dorsal fin; tips, when laid back, extending just beyond the base of pelvic; anterior margin weakly convex; distal margin straight or slightly concave; apex sharp pointed; ner corner broadly rounded. Prepelvic openings present. Frontal tenaculum embedded in skin in this immature male. Claspers bifid but may develop as trifid with age. Color—Dark brownish everywhere on head and body above and below; fins somewhat darker. The female closely resembles the male but lacks the prepelvic openings and, of course, the frontal tenaculum. This species is known only from the offing of Pensacola, Fla., in a depth of 305 fathoms. DECEMBER 1951 OTEIFA: EFFECTS OF POTASSIUM NUTRITION 393 NEMATOLOGY Effects of potassium nutrition and amount of inoculum on rate of reproduction of Meloidogyne incognita. BAkir A. OrrIra, University of Maryland and U. 8. Bureau of Plant Industry, on leave from Fouad 1, Uni- versity, Giza, Egypt. (Communicated by G. Steiner.) It is well established that nutritional con- ditions of host plants have a marked in- fluence on development of various bacteria and fungi that parasitize them. As far as can be determined no information is avail- able regarding such influence on develop- ment of parasitic nematodes. Godfrey and Oliveira (1932) have shown that the length of time required for reproduction of root- knot nematodes depends on the type of host plant used. Other authors (Chitwood, 1951; Christie, 1949) have indicated that various plant species react differently to the same nematode. In this connection question was raised whether the mineral composition of the host plant affects the reproduction of the nematode infecting it. The present study at- tempts to ascertain the effect of low, medium and high concentrations of potassium in a host plant upon the production of females and egg masses of the root-knot nematode, Meloidogyne incognita (Kofoid and White, 1919) Chitwood, 1949, infecting it.t Inoculum used in this experiment was ob- tained from tomato, Lycopersicon esculentum Mill. var. Marglobe. The number of MM. incognita egg masses contained in a finely chopped sample of roots was counted under a binocular microscope; the corresponding weights of roots containing approximately 50 and 200 egg masses, which were the two levels of inoculum used throughout this ex- periment, were computed. Glazed, 3-gallon crocks were filled to one-quarter of their capacity with a coarse sand of approximately 8-mesh, on top of which a finer sand of ap- proximately 40-mesh was added so that the pot was about half full. Chopped roots con- taining the required amount of inoculum in each case were distributed evenly over the surface, after which an additional layer of the finer sand was added to raise the surface to about 2 inches from the top of the crock. Seedlings of lima bean, Phaseolus lunatus L. 1 This experiment was carried out in coopera- tion with the Division of Nematology, Bureau of Plant Industry, Soils, and Agricultural Engineer- ing, Beltsville, Md. var. Henderson that had been germinated in pure quartz sand were transplanted to the crocks when in the 3- or 4-leaf stage. Composition of nutrient solutions used in the experiment is shown in Table 1. All standard compounds used were of C.P. gerade. Immediately after transplanting, each crock received 250 ml of the nutrient solu- tion desired after which additional applica- tions of 400 to 500 ml per crock were added when needed to maintain the proper mois- ture level. Crocks were flushed weekly with tap water in order to prevent any accumula- tion of salts. The experimental design was a randomized complete block with four replications. Dur- ing the course of the experiment greenhouse temperature varied from 65° to 85°F., with an average temperature of 75°F. After 70 days the plants had reached ma- turity and roots of each plant were washed free of sand and rinsed in tap water. After drainage for a few seconds, root weights were recorded and the root-gall index was deter- mined. This index was based on the relative amount of root galling, the root system being classified as follows: 0—no evidence of gall- ing; 1—trace of galling; 2—moderate galling; 3—extensive galling; 4—severe gall- ing. The roots were then finely chopped and the number of females and egg masses in one gram of roots from each plant was counted. Results are given in Table 2. Examination TaBLeE 1.—CompositTion or NuTRIENT SoLtutTions UsEp MI stock/liter of nutrient Stock solutions SOHO Low | Medium | High | “| 7 lew 5 — WIVAl CEXONON)R: og aueocosoaaebnonace 5.0 | 5.0 | 5.0 IMI IKON O gichee ani nfusircnescntaste | @O |) SO |) aw IMU /TONIGIIN © ane eines cc asticase cise clears 5.0 0.0 | 0.0 IMIS Ce iene mretcinietsigertseeios 0.5 0.0 | 4.0 INU/ALEN AC) es pada sGn enn erat nGacae | Ao 4.5 || 0.5 IMi/TeMig S @anens ceramic siemcnrepeisicmets 2.0 | 2.0 2.0 WALA SIA OV Gn dnaios aobrentoanoonod GO ye TM hae INU/Al INAIEISEO, anvecoaugncnsocnase nw | Oe 0.9 UNV AE Qeeees QR HOTG ATIC OUAACOT NEO |p NW 1.0 * Micronutrient solution ss described by Hoagland and Snyder (1933). 394 of the data reveals that the average increase in number of females and egg masses was significant with each increase in concentra- tion of potassium. The mean effect of in- crease of inoculum increment was likewise highly significant in increasing the number of females and egg masses produced. Chitwood (1951) has shown that with cer- tain root-attacking nematodes the mean number of females and the mean number of ege masses produced per unit of inoculum were inversely proportional to the amount of inoculum. The present results confirm this (Table 2). For each of the medium and high potassium levels it was found that an in- crease of egg masses in the inoculum resulted in a corresponding significant decrease in number of mature females as well as a de- crease In number of egg masses produced on the test plants. However, in the cases of low potassium level this relationship was only shehtly evident. This indicates that the num- ber of egg masses produced per unit of inoculum may be influenced by the amount of potassium available. Reproductive activities of the nematodes may be limited more by availability of po- tassium than by amount of root space avail- able to the nematode. When potassium was low the average number of egg masses produced per unit of inoculum was five and the mean root weight per plant was 12 gm. When the level of potassium was medium the mean number of egg masses produced per unit of inoculum was 30, or six times as ereat as that of the low potassium level, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, VOL. 41, No. 12 while the average root weight was 27 gm or only slightly more than double the root weight for the low potassium level. When potassium level was high the mean number of egg masses produced per unit of inoculum was 32 and the root weight was 25 gm, indi- cating that an increase in potassium level from medium to high had little effect on the corresponding root weight and number of egg masses produced per unit inoculum. Thus while root weight increases by a factor of 2 from the low to the medium and high potassium levels the number of egg masses produced per unit inoculum increases by the factor 6. These data indicate that the maximum number of females which the roots can sup- port under the medium and high potassium levels was in the vicinity of 350 females per gram of root. When roots were infected to that extent the rate of reproduction, which was obtained by dividing the number of egg masses by the number of mature females, was about 0.5. Plants inoculated with 200 egg masses and given the high level of po- tassium did not support a greater number of females and egg masses than such plants receiving the medium level of potassium. Similar results were evident in the compari- son of root gall indices of these plants. Such failure was attributed to the effects of over- crowding. When roots were not heavily in- fected, as in the case of plants receiving 50 units of inoculum, the number of egg masses per gram of root increased with the increase in potassium level. Rate of reproduction was TaBLE 2.—RELATIONSHIP OF Potassium NutfRITION AND AMOUNT OF INOCULUM TO RATE OF REPRODUCTION OF MELOIDOGYNE INCOGNITA | Mean number of females | Mean number of egg masses | Units of | Mean c Potassium levels | ‘Wotan ropeeall Mean 00k | F per gm per : OHS '(egg masses)| index wets per gm per |per unit* per unit?) duction | | root plant jinoculum inoculum | root plant | | gm | 50 | 3.2 | 9.2 | slal7/ 1084 22 20 200 4 0.168 LH St essceante Seca I 88 15.0 | 246 3675 18 83 1229 6 0.334 eal 50 | 2.7 32.5 126 4079 82 54 1665 32 0.428 western stair ||| 200 0 23.1 346 8034 40 196 4564 28 0.568 High (| 50 3.0 21.2 | 158 3330 67 | 108 2281 45 0.688 alk 200 4.0 21.1 361 7668 39 186 3964 20 0.514 LSD* .05 A 5.8 16.9 589.0 10.6 IBec 305.8 bad, 0.173 01 U8 23.2 | 807.8 14.6 } L828 419.3 | 7.9 | 0.236 4 Females per plant divided by egg masses in inoculum. b Begg masses per plant divided by egg masses in inoculum. © Number of egg masses divided by number of mature females. 4 Teast significant differences. DECEMBER 1951 also increased significantly with an increase in the 3 potassium levels: 0.168, 0.428, and 0.688, respectively. Among plants receiving a relatively low amount of inoculum, rates of reproduction were apparently limited by the amount of potassium available, as indicated by the highly significant differences between treat- ments. On the other hand, with higher amounts of nematode inoculum an increase in potassium correspondingly increased the rate of reproduction up to a certain point between that produced by the medium and high levels of potassium. Thus it seems that rates of reproduction of nematodes among plants receiving medium and high levels of potassium are correlated with the amount of root available and with competition between nematodes for living space in the roots rather than the amount of potassium available. SUMMARY Lima-bean plants grown in sand cultures were inoculated with the root-knot nematode Meloidogyne incognita. Three nutrient treat- ments were employed supplying low, inter- mediate and high potassium concentrations. Two levels of nematode inoculum were used at rates of 50 and 200 egg masses. Results of this experiment are: 1. Differences in the number of female nematodes produced on the roots and differ- HUMES AND WILSON: DIAPTOMUS SANGUINEUS 395 ences in the rate of their oviposition can be induced by variations in potassium concen- trations. 2. Among plants receiving a relatively low amount of inoculum, rates of nematode re- production were apparently limited by the amount of potassium available. 3. In plants receiving relatively higher inoculum and treated with higher potassium concentrations, rates of reproduction are correlated with the amount of root available and with competition between nematodes for root space rather than with the amount of potassium available. REFERENCES Currwoop, B. G. Root knot nematodes—Part I: A revision of the genus Meloidogyne Goeldi, 1887. Proc. Helm. Soc. Washington 16(2): 90-104. 1949. ———. Rool-knot nematodes. IT. Quantitative rela- tions of the root-knot nematode—Meloidogyne hapla Chitwood, 1949 with tomatoes, onions and lima beans. Plant and Soil 111(B): 47-50. 1951. Cueisti£, J. R. Host-parasile relationships of the root-knot nematode, Meloidogyne spp. IIT. The nature of resistance in plants to root knot. Proc. Helm. Soc. Washington. 16(2): 104-108. 1949. Goprrey, G. H., and Oriverra, J. The develop- ment of root-knot nematode in relation to root tissues of pineapple and cowpea. Phytopath. 22(4) : 325-348. 1932. Hoacuanp, D. R., and SynprEr, W. R. Nutrition of the strawberry plant under controlled condi- tions. Proc. Amer. Soc. Hort. Sci. 30: 288-294. 1933. ZOOLOGY .—The last copepodid instar of Diaptomus sanguineus Forbes (Copepoda). ArtTuur G. Humus, Boston University, Boston, Mass., and MruprEp STRATTON Witson, Arctic Health Research Center, Anchorage, Alaska. The larval stages of Diaptomus vulgaris Schmeil have been described by Grandori (1912) and those of D. castor (Jurine) by Dietrich (1915) and Gurney (1931). Naupli and copepodids of North American diapto- mids, however, are almost entirely unknown. Ewers (1930) described the nauplius stages of D. siciloides Lilljeborg. C. B. Wilson (1932) described briefly the fifth leg of “voung’’ male and female D. leptopus Forbes and the fifth leg of ‘“‘undeveloped”’ male and female D. oregonensis Lilljeborg, both of these immature forms being apparently the last copepodid stage. It is the purpose of this paper to describe the last copepodid instar of D. sangwineus Forbes and in so doing to supply certain details of the structure of the adult that were not mentioned in Forbes’ descriptions (1876, 1882) or by later authors. Since large numbers of the last copepodid stage of both sexes may occur in plankton, along with adults of this and often other species, it is desirable to be able to correlate this imma- ture stage with its adult form. The specimens of D. sanguineus upon which the following description is based were collected from a small ice-covered pond in Weston, Mass., in February and March of 1950 and 1951. The copepods were studied entire and dissected, as stained mounts in balsam, as unstained mounts in glycerin, or 396 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, VOL. 41, No. 12 Ny My \, [| ha 7] \\ WN S\ \ eee, cake \ re SCALE 8. 0.05 MM. SSS kUFies. 1-13.—Diaptomus sanguineus Forbes: 1, Last copepodid of male, last metasomal somite, one side only; 2, adult male, last metasomal somite and genital segment; 3, last copepodid of male, right antennule; 4, adult male, right antennule; 5, last copepodid of male, left antennule; 6, adult male, proe- ess on segment 23 of right antennule; 7, last copepodid of male, antenna; 8, same, mandible; 9, same, first maxilla; 10, same, second maxilla; 11, same, maxilliped; 12, same, first swimming leg; 138, same, second swimming leg. (All figures drawn with the aid of a camera lucida. Scale A applies to Fig. 1 only, scale B to Figs. 6, 18, and 19, and scale C to the remaining figures.) DECEMBER 1951 as unstained mounts in water. The last method was most satisfactory for distin- guishing the aesthetes and other minute de- tails. Only salient points of difference be- tween the larval and adult stages are described, since many features are better shown by figures. Specimens of both sexes of copepodids and adults have been de- posited in the United States National Mu- seum. Last copepodid, male——The body propor- tions are similar to those of the adult. The average total length and average sizes of the body regions, based upon 10 copepodid and adult males, measured without pressure, are indicated in Table 1. The metasome reaches its greatest width at the level of the second somite. The posterior lateral areas of the last somite bear a pair of sensory spines, smaller in the copepodid (Fig. 1) than in the adult male (Fig. 2). The urosome con- sists of four somites, as compared to five in the adult male. The right antennule (Fig. 3) is slenderer than that of the adult male (Fig. 4), 25- segmented, and nonprehensile. It differs from that of the left side (Fig. 5) in the presence of incipient spines and depressed processes on segments 13 and 17-19. The major spines of 8 and 10-11 are represented in the cope- podid by stout setae. The right antennule of the adult is distinguished by the enlarge- ment of the usual minor spine of segment 8, and the presence of a very stout spinous cuticular process on 15. The process of seg- ment 23 is as shown in Fig. 6. The antenna of the copepodid (Fig. 7) resembles that of the adult, except that in HUMES AND WILSON: DIAPTOMUS SANGUINEUS 397 the latter the joints are somewhat more distinct and there are nine instead of eight setae on the inner side of the last endopodite podomere. The mandible of the copepodid (Fig. 8) is similar to that of the adult, except that in the palp of the latter there are nine instead of eight setae on the last endopodite podomere, and the very reduced fifth podo- mere of the exopodite is hardly separated. No important structural differences between the copepodid and adult were observed in the first maxilla (Fig. 9), second maxilla (Fig. 10), or maxilliped (Fig. 11). The first (Fig. 12), second (Fig. 13), third, and fourth swimming legs are similar in both instars, although the joints in the copepodid legs are less distinct. The cuticular lobe on the second podomere of the endopodite of the second leg occurs in both instars. The right fifth leg has a single terminal spine (Fig. 14), and the left three apical spinous processes. In specimens about to molt the form of the adult leg may be seen within the copepodid form (Fig. 15). The adult leg (Fig. 16) is distinguished by the broadened second basipodite segments, that of the right side having a small, inner, prox- imal lamella and a distinctive elongation of the distal outer corner (Fig. 17). The apical podomere of the left exopodite has prominent chitinized areas on the anterior side (Fig. 18), that at the base of the proximal process emphasizes the extended, pointed portion of the segmental body which is of systematic importance. The pads are well developed, the proximal being medially placed and bulg- ing, the distal confined largely to the poste- rior face (Fig. 19). TaBLE 1.—MEASUREMENTS (IN Microns) or Last Coprpopip AND ApULT INSTARS OF DIAPTOMUS SANGUINEUS, EacH FiGuRE REPRESENTING THE AVERAGE OF 10 SPECIMENS Body region Copepodid male potallbleme tlieer eet stise cree eect tex. sorssereienclststarestens 1367 (1287-1430) BIGAGl.0 os de Jone be CobU RE OSG OS cE OR Cente 336 X 323 DSSS TAOREKG Coon now ene oan ou ReGen enae an 130 X 323 ME CONCBUDOLACIC fe epit. aes asGiee scenciiveides: 136 X 336 MINIT GCUEROLACIGN fan cisaie Haieidinesinean seeernee sie 105 X 326 HounbihebhoraciCasesreeer aerate aenicnie uie 98 X 296 Neda, WoO RO Conesesne eeloea aa rotheod cae eer 87 X 257 SKeIa WPGC cnauonduponecdacncodsusoncoboad 64 X 196 IDLH eM oysbraytets) ego oeme mG obn UU aces bebo os 67 X 125 Secondsabdominali-cmeci dase 84 X 105 sehr cdeabdominalenrecene sence criss eases er 73 X 98 Movint bea bd omni aleewenise susetneriniiee caters: 100 X 100 Ibije: lores om oureyomcdeaea robo ceeds ac MO GE PAINS Fe cctertresscs Se ncieree sees seo e wl enesrnaser ets 105 X 48 Adult male Copepodid female Adult female 1591 (1515-1701) 1522 (1500-1558) 1730 (1689-1773) 361 X 342 353 X 356 391 X 387 143 X 347 145 X 351 157 X 406 163 X 359 158 X 372 181 X 422 123 X 352 121 X 364 140 X 409 115 X 325 120 X 333 | 132 X 380 102 X 285 107 X 289 128 X 347 71 X 226 79 X 240 | 121 X 302 of e +8 162 & 145 | 201 X 169 96 X 98 81 X 110 | 65 X 98 89 X 90 108 X 113 | UU Xwy 64 X 98 | 110 X 46 103 X 54 107 X 55 398 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, VoL. 41, No. 12 0,2 MM. SCALE C ‘\ es Fies.' 14-24.—Diaptomus sanguineus Forbes: 14, Last copepodid of male, fifth pair of legs; 15, same, fifth pair of legs about to molt; 16, adult male, fifth pair of legs; 17, same, basal segments of leg 5, turned somewhat mediad to show lamella of second basal segment in profile; 18, same, left fifth leg, anterior view; 19, same, left fifth leg, distal portion of exopodite, posterior view; 20, last copepodid of female, last metasomal somite and genital segment; 21, adult female, last metasomal somite and genital seg- ment; 22, last copepodid of female, fifth pair of legs; 23, adult female, fifth leg; 24, last copepodid of female, fifth pair of legs about to molt. DECEMBER 1951 Last copepodid, female—The outline of the body is similar to that of the male. The average measurements for both copepodid and adult females, corresponding to those given for the male, are indicated in Table 1. The pair of sensilla on each side of the last metasomal somite (Fig. 20) are smaller than the prominent ones of the adult (Fig. 21) which are highly characteristic of D. san- guineus. The urosome in both instars con- sists of three somites. The genital segment of the copepodid (Fig. 20) is simple, but that of the adult is elongate and asymmetrical (Fig. 21). The right and left antennules are similar in both instars, resembling the nonprehensile appendages of the males. The species is of the ‘‘little setaceous” type, having only one seta on segments 11 and 13-19. The antennae and mandibles differ in the two instars in the same way as in the male. The first and second maxillae, maxillipeds, and __ first through fourth legs are similar to those of the male. The fifth leg in the copepodid (Fig. 22) differs from the adult in the presence of the lateral seta of the second exopodite podo- mere. The prominent claw of the adult (Fig. 23) is weakly developed. In specimens about to molt the form of the adult female may be seen within (Fig. 24). HACSKAYLO: MYCORRHIZAE OF PINUS VIRGINIANA 399 The principal points of difference between the last copepodid and the adult stages, aside from changes in body size and propor- tions, are found in both sexes in the develop- ment of the sensilla of the last metasomal somite, in the number of terminal setae on the endopodites of the antennae and the mandibles, and in the form of the fifth legs. The male is further distinguished by the number of somites in the urosome, and by the structure of the right antennule. The female differs conspicuously in the develop- ment of the genital segment. LITERATURE CITED Dierricu, WattruEer. Die Metamorphose der freile- benden Stisswasser-Copepoden. Zeitschr. Wiss. Zool. 118: 252-324. 1915. Ewers, Leva A. The larval development of fresh- water Copepoda. Ohio State Univ., Franz Theodore Stone Lab., Contr. no. 3: 1-43. 1930. Forses, 8. A. List of Illinois Crustacea, with descriptions of new species. Bull. Illinois Mus. Nat. Hist. 1: 3-25. 1876. ——. On some Entomostraca of Lake Michigan and adjacent waters. Amer. Nat. 16: 640-649. 1882. GRANDORI, Remo. Studi sullo sviluppo larvale det copepodi pelagici. Redia 8: 360-457. 1912. GuRNEY, Roper. British fresh-water Copepoda. Ray Society, London, 1931. Wiuson, CHartes Brancu. The copepods of the Woods Hole region Massachusetts. U. 5. Nat. Mus. Bull. 158: 1-635. 1932. BOTANY —A study of the roots of Pinus virginiana in relation to certain Hymen- omycetes suspected of being mycorrhizal. EDwaRpd HAcsKAYLO, George Wash- ington University. (Communicated b The occurrence of ectotrophic mycorrhizae on Pinus virginiana Mill., a common conifer of the eastern United States, has been re- ferred to by Henry (1), Kelley (2), McComb (4), and McDougall (5), but no mention was made concerning the identity of the fungi in- volved in the relationship with this tree spe- cies. Inasmuch as fungal cultures could be obtained from sporophores collected from a stand of pine, it would be possible to deter- mine experimentally the identity of some of those species associated in the mycorrhizae of P. virginiana. This could be accomplished by subjecting seedlings germinated under aseptic conditions to simple inoculation tests using pure cultures of each fungus suspected y William W. Diehl.) because of its constant association with the pine stands. Sporophores of several Hymenomycetes were collected during the summer and fall of 1949 from two nearly pure stands of Pinus virginiana occurring in Virginia near Wash- ington, D. C. The following fungi were iden- tified: Amanita verna (Bull.) Quel., Boletus americanus Pk., Boletus sp., Clavaria pulchra Pk., Lactarius chrysorrheus Fr., L. piperatus (Scop.) Fr., -Tricholoma equestre (.) Quel., and 7. portentosum Fr. From young sporo- phores of the above, tissue fragment cultures were obtained on a 50-50 mixture of com- mercial potato dextrose and malt dextrose agars. 400 Seeds of Pinus virginiana, purchased from the Herbst Brothers Seed Co., of New York, were surface-sterilized by soaking them for five minutes in a 1:1000 aqueous solution of bichloride of mercury. Following this treat- ment, the seeds were washed four times with sterile deionized water and then placed on a 2% (Ben Venue! green plant) agar medium containing the following amounts of salts per liter: MgSO,, 1.2 gm; (NH4,)2SO,, 0.2 gm; Ca(NO3)o, 0.8 gm; KH»PO,, 0.7 gm and a trace of CuSQ,. They were germinated aseptically in Petri dishes and urine speci- men bottles in a room at approximately 24°C. not exposed to direct sunlight. In January and February, 1950, 100 pot cultures of pine seedlings were inoculated with the various fungi in culture, and 16 un- inoculated controls were prepared. The meth- ods used were similar to those described by MeArdle (3) modified as follows. Each 3- inch pot was equipped with a glass subirriga- tion tube in order to avoid washing surface contaminants into the substrate during wa- tering and applying nutrient solution to the cultures. The end of tube exposed to the alr was covered with a glass vial when not in use. The system tended to reduce the amount of moisture on the substrate surface and con- sequently was not favorable for air-borne contaminants. The nutrient solution used was the same as prescribed by McArdle (3). The pot cultures were maintained in the greenhouse where growth was generally fa- vorable. There was, however, some variation in the amount of shoot growth among the different cultures. In April 1950, examination of some of the roots showed profuse dichotomy of the short roots, this having developed in less than four months in cultures containing mycelium of Amanita verna. Dichotomy was also present to a lesser extent in the cultures containing mycelium of Lactarius piperatus and Tri- choloma portentosum, but not in the pots con- 1 Ben Venue Laboratories, Bedford, Ohio. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, vou. 41, No. 12 taining the other fungi noted above. In free- hand sections of these dichotomous roots, it was found that initials of ectotrophic my- corrhizae had developed since mantles were present. Hyphal penetration was not evident as a well-developed Hartig net. Roots of eight of the control plants were examined and neither dichotomy nor fungus association was found. The roots of seedlings that were main- tained and examined after a period of six to eight months did not appear to be growing actively during late spring and summer. There were neither mycorrhizal nor nonmy- corrhizal young roots and very few older structures that resembled mycorrhizae. High temperatures up to 46°C. noted in the green- house after April 1 may have inhibited my- corrhizal formation and root development. These results indicate that Amanita verna, Lactarius piperatus, and Tricholoma porten- losum are possibly involved in the mycorrhi- zae of Pinus virginiana. No such indications, however, were found with Boletus ameri- canus, Boletus sp., Clavaria pulchra, Lactarius chrysorrheus, and Tricholoma equestre under the conditions of the experiment. None of the roots of the control plants were found to be associated with a fungus. This work has revealed some of the problems that must be solved in future experimentation and is a forerunner of research now under way. REFERENCES (1) Henry, LeR. K. Mycorhizas of trees and shrubs. Bot. Gaz. 94: 791-800. 1933. (2) Keuitey, A. P. The variations in form of my- corrhizal short-roots of Pinus virginiana Mzill. associated with certain soil series. 10 pp. 1941. (83) McArpie, R. E. The relation of mycorrhizae to conifer seedlings. Journ. Agr. Res. 44: 287-316. 1932. (4) McComps, A. L. Mycorrhizae and phosphorous nutrition of pine seedlings in a prairie soil nursery. Iowa Agr. Exp. Stat. Res. Bull. 314: 582-612. 1943. (5) McDoueatL, W. B. Mycorhizas from North Carolina and eastern Tennessee. Amer. Journ. Bot. 15: 141-148. 1928. INDEX TO VOLUME 41 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES Anthropological Society of Washington. 307. AUTHOR AxssottT, Donaup P. Bostrichobranchus digonas, a new molgulid ascidian from Florida. 302. Axssort, R. Tucker. New stenothyrid gastropods from the Philippines (Rissoidae). 14. —and Lapp, H.S. A new brackish-water gas- tropod from Texas (Amnicolidae: Littori- dina). 335. . See also REHDER, HARALD. 22. AutarD, H. A. Dinoponera gigantea (Perty), a vicious stinging ant. 88. ArcHER, W. ANDREW. See JENKINS, ANNA E. 66. Barrscu, Paun. More urocoptid mollusks from Mexico. 146. Bayer, FREDERICK M. A revision of the nomencla- ture of the Gorgoniidae (Coelenterata: Octo- corallia), with an illustrated key to the genera. 91. . Two new primnoid corals of the subfamily Calyptrophorinae (Coelenterata: Octocoral- lia). 40. Brxue, WiiiramM H., and SevanpEerR, Roperr J. The systematic relationships of the fox spar- rows (Passerella iliaca) of the Wasatch Moun- tains, Utah, and the Great Basin. 364. BERKELEY, E. and C. A second record of the polychaetous annelid Potamethus elongatus (Treadwell). 333. BicEetow, Henry B., and ScHRoEDER, WILLIAM C. Three new skates and a new chimaerid fish from the Gulf of Mexico. 383. . A new genus and species of anacantho- batid skate from the Gulf of Mexico. 110. Brrancourt, A. A. See JENKINS, ANNA HL. 66. Buake, Doris H. New species of chrysomelid beetles of the genera Trirhabda and Disonycha. 324. Burury, Gorpon. See Kracek, F. C. 373. CampsBELL, T. N. Medicinal plants used by Choc- taw, Chickasaw, and Creek Indians in the early nineteenth century. 285. Carr, Luoyp G. K. Interesting animal foods, medicines, and omens of the eastern Indians, with comparisons to ancient European prac- tices. 229. CxHacr, FENNER A., Jr. The grass shrimps of the genus Hippolyte from the west coast of North America. 35. . The number of species of decapod and stomatopod Crustacea. 370. Causgy, Neti B. New cleidogonid millipeds (Chor- deumoidea). 78. CHALKLEY, H. W. See CoRNFIELD, JEROME. 226. Crark, Austin H. The brittle-stars of the United States Navy Antarctic Expedition 1947-48. 26. Cuarke, J. F. Garss. A new genus and species of North American Olethreutidae (Lepidoptera: Laspeyresiinae). 46. . New species of Gelechiidae from Argentina (Lepidoptera). 140. . New species of Olethreutidae from Ar- gentina. 296. Washington Academy of Sciences. 48, 115, 148, 238. INDEX Corn, Westry R. Geographical distribution of the nemerteans of the northern coast of the Gulf of Mexico as compared with those of the southern coast of Florida, with descriptions of three new species. 328. Coorrr, G. ArrHur. New brachiopods from the Lower Cambrian of Virginia. 4. and Mutr-Woop, Hreten M. Brachiopod homonyms. 195. CoRNFIELD, JEROME, and CHaLKLEy, Haroxtp W. A problem in geometric probability. 226. Curtin, Puture D. A survey of new archeological sites in central Pataz, Peru. 49. Dataquest, WALTER W. Six new mammals from the state of San Luis Potosi, Mexico. 361. DaveENpPoRT, Dresmorest. See Loomis, H. F. 270. Dexter, Raupu W. See Speck, FRANK G. 250. Drake, Cart J. New American chinch bugs (Hemiptera: Lygaeidae). 319. Dunxkir, Davin H. New Western Hemisphere occurrences of fossil selachians. 344. DuRBIN, CHARLES G., and Hongss, Raupu F. A new roundworm, Nematodirus rufaevastitatis (Nematoda: Trichostrongylidae), from do- mestic sheep, Ovis aries, in Wyoming. 179. Emerson, WiiiiAm K. A new scaphopod mollusk, Cadulus austinclarki, from the Gulf of Cali- fornia. 24. FRIEDMANN, HERBERT. Dedication [to Austin Ho- bart Clark issue). 1. GARDNER, JULIA. Two new guide fossils from the Tallahatta formation of the Southeastern States. 8. Gryc, Grorae, Parron, W. W., Jr., and Payne, T. G. Present Cretaceous stratigraphic no- menclature of northern Alaska. 159. Gwituiam, G. F. See Hann, Caper. 206. Haas, Vicror H. Disaster and disease, 277. Hackman, Ropert J. See SouecKI, Raupu S. 85. Hacskayo, Epwarp. A study of the rootsof Pinus virginiana in relation to certain Hymeno- mycetes suspected of being mycorrhizal. 399. Hanp, Capet, and Gwiuuiam, G. F. New distri- butional records for two athecate hydroids, Cordylophora lacustris and Candelabrum sp., from the west coast of North America, with revisions of their nomenclature. 206. Heyt, Pau R. The limitations of the principle of superposition, II. 149. Hosss, Horron H., Jr. A new crayfish of the genus Procambarus from Louisiana, with a key to the species of the Spiculzfer group. 272. Horrman, Ricuarp L. The diplopod family Cam- podesmidae (Polydesmida). 209. Honess, Raupu F. See DurBIN, CHARLES G. 179. Humes, Arruur G., and WrLson, Mitprep Srrar- TON. The last copepodid instar of Diatomus sanguineus Forbes (Copepoda). 395. Inte, Paun L. A new genus and species of noto- delphyoid copepod from Japan. 30. 402 JenxKINS, ANNA E., Brrancourt, A. A., SILBER- scumipT, Ix., and ArcHpR, W. ANDREW. Peter Wilhelm Lund’s pequi tree at Lagoa Santa and pilgrimages to his cemetery. 66. JOHNSTON, Francis E. The theory of group repre- sentations. 117. Kene, Hstian. New or critical Euphorbiaceae from eastern Asia. 200. Kracek, F. C., Neuvonen, K. J., and Burury, Gorpvon. Thermochemistry of mineral sub- stances, I: A thermodynamic study of the stability of jadeite. 373. KrisHNaswamy, K. Notes on the undescribed males of two species of Copepoda. 75. Lapp, H. 8. See Apsor?r, R. Tucker. 335. Luano, Grorce A. A contribution to the lichen flora of Alaska. 196. Loomis, H. F., and Davenrort, Demorestr. A luminescent new xystodesmid milliped from California. 270. MacNetrn, F. Stearns. Nucula austinclarki, n. sp., a concentrically sculptured Nucula from the Lisbon formation of Alabama. 12. Miuipr, Ropert Rusu, and Winn, Howarp Ex- Ltiorr. Additions to the known fish fauna of of Mexico: Three species and one subspecies from Sonora. 83. Mrrrinovircu, D. S. On an equation of Neményi and Truesdell. 129. Morrison, J. P. EH. Two new Western Atlantic spe- cies of pulmonate mollusks of the genus Det- racia and two old ones (family Ellobiidae). 17. Morton, C. V. A new fern of the genus Danaea from Colombia. 276. Murr-Woop, Hrven M. See Cooper, G. A. 195. NeEvuvongEn, K. J. See Kracek, F. C. 373. Nico, Davrp. A new species of glyevmerid from the Philippines. 20. . Recent species of the cyrenoid pelecypod Glossus. 142. ———. Recent species of the veneroid pelecypod Arctica. 102. Orrrra, Baxir A. Effects of potassium nutrition and amount of inoculum on rate of reproduc- tion of Meloidogyne incognita. 393. Pare, Cuester H. Information theory. 245. Parron, W. W., Jr. See Gryc, Groran. 159. Payne, T. G. See Gryc, Grorce. 159. Prrrisponr, Martan H. A new species of poly- chaete worm of the family Polynoidae from Point Barrow, Alaska. 44. PireuKa, Frank A. Race names in the Central American jay, Cyanolyca argentigula. 113. Pratt, Harry D. Ficalbia minima (Theobald) in South Indochina, with descriptions of the larva and pupa (Diptera: Culicidae). 300. ReEEDER, JOHN R. A new species of Poa from Peru. 295. Reuper, Haratp A., and Apporr, R. Tucker. Two new Recent cone shells from the Western Atlantie (Conidae). 22. Rioux, Marceu. Some medical beliefs and prac- tices of the contemporary Iroquois Long- houses of the Six Nations Reserve. 152. Ross, Hersert H. Phylogeny and biogeography of the caddisflies of the genera Agapetus and Electragapetus (Trichoptere : Rhyacophilidae). 347. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 12 Savace, Jay M. Studies on the lizard family Xantusiidae, II: Geographical variation in Xantusia riversiana from the Channel Islands of California. 357. ScHAEFFER, CLAUDE HE. Was the California condor known to the Blackfoot Indians? 181. ScumittT, W. L. [Biographical Résumé, of Austin Hobart Clark.] 3. ScHROEDER, W. C. See Bicetow, H. B. 110, 383. Scuuitz, LEONARD P., and SimOEs DE MENEZEs, Rur. A new anchovy of the genus Anchoviella from the Poti and Parnaiba Rivers of Brazil. 235. . See also WeELANDER; ARTHUR D. 107. SevaNDgER, R. K. See Benin, WiuiiAm H. 364. SILBERSCHMIDT, K. See JENKINS, ANNA HD. 66. SIusBen, Francis B. Measure for measure: Some problems and paradoxes of precision. 213. StmOrs pp Menezes, Rut. See ScHuttz, LEONARD P. 235. Sonn, I. G. Check list of salinity tolerance of post-Paleozoic fossil Ostracoda. 64. Souecki, Rate S.and Hackman, Rosert J. Addi- tional data on the Denbigh Flint Complex in northern Alaska. 85. Sour, Joun D. Two new species of incrusting ctenostomatous Bryozoa from the Pacific. 367. Speck, FRANK G., and Dextmr, Raupu W. Utiliza- tion of animals and plants by the Micmac Indians of New Brunswick. 250. Spirzpr, Lyman, Jr. The birth of stars from interstellar clouds. 309. STAINBROOK, Merrie A. Substitution for the pre- occupied name Hystricina. 196. STRIMPLE, Harrety L. New crinoids from the Pitkin of Oklahoma, 260. . New Desmoinesian crinoids. 191. . Notes on Phanocrinus cylindricus and de- scription of new species of Chester crinoids. 291. Tawapba, SHInsuN. See WaLkER, Eapertr H. 138. Timm, R. W. A new species of marine nematode, Thoracostoma magnificum, with a note on possible “pigment cell”’ nuclei of the ocelli. 331. Treron, VERNON J. See Traus, RoBert. 264. Tracer, Grorce L. Linguistic history and eth- nologic history in the Southwest. 341. Travus, Ropert, and Tipron, VERNON J. Jordan- opsylla allredi, a new genus and species of flea from Utah (Siphonaptera). 264. Waker, Hapert, and Tawapa, SHinsuN. A new species of Portulaca from Okinawa. 138. WepeEL, Watpo R. Notes on aboriginal pottery from Montana. 130. WetaNnper, ArrHur D., and ScuuitTz, LEONARD P. Chromis atripectoralis, a new damselfish from the tropical Pacific, closely related to C. caeruleus, family Pomacentridae. 107. Wetmore, ALEXANDER. Observations on the gen- era of the swans. 338. Wiuson, Mitprep Srrarron. A new subgenus of Diaptomus (Copepoda: Calanoida), includ- ing an Asiatic species and a new species from Alaska. 168. . See also Humes, ARTHUR G. 395. Winn, Howarp Exuiorr. See Mriuyr, RoBERT Rusu. 83. DECEMBER 1951 INDEX 403 SUBJECT INDEX Archeology. Additional data on the Denbigh Flint Complex in northern Alaska. RaLpn Ss. Soiecki and Ropert J. Hackman. 85. A survey of new archeological sites in central Pataz, Peru. Parure D. Curtin. 49. Notes on aboriginal pottery from Montana. Watpo R. WEDEL. 130. Astronomy. The birth of stars from interstellar clouds. Lyman Sprrzer, JR. 309. Biography. Biographical sketch and portrait of Austin Hobart Clark. 2-3. Botany. A contribution to the lichen flora of Alaska. Grorce A. Luano. 196. A new fern of the genus Danaea from Colom- bia. C. V. Morton. 276. A new species of Poa from Peru. Joun R. REEDER. 295. A new species of Portulaca from Okinawa. Ecpert H. Waker and SHinsun Ta- WwabA. 138. Pew ) A study of the roots of Pinus virgyniana 1n relation to certain Hymenomycetes sus- pected of being mycorrhizal. Epwarp Hac- SKAYLO. 399. New or critical Euphorbiaceae from eastern Asia. Hst'an Kune. 200. Peter Wilhelm Lund’s pequi tree at Lagoa Santa and pilgrimages to his cemetery. Anna BE. Jenkins, A. A. Bitancourt, K. SinperscHmipt, and W. A. ArcHER. 66. Entomology. A new genus and species of North American Olethreutidae (Lepidopter : Las- peyresiinae). J. F. GaTEs CLARKE. 45. Dinoponera gigantea (Perty), a vicious sting- ing ant. H. A. ALLARD. 88. Ficalbia minima (Theobald) in South Indo- china, with descriptions of the larva and pupa (Diptera: Culicidae). Harry D. Pratt. 300. Jordanopsylla allredi, a new genus and species of flea from Utah (Siphonaptera). RobERT Traus and VERNON J. TipTon. 264. New American chinch bugs (Hemiptera: Ly- gaeidae). Cary J. Drake. 319. New species of chrysomelid beetles of the genera Jrirhabda and Disonycha. Doris H. Buake. 324. New species of Gelechiidae from Argentina (Lepidoptera). J. F. Gares Cuarxe. 140. New species of Olethreutidae from Argentina (Lepidoptera). J. F. Gares CLARKE. 296. Phylogeny and biogeography of the caddis- flies of the genera Agapetus and Electra- gapetus (Trichoptera: Rhyacophilidae). Hersert H. Ross. 347. Ethnology. Interesting animal foods, medicines, and omens of the eastern Indians, with com- parisons to ancient European practices. Lioyp G. K. Carr. 229. Linguistic history and ethnologic history in the Southwest. Groran L. Tracmr. 341. Medicinal plants used by the Choctaw, Chick- asaw, and Creek Indians in the early nine- teenth century. T. N. CampsBewu. 285. Some medical beliefs and practices of the i contemporary Iroquois Longhouses of the Six Nations Reserve. Marcent Rioux. 152. Utilization of animals and plants by the Micmac Indians of New Brunswick. FRANK G. Speck and Raupew W. Dexter. 250. Was the California condor known to the Blackfoot Indians? CuaupE E. ScHAEFFER. 181. Geology. Present Cretaceous stratigraphic nomen- clature of northern Alaska. Grorar Gryc, W.W. Parton, Jr., and T. G. Payne. 159. Helminthology. A new roundworm, Nematodirus rufaevastitatis (Nematoda: Trichostron- gylidae), from domestic sheep, Ovis aries, in Wyoming. CHartes G. DurRBIN and Rawvpu F. Honsss. 179. Herpetology. Studies of the lizard family Xantu- siidae, II: Geographical variation in Xan- tusia riverstana from the Channel Islands of California. Jay M. Savaan. 357. Ichthyology. Additions to the known fish fauna of Mexico: Three species and one subspecies from Sonora. Roperrt RusH MiILier and Howarp Enuiorr WInN. 83. A new anchovy of the genus Anchoviella from the Poti and Parnaiba Rivers of Brazil. Lronarp P. Scnuuttrz and Rut Stm6Es DE MENEZzEs. 235. A new genus and species of anacanthobatid skate from the Gulf of Mexico. Henry B. BrarLow and WiuiramM C. ScHROEDER. 110. Chromis atripectoralis, a new damselfish from the tropical Pacific, closely related to C. caeruleus, family Pomacentridae. ARTHUR D. Weranpver and L. P. Scuutrz. 107. Three new skates and a new chimaerid fish from the Gulf of Mexico. Henry B. Brian- Low and WiuiiaAM C. SCHROEDER. 383. Malacology. A new brackish-water gastropod from Texas (Amnicolidae: Littoridina). R. T. Appottr and H. 8S. Lapp. 335. A new scaphopod mollusk, Cadulus austin- clarki, from the Gulf of California. WILLIAM K. Emprson. 24. A new species of glycymerid from the Philip- pines. Davip Nicou. 20. More new urocoptid mollusks from Mexico. Paut Bartscu. 146. New stenothyrid gastropods from the Philip- pines (Rissoidae). R. Tucker Apport. 14. Recent species of the cyrenoid pelecypod Glos- sus. Davip Nicou. 142. Recent species of the veneroid pelecypod Arctica. Davip Nrcou. 102. Two new Recent cone shells from the Western Atlantic (Conidae). Haratp A. REHDER and R. Tucker Apporr. 22. Two new Western Atlantic species of pulmo- nate mollusks of the genus Detracia and two old ones (family Ellobiidae). J. P. E. Mor- RISON. 17. Mammalogy. Six new mammals from the state of San Luis Potasi, Mexico. WauTmrR W. DaAt- Quest. 361. Mathematics. A problem in geometric probability. JEROME CorRNFIELD and Haroip W. CHAarK- LBY. 226. 404 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 41, No. 12 Mathematics. Information theory. Curster H. Pace. 25. On an equation of Neményi and Truesdell. D.S. Mrrrinovircu. 129. The theory of group representations. FRANCIS E. Jounston. 117. Medicine. Disaster and disease. V. H. Haas. 277. Nematology. Effects of potassium nutrition and amount of inoculum on rate of reproduction of Meloidogyne incognita. B. A. OTEIFA. 393. Ornithology. Observations on the genera of the swans. ALEXANDER WETMORE. 338. Race names in the Central American jay, Cy- anolyca argentigula. FRANK A. Prre Ka. 113. The systematic relationships of the fox spar- rows (Passerella iliaca) of the Wasatch Mountains, Utah, and the Great Basin. W. H. Bente and R. K. SELanper. 364. Paleontology. Brachiopod homonyms. G. ARTHUR Cooper and Hrten M. Mutr-Woop. 195. Check list of salinity tolerance of post-Paleo- zoic fossil Ostracoda. I. G. Soun. 64. New brachiopods from the Lower Cambrian of Virginia. G. ARTHUR CoopERr. 4. New crinoids from the Pitkin of Oklahoma. Harrevyt L. Srrimpie. 260. New Desmoinesian crinoids. HarreLu lL. STRIMPLE. 191. New Western Hemisphere occurrences of fossil selachians. Davip H. DuNKLE. 344. Notes on Phanocrinus cylindricus and descrip- tion of new species of Chester crinoids. HARRELL L. STRIMPLE. 291. Nucula austinclarki, n. sp., a concentrically sculptured Nucula from the Lisbon forma- tion of Alabama. F. Srrarns MacNett. 12. Substitution for the preoccupied name Hys- tricina. Merritt A. STAINBROOK. 196. Two new guide fossils from the Tallahatta formation of the Southeastern States. JULIA GARDNER. 8. Petrology. Thermochemistry of mineral sub- stances, I: A thermodynamic study of the stability of jadeite. F. C. Kracrx, K. J. NBEUVONEN, and GorpoNn BurteEy. 373. Physics. Measure for measure: Some problems and paradoxes of precision. F. B. SirsBEn, 213. The limitations of the principle of super- position: II. Paut R. Heyu. 149. Zoology. A luminescent new xystodesmid milliped from California. H. F. Loomts and DEmo- REST DAVENPORT. 270. A new crayfish of the genus Procambarus from Louisiana, with a key to the species of the Spiculifer group. H. H. Hosss, Jr. 272. Zoology. A new genus and species of notodel- phyoid copepod from Japan. Paut L. Ite. 30. A new species of marine nematode, Thora- costoma magnificum, with a note on possible “Higment cell’’? nuclei of the ocelli. R. W. Timm. 331. A new species of polychaete worm of the family Polynoidae from Point Barrow, Alaska. Martan H. Prrtrspone. 44. A new subgenus of Diaptomus (Copepoda: Calanoida), including an Asiatic species and a new species from Alaska. MILDRED StTRaArT- TON Witson. 168. A revision of the nomenclature of the Gor- gonlidae (Coelenterata: Octocorallia), vith an illustrated key to the genera. FREDERICK M. Bayer. 91. A second record of the polychaetous annelid Potamethus elongatus (Treadwell). E. and C. BERKELEY. 333. Bostrichobranchus digonas, a new mo) sulid ascidian from Florida. D. P. ABsorrt. 302. Geographical distribution of the nemerteans of the northern coast of the Gulf of Mexico as compared with those of the southern coast of Florida, with descriptions of three new species. WrsLney R. Cor. 328. New cleidogonid millipeds (Chordeumoidea). Newu B. Causey. 78. New distributional records for two athecate hydroids, Cordylophora lacustris and Cun- delabrum sp., from the west coast of North America, with revisions of their nomencla- ture. Caper Hanp and G. F. Gwriiiam 206. Notes on the undescribed males of two species of Copepoda. 8S. Kr1IsHNASWAMY. 75. The brittle-stars of the United States Navy Antarctic Expedition 1947-48. Austin H. CraRK. 26. The diplopod family Campodesmidae (Poly- desmida). RicHarp L. Horrman. 209. The grass shrimps of the genus Hippolyte from the west coast of North America. FENNER A. CHACE, JR. 35. The last copepodid instar of Diaptomus san- guineus Forbes (Copepoda). ArtHuR G. Humes and Mitprep 8S. Witson. 395. The number of species of decapod and stoma- topod Crustacea. F. A. CuHacr, JR. 370. Two new primnoid corals of the subfamily Calyptrophorinae (Coelenterata: Octocor- allia). FrepERIcK M. Bayer. 40. Two new species of incrusting ctenostomatous Bryozoa from the Pacific. J. D. SouLE. 367. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences LETRAS SUITORS ees See ee ae NatHan R. Smiru, Plant Industry Station President-elect....... An Soy Sets aeons WALTER RAMBERG, National Bureau of Standards ‘S PERIOD olkod 6 OS At ee EERE ee F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards 1 POLST AG oe eee fe Howarp 8S. Rappierye, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey URE CCIE 5 nhs p SOG See ees ee IIE: Joun A. Stevenson, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Harap A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Philosophical Society of Washington. ................--:.:.-- Epwarp U. Conpon Anthropological Society of Washington.......................-- Watpo R. WEDEL Biolovicall Society of Washington... s-eccoccscecceeceee es: senna: W@hemicaliSociety ofiWashington: ). snscaessuecc ede. dak gen eeion as JospPH J. FAHEY Bmpemolocicall society, of Washington: ys... ses. ss -se nee. FrepERIcK W. Poos National’ Geographic Society... .4-2.\s.5c2a-ine-c eens oe eels: ALEXANDER WETMORE Cealosical’Society, of Washington). 225 5---¢2-6-5s4nne soe. Lrason H. ADAMS Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... WolumbiankistonicaliSociety,2..4. 45.0 ccos ones deke oA GILBERT GROSVENOR Bovanicalli Society, of Washingtones.) afccc 44:25 sesoceueceeeesece ek E. H. WALKER Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wituram A. Dayton Washington Society of Engineers...........................5- Currrorp A. Brtrs Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers Francis M. DEFANDORF Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp S. D1Lu Helminthological Society of Washington.......................... L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Aneus M. GRIFFIN Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers....HENryY W. HEMPLE Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......... HERBERT G. DorsEY District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason Elected Members of the Board of Managers: Ie dammniny IEP Ears de Gekoeene momaetets Sarna aie eee W. F. Fosuwaa, C. L. Gazin Dh® damien; OEE cores eerreeioe one ee ere C. F. W. Mursnseck*, A. T. McPHERSON MRombamuarya 1954 ee Les tk ae Ne ase ee hs Sara E. Branoam, Mitron Harris* BOOTONOPVNGMAGETS) 2. oie ne fhe ea lee ee All the above officers plus the Senior Editor SOMLAdO MAO ULOTS ONO ASSOCUALE BIQULONS) ©) 2 sae acne dons dees so gaeat {See front cover] Executive Commitiee....N. R. SmitH (chairman), WALTER RamsBeErG, H. S. RAPPLEYE, J. A. Stevenson, F. M. Deranporr Committee on Membership.......... EE. H. Waker (chairman), M. 8. ANpErson, R. E. BLACKWELDER, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. Hanssen, D. B. Jonzs, DorotHy Nickerson, F. A. Smitu, Hetnz Specut, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings......... MARGARET PITTMAN (chairman), NoRMAN BEKKEDAHL, W. R. Cuapuine, D. J. Davis, F. B. Scuterz, H. W. Weis Committee on Monographs: pRorianwary, 1952. 5. so beck eee ee J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), Paut H. OBHSER OMAN ISS eee ea ee crete ae sacies tee EAR aguas eee tte R. W. IMnay, P. W. OMAN IRD IDOE OGY Cea eae oe can nN ene A Ene Ne S. F. Buaks, F. C. Kracex Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (GEORGE P. WALTON, general chairman): For the Biological Sciences............ G. H. Coons (chairman), J. E. Faser, JR., Myrna F. Jonss, F. W. Poos, J. R. SwaLuen For the Engineering Sciences......... R. 8S. Druu (chairman), ARSHAM AMIRIKIAN, J. W. McBurney, Frank Neumann, A. H. Scorr For the Physical Sciences............. G. P. Watron (chairman), F. ey BRACKETT, G. E. Hom, C. J. Humpureys, J. H. McMi.ien For Teaching of Science............ B. D. Van Evera (chairman), R. P. BaRNgEs, F. EH. Fox, T. Koppanyr, M. H. Martin, A. T. McPuerson Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research..................00-.. L. E. Yocum (chairman), M. X. Suutivan, H. L. WHITrEMoRE Committee on Policy and Planning: ‘ING Uevaien iia leas aes eines ato orale ae J. I. HorrmMan (chairman), M. A. Mason pRoman wary gl OO smeareaciemrAC ACT ee ee ine W. A. Dayton, N. R. SmitH ORAM aT Va QO4 Wo) Jeni as tue cl ieleonn.s con ota wate s H. B. Couns, Jr., W. W. RuBey Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: @ Ueno EW, F wnconnonsccousuode M. A. Mason (chairman), A. T. McPHERSON ‘ALG dain era PIERO Fo odo puree ance cians nen ae od eet IXG Mele CLARK, F. L. MouLer PORN Amana 9G4 se ys MGM RL ts tretta de uacteatretvall J. M. CaLpWELL, We L. Scumirt BED ESENLALIUCROTC OUNCLUO PAGE AGE AI Saree entices niet een: M. SrerzLer Committee of Auditors...... J. H. Martin (chairman), N. F. BraatEn, W. J. YOUDEN Committee of Tellers...W.G. BRoMBACHER (chairman), A. R. Merz, Lovrsr M. RussEuu * Appointed by Board to fill vacancy. CONTENTS Page Prrrotogy.—Thermochemistry of mineral substances, I: A thermo- dynamic study of the stability of jadeite. F. C. Kracnx, K. J. NEUVONENS andGorDon| BURUE Ye oe eee ee en eee 3/3 IcutHyYoLoGcy.—Three new skates and a new chimaerid fish from the Gulf of Mexico. Henry B. BicrLow and WiLiiAM C. ScHROEDER. 383 NemMAToLocy.—Hffects of potassium nutrition and amount of moculum on rate of reproduction of Meloidogyne incognita. BAkirR A. OTEIFA. 393 Zootogy.—The last copepodid instar of Diaptomus sanguineus Forbes (Copepoda). Artur G. Humes and Minprep Strarron WIiLson 395 Botany.—A study of the roots of Pinus virginiana in relation to certain Hymenomycetes suspected of being mycorrhizal. Epwarp Hac- SIRAVEE Olle. HOHE eheua. eles ewes beet ne le lok fue Rieter eke 399 INDEX: LO VOLUME! 40) f5 qe ohnnk son bee ae ote ae 401 This Journal is Indexed in the Internationa! Index to Periodicals JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOLUME 42, 1952 BOARD OF EDITORS Witiiam F. FosHacG J. P. E. Morrison JoHn C. Ewers U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS F. A. CuHace, JR. Miriam L. BomHarp BIOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrmMan R. K. Cook CHEMISTRY PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS T. P. THAYER PHILip DRUCKER GEOLOGY ANTHROPOLOGY C. W. SaABROSKY ENTOMOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royat & GuILFoRD AVEs. BautTrmMorE, MARYLAND ACTUAL DATES OF PUBLICATION, VOLUME 42 No. 1, pp. 1-32, January 23, 1952 No. 2, pp. 33-64, February 20, 1952 No. 3, pp. 65-104, March 18, 1952 No. 4, pp. 105-136, April 24, 1952 No. 5, pp. 137-168, May 28, 1952 No. 6, pp. 169-208, June 30, 1952 No. 7, pp. 209-240, July 29, 1952 No. 8, pp. 241-272, August 19, 1952 No. 9, pp. 273-312, September 23, 1952 No. 10, pp. 313-344, October 20, 1952 No. 11, pp. 345-368, November 17, 1952 No. 12, pp. 369-396, December 17, 1952 Vou. 42 JANUARY 1952 No. 1 ATTA ci FEB 1- 1952 ) OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS CHARLES DRECHSLER WILLIAM F. FosHaG J. P. E. Morrison PLANT INDUSTRY STATION U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U. 8. NATIONAL MUSEUM BELTSVILLE, MD. ASSOCIATE EDITORS J.C. EWERS J. I. Horrman ANTHROPOLOGY CHEMISTRY C. W. SABROSKY T. P. THAYER ENTOMOLOGY GEOLOGY F, A. CHACE, JR. Miriram L. BomuarpD BIOLOGY BOTANY R. K. Coox PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Roya & GUILFORD AVEs. BaA.LtIMor=, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912,at Baltimore, Md, Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925 Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- ouymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48:75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PrRocgEpDINGs should be sent to Haratp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouURNAL.—Per year................-.0eeeeeeeeeee $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available.*................ — _ Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 41, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $348.50. MonoecrapH No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann. .$4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete Single volumes, unbound Single numbers........ Oe Male aroan ie uci etsras tee sudo A ni ae ean .25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and oie to the Treasurer, H. S. Rapeieye, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, D.C. Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoLuME 42 January 1952 No. 1 ETHNOLOGY — Utilization of animals and plants by the Malecite Indians of New Brunswick. FRANK G. Speck, University of Pennsylvania, and Rap W. Dexter, Kent State University. (Communicated by John C. Ewers.) An earlier paper (Speck and Dexter, 1951) described the utilization of animals and plants by the Micmac Indians of New Brunswick. The present report is a con- tinuation of the same project in ethno- ecology carried out in the summer of 1949 shortly before the death of Dr. Speck. Refer- ence should be made to the previous publica- tion for an explanation of this field study and the conditions under which these reports were prepared. Acknowledgment is again made to all those mentioned earlier in making it possible for the junior writer to complete these studies. While traveling in Maine in September in 1949, we visited the Indian colony on Indian Island at Old Town. Several families, well known to Dr. Speck over many years time, were revisited. Information on our food investigation of the Eastern Woodland Indians was gathered largely from three members of the Malecite tribe who had formerly lived on the Malecite reservations of the St. John River Valley. They were Gabe Polchis, aged 65, who was born and raised in a wigwam on the banks of the St. John River in New Brunswick, and two younger men, Paul Sappier and Charles R. - Paul. These informants, to whom we are greatly indebted, are familiar with the hunting and fishing activities and the utilization of natural resources in the St. John Valley. Again in this investigation, special attention was directed toward the use of native animals and plants for food or food procurement, with incidental attention to other multiple uses of these food resources. As before, an attempt has been made to synthesize original and published knowledge of an archeological, ethnological, and biologi- JAN o 1952 cal nature so as to present an overview of the relations of these surviving aborigines to their natural environment. Like the Micmac and other groups of the North- eastern Indians, the Malecite lived largely on the harvest of wild resources. Many of their native practices have come down to the present day, in modified form, and others are still in the memory of the older Indians. Animals and their capture, especially, oriented the lives of these neolithic people who sought them for food, medicine, cloth- ing, housing, and utensils. Animal life also forms the basis for much of their art, religion, folklore, and social organization. Because Dr. Speck had previously learned or recorded many of the Malecite names for animals and plants on earler field trips, only a few were taken down during this last one. Those are given in the text. It is unfortunate that our original intention of preparing a complete table of Malecite terms cannot be fulfilled. Transcriptions of Dr. Speck’s linguistic notes were made by John Witthoft—R.W.D. THE MALECITE INDIANS OF THE ST. JOHN RIVER VALLEY In the valley of the St. John River there has long lived a group of American aborigines known as the Malecite. Early accounts designated these people as Etchemin or Maliseet. Those dwelling near the coast, with a somewhat different culture, have been given the special name of Passama- quoddy. They lived much hke their neigh- bors, the Miemace of eastern New Brunswick and coastal Nova Seotia, which have been treated in the earher report. The main 2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY eroup of Malecite, however, have been river- bank dwellers, occupying the boundary between the Province of New Brunswick and the State of Maine. Chamberlain (1904) has offered a suggestion, not ac- cepted by all, that the Malecite were an offshoot from the Penobscot tribe of Maine, which migrated northward and settled on the inland waters of northern Maine and western New Brunswick, especially along the St. John River. Here they called themselves “Wulastuk-wink,” meaning ‘dwellers on the beautiful river.” Today there still remain six reservations for these people along the St. John River at Oromocto, Devin (St. Mary), Kingsclear, Woodstock, Tobique Point, and Edmunston, named in order going upstream, where fishing and basket weaving are still the chief occupa- tions. Our informants have visited or lived on all these reservations except the last two. In recent times there has been frequent intermarriage between the Malecite and Penobscot with a resulting fusion of their cultures. The Penobscot tribe has been monographed by Speck (1940). Prehistoric culture of the Malecite, es- pecially the coastal Passamaquoddy, has been the subject of archeological papers by Treat (1836), Baird (1882), Matthew (1884), Bailey (1887), and McIntosh (1909). Ethno- logical studies in this region by Maillard (1758), Barratt (1851), Flannery (1939, 1946), and Cooper (1946) have included in- formation on protohistoric Malecite culture. Perhaps the best-known aspect of this culture is the folklore, much of which has been published by Jack (1895), Chamberlain (1898), Watson (1907), Mechling (1913, 1914), Stamp (1915), and Speck (1917). Just as in the case of the Micmac, animal lite was the dominant theme of Malecite economic and social life. However, only the Passamaquoddy branch shared the de- pendency on marine resources which were so vital to the Micmac and other coastal tribes. Wissler (1924) has observed that “when a mode of culture evolves anywhere, it grows up around some natural resource and tends to spread to the distribution limits of that resource.”” The inland Malecite of the St. John Valley depended more upon fresh-water fishes, the birds and mammals of the river OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 1 bottomland, and upland game. They also developed agriculture to a greater degree. | After contact with the white man, hunting gradually diminished and maize cultivation became of increasing importance. This led to even more of a sedentary existence. There is some evidence, however, that mem- bers of the inland bands at one time journeyed to the coast on the Bay of Fundy during the summer season to obtain shell- fish and marine fishes, a portion of which was preserved and carried back for winter use. Published records of shell heaps list the follow- ing marine animals which were gathered by the inhabitants and seasonal visitors along the coast line of southern New Brunswick: Pecten grandis—Giant scallop Modiolus modiolus—Horse mussel Mytilus edulis—Blue mussel Mya arenaria—Soft-shell clam Polinices heros—Sand-collar snail Crepidula fornicata—Boat shell Thais lapillus—Rock snail Buccinum undatum—W helk Echinoidea—Sea-urchins Clupea harengus—Herring Cottidae—Sculpins Gadus morhua—Cod Elasmobranechii—Sharks Sea birds of various species Undoubtedly this listing is very incomplete. Several small species of shells have also been re- ported, but they probably reached the refuse heaps accidentally. Land snails reported may have been hidden there by shrews as part of their storing activities, as similar finds in shell heaps of Massachusetts were explained by Speck and Dexter (1948). The occurrence of large quantities of the tests and spines of sea-urchins as found by Baird (1882) is unusual. Very little evidence is known for the utilization of these echinoderms on the North American coast except in the Aleutian Islands and adjacent areas where they were often the predominant food resource. Loomis and Young (1912) likewise reported sea-urchins from shell heaps they studied on the coast of Maine. Matthew (1884) raised the question that a sea- urchin found by him in an excavation may have been accidentally dropped there by a crow (or possibly by a gull?—author). Loomis and Young (ibid.) thought some of the snails they found might also have reached the shell heaps in the same way. Since the sea-urchins found by Baird were in one large mass in a single mound, they JANUARY 1952 may have served as an emergency food over a short period of time or advantage may have been taken of this animal form, commonly eaten in southern Europe, at a time when it was particu- larly abundant or easy to gather. Baird stated that they were cooked by being wrapped up in dried eelgrass (Zostera marina) and then burned. The soft-shell clam was consumed in great quantities by the seashore dwellers of this region, some mounds consisting largely if not entirely of this species, but the quahog was not found by Baird in the mounds of eastern Maine and ad- joming New Brunswick. Loomis and Young (1912), however, found the quahog in shell heaps on the coast of Maine. The oyster likewise was not encountered on Passamaquoddy shores by arche- ologists, although again Baird and Loomis and Young described a single large mound at Damaris- cotta, Maine, consisting almost entirely of this species. Today this bivalve is rarely found on the coast of Maine. Alternating layers of shells and of animal bones in the refuse heaps is interpreted by Baird (1882) as the result of summer gathering at the seashore alternating with winter hunting of game. From the St. John River the following fishes were taken: Salmon, gaspereau (fresh-water her- ring or alewife), shad, striped bass, sturgeon, eel, smelt, and white perch. Barratt (1851) gave a brief account of salmon fishing with spears of rock maple. Striped bass and sturgeon were speared and, beside being used for food, the end of the nose was cut off and used as a rubber ball for play. Some fish were smoked, especially the salmon, gaspereau, shad, sturgeon, and eel. De- cayed wood was used for the smoking. Eels were speared and were also taken in eel pots or traps (kadewi-galhi-gan) made of splints. In fresh- water ponds and lakes, togue, pickerel, chubs, suckers, and shiners were fished. Another one called the gizzardfish was mentioned by our in- formants. The identity of this is not clear, but it might possibly refer to the gizzard shad. In recent times trout have been introduced into the waters of New Brunswick. Food, oil, and fertilizer were the products obtained through fishing. Snapping turtles and their eggs were gathered for food. The reptile lore of these Northeastern Indians has been treated in an earlier paper (Speck, 1923). An interesting superstition from the Malecite is pointed out in that paper to the effect that a snakeskin worn about the head will ward off enemies. SPECK AND DEXTER: USE OF ANIMALS AND PLANTS BY MALECITE 3 As far as can be determined, river mussels and crayfish were not eaten although the fresh-water clams were used for bait. Bailey (1887) found wampum (or shell beads) manufactured from fresh-water clams. The muskrat was one of the most important animals in Malecite culture. Both flesh and brains were used for food, the intestines were used in medicine, especially for diarrhea, and the hide was used for many purposes. Our informants de- scribed the cooking of muskrat by placing the whole carcass on coals. Jack (1895) relates that “the Malecite were known by other tribes of the Abenaki as ‘the Mouskouasoaks’ or water rats either because, like these animals, they lived on the banks of the river or because they highly esteem the muskrat as food which they do at the present time, preferring its flesh beyond that of any other.” The beaver and otter were other aquatic mammals of considerable value to these people. Beaver tail was considered a special delicacy, and the incisor teeth were made into knives. Ducks and geese and their eggs were taken in season for food. Ducks were cooked in a mud ball placed on coals. After the mud had dried and cracked, it was peeled off removing feathers and skin from the carcass. Our informants de- scribed the testing of duck eggs before using— fresh eggs sink in salt water, whereas those which are in process of development will float to the surface. Sandpipers, plovers, snipe, and wood- cock were also eaten. The upland game pursued by the Malecite was essentially the same as that sought by the Miemac. The woodland caribou, moose, and white-tailed deer were the important ungulates that served as food and provided skins for clothing and shelter. Moose hide was used in making canoes and mocassins as well as clothing; the intestines, in cording snowshoes. The in- testines were also cleaned, dried, and stored for winter food. Moose hair was used for embroidery on pouches and containers made from animal skins. The hides of all these large animals were used in making bags and containers. Sometimes the whole skin of one animal was adapted for that purpose. The black bear likewise was utilized for many purposes—flesh for food, hides and fur for clothing and shelter, intestines for bow strings, teeth and claws for beads and decoration, and bones for scrapers. Children ate the fat as a tidbit. Bears were captured chiefly by the deadfall trap (achazihi-e@en). Flesh of muskrat, beaver, cari- bou, moose, and deer was dried and smoked. 4 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES The snowshoe hare was trapped in the following manner. A pile of birch boughs was built to attract the animal. A fence was then constructed around this pile containing several openings through which the hares could pass to reach the source of food. Snare traps (abe’k%towa’gan) were set in these openings to capture them as they passed through. Red and gray squirrels and woodehucks were also hunted. Tobacco pouches were made from the skins of woodchucks. Porcu- pine meat and quills were utilized as much by the Malecite as by the Micmac. Mr. Polchis said it was the easiest of the animals to kill. MeIntosh (1909) found that designs on aboriginal pottery frequently resembled the porcupine quill orna- mentation found on birch-bark vessels as well as that of spruce-root stitching. He believed these designs were suggested by the quill work on the bark vessels which long antedated the manu- facture of pottery ware in this region. The rac- coon, skunk, weasel, mink, pine marten, fisher, wolverine, and lynx were the common animals hunted for fur. The raccoon was also used for food, and the os baculum (penis bone) of this animal and the mink served as an ear pick for the Indians. Chamberlain (1884) listed both the Canada lynx and the bay lynx for New Bruns- wick and noted that pme marten was common at the time of his writing, but the fisher was rare. The woodland caribou was still common at that date, whereas the Virginia deer was uncommon but increasing in number. He also noted that the red squirrel was very abundant but the gray squirrel (mi’-ko) was rare. The Canada ruffed grouse and spruce grouse, called fool hen by the Malecite, were among the most important forest birds. Fans were made from the tail feathers of these birds. The ring-necked pheasant has been introduced in recent times and the passenger pigeon, once so abundant, has become extinct. There is no indication that the American wild turkey ever extended this far in its range. Mr. Polchis called to our attention that hunters con- sidered it bad luck to shoot an owl. Birdlore of the Northern Indians was the subject of an earlier paper by the senior author (Speck, 1921). The hunting, fishing, and trapping devices of the Malecite were essentially the same as those employed by the Micmac. These included the harpoon (si:gaewan), dip net (azahi’-gan), hook (pki’-*k-an), spear (saptihi’-gen), leister (n1’- gak), torch (pu’’segwo’n), bow and arrow (ta’b nazaba°k™), traps (kelhi’-genal), and others men- vou. 42, No. 1 tioned above. Here again the family hunting ground system regulated the taking of game and served to keep the Indian population in balance with the game populations (Cooper, 1939; Speck and Hiseley, 1939; Speck and Hadlock, 1946; Hallowell 1949). Mr. Polchis mentioned eating blaek ants in the springtime for medicinal purposes. Only rarely did our informants mention the medical uses of animals and plants, and they were very reluctant to discuss the purposes for which certain native medicines were used. Mr. Polchis explained that it was tabu to discuss with members of the same sex medicinal properties of animals and plants for fear of losing the power of these medicants. Pre- sumably one could discuss such matters with the opposite sex without fear of losing their value. The coniferous trees, as abundant in Malecite territory as in that occupied by the Micmac, were commonly utilized. Reots for thread were ob- tained from the black and white spruce and balsam fir. Needles and branches of these same evergreens were used for pillows and bedding, while the pitch was used for waterproofing seams in the canoes, and in medicine. Bark of the white spruce was used for canoes and roofing the huts. Arrow shafts were made from tamarack. The bark of hemlock (k°sius*k), tamarack, and yew served for medicine, and from the bark of hem- lock a dye and tanning material was obtained. From white cedar (arbor vitae), wood for canoe slats and arrows was sought, and the bark was used in tanning hides. Of the deciduous trees, white or canoe birch was of greatest importance because of the uses of its bark for canoes, boxes, and containers of all kinds. Yellow bireh was em- ployed in the manufacture of sled and toboggan runners. The wood, stripped of the bark, was heated and used like the hot-water bottle of the white man. Brooms were also made from birch. Basket splints were made from brown ash, red maple, and white cedar, and the fiber from bass- wood was made into belts and ropes as well as for sewing birch bark. White ash was used for making boat frames and snowshoes. Elm (dje’s:agank™) bark was sometimes substituted for birch bark in the construction of bark canoes. Ironwoods (the hornbeams) were used for making bows and handles for utensils. Torch handles, paddles, and - oars were made from the wood of sugar maple. Medicines were prepared from slippery elm, wild cherry, black cherry, sumac, alder, and the oaks. Willow bark was mixed with tobacco, and some- JANUARY 1952 times acorns mixed with dried willow bark was substituted for tobacco. Pipes were made from the wood of wild cherry, among other things. Even food was derived from the hardwoods. Maple syrup and sugar were tapped from the sugar-maple tree. Fruits were eaten from the wild plum, black cherry, choke cherry, and the sand cherry. Gorham (1943) reports the finding of charred plum pits found among the ashes of prehistoric campfires on old village sites, and clumps of plum trees (Prunus nigra) have been found still living on or near these village sites, relics of the new stone age. Since this plum is found in New Brunswick only in the vicinity of present or past habitations of man, Gorham has suggested that it might be a relict of aboriginal agriculture. Nuts were gathered from the hazel- nut shrub and from butternut, beech, and oak trees. The acorns of the red, black, and white oak (wa’*tci:lamas) were baked. All the woods, es- pecially the hardwoods, were used as fuel. Two species of trees have been introduced from the Old World that are of special interest. The balm of Gilead (ewebi-bak) is a source of medicine, es- pecially salves, and of trap scents. The Lombardy poplar, however, was described as a cursed tree which brings bad luck. Land having the Lom- bardy poplar was said to be cursed, and the nearly verticle position of the branches is inter- preted as a symbol asking for its forgiveness. All the fruits and berries listed in the paper on the Micmac group were gathered by the Malecite, and, in addition, dewberry, bilberry (a‘nkwuda- Waba’wimus), and mooseberry, the latter not recognized by the authors, were named by our SPECK AND DEXTER: USE OF ANIMALS AND PLANTS BY MALECITE 5) informants. Adney (1944) has made a special study of the native fruits and berries known to the Malecite. In spite of the wide variety of wild fruits eaten, the Indians were cautious about eat- ing strange fruits and berries without consulting older people to determine whether they were suit- able for food. Some fruits and berries were dried for winter use. The wild onion, the wild potato (tacki-damuk), and the roots of the bracken fern were harvested for food, and shoots of pokeberry and fiddlehead ferns were gathered for food. A number of introduced weeds have been added to the diet since the advent of colonization. Among these are the dandelion, wild mustard, pig weed, and lambs quarters. Wildrice, widely used among the eastern Indians, was harvested. Teas were prepared from wintergreen, Labrador tea, and the barks of many trees, but especially that of the yellow birch. In preparing teas a green stick was placed across the boiling vessel to prevent it from boiling over. Sweet flag, skunk-cabbage, and goldthread were used for medicines and sweet grass has been introduced for basket-making. Sphagnum mosses and cattail down served for absorbents and filling for mattresses. American Indians lived close to nature. They had an intimate knowledge of animals and plants —where they lived, how they behaved, what use could be made of them, when and how they could be obtained. They had great respect for natural resources. Their stories and legends revolved about native animals particularly. Their whole lives were intricately woven into a pattern of plant-animal-man relationships. TABLE 1.—ANIMALS AND PLaNts UtinizEp BY THE INLAND MALECcITE INDIANS, CHIEFLY FOR Foop or Foop PROCUREMENT Scientific Classification English Name Scientific Classification English Name INSEcTA: Formicidae Piscrs: Acipenser oxyrhynchus Anguilla bostoniensis Dorosoma cepedianum ? Pomolobus pseudoharengus | Alosa sapidissima Salmo salar Cristivomer namaycush Osmerus mordax Roccus saxatilis Morone americana Catostomidae Leucosomus corporalis Black ants Sturgeon Eel Gizzard shad; gizzardfish Alewife; fresh-water herring; gaspereau Shad Atlantic salmon Togue; ee lake trout Smelt Striped bass White perch; sea perch Suckers Chub Pisces (Continued): Cyprinidae Esox lucius Perca flavescens ReEPTILIA: Chelydra serpentina AVES: Branta canadensis Chen hy perborea Anatinae; Nyrocinae Canachites canadensis Bonasa wmbellus Phasianus colchicus Charadrioidea Philohela minor Shiners; minnows Pike; pickerel Yellow perch ibe Snapping turtle | Canada goose Snow goose Surface-feeding and ducks la | Spruce grouse Rutted grouse | Ringed-neck pheasant | Shorebirds Woodeock diving JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON TaBLeE 1.—(Continued) ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 1 Scientific Classification English Name Scientific Classification English Name Aves (Continued): Capella delicata Actitis macularia Larinae Ectopistes migratorius MAMMALIA: Euarctos americanus Procyon lotor Martes americana Martes pennanti Mustela cicognani Mustela vison Gulo luscus Lutra canadensis Mephitis mephitis Lynx canadensis Marmota monax Sciurus hudsonicus Sciurus carolinensis Castor canadensis Ondatra zibethica Erethizon dorsatum Lepus americanus Odocoileus virginianus Alces americana Rangifer caribou Bryopnyta: Sphagnum spp. PTERIDOPHYTA: Filicinae GYMNOSPERMAE: Taxus canadensis Pinus strobus ‘Lari laricina Picca glauca Picea mariana Abies balsamea Tsuga canadensis Thuja occidentalis Juniperus spp. ANGIOSPERMAE: Zostera marina Zizania aquatica Hierochloé odorata Symplocarpus foetidus Acorus calamus Wilson’s snipe Spotted sandpiper Gulls Passenger pigeon Black bear Raccoon Marten Fisher Weasel Mink Wolverine Otter Skunk Lynx Woodchuck Red squirrel Gray squirrel Beaver Muskrat Poreupine Showshoe rabbit; varying hare White-tailed deer; Virginia deer Moose Woodland caribou Sphagnum moss Ferns Yew; ground hemlock White pine Tamarack White spruce Black spruce Balsam fir Hemlock White cedar; srbor vitae Red cedar; juniper Eelgrass Wildrice Sweetgrass Skunk-cabbage Muskrat-root; sweet flag ANGIOSPERMAE (Continued): Allium spp. Saliz spp. Populus gileadensis Juglans cinerea Corylus sp. Ostrya virginiana Carpinus caroliniana Betula spp. Betula papyrifera Alnus spp. Fagus grandifolia Quercus spp. Ulmus americana Chenopodium sp. Phytolacca americana Coptis groenlandica Brassica spp. Ribes spp. Crataegus spp. Fragaria virginiana Rubus spp. Prunus spp. Apios americana Acer pennsylvanicum Acer saccharum Acer rubrum Vitis vulpina Tilia americana Cornus canadensis Pyrola sp. Ledum groenlandicum Gaultheria procumbens Vaccinium spp. Fraxinus americana Fraxinus nigra Viburnum opulus p Viburnum lentago Mitchella repens Pi Sambucus canadensis, S. pubens Helianthus tuberosus Taraxacum officinale Wild onion Willows Balm of Gilead Butternut Hazelnut Hop-hornbeam; ironwood Hornbeam; ironwood Birches Canoe birch; paper birch Alder Beech Oaks American elm Pigweed Poke; pigeonberry Goldthread Mustard i: Currants; gooseberries Hawthorn Strawberry Raspberries; dewberries Wild cherries; black cherries; beach plum; sand plum Wild bean; groundnut Moosewood; striped maple Sugar maple; rock maple Red maple Wild grape; river-bank grape Basswood Bunchberry Wintergreen Labrador tea Teaberry; checkerberry Blueberries; cranberries White ash Black ash; brown ash Highbush cranberry Sheepberry Partridgeberry blackberries; Elderberries Artichoke; wild potato Dandelion LITERATURE CITED Apney, E. Tappan. The Malecite Indians’ names for native berries and fruits, and their meanings. Acadian Nat. 1 (3): 103-110. 1944. Baitny, L. W. On the relics of the stone age in New Brunswick. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. New Brunswick, no. 6 (art. 1): 38-16. 1887. Barirp, 8S. F. Notes on certain aboriginal shell mounds on the coast of New Brunswick and of New England. Proce. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 4: 292- 297. 1882. Barratr, JosepH. The Indians of New England and the northeastern provinces: 24 pp. 1851. CHAMBERLAIN, Montacur. Mammals of New Brunswick. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. New Bruns- wick 1 (3), art. 4: 37-40. 1884. The origin of the Maliseets. New Bruns- wick Mag. 1. 1898. . The Indians in New Brunswick in Champlain’s time. Acadiensis 4: 280-295. 1904. Coopgr, J. M. Is the Algonquian family hunting ground system pre-Columbian? Amer. Anthrop. 41: 66-90. 1939. The culture of the northeastern Indian hunters: A reconstructive interpretation. In: “Man in Northeastern North America,” Papers Robert S. Peabody Foundation for Archeology 3: 272-306. Ed. by F. Johnson. 1946. FLANNERY, ReGina. An analysis of coastal Al- gonquin culture. Catholic Univ. Amer. Anthrop. Series no. 7: 1-219. 1939. JANUARY 1952 The culture of the northeastern Indian hunters: A descriptive survey. In: ‘‘Man in Northeastern North America,’’ Papers Robert S. Peabody Foundation for Archeology 3: 263-271. Edited by F. Johnson. 1946. Goruam, R. P. The history of plum culture in New Brunswick. Acadian Nat. 1 (2): 59-69. 1943. Hatitowe.L, A. 1. The size of Algonkian hunting territories: A function of ecological adjustment. Amer. Anthrop. 51 (1): 35-45. 1949. Jack, Epwarp. Maliseet legends. Journ. Amer. Folk-lore 8: 193-208. 1895. Loomis, F. B., anp Youne, D. B. On the shell heaps of Maine. Amer. Journ. Sci., ser. 4, 34: 17-42. 1912. Marniarp, A. 8. Account of the customs and manners of the Micmakis and Maricheets: 138 pp. London, 1758. Marruew, G. F. Discoveries at a village of the stone age at Bocabec, N. B. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soc. New Brunswick 1 (3): 5-29. 1884. McInrosn, WiuuraAmM. Aboriginal pottery of New Brunswick. Bull. Nat. Hist. Soe. New Bruns- wick 6 (2) art. 2: 110-120. 1909. Mecuiine, W. H. Maliseet tales. Journ. Amer. Folk-lore 26 : 219-258. 1913. Malecite tales. Can. Geol. Surv. Mem. 49 (Anthrop. Series no. 4): 133 pp. Ottawa, 1914. Speck, FRANK G. Malecite tales. Journ. Amer. Folk-lore 30: 479-485. 1917. SOHN AND BERDAN: RANGE OF PHANASSYMETRIA 7 Bird-lore of the northern Indians. Bull. Univ. Pennsylvania 21 (18): 349-380. 1921. Reptile-lore of the northern Indians. Journ. Amer. Folk-lore 36: 273-280. 1923. Penobscot man: 325 pp. 1940. Speck, FRANK G., AND DeEexterR, Ratepu W. Utilization of marine life by the Wampanoag Indians of Massachusetts. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 38 (8): 257-265. 1948. —. Utilization of animals and plants by the Micmac Indians of New Brunswick. Journ. Washington Acad. Sei. 41 (8): 250-259. 1951. Speck, FranNK G., AND Eiseuny, L. C. Signifi- cance of hunting territory systems of the Al- gonkian in social theory. Amer. Anthrop. 41: 269-280. 1939. Speck, FRANK G., AND Haptock, W.8. A report on tribal boundaries and hunting areas of the Malecite Indian of New Brunswick. Amer. Anthrop. 48: 355-374. 1946. Stamp, Hartey. A Malecite tale: Adventures of Bukschinskwesk. Journ. Amer. Folk-lore 28: 243-248. 1915. Treat, J. Htchemins. Archaeologica Americana 2: 305-367. 1836. Watson, L. W. The origin of the Malecites. Journ. Amer. Folklore 20: 160. 1907. WIssLER, CuARK. The relation of nature to man as illustrated by the N. A. Indian. Ecology 5 (4): 311-318. 1924. PALEONTOLOGY.—Stratigraphic range of the ostracode genus Phanassymetria Roth2 I. G. SoHN and JEan M. Brerpan, U.S. Geological Survey. (Communi- cated by John B. Reeside.) The genus Phanassymetria was established by Roth (1929, p. 358) for two species of ostracodes from the Haragan marl (Lower Devonian) of Oklahoma. In 1936 van Veen (1936, p. 177) discussed this genus and as- signed to it two species from the Upper Cretaceous of Holland. As has been noted by Kellett (1943, pp. 626-627), this created a surprisingly long range for the genus, and because other species from intermediate periods have not been recorded, it appeared desirable to review the generic characters of both the Lower Devonian and the Cretace- ous species. We have been fortunate in having van Veen’s paratype material for study, as well as Roth’s types from the Haragan marl, and have observed morpho- logical differences between the Lower Devonian and the Cretaceous species. In this paper the genus Phanassymetria is 1 Published by permission of the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. limited to those forms occurring in rocks of Silurian and Devonian age, and a new genus is established for the Cretaceous species. We are grateful to Drs. G. A. Cooper and David Nicol, of the U.S. National Museum, for arranging the exchange of van Veen’s paratype material through Dr. J. H. van Voorthuysen, Geologische Dienst, Haarlem, Holland, and for making available Roth’s types. Dr. R. A. M. Schmidt, of the U. 8. Geological Survey, prepared the radiographs used in illustrating this paper, and her co- operation is gratefully acknowledged. Mrs. Elinor Stromberg prepared the illustrations. Wealsowish tothank Dr. Kurt Rosenwaldand Mrs. Severine Britt for assistance in trans- lating the quoted portions of van Veen’s dis- cussion of Phanassymetria from the German. MORPHOLOGY OF OSTRACODE SHELLS The most recent discussion of the shell structure of ostracodes is that by Sylvester- 8 JOURNAL Bradley (1941, pp. 1-33). The valves of living ostracodes are pierced at right angles to the surface by pores known as ‘normal pore canals,”’ from which hairs protrude. In general, these pores are not recognizable on Paleozoic ostracodes, although they can be observed on many post-Paleozoic forms. Swartz (1936, p. 581) described the early Paleozoic genus Tubulibairdia as charac- terized by ‘‘coarse tubular pores which open on the internal surface of the valves, but do not reach the exterior.”” The same type of pore occurs in the Paleozoic species of Phanassymetria (Fig. 1) and in other Paleozoic genera. If the tubules are normal pore canals they should be present in all the genera of a given faunule that contains speci- mens in which the tubules can be seen. We have examined material from several locali- ties of Silurian and Devonian age and have observed that the tubules are restricted to a group of genera related to Phanassymetria. The tubules can be seen on the inside surface of well-preserved valves. In some cases they appear as perforations through the shell wall of abraded specimens. They may also be seen by transmitted light on wetted specimens of both complete carapaces and dissociated valves. Under some conditions of preserva- tion it is necessary to make thin sections to determine the presence of the tubules. They show very plainly on radiographs of the valves: Examination of van Veen’s paratype material from the Cretaceous of Holland fails to show any indication of these tubules, either with transmitted lhght or on the radiographs. The following translation of the discussion of the genus Phanassymetria by van Veen shows that she was not aware of the presence of the tubules in the early Pale- ozoic species: This genus was established by Roth for two Lower Devonian ostracodes from America whose valves, as the name indicates, are distinctly asym- metrical. Their asymmetry consists in one valve being much larger than the other and overlapping it on all the margins. Roth arbitrarily established the wider end as anterior, thus making the right valve larger. This orientation should very likely be reversed, mak- ing the left valve the larger, as is the usual case with ostracodes. This orientation is indicated also OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 1 by the fact that in P. quadrupla the posterior and not the anterior end varies considerably in width. Roth states that in both of his species the hinge of the valve which we consider as the left has a furrow and the right valve is flanged [“‘scharf”’]. On the other hand, we believe that in our two species the opposite is the case, as is usual with other ostracodes. Roth does not give generic characteristics, but describes in detail his two species. Bassler and Kellett (1934, p. 37) describe the genus in their Bibliographic Index of Paleozoic Ostracodes. They, however, base their description mainly on the genotype. They place this genus in the family Thlipsuridae. The following may be men- tioned as the chief characteristics: The carapace is thick and strongly asymmetrical, since the left valve is much larger than the right one, and overlaps it on all the margins. The surface of the valves is smooth or punctate. Hinge margin straight, and hinge teeth absent. Roth as well as we [van Veen] found two types of forms of this genus. We, therefore, originally concluded that his as well as our specimens rep- resented a species exhibiting strong sexual di- morphism. The illustrations given by Roth do not contradict this assumption; P. triserrata would be the female and P. quadrupla the male. In order to investigate this problem a sample of Haragan marl from White Mound, Oklahoma, was obtained from Prof. R. W. Harris through the courtesy of Dr. Merle Israelsky to both of whom we express our sincere thanks. The sample contained a great number of complete carapaces and dissociated valves of the two species of Phanassymetria differentiated by Roth. We con- cluded that our assumption is most likely not correct because we believe that we are able to differentiate longer and shorter carapaces in both species [““Gattungen’’] with a greater number of shorter ones. Fossils of this genus were found only in the Lower Devonian of North America and in the Cretaceous of South Limburg, the former being much larger. It may be mentioned that Bonnema (1932, p. 288; 1933, p. 25) was referring to this genus when he wrote “‘pot-with-lid.” As may be seen from the above discussion in addition to lacking tubules that are char- acteristic of Phanassymetria, the Cretaceous species differ in being smaller. It might be JANUARY 1952 considered as a possibility that the small size coupled with the absence of pores in the Cretaceous forms represents an atavistic re- version or a Juvenile stage of the Phanassy- metria stock. That this is not the case is shown by the presence of pores in a juvenile growth stage of Phanassymetria, which is about half the size of the adults, from the type locality at White Mound, Oklahoma. This juvenile specimen has a length of 0.5 mm as compared with a length of 0.4 mm for the Cretaceous specimens. It therefore ap- pears that the resemblance between the lower Paleozoic and the Cretaceous species is due to homeomorphy rather than any genetic relationship. Even this resemblance iS more apparent than real, however, as the “groove” on P. foveata van Veen, which is SOHN AND BERDAN: RANGE OF PHANASSYMETRIA 9 supposed to resemble that on P. triserrata Roth, is actually a shallow subtriangular depression oblique to the hinge line (Fig. 5) rather than a groove open posteriorly and parallel to the hinge line as in the Paleozoic species. The thickness of the shell wall of the Paleozoic specimens appears to be propor- tionately greater than that of the Cretaceous specimens. In P. afoveata van Veen, no pit or groove 1s present, and the resemblance to the lower Paleozoic forms is in the general outline and in the alleged thickness of the shell walls. Considering these factors, and considering that no species assignable to Phanassymetria have been found in either the upper Paleozoic or the lower Mesozoic, it seems desirable to remove the Cretaceous species from the genus Phanassymetria. 2 3 Fries. 1-3.—1, Phanassymetria sp.: Left valve from the inside, camera-lucida drawing, approx. X 66, showing the tubules. Marl beds of Haragan shale west of Clarita, Coal County, Okla., donated by Robert H. Stewart, U. S. Geological Survey, who obtained the sample from Prof. William Shideler, Miami University, Oxford, Ohio, U.S.N.M. no. 116454. 2, Pseudophanasymmetria foveata (van Veen) : Complete carapace, lateral view of right side, camera-lucida drawing from radiograph, approx. X 113; tubules not present. Van Veen’s paratype material, Maestrichtian from South Limburg, Holland, U.S.N.M. no. 108231. 3, Pseudophanasymmetria? afoveata (van Veen): Complete carapace, lateral view of right side, camera-lucida drawing from radiograph, approx. X 113; tubules not present. The specimen was tilted when the radiograph was made so that the muscle sear patterns, presumed to be located opposite each other, are projected on the plane of the film as two units. The upper pattern is interpreted to belong to the right valve, and the lower, to the left valve. Van Veen’s paratype material, Maestrichtian from South Limburg, Holland, U.S.N.M. no. 108232. 10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Family BAIRDIIDAE? Sars, 1887 Pseudophanasymmetria Sohn and Berdan, n. gen. Phanassymetria (part) van Veen, Natuurhist. Maandblad, Jaarg. 25, no. 11-12: 177. 1936. Genotype P. foveata (van Veen), ibid.: 177-178, pl. 10, figs. 16-22. Diagnosis —Markedly asymmetrical ostra- codes with shells not penetrated by conspicuous large pores. Larger valve overlaps smaller on all margins. Hinge straight, simple, reported by van Veen to consist of a bar and groove. Both dorsal and lateral outlines subovate. Shell surface either smooth or punctate, and with a shallow depres- sion on the posterodorsal part of the shell. Inner lamella not observed, probably absent. Discussion.—The reasons for separating this genus from Phanassymetria have been cited above. Van Veen placed two Cretaceous species, P. foveata and P. afoveata, in Phanassymetria. Of these two, P. foveata has been selected as the type of the new genus. Van Veen (1936, p. 178) has stated that P. foveata and P. afoveata resem- ble each other in having the left valve much larger than the right and overlapping it on all margins, and also in having a small spine on the posterior margin of each valve. These spines are very small, and, according to van Veen, many of them are abraded. As such spines in many ostra- code genera are not even of specific importance, the principal indication of relationship between the two species is the similarity in overlap. The species differ in the presence of surface sculpture in P. foveata as opposed to P. afoveata, and in a well-defined muscle scar in P. afoveata, which has not been observed in P. foveata. It is, therefore, possible that examination of additional material will show that the two species do not belong to the same genus. However, the material available to us, which consists of a complete carapace and one larger valve of each species, does not justify vou. 42, no. 1 the proposal of an additional genus. The species afoveata is provisionally referred to Pseudophana- symmetria. The following species appear similar to Pseudophanasymmetria? afoveata: Bairdia subglobosa Bosquet, 1852, Memoires Cou- ronnes et Memoires des Savants HEtrangers publiés par l’Académie Royale des Sciences, des Lettres et des Beaux-arts de Belgique 24: 25, pl. 1, figs. 7a-d. Cretaceous to Miocene.— Bosquet, 1854, Mon. Crust. foss. Crétacé de Limburg: 65-66 (55-56), pl. 8, figs. 3a-d. Bairdia subglobosa Méhes, 1911, Resultate der Wissenschaftlichen Erforschung des Balatonsees 3: pt. 6: 21, pl. 2, figs. 11-13, Triassic. Bairdia (?) problematica Méhes, 1911 (= Hunga- rella problematica (Mehes)), Resultate der Wis- senschaftlichen Erforschung des Balatonsees 3: pt. 6: 21, pl. 2, figs. 14-18, Triassic. Bardia (2?) problematica var. reniformis Méhes, 1911 (= Hungarella problematica var. reniformis (Méhes)), Resultate der Wissenschaftlichen Er- forschung des Balatonsees 3: pt. 6: 22-23, pl. 2, figs. 19-23, Triassic. Further study may disclose that the listed species and Pseudophanasymmetria? afoveata be- long to the same group, and in one or more genera. Bosquet’s statement (1854, footnote, ex- planation to pl. 8) that the specimens described as B. subglobosa are young individuals of B. subdeltoides is probably not correct, because we have observed growth stages of species of Pale- ozoic Bairdia and of post-Paleozoic Bairdoppilata in which the younger stages have the same lateral and dorsal outlines as the adults. The Triassic species referred by Méhes to Bairdia subglobosa probably does not belong to it, and may require a new name. Pseudophanasymmetria foveata (van Veen), 1936 Figs. 2, 4, 5 Phanassymetria foveata van Veen, Natuurhist. Maandblad, Jaarg. 25, no. 11-12: 177-178, pl. 10, figs. 16-22. 1936. Fires. 4-6.—4, 5, Pseudophanasymetria foveata (van Veen): 4, Left valve from the inside, approx. < 70; anterior ventral portion broke in handling. Van Veen’s paratype material, Maestrichtian from South Limburg, Holland, U.S.N.M. no. 108234; 5, complete carapace, dorsal view, approx. X 70; same specimen as shown in Fig. 2. 6, Pseudophanasymetria ? afoveata (van Veen). Left valve from the inside approx. X 70. Van Veen’s paratype material, Maestrichtian from South Limburg, Holland, U.S.N.M. no. 108233. January 1952] A translation of the original description follows: This species is represented by 4 carapaces and 21 left valves. Right valves are absent, presuma- bly because of their smaller size. Carapace thick. Egg-shaped in lateral view, greatest height anterior to midlength. Anterior margin broadly rounded. Posterior margin some- what truncated. Dorsal margin straight, ventral margin slightly convex. These two margins con- verge strongly backward, dorsal and ventral out- line also egg-shaped, greatest width is behind midlength. Lengthwise very irregularly triangu- lar, with greatest width below midhieght so that the carapace is flattened out below. It is very characteristic that the left valve has a suleus [Grube] located on the outside in the back below the dorsal margin. The margins of the suleus are elevated, except along dorsal margin. Strange to say, a similar sulcus is found in P. triserrata Roth, but there the elevation is lacking. The surface of the valves is finely punctate, with small dots that are arranged in rows. It is further characteristic that each valve has on its posterior a little spine, which, however, is often abraded. In P. triserrata such a spine is present on the dorsal surface of each valve. This ostracode is present in Staring’s third Bryozoa bed in the Jeker Valley, and in the first Bryozoa layer of Maestrichtian ‘‘d’’ at Bemelen. Measurements (in millimeters): Greatest length Greatest height Convextty Complete c2rapace 0.44 0.32 0.31 Left valve 0.41 0.2) — The extremely small size of the specimens suggests that they possibly represent young erowth stages. The original of van Veen’s figs. 16-20, pl. 10, is here designated as the lectotype. Pseudophanasymmetria? afoveata (van Veen), 1936 Figs. 3, 6 Phanassymetria afoveata van Veen, Natuurhist. Maandblad, Jaarg. 25, no. 11-12: 178, pl. 10, figs. 23-30. 1936. A translation of the original description follows: This ostracode, too, belongs to the less common species, being represented by four complete cara- paces, six left valves, and one right valve. The relationship of this ostracode with the previous one results from the fact that the left valve is much larger than the right and overlaps it all around, and that each valve bears a little spine on the posterior margin. It differs from the former by being smaller, less thick, more slender, and more cylindrical in shape. Moreover, the surface is not punctate. Furthermore, the groove on the posterior part is absent. SOHN AND BERDAN: RANGE OF PHANASSYMETRIA 11 This species is found in Staring’s third Bryozoa bed in the Jeker Valley and in the first Bryozoa bed at Bemelen. Measurements (in millimeters): Greatest length Greatest height Convextly Complete carapace 0.40 0.26 0.26 Left valve 0.41 0.26 — The extremely small size of the specimens suggests that they possibly represent young erowth stages. A complete carapace and two larger valves were available to us for study, but unfortunately one of the larger valves was de- stroyed during the process of obtaining radio- graphs, and a portion of the larger valve of the carapace was broken after a satisfactory radio- graph was obtained. The radiograph of the cara- pace shows muscle scar patterns on both valves (Fig. 3). The pattern is circular and consists of eight discernible scars that differ in arrangement in the opposing valves. It is not known whether this asymmetry in arrangement of the individual muscle fibers is typical in ostracodes. The ar- rangement of the muscle scar pattern is similar to that of Hungarella Méhes (1911, p. 22) as figured by him for Bairdia(?) problematica Méhes, 1911, on pl. 2, fig. 16. The small sears that sur- round the central group in Hungarella are not discernible in P. afoveata. The original of van Veen’s figs. 23-27, pl. 10, is hereby designated as the lectotype. REFERENCES Bassuer, R. 8., and Kenierr, Berry. Biblio- graphic index of Paleozoic Ostracoda. Geol. Soc. Amer. Spec. Pap. 1: 500 pp. 1934. Bonnema, J. H. Orientation of the carapaces of Paleozoic Ostracoda. Journ. Pal. 6: 288-295. 1932. . Die Orientierung der Schalen der paleozoi- schen Ostracoden. Zeitschr. Geschiebeforsch. 9, pt. 1: 23-42. 1933. Bosaqurt, J. Monographie des Crustaces fossiles du terrain Crétacé dw Duché de Limburg. Me- moires de la Commission pour la description et la carte Géologique de la Neerland. 2: 137 pp., LO pls. 1854. Keniuert, Berry. Permian ostracodes. Journ. Pal. 17: 615-628, 1943. Méurs, Gruna. Uber Trias-Ostrakoden aus dem Bakony. Resultate der wissenschaftl. Erfors- chung des Balatonsees, Anhang, Paleont. der Umgebung des Balatonsees 3, pt. 6: 38 pp., 4 pls. 1911. Rovru, Roperr. Some ostracodes from the Haragan marl, Devonian, of Oklahoma. Journ. Pal. 3: 327-3872, pls. 35-38. 1929. Swartz, F. M. Revision of the Primitiidae and Beyrichiidae, with new Ostracoda from the IW JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES lower Devonian of Pennsylvania. Journ. Pal. 10: 541-586, pls. 78-89. 1936. SYLVESTER-BRADLEY, P. C. The shell structure of their the Ostracoda and its application to paleontological investigation. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 11, 8: 1-33. 1941, VoL. 42, No. | vAN VEEN, J. E. Nachtrag zw der bis jetzt erschie- nenen Revision der Ostracoden der Maastrichter Tuffkrerde und der Kunrader Korallenkalkes von Stid-Limburg. Natuurhist. Maandbland, Jaarg. 25, no. 11-12: 170-188, pls. 9-10. 1936. PALEONTOLOGY .—The arms of Polusocrinus. HARRELL L. Srrimpxe, Bartles- ville, Okla. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) Several months ago, Gregory Elias, of Gulf Oil Corporation, found a specimen of Polusocrinus Strimple (1951) with well- preserved arms attached. The specimen was obtained by the author through exchange and provides vital information for the study of ampelocrinids. The specimen was collected in the small excavation about half a mile due west of the school at Ochelata, Okla., in the Wann formation. This zone is also found at the hill, locally termed ‘‘The Mound,” just west of the city limits of Bartlesville, Okla., where several specimens of the species have been collected by the author. Description is given below as P. ochelataensis, n. sp. Genus Polusocrinus Strimple, 1951 There have been some questions raised as to the practicability of the genus Pelusocrinus. One char- acteristic, which was not brought out by the author, is the lack of depth of the arm articulating facets found in the genus. In Aestocrinus mag- nificus Miller and Gurely (1890), the genotype species, and in other typical representatives of that genus, the arm articulating facets attain a depth somewhat greater than the normal thick- ness of the RR. Typical species also have a shal- low basal coneavity. Oklahomacrinus Moore (1939) has comparable arm articulating facets, but the genus is characterized by extreme basal invagination, quite foreign to the convex base of Polusocrinus. The form described as Moundo- crinus osagensis Strimple (1939) has the same type of arm articulating facets as Polusocrinus but the anal plate of that species is only faceted for the reception of a single tube plate, and the IBB circlet is smaller and downflared in attitude. In both Polusocrinus and Aesiecrinus the anal plate is followed by two tube plates. With the knowledge afforded by the crown of P. ochelataensis, we are able to anticipate from fourteen to sixteen arms in Polusocrinus. Most Pennsylvanian genera assigned to the Ampelo- crinidae have only ten arms, and one, Allosocrinus Strimple (1949), has only five. Hxocrinus Strimple (1949) has numerous arms, but the author con- templates removal of this genus from the am- pelocrinids in the near future. Polusocrinus ochelataensis, n. sp. Figs. 1-8 Dorsal cup is full, semiglobular shaped. Five IBB form a large, pentagonal disk, which is shallowly concave about the columnar attach- ment but is mildly convex in its entirety. Five large BB are hexagonal except for the post. B, and are equally wide as long. Five RR are slightly wider than long and are pentagonal. Articulating facets slope inward and attain a length only 0.7 mm greater than the normal thickness of the RR. One large anal plate is present, resting evenly on the upper truncated extremity of the post. B. It extends only slightly above the upper extremity of the cup and attains its maximum width at the upper level of the cup. There is provision for the reception of two tube plates of equal size. The entire crown is devoid of ornamentation and the sutures of the cup are not impressed. The column is pentagonal and the lumen is pentalo- bate. The tegmen has not been observed. First bifurcation of the arms occurs on the low axillary second primibrachials in all rays. Subse- quent branching is known in the left ray of all rami except the r. post. where preservation is not clear enough to be certain. The second secundibra- chials are axillary in all left rays with the ex- ception of the anterior where the first SBr is an unusually large axillary plate. The arms are uni- serial and are well rounded, appearing not to have reposed in close contact. No branching has been observed in the right rays. Measurements in mm.—As follows: JANUARY 1952 STRIMPLE: ARMS OF POLUSOCRINUS 13 Figs. 1-8.—Polusucrinus ochelataensis, n. sp.: 1,5, Paratype from summit, X 2, andfrom base, X 1.5; 2-4, large paratype from posterior, summit, andbase, X 1.4; 6-8, holotype from right anterior, posterior, and left anterior, X 1.5. 14 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY Large Holotype paratype Width of dorsal cup (max.)................ 26.5* 29,2* Height of dorsal cup (max.)............... 14.2* 14.3* Tengthvofiantse Awe eee eee een eras 8.7 10.0 Widthvotant:ahie eer eee rere Ge erent 13.2 15.7 Length of suture between RR............. 3.9 4.0 Length of arm articulating facet atsuture.. 3.7 — Normal thickness of RR.................. 3.0 — iLengthyotarantseS sere eee ree Cree 11.9 14.6 Widthvoterants Bieter er ree ere rere 11.9 14.7 Length of suture between BB............. 6.3 5.6 Diameter of IBB circlet................... 12.2 14.2 Diameter of columnar scar............... 4.1F 3.5 Length of anal plate (max.)............... dott 7.5 Width of anal plate (max.)................ 7.9 9.0 * Distorted. + Proximal columnals. Remarks.—P. ochelataensis has characteristics closely comparable to other described species referred to the genus. However, it has a more convex base and is the largest known species. The RR plates are wider and lower than those of P. avanti Strimple (1951), and the anal plate does not ENTOMOLOGY .—Phylogenetic studies thripidae).! Lewis J. STANNARD, JR OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 1 extend so far above the summit of the cup. The BB plates of P. rosa Strimple (1951) are propor- tionately wider than those of the present species. Occurrence and horizon.—The holotype is from a small excavation approximately one-half mile due west of Ochelata, and the paratypes are from the hill just west of the city limits of Bartlesville, Oklahoma; Wann formation, Ochelata group, Missouri series, Pennsylvanian. Types.—To be deposited in the U.S. National Museum. REFERENCES Miuuer, 8S. A., ann Gurury, W. F. E. Journ. Cincinnati Soc. Nat. Hist. 13: 14. 1890. Moorg, R. C. Denison Univ. Bull., Journ. Sci. Lab., 34: 255-257. 1939. SrrimpLte, H. L. Bull. Amer. Pal. 24: 9-10, pl. 1, figs. 5, 6, 10. 1939. Bull. Amer. Pal. 32: 9-10, 17-18. 1949. Bull. Amer. Pal. 33: 24-26, pl. 5, figs. 4-6, 11. 1951. of Franklinothrips (Thysanoptera: Aeolo- Ihnois Natural History Survey, Urbana, Ill. (Communicated by Herbert Friedmann.) The unusual aeolothripid genus Frank- linothrips has been of particular interest to most thysanopterists. Whenever examples came to hand they were deemed worthy of special comment even when taxonomic con- siderations were not involved. Since at first it was not realized that dimorphic variation occurred in the antennal segments and heads of the sexes and since all but two of the seemingly new species were described from unique specimens, it is not too surprising that 11 species, 3 genera, and | family have been described or proposed for this small genus of six species. Perhaps the most impressive feature of the Franklinothrips is the extremely elongated and slender third and fourth antennal seg- ments, which bear elaborate sensoria (Figs. 1-3). For aeolothripids, their wings are narrow and the veins are exceptionally faint, so faint that some students formerly believed no cross veins were present. At least when dead, the head is often partially withdrawn into the prothorax giving this part of the 1 This paper is a Joint contribution of the Sec- tion of Faunistic Surveys and Insect Identifica- tion, Illinois Natural History Survey, and the Department of Entomology, University of Illinois. body a compact appearance. In nature they resemble ants somewhat. In spite of the paucity of collections of these thrips, enough samples have been taken to.indicate that they inhabit the warmer regions of the world and are con- fined to areas between the northern and southern latitudes of 35°. They are largely, if not entirely, predaceous, feeding on mites and insects including other thrips. The larvae spin flimsy pupal cocoons on the underside of leaves; there is but a single pupal stage in contrast to two or three pupal forms in all other thrips. Reijne (1920) pub- lished limited observations on their activi- ties before and during the pupal stage, but details of the rest of their life history remain unknown. Occasionally males are attracted to lights but females have never been taken from this source. Franklinothrips should not be confused with Frankliniella, another kind of thrips belonging to the family Thripidae. Although only one type was available to me for study, borrowed identified specimens and freshly collected specimens of most of the other species were considered satis- factory reference material. Over 100 indi- viduals of this genus were studied. JANUARY 1952 STANNARD: PHYLOGENETIC I am sincerely grateful to Prof. Dr. Hermann Priesner, of Cairo, for the loan of male and female specimens of F. megalops; to C. F. W. Muesebeck and the late J. C. Crawford for permitting me to examine collections of F. tenuicornis and F. vespi- formis at the United States National Museum (USNM); to George Mack, of the Queensland Museum, for the loan of the holotype of F. variegatus; and to Dr. W. E. China, of the British Museum, for the in- formation he has given me on the type speci- men of F. aureus. Drs. 8. F. Bailey, H. K. Gloyd, B. W. Benson, and E. Wilhams and E. C. Becker have aided me by their sugges- tions or by the presentation of specimens which have been placed in the collections of the Illinois Natural History Survey (INHS). Genus Franklinothrips Back Franklinothrips Back, Ent. News 23: 75-77. Mailed Jan. 31, 1912. [Monotypic; genotype by original designation, Aeolothrips vespiformis D. L. Craw- ford.] Mitothrips Trybom, Ent. Tidskr. Arg. H. 3-4: 146-147. 1912. [Monotypic; genotype, Mitothrips megalops Trybom. New synonym, Bagnall (1913a); reestablished as full genus, Bagnall (1913b); resynonymized, Bagnall (1926).] Spathiothrips Richter, Deutsch. Ent. Zeitschr. H. 1: 32. 1922. [Genotype by subsequent desig- nation of Priesner (1949), Spathiothrips bischoffi Richter New synonymy, Bagnall (1931).| Aeolothripoids with extremely elongate third antennal segments having long linear sensoria subdivided or nearly subdivided by short sub- dermal rods; with head when closely fitted against the prothorax, forming with the prothorax a com- pact, elliptical mass; with forepart of head not greatly extended beyond eyes; with but three segments in the maxillary palpus, although seg- ment 2 bears faint markings indicating divisions; and with wings relatively narrow for the family. These antlike thrips have been found in tropical or subtropical regions of North and South Amer- ica, In some of the adjacent islands including the West Indies, and in Africa and Australia. Head round to oval in shape; ventral surface of eyes more prolonged posteriorly than dorsal surface; ocelli always present, although the fore ocellus is often smaller than the posterior ones; third antennal segment elongated, at least 10 times as long as broad; sensoria of the third and fourth antennal segments linear, more or less subdivided by fine strengthening subdermal STUDIES OF FRANKLINOTHRIPS 15 ridges, in the male these sensoria occupy the entire ventral and portions of the lateral areas of the third and fourth antennal segments; sensoria of the fifth, sixth, and seventh antennal segments peglike, extending free from their segments, the base of these sense cones oval; maxillary palpi 3-segmented, second segment of these palpi often with faint indications of about five subdivisions; labial palpi 4-segmented. Prothorax with many small setae, no longer setae on the angles; mesosternellum (area pos- terior to the mesofurcal suture) fused with meta- sternum; all tarsi 2-segmented (see Crawford 1909, fig. 49D; not as in Back 1912, fig. 3); longitudinal and cross veins of forewings faint; wings similar to those of Stomatothrips. Abdomen narrowly attached to thorax. The remarkable ventral sensoria of the third and fourth antennal segments are found in no other kind of thrips. On both sides of the clear sensory area there appears to be a differentiated shelf extending longitudinally in a sinuate man- ner. This marginal area of a different texture than the granular dorsal surface possibly is covered by the sensorial membrane that extends over from the clear area. Since most of the ventral surface of the antennae is composed of the sensorial membrane, it is reasonable to suppose that the short rods extending from the shelf are for the purpose of strengthening the antennae to help keep it in a rigid shape. Proliferations of the dorsal integument toward the venter undoubtedly also serve to make the segment rigid. In Figs. 1 and 2, both dorsal views, the sensorial membranes are those areas on the lateral portions of the antennal segment; the shelf is depicted as small areas be- tween the sublateral spines; and the dashes or short transverse lines represent the strengthening rods. These antennal segments were drawn from specimens which had been magnified by an oil immersion objective of a phase microscope. When the antennal segment of megalops was drawn (Fig. 3) I did not have access to a phase mi- croscope, and I was unaware of the marginal shelf if it exists. KEY TO ADULTS (based in part on descriptions) 1. Females, sternum of abdominal segments 8 to 10 longitudinally divided, forming a cleft into which a sawhke ovipositor can be re- WAMCUOC! Gc aco ole oe 2 9 entire, not longitudinally divided i 16 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON 2. Forewings with dark and light cross bands; some basal abdominal segments pale.. 3 Forewings with dark border around margins; abdomen uniformly dark...... lineatus Hood 3. Antennal segment 4 largely;.or entirely pale VO liosov reece sy cate sate es les ce sheet al aba ete ok ens 4 Antennal segment 4 brown................. 6 4. Abdominal segment 4 completely dark brown, similar in color to segments 5 to 9; abdominal segments 1 to 3 pale in apical two-thirds tenwicornis Hood Abdominal segment 4 mostly pale yellow, similar in color pattern to the preceding segments; abdominal segments 5 to 9 abruptly Cank*browmier.ne ee eee et eee 5 5. Antennal segment 4 with brown shading at apex; antennal segment | pale yellow megalops Trybom Antennal segment 4 pale yellow without brown at apex; antennal segment 1 yellowish brown variegatus Girault 6. Abdominal segment 10 black. fulgidus Hood Abdominal segment 10 yellowish vespiformis Crawford . Forewings not continuously bordered around EATS lony Glawale Jmol. 5 o sosassdos000s58- 8 Forewings continuously bordered around mar- gins by a dark band........ lineatus Hood . Antennal segments 3 and 4 dark brown, segment 3 as in Fig. 1; lateral ocelli farther apart from each other than the length of the diameter of a single ocellus, Fig. 7..vespiformis Crawford Antennal segments 3 and 4 light yellow brown, segment 3 as in Figs. 2 and 3; lateral ocelli closer to each other than the length of the diameter of a single ocellus, Fig. 8...... 9 9. Ocellar setae minute, much shorter than the length of the Ist antennal segment, not reaching the anterior margin of the fore ocellus; antennal segments 1 and 2 pale, similar to segment 3; antennal segment 4 longer than segment 3...megalops Trybom Ocellar setae long, longer than the length of the Ist antennal segment, greatly extended beyond anterior margin of fore ocellus; an- tennal segments 1 and half of 2 abruptly brown; antennal segment 4 slightly shorter than’ segment 3.........-: tenwicornis Hood “N oa) Franklinothrips vespiformis (Crawford) Aeolothrips vespiformis D. L. Crawford, Pomona Coll. Journ. Ent. 1: 109-110, 9. 1909 [Type locality: Managua, Nicaragua. |] Franklinothrips vespiformis (Crawford). Back, Ent. News 23: 75. 1912. [New combination. ] Franklinothrips vespiformis (Crawford), Williams, Trinidad and Tobago Bull. 17: 143-144. 1918. [Description of larva.] Franklinothrips vespiformis (Crawford), Moulton, Rev. de Ent. 2: 464-465. 1932. [Description of oa.) Illustrations: Back, 1912; Crawford, D. L., 1909; Ebeling, 1950; Hood, 1915; Williams, 1918. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 1 Franklinothrips vespiformis, the genotype and the oldest known species in the genus, is well illus- trated in the literature and much described. It is the only Franklinothrips whose range extends northward into the boundaries of the United States. In the Nearctic region it occurs from southern Florida to southern California. Some variation has been noted in the width of the forewing and in the color of the third antennal segment and wings, but these varying conditions have not been considered as yet in detail for interpretation of clinal or subspecific significance. As a predator vespiformis is of benefit to growers of tropical fruits. Larvae have been ob- served by Ebeling (1950) feeding upon Heliothrips haemorhoidalis. Reijne (1921) reports them as natural enemies of Selenothrips rubrocinctus. An excellent photograph of the feeding attitude was published in Ebeling’s Subtropical entomology. Other hosts are red spider mites, Tetranychus yothersi. McG.; leafhoppers, [dona minuenda (Ball); and white flies, Trialeurodes floridensis Q. (Moznette, 1920). Young and adults of F. vespr- formis are often observed cn leaves of herbs, shrubs, and trees. I have found them also on grass growing in roadside ditches in Chiapas, Mexico. Pupal cocoons are spun on the under side of leaves (Moznette, 1920). These oval cocoons are composed of weak, loose mesh of silk several layers thick, surrounding the insect. Cocoon slides in the collection of the United States National Museum have within them either pupae or newly moulted females. The distribution of vespiformis is from Brazil to southern United States, including islands of the West Indies, but apparently it is more numer- ous in Central America than in South America. It has been collected from the following places: Trinidad (Williams, 1918); Nicaragua (Crawford, 1909); USA: Florida (Back 1912), Texas (Hood, 1913), California (Moulton, 1929), Arizona (INHS); Panama (Hood, 1913); Cuba (Watson, 1923); Honduras (Watson and Hubbell, 1924); Mexico (INHS); St. Vincent Island, West Indies (Bagnall, 1917); Brazil (Moulton, 1932, 1938); Surinam (Reijne, 1920). Franklinothrips fulgidus Hood Franklinothrips fulgidus Hood, Rev. de Ent. 20: 8-9, 2. 1949. [Type locality: Petropolis, R. J., Brazil.] Illustrations: Hood, 1949. JANUARY 1952 STANNARD: PHYLOGENETIC STUDIES OF FRANKLINOTHRIPS / MEGALOPS ERYTHROTHRIPS STOMATOTHRIPS FRANKLINOTHRIPS ARIZONAE FLAVUS VESPIFORMIS Fras. 1-6.—1-3, Franklinothrips, males, third antennal segments, dorsal aspect; 4-6, Aeolothripidae, females, fourth antennal segments, dorsal aspect. 18 JOURNAL OF THE Possibly fulgidus is most closely related to vespiformis. In coloration fulgidus has no basal dark cross bands on abdominal segments two and three and the tenth abdominal segment is dark. In contrast vespiformis has dark cross bands on the basal parts of abdominal segments two and three and the tenth abdominal segment is pale yellow. This species is known from Brazil by two females. Franklinothrips lineatus Hood Franklinothrips lineatus Hood, Rey. de Ent. 20: 4-6, #7, 2, 1949. [Type locality: Nova Teutonia, Brazil.] Illustrations: Hood, 1949. This species is the only member of the genus with blackish-bordered wings without cross bands, although the male has faint indications of cross banding in addition to the black border. It is also the only species that 1s not bicolored on the abdomen. Instead, at least in the female, the abdomen is uniformly dark brown in pigment. Nothing at all is known of its habits. It has been discovered just recently from Brazil. Franklinothrips megalops (Trybom) Mitothrips megalops Trybom, Ent. Tidskr. Arg. 33 H. 3-4: 147-151, o. 1912. [Type locality: Kibwezi, British East Africa.] Franklinothrips megalops (Trybom), Bagnall, Trans. 2d Ent. Congress (1912): 397. 1913. [New combination.] Mitothrips megalops Trybom, Bagnall, Journ. Econ. Biol. 8: 157-158. 1913 [Reconsidered, transferred from Franklinothrips back to original Mitothrips.| Franklinothrips myrmicaeformis Ganon, Atti Pontifica Acead. Sei. Nouvi Lincei 77 (separate) : 4-9, 2. 1924. [Type locality: Bengasi, Libya. New synonym, Bagnall, 1927.] Franklinothrips megalops (Trybom), Bagnall, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 17: 170. 1926. [Reconsidered, combined again with Franklinothrips.| Spathiothrips bischoffi Richter, Deutsch Ent. Zeitschr. H. 1: 33, @. 1928. [Type locality: Kwarangiva, German East Africa. New syn- onymy, Bagnall, 1931.] Franklinothrips aureus Moulton, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 17: 496-497, & (erroneously given as 9 in original description). 1936. [New synonymy.] Illustrations: Richter, 1928; Trybom, 1912; Zanon, 1924. This African species has been illustrated, de- scribed, and discussed frequently under several names. Bagnall (1915, 1926) and Richter (1928) were the only two thysanopterists who possibly recognized its close relationship to F’. tenuicornis, WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 1 a South American species. While neither of these authors always used the name tenuicornis, or even necessarily the name megalops, they did place the two entities together to form a group distinct from vesptformis. The recent discovery of the male of tenwicornis now permits, with reason- able certainty, the conclusions that both of these species, megalops and tenwicornis, are very simi- lar im all respects and both are more different from vespiformis than either is from the other, Possibly the Australian variegatus, another member of the megalops-tenwicornis group, is the closest relative of megalops. However, since there are no known males of variegatus for comparative studies and since the single type specimen of vartegatus is probably deformed, the exact rela- tionship of megalops and variegatus cannot be determined. My suspicion that awreus was based on a male specimen rather than a female as stated by Moulton (1936) was substantiated by Dr. China, who examined the unique type for me. Dr. China stated that the type slide had been labelled “= of of F. megalops” by Mr. F. Laing. The preceding key and the discussion under the section of phylogeny present points for the recog- nition of this species as well as evidence used in placing it near tenwicornis in the genus. Measurements of the antennae given in several of the descriptions and measurements I have made indicate some regional variation. If all the measurements and statements are correct, the fourth antennal segment of the male varies from about two times as long as the last five segments combined to nearly three times the length of the last five segments. Average antennal segment lengths of females of megalops and tenuicornis are similar to each other, but both differ considerably from their respective males. Like other Franklinothrips whose habits have been observed, megalops is also predatory. Dr. Ebeling has called my attention to an article written by Avidov and Ben-Haim in which they report megalops (under the name myrmicaeformzs) as being natural enemies of Heliothrips haemo- rhoidalis and Retithrips syriacus in Israel. Collections of megalops have been made from Kibwezi, British East Africa (Trybom, 1912); Bengasi, Libya (Zanon, 1924); German East Africa (Richter, 1928); Mossel Bay, Cape Prov- ince, South Africa (Bagnall, 1927, and Moulton, 1930); and Paoli, Italian Somaliland (material borrowed from H. Priesner). JANUARY 1952 Franklinothrips tenuicornis Hood Franklinothrips tenuicornis Hood, Ent. News 26: 164-165, 2. Mailed Mar. 31, 1915. [Type lo- eality: Moro Island, Panama.] Mitothrips petulans Bagnall, Linn. Soc. Journ. 32: 496-498, 2. Sept. 1915. [Type locality: Sangre Grande, Trinidad. New synonymy, Bag- nall, 1926.] ie Franklinothrips tenuicornis Hood, Williams, Trini- dad and Tabago Bull. 17: 1440. 1918. [De- seription of larvae.| Spathiothrips petulans (Bagnall), Richter, Deutsch Ent. Zeitschr. H. 1: 33-37. 1928. [New com- bination of synonym. ] Franklinothrips petulans (Bagnall), Moulton, Rev. de Ent. 2: 465. 1932. [New combination of synonym.] Illustrations: Bagnall, 1915; Hood, Reijne, 1920. Contrary to the contention made by Hood (1915) tenuicornis is most closely allied morpho- logically, character by character, to megalops rather than to vespiformis. Comparisons of these species are made in the section on phylogeny. Shared in common with vespiformis are areas of the range of tenwicornis since both species occur in Trinidad, Surinam, and Panama, and possibly 1915; in other parts of South America. Unlike vespi- - formis, tenuicornis does not extend into Central America. Description of male: Length distended about 1.7 mm. Body generally brown with much red to purplish-red subintegumental pigments; abdomi- nal segments 2 and 3 and tibiae, pale yellow; apices of femora light brownish yellow; tip of abdomen orange-yellow; antennal segments 1, base of 2, and all of 5 to 7 brown concolorous with head; tip of antennal segment 2, and all of segments 3 and 4 light brownish yellow; ocellar pigments crimson; forewings with three brown bands, one near base, one just beyond the middle and one at the tip of the wing; forewing scale possibly brownish. Head oval with large eyes and ocelli, with long interocellar setae, as in Fig. 8; antennal segments 3 and 4 with elaborate sensoria, finely divided by numerous ridges as in Fig. 2; segment’ 3 slightly longer than segment 4. Maxillary palps 3-seg- mented with almost no indications of subdivision marks in the second segment. Prothorax slightly narrower than head width. Abdomen unadorned by clasperlike processes as found in some males of Aeolothrips. Described from a male collected in a light trap at Madden Dam, Panama Canal Zone, on Febru- ary 1, 1946, by Dr. Eliot Williams. STANNARD: PHYLOGENETIC STUDIES OF FRANKLINOTHRIPS 19 Both C. B. Williams (1918) and Reijne (1920), have noted that the habits of tenwicornis are similar to those of vespiformis. Larvae of tenwi- cornis actually have been observed feeding on Selenothrips rubrocinctus, the Cacao thrips. An in- teresting account of the cocoon making activ- ities of tenwicornis was given by Reijne in 1920. According to this author, the prepupal stage does not occur; instead the larva passes directly into the pupal form. F. tenuicornis has been found in the following regions: Trinidad (Bagnall, 1915; Williams, 1918); Panama (Hood, 1915); Peru (USNM); Surinam (Reijne, 1920); Venezuela (Moulton, 1932); Brazil (Moulton, 1932, 1938). Franklinothrips variegatus Girault Franklinothrips variegatus Girault, Brisbane, Pri- vate publication, 2. 1927. [Type locality: Brigalow, Jandowae, Queensland, Australia.| In coloration and in structure variegatus, (Fig. 9) is most similar to the African megalops. Unlike megalops the legs of variegatus are darker; the first antennal segment is darker, lightly shaded with brown; the fourth antennal segment is en- tirely light yellow, nearly white, without brown at the apex; and the fourth antennal segment is slightly longer in proportion to the third segment in the female. Both antennal segments are detached beyond the third segment in the type slide. The detached portion of one antenna lies to the side under the cover slip; the remainder of the other antenna is missing. Most probably the present portion is of a deformed antenna because segments 7 and 8 are completely fused (Fig. 10). Such deformities are not uncommon in the Thysanoptera. It seems un- wise, therefore, to characterise this species as “having each antenna with but eight segments” on the basis of this one fragment. Girault, in his original description, stated: “Antennal 3 elongate, 5-74 + 4 which is shorter than 3.” By this remark Girault most likely meant that the length of segments 5, 6, and 7 together is 14 times longer than the segment 4 and that segment 4 is shorter than segment 3. To arrive at such a conclusion Girault must have con- sidered the fused seventh and eighth segment and the small ninth segment as one, the seventh seg- ment. Acutally the suture setting off the ninth segment is difficult to see in Girault’s slide prepa- ration. By this interpretation, even though in- correct, the combined length of segments 5, 6, and 7 is 14 times longer than the fourth. Some 20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 1 time later Kelly and Mayne (1934) reworded in the interpretation of Girault’s meaning but Girault’s remarks to state that the combined also in fact. The combined length oi segments 5, length of segments 5, 6, and 7 is equal to half the 6, and 7, whether the seventh is the “deformed” length of 4. Their rewording is in error, not only fused seventh and eighth, or the morphological VESPIFORMIS TENUICORNIS 7 j 8 VARIEGATUS 9 VARIEGATUS Fics. 7-10.—7, 8, Franklinothrips, males, heads, dorsal aspect; 9, 10, Franklinothrips variegatus: 9, Head, dorsal aspect, holotype; 10, outline of ‘‘deformed”’ antennal portion, holotype. JANUARY 1952 seventh segment, measured to the fusion line, is either slightly longer than the fourth, or very much longer than the fourth segment. Although described nearly a quarter century ago, presumably the type specimen, captured February 17, 1924, remains the only known repre- sentative of this species. It is the sole species of Franklinothrips in Australia. PHYLOGENY Guide points for the initial plotting of the phylogeny are more apparent in certain male structures in this genus. Variations in the shape of the third and fourth antennal seg- ments and their sensorial areas and the head outline are more markedly different between the males than between the females. Since these differences range from one type to another, a progression can be set up using any extreme as the starting place. After these characters have been correlated to establish the progressive trend, relationships of both ends of the trend (most like the prototype or most divergent) can be deter- mined by associating these ends with the rest of the family. Such a procedure was followed in determining what could be sur- mised of the phylogeny of Franklinothrips. Because two of the species are unknown in the male sex, only megalops, tenwidornis, vespiformis, and lineatus were considered for exact relationships. Figs. 1 and 2 of the third antennal segment illustrate the greatest divergence in antennal types. The fourth segment resembles the third except that it differs in size. In vespr- formis the third segment is shorter and wider than in its congeners, and the sensorial membrane is less subdivided by ridges. On the other hand, tenwicornis and megalops, both similar to each other, have a more slender and longer third and fourth segment, and the sensoria have many numerous ridges subdividing them. Possibly near the latter extreme is the antennal type found in lineatus. Although Hood in 1949, called the sensoria of lineatus colorless and reticulated ventral and lateral areas, his drawing of the fourth antennal segment shows that this colorless region is that part of the antennae that is referred to here as a sensorium. In some respects the sensoria of lineatus are more like lenwcornis and megalops in the STANNARD: PHYLOGENETIC STUDIES OF FRANKLINOTHRIPS 21 fourth segment and presumably also in the third segment. Two types of head outlines exist in the males. The oval-shaped head with relatively smaller compound eyes, as in vespiformis (Fig. 7), differs from the round head and relatively larger compound eyes of megalops and tenuicornis (Fig. 8). Again, compared with Hood’s illustrations, the head of lineatus appears to be intermediate between the round and oval types. The lineatus head is oval but the eyes are proportionately larger than those of vespiformis, approaching more closely the eye shapes found in megalops and tenwcornis. By so sorting these several characteristics and correlating them, the empirical phylo- genetic tree shown in Fig. 11, is suggested. The species fulgidus and variegatus are placed on this tree solely on the basis of color similarities. Whether the genus originated as a form similar to vespiformis or instead similar to megalops, or even by a form intermediate to these two, possibly like lineatus, is the next aspect to be considered. To attempt deter- mination of this starting point it is neces- sary to examine the family Aeolothripidae of which Franklinothrips is a part. When the extremes of some characteristics of many species of the family Aeolothripidae were established and intermediate types plotted between the extremes, a sort of rectilinear progression was noted. A very variegatus megalops tenuicornis lineatus vespiformis fulgidus (Australia) (Africa) (So.Am.) (So.Am.) (Cent.Am.) (So.Am.) World dispersal 1 t é head round éhead oval 6 intermediate (So.Am.) ' 1 ' a SSOoee Sse Sorc Ve H ' (So.Am.) Prototype of Franklinothrips Fic. 11.—Family tree of the genus Franklin- othrips showing possible historical distribution. 22 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES gradual progression occurs from short to long third and fourth antennal segments, from small circular to elongate linear third and fourth antennal sensoria, from pupation in the soil to pupation on leaves, and from flower inhabitors to roving predators. Franklinothrips finds its place in this scheme at one extreme end of its family. This genus represents that end of the pro- gression having the longest third and fourth antennal segments, having the most elaborate elongate sensoria on these two seg- ments, besides being predators and using leaves for pupation sites. The species tenwicornis and megalops, be- ‘ause they possess the longest third and fourth antennal segments with the most subdivisions in the sensoria of these seg- ments, would be the most extreme forms of the genus and of the family. Therefore, it is reasonable to presume that either lineatus or vespiformis both having less elaborately formed antennae are closer to the prototype than is the megalops group. Because I have not had the opportunity to examine a male of lineatus I am unable to continue the analysis to decide whether Franklinothrips arose from a_ lineatus-like species or a vespiformis-like species. However, it seems probable that both lineatus and vespiformis are specialized themselves and that the ancestor of the genus, while near the latter two species, was even more primitive. This ancestor could have been a Stomatothrips derivative. Development of the peculiar sensoria of the Franklinothrips can be traced from clues derived from living forms. Figs. 4, 5, and 6 show the sensoria of females in three genera. A progression goes from the smaller linear type in Erythrothrips to the more elongated sensoria of Stomatothrips to the extremely elongated form in Franklinothrips. Faint indications of sensorial subdivisions first appear in Stomatothrips. A broadening of the sensoria to cover the entire surface of the third and fourth antennal segments has evolved in the male sex only of the Franklinothrips whereas the Franklinothrips female has preserved the Sfomatothrips type more closely. Huceratothrips Hood, another aeolothripid, likewise has elaborate sensoria, but, while similar in some respects vou. 42, No. l to the sensoria of Franklinothrips males, the sensoria of Huceratothrips is formed in a different manner (see Hood, Rev. de Ent. 6: 425-429, 1936). In North America, the closest relative of Franklinothrips is Stomatothrips. In addi- tion to the similarities in the sensoria, both have narrow wings, slightly broader at the apex; their maxillary palpi are somewhat the same, although in Stomatothrips the third segment is usually completely sub- divided several times whereas only indica- tions of subdivision are usual in Franklino- thrips; and even the habits of the two may be similar for I have collected species of each of these genera from ecological niches that are grossly the same. Corynothripoides Bagnall, in most classi- fications, 1s placed with Franklinothrips in the tribe Franklhnothripini. Whether Coryno- thripoides is closer to Franklinothrips than to Stomatothrips on all characteristics is not clear to me. I have never seen Coryno- thripoides nor do the descriptions of this genus include information on the condition of all of the characters that I have studied in Stomatothrips and Franklinothrips. NOMENCLATORIAL REMARKS Three species, now in other genera, have been assigned to Franklinothrips for a brief time. Should names be designated subse- quently to true Franklinothrips which are identical to the names of these three species, the thorny problem of secondary homonyms might be raised. Most certainly, circumven- tion of such difficulties by the avoidance of these names would be an advantage. The three species involved are listed below with references. These names would best not be used again in Franklinothrips. Franklinothrips insularis (Franklin): Franklinothr. insularis (Fr.). Girault, New pests from Australia, VIII. Private publication, Brisbane, Aug. 16, 1930. [Misstatement for Frankliniella insularis Franklin. Corrected by Girault Dec. 29, 1930, in ‘‘New pests from Australa, IX,”’ Brisbane.] Franklinothrips longiceps (Crawford) : Franklinothrips longiceps (Crawford), Bagnall, Trans. 2nd Ent. Congress (1912): 397, 1913. [New combination from Aeolothrips. Reas- signed to Aeolothrips, Hood, 1915.] JANUARY 1952 MATTOX: NEW GENUS AND Pranklinothrips nasturtw (Jones): Pranklinothrips nasturtti (Jones), Bagnall, Trans. 2d Ent. Congress (1912): 397, 1913. [New combination from Aeolothrips. Reas- signed to Aeolothrips, Hood, 1915.] LITERATURE Back, E. A. Notes on Florida Thysanoptera, with description of a new genus. Ent. News 28: 73-77. 1912. BaAGNALL, R.S. A synopsis of the thysanopterous family Aeolothripidae. Trans. 2d Ent. Con- gress, 1912: 394-397. 1913a. Notes on Aeolothripidae, with description of a new species. Journ. Econ. Biol. 8: 154- 158. 1913b. On a collection of Thysanoptera from the West Indies, with descriptions of new genera and species. Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., 32: 495-507. 1915. On a collection of Thysanoptera from St. Vincent, with descriptions of four new species. Journ. Zool. Res. 2: 21-27. 1917. The family Franklinothripidae, nov., with description of a new type of Thysanopteron. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 17: 168-173. 1926. Contributions towards a knowledge of the European Thysanoptera—IT. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 19: 564-575. 1927. On the aeolothripid complex and the classt- fication of the sub-order Terebrantia (Thysanop- tera). Ges. Luxemberger Naturf. 25: 115-118. 1931. CrawrorD, D. L. Some Thysanoptera of Mexico and the South, I. Pomona Coll. Journ. Ent. 1(4): 109-119. 1909. Esevine, W. Subtropical entomology: 747 pp. San Francisco, 1950. SPECIES OF LIMNADIIDAE 23 Grrautr, A. A. New Australian animals so far overlooked by outsiders. Private publication: 2 pp. Brisbane, 1927. Hoop, J. D. Ona collection of Thysanoptera from Panama. Psyche 20: 119-124. 1913. On some American Aeolothripidae (Thy- sanoptera). Ent. News 26: 162-166. 1915. Brasilian Thysanoptera, I. Rev. de Ent. 20 (1-3): 3-88. 1949. Ikeviy, R., anp Mayne, R. J.B. Vhe Australian thrips, a monograph of the order Thysanoptera in Australia: 81 pp. Sydney, 1934. Mouton, D. TVhysanoptera from Africa. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 5: 194-207. 1930. The Thysanoptera of South America (1). Rev. de Ent. 2: 451-484. 1982. Thysanoptera from Africa. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 17: 493-509. 1936. Moznertte, G. F. Annotated list of the injurious and beneficial insects of the Avocado in Florida. Florida Buggist 3 (Dec. 1919): 45-48. 1920. PrresneR, H. Genera Thysanopterorum. Bull. Soc. Fouad Ent. 33: 31-157. 1949. REWwNE, A. A cocoonspinning thrips. Tijdschr. Ent. 63: 40-45. 1920. Ricuter, W. J. Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Aeolo- thripiden (Thysanoptera). Deutsch. Ent. Zeitschr. H. 1: 29-87. 1928. Trysom, F. Mitothrips, eine newe Physapoden- Gattung aus Britischen Ostafrika. Ent. Tidskr. Aig. 33 (3-4): 145-159. 1912. Watson, J.R. Synopsis and catalog of the Thysan- optera of North America. Univ. Florida Agr. Exp. Stat. Tech. Bull. 168: 1-100. 1923. Wiiiiams, C. B. Notes on some Trinidad thrips of economic importance. Trinidad and Tobago Bull. 17: 143-146. 1918. ZANON,D.V. Nowva specie di ((Franklinothrips) ) (Thysanoptera) rinvenuta a Bengasi. Atti Pon- tificia Accad. Sei. Nuovi Lincei 77: 1-9 (separate). 1924. ZOOLOGY —A new genus and species of Limnadiidae from Venezuela (Crustacea: Conchostraca). N. T. Marrox, College of Agriculture and Mechanic Arts, Mayagiiez, Puerto Rico.! (Communicated by F. A. Chace, Jr.) While making collections for the Venezuelan Scientific Expedition conducted by the Uni- versity of Puerto Rico, one of the collectors, Jenaro Maldonado Capriles, observed many temporary rain pools which contained con- chostracan phyllopods. One collection of 10 males and 11 females was made in a rock pool near Samariapo, Venezuela, on June 11, 1950. According to Mr. Maldonado, these animals were very abundant and many pools were inhabited by them, but only one collec- tion was made. Study of these animals indi- cated that they are members of the family 1 Contribution from the Department of Bi- ology, College of Agricultural and Mechanic Arts University of Puerto Rico, Mayagiiez, P. R. Limnadiidae but are intergeneric in char- acter and referable to a distinct and previously undescribed genus. Metalimnadia, n. gen. Generic designation.—Conchostracan phyllo- pods with 7 to 13 lines of growth in the adult, and a prominent anteriorly located umbo on the shell. Head without fornice: the prehensile frontal organ rudimentary and not pyriform. First an- tennae with two segments. Occipital notch prom- inent. Sixteen pairs of swimming appendages; first two pairs of male with prehensile claws; female ninth and tenth pairs with very long epipodite of exopodite for bearing eggs. Inferior, distal angle of telson with a small spime. The 24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES posterior 15 of the body segments bear one or more dorsal spines. Genotype: Metalimnadia serratura, n. sp. Metalimnadia serratura, n. sp. Description —Male: The male shell is elongate oval with a prominent umbo at one-fifteenth of the distance from the anterior margin (Fig. la). The number of lines of growth varies from 11 to 13, with much crowding at the anterior end of the shell. The dorsal margin is straight except at the posterior slope of the shell; the ventral margin is regularly rounded. The size of the adult shell averages 5.88 by 3.66 mm, varying from 5.5 mm long by 3.7 mm wide to 6.0 by 3.8 mm; the great- est height is just posterior to the middle. The height-length ratio averages 1 :1.54. The head presents definite generic and specific characters (Fig. 1b). The dorsal “frontal organ” is very rudimentary, being raised only slightly as a rounded knob with a central concavity. The front of the head is deeply concave with the rostrum extending in a very pronounced hooklike beak. The first antennae are distinctive in that they have two segments, the distal one clavate. The second antennae are biramous, each branch with nine segments and each segment with a vary- ing number of long, dorsal spines. The occipital notch is prominent. The ocellus is very pronounced. The body bears 16 pairs of swimming ap- pendages. The first and second pairs are modified into typical claspers. The claspers of the first pair are very broad; the fourth endite has a short knoblike lateral extension, and the two segments of the sixth endite are approximately of equal length (Fig. 1c). The claspers of the second pair are more slender; the terminal segment of the sixth endite is approximately 1.5 times longer » than the first segment (Fig. 1d). The exopodites on both pais of claspers are very short. The branchiae, as on the other appendages, are broad. The dorsal surface of the first body segment is bare; the other segments bear 1 to 5 dorsal spines, those on the posterior segments being longer and more slender (Fig. le). An example of a typical spine formula is: 0-1—2-2-2-3-3-4-4-4-5-4-4 3-1-1. The telson is very truncate. The dorsal ridges of the telson are regularly serrated with an average number of 12 evenly spaced and _ pro- nounced sawtoothlike spines; a biramous fila- mentous spine arises between the third and vou. 42, no. I fourth dorsal spines. The pair of ventral, pos- terior, movable spines have bristlelike spines on the proximal portion with microspines on the sharply attenuated terminal portion. On the in- ferior distal margin of the telson is a small spine. Female: The female shell is similar to, but smaller than, that of the male. It is more ven- tricose and more rounded on the dorsal margin than in the male (Fig. 1f). The umbo is less pro- nounced and there is a median, shallow indenta- tion on the ventral margin. The usual number of growth lines is 10, with a variation from 7 to 10. In size the female shell averages 4.94 mm long by 3.39 mm in height. The variation in the 11 females is from 4.5 mm by 3.0 mm to 5.4 by 3.5 mm. The height-length ratio is 1:1.45. The head of the female is smaller and less elongate, but similar to that of the male. The front is deeply concave, the rostrum beaklike. The ocellus is very pronounced, the frontal organ very rudimentary, and the first antennae 2-seg- mented (Fig. Lh). The 16 pairs of trunk appendages are swim- ming legs typical of the group. The first pair have well marked endites; the sixth endite ex- tends about to the end of the fifth endite (Fig. 11). The branchiae, as in the male, are very broad. The ninth and tenth pairs of legs possess a greatly extended basal exopodite flabellum for the at- tachment and carrying of eggs; this flabellum is twice as long as the length of the rest of the ap- pendage (Fig. 1}). The eggs are spherical, with rough surface, and average 0.3 mm in diameter (Fig. 1g). The dorsal ridges of the trunk segments are variously spined as in the male, and the telson is similar to that of the male. Type locality —Samariapo, Territorio Ama- zonas, Venezuela. Types.—Holotype, male, U.S.N.M. no. 92292, and paratypes, both sexes, U.S.N.M. no. 92293, in the U.S. National Museum and in the writer’s collection. Remarks.—Metalimnadia serratura differs from other members of the family Limnadiidae in so many characters as to nearly warrant a subfamily or separate family designation. However, the general form of the body, number of trunk ap- pendages, form of the telson, and the first two pairs of male claspers, find closer resemblance in the Limnadiidae than in any of the other con- chostracan families. Many of the other morpho- logical characters, however, are very different from those of other Limnadiidae. JANUARY 1952 MATTOX: NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF LIMNADIIDAE 25 The shell of MM. serratura is more estheriudlike growth lines or an umbo as well developed. In than it is like the shells of the other Limnadidae. Limnadia, only the male of L. stanleyana King No member of the genus Hulimnadia hasasmany from Australia has a shell with a well-pronounced Fre. 1.—Metalimnadia serratura, n. gen., n. sp. a-e, male: a, Lateral view of shell: 6, lateral view of head; c, first pair of claspers; d, second pair of claspers; e, lateral view of trunk and telson. f-}, female: f, Lateral view of shell; g, an egg; h, lateral view of head; 7, a first trunk appendage; 7, tenth trunk appendage. Scales a, b, e, f, h equal 1 mm; c, d, i, j equal 0.5mm; gequals0.l mm. 26 umbo and as many lines of growth. The female of this latter species has a very different shell. All species of Limnadiopsis, the other genus of the family, are unique in having a very noticeably serrated dorsal shell margin. The head characters of M. serratura are very different from those of the other members of the family, although the general form of the head is similar to that of the other genera. As indicated by Daday (1915, 1925) the Limnadiidae are char- acterized by a prominent, pyriform frontal ap- pendage. This frontal organ in M. serratura is very rudimentary, not pyriform, and it is raised only slightly above the dorsal surface of the head. What may be the evolutionary status of this very characteristic limnadiid feature among the dif- ferent genera cannot be indicated at this time. The first antennae of all the other members of the family are elongate, unsegmented appendages with a series of dorsally located sensory papillae. The 2-segmented first antennae of M. serratura are more like those of the Lynceidae than any other of the Conchostraca. These appendages are strongly diagnostic for the present genus and species. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 1 As pointed out by Linder (1945) many species of Limnadia have only 16 pairs of trunk ap- pendages, as does M. serratura. Other members of the family may have up to 32 pairs. The first two pairs of male claspers are characteristic, but, as on the other trunk appendages, the branchiae are much larger and proportionately wider than in the other genera. The egg-bearing exopodite of the ninth and tenth female appendages is pro- portionately much longer than typically found in the Limnadiidae. The telson, with the inferior distal spine, is more like that of Hulimnadia, than that of the other genera. It seems as if this species, Metalimnadia serra- tura, represents a newly found intergeneric line of evolution in the family Limnadiidae. LITERATURE CITED Dapbay DE Ders, E. Monographie systématique des phyllopodes conchostracés. Ann. Sci. Nat., Zool., ser. 9, 20: 39-192. 1915. Ibid., ser. 10, 8: 143-184. 1925. LinpeEr, Fouke. Affinities within the Branchiopoda, with notes on some dubious fossils. Ark. fiir Zool. 37(4): 1-28. 1945. HELMINTHOLOGY .—Some cestodes from Oregon shrews, with descriptions of four new species of Hymenolepis Weinland, 1858. Berry Lockmr, Reed College, Portland, Oreg., and Ropert Rauscu, Arctic Health Research Center, Anchor- age, Alaska. A large number of shrews of the genus Sorex has been examined in connection with the investigation of the helminth parasites of Oregon mammals. It is the purpose of this paper to give a preliminary list of the cestodes obtained from these shrews, to- gether with the description of new species. More complete information on these and other helminths will be published by one of us (B. L.) at a later date. The helminths reported here have been collected from Sorex v. vagrans Baird, the most common shrew of western Oregon dur- ing the time these collections were made. Host determinations were made by compar- ing our material with specimens in the mammal collections of the U. 8. National Museum. In addition to the species herein described, we have also recorded three previously de- scribed cestodes from Oregon shrews. These observations appear to be the first to be. made on cestodes in shrews from the Pacific coast region. Each species is considered sep- arately below. Protogynella blarinae Jones, 1943 This minute cestode of uncertain status was found to occur commonly in Oregon shrews. The Oregon specimens were not considered in detail, since another worker has already undertaken the restudy of the species; however, as far as was determined these cestodes were morphologically identical with those found in shrews (Sorex c. cinereus Kerr; Blarina brevicauda Say) in the eastern States. It was noted, however, that the Oregon specimens had a much larger number of hooks than was reported from Wisconsin shrews (Rausch and Kuns, 1950). Because of the minute size and proximity of these rostellar hooks, an accurate count was impossible; however, the number is near one hundred. Whether or not this represents only variation can be determined on the basis of the study of specimens from different geographical locations. Ni JANUARY 1952 LOCKER AND RAUSCH: CESTODES FROM OREGON SHREWS y 9 1Ou Se Fics. 1-10.—1, Seolex of H. macyi; 2, mature segment of H. macyi; 8, mature segment of H. kenki; 4, scolex of H. kenki; 5, mature segment of H. sphenomorphus; 6, scolex of H. sphenomorphus; 7, rostellar hook of H. sphenomorphus; 8, scolex of H. intricatus; 9, rostellar hook of H. tntricatus; 10, mature seg- ment of, H. intricatus. 28 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Hymenolepis falculata Rausch and Kuns, 1950 Although not a common species when com- pared with some of the other cestodes occurring in Oregon shrews, H. falculata was collected fre- quently. This is perhaps the most common species occurring in Sorex cinereus in southern Wisconsin, but it has not yet been recorded from other localities. The specimens examined from 5S. vagrans were morphologically identical with mate- rial from the type locality. Hymenolepis schilleri Rausch and Kuns, 1950 The study of abundant material from Oregon shrews has allowed some further observations on the morphology of H. schilleri, which so far is known only from the two specimens upon which the original description was based. It has been found that the number of rostellar hooks is vari- able, and a maximum number of 32 has been recorded. In regard to other morphological char- acters, the original description is adequate. Hymenolepis macyi, n. sp. Migs. 1525 11 Diagnosis —Hymenolepididae. Strobila length up to 2 mm; greatest width, attained in gravid segments, 500u. Strobila characterized by rela- tively large size of gravid segments, up to 500 by 250u. Transition from immature to mature seg- ments, and from mature to gravid segments, very abrupt; this results in tripartite appearance of strobila. There are usually 4 to 6 segments in each (immature, mature, and gravid) section of strobila, with maximum possible segment number about 18. Immature and early mature segments wider than long; late mature segments nearly square; gravid segments oval. Scolex 180 to 230. in diameter, strongly set off from neck; rostellum absent. Suckers oval, about 100u long. Genital pores unilateral and dextral, situated near an- terior end of margin of segment. Cirrus sac, as much as 400u long by 70m wide, extends nearly across mature segment to anterior aporal corner. Cirrus unarmed. External seminal vesicle strongly developed. Testes in mature segments measure about 354 in diameter, and are situated in diagonal row with aporal testis most anterior. Vagina, about Sy in diameter in mature segments, situated ventral to cirrus sac; it narrows abruptly just poral to ovary. Seminal receptacle not noted. Ovary trilobed, situated near center of segment; two lobes posterior and one anterior. Ovarian lobes subspherical, each about 30y in diameter in mature segments. Vitelline gland on midline of vou. 42, No. 1 segment at posterior edge of ovary, and ventral to it. Development of uterus abrupt; gravid segment capsulelike, with thick parenchyma around egg- filled uterus. Genital ducts persist in terminal segments. Eggs spherical, from 30 to 32 in diameter. Host.—Sorex v. vagrans Baird. Type locality—Portland, Oreg. Habitat—Small intestine. Type.—A slide containing an entire specimen has been deposited in the Helminthological Col- lection of the U.S. National Museum, no. 47531. Hymenolepis macyt appears to be well char- acterized by the unusual gross appearance of the strobila, and can be differentiated on this basis from the other unarmed soricid species of Hy- menolepis (H. alpestris Baer, 1931; H. antho- cephalus Van Gundy, 1935; H. diaphana Kholodkowski, 1906; H. globosa Baer, 1931; H. minuta Baer, 1926; H. soricis Baer, 1925). It can be further differentiated on the basis of cirrus sac position and size, arrangement of testes and ovary, and egg size. This cestode is named in honor of Dr. Ralph W. Macy, chairman, department of biology, Reed College, Portland, Oreg. This opportunity is taken to express appreciation of his providing facilities and working space in connection with part of this work. Hymenolepis kenki, n. sp. Figs. 3, 4, 12 Diagnosis.—Hymenolepididae. Strobila 1 to 2 mm long; greatest width, attamed in gravid seg- ments, slightly over 200u. Strobila consists of about 50 segments, all wider than long with a slight relative increase in length in gravid seg- ments. Scolex 280 to 340u in diameter; rostellum absent. Suckers strongly developed, elliptical, about 180u long. Genital pores unilateral and dextral, situated near middle of segmental margin. Cirrus sac, usually about 100g long by about 204 wide in mature segments, extends aporally to just beyond midline of segment. Cirrus thickly set with fine spines. External seminal vesicle present. Testes spherical, about 30 in diameter in mature segments; situated in straight lime with two aporal and one poral. Vagina ventral to cirrus sac; diameter uniform and course direct as far aporal as poral margin of ovary. Seminal receptacle not evident. Ovary subspherical, about 304 in length, situated near midline of segment. Vitelline gland ventral to ovary. Uterus appears early in strobila as spheri- January 1952 eal body which gradually enlarges to fill entire eravid segment. Eggs apparently spherical, 19 to 224 in diameter; fully-developed eggs in terminal segments highly distorted by fixation in all avail- able material. Host.—Sorex v. vagrans Baird. Type locality —Portland, Oreg. Habitat—Small intestine. Type—A slide containing paratype material has been deposited in the Helminthological Col- lection of the U. S. National Museum, no. 47532. On the basis of testes arrangement (straight line) as well as by other morphological char- acters, H. kenki can be differentiated from the soricid species of Hymenolepis which have the testes arranged in a triangle (H. anthocephalus Van Gundy, 1935; H. alpestris Baer,-1931; H. 25 yu LOCKER AND RAUSCH: CESTODES FROM OREGON SHREWS 29 diaphana Kholodkowski, 1906; H. globosa Baer, 1931). It may be differentiated from H. minuta Baer, 1926, and from H. soricis Baer, 1925, which also have the testes arranged in a straight line, by size and relative length of cirrus sac, by egg size (?), and other morphological characters. However, HH. soricis is poorly known, and H. minuta was described on the basis of an immature specimen. This cestode is named in honor of Dr. Roman Kenk, of Washington, D. C. Hymenolepis sphenomorphus, n. sp. Figs. 5-7, 13 Diagnosis.—_Hymenolepididae. Strobila length up to 800z; greatest width, attained in terminal segments, about 200u. Wedge-shaped strobila of 13 Fies. 11-15.—11, Entire strobila of H. macy; 12, entire strobila of H. kenk?; 13, entire strobila of H. sphenomorphus; 14, semidiagrammatic drawing of cirrus (A) and vagina (B) of H. intricatus, showing attachment; 15, entire strobila of H. intricatus. (Figs. 11, 12, 18, and 15 all drawn to same scale with the aid of a projector.) 30 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES characteristic gross appearance. Segments, about 15 in number, wider than long; they become relatively longer when gravid. Strobila margins serrate. Scolex 90u in diameter, distinctly set off from neck. Rostellum well developed, armed with 10 hooks 16 to 20u long. Suckers elliptical, about 45u long. Genital pores unilateral and dextral, situated near middle of margin of segment. Cirrus sac attains length of 110 and width of 25y in mature segments, and extends aporally beyond midline of segment. Cirrus strongly developed, and furnished with spined terminal knob 30 to 32u in diameter. External seminal vesicle present. Subspherical to ovoid testes about 35y in diameter in mature segments; testes arranged in straight line, with two poral to ovary, and one aporal. Thin-walled vagina ventral to cirrus sac; about 204 in diameter near genital pore. Vagina nar- rows abruptly to slender duct at distance of about 604 from poral margin of segment; small seminal receptacle formed just poral to ovary. Ovary subspherical, about 35, in diameter, situ- ated aporal of midline ventral to testes. Vitelline gland ovoid, situated ventral to ovary. Uterus gradually enlarges in central part of segment; gravid segments completely filled with eggs. Eggs measure 16 to 19x. Host.—Sorex v. vagrans Baird. Type locality—Multnomah Falls, Oreg. Habitat —Smaill intestine. Type.—A slide containing an entire specimen has been deposited in the Helminthological Col- lection of the U. 8. National Museum, no. 47533. Hymenolepis sphenomorphus is characterized grossly by the very small, wedge-shaped strobila in combination with the extreme relative size of the cirrus. It is differentiated from the other soricid species which have 10 hooks (H. blarinae Rausch and Kuns, 1950; H. jacobsont von Linstow, 1907; H. parva Rausch and Kuns, 1950; H. scutigera (Dujardin, 1845); H. singularis Kholodkowski, 1913) by differences in hook size and shape, size and location of cirrus sac, and character of the cirrus. Six specimens of this cestode were obtained from a shrew captured under a log along the Columbia River near Multnomah Falls. This parasite was collected but once, and was the least common form considered here. Hymenolepis intricatus, n. sp. Figs. 8-10, 14, 15 Diagonsis—Hymenolepdidiae. Strobila length 1.2 to 2mm; greatest width, attained near middle vou. 42, no. 1 of strobila, about 1004. Strobila margins not serrate; all segments wider than long. Total number of segments 60 to 75. Scolex strongly developed, 160 to 180u in diameter; distinctly set off from unsegmented neck. Rostellum well developed, armed with 10 hooks 17 to 21 long. Suckers 90 to 100, long. Genital pores unilateral and dextral, situated near middle of margin of segment on projection of segmental margin. Cir- rus sac large, attaining length of 75 by 16y in mature segments, and extending aporally nearly to margin of segment. External seminal vesicle well developed. Cirrus spinose and slender. Testes situated in diagonal line, all aporal of midline. Spherical testes measure about 10u in mature segments. Vagina thin-walled, of about same diameter as cirrus sac. Terminal part of vagina highly specialized, having a bulblike, heavily spined section which adjoins a terminal, funnel- like structure whose wall is supported by several rigid spicules. This organ is capable of being ex- truded, and appears to function in connection with clasping during copulation. No seminal receptacle noted. Ovary subspherical, up to 20u long in mature segments. Vitelline gland not ob- served. Uterus develops gradually as single body; gravid segments completely filled with eggs. Eggs ovoid, apparently about 25, in length; accurate measurement prevented by distortion resulting from fixation. Host.—Sorex v. vagrans Baird. Type locality Portland, Oreg. Habitat—Small intestine. Type.—A slide bearing paratype material has been deposited in the Helminthological Collection of the U.S. National Museum, no. 47534. This species may be differentiated from related forms having 10 hooks (see above) on the basis of hook size and shape, size and position of cirrus sac and other genital organs, and particularly by the apparently unique development of the termi- nal part of the vagina. The finer details of the vagina of this cestode could not be completely worked out, because of the extremely small size; however, it is evident that the vagina demonstrates a much higher degree of specialization than is ordinarily seen in the species of Hymenolepis. The vagina is capable of being extruded to a distance of more than 20 behond the margins of the genital atrium, which itself possesses a thick, chitinlike wall. The heavy spicules seen in the terminal part of the vagina seem to act as a support for this structure, but their function is not clearly understood. From ob- JANUARY 1952 servations on a large series of these cestodes, it is concluded that once contact is established be- tween the cirrus and vagina, separation may not often occur. Both intersegmental and _ inter- strobilar copulation were recognized, and in the case of the latter, apparently as a result of manipulation when the worms were removed from the host, it was commonly seen that either the vagina or cirrus was torn completely free from the segment. This resulted in the two organs remain- ing tightly attached (Fig. 15). This cestode was frequently observed in Oregon shrews and was one of the common species, along with H. macyi and H. kenkv. DISCUSSION The description of the four species of ces- todes here brings the total number of species recorded from North American shrews to 11. All the North American species are well characterized and can be readily differenti- ated. It would appear that the species of Hymenolepis parasitic in North American shrews have evolved quite separately from those found in the Eurasian mammals, since no Eurasian species has so far been recorded from North America. When more nearly complete information has been obtained there may be derived from it some under- FRIEDMANN: LONG-TAILED SUGARBIRD 31 standing of the zoogeographically important implications which are involved. SUMMARY Seven species of cestodes have been re- corded from Oregon shrews (Sorex v. vagrans Baird). Of these, Protogynella blarinae Jones, 1943, Hymenolepis falculata Rausch and Kuns, 1950, and H. schillerr Rausch and Kuns, 1950, are recorded here for the first time from the western part of North Amer- ica. Four species of Hymenolepis, H. macyz, H. kenki, H. sphenomorphus, and H. intrica- tus, are described as new. REFERENCES Bakr, J. G. Cestodes de mammiferes. 2. Une nou- velle espece d’Hymenolepsis parasite d’un in- sectivore. Bull. Soc. Neuchatel. Sci. Nat. 50: 80-81. 1925. ——. Contribution a la faune helminthologique de Suisse. Rev. Suisse Zool. 39: 1-57. 1932. Jonus, A. W. Protogynella blarinae n.g., n.sp., a new cestode from the shrew, Blarina brevicauda Say. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc. 62: 169-173. 1943. JoyrEux, Cu., and Bamr, J. G. Cestodes. Faune de France 30, 610 pp. Paris, 1936. Rauscu, R., and Kuns, M. L. Studies on some North American shrew cestodes. Journ. Para- sitol. 36: 433-438. 1950. Van Gunpy, C. O. Hymenolepis anthocephalus, a new tapeworm from the mole shrew, Blarina brevicauda Say. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc. 54: 240-244. 1935. ORNITHOLOGY .— The long-tailed sugarbird of eastern Rhodesia! HERBERT FRIED- MANN, U. 8. National Museum. In his second paper on the birds of Gaza- land, Swynnerton (Ibis, 1908: 31-32) re- corded the Natal long-tailed sugarbird from the scrub-grown kloofs of the Melsetter District, extreme eastern Southern Rhodesia, and remarked that the bird was previously unknown north of the Limpopo, being re- corded only from Natal, Swaziland, and the Transvaal. However, some eight years earlier Stark (Fauna of South Africa, Birds, 1, 273. 1900) included Gazaland in the range of the species, although on what basis he did so is a mystery as there appear to be no published records prior to Swynnerton’s. Indeed, 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. For the loan of speci- mens for study in the present connection I am in- debted to the authorities of the American Museum of Natural History, the Chicago Natural History Museum, and the National Museum of Southern Rhodesia. several authors, such as Shelley and Reichenow, who refer to Stark’s book, give the distribution of the species merely as Natal, Zululand, and the Transvaal, and either overlooked or doubted the stated oc- currence in Gazaland. Since Swynnerton’s day no notable extension of range has been reported for the bird in spite of very con- siderable work in eastern parts of the Union of South Africa, Southern Rhodesia, and Portuguese East Africa. It appears, then, that the bird has a very discontinuous range, which, in light of present knowledge, may be stated as from Pondoland in the eastern Cape Province, through Natal, Zululand, Swaziland, and the Drakensberg Mountains north to the Zoutpansberg area of the eastern Transvaal, and then again, after a long geo- graphic gap of at least 200 miles of unsuitable 32 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES country, in the Melsetter District of South- ern Rhodesia, near the Portuguese border. Populations that are strikingly isolated geographically frequently reveal morphologi- cal characters worthy of nomenclatural recognition, and I was interested to examine and to compare Melsetter Promerops with others from eastern South Africa. When in Southern Rhodesia in 1950 I was able to acquire from Capt. Cecil D. Priest a number of birds he had obtained some years earlier in Gazaland, and among them was a fine adult male Promerops. Through the kindness of Reay H. N. Smithers, two additional ex- amples (adult females) from Rocklands, in the Melsetter area, in the collections of the National Museum of Southern Rhodesia, have been made available to me for study. These three birds have been compared care- fully with six examples of typical gurney from Natal and the northeastern Transvaal, and prove to represent a readily distinguish- able race, which may be known as Promerops cafer ardens, n. subsp. Type.—U.S.N.M. no. 433386, ad. @, collected at Melsetter, Southern Rhodesia, May 13, 1939, by Cecil Damer Priest; orig. no. 290. Subspecific character—Similar to Promerops cafer gurneyi, but with the pectoral band con- spicuously brighter and darker—between Hazel? and Mikado Brown, as opposed to Sayal Brown in gurneyt, with the rump and upper tail coverts less yellowish, more greenish—dusky Warbler Green as compared with Pyrite Yellow in gurneyz, with the upperparts generally darker, the centers of the feathers blacker—Chaetura Black (Fuscous in gurneyt), the cheeks darker—dusky Olive Brown (Drab in gurneyt), the tail feathers darker, the median ones more blackish below than in gurneyt, and the streaks on the sides and flanks are more blackish, less brownish than in the birds of the highlands of Natal and the north- eastern Transvaal. An adult male from Wood- bush, northeastern Transvaal, agrees with topo- typical gurneyt from Natal in all the color characters. There seem to be no significant differ- ences in dimensions between the two races, al- though not enough specimens have been available for measurement to be certain. The measurements of the type of P. c. ardens are wing 92, tail 170; culmen from the base 31.8, exposed culmen 26.2; 2 Capitalized color terms ex Ridgway, Color standards and color nomenclature. vou. 42, No. 1 tarsus 19.6 mm. The two females measure—wing 80, 88.2; tail 115+, 148+, culmen from the base 29, 29.7; exposed culmen 26, 27; tarsus 21, 22 mm. Darrel C. H. Plowes, who knows the habi- tats of both the Natal-Transvaal race and the Melsetter form, has kindly supplied me with some pertinent facts about them. He tells me that in parts of Melsetter Brachystegia is the dominant tree with the Proteas being secondary, whereas in the Transvaal Brachy- stegia is absent. The ecological differences between the Transvaal section of the Drakensberg, and the Chimanimani Moun- tains in the Melsetter area have resulted in a number of endemic forms being found in the latter area, to which number the new Promerops is the latest addition. Plowes noted Promerops was not uncom- mon around Melsetter village, though only rarely seen on the Martin Forest Reserve, an area of some 25,000 acres to the north and northeast. The birds were very common in the Protea-Brachystegia-Philipia serub on “(Gwendingwe,” some 15 miles to the east, and do not seem to stray far from this botan- ical complex. There has been some discussion in the literature as to whether all the forms of Promerops are conspecific or if cafer is one species and gurneyt (with ardens) another species. It is true that cafer differs in having a very much longer tail and in lacking the rufous to a large extent on the crown, and, on the breast as well, but in habits the two groups are said to be alike, and geographi- cally they do replace each other, i.e., they are representative forms. Final solution of this problem must wait until someone with adequate material from all parts of the range of the whole group and with sufficient data on their habits makes a comprehensive study. It is relatively seldom that one finds two closely related birds that show such marked morphological differentiation ap- parently unaccompanied by any differences in habit. The opposite condition—slight morphological differences coupled with con- siderable divergences in habit is much more frequent, as for example, in congeneric species of African pipits (Anthus) and grass warblers (Cisticola) or American tyrant fly- catchers (Empidonax). Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences Fat CSECOTL Deval oie en er S Siar Se See es @ Natuan R. Suita, Plant Industry Station [PRE Cite donb os HBR On aoe at WaLTER RaMBERG, National Bureau of Standards SARRACRT pigs oc EH Ran MOTO eit Sage F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards WC OS UTET Re eee SSR Osa GR Howarp S. Rappers, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey PAD CUGUUS bet es Ns mya ety Be EME ae Sie _JouN A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haraup A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: ipinilosophical Society of Washing tontee. ase se acs cbianae ae eee Epwarp U. Connon Anthropological Society of Washington..................-.++--- Watpvo R. WEDEL BiologicalysocienyAOuWashing Onna tee oes cccesiineeene cae ChemicaliSocietyot Washing tone seasons eds aes ee eer JosrepH J. FAHEY Entomological Society of Washington.......................- FREDERICK W. Poos National Geographic Society ares -g cme egos Mime ate Me ALEXANDER WETMORE Geological Society, of Washington) ...2. 0.0.5... 502005-0 seuss. Lrason H. Apams Medical Society of the District of Columbia.......................... ColambiaytlistoricallSocietys eeenco cee eee eee GILBERT GROSVENOR Boummicalssociety, of Washingtone..cassscee eee a+ ccs ee eeeene - EK. H. Waker Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... WiuiiamM A. Dayton Washington Society of Engineers...........................:- Currrorp A. BretTs Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers Francis M. DEFANDORF Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp 8. Diu Helminthological Society ofaWashingtonynee perce een pce L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Anaus M. GriFrFin Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers....Henry W. HemPLEe Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers.......... Hersert G. Dorsey District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason Elected Members of the Board of Managers: POM amU aT yal O52 Rae nied One Mere als ver Aine entsiele St W. F. Fosuae, C. L. Gazin BROW ATIUAT Yel OD amr ee ser Sue aerate C. F. W. Murseseck*, A. T. McPHERSON BRomamuaryel O54. one oe Sara E. Branuam, Mitton Harris* BOUKGKO /MVUGNUGET SHA ie Soy se All the above officers plus the Senior Editor EGULOIO;MUALLOTS Land PA\ISSOCLate EL AULOT Sse eens ee eee oe {See front cover] Executive Committee....N. R. Smita (chairman), WALTER RamBereG, H. S. RapPpLeye, J. A. Stevenson, F. M. DeranporFr Committee on Membership.......... E. H. WaLKer (chairman), M.S. ANpERsoN, R. E BLACKWELDER, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. Hansen, D. B. Jonzs, DorotHy Nickerson, F. A. SmitH, Heinz Specat, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings......... Marcaret Pittman (chairman), NoRMAN BEKKEDAHL, W. R. Cuapune, D. J. Davis, F. B. Scanetz, H. W. WELLS Committee on Monographs: PRoranuUanyylGo2 eee ease any see J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), Paut H. OfHSER MGM AM Way MLODS vues cesarean Tecra AS eee ater R. W. Imuay, P. W. Oman “AEG, LIEU TUT AICO E S io eFO 8. F. Buaxs, F. C. Kracex Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (GEORGE P. WALTON, general chairman): For the Biological Sciences............ G. H. Coons (chairman), J. E. FABER, JR., Myrna F. Jonszs, F. W. Poos, J. R. SwALLEN For the Engineering Sciences......... R. 8S. Diuu (chairman), ARSHAM AMIRIKIAN, J. W. McBurney, Frank Neumann, A. H. Scorr For the Physical Sciences............. G. P. Warton (chairman), F. S. BRAcKETT, G. E. Hou, C. J. Hompxreys, J. H. McMILuen For Teaching of Science Re ee it B. D. Van Evera (chairman), R. P. BaRNEs, F. E. Fox, T. Koppanyr, M. H. Martin, A. T. McPurrson Commitiee on Grants-in-aid for Research se es L. E. Yocum (chairman), M. X. Suuiivan, H. L. WairreMorEe Committee on Policy and Planning: RorWianwaryelOa Que i re vel Meee ee O J. I. HorrmMan (chairman), M. A. Mason PROMMAMU ATVI OSS ect sme aa heart hie petaluers wae: W. A. Dayton, N. R. Surra PROWIATIUA TI: LO DA tama scree eda od acsteraty cele H. B. Couuins, JR., W. W. Rusey Committee on Encouragement of Science Latent Ao) demmnnyay WO. | oscoonbossonenason M. A. Mason (chenen) A. T. McPHERSON POR Gary G5Sh ee Cadena CI Fue Aue A.H _ CLARK, F. L. MonLpr ora muaryy 954s Me ee CMO A NA, siopianee Meus 3 J. M. CALDWELL, W. L. Scamittr TLE DRESENLALIVELOTN COUNCTUOIRACRARPARTS Setei ian aiaeene tae eee: F. M. Setzer Committee of Auditors...... J. H. Martin (chairman), N. F. Braaten, W. J. YoUDEN Committee of Tellers...W.G. BRoMBACHER (chairman), A. R. Mgrz, LoutsE M. RussELL * Appointed by Board to fill vacancy. CONTENTS Eruno.toey.—Utilization of animals and plants by the Malecite Indians of New Brunswick. FRANK G. Speck and RatpH W. DEXTER.... PALEONTOLOGY.—Stratigraphic range of the ostracode genus Phanas- symetria Roth. I. G. Sonn and JEAN M. BerDANn............... PALEONTOLOGY.—The arms of Polusocrinus. HARRELL L. STRIMPLE... EntomoLtocy.—Phylogenetic studies of Franklinothrips (Thysanoptera: Aeolothripidae): inwisi J-STANNARD; JIR-. 4. 4..-.- 2-0] Zootoacy.—A new genus and species of Limnadiidae from Venezuela (Crustacea: Conchostraca)s Ne a MaArrox... 2+... eee HELMINTHOLOGY.—Some cestodes from Oregon shrews, with descriptions of four new species of Hymenolepis Weinland, 1858. Brtry LockER anid JROBERTVMRAUSCH . .). 02). Gal as oad ee OrniTHOLOGY.—The long-tailed sugarbird of eastern Rhodesia. Hzr- BERT RTBDMANIN © :./.0., s-.00¢ des islite) o, while 2{ experiences a single maximum Yf = m/2 when © = 1, falling off thereafter to zero. One may show that the curve of A» is similar to that for %, except that the maximum value Ay = 7/+/2 occurs when x = 1/3. However, A — ~ monotonically as X —> ©. It is interesting to compare these results formally with those of Kneser (8, 9, 10) for absorption and dispersion arising from TG Yo te Go" (2) VOL. 42, No. 2 the internal degrees of freedom in gases. Taking account of van Itterbeck and Ma- riens’s experimental evidence (//) that Kne- ser’s relaxation time is inversely proportional to pressure, we may put Kneser’s results into the present notation. We then find that Kneser’s formula for 9{ becomes identical with (2). except for numerical factors, but for (V/V.) Kneser obtains a finite limit (Vx/Vo) as X% — «©. The difference in the two dispersion formulae accounts also for the difference in the formulae for A» and A. From experimental data it is difficult to see even qualitatively which type of dis- persion curve actually occurs. In any case the foregoing results show that to obtain an absorption peak it is not at all necessary to introduce molecular notions or to mod- ify the Navier-Stokes equations. The ‘‘re- laxation time” for Ao according to (2) is tT = 2n(’ + 2n)/(/3eV 0). The effect of the value of 0 on absorption and dispersion is plain from (2). If % or Ay be regarded as functions of § for various fixed values of U, then increase in VU in- creases the initial slope (classical absorption coefficient) but decreases the value of § at which the absorption peak occurs. Thus liq- uids in which \/u is large show “‘relaxation”’ effects at much lower frequencies than if \/u = — 2/3, and their absorption peaks are sharper. Increase in the value of 0 al- Ways increases the dispersion. Now in the ultrasonic literature absorp- tion measurements in liquids are always compared with the ‘classical’? value A = Ay = A = (4/3)a8 obtained by linearizing (2)2 and putting U0 = 4/3. The correct linearized expression, allowing for bulk vis- cosity, is A = 7S. If, as has been sug- gested (12, 13), U is to be determined from this formula then care must be taken that all results are extrapolated to § = 0. For otherwise the nonlinearity of (2). needs to be taken into account, especially if UO is large. It is possible to get apparent agree- ment with the ‘classical’ result by making two compensating errors: taking foo large a value for A by linearizing (2)2, but too small a value by assigning to U its mini- mum, 4/3. While the piezotropic fluid serves as a first approximation to a nonmetallic liquid, FEBRUARY 1952 a better approximation is obtained by sup- posing y + 1 but y/@ << 1. For the pair of solutions of (1) which as y > 1 approach those appropriate to sound waves in the piezotropic case, one may show that with great accuracy the following approximate formulae hold for all values of X: ( oy _ Adee i mee ery/ 1 = oC? 5 — §84+2/1 +2 — & | See ea) Gp 2) % yg = 5|1+ eae |. 4) ae oe (sr BF : Comparison with (2) shows that a relatively slight amount of heat conduction slightly increases both absorption and dispersion for small xX, but slightly decreases both for large 9. In particular, the absorption peak is both lowered and brought in to a smaller value of 9, for we have the maximum value % = Gr/2) @ — Z/2) when X& = 1 — Z/2. If the experimentally measured peak in %f can be accurately located, we have an excellent means of determining \ from the formula Ose — lh —) 2/2, or, approximately, (3) where §,, is the value of $ at which reso- nance occurs. We have $8, S 3/4 always, since §, = 3/4, y = 1 implies the Stokes relation 3\ + 2u = O, which gives 2 its minimum value. For gases it is possible to exhibit the ex- act coefficients but very difficult to trace their behavior as functions of 8. The second pair of solutions of (1), which when y — 1 approach those appropriate to a thermal wave in a piezotropic fluid, yield a second type of waves, which if y ~ 1 are unavoidably produced along with the first by any source of disturbance. These have been discarded by Kirchhoff and all subsequent investigators because as § — 0 they are much more strongly absorbed than the first. It 1s interesting to compare the two absorption coefficients for general values of 8. My results are not yet complete, but from (1) it is easy to see that as $ > « the two pairs of solutions approach those which would belong to a fluid in which TRUESDELL: PLANE ULTRASONIC WAVES IN PURE FLUIDS 35 p = p(p) but formally y # 1. Perhaps the ratio of their values in general is not too far different from that for such a fictitious fluid. Denoting the absorption coefficient for the second by Ay, we have then Aj; = Qn °/Y8, (*) a OO ae SAH) Ao VSlx/1 + 80? — 1) This function is a monotone decreasing func- tion of $. Hence as § grows larger, the pos- sibility of observing the second type of wave increases. As § — o we have 42?/A, — P0/y (and this result is valid without ap- proximation for the fully general eq. (1)). Hence in nonmetallic liquids, where @ is large, the second type of wave will never be observed at any frequency; in monatomic gases, however, since PU/y = 8/15, at high fre- quencies and very low pressures the second type of wave is absorbed only about half as much as the former; while in metallic liquids, where @ is small, the second type of wave will altogether predominate for large values of 8, unless perchance 0 be large. In a memoir now in preparation I shall give accurate graphs of all coefficients for 0 < X S 4 and for all values of the param- eters y and 3 which are found in actual fluids. I shall also attempt to compare these results with experimental data and thence, in particular, to determine reliable values for © in common pure fluids REFERENCES (1) Wane Cuanea, C.S8., and UHLENBECK, G. E. On the transport phenomena in rarefied gases. APL/JHU CM-443, UMH-3-F. Feb. 20, 1948 (2) Wane Cuanea, C.S. The dispersion of sound in helium. APL/JHU CM-467, UMH-3-F. May 1, 1948. (3) GREENSPAN, M. 1949. Phys. Rev. (2) 75: 197-198. . Journ. Acoust. Soc. Amer. 22: 568— 571. 1950. (5) Krrenorr, G. Ann. Physik 184: 177-193. 1868 (= Gesammelte Abhandlungen 1: 540- 556) . (6) Braquarp, P. 1932. (7) Lamp, H. A treatise on the mathematical theory of the motion of fluids. Cambridge, 1879. (See $1838. This material was omitted in later editions. ) (8) Kneser, H. Ann. Physik (5) 11: 761-776. 1931. (9) ———. Ci Rév. d’Acoustique 1: 93-109. Ann. Physik (5) 16: 337-399. 1933. 36 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (10) ———.. Ergebn. Exakten Naturwiss. 22: 121-185. 1949. (11) van IvrerRBecK and MARIENs. 153-160. 1938. Physica 5: vou. 42, No. 2 (12) Manpetstam, L., and Lrontovic, M. C. R. Doklady Acad. Sei. SSR (2) 3, 111-114. 1936. (13) Tisza, L. Phys. Rev. (2) 61: 531-536. 1942. MINERALOGY .—The nature of rock phosphates, teeth, and bones. DUNCAN McCon- NELL, Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio. (Communicated by W. F. Foshag. ) In order to understand the chemistry of rock phosphates it is essential to realize what minerals are likely to be present in these rocks (7). One must consider also that very few minerals have rigorously fixed compositions because they are subject to isomorphic variations. For example, one of the commonest mineral substances, plagio- clase feldspar, may be a sodium aluminum silicate (albite) or a calcium aluminum silicate (anorthite), but the commonest varieties are intermediate in composition. When considering the chemical analysis of an intermediate variety of plagioclase, it is usually not possible to set down a simple formula, but one can indicate, nevertheless, the relative percentages of NaAISi;0s and CaAlSioOs, which are the theoretical end members of the isomorphic series. If one attempts to calculate from the chemical analysis of a rock the amount and variety of feldspar present, he faces an impossible task if other mineral constituents containing Na,O, CaO, and SiO, also are present and their amounts and compositions likewise are unknown. The situation is similar when considering rock phosphates; the composition of the principal mineral constituent cannot be determined from the analysis of the rock unless the kinds and quantities of other minerals present can be determined accu- rately. Therefore, it becomes impossible to ascertain the types of isomorphic variation of the minerals, francolite, dahllite, ete., from even the most precise data obtained on heterogeneous substances such as phos- porites. The “mineral phase” of tooth and bone has been shown to be an apatitelike sub- stance and, to this extent, it is similar to phosphorite. It differs from most phosphor- ites, however, in its low fluorine content. The substance of tooth and bone is not composed entirely of this apatitelike sub- stance; it contains organic compounds in addition. Were it possible to remove the organic substances without in any way altering the inorganic material, it would be possible to study the crystal chemistry of the ‘‘mineral phase.” Insofar as present knowledge is concerned, one of the impor- tant constituents of the ‘mineral phase”’ may be water (2), which occurs in combined form in the crystallites. No method that will remove the organic matter from teeth and bones without danger of altering the water content of the apatiteliike substance has ever been described. Here again is the same situation: neither the kinds nor quan- tities of the other constituents are known. Therefore, quantitative study of the iso- morphic variation of the apatite phase can- not be accomplished by experimentation on the whole substance of teeth and bones. The exceedingly important difference be- tween the chemical compositions of ordinary fluorapatite and the substances of teeth, bones, and phosphorites is the universal presence of significant amounts of carbon dioxide in the latter substances. Therefore, considerable interest has arisen in pure mineral substances which contain carbon dioxide and produce diffraction patterns similar to fluorapatite. Francolite is the best known of these substances; it occurs at several widely separated localities, but re- markable similarities between samples from Germany (3) and South Africa (4) exist. The mineral dahllite is similar to francolite except that it contains less than one percent fluorine (5). Lewistonite and dehrnite are similar in that they may contain carbon dioxide but are different to the extent that they contain potassium and sodium, re- spectively. Details concerning the isomorphic sub- stitutions which can occur in the apatite Fespruary 1952 lattice need not be considered here. Substi- tutions for calcium include K, Na, Mn, Mg, Sr, and Ba. Substitutions for phosphorus in- clude Si, S, V, Cr, and probably aluminum. Such compounds as Cayo(OH )2(S104)3(SO4)3 and (Na,sCa,)F2(SO.), clearly indicate the extensive possibilities for isomorphic sub- stitution (6, 7). Recognizing this extensive tolerance of the apatite structure for iso- morphic substitution, one can return to the question of the sorts of isomorphic substitu- tion in francolite. In viewing the chemical nature of fran- colite, five recent analyses by well-qualified analysts are available. One quickly discovers that the Ca:P:C ratios are not uniform. This fact is no more surprising, however, than the fact that the ratios Na:Ca:Al of plagioclase feldspar are not constant. Never- theless, the compounds CapCO;(PO:)5 has been assumed as a theoretical end member for the purpose of calculating the composi- tion of dental enamel, and these calculations have been made within the past few years, completely disregarding the fact that Gruner and MeConnell (3) disproved the existence of this compound in 1937. The variation in Ca:P:C has been taken to indicate that francolite is composed of two phases. Although this conclusion by no means follows as a logical sequence to the principles of isomorphism, one might ask whether or not any other evidences for the presence of two phases exist. In view of the water-clear condition of the francolite crys- tals, the proponents of the 2-phase hypothe- sis are forced to call upon ‘‘submicroscopic”’ or “colloidal” particles of CaCO; distributed throughout the francolite. This explanation is unique in its application to francolite, and several incompatabilities arise from consideration of the data. If francolite were composed of fluorapatite and CaCQO;, one could obtain the correct stoichiometry for fluorapatite merely by deducting equiva- lents of CaO and CO, from the analyses of francolite. This is by no means the case, however, and the discrepancies which occur probably exceed the experimental error in each instance (2). Far more important, however, is the fact that the unit-cell dimensions of francolite and fluorapatite differ by amounts which McCONNELL: ROCK PHOSPHATES, TEETH, AND BONES a7 far exceed the experimental error for these measurements (2). X-ray diffraction data obtained by use of the Philips high-angle spectrometer indicate, furthermore, that significant intensity differences also exist. In the absence of any explanation of how the so-called colloidal particles of CaCO, could possibly alter the diffraction pattern of apatite in this way, it becomes necessary to conclude that the crystal lattice of franco- lite is somewhat different from that of the fluorapatite and these differences are the cause of the X-ray diffraction phenomena. Recently, Hendricks and Hill (8) have obtained an explanation based upon absorp- tion of nitrogen by francolite. They con- clude that certain surfaces exist within francolite crystals and that these ‘‘discon- tinuities”” are capable of adsorbing car- bonate. The physical analogy is not quite clear but apparently the ‘“‘carbonate’’ is believed to be present in the form of ions which are brought to electrical neutrality by cations in the structural arrangement. Further scrutiny will indicate that they postulate a new type of disordering in crys- tals in which part of the atoms are in the lattice and part are present at discontinui- ties. One can not predict how such a process could be detected by crystallographic methods, and Hendricks and Hill do not clarify the matter, but here again is a hy- pothesis that seems to have francolite as an unique example. It is noticeable that they calculate 61 m.”/g. as the ‘“‘surface”’ of francolite whereas the highest experimental value is 7.3 m.?/g. and no comment appears in explanation of this significant discrepancy. One can extend their method of calculation in order to obtain the periodicity of interruption of a solid system with regular 3-dimensional coordinates. Under these circumstances, the average spacing of the discontinuities would be 315 A. What the effect of discontinuities of this spacing would be on the X-ray diffrac- tion pattern is difficult to predict without a more reliable knowledge of the true nature of these discontinuities. Nevertheless, it can be assumed that such a condition would not merely alter the spacings and intensities without in any way altering the excellency of resolution of the diffraction lines. In this 38 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES connection it is: noteworthy that although bone produces broad and diffuse diffraction lines, the lines of francolite are essentially as sharp and distinct as those of fluor- apatite (2). Quite in contrast with some of the explana- tions discussed above, stand attempts to seek an explanation of the crystal lattice of francolite in terms of the principles of isomorphic substitution. That knowledge of all of these principles is not presently avail- able can safely be admitted. Nevertheless, it is possible through shght extension of well recognized principles to obtain a structural model which has two important properties (2). It is capable of qualitative altération of the intensities of prismatic diffraction maxima as well as the birefringence. Both values are observed to increase for francolite when compared with fluorapatite. Quantita- tive comparisons cannot be obtained readily because of limitations imposed by an inexact knowledge of the precise atomic coordinates for pure apatite. No relable integrated intensity measurements for an analyzed sample of apatite have been published and therefore the published coordinates cannot claim great precision. Although Bale (9) claims to have refined the coordinates for one type of calcium position by small percentages of the cell edge, his crystal of apatite apparently was not analyzed, so his results are quite mean- ingless. Beevers and McIntyre (10) stated that they were able to obtain highly refined coordinates for the atoms in apatite but neither did they give their newly determined coordinates nor did they indicate that analyzed material was used. Their principal contribution, consequently, was a series of colored diagrams which explain the well known structures proposed by Naray-Szab6 (11) and by Mehmel (72). Properties of francolite other than those which can be measured by X-ray diffraction should also be mentioned briefly. The bire- fringence of francolite exceeds that of fluorap- atite (13), francolite is usually biaxial and may have an optic angle as large as 40° (14, 15), and the mean refractive index of vou. 42, No. 2 francolite is less than that of fluorapatite (13). In summary on the properties of franco- lite, one concludes that all the crystallo- graphic properties are different from those of fluorapatite and that adsorption or the presence of colloidal impurities apparently are incapable of explaining these differences. Returning to teeth, bones, and _ phos- phorite one concludes: (1) The physical and chemical properties of these substances are largely dependent upon the properties of francolite or dahllite, and (2) the properties of these heterogeneous substances cannot be expected to reveal the isomorphic nature of francolite or dahllite. Concerning franco- lite these additional conclusions obtain: (3) Direct study of the chemical and physical properties has resulted in an explanation of the crystal structure of francolite which appears to be consistent qualitatively with all of the observed data, (4) quantitative confirmation of the proposed structure for francolite will require additional data, which will be difficultly obtainable for several reasons, and (5) the assumption of adsorp- tive processes or mechanical admixtures will not account for the experimental data on francolite. REFERENCES (1) McConnetu, D. Journ. Geol. 58: 16. 1950. (2) —. Bull. Soc. Frang. Min. Crist. (In press.) (3) Gruner, J. W., and McConnetn, “D. Zeitschr. Krist. 97: 208. 1938. (4) DeVituprs, J. E. Amer. Journ. Sei. 240: 443. 1942. (5) McConneti, D. Amer. Min. 23: 1. 1938. Amer. Min. 22: 977. 1937. (7) KiemMent, R. Naturwiss. 33: 568. 1939. (8) Henpricks, 8. B., and Hitn, W. L. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 36: 732. 1950. (9) Bate, W. F. Amer. Journ. Roentgen. Ra- dium Therapy 48: 735. 1940. (10) Brrevers, C. A., and McIntyre, D. B. Min. Mag. 27: 254. 1945. (11) NAray-Szapo, 8. Zeitschr. 1930. (12) Mreumet, M. Zeitschr. Krist. 75: 323. 1930. (13) McConnetu, D., and Gruner, J. W. Amer. Min. 25: 135. 1988. (14) Hurron, C. O., and Steetye, F. T. Trans. Roy. Soc. New Zealand 72: 191. 1942. (15) Deans, T., and Vincent, H. C. G. Min. Mag. 25: 135. 1988. Krist. 75: 387. Frespruary 1952 Li: FORMOSAN PHANEROGAMS 39 BOTANY —Notes on some families of Formosan phanerogams. Hut-Lin Li, Na- tional Taiwan University, Taipeh, Taiwan, China. (Communicated by A. C. Smith.) These notes are the result of critical studies on selected families of Formosan flowering plants, namely, Juglandaceae, Ulmaceae, Lardizabalaceae, Beberidaceae, and Saxifragaceae. Most of the species of plants described from this island by bota- nists have been proposed without adequate consideration of the neighboring and closely related floras, except for that of Japan. We now realize that the flora of Formosa is more closely related to the flora of main- land China than to that of any other region; numerous mainland species are represented in Formosa by their typical form or by a variation. Both the lowland and the mon- tane floras of the island show intimate kin- ship with those of the mainland, the rela- tionship in the former case being especially with southern China and in the latter case particularly with the highlands of western China. The flora of Formosa also shows close relationships with that of the Philippine Islands, especially as regards the southern species and to a certain extent also the montane species. In order properly to interpret the identity, nature, and range of Formosan spécies, it is therefore essential to consult closely all the neighboring floras. Large series of specimens from mainland China, Hainan, the Philippines, the Liukius, and Japan now being available to the present writer, careful studies of selected families of Formosan plants show that considerable alterations in our concept of some species are necessary. In the present paper, three new species, one new variety, and one new form are proposed, three new combinations are effected, and one new record is indicated. Twelve names are found to represent syn- onyms of previously described species and reductions are accordingly made. Several binomials, relegated to synonymy by former authors, are reinstated as distinct entities. These findings will serve to indicate what we may expect as we review the Formosan flora in particular and the eastern Asiatic flora in general. The materials used are those of the herbarium of the National Taiwan Univer- sity (indicated as NTU) and the U. S. National Herbarium (US). Only selected specimens are cited from the former her- barium. This paper was prepared in the Depart- ment of Botany of the U. S. National Museum, with the aid of a grant from the U. S. Department of State. The writer is indebted to the American Philosophical Society for an earlier grant which gave him an opportunity to study Formosan plants in the field and in some Chinese herbaria. To Dr. A. C. Smith, grateful acknowledg- ment is due for his kindness in reading the manuscript. JUGLANDACEAE Engelhardtia chrysolepis Hance in Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. 15: 227. 1861. Engelhardtia formosana Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 6: 61. 1916; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rev. ed. 80. f. 36. 1936. Syn. nov. Engelhardtia spicata Blume var. formosana Hay. in Journ. Coll. Sci. Tokyo 25 (19): 199. 1908 (Fl. Mont. Formos.). Syn. nov. Formosa: Mount Noko, H. H. Bartlett 6158 (US); Baibara Nokogun, S. Sasaki Aug. 27, 1924 (NTU). Southern China. In Formosa, common in broad-leaved forests throughout the island. The Formosan plant is identical with the mainland species, which is widely distributed from northern India through western to southern China. The species shows some variation. When herbarium specimens from various regions are compared, the Formosan ones are similar par- ticularly to those from Hainan Island. Juglans cathayensis Dode in Bull. Soc. Dendr. France 1909: 47. f. 1909. Juglans formosana Hay. in Journ. Coll. Sci. Tokyo 30 (1): 283. 1911 (Mat. Fl. Formos.) ; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rev. ed. 82. f. 36. 1936. Syn. nov. Formosa: Kaunko, Kwarenko, EF. H. Wilson 11152 (US). Widely distributed in China. In Formosa, scat- tered in forests at 1,200-2,000 meters. Hayata originally described the Formosan plant as a distinct species and compared it with 40 JOURNAL. OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES J. cordiformis Maxim. and J. sieboldiana Maxim. of Japan. Actually the plant is identical with J. cathayensis Dode, a species of wide distribu- tion on the Chinese mainland, and the two are evidently conspecific. Platycarya strobilacea Sieb. & Zucc. in Abh Math.-Phys. Kl. Akad. Wiss. Miinch. 3: 741. 1843. Platycarya strobilacea var. kawakamii Hay. m Journ. Coll. Sei. Tokyo 30 (1): 284. 1911 (Mat. Fl. Formos.). Syn. nov. Petrophiloides strobilacea var. kawakamit (Hay.) Kanehira, Formos. Trees rev. ed. 82. f. 37. 1936. China to Japan. In Formosa, in forests at medium altitudes in the northern part of the island. Formosa: Seisui, Kwarenko, Sasaki 7264 (US, photo). Hayata proposed the Formosan entity as a variety, stating that it “Differs from the type in having much smaller leaflets, and narrower cones with a little broader bracts.” These differ- ences, shown by a single specimen, do not actually differentiate the Formosan plant as a distinct variety. It does not differ significantly from plants of the Chinese mainland and Japan, which exhibit considerable variation in all parts of the plant. Kanehira & ULMACEAE Trema virgata (Roxb.) Blume, Mus. Bot. Lugd.- Bat. 2: 58. 1856; Hand.-Mazz. Symb. Sin. 7: 106. 1929. Celtis virgata Roxb. in Wall. List n. 3694. 1828-49. Southern China. New record for Formosa. Formosa: Sintin, Taihoku-syu, AK. Odashima 13605 (US). Ulmus uyematsui Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 3: 174. pl. 32. 1931; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rev. ed. 143. f. 90. 1936. Endemic. In forests of the central mountains at altitudes of 1,500—2,000 meters. Formosa: Arisan, #. H. Wilson 9684 (US). Ulmus uyematsui Hay. is apparently endemic to Formosa. Handel-Mazzetti (Symb. Sin. 7: 100. 1931) doubtfully refers several collections from mainland China to this species. One of these, Ching 2194a, from southern Chekiang (US), is available. This specimen bears leaves that are distinctly cordate at base, densely appressed- vou. 42, No. 2 pubescent beneath, simple serrate at margins, and with more than 20 lateral veins per side; it is very clearly distinct from U. wyematsut. Zelkova serrata (Thunb.) Makino in Bot. Mag. Tokyo 17: 13. 1903. Zelkova formosana Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 9: 104. f. 33, 1 & 2. 1920; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rev. ed. 144. f. 91. 1936. Syn. nov. Eastern China to Japan. Formosa, in forests at about 1,000—2,000 meters. Formosa: Musha, 2. H. Wilson 10102 (US); no locality, Taiwan Univ. Herb. (NTU). Zelkova formosana was noted by both Hayata and Kanehira as very close to Z. serrata, differing only in the smaller leaves. However, the leaves of Formosan plants are about the size of the normal leaves of Japanese and Chinese plants, which sometimes may bear much larger ones on sprouting shoots. As there is no other single character to support its differentiation, Z. for- mosana is here reduced to the synonymy of Z. serrata. Zelkova serrata (Thunb.) Makino var. tarokoen- sis (Hay.) comb. noy. Zelkova tarokoensis Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 9: 104. f. 33, 3 & 4. 1920. Endemic to the eastern coast of Formosa. Formosa: Taitotyo, Sinkogun, 7. Suzuki 19728 (NTU). Kanehira (loc. cit.) treated this entity as a straight synonym of A. formosana (= Z. serrata) but noted its small leaves with fewer veins. The leaves are also much less sharply serrate and are totally glabrous. It appears as a distinct but very localized variety. LARDIZABALACEAE Stauntonia hexaphylla (Thunb.) Decaisne f. rotundata Wu in Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 13: 369. 1936. Stauntonia obovatifoliolata Hay. Icon. Pl. For- mos. 8:4. f. 3, 1-6. 1919; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rev. ed. 180. 1936. Syn. nov. Japan, Liukiu. Formosa, in central mountains. Formosa: Musya, Nanto, 7. Kawakami 9882 (US, photo). Wu, without seeing the type, reduced S. obovatifoliolata together with S. obovatifoliolata var. penninervis Hay. to the synonymy of S. hexaphylla f. obovata Wu. Photographs of Hayata’s types show that the two are different and the former should be referred instead to f. rotundata. Fespruary 1952 LI: FORMOSAN Stauntonia hexaphylla (Thunb.) Decaisne f. cor- data f. nov. A typo speciei foliolis distinete cordatis differt; foliolis ovato-oblongis vel oblongo-lanceolatis, 5-7.5 em longis, 2-2.7 em latis, apice caudato- acutis, basi distincte cordatis. Formosa, in forests between Yappitu and Do- zan, Taihoku-syu, T. Suzuki 8751, April 17, 1933 (NTU, type). Stauntonia obovata Hemsley in Hook. Icon. PI. 29: pl. 2847. 1907. Stauntonia hebandra Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 8: 3. f. 2. 1919; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rey. ed. 180. 1936; Wu in Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 13: 375. 1936. Syn. nov. Southern China to Formosa. Formosa: Karapin and Funkiko, B. Hayata 9875 (US, photo of isotype). Hayata differentiated his species from S. obovata Hemsley by the obtuse or emarginate anthers. In S. obovata the anthers are very shortly apiculate, the spur attaiming a length of hardly 1 mm. Hayata’s illustration shows that the anthers of his plant vary from nonapiculate to shortly but distinctly apiculate. Undoubtedly the Formosan plant is conspecifie with the Chi- nese mainland species. Stauntonia obovata Hemsley var. angustata (Wu) comb. nov. Stauntonia hebandra Hay. var. angustata Wu in Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Berlin 13: 375. 1936. Endemic, common in thickets of central moun- tains. Formosa: Horisha, Nanto, FH. H. Wilson 9949 (US, isotype). BERBERIDACEAE Mahonia morrisonensis Takeda in Notes Bot. Gard. Edinb. 6: 239. pl. 36, f. 200-206. 1917. Endemic to Formosa, in forests on central ranges, rare, at about 2,500 meters. Formosa: Matsuyama, prov. Kagi, #. H. Wil- son 9816 (US). Kanehira (Formos. Trees rev. ed. 184. 1936) reduced M. morrisonensis Takeda to the syn- onymy of M. oiwakensis Hay., as a result of his examination of the types. However, a photograph of Takeda’s isotype (Kawakami & Mori 9941, US), although showing only a few leaves, defi- nitely indicates that the plant is distinct. from PHANEROGAMS 4] Hayata’s species. It is readily distinguished by the fewer leaflets, which are larger, much broader, more faleate in shape, and with more teeth on the margins. The terminal leaflet, instead of being the largest one as in M. japonica and M. oiwakensis, is among the smallest. Takeda mentioned at the same time a specimen collected by U. Mori on Mount Morrison, which he left undetermined, as having about twelve pairs of leaflets which are thicker, hardly faleate, and with less numerous teeth; he believed it might represent a new species. These characters, however, clearly demonstrate that the specimen in question belongs to M. ovwakensis Hay. Berberis formosana sp. nov. Frutex parvus; ramulis novellis gracilibus, leviter cinereis, angularibus, conspicue sulcatis; foliis spinescentibus 2- vel 3-aristatis, spinis 1-1.5 cm longis; foliis normalis 2- vel 3-verticillatis, chartaceis, brevi-petiolatis, oblongo-lanceolatis, 1.5-8 em longis, 0.6-1.2 em latis, apice acutis vel mucronulato-apiculatis, basi acutis vel obtusis, margine subintegris vel spinoso-serratis, spinis utrinsecus ad 6, gracilibus, ad 1 mm _ longis, adpresso-adscendentibus, utrinque glabris, supra viridibus vel leviter glaucis, subtus leviter atris plus minusve nitidis, costa supra impressa subtus valde elevata, venis secundariis utrinsecus 5-7, supra inconspicuis, subtus leviter elevatis, ad marginem distincte anastomosantibus; petiolis haud 1.5 mm longis; floribus ignotis; fructibus immaturis 2-6-fasciculatis, ovoideis, ad 4 mm longis et 2 mm ecrassis, atro-cyanis, distincte glaucis, apice stigmatibus coronatis. Formosa: Mountains near Muroroahu, Tai- hoku-syu, 7. Suzuki 7258, July 17, 1932 (NTU, type). This distinct species has chartaceous leaves like those of B. morrisonensis Hay., but it is readily distinguished by the shape of the leaves and the inconspicuous venation. It also has more fruits and these are elongated. It is a moss-clad plant of the high mountains, with slender branches. In its leaves, which have a pale subglaucous upper surface and a dark more or less shining lower surface, it is very different from all other For- mosan species of the genus. Berberis alpicola C. Schneider in Rep. Sp. Novy. 46: 253. L9B8L. Indemie in Arisan at stream-sides at 3,600 meters. Formosa, common on Mount 42 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Formosa: Arisan, #. H. Wilson 10952 (US, isotype). This species is characterized by its small shin- ing leaves with strong spreading spines at the margins. It is apparently very close to B. kawakamvi Hay., as the type collection was first identified by Byhouwer (in Journ. Arnold Arb. 9: 133. 1928) as representing that species. Yojira Kimura, in Journ. Jap. Bot. 16: 58. 1940, con- sidered B. alpicola (as “‘alpicora’’) Schneider as a synonym of B. morrisonensis Hay., basing his conclusion on the original description. This place- ment is erroneous, as the type collection shows B. alpicola to be very different from the rather distinct B. morrisonensis Hay., although very close to B. kawakamu Hay. Berberis brevisepala Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 3: 14. 1913; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rev. ed. 182. 1936. Berberis densifolia Byhouwer in Journ. Arnold Arb. 9: 133. 1928; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rey. ed. 182. 1936; non Rusby. Syn. nov. Berberis nantoensis C. Schneider in Rep. Sp. Noy. 46: 252, 1939. Syn. nov. Endemic to Formosa, high central mountains, over 3,500 meters. Formosa: Mount Kiraishui, prov. Nanto, E. H. Wilson 10074 (US, isotype of B. densifolia Byhouwer). A photograph of the isotype of B. brevisepala, U. Mori, April 1910 (US, photo), is available. Hayata’s original description does not discuss the flower or fruit. The flowers are 7- or 8-fasci- culate, with pedicels about 1 cm. in length. The fruit is ovoid, to 9 mm long and 5 mm across, dark bluish black, and more or less glaucous. The densely leafy habit and the thickly coriaceous leaves with strongly recurved margins are very characteristic. Berberis densifolia Byhouwer, based on a smaller-leaved specimen, is apparently referable to this same species. Kanehira did not have access to the type, nor did he notice the name B. nantoensis C. Schneider given to this same plant. SAXIFRAGACEAE Hydrangea lobbii Maxim. in Mém. Acad. Sci. St. Pétersb. VIT. 10: 15. 1867. Hydrangea macrosepala Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 3: 108. 1913; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rev. ed. 244. f. 187. 1936. Syn. nov. Philippine Islands. In Formosa, widely dis- tributed in lower forests. vou. 42, No. 2 Formosa: Kotosho, 7. Hosokawa 9887 (NTU); Kashoto, Y. Kudo & K. Mori 241 (NTU). This species, widely distributed in Formosa and known as H. macrosepala Hay., is the same as H. lobbii Maxim., of wide distribution in the mountains of the Philippines. The obscurely denticulate leaves and the prominent sepals on the fruit are very characteristic. Deutzia pulchra Vidal, Revis. Pl. Vasc. Filip. 124. 1886; Rehder in Sarg. Pl. Wils. 1: 18. 1911; Turrill in Bot. Mag. 148: pl. 8962. 1923; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rev. ed. 238. f. 179. 1936. Deutzia taiwanensis Hay. in Journ. Coll. Sei. Tokyo 80 (1): 132. 1911. (Mat. Fl. Formos.) ; Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 1: pl. 33. 1911, 2: S. 1912; non Schneider. Deutzia pulchra Vidal. var. formosana Nakai in Bot. Mag. Tokyo 35: 84. 1921. Deutzia hayatai Nakai in Bot. Mag. Tokyo 35: 83. 1921. Deutzia bartlettii Yamamoto, Suppl. Icon. Pl Formos. 4: 16. f. 10. 1928. Mountains of northern Luzon and Formosa. Formosa: Mount Arisan, EH. H. Wilson 9742 (US); Parsha, prov. Giran, EZ. H. Wilson 10126 (US); Mt. Noko, H. H. Bartlett 6133 (US), 6244 (US), Kanehira & Sasaki 21712 (US); Kando & Rikiki, Takao-syu, T. Suzuki 7881 (NTU); Mt. Morrison, H. H. Bartlett 6312 (US, isotype of D. bartlettit Yamamoto). The Formosan plant is manifestly the same as the plant found in the mountains of northern Luzon. Rehder noted a slight difference in the number of rays of the stellate hairs when he compared a single specimen from Formosa with another from Luzon. Nakai considered the Luzon plant as having more acuminate leaves and the calyx-lobes “‘late ovati’’ instead of “‘late depresso- ovati.”” However, when the Formosan specimens are compared with a large series of Luzon plants, such differential characters seem inconsequential. Kanehira is thus correct in not recognizing the Formosan plant as a distinct variety. He also reduced D. hayatai Nakai, based on Kawakami & Nakahara 988, from Kotosho (Botel Tabago), which conclusion is similarly justified. Deutzia cordatula sp. nov. Frutex, ramulis tenuibus, angularibus, dense fulvo-tomentosis, tomento stellato; foliis charta- ceis, ovatis, 4.5-S cm longis 2-3.8 cm latis, Fespruary 1952 LI: FORMOSAN PHANEROGAMS 43 apice acutis, basi cordatulis, margine leviter scabridis, subtus pallidis, stellato-villosis, costa venisque dense fulvo-stellato-tomentosis, supra leviter impressis, subtus distincte elevatis, venis secundariis utrinsecus 5 vel 6, arcuato-adscen- dentibus, ad marginem anastomosantibus; petio- lis brevibus haud 2 mm longis, stellato-tomento- sis; inflorescentiis parvis paniculatis, ramulis terminalibus, ad 5.5 em longis, dense fulvo- stellato-tomentosis; pedicellis 2-4 mm _ longis; calyce campanulato, tubo circiter 3 mm diametro, extus dense fulvo-stellato-tomentoso, lobis minu- tis, triangularibus, acutis; petalis oblongis, cir- citer 8 mm longis et 3-4 mm latis, subobtusis; staminibus 10, inequilateralibus, filamentis 5-7 mm longis; stylis 4, distinctis, 6-7 mm longis, apice dilatatis, indistincte 2-lobatis; ovario 4-locu- Jari; ovulis numerosis. Formosa: Mount Kwanonzan, Taihoku-syu, N. Fukuyama & S. Miura 14, April 29, 1940 (NTU, type). This very distinct species is strongly character- ized by the densely tomentose habit, the cordatu- late, short-petiolate leaves, and the narrow, racemelike inflorescence. It suggests no close relationships with other species but perhaps can be remotely associated with D. sieboldw Koern., of Japan. Itea parviflora Hemsley in Ann. Bot. 9: 153. 1895; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rev. ed. 246. f. 189. 1936. Considerable confusion exists concerning the classification of the genus Jtea in Formosa. [tea parviflora Hemsley was described in 1895, from materials procured at the southern tip of the island. The species I. chinensis Hook. & Arnott was recorded by Henry in 1896, and later by Matsumura & Hayata and others from the northern part of the island. Hayata described J. arisanensis in 1916, basing it on materials from the central part of the island. In 1932 Masamune treated this as a variety of J. chinensis. In Kanehira’s treatment of Formosan trees in 1936, he listed I. chinensis, I. parviflora, and I. arisa- nensis as present in Formosa. In 1937, Yamamoto made a special review of the genus in Formosa, listing J. chinensis, I. parviflora, and I. arisanen- sisand at the same time describing two varieties, var. longifolia and var. parvifolia under the last species. Migo, in 1944, considered J. arisanensis Hay. as a synonym of I. chinensis. Apparently none of the Japanese authors has had a chance of examining isotypes of Henry’s I. parviflora, and consequently this species was much misunderstood. Yamamoto emphasized the size of flowers and differentiated the three species by slight differences in floral diameter. This char- acter actually is not constant, as flowers on the same plant may vary in their diameter according to age. Furthermore, the plant with coriaceous leaves found in northern Formosa is in reality different from I. chinensis of mainland China and is here proposed as a new species. Yamamoto’s I. arisanensis var. longifolia is the same as the typical form of I. parviflora Hemsl. The type specimen of J. parviflora Hemsley shows slight tufts of hairs in the nerve-axils on the lower sur- face of the leaves, like the plant depicted by Yamamoto. His J. arisanensis var. parvifolia, showing a similar kind of hairs but with broader leaves, belongs to J. parviflora var. latifolia as here proposed. ‘‘Itea parviflora’ of Yamamoto presumably also belongs here, although his draw- ing does not show the tufts of hairs in the nerve- axils, but these hairs are very few and thin and sometimes are not present in older leaves. The leaves of I. artsanensis are oblong and large and they have 7 or 8 nerves per side instead of 5 or 6 as described and depicted by Yamamoto. This entity was made into a variety of I. chinensis by Masamune, but it is a different plant from J. chinensis and the actual presence of the latter in Formosa is questionable Jtea arisanensis 1s closely related to I. parviflora and is best treated as a variety. The followmg key serves to differentiate the Formosan species and varieties of the genus Ttea: A. Leaves membranaceous, the margins entire to crenate-serrulate. B. Leaves lanceolate, 8-12 em long, 2.5-3.5 em broad; nerves 5 or 6. I. parviflora var. parviflora BB. Leaves ovate, 9-10 em long, 4-5 em broad; nerves 5 or 6....... I. parviflora var. latifolia BBB. Leaves elliptic, 10-14 em long, 3-5 cm broad; nerves 7 or 8. IT. parviflora var. arisanensis AA. Leaves coriaceous, ovate, the margins with fewto several large teeth........... I. formosana Itea parviflora Hemsley var. parviflora. Endemic in Formosa, widely distributed in forests. Formosa: South Cape, A. Henry 1822 (Us, cotype coll.), 7980 (US); Bankensing, A. Henry 44 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY 1486 (US); Gu-kutsu, Kwarenko, #. H. Wilson 11069 (US); Sozan, Taihoku, F. H. Wilson 10722 (US), T. Tanaka & Y. Shimada 11040 (US). Itea parviflora Hemsley var. latifolia var. nov. Itea parviflora sensu Yamamoto in Acta Phyto- tax. Geob. 6: 248. f. 2. 1937, non Hemsley. Itea arisanensis var. parvifolia Yamamoto loc. cit. 248. f. 3d. 1987. Syn. nov. A typo speciei differt foliis latioribus; foliis membranaceis, ovatis, 9-10 cm longis, 4-5 cm latis, apice acutis vel acuminatis, basi late acutis, margine creanato-serrulatis, nervis secondaris utrinsecus 5 vel 6. Formosa: Bankensing, 455805, type), 548 (US). A. Henry 560 (US Itea parviflora Hemsley var. arisanensis (Havy.) comb. noy. Itea arisanensis Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 6: 19. 1916; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rev. ed. 246. 1936. Ttea chinensis var. arisanensis Masamune ex Kudo & Masamune, in Ann. Rep. Taihoku Bot. Gard. 2: 117. 1932. Formosa, central mountains at an altitude of about 1,300 meters. Formosa: Mount Suibarai, Tikuto-gun, Sin- tiku-syu, 7. Suzuki 20232 (NTU). Itea formosana sp. nov. Ttea chinensis sensu Henry in Trans. Asiat. Soc. Jap. 24. Suppl.: 41. 1896; Matsum. «& Hay. in Journ. Coll. Sci. Tokyo 22: 133. 1906; Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 2: 10. 1912; Kudo & Masamune in Ann. Rep. Taihoku Bot. Gard. 2: 117. 1932; Sasaki, List PI. Formos. 208. 1928, Cat. Govern. Herb. (For- mos.) 241. 1930; Makino & Nemoto, FI. Jap. ed. 2. 292. 1932; Kanehira, Formos. Trees rev. ed. 245. f. 188. 1936; non Hook. & Arn. Frutex 2-3 m altus; ramulis plus minusve crassis, novellis laxe pilosis; foliis coriaceis, glab- ris, ovatis vel ovato-oblongis, 6-9 em longis, 4-5 em latis, apice breviter acutis, acuminatis, vel obtusis, basi subobtusis vel acutis, margine re- mote pauci-dentatis, raro subintegris, dentibus utrinsecus ad 10, interdum ad apicem 2-3, trian- gularibus, acutis, ad 4-5 mm longis et 7-8 mm latis, costa supra impressa subtus valde elevata, venis secundariis utrinsecus 5-7, arcuato-adscen- OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 2 dentibus; petiolis circiter 1 cm longis; inflores- centiis axillaribus vel terminalibus, racemosis, 3-5 em longis, semper pubescentibus; pedicellis 2-4 mm longis patentibus; bracteis linearibus; calyecis tubo infundibulari, 2 mm _ diametro, limbo 5-lobato, lobis triangularibus, 1.5 mm lon- gis, extus pilosis; petalis 5, albidis, lanceolatis, circiter 2.5 mm longis et 1 mm latis, ad apicem costatis, intus glabris, extus pilosis; staminibus 5, quam petalis plus minusve longioribus, inferne pubescentibus; ovario urceolato, pubescente; fructibus urceolatis, 5-6 mm longis, basim 2 mm crassis, leviter pubescentibus, sepalis persistenti- bus coronatis, vel 2-carpellis dehiscentibus. Formosa, in thickets, northern part of the island. Formosa: Nanwo, prov. Kwarenko, EH. H. Wilson 11123 (US); Taihoku, H#. H. Wilson 9908 (US); Sozan, Taihoku-syu, T. Kawakami, Oct. 1912 (NTU); Sizangan, Taihoku-syu, K. Mori, Oct. 11, 1931 (NTU, type); Hermbi, Tai- hoku-syu, H. H. Wilson 10259 (US); Tamsui, R. Oldham 108 (US); Keelung, 7. Tanaka 346 (US). Itea formosana differs from I. chinensis, of the mainland, in the much more coriaceous leaves, often with a few large broad teeth. In the serra- tion it somewhat resembles J. tlicifolia Oliver, of western China, but the teeth are not so sharp and fine as in the latter species. The inflorescences are generally shorter and the flowers and fruits are smaller than those of J. chinensis. Pilostegia viburnoides Hook. & Thoms. in Journ. Linn. Soc. 2: 76. pl. 2. 1875. Pilostegia viburnoides Hook. & Thoms. var. parviflora Oliver ex Maxim. in Mém. Acad. Sci. St. Pétersb. VIT. 10 (16): 18. 1867. Schizophragma viburnoides Stapf. in Bot. Mag. 155: pl. 9262. 1931. Pilostegia urceolata Hay. Icon. Pl. Formos. 3: 105. 1913. Syn. nov. Southern Japan, Liukiu Islands. In Formosa in central mountains at 1,200—2,500 meters. Formosa: Arisan, #. H. Wilson 9660 (US); Funkiko, prov. Kagi, 2. H. Wilson 10827 (US); Mt. Taiheisan, H. H. Bartlett 6054 (US), S. Suzuki 714 (NTU). Only one species of Ptlostegia is present in Formosa and this proves to be the same as that of southern Japan and the Liukiu Islands. Fepruary 1952 ENTOMOLOGY .—New species of Sarcophagini ROBACK: NEW SPECIES OF SARCOPHAGINI 45 (Diptera: Sarcophagidae).1 Setwyn 8S. Ropack, University of Illinois. (Communicated by C. W. Sabrosky.) The following descriptions of new species are based on material from several collec- tions examined in the course of phylogenetic studies on the Sarcophaginae. The disposi- tion of the types is indicated after each species description. Sarcophaga hollandia, n. sp. Fig. 1 Close to Sarcophaga antilope Bottcher and S. pwa Roback but differs from these in the lack of the golden pollen on the body. Also related to Sarcophaga beta Johnston and Teigs, but differs in details of genital structure. The anterior lateral clasper is bifurcate in all three. Male.—Parafrontals and parafacials gray with some golden pollen, both setulose; frontal rows divergent below in last three bristles; facilia setu- lose three-quarters distance from oral vibrissae to apex of second antennal segment; buccae with only golden hair; antennae and palpi black; outer verticals not distinct; three postocular rows. Thorax gray-pollinose, longitudinally striped; anterior acrosticals indistinct; prescutellars well developed; four posterior dorsocentrals; three lateroscutellar pairs; one discoscutellar pair; one apioscutellar pair; propleuron setulose. Abdomen gray; first two segments reddish laterally; with only lateral marginals; third red- dish, with median marginals in addition to laterals; fourth reddish, with marginal row of twelve bristles; sternite of third segment with apical brush of setae. Wings with small costal spine; first vein bare, third setulose; hind tibiae villous; genital seg- ments dark; genitalia shown in Fig. 1, A—D; part of fifth sternite missing as shown in Fig. 1, C. Holotype —Male, Hollandia, Netherlands New Guinea, rain forest 250 feet, May 1945 (H. Hoog- straal). In collection of Chicago Natural History Museum. Sarcophaga piva, n. sp. Fig. 2 Most closely related to Sarcophaga antilope 1This paper is a joint contribution from the Department of Entomology, University of Illinois, and the Section of Faunistic Surveys and Insect Identification, Illinois Natural History Survey. Bottcher, S. alpha Johnston and Teigs, and S. hollandia Roback. Differs from the first two in details of the genitalia and from the latter in possessing golden pollen on the body. The an- terior lateral clasper is bifurcate in all three. Male.—Parafrontals and parafacials golden- pollinose; both haired; frontal rows divergent below in last four bristles; facilia setulose a little over three-fifths distance from oral vibrissae to apex of second antennal segment; buccae with mostly black hair; some golden hair anterior to metacephalic suture; antennae and palpi black; outer verticals not distinguishable; three post- ocular rows. Thorax golden-pollinose; three longitudinal brown stripes, two faint ones between these; six pair anterior acrosticals; prescutellars well de- veloped; four or five posterior dorsocentrals; the fifth if present, weak; lateroscutellars, three pair; discoscutellars, one pair; apioscutellars, one pair; propleuron setulose. Abdomen golden-pollinose; first two segments with lateral marginals only; third with median marginals in addition to the laterals; fourth with a complete marginal row. Wings with weak costal spine; first vein bare third vein setulose; hind tibiae villous; genital segments black; genitalia shown in Fig. 2, A-E. Female —Outer verticals and proclinate fronto- orbitals distinct; more golden hair on buceae than in male; posterior dorsocentrals six; four small an- terior bristles and two large bristles before scutel- lum; scutellum without apicals; propleuron bare; genitalia brownish black. Holotype.—Male, Piva River, Bougainville, Solomon Islands, June 25, 1944 (B. D. Valentine). In collection of Illinois Natural History Survey. Allotype—Female, same data as for holotype. Sarcophaga lorena, n. sp. Fig. 3 Closely related to Sarcophaga setigera Aldrich from which it differs in the shape of the distal seg- ment of the aedeagus and the lack of median marginals on the second abdominal segment. Male.—Parafrontals and parafacials moderately setulose; frontal rows divergent below in last three facialia fourths distance from oral vibrissae to apex of eray; bristles: setulose three- 46 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 2 I-S. HOLLANDIA 8 3-S. LORENA Fig. 1.—Sarcophaga hollandia, n. sp.: A, Anal forceps, caudal view; B, genitalia, lateral view; C, fifth sternite; D, left lateral clasper, ventral view. Fra. 2.—Sarcophaga piva, n. sp.: A, Left lateral clasper, ventral view; B, anal forceps, caudal view; C, genitalia, lateral view; D, fifth sternite; E, phallus, lateral view. Fig. 3.—Sarcophaga lorena, n. sp.: A, Fifth sternite; B, phallus, anterior view; C . . . ? genitalia, lateral view. Fepruary 1952 ROBACK: NEW SPECIES OF SARCOPHAGINI 47 |, / MH, My = — 5-R. TANCITURO 6-Z. CANTENEA _ Fie. 4.—Boettcheria carata, n. sp.: A, Phallus, lateral view; B, fifth sternite; C, genitalia, lateral view; D, juxta, caudal view. Fia. 5.—Ravinia tancituro, n. sp.: A, Phallus, lateral view; B, acces- sory genital structures, lateral view; C, fifth sternite. Fia. 6.—Zygastropyga cantenea, n. sp.: A, Aedeagus, lateral view; B, anal forceps and anal plates, caudal view; C, genitalia, lateral view. 48 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES second antennal segment; buecae with black hair only; antennae and palpi brownish; outer verti- ‘als not distinct. Thorax with usual three to five longitudinal stripes; gray-pollinose; three pair anterior acrosti- cals; prescutellars well developed; three posterior dorsocentrals; lateroscutellars, two or three pair; discoscutellars, one pair; apioscutellars, one pair. Abdomen gray-pollinose; first two segments with only lateral marginals; third with marginal row of 12 bristles; fourth with marginal row of 16 bristles, reddish apically. Costa! spine present; first wing vein bare; third setulose; hind tibiae bare; genital segments light; genitalia shown in Fig. 3, A-C; fifth sternite cut as shown in Fig. 3, A. Holotype—Male, Riverhead, Long Island, N. Y., June 30, 1921. In the collection of Cornell University. Boettcheria carata, n. sp. Fig. 4 Closely allied to Boettcheria litorosa (Reinhard) and B. praevolans (Wulp). Differs from both in possessing outer verticals and lateral processes on the juxta. Male—Parafrontals and parafacials setulose; frontal rows sharply divergent below in last five bristles; facialia setulcse one-half distance from oral vibrissae to apex of second antennal segment; buecae with cnly black hair; antennae and palpi brownish; cuter verticals present; three post- ocular rows. Thorax gray-pollinose, striped longitudinally; two or three pair anterior acrosticals: prescutel- lars very weak; three posterior dorsocentrals; lateroscutellars, three pair; discoscutellars, one pair; apioscutellars, one weak pair. First two abdominal segments with only lateral marginals; third with a pair of median marginals in addition to laterals; fourth with a marginal row of 30 bristles; slightly red apically. Costal spine weak; first vein bare; third vein setulose; hind tibiae villous; genital segments reddish; genitalia shown in Fig. 4, A-D. Holotype-—Male, Monterey County, Calif., July 31, 1896. In collection of Chicago Natural History Museum. Paratype—Male, Custer, 8. Dak. In collection ef Lllmois Natural History Survey. Ravinia tancituro, n. sp. Fig. 5 Most closely related to Ravinia planifrons vou. 42, No. 2 (Aldrich) from which it differs in having three instead of four posterior dorsocentrals and in details of the phallus. Male.—Parafrontals and parafacials slghtly golden; lightly haired; frontal rows barely diver- gent below in last bristle; buccae with mostly black hair; antennae and palpi black; outer verti- cals absent; three postocular rows. Thorax gray-pollinose with usual three to five longitudinal stripes; one pair anterior acrosticals; prescutellars very weak; three posterior dorso- centrals; lateroscutellars, two pair; discoscutel- lars, one patr; no apioscutellars. Abdomen gray-pollincse; first and second seg- ments with only lateral marginals; third with a pair of median marginals in addition to the laterals; fourth with a marginal row of about twelve bristles. Costal spine lacking; first vein bare; third vein setulcse; epaulet yellow; hind tibiae bare; first hypopygial segment dark, second yellowish; geni- talia shown in Fig. 5, A-C. Holotype-—Male, Mount Tancituro, sweeping in meadow, 780 feet, Michoaecin, Mexico. Fourth Hoogstraal Mexican Biological Expedition, 1941 (H. Hoogstraal). In collection of Chicago Natural History Museum. Zygastropyga cantenea, n. sp. Fig. 6 Close to Zygastropyga aurea Townsend and Sarcophaga villipes (Wulp). Differs from former in the greater divergence of the frontal row and from the latter in having the first vein bare. Details of phallus differ from both above species.-Also near Sabinata arizonica Parker but differs in possessing strong outer verticals and a slight beard on the anterior tibiae. Male.—Parafrontals and parafacials gray with slight brownish cast; both setulose; frontal rows divergent below in last four bristles; facialia setulose to the base of arista; buecae with only black hair; antennae and palpi brown; outer verticals well developed. Thorax gray-pollinose; longitudinally striped; three pair anterior acrosticals; prescutellars large; four posterior dorsocentrals; lateroscutellars, three pair; discoscutellars, one pair; apioscutel- lars, one fine pair; propleuron bare. Abdomen gray-pollinose; first two segments with lateral marginals only; third and fourth ab- dominal segments missing on holotype. Cestal spine lacking; first vein bare, third vein Frespruary 1952 setulose; hind tibiae villous; genital segments red; genitalia shown in Fig. 6, A-C. Holotype—Male, Huachuca Mountains, Co- chise County, Ariz., July 21, 1930 (Leonora K. Gloyd). In collection of the University of Michigan. LITERATURE Atpricu, J. M. Sarcophaga and allies in North America: 301 pp., illus. 1916. JouNston, T. H., and Harpy, G. H. A revision of the Australian Diptera belonging to the genus Sarcophaga. Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales 48: 94-129, illus. 1923. BRIDWELL: A NEW GENUS OF BRUCHIDAE 49 Lopes, H.S. Sdébre os géneros Boettcheria Parker 1914 e Boettcherimima, n. gen. Mem. Inst. Oswaldo Cruz 48: 687-710, illus. 1950. Parker, R. R. North American Sarcophagidae: A new genus and several new species from the southwest United States. Bull. Brooklyn Ent. Soc. 16: 112-115, illus. 1921. REINHARD, H. J. New North American muscoid Diptera. Journ. Kansas Ent. Soe. 20 (3): 95-116, illus. 1947. Senror-Wuirte, R., AuUBERTIN, D., and Smart, J. The fauna of British India, including the remainder of the Oriental Region. Diptera 6: Family Calliphoridae: 288 pp., illus. London, 1940. ENTOMOLOGY .—A new genus of Bruchidae affecting Hibiscus in Argentina (Bru- chinae: Acanthoscelidini). J. C. BRipwexiu, Lignum, Va. (Communicated by Waldo L. Schmitt.) On March 16, 1940, P. B. Denton, an oiler on a tanker then in the harbor of Buenos Aires, collected 10 adult bruchids on flowers along the River Plate which he subsequently brought to the late Herbert Spencer Barber in the United States Na- tional Museum, where they are now pre- served. These 10 examples, no two of them alike in coloration, were so peculiar that soon after they reached me in January 1942 I wrote a description of the new genus Bonaéreus, here presented practically un- changed except for the identification of the species which has received seven specific or varietal names, all proposed by Maurice rc The clue enabling me to name the bruchid and its host plant was found in Juan M. Bosq’s highly esteemed “Segunda Lista de Coleépteros de la Reptiblica Argentina Dafinos a la Agricultura,” reprinted in 19438 from the ‘Ingenieria Agrondémica Buenos Aires 1942” 4: Nos. 18-22. In this reprint (p. 45) under no. 419 is the note: “Bruchus inornatipennis Pic Buenos Aires, Santa Fe, Corrientes. E[ntre] Rios. Ataca semillas de ‘rosa del Rio” (Hibiscus cisplatinus St. Hill.) en la misma planta. Ws una especie variable.” Mr. Denton’s flowers along the River Plate were thus identified as a plant much like our Hibiscus militaris, moscheutos, coccineus, and lasiocarpus in swamps and on river banks which support Althaeus hibisci (Olivier) (see Bridwell, 1946, The genera of beetles of the family Bruchidae in America north of Mexico, Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 36: 52-57). The bibliography of Pic’s plurinominate species had already been worked out thus: Bruchus inlineatus Pic, 1930, Melanges 55: 12: de l’Argentine. Also var. testaceicollis and var. Deyrollei on the same page. Bruchus tnornatipennis Pic, 1938, Rev. Soc. Ent. Argentina 10: 20: Chaco argentin (Viana), with var. obscurtmembris: Buenos Aires. On page 78 inornatipennis is referred to inlineatus as a variety, and on the same page postreductus and latetestaceus were described as varieties of inlineatus.t Would that we could forget six of these names, for they represent the descriptions of individual specimens. After examining the Denton series in 1942, I wrote in my notes, ‘‘One of the 10 examples is practically entirely reddish testaceous, with apical joints of maxillary palpi, antennal club and claw joints of tarsi somewhat infusecate; another is almost entirely black with the basal five joints of antennae more or less reddish testaceous. The remaining specimens repre- sent intermediates between these extremes, 1 In 1946 Blackwelder (Checklist of the coleop- terous insects of Mexico, Central America, the West Indies, and South America, U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 185, pt. 4: 759) listed tnlineatus and two varieties in Acanthoscelides, also separately listed 7rornate- pennis and one variety in the same genus, over- looking Pie’s merger of the species and the deserip- tions of two additional varieties on page TS. 50 some black with pale legs, others with the legs particolored and with the elytra partly red and partly black. In most of them the basal five joints of antennae and joint 11 are pale, while the club is dark above and pale beneath. They are all clothed through- out with thin fine pubescence but little obscuring the surface sculpture.” The combined generic and specific de- scription of the genus Bonaérius and its genotype, Bruchus inlineatus Pic, follows: Bonaérius inlineatus (Pic), 1930 Antennal joints 1-5 narrow, 6 small, twice as wide as 5; joints 7-10 transverse, cyathiform, forming with the expanded-ovate joint 11 a broad paddle-shaped club. Head short, frontal carina short, front about twice as broad as inner lobe of eye. Eye emarginate for one-half its length, con- vex, strongly projecting, temples narrow, abruptly declivous. Pronotum flat and even above, resembling that of Bruchus loti Paykull in shape. Flanks sep- arated from dorsum by a nearly straight mar- ginal carina ending above the coxa remote from the front margin, the flanks not closed front. Intercoxal process of prosternum short, meta- sternum with a deep median longitudinal sulcus. Scutellum quadrate, emarginately bidentate. Elytra broader than pronotum, flattened in HERPETOLOGY —Two Brazilian frogs: JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 2 above, subquadrate, without basal tubercles or elevations. Striae 2-6 and 10 reaching base; striae 5 and 6 abbreviate at apex. Striae strongly impressed and punctured, intervals flat. Front and middle femora a little more than usually incrassate. Hind femur slender, about as wide as its coxa and narrower than the first sternite behind the coxa, a little flattened beneath, armed near apex within with a single blunt tooth, not reaching apex of abdomen. Hind tibia slender, not longitudinally carinate beneath or on outer face; armed at apex beneath with two similar symmetrically disposed blunt teeth and above with three subdorsal apical teeth. Basitarsus gently arched, not apically produced beneath, without longitudinal carinae. Pygidium convex, about as broad as long, oblique; apex of pygidium rounded and bent down, impressed on either side, a prominent little mound in the middle between the two poorly defined impressions. While the general form resembles Althaeus hibisci (Olivier), 1795, Abutiloneus idoneus Brid- well, 1946, Acanthoscelides aequalis (Sharp), 1885, and other species of Acanthoscelidini known to affect seeds of Malvaceae, this resemblance is be- lieved to result from their developing within rounded seeds rather than from any particular affinity among them. The peculiar pygidium dis- tinguishes this genus from any other bruchid known to me. Hyla werneri, n. nom., and Hyla similis, n. sp. Doris M. Cocuran, United States National Museum. In 1874, Meyer proposed the name Hyperolius pygmaeus for a frog from Jobi Island in Dutch New Guinea (Monatsb. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1874: 139). Loveridge (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 101 (2): 397. 1948) lists this species as Hyla pygmaea (Meyer). It appears, therefore, that the name Hyla pygmaea proposed by Werner in 1894 for a frog from Santa Catharina, Brazil, should be renamed. I propose the following name for the Brazilian frog: Hyla werneri, n. nom. Hyla pygmaea (not of Meyer) Werner, Zool. Anz. 7: 411. 1894 (type locality, Blumenau, Santa Catharina); Nieden, Das Tierreich, Anura 1: 289. 1923. Hyla pigmaea Miranda-Ribeiro, Arch. Mus. Nac. Rio de Janeiro 27: 83. 1923; Mello-Leitao, Zoo-geografia do Brasil: 341. 1937. A gregarious little frog that quacks like a duck occurs in considerable numbers in the Federal District and within the city limits of Rio de Janeiro. So far no name already proposed seems to apply to this species. It is one of the rubra group, quite easily recognized as one of that group be- cause of its very thick tibia and the yellow and brown reticulations on the posterior femur. But like all the group, this form also varies indi- vidually to a very considerable degree. It may intergrade with hayii in the lower mountain regions, and with fuscovaria in the uplands of southern Minas Gerais. Only further collecting and study can limit its precise range. Hyla similis, n. sp. Diagnosis —Resembles H. fuscovaria A. Lutz in shape and structure of head and body and in a Fepruary 1952 tendency toward a grouping of dark elongate spots dorsolaterally. Differs im its significantly lower average length of head, femur, tibia, and foot, in the absence of clear-cut dorsolateral stripes, in the usually more finely spotted femur and tibia, and in its smaller size (maximum length 37 mm). Description of the type—An adult male, US. N.M. no. 97317, from Manguinhos near the city of Rio de Janeiro collected on February 25, 1935, by Joaquim Venancio. Vomerine teeth in two heavy, short, transverse groups almost continuous medially, between the posterior halves of the choanae; tongue about three-fifths as wide as mouth opening, roundly elliptical except for a deep notch on its free posterior margin; snout rather short, rounded when viewed from above and in profile, the upper jaw extending consider- ably beyond the lower; nostrils superolateral, greatly projecting, almost at the extreme tip of snout, separated from each other by an interval equal to two-thirds their distance from eye. Canthus rostralis rounded; loreal region slightly concave and very oblique. Eye large, very promi- nent, its diameter equal to its distance from nos- tril and to five-sixths the length of snout; inter- orbital diameter about 11 times the width of upper eyelid, greater than distance between nos- trils. Tympanum very distinct, about two-thirds the width of eye, separated from eye by a very narrow interval equal to about one-eighth its own diameter. Fingers with a slight trace of a basal web, fourth very slightly longer than second but not reaching the base of third, which covers one- fourth the tympanic area; no rudiment of a pollex visible; toes one-half webbed, fifth slightly longer than third, disk of fourth toe covering about one- fourth the tympanic area; a distinct oval inner and a small, wartlike outer metatarsal tubercle; a faint glandular ridge along inside of tarsus and a still weaker outer tarsal ridge; no dermal ap- pendage on heel. Body moderately heavy in build, in postaxillary region narrower than greatest width of head. When hind leg is adpressed, heel reaches to anterior border of eye; when limbs are laid along the body, knee and elbow are separated by a considerable interval; when hind legs are bent at right angles to the body, heels consider- ably overlap. Skin of upper parts with numerous elongate glandules and small tubercles, especially prominent on the center of the back; a narrow glandular ridge encircling upper part of tym- panum, and ending just behind it above the COCHRAN: TWO BRAZILIAN FROGS 51 shoulder; skin of throat and chest with minute scattered pustules, that of belly coarsely granular on the breast, finely granular posteriorly and on the lower surface of femur; a slight skin fold across the chest and another much more prominent pre- ceding it across the throat. A series of lateral folds on each side of the throat marking the presence of lateral gular sacs in the male. Dimensions—Head and body, 35 mm; head length, 11.5 mm; diameter of eye, 4 mm; width of head, 11 mm; femur, 15 mm; tibia, 16.5 mm; hind limb, 48 mm; forelimb, 19 mm; foot, 14 mm; hand, 9 mm. Color in alcohol—Dorsal ground color ecru- drab, with an indistinct light sepia triangle be- tween the eyes; a dorsolateral longitudinal series of very irregular sepia spots sometimes anas- tomosing across the back, their outer margin dark and fairly straight, delineating a dorsolateral stripe of the pale ground color, this light stripe edged below with an indefinite dark stripe, which begins behind the tympanum and breaks up on the sides into a fine reticulation of dark on a light ground, continued and becoming coarser toward the groin; a faint dark line along canthus rostralis; loreal region and upper lip marbled slightly with drab; upper surface of femur with fine sepia reticulations fading out on the anterior surface, becoming darker and coarser on the posterior surface and enclosing irregular pale cinnamon areas; upper surface of tibia with three large diagonal spots; outer tarsus and upper arm in- distinctly marbled with drab; ventral surface im- maculate buff. Color in life-—Some color notes on living speci- mens from Manguinhos were made on January 18, 19385. U.'S.N.M. no. 97374: Malachite to sage green above, immaculate. Posterior femur chrome-yellow with brown reticulations. Throat citron-yellow; belly sulphur-yellow in the center, chrome-yellow toward the sides, immaculate. U.S.N.M. no. 97376: Dorsum clay color in center, with a drab dorsolateral stripe. Groin and ventral surface olive-buff, the sides with sepia spots. Fore and hind legs ochraceous, barred with raw umber. US.N.M. no. 97375: Dorsum light olive-gray, with coarse mouse-gray blotches edged with black. Upper and posterior parts of femur orange- ochraceous, mottled with dark sepia. Chin, chest, and lower parts of limbs ecru-drab; belly pale blue. Variations —Within the usual limits there is the same amount of confusing variation in this 52 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON species that is met with in the cther members of the rubra group. The snout is usually rounded, but in about one-third of the examples it is slightly pointed. The tympanum, always distinct, may range from one-half to two-thirds the diameter of the eye in width. The interorbital diameter is often 14 times the width of the upper eyelid, but in a few instances scarcely exceeds the eyelid in width. The distance from the posterior border of the tympanum to the tip of the snout varies be- tween 31 and 36 percent of the total length of head and body, while the tibia is from 43 to 54 percent of this length. The adpressed heel may reach occasionally only to the posterior corner of the eye, most often to the center or anterior border of the eye, and rarely as far as the nostril. The disks of the fingers may be large, moderate or rather small, and as the tympanum itself varies considerably in size, the fourth finger disk may cover as little as one-fourth of its area to as much as two-thirds. The skin of the back is smooth in perhaps one-fourth of the specimens (this may depend on preservation to some extent), faintly granular all over in some, granular only on the posterior part in others. The pattern seems as varied as do the physical dimensions. Usually there is a more or less distinct dark area between the eyes, but no other markings are at all constant. Some individuals are pale drab, with remnants of longitudinal dark stripes as in rubra appearing in this species as two rather irregular dark stripes enclosing a light area on each side of the back. In other specimens the upper one of the two dark stripes shortens and becomes crescentic; in many cases its inner edge approaches its fellow until they nearly fuse across the back, and in some cases they actually do become fused, with a few scattered light spots on them which may indicate their usual limits. Some- times there is an irregular network of coarse dark spots down the back; sometimes an inverted V or its separated elements may appear cn the sacral region. The upper part of the femur is usually irregularly spotted or reticulated; in only a few instances do these spots suggest the regular dark cross bars characterizing some other members of this group. Quite often the posterior surface of the femur reveals a. rather large, very irregular, elongate light spot surrounded and set off by nar- row dark reticulations. In other cases the pos- terior femur is finely marbled with small light and dark spots in about equal proportions. The upper surface of the tibia often has three irregular oval ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 2 spots placed diagonally across it. Any of these dark spots may lhghten, leaving only a narrow dark outline which suggests a parallelogram or an irregular circle. Numerous small dark dots scat- tered over the upper surfaces still further obscure the pattern. The sides sometimes show linear rows of dark dots more or less fused into a net- work, or often a scattering of fine dots with no particular arrangement. The groin quite often has a very pale (yellowish in life) area, confined some- times to an elongate irregular spot encircled by darker, heavier reticulations. The ventral surface appears to be immaculate in the specimens at hand. A good many individuals show a dark brown stripe along the canthus, with considerable spotting on the upper lip; other specimens have a much hghter canthal stripe and the labial spots are reduced to a light marbling. Sometimes the ‘anthal stripe is continued over the tympanum as a narrow dark line, widening behind the ear and often ending in front of the forearm, but also sometimes carried part way down the side as an irregular dark stripe. Remarks.—It is perhaps rash to give a new name to another of the rubra group, the most variable of any in Brazil, but no formerly pro- posed name seems to be applicable to the form coming from within the Federal District. H. x-sig- nata of Spix from Bahia is apparently nearest to similis, after fuscovaria, but fresh Bahian material is needed before an exact comparison can be made. This species has the peculiar habit of ‘‘swarm- ing,” as hundreds appeared at one time on a tree outside the laboratory at the Instituto Oswaldo Cruz. The voice of the adult is a high-pitched crack, crack, crack, crack, sounding somewhat like that of a duck. Breeding takes place in March and April. The tadpoles metamorphose very rap- idly, taking only 20 to 30 days to change into frogs, but they are rather delicate, as they die from the effects of too much sun if the water in which they live is not deep enough. While this species is exceedingly plentiful at Manguinhos, it is not known from the southern part of the state of Rio de Janeiro. In fact, only two other examples at all resembling this form are known outside of the Manguinhcs material. One of these is from Bom Successo, a few minutes’ ride by automobile from Manguinhos, while the other, no. 96213, not in good condition but seem- ing to belong to the present species, is from Amorim near the city of Rio de Janeiro. Frepruary 1952 SCHILLER: A MATHEMATICAL ANALYSIS Head length Head width Femur Tibia Foot Hand N 49 49 49 49 49 49 M a8 7 31.9 42.0 48.0 39.0 26.2 o 1.2 1.2 1583 2.0 2.0 1.4 15 3.56 3.76 3.10 4.17 1183 5.36 Gm 0.01 0.54 0.44 0.59 0.73 0.77 Range 31.1— 29.4— 37.9— 43.5— 34.8— 23.9— 36.0 35.1 47.1 54.2 47.5 30.0 List of specimens—Rio de Janeiro (state): US.N.M. no. 97317, the type of Hyla similis, and paratypes U.S.N.M. nos. 97312-6, 97318-52, NEW CESTODE 53 97374-6, from Manguinhos, all collected between January 18 and May 20, 1935, mostly by J. Venancio; U.S.N.M. nos. 96144-6 from Man- guinhos collected in January 1922; U.S.N.M. no. 96203, an adult male from Bom Successo near the city of Rio de Janeiro, collected on October 25, 1928, and received from Dr. A. Lutz; U.S.N.M. no. 96213 from Amorim near the city of Rio de Janeiro collected in January 1926; U.S.N.M. nos. 81119-21 from Rio de Janeiro, collected in 1930 and received from Dr. A. Lutz. HELMINTHOLOGY.—Hymenolepis johnsoni, . sp., a cestode from the vole Mi- erotus pennsylvanicus drummondi. Evererr L. ScHi~uer, Arctic Health Re- search Center, Anchorage, Alaska. (Communicated by Harald A. Rehder.) In connection with a separate work con- cerning morphological variation, the writer had occasion to study a number of hyme- nolepidid cestodes obtained from the autopsy of some preserved microtine rodents in the collection of the U. 8. National Museum. Two of these cestodes, taken from a vole, Microtus pennsylvanicus drummondiw (Au- dubon and Bachman), collected at Fort Rae, District of Mackenzie, Canada, represent a species of the genus Hymenolepis Weinland, 1858, which appears to be unknown in the parasitological literature and therefore is herein described as new. The voles from which this material was taken were included among a large series of preserved rodents made available to Dr. Robert Rausch, of this laboratory, in con- junction with a survey of the helminth para- sites of Nearctic microtine rodents. All hymenolepidid cestodes were turned over to the writer for study. This opportunity is taken to express to Dr. David H. Johnson, associate curator, division of mammals, U.S. National Museum, appreciation of his generous cooperation, which has made these studies possible. Hymenolepis johnsoni, n. sp. Figs. 1-3 Diagnosis.—Length of strobila 30-40 mm; maximum width 1.4 mm, attained at poste- rior end. Scolex diameter 150-180u. Suckers, unarmed, 64 by 80u. Evaginated rostellum 160u long by 48u wide at apex, which sup- ports single row of 10 hooks 15 in length. Strobila 1084 wide immediately posterior to base of scolex. Genital pores unilateral and dextral. Genital ducts pass dorsal to excre- tory canals. Cirrus sac muscular, averages 112u in length by 43u in diameter in mature proglottids. External seminal vesicle well developed, 115 by 72u. Cirrus armed with minute spines. Testes, three in number, ovoid, 24 by 32u, arranged in form of tri- angle with one testis poral and two aporal to ovary and vitelline gland. Deeply lobed ovary located in middle of proglottid. Vitelline gland hes ventral and posterior to ovary. Vagina ventral and posterior to cirrus sac. Saccate seminal receptacle prominent in mature proglottids, attains maximum size of 168 by 104u. Uterus extends as slender irregular tube transversely across anterior part of proglottid, passing dorsal to excre- tory canals and reaching beyond them. Completely developed eggs not observed. Ventral longitudinal excretory canals meas- ure 93u in diameter; dorsal canals, Ilp in diameter. Host.—Microtus pennsylvanicus mondii (Audubon and Bachman). Locality—Fort Rae, District of kenzie, Canada. Habitat—Small intestine. Type.—One slide, no. 37340, containing an entire specimen, has been deposited in the Helminthological Collection of the U.S. National Museum. drum- Mae- DISCUSSION Baer (1931) listed 14 armed species of Hymenolepis parasitic in rodents and added H. muris-sylvaticc (Rudolphi, 1819).to this JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 2 LSS Sy 59 It SEIS GSS SCS SiS See SSeS, TESS SS SP AG Sp Si SIS SS SSSSIS Ss SIND SSSSSSS LESS Sy L555 GIS SS SS SIISIS dl 500 y 5 Fries. 1-3.—Morphological details of Hymenolepis johnsoni, n. sp.: 1, Scolex; 2, rostellar hook; 3, late mature proglottid (ventral view). Fesruary 1952 list. In a further review of the taxonomic status of this group (1932) he reduced the total number to 13. More recently Rider and Macey (1947) described H. ondatrae bringing the total again to 14. Of these, only four species have 10 rostellar hooks. These were found to differ from H. johnsoni as follows: H. evaginata Barker and Andrews, 1915 (from Ondatra zibethica L.), has a strobila of much greater length (200-400 mm), a bilobed ovary, and smaller rostellar hooks (7u) of a characteristically different shape. H. pearset Joyeux and Baer, 1930 (from Hybomys univittatus Peters), has a larger cirrus sac (520 by 60u), testes arranged in a straight line, the ovary and vitelline gland poral to midline, and much longer rostellar hooks (60u) of a different shape. H. muris-sylvatict (Rudolphi, 1819) (from Apodemus sylvaticus (L.)) has an aspinose cirrus and larger rostellar hooks | (23y), which differ markedly in shape. COE: NEMERTBANS OF ARCTIC OCEAN 55 H. ondatrae Rider and Macy, 1947 (from Ondatra zibethica occipitalis (Elhot)), has a larger cirrus sac (30-385 by 150-220y), an ovary that is smooth or may tend to be trilobate, and rostellar hooks that vary in number from 8 to 10, are of a much greater length (67-73u), and have a_ distinctly different shape. This cestode is named in honor of Dr. David H. Johnson, whose interest in these studies made possible the examination of valuable host material. REFERENCES Barer, J. G. Sur la position systématique du Taenia muris-sylvatici Rudolphi, 1819. Bull. Soc. Neuchatel. Sci. Nat. 55: 35-39. 1931. Contribution a la faune helminthologique de Suisse. Rev. Suisse Zool. 39: 1-57. 1932. Riper, C. L., and Macy, R. W. Preliminary survey of the helminth parasites of muskrats in northwestern Oregon, with description of Hy- menolepis ondatrae n. sp. Trans. Amer. Mier. Soc. 66: 176-181. 1947. ZOOLOGY —Geographical distribution of the species of nemerteans of the Arctic Ocean near Point Barrow, Alaska... WrstEyY R. Cor, Scripps Institution of Oceanography. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) Nemerteans occur along the borders of all the oceans, from beneath the Polar Seas northwest of Greenland (Coe, 1944) to the ice barrier surrounding the South Pole (Coe, 1950). Moreover most of the same genera, but not the same species, are found in both these extremes of latitude. The floor of the Arctic Ocean near Point Barrow is evidently well adapted for popu- lations of nemerteans, for Prof. and Mrs. George MacGinitie during their two years at the Arctic Research Laboratory? collected more than 300 specimens of these worms. Nemerteans were found at nearly all the dredging stations, from shallow water to depths of about 250 meters 12 to 16 miles from shore. The collections contained 24 recognizable species, among which are 7 species of Amphiporus, 4 of Tubulanus, 3 of ‘Contribution of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography, new series, no. 557. 2Supported by the Office of Naval Research through contracts with the California Institute of Technology and the Johns Hopkins University. Micrura, 4 of Tetrastemma, 2 of Cerebratulus, 1 each of Lineus, Emplectonema, Nemertopsis, and Paranemertes. Asin other collections from Arctic seas, the genus Amphiporus has not only the greatest number of species but some of the species have also the largest popula- tions. A. angulatus and A. lactifloreus are the most abundant species in the Point Barrow area. Ten of the species have not been re- ported previously from strictly Arctic seas, although three of these have been found in the nearby Bering Sea. These collections are of particular interest because only three species of nemerteans were formerly known from that portion of the Arctic seas and the others contribute to an understanding of the cireumpolar dis- tribution of some of the species. Even at the present time no nemerteans are known from the Polar seas between the Point Barrow area and northwest Greenland on the east and Nova Zemblya and Franz Josef Land on the west. From the Polar seas the populations of 56 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES several of the species extend southward along the European, American, and Asiatic coasts. Cerebratulus marginatus may be men- tioned as a species with an unusually exten- sive geographical distribution, for the range of this species extends from near King Karl Land, Spitsbergen, and elsewhere in the Arctic to Norway, Great Britain, the Medi- terranean and Madeira in the eastern Atlantic and from Greenland to Labrador, Nova Scotia, New England, Cape Cod, and farther southward beneath the offshore cur- rent in the western Atlantic. It also extends from the Point Barrow area, Bering Sea, Pacific coast of Alaska and southward to southern California along the American coast, and to Kamchatka and Japan on the Asiatic coast. This does not imply that the populations in the present geological era are continuous through all this vast extent of territory, nor can it be assumed that the species originated in that portion of the globe which is now occupied by the Polar seas. The species presumably exists as isolated, localized, more or less widely sepa- rated populations. Moreover it is probable that it is even more widely distributed than is at present known. Four other species, Lineus ruber, Cere- bratulus fuscus, Amphiporus lactifloreus, and Tetrastemma candidum, similarly extend southward along the European and American Atlantic coasts, while Amphiporus angulatus extends from Greenland as far south as southern New England in the western Atlantic and from Point Barrow to California on the American coast, as well as to Japan on the Asiatic coast, but it has not been found in the eastern Atlantic. Amphiporus lactifloreus occurs on both the European and American Atlantic coasts, as well as in the Arctic, but has not been re- ported from the Pacific, while Tubulanus capistratus 1s found on both sides of the Pacific, from Point Barrow to California and to Japan, but not in the Atlantic. The Point Barrow area therefore forms an inter- mediate link for those species formerly known to occur in the Polar seas north of Europe or near the coasts of Greenland, or both, and those on either the American or Asiatic Pacific coasts or both. Relatively few species of nemerteans are VoL. 42, No. 2 known to occur in both the Northern and Southern Hemispheres. Of those here re- ported for the Point Barrow area, Tubulanus annulatus, Lineus ruber, Cerebratulus fuscus, and Tetrastemma candidum have been found also on the coast of South Africa and Hm- plectonema gracile on the coast of Chile. The following list, arranged in systematic order, gives the geographical distribution of each of the species found in the Point Barrow area in so far as at present known. A similar list of the distribution of other species re- ported for Arctic seas: has been published by Coe (1944). Order PALEONEMERTEA Tubulanus albocinctus (Coe), 1904. This is the first record of this species in Arctic seas. It has been dredged previously among red algae at depths of 100 to 200 meters off the coast of south- ern California. One specimen, about 107 mm in length, was collected at a depth of 65 meters between 4 and 5 miles from shore off Point Barrow. Tubulanus annulatus (Montagu), 1804. This species is widely distributed on the eastern shores of the North Atlantic, from Norway and Great Britain to the Mediterranean; it has also been re- ported from the South Atlantic, near the Cape of Good Hope. In the Arctic it has been dredged near King Karl Land, off Cape Platen, and in the Karajek Fiord, Greenland, as well as off the northwest coast of Greenland (Coe, 1944). In the Point Barrow area it was found at depths up to 126 meters and up to 7 miles from shore. Tubulanus capistratus (Coe), 1901. This species is closely similar to the preceding but is without the white band on the dorsal surface of the head. It has been found in the intertidal zone and below along the Pacific coast of Alaska and southward to Monterey Bay, Calif., and it is also reported from Japan. In the Point Barrow area it was col- lected at depths of 3 and 131 meters, from near shore and 12 miles out. Tubulanus frenatus (Coe), 1904. One specimen was found near Point Barrow. Previously re- corded only from southern California. Order HETERONEMERTEA Lineus ruber (O. F. Miiller), 1771. Cireumpolar; coasts of Siberia; Greenland; Norway and Great Britain to the Mediterranean, Madeira and South Africa; Labrador to southern New England; FEBRUARY 1952 Alaska to California. In the collections from the Point Barrow area only two specimens were as- signed to this species. One of these was found near shore and the other ot a depth of 136 meters 8 miles out. Micrura alaskensis Coe, 1901. A species in the intertidal zone and below along the Pacifie coast of Alaska and southward to northern Mexico. Found also in Japan. In the Point Bar- row area only four individuals were obtained. One of these was found near shore and the others 4 to 7 miles out, at depths of 50 to 65 meters. Micrura impressa (Stimpson), 1857. Originally described from an individual dredged in. Bering Strait. Later reported from Japan (Yamaoka, 1940). One specimen measuring 97 mm in length and 9 mm in width when contracted was found washed ashore at Point Barrow. Micrura purpurea (Dalyell), 1853. Reported in Arctie seas northwest of Greenland, Karajak Fiord and Hinlopen Strait at depths of 45 to 115 meters (Coe, 1944). Common on European coasts from the intertidal zone to depths of 200 meters or more. One specimen was obtained in the Point Barrow area at a depth of 143 meters, 16 miles from shore. (Cerebratulus barentst Birger, 1895. The minor morphological features which have been thought to separate this species from C. marginatus have evidently resulted from different states of con- traction of the head. Hence C. barentsi is no longer considered to be a valid species.) Cerebratulus fuscus (McIntosh), 1873-4. This is a species with a very wide geographical distri- bution, for it has been reported not only from the coasts of Greenland and elsewhere in Arctic seas, but also from Norway and Great Britain to the Mediterranean, as well as South Africa and Florida (Coe, 1951). The single specimen col- lected in the Point Barrow area was dredged at a depth of 41 meters, 3.5 miles from shore. Cerebratulus marginatus Renier, 1804. This species has the wide circumpolar distribution previously mentioned, being found on European coasts as far south as Madeira; on the eastern North American coasts it extends southward to Cape Cod and farther south beneath the offshore current; on the western North American coast southward to southern California and in the western Pacific as far south as Japan. In the Arctic it has been reported from King Karl Land, Bremer Sound, Hinlopen Strait, Hast Spisbergen, and northwest Greenland. In the Point Barrow common COE: NEMERTEANS OF ARCTIC OCEAN 57 area it was found at depths of 61 to 222 meters, 5 to 12 miles from shore. Order HopLONEMERTEA Emplectonema gracile (Johnston), 1837. One small specimen about 30 mm long and | to 2mm in diameter after preservation was obtained in the Point Barrow area at a depth of 38 meters. This is one of the most widely distributed of all species of nemerteans, being abundant in the intertidal zone and below, on the northern coasts of Europe and southward to Madeira; on the coasts of Alaska to California and northern Mexico, and it has been reported also from Chile, as well as from Kamchatka and Japan. It has not been recorded previously from Arctic areas. Paranemertes peregrina Coe, 1901. In many localities this is the most abundant nemertean in the intertidal zone along the Pacific coast of Alaska and southward to California. It has also been reported from the Aleutian Islands, Kam- chatka and Japan. Only a single representative of this species was found in the Point Barrow area. Nemertopsis gracilis Coe, 1904. Previously re- ported from Pugent Sound to northern Mexico. Only one specimen was dredged in the Point Barrow area. Amphiporus angulatus (Fabricius), 1774. The collections indicate that this is the most abundant nemertean in the Point Barrow region. Because of the relatively large size of many individuals and their conspicuous coloration, it is unlikely that they would be overlooked by the collector. This species was found at 9 stations, where the depths were between 12 and 226 meters. The distance from shore varied from 2.75 to 16 miles. This species is widely distributed in Arctic seas, having been reported from near Greenland, Baffin Bay, Davis Strait, Labrador, Nova Scotia, southward to Cape Cod and further south beneath the off- shore Arctic current. On the Pacific coast of North America it extends through Bering Sea, along the coast of Alaska and south as far as Point Con- ception, California. On the Asiatic coast it has been found on the shores of Kamchatka and Japan. It was collected by Stimpson (1857) in Bering Strait. Amphiporus fornadabilis Griffin, 1898. Previ- ously recorded from Bering Island, Aleutian Islands, coast of Alaska and southward to Mon- terey Bay, California. Two specimens in the Point Barrow collections were dredged at depths of about 62 and 226 meters, 5 to 12 miles from shore. 58 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Amphiporus groenlandicus (Oersted), 1844. This is another species that is widely distributed in Arctic seas, having been reported from both the eastern and western coasts of Greenland, from Hinlopen Strait, Barents Sea, and from the waters off King Karl Land, Jena Island, Franz Josef Land, and Spitzbergen at depths of 4 to 450 meters. The same or a closely similar species, A. caecus Verrill, also without ocelli, has been dredged at a depth of about 35 meters off the New England coast (Coe, 1943). A. groenlandicus was found in the Point Barrow area at depths of 40 to 247 meters and up to 12 miles from shore. Amphiporus imparispinosus Griffin, 1898. This has been reported previously from the Bering Sea and it is abundant in many localities in the intertidal zone and below, along the coast of Alaska and southward to Ensenada, Mexico. The typical form, which has three pouches of ac- cessory stylets is often associated with the variety similis, which has only two. The species was found in the Point Barrow area at depths of 87 to 104 meters and up to 7 miles from shore. Amphiporus lactifloreus (Johnston) 1828. With the exception of Amphiporus angulatus, this species appears to be the most abundant nemer- tean in the Point Barrow area. The species was found at 13 stations, where the depths varied from 12 to 226 meters and at distances up to 12 miles from shore. It is widely distributed along the shores of the Arctic and North Atlantic oceans, extending southward to the Mediterranean Sea and on the American coast as far as Cape Cod. Except in the far north it occurs in the intertidal zone and in some areas to depths of 200 meters. Amphiporus macracanthus Coe, 1905. This spe- cies is known only from the Arctic coast of Alaska, where it was collected as early as 1882 near Cape Smyth and at a later date at Wain- wright Inlet (Coe, 1905). In the Point Barrow area it was found at depths of 38 to 53 meters and up to 4 miles from shore. Amphiporus pacificus Coe, 1905. Previously dredged at depths of 70 to 180 meters in the Bering Sea and off the coasts of Washington and California. Collected in the Point Barrow area at depths of 9 to 226 meters and up to 12 miles from shore. Tetrastemma aberrans Coe, 1901. Several speci- mens were dredged at depths of less than 40 meters. Previously known only from the coast of Alaska. VoL. 42, No. 2 Tetrastemma bicolor Coe, 1901. Previously known only from Kodiak Island, Alaska. One individual was dredged at a depth of 50 meters about 3 miles from Point Barrow. Tetrastemma candidum (Miller), 1774. Cireum- polar; Greenland; Norway to Madeira; South Africa; Labrador to southern New England and southward to northern Florida; northern coast of the Gulf of Mexico; Alaska to California and north- ern Mexico. In the Point Barrow area the species was found at depths of 34 to 145 meters and up to 16 miles from shore. Tetrastemma coronatum (Quatrefages), 1846. The collection from the Poimt Barrow area was accompanied by a colored photograph of an indi- vidual of this species that had been dredged at a depth of 50 meters, about 3 miles from shore. Common on European coasts and the Mediter- ranean. Reported also in Japan (Yamaoka, 1940). All the specimens in this collection are in the U.S. National Museum. REFERENCES Bircer, Orro. Beitrdge zur Anatomie, Systematik und geographische Verbreitung der Nemertinen. Zeitschr. wiss. Zool. 61: 16-37. 1895. ———. Die Nemertinen. Fauna Arctica 3: 57-64. 1903. Cor, W. R. Nemerteans of the west and northwest coasts of America. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 47: 1-319. 1905. Revision of the nemertean fauna of the Pacific coasts of North, Central and northern South America. Allan Hancock Pacific Exped. 2: 247-323. 1940. Biology of the nemerteans of the Atlantic coast of North America. Trans. Connecticut Acad. Arts and Sei. 35: 129-328. 1943. Nemerteans from the northwest coast of Greenland and other Arctic seas. Journ. Wash- ington Acad. Sci. 34: 59-61. 1944. Nemerteans from Antarctica and the Ant- arctic Ocean. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 40: 56-59. 1950. Geographical distribution of the nemerteans of the northern coast of the Gulf of Mexico as compared with those of the southern coast of Florida, with descriptions of three new species. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 41: 328-331 1951. Punnett, R. C. Arctic nemerteans. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 1901: 90-107. 1901. Uscoakow, P. Beschreibung einiger neuen Nemertinenarten von Barents-Meere, Weissen Meere und Nowaja-Semlja. Zool. Jahrb. 54: 407-424. 1928. YamAoKA, Tr1icat. The faunaof Akkeshi Bay, 1X Nemertini. Journ. Fac. Sci. Hokkaido Imp. Univ. (ser. v1, Zool.) 7: 205-263. 1940. NEW MEMBERS OF THE ACADEMY There follows a list of persons elected to membership in the Academy, by vote of its Board of Managers, since March 1, 1950, who have since qualified as members in accordance with the bylaws. The bases for election are stated with the names of the new members. RESIDENT Elected March 20, 1950 GeorGE 8. Switzer, associate curator of min- eralogy and petrology, U. 8. National Museum, in recognition of his studies of systematic min- eralogy. Elected April 17, 1950 Herpert LeaperMan, physicist, rubber sec- tion, National Bureau of Standards, in recogni- tion of his work on the physics of high polymers and in particular his contributions to rheology as exemplified by research on the creep and flow of rubbers and fibers. Elected May 15, 1950 J. M. Amprrson, commander, Medical Corps Reserve, USNR, chief of tropical medicine, Naval Medical School, in recognition of his studies of tropical diseases, especially cholera and schisto- somiasis, and for his leadership in field surveys to probe into the epidemiology of these diseases and improved methods for their control. Rosert G. BRECKENRIDGE, physicist, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his con- tributions to chemical physics and in particular his work on the electrical properties of solids. Lioyp A. Burkey, bacteriologist, Bureau of Dairy Industry, in recognition of his studies on the pectin-fermenting bacteria, his contributions on the bacteriology of Swiss cheese and on cul- tured milks, and his contributions in bacteri- ological studies on the detection, diagnosis, and causes of bovine mastitis. Wixtiiam D. Fieup, associate curator of in- sects, U. S. National Museum, in recognition of his taxonomic and distributional studies of the Lepidoptera, the butterflies and larger moths in particular. Ropert Travus, major, U. 8. Army, chief, department of parasitology, Army Medical Center, in recognition of outstanding contribu- tions to the systematics of fleas and to the epidemiology of scrub typhus. Elected October 30, 1950 B. M. Axitrop, physicist, National Bureau of 9 Standards, in recognition of his contributions to knowledge of the mechanical properties of plastics and of cohesive forces in crystals of the rare gases. hh. W. Cannon, assistant chief, applied mathe- matics division, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to the develop- ment of high-speed automatic computing ma- chinery, and to the establishment of a strong federal program in applied mathematics. Harotp E. Cunaves, chief, chemical metal- lurgy section, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions in the field of physical metallurgy, particularly in the prepara- tion and determination of the properties of the purest iron ever prepared. Irvine A. Denison, chief, underground cor- rosion section, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to theory of corrosion and corrosion prevention in soils and measurement of the corrosion of metals in soils. Tuomas G. Diaars, chief, thermal metallurgy section, National Bureau of Standards, in recog- nition of his contributions to metallurgy, in particular his studies of machinability, harden- ability, and creep. GrorGe A. ELLINGER, chief, optical metallurgy section, National Bureau of Standards, in recog- nition of his work in the field of metallurgy, particularly in metallography and corrosion. Haru K. Fiscuer, chief, organic coatings sec- tion, National Bureau of Standards, in recogni- tion of his contributions to rheology and colloid chemistry. AupHonsEe F. Forzratt, research associate of the American Dental Association at the National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contri- butions to physical chemistry, in particular his studies of the purification and properties of petroleum hydrocarbons. THoMAs WALLER GerorRGE, head, armor materials section, Naval Research Laboratory, in recognition of his studies of the mechanical strength of solids, in particular the relation be- tween strain rate and strength. Wayne C. Hatt, superintendent, electricity division, Naval Research Laboratory, in recogni- tion of his work on electrostatic charging of ai- craft and on thermal conductivity. Homer D. Hoturr, general physical scientist, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to the theory of corrosion and his applications of electrical theory to corrosion and corrosion prevention. 60 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Donatp Hupparp, chemist, glass section, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to physical chemistry and in particular his studies of photographic emulsions and the relation between chemical durability and pH response of glass electrodes. Perer Kine, branch head, chemistry division, Naval Research Laboratory, in recognition of his contributions to chemistry and opties, in particu- lar his studies of low-reflecting coatings. Lutuer B. Lockuarr, Jr., research chemist, Naval Research Laboratory, in recognition of his work on separation of the constituents of petroleum and pilot plant work on extraction of alumina from clay. Howarp F. McMvurpir, chief, constitution and microstructure section, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his work in applied crystallography and phase studies in inorganic chemistry, especially as regards portland cement, ceramics, and dry cells. W. T. Reap, chemical adviser, general staff, G-4, U. 8. Army, in recognition of his contri- butions to organic chemistry, particularly the chemistry of hydrazines and hydantoins, to edu- cation in chemical engineering, and to the history of chemistry. JoHN A. SANDERSON, superintendent, optics division, Naval Research Laboratory, in recog- nition of his contributions to optics, particularly his researches in the infrared. A. L. SHanowrrz, chief, research, review, and technical information section, U. 5. Coast and Geodetic Survey, and special assistant to the director, in recognition of his research work in the field of nautical cartography and in the stand- ardization of practices relating to hydrographic surveying, particularly in the matter of inter- pretation of charts and surveys for scientific and legal purposes. James L. THomas, chief, resistance measure- ments section, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to physics and in particular to precise electrical measurements. Leroy W. Titton, physicist, optical instru- ments section, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to physics, par- ticularly in the field of refractometry. Herpert C. Vacuer, X-ray metallographist, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his researches on gases in metals, physical chem- istry of steel making, and plastic deformation of metals. SAMUEL G. WeIssBERG, physicist, organic plas- VoL. 42, No. 2 tics section, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his work on the properties of high polymers in solution and his contributions to our knowledge of the properties of building materials and aircraft finishes. Elected November 20, 1950 B. D. Burks, entomologist, Bureau of En- tomology and Plant Quarantine, in recognition of his contributions to the classification and biology of insects, especially his studies in the taxonomy of parasitic wasps and of mayflies. Frank R. CALpWELL, physicist, combustion section, National Bureau of Standards, in recog- nition of his contributions in the field of com- bustion, particularly as applied in gas turbines and jet engines. Anprew I. Dau, physicist in charge of gas temperature measurements, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of the development of thermocouple pyrometers for use in gas turbines and jet engines. Mitprep A. Doss, zoologist, zoological di- vision, Bureau of Animal Industry, in recognition of her servies to the science of parasitology through the maintenance of the Index Catalogue of Medical and Veterinary Zoology, which pro- vides a working tool of inestimable value to para- sitologists the world over. U. Fano, physicist, National Bureau of Stand- ards, in recognition of his contributions to theoret- ical nuclear physics, in particular his studies on the penetration of radiation through barriers. Marion M. Farr, parasitologist, zoological division, Bureau of Animal Industry, in recog- nition of her work on the Protozoa and protozoan diseases on poultry. MarsuHati C. Garpner, biologist, U. 8. Fish and Wildlife Service, in recognition of his re- search in mammalogy, and in particular his re- searches on the taxonomy of the mammalian genera Sigmodon and Lynx. Derror C. GInnrINGs, chemist in charge of high- temperature calorimetry, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to -alorimetry, and in particular of the development of the ice calorimeter and its application to accurate measurements of heat capacities at high temperatures. Frank L. Howarp, acting chief, engine fuels section, National Bureau of Standards, in recog- nition of his contributions to the synthesis of hydrocarbons of high purity, particularly those of interest in internal combustion engines. FEeBRuARY 1952 Kk. C. Kares, parasitologist, zoological di- vision, Bureau of Animal Industry, in recognition of his contributions to the knowledge of par- asites and parasitic diseases of swine and sheep. H. Wituram Kocu, chief, betatron section, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to nuclear physics, in particular to betatron applications, and his studies of the interactions of high energy gamma rays with matter. S. A. McKus, chief, engines and lubrication section, National Bureau of Standards, in recog- nition of his contributions in the field of lubrica- tion and wear. Russetut B. Scorr, chief, cryogenic section, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to cryogenic research, particu- larly his calorimetric investigations at low tem- peratures. Doys A. SHors, parasitologist, Bureau of Animal Industry, in recognition of his extensive investigations of parasites and parasitic diseases of livestock. Mary S. SHors, research professor, depart- ment of poultry husbandry, University of Mary- land, in recognition of her contributions to the science of nutrition, especially the development of methods of assay for vitamin B-12 and related investigations. Bancrorr W. Sirreryy, professor of mathe- matics and associate dean, American University, in recognition of his contributions to astronomy, and in particular investigations on eclipsing bi- nary stars, stellar magnitudes, and stellar paral- laxes; also studies in the theory of hyperbolic systems of radio navigation, in particular the Loran system. CHarLoTte M. Sirrerty, physicist, spectros- copy section, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of her contributions to astrophysics, in particular researches on the solar and sun spot spectra, and contributions to the study of atomic spectra and tables of atomic energy levels. Joun Topp, chief, computation laboratory, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contribution to numerical analysis in particu- lar, and to mathematics in general. GrorGe B. Voart, entomologist, Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, in recognition of his original and unusually searching work in insect biology and taxonomy, especially that deal- ing with Texan woodboring beetles. KATHARINE Way, physicist, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of her contributions PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 61 to nuclear physics, in particular her work on binding energies and fission products. Harowp O. Wyckorr, chief, X-ray section, Na- tional Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to radiation physics and in particu- lar his researches on the protection requirements for electromagnetic radiations. Elected January 16, 1951 Francis A. ARNOLD, JR., associate director, National Institute of Dental Research, National Institutes of Health, in recognition of his contri- butions to dental research, and in particular his contributions to the epidemiology of dental caries with particular reference to the role of naturally occurring fluorine in water supplies. ALFRED EK. Brown, assistant director, Harris Research Laboratories, in recognition of his work on the chemical modification of proteins, and in particular his researches on modification of wool and other fibrous proteins. Lyman Fourt, research associate, Harris Re- search Laboratories, in recognition of his work in the testing of textiles and in their evaluation for clothing. A. R. Guaseow, Jr., chemist, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his studies in the separation, purification, and analysis of petroleum hydrocarbons. Epwarp G. Hampep, research associate, Na- tional Institutes of Health, in recognition of his fundamental contributions to knowledge of dis- eases of the oral cavity, and in particular his studies on oral spirochetes and the isolation of Borrelia vincent in pure culture. Harry JosepH Krecan, physicist, Newromel Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his con- tributions to optics, in particular his work spectrophotometry and its application to the specification of color. L. Rouanp Kuan, lieutenant colonel, chief, department of bacteriology, Army Medical De- partment Research and Graduate School, in ree- ognition of his contributions to microbiology in particular his outstanding studies on Crypto- coccus hominis. Louise H. Marswatu, physiologist, National Institute of Arthritis and Metabolic National Institutes of Health, in recognition of her contributions to high-altitude physiology, particularly in respiration and renal hemody- namics. Wapb H. MarsHatn, research fellow, National Institutes of Health, in recognition of his con- Diseases, 62 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES tributions to physiology, in particular his studies of the central nervous system, sensory areas, and pathways of the brain. F. J. McCuure, biochemist, National Insti- tutes of Health, in recognition of his studies of the physiological effects of fluorine, particularly of the relation of fluoride to dental caries. AntHony M. ScHwartTz, manager, industrial chemicals division, Harris Research Laboratories, in recognition of his work on the preparation and utilization of surface-active agents, and the theory of their action. Witur W. Smiru, physiologist, National In- stitutes of Health, in recognition of her contribu- tions in physiology, particularly concerning renal function and radiation biology. JoEL WARREN, chief, division of virus research and biophysics, Army Medical Service Graduate School, in recognition of his contributions to virus diseases, and in particular his researches on epidemic encephalitis and encephalomyocarditis. Elected February 12, 1951 H. Herserr Hower, mathematician, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, in recognition of his outstanding contributions to the theory of geo- magnetism and numerous publications of mag- netic data. Davin G. Knapp, mathematician, U. 3. Coast and Geodetic Survey, in recognition of his charting of geomagnetic data and the library classification of research data, especially in geo- magnetism, magnetism, geoelectricity, and seis- mology. M. LinpeMAN Puiuies, physicist, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of her in- vestigations in terrestrial magnetism and _ at- mospheric electricity, and her studies of in- candescent solids. RavpuH Srair, physicist, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his work in radiom- etry, in particular the measurment of atmos- pheric ozone and the intensity and ultraviolet spectral distribution of the radiant energy from the sun. Elected April 16, 1951 Tuomas J. Hicxury, electrical engineer, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, in recognition of his contribution to cartography through research and development of electronic hydrographic sur- veying equipment, particularly the electronic position indicator. Rosertr W. LevukeEt, plant pathologist, Bureau vot. 42, No. 2 of Plant Industry, Soils, and Agricultural Engi- neering, in recognition of his outstanding con- tributions to plant pathology, especially with respect to seed treatments of cereals and the identification of the organism causing the Milo disease. Elected May 14, 1951 Haic Derman, cytologist, Bureau of Plant Industry, Soils, and Agricultural Engineering, in recognition of his outstanding researches on the cytology of plant hybrids and chimeras. Monroe E. FREEMAN, chief, department of biochemistry, Army Medical Center, in recogni- tion of his services as a teacher of chemistry and his research contributions in biochemistry. RicHarD Tousey, head, micron waves branch, optics division, Naval Research Laboratory, in recognition of his work on solar spectroscopy from rockets, and spectroscopy in the vacuum ultra- violet region. Elected June 18, 1951 Lours E. Barsrow, electrical engineer, Na- tional Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to photometry and lighting, and in particular to the development of federal and ASA standards and specifications for lamp and electrical supplies, for his establishment of new luminous flux values for mercury lamps, and for his effective furtherance, as secretary of the U.S. National Committee of the International Com- mission on Illumination, of international stand- ards and practice in the field of lighting. Howarp 8. Bran, chief, capacity, density, and fluid meters section, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his work in metrology, especially his researches in the meas- urement of fluids, especially gases, with orifice meters. Rocer W. Curtis, prysicist, ordnance de- velopment division, National Bureau of Stand- ards, in recognition of his contributions and work in absolute measurement of electrical current, ultrasonic absorption in gases, electronics. Fiorence Hooppr Forziati, chemist, Na- tional Bureau of Standards, in recognition of her contributions to carbohydrate chemistry, and in particular her researches on the chemistry of cellulose. Wess E. Haymaxker, chief, neuropathology, Armed Forces Institute of Pathology, in recog- nition of his contributions to experimental neuro- pathology. Frepruary 1952 JosEPH VINCENT KarasiINos, chemist, Na- tional Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his contributions to organic chemistry, particularly on heparin, on reductive desulfurization, aromatic hydrocarbons, and the isolation of substances from natural sources. BengaMin L. Pace, physicist, National Bu- reau of Standards, in recognition of his work in metrology, especially in length and angle measurements. JoHn Tuomas Prestry, plant pathologist, Bureau of Plant Industry, Soils, and Agricultural Engineering, in recognition of his work on the diseases of cotton, in particular his researches on the root rot of cotton and the breeding of disease-resistant varieties. Rospert FRANcIs REITEMEIER, soil-scientist, Bureau of Plant Industry, Soils, and Agricultural Engineering, in recognition of his contributions to soil science, in particular his researches on metaphosphates, soil colloids, semimicroanalysis, and soil fertility. Maurice M. SuHaprro, head, heavy particle physies branch, nucleonics division, Naval Re- search Laboratory, in recognition of his work in cosmic rays and in nuclear and pile physics. Kart Souuner, chief biochemist, National Institutes of Health, in recognition of his ex- tensive research into theory and experimental practice in the fields of physical chemistry of colloids as related to membranes, permeability, ultrasonics and osmosis; thixotropy; sols and gels; emulsions; and physical biochemistry. Ray PaumMer THELE, Jr., physicist, National Bureau of Standards, in recognition of his con- tributions to photometry and lighting, and in particular the development of the physical pho- tometer, the photometry of phosphorescent ma- terials, and his contributions to international agreement on photometric standards. Horace Maynarp Trent, head, applied mathematics branch, Naval Research Labora- tory, in recognition of his work in electrome- chanical analogies and in mathematical theories of mechanics. NONRESIDENT Elected May 15, 1950 Harry D. Pratt, scientist, U.S. Public Health Service, Atlanta, Ga., in recognition of his taxo- nomic studies of insects of economic importance, especially the parasitic Hymenoptera and the disease-carrying Diptera. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 63 Elected November 20, 1950 Witiarp H. Bennett, physics department, University of Arkansas, in recognition of his studies of negative ions in electrical discharges and gases. CoLIn CAMPBELL SANBORN, curator of mam- mals, Chicago Natural History Museum, in rec- ognition of his contributions to systematic mam- malogy, particularly the classification of the Chiroptera and faunal studies in South America. Ciaupr E. ScHAEFFER, curator, Museum of the Plains Indian, Browning, Mont., in recogni- tion of his contributions to the ethnography of the American Northwest and to the organization of scientific archeology in Pennsylvania. Elected December 18, 1950 Harotp J. Hoge, physical division, research department, Leeds Northrup Co., Philadelphia, Pa., in recognition of his contributions to thermometry, particularly in the range below the boiling point of oxygen. Elected January 16, 1951 E. Raymonp Hatt, director, Museum of Nat- ural History, University of Kansas, Lawrence, Kans., in recognition of his contributions to the systematic study of recent and fossil mam- mals, especially with regard to the fauna of western North America and to the mustelid carnivores. Rogsert Rauvscu, parasitologist in charge, ani- mal-borne disease section, Arctic Health Re- search Center, U. $8. Public Health Service, Anchorage, Alaska, in recognition of his studies of host-parasite ecology, in particular the hel- minth parasites in wildlife and the relation of these diseases to public health. S. F. SnieszKo, director, microbiological lab- oratory, U. 8. Fish and Wildlife Service, Kear- neysville, W. Va., in recognition of his contribu- tions to plant and fish diseases and in particular his studies of bacteria which cause fish diseases. Elected April 16, 1951 Haru 8. BeLore, mathematician, U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey, New York City, in recog- nition of his contribution to geodesy through research and development in the methods of adjusting the observational data from triangula- tion and traverse measurements. Elected May 14, 1951 Brrpsauu N. Carue, pathologist, U.S. Marine Hospital, New Orleans, La., in recognition of his 64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES research in infectious diseases, particularly in the field of brucellosis. GeorGE A. Luano, research specialist, Head- quarters Air University, U. 8. Air Force, in voL. 42, No. 2 recognition of his contributions to the taxonomy and ecology of lichens and in particular his re- cent studies of the relation of these plants to arctic conditions. @bituartes Owen Berr FRENCH, geodesist, died at his home, Lakewood, Ohio, on February 1, 1951, ending a long, useful, and colorful career. He was born near Cleveland, Ohio, on December 17, 1865, the son of Marshall and Melissa A. French. He received a B.S. degree in 1888 and a C.E. degree in 1905, both at the Case School of Applied Science. On May 27, 1907, he married Marie Wilhelmine Schott, of Washington, D. C. In 1889 Mr. French joined the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, which he served until 1915. His work carried him throughout the United States as well as Alaska and Hawaii. His duties were many and varied and included topographic, hydrographic, magnetic, and astronomic surveys; on the last he became an authority. In 1894 he was in charge of scientific work on Walter Well- man’s first polar trip. Early in the century he was engaged on astronomic work along the boundary between Alaska and British Columbia, in 1906 on triangulation and base measurements, as well as astronomic surveys along the United States- Canadian Boundary. He made the first investiga- tion of invar (nickel steel) tapes for use in the measurement of base lines, proving them to be far superior to steel tapes for this purpose. Mr. French retired from the Coast and Geo- detic Survey in 1915 and practiced as a consulting geodesist in 1916-17. In 1918-19 he was a pro- fessor of geodesy and astronomy at the Institute of Military Surveying, Peking, China, where he was awarded the Wheat decoration. From 1920 to 1933 he was professor of surveying and astronomy at George Washington University, after which he continued his practice as a consulting geodesist. Thorough and painstaking in all his work, Mr. French became well known at home and abroad as one of the leading practical geodesists of his time. He was author of many reports and papers, among which are Jnvar tapes on the measurement of six primary base lines and Report on the Scheimp- flug method of aerial photography, and co-author of Determination of the difference in longitude between each two of the stations Washington, Cam- bridge, and Far Rockaway. He also wrote a large portion of Gillespie’s Higher surveying. Mr. French had been a member of the Ameri- can Society for the Advancement of Science, American Society of Civil Engineers, Washington Society of Engineers, Washington Academy of Sciences, Washington Board of Trade, American Association of College Professors, Philosophical Society of Washington, American Geophysical Union, and the Cosmos Club. Baru K. FiscHer, who died on August 3, 1951, had served as chiet of the organic coatings section of the National Bureau of Standards for slightly less than a year prior to his death. His previous assignment had been as consultant to several divisions of the Bureau on problems in the field of rheology. Before coming to the Bureau in 1949, Dr. Fischer was head of the physical chemistry division of the Institute of Textile Technology at Charlottesville, Va. From 1933 to 1945 he was a physical chemist with the Interchemical Cor- poration. During the early part of this period he was with the United Color and Pigment Co., a subsidiary of the Interchemical Corporation; he later transferred to the central research labora- tories and was head of Interchemical’s physical- chemistry laboratory from 1939 to 1945.- He was bornin Milwaukee, Wis., on November 21, 1995. He received a B.A. degree in 1927 and an M.A.in 1928 from the University of South- ern California and the Ph.D. in 1931 from the University of Wisconsin. He held a Stieglitz fellowship in physical chemistry at the Univer- sity of Chicago for three years. Dr. Fischer was the author of a recently pub- lished book, Colloidal dispersions, and many tech- nical papers that reflect his extensive investiga- tions in the fields of surface chemistry, rheology, pigment technology, and the special instruments and techniques he developed in the course of these studies. He was a member of the American Chemical Society, a Fellow of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, and from 1947 to 1949 he was the Secretary of the Society of Rheology. He was also a member of the American Institute of Physics, Textile Re- search Institute, Fiber Society, New York Acad- emy of Sciences, Washington Academy of Sciences, Virginia Academy of Science, Society of Motion Picture Engineers, American Associa- tion of Textile Chemists and Colorists, Sigma Xi, Phi Beta Kappa, Phi Lambda Upsilon, and the New York Chemists’ Club. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences PROSITE TE ies Ba sid Geet pee Err ecn ae Wa.tteR RamBere, National Bureau of Standards PARENT LEN CLECL SP TE Eo Sette ea nae F. M. Serzizr, U. S. National Museum SOGGET TAU Bia tecitne Scien eee an eae te F. M. Deranvorr, National Bureau of Standards PR CULSULT. CT Nara te nce Ne ages: Howarp 8. Rappers, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey AURGINTIOOES cle See re are STERIC Oe eRe Eee Joun A. SteEvEenSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Harrap A. Renper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Philosophicalisociety of Washingtontess a. cs osssscdeds cae sees A. G. McNisa Anthropological Society of Washington........................ Wawpo R. WEDEL Broloricals Society of Washimetons sce ssneceecce esse ee ds cose Hues T. O’ NEILL Chemical Society of Washington oe RM oANi ae Leta cel Uliana ce peed Joun K. TaYLor Hatomological Society of Washington.:..:................... FREDERICK W. Poos National Geographic SOCIE bye ee er ere rants k Wee ene aie ae ALEXANDER WETMORE Geolozical Society of Washington. 3.025.220... 0552-5. .02. 40-4 ss A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia........................ FRED O. Cor Columbia; HistoricallSocietyees.).. 2 ose ss aseoce esc cones. GILBERT GROSVENOR Hotanicalasociety, of Washinetontesraes+ sates se) es i). e ss aes: Lest M. Houtcuins Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Witiram A. Dayton Washington Society’ OME mn IMNCErsi serie een a eits ue cmesmeesca, Cuirrorp A. Brrts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers...... A. H. Scorr Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp S. D1iLu Helminthological Society of Washington.......................... L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Anaus M. GRIFFIN Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Fioyp W. Houcu Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers........... Herpert G. Dorsty District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason Elected Members of the Board of Managers: plovdaniaryelG5S ye cs Seeks dace s fag C. F. W. Munsesecx, A. T. McPHerson Tha darren dt ye2 ie sree Seeker tne hee ee anon Sara EH. BranHoam, Mitton Harris MIR OMA UTA O SD etic sace eed a eeithees slsiatereceveistnie exteiss Rocer G. Batss, W. W. Dieu SG OMORO I VUGIGGETS v6.20 eens eee Sinn see oe All the above officers plus the Senior Editor Bodom aitorsiand -A'ssociate Hdvtors: ...5. 0425. o ene cees cece ae [See front cover] Executive Committee....WALTER RAMBERG (chairman), F. M. Serzuer, H.S.RapPLere, Wiuuram A. Dayton, F. M. Derannvorr Committee on Membership. ...E. H. WaLkmR (chairman), M. 8. Anpmerson, R. C. Dun- can, G. T. Faust, I. B. Hansen, D. B. Jones, Dorotuy Nickerson, F. A. Smita, Heinz Specut, H. M, Trent, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings....H. W. Wes (chairman), Wm. R. Camppeti, W. R. Cuap- LINE, D. J. Davis, H. G. Dorsry, O. W. Torreson Committee on Monographs (W. N. FENTON, chairman): ROMAN rg O Dre meer Melo Acvere ean homme roan « R. W. Imuay, P. W. Oman pltomedetrate crave 9 Faves eye Re te eis I ee eae Bil S. F. Buaxs, F. C. Kracex ‘Sh@. Uenrnnrrcyye SOT ee aie uate ee Ree meee re NE ecea re ae a W.N. Fenton, ALAN STONE Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (J. R. SWALLEN, general chairman): For Biological Sciences.......... J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), MarGarEt PITTMAN, F. Poos, L. P. ScHutrz For Engineering Sctences............. R. C. Duncan (chairman), A. C. FIELDNER, Wayne C. Hat, J. W. McBurney, O. 8S. Reapine, H. L. WHITTEMORE OTMEDVUSUCHUS CLETECES earn cso ely ceehe eo ee aroha IL. A. Woop (chairman), F.S. Dart, Grorce W. Irvine, Jr., J. H. McMILuENn For Teaching of Science...... M.A. Mason (chairman), F. E. Fox, M. H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research....... L. E. Yocum (chairman), H. N. Eaton, K. F. Herzreup Committee on Policy and Planning: orvanmanyalOosne eer wosn ccneies sors W. A. Dayton (chairman), N. R. Smiru PROP ATU AT AO Da es aia tte ee eat misuse dialons ite. H. B. Couurns, Jr., W. W. RuBey ORM ATTa Ty OD OME ee cnee tam TO eae cea b in lume Mnioelc L. W. Parr, F. B. SitsBEE Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. McPuerson, chairman): PEon at UaT yal Ob se ete wea ees a Teles ca eicuarere omnes A. H. Cuarx, F. L. Monuer MovJamuamyalO a4. sete se. cesrare a ivscta solsianelevess slaustiee ahs J. M. Caupwe tu, W. L. Scumirr Mou amie OOO 5. cocks a seetenne eA tates «teres ai ua deninress A. T. McPuerson, W. T. Reap RODS MAOIE O18 COOKE, OF ALs Ale Als Soo son nncencdcoassbecsncGuacdunas F, M. Serzuer Committee of Auditors...... C. L. Gazin (chairman), Louise M. Russetu, D. R. Tats Committee of Tellers. ..GnORGE P. Watton (chairman), Guorcs H. Coons, C.L. GARNER CONTENTS Puysics.—Preliminary report: Nonlinear absorption and dispersion of plane ultrasonic waves in pure fluids. C. TRUESDELL............ MIneRALOGY.—The nature of rock phosphates, teeth, and bones. Dun- CAN: (MGCONNBEE oot ots ow haces o See Botany.—Notes on some families of Formosan phanerogams. Hv1-Lin Taras ie ee, ee ae Re os ont, A EntTomoLtocy.—New species of Sarcophagini (Diptera: Sarcophagidae). SELWYN St HROBACK. 2.05.05 .4 2.0 coset noiey et... EntomoLocy.—A new genus of Bruchidae affecting Hibiscus in Argentina, (Bruchinae: Acanthoscelidini). J.C. BRIDWELL................. HerrrretoLtocy.—Two Brazilian frogs: Hyla werneri, n. nom., and Hyla sumlissnasp: Doris .M. CocHRan...:..........5.. -- eee HrLMiIntHoLocy.—H ymenolepis johnsoni, n. sp., a cestode from the vole Microtus pennsylvanicus drummondii. Evrrett L. SCHILLER...... Zootocy.—Geographical distribution of the species of nemerteans of the Arctic Ocean near Point Barrow, Alaska. Wustry R. Coz....... This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals Page Marcu 1952 JOURNAL OF THE No. 3 WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS Wiuuiam F. FosHaG U.8. NATIONAL MUSEUM J. P. E. Morrison U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS F, A. Cuace, JR. Miriam L. Bomuarp BIOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrMan R. K. Coox CHEMISTRY PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS T. P. THAYER Puitip DRUCKER GEOLOGY ANTHROPOLOGY C. W. SABROSKY ENTOMOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES | Mount Roya & GUILFORD AVEs. BALTIMORE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912,at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925 Authorized February 17, 1949 Joun C. EwErs U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the JouR- NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to HarALD A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouRNaL.—Per year.....................--------. $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl_—not available.*................ — _ Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 41, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $348.50. MonoerarH No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann. .$4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete...........................05- $25.00 Single volumes, unbound We Single numbers Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘“‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rapr.eye, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOLUME 42 March 1952 No. 3 ANTHROPOLOGY.—Some applications of physical anthropology. Ropmrr M. WHITE, Quartermaster Climatic Research Laboratory, (Communicated by T. D. Stewart.) Just as some cultural and social anthro- pologists have adapted their particular fields to contemporary problems, so have some physical anthropologists drawn from their techniques and developed methods by which many problems of every-day living which involve dimensions of the human being may be subjected to scientific analysis and solved in an objective manner. Although the prob- lems generally treated by fields of anthro- pology other than physical are more subtle and abstract in nature, their very subtlety and abstractness have presented challenges that have enabled professional anthro- pologists to engage in direct approaches to them, since they present fields of investiga- tion in which no other people are prepared to engage. On the other hand, the physical anthropologist encounters large numbers of “experts”? when he approaches any of the numerous problems he may solve or help to solve. In general, we, as people, have become so well acquainted with all the various imple- ments used by us physically that we suffer from the types of prejudices so well described by Gittler (1949). Clothing, furniture, auto- mobiles, all are familiar to us from our early childhood. We develop specific ideas about them, aided considerably by advertising claims. Consequently, when we develop tired backs, or we feel cramped, we believe we are in the best furniture or clothing that can be ' Presented before the Anthropological Society of Washington, April 18, 1950. The opinions or as- sertions contained herein are the private ones of the writer as a physical anthropologist and are not to be construed as official or as necessarily reflect- ing the views of the Quartermaster Corps or the Department of the Army. 65 Lawrence, Mass. made and so we, as people are at fault. The dissenting opinion of the objective investi- gator, merely expressed as a viewpoint, 1m- mediately arouses our antagonism. ‘I paid $150 for this suit, so it is perfect.”’ ‘“This automobile cost $2,500, so it cannot be im- proved upon.” Such reactions should be familiar to all of us. Since these reactions are encountered among laymen, it is easy to imagine the attitudes or opinions expressed by designers of clothing and other items with which we come into physical association. Men who have made fortunes in the design- ing of clothing are hard to convince when we argue that they might improve upon their procedures. One of the greatest handicaps in reaching a mutual understanding with the designer or the engineer is the necessary use of statistical knowledge in explaining the problem. No one professional group attempts to use applied statistics more than does that engaged in clothing design and construction. Grading between sizes and sizes themselves are really applied statistics, but the use made of modern statistical concepts among that group is practically archaic. Although me- chanical design engineers have benefited from training in mathematics, little, if any, statistical method has been included. Since we, as people, are so well acquainted with all the various articles we wear or use every day, 1t comes somewhat as a shock to us to find that so little consideration has been given to us, as people, in the design of those articles. The common reaction ex- pressed by most persons who are at first confronted by the idea that all is not right with the world is one of perplexed question- ing. ““How have we gotten along so well, so 66 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES far, if this situation actually exists?’? The answer is simple. The first chair was prob- ably a stone or a log. Trial and error soon indicated its deficiencies. A pad of animal skin or grass considerably alleviated the concentration of pressures on the ischial tuberosities. By further trial and error a back was added, and so we have now a product, called a chair, which has shown little evolution from its primitive ancestor. Sporadically, claims are made that some chairs are functional. Seldom is the function specified. Rarely is it directed at comfort, objectively specified in terms of the human occupant. Claims are often made, but the proof is seldom present. Coincident with this situation in furniture is that existing in clothing. Design and size are considered to be integral. They are, but seldom does size have a known and provable relation to human bodily dimensions. It is of little interest to the designers of clothing that I wear a “‘size 38 Regular” in this year’s style, and next year, even though my dimensions do not change, I wear a “‘size 40 Regular’’. The explanation is simple. I am a ‘38 Regular” in this year’s style, and a ‘40 Regular” in next year’s. Opposed to this type of free thinking is the plight of the retailer who stocks next year’s inventory on the basis of this year’s sales. The equalization occurs with a ‘‘stock reduction and clearance sale’. Fortunately for the poor retailer, the designer and his style usually stay within three sizes in their variation, so that the retailer can operate at 80-85 percent efficiency. All this should serve to orient us with the more direct aspects of the field into which physical anthropology has recently entered. Essentially, the scope lies almost within the range of engineering, whether it be termed as such, or whether it is such by method. In clothing, little has been accomplished which would warrant the term “engineering.” In what is more commonly accepted as an engineering field, furniture, automobiles, ete., equally negligible accomplishments have been attained with specific reference to human beings. Two factors explain this condition. The first, and fundamentally the most important, is the lack of statie and dynamic anthropometric data. Allied with this, although necessarily following it in VOL. 42, NO. 3 demand, is the lack of statistical knowledge required to obtain proper application. The second, and of equal practical importance, is the universal attitude that the accommoda- tion of the human being is a factor in the general field of competition. Whole industries are willing to standardize sizes of fittings, such as rims of wheels on automobiles, in order to accommodate tires made by another industry, but the perfectly simple concept of standardization of accommodation for hu- man beings has not yet been accepted. The various commercial airlines are encountering a serious problem as a result of this type of situation. Pilot accommodations vary con- siderably among various aircraft (King, 1948). Consequently, when the suggestion is made that savings in time and ‘money could be achieved by through-routing of aircraft over different lines, the pilots refuse, and wisely so, to accept responsibility of piloting aircraft that have cockpit arrangements differing markedly from those with which they are familiar. The armed services have been striving for the past five or six years to accomplish some form of cockpit standardization, and have made some progress, but the fulfillment of their efforts has yet to be realized in operational aircraft (Randall, 1946b). Therefore, when the physical anthro- pologist carefully measures large series of people, develops objective analyses, and proposes results to be introduced into the design of all types of personal equipment or of equipment which requires accommodation of the human being, only part of his work is done. Two parts remain. He must educate the designers in his way of thinking, and then he must collaborate with the designers in setting up experiments which will convert the anthropometric requirements into terms which will be familiar to them. The various needs for the objective con- sideration of bodily dimensions should be obvious, in part, to the casual observer. Beginning with clothing (Randall, 1946a), these needs extend to furniture, both for comfort and for function, automobiles, trains, aircraft, and even housing. From the viewpoint of the applied physical anthro- pologist a person ‘“‘wears” a house, in that he gains his greatest comfort and efficiency if the house “‘fits”” him. Tired backs at the Marcu 1952 WHITE: kitchen sink and the laundry tub can be just as painful as if they resulted from sitting in an inefficient chair. Bodily motions can be just as inefficient in a small room as they ean be in tight gloves or shoes (Callaghan and Palmer, 1944). The main objective, then, in applied physical anthropology is to attain the optimum “‘fit’”’ and thus the proper “size” for the human beings involved. Obviously, in most of the problems en- countered, 100 percent efficiency is not expected. The degree to which efficiency ean be obtained in any one item will be dependent upon its functional characteristics of ‘fit’? and also upon the degree of varia- bility of dimensions which it will be required to accommodate. A secondary factor which enters the picture is the economics involved. All these factors operate to produce a compromise which is considered optimum. For example, the kitchen sink is relatively tolerant of a considerable variation in stature, but not so much as to accommodate a range of 16 inches in stature commonly encountered among housewives. On the other hand, most housewives do not operate on a strict time and motion basis, even though it would be to their advantage to do so, if they could. Finally, building houses in various ‘“‘sizes’”’ in terms of wear by the housewife is not very economical. Therefore, a compromise between accommodation, efficiency, and cost is necessary. The com- mon compromise is a standard sink height, with the cost at a minimum and the ef- ficiency unknown. It would not seem unreasonable to consider another possible answer; a sink provided with a_height adjustment. Cost would rise somewhat, but range of accommodation and increase in efficiency would result. It is the goal of the investigator to provide information for the designer as to the requirements of accommodation. It is the goal of the designer to meet these require- ments. Finally, it is the objective of both to obtain the optimum compromise at the minimum cost. Thus, in the field of applied physical anthropology, the physical anthropologist occupies three successive positions. Initially, he is an anthropometrist in collecting the metric data. Secondly, he is a statistician in (SGc< preparing the ‘‘specifications” which describe APPLICATIONS OF PHYSICAL ANTHROPOLOGY 67 the requirements. Finally, he is an applied physical anthropologist, analyzing the prob- lem of the designer insofar as it relates to human bodily dimensions, and in providing for the designer, in concrete practical terms understandable to the designer, the measure of fulfillment of the requirements by the designer. Many times this last role permits the anthropologist, through his analysis, to suggest revisions in the original design which will improve its efficiency materially and often reduce its cost. The part played by statistics in applied physical anthropology should not be under- rated. It is the essential tool for converting anthropometry to engineering terms. The use made of statistical method by designers is limited at best. More often than not the concept of variability is ignored. Further the concept of accommodation of an opti- mum percentage (e.g., 90 percent) of a population is usually only estimated. A common design criterion is the aceommoda- tion of the ‘‘average.’’ Two examples may serve to indicate how this is done. In the design of clothing, a new pattern is usually tested to prove its adequacy. This test is accomplished by construction of an “average” size, 36 or 38 Regular in men’s garments. Revision may be necessary, but the final opinion is based upon the adequacy demonstrated by this size of garment tried on “average” men. Following this test, there are certain rules which are followed to develop the other sizes. However, ex- perience has shown that these rules are only, at best, vaguely related to regressions which can be demonstrated by anthro- pometry and statistics. In automotive design, considerable use is made of profile manikins (Randall, 1949c). These are constructed as ‘‘average men,” complete with hat. If space is sufficient to accommodate this ‘“‘average’’ man, the design is considered satisfactory. But, con- sider for a moment. The ‘average’? man is about 69 inches tall and weighs about 150 pounds. Stature ranges between 61 and 77 inches, and weight between 110 and 250 pounds. Further, and apparently totally ignored, at least 33 percent of our auto- mobiles are driven by women as well as by men. Women “average”? about 64.5 inches tall and 185 pounds in weight, ranging 68 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES between 56.5 and 72.5 inches, and 90 to 200 pounds. If the automobile is to accom- modate its drivers, the ‘‘average”’ man is too large to be “‘average”’ of drivers. Further, if the design is satisfactory for 90 per cent of its drivers, being adjustable for statures between about 61 and 70 inches, and weight between 110 and 210 pounds, it will certainly accommodate “‘average”’ drivers, and, conse- quently, the ‘‘average’”? manikin has only academic interest at best. Situations such as those described above have been encountered so universally that there is good reason to suspect that the field of applied physical anthropology has con- siderable room to grow. As of this writing at least three large and applicable series of anthropometric data have been accumulated in the United States. The first, on some 147,000 children (O’Brien and = Girshik, 1939; O’Brien, Girshik, and Hunt, 1941), and the second, on about 14,700 women (O’Brien and Shelton, 1941) were collected by the Bureau of Home Economics, United States Depart- ment of Agriculture. The third, on about 135,000 Army men and 10,000 Army women represents a selected military popula- tion (Damon and Randall, 1944; Randall, 1948b). Some applications of the Depart- ment of Agriculture series have been made (Lonie, 1948; Staples and DeLury, 1949). Much wider applications of the military series have been accomplished over the past seven years. Since the Department of the Army and the Department of the Air Force are in a position to include anthropometric findings in their specifications, wide and effective applications are possible. The results can be quickly demonstrated and assessed. It is hoped that demonstrated results of the use of applied physical anthro- pology in the armed services will serve as stimuli to other agencies to incorporate similar approaches in their activities. Frequently, such questions as ‘‘Why is the Army interested in physical anthropology?” or ‘“‘How is the Army using physical anthro- pology?” are asked by laymen and even physical anthropologists as well. It is intended here to summarize present Army research in physical anthropology and to in- dicate some of the methods currently in use. VOL. 42, NO. 3 In some respects, it would seem that the use of physical anthropology by the military is a relatively new thing, at least in this country. The increasing use of applied. physical anthropology, which is perhaps a more accurate term, is a comparatively new development. However, it is interesting to note that a book by B. A. Gould was published by the U.S. Sanitary Commission in 1869, entitled /nvestigations in the military and anthropological statistics of American soldiers, while in 1875 two volumes by J. H. Baxter were issued by the Government Printing Office under the imposing title of Statistics, medical and anthropological, of the Provost-Marshall-General’s Bureau, derived from records of the examination for military service in the Armies of the United States during the late War of the Rebellion, of over a million recruits, drafted men, substitutes, and volunteers. The extensive work of Davenport and Love (1921) during and following the first World War is familiar to most physical anthropologists. Measurements were ob- tained on 1,000,000 recruits, and also on 100,000 troops during demobilization. Although the emphasis was primarily sta- tistical and clinical, some applications of the anthropometric data to clothing problems were carried out. Medical and _ clinical studies were continued through the last war under the Surgeon-General’s Office, while the Selective Service System has issued several reports on medical statistics, dealing with such topics as physical examinations and causes for rejections of draftees. As early as 1942, research in applied physical anthropology was started by the Army Air Forces. This work was carried on throughout the war, with the center of activity at the Aero-Medical Laboratory, Wright Field, Dayton, Ohio, and is being continued there. Several anthropometric surveys were carried out on flight personnel and the data obtained were used in con- nection with spatial requirements in aircraft and in the development of flight clothing and other types of personal equipment (Damon et al., 1944; Randall et al., 1946; Hertzberg, 1948). After several years, the Army Quarter- master Corps carried out an anthropometric Marca 1952 survey in 1946. Approximately 96,000 Army separatees were processed at separation centers, while a small series of 8,500 inductees was also obtained. A series of about 9,000 women, consisting of WAC personnel and Army nurses, was measured. In conjunction with the anthropometric survey, somatotype photographs of ap- proximately 50,000 men and 550 women were taken. This photographic material has been utilized by Hooton at Harvard Uni- versity in extensive studies of body builds occurring in the Army population. More recently, additional data have been secured in the form of smaller Army series. One year ago, a sample of 6,500 men, including draftees, enlistees and reenlistees, Was measured at induction centers, while data on 2,000 marines were also obtained in 1949. Numerous smaller series of men have been measured from time to time in con- nection with various clothing fitting tests. Since one of the primary responsibilities of the Office of The Quartermaster General is to clothe and equip Army men and women, applications of anthropometric data to clothing problems have received first consideration. However, there are still basic problems in the general field of human biology for which the accumulated Army anthropometric data should and can be used. Consequently, the Army program of research in physical anthropology may be considered to include both basic research and practical applications. Obviously the human sample comprising the available Army data cannot be con- sidered representative of the total popula- tion, since it is a selected group. There are various limiting factors, such -as_ age, physical and medical qualifications, as well as social and economic factors. However, several types of investigation are possible with these data. One for example, is the problem of age change and terminal growth. Sufficient data are available to provide adequate series for each age from 17 through 32 years. Another problem involves the differences between military and non- military populations. How do draftees or enlistees entering the Army for the first time compare with separatees who have been exposed to the military environment for WHITE: APPLICATIONS OF PHYSICAL ANTHROPOLOGY 69 various lengths of time? It is well-known that draftees, and especially 17-, 18-, or 19-year old enlistees tend to gain weight and that their body measurements change upon entering the Army. Do these changes take place rapidly within the first few weeks, do they extend over the whole period of basic training, or is it a more gradual process covering several years? These are questions of practical importance to those responsible for supplying and issuing Army clothing and equipment. Present studies utilizing the anthropometric data are focussed on these problems (Randall, 1949a). Only preliminary reports on the Army work have been issued, since analyses of the extensive data have taken considerable time. A volume of the female data has been published, containing some 98 _ bivariate charts of 23 body measurements, together with 109 regression tables (Randall and Munro, 1949b). Sorting of the male data and statistical analyses of some 37 body measurements have been completed, giving 72 bivariate charts and 83 regression tables. In addition, the male data have been sorted by age groups from 17 through 32 years, with bivariates and regression tables for each year of age. All this material is now ready for publication and will represent useful reference data. A certain amount of sociological informa- tion is included along with the anthro- pometric data, such as location of birthplace, national extraction, birthplace and_ ex- traction of parents, education, civilian and military occupation, etc. Preliminary sortings on the basis of geographical area of birthplace and national extraction are now in progress: The more recent data of a year ago are being sorted on the basis of classification— draftees, enlistees, reenlistees—as well as by age groups, for purposes of comparison with the earlier separatee and inductee material. The IBM system of punched cards and electrical sorting machines is used in all this work. As has been mentioned previously, Army clothing has received first consideration in the applications of anthropometric data. It has been a gradual process, but marked 70 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES improvements have been and are being made in the fit of Army clothing. The old Armv joke to the effect that there were only twe sizes of clothing issued—too large and too small—has been disposed of. Reduced to simplest terms, the aim of the Quartermaster Corps with respect to cloth- ing is to fit the Army population with the best possible clothing in a minimum number of sizes, requiring the least amount of altera- tion. In addition, there is a further con- sideration which is the percentage of the population to be fitted with standard sizes. It is desirable to have this percentage as high as possible, since men outside of the range of standard sizes must be fitted with supplementary or special order sizes. These men are usually those whose body measure- ments fall at the upper or lower ends of the distribution curve, and who comprise the lowest percentage frequencies in the popula- tion. Obviously, the clothing of several hundred thousand men is no small item, especially in terms of the taxpayers’ dollars and cents. In this respect, it will be seen that in the proper applications of Army anthropometry with respect to clothing sizes, size systems and tariffs, significant contributions can be made, particularly in the elimination of waste resulting from incorrect sizes. The Army cannot afford the trial and error methods of the clothing industry with re- spect to size, nor can it afford the cost of frequent or numerous alterations. The applications of anthropometry to clothing consist, essentially, of relating body dimensions to clothing sizes (Randall, 1948a). This procedure has necessitated a definition of the Army population in metric terms in order to obtain a measure of the ranges and variations which occur. The metric definition of the population, to- gether with the establishment of normal distribution curves, is the most useful ad- vance made thus far (Randall, 1949b; Randall and Munro, 1949a). Initially, the anthropometric data were used in investigating deficiencies in the size systems of standard clothing items already in use. In several cases, this resulted in recommendations that some smaller sizes be procured, since many smaller men at the VOL. 42, No. 3 lower end of the distribution curve were not being fitted properly. Another use of the data has been in the preparation of clothing tariffs. A tariff is a listing of the numbers of each clothing size required for the population, in terms of a given ratio, such as number per 1000, or per 100,000, as the case may be. For example, such tariffs for clothing items were prepared when the Universal Military Training pro- gram was first under consideration. Tariffs were also prepared when the recent post- war draft went into effect. Even more profitable applications of anthropometry have been made in the development of new and improved items of clothing. In some cases it has been neces- sary to investigate various body measure- ments in order to determine just which dimensions are critical and important in the fit of clothing. It has been found that al- though upper body clothing, such as coats and jackets, traditionally has been sized on the basis of chest circumference, actually shoulder circumference and even waist circumference are more important than chest with respect to tolerances and fit. For example, a new system of sizing trousers on the basis of the seat dimension rather than the waist may result in a reduction of standard trouser sizes from 95 to only 30 sizes, which would be quite a saving. The sizes and tariffs for the new Air Force blue uniform were developed through the use of anthropometric data. The applications of anthropometric data are not limited to body clothing by any means. Measurements of the head and face were used during the war in the develop- ment of-gas masks, oxygen masks, goggles, and helmets (Randall and Damon, 1943). The anthropometry of the foot and the proper fit of all types of boots and shoes is a large problem in itself. A study of the hand and the functional fit of handwear has recently been initiated. It is hoped that the use of anthropometric data eventually may be extended to other types of military equip- ment: sleeping bags, tents, tanks, etc. The necessity for anthropometric specifications in aircraft and submarines where spatial requirements are critical is obvious. The criticism has been made that Army Marca 1952 anthropometry on such a scale is unsatis- factory from the standpoint of technique. Some anthropologists even feel that as far as clothing is concerned, tailors could do just as well, and that we are wasting time and effort in attempting to apply the meth- ods of physical anthropology to such a problem as Army clothing. The point is that clothing people are basically artists, and not human biologists, and they do not have sufficient knowledge of such topics as normal distributions of body measurements or applied statistics. Here is one field in which the trained professional anthropolo- gist can make a practical contribution. In closing, mention should be made of the late Francis E. Randall, who, perhaps more than any other, was responsible for the development of applied physical anthro- pology in the Army. He began his work with the Air Force during the war, and then came to the Quartermaster Corps in 1946 to direct the anthropometric survey. He really be- lieved in applied physical anthropology, to the extent that had he lived, he probably would have found ways to incorporate an- thropometric data in the working height of the kitchen sink or the handle of an egg- beater, not to mention automobiles or office furniture. LITERATURE CITED Baxter, J. H. Statistics, medical and anthro- pological, of the Provost-Marshal-General’s Bureau, derived from records of the examination for military service in the Armies of the. United States during the late War of the Rebellion, of over a million recruits, drafted men, substi- tutes and volunteers, 2 vols. Washington, 1875. CALLAGHAN, J., and PaumpEr, C. Measuring space and motion. Family living as the basis for dwelling design, vol. 5: Research study no.6. John B. Pierce Foundation, New York, 1944. Damon, A., and Ranpa.t. F. E. Physical anthro- pology in the Army Air Forces. Amer. Journ. Phys. Anthrop., n.s., 2: 219-316. 1944. Damon, A., RANDALL, F. E., Benton, R. 8. and Brues, A. M. The importance of human sizing standards in aviation. Journ. Aviation Med. 15: 238-243. 1944. Davenport, C. B., and Lovn, A. G. Army anthro- pology: based on observations made on draft recruits, 1917-1918, and veterans at demobiliza- tion, 1919. Medical Department of the United States Army in the World War, vol. 15: Sta- tistics, pt. 1. 1921. GirtLeR, J. B. Man and his prejudices. Sci. Monthly 69: 43-47. 1949. WHITE: APPLICATIONS OF PHYSICAL ANTHROPOLOGY 71 Gouup, B. A. Investigation in the military and anthropological statistics of American soldiers. U.S. Sanitary Commission. New York, 1869. Herrzperc, H. T. E. Postwar anthropometry in the Air Force. Amer. Journ. Phys. Anthrop., n.s., 6: 363-371. 1948. Kine, B. G. Measurements of man for making machinery. Amer. Journ. Phys. Anthrop., n.s., 6: 341-352. 1948. Lonig, M. Anthropometry and apparel. Amer. Journ. Phys. Anthrop., n.s., 6: 353-361. 1948. O’Brign, R., and Grrsuik, M. A. Children’s body measurements for sizing garments and patterns. A proposed standard system based on height and girth of hips. U. 8. Dept. Agr., Mise. Publ. 365. 1939. O’Brien, R., Grrsuix, M. A. and Hunt, E. P. Body measurements of American boys and girls for garment and pattern construction. A com- prehensive report of measuring procedures and statistical analysis of data on 147,000 American children. U. 8. Dept. Agr. Mise. Publ. 366. 1941. O’Brien, R., and SHEtTon, W. C. Women’s meas- urements for garment and pattern construction. U.S. Dept. Agr. Mise. Publ. 454. 1941. Ranpauu, F. E. Garment size and the retailer. Department Store Economist, July and Au- gust, 1946a. . Seat comfort. Mechanical Engineering 68: 1056-1058. 1946b. ———. Applications of anthropology to the deter- mination of size in clothing. Environmental Protection Series, Report no. 133. Quarter- master Climatic Research Laboratory, Law- rence, Mass., 1948a. ———. Anthropometry in the Quartermaster Corps. Amer. Journ. Phys. Anthrop., n.s., 6: 373-380. 1948b. . Age changes in young adult army males. Human Biology 21: 187-198. 1949a. . Anthropometric nomograph of Army men. Human Biology 21: 218-232. 1949b. ———. Theory and practice in the use of scale man- ikins. lowa Transit, December 1949c. Ranpatu, F. E., and Damon, A. An interesting application of a basic science to aviation med- icine. Journ. Aviation Med. 14: 200-205. 19438. RanpDaut, F. E., Damon, A., Benton, R.S., and Patt, D. 1. Human body size in military avr- craft and personal equipment. U. 8. Army Air Forees Technical Rep. 5501. Air Materiel Command, Wright Field, Dayton, Ohio, 1946. RaAnpDALL, F. E., and Munro, E. H. Anthropo- metric nomograph of Army women. Environ- mental Protection Section Rep. 148. Quarter- master Climatic Research Laboratory, Lawrence, Mass., 1949a. Reference anthropometry of Army women. Environmental Protection Section Rep. 149. Quartermaster Climatic Research Laboratory, Lawrence, Mass., 1949b. Srapies, M. L., and DeLury, D. B. A system for the sizing of women’s garments. Textile Re- search Journal 19: 346-354. 1949. 72 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 2 GEOLOGY .—Paleozoic of western Nevada. H. G. Frercuson,! U. 8S. Geological Survey. The stratigraphic and structural history of western Nevada during the Paleozoic differs fundamentally from that of the rest of the Great Basin. In eastern and central Nevada and southern California, the Paleo- zoic section, at least above the Lower Cambrian, is largely limestone and dolo- mite. The formations, particularly those older than the Carboniferous, are fairly continuous; disconformities and uncon- formities are rare except at the margins of the area; and volcanic rocks are absent. Within the western area, roughly north of lat. 37°30’ and west of an irregular line between long. 116° and 117°, there is an entirely different Paleozoic section, whose nearest lithologic similarities are with north- ern California and central Oregon. Quart- zite, slate, and chert are the prevailing rock types, voleanic rocks are abundant, and carbonate rocks are subordinate. Crustal instability during the Paleozoic is recorded not only by unconformities and major gaps in the sections, but also by several episodes of folding and thrusting, one of which can be dated approximately as Mississippian or Pennsylvanian and another as early Per- mian. These were followed by major diastro- phism within the Jurassic. Further study is needed to determine whether, during early as well as late Paleo- zoic (Nolan, 1928), a barrier of some sort separated the two areas, as suggested by the differences in lithology, by the gaps in the sections, and by numerous disconformities and unconformities both east and west of the inferred barrier. On the other hand, lack of observed gradation between the eastern and western facies may be due to the fact that along at least a part of the border zone be- tween the areas thrusting has carried the rocks of the western facies eastward, possibly as much as 30 or 40 miles; to the south, the western facies is separated from the eastern facies of the Panamint and Inyo Ranges by a broad belt, largely unexplored, in which the only Paleozoic rocks known are Lower Cambrian. 1 Published by permission of the Director, U.S. Geological Survey. The following notes on the lithology of the western Nevada Paleozoic formations are based chiefly on the results of U. 8. Geological Survey reconnaissance by the writer and his associates, S. W. Muller, R. J. Roberts, and 8. H. Cathcart. The area covered consists of three one-degree quad- rangles: the Sonoma Range quadrangle, lat. 40°-41°, long. 117-118°, comprising four 30 - minute quadrangles — Winnemucca (Ferguson, Muller, and Roberts, 1951); Mount Tobin (Muller, Ferguson, and Roberts, 1951); Golconda (Ferguson, Roberts, and Muller, in press); and Mount Moses (Ferguson, Muller, and Roberts, 1951); and the Hawthorne and Tonopah quadrangles, lat. 38-39°, long. 117-119° (Ferguson and Muller, 1949). In addition to the reconnaisance studies, more detailed mapping was done by Roberts in the Antler Peak 15-minute quadrangle (Roberts, 1951) in the northeastern part of the Sonoma Range quadrangle. Mapping by James Gilluly is in progress in three 15-minute quadrangles (Mount Lewis, Crescent Valley, and Cortez), east of the southern part of the Sonoma Range quadrangle, and by Preston E. Hotz in the Osgood Mountain quadrangle to the north. A vast area re- mains unexplored, and much additional field work is needed. Cambrian.—In the Hawthorne and Tonopah quadrangles, the fossiliferous Lower Cambrian rocks are largely quartzite and slate, with sub- ordinate dolomite and limestone. No Middle or Upper Cambrian has been identified, though Upper Cambrian has been reported by Turner (1902) in the Silver Peak quadrangle to the south. These rocks are overlain apparently conformably by Ordovician rocks of the western facies (Ferguson and Muller, 1949, pp. 45-52). In the Sonoma Range quadrangle thick un- fossiliferous quartzite, presumably of Lower Cambrian age, is overlain by several thousand feet of slate with minor amounts of dolomite and limestone of Upper or Middle Cambrian age (Ferguson, Roberts, and Muller, in press). These show no lithologic similarity to the better- known dominantly carbonate formations in the ranges to the east. Marcu 1952 Ordovician.—Ordovician rocks are present in great thickness and variety throughout the entire western area. In the Tonopah and Haw- thorne quadrangles (Ferguson and Muller, 1949) they consist largely of dark cherts, grapto- lite-bearing slates, and quartzites. In the Sonoma Range quadrangle and neighboring quadrangles to the east, there are also andesitic lavas and breccias (Roberts, 1951; Ferguson, Muller, and Roberts, in press). The proportions of the various rocks vary greatly in different areas. Carbonate rocks, which form most of the section in central and eastern Nevada, are scarce. Along the eastern border of the area, a thrust has superposed the slaty rocks of the western facies Ordovician above the carbonate eastern facies. The western facies of the upper plate is known to extend as far to the east as the Sulphur Spring Mountains, about lat. 39°45’, long. 116°05’ (Merriam and Anderson, 1942). The same thrust relations of the two facies are also present in the Cortez quadrangle, lat. 40°10’, long. 116°40’ (Gilluly, personal communication). It is possible that a thrust contact is also present to the southward, for at Belmont, about lat. 38°35’, long. 116°55’, the Ordovician consists of characteristic western facies with graptolite- bearing slate (Ferguson, 1924, p. 23), while the eastern facies, including the Pogonip limestone and Eureka quartzite, is present at Tybo, 30 miles southeast (Ferguson, 1933, pp. 16-20). The western facies is known to extend southward as far as the southern border of the Silver Peak quadrangle, lat. 37°30’ (Turner, 1902). Fifty miles to the south, at the northern end of the Panamint Range, are the characteristic car- bonate rocks and Eureka quartzite of the eastern facies (McAllister, 1947). In the largely un- explored region between these two areas the only known Paleozoic rocks are of Cambrian age. Silurian.—No rocks of Silurian age have yet been found in the western area, although thick Silurian formations of carbonate rocks are known along its eastern border, as far west as long. 116°50’. The westernmost sections include shaly limestones carrying graptolites (Kirk, 1938, p. 34; Gilluly, personal communication). Devonian.—Devonian is known at two locali- ties in the western area; in the San Antonio Mountains about 8 miles north of Tonopah (about lat. 37°10’, long. 117°10’) and in the northeastern part of the Mount Lewis quadrangle (near lat. 40°30’, long. 116°45’). The Devonian of the San Antonio Mountains FERGUSON—PALEOZOIC OF NEVADA 73 consists of about 1,000 feet of limestone con- taining a fauna referred to Middle Devonian. This rests with a small angular unconformity on the characteristic Ordovician chert and slate of the western facies, although the lithology and fauna suggest correlation with Devonian car- bonate formations to the east. In the Mount Lewis quadrangle (Gilluly, personal communication) the Devonian is en- tirely different in lithology and consists of about 4,000 feet of dark chert and sandstone with subordinate slate, and a few thin beds of lime- stone which have yielded identifiable fossils. No voleanic rocks are present. The formation is in thrust contact with the Ordovician of the western facies and its relation to other formations is unknown. Except for the absence of volcanic rocks, the lithology is similar to that of parts of rocks mapped as Pennsylvanian (?) in the Sonoma Range quadrangle (Pumpernickel forma- tion) and it is possible that more detailed study will show that Devonian is also present in the Sonoma Range quadrangle. Carboniferous —No formations of Carbonif- erous age are present in the Hawthorne and Tonopah quadrangles, where Permian rocks rest unconformably on highly folded Ordovician slate and chert. In the Sonoma Range quad- rangle, however, there is a puzzling complex of formations of probable Mississippian and known Pennsylvanian age (Roberts, 1951). A great thrust, the Golconda thrust (Ferguson, Roberts, and Muller, in press), probably of Jurassic age, brings together completely different Carbonif- erous and Permian formations. Further com- plexity is caused by thrusting within both plates during at least two periods; in late Mississippian or early Pennsylvanian in the lower plate, and within the Permian in the upper plate. Below the thrust, there are two formations of probable Mississippian age. These are them- selves in thrust contact, and both are overlain by lower Pennsylvanian conglomerate. The Scott Canyon formation (Roberts 1951), present only in the eastern part of the Antler Peak quad- rangle, consists of andesitic meta-voleanic rocks and chert, with some argillite. A thin bed of lime- stone yielded fossil sponges, considered to be not older than Carboniferous (Helen Dunean, per- sonal communication). The Harmony formation is unfossiliferous and consists essentially of micaceous arkosie grit and micaceous quartzite that locally attain a con- siderable thickness. Derivation from a granitic 74 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY or gneissic land mass to the west, perhaps in the area now occupied by the Sierra Nevada batho- lith, seems to be implied. Probable persistence of such a land mass throughout most of late Paleozoic time is suggested by recurrence of beds of similar arkosic material in the Pennsyl- vanian and Permian clastic formations of the area. The Battle formation, consisting of conglomer- ate and pebbly limestone of lower Pennsylvanian age (Roberts, 1951), was deposited across the thrust contact of the Scott Canyon and Harmony formations. No correlation with formations in the east has yet been established. Disconformably above the Battle formation is the Antler Peak limestone of upper Pennsyl- vanian and possibly lower Permian (?) age (Roberts, 1951). The fauna of the limestone, according to J. 8. Williams (personal communica- tion), resembles Alaskan and Russian species. At present this limestone is known only in the northeastern part of the Sonoma Range quad- rangle and the Osgood Mountain quadrangle to the north (Hobbs, 1948). In the upper plate of the Golconda thrust, the thick Pumpernickel formation, largely andesitic voleanics, chert, and argillite, is tentatively assigned to the Pennsylvanian, as it is overlain conformably by sedimentary formations of lower Permian (?) age (Roberts, 1951; Muller, Fer- guson, and Roberts, 1951). This formation has not yet been traced outside the Sonoma Range quadrangle, but it is probably present in the Osgood Mountain quadrangle to the north (Hobbs, 1948). Permian.—Permian rocks of the Sonoma Range quadrangle (Roberts, 1949, 1950; Fer- guson, Roberts, and Muller, 1951) also differ on the two plates of the Golconda thrust. Below the thrust the Edna Mountain formation, con- sisting primarily of quartzite, in part micaceous, conglomerate, limestone, and slate, rests dis- conformably on the Pennsylvanian and Permian (?) limestone. This formation contains the same fauna as the well-known Phosphoria formation of the eastern part of the Great Basin and may represent a clastic marginal facies. The upper plate of the thrust carries two formations not found in contact, but both overlie conformably a thick sequence of dominantly metavolcanic rocks assigned to the Pennsyl- vanian. In the central part of the Sonoma Range quadrangle the Havallah formation is 10,000 feet or more thick and consists of quartzite carrying feldspar in part, with mterbedded chert, OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 3 subordinate slate, and thin limestone beds. Near the base of the formation the limestone contains fusulinids of Wolfcamp and probably Leonard age (Roberts, 1951). Along the western edge of the quadrangle and tentatively correlated with the MHavallah formation, is the Leach formation containing a larger proportion of coarser clastics including conglomerate, gray- wacke, impure quartzite in part arkosic, together with slate and a little limestone in the upper part (Muller, Ferguson, and Roberts, 1951). No determinable fossils were obtained from these, and a thrust separates them from the more quartzitic Havallah formation of the central part of the quadrangle. It seems a reasonable inference that it may be merely a more coarsely clastic facies. If so, a western source for both formations is implied. Folding, accompanied by some thrusting and followed by deep erosion, preceded the youngest Permian unit of the Sonoma Range quadrangle, the dominantly volcanic Koipato formation. This differs from the older voleanic formations in that the lavas are in part silicic, and are less metamorphosed. The Koipato formation overlies the Permian (?) of the upper plate facies with marked angular unconformity and is overlain unconformably by ‘Triassic rocks, but with angular discordance of only a few degrees at most. Its greatest known thickness, 14,000 feet (Knopf, 1924; Wheeler, 1939), is a few miles west of the Sonoma Range quadrangle, but within the quadrangle it thins out completely to the east (Ferguson, Roberts, and Muller, in press). It is known, however, to extend some distance to the south and southwest. It has not been found below the Golconda thrust, so its relation to the Permian sedimentary rocks with Phosphoria fossils is not determinable in the Sonoma Range quadrangle. In the Tonopah and Hawthorne quadrangles, the Permian sedimentary rocks containing the Phosphoria fauna lie unconformably on folded Ordovician rocks (Ferguson and Muller, 1949, pp. 45-52). In the southern part of the area these sedimentary rocks consist of 400 feet or less of grit and quartzite that locally grade laterally into dolomite. The formation is dis- conformably overlain by Lower Triassic and locally the Permian was completely eroded before Triassic deposition. In contrast to the thin Permian of the south, the Toyabe Range in the northeast part of the Tonopah quadrangle contains a thickness of Marcu 1952 about 6,000 feet of sedimentary and volcanic rocks assigned to the Permian, though fossilif- erous only in the lower part. The upper part of the sequence is principally chert and meta- andesite with interbedded sedimentary rocks similar to those of the lower part. Fine-grained silicic intrusive rocks similar in composition to the lavas of the Koipato formation cut these rocks, but were not found in areas underlain by Triassic rocks. It is therefore possible that the Koipato formation may be somewhat younger than the sedimentary rocks containing Phos- phoria fossils. REFERENCES Fereuson, H. G. Geology and ore deposits of the Manhattan district, Nevada. U.S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 723. 1924. . Geology of the Tybo district, Nevada. Univ. Nevada Bull. 27 (3). 1933. Frereuson, H. G., and Muuuer, S. W. Structural geology of the Hawthorne and Tonopah quad- rangles, Nevada. U.S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Pap. 216. 1949. Fereuson, H. G., Ropers, R. J., and Muuuer, S. W. Golconda quadrangle, Nevada. U.S. Geol. Surv. Geologic Quadrangle Map Series. (In press.) Fereuson, H. G., Muuier, 8S. W., and Rosperts, R. J. Winnemucca quadrangle, Nevada. U.S. Geol. Surv. Geologic Quadrangle Map Series. 1951. Hopss, S. W. Geology of the northern part of the STRIMPLE: SOME NEW CRINOIDS 79d id Osgood Mountains, Humboldt County, Nevada. U.S. Geol. Surv., Open file report. 1948. Kkork, Epwin. The Eureka quartzite of the Great Basin Region. Amer. Journ. Sci., ser. 5, 26: 27— 44. 1933. Knorr, ApoupH. Geology and ore deposits of the Rochester district, Nevada. U. S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 762. 1924. McAuuisterR, J. F. Memorandum report on the geology of the northeastern part of Ubehebe Peak quadrangle, California. Manuscript, U.S. Geol. Survey files. 1947. Merriam, C. W., and AnpERsON, C. A.. Recon- naissance survey of the Roberts Mowntains, Nevada. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 53: 1675-1728. 1942. Mutter, 8S. W., Fercuson, H. G., and Roserts, R. J. Mount Tobin quadrangle, Nevada. U.S. Geol. Surv. Geologic Quadrangle Map Series. 1951. Nouan, T. B. A late Paleozoic positive area in Nevada. Amer. Journ. Sci., ser. 5, 16; 153-161. 1928. RoseErts, R. J. Geology of the Antler Peak quad- rangle, Nevada. U. S. Geol. Surv., Open file report. 1949. . Antler Peak quadrangle, Nevada. U. S. Geol. Surv. Geologic Quadrangle Map Series. 1951. Turner, H. W. A sketch of the historical geology of Esmeralda County, Nevada. Amer. Geol. 29: 261-272. 1902. WHEELER, H. KE. Helicoprion in the Anthracolithic (late Paleozoic) of Nevada and California, and its stratigraphic significance. Journ. Pal. 13: 1038-114. 1939. PALEONTOLOGY .—Some new species of crinoids from the Henryhouse formation of Oklahoma.! Harreit L. Stripe, Bartlesville, Okla. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) This paper is the first of a series to be devoted to echinoderms of Silurian age. The genera dealt with are Allocrinus, Zophocrinus, Gnorimocrinus, Bactrocrinites, Hexacrinites, and Synbathocrinus. All except the last three are known from rocks of Brownsport age; however, the species from the Henryhouse exhibit some decided, and probably signifi- cant, variances from the norm of the genera involved. The last three genera are not re- ported elsewhere from strata of Silurian age but are found in rocks of Devonian age. 1Numerous individuals have contributed directly or indirectly to this study. Dr. G. A. Cooper, Dr. A. R. Loeblich, Jr., and Arthur Bowsher, of the U. S. National Museum, and Dr. W. E. Ham, of the Oklahoma Geological Survey, have directed the author in field studies and/or have lent speci- Genus Hexacrinites Austin and Austin, 1843 Hexacrinites adaensis, n. sp. Figs. 4, 5 Dorsal cup is somewhat elongate bell-shaped. The lateral sides rise evenly above the columnar mens for description and comparison. Dr. Edwin Kirk, of the U. S. Geological Survey, Dr. R. S Bassler, of the U. S. National Museum (retired), Dr. Hertha Sieverts-Doreck, of Stuttgart, Ger- many, and Dr. G. Ubaghs, of Liége, Belgium, have assisted in taxonomic and technical problems. Richard and Russell Alexander, at present students at the University of Oklahoma, William T. Watkins, of San Antonio, Tex., and Mr. and Mrs. Allen Graffham, of Purcell, Okla., have assisted considerably in field work and through contribution of many fine specimens. The author’s wife, Mrs. Melba Strimple, has found many splen- did specimens in both the Henryhouse of Okla- homa and the Brownsport of Tennessee. 76 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES attachment, then expand rapidly for a short dis- tance, after which further expansion is gradual. There are three unequal BB, the smallest right posterior in position. Slightly over half the cup height is composed of the elongated RR and anal X. The five RR have small arm articulating facets, which are directed outwardly. The single anal plate is comparable in size to the r. post. R, and both are smaller than other RR. Columnar cicatrix is round. Arms and tegmen are unknown. Measurements in mm.—As follows: Heightiofidorsalicupp eee eee eee soon IO) Maximum) widthioficup)= = -5..-4--25 see = Height of BB circlet (maximum) Diameter of columnar scar............. BCRP ate 3.0 * Mildly distorted by lateral compression. Remarks.—H. adaensis is the only representa- tive of the genus reported at present from rocks of Silurian age. The distinctive contour of the cup is sufficient to distinguish the species from other described forms. Holotype Collected by the author. To be de- posited in the U. 8. National Museum. Occurrence and horizon.—SW1/4NW1/4NW 1/4 sec. 33, T. 3 N., R. 6 E., south of Ada, Pontotoe County, Okla.; Henryhouse formation (upper), Silurian. Genus Synbathocrinus Phillips, 1836 Synbathocrinus antiquus, n. sp. Figs. 1-3 Dorsal cup is elongated and narrow until the distal extremity is approached, at which point there is a strong, outwardly directed flexing. There are three erect BB, the smaller in left anterior position. Five RR are of equal size and are very elongated. A well-developed notch is present between r. post. and I. post. BB for reception of an anal plate. This groove continues into the interarticulating areas. Arm articulating facets are distinctive; the outer ligamental furrow is very thin and is bordered to the exterior by a well-crenulated lip and to the interior by a slight ridge; muscle areas are shallowly depressed and thereafter the facets curve strongly upward so that a domelike structure is formed, almost covering the body cavity. In the uplifted area, a narrow slit divides each facet into two equal parts. Unless carefully examined, the domelike structure has the appearance of an oral circlet. PBrBr are quadrangular, slightly wider than high. The proximal columnal is round, thick and expanded in midsection. A minute, pentalobate lumen pierces the column. VOL. 42, No. 3 Measurements in mm.—As follows: Holotype Heightiof(dorsal’cupe ses scen ae eee eee 9.4 Maximum)widthioficup)o gene eee eee 7.6 Heightiof BBicirclet-s.2---5) ce eee ene eee ee eeee 3.7 Widthiof*BBicirclete .)-5.-0 ene eeee eee eee S17 Diameter of proximal columnal.................... Pye) Remarks.—The unique appearance of S. anti- quus is not closely approached by any other described species, and no other representative of the genus is recorded from Silurian strata. Types.—Holotype collected by William T. Watkins, one paratype collected by Richard Alexander and one by the author. To be de- posited in the U. 8. National Museum. Occurrence and horizon.—Near center of sec. 4, T.2N., R.6 E., south of Ada, Pontotoc County, Okla., the type locality. Paratypes from SW1/4 NW1/4NW1/4 sec. 33, T. 2 N., R 6 E., Pontotoc County; Henryhouse formation (upper), Silurian. Genus Zophocrinus S. A. Miller, 1892 Zophocrinus angulatus, n. sp. Figs. 6, 7 Dorsal cup is elongated and angular. There are four lateral sides marked by sharp longi- tudinal ridges. A horizontal ridge about 0.4 mm below the summit marks the termination of, the cup angulation and the uppermost portion is circular in outline. In the proximal region is a slight twisting which causes inequality in the width of facets and there is a wafer-thin ridge marking the lowermost edge of the cup. Viewing the cup from below, there is an almost triangular outline. Three BB form almost half the length of the cup and four RR the balance. Arm articulat- ing facets have not been observed in any of the specimens at hand. Sutures of the cup are not impressed. Proximal columnal is round, thin and small. Measurements in mm.—As follows: Holotype Paratype Height of dorsal cup......:.......-:.-- 9.3 10.3 Maximum width of cup................ 5.5 5.6 Heightiof BiBicircletyee eee 4.5 4.7 Maximum width of BB circlet......... 4.7 5.1 Diameter of stem attachment.......... 1.1 1.4 Remarks.—The strong angulation characteris- tic of Z. angulatus is sufficient to distinguish it from other described species. Types.—Holotype collected by the author. Paratype collected by Richard Alexander. To be deposited in the U. S. National Museum. Occurrence and horizon—Center SW1/4NW 1/4 sec. 33, T. 3. N., R. 6 E., south of Ada, Pontotoc County, Okla.; Henryhouse formation (upper), Silurian. Marcu 1952 STRIMPLE: SOME NEW CRINOIDS 1-3.—Holotype of Synbathocrinus antiquus, n. sp., from posterior, anterior, and summit, Fias. 4 xX 3.6. Fias. 4-5.—Holotype of Hexacrinites adaensis, n. sp., from left anterior and posterior, XK Ideke Fias. 6-7.—Holotype of Zophocrinus angulatus, n. sp., side view of dorsal cup and Fres. 8-9.—Holotype of Allocrinus divergens, n. sp., side view of crown and opposite side, X 3. opposite side, X 1.7. Fres. 10-11.—Holotype of Gnorimocrinus pontotocensis, n. sp., from base and summit, X 5.8. Fires. 12-13.—Holotype of Bactrocrinites oklahomaensis, n. sp., from right poste- rior and posterior, X 1.5. 78 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Genus Bactrocrinites Schnur, 1849 Bactrocrinites oklahomaensis, n. sp. Figs. 12, 13 Dorsal cup is very long, slender, expanding evenly from the columnar attachment. Five slen- der IBB form almost half the cup height. Five BB are normal hexagonal plates except for the posterior and right posterior RR which are trun- cated for the reception of the two anal plates. Five RR are relatively wide plates with small, outwardly directed arm articulating facets. R. post. R. is smaller than others and is extended above the normal cup height. Ant. R is the largest plate of the circlet. RA is small, quadrangular and rests obliquely on the left shoulder of r. post. B and the right shoulder of post. B. Anal X is large, hexagonal and rests obliquely on_post. B and RA to the right below. Arm articulating facets show no evidence of muscular fossae but have rather deep intermuscular notches which extend well into the body cavity. Measurements in mm.—As follows: Height of dorsal cup (anterior)................ 50 683 Maximumawidthyoficupreee-nareee eer ereereeeee enn: 12.0 Heightiofelb Bicircletperrrs eee ree eeer reece 11.2 Maximum width of IBB circlet................... 7.8 Diameterof/colummariscare. eee eee 2 ai Remarks.—B. oklahomaensis has a more elon- gated calyx, especially as reflected by the IBB portion, than any other described species. It is the only representative of the genus reported from rocks of Silurian age. Holotype.—Collected by the author. To be de- posited in the U. 8. National Museum. Occurrence and horizon —NW1/4NW1/4SW 1/4 sec. 4, T. 3 N., R. 6 E., south of Ada. Ponto- toc County, Okla.; Henryhouse formation, Si- lurian. Genus Gnorimocrinus Wachsmuth and Springer, 1880 Gnorimocrinus pontotocensis, n. sp. Figs. 10, 11 Dorsal cup shallowly expanded. IBB are three, almost entirely covered by the shallowly de- pressed, round columnar cicatrix. BB are five 6-sided plates with pentagonal outlines, except for post. B, which is strongly encroached upon by the hexagonal RA, and is extended inwardly toward the body cavity. RR are five rather elongated, pentagonal plates. Interradial areas are deeply impressed. Anal X is a large plate and is followed by a tubelike series of plates which curve inwardly. The entire body cavity VOL. 42, No. 3 appears to be covered by tegmenal and minute ambulacral plates. Five rather large plates alter- nate with the RR, and that of the posterior carries a small node, which may mark a hydro- pore. First PBrBr are only preserved in the right and left posterior rays. The |. post. PBr is axillary and the r. post. PBr is nonaxillary. Both are rather short plates. Measurements 1n mm.—As follows: Heightiofdorsalicup). 2.22 4+ ee eee ere ee eee ere Soil Maximum width! oficupi.--e- eee eee e eee 7.0 Diameter‘of stem’ scar).--.. -.-4-- eee eee is7/ Remarks.—Other described species normally disclose arm branching with the second primi- brachials in all rays and the RA is quadrangular, not in contact with the IBB circlet. In G. ponto- tocensis the first PBr of the 1. post. ramus is axillary and RA is hexagonal owing to contact with the IBB circlet. Holotype—Collected by A. R. Loeblich, Jr. Deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. Occurrence and horizon——SW1/4NW1/4NW 1/4 sec. 33, T. 3 N., R. 6 E., Pontotoc County, Okla.; Henryhouse formation, Silurian. Genus Allocrinus Wachsmuth and Springer, 1889 Allocrinus divergens, n. sp. Figs. 8, 9 Crown is elongate, expansive. Dorsal cup is proportionately quite small. The BB plates are displaced and are not sufficiently well preserved for accurate observation. Considering the attitude and structure of the RR, there is little likelihood that the base of the cup was particularly broad or invaginated, as is considered typical of’ the genus. Five RR are moderately large. The prox- imal portions are not curved under but the lateral sides are curved mildly inwardly and the depres- sions continue into the interbrachial region. Arm articulating facets do not fill the distal faces of RR and the junctures with PBrBr are not well defined. PBrBr are low, triangular shaped axil- lary plates, one to each ray. Succeeding SBrBr are low wide plates and are multiple pinnular. One IBr is known to be present in one interray. The column is small and round. Tegmen is un- known. Measurements in mm.—As follows: Length of crown’. 5% 5.0... sence eee Oe eee 37.2 Height of dorsal cup «dreyels 2s epee 2.8 Diameter of proximal columnal................... 1.8 bength of RV (tole BrBr) eee eee 2.8 Maximum) wid thiof Riven eee ere neeeee nee 3.9 Remarks.—In general appearance this species is obviously a member of Allocrinus, but certain Marcu 1952 characteristics are not typical of the genus. In other known species there is a small quadrangu- lar PBr in each ray followed by a larger pentag- onal PBr which is axillary. The first PBr in each ray of A. divergens is low, triangular and axillary. The proximal extremities of RR are curved under to form part of a broad basal area in other species. A. longidactylus Springer (1926) displays arms, which are very similar to those of the present species except for the number of primibrachials. LOEBLICH AND TAPPAN—CRIBROTEXTULARIA 79 Holotype.—Collected by Richard Alexander. To be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. Occurrence and horizon.—N W1/4SW1/4 sec. 4, T.2N., R. 6 E., south of Ada, Pontotoc County, Okla.; Henryhouse formation (upper), Silurian. REFERENCES All cited references are to be found in Bassler and Moody, Bibliographic and faunal index of Paleozoic Pelmatozoan Echinoderms. Geol. Soc. Amer. Spec. Pap. 45. 1943. PALEONTOLOGY .—Cribrotextularia, a new foraminiferal genus from the Eocene of Florida. ALFRED R. Lorsiicn, Jr., and HeLten Tappan, U.S. National Museum. In a search for topotype specimens of genotype species, for study in a generic re- vision of the Foraminifera, the writers found specimens of a textularian form with a cribrate aperture in middle Eocene material from Florida. Comparison with the types showed it to be the species Textularia coryensis Cole. The species was described by Cole (1941, p. 21) as having an ‘aperture broad, low, indistinct.” A thorough rewashing of topotype material including prolonged boiling, made possible the determination of the true apertural characters which were obscured in the holotype by adhering limy material. The cribrate aperture thus revealed is reminiscent of the upper Paleozoic for- aminiferal genus Cribrostomum Moller, and affords an interesting example of conver- gence in development between these two stratigraphically distant genera. Although Cushman (1948) defines Cribro- stomum as “‘test free, biserial; wall finely arenaceous, thick, with an outer thin layer; apertures of the early stages textularian, later cribrate, on the terminal face of the chamber,” he also noted that it ‘‘may be only a stage in the development of Clima- cammina.”’ This latter genus he describes as ‘‘test free, early portion biserial, later uniserial; wall arenaceous, mostly of fine fragments but including coarser ones, cement caleareous; aperture in the biserial portion textularian, in the uniserial portion irregu- larly cribrate, terminal.’’ Thus he distin- guished these genera as Cribrostomwm being wholly biserial and Climacammina biserial to uniserial. Moller (1879) did not exclude bigenerine forms and in fact described Cribrostomum bradyi, C. commune, C. ele- gans, C. gracile, C. pyriforme, and C. tex- tulariforme, of which only the first and last “species” were illustrated as completely biserial. Moller did not designate a geno- type, but included four bigenerine forms to only two of the textularian forms. The genotype was selected by Cushman (1928, p. 120) as Cribrostomum textulariforme. However, all of Moller’s species are sur- prisingly alike in size, ornamentation and other characters and it seems unlikely that six true “‘species’’ would occur in such a limited horizon, all very close in appearance and with similar geographic ranges. In fact, as was stated by Plummer (1945, p. 244) “The designated genotype [C. textulariforme| is without doubt the immature form of one of the five biformed species in the group of eight ‘“‘species” recorded in the same paper with the description of Cribrostomum. C. commune Moller is recorded from the same localities as C. textulariforme and can well be the mature form of the species.” Other writers have also included biformed species under Cribrostomum including Lee and Chen (1930, pp. 96-102), Harlton (1927, p. 22) and Plummer (1945, p. 245). This genus might thus be considered synonomous with Clmacammina H. B. Brady, 1873. However, they may be dis- tinguished by apertural characters as was brought out by Plummer (1945, pp. 244, 245), who stated that symmetry in arrangement and in shape of the large and 80 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES comparatively few openings throughout the uniserial stage is a consistent feature that distinguishes the group represented by Brady’s genotype of Climacammina from Moller’s genotype of Crizbrostomwm.’ Cribrostomum in the adult thus has a multiple aperture of irregularly shaped pores scattered over the terminal area with no definite pattern, whereas Climacammina has symmetrical pores both in shape and arrangement. A similar form, Deckerella Cushman and Waters, was described as like Climacammina, but with only two terminal pores. This “genus” is only a growth stage of Climacammina and the genotype species itself may have a multiple aperture of at least four openings. Cushman regarded both Cribrostomum and Climacammina as having an arenaceous wall with calcareous cement. Galloway (1933, pp. 223, 224) stated that both are calcareous, consisting of an “inner, hyaline, fibrous or porous layer and outer darker, p) VoL. 42, No. 3 very fine granular or structureless layer which is neither arenaceous nor composed of agglutinated particles but is partially a network of cryptocrystalline silica, the major portion being calcite; surface of test rough, giving an arenaceous appearance.” Galloway used this type of wall structure as the basis for a new subfamily, the Palaeo- textulariinae. Lee and Chen (1930, p. 100) in describing Cribrostomum longissimoides state ‘“‘Wall composite, with a relatively thin and smooth inner layer and much thicker and coarser outer layer of arena- ceous nature.’’ Plummer (1945) corroborated these observations stating “The calcareous shell wall is almost wholly fibrous with an external coating of irregular calcareous particles or granules, so that the surface is pebbled, though composed of no adventitious matter.”’ Plummer also noted that “the cribrate surface of chambers in the late biserial stage and throughout the uniserial stage is supported and strengthened by Figs. 1-5.—Cribrotextularia coryensis (Cole): 1, Top view of hypotype (USNM P. 67a), with final chamber broken to show slit aperture of previous chamber and supplementary apertures; 2, 4, top views of additional hypotypes (USNM P. 67 b, c) showing multiple apertures; 3a, side view of hypotype (USNM P. 67d) showing biserial chamber arrangement; 3b, top view, showing ring of apertures; 5, top view of hypotype (USNM P. 67e) with broken final chamber with part of ring of apertures visible and ee multiple apertures of preceding chamber where final chamber is broken away. (All figures Marcu 1952 irregularly developed walls and pillars that tie the terminal wall to the last septum, thus making the chamber labyrinthic.”’ The following brief description sum- marizes the characters of the new genus: Family TEXTULARIIDAE Cribrotextularia Loeblich and Tappan, n. gen. Genctype: Textularia coryensis Cole. Middle Eocene of Florida. Diagnosis—Test free, quadrate in section; chambers biserially arranged throughout; wall arenaceous, simple in construction, not laby- rinthic; aperture in early stages consisting of an arch at the base of the last chamber and in addi- tion a symmetrical series of pores, usually in a ring, on the face of the chamber, arched aper- ture partially closed in later chambers and repre- sented by a series of openings at the base of the final chamber in addition to the terminal cribrate apertures. Remarks——The present genus differs from both Climacammina and Cribrostomum in being wholly biserial, and in lacking any uniserial de- velopment, in being quadrate rather than oval in section, in lacking surface ornamentation, in having a simple and distinctly arenaceous wall, and not a double-layered fibrous calcareous one, and in lacking any development of pillars sup- porting the terminal chamber as was found in Cribrostomum by Plummer. It further differs from Cribrostomum in having a ring of sym- metrically arranged rounded pores as the cri- brate aperture, rather than irregularly shaped and spaced openings, and in this respect is more like Climacammina. However, the cribrate aper- ture is visible only on the final chamber, while all the pores on earlier chambers are covered by the wall of the succeeding chamber. On biserial specimens of Cribrostomum marblense Plummer, the cribrate aperture is visible on both chambers of the last pair. Cribrotextularia coryensis (Cole) Figs. 1-5 Textularia coryensis Cole, Florida Geol. Surv. Bull. 19: 21, pl. 1, fig. 13. 1941. Test free, large, robust, triangular in side view, quadrate in section; chambers numerous, bi- serially arranged, increasing gradually in height and breadth as added, slightly inflated; sutures. distinct, depressed, nearly straight, slightly oblique; wall agglutinated, with distinct cal- LOEBLICH AND TAPPAN—CRIBROTEXTULARIA 81 careous fragments in a granular ground mass, surface irregular; aperture in the early stages consisting of an elongate slit at the base of the final chamber, which becomes progressively closed in later chambers with the simultaneous development of a terminal cribrate aperture of about four or five regularly spaced openings, the complete slitlke aperture has not been observed on the final chamber of any specimen, although it can be seen in the penultimate chamber of one of the hypotypes (Fig. 1), the final chamber has only a few residual pores representing the slit aperture, and a better development of the ter- minal cribrate aperture. Length of figured hypotype (Fig. 3) 1.77 mm, greatest breadth 0.94 mm, thickness 0.73 mm. Other specimens are from 1.51 to 2.29 mm in length. Types and occurrence.—Holotype and un- figured paratypes (Florida Geological Survey collections, S-1533 and $-1533A) and unfigured hypotypes also in Florida Geological Survey Collections (S-3330), figured hypotypes (USNM P. 67, a-e) all from the middle Eocene at 1,360- 1,370 feet in the Peninsular Oil and Refining Co. Cory No. 1, in sec. 6, T.558., R. 34E., Monroe County, Fla. Acknowledgements.—The writers are indebted to Dr. Herman Gunter, director of the Florida Geological Survey, for use of topotype material and also for the loan of Cole’s type specimens. The illustrations are camera-lucida drawings made by Mrs. Sally D. Lee, scientific illustrator, Smithsonian Institution. REFERENCES Cote, W.S. Stratigraphic and paleontologic studies of wells in Florida. Florida Geol. Surv. Geol. Bull. 19: 1-91, pls. 1-18. 1941. CusHMAN, J. A. Foraminifera, their classification and economic use. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. Spec. Publ. 1: 1-401. 1928. . Foraminifera, their classification and eco- nomic use, ed. 4: 1-605, pls. 1-55. 1948. Haruton, B. H. Some Pennsylvanian Foraminifera of the Glenn formation of southern Oklahoma. Journ. Pal. 1: 15-27, pls. 1-5. 1927. Lep, J. S., CHEN, S., AND Cuu, S. The Huanglung limestone and its fauna. Acad. Sinica, Nat. Res. Inst. Geol., Mem. 9. 19380. Mo6uiER, V. Die Foraminiferen des russischen Kohlenkalks. Mém. Acad. Imp. Sei. St.-Péters- bourg, sér. 7, 27: (5). 1879. Puummer, H. J. Smaller Foraminifera in the Marble Falls, Smithwick, and lower Strawn strata around the Llano wplift in Texas. Univ. Texas Publ. 4401: 209-271, pls. 15-17. 1945. 82 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 3 ZOOLOGY .—Ammopemphix, new name for the Recent foraminiferal genus Urnula Wiesner. ALFRED R. Logesuicu, Jr., U.S. National Museum. The name Urnula proposed by Wiesner (Deutsche Stidpolar-Exped. 20: Zool.: 82. 1931) for a Recent Antarctic foraminiferal genus is preoccupied by the protozoan Urnula Claparéde and Lachmann (Ann. Sci. Nat., Paris, Zool. ser. 4: 8: 235. 1857). The name Ammopemphiz is here proposed to replace the name Urnula Wiesner. The genotype (type species) is Urnula quadrupla _ Wiesner, 1931. ZOOLOGY.—A new Calyptrophora (Coelenterata: Octocorallia) from the Philip- pine Islands. FrepERICK M. Baynr, U. 8. National Museum. Among the unidentified primnoid octo- corals of the U.S. National Museum which have been examined in connection with studies on the Gorgonacea of the Indo- Pacific region, there is a single branch of a remarkable species of Calyptrophora. Its zooids are so distinctly different in armature from those of any previously described species that I feel justified in describing it as new even without knowledge of the appearance of the entire colony. It is with a deep sense of appreciation that I name this species in honor of Dr. Julia A. Gardner, of the U. 8. Geological Survey. Genus Calyptrophora Gray Calyptrophora J. E. Gray, 1866, p. 25; Kiikenthal, 1924, p. 317. Calyptrophora juliae, n. sp. Diagnosis.—Zooids about 1.75 mm high, facing upward, in whorls of 4-6; 15 whorls in 3 em of axis length; both scale pairs inseparably fused in ring form; basal ring with two stout diverging spines 1.5 mm long; buccal ring margin with 2-4 short, triangular processes; operculars not lacini- ated apically; rind scales without external crests; tentacles with minute flat scales. Description.—The type specimen is a single ter- minal branch about 12 cm long, which bears closely set whorls of distally directed zooids throughout its length except for the proximal 5 mm, where the axis is bare. The axis is dis- tinctly flattened, at least in this branch, longi- tudinally grooved and of a metallic gold sheen with bright green inidescence. Fifteen zooid whorls (Fig. 1, f) occur in 3 cm of axial length; the apical 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. whorl contains four zooids, while those lower down on the branch ordinarily are made up of five or six. The zooids (Fig. 1, e, k) are surrounded by two pairs of body scales, basal and buccal, as is characteristic of the genus. The members of both sclerite pairs are completely united and inseparably fused to form a pair or rings which encircle the zooid body. The basal ring (Fig. 1, A) is unusually thick and heavy, and bears a single pair of strong, tapered, diverging spines. These are very stout and nearly round, and are longitudinally sculptured with fine, wavy striae which are minutely prickly, especially toward the tips of the spines. The spines are about 1.5 mm long (1.25-1.75 mm) and about 0.35 mm thick at the base. The body of the ring is externally finely granular, the granules so arranged as to form a closely reticulate pattern. The total length of the basal ring including the spines is about 2.75-3.00 mm. The buccal ring (Fig. 1, g) is stout but not so heavy as the basal. It expands somewhat distally, but is not flared, and there is only a very slighty projecting margin which bears one or two pairs of short, triangular proe- esses. The length of the buccal ring along the abaxial suture is about 1.25 mm; its diameter at the oral aperture about 1 mm. There is a well- developed operculum of eight roughly triangular scales 0.4 to 0.6 mm high (Fig. 1, a-d). Each bears a prominent longitudinal ridge on its inner face, and even the largest show no tendency to- ward laciniation of the apex. The tentacles con- tain small, elongate, irregular-margined scales (Fig. 1, 7) about 0.1 mm long. Ordinarily there is but a single pair of curved infrabasal plates lying between the basal scale ring and the plates of the coenenchyma, but one or both may be transversely divided into two short plates, so that there sometimes appears to be an extra in- frabasal scale or pair of scales. The infrabasals Marcu 1952 BAYER: A NEW CALYPTROPHORA 83 ———) 0.5mm Fic. 1.—Calyptrophora juliae, n. sp.: a-d, Opercular scales; e, oblique view of single zooid; f, portion of branch with three whorls of zooids; g, buccal scale ring seen from adaxial side; h, basal seale ring from above; 7, scales from the tentacles; 7, plates from the coenenchyma; k, abaxial view of zeoid. (Magnifications: 0.5 mm scale at d applies to a-d, g, h, 7, k; 0.5 mm scales at e and k apply to those fig- ures only; 1.0 mm scale at f, and 0.1 mm scale at 7, apply to those figures only.) 84 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON form a semicircular collar which partially sur- rounds the base of the zooids. The rind sclerites (Fig. 1,7) are flat, irregular, granular plates with- out strong external keels or ridges. All of the large sclerites are translucent, milky white. Type.-—U.S.N.M. no. 49814. Albatross station 5119, Philippine Islands: Verde Island Passage, between Lubang Island and Cape Santiago, Luzon, (13° 45’ 05” N., 120° 30/30” BH.) 394 fathoms, sand and green mud; January 21, 1908. Remarks.—While the over-all character of branching is unknown, there is a possibility that the entire colony has the lyrate form which occurs in various species of Calyptrophora (cf. Kino- shita, 1908, pl. 4, figs. 33, 35; and Versluys, 1906, p- 148, fig. 178). The armature of the zooids, while basically like that of Calyptrophora japonica Gray (1866, p. 25; Versluys 1906, p. 113), is quite unlike any other described form. The spines of the basal ring are relatively longer and much stouter than those of the type of C. japonica as described by Versluys. The zooids of C. juliae are stouter and larger than those of C. clarki Bayer 1951, and the marginal processes of the buccal ring are never so ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 3 strongly developed; the buccal ring of C. juliae bends adaxially more sharply than does that of C. clarki; and so far as I can determine, its opercular scales are never divided apically into lobes. The close-set whorls of zooids, with their strongly projecting spines, give even this single branch a distinctive appearance, and the entire colony must have been one of striking elegance. LITERATURE CITED Bayer, Freperick M. Two new primnoid corals of the subfamily Calyptrophorinae (Coelenterata: Octocorallia). Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 41(1): 40-48, 2 figs. 1951. Gray, JOHN Epwarp. Description of two new forms of gorgonioid corals. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 1866: 24-27, 2 figs. 1866. Kinosuita, Kumao. Primnoidae von Japan. Journ. Coll. Sci. Imp. Univ. Tokyo 23(12): 1-74, 9 figs., 6 pls. 1908. KUKENTHAL, Witty. Gorgonaria. Das Tierreich 47: xxvili + 478, 209 figs. Berlin and Leipzig, 1924. Verstuys, J. Die Gorgoniden der Siboga Expedi- tion. II, Die Primnoidae. Siboga Exped. Monogr. 18a: 1-187, 178 figs., 10 pls., chart. 1906. ICHTHYOLOGY.—ELight new fishes from the Gulf coast of the United States, with two new genera and notes on geographic distribution. IsAac GinsBuRG, U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service. (Communicated by Ernest A. Lachner.) In the course of my studies of the fishes of the Gulf of Mexico, eight species were found not to have been named previously. This conclusion was reached after a virtual revision of the species of their respective families that occur in the Gulf and adjacent waters. Only one of the species is based on a single specimen. The others are based on sufficient numbers to indicate that they are not uncommon. Three of them are common enough to enter the commercial fish catch at the present time. One offshore species apparently occurs in sufficient numbers to have market possibilities. During an investigation of the southern species of commercial shrimps, the U. S. Fish and Wildlife Service, by means of the research boat Pelican, preserved and brought together a collection of fishes on the coast of our Southern States, which is of great value in the study of the ichthyological fauna of the Gulf and adjacent waters. It is my privilege to be engaged in a study of this collection, and four of the species herein described were obtained by the Pelican. Three of the species indicate a peculiarity of geographic distribution of the fish fauna of the Gulf, to which attention is called and which is discussed at a later point. The photographs for Figs. 1-8 were made in the Smithsonian Photographic Labora- tory. Family SERRANIDAE Centropristes melanus, n. sp. GULF Buack SEABASS D X11. A III 7. P 17-18. Se 47-49. Dorsal and anal spines and rays constant (in 12 specimens). Gill rakers on lower limb 10-14 with 1-4 tubercles, or 14-17 altogether; on upper limb gill rakers grade gradually into tubercles or the difference between the two kinds only mod- erately indicated, 7 or 8 altogether; total number of gill rakers and tubercles on both limbs 21-25. Marca 1952 Body elongate, moderately deep. Mouth termi- nal, lower jaw subequal to upper in front or slightly projecting. Maxillary ending under mid- dle of eye or posterior margin of pupil, without supplemental bone; a broad, rather shallow elon- gate groove below upper maxillary edge, setting off an elongate, moderately depressed piece hav- ing somewhat the shape of a supplemental maxil- lary (asin Epinephelus), but without an evident suture. Teeth in jaws in bands of medium width, widest in upper jaw; side of lower jaw with only two rows of teeth; outer and inner teeth mod- erately enlarged; no canines; none of the teeth depressible to a marked extent. Opercle drawn out posteriorly to form a rather long, flexible flap; middle opercular spine well developed; lower spine moderate; upper spine not developed, in form of blunt, rounded protuberance. Preopercle not expanded; its transverse margin well serrate; lower margin rather sparsely serrate, the serrae covered by skin; serrae at angle slightly enlarged; interopercle and subopercle moderately serrate or smooth. Branchiostegal rays 7. Scalation on mid- back ceasing at moderate distance behind eye, its anterior boundary a nearly straight, trans- verse line; cheek and opercle scaled; interopercle sparsely scaled; patch of scales over cheek and opercle moderately or rather well separated from posterior scales; interorbital, snout, suborbital, maxillary and lower jaw naked; proximal part of caudal rather well scaled for a considerable dis- tance, scaleless posteriorly; other fins scantily scaled near their base; all scales ctenoid (besides small scales on fins), except those on chest some- times cycloid. Lateral line moderately rising an- teriorly, running nearly parallel to contour of back and at some distance below it, making a slight curve at caudal peduncle; 4 or 5 longitu- dinal rows of complete scales between highest part of lateral line and midback, besides a row of incomplete scales; modified, channeled scales in lateral line moderately smaller than adjacent normal scales, not separated by latter or only slightly so. First three dorsal spines abruptly and nearly evenly or somewhat unevenly graduated; first and second usually about half as long as — second and third, respectively; third spine only a little shorter than fourth and longest; thence very gradually decreasing in length to eighth; last two spines subequal to or slightly longer than the one immediately preceding; last spine mod- erately shorter than first ray, emargination be- tween spinous and soft parts of dorsal moderate. GINSBURG: EIGHT NEW FISHES 85 Second anal spine a little shorter and slightly stouter than third. Ventral about reaching anus or falling a little short, its outer angle a little in front of lower pectoral angle. Pectoral having its posterior margin nearly truncate, rounded at angles, more so below than above, ending nearly on same vertical as ventral or a little behind. Caudal asymmetrical, rounded for its greater and lower part, a moderate emargination above, the second branched ray from top moderately or slightly produced. Measurements of four specimens 95-136 mm in standard length, and two, including the holo- type, 177-206 mm, expressed as a percentage of the standard length, the ranges of the smaller specimens in parenthesis, as follows: Depth (33.0- 38.5) 35-36, depth of peduncle (13.5-14.5) 13- 13.5, head to end of flap (40-41.5) 41-44, maxil- lary (17-18.5) 20.5-21, snout (11.5-12.5) 12.5- 13, eye (8.5-9.5) 8-9, interorbital (7-8.5) 7.5. General ground color dark to nearly black; often with very faint traces of irregular, wide darker cross areas, separated by narrower, slightly lighter interspaces; scales with a lighter colored area on exposed part anteriorly, sur- rounded peripherally with dark pigment, pre- senting in gross appearance effect of beadlike longitudinal lines of light spots along rows of scales; no definite dark spot at posterior end of spinous dorsal base; a diffusely dusky area on inner side of opercle, at its upper, anterior part, but no well-defined spot on inner or outer surface of opercle; anal and ventral dark, sometimes edged with lighter color; pectoral uniformly very moderately dusky or nearly pigmentless; dorsal with obliquely lengthwise rows of diffuse light spots; caudal with very faint spots, almost uni- formly dusky or dark. Holotype -—C.N.H.M. no. 33719. Newport, near Wakulla, Fla.; November 10, 1937; Fred Ladd; 270 mm. Paratypes—C.N.H.M. nos. 33717-8, 33721-3; same data as holotype. Pensacola, Fla.;S. Stearns TABLE 1.—FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION OF THE NUM- BER OF GILL RAKERS AND PECTORAL RAYS OF CENTROPRISTES MELANUS AND C. STRIATUS “Leh ere | Gill rakers and | ota eu rarer tubercles on | Pectoral Species both limbs lower limb eS only | ~ 24|22/23)24|25|26|27/28 14] 15]16|17)18 19]17|18|19!20 Pear teh a\altelial 1 | | | 1) 5) 5/4) | | sis striatus | 3! 615! 1 1/1314] 2] | gos} 4 86 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (U.S.N.M. no. 21483). St. Marks, Fla.; B.C. Marshal; August 1931 (92282). Aucilla, Fla.; Fish Hawk station 7147; 3 fathoms; November 6, 1901 (73009). Cedar Keys, Fla.; C. R. Asch- meier; March 3, 1938 (106990). Total 11 para- types 48-270 mm. Remarks.—This species differs from the other two species of Centropristes occurring in the Gulf, ocyurus and philadelphicus, in having fewer scales and more gill rakers (scales 538-57 and total number of gill rakers and tubercles on both limbs 18-21 in the latter two species) and in not having the caudal biconcave, besides other minor differences. It is very close to the Atlantic C. striatus. As shown in Table 1, melanus diverges from striatus in the combined gill raker and tubercle count, that on the lower limb of the first gill arch and also in the total of both limbs, to a degree that is of species magnitude or very nearly so. A high divergence of the pectoral count is also indicated, but of lesser magnitude. Also, in striatus the emargination on the upper part of the caudal is generally more pronounced, and the second branched ray from the top is usually much more prolonged. The data for striatus given in Table 1 are based on specimens ranging from Woods Hole, Mass., to New Smyrna, Fla. Three species of Centropristes occur in the Gulf, melanus, philadelphicus, and ocyurus. The species here described is the counterpart of striatus from the Atlantic. By their long isolation, the Gulf and Atlantic populations have diverged morphologically to a degree of species magnitude, or at least to a degree that is at the borderline of species and subspecies. I have also compared the Gulf populations of philadelphicus and ocyu- rus with their corresponding populations in the Atlantic and find some differences; but those differences are of low degrees, below the sub- species level. It is reasonable to assume that all the populations have been isolated by the penin- sula of Florida equally in point of time. It is in- teresting then to note that in the same genus there is an evident wide difference in the tempo of population divergence. Weed (1937) treats of the species of Centro- pristes and describes a new species, springert, from the Gulf. His treatment in some respects is unsatisfactory. He does not adequately describe the well-marked difference in the shape of the caudal between striatus and philadelphicus, which evidently constituted the main character on which Gill established a distinct genus, T'rilo- VOL. 42, NO. 3 burus, based on philadelphicus; but the caudals of his specimens might have been damaged. He further states that the scale count is the same in all the species; whereas I found it to be a good character for separating striatus and melanus from ocyurus and philadelphicus. The latter dis- crepancy might be due to differences of method; Weed counted the scales in the lateral line, while my counts are of the number of oblique rows above the lateral line. I have reexamined the three specimens on which Weed based his sprin- geri and find that they belong to the same species as the holotype of ocywrus, and consequently these two names are synonymous, ocyurus having priority. Serraniculus, n. g. Genotype.—Serraniculus pumuilio, n. sp. Body elongate, rather spindle-shaped. Mouth subsuperior, the lower jaw moderately projecting. No supplemental maxillary. Upper jaw without notch. Teeth in jaws in rather wide bands; in two rows on side of lower jaw; outer teeth in both jaws and inner teeth in lower jaw enlarged, a few moderately enlarged inner teeth at symphysis of upper jaw also; inner teeth on side of lower jaw largest, 3 or 4 of those teeth moderately larger than adjacent ones but hardly large enough to be designated canine; vomer and palatines with teeth; tongue toothless. Lower two opercular spines well developed; upper spine short and pointed or a rounded, slight protuberance. Trans- verse margin of preopercle serrate, lower margin smooth. Branchiostegal rays 6. Gill rakers short, few. End of posttemporal not covered by skin, exposed in form of rather heavy scale (often referred to as ‘‘axillary scale”). Body entirely covered with ctenoid scales, including chest and pectoral base; opercle and cheek scaled; inter- opercle scaled for a variable distance at its posterior end only; dorsal aspect of occiput interorbital, snout, suborbital, maxillary and lower jaw scaleless. Lateral line rising moder- ately in front and making a slight curve at caudal peduncle; three longitudinal rows of complete scales between highest part of lateral line and midback, besides a row of incomplete scales; modified, channeled scales in lateral line notably smaller than adjacent normal scales and separated by them. All dorsal spines pungent and of normal length. Caudal having its distal margin very slightly rounded. This genus is near Centropristes, structurally and in general appearance. Serraniculus differs Marcu 1952 in constantly having six branchiostegal rays, instead of seven. The caudal shape is as in the young of Centropristes and markedly unlike that of the adults. That is, Serraniculus retains the juvenile caudal of Centropristes also in the adult stage. Serraniculus differs as well from all other known serranid genera on the Atlantic coast of GINSBURG: EIGHT NEW FISHES 87 North America in having six branchiostegal rays. As errors in the treatment of this character have entered the literature, which have been copied and repeated by successive authors, the pertinent literature of the species concerned is here briefly reviewed in connection with the establishment of Serraniculus. Fies. 1-4.—1, Centropristes melanus, n. sp., a paratype, 122 mm; 2, Serraniculus pumilio, n. gen. and sp., holotype; 3, Paracentropristes pomospilus, n. sp., holotype; 4, Anthiasicus leptus, n. gen. and sp., holotype. 88 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Jordan and Evermann (1896, pp. 1218-1219) erroneously place Centropristes subligartus Cope and C. dispilurus Giinther in Dules Cuvier on the assumption that they have six branchiostegal rays. However, in 21 and 5 specimens of those two species, respectively, which I examined in the National Museum, the branchiostegal rays are constantly seven. Also, in those two species the dorsal spines are normal in length and pun- gency, none being notably produced. Dules, on the other hand, is a monotypic genus charac- terized by a combination of two salient char- acters, the presence of only six branchiostegal rays and the striking whiplike prolongation and flexibility of the third dorsal spine. These two characters hold in all 14 specimens of what is presumably Dules auriga Cuvier, which I ex- amined in the National Museum from the general region of Rio de la Plata, South America. Ser- raniculus has six branchiostegal rays like Dules; but otherwise the two genera seem only remotely related. Dules differs from Serraniculus, apart from the structure of the third dorsal spine, in having a notably deeper body, a long, somewhat pointed snout, a deeper and shorter caudal pe- duncle and more numerous dorsal rays, the latter often being a generic character in the family Serranidae. Boulenger (1895, p. 287) erroneously placed subligarius and dispilurus as synonyms of Dules auriga, claiming that the former two names represent females and the latter name males of the same species. Judged by his listed specimens, Boulenger evidently examined only three speci- mens, one auriga, two dispilurus and none of subligarvus, and based his sex determination and conclusion on these three specimens. In reality, these three names represent three separate species which are very readily distinguishable, much more so than some other closely related serranid species. Fowler (1907, p. 265) establishes a new sub- genus, Callidulus, under Dules (which he re- names Hudulus), based on subligarius as the genotype, again on the erroneous assumption that subligarius has six branchiostegal rays. The new name Callidulus (as well as HKudulus) is an unnecessary addition to the nomenclature, as subligarius is near enough to Serranus scriba Linnaeus to be placed in the same genus; while scriba is the genotype of Serranellus Jordan (in Jordan and Eigenmann, 1890, p. 399). There- fore, subligarius, and the closely related dis- ptlurus, should be placed in the genus Serranel- VOL. 42, NO. 3 lus. On a revision of the family, it might be found advantageous to treat Serranellus as a subgenus of Serranus, as it was treated by Jordan and Eigenmann. The untenable placement of subligarius and dispilurus by Jordan and Evermann and their erroneous treatment by Boulenger are perhaps due, in part, to the three species having two general features in common: (1) the shape is rather unusual and similar in all three species, and (2) they also have a light yellowish color more or less developed in the abdominal region. Hither these features represent parallel develop- ments in Dules auriga or else the latter is derived from Serranellus but has become modified to such an extent as to represent a divergence of genus magnitude. The five specimens of dispilurus which I ex- amined, as noted above, so labeled in the Na- tional Museum collection, evidently correctly, are from Jamaica and Puerto Rico. Jordan and Eigenmann (1890, p. 405) venture the opinion that dispilurus is a synonym of Dules flaviventris, which Cuvier and Valenciennes (1829, p. 113) originally described from Brazil. Judged by the brief description of the latter species, the sug- gested synonymy seems well advised; but I have no specimens from Brazil to verify it. Should that synonymy prove to be correct, then Cuvier and Valenciennes were also in error in placing flaviventris in Dules, as they based that genus, first established in the publication cited above, on the presence of six branchiostegal rays. The first branchiostegal ray in serranids is often short, thin, and closely approximated to the second ray, and it might be overlooked unless particular care is exercised. This perhaps ex- plains some of these errors that entered the literature. Serraniculus pumilio, n. sp. D X (10) 11. A III 7. P 14-15. Se 44-46. GR ie Dorsal rays normally 11 (in 20), infrequently 10 (in 1); dorsal and anal spines and anal rays constant (in 21). Pectoral rays 14 (in 12) or 15 Gn 9). Gill rakers on lower limb 5-7 with 1-4 tubercles, or 8-11 altogether; upper limb with 0-3 gill rakers and 0-4 tubercles, or 3-5 alto- gether; total number of gill rakers and tubercles on both limbs of the first gill arch 11-14. Body and caudal peduncle of medium depth; upper profile rising moderately from snout to dorsal origin; peduncle deeper than eye diameter; dis- Marcu 1952 GINSBURG: tance from a median point under end of dorsal to caudal base, greater than eye diameter; maxil- lary ending under anterior margin of pupil or slightly behind. First three dorsal spines rapidly and almost evenly graduated; the first a little less than one-half as long as second; second a little more than one-half as long as third; third to fifth subequal or slightly increasing in length, thence gradually decreasing to ninth; tenth spine a little longer than ninth and moderately shorter than first ray, emargination between spinous and soft parts of dorsal moderate. Ventral rather short, falling short of anus, its end at a more anterior point than that of pectoral, its outer angle slightly in front of lower pectoral angle, its spme about one-half as long as rays. Distal margin of upper two-thirds of pectoral a well- inclined line, its lower angle rounded. Diffusely and irregularly cross-banded; with four diffuse, dark or dusky bands, the first under dorsal origin, the last at caudal base; anterior three bands broader than interspaces, last band comparatively narrow, preceded by broad lighter interspace over greater part of caudal peduncle; the bands without definite boundaries, the dark shade more or less encroaching and becoming diffuse on interspaces; sometimes bands and in- terspaces hardly distinguishable, except light in- terspace on peduncle; interspaces often with a silvery tinge, the interspace between first and second bands often especially prominent as a transverse silvery band on lower two-thirds of body, under middle of spinous dorsal; a series of small dark spots on upper profile often dis- tinguishable, 4 or 5 at dorsal base, the first at base of last spine, the fourth or fifth at end of dorsal somewhat more prominent, one at end of peduncle and one or two on upper margin of caudal near its base; a characteristic, yellowish, rounded spot directly behind last dark band, at its lower half; sometimes a similar spot, smaller and not as well marked, also at its upper half; a light streak along course of lateral line with dark very small spots placed at somewhat irregu- lar intervals; spinous dorsal usually with a large dark blotch a little below its distal margin, between seventh and ninth spines, often hardly perceptible; anterior margin of dorsal often with three dark dots, one above the other; ventral and anal almost uniformly dark to black; other fins usually rather sparsely pigmented, without rows of well marked spots, except some irregular shadings, and caudal and lower pectoral edge broadly margined with dusky or blackish. EIGHT NEW FISHES 89 Measurements (expressed as a percentage of the standard length) of three specimens 56-59 mm, including the holotype, and 3, 70-80 mm, those of the smaller specimens in parenthesis: caudal (25-26) 24-25, ventral (24-25) 22-23, pectoral (26-28.5) 26.5-28.5, depth (27—29.5) 29.5-31, depth of peduncle (12.5-13.5) 13-13.5, head (34.5-35) 35.5-36, maxillary (13-14.5) 14- 15, snout (8.5-9.5) 9-10.5, eye (9.5-10) 8.59.5, interorbital (5-6) 5.5-6.5. Holotype.—U.S8. N. M. no. 133791. Fish Hawk station 7177; lat. 29° 05’ N., long. 83° 22’ 30” W.; off Cedar Keys, Fla.; 53 fathoms; November 27, 1901; 56 mm. Paratypes.—Off Mobile Bay, Ala. (U.S.N.M: nos. 101521, 144164-5). Georgia (149971). Off Cape Lookout, N. C. (131015). Texas; Texas Game, Fish and Oyster Commission (C.N.H.M.). Also, the following Pelican stations: Off Cape Canaveral (station 208—2) and St. Augustine (208—8), Fla.; off St. Andrews Sound (177—12), St. Simon Island (178—7) and Ossabaw_ Is- land (180—7), Ga.; off Head Island (182—8), St. Helena Sound (195—2) and Edisto Island (194—13), 8. C. Total paratypes 20, taken in 6-32 fathoms, 33-80 mm. Remarks.—The abdominal cavity of one 63-mm specimen was exposed to examine the gonads. They were found to contain ripe eggs. The struc- ture of the gonads does not appear to be uniform in gross appearance. Interspersed with the masses of ripe roe are areas of tissue which have the gross appearance of milt. It seems probable, therefore, that this species is hermaphroditic like some other serranids. This is the smallest American serranid dis- covered so far. It is readily distinguished by its generic and specific characters. Its relationship is discussed above under the account of the genus. Paracentropristes pomospilus, n. sp. Prionodes atrobranchus Longley (not Cuvier and Valenciennes), Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 535 :106. 1941 (Tortugas). D X 12. A III 7. P 14-17. Se 46-48. GR 9-11. Dorsal and anal spines and rays constant (in 26 specimens). Pectoral rays normally 16 (only 4 variants in 57 specimens, 14 and 15 in one each, and 17 in 2). Gill rakers on lower limb 9-11, with 1-8 tubercles, or 10-13 in combined number; upper limb with 6 or 7 gill rakers and tubercles combined; total combined number of gill rakers 90 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES and tubercles on both limbs 17-20. Rather spindle-shaped, depth medium; depth of caudal peduncle somewhat greater than eye diameter. Snout subequal to or shghtly shorter than eye. Mouth terminal, lower jaw subequal to upper or slightly projecting. Maxillary without supple- mental bone, ending approximately under middle of eye. Teeth small, in narrow bands, widest in upper jaw, in two rows on side of lower jaw; upper jaw having outer teeth and a few inner teeth at symphysis larger than others; lower jaw having a few anterior outer teeth and all teeth in inner row enlarged; some inner teeth on middle of side of lower jaw larger than all others, but not large enough to be designated canine. Opercu- lar spines poorly developed, short, stubby or slightly poimted. Preopercle serrate; serrae on lower margin stronger than those on transverse edge, except without serrae anteriorly for a third the distance or less. Sealation on antedorsal area extending to eye and continued on inter- orbital space approximately to opposite posterior margin of pupil; cheek, opercle, and interopercle completely scaled; anterior part of interorbital, snout, suborbital, maxillary, and lower jaw scale- less; 3 or 4 rows of complete scales between high- est part of lateral line and midback; modified, channeled scales in lateral line notably small, widely separated by adjacent normal scales. First three dorsal spines nearly evenly graduated, the second about two-thirds as long as third; fifth or sixth spine longest or the two subequal, the length very gradually decreasing to third and last spines; first ray moderately longer than last spine, emargination between spinous and _ soft parts of dorsal slight. Second anal spine shorter and slightly stouter than third. Ventral pointed, reaching anus or a little short. Pectoral having distal margin of its upper two-thirds in a moder- ately inclined line. Caudal moderately and asym- metrically lunate, the upper lobe longer. Measurements of four specimens 114-120 mm, including the type: Caudal (upper lobe) 25.7— 31.0, ventral 27.0-29.5, pectoral 29.0-32.5, depth 31-35, depth of peduncle 12.5-14.0, head 34.5— 37.5, maxillary 16.0-17.5, snout 9.0-10.5, eye 11.0-11.5, interorbital 5.5-7.0. General color a nearly uniform light brownish or yellowish; sometimes very faint indication of dusky rather narrow cross bands, in an occasional specimen a somewhat obliquely placed cross band on body under base of eighth to ninth spine fairly marked; a lengthwise row of small, light yellowish spots, subtriangular or irregular, on VOL. 42, NO. 3 body behind head, a little above pectoral base, ending near end of pectoral, discernible only in the smaller specimens having the scalation nearly intact, imperceptible in the majority of speci- mens; some specimens with trace of a narrow black margin on anal and caudal; belly with a silvery tinge, better marked on chest; upper part of opercle with a large black or dusky area on inner surface, visible externally as a dark spot, -often divided into two spots; no dorsal spot or other color marks. Holotype-—U. S. N. M. no. 151883. Pelican station 108—1; lat. 28° 03’ 30” N., long. 95° 41’ 30” W.; off St. Joseph Island, Tex.; 26 fath- oms; January 23, 1938; 120 mm. Paratypes.—Three specimens obtained with the holotype; 29 other specimens collected by the Pelican at 19 other stations off the following localities: Padre Island and Corpus Christi, Tex.; Atchafalaya Bay, Grand Isle, and Mississippi Delta, La. Also, specimens in the National Mu- seum taken off Dauphin Island, Ala., and Tortu- gas, Fla. Total number of paratypes 56, 75-133 mm. Depth records for these lots range 20-90 fathoms. Remarks.—This species has been compared with the Mediterranean (Labrus) Paracentro- pristes hepatus (Linnaeus), the genotype of Para- centropristes Klunzinger. The Mediterranean species differs in having the scales 52-57, the interorbital nearly all scaled and the caudal very moderately emarginate. However, the two species are similar to a sufficient extent to be placed in the same genus. Among American species pomo- spilus is related to (Serranus) Paracentropristes notospilus (Longley). The two American species differ in a number of characters, the most striking of which are: the very poorly developed opercular spines of pomosptlus, its deeper caudal peduncle, the lack of a dorsal spot and the presence of an inner opercular spot. Longley refers specimens of this species to Centropristes atrobranchus Cuvier and Valencien- nes. However, these authors (1829, p. 45), state that their species has a large black spot on the dorsal. Jordan (1887, p. 532) and Boulenger (1895, p. 289), both of whom examined and described the type specimen and placed the species under Serranus, state that it has a “jet black” and “inky black” blotch on the dorsal. In contrast, the 33 specimens recently preserved by the Pelican do not show a trace of such a spot, and this also holds for the other 24 specimens examined; while the presence or absence of a Marcu 1952 dorsal spot is often a good specific character in serranid species. Moreover, judged by Boulenger’s description there is another, structura’ difference. He states of the type of atrobranchus: ‘“‘preopercle finely serrated, the serrae coarser at the angle, obsolete on the lower border... ;’”’ while in our specimens the serrae on the posterior two-thirds of the lower border, are well developed and as coarse as at the angle. It is evident that the species here described is not the same as Cuvier and Valenciennes’s C. atrobranchus. Anthiasicus, n. g. Genotype.—A nthiasicus leptus, n. sp. Body comparatively slender. Mouth superior. Supplemental maxillary absent. Upper jaw with a moderate notch at symphysis. Teeth in jaws in narrow bands, except in a single row on side of lower jaw; outer teeth very moderately en- larged; both jaws with two small canines in front and two inner canines; a caninoid on side of lower jaw; vomer and palatines with teeth; tongue toothless. Opercular spines poorly de- veloped; the two lower ones short, obtuse; the upper not developed, a mere rounded protuber- ance. Transverse margin of preopercle rather well serrate; serrae on lower margin sparse; one serra at angle of preopercle rather large, sub- triangular; interopercle and subopercle with a smooth edge. Gill rakers long, numerous. Bran- chiostegal rays seven. End of posttemporal not covered by skin, exposed in form of rather heavy scale. Scales comparatively numerous; anterior boundary of scalation a nearly straight trans- verse line at posterior margin of eye; interopercle scaled; interorbital, snout, suborbital, maxillary and lower jaw scaleless. Lateral line placed at a considerable distance below dorsal contour, five longitudinal rows of complete scales between highest part of lateral line and midback, besides two rows of smaller scales at dorsal base; modi- fied, channeled scales in lateral line moderately smaller than adjacent normal scales and moder- ately separated by them. All dorsal spines pun- gent and of normal length. Pectoral pointed. Caudal deeply lunate, the lobes filamentous, nearly half as long as standard length. Anthiasicus is evidently allied to the group of serranid genera which is partly characterized by having numerous rather long gill rakers, in addi- tion to other characters. As compared with its near relatives in that group it differs from Prono- - togrammus in the low position of lateral line and the relatively small scales. From Hemanthias, GINSBURG: EIGHT NEW FISHES 91 it differs in having the third dorsal spine of normal length and pungency, not greatly prolonged and flexible, and in the deeply lunate caudal. From Ocyanthias it differs in the low position of the lateral line, the absence of teeth on the tongue, and the small scales. From Anthias it differs in not having the anterior part of the head scaled, in the notably shorter third dorsal spine, in the small scales, and in not having the ventrals greatly prolonged. The body is notably slenderer than in any of those genera. Anthiasicus leptus, n. sp. D X 14. A III 8. P 19. Se 78. GR 10-26. Eye rather large, subequal to snout, a little less than peduncular depth, about three times in head. Maxillary ending under anterior margin of pupil. First three dorsal spines nearly evenly and rapidly graduated, the first two-thirds as long as second, third moderately shorter than fourth and longest, thence gradually and slowly decreasing in length to last; last spine about three- fifths as long as first ray, emargination between spinous and soft parts of dorsal rather well de- veloped; dorsal spines with very short filaments or tabs. Second anal spine moderately shorter and stouter than third. Ventral somewhat fila- mentous reaching a little past anal origin, its outer angle under lower pectoral angle. Pectoral reaching a vertical through vent. Color nearly uniform, golden above shading to silvery below; fins straw yellow; no distinctive color marks. Measurements (expressed as a percentage of standard length). Standard length 108 mm; caudal upper lobe 48.5, lower lobe 46.5; ventral 28.5; pectoral 23.5; depth 31; depth of peduncle 13.5; head 36; maxillary 16.5; snout 11; eye 12; interorbital 8.5. Holotype-—U. 8. N. M. no. 134189; Albatross station 2378; lat. 29° 14’30” N., long. 88° 09’ 30” W.; off Dauphin Island, Ala.; 68 fathoms; February 11, 1885; 160 mm; the only specimen examined. The relationship of this species is discussed above under the genus. It is easily distinguished from all known Gulf serranids by the combination of its generic and specific characters, especially its fin ray, seale and gill raker counts. Family LUTIANIDAE Pristipomoides andersoni, n. sp. Pristipomoides macrothalmus Hildebrand (not Miul- ler and Troschel), Carnegie Inst. Washington Publ. 535:120. 1941. 92 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES D X (10) 11. A III 8. P 14-16. Sc 49-53. GR 16-17. Dorsal rays normally 11 (in 36), infrequently 10 (Gn 1). Dorsal and anal spines and anal rays constant (in 38). Pectoral rays modally 16 (Gn 20), nearly as often 15 (in 16), sometimes 14 (Gn 2). Gill rakers on lower limb 16 or 17 with 0-2 tubercles in 24 specimens 100-240 mm, 16-18 with 0 or 1 tubercle in 14 specimens 44-95 mm, the total number of gill rakers and tubercles in both size groups 16-18; upper limb with 7-10 gill rakers, the 2-4 near angle of arch longer and nearly evenly graduated, the upper ones more or less abruptly short, the uppermost one sometimes tubercle-like; combined number of gill rakers and tubercles on both limbs, at all sizes, 24-28. Body rather deep, well compressed, somewhat spindle-shaped, ventral curvature only moder- ately less than dorsal. Snout rather short, blunt, subequal to or a little longer than large eye. Interorbital flat and broad, only a little narrower than eye diameter. Mouth well inclined, terminal, lower jaw only slightly projecting. Suborbital moderately wide. Maxillary ending under an- terior margin of pupil or a little behind. Teeth on jaws, vomer and palatines small, in narrow bands, except outer and inner teeth in jaws and inner teeth on vomer more or less enlarged; upper jaw having one or two outer teeth near to and on both sides of symphysis large, caninoid, the other outer teeth smaller and gradually decreas- ing in size posteriorly; vomerine band of teeth somewhat in form of an arch with a shallow con- cavity posteriorly and crowned by a blunt apex anteriorly, without a backward extension on the shaft; no teeth on tongue. Opercle having a moderate spinous projection in a line with lower margin of eye, another projection at some dis- tance above it blunt, broadly rounded. Pre- opercle without or with a very slight emargina- tion on vertical edge, its horizontal edge serrate nearly all the way forward. Interorbital scaleless, boundary of scalation on midback opposite pos- terior margin of eye or slightly behind; an oblique band of scales on nape over cheek and opercle, well separated from rest of scales; greater part of interopercle scaled with 2-3 rows of scales; length- wise rows of scales above lateral line parallel to it; dorsal and anal scaleless. Dorsal spines rather slender, first three very unevenly graduated, the first about half as long as second, the second only a little shorter than third, the last subequal to second; first dorsal ray very moderately longer than last spine, soft and spmous parts of dorsal VOL. 42, NO. 3 nearly continuous. Anal spines very moderately stout, the first about half as long as second, the second a little shorter than third. Last dorsal and anal ray longer than preceding rays. Ventral about reaching anus. Pectoral about reaching a vertical through base of first anal spine. Caudal deeply lunate, the upper lobe somewhat longer. Measurements of two specimens 178-216 mm, including the type and two specimens 81-94 mm, those of the smaller specimens in parenthesis: caudal (upper lobe) 33.5-35.0 (80.0-32.5), ventral 26.0-26.5 (24.5), pectoral 31-32 (30.0-31.5), depth 37.0-40.5 (36-89), depth of peduncle 11.5 (12), head 35-38 (37.5-38.5), maxillary 16.0- 16.5 (16-17), snout 11.5-12.5 (10.5-11.5), eye 10.5-11.0 (12-13), interorbital 9.5-11.5 (10.5— 11.0). General color of preserved specimens straw yellow, often with a slight reddish tinge; lower half often partly or almost wholly with a silvery tinge; often with a few very small, rounded or elongate, dark spots on lateral line spaced at irregular intervals or bunched close together, sometimes similar spots in oblique row on nape; no other distinctive color marks; fins plain yellow- ish. In life the species is of a prevailing pink color. Holotype-—U. 8. N. M. no. 151882. Pelican station 40; lat. 27° 24’ 30” N., long. 96° 13’ W.; off Padre Island, Tex.; 90 fathoms; 216 mm. Paratypes.—Two specimens obtained with the holotype; 27 other specimens collected by the Pelican at 17 stations off the following localities: Padre Island, Corpus Christi, and St. Joseph Island, Tex.; Marsh Island and Atchafalaya Bay, La.; Horn and Petit Bois Islands, Miss.; Perdido Bay and Cape San Blas, Fla. Also, specimens in the National Museum taken at Tortugas, Fla., and off Dauphin Island, Ala. Altogether 37 para- types 44-263 mm. Depth records, available for all except two lots, range 13-95 fathoms. This species differs from the West Indian (Centropristes) Pristupomoides macrophthalmus (Miller and Troschel) in having more gill rakers and fewer scales. In three specimens of macro- phthalmus from Cuba, 200-350 mm, the gill rakers on the lower limb are 11-12 and 2-4 tu- bercles or 13-16 altogether; on upper limb 6 or 7 gill rakers and tubercles combined; total num- ber of gill rakers and tubercles on both limbs 20— 22. This compares with a total count of 24-28 in 38 specimens of andersoni given above. The scale count in the Cuban specimens is 55-57 as compared with 49-53 for the 38 specimens of anderson. Marcu 1952 It is a pleasure to name this apparently com- mon, offshore snapper after William W. Ander- son, who, while carrying out an investigation of the species of commercial shrimp on the U. 8. Fish and Wildlife research boat Pelican, ines- timably served the science of ichthyology by industriously saving, preserving, and assembling as a unit a very valuable collection of fishes from off the Gulf and Atlantic coasts of our Southern States. Family SPARIDAE Pagrus sedecim, n. sp. D XII 9-11. A III 8. P (15) 16. Se 56-59. GR 9-11. Dorsal and anal spines and anal rays constant (in 16). Dorsal rays usually 10 (an 14), sometimes 9 (in a specimen from North Carolina) or 11 (in a specimen from Brazil). Pectoral rays normally 16, sometimes 15 (16 on both sides in 14, 15 on both sides in one, 15 on one side and 16 on the other in one, both variants from the Carolinas). Upper limb of outer gill arch with 6 or 7 gill rakers; lower limb with 9-11 including one tubercle; total number on both limbs 15-17. Moderately deep (for a sparid); anterior profile rising steeply and making a smooth curve to dorsal origin; ventral profile nearly horizontal from head to anal origin. Snout long; preorbital broad; eye rather large. Mouth of medium extent, nearly horizontal, sub-terminal, lower jaw slightly included. Maxillary reaching a vertical through anterior margin of eye in the smaller specimens, a little short of that in the larger. Anterior part of jaws with a short outer row of strong, stout, nearly conical teeth, large enough to be desig- nated canine, usually 4 teeth in upper jaw and 6 in lower, the middle two teeth in lower jaw much smaller than others; side of jaws with two rows of very stout, short teeth, anterior teeth in outer row subconical, rather pointed, changing to mo- lars posteriorly, inner row shorter, the teeth all molar; an elongate patch of smaller teeth on both sides of midline behind outer anterior teeth, anterior teethin patch rather conical and pointed becoming stouter and changing to small molars posteriorly; the patch of smaller teeth over- lapping the two outer side rows of large teeth. Greater part of interorbital scaled, anterior bound- ary of scales curving to a point opposite anterior margin of eye; band of scales on cheek moderate, tapering upward. First four dorsal spines un- evenly graduated, first nearly two-thirds as long as second; second and third about four-fifths as GINSBURG: EIGHT NEW FISHES 93 long as third and fourth, respectively; fourth longest, fifth subequal to it; procumbent spine absent. Second anal spine a little stouter than third, the two subequal in length. Ventral about reaching anus, its base a little behind that of pectoral. Pectoral long, falcate, reaching to over base of first to third anal spines. Caudal well lunate, upper lobe longer than lower. Measurements of 3 specimens 366-425 mm, and two specimens 228-263 mm including the holotype, those of the smaller specimens in paren- theses: Caudal (upper lobe) 29 (32.0-32.5), ven- tral 19.5-23.0 (23.5-24.0), pectoral 36.5-38 (35.5), depth 36.0-39.5 (38.5—40.5), head 30.5-32.5 (33.5- 34.5), maxillary 13.0-13.5 (13.5), snout 13.5-16.0 (15.0), eye 7.0-7.5 (9.0-9.5), preorbital (across its greatest width, on a line oblique to axis of fish) 8.5-9.5 (9.5). Ground color almost uniformly yellowish some- times with a slight pinkish blush; upper half of body with many very small brownish spots, ir- regularly scattered above lateral line, roughly tending to an arrangement along longitudinal lines below it. The small spots are present in 4 specimens, 212-428 mm, which were preserved during the last 12 years, and absent in all others preserved for 25 years or longer. Apparently they disappear after long immersion in preservative. In life the ground color is of a reddish tinge and the spots are bluish. Holotype.—U. 8. N. M. no. 151881. 25 miles south of Pensacola, Fla., on snapper bank; 45 fathoms; July 31, 1988; collected by the Pelican; 208 mm in standard length; the caudal damaged at tip, about 263 mm in total length. Paratypes.—Pensacola, Fla. (21339, 30838); off Cape Fear, N. C. (collected by the Albatross III); Charleston, 8. C. (20981); Rio de Janeiro (83181), Brazil; a specimen obtained by the trawler Santa Maria on the coast of Brazil, locality not stated (87741); New York market (22868-9). Total paratypes 15, 138-507 mm. Remarks.—This porgy, which is not uncom- mon on the American coast and sometimes enters the commercial catch, has been identified hitherto with the European Pagrus pagrus. However, the corresponding populations from the two sides of the Atlantic represent distinct species, as de- termined by comparing the 16 American speci- mens which form the basis of the preceding account with three specimens 155-391 mm from the Azores. The American species normally has 16 pectoral rays, the three Azores specimens 15. As the total 94 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES number of available specimens are relatively few, the rays in both pectorals were counted for each fish. As stated above, of 32 counts of American fish 29 were 16 and 3 were 15. The six counts of Azores fish were all 15. Hence, out of 32 American counts three intergrade with the European species. This gives an index of divergence of 95 (Gins- burg, 1938), which is of species magnitude, judged by the small samples examined. The American species has a slenderer caudal peduncle, as shown in Table 2, with no inter- gradation between the specimens measured. Another possible difference refers to color. As described above, the American species has very small spots which disappear after long immersion in preservative, while no such spots are men- tioned in descriptions of Pagrus pagrus by Euro- pean authors which were consulted. TABLE 2.—FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION OF THE DeprH OF THE CAUDAL PEDUNCLE IN PaGRuUSs PAGRUS AND P. SEDECIM, EXPRESSED AS A PER- CENTAGE OF THE STANDARD LENGTH 10.5 | 11.0 LES Species 9.0 9.5 10.0 SEdeCumuneseniee cee 1 6 6 2 AGTUS Heentevetatereks 2 1 Archosargus oviceps, n. sp. GULF SHEEPSHEAD D XE-XII (XIII) 11-12. A III 9-10. P 15- 17. Se 45-49. Dorsal spines modally 12 (in 20), very often 11 Gn 11), infrequently 13 (in 1); dorsal rays modally 11 (in 20), very often 12 (in 12); number of spines and rays highly correlated, variants having 12 spines usually also having 11 rays and vice versa (D XII 11 in 17; D XI 12 in 10; D XII 12 in 2; D XI 11 in 1; D XIII 11 in 1). Anal spines constant; anal rays modally 10 (in 8), very often 9 (in 4). Pectoral rays modally 16 (in 16), often 17 (in 6), sometimes 15 (in 2). Glli rakers short, stubby, 6 or 7 on upper limb of first gill arch and 8 or 9 on lower, or 14-16 alto- gether. Notably deep, depth about one-half the standard length; anterior profile curving steeply to dorsal origin. Mouth rather small, terminal, only slightly inclined, nearly horizontal; the two jaws subequal in front. Maxillary ending under anterior margin of eye. Preorbital notably wide. Outer teeth broad incisors, confined to anterior part of Jaws, six in upper jaw, eight in lower, with three notches or four cusps in young, be- coming worn with growth; inner molars well VOL. 42, No. 3 developed, those behind incisors smaller and in three irregular rows, those on side notably broader and in two rows in lower jaw, three rows in upper jaw; no teeth on vomer, palatines or tongue. Opercle of nearly uniform thickness, forming a rather broad, rounded projection posteriorly, without spines (the projection nearly spinelike in small fish). Margin of preopercle slightly serrate to smooth. Anterior boundary of sealation a nearly horizontal, curved line with its apex on a vertical about through anterior margin of eye or a little behind; interorbital only partly scaled; cheek with a moderately broad, bandlike scaled area, tapering upward, anterior boundary of scales on cheek a line a little behind eye to end of maxillary; opercle and interopercle scaled; preopercle, preorbital, snout and lower jaw scale- less. Lateral line rising moderately upward, run- ning at a considerable distance from, and nearly parallel to dorsal contour, slightly nearer it posteriorly than anteriorly, making a moderate curve at caudal peduncle. Anterior four dorsal spines rapidly and somewhat unevenly gradu- ated, the first a little more than half as long as second, the fourth only slightly shorter than fifth and longest, thence gradually decreasing in length to last or penultimate; first ray moder- ately longer than last spine, emargination be- tween spinous and soft parts of dorsal very moderate. Second anal spine longer and stouter than third. Ventral placed behind pectoral, about reaching anus, the outer ray usually a little pro- longed. Pectoral about reaching third body band, that is, a vertical through approximately third anal spine. Caudal moderately emarginate. Measurements of two specimens 103-115 mm and 2 large ones 235-247 mm, expressed as a percentage of standard length, measurements of smaller specimens in parenthesis. Caudal, slightly frayed (31-31.5) 30-30.5; ventral (29-29.5) 27— 28; pectoral (35.5-36) 41—41.5, a little damaged in larger specimens; depth (48-53) 50.5-52.5; head (33.5 in both) 33-34; maxillary (12-13) 13 in both; snout (13.5-14.5) 15.5-17; eye (9-9.5) 7-7.5; interorbital (11-12) 11.5-12.5. Sharply cross banded; a band on nape some- what oblique, tapering downward, not extending on head, usually not as intensely pigmented as posterior bands; body with 5 broad black sharply marked bands extending nearly all the way down; first and fourth bands under beginning and end of dorsal, respectively, only two other bands under dorsal base; last band at caudal base; a transverse blotch on caudal, at its base, often Marcu 1952 GINSBURG: EIGHT NEW FISHES 95 present, somewhat coalescent with last band; an silvery or golden tinge; dorsal, anal and ventral axillary spot on lateral line, placed on and more almost uniformly dark to nearly black; caudal intensely pigmented than first body band, some- dusky; pectoral yellowish. times imperceptible; ground color grayish with a Only two small specimens, 14-35 mm, have an Fias. 5-8.—5, Pristipomoides andersoni, n. sp., holotype; 6, Pagrus sedecim, n. sp., holotype; 7, Archosargus oviceps, n. sp., holotype; 8, Menticirrhus focaliger, n. sp., holotype. 96 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES asymmetrical color pattern, five body bands on one side, six on the other. All other 76 specimens have 5 body bands on both sides, except that in four of the smallest specimens the last one, or two bands are more or less faint or irregular. As in probatocephalus (see below), specimens with an asymmetric color pattern possibly die before at- taining any considerable size. Holotype —U. 8S. N. M. no. 144151. Barataria Bay, La.; Isaac Ginsburg; November 24, 1931; in shrimp trawl; 103 mm. Paratypes.—Mobile, Ala. (19525). New Orleans, La.; Couch (727). Galveston, Tex.; D. 8. Jordan (31041). Port Lavaca, Tex.; Graham (726). Bra- zos Santiago, Tex.; Emory (728) and J. Wurde- mann (730). Tampico, Mexico; Snyder (62282). The following were collected on the coast of Texas by J. C. Pearson, in 1926: Gulf.of Mexico (144158). Harbor Island (144152-5 inel., C. N. H. M.). Shamrock Cove (144156). Ingleside (144157). Corpus Christi (144160). Corpus Christi Pass (144159). Total paratypes 77 specimens, 11-855 mm. Remarks.—This species differs from A. pro- batocephalus in normally having five bands on the body, not counting the band on the nape, instead of six. The band on the nape, the one at the caudal base, and one each under the beginning and end of the dorsal, occupy the same positions in oviceps and probatocephalus; but between the latter two bands oviceps has only two others, while probatocephalus has three. Other structural differences between the two species are not pro- nounced; probatocephalus apparently averaging a slightly higher dorsal spine count and slightly lower pectoral and gill raker counts. Of the South American A. aries only one specimen was examined, from Venezuela. It is apparently nearer to probatocephalus than to ovi- ceps. A. aries has six body bands like probato- cephalus, but the bands are appreciably narrower. In meristic counts the single Venezuelan speci- men agrees with probatocephalus, and the differ- ences between aries and that species remains to be determined by a study of adequate samples. Archosargus probatocephalus (Walbaum) As the only substantial character determined that distinguishes oviceps from probatocephalus refers to the number of bands, a study of the vari- ability and development of this character in probatocephalus was made for comparative pur- poses. Variation in the number of bands is shown vou. 42, No. 3 TABLE 3.—FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION OF NUMBER oF Bopy Banps IN ARCHOSARGUS PROBATOCEPHALUS Length of | Distribution Locality specimens mee IG. G/SI),.S iBeesleysphoint-Neuheeareoeee oer eree 25-74 24 | — 1 Beaufort, NEG. fosscse a eee Miscellaneous, Chesapeake Bay to Key 10-68 182 | 24 | 13 71-361 1 | = |= Homosassa and Tampa Bay, Fla. 92-252 6 | = TaBLeE 4.—FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION OF NUMBER or Bopy BANDS IN ARCHOSARGUS PROBATOCEPH- ALUS AS RELATED TO SIZE OF SPECIMENS Length of spe- | cimens in ae 10-25 | 26-41 | 42-58 | 59-74 | 92-361 umbels of body bands Ne 6 68 80 53 6. 24 6/5 5 16 3 = _ 5 5 5 3 1 = in Table 3. All specimens are divided into three groups: (1) With six body bands; not including the incomplete band on the nape, (2) with five body bands, and (3) asymmetrical, five bands on one side, six on the other, the column heading being “6/5”. Of the 269 specimens examined (six from western Florida, the rest from the Atlantic), 24 or slightly less than 9 percent are asymmetrical, and 14 or a little over 5 percent have five bands. The total of both variant cate- gories is slightly over 14 percent. Table 3 also shows that all variants except one are from Beaufort. The latter composite sample comprises young fish, 10-68 mm, which formed the basis of the account of development of the species by Hildebrand and Cable (1938), and a study was made of the development of the bands in this species. At 10 mm the bands are not sharply outlined, but the chromatophores are already crowded in definite transverse areas which are separated by narrower intervals that are almost devoid of chromatophores. By this arrangement the number of bands in fish as small as 10 mm is determinable. On growing another 2-5 mm, the bands become sharply outlined. Table 4 shows the grouping of the variants with respect to size. They are present in the smaller size groups and evidently disappear with growth. The largest 5-banded fish is 74 mm, the largest asymmetrical specimen 53 mm. Speci- Marcy 1952 mens 92 mm or longer, 24 in all, have a symmetri- cal 6-banded pattern. An obvious and plausible explanation is that in probatocephalus an asym- metric and a 5-banded color pattern is linked with a lethal factor which results in the failure of such variants to reach some size, much less to reach adulthood. It can hardly be explained that the asymmetric or 5-banded pattern changes with growth to a 6-banded pattern, as the posi- tion of the bands is constant and there would have to be a radical rearrangement of the chro- matophores to produce this change, which is hardly probable. The isolating mechanism that keeps probatocephalus and oviceps as separate species, therefore, seemingly includes two factors, one geographic, and another which may be termed physiologic, using the term in a broad sense. While the evidence is not based on a sufficient number of specimens to be altogether conclusive, it is fairly presumptive of this conclusion. Family SCIAENIDAE Menticirrhus focaliger, n. sp. GuuFr MINKFISH D X; I 24-25. AI (7) 8. P 19-21. Se 75-86. Dorsal rays 24 (in 6) or 25 (in 5). Anal rays normally 8 (in 26), infrequently 7 (in 1). Dorsal and anal spines constant (in 11). Well elongate; rather fusiform, but tapering posteriorly more than anteriorly and upper profile more curved than lower. Snout long, bluntly rounded at tip, somewhat conical, projecting beyond upper lip. Mouth small, nearly horizontal, notably inferior, placed well behind tip of snout. Maxillary ending under middle of eye or posterior margin of pupil. Interorbital subequal to eye diameter. A single, short, rather stout, truncate barbel at chin. Lower jaw with five pores, one on midline of chin, at base of barbel, two on both sides. Anterior margin of snout with four lobes well developed. Teeth in jaws in rather broad bands; small, except outer teeth in upper jaw rather well enlarged, the others subequal; vomer and pala- tines toothless. Gill rakers short, rather stout, stumpy, comparatively few, the anterior 2 or 3 gill rakers on lower limb better marked in the smaller specimens, reduced to low tubercles or to a few spinules at the surface or hardly per- ceptible in the larger specimens (hence the tu- bercles were not counted, and the gill raker count differs with size), 5 + 7-10 in the smaller speci- mens (four specimens 53-81 mm), 5 + 6-8 in the larger (six specimens 90-132 mm). Hard part GINSBURG: EIGHT NEW FISHES 97 of opercle ending in two widely separated, moder- ately pungent or flexible points, without well marked spines. Preopercle moderately serrulose or crenate, the points moderately pungent or flexible. Scaled all over; except a moderate area at anterior end of snout naked; scales on chest subequal, the middle scales not notably smaller than those at periphery; scales on lateral aspect of snout and anterior part of cheek cycloid, others ctenoid; proximal part of caudal scaled, distal part scaleless, except the modified lateral line scales extending to its distal margin; ventral and pectoral scaled for a short distance at base; a single row of scales on second dorsal base; spi- nous dorsal and anal scaleless. Spinous and soft dorsal well separated, forming two fins; the spines flexible; second to fourth spines prolonged, the third longest; extent of prolongation varying greatly with the individual and increasing with growth, tip of longest spine reaching base of third to eighth dorsal ray inspecimens 53-103 mm (25 fish), to base of ninthray inspecimens 115-132 mm (2 fish). The single anal spine flexible in the larger specimens, moderately pungent in small ones. Ventral placed at some distance behind pectoral base, falling considerably short of anus. End of pectoral falling a little short of a vertical through end of ventral in the smaller specimens, extending to or a little behind that vertical in the larger fish. Caudal asymmetrical, lower part rounded, longer than upper part, the latter emar- ginate. Measurements of six specimens 90-132 mm, including the holotype expressed as a percentage of standard length: Caudal (lower part) 25- 27.5, ventral 18-20, pectoral 20-22, depth 24-25, head 30-31.5, maxillary 10.5-11, snout 10-11, eye 6-7.5, interorbital 6.5-7.5. Ground color light yellowish or grayish; with dusky or black rather wide bands; four oblique bands under dorsal fin running downward and forward, the first band under end of spinous dorsal continued upward on posterior part of fin, the fourth at some distance before end of soft dorsal, the bands decreasing in length and increasing in obliquity from first to fourth; two oblique bands on nape running in opposite diree- tion to preceding series, downward and backward; the first band of the posterior series and the second band of the anterior series forming a broad V on side; caudal with a dusky longitudinal band along middle of its lower half, often rather faintly continued forward on posterior part of 98 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 3 TABLE 5.—FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION OF THE NUMBER OF SCALES AND PECTORAL RAYS OF MENTICIRRHUS FOCALIGER AS COMPARED WITH M. SAXATILIS. Scales Pectoral rays Species |75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 18! 19 20, 21 Pell | ln | | leet peal | | | | focaliger ........ceceececeees UHI MAO oa | ie hale | 2} 3/47} 4 saxatilis: | | | | | | | | North Carolina........... | [| | | |? 3 Ht) 23] ea a 1) 2] 8 Wioods¥HoleseeeeCereetcee ale | Pe ey bee 2) 1 gaa |a 2 1 10| 6 body. The oblique bands described above are sometimes sharply black and sometimes hardly perceptible. Usually they are of a diffusely dusky pigment. In general the bands are better marked in the smaller specimens. In life they are more sharply outlined than in preserved specimens. Holotype-—U. 5. N. M. no. 144161. St. Joseph Bay, Fla., near its entrance; Isaac Ginsburg; June 21, 1932; 132 mm. Paratypes.—F ive specimens 90-114 mm, ob- tained with holotype (U. 8. N. M. no. 144163). Cape San Blas, Fla.; Isaac Ginsburg; June 20, 1932; 21 specimens 53-103 mm (U.S.N.M. no. 144162; C.N.H.M.). Remarks.—I obtained the above 27 specimens on two successive days at two localities not far apart by means of a 30-foot seine on sandy beaches. Several drags of the net were made at each place and every drag brought in one or more specimens of focaliger. Very likely I could have obtained more specimens by further seining; but at the time I thought that they represented the common saxatilis. At Cape San Blas, 38 speci- mens of M. americanus and 5 of M. littoralis were obtained in the same drags as the 21 focaliger. Evidently the three congeneric species live and mingle side by side. This species is close to M. saxatilis from the Atlantic, nearly agreeing with it in normally having 8 anal rays, in the extent of prolongation of the dorsal spines, in the color pattern and the size of the scales on the chest. It differs chiefly in having a lower scale count as shown in Table 5. While counts of more specimens might show some overlap in the distributions of the two species, the extent of divergence is evidently of species magnitude or very close to it. The populations of saxatilis from Woods Hole and North Carolina also differ in the scale count, possibly to an extent to be treated as distinct subspecies; but such is not unusual for north and south popula- tions of the same species. The pectoral count of focaliger is nearer to the Woods Hole population of saxatilis than to the North Carolina population. vat bce fh Fig. 9.—Serraniculus pumilio, n. gen. and sp., drawn from a paratype by Ann 8. Green. Marcu 1952 GINSBURG: EIGHT NEW FISHES 99 NOTES ON THE GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION OF THF FISH FAUNA OF THE EAST COAST OF THE UNITED STATES WITH PARTICULAR REFERENCE TO THREE OF THE SPECIES ESTABLISHED ABOVE The relationship of thetemperate-water, marine fish fauna of the Atlantic and Gulf coasts of the United States constitutes an interesting problem in zoogeography. The peninsula of Florida forms an effective natural barrier to the spread, and results in the isolation, of fish populations. The Gulf fish fauna from the Rio Grande (very little is now known of the fishes on the Mexican coast), say, roughly to Cape Romano, Fla., is on the whole very similar to the temperate-water fish fauna of the Atlantic coast of the United States. Most species of both coasts are nearly identical (with some qualifications as discussed below). The southern limit of the temperate Atlantic fauna is somewhere between Cape Canaveral and Biscayne Bay, Fla. The fauna of the extreme end of southern Florida, on the other hand, from Biscayne Bay to Tortugas, is in its larger aspects tropical and very similar to or nearly identical with the West Indian fish fauna and that of central and the tropical part of South America. The very similar temperate fish faunas of the Atlantic and Gulf coasts are thus isolated by the physical barrier of the peninsula of Florida and by the ecological barrier of the tropical waters at the Florida keys. The division between the temperate water and tropical fish faunas is not sharp. Many species do have a discontinuous geographic range. They oecur on the Atlantic and Gulf coasts of the United States; but their geographic distribution is interrupted by their absence at the Florida keys. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of zoogeography, a second category contains many species, in the families Carangidae and Lutiani- dae for instance, which have a continuous range, from the Atlantic coast, around the Florida keys, to the Gulf coast and also to the West Indies and Central America. The ichthyofauna at the Florida keys is not well enough known to make a numerical comparison of the species in these two categories. Whatever the relative num- ber of species in the two categories, those species which by their preponderance in numbers give character to the fauna, have a discontinuous dis- tribution. For instance, the temperate-water channel bass, croaker, spot, sea trouts, and men- haden, species that dominate the faunal scene by their abundance, have a discontinuous dis- tribution. Also, most species having a continuous geographic range, typically belong rather to the tropical fauna. Their center of abundance is at the West Indies, the Florida keys and the coast of Central America, and occur only sparingly farther north on the Atlantic and Gulf coasts of the United States. Fewer species with a continu- ous geographic range, such as the sheepshead and the pigfish, typically belong to the temperate water fauna and occur in much reduced numbers at the Florida keys. As a general rule species are not uniform morphologically throughout their geographic ranges; they differ more or less with the local population. Two species having a continuous distribution, which I have studied in detail, namely, Bathygobius soporator (Cuvier and Valen- clennes), sensu lato (Ginsburg, 1947), and Ba- thystoma aurolineatum (C. and V.), sensu lato (1948) show that the populations of the Florida keys are somewhat intermediate, between the comparable West Indies populations and those farther north on the coast of the United States. Comparisons made of the corresponding pairs of populations—one from the Atlantic, the other from the Gulf—of species having a discontinuous geographic range show that they too diverge more or less morphologically. The extent of divergence of comparable pairs is of different degrees and their magnitudes form a graded series, from very slight to very pronounced, with all grada- tions in between. (A difference in degrees of divergence among species of the same genus even, is mentioned above under the account of Centropristes melanus.) An example near the low end of the series is furnished by the Atlantic and Gulf populations of Cynoscion nebu- losus as discussed by me in another paper (1938), which also gives a number of other, graded divergences at or below the subspecies level. The divergences of two corresponding pairs, namely, Brevoortia tyrannus from the Atlantic as compared with B. patronus from the Gulf, and B. smithi as compared with B. guntert, re- cently published by Hildebrand (1948), are evi- dently of higher degrees, near the borderline between species and subspecies. The divergence of two pairs compared above, namely, Centro- pristes striatus with C. melanus and Menticirrhus savatilis with M. focaliger, is approximately the same as the above named two pairs compared by Hildebrand. Finally, as an example near the other extreme, that of very pronounced diver- 100 gence, the two species of Stenotomus may be cited. S. chrysops (Linnaeus) is common on the Atlantic coast of the United States and is re- placed on the Gulf coast by S. caprinus Bean which is not known to occur in the Atlantic. This is an example of two closely related allo- patric species which replace each other geograph- ically but which are so highly divergent that they are often placed by authors in separate genera.1 In sum, subject to the qualifications and ex- ceptions discussed, by and large, the fish fauna of the Florida keys is tropical and West Indian, while that of the Gulf is very similar to the temperate water Atlantic fauna. The two very similar temperate water faunas are isolated by the peninsular barrier. This barrier is such a striking feature in the geographic distribution of the icthyofauna that it could not have escaped the notice of students of fishes. But it is only lately that a beginning was made towards a detailed study and evaluation of the results of its influence on the ramification of fish populations. In any further studies, it would be interesting to note whether the change in the general character of the fauna at the lower end of the peninsula of Florida is fairly abrupt or gradual, and if abrupt at what area the change occurs. The geographic distribution of three species described here is not in line with the general relationship of the temperate faunas on both sides of the now existing peninsular barrier as discussed above. The sheepshead, Archosargus probatocephalus, is one of those fewer among the typically temperate-water species that have a continuous geographic distribution, occurring as 1 As the above statements regarding Stenotomus are at variance with published accounts, it should be here said that they are based on original and as yet unpublished data and observations. I did this work in preparing an account of the Gulf coast fishes. The specimens of Stenotomus examined from the Atlantic range from the Bay of Fundy in the north to Cape Canaveral, Fla; those of the cor- responding population in the Gulf range from Pensacola, Fla., to Aransas Pass, Tex. Of the At- lantic material a few specimens from near the ex- tremes of their geographic range were studied in detail and compared with those in the Gulf. All available specimens, more than 100 in number, were then examined for the most critical distin- guishing characters. As a result of these studies I have come to the conclusion that only two species of the common scups are known, namely, Steno- tomus (Stenotomus) chrysops, which is confined to the Atlantic, and Stenotomus (Otrynter) caprinus, which is confined to the Gulf. Judged by analogy, by the distribution of Archosargus probatocephalus, as determined during this investigation and re- corded above, S. chrysops might occur in western Florida, but this remains to be determined. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 3 it does, in reduced numbers, in the Florida keys. A comparison of the specimens examined from Tampa Bay and Homosassa with those from the Atlantic coast makes it evident that any diver- gence that might exist between the Atlantic and west Florida populations will prove to be of very minor degree, decidedly below the subspecies level. This relationship is similar to that of the populations of many other species on the opposite sides of the peninsular barrier. However, in the case of the sheepshead, something different is also indicated. The population on the west coast of Florida differs materially from the comparable population on the coast of Alabama, Louisiana, Texas, and Mexico, the difference being such that they may be treated as distinct species; that is, on the Gulf coast westward of Florida proba- tocephalus is replaced by a distinct species, ovt- ceps. A similar, though not parallel, difference in distribution is indicated further by two other species here described, M. focaliger and C. mela- NUS. The two species of Menticirrhus compared above, focaliger and saxatilis, are examples of two corresponding populations that replace each other on the two sides of the peninsular barrier and that have attained a divergence of species magni- tude. This also is not unusual. Similar instances have been cited above. However, focaliger ap- parently does not occur on the Gulf coast west- ward of Florida. Of the thousands of specimens I closely examined or observed on the coast of Louisiana and Texas, not a single focaliger was found; they all comprised two species, americanus and littoralis, which also occur on the west Florida and Atlantic coasts. M. focaliger is also lacking among the many specimens of Menticirrhus, which John C. Pearson preserved during his study of the sciaenids of the Texas coast, and it was not found in the National Museum. It seems safe to conclude, therefore, that it does not occur in the Gulf west of Florida. Apparently this also holds for Centropristes melanus. The latter species has been masquerading heretofore under the name C. striatus. There are no indisputable records of its having been taken westward of Florida. I have not encountered it in my col- lecting trips from Alabama to Texas; and no specimens from the coast of those States are present in the large collection of Centropristes in the National Museum. Weed (1937) gives an extensive annotated bibliography of Centro- pristes. None of the references cited contain an undoubted record of the black seabass west of Marcu 1952 Florida. One reference, that by Collins and Smith, recording C. striatus as being a commercial species in Mississippi, is most probably based not on actual specimens but on reports of fishermen and fish dealers, and it very likely refers to some other species designated ‘‘seabass” in the fish trade of Mississippi, rather than to Centropristes. The specimens that Weed designated as striatus and that are designated above melanus all came from Florida. Still another example, again not altogether parallel, is furnished by the species of Hzippo- campus (Ginsburg, 1937). H. zosterae occurs on the coast of Florida and is replaced on the coasts of Mississippi and Texas by the closely related and morphologically somewhat overlapping H. regulus. This case is not altogether parallel in as much as H. zosterae is not known to occur in the Atlantic north of Biscayne Bay; but it indicates a marked difference in the fish fauna between the Gulf coast of Florida and the coast westward of Florida. The peculiar geographic distribution of the four species discussed, as compared with their close relatives, challenges a rational explanation. On the surface the existing ecological conditions on the greater part of the Florida west coast are not so strikingly different from those of most other parts of the Gulf coast as to account for this difference in geographical distribution. Yet, in some important elements, the fish fauna of the Gulf coast of Florida differs markedly from that of the coast of Alabama and westward and is nearer to that of the Atlantic coast. In our present state of knowledge only specu- lative suggestions may be made. One such sug- gestion would be the existence of some past or present barrier, now unrecognized. On this as- sumption the thought that comes to mind first is an ecological barrier, namely, the soft or muddy nature of the bottom in the delta region resulting from the tremendous mass of silt carried down by the Mississippi River. But, while this may be a partial factor in isolating fish populations, it evidently does not offer a full explanation of the peculiar distribution here discussed. Most species are able to surmount this barrier. More- over, the fauna on the coasts of Alabama and Mississippi, on the east side of the Mississippi Delta, is the same as far as we know now as that of Louisiana and Texas, west of the delta. Another assumption would be the probable existence of a faunal barrier, similar to the now existing peninsular barrier, physical or ecological, in some past geologic epoch, perhaps the Pliocene, some- GINSBURG: EIGHT NEW FISHES 101 where between what is now Cape San Blas, Fla., and Mobile Bay, Ala. This hypothetical] barrier must have antedated the peninsular bar- rier as it now exists. It produced its effect in isolating fish populations when the west coast of Florida was still continuous with the Atlantic coast, at least when it was climatologically and ecologically uninterrupted and supporting the same fauna. The proof of such a hypothesis, of course, lies within the province of historical geology as well as zoogeography. My main ob- ject here is to place the zoogeographic evidence on record as it relates to fishes, for the purpose of correlation with similar evidence that might exist for other groups or that might be discovered in the future study of fishes. LITERATURE CITED BouLENGER, GrorGE ALBERT. Catalogue of the perciform fishes in the British Museum, ed. 2,1. 1895. Cuvier, GEORGES, and VALENCIENNES, ACHILLE. Histoire naturelle des poissons 3. 1829. Fowuer, Henry W. Notes on Serranidae. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sei. Philadelphia 59 : 249-269. 1907. GinsBurRG, Isaac. Review of the seahorses (Hippo- campus) found on the coasts of American con- tinents and of Europe. Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus. 83 : 497-594. 1937. ———. Arithmetical definition of the species, sub- species and race concept, with a proposal for a modified nomenclature. Zoologica 23 (3): 253- 286. 1938. ———. American species and subspecies of Bathy- gobius, with a demonstration of a suggested modified system of nomenclature. Journ. Wash- ington Acad. Sci. 37 (8): 275-288. 1947. . The species of Bathystoma (Pisces, Haemu- lonidae). Zoologica 33 (3): 151-156. 1948. HILDEBRAND, SAMUEL F. A review of the American menhaden, genus Brevoortia, with a description of a new species. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 107 (18): 1-39. 1948. ——— and Casue, Lovenua E. Further notes on the development and life history of some teleosts at Beaufort, N. C. Bull. U. 8. Bur. Fish. 48 (24): 505-642. 1938. JorpaNn, Davip Srarr. Notes on typical specimens of fishes described by Cuvier and Valenciennes and preserved in the Musée d'Histoire Naturelle in Paris. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 9: 525-546. 1887. ——— gnd EIGENMANN, Carl H. A review of the the genera and species of Serranidae found in the waters of America and Europe. Bull. U.S. Fish Comm. 8: 329-441. 1890. ——— and Evermann, Barron W. The fishes of North and Middle America. Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. 47 (1): 1-1240, figs. in separate volume. 1896. Wrep, AuFrRED C. Notes on seabasses of the genus Centropristes. Publ. Field Mus. Nat. Hist. Zool. 20 (23): 291-320. 1937. 102 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 3 MAMMALOGY.—A new Clyomys from Paraguay (Rodentia: Echimyidae). Joao Moosen, Museu Nacional, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil. (Communicated by Her- bert Friedmann.) Among the mammal specimens collected by Charles Wharton in Paraguay is an apparently undescribed form of the genus Clyomys. Hitherto this genus has been known only from specimens obtained by Lund at Lagoa Santa, Minas Gerais, Brazil. This new form appears to be subspecifically distinguishable, as follows: Clyomys laticeps whartoni, n. subsp. Type.—Museu Nacional no. 11400, adult male; collected on May 5, 1950, by Charles Wharton. Type locality —I|1 km north of Aca-poi, long. 56°7’ W., lat. 23°5’ S., Department of San Pedro, Partido de Taquati, Paraguay; approximately 60 km east-northeast of Puerto Ybapobo and 10 km south of the Rio Ypané. Specimen trapped alive at mouth of burrow in cafadon (natural open- ing). Diagnosis—Head grizzled ferruginous and black, more uniformly ferruginous on the nose and cheeks. Back rufous strongly mixed with black, the amount of black decreasing to the sides of body and caudad. Sides of the body and primna more uniform cinnamon. Tail like back in the proximal fifth, covered with stiff blackish hairs in the remaining portion. Hands and feet finely grizzled whitish and rufous with some black intermixed. Ventral surface grayish white with gray patches in the gular region and middle of chest and belly. Pelage.—Aristiforms on shoulder: Grayish basally, gradually blackening toward tip but interrupted by an Apricot Orange subapical zone: about half of them with no subapical zone and therefore completely black in the distal part; groove of aristiforms dorsal, as in Huryzygoma- tomys; total length 18 to 20 mm; maximum width 0.5 to 0.6 mm. Setiforms on shoulder: Whitish basally, grad- ually darkening toward tip but interrupted by an Apricot Buff subapical zone; total length about 18 mm; maximum width 0.1 to 0.2 mm. Aristiforms on middorsal region: Grayish basally, gradually blackening toward tip but most of them interrupted by an Apricot Buff subapical zone; total length 20 to 23 mm; maxi- mum width 0.8 to 0.9 mm. Setiforms on middorsal region: Grayish basally, gradually darkening toward tip but interrupted by a broad Salmon-Buff subapical zone; total leneth 15 to 20 mm; maximum width 0.02 mm. Setiforms on thighs: Almost uniformly with a broad Apricot Buff subapical zone. Measurements.—Dry skin: Head and body, 190 mm; tail, 69 mm; hind foot (¢.u.) 36 mm; ear, 16 mm. Skull: Greatest length, 46.9 mm; basal length, 44.5 mm; zygomatic breadth, 26.5 mm; length of nasals, 14 mm; interorbital breadth, 11.7 mm; palatilar length, 17.6 mm; bullae, 14.6 by 10.4 mm; crown length of cheek teeth, 9.3 mm. Comparisons——This new subspecies differs from C. l. laticeps in having grayish patches on the gular region and median ventral surface. The palate is shorter and the bullae are larger than in C. l. laticeps. Remarks.—The discovery of Clyomys laticeps in Paraguay considerably extends its range, show- ing that the species probably lives in the whole savannah region of the South American central plateau. Since it is now known from Lagéa Santa, Minas Gerais, Brazil, and Taquati, Para- guay, it should follow the pattern of distribution of other genera in the same family, as for in- instance Cercomys, Euryzygomatomys, and Car- terodon, which live in similar habitat. The fact also that Mr. Wharton was not able to find the species in Summerfeld Colony, De- partment of Yhu, lat. 25°20’ S., and long. 55°45’ W., supports the assumption that most of the Echimyidae do not go below lat. 24° S. in spite of topographical and floristical conditions. Mr. Wharton intends to publish on the habits of the subspecies. An old adult female was also examined, col- lected by Mr. Wharton in the same locality, and will be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum collection. The color of this specimen is consid- erably lighter than that of the type, the subapical zone of the aristiformes being Salmon-Buff. Its measurements are: Skin (in the flesh): Head and body, 107 mm; tail, 75 mm; hind hoot, 21 mm. Skull: Greatest length, 47.1 mm; basal length, 44.1 mm; zygomatic breadth, 26.5 mm; length of nasal, 13.0 mm; interorbital breadth, 10.9 mm; palatilar length, 17.1 mm; bullae, 14.4 by 10.1 mm; crown length of cheek teeth 9.1 mm. Marca 1952 ZIMMER: A NEW FINCH FROM PERU 103 ORNITHOLOGY.—A new finch from northern Peri. Joun T. ZimMER, American Museum of Natural History. (Communicated by Herbert Friedmann. ) A small consignment of Peruvian birds, recently submitted by Javier Ortiz de la Puente, of the Museo de Historia Natural ‘Javier Prado’ of Lima, Pert, contained, among other interesting specimens, a fine new finch belonging to the genus [ncaspiza. Sefor Ortiz de la Puente has kindly given me permission to describe this new bird and, in addition, has generously given the type to the American Museum of Natural History, for which I am grateful. I am also indebted to Rodolphe M. de Schauensee, of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, for the loan of a specimen of one of the allied species of Incaspiza, not contained in the American Museum series, and one additional young individual of uncertain affinity. Both ex- amples were examined some years ago but were studied again in comparison with the new form. The new bird may be known as follows. Names of colors are capitalized when direct comparison has been made with Ridgway’s Color standards and color nomen- clature. Incaspiza ortizi, n. sp. Type—FKrom-near La Esperanza, Dept. Caja- marca, Pert; altitude 1,800 meters. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. no. 748395. Adult female collected April 24, 1951, by Javier Ortiz de la Puente. Diagnosis—Somewhat similar to I. pulchra of central-western Peri (Departments Ancash to Lima at approximately the same elevations) but differing in various respects. Upper parts darker and duller, more streaked and without any bright rufescence; gray of breast lighter and clearer, being broadly extended down the flanks; belly white, without buff; facial pattern different, hav- ing broader black on the front and a more re- stricted black gular patch, which, however, is broadly connected with the lores; no gray super- ciliary stripe over the lores and only a weak sug- gestion of one between the black orbital ring and the crown; feet paler yellowish. The facial pat- tern rather noticeably resembles that of J. per- sonata (of even higher elevations in the Caja- marca region), giving the only obvious feature of resemblance to that species. Range.—At present known definitely only from the type locality, on the western side of the An- des of northern Pert. Possibly crossing the An- des to the eastern slope of the Western Cordillera. Description of type-—Crown Deep Mouse Gray with poorly defined darker shaft streaks; back of head a little lighter; mantle Hair Brown x Mouse Gray with rather broad, sooty shaft streaks, not sharply defined; forehead broadly black with the shading extending over the lores, narrowly around the orbit, broadly over the ma- lar apex, and moderately broadly over the chin; rest of sides of the head Neutral Gray x Light Neutral Gray, merging with the Pale Neutral Gray of the throat; breast a little lighter, with traces of whitish shaft lines; flanks broadly Pale Neutral Gray; belly white; under tail coverts whitish, faintly tinged with light buff. Remiges near Hair Brown; primaries. with exterior mar- gins finely Drab-Gray ; secondaries with this outer margin broader and less well defined; tertials with a brown submarginal area passing into a grayer margin; upper primary coverts dusky with dull grayish margins; greater coverts like the secondaries; median and lesser series gray with lighter margins; under primary coverts dull gray- ish; remainder of under coverts whitish; inner margins of remiges soiled whitish. Median three pairs of rectrices blackish with prominent gray margins tending to broaden at the tips (worn plumes faded to brown); fourth pair blackish, with a large white patch on the terminal part of the inner web, adjoining the shaft but withdrawn from the inner margin except for a short distance terminally; subexternal pair similarly marked but the white patch reaching well over half the dis- tance basad along the shaft and a third of the distance on the inner margin; outermost pair with the white even more extensive, involving most of both webs except for a dusky diagonal patch at the base and a narrow streak on the outer web near the tip. Bill Gn dried skin) Capu- cine Yellow x Deep Chrome; feet Maize Yellow. Wing, 73 mm; tail, 67; exposed culmen, 14.5; culmen from base, 18; tarsus, 26.5. Remarks. mon, Perti, kindly lent by Mr. de Schauensee, of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, may be an immature example of the present spe- A young male from Hacienda Li- cies, but it is impossible to be certain without adults from the same locality. I have no ecom- parable plumages of pulchra or personata, but the 104 characters of this young bird approximate those of adult ortizi more than those of either of the other forms. The bill is of much the same con- formation; the upper parts are strongly streaked, and the pattern of the tail is very similar. The under parts are dull with prominent pectoral streaks, and there is no facial black although the lores and malar apex (but not the forehead or chin) are somewhat dusky. There is, however, a rather broad superciliary stripe over the orbit and the lores to the base of the bill which may indicate relationship to pulchra more than to ortizi. For the present I prefer to leave this bird with a query. The possibility exists that ortiz: and pulchra are conspecific or even, as maintained by Hell- mayr, that pulchra and personata bear that close relationship, but I believe the situation is not sufficiently clear to establish such arrangement without question. The various members of the genus incaspiza, including several species that are rather obviously no more than generically related to these three forms, all exhibit notable JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 3 similarities in pattern of coloration, and the pos- session of one or more resemblances of this sort. in common is not an adequate criterion of con- specific affinity. I have been handicapped to a certain extent by lacking a female of pulchra or a male of ortizv. Throughout the genus Incaspiza, however, the sexes show no striking distinctions. Furthermore, both sexes of pulchra were studied by Hellmayr, who reported no differences except of size; a fe- male was slightly smaller than two males. Conse- quently I am confident that the characters of ortiz’ can not be attributed to any sexual dif- ferentiation. I take great pleasure in naming this fine bird for its discoverer. Specimens examined.—As follows: T. ortizi.—Prrt: La Esperanza, 1 9 (type). I. pulchra.—Perrt: Yuramarca, Dept. Ancash, I, oft I. personata.—PERG: Cajabamba, 2 o; near Cajamarca, 2 o&',4 9; Succha, 1 @. I. species?.—Prrt: Hacienda Limén, 1 o juv.! 1 Specimens in Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia. Obituary Merritt Bernarp was born at Burlington, Towa, on July 25, 1892. He died in his home in Washington, D. C., on April 18, 1951. He is sur- vived by his wife Claudia Bernard. Bernard completed his education at the North Carolina Military Academy (Preparatory), Mil- tary College of South Carolina, and A. and M. College 0. Oklahoma, after which he practiced municipal, irrigation, and railroad engineering in Louisiana and Texas. After military service as first lleutenant during the First World War (1917-18) he engaged in consulting engineering practice in Louisiana, Texas, and Central Amer- ica, including hydrologic consultant for the Mis- sissippi Valley Committee in 1934-1936, and brief associations with the U.S. Geological Survey and the Soil Conservation Service. He became chief, River and Flood Division, U.S. Weather Bureau in 1937, advancing to hydrologic director, 1939, and finally chief, Climatological and Hydrologic Services, in 1946, the position he held at the time of his death. Among the special assignments he accomplished were those of member, American Meteorological Mission to USSR (1945), and me- teorological attaché to embassy, Moscow (1946). His many contributions in the fields of hy- drology and meteorology are notably important for their success in clarifying the relationship between these two sciences. His paper Primary role of meteorology in flood flow estimating won for him the Norman Medal of the American So- ciety of Civil Engineers in 1945. In addition to his association with this Acad- 1} emy, Merrill Bernard was affiliated with the In- ternation Association of Hydrology, IUGG, of which he was president; International Meteoro- logical Organization, in which he served as presi- dent of their jomt subcommittee on machine methods, and vice president of their technical comm ssion on hydrology; American Meteorolog- ical Society; American Geophysical Union; and American Society of Civil Engineers. His widely recognized abilities and professional prestige, combined in action with his personal likability and unvarying loyalty to the Service, gained for the Weather Bureau a great many ad- vantages in its work with such other agencies as the Corps of Engineers, the Bureau of Reclama- tion, and the U.S. Geological Survey, with whose cooperation, under his active guidance, many major projects of public benefit and value have been developed and are now in continuing opera- tion. Outstanding examples of these are the objec- tives and output of the hydrometeorological and the cooperative studies sections of the Clima- tological and Hydrologic Services Division in Washington for which his vision and ingenuity are very largely to be thanked, and which have become indispensable as aids in relating the facts. and potentials of storm behavior to the design and location of flood-control and water-conservation construction throughout the country. Less well- defined but of comparable character and value was the success of his effort to extend the flood- forecasting function of the Weather Bureau to upstream and headwater areas.—W. F. F. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences [PROSCUG Dim ie oo Rea tice Ceo peeaee Water Rampere, National Bureau of Standards aS CSULCTLCLECE ME Aeneas FT Toe EM Eee Cac ins F. M. Serzuer, U.S. National Museum SRRRAUTID] s ob chars eae u kiana Beate Cae eee F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards I REP SOT Too RACERS roe Howarp S. Rapprieye, U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey ATAU Ro 0 Go Co ed oO toe A OC Oe Joun A. Stevenson, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Harap A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: emilosophical Societyson Washingtonee..s.-.-s25-42- esses) see ee A. G. McNisu Anthropological Society of Washington........................ Wawpo R. WEDEL Brolocicalisocieby of wWashingtome 9s. 25s.c0-sace.neseeceee sos Hues T. O’N&ILL @hemicallSocietyzoiWashingtonee sate sces ses seks ee eseceusa Joun K. Taytor Entomological Society of Washington........................ FREDERICK W. Poos National’ Geographic Society~n ose. ses. +usece se ance clon: - ALEXANDER WETMORE Geological Society of Washington.................. ren tene Be A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Sacietysot che Mistrictyot Columbians.) 5-570. - 2 eee ee Frep O. CoE ColumbtayelistoricallSocietyecr. cs seen ae sees ese see GILBERT GROSVENOR Boranicalusociety on wWashinetones. 20. ses dees ee oe wie sce Ler M. Hutcuins Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wiutiam A. Dayton Washington Society. OLE TOTNES yee eee a, etsy ae Brae e Gate Currorp A. Brerts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers...... A. H. Scorr Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .Ricuarp 8. D1Lu Helminthological Society OiWiashingtontanrer iene eae a L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Aneus M. GRIFFIN Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Fioyp W. Houcs Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers........... Hersert G. Dorsey District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason Elected Members of the Board of Managers: IN dammeny WOR a se secant onan eree C. F. W. Munsesecr, A. T. McPHeRson PROMO ATY O54 en i ccnss cede BOG eae be ee cues Sara EK. Branuam, Mitton Harris LO Uamwerry WORD. sone sume meee oe octamer eniert Roamr G. Batss, W. W. DisHu OU GNOsMIVANGGENSs asc c de: oe esa All the above officers plus the Senior Editor oaral oy Lahiions Cine) AGSOCICUG THOWUORS., scbonaugescaeeouuueaseououbee [See front cover] Executive Committee....W ALTER RAMBERG (chairman), F.M.Smtzipr, H.S.RApPLeye, Wiuuiam A. Dayton, F. M. Deranporr Committee on Membership. .E. H. WALKmR (chairman), M.S. ANDERSON, CLARENCE, Cort- TAM, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. HANSEN, FRANK Kracnk, D. B. Jonrs, Doro- tHy Nickerson, Leo A. SHINN, F. A. SmitH, Heinz Specut, H. M. Trent, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings....H. W. Wreuts (chairman), Wm. R. CAMPBELL, W. R. CHap- LINE, D. J. Davis, H. G. Dorsry, O. W. TorRESON Committee on Monographs (W. N. FENTON, chairman): PROMS AMU ATV OOo eee tie race ane pe eiciiescsusiermiustectsder a sealeeee R. W. Imuay, P. W. Oman Mona aryl O54 rewire Mette nm crys eens edi se eee sae yas 8S. F. Buaks, F. C. Kracex MIR OMEN INU eT Van OD ae pcre rctine ses etcetera ey syst tro osiaege euap els W.N. Fenton, ALAN STONE Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (J. R. SwaLuEeN, general chairman): For Biological Sciences............. J. R. Swauuen (chairman), L. M. Hurcuins, Marearer Pirrman, FI’. W. Poos, L. P. Scoutrz For Engineering Sciences............. R. C. Duncan (chairman), A. C. FIELDNER, Wayne C. Hat, J. W. McBurney, O. S. Reapine, H. L. Warrremore HOMEY SUC QUIS CLCTLCCSER EE eee nnn L. A. Woop (chairman), P. H. ABELSON, F.S. Dart, Grorcs W. Irvine, Jr., J. H. McMILLEN For Teaching of Science...... M. A. Mason (chairman), F. E. Fox, M. H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research....... L. E. Yocum (chairman), H. N. Eaton, K. F. HprzFreip Committee on Policy and Planning: PROMAMU AT MO DSK eases yaxe crereh Aehees he a) eae; cases W. A. Dayton (chairman), N. R. Smrre Mogdamu ary WO 54 ee... ede cc nine qe-ceom aera oe cee H. B. Couurns, Jr.. W. W. Rusey PROM Ua ty al OO arte wee cleanse pata imete ci pees acshelere lays anes L. W. Parr, F. B. StusBeE Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. McPuHerson, chairman): AG) Unrate AOR ene Geis 5 bie ate Rea trn Reig iit ane een ereae ANG Jal. CLARK, F. L. Mounier POM ATI Ty MO GANS seme Renn eet Palgsy «ee ces ahecn sletay sraveiet J. M. CALDWELL, "W. L. Scamirr ARG UDMRET AY IE ST Bis odo bode pOSd GIO UGS SG eeeerEs AY. McPHERSON, W. T. Reap EDRESETILALUVEROT COUNCILOfp AmpAcPAls Seen se ecdscceessead essen s ese: F. M. Serzuer Committee of Auditors...... C. L. Gazrn (chairman), Loutsp M. Russet, D. R. Tate Committee of Tellers...GEORGE P. WAuTON (chairman), Grorce H. Coons, C. L. GARNER CONTENTS Page ANTHROPOLOGY.—Some applications of physical anthropology. Robert IMI SWRI oot Sn castehe acho cee atic andes s Beaches nS clare SEO UC 65 GroLocy.—Paleozoic of western Nevada. H. G. FERGUSON.......... 72 PALEONTOLOGY.—Some new species of crinoids from the Henry nee formation of Oklahoma. Harreni L. SrRIMPLE................ 75 PALEONTOLOGY.—CYribrotextularia, a new foraminiferal genus from the Eocene of Florida. ALFrep R. Lorsiicu, Jr., and HELEN Tappan 79 ZooLocy.—Ammopemphiz, new name for the Recent foraminiferal genus Urnula Wiesner: ~Atrrep R. LOEBLICH, JR............ 29: 82 Zootogy.—A new Calyptrophora (Coelenterata: Octocorallia) from the Philippine Islands) ERepERIcCK M. BAYER, ............5seeee 82 IcuTHYoLoGy.—Hight new fishes from the Gulf coast of the United States, with two new genera and notes on geographic distribution. TSANG “GINSBURG. 06 oo ek ee eta de cs oe a ls er 84 Mammatocy.—A new Clyomys from Paraguay (Rodentia: Echimyidae). JOLOSMOOIEN As... aec hes actors ees ee ahegee ah. ee 102 OrNITHOLOGY.—A new finch from northern Peri. Joun T. Zimmer... 103 OpimuARyee ernie Bernarcd ee eee eee ee 104 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals VoL. 42 Aprit 1952 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Wiuiiam F. FosHaG U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM F, A. Cuace, JR. BIOLOGY J. I. HorrmMan CHEMISTRY T. P. THAYER GEOLOGY BOARD OF EDITORS J. P. E. Morrison U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM JOHN C. EwEers U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS Miriam L. Bomuarp BOTANY R. K. Coox PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS PHILIP DRUCKER ANTHROPOLOGY C. W. SABROSKY ENTOMOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Roya & GuILFoRD AVES. Battimore, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at,!Baltimore, Md, Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925 Authorized February 17, 1949 No. 4 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JourRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JoURNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate): Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocEEDINGS should be sent to HarRaLp A. REHDER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscruption lates for the’ JouRNAL-—EFer year. 4----- ee eee ee eee $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available.*................ — — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JourRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 41, inel.) available for sale to libraries at $348.50. MonoerapH No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’”’ by Herbert Friedmann. .$4.50 ProcEEpDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete.............................- $25.00 Single volumesunbound) 3.22 heels cece wines ee ene ee eee 2.00 Single numbers) i552 2 ses corte en os arta noes So ASAE ee .25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappteye, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOLUME 42 April 1952 No. 4 METEOROLOGY .—On the variation of the average daily temperature at Washington, D.C. Ricumonp T. Zocu. The long-period averages of temperature, the “normals,” have been computed for Washington by numerous persons since continuous records were made here. The object of having a normal daily temperature is to make an estimate of the temperature for each day. The temperature on the same day for different years varies considerably ; and as no paper has been published showing how variable this daily temperature can be, this paper has been prepared. The standard deviations and the extremes for each day of the year, derived from a 60- year period of record, have been computed and are shown in a table. Finally, it is pointed out that while there is no diurnal variation in the normal daily temperature, there is a definite diurnal variation in the standard deviation of the average daily temperature, and this has a bearing on the long standing question of the reality of singularities. COMPUTING THE STANDARD DEVIATION One of the most obvious facts of meteor- ology is that there is a diurnal variation in the temperature of the air. Another obvious fact is that there is an annual variation in the air temperature; this latter variation is usually referred to as the annual march of temperature. In making studies of the nature of the annual variation it is sometimes useful and convenient first to eliminate the diurnal variation. In the past, this has been done most often by taking the daily maximum and daily minimum temperatures, adding them together and dividing their sum by two. This is the method used by C. F. Marvin when he compiled Monthly Weather Review Supplement No. 25, which contains daily normal temperatures for each of the principal cities in the United States including Washington. Other methods of computing the average daily temperature have also been used and the reader who is interested in them should refer to Bulletin S of the U.S. Weather Bureau. The method used in this study was to take the twenty- four hourly readings of the temperature for each day, add them and divide the sum by 24. The temperature observations used in this study were all made by the U. 8. Weather Bureau at its central office located on the southwest corner of twenty fourth and M Streets, N.W. A continuous record of temperature has been maintained there since March 1889 by means of a thermo- graph, and this thermograph has been regularly checked with standard as well as maximum and minimum thermometers. From the thermograph traces hourly read- ings of temperature have been extracted. The Weather Bureau computed daily aver- ages from the 24 hourly readings from the beginning of this record through 1942. The averages for the years 1943 through (March) 1949 were specially computed for this study. It is worth pointing out that the record of temperature at twenty fourth and M Streets, N.W., maintained by the Weather Bureau is the longest record of temperature for any location in the District of Columbia. The record used for this study was exactly 60 years (to the nearest whole day) and commenced with the day after the vernal equinox in 1889 and ended on the day of the vernal equinox in 1949, and this period comprises 21,914 days. The date of the vernal equinox in both 1889 and 1949 was March 20 although prior to 1900 it was most 105 106 often March 20, and after 1900 it was usually on March 21. The average temperature for these 21,914 days was arranged into 366 arrays, one array for each day, the arrays so placed that both the vernal equinox and the autumnal equinox of each year were always in the same array. These two days are near the times of the year when the annual march of temperature is rising or falling most rapidly, respectively. As the time from the vernal equinox to the autumnal equinox during these years was approximately 186 days 10 hours and from the autumnal equinox to the vernal equinox approximately 178 days 20 hours, there were 186 arrays with 60 days each beginning with the vernal equinox prior to the autumanl equinox and 178 arrays with 60 days each beginning with the autumnal equinox prior to the vernal equinox. These 364 arrays thus accounted for 21,840 days. The remaining 74 days were placed in two arrays, one about January 20 with 49 days and the other about July 22 with 25 days. After the average daily temperatures were placed in these 366 arrays several statistical parameters were obtained for each array. First the arithmetic mean was com- puted for each array, and secondly the standard deviation. Next, a frequency distribution for each array was made and the extremes (lowest average daily temper- ature and highest average daily temperature, not the absolute maximum and absolute minimum), the upper and lower quartiles and the median of each array were obtained. Table 1 shows these standard deviations and extremes. The arithmetic means, quartiles, and medians are not given in this paper. Table 2 summarizes, or smoothes, the data shown in Table 1. Here the day to day fluctuations are ironed out and one can see at a glance how the standard deviations and extremes of the average daily temper- atures change during the year. Table 2 also shows the smoothed averages of the daily arithmetic means which were omitted from Table 1. The standard deviation is greatest in winter and least in summer. Table 2 is intended only to show roughly the annual variation. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 4 THE DIURNAL VARIATION OF THE STANDARD DEVIATION The question naturally arises, in making these analyses of temperature, when is the best, or most logical, time to begin the “day,” the 24-hour period. No answer is given to this question in this article but a few comparisons were made and the results of these will be shown. The U.S. Weather Bureau, in computing the average daily temperature from the 24 hourly readings, quite naturally used the civil day, when the end of one ‘‘day” and the beginning of the next occurs at midnight. There is no a priori reason for assuming this to be the most logical time. The most care- ful or thorough way to investigate this would be to begin the “‘day”’ with each one of the 24 hours. Then, instead of having 21,914 average daily temperatures for this 60 year period of record there would be 24 times 21,914 or 525,936 average daily temperatures to be placed in 24 sets of 366 arrays and then 24 sets of 366 arithmetic means, standard deviations, extremes, quar- tiles and medians to be computed or derived. Clearly, to do this task in such a thorough manner is a machine job, and it was not possible for the present writer to undertake it. To make some investigation it was decided to use a ‘‘day”’ for which the end of one 24-hour period and the beginning of the next occurs at noon. This additional investi- gation would mean one additional set of 366 arrays, and to proceed it would first be necessary to compute 21,914 new average daily temperatures. Even this was too large an undertaking by hand methods so this investigation was confined to a 31-day period, the 31 days following the vernal equinox. First, 1860 average daily temperatures were computed where the end of one 24- hour period and the beginning of the next was at noon. Then these 1860 average daily temperatures were arranged into 31 arrays with 60 temperatures in each array; finally the arithmetic means and the standard deviations were computed and the ex- tremes obtained for each of these 31 arrays. These results are shown in Tables 3 and 4. Aprit 1952 ZOCH—AVERAGE D. C. TEMPERATURE 107 TABLE 1.—STANDARD DEVIATIONS AND ExrREMES FoR Hacu Day oF THE Year ay Ww Year Highest Y i 5 go ee ee ees ae vernal ature occur- oF ature — occur- dar vernal ature occur- “deviation ature occur- dar equinox °F rence F tence date equinox °F rence F °F rence date Mar. May 1 30.4 1914 10.61 74.8 1948 21 52 49.0 1907 6.44 81.2 1896 11 2 21.5 1934 10.63 75.6 1948 22 53 49.5 1939 7.02 79.2 1896 12 3 23.8 1906 Waid 67.0 1929 23 54 50.2 1895 6.59 75.3 1908 13 4 26.0 1940 9.06 Testes 1939) 24 55 49.7 1895 6.44 Mot A) 5 26.7 1940 9.52 68.7 1939 25 56 49.7 1895 7.05 78-1 | 1900) 15 6 29.9 1894 9.76 Tle eR) OB 57 49.1 1895 6.40 HO i ig 7 27.0 1994 10.00 Tn Rl | 58 52.1 1891 6.13 8 - iil sy 8 29.8 1923 9.72 72 1907) 728 59 52.9 1895 6.15 He i oe 9 34.0 1893 8.94 72.5 1945 29 60 54.8 1915 6.03 80.4 191 © 19 10 26.2 1923 8.24 70.8 1945 30 61 50.3 1929 6.82 78.4 1898 20 62 49.8 1895 6.53 80.8 1911 21 11 25.9 1923 8.17 65.6 1945 31 Apr. 63 52.1 1895 7.54 82.1 1941 22 12 31.8 1924 9.18 71.2 1917 1 64 53.4 1889 6.05 80.4 1925 23 B 34.9 1911 8.26 69.5 1903 2 65 53.2 1907 6.11 77.9 1946 24 14 35.4 1908 8.59 70.7 1913 3 66 47.7 1925 6.06 78.6 1918 25 15 35.0 1896 8.98 69.3 1910 4 67 52.7 1925 6.53 78.8 1914 26 16 34.1 1944 7.61 74.5 1942 5 68 53.3 1902 6.99 83.9 1941 27 17 35.5 1898 8.53 75.0 1942 6 69 55.8 1891 6.68 83.8 1941 28 18 38.4 1935 8.40 77.5 1929 7 70 54.6 1915 6.60 79.6 1939 29 19 35.1 1916 7.55 76.7 1929 8 71 55.2 1910 6.50 82.6 1895 30 20 34.0 1917 8.83 77.6 1922 9 72 52.8 1907 6.40 84.3 1895 31 21 34.3 1918 8.79 73.9 1922 10 Wane 22 34.9 1894 7.62 Pe? 1947 11 73 50.8 1907 6.40 85.7 1895 1 23 39.5 1894 7.21 69.6 1948 12 74 54.9 1915 6.99 86.7 18 a a F 95 2 24 34.7 1940 8.05 72.4 1945 13 75 54.4 1929 6.63 85.2 1895 25 36.8 1923 8.80 74.8 1941 14 ‘ ; : 3 76 52.7 1926 6.57 84.8 1943 4 26 B58) 1935 8.24 75.1 1941 16 i Sra ae ae eee oe 27 38.8 1905 7.71 72.6 1941 16 28 SOMO MEE G200 | Ss14 0) 73150 1806" 17 ds Mee EE EI TERS 1G 29 Eommeeeiooop 6:87) 78:41) 1896) 18 CT ciples PS aR SN gj RE GE IO ERD TN Sa 30 41.6 1890 8.72 79.8 1896 19 Bo Ses een area Ozone So Cee S00 an 8 31 qe «1807 «8.95 «80.91 1941 «(20 St SO PR SET RE 82 51.8 1907 6.56 85.4 1911 10 32 42.2 1922 8.10 74.9 1896 21 ae ee Ln 33 42.2 1930 8.12 76.7 1902 22 83 55.5 1907 6.23 84.9 1947 11 34 40.9 1930 7.97 71.6 1915 23 84 55.8 1907 5.90 81.5 1933 12 35 39.5 1919 7.58 77.2 1925 24 85 57.7 1907 5.43 80.7 1944 13 36 44.4 1919 7.41 75.8 1915 25 86 56.3 1933 5.43 82.9 1945 14 87 58.1 1901 6.08 84.2 1945 15 37 45.8 1892 7.49 76.4 1915 26 38 43.2 1928 7.39 74.7 1938 27 88 58.9 1917 5.99 84.5 1945 16 39 37.8 1898 6.69 69.6 1938 28 89 59.8 1900 5.56 83.8 1945 17 40 48.3 1925 6.60 74.6 1942 29 90 62.5 1946 4.80 84.6 1944 18 41 45.1 1912 7.10 77.5 1942 30 91 62.9 1912 5.17 85.4 1931 19 92 64.0 1920 5.23 85.2 1924 20 May 93 61.2 1940 5.26 83.5 1941 21 42 47.8 1908 6.86 75.5 1930 1 43 49.5 1911 6.74 76.6 1942 2 94 59.7 1918 5.65 84.3 1948 22 44 46.1 1946 7.32 75.2 1919 3 95 61.7 1936 5.81 84.0 1914 23 45 46.5 1917 7.32 74.9 1944 4 96 57.0 1936 5.69 85.8 1943 24 46 44.2 1917 7.69 75.2 1918 5 97 63.0 1918 4.83 85.1 1943 25 98 64.3 1896 4.73 84.7 1943 26 47 45.1 1891 8.37 79.2 1930 6 48 46.5 1947 7.12 Udell 1930 7 99 62.6 1893 dels) 83.8 1913 27 49 44.5 1947 7.42 77.4 1930 8 100 62.8 1919 5.07 87.5 1934 28 50 46.6 1906 32 78.9 1936 9 101 61.5 1893 5.36 86.0 1945 29 51 47.1 1913 7.28 78.6 1911 10 102 67.2 1943 5.16 89.3 1901 30 108 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES TaBLe 1.—Continued VOL. 42, No. 4 D | i Usual Da Lowest Year Highest Year Usual After ee ae A Standard Pees ve : calen- ater temper- of standard tebe of calen- vernal ature — occur- oF ature occur- dar vernal ature — occur- oF ature occur- dar equinox °F rence Ss rence date equinox F rence F rence date July July 103 66.6 1940 5.50 88.0 1933 1 114 64.7 1898 4.57 85.2 1944 12 104 65.8 1891 4.66 87.9 1898 2 115 66.4 1926 4.35 85.2 1942 13 105 60.9 1933 5.32 88.5 1898 3 116 62.5 1926 4.73 85.5 1934 14 106 63.5 1940 5.30 86.2 1911 4 117 67.2 1903 4.36 84.8 1936 15 107 66.0 1909 4.74 86.5 1911 5 118 68.0 1929 3.98 84.3 1942 16 108 66.2 1892 4.52 86.5 1934 6 119 65.8 1910 5.04 86.8 1900 ily 109 65.4 1918 4.28 85.7 1925 7 120 65.8 1892 4.74 88.0 1942 18 110 60.5 1891 4.81 86.2 1890 8 121 68.7 1939 4.62 89.9 1930 19 111 64.2 1891 5.00 87.4 1936 9 122 65.3 1890 5.20 90.0 1930 20 112 65.9 1890 4.79 89.9 1936 10 123 66.3 1890 4.63 87.6 1926 21 113 63.3 1895 4.79 86.0 1935 11 124 68.1 1904 3.65 83.2 1899 22 i High Year Usu Da Lowest Year Highest Year Usual Ries eeeee Bee : Standard tenes of ee betes temper- of Standard temper of calen- autumnal ature — occur- oF ature occur- dar autumnal ature —occur- oF ure occur- dar equinox °F rence °F rence date equinox F rence F rence date July Aug. 62 67.4 1947 4.20 84.6 1914 23 31 60.5 1931 4.75 84.2 1936 23 61 66.4 1912 4.46 84.3 1935 24 30 60.7 1890 5.07 84.4 1903 24 60 66.5 1904 4.22 85.0 1930 25 29 59.8 1890 5.38 84.0 1947 25 59 64.0 1920 4.95 88.0 1930 26 28 59.2 1908 5.52 84.0 1900 26 58 65.5 1920 5.14 88.9 1930 27 27 59.3 1927 5.41 85.1 1948 27 57 68.3 1895 4.74 88.0 1940 28 26 60.3 1915 5.42 86.0 1948 28 56 67.8 1914 3.98 86.2 1901 29 25 58.7 1891 5.59 86.0 1948 29 55 63.0 1914 4.49 85.0 1931 30 24 60.8 1911 5.24 83.2 1948 30 54 64.1 1903 5.22 87.5 1917 31 23 61.2 1911 5.50 85.8 1932 31 Aug. Sept. 53 66.4 1895 4.70 87.4 1933 1 22 61.4 1890 5.63 86.5 1932 1 52 67.2 1920 4.42 84.3 1926 2 21 60.0 1893 5.91 83.2 1898 2 51 62.9 1921 4.90 86.3 1931 3 20 61.2 1892 5.76 82.4 1898 3 50 64.2 1912 4.68 87.4 1930 4 19 62.7 1893 4.81 83.7 1898 4 49 64.1 1912 5.31 88.5 1930 5 18 60.0 1928 4.89 82.1 1944 5 48 65.5 1912 4.65 91.3 1918 6 17 57.2 1928 5.88 83.0 1900 6 47 66.9 1948 4.75 87.3 1918 uf 16 59.2 1924 6.32 82.7 1898 u 46 68.6 1942 4.43 87.0 1930 8 15 57.9 1918 5.93 86.2 1939 8 45 65.0 1897 4.99 88.0 1930 9 14 57.8 1914 6.20 82.2 1933 9 44 67.6 1927 4.05 87.7 1896 10 13 54.7 1924 6.98 83.7 1941 10 43 67.1 1931 4.32 86.3 1900 11 12 51.1 1917 6.90 83.7 1900 il 42 60.7 1928 5.43 86.7 1926 12 11 56.7 1917 6.08 83.0 1895 12 41 65.7 1941 5.70 85.1 1896 13 10 58.2 1911 5.73 1.4 1931 13 40 66.4 1902 5.01 86.0 1943 14 9 55.6 1913 6.63 82.6 1915 14 39 65.1 1899 4.59 84.7 1938 15 8 56.0 1895 5.57 82.6 1930 15 38 66.9 1921 4.14 85.0 1938 16 7 55.8 1923 6.10 79.9 1942 16 37 64.2 1923 4.46 83.1 1944 17 6 57.8 1903 6.00 79.2 1915 17 36 63.8 1915 4.60 83.0 1944 18 5 56.9 1937 5.89 79.8 1921 18 35 65.0 1905 4.12 84.4 1937 19 4 52.6 1916 6.23 80.3 1942 19 34 63.0 1926 4.56 85.0 1937 20 3 54.5 1929 6.34 80.7 1895 20 33 62.7 1926 4.92 84.0 1937 21 2 51.9 1918 5.19 81.9 1931 21 32 62.2 1931 4.98 84.6 1916 22 1 47.4 1904 7.58 84.1 1931 22 Aprit 1952 ZOCH—AVERAGE D. C. TEMPERATURE 109 TABLE 1.—Continued Year Highest Year Usual D Ww i < ae ais of Riandard temper- of calen- Aitor pees nee - ptendard oes Nee : ieee autumnal ature occur- oF ature occur- dar autumnal ature occur- oF Hon ature occur- dar equinox °F rence °F rence date equinox °F rence oH rence date Sept. Nov. 0 50.0 1904 7.08 82.2 1895 23 50 33.6 1926 7.76 67.1 1935 12 1 50.8 1896 6.91 79.0 1926 24 51 26.4 1911 8.09 62.8 1931 13 2 51.5 1928 7.00 80.9 1930 25 52 30.3 1905 7.14 63.6 1929 14 3 49.7 1928 7.09 82.5 1930 26 53 27.1 1933 8.22 62.8 1926 15 4 49.4 1940 7.22 78.7 1900 27 54 23.8 1933 8.26 64.5 1927 16 5 50.9 1942 6.92 7.2 1945 28 55 29.5 1924 8.88 66.0 1930 17 6 50.1 1942 6.46 76.1 1945 29 56 026.8 1891 9.71 70.6 1928 18 7 48.8 1899 6.69 75.8 1927 30 57 28.4 1936 9.03 66.7 1921 19 Oct. 58 31.4 1901 8.36 65.8 1931 20 8 44.5 1899 6.72 78.4 1927 1 59 30.6 1937 8.60 68.7 1900 21 9 46.4 1899 6.13 76.2 1927 2 60 31.0 1929 8.35 63.2 1931 22 10 45.9 1899 6.21 74.2 1941 3 61 30.1 1929 7.36 63.7 1940 23 11 49.2 1901 7.51 80.9 1941 4 62 29.1 1938 6.85 61.8 1927 24 12 49.8 1901 7.23 82.8 1941 5 63 25.8 1903 7.18 57.5 1905 25 13 42.4 1935 Ulatpl 82.5 1941 6 64 24.9 1903 8.40 64.4 1946 26 14 43.9 1904 Uo 83.3 1941 7 65 24.8 1932 9.01 60.8 1927 27 15 46.1 1889 7.19 76.1 1941 8 66 20.1 1930 8.61 66.5 1896 28 16 43.2 1917 7.40 75.5 1939 9 67 25.9 1891 8.23 62.0 1896 29 17 41.8 1925 7.82 76.6 1939 10 68 18.0 1929 9.27 64.4 1927 30 18 41.5 1906 6.94 74.6 1919 11 Dec 19 42.0 1906 6.31 73.6 1912 12 69 23.8 1936 7.76 62.9 1908 1 20 43.2 1934 5.82 72.0 1928 13 21 44.5 1934 6.52 69.6 1941 14 a0 Pid ED Co 54.9 1921 2 22 42.6 1937 6.99 70.2 1915 15 a 23-5 18960 7.51 55.2 1914 3 23 43.9 1937 6.92 72.2 1919 16 a2 aoe Bo) e323 53.3 1933 4 24 46.3 1900 6.98 74.4. 19298 17 3 PPro LOO Rcces 59.7. 1916 5 74 22.1 1901 7.29 59.5 1912 6 25 44.7 1901 6.89 72.8 1928 18 26 44.7, 1948 6.77 70.9 1947 19 75 26.5 1893 6.64 56.0 1932 7 97 38.5 1940 7.28 70.5 1916 20 76 25.3 1910 6.89 57.1 1924 8 28 37.2 1940 7.34 68.6 1941 21 77 21.1 1927 9.12 56.0 1923 9 29 41.9 1925 7.48 71.4 1935 22 78 16.0 1917 8.55 55.6 1889 10 79 17.0 1917 8.53 55.0 1899 11 30 41.2 1907 6.85 70.2 1900 23 31 38.8 1889 6.13 69.5 1900 24 80 20.5 1904 8.55 59.8 1899 12 32 41.0 1889 6.53 66.0 1908 25 81 20.7 1895 8.99 58.6 1919 13 33 39.9 1933 6.83 67.3 1920 26 82 17.0 1904 9.54 62.7 1901 14 34 36.8 1936 7.44 70.5 1920 27 83 15.1 1914 9.04 54.9 1906 15 84 17.8 1916 9.30 51.6 1933 16 35 40.2 1936 Ulli 71.4 1919 28 36 38.1 1925 7.69 72.4 1918 29 85 18.9 1932 7.81 54.5 1928 17 37 36.6 1925 7.45 69.8 1946 30 86 12.6 1919 8.80 55.8 19387 18 38 34.5 1917 7.91 72.4 1946 31 87 15e2 1919 8.67 57.8 1929 19 Nov. 88 13.5 1942 7.62 58.2 1895 20 39 37.9 1893 7.67 67.0 1919 1 89 14.8 1942 8.74 56.8 1923 21 40 37.2 1905 8.46 71.8 1929 9 90 18.4 1924 8.38 53.8 1923 22 41 36.3 1911 7.68 69.6 1936 3 91 21.0 1935 8.84 58.7 1891 23 42 38.1 1910 7.48 67.0 1936 4 92 18.3 1906 8.96 59.5 1891 24 43 35.9 1908 6.75 71.2 1935 5 93 19.2 1892 8.24 59.3 1932 25 44 35.8 1903 7.02 68.2 1938 6 94 12.5 1914 9.12 56.2 1895 26 45 34.0 1930 6.82 71.0 1948 7 95 14.0 1914 9.07 58.4 1889 27 46 38.5 1927 6.55 66.3 1943 8 96 18.9 1892 9.66 55.5 1936 28 47 37.9 1923 6.98 69.6 1895 9 97 7.3 1917 9.63 52.0 1910 29 48 35.2 1933 6.28 58.6 1935 10 98 2.7 1917 10.12 56.7 1940 30 49 32.2 1926 ea) 62.8 1935 ll 99 7.2 1917 8.86 56.8 1898 31 en 110 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 42, No. 4 TaBLeE 1.—Continued Day Lowest Year Highest Year Usual Day Lowest Year Highest Year Usual after temper- of Standard temper- of calen- after temper- of Standard temper- of calen- autumnal ature occur- © oF jon “ature occur- dar autumnal ature occur- oF ature occur- dar equinox oF rence 7 rence date equinox °F rence ° rence date Jan. Jan. 100 10.9 1918 8.77 57.6 1919 1 110 13.6 1893 8.68 53.6 1913 11 101 11.5 1904 9.87 56.6 1930 2 111 12.6 1893 8.26 50.6 1911 12 102 10.3 1918 9.31 51.5 1890 3 112 2.2 1912 10.04 65.6 1932 13 103 10.8 1904 9.58 51.3 1907 4 113 5.3 1912 11.04 60.2 1932 14 104 12.1 1896 10.34 57.2 1897 5 114 13.7 1893 11.05 65.0 1932 15 105 11.0 1912 9.89 60.9 1946 6 115 13.5 1912 8.70 56.9 1943 16 106 17.8 1912 9.74 62.4 1946 7 116 9.2 1893 9.29 59.5 1913 17 107 12.4 1942 8.06 57.5 1930 8 117 21.1 1904 9.94 56.8 1915 18 108 19.1 1942 9.74 63.2 1937 9 118 10.7 1893 9.98 56.5 1929 19 109 18.9 1942 7.71 54.7 1939 10 119 15.4 1940 8.65 52.6 1949 20 Day Lowest Year Highest Year Usual Day Lowest Year Highest Year Usual before temper- of standard temper- of calen- before _ temper- of Standard temper- of calen- vernal ature occur- oF ature occur- dar vernal ature occur- oF ature occur- dar equinox °F rence 2 rence date equinox °F rence °F tence date Jan Feb 59 13.0 1924 9.50 55.6 1890 21 29 20.1 1934 9.42 65.9 1939 20 58 16.7 1893 9.11 60.2 1906 22 28 12-1 1896 9.27 56.6 1943 21 57 8.5 1936 10.35 59.7 1906 23 27 17.1 1896 8.78 57.9 1913 22 56 11.5 1935 10.57 57.5 1933 24 26 19.5 1914 8.95 62.0 1922 23 55 14.0 1935 9.58 55.5 1909 25 25 11.9 1914 9.11 57.5 1943 24 54 11.7 1897 10.02 55.4 1916 26 24 14.5 1914 9.62 68.3 1930 25 53 14.1 1936 11.25 61.3 1916 27 23 14.6 1900 9.75 58.7 1930 26 52 12.1 1935 10.97 61.2 1916 28 22 12.8 1934 9.70 63.4 1890 27 51 10.2 1925 9.42 53.6 1947 29 21 15.8 1934 9.99 62.2 1903 28 50 11.2 1934 10.63 64.5 1947 30 20 25.0 1941 7.46 59.8 1910 29 49 15.4 1936 10.07 QO iG Ve Mar Feb. 19 20.8 1914 7.24 59.0 1895 1 48 17.9 1936 7.23 48.4 1916 1 18 23.0 1891 7.88 64.5 1923 2 47 11.2 1900 8.89 51.5 1891 2 17 21.2 1925 9.05 63.9 1923 3 46 11.1 1905 9.58 5i.0 1932 3 16 23.6 1926 8.40 62.0 1946 4 45 13.3 1905 9.53 54.0 1903 4 15 16.1 1901 9.84 63.5 1935 5 44 6.3 1918 9.44 55.4 1890 5 14 21.8 1920 9.13 64.9 1946 6 43 8.4 1917 9.92 58.9 1890 6 13 21.8 1932 8.80 66.0 1921 7 42 6.8 1895 9.01 55.3 1904 7 12 24.5 1932 7.98 68.2 1921 8 41 6.9 1895 8.10 49.2 1932 8 11 20.9 1932 7.28 63.7 1921 9 40 3.7 1934 9.72 52.6 1900 9 10 23.2 1932 8.02 58.8 1935 10 39 3.0 1899 9.78 53.0 1949 10 9 25.6 1914 8.56 63.1 1925 11 38 —3.2 1899 9.47 58.8 1925 11 8 22.0 1900 9.82 63.8 1890 12 37 4 1899 10.04 60.0 1932 12 7 25.2 1896 9.01 63.8 1946 13 36 7.5 1899 10.28 54.0 1898 13 6 23.6 1896 9.41 65.5 1929 14 35 7.0 1899 10.21 56.0 1949 14 5 21.6 1911 9.44 65.1 1935 15 34 12.2 1943 9.98 62.0 1909 15 4 P35 1916 11.46 72.2 1945 16 33 11.8 1904 10.25 65.0 1949 16 3 20.8 1900 10.78 69.1 1945 17 32 14.0 1904 9.63 60.2 1927 17 2 22.5 1941 9.63 64.5 1945 18 31 13.5 1896 8.36 66.8 1891 18 1 26.3 1914 9.66 69.9 1945 19 30 10.2 1903 10.44 59.4 1891 19 0 24.4 1914 10.61 73.6 1945 20 Table 3 shows the standard deviations for each array computed first from midnight-to- midnight average daily temperatures and then, in another column, from noon-to-noon temperatures. For the 31-day period con- sidered the mean difference is 0.421° F. It is not believed advisable to apply the usual statistical tests to find out whether this difference is significant because of the strong serial correlation due to the interrelation- ship between the values. Table 4 shows the extremes for each array derived first from midnight-to-midnight values and then from noon-to-noon values. For this 31-day period Aprit 1952 the mean range between lowest and highest for midnight-to-midnight values is 40.1° F., while this range for noon-to-noon values is 40.8° F. It is concluded that the variability of average daily temperature is greater when these daily averages are based on noon-to- noon values than when determined from midnight-to-midnight values. There is no reason for thinking that the midnight-to- midnight averages of temperature neces- sarily gives the minimum value for the standard deviation, nor is there any reason for concluding that the standard deviation computed from averages based on beginning and ending the day with noon is the maxi- mum. Further research will be required to determine these maximum and minimum values of the standard deviation. However, the fact that there is a difference between the standard deviations computed from average daily temperatures based on mid- night-to-midnight from those based on noon-to-noon demonstrates that maximum and minimum values of this standard de- viation of temperature do exist. Figures 1 and 2 depict the results of Table 3 graphically. Figure 1 shows the arithmetic means for 62 arrays all for the 31-day period following the vernal equinox. Likewise, Figure 2 shows the standard de- viations. Figure 1 also shows the fairly well known fact that the annual march of TABLE 2.—SumMMARY OF TABLE 1. MEAN VALUES OF EXTREMES AND STANDARD DEVIATIONS OF AVERAGE Daity TEMPERATURE BY PERIODS (Temperatures are in °F.) . Stand- | Dura- . Arith- - . High- A ard tion of Period Lowest AS metic devia- | period, tion days Mar. 21-Apr. 20..... 33.1 73.2 50.9 8.74 31 Apr. 21-May 21.....| 46.8 77.0 61.6 7.08 31 May 22-June 21..... 55.5 83.4 70.0 6.19 31 June 22-July 22..... | 64.3 86.6 75.9 4.87 30.42 July 23-Aug. 22..... 65.3 86.1 75.8 4.68 31 Aug. 23-Sept. 22....| 57.7 83.1 70.9 5.82 31 Sept. 23-Oct. 22..... 45.5 76.0 60.3 6.98 30 Oct. 23-Nov. 21.....| 34.5 67.7 49.7 7.56 30 Nov. 22-Dec. 21....| 21.4 58.6 39.2 8.21 30 Dec. 22-Jan. 20..... 12.8 57.2 35.1 9.31 29.82 Jan. 21-Feb. 19..... 10.0 57.2 34.2 9.71 30 Feb. 20-Mar. 20..... 20.5 63.9 40.8 9.14 30 ZOCH—AVERAGE D. C. TEMPERATURE 111 TaBLeE 3.—COMPARISON OF STANDARD DEVIATIONS CompuTED FrRoM MipnicHr-Tro-MIpNIGHT AVERAGE Datty TEMPERATURE WITH THOSE FROM Noon to Noon Midnight to midnight Noon to noon Day alter verna 9 : equinox Anh Standard Artis Standard macan deviation Tea deviation 1 45.70 10.61 45.71 11.23 2 46.72 10.63 47.43 10.10 3 47.78 9.17 48.35 9.14 4 49.04 9.06 49.12 9.25 5 49.28 9.52 49.89 10.46 6 50.32 9.76 50.00 10.07 7 48.64 10.00 47.94 10.15 8 47.51 9.72 47.31 9.65 9 47.51 8.94 47.54 8.10 10 47.60 8.24 48.24 8.80 11 48.92 8.17 49.88 9.05 12 50.14 9.18 50.00 8.90 13 49.78 8.26 49.55 8.32 14 49.33 8.59 49.52 9.07 15 50.30 8.98 51.06 9.40 16 51.30 7.61 51.90 10.58 17 52.27 8.53 52.29 9.65 18 51.80 8.40 50.60 8.23 19 50.58 7.55 51.00 9.49 20 51.60 8.83 51.94 9.52 21 50.98 8.79 50.17 8.22 22 50.13 7.62 51.02 7.59 23 52.18 Uord! 52.38 7.74 24 53.13 8.05 53.87 9.36 25 54.54 8.80 54.34 9.14 26 53.74 8.24 53.36 8.03 27 53.85 Cotta 54.13 8.27 28 54.86 8.14 55.43 8.79 29 56.30 8.87 56.93 9.08 30 56.94 8.72 56.60 9.09 31 56.54 8.95 56.66 9.41 Means......... 8.737 9.158 temperature is not perfectly smooth. The high points such as the midnight-to-mid- night value of the arithmetic mean (50.32) for the array dated March 26 and the low points such as the noon-to-noon value (47.31) for the array dated March 28 are technically referred to as ‘‘singularities” and have long been discussed by meteor- ologists and climatologists. C. F. Marvin held that these singularities were unreal, ie., that there was no natural cause for them and that they were entirely the result of random sampling of the data. Other meteorologists have held these singularities to be real. The discussion of the reality of these singularities resolves itself into an 58 - — -@ Based on daily average computed from midnight fo midnight. A Bosed on daily average computed from noon to noon. ae 56 4 54 i 68 TEMPERATURE- DEGREES FAHRENHEIT 2i 26 3| 5 10 15 20 MARCH APRIL Fig. 1.—Observed average daily temperature: 60 years of record, 1889-1948, Washington, D. C. Twenty-fourth and M Streets, NW. LA ame ape aT @ Bosed on daily average computed from midnight to midnight A 8oased on gaily average computed from noon to noon TEMPERATURE VARIATION— DEGREES FAHRENHEIT 2 IDI eae) 21 26 31 5 10 15 20 MARCH APRIL Fic. 2.—Observed daily standard deviation of temperature: 60 years of record, 1889-1948, Washing- ton, D. C., Twenty-fourth and M Streets, NW. 112 Aprit 1952 TaBLE 4.—COMPARISON OF EXTREMES DERIVED FROM MipNnicutT-To-MIpDNIGHT AVERAGE DAILy TEMPERATURES WITH THOSE FROM Noon to Noon ZOCH——AVERAGE D. Lowest daily mean Highest daily mean temperature temperature Day after vernal | Midnight to} Noon to | Midnight to| Noon to equinox midnight noon midnight noon °F | Year| °F | Year| °F | Year| °F | Year 1 30.4 | 1914 | 30.1 | 1896 | 74.8 | 1948 | 78.5 | 1948 2 21.5 | 1934 | 21.3 | 1934 | 75.6 | 1948 | 69.6 | 1948 3 23.8 | 1906 | 24.9 | 1906 | 67.0 | 1929 | 70.3 | 1939 4 26.0 | 1940 | 26.1 | 1896 | 71.8 | 1939 | 69.3 | 1913 5 26.7 | 1940 | 29.0 | 1896 | 68.7 | 1939 | 72.4 | 1939 6 29.9 | 1894 | 25.9 | 1894 | 71.8 | 1921 | 73.7 | 1921 7 27.0 | 1894 | 28.3 | 1923 | 74.1 | 1921 | 75.3 | 1921 8 29.8 | 1923 | 33.8 | 1904 | 72.1 | 1907 | 74.5 | 1907 9 34.0 | 1893 | 33.1 | 1941 | 72.5 | 1945 | 73.3 | 1945 10 26.2 | 1923 | 22.9 | 1923 | 70.8 | 1945 | 69.1 | 1945 11 25.9 | 1923 | 31.0 | 1919 | 65.6 | 1945 | 70.2 | 1917 12 31.8 | 1924 | 30.8 | 1924 | 71.2 | 1917 | 71.5 | 1917 13 34.9 | 1911 | 34.6 | 1911 | 69.5 | 1903 | 72.5 | 1913 14 35.4 | 1908 | 33.0 | 1903 | 70.7 | 1913 | 68.1 | 1945 15 35.0 | 1896 | 34.3 | 1944 | 69.3 | 1910 | 72.3 | 1910 16 34.1 | 1944 | 31.0 | 1898 | 74.5 | 1942 | 76.9 | 1942 17 35.5 | 1898 | 37.4 | 1898 | 75.0 | 1942 | 77.2 | 1929 18 38.4 | 1935 | 38.0 | 1935 | 77.5 | 1929 | 76.7 | 1929 19 35.1 | 1916 | 34.2 | 1916 | 76.7 | 1929 | 77.2 | 1929 20 34.0 | 1917 | 34.5 | 1909 | 77.6 | 1922 | 78.2 | 1922 21 34.3 | 1918 | 33.2 | 1918 | 73.9 | 1922 | 71.5 | 1947 22 34.9 | 1894 | 36.4 | 1894 | 72.2 | 1947 | 64.8 | 1889 23 39.5 | 1894 | 32.8 | 1940 | 69.6 | 1948 | 69.9 | 1922 24 34.7 | 1940 | 33.7 | 1923 | 72.4 | 1945 | 74.0 | 1945 25 36.8 | 1923 | 39.0 | 1943 | 74.8 | 1941 | 75.9 | 1941 26 35.8 | 1935 | 37.4 | 1928 | 75.1 | 1941 | 75.1 | 1941 27 38.8 | 1905 | 39.7 | 1904 | 72.6 | 1941 | 72.0 | 1941 28 38.6 | 1926 | 37.2 | 1926 | 73.5 | 1896 | 76.8 | 1896 29 37.6 | 1926 | 36.5 | 1926 | 78.4 | 1896 | 78.8 | 1896 30 41.6 | 1890 | 37.7 | 1904 | 79.8 | 1896 | 81.0 | 1896 31 38.0 | 1897 | 42.0 | 1947 | 80.9 | 1941 | 77.3 | 1896 Means 33.1 32.9 73.2 73.7 investigation of the statistical reliability of the Arithmetic Mean, and this latter in turn is based on the value—or the estimate of the value—of the standard deviation. Besides showing the daily values of the standard deviation of average daily temper- ature (which have not been previously published for Washington) the object of this paper is to point out the uncertainty in the standard deviation due to this diurnal vari- ation, a fact not previously emphasized by meteorologists and climatologists. The question may be asked as to what is the cause of the diurnal variation in the C. TEMPERATURE 113 standard deviation of temperature. An explanation is offered here though it is not claimed that it is necessarily the correct one. It is well known that the air is more stable at night time than during the day; or that vertical mixing and convection are more common during the day. In the latitude of Washington cold and warm air masses are continually passing. Now if the central part, the core so to speak, of a cold air mass passes during the middle of the afternoon, the time when vertical convection is greatest, the effect of the cold air mass is to an extent neutralized. If the central part of the cold air mass passes about sunrise, when the air is most likely to be stratified, its effect will be most pronounced. Hence it would seem that the coldest (lowest) 24 hour averages of temperature could be ob- tained by choosing the middle of the 24- hour period at sunrise. Also the overturning of a warm surface air mass is more likely to occur when vertical convection is great. And apparently if a warm surface air mass is not overturned (displaced by cold air) during the daylight hours of one day, the probability of its occurring during the night immediately following is sufficiently low to produce the observed diurnal variation in the standard deviation of temperature. It would also appear reasonable to believe that the hours of the maximum and mini- mum in the diurnal variation of the standard deviation of temperature vary slightly during different times of the year. Acknowledgment.—I appreciate very much the help and encouragement Dr. Helmut EK. Landsberg has given me with this paper. REFERENCES For the normal average daily temperature at Washington, D. C., the reader is referred to the Climatic handbook for Washington, D. C., a publica- tion of the U. 8. Weather Bureau, Tables 29 and 30, both on page 44. Table 29 was computed by C. F. Marvin, while Table 30 was computed by John L. Baldwin. For an earlier determination of the Normal daily temperature see: The daily normal temperature and the daily precipitation in the United States, by Frank H. Bigelow, U.S. Weather Bureau, Bulletin R. 1908. For discussions about the merits of ditferent methods of computing the average daily tempera- ture see: Methods tn climatology, by V. Conrad and L. W. Pollak, 2d ed.: 155-164. 1950. Also Report on 114 the temperatures and vapor tensions in the United States, by Frank H. Bigelow, U. 8S. Weather Bureau, Bulletin S. 1909. For singularities at Washington see: Annual march of temperature at Washington, D. C., by G. Slocum, Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc. 22: 220. 1941. For the subject of singularities in general see: Normal temperatures, daily, are irregularities in the annual march of temperature persistent, by JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 4 Charles F. Marvin, Monthly Weather Rev. 47 (8): 544-555. 1919; Literature concerning supposed recurrent irregularities in the annual march of temperature, by C. Fitzhugh Talman, Monthly Weather Rev. 47(8) : 555-565. 1919; Physical clima- tology, by H. Landsberg, 1941, pp. 108-112; Annual recurrences of weather: Singularities, by C. BE. P. Brooks, Weather (London) 1(4/5): 106-113, and 130-134. 1946. GEOLOGY .—Brightseat formation, a new name for sediments of Paleocene age in Maryland.! Ropert R. BENNETT, U.S. Geological Survey, and GLENN GENE Couuins, Maryland Department. of Geology, Mines, and Water Resources. (Communicated by C. Wythe Cooke.) Sediments of Paleocene age were con- sidered to be absent in the coastal plain of Maryland until Cushman? concluded from his study of Foraminifera obtained from cores and cuttings from a deep oil-test well near Salisbury, Md., in the Eastern Shore area of Maryland, that beds of Paleocene age are present in the subsurface at that locality. Later, in connection with a study by Shiflett? of the Foraminifera in the sediments chiefly in the Western Shore area of Maryland, Cushman determined from the Foraminifera obtained from drill cuttings from a water well near Upper Marlboro (Prince Georges County), Md., that Paleo- cene sediments were present there in the subsurface.* Shifflett’s study showed that, according to the foraminiferal content, Paleocene sediments are present in the subsurface in other parts of the Western and Eastern Shore areas of the Maryland Coastal Plain. Additional studies made by the writers and others, in connection with the cooper- ative ground-water investigations in the Coastal Plain of Maryland by the U. S. Geological Survey and the Maryland De- eualicaton by permission of the Director, U. 8. Geological Survey, and the Director of the Misraylewal Department of Geology, Mines, and Water Resources. 2 CusHMAN, JosEepH A., Foraminifera from the Hammond well. In “Cretaceous and Tertiary Sub- surface Geology.”? Maryland Dept. Geology, Mines, and Water Resources Bull. 2: 226. 1948. 8 SHIFFLETT, ELAINE, Eocene stratigraphy and Foraminifera of the Aquia formation. Maryland Dept UE Mines, and Water Resources Bull. 3. 194 eee idem, p. 1. partment of Geology, Mines, and Water Resources, showed that this same section of sediments occurred at a shallow depth in some places in the western part of the Coastal Plain. This information indicated that this section of sediments might pre- viously have been overlooked on the outcrop. and had been mapped with either the over- lying Aquia greensand (Eocene) or the underlying Monmouth formation (Upper Cretaceous). Sections of sediments exposed in the general vicinity of Brightseat (Prince Georges County), Md. (see locations A, B, C, and D in Fig. 1), have a foraminiferal content and lithology similar to the sub- surface section considered by Cushman and Shifflet to be of Paleocene age. A collection of megafossils from the exposed section at. location A were studied by Dr. Juha Gardner, of the U. S. Geological Survey, who concluded that they probably represent. a northern phase of the Paleocene.® Lith- ologic descriptions of the sections in the Brightseat area are as follows: Location A: 1 Mite West-SouTHWEST OF BRIGHT- SEAT AND 0.2 MILE SouruH oF SHERIFF RoapD Aquia greensand (Eocene): Glauconitie sand and clay; contains black pebbles and black phosphatic nodules at the base; contact with underlying bed is abrupt andeirneculanwn eee 2 ft. exposed Brightseat formation (Paleocene): Dark-gray micaceous sandy clay; contains megafossils; upper 1/6” contains, in part, material from overlying bed 8 ft. exposed 5 Letter, May 8, 1951. Aprit 1952 Location C: East Sipe or Appison Roap 0.7 Mie Souts or CentRAL AVENUE Aquia greensand (Eocene) : Glauconitic clayey sand; weathers buff; large black pebbles (up to 1 inch in diameter) and black phosphatic nodules immediately above basal contact which is abrupt and PERE C UA TM. raheem ae, eta 14 ft. exposed Brightseat formation (Paleocene): Light-gray micaceous sandy clay; fossilifer- ous; contains irregularly shaped masses of material from overlying bed..... 1 ft. 3 in. Indurated dark-gray silty clay; fossiliferous 10 in. Dark-gray silty clay; fossiliferous 4 ft. exposed Location D: Asout 0.05 MiLE Wrst OF LocaTION C Aquia greensand (Kocene): Greenish-buff glauconitic sand; fossiliferous; basal contact is abrupt and irregular; black pebbles and phosphatic nodules occur im- mediately above contact..... 4 ft. exposed Brightseat formation (Paleocene): Fine-textured dark-gray micaceous sandy clay; fossiliferous........... 4 ft. exposed Seat \ Pleasant BENNETT AND COLLINS—BRIGHTSEAT FORMATION 115 The base of the Paleocene was seen only at location B about 1 mile southwest of Brightseat and 0.2 mile southeast of location A. There the contact with the underlying Monmouth formation of Upper Cretaceous age is abrupt but is even. The presence of a few large pebbles and reworked fossils immediately above the contact, and the abrupt contact itself, indicate an uncon- formable relation between these beds. The pebble zone, irregular contact, and lith- ologic contrast between the Eocene and Paleocene sediments at locations A, C, and D also indicate an unconformable relation. The lithologic character of the Paleocene sediments and the underlying Monmouth formation is similar; however, if they are examined closely some differences can be detected. For example, the Monmouth formation contains a large amount of fragmental carbonaceous material, whereas in the Paleocene sediments it is scarce; moreover, the Paleocene sediments are Fic. 1—Map of Brightseat Area, Md., showing the locations of exposures of the Brightseat formation. 116 softer and do not have the tendency to break into large pieces or blocks as do the sediments in the Monmouth formation. The thickness of the Paleocene sediments appears to be extremely variable in the out- crop area. Their thickness at locations A, C, and D probably is about 8 to 10 feet, but at other places along the line of outcrop Paleocene sediments are absent and the Aquia greensand directly overlies the Mon- mouth formation. For example, Paleocene sediments are absent in the first creek directly west of location A in Fig. 1. Although the Paleocene sediments do not crop out as a continuous band, examination JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 4 of drill cuttings and Foraminifera from water wells shows that this unit occurs over a wide area in the subsurface in southern Maryland, where it commonly attains a thickness of 50 to 75 feet. Inasmuch as this section of Paleocene sediments occurs over a large area, is unconformable with the Eocene and Cre- taceous sediments, and constitutes a mapp- able unit, it seems desirable to give it formational rank. The name _ Brightseat. formation is here proposed for this unit, and the exposure designated by location A in Fig. 1, 1 mile west-southwest of Bright- seat, Md., is considered the type locality. PALEONTOLOGY .—Nomenclatural notes on carditids and lucinids. A. CHAVAN, Thoiry (Ain), France. (Communicated by Julia Gardner.) The revision! of several superfamilies, among which Carditacea and Lucinacea are, perhaps, the most puzzling and complex, led the writer to a re-examination of important nome clatural points. Types of common genera, like Cardita, Jagonia, Lucina, or Diplodonta (Taras of most authors), are still under discussion, and conclusions ac- cording with the Rules are not universally accepted. The present paper deals with such problems and reviews, when necessary, points settled in the previous papers. The conclusions here adopted not only follow the International Rules of Nomen- clature in accepting the first unquestionable type-designation for a genus, and in re- jecting those wrongly introduced, but they also succeed in saving well-known names, such as Dzplodonta. It is, therefore, hoped that the International Commission of Zoo- logical Nomenclature will soon place on the Official List the common names here dis- cussed with the type species adopted in accordance with a strict interpretation of the Rules. CARDITA, CARDITES, ARCINELLA, MYTILICARDIA Two species are under discussion for the type of Cardita Bruguiére, 1792 (Encycl. Method. 1: 401-413): Cardita sulcata Bruguiére = Chama 1As a contribution to the ‘‘Treatise of In- vertebrate Paleontology.” antiquata Linné and Cardita calyculata Bruguiére = Chama calyculata Linné. In 1799 Lamarck listed C. calyculata Linné under Cardita; however, according to the Rules, Lamarck’s citations of 1799 are not designations, but only examples, as noted by Lamarck himself. In 1801, the same author cited the related species variegata, and this, again, is not a type-designa- tion. In 1817, Schumacher distinguished two groups: the ‘“‘cordiformes” (a) and the “trapezi- formes” (8), and cited sulcata and calyculata as representatives. The first real designation to be discussed is that of Schmidt (Versuch Conch. Samml.: 63. 1818) of Chama calyculata as the type of Cardita Lamarck, and of antiquata as the type of Cardita Megerle von Miihlfeld (who used Cardita in 1811 without selecting its type). But Cardita is of Bruguiére, not of Lamarck or of Megerle von Miihlfeld; and as both these species are available for the type, Schmidt’s designation of the two of them invalidates both (Stewart, R. B., Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, Spec. Publ. 3: 149. 1930). Winckworth (Proc. Malac. Soc. 26 (pt. 1): 23. 1944) has also pointed out that Schmidt’s designations are referable only to the authors quoted by him. Children’s designation (Lamarck’s Genera of shells: 43, pl. 6, fig. 60. 1822) of Cardita antiquata = sulcata is commonly accepted, and Stewart has recognized it, but Children’s designations apply only to Larmarck’s genera, so that Chama antiquata may be the designated type of Cardita Lamarck, but not ipso facto of Cardita Bruguiére. Children makes no reference to Bruguiére but Aprit 1952 refers only to “Hist. Nat. des Animaux sans Vertébres, 1802-1806,” so that his selection is not applicable even to Lucina Lamarck of 1799 or of 1801. The next designation was that by Anton (Verz. Conch.: 10. 1839) of Cardita calyculata Gmelin not of Bruguiére as the type of Cardita “Tamarck, Desh.’”’ Gray (Proc. Zool. Soc. Lon- don 15: 193-194. 1847) was the first author to refer to Cardita Bruguiére; he designated Chama calyculata as the type of Cardita Bruguiére, 1789 (error for 1792), and also of Cardita Lamarck, 1801; Cardita Schumacher, 1817; and Chama sp. Linné. Cardita Bruguiére, 1792 (type by subsequent designation, Gray, 1847): Chama —calyculata Linné is totally distinct from Venericardia Lamarck, while Cardita “Lamarck”’ corresponds partly to Cardita Bruguiére and partly to Cardita Megerle von Miihlfeld, 1811 (type by subsequent designation, Schmidt, 1818): C. antiquata Linné, Schmidt’s designation for Cardita Megerle von Miuhlfeld, antedates that of Children for Cardita Lamarck, and applies to the same group. Both names are homonyms of Cardita and, therefore, synonyms of Cardites Link, 1807 (Besch. Rostock Samml.: 153) (type by monotypy): Chama antiquata Linné, the first valid name for this group, which is related subgenerically to Veneri- cardia Lamarck, 1801. Arcinella Oken, 1815 (Lehrb. Zool.: 238), type by subsequent designation, Stewart, 1930: Chama calyculata Linné is a synonym of Cardita Bruguieére. Authors like Schmidt and Gray not only desig- nated a type or example, but also recognized, after Schumacher, that two groups were confused under the name Cardita and agreed in regarding the ‘‘trapeziformes” as typical and the ‘‘cordi- formes” as atypical, so that the interpretation here offered is in total accord with the original meaning of Cardita. Chama sulcata Solander, 1766, is a small Venericardia “‘s. 1.” (after Stewart) and does not invalidate Cardita sulcata Bruguiére. Therefore Cardita sulcata Bruguiére is a specific homonym, and this type species of Cardites must be named Venericardia (Cardites) antiquata (Lin.) pars = sulcata (Brug., non Sol.). Antiquata is a some- what doubtful name, which has been reserved by Poli for the Mediterranean form. “Mytilicardia” is the Latinization of a ver- nacular name, “les Mytilicardes’’, published in CHAVAN—CARDITIDS AND LUCINIDS LEZ Blainville (1824) with two examples: Cardita crassicosta and C’. calyculata. Agassiz has cited it without species in the Latin form “Mytilicardia’” (Nomenclator: 704. 1847). Herrmannsen’s desig- nation (Index 2: 85. 1847) of Cardita jeson Adanson (= senegalensis Reeve) accords with Blainville’s view that “Perna” jeson was iden- tical with C. crassicosta Lamarck. These species are, in fact, distinct, and “le Jeson” = Cardita senegalensis represents a subgenus of Cardita Bruguiére with the anterior part of tooth 3b obliquely directed backwards: it has been desig- nated the type of Jesonia Gray, 1840, by Gray 1847. The earliest valid Latinization of “les Mytili- cardes”, and prior to that of Agassiz and Herr- mannsen, is that of Anton, 1839 (op. cit.)? under the spelling “Mytilicardita.” The type is C. calyculata, as quoted by Gray, 1847, so that Mytilicardita falls in the synonymy of Cardita Bruguicre. The usual spelling ‘“Mytilicardia” Blainville is used in Tryon, 1872. All the above cited uses intending to give a Latinization of the same vernacular term, and the first of them, Mytilicardita, being a synonym of Cardita, Mytilocardia, without species, has no status, and Mytilicardia falls also in the synonymy of Cardita, Herrmannsen’s designation referring to a species which proves to be different from the two included in the original list. So that Jesonia Gray, n. n., according to Sherborn, is available for the senegalensis group, while Actinobolus “Klein” Moérch, 1853, of which the type is C. sulcata = antiquata, is to be listed in the synon- ymy of Cardites. PSEUDOCARDIA, VETOCARDIA, VETERICARDIA Pseudocardia Conrad, 1866 (Amer. Journ. Conch. 2: 103) was a heterogeneous unit, in- cluding true carditids, among them Venericardia dupiniana d’Orbigny and species of cardiid affinities, such as Cardiwm hauert Hoernes which is a Limnocardiid, and for that reason Fischer, 1887 (Manuel de Conchyhologie, p. 1039), placed Pseudocardia pars, in the synonymy of Limnocardium. Thirteen unlike species are listed by Conrad under Pseudocardia; the first one is cited as “C. Smidti Horn.’’, apparently an error for Cardium schmidti Hoernes. Three years after, Conrad (ibid. 4: 246) re- 2The C. calyculata of both Anton and Gray seems to include more than one species. 118 placed Pseudocardia by Vetocardia, because of the prior use of Pseudocardium Gabb, 1866 (not 1869, as indicated in Neave). According to the present Rules, Pseudocardium does not invali- date Pseudocardia. This substitution of name in Conrad’s paper (1868, publ. Feb. 4, 1869) is not accompanied by a citation of species, so that, in February 1869, Vetocardia-Pseudocardia was still a doubtful unit, ill-characterized and without type-designation. But in July, 1869 (cbid. 5: 43) Conrad rede- fined his genus and cited under it a single species (p. 48), Vetocardia crenalirata, which was not included under Pseudocardia in 1866. In 1872 Conrad replaced Vetocardia because ‘“‘this genus was improperly printed” by Vetericardia (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 1872: 52) and cited two species, V. crenalirata and V. dupiniana. Stoliezka, in his discussion of Palaeocardita on page 280, writes: “I believe that to this genus should be referred a great number of Cretaceous Carditacea of the type of C. dupiniana d’Or- bigny.” Before the introduction of Vetericardia, in 1872, but after the publication of the mono- typic Vetocardia in 1869, Stoliczka (Cret. Fauna South Ind., Pal. Ind. 1871, Lamell, p. 283) dis- cussed the affinities of Pseuwdocardia-Vetocardia and wrote “Conrad called some of the Cretaceous species at first Pseudocardia for which name he subsequently substituted Vetocardia as the type of which Venericardia dupimana d’Orb. can fairly be taken.” Eames’, after Cox (Proc. Malac. Soc. London 27(1): 37. 1946), has recently accepted Sto- liczka’s statement as a valid designation, but I think it is a very questionable one. First, such a “designation” is unusual in Stoliczka’s work, for he clearly writes: “Type: ..’ when intending to designate a species. “Can fairly be taken,” translated into French, appears to be more a suggestion than a selection. Stoliezka’s English seems a little ambiguous and when translated into French is even more diffi- cult to understand clearly, for on the same page Stoliczka writes that the genus has no significa- tion, and is probably a synonym of Palaeocardita. It is evident that Stoliczka intended only to suggest, rather than to designate, a characteristic species while awaiting a restudy and careful comparisons of a difficult group. Another very important argument is that 3 Eames, F. E., A contribution to the study of the Eocene of western Pakistan. Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London, ser. B, No. 627: 372. 1951. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 4 Stoliczka overlooked the redefinition of Veto- cardia and did not realize that its use with a single species not previously cited under Pseudo- cardia necessitated either the recognition of two distinct units, with a type to be selected for Pseudocardia and crenalirata for Vetocardia of July 1869; or, according to Conrad’s indication that Vetocardia was a substitute, the selection of the species for which this term was used, its re- definition preventing the use of any of the very different forms cited in 1866. But Stoliczka’s “designation,” being common to two names, of which the former is heterogeneous and the latter, proposed “‘in replacment,” but used for a single species not previously cited, cannot be accepted. No designation has yet been given for Pseudo- cardia or for Vetocardia (Eames only accepts Stoliezka’s writing), but in 1941 Stephenson (Univ. Texas Publ., Bull. 4101: 175) designated “‘Astarte crenalirata Conrad” as the type of Vetericardia Conrad, 1872, and, according to the Rules, this applies ipso facto to Vetecardia of July 1869, used for the same species and men- tioned by Stephenson. So that Vetericardia Conrad, 1872 (= Vetocardia Conrad, July, non February 1869), can validly be used with Astarte crenalirata as its type. It is impossible to design another species and to reject both Vetericardia and Vetocardia of July 1869 into the synonymy of Pseudocardia, since, despite Conrad’s indica- tion, they apply to a redefined unit, which was used for a single species, which was not listed either under Pseudocardia or Vetocardia of February 1869. But as Pseudocardia is totally heterogeneous and remains without selected type, for Stoliczka’s “designation” applying to both names is valueless. I hereby designate “Cardium Smidtr” Horn as the type of Pseudo- cardia, the first species listed by Conrad, 1866 (op. cit.). In a recent paper’, I have proposed the genus Ludbrookia Chavan, 1951, type (0.d.): Venert- cardia dupiniana d’Orbigny, because this species is, in fact, quite distinct from the Vetericardia stock as well as from Venericardia, with which Eames unites it (as a ‘‘Pseudocardia”). This was, probably, more advisable than to replace Stoliczka’s wrong “designation” by a correct one of the same species for Pseudocardia only; dupiniana having been listed not only under this 4CHavan, A., Dénominations supraspécifiques de mollusques modifiées ou nouvelles. C. R. somm. 8. G. F., 1951: 210-212. Aprin 1952 heterogeneous term, but in 1872 under Veteri- cardia also, together with crenalirata, and re- cently under Venericardia by Eames (as “type” by Stoliezka of Pseudocardia). I wish to point out that Vetocardia having been used twice by Conrad before its replace- ment, it seems difficult to follow this author when he says he intended to correct only a mis- print. The type is known as crenalirata Conrad, 1860. However, in July 1861, Isaac Lea included it in a checklist under the name Astarte crenult- rata Conrad. LUCINA In a previous paper® I have discussed in full the status of Lucina Bruguiére, 1798, and have accepted Venus jamaicensis Spengler as its type, following a number of authors, but disagreeing with Stewart’s interpretation (op. cit.: 175-178). In a recent paper, Eames (op. cit.: 382) does not refer to Stewart but accepts, like him, Venus pennsyluanica Chemnitz, a species belonging to the well-known Linga de Gregorio, 1885, which, therefore, would fall in the synonymy of Lucina. Curiously enough, although adopting the same conclusion, Eames refers to Schmidt’s designa- tion (1818) rejected by Stewart, who refers to Anton’s paper of 1839, as the first unquestion- able designation for Lucina Bruguiére. A short historical restudy will find easily what species has been clearly and correctly designated as the type of Bruguiére’s genus, prior to any other unambiguous designation, and in total accordance with the Rules. Lucina appears in Bruguiére’s Encyclopedy (Encycl. Math., Tab. Vers, pl. 284-286) at the top of three plates of shells (and not of only plate 284, as quoted by Eames). According to the Rules, the identification of the species figures by Bruguiére being possible—and having been done by Dillwyn, 1817—Lucina is ‘“‘a genus with an indication” and not a nomen nudum (as I had myself admitted) so that a valid type- designation must refer to Bruguiére, and not to a subsequent worker. The first generic diagnosis of Lucina is by Lamarck (1799), who cites a species (Venus edentula) disagreeing with it. But it has been ruled that Lamarck’s citations of 1799 are only 5 Cuavan, A., Essai critique de classification Lucines. I. Journ. Conchyl]. 81: 133-153. 1937. CHAVAN—CARDITIDS AND LUCINIDS AS) examples, as stated by himself—this one being inadequate—and not type-designations, so that edentula is fortunately not the monotype of a genus defined as having well-developed teeth. These conclusions are now generally accepted, and Eames has recently shown that Anodontia Link, 1807, was, as I had admitted, but in disa- greement with Stewart’s statement, the first valid generic name for “Lucina’’ edentula (see Gardner, 1951). In 1801, Lamarck (Syst. Animaux sans Vert.: 124) gave a better example of Lucina, with L. jamaicensis as sole citation under this genus. After Lamarck, the meaning of such a citation is as follows: “Pour connaitre d’une maniere cer- taine les genres dont je donne ici les caractéres, j’ai cité sous chacun d’eux une espéce connue ou trés rarement, plusieurs.”’ So that, although not a valid designation, this is a virtual one, giving, at least, Lamarck’s choice in the selection of a typical form. Subsequent designations of L. jamaicensis by several authors, are therefore in total accordance with the original concept of the genus, while designations of L. pennsylvanica are not, this species having been excluded from the “Tucines” by Roissy (1805) and, apparently, by most revisers before the publication of Stewart’s paper. The first real type-designation is by Schu- macher (1817), who selected L. pennsylvanica, but for Lucina Lamarck, without reference to Bruguiére’s work so that this designation has been rejected as not valid by Stewart and others. The second one, accepted by Eames, is by Schmidt (1818), also L. pennsylvanica. Eames (op. cit.) accepted it on reference to Winckworth’s opinion that Schmidt has really designated types for several genera, among them Lucina. But Winckworth has not discussed this particular designation, which is a questionable one, as pointed out by Stewart (op. cit.), who did not accept it. Although referring to Bruguiére’s genus, Schmidt has quoted plate 284 only (on which are several species figured) and, above all, he designated also pennsylvanica as the type of Lucina Lamarck, with an inexact reference to Chemnitz’s figures of jamaicensis. Such a double and confused designation must be rejected, as already done by Stewart, but the pertinent ob- jections were not discussed in Hames’ paper; Hames says that Schmidt's designation seems to be “the earliest valid’ one, referring only to 120 Winckworth’s general opinion on such selections by Schmidt. The third is by Children (1823), and I had accepted it in my first paper (op. cit.). But Chil- dren referred only to Lamarck’s Lucina, and his designation of L. jamaicensis, like that of penn- sylvanica by Schumacher, deals only with Lucina Lamarck. Recent additions to the Rules do not permit the consideration of Lucina Bruguiére as a nomen nudum, apart from its interpretation by Lamarck (which was possible when I wrote my first paper). Anton’s designation of L. pennsylvanica (1839) has been accepted by Stewart as the first valid one. It is the only one Lucina printed by Anton in small capitals. But, although indi- cating in his introduction that such a printing was reserved to generic typifications, Anton commonly used it also for subgenera. In the case of Lucina, four “groups” are recognized, instead of subgenera, the first species of each being printed in italics. This printing typifies them, as pointed out by Eames (op. cit.). L. pennsylvanica being also printed in italics ahead of the third group (c), is thus on the same rank that three other species, despite the fact it was also printed in small capitals when listed among the hetero- geneous species of group ¢c. One can hardly know what printing must prevail, since the ‘type designation” is here subordinated to a “group”’ subdivision and typification. Herrmannsen’s designation (1847) of L. penn- sylvanica is for Lucina Bruguiére and Lucina Schumacher. But the same year, Gray has given the first valid designation I have been able to find, of L. jamaicensis as the type of Lucina Bruguiére, while Lucina Schumacher is clearly separated as a synonym, having another type (pennsylvanica). This selection is not only the first unquestionable one, but it is in accordance with Lamarck’s first implicit selection (1801), quoted above and confirmed by Children’s desig- nation for Lucina Lamarck, 1801, which therefore is a synonym of Bruguiére’s genus. Gray’s selection has been followed by subse- quent best authors, like Stoliczka (1871) and Meek (1876) and has been disregarded only when opinions favoring the retention of “Venus eden- tula” by “monotypy” have been expressed. This “monotypy” referring to Lamarck’s work of 1799, now rejected for type-designations, and both Schmidt’s and Anton’s choices proving to be questionable, Lucina jamaicensis must be JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 4 accepted as the type of Lucina Bruguiére, as designated by Gray, 1847. It is interesting to point out that the former Rules—now rejected but followed during many years by well-known specialists—would have led to the same conclusion, if the type had to be chosen ‘‘by elimination”’; L. edentula being then rejected for inappropriateness, and L. pennsyl- vanica as excluded from the ‘‘Lucines” by Roissy, L. jamaicensis, first and single species cited in 1801, would have been yet the only one to be validly available. As in any manner, and in total accordance with the present Rules, L. jamaicensis is the type of Lucina Bruguiére—unless we accept arbitrarily another designation among the prior ones, which prove all to be strongly questionable, it is here proposed that Lucina, with jamaicensis as its type, shall be soon placed in the “Official List of Generic Names”, this having the advantage of definitely saving the well-known Linga, which is available for the pennsylvanica group, and of re- jecting in synonymy the vernacular Phacoides, generally used for designation of any lucinid that can not receive an exact generic assignment. PHACOIDES As often pointed out, Phacoides ‘“Blainville, 1825” (Dict. Sci. Nat. 32: 334) is only a vernacu- lar name®: ‘‘Les Lucines Phacoides” having no status. L. jamaicensis is cited under it as an example. The word Phacoides is found first in Agassiz (Nom. Zool. Moll. 2: 67) in 1845 as a name without species, being merely a quotation from Blainville. Its second use is by Gray, 1847 (Proc. Zool. Soc. London: 195) in the synonymy of Lucina, of which L. jamaicensis is designated as the type. Its third use is by H. and A. Adams, 1858 (Gen. Rec. Moll. 1: 467), also as a synonym of Lucina Bruguiére, of which L. jamaicensis is given as an example. Kames (op. cit.), having selected L. pennsyl- vanica as the type of Lucina, thinks that Phacoides (Blainville) H. and A. Adams can be accepted as “the first valid use of this name” with L. jamaicensis as monotype. But it is not the first valid use at all: despite the fact that Agassiz first used Phacoides as a genus without species, Gray, prior to H. and A. Adams, used it also as a synonym of Lucina, and with a type-designa- 5 See Iredale (1915), Stewart (1930), Eames (1951). Aprit 1952 tion for the latter not only an example. I cannot understand how the citation of jamaicensis as example only for Lucina can be applied as a monotype for Phacoides: such a selection after Adams cannot be accepted. But as Gray himself has only quoted Phacoides in synonymy of a nonmonotypical genus, his type-designation for Lucina is not, ipso facto, available for Phacoides as monotype. Phacoides itself cannot be monotypical, Blainville having written “Les Lucines Phacoides.”’ Agassiz, Gray, and Adams have all only quoted the word “Phacoides” after Blainville in their papers, without species referred to this name; it is not even certain that they have used it as = Latinized. One cannot affirm that they intended to quote a Latin genus Phacovdes, instead of only a French word, transferred from an adjective to a substantive: (Les) Phacoides. So _ that “Phacoides” must be rejected as vernacular in any manner, no Latin use of it prior to Denti- lucina Fischer, 1887, being demonstrated by its connection to a specific Latin name. Neither Gray nor Adams have referred to ‘Phacoides jamaicensis” but only listed a vernacular name in a synonymy; and on page 194 of his paper, Gray similarly quoted as a synonym of a Latin generic name (Agaria) the ‘“Cardito-Cardite” of Blainville under its vernacular form, not Cardiocardita. If a valid and unquestionable designation of L. pennsylvanica, or of any species other than L. jamaicensis is found as the type of Lucina Bruguiére prior to Gray’s selection, Dentilucina would then replace Lucina for the jamaicensis group, and not Phacoides, as several authors have already noted. Before studying other names, it is interesting to point out that a case almost similar to that of Cardita and Lucina has been ruled recently by the International Commission in the same sense. Arca Noae Linné has been officially established as the type of Arca Linné, 1758, following Gray’s selection, instead of Schmidt’s or Schumacher’s prior, but questionable, designations. But in the case of Arca, a suspension of the Rules was necessary, because Schumacher’s designation was only somewhat questionable, according to Rein- hart (1935) but not to most authors. In the case of Cardita and of Lucina such a suspension would not be needed, all designations prior to Gray’s being evidently erroneous in their references, and vot concerning Bruguiére’s work. CHAVAN—CARDITIDS AND LUCINIDS 121 DIPLODONTA AND TARAS Diplodonta Bronn, 1831 (Ergebn. Nat. Reisen 2: 484), is a well-known ungulinid, with Venus lupinus Brocchi (non Linné) = Tellina rotundata Montagu var. aequilateralis Cerulli (Diplodonta) as its type, designated by Herrmannsen and by Gray, both in 1847. There is a prior Mysia Leach in Brown, 1827, with the same species as monotype, but invalidated by Mysia Lamarck, 1818. There is also Taras Risso, 1826, type (mono- type) T. antiquatus Risso (Hist. Nat. Eur. Mérid. 4: 344) from the Pliocene beds of La Trinité, near Nice. Stewart (op. cit.) thinks that this species is identical with the Recent Dzplo- donta rotundata (Mtg.) and therefore that Taras must have priority over Diplodonta. Taras antiquatus, only figured by Risso, looks, in fact, like Diplodonta rotundata. Dall had interpreted the diagnosis of its hinge as that of a specimen of this species on which the left posterior cardinal was broken off, and the right posterior confused with a lateral tooth. But Cerulli (1909) and Lamy (1920) treated Taras as a doubtful name, and Eames (1951) also has recently listed it as a nomen dubium. Stewart was of the opinion that ‘it should not be difficult to identify 7. antiquatus at Trinité.” However, in this locality as well as on the Mediterranean coast, another quite different species can be found which is externally and in- ternally very similar to Dzplodonta rotundata. Modern authors seem not to have realized that Taras antiquatus was, perhaps, a specimen of Mysia undata (Pennant), also known as Lucinop- sis undata. It is a venerid, with a deep pallial sinus, and a third narrow, cardinal tooth, just in front of the nymph (perhaps the “right posterior’’ dis- cussed by Dall): however, both the shape and hinge of Mysia undata recall strongly Diplo- donta rotundata, especially when the specimens are worn. Both species are not uncommon in the recent fauna. As I have failed to find specimens labelled Taras antiquatus in the Risso material preserved in the Paris Museum, I am of the opinion that the name must be rejected as a nomen dubtum, since it may be that Risso has described a Mysia, as well as a Diplodonta, and since no type material can be studied. I have noticed, when examining Risso’s shells, that their original labels have, sometimes, been 122 misplaced and several specimens apparently misidentified. If some day shells labelled ‘“‘Taras antiquatus” should be discovered (and probably not, then, in the Paris Museum where I have failed to find them and where they have not been listed), it would be yet necessary to verify with much care if they are really the true Taras Risso has studied. So that there is only a very slight possibility that Taras can have status of any kind, and Diplodonta, therefore, can be confidently used. I have failed to find, among numerous BOTANY .—New species of grasses from Botany, U. 8S. National Museum. The genus Thrasya H.B.K., Nov. Gen. et Sp. 1: 120. pl. 39. 1816, was based on a single species, 7. paspaloides H.B.K., col- lected by Humboldt and Bonpland on the island of Panamuna, in the Orinoco between Atures and San Borja, Venezuela. There are now 12 known species of Thrasya, ranging from Costa Rica to Brazil and Bolivia, four of them from Venezuela, to which a fifth is now proposed. In this genus the sterile lemma is mostly firm, thinner and sulcate down the middle and usually splitting to the base, the margins of the split rolling inward. In the species here described the sterile lemma partly splits tardily or not at all, as in T. campylostachya (Hack.) Chase and 7’. hitchcockii Chase, and the plant some- what resembles Paspalum pilosum Lam. Thrasya venezuelana Chase Fig. 1 Planta perennis; culmi 50 cm alti, erecti, dense hispidi, nodis inferioribus ramosi; vaginae et laminae appresso-hispidae; ligula minuta; lami- nae 15-20 cm longae, 6-8 mm latae; racemi 1-3, arcuati, 8-13 cm longi, rhachi 2 mm lata, mar- ginibus longe hispidis; spiculae crebrae, 4 mm longae, 2 mm latae, dense hispidae; gluma prima obsoleta; gluma secunda et lemma sterile sub- aequalia, 3-nervia, lemmate sterili suleato non vel tarde fisso; fructus 3.5 mm longus, 1.5 mm latus, marginibus lemmatos et paleae appresso- pubescentibus. Perennial, in small tufts; culms 50 cm tall, erect, appressed-hispid, branching from the lower nodes, the lower internodes 4-5 em long, the JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 4 carditid and lucinid units, other unsettled generic terms of the importance of those here discussed; so that I think it was of interest to study them in full, as I have tried to do it in the present paper. It is very satisfactory to see that a strict application of the International Rules has succeeded in saving well-known names. Wise decisions of the Commission having already placed several usual genera in the Official List, I hope that Cardita, Lucina, and Dzplodonta, at least, may obtain the same favor. Venezuela. AGNES CHASE, Department of nodes densely hispid; branches erect, the pro- phylla prominent, thin, to 5-6 em long; foliage conspicuously appressed-hispid; sheaths exceed- ing the internodes; ligule a brown membrane 0.5 mm long; blades rather thick, 15-20 cm long, 6-8 mm wide, about as wide at the base as the summit of the sheath, folded and flexuous in age; racemes on slender erect peduncles, 1-3 from the upper sheaths, the racemes strongly arcuate, 8-13 cm long, the rachis narrowly winged, 2 mm wide, appressed-pubescent, the margins long- hispid; spikelets crowded, 4 mm long, 2 mm wide, rather turgid; first glume obsolete; second glume and sterile lemma 3-nerved, densely hispid with pale hairs, the glume slightly shorter than the lemma, the lemma sulcate, not or tardily partly splitting, its palea of equal length, with firm minutely pubescent margins, enclosing 3 rudi- mentary stamens; fruit 3.5 mm long, 1.5 mm wide, subacute; lemma and palea minutely papil- lose-striate, the margins of both sparsely appressed-pubescent. Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1762139, collected on dry stony open slope, among low brush, Sabanas de Cotiza, Distrito Federal, Venezuela, March 11, 1940, by Agnes Chase, no. 12407. Part of the type is in the her- barium of the Instituto de Botdnica, Caracas, Venezuela. Ichnanthus tamayonis Chase Fig. 2 Planta annua; culmi ramosi decumbentes, 65— 90 cm longi, gracillimi, angulati, pilosi, internodiis inferioribus brevibus, nodis tumidis, saepe radi- cosis, superioribus ad 15 ecm longis; vaginae Aprit 1952 pilosae, marginibus ciliatis; ligula 0.3 mm longa; laminae anguste lanceolatae, 5-10 cm longae, 47 mm latae, acuminatae, basi rotundatae, tenues, laxae, subtus molliter pubescentes, supra scaberulae; paniculae terminales et axillares, 6-8 cm longae, 3-4 cm latae, laxae, ramis ascendenti- bus, 1-5 cm longis, ramulis 1-3 spiculas feren- tibus; spiculae 4.2-4.4 mm longae, glumis et lemmate sterili acuminatis; fructus 2.6 mm longus, basi appendicibus nullis. Annual; culms decumbent, 65-90 cm long, very slender, angled, pilose, the lower internodes short, the nodes swollen, few to several of them with slender prop-roots 4-10 em long; sheaths, except the uppermost, 1-2 cm long, the uppermost 3-4 em long, pilose (the uppermost sparsely), the margins densely ciliate; ligule membranaceous, 0.3 mm long; blades narrowly lanceolate, 5-10 em long, 4-7 mm wide, long-acuminate, rounded at base, thin, lax, softly pubescent on the lower SS ——s CHASE: NEW SPECIES OF GRASSES 123 surface, the upper surface subglabrous, the fine nerves scaberulous; panicles terminal and axillary on long very slender angled peduncles, pilose below the panicles; terminal panicles lax, 6-8 cm long, 3-4 cm wide (the axillary mostly smaller), the very slender angled axis sparsely pilose, the branches ascending, 1-5 cm long, with short ascending branchlets bearing 1-3 short-pedicellate spikelets, at least the lower axils pilose; spikelets 4.2-4.4 mm long; first glume long-acuminate, a little shorter than the sterile lemma, 3-nerved, the midnerve scabrous; second glume acuminate, 4.2-4.4 mm long, 5-nerved, the nerves scabrous, sometimes with a few hairs on the midnerve; sterile lemma 4—4.1 mm long, 5-nerved, the nerves scabrous; fruit 2.7 mm long, the basal wings reduced to scars. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1858484, collected in ‘‘sitios abrigados, Dist. Fed.: Figs. 1-3.—Thrasya venezuelana, n. sp.: 1, Raceme, X1, two views of spikelet, and fruit, X 10, type; 2, Ichnanthus tamayonis, n. sp.: Spikelet and fruit, X 10, type; 3, Zchnanthus nubilus, n. sp.: spikelet and fruit, X 10, type. 124 Carretera Catia - El Junquito,”’ Venezuela, Octo- ber 8, 1943, by Francisco Tamayo, no. 2564. A duplicate of the type is in the herbarium of the Instituto de Botanica, Caracas, Venezuela. Ichnanthus nubilis Chase Fig. 3 Planta annua; culmi ramosi decumbentes, 60- 100 cm longi, graciles, angulati, infra nodos papil- losis-pilosi; nodi pilosi; vaginae papillosae-pilo- sae; internodii 1.2-2.5 cm longi, papillosi-pilosi, ciliati; ligula brevissima; laminae anguste lanceo- latae, 5-10 cm. longae, 4-8 mm latae, acuminatae, basi constrictae, tenues, infra obscure reticulatae; paniculae terminales et axillares, pedunculis gra- cillimis longissimis; paniculis 2.5-3.5 cm longis, 5-10 mm latis, 2-6 spiculas ferentibus; spiculae 3.5 mm longae, glumis et lemmate sterili firmis; gluma prima acuminata 2/3-3 /4 spiculae aequans, 5-nervis; gluma secunda 3.5 mm longa, subacuta, 5-nervis; lemma sterile 5-nerve, quam gluma secunda brevius; fructus 2.6 mm longus, basi appendicibus nullis. Plants annual; culms decumbent, 60 to 100 cm long, slender, strongly nerved to angled, papil- lose-pilose below the nodes and sometimes along one of the nerves; nodes pilose; sheaths much shorter than the internodes (mostly less than 2.5 cm long), finely papillose-pilose, at least JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 4 toward the summit and on the collar, finely ciliate; ligule minute; blades narrowly lanceolate, 5-10 cm long, 4-8 mm wide, acuminate, narrowed at base, thin, faintly reticulate on the lower surface, and sparsely pilose to glabrous on both surfaces; panicles terminal and axillary on long very slender angled peduncles, the panicles 2.5- 3.5 cm long, 5-10 mm wide, the short ascending scabrous branches bearing 2-6 short-pedicelled spikelets; spikelets 3.5 mm long, the glumes and sterile lemma firm; first glume abruptly acumi- nate, 2/3-3/4 as long as the spikelet, 5-nerved, the midnerve scaberulous toward the apex; sec- ond glume 3.5 mm long, subacute, 5-nerved; sterile lemma similar to the second glume, slightly shorter, 5-nerved; fruit 2.5 mm long, the basal wings reduced to scars. Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1762167, collected near the upper margin of cloud forest, El Junquito, Cordillera Costanera, Dis- trito Federal, Venezuela, March 12, 1940, by Agnes Chase, no. 12439. A duplicate of the type is in the herbarium of the Instituto de Botanica, Caracas, Venezuela. Ichnanthus tamayonis and I. nubilis, creeping, shade-loving species, resemble J. angustifolius Swallen of the Eastern Cordillera of Colombia, but are freely branching and bear axillary as well as terminal panicles with spikelets glabrous or with scabrous nerves only. ENTOMOLOGY .—Notes on Bruchidae affecting the Anacardiaceae, including the description of a new genus. JOHN CoLBURN BRIDWELL, Lignum, Va. (Com- municated by Waldo L. Schmitt.) Anyone interested in the Bruchidae is intrigued by the relatively few species that diverge from the usual family habit of feeding their young in seeds of legumes by attaching themselves to plants of other families. We have three records of Bruchidae affecting the Anacardiaceae, a family of plants represented in temperate North America almost entirely by the poly- morphic genus Rhus, including the sumacs, poison ivy, and smokebush. The genera affected by Bruchidae are Chilean and Brazilian, and both are close allies of Rhus. These genera are Duvaua Kunth, now usually included in Schinus Linnaeus, which includes the “California” peppertree, and Iithraea Miers, which includes the Chilean ‘litre, L. caustica (Molina) Hooker & Arnott (venenosa Miers). 1. GALL-MAKING BRUCHID OF Schinus huigan (CHILE) Kieffer and Herbst (Zeitschr. Wiss. Insekt.- Biol. 1: 66. 1905) reported a bud gall in the axils of the flowering twigs of Duvaua dependens DC (= Schinus huigan Molina), which is described as follows: These are easily dislodged, being attached at only a single point. The gall is ellipsoidal, 6-8 mm high by 5-6 mm broad, naked, red flecked with white, the middle of the flecks sometimes tuberculately prominent. The texture of the gall is somewhat woody. Within the gall lies a thick curved footless beetle larva with the body gradually thickened behind, 8-9 mm long by 2-3 mm broad, naked except for some scattered hairs on the anterior seg- ments, mandibles dark. This material was obtained by Pablo Herbst between Santiago and Valparaiso on November Aprin 1952 3, and later a new species of Bruchus was reared from these larvae. Since this still undescribed species is one of the few Bruchidae affecting plants in parts other than seeds, it would be a useful work for some of our Chilean friends to recover this species and have it described. 2. Inthraeus electus FROM THE SEEDS OF LITRE (CHILE) Prof. Carlos Porter (Revista Chilena Hist. Nat. 29: 286. 1925) reported determining the attractive Bruchus elegans Blanchard in material submitted to him for identification by Prof. Flaminio Ruiz, obtained by the latter from the seeds of litre, Lithraea caustica, from Sauzal (Province of O’Higgins) im January 1924. Since Camacho (Algunos insectos perjudiciales G las arvejas, frijoles, lentejas y otras legumbres y brucos del trebol, Serv. Policia Sanit. Vej., Santiago de Chile, 1919: 22-23) had previously erroneously reported this species affecting seeds of clover, I sought confirmation for Professor Porter’s record. With this in mind I examined several lots of seeds of litre in the collection of the Office of Foreign Plant Introduction, U. S. Depart- ment of Agriculture. In one of these lots (S.P-I. No. 27434) were found four seeds showing insect injury. Three exhibited exit holes, evidently of some hymenopterous insect smaller than Bruchus elegans. This should be a parasite of a bruchid, but it might also be some seed inhabiting chalcid. Fortunately, the fourth seed still contained an insect. When this was extracted from within its slight silken cocoon, there was found a nearly mature braconid identified by C. F. W. Muese- beck as a species of Urosigalphus. Since some of the species of Urosigalphus parasitize bruchids, and others attack curculionids, the remains of the beetle larva at the expense of which the Urosigal- phus larva had nourished itself were extracted and submitted to Dr. Adam Béving. The frag- ments were sufficient to enable him to determine them positively as those of a bruchid larva. We may hope that ultimately the larvae of Bruchidae will be identifiable, since Dr. Béving has admirably worked out the mouth parts (Proc. Ent. Soc. Washington 29: 133-148. 1927). However, the larva of Bruchus elegans is still undescribed, and so no matter how perfect the larva might be it would still be impossible to determine it to species. We were not, therefore, quite able to..confirm fully Professor Porter’s record as to the species concerned. But a bruchid BRIDWELL—BRUCHIDAE AFFECTING ANACARDIACEAE 125 certainly does affect the seeds of Lithraea caustica in Chile, and I have no doubt that he is right in his determination, for Bruchus elegans is a common, well-known, and strongly characterized species not likely to be mistaken.! Unfortunately, the appropriate specific name elegans Blanchard, 1851, is preoccupied by Bruchus elegans Sturm, 1845, a valid binomial, and must be replaced. Furthermore, the varietal name obscurior Pic, 1902, is also preoccupied? and cannot take its place. The species is, I believe, distinct enough to represent a separate genus, and Lithraeus is proposed with Bruchus elegans Blanchard, 1851, as genotype. For the untenable specific name elegans the substitute electus is proposed, so that this beautiful seed weevil of the litre may be known hereafter as Lithraeus electus. Lithraeus, n. gen. (Bruchinae, Acanthoscelidini) Genotype: Lithraeus electus, n. name Bruchus elegans Blanchard, 1851, not Sturm 1843. Bruchus elegans obscurior Pic, 1902, not Bruchus (Pseudoptinus) martini obscurior Pic, 1896. Freshly emerged individuals of this elegant Chilean bruchid may best be recognized by the pubescent markings, which later are often badly rubbed. With fine sericeous pubescence on head, body and legs above and below, invisible except when seen obliquely; sharply defined decorations of dense snowy white pubescence concealing the surface thus: a small quadrangle on median lobe of pronotum; on the small quadrate scutellum (emarginately bidentate at apex), narrow arcuate elytral fasciae extending obliquely forward from near the middle of fourth stria to near basal third of ninth, an elliptical fleck at the apex of the fourth and fifth striae, on mesepimeron, on narrow outer margin of metapleura, on outer end of hind coxa and small maculae on extreme margin of sternites 2-4, narrow basal margin of pygidium; less condensed and less definite pubes- cent markings on posterolateral lobes or angles of pronotum and on its flank near front coxa. Small, 2.3-3.1 mm long by 1.8-1.6 mm broad, ovate, shining black or reddish testaceus, with almost all parts rufescent in some individuals; 1Since this part of this paper was prepared, repeated positive proof of this host relationship has been obtained. I do not have any confirmation of Dr. Porter’s subsequent record (Revista Chilena Hist. Nat. 43: 189-140. 1940) of its affecting Schinus molle L., the so-called ‘‘California’’ peppertree. 2 Bruchus (Pseudoptinus) martini obscwrior Pie, 1896, now referred to Ptinus. 126 head, prothorax, and body beneath generally black; antennae sometimes entirely black, some- times with some basal joints reddish. Integument everywhere micropunctulate, with coarser punc- tures on head, pronotum, and hind coxa. Head short, malar space short, temples abruptly declivous; eyes normally convex and projecting, broadly emarginate for two-thirds their length, separated on front by nearly the width of an eye. Front punctured throughout, without a carina, glabrous impunctate line, or area; antennae alike in the sexes, extending beyond base of pronotum but not to hind coxa, with four narrow joints at base, joint 5 triangularly expanded at apex, 6-10 nearly alike, subquadrate, closely applied to each other, not at all serrate, 11 broadly ovate. Pronotum narrower than elytra and less than half as long; sides nearly straight, converging and suddenly rounded in front; dorsum nearly even, convex, separated from flanks by a vestigial lateral carina bent down to the coxa. Elytra with even surface, flat intervals, epipleural lobes well developed, humeri small, no basal tubercles, striae except 8 and 9 reaching base, 4 and 5 abbreviate and joined at apex, striae perceptibly punctured, well impressed; elytra broadest near basal third, narrowed to apex, covering base of pygidium, not microserrulate at suture. Hind coxa broader than hind femur and broader than first sternite behind it, finely punctured except for the polished area along more than half the anterior margin; hind femur more than three times as long as broad, not extending to apex of abdomen, arcuate above, nearly straight be- neath, sinuate before the small apical lamella; slightly flattened apically, inner margin with vestigial carina usually bearing a slightly an- gulate denticle; hind tibia straight, slightly broader toward apex, entirely without longi- tudinal carinae, apex abruptly truncate, mucro short and but little different from the lateral tooth which is near it, separated by a shallow sinus; subdorsal denticles smaller, two or three in number. Numerous American Bruchidae such as Bruchus (Pachymerus) albotectus Sharp, Bruchus (Pachymerus) incrustatus Gyllenhal, and Pseu- dopachymerus multimaculatus and binotatus Pic, which have been referred to Pseudopachymerus or Caryedes, from which they are generically distinct, have the elytra with dense white pubes- cence over most of the surface but in Lithraeus electus most of the elytron is covered with prac- tically invisible pubescence and the white covers JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 4 only a minor part of the surface. These species with longitudinally carinate hind tibiae and femur armed with tooth and denticles near apex beneath are widely separated from Lithraeus by the structure of the hind legs. Most genera of Acanthoscelidini have longitudinal carinae on the hind tibiae: (1) One on outer face ending in a tooth at apex. (2) One on ventral margin ending in the mucro at apex; (3) One on the surface between outer and ventral carinae, often con- verging apically toward the ventral carina; (4) One on the inner face, not related to any apical structure. The complete absence of such carinae in Lithraeus distinguishes it from any other American bruchid genus known to me. 3. A BRUCHID FROM THE SEEDS OF AROEIRA (BRAZIL) Gregorio Bondar, 1937, records a _ third bruchid affecting a plant of the family Ana- cardiaceae in Brazil (Rio) in his Notas biologicas sobre bruchideos observados no Brasil (Arch. Inst. Biol. Vegetal 3: 7-44, figs. 1-61 [December, 1936]), a work largely reprinted from previously published papers in Correio Agricola (Bahia), O Campo (Rio de Janeiro), Revista de Entomo- logia (Rio de Janeiro), and perhaps elsewhere, 1930-1932, the details of which I cannot here quote. This paper by Bondar is the most sig- nificant single contribution to the biology of Bruchidae known to me. Bondar’s too brief note (p. 43) reads thus: ‘‘Bruchus atronotatus Pic. Cria-se en sementes de aroeira. Rio.” The bruchid species was described by Pic 1929, Mélanges 54: 35, Brésil (type in coll. Pic). It was listed by Blackwelder, Checklist of the coleopterous insects of Mexico, Central America, the West Indies, and South America, U. 8. Nat. Mus. Bull. 185 (pt. 4): 758. 1946, as Acantho- scelides atronotatus Pic. Ido not have the descrip- tion before me, but I doubt if it would be of service in determining the species if it is in any way like Lithraeus electus or particularly related to it. From Dr. Da Costa Lima’s very useful “Indice das Plantas” in his Terceiro catalogo dos insectos que vivem nas plantas do Brasil, Rio de Janeiro, 1936, p. 426, we find the vernacular name aroeira with or without an adjective, brava, mansa, or preta, applies to Lithraea brasiliensis. Aroeira vermelha or. manza is Schinus terebin- thifolius. My impression is that Bondar meant Iithraea brasiliensis as the host of Bruchus atronotatus. Aprit 1952 HOTTES—TWO SPECIES OF APHIDIDAE 127 ENTOMOLOGY .— Descriptions and notes on two rare species of Aphididae. F. C. Horttss. (Communicated by Herbert Friedmann.) Opportunity is taken to describe some forms heretofore unknown of two rare species of Aphididae, and to record some notes on their life habits. Rhopalosiphum grabhami Cockerell This species was described by T. D. A. Cock- erell in 1903. Since that time I am aware of its mention in aphid literature only once, by Gil- lette and Palmer in 1932. In the fall of 1951 it was present in numbers in pseudogalls made by rolling both halves of the leaf blade toward the midrib. On Lonicera involucrata the galls thus formed were red, mottled with yellow. The edges of the leaves were tightly rolled into tubes just large enough for the bodies of the aphids. In such tubes numerous aphids apparently adult, but with undeveloped wings were taken dead, killed by a fungus. Toward the midrib the leaves were more loosely rolled, and it was in these regions that living alate viviparous females and males were taken. Oviparous females were not taken. The male has not been described before. ALATE MALE Size and general color—In life very much shriveled and shrunken; general color black. Mounted specimens, relaxed and cleared, are about 1.45 mm long from vertex to tip of anal plate; width across eyes, 57 mm. Mounted speci- mens show the head and thorax blackish brown, abdomen with dusky spots at the sides, and smaller spots, irregular in shape and size, ar- ranged in transverse rows across the dorsum. The median spots are larger and more or less confluent, near the posterior; cauda and anal plate dusky; cornicles dark dusky; antennae uniform black; tibiae dark brown with apical portions darker. Head and appendages.—Comparative lengths of antennal segments as follows: III, .57 mm; IV, .37 mm; V, .31 mm; VI, .11 + .52 mm. Antennal hair slightly knobbed, that on III not so long as width of segment. Secondary sensoria round, tuberculate, arranged as follows: III, 56-60 evenly distributed over surface; IV, 33 evenly distributed; V, 5-11 more or less in a row. All antennal segments imbricated. Primary sensoria on V and VI with a hair rim. Anterior margin of head with a strongly developed me- dian tubercle. Antennal tubercles extremely well developed. Rostrum very short, extending only about midway to mesothoracie coxae, segment before apex very bulbous. Thorax.—Veins of forewings dark dusky brown; second branch of media about midway between first and margin of wing; radial sector much bowed; hind tibiae 1.07 mm long; hair on inner surface of hind tibiae more abundant than that on outer surface; hair on both surfaces equal in texture and about equal in length. The hair on the proximal surface of the tibiae is shortest, length of hair in midregion less than width of tibiae; apex of tibiae somewhat en- larged. Tarsi .08 mm long. First segment of tarsus deeply recessed within tibiae, this is also true of alate viviparous females. First segment of tarsus apparently with only two hairs. Abdomen.—Cornicles .20 mm long, with sur- face imbricated, sides almost uniformally swollen, slightly constricted just before well-developed rim. Cauda, .057 mm long, with three hairs on a side. Anal plate with few long hairs. Gonapophy- ses short with numerous hair. Allotype alate male—Collected September 7, 1951, Skyway, Colo. (Cottonwood Lake Trail) deposited in United States National Museum. I am not sure that this species is correctly placed in the genus Rhopalosiphum. It has much in common with the Myzini. Lachnus montanus (Wilson) This species was described by Wilson in 1919 from three ‘‘apterous viviparous” females col- lected by Gillette at Cimmaron, Colo. in 1906. I am not aware of other specimens having been recorded in aphid literature since that time. Dr. Knowlton, however, has sent me an unidentified slide of this species to determine, collected by B. A. Hows at Vallecitos New Mexico in 1943. The host is not recorded; the specimens are apterous. This species is of especial interest because two kinds of apterous viviparous females occur; females with no sensoria on the hind tibiae and females with sensoria on the hind tibiae. It was from females of the latter type that Wilson de- scribed the species. At the time he stated that it was possible for the females to be oviparous, a possibility he promptly rejected because the 128 specimens were collected in August which he thought too early to produce oviparous females. Despite the presence of sensoria on the hind tibiae, a characteristic as a rule of oviparous females, but not confined to them, such females are viviparous. I can not state that they are always thus, but my material so indicates. They seem to occur in the fall as a generation just preceding the oviparous generation. Because they differ in other respects in addition to the presence of sensoria on the hind tibiae they must be regarded as distinct forms. I have been in- formed by Professor Palmer, that Professor Essig has a paper in press in which he calls similar forms produced in another genus “‘intermediates”’ and I make use of his term. It was my intention to call them pseudo-oviparous. I took all my specimens in a small region south of Glade Park, Colo. (Pifon Mesa), on scrub oak (Quercus gunnisonii). On the larger trees of this species they apparently live singly, of in the case of immature specimens in groups of two or three. I have taken them on the twigs, branches, and trunk. On twigs they seem to show a preference for regions near twig galls, and in one case I collected a female with the head and a portion of the thorax in the cavity of a gall, too small to admit the entire body. On branches and on the trunk, rough regions seem preferable. Even when directed to them by ants, collecting of this species is slow and tedious. By actual count only five mature specimens were taken in three afternoons collecting, on mature trees. Quite by accident I chanced to stop to examine some small seedlings not more than 3 feet high and found that they had fairly large colonies of oviparous females and males on the trunks, not more than a foot from the ground. If this represents the normal preference for this species, perhaps it explains why this species is so rare in aphid collections. APTEROUS MALE Size and general color—TIn life black, very insignificant looking, being much shrunken and very shriveled. Mounted specimens, after clear- ing and relaxing, vary in length from 2.07 to 2.50 mm. Mounted specimens have the head and thorax dusky brown, abdomen greenish with large lateral dusky areas; dorsum of abdomen with many dusky spots, which vary greatly in size and shape. Posterior region of abdomen dusky; cornicles dusky; antennae with the ex- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 4 ception of the base of third dark dusky brown; femora brown at base shading to almost black; tibiae and tarsi uniform dark brownish black. Head and appendages.—Width of head across eyes .715—.78 mm. Anterior margin of head rather flat with numerous long hair; median suture present; first and second antennal segments with numerous short, rather thick hair. All antennal segments imbricated; hair on antennal segment III, IV, and V spinelike and for the most part about as long as width of segment. Secondary sensoria distributed as follows: III, 10-39; IV, 0-2; V, 1-6. The specimen that had the fewest sensoria on III had the most on V. Marginal sensoria on VI far removed from primary, rather large, sometimes difficult to determine, most commonly three. Proportional lengths of anten- nal segments as follows: III, .715-.815 mm; IV, .314—.371 mm; V, .30—.343 mm; VI, .143 + .085- 185 + .128 mm. The unguis is outstandingly long and thick. Ocular tubercles present, well developed. The rostrum reaches almost to the cornicles. Thorax and abdomen.—The hind tibiae meas- ure 2.28-2.41 mm in length. The hind tarsi are .3847 mm long. The hair on the hind tibiae is about equally well developed on all surfaces, in length it is subequal to the width of segment. The ventral surface of the first segment of the hind tarsus has about 15 hairs, the dorsal surface 3. The cornicles measure .171-.214 mm at the base, which is rather irregular in outline. The cauda and anal plate are rounded. The hair on these structures and on the cornicles is longer than that found on other parts of the body. The gonapophyses have what appear to be tufts of hair at their ends. APTEROUS VIVIPAROUS FEMALE Size and general color—Length varying from 3.50 to 3.78 mm. Immature specimens of this species are so large that they may be taken for adults in the field. Body highly arched and much inflated except in regions of spots which appear deeply pitted. Color of head and thorax light brown with a very scant amount of pul- verulent matter. Abdomen the color of cocoa with a rather thick hoar-frost pulverulence covering all but the cornicles, which are dark brown, very small lateral tubercles and areas which surround them, which are also brown, and small rather deeply pitted areas arranged in four rows on the dorsolateral surface of the abdomen. Aprit 1952 These areas, which appear to be glandular, are most likely not wax glands, being free from pulverulent matter. First and second antennal segments slightly darker than the head, third segment yellowish brown at base shading to dark dusky brown, remaining antennal segments dusky; femora brownish at base shading to very dark dusky brown if not black; tibiae almost uniform brownish black, tarsi the same. Mounted specimens may show dusky areas on dorsum of abdomen. When present, these are irregular in outline and variable in size. Head and appendages.—Width of head across eyes .57 mm; antennal segments with the follow- ing proportional lengths: III, .71-.78 mm; IV, .30-.314 mm; V, .314-.347 mm; VI, .157—.171 + 114 mm. The unguis is very long and thick. The secondary sensoria are distributed as fol- lows: III, none; IV, 0-2; V, 0; marginal sensoria on VI far removed from primary; first and sec- ond antennal segments with more hair than usual; antennal hair spinelike, not so long as width of segment; antennal segments imbricated; primary sensoria free from hair ring; rostrum nearly reaching to base of cornicles; ocular tubercles poorly developed; head with a median suture, which continues more or less on the seg- ments of the thorax, never being complete on any one segment. Thorax.—The metathoracie femora are much longer than those of the prothorax and meso- thorax, measuring 1.64 mm in length; the hind tibiae are 2.86 mm long; the hind tarsi measure .34 mm in length. The hair on the tibiae are spinelike and arise from clear areas which stand out from the otherwise very dark color of the tibiae; hair on tibiae not as long as width of tibiae, not all of uniform length, longest hair dull at the tip; first segment of hind tarsi with nine hairs on ventral surface and three on dorsal. Abdomen.—Cornicles with base varying from .257 to .286 mm; base very irregular in outline with about four rows of hair; abdomen with much hair; cauda narrow but deep, with two kinds of hair: long spinelike hair on the margin and short fine hair on the dorsum. Anal plate rounded. INTERMEDIATE VIVIPAROUS FEMALE It was this form that Wilson described. Specimens of this form resemble the viviparous females just described in color. They differ from such females in size, varying from 3.78 to 4.00 HOTTEN—TWO SPECIES OF APHIDIDAE 129 mm, in length of sixth antennal segment, which is shorter, .128 + .08 mm; the unguis is different in shape, not being so thick or so blunt. The hind femora are much shorter, 1.35-1.43 mm, as are also the hind tibiae, 2.28-2.59 mm. The tarsi are also shorter, those of the meta- thorax measuring only .228 mm.; antennal seg- ments III, IV, and V vary within the limits of those of the true apterous viviparous female. The sensoria on the antennae are also similar; sensoria on the hind tibiae are similar to those of the oviparous female; the cornicles have a wider base. OVIPAROUS FEMALE Size and general color.—Length from vertex to tip of anal plate 3.2-3.64 mm. Color much the same as that of apterous viviparous female. However, some specimens are more black than brown, and such lack pulverulence and have a dull appearance due to abundant hair. The head and prothroax of black specimens are often light brown; the body is not highly arched. Head and appendages.—Ocular tubercles poorly developed; width across eyes .78-.85 mm; an- tennal segments with the following proportional lengths: III, .74—.85 mm; IV, .257-.286 mm; V, .57-.386 mm; VI, .157 + .085 mm or .158 + .128 mm; unguis not so thick as that of apterous viviparous female; rostrum not reaching cor- nicles, median suture on head and thorax similar to females described; secondary sensoria dis- tributed as follows: III, 0; IV, 0-1; V, 0-2; when present small. Thorax.—Hind femora long, 1.57-1.78 mm; metathoracic tibiae, 2.71-2.84 mm; hind tibiae not disfigured by sensoria; sensoria not limited to upper half but few are present below the middle. The sensoria are irregular in shape and size, rather abundant, and hardly tuberculate. They are sometimes very difficult to determine because of the dark color of the tibiae. The hind tarsi are .828-.347 mm long. Abdomen.—Base of cornicles measuring from .286 to .371 mm; posterior portion of abdomen not drawn out. Types.—Allotype apterous male, taken Octo- ber 12, 1951. Morphotype apterous viviparous female, taken September 16, 1951 (no sensoria on tibiae). Morphotype apterous oviparous fe- male, taken October 12, 1951. All types depos- ited in the United States National Museum. 130 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 4 ICHTHYOLOGY .—Notes on the systematic status of four eel families.1 Witu1AM A, Gos.InE, University of Hawaii. (Communicated by L. P. Schultz.) Certain aspects of the classification of the eel families Derichthyidae, Simenchelidae, Ophichthidae, and Chilorhinidae are taken up here. The last is proposed as new. DERICHTHYIDAE The species Derichthys serpentinus was de- scribed by Gill (in Goode and Bean, 1895: 161, fig. 169), who erected a new genus, family, and the new order Carenchelyi for it. However, sub- sequent authors have been unanimous in placing the species with other eels in the order Anguillida (or Apodes). Regan (1912: 386) has tentatively placed Derichthys in the Congridae, but Tre- wavas (1932: 641) and Beebe (1935) have re- tained a separate family for it. In the above works on Derichthys two points of disagreement have arisen: (1) whether the premaxillaries are separate from the vomer or whether they are fused with it, and (2) whether the frontals are ankylosed to form a single bone or whether they are separated by suture. The type of Derichthys serpentinus consists of a skull 14 mm long, branchial arches, suspensoria, and pectoral girdles. In the skull the premaxil- laries are ankylosed to one another but at present are free from the vomer. Gill stated that the premaxillaries were separated from the vomer by a suture, and I see no reason to doubt this de- spite the descriptions and figures of both Tre- wavas and Beebe. In fact, still another rather indefinite suture can also be made out in the type between the vomer and ethmoid. A more unique feature among eels than the relationship between the premaxillary, ethmoid, and vomer in Derichthys is the maxillary articu- lation. This, instead of being at least in part medially with the ethmoid, is entirely forward, the front end of the maxillaries riding on sockets at either end of the transverse, premaxillary plate (Trewavas, 1932: 641, fig. 2). As to the frontals, in the type specimen of D. serpentinus they are definitely ankylosed as stated by Beebe (1935: 9), and not paired as stated for D. kempi by Trewavas (1932: 641). This discrepancy, remarked upon elsewhere (Gosline, 1951a: 201), has been resolved by a re- cent letter from Trewavas. She writes: “I have 1 Contribution No. 19, Hawaii Marine Labora- tory. examined the type of Derichthys kempi (Norman) and find that I had not slit the skin far enough to expose the frontals properly. I have now made a bigger slit and lifted the muscles and their raphe from the bones and I find that the frontals are united.” Benthenchelys, placed by Fowler (1934: 267) and. Beebe (1935: 3) in the Derichthyidae, ap- pears to be a congrid. Gorgasia, also placed in the Derichthyidae by Meek and Hildebrand (1923: 133) and Beebe (1935: 3), seems to be more nearly related to Heteroconger, which again may provisionally be considered a congrid. SIMENCHELIDAE The anatomical characters of this family, based on Simenchelys parasiticus, have been treated by Gill (1890), Regan (1912: 381), and Jaquet (1920). As in the Derichthyidae the two premaxil- laries are ankylosed, but this premaxillary plate, the ethmoid, and the vomer are again united by suture (Fig. 1). However, unlike Derichthys the maxillaries articulate with both the premaxillary plate and the ethmoid. In fact the relationships of all these bones of the snout area are exactly the same as those illustrated for the larval An- guilla by Trewavas (1932: 640, fig. 1). I think it may be assumed from these bone arrangements in the above two families and in the larval Anguilla that the ankylosis of the two premax- illaries to one another takes place earlier in life and occurred earlier in eel evolution than the fusion that gave rise to the premaxillary-ethmo- vomerine plate. Again the question of fused vs. paired frontals has arisen in the literature on Simenchelys. Regan has indicated that the frontals of the Simen- chelidae are paired. However, Jaquet (1920: 14) states that the frontals are ankylosed, as indeed they are in National Museum specimens. Once again this dilemma has been resolved by Tre- wavas. She writes (in litt.): “In our collection there is one specimen (N. Atlantic) partially dis- sected and this was probably the source of Regan’s information. There is a median ridge in the frontal region which Regan may have in- terpreted as a suture but I can find no separation of the two bones.” Aprit 1952 GOSLINE The presence of scales in one of the two genera of Simenchelidae and the maintenance of the pre- maxillaries, ethmoid, and vomer as separate en- tities are certainly prinitive for eels. However, the small transverse mouth with its short, deep maxillaries and dentaries seems to be unique in the order; whether these structures are primitive or specialized seems impossible to determine. OPHICHTHIDAE The osteology of several Hawaiian genera of ophichthids has been recently discussed (Gos- line, 1951b). The present section deals with Echelus myrus from the Mediterranean. In view of the peculiarities of this eel and of the fact that recognition or non-recognition of the family name Echelidae depends upon the systematic position of H. myrus (since this is the type species of Echelus), it will be described and fig- ured in some detail. External features—Head and body elliptical in cross section, somewhat higher than broad; head and trunk shorter than tail. Dorsal and anal low, continuous around tip of tail, the dor- sal beginning somewhat behind middle of the pectoral. Pectoral well developed, with 16 rays. Lateral line of body extending from in front of gill openings nearly to tip of tail, with about 137 pores. Gill opening wide, below pectoral base. Snout more or less acutely pointed, its length equal to about 2 eye diameters. Eye well devel- oped, its posterior border slightly ahead of rictus. Lower jaw inferior. Lips without folds, the upper somewhat fringed just behind anterior nostril; both lips with innumerable microscopic papillae. Anterior nostril in a tube; posterior nostril open- ing partly on the lateral, partly on the lower sur- face of the upper lip, the lower opening caused by a flap which covers the anterior two-thirds of the lateral opening (Fig. 2a). The pore system differs from that of other ophichthids examined (Gosline, 1952b) in lacking postorbital pores, a posterior supraorbital pore, an interorbital pore on the middorsal line, and a transverse series across the nape (Fig. 2a). Teeth multiserial on dentaries, maxillaries, premaxillary plate (fused premaxillaries), and vomer. Teeth on mavxil- laries and dentaries all small, conical, blunt, and non-depressible; those on the premaxillary simi- lar but slightly larger and with a single some- what enlarged, fixed tooth behind; those on vomer still larger, granular, rising from a sub- ovate plate which is broadest behind center. FOUR EEL FAMILIES 131 Color brown above, lighter below, with short, light bands on the head and several white spots on nape (these markings not indicated in Fig. 2a); dorsal and anal light anteriorly, with dark borders posteriorly. Lateral-line canals—The lateral-lne canals of this species have been excellently described by Allis (1903: 131). Nothing need be added to this account except to point out that the course of these canals is about as in other ophichthids, even though several of the external pores found in other members of the family are not present in Kchelus. Jaw structure—Lower jaw with the articular and angular fused as usually in eels. Premaxil- laries ankylosed to one another and to the eth- movomer, the toothed surface of the premaxil- lary area forming an angle with the rest of the upper jaw (Fig. 2b). Anterior end of maxillaries articulating with the cranium at about the point of junction between the premaxillaries and vomer. Maxillary long, extending nearly to the articular- \Y Ve A 1 ' 1 1 i I ' | 1 1 I oJ ps vo ts topm 1 B | os al pt fr | 1 | | | 1 | J ! —— | > p interorbital opening ——-—-—-—---3---- Fic. 1.—Simenchelys parasiticus: A, Ventral view of anterior end of skull; B, dorsal and some- what anterior view of bones at tip of snout; C, lateral view of anterior end of skull; all X7é. (al, Alisphenoid; et, ethmoid; fr, frontal; os, orbitosphenoid; ps, parasphenoid; pm, premaxil- lary plate; pt, pterotic; to, tooth; ts, tooth socket (its tooth missing); and vo, vomer.) 132 angular, to which it is closely attached by liga- ment, bearing multiserial teeth for nearly its entire length. There is a strong preorbital strut, apparently cartilaginous, between the maxillary and the cranium (Fig. 2b). In many, if not all eels in which the maxillaries are long and used for biting or crushing, a strut is developed be- tween the maxillary and the cranium for support of the former. In the ophichthid Brachysemophis such a strut develops behind the eye from the postorbital lateral-line canal ossicles (Gosline, 1952b). The development of this strut in Brachy- somophis has apparently pushed the eye far for- ward of its normal position in eels. In the mu- raenid Gymnothorax funebris, according to Fig. 82 of Gregory (1933: 202), both an antorbital and a postorbital strut are developed. Thus, maxillary supports of this type appear to be functional adaptations appearing here and there where needed among eels. However, the origin of the antorbital strut, where present, is dubious. That it is not an expanded lacrymal is indicated by its failure to bear any lateral line canal; that it is not a prefrontal is suggested by its apparently cartilaginous nature in Hchelus. Suspensorium.—This structure is somewhat forwardly inclined, less so than in Conger but more than in other ophichthids. Palatoptery- goid laminar, well developed for eels, adjoining the quadrate posteriorly. Opercular series —Opercle well developed be- low but more or less truncated above. Preopercle moderately developed for eels and closely ap- pressed to the posterior edge of the hyomandi- bular. Subopercle made up largely of a branchio- stegal-like bone which encircles the lower edge of the opercle. Interopercle well developed, largely underlying the preopercle. pe go i] . ! ! 1 1 ! We nee oe seu ' 1 oe JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 4 Gull arches.—Tongue not free. Branchiostegal rays 15 on each side, those of the two sides over- lapping below. Openings between the gill arches wide, except the last. Upper pharyngeal ovate, with numerous conical teeth. Cranium.—The skull of Hchulus is long and moderately low, with an interorbital opening that is longer than deep. Unlike other ophichthids examined, the skull of Echelus is abruptly trun- cate posteriorly with a prominent edge above, as in Conger. There is a slight, longitudinal, median crest running along the ankylosed frontals. The ethmoid sends a triangular wedge over the ante- rior end of the frontals. A well-developed otic bulla present. Axial skeleton—On one of the first vertebrae (the only one examined) there is no neural crest. In this character Hchelus like other ophichthids differs from the Congridae. Pectoral girdle —This structure, together with the pectoral fins, is fully developed for eels, with 4 well-formed actinosts. Discussion of Echelus.—In that Echelus myrus bears a number of structures showing a closer resemblance than any other ophichthid to the relatively unspecialized Congridae (from which the Ophichthidae was undoubtedly derived), it may be said to be a primitive member of its fam- ily. Characters on which this statement is based are: suspensorium somewhat forwardly inclined; branchiostegal rays relatively few; skull abruptly truncate posteriorly; and pectoral girdle with four actinosts. Characters in which Echelus appears to differ both from the Congridae and from other ophich- thids are: external pores of the lateral line sys- tem of the head reduced in number; a middorsal crest on the skull; and an antorbital stay be- tween the maxillary and the cranium. oe ee y= Fig. 2.—Echelus myrus: A, Lateral view of head region, X 4/5; B, lateral view of head skeleton (the teeth and branchial apparatus omitted), 4/5. (al, Alisphenoid; an, anterior nostril; ar, articular-angu- lar; da, dentary; ep, epiotic; fl, flap covering the anterior section of the posterior nostril; fr, frontal; go, gill opening; hm, hyomandibular; io, interopercle; mx, maxillary; op, opercle; os, orbitosphenoid pa, parietal; pe, pectoral fin; pn, posterior section of posterior nostril; po, preopercle; pp, palatoptery- goid; ps, parasphenoid; pt, pterotic; pv, premaxillary-ethmovomerine plate; hu, quadrate; so, supra- occipital; sp, spenotic; sr, subopercle; and st, preorbital strut.) GOSLINE Aprit 1952 Characters in which Hchelus myrus is similar to other ophichthids but differs from Conger are as follows: posterior nostril opening out on the ventrolateral surface of the upper lip; tongue not free; branchiostegal rays of the two sides over- lapping along the midventral line; otic bulla de- veloped; and neural crests apparently absent. In summary, Hchelus myrus appears, despite specializations, to be by far the most primitive (or generalized) ophichthid known. In fact, to a considerable degree it fills in the gap between the Ophichthidae and the Congridae. Within the Ophichthidae, on zoological grounds as well as for convenience in identification, two subfamilies should in my opinion be recognized: (1) the Echelinae (called Myrophinae by Gos- line in previous papers) with the dorsal and ana- continuous around the tip of tail, and (2) the Ophichthinae with the tail protruding as a fleshy point. Both of these subfamilies contain very diverse eels and both include highly spe- cialized members, but thereis no known evidence that either is polyphyletic. Because of this di- versity, the separation of Echelus, despite its peculiarities, from other fintailed ophichthids— Muraenichthys, Myrophis, etc.—as a third sub- family seems inadvisable at the present time. CHILORHINIDAE, n. fam. The family name Chilorhinidae is here pro- posed for a group of three eel genera: Chilorhinus Liitken (1851), Garmanichthys Seale (1917, of which Arenichthys Beebe and Tee-Van, 1938, appears to be a synonym), and Kaupichthys Schultz (1943). These three genera have gen- erally been placed with Echelus, Muraenichthys, etc., in the family Echelidae. However, osteo- logical investigation has shown that Kaupichthys (Gosline, 1950) and Chilorhinus (Gosline, 1951a) belong in a very different family from. Murae- nichthys (which is an ophichthid, Gosline, 1951b). At the time the above genera were investigated specimens of Hchelus were unavailable to me, and the name Hchelidae was provisionally re- tained for the family represented by Kawpichthys and Chilorhinus. That this use of the name Echelidae is untenable has been shown by the previous section of the present paper. The name Chilorhinidae is therefor substituted. Examination of a specimen of Garmanichthys apterus indicates that this genus also belongs in the Chilorhinidae. Though phylogenetically distant as has been previously pointed out, the chilorhinids bear a FOUR EEL FAMILIES 133 close superficial resemblance to the subfamily Echelinae of the Ophichthidae. The two groups can, however, be separated by a few minor super- ficial characters which may be tabulated as fol- lows: CHILORHINIDAE ECHELINAE Branchiostegal rays of | Branchiostegal rays of the two sides (usually visible through the flesh of the ‘‘neck’’) the two sides over- lapping on the mid- ventral line. never overlapping on the midventral line. Vomerine teeth biserial, the two rows widely Vomerine teeth, if present, uniserial, in separated. two or more irregular rows, or in a broad band. Finraysatthetipofthe Fin rays at the tip of tail longer than the dorsal and anal rays preceding them. tail usually shorter than the dorsal and anal rays preceding them. The three known genera of Chilorhinidae may be separated as follows: la. Pectorals present, well developed (Indo-West- PaCihic) cs piss c eaten scMaeeere or Kaupichthys 1b. Pectorals rudimentary or absent. 2a. Lower lip with a well-developed flap on either side; snout broader than long (West Indies and Hawail)............ Chilorhinus 2b. Lower lip without a downwardly-folded flap on either side; snout longer than broad (includes Arenichthys; both sides of tropical Am eriCal) inc ease eee Garmanichthys EEL CLASSIFICATION Recent examination of the osteology of certain eels (Gosline, 1950, 195la, 1951b, and the present paper) has necessitated a shift in the systematic position of several eel families. Yet much remains to be done before any basic understanding of eel classification can be attained. Not only are we ignorant of the phylogenetic relation- ships of many eel groups and of the order Anguillida itself, but the present delimitation of many eel families is awry. On the one hand families have been erected for certain species on insufficient osteological evidence; on the other the Congridae continues to form a dumping ground for all sorts of creatures (including, as my contribution, Benthenchelys, Gorgasia, and the Macro- cephenchelidae). At present then, it — is impossible to do more than add to the classification of eels set up by Regan (1912). 134 So far as I ean tell, this foundation remains sound; at the very least, a better one has never been proposed. The changes in classification necessitated by the recent work cited above can be integrated into the synopsis of eel families given by Regan (1912: 379) and amended by Trewavas (1932: 656) as follows: la. Caudal fin well developed and free from dorsal and anal. (A fossil group.)..... URENCHELIDAE 1b. Caudal fin, if present, small, and generally continuous with the dorsal and anal. 2a. Frontals divided by suture, at least pos- teriorly. 3a. Frontals divided by a suture for their entire length. 4a. Jaws not produced. 5a. No expanded auditory bulla present ANGUILLIDAE, XENOCONGRIDAE, My- ROCONGRIDAE, and MURAENIDAE 5b. Prootic and basioccipital forming an enlarged auditory bulla around a large otolith. 6a. Posterior nostril labial CHILORHINIDAE 6b. Posterior nostril on cheek HETERENCHELIDAE and Morin- GUIDAE 4b. Jaws produced.......SERRIVOMERIDAE 3b. Frontals ankylosed anteriorly NEMICHTHYIDAE and CYEMIDAE 2b. Frontals ankylosed for their entire length. 7a. Maxillaries articulating only with lateral tips of premaxillaries. ... DERICHTHYIDAE 7b. Maxillaries articulating in part or entirely with ethmoid. 8a. Jaws strong; suspensorium vertical or directed obliquely forward. 9a. Caudal vertebrae without transverse processes above haemal arches. 10a. Maxillary articulating with eth- moid at some distance from end of SHOWtP aa MURAENESOCIDAE and NEENCHELIDAE 106. Maxillary articulating with eth- moid near tip of snout. lla. Mouth a small, transverse slit across front of head SIMENCHELIDAE 116. Gape large; jaws long NETTASTOMIDAE and NESSORHAMPHIDAE 9b. Caudal vertebrae with transverse proc- esses above the haemal arches. 12a. Posterior nostril superior or lateral. (The Heterocongridae and Macro- cephenchelidae are provisionally included here.).......CONGRIDAE 12b. Posterior nostril labial. (Includes Echelinae.)........ OPHICHTHIDAE 8b. Jaws slender; suspensorium directed obliquely backward....... ILYOPHIDAE, DyssoMIDAE, and SyYNAPHOBRANCHIDAE JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 4 I wish to thank Dr. L. P. Schultz for permission to examine skeletal material in the U.S. National Museum of Simenchelys and Derichthys reported on by Gill (1890 and, in Goode and Bean, 1895, respectively), together with a preserved specimen of Garmanichthys apterus. Through the kindness of Dr. G. 8. Myers and J. Bohlke, a Stanford University specimen of Echelus myrus has been lent me; as this appears to be the only specimen of Echelus in America, I am particularly indebted to Dr. Myers for permission to dissect it partially. I also wish to thank Dr. E. Trewavas of the British Museum for examining specimens of Derichthys and Simenchelys for me. LITERATURE CITED Auutis, Epwarp PHELpPs, JR. The lateral sensory system of the Muraenidae. Int. Monatschr. Anat. und Physiol. 20: 125-170, pls. 6-8. 1903. BEEBE, WILLIAM. Deep-sea fishes of the Bermuda Oceanographic Expeditions, No. 1: Family Derichthyidae. Zoologica 20(1): 1-23, 9 figs. 1935. BEEBE, WILLIAM, and TEE-VAN, JoHN. Eastern Pacific Expeditions of the New York Zoological Society, XV: Seven new marine fishes from Lower California. Zoologica 23: 299-312, 3 pls., 5 figs. 1938. Fow.uer, Henry WEED. Descriptions of new fishes obtained 1907 to 1910, chiefly in the Philippine Islands and adjacent seas. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 85: 233-367, 117 figs. 1934. Git, THEODORE N. The osteological characters of the family Simenchelidae. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 13: 239-243. 1890. GoopE, GEORGE Brown, and BEAN, TARLETON H. Oceanic ichthyology. U. S. Nat. Mus. Spec. Bull. 2: i-xxv + 1-553 and atlas of i-xxili + 1-26, 123 pls. 1895. GosLINE, Wi1LL1AM A. The osteology and relation- ships of the echelid eel, Kaupichthys diodontus. Pacific Sei. 4: 309-314, 7 figs. 1950. . Chilorhinus brocki, a new echelid eel from Hawaii, with notes on the classification of the order Anguillida. Copeia, 1951: 195-202, 1 fig. 195la. . The osteology and classification of the ophichthid eels of the Hawaiian Islands. Pacific Sci. 5: 298-320, 18 figs. 1951b. Grecory, WiLtu1AM K. Fish skulls: a study of the evolution of natural mechanisms. Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. (new ser.) 23(2): i-vii + 75-481, 302 figs. 1933. JAQuET, Maurice. Contribution a lV’anatomie du Simenchelys parasiticus Gill. Resultats des Campagnes Scientifiques, Monaco, 55: 1-77, 5 pls. 1920 LUTKEN, Cur. Ueber die Stellung der Nasenlécher bet den Ophisurus-Arten und den mit thnen verwandten Gattungen aus der Familie der Aale. Arch. Naturg. 18(1): 255-276. 1851. Meek, Setx E., and Hrnpepranp, SAMUEL F. The marine fishes of Panama. Publ. Field Mus. Nat. Hist., zool. ser., 15(1): i-xi + 1-330, pls. 1-24. 1923. Aprit 1952 Reean, C. Tate. The osteology and classification of the teleostean fishes of the order Apodes. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8)10: 377-387, 2 figs. 1912. Scuuttz, LEONARD P. Fishes of the Phoenix and Samoan Islands...U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull 180: 1-x + 1-316, 9 pls., 27 figs. 1943. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 135 SEALE, Atvin. New species of apodal fishes. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 61(4) : 79-94. 1917. TREWAVAS, ETHELWYNN. A contribution to the classification of the fishes of the order Apodes, based on the osteology of some rare eels. Proc. Zool. Soe. London, 1932: 639-659, 4 pls., 9 figs. 1932. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 452D MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 452d meeting of the Board of Managers held in the Cosmos Club on January 14, 1952, was called to order at 8:03 p.m. by President- Elect WaLTeR RamBerG. Others in attendance were: H. 8. Rappinye, J. A. Stevenson, H. A. REHDER, CHARLES DrREcHSLER, W. F. FosHaa, A. T. McPumrson, C. F. W. MursEBECK, SARA E. Branuam, J. J. Fanny, E. H. Watker, WM. A. Dayton, C. A. Butts, R. 8. Dirty, A. M. GRIFFIN, FLoyp Hoven, M. A. Mason, F. M. DEFANDORF, and, by invitation, MarGareErT Pirr- MAN, J. R. Swatien, G. P. Watton, B. D. Van Evera, and G. H. Coons. Chairman WALTON presented the report of the Committee on Awards for Scientific achievement. Minton SpymMour ScHEcHTER, of the Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, was nomi- nated for the Award in the Physical Sciences; Epwarp WiLuiaM Baker, Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, for the Award in the Biological Sciences; and Max A. Koutmr, of the Weather Bureau, for the Award in the Engi- neering Sciences. For the Teaching of Science, the first award of its kind to be requested of the Board since this award was approved in principle in 1950, the Committee recommended that in lieu of the regular award, which bears the age limitation of 40, a special award be presented to Howarp B. Owens, biology teacher in the Hyattsville High School, for his outstanding teaching and for his work in arousing the enthu- siasm of the students who come in contact with him. The Managers approved the granting of the awards as recommended. Chairman Mason of the Committee on En- couragement of Science Talent spoke of activities in connection with the forthcoming 4th District Talent Search, the National Science Talent Fair, and the 5th Annual Science Fair to be held in Washington. Funds accruing from the Academy- sponsored benefit showing of the film Kon-Tiki should ease the financial problems that arise on these occasions where there is no obvious source of financial support. The Secretary read a letter dated January 4, 1952, from N. R. Ellis, secretary-treasurer of the Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine, expressing the interest of this Society in becoming affliated with the Academy. It was moved and approved that the President of the Academy appoint a special committee to consider the application and bylaws of the Society and make suitable recommendations to the Board. The Secretary read a letter from the business manager of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, listing the following amounts available for Grants-in-Aid: Balance for 1950.............. $4.50 Hor slOD eat: ZocH...5- +)... see GroLocy.—Brightseat formation, a new name for sediments of Paleo- cene age in Maryland. Rosprert R. BENNETT and GLENN GENE COLLINS) 0 38) Pie oke oe Ga Sone Me anes So acu RO PaLEonTOLOGY.—Nomenclatural notes on carditids and lucinids. A. Borany.—New species of grasses from Venezuela. AGNES CHASE.... Entomotocy.—Notes on Bruchidae affecting the Anacardiaceae, in- cluding the description of a new genus. JOHN COLBURN BRIDWELL. EntTomMoLoey.—Descriptions and notes on two rare species of Aphididae. BY ©) HOTTIES hie oo Sto ae cape hole Mey G apo ae duane ce ey Tee IcutHyoLocy.—Notes on the systematic status of four eel families. Wititam A. GOSLINE 20. Jase ble. bo os oo). er This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals Page 105 114 VoL. 42 May 1952 No. 5 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS WILLIAM F. Fosuae J. P. E. Morrison JOHN C. EwERs U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS F. A. Cuace, JR. Miriam L. BomHarp BIOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrMan R. K. Coox CHEMISTRY PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS T. P. THAYER PHILIP DRUCKER GEOLOGY ANTHROPOLOGY C. W. SaABROSKY ENTOMOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Roya & GUILFORD AVEs. Ba.Lrimore, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912,at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925. Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to ‘ correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate): Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26.00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRoceEDINGs should be sent to Haraup A. RexapER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouRNAL.—Per year....................--+-+---+ $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available.*................ — _ Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.).......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JourRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 41, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $348.50. Monoerapu No. 1, “The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’ by Herbert Friedmann. .$4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete...........................-:. $25.00 Single volumes; unbound!) 0 a2 ee es Bek ee eee 2.00 Single numbers) 2): Sey see ead Sn ae am RES ee 25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after date of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’”’ and aoe to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappieye, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoLuME 42 May 1952 NOM SYSTEMATIC ZOOLOGY .—Nomenclature and grammar. Cesarb EMiviant, Uni- versity of Chicago.! (Communicated by James Steele Williams.) Today, more than ever before, a student of biological sciences finds it difficult to fol- low both nomenclatural and grammatical rules. Increasing disregard for the classical languages, particularly in the United States, Russia, and the Orient, is largely respon- sible. Taxonomic rules state in essence that: 1. Nomenclature must use the Latin language. 2. An organism is known by a generic and a specific? name (possibly also by a sub- generic and a subspecific name). 3. These names may be natural or artificial words. 4. Generic names must be used as sub- stantives. 5. Specific adjectives (and presumably participles and pronouns) must conform in gender to the generic names with which they are associated. Three main problems originate from these rules: 1. Substantives, adjectives, participles, and pronouns; other parts of speech; and artificial words must be distinguished. 2. Gender of generic substantives must be determined. 3. Specific adjectives, participles, and pronouns must be given the proper gender endings. Several authors in recent years have pro- posed different solutions of these problems. McAtee (1928) suggested that ‘‘generic and subordinate names... shall be regarded 1 The writer is indebted to Dr. J. Marvin Wel-- ler, of the University of Chicago, for revising the manuscript. 2 The term specific is used here and in the fol- lowing as equivalent to trivial. The term specific is preferred because of its relations to the well- aecepted terms generic and subspecific. To desig- nate the whole nameof a species(generic + specific names) the term species name should be used. JUNS 8d2 .as arbitrary combinations of letters’ and, therefore, except for proved typo- graphical errors, remain as the first author used them. Guba and Linder (1932) proposed to keep unchanged the original spelling even if erroneous. Blackwelder (1941) repeated suggestions previously made by Casey (1890) for determining the gender of generic names by their endings and published lists of end- ings for these determinations. Richter recom- mended that all specific adjectives and all specific substantives with -us (or -er), -a, and -wm endings, should be used in the feminine form (Richter, 1942; Weller, 1950; Bartenstein, 1950). Other authors have made occasional reference to these problems, often publishing partly incorrect statements. Thus Baker (1929) reported that Zonitordes should be masculine; Macfadyen and Kenny (1934) and Thalmann (1950) classified as masculine all names ending in -7des, -ztes, and -ozdes; and Bartenstein (1950) concluded that end- ings in -ztes, -on, and -opsis indicate the masculine. Some of the suggestions that have been made (McAtee, 1928; Guba and Linder, 1932), if accepted, would increase the diffi- culties of nomenclature because both specific names and their particular endings would have to be remembered. Blackwelder’s lists may be misleading, because there are excep- tions to all such generalities. Richter has not solved these problems either because substantives, adjectives, participles, and pronouns must still be identified and proper handling of the feminine forms is required. Also his suggestion that all substantives which may end in -us (or -er), -a, and -wm be used in the feminine form, if applied to words that are exclusively substantives, would be likely to create new names and thus add to the confusion. 138 All the foregoing suggestions aim at avoid- ing the difficulties of Latin grammar. It is the opinion of the writer that, if the Latin language is used, it is impossible to ignore its rules; and that strict observance of these rules is really not so difficult and offers the most convenient solution to the whole prob- lem. : Students are inclined to spend much time checking earlier authors to resolve ortho- graphic doubts. A quicker and safer course is to consult good Latin and Greek diction- aries. As shown below, this can be done easily by persons totally ignorant of the classics. A rational use of dictionaries and the few suggestions that follow, will help to solve most controversial issues definitely. The exceptions that may occur do not im- pair the procedure. GENERIC NAME I. IF GENERIC NAME IS A SUBSTANTIVE 1. Simple substantives. Ex.: Arca, Asperitas, Battus, Chiton, Lagena, Murex, Oenone, Venus. Consult dictionaries for gender determinations. 2. Compound substantives. Ex.: Awlocaulis, Cyphosoma, Dictyonema, Homotrema, Orthoceras, Tetrataxis. Determine the genders of the last parts (-caulis, -soma, -nema, etc.) by looking them up in the dictionaries. 3. Simple or compound substantives with di- minutive suffixes -lus, -ulus, -culus, -unculus, -inus, -ellus, -tllus, -iolus, and their feminine (-a) and neuter (-wm) forms. Ex.: Atrypina, Atrypella, Avicula, Modiolus, Pectunculus, Scutella, Vulvu- lina, Asonoina, Cushmanella, Haeckelina, Paal- zowella, Schubertella, Wiesnerella. Gender is de- termined by endings (-ws, m; -a, f.; -wm, n.). Many words having these endings, however, are not diminutive forms, and dictionaries should be consulted in all cases of doubt. Barbaric names (Asanoina, Cushmanella, Haeckelina, etc.) should be easily recognizable. II. IF GENERIC NAME IS A SUBSTANTIVIZED ADJECTIVE OR PARTICIPLE 1. Simple or compound adjectives and parti- ciples with three endings (in Latin mostly: -us or -er, m.; -a, f.; -wm, n.; in Greek mostly: -os, m.; -n, {.; -ov, n.). Ex.: adjectives: Arctica, Blain- villea, Bronteus, Carpenteria, Entosolenia, Flintia, Indiana, Metagraulos, Michelinia, Viviparus; par- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 5 ticiples: Corrugata, Composita, Optatus. Gender is determined by ending. 2. Simple or compound adjectives with two endings (in Latin: -ts, m. and f.; -e, n.; in Greek: -OS, -WV, -Ws, -ns, -ls, -us, m. and f.; -ov, -wy, -es, -t, -v, n.). Ex.: Datphron, Epelys, Monoceros, Vitalis. These names have one ending for mascu- line and feminine, and another for neuter. Note that since the Greek endings -ov, -wy, and -ns, -€s, are transliterated into Latin simply as -on and -es, transliterated names of this type do not indicate any particular gender. 3. Simple or compound adjectives and parti- ciples with one ending (various types). Many of these names are indifferently masculine, feminine, or neuter (Vagans, Anomalinoides, and _prac- tically all names in -oides). Others may be mas- culine or feminine (Apus, Harpax, Monyz, Calliops, Ogygopsis, most classical and all post- classical names ending in -ops and -opsis derived from the Greek words 6y, ay, and dis, meaning “look, appearance’’). A few are exclusively mas- culine (Gennadas) or feminine (Hyalopis, Mon- opis). It should be noted that some names ending in -oides and several derived from 6y, yp, and dys are substantives and, therefore, have deter- minate genders (Ooides, Cyclops, Diopsis). On the other hand, many names with the endings -ops and -opsis (Penelops, Scalops, Lycopsis) are sub- stantives having different etymologies and gen- ders (usually masculine, but also feminine). Use of dictionaries is necessary to distinguish these. Adjectives of type 2 and 3, and participles of type 3, have caused the greatest confusion in nomenclature, because their genders are very often indeterminate. It would be most helpful if these were established by convention. This can be done easily if these names are thought of as referring to the word forma (or concha for shelled animals). Thus their genders would be established as feminine. The same procedure could be applied to substantives that may be either masculine or feminine (Pais, Vindex), thus considering them as feminine. Names that may be either substan- tives or adjectives (T’ribon) should be interpreted as substantives, to agree with the substantival character of the generic name. II]. 1rF GENERIC NAME IS ANOTHER PART OF SPEECH 1. Pronouns. Ex.: Mea, Quisque, Utra. Most pronouns have different forms for different gen- ders. wage May 1952 2. Verbs, participles excepted, and other parts of speech. Ex.: Vireo, Extra, Ita, Parce. All these names should be considered neuter. IV. IF GENERIC NAME IS AN ARTIFICIAL, BARBARIC, OR MISSPELLED WORD 1. Artificial combinations of letters Ex.: Aa, Neda, Nonion, Salifa, Torix. 2. Barbaric unlatinized names. Ex.: Macao, Scalez, Vanikoro. 3. Names with misspelled endings. Ex.: Bato- crinus (for Batocrinon), Graphiadactyllis (for Graphiodactylus). The genders of these names can be established as masculine or neuter if they have obvious mas- culine or neuter endings. All others, including barbaric names, may be considered as feminine (in analogy to the suggestion in II, 3 above). SPECIFIC NAMES I. IF SPECIFIC NAME IS A SUBSTANTIVE Specific substantives may be either in the nominative singular in apposition to the generic name (Retepora archimedes), or in the genitive as a possessive term (Rotalia beccari). Il. IF SPECIFIC NAME IS AN ADJECTIVE OR A PARTICIPLE The gender of a specific adjective or participle must conform with the gender of the generic name. Simple instructions on how to select proper gender endings are given below. It should be noted that accordance must be observed also with compound names like acutangulus, which, if used with a feminine generic name, becomes acutangula, or with a neuter name acutangulum (cfr. semicanis, -e; semicirculus, -a, -um,; sexangu- lus, -a, -um; wnicalamus, -a, -wm; unimanus, -a, -um; etc.). Names that may be either substantives or ad- jectives should be considered adjectives in agree- ment with the adjectival character of the specific name. II]. IF SPECIFIC NAME IS ANOTHER PART OF SPEECH 1. Pronouns. Pronouns that have different forms for different genders should follow accord- ance rules (Spondylospira alia). 2. Verbs, participles excluded, and other parts of speech. All these names should be considered invariably as appositions. EMILIANI: NOMENCLATURE AND GRAMMAR 139 IV. IF SPECIFIC NAME IS AN ARTIFICIAL, BARBARIC, OR MISSPELLED WORD Names of this type similar to those used for generic names have been employed for species. They should be treated invariably as appositions. USE OF LATIN AND GREEK DICTIONARIES I. LATIN AND GREEK ALPHABETS To consult Latin and Greek dictionaries it is necessary to know the Greek equivalents of Latin letters. These are given below: a 22, t i p r Bb (352 Op Ie g,s 8 y g r ] T t Cae | Bb m v y ee v n ’ ph eZ g x x ch mn e to) co) y ps d th 7 p a) o II. LATIN AND GREEK DICTIONARIES Recommended dictionaries are: Harper’s Latin dictionary and Liddell and Scott’s A Greek-Eng- lish lexicon. For Greek proper names, not in- cluded in Liddell and Scott, Harper’s Dictionary of classical literature and antiquities may be used. These are standard dictionaries available at all good libraries. Special problems can be solved by consulting the following larger dictionaries: Forcellini: Totius Latinitatis lexicon; Estennes: Thesaurus Graecae linguae; De-Vit: Totius Latinitatis onomasticon. III. USE OF LATIN DICTIONARIES In the Latin dictionaries above mentioned, a substantive is represented by a word followed by the genitive ending and a gender notation: m. for masculine; f., for feminine; and n., for neuter. Ex.: lupus, t, m. An adjective or a participle is represented by a word followed by: 1. Two gender endings and the notation adj. or Part. Ex.: albus, a, wm, adj.; expansus, a, um, Part. These names have different forms for the three genders: albus and expansus for the mas- culine; alba and expansa for the feminine; albwm and expanswm for the neuter. 2. A gender ending and the notation adj. Ex.: habilis, e, adj. These adjectives have the same form, habilis, for the masculine and feminine and another, habile, for the neuter. 140 3. The genitive ending and the notation adj. or Part. Ex.: audax, acts, adj.; virens, entis, Part. Such names have the same endings for all genders. Words other than substantives, adjectives, or participles, are easily recognized by such nota- tions as pron., adv., prep., conj., ete., or by their English meaning. TV. USE Greek, in contrast to Latin, has articles which are used in the dictionaries to indicate gender. These are: 6 masculine; 7 feminine; and 70 neuter. In the Greek dictionaries above mentioned, substantives are represented by a word followed by the article. Ex.: éo7paxov, 76, which is conse- quently neuter. An adjective is represented by a word fol- lowed by: 1. Two gender endings. Ex.: dixavos, 4, ov. These adjectives have different forms for the three genders:, dixavos m.; duxaln, f.; dixacoy, n. OF THE GREEK DICTIONARIES 2. One gender ending. Ex.: avadoyos, ov; evyevns, és. In such cases, the first forms, avadoyos, evyerns, are either masculine or fem- inine, and the second ones, avadoyor, evyevés, are neuter. 3. The genitive ending and two articles. Ex.: apmaé, ayos, 0, 7; gawov, ozos, 6, 7. Such names have the same ending for both masculine and feminine and no neuter form. Words that are neither substantives nor adjec- tives, may be recognized by their English mean- ing. LATINIZATION OF GREEK WORDS Greek words are latinized by transliterating according to the equivalents noted above and in addition the following: final 7 a final os us yx neh é,7 he a e final ov um yk ne i hi €, 7 i ov u py ida 6, @ ho ol,w e 1Y ng a ha v hy Also it should be noted that Greek adjectives with the two endings -os, m. and f.; -ov, n., have three forms in Latin: avadoyos, analogus, m.; avadoyos, analoga, f.; avadoyov, analogum, n.; BapBapos, barbarus, m.; BapBapos, barbara, f.; BapBapov, barbarum, n. DETERMINATION OF GENDER Two examples will suffice to illustrate the proc- ess of determining the genders of names. Consider the generic names Lepas and Cyphosoma. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 42, No. 5 In the Latin dictionary Lepas is found as Lepas, adis, f., and therefore this is a feminine substantive. Compound words usually will not be found as such in the dictionaries. However, they will be easily recognized because their initial parts will be found as independent words. Once the com- pound character of the word has been recognized, only its latter part needs to be considered for the gender determination. Thus Cyphosoma is a com- pound word formed by Cypho and soma. The latter does not occur in the Latin dictionary. By transliteration into Greek this becomes goa or cwua (Latin o corresponds to the two Greek letters o and w). The latter appears in the Greek dictionary as o@ma ,7o. Cyphosoma is therefore a neuter substantive. LIMITATIONS Some possibilities of error or doubt remain: 1. Misspelled names and failure to recognize barbaric and artificial words as such may lead to wrong identifications in the dictionaries. 2. Declinable words in cases other than the nominative singular (Amantis) may not be found in the dictionaries. 3. The same word may be found to have dif- ferent values and meanings. As suggested, names that may be either substantives or adjectives should be considered substantives, if used as generic names, or adjectives, if used as specific names. Other names may be either substantives or adverbs (Parwm), pronouns or adverb (Alia), verbs or adverbs (Parce), etc. No rule can be set for these names. and each must be considered individually. They occur very rarely. BIBLIOGRAPHY Baker, H. B. Gender in generic names. Nautilus 43: 139-40. 1929. BaRTENSTEIN, H. Do specific names of the For- aminifera accord with the rules of nomencla- ture? Contr. Cushman Found. Foram. Res. 1: 79-80. 1950. BLACKWELDER, R. E. The gender of scientific names in zoology. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 31: 135-140. 1941. Casry, T. L. Coleopterological notes: Pt. 2. Ann. New York Acad. Sei. 5: 307-504. 1890. Guspa, EB. F., ann Linprer, D. H. Mycological nomenclature. Mycologia 24: 415-419. 1982. Kkrrrakorr, 8S. G. Quelques remarques nomencla- toriales. Bull. et Ann. Soc. Ent. Belgique 85: 173-79. 1949. Macrapyen, W. A., and Kenny, HE. J. A. On the correct writing in form and gender of the names of the Foraminifera. Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc. (3) 54: 177-81. 1934. May 1952 MecArezr, W. L. Automatic nomenclature. Proc. Ent. Soc. Washington 30: 72-76. 1928. RicuTER, R. Ist eine unverdnderliche Form des Art-Namens méglich? Senckenb. 25: 340-356. 1942. ——. Die ‘‘Berichtung’’ von Namen nach Arti- kel IRZN, an den Fallen senckenbergit und smithae c/a smithi. Senckenb. 31: 269-72. 1950. RopertTson, C. About nomenclature. Amer. Nat. 67: 53-61. 1933. ScHENK, EK. T., anp McMasrers. J. M. Proced- ure in taxonomy, rev. ed., 93 pp. Stanford, Calif., and London, 1948. LOEBLICH AND TAPPAN: ADERCOTRYMA 141 Srarnrortu, R.M.Nomenclatural notes on Pullenia and Cibicides. Journ. Pal. 23: 436-438. 1949. Comments to “‘A Pitfall of Paleontological ‘Latin’.’ Journ. Pal, 24: 504-595. 1950. THALMANN, H. W. ‘Foraminifera from the Tertiary of the Dominican Republic,’ by Pedro Joaquin Bermudez (review). Bull. Amer. Assoc. Petr. Geol. 34: 2227-2229. 1950. Van Beuien, R. C. A_ pitfall of paleontological “Latin.’ Journ. Pal. 24: 504. 1959. Weer, J. M. Ist eine wnverdnderliche rorm des Art-Namens méglich? (review). Journ. Pal. 24: 507-12. 1950. ZOOLOGY .—Adercotryma, a new Recent foraminiferal genus from the Arctic. ALFRED R. Lorsuica, JR., and HELEN Tappan, U.S. National Museum. In a current restudy of the foraminiferal genotype species, the writers have encoun- tered numerous species that do not agree with the generic descriptions or the genotype species of the genera to which they had been assigned. This is especially true of the Lituolidae. In his excellent work on the Foraminifera of the Gullmar Fjord and the Skagerak, Héglund (1947, p. 132) did much to clarify some of these problems and sub- divided the genus Haplophragmoides Cush- man. From Haplophragmoides sensu stricto he differentiated two genera, Labrospira Héglund and Ammoscalaria Héglund. How- ever, the writers feel that one species which Hoéglund treated in this paper, Haplophrag- moides glomeratum (Brady) is also sufficiently distinct to warrant separate generic status, based on differences in shell morphology and form and position of aperture. These features are considered to be of fundamental im- portance in the classification of the Fora- minifera. Family LirvoLipar Adercotryma Loeblich and Tappan, n. gen. Genotype (type species): Lituola glomerata Brady, 1878. Test free, planispiral. subglobular or ovate, elongate in the direction of the axis of coiling, slightly asymmetrical; wall agglutinated; aper- ture may be lacking in the final chamber, or when present is interio-marginal, forming a low slit or arch near the umbilicus of one side, and closer to the umbilicus than to the periphery. Remarks —Adercotryma differs from Haplo- phragmoides Cushman, as based on the genotype species, in being somewhat asymmetrical, in being completely involute, rather than slightly evolute, in having the greatest dimension in the axis of coiling, rather than in being somewhat com- pressed, and inthe character of the aperture, which is found near the umbilicus of one side rather than in the plane of coiling at the periphery, or may even be completely lacking in the final chamber. Adercotryma glomeratum (Brady) Figs. 1-4 Lituola glomerata Brady, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, 1: 433, pl. 20, figs. la-c. 1878. Haplophragmium glomeratum (Brady) Goés, Kong]. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl. 25 (9): 23, pl. 5, figs. 134-139. 1894. Haplophragmoides glomeratum (Brady) Cushman, U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 71 (1): 104, figs. 158- 161. 1910; U. S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 104, pt. 2: 47, pl. 9, fig. 6. 1920; Héglund, Zool. Bidrag Uppsala: 135, pl. 10, figs. 3-4, text fig. 112, 1947; Cushman, Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. Spec. Publ. 23: 28, pl. 2, fig. 16. 1948. Test free, subglobular to slightly ovate, plani- spiral but somewhat asymmetrical, with about two whorls present, greatest dimension in the axis of coiling, periphery broadly rounded; cham- bers few in number, only the four of the final whorl visible, very broad and low, slightly in- flated, somewhat wedge-shaped with the narrower portion on the side with the aperture; sutures distinct, rather straight, slightly constricted; wall rather coarsely arenaceous, with considerable cement between the grains; aperture may be indistinct or lacking, or form a short slit or low arch at the inner margin of the final chamber, about one-half to two-thirds the distance from the periphery to the umbilicus, on the narrower side of the test. 142 Remarks.—Brady (1878, p. 483) in describing this species states, ‘“Aperture at the inner margin of the terminal chamber, near the exterior of the corresponding segment of the previous convolu- tion, simple, often obscure.’ Cushman (1948, p. 28) states that the aperture is “a short slit at the base of the chamber, often obscured by sand grains.” It remained for Héglund (1947, p. 135, pl. 10, fig. 4) to clearly demonstrate the position of this aperture. He found the aperture to be ‘Gnterio-marginal, forming a short slit at the margin of the last chamber, near the narrow end of the oviform test, most frequently indistinct or even lacking.” In any large series of specimens, apertures are occasionally seen. These are of two types, either a low arch about halfway between the periphery and the umbilicus (Figs. 2, 3, 4b) or forming a slit that extends along the inner mar- gin of the final chamber to the umbilicus (Fig. 1b). Héglund suggested that specimens lacking an aperture might be in a growth stage in which it had not yet been developed. It is possible that JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 5 different stages of growth may account for the two variations of apertures here mentioned. Types and occurrence.—Figured hypotypes (USNM P. 829a-c) and unfigured hypotypes (USNM P. 830) from mud and sand bottom off the south end of Humboldt Glacier, northwest Greenland at a depth of 110 fathoms; collected by Capt. Robert A. Bartlett. Figured hypotype (USMN P. 831) and unfigured hypotypes (USNM P. 832) at a depth of 50 to 57 fathoms, off Clav- ering Island, northeast Greenland; collected by Capt. Robert A. Bartlett. This species has been widely reecrded in both the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. REFERENCES Brapy, H. B. On the reticularian and radiolarian Rhizopoda (Foraminifera and Polycystina) of the North-Polar Expedition of 1875-76. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 5, 1: 425-440. 1878. CusHMAN, J. A. Arctic Foraminifera. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. Spec. Publ. 23: 1-79. 1948. H6atunp, H. Foraminifera in the Gullmar Fjord and the Skagerak. Zool. Bidrag Uppsala 26: 1-328. 1947. Fires. 1-t.—Adercotryma glomeratum (Brady): 1a, Side view of hypotype (USNM P. 831) showing four chambers of final whorl, and aperture extending into the umbilical area; 1b, edge view of same showing test slightly elongated along axis of coiling, somewhat wedge-shaped chambers and slitlike aperture; 2, edge view of hypotvpe (USNM P. 829a) showing low archlike aperture; 3, edge view of hypotype (USNM p. 829b) showing short slitlike aperture; 4a, side view of hypotype (USNM P. 829c); 4b, edge view of same showing low arched aperture. Illustrations are shaded camera-lucida drawings by Sally D. Lee, scientific illustrator, Smithsonian Institution. All X150. May 1952 ANDERSON: BUCCELLA, NEW GENUS OF FORAMINIFERA 143 ZOOLOGY —Buceella, a new genus of the rotalid Foraminifera. HARoLD V. ANDER- smN, Louisiana State University. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) In 1948-1950, while working with foram- iniferal faunules from the mudlumps_ off the Passes of the Mississippi River, the need for a new genus of Foraminifera became apparent. The species selected as the geno- type, and also designated the genotype in this paper, has recently been described by Phleger and Parker (1951) as Hponides hanna. The morphologic feature of HL. hannai that makes the species untenable as an Eponides—the presence of multiple aper- tures on the ventral side of the test—con- stitutes the diagnostic morphologic feature of the new genus Buccella introduced in this paper. Also characteristic of #. hannaz is a coat- ing of pustules on the ventral side of the test. This morphologic feature was the medium by which the following species and varieties of Hponides in the U. 8. National Museum and Cushman Collections were brought into the present study: Eponides alabamensis Cushman and McGlamery, 1938 Eponides choctawensis Cushman and McGlamery, 1938 Eponides frigida (Cushman), 1921 (1922) Eponides frigida (Cushman), var. calida Cushman and Cole, 1930 Eponides hanna Phieger and Parker, 1951 Eponides mansfieldi Cushman, 1930 Eponides mansfieldi Cushman, var. oregonensis Cushman, Stewart and Stewart, 1947 (1948) Eponides peruviana (d’Orbigny), Cushman and Kellett, 1929; Cushman, Stewart and Stewart 1930; and Cushman and Parker, 1931 Eponides vicksburgensis Cushman and _ Ellisor, 1931 When the types of the above species were studied, discrepancies were noted between the descriptions and illustrations and the actual specimens, and within suites of speci- mens bearing the same specific designation. As a result of these discrepancies, three new species of the genus Buccella (depressa, musitata, and parkerae) are described, and five species of Eponides (hannaz, frigida, mansfieldi, mansfieldi var. oregonensis, and vicksburgensis) are placed in the genus Buccella. Emended descriptions and new figures of the above species of ‘‘Hponides,”’ with the exception of “H.”’ mansfieldi var. oregonensis, are presented to record the morphologic features omitted in the original descriptions that justify the assignment of these species to the genus Buccella. Also as a result of this study, ‘“Hponides”’ frigida (Cushman) is eliminated as a typical species of H’ponides as suggested by Hofker (1950). Acknowledgments.—The preparation of this paper was facilitated by the following people whose assistance and contributions are gratefully acknowledged: Dr. G. Arthur Cooper and Dr. Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr., U. 8. National Museum, who placed the National Museum samples and equipment at the writer’s disposal and aided in the preparation of this report; Miss Ruth Todd, U.S. Geological Survey, who reviewed the manuscript and supplied the samples from which the new species were described; Mrs. Sally Lee, who did such a commendable job in the preparation of the illustrations; and my wife, Dorothy S. Andersen, who assisted in the final preparation of the manuscript. Family RoraiipAE Buccella Andersen, new genus Genotype: Hponides hannav Phleger and Parker. Test free, calcareous perforate, multilocular with chambers arranged in a trochoid coil; bi- convex. Dorsal side with all chambers and sutures visible; ventral side with sutures, umbilicus, and basal margin of adult chamber concealed wholly or in part with a coating of pustulose material. The primary aperture, interiomarginally situated about midway between the umbilicus and periph- ery on the ventral and anterior side of the last- formed chamber, is visible only from the interior of the chamber on well-preserved specimens. Single or multiple supplementary apertures, visible in some species, are developed at the postero-sutural margin of each chamber on the ventral side of the test and are typically situated in the distal portion of the chamber near the periphery. Remarks.—The most obvious feature of the genus Buccella is the development of pustules on the ventral side of the test, which conceals the sutures, umbilicus, and basal, anterior margin 144 of the adult chamber. The diagnostic feature of Buccella is its supplementary apertures that are visible in a few species, but concealed in most. Weathering usually reveals the position and shape of the supplementary apertures in those species in which well-preserved specimens bear a thick coating of pustules along the ventral sutures. Buccella can be differentiated from Eponides on the basis of the pustulose coating and supple- mentary apertures on the ventral side of the test, and from Pseudoeponides by the absence of elongate slits on the dorsal side of the chambers. Eponides has a single, simple and visible aperture at the base of the last formed chamber between the closed umbilicus and the periphery on the ventral side of the test. Pseudoeponides has a small, crescentic opening at the ventral border of the last chamber; loop-shaped openings along the ventral sutures radiating from the umbilicus; and elongate slits on the dorsal side at the middle part of the inner margin of each chamber. Range.—Oligocene to Recent. Buccella hannai (Phleger and Parker) Figs. 3a-c Eponides hannai Phleger and Parker, Geol. Soc. Amer. Mem. 46: 21, pl. 10, figs. 11-14. 1951. Emended diagnosis.—Test small; trochoid; biconvex, ranging from specimens with equal convexity on dorsal and ventral sides to speci- mens that are extremely convex on the dorsal side and nearly flat on the ventral side. Dorsal side with surface smooth, finely perforate and hyaline (in well-preserved specimens); and with curved and limbate sutures that form the periph- eral margin of each chamber. Ventral side with surface more coarsely perforate than the dorsal surface; sutures depressed and radial; chambers slightly inflated; and with umbilicus, sutures, and anterior basal margin of last-formed chamber bearing a coating of pustulose material. Periph- ery distinctly lobulate; typically acute and lim- bate although an occasional specimen (not necessarily all young specimens) has a very rounded periphery. The number of chambers in the last-formed whorl range from 7 to 9, the most common being 8. Adult tests have 3 to 34 coils. The only visible apertures are the supple- mentary apertures on the ventral side of the test. Each aperture is a low arched opening located at the posterosutural margin of each JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES von. 42, No. 5 chamber. In those specimens with an acute periphery, the supplementary apertures are in a slight depression at the outer margin of the suture near the periphery. In those specimens with a rounded periphery, the apertures are located about midway between the periphery and the umbilicus. When viewed from the interior, the adult chamber has an irregular-shaped primary aper- ture at the base and inner margin of the anterior wall; a septal foramen irregularly elliptical in outline and typically areal in the posterior wall that connects chambers in the same coil; and, in those forms examined, a round, septal foramen dorsally situated that connects adjacent cham- bers in previous coils. Dimensions of figured specimen: Maximum diameter 0.38 mm.; maximum thickness 0.19 mm. Remarks.—The typical form of Buccella hannai is easily distinguished from all other Recent species. It can be differentiated from B. inusitata by its smaller test and single posterosutural aperture in each chamber; from B. frigida by its less inflated test and visible supplementary aper- tures; and from B. depressa by its acute periph- ery, convex umbilicus, and visible supplementary apertures. The Oligocene form B. vicksburgensis, which might conceivably be the ancestor of B. hannai, has a less distinctly lobulate periphery and lacks the visible supplementary apertures of B. hannav. Types and occurrence-—Reported from depths less than 100 meters in the northwest Gulf of Mexico (Phleger and Parker, 1951). Holotype (U.S.N.M. no. P. 835) and paratypes (U.S.N.M. nos. P. 8386 and P. 838) from station 374 (lat. 28°24’ N., long. 94°42.5’ W.) at 35 meters water depth. Paratype (U.S.N.M. no. P. 837) from station 288 (lat. 26°30.5’ N., long 96°33’ W.) at 59 meters water depth. Also recovered from a mudlump island (L.8.U. Geology Museum Sample no. M-144) off South Pass of the Mississippi River, Louisiana (H. V. Howe Collection no. 4435). Buccella frigida (Cushman) Figs. 4a-c, 5, 6a-e Pulvinulina frigida Cushman, Contr. Can. Biol. 1921: 12. 1922. Eponides frigida (Cushman), Cushman, U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 104, pt. 8: 45 (in part). 1931. Eponides frigidus (Cushman), Cushman, Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 17: 37, pl. 9, figs. 16, 17. 1941. f May 1952 Eponides frigida (Cushman), var. calida Cushman and Cole, Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 6 (4): 98, pl. 13, figs. 13a-e. 1930; Cushman, U. S. Nat. Mus., Bull. 104, pt. 8: 47. 1981; Cush- man, Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. Special Publ. 12: 34, pl. 4, figs. 19, 20. 1944. Emended diagnosis —Test small; trochoid; bi- convex. Dorsal side with smooth surface; and with narrow, slightly curved and limbate sutures oriented oblique to the peripheral margin. Ven- tral side with surface smooth and finely per- forate; sutures slightly depressed, curved to radial, and filled with opaque pustulose material; chambers slightly inflated; and with umbilicus and basal margin of last-formed chamber bearing a thick coatmg of pustules. Periphery slightly lobulate, and broadly rounded. The number of chambers in the last-formed whorl range from 5 to 7, the most common being 6. Adult tests have 2% to 3 coils. In well-preserved specimens, all apertures are concealed by pustulose material. Weathered specimens exhibit, as shown in Fig. 5, an arched primary aperture at the basal margin of the final chamber about midway between the umbilicus and periphery, and low arched supplementary apertures located in slight depressions at the outer margin of the sutures near the periphery. When viewed from the interior, narrow septal foramen, typically areal, connect chambers in the same coil. Dimensions of figured specimens: lectotype (Figs. 6a-c), maximum diameter 0.46 mm., maximum thickness 0.20 mm.; hypotype (Figs. 4a—c), maximum diameter 0.46 mm., maximum thickness 0.22 mm.; and hypotype (Fig. 5), maximum diameter 0.40 mm., maximum thick- ness 0.20 mm. Remarks.—The redefinition of Buccella frigida (Cushman) resulting from this study can be at- tributed to two factors: (1) That none of the original specimens identified as Pulvinulina fri- gida Cushman (1921) has been figured; and (2) that the literature has never clearly demonstrated the difference between Hponides frigidus (Cush- man) and £#. frigida (Cushman), Var. calida Cushman and Cole. Subsequent to 1931, Cushman designated three cotypes of “H.” frigidus (Cushman Collection nos. 3031 (two specimens) and 3032 (one speci- men)). On the basis of these cotypes, ‘“H.”’ frigida (Cushman), var. calida Cushman and Cole has to be placed in synonvmy with “7.” ANDERSON: BUCCELLA, NEW GENUS OF FORAMINIFERA 145 frigidus. This observation is insured in this paper by refiguring the holotype of “E.” frigida, var. calida (Fig. 4), and by figuring for the first time im any publication one of the cotypes (herein designated the lectotype) of “EH.” frigidus (Fie. 6). Buccella frigida (Cushman) is an extremely variable species. The typical form is relatively small and robust, with a broadly rounded periph- ery, six to seven chambers in each whorl, and ventral sutures that are slightly curved. This form commonly occurs in samples from Hudson Bay and along the Atlantic coast as far south as Maryland. The Pacific coast forms are generally larger and have straighter sutures, but have the same number of chambers and the thick pustu- lose coating in the umbilicus. Despite these differences, it appears to be inadvisable to sepa- rate the two forms at this time since both forms may occur in the same sample along with transi- tional forms. B. frigida more closely resembles B. depressa than any other Recent or late Tertiary species. It differs from B. depressa by its thicker coating of pustulose material which completely fills the umbilicus and sutures, by the fewer number of chambers in each whorl, by the smaller size of the test, and by the limbate chambers on the dorsal side of the test. Types and occurrence —Lectotype (Cushman Collection no. 3032) from station 5, bay between Black Whale and Olasks Harbors, east coast of Hudson Bay (about lat. 55° N.) at 10 fathoms water depth. Hypotype (of “FE.” frigida (Cush- man), var. calida Cushman and Cole (Cushman Collection no. 14213)), from the Pleistocene, Talbot formation, Wailes Bluff, near Cornfield Harbor, St. Marys County, Md. Hypotype (Cushman Collection no. 64505), off Pocasset, upper end of Buzzard Bay, Mass. Buccella depressa Andersen, n. sp. Figs. 7a-c, 8 Eponides perwoianus Cushman and Parker (not dOrbigny), Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 80 (art. 3): 19 (not figured). 1981. Test of medium size; trochoid; dorsal and ventral sides equally biconvex. Dorsal side with surface smooth, finely perforate and hyaline (in well-preserved specimens); and with slightly curved sutures oriented oblique to the peripheral margin. Ventral side with surface more coarsely perforate than the dorsal surface; sutures greatly 146 depressed, nearly radial, and partly filled with opaque pustulose material; chambers inflated; and with depressed umbilicus and basal margin of last-formed chambers bearing a moderate coating of pustulose material. Periphery broadly acute to rounded and lobulate. The number of chambers in the last formed whorl ranges from 7 to 9, the most common being 8. Adult tests have 24 to 3 coils. In well-preserved specimens all apertures are concealed by pustulose material. Weathered specimens exhibit, as shown in Fig. 8, a low arched primary aperture at the basal margin of the last-formed chamber and slitlike supple- mentary apertures that extend along the outer postero-sutural margins of each chamber. When viewed from the interior of the test, a narrow septal foramen interomarginally situated connects chambers in the same whorl. A single round septal foramen more or less centrally lo- cated in the dorsal side of the chamber connects adjacent chambers of previous coils. Dimensions of figured specimens: Holotype, maximum diameter 0.46 mm, maximum thick- ness 0.20 mm; paratype, maximum diameter 0.49 mm, maximum thickness 0.22 mm. Remarks.—Pacific coast specimens with pustu- lose material on the ventral side of the test, which were not identified as ““Hponides”’ frigida or its variety calida, have been indiscriminately grouped under Hponides peruviana (d’Orbigny) {Cushman and Kellett (1929), Cushman, Stewart, and Stewart (1930), Cushman and Valentine JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 5 (1930), and Cushman and Parker (1931a)]. The Cushman and Kellett specimen has been placed in synonymy with V. inusitata; the Cushman, Stewart, and Stewart specimen is too badly weathered to be properly identified; the Cush- man and Valentine specimen is neither Eponides nor Buccella; and the Cushman and Parker assemblage is the basis of this species B. depressa. The designation of the Cushman and Parker specmens as a new species is deemed advisable rather than to perpetuate an assumption that Rotalia peruviana d’Orbigny has a pustulose coat- ing on the ventral side of the test. In general appearance, B. depressa resembles the larger specimens of B. frigida. Differentiation between the two is based on the number of chambers, appearance of sutures, and intersity of the pustulose coating. B. depressa has more chambers in each whorl, much more depressed sutures and umbilicus, less pustulose material deposited in the sutures and umbilicus, and less limbate sutures on dorsal side than B. frigida. Other Recent species, B. hannai, and B. inusitata, can be distinguished from B. depressa by their acute peripheries. Types and occurrence—Holotype (U.S.N.M. no. P. 833) and paratype (U.S.N.M. no. P. 834) from station 97, Port Williams, Falklands, at 8 to 10 fathoms. Unfigured paratypes (Cushman Collection no. 21256) from same locality as above and unfigured paratypes (Cushman Collection no. 21257) from station 87, off lower jetty, Port Howard, Falklands, at 4 fathoms. Fig. 1, 2.—Buccella vicksburgensis (Cushman and Ellisor): la, Dorsal view of holotype (Cushman Coll. no. 15521); 1b, ventral view; and Ic, edge view (note: opening is fracture not aperture); 2a, dorsal view of hy potype (holoty pe of Eponides alabamensis Cushman and McGlamery, Cushman Coll. no. 23678); 2b, ventral view; 2c, edge view. Oligocene and L. Miocene?. Fic. 3.—Buccella hannai (Phleger and Parker): 3a, Dorsal view of holotype (U.S.N.M. no. P 835); 3b, ventral view showing supplementary apertures at outer margin of suture; 3c, edge view. Recent, Gulf of Mexico. Fies. 4-6.—Buccella frigida (Cushman): 4a, Dorsal view of hypotype (holotype of Eponides frigida (Cushman), var. calida Cushman and Cole, Cushman Coll. no. 14213); 4b, ventral view; and 4c, edge view; 5, ventral view of weathered hypotype (Cushman Coll. no. 64505) showing position of supple- mentary apertures normally concealed by pustules; 6a, dorsal view of lectotype (Cushman Coll. no. 3032); 6b, ventral view; 6c, edge view. Late Tertiary to Recent. Fics. ie 8. —Buccella depressa Andersen, n. sp.: 7a, Dorsal view of holotype (U.S.N.M. no. P 833); 7b, ventral view; 7c, edge view; 8, ventral view of weathered paratype (U.S.N.M. no. P 834) showing position of supplementary apertures normally concealed by pustules. Recent. Fie. 9.—Buccella parkerae Andersen, n. sp.: 9a, Dorsal view of holotype (Cushman Coll. no. 14582) ; 9b, ventral view; 9c, edge view. Miocene. Fras. 10, 11 —Buccella inusitata Andersen, n. sp.: 10a, Dorsal view of holotype (Cushman Coll. no. 64503); 10b, ventral view; 10c, edge view; lla, dorsal view of paratype (Cushman Coll. no. 64504); 11b, ventral view; llc, edge view. "Recent. Fras. 12, 13. —Buccella mansfieldi (Cushman): 12a, Dorsal view of hypotype (Cushman Coll. no. 46507); 12b, ventral view; 12c, edge view; 13a, dorsal view of hypotype (Cushman Coll. no. 46506); 13b, ventral view; 13c, edge view. Miocene. All magnifications x50. May 1952 ANDERSON: BUCCELLA, NEW GENUS OF FORAMINIFERA 147 Frias. 1-13.—(See opposite page for legend) 148 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON Buccella inusitata Andersen, n. sp. Figs. 10a-c and 1la-c Eponides frigidus (Cushman), Cushman and Todd, Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. Special Publ. 21: 21 (Cushman Collection no. 48597 not figured). 1947. Eponides peruvianus Cushman and Kellett (not d’Orbigny), Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus. 75 (art. 25): 10, pl. 4, figs. 5a-c. 1929. Eponides frigidus (Cushman), Cushman, Cush- man Lab. Foram. Res. Special Publ. 23: 71, pl. 8, fig. 7. 1938. Test of medium size; trochoid; dorsal and ventral sides equally biconvex in the micro- spheric form; megalospheric generation with the ventral side nearly flat and dorsal side extremely convex. Dorsal side with surface smooth, finely perforate and hyaline; and with shghtly limbate sutures oriented strongly oblique to the periph- eral margin and confluent with the periphery. Ventral side with surface rough and more coarsely perforate than the dorsal side; sutures depressed and radial; chambers slightly inflated, and with umbilicus, sutures, and basal margin of the last- formed chamber bearing a thick coating of pustu- lose material. Periphery acute and limbate, and with the last 2 or 3 chambers usually lobate. The number of chambers in the last-formed whorl ranges from 7 to 9, the most common being 9. Adult tests have 3 to 3% coils. The only visible apertures are located on the ventral side of the test at the outer margin of each suture. In a slight depression near the periphery is a concentration of pustulose material through which are numerous, irregularly shaped openings. These openings eminate from the posterosutural margin of the younger (most recently added) chamber and from the antero- sutural margin of the older (preceding) chamber. The last-formed chamber when viewed from the interior has no well defined anterior aperture. Preceding chambers, however, have a well de- veloped, narrow septal foramen interomarginally situated and numerous areal cribrate openings near the periphery which connect chambers in the same coil. One or two lateral foramen connect adjacent chambers of previous coils. Dimensions of figured specimens: Holotype, maximum diameter 0.57 mm, maximum thickness 0.27 mm; paratype, maximum diameter 0.55 mm, maximum thickness 0.24 mm. Remarks —Buccella inusitata is characterized by its large test, by its acute and limbate periph- ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 5 ery, by its limbate dorsal sutures, and by its supplementary apertures consisting of numerous irregularly shaped openings. It can be distin- guished from B. frigida and B. depressa by its greater size and acute periphery; from B. hannai by its greater size and multiple openings in the outer portion of the ventral sutures; and from B. mansfieldi by its smaller size, lack of raised and limbate dorsal sutures, and greater develop- ment of pustulose material along the sutures. B. inusitata most closely resembles B. oregonensis from which it differs in having more inflated chambers on the ventral side of the test; less convexity in the umbilicus; and multiple supple- mentary apertures. Types and occurrence—Holotype (Cushman Collection no. 64503) and paratype (Cushman Collection no. 64504) from Dallas Bank, Straits of Juan de Fuca, station “A,” coast of Washing- ton. Unfigured paratypes (Cushman Collection no. 48597) from same locality as holotype. Station “A” refers to the list of stations in Special Publication 21 (Cushman and Todd, 1947). Buccella mansfieldi (Cushman) Figs. 12a, b and 13a-c Eponides mansfieldi Cushman, Florida Geol. Surv. Bull. 4: 54, pl. 11, figs. la-e. 1930. Emended diagnosis —Test large for the genus; trochoid; biconvex, ranging from specimens with equal convexity on dorsal and ventral sides to specimens less convex on the ventral side. Dorsal side with surface finely perforate and hyaline (in well-preserved specimens); and with broadly limbate and raised sutures oriented oblique to the peripheral margin and confluent with the periphery. Ventral side with surface rough and more coarsely perforate than the dorsal side; sutures depressed and radial; chambers slightly inflated; and with the depressed umbilicus, su- tures, and anterior, basal margin of the last- formed chamber bearing a coating of pustulose material (a few specimens have pustules covering the entire ventral side of the test). Periphery acute, broadly limbate, and lobulate. The num- ber of chambers in the last whorl range from 9 to 12, the most common being 11. Adult test with 24 to 3 coils. All apertures are concealed by pustulose mate- rial. When viewed from the interior, the adult chamber has an irregularly shaped opening at the May 1952 ANDERSON: BUCCELLA, NEW base and inner margin of the anterior wall, and a long, narrow slitlike opening at the base and outer margin of the posterior wall. This slitlike opening which, externally, would lie at the poste- riosutural margin of the chamber, is so minute that it can not be discerned even in weathered specimens. Comma-shaped, internal septal foramen con- nect adjacent chambers in the same coil; none appear to connect chamber in previous coils. Dimensions of figured specimens: Hypotype (Fig. 12), maximum diameter 0.62 mm, maxi- mum thickness 0.28 mm; hypotype (Fig. 13), maximum diameter 0.62 mm, maximum thick- ness 0.25 mm. Remarks —Buccella mansjfieldi is larger, has a greater number of chambers, and has a more ornamented dorsal surface than other species. It lacks the open supplementary aper- tures of B. hannai and B. inusitata. Even weath- ered specimens fail to exhibit supplementary apertures in the striking manner of some speci- mens of B. frigida, B. depressa, and B. vicksbur- gensis. The most evident characteristic of the genus Buccella exhibited by B. mansfieldi is the pustulose material coating the ventral side of the test. Types and occurrence-—Hypotype, Fig. (Cushman Collection no. 46507), is from the Choctawhatchee marl of John Anderson’s farm, 3 mile east of Red Bay, Walton County, Fla. It is from the same locality as the holotype (US.N.M. no. 371079), although it was not designated a paratype by Cushman. Hypotype, Fig. 13 (Cushman Collection no. 64506), is from the Miocene Choctawhatchee formation, Yoldia zone, Old Frazier farm, } mile south of center of section 18, T.2 N., R19 W., Walton County, Fla. any 12 Buccella oregonensis (Cushman, R. I. Stewart, and K. C. Stewart) Eponides mansfieldi Cushman, var. oregonensis Cushman, Stewart, and Stewart, Oregon Dept. Geol. and Min., Ind. Bull. 36, (2): 48, pl. 6, fig. 4. 1947(1948). Remarks.—The holotype of B. oregonensis (Cushman, Stewart, and Stewart) is the only representative of the species in the Cushman Collection. This constitutes an inadequate num- ber of specimens upon which to base a study, and in this species it is particularly madvisable since the final chamber of the holotype is broken. There is sufficient evidence, however, that the GENUS OF FORAMINIFERA 149 species belongs with the genus Buccella, and that there is no justification in continuing to consider it a variety of B. mansfieldi. B. oregonensis has neither the size nor dorsal ornamentation of B. mansfieldi. The species most similar to B. ore- gonensis is B. inusitata. Differentiation between the two is based on the more inflated chambers on the ventral side of the test, the less convex umbilicus and the multiple supplementary aper- tures of B. inusitata. Types and occurrence—Holotype (Cushman Collection no. 44208) from the Miocene shale of the Astoria formation, 700 feet southeast of Yaquina Head, Yaquina quadrangle, Oreg. Buccella parkerae Andersen, n. sp. Figs. 9a-c Eponides mansfield’ Cushman, Cushman and Parker (not Cushman, 1930), Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 7 (1): pl. 2, fig. 10a-e. 1931. Test small; trochoid; biconvex, dorsal side nearly conoidal, ventral side with an umbilical flattening. Dorsal side with surface coarsely perforate; and with sutures of variable intensity ; in the early coils concealed by a thin exogenous covering of shell material, in the last coil distinct, limbate, and in some specimens slightly raised above the surface of the test. Ventral side with surface coarsely perforate; depressed sutures radial near the umbilicus and abruptly curved backward at the peripheral margin; umbilicus depressed; and with umbilicus, sutures, and basal margin of the last-formed chamber bearing a coating of pustulose material, thickly deposited in the umbilicus, less densely deposited in the outer portion of the sutures. Periphery acute, limbate and slightly lobulate. The number of chambers in the last-formed whorl range from 9 to 11, 11 being the most common. Adult tests with 24 to 3 coils. The primary aperture is concealed by pustules. Supplementary apertures on the ventral side of the test are located in the slight depression at the outer margin of the suture near the periphery. Each aperture is a long, slitlike opening barely visible under high magnification. When viewed from the interior, comma-shaped septal foramen connect chambers in the same coil. Dimensions of figured holotype: maximum diameter 0.42 mm; maximum thickness 0.17 mm, Remarks —Buccella parkerae, originally identi- fied as Eponides mansfieldi by Cushman and 150 Parker (1931b), has a superficial resemblance to the Florida species. It differs from B. mansfieldi, however, in its smaller size and less intensely ornamented dorsal surface. In B. mansfieldi the raised sutures on the dorsal side of the test are clearly defined from the proloculus to the periph- ery. In B. parkerae the proloculus and early coils of the dorsal spire are concealed by a thin coating of exogenous material that produces a low, co- noidal capping in the center of the test. Only the last-formed coil or coil and half has distinct sutures with the barest indication being raised above the surface of the test. Buccella parkerae can be distinguished from all other Pacific coast forms by the exogenous material on the dorsal side of the test. In addi- tion, B. parkerae differs from B. inusitata by its raised dorsal sutures, smaller size, and more curved ventral sutures; from B. depressa by its acute periphery, limbate and raised dorsal su- tures, and less depressed umbilicus; and from B. oregonensis by its smaller size, and depressed umbilicus. Types and occurrence——Holotype (Cushman Collection no. 14582), and unfigured paratypes (Cushman Collection no. 14583), from the Mio- cene, upper Tremblor formation, 1,500 feet west and 1,000 feet south of northeast corner of sec- tion 3, T. 28 8., R. 28 E., M.D.B.M., east side of San Joaquin Valley, Calif. Buccella vicksburgensis (Cushman and Ellisor) Figs. la-c, 2a-c Eponides vicksburgensis Cushman and _ Ellisor, Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 7 (3): 56, pl. 7, figs. 8a-c. 1931. Eponides alabamensis Cushman and McGlamery, U.S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Paper 189-D: 110, pl. 27, fig. 2. 1938. Eponides choctawensis Cushman and McGlamery, U.S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Paper 189-D: 110, pl. 27, fig. 1. 1988. Emended diagnosis——Test small, trochoid; bi- convex, megalospheric forms with dorsal side strongly convex, microspheric forms with ventral side slightly flattened. Dorsal side with surface smooth, finely perforate and hyaline (in well- preserved specimens); and with limbate sutures oriented oblique to the peripheral margin and confluent with the limbate periphery. Ventral side with surface rough and more coarsely per- forate than the dorsal side; sutures slightly de- pressed and slightly curved; and with chambers slightly inflated. Typical specimens have pustu- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 5 lose only on the sutures, umbilicus, and anterior basal margin of the last-formed chamber. Megalo- spheric forms have a slightly rounded periphery; microspheric forms have an acute, limbate and slightly lobulate periphery. The number of chambers in the last whorl range from 6 to 8, the most common being 7. Adult tests with 24 coils. All apertures are concealed by pustulose mate- rial. An occasional weathered specimen reveals the posterosutural apertures in slight depressions near the peripheral margin on the ventral side of the test. When viewed from the interior, the final chamber has an irregularly shaped opening at the base and inner margin of the anterior wall and a small arched opening at the base and outer margin of the posterior wall. Also from the interior, comma-shaped septal foramen connect adjacent chambers in the same coil; and rounded septal foramen, laterally situ- ated in each chamber connect adjacent chambers in previous coils. Dimensions of figured specimens: Holotype, maximum diameter 0.338 mm, maximum thick- ness 0.20 mm. Hypotype (holotype for “EZ. ala- bamensis”) maximum diameter 0.32 mm, maxi- mum thickness 0.17 mm. Remarks.—The factors which have a bearing on the placement of ““Hponides alabamensis”’ and “EH. choctawensis” in synonymy with B. vicks- burgensis are: (1) Morphologic homogeneity noted in the actual specimens not discernible from the original descriptions and illustrations; and (2) the number of specimens of a species reported in the literature. “EB.” vicksburgensis and “EH. alabamensis’’ were found to be incorrectly described and illustrated. In “HE.” vicksburgensis, the opening at the base is a void produced by breakage not an aperture prepared by the animal; and the sutures on the ventral side of the test are more concealed by pustules than illustrated. In “EH. alabamensis”’ the aperture is concealed by pustules, not open as illustrated and described; there are no costae across the sutures on the ventral side of the test as illustrated and described in the text; and the sutures on the ventral side of the test are more nearly concealed with pustules than illustrated. When purged of inaccuracies, the descriptions reflect the morphologic similarity apparent in the actual specimens. Additive proof of this morphologic similarity lies in an assemblage of specimens identified as Eponides alabamensis (Cushman Collection no. 25950) from the Chicka- sawhay marl near Millry, Ala. This assemblage May 1952 contains specimens with the thick coating of pustules on the ventral side of the test similar to the holotype of “EH.” vicksburgensis, and also specimens with the reduced pustulose coating on the ventral side of the test that characterizes the holotype of ‘“E. alabamensis.” “Hponides choctawensis’”’ has been reported three different times: Cushman and McGlamery, 1938; Cushman and McGlamery, 1942; and Cushman and Todd, 1946. In the last two re- ports the presence of the species in the sample is based on a single specimen. It is even possible that the holotype is based on a single specimen since there are no paratypes in the Cushman Collection. In addition to the limited number of specimens available of “EH. choctawensis,” it is also significant to note that ‘EH. choctawensis”’ has been reported only from samples in which “EH. alabamensis” (B. vicksburgensis) is also pres- ent and well represented by a number of speci- mens. The conclusion drawn is that “E. chocta- wensis” probably represents a varient or phase in the life cycle of B. vicksburgensis and therefore does not warrant a separate specific name. An analogy can be drawn with B. hannai in which a small, rare form with more inflated chambers and a more lobulate and rounded periphery than the typical form is accepted in the species (Phleger and Parker, 1951). The typical specimen of B. vicksburgensis is easily distinguished from any other species of Buccella by its thick pustulose coating on the ventral side of the test. In comparison with other Atlantic and Gulf Coast forms and in addition to the above characteristic, it can be differen- tiated from B. mansfieldi by its smaller size, and lack of ornamentation of the dorsal sutures; from B. frigida by its acute periphery; and from B. hannai by its lack of open supplementary apertures, and less lobate periphery. REFERENCES ASANO, Ktiyosut. Illustrated catalogue of Japanese Tertiary smaller Foraminifera, Part 14: Rotali- idae. Institute of Geology and Paleontology, Tohoku University, Japan, 1951. Brotzen, Fritz. Foraminiferengattung Gravel- inella Nov. Gen. und die Systematik Rotali- iformes, Sver. Geol. Unders., Sec. C, no. 451. 1942. CusHMAN, J. A. Results of the Hudson Bay Ex- pedition 1920. I, The Foraminifera. Contr. Can. Biol. 1920. 1922. . The Foraminifera of the Choctawhatchee Formation of Florida. Florida State Geol. Surv. Bull. 4. 1930. ANDERSON: BUCCELLA, NEW GENUS OF FORAMINIFERA 151 . The Foraminifera of the Atlantic Ocean. Part 8. Rotaliidae, Amphisteginidae, Cal- carinidae, Cymbaloporettidae, Globorotaliidae, Anomalinidae, Planorbulinidae, Rupertiidae, and Homotremidae. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 104, pt. 8. 1981. . Some fossil Foraminifera from Alaska. Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 17, pt. 2. 1941. : . Foraminifera from the shallow water of the New England coast. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. Special Publ. 12. 1944. . Arctic Foraminifera. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. Special Publ. 23. 1948. CusHMAN, J. A., and Corr, W. S. Pleistocene Foraminifera from Maryland. Contr. Cush- man Lab. Foram. Res. 6, pt. 4. 1930. CusHMAN, J. A., and Exxtisor, A. C. Some new Tertiary Foraminifera from Texas. Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 7, pt. 3. 1931. CusHMAN, J. A., and Keuuerr, B. Recent Foram- imifera from the west coast of South America. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 75, art. 25. 1929. CusuMan, J. A., and McGuamery, W. Oligocene Foraminifera near Millry, Alabama. U. S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Paper 197-B. 1942. CusHMAN, J. A., and Parker, F. L. Recent Fo- raminifera from the Atlantic coast of South America. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. 80, art. 3. 1931a. . Miocene Foraminifera from the Tem- blor of the east side of the San Joaquin Valley, California. Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 7, pt. 1. 1931b. CusuMan, J. A., Stewart, R. E., and Srewarr, K. C. Tertiary Foraminifera from Hum- boldt County, California. A preliminary survey of the fauna. Trans. San Diego Soc. Nat. Hist. 6, pt. 2. 1930. . Astoria Miocene Foraminifera from Agate Beach, Lincoln County, Oregon. Oregon Dept. Geol. and Min. Ind. Bull. 36, pt. 2. 1947. CusHMAN, J. A., and Topp, R. A foraminiferal fauna from the Byram Marl at its type locality. Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 22, pt. 3. 1946. . Foraminifera from the coast of Wash- ington. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. Special Publ. 21. 1947. CusHMaN, J. A., and VALENTINE, W. W. Shallow- water Foraminifera from the Channel Islands of southern California. Contr. Dept. Geol. Stanford Univ. 1, no. 1. 1980. Horker, J. What is the genus Eponides? Micro- paleontologist 4 (1). 1950. . The Foraminifera of the Siboga Expedi- tion, Part IIT. Monographie IVa de: Uitkom- sten op Zooligisch, Botanisch, Oceanogra- phish en Geologisch Gegied. Leiden, 1951. pd’Orsieny, A. D. Voyage dans lV’ Amérique Meri- dionale 5, pt. 2. 1839. Puurcer, F. B., and Parker, F. L. Ecology of Foraminifera, northwest Gulf of Mexico, Geol. Soc. Amer. Mem. 46. 1951. 152 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCHS VOL. 42, No. 5 MAMMALOGY.—-A new pine mouse (Pitymys pinetorum carbonarius) from the southern Appalachian Mountains.! CHARLES O. HANDLEY, JR., U. 8. National Museum. (Communicated by H. W. As long ago as 1900 Vernon Bailey noticed that the pine mouse (Pitymys pinetorum) of the Cumberland Plateau region of the south- eastern United States differed in important respects from other populations farther to the south and southwest. In his Revision of American voles of the genus Microtus, North American Fauna no. 17: 65. 1900, he re- marked that: “A series of 31 specimens in the Merriam collection from Eubank, Ky., average darker and richer in coloration than the type series [referring to P. p. auricu- laris|, and have equally large ears.”’ Lacking material from other Cumberland localities, he called the Eubank mice auricularis. Later, Hooper and Cady (Journ. Mamm. 22: 325. 1941) discovered the same charac- ters in specimens from Cleveland, Virginia, on the eastern fringe of the plateau region, but referred their specimens to P. p. scalop- soides. Sufficient material is now available to show that the pine mouse of the Cum- berland Plateau is quite distinct from sur- rounding populations. With regard for its habitation of a region particularly noted for coal, I have named it: Pitymys pinetorum carbonarius, n. subsp. Type—Old adult female in slightly worn winter pelage; skm and skull; U.S. N. M. no. 191204; collected February 14, 1888, at Eubank, Pulaski County, Ky., by John B. Lewis; original number 76. Distribution —The Austral and Transition Life Zones of southwestern Virginia, northeastern Tennessee, eastern Kentucky, extreme south- eastern Ohio, and probably southern West Vir- gimia (east to Russell County, Va., and Carter County, Tenn.; south to Jefferson and Campbell Counties, Tenn.; west to Pulaski County, Ky.; and north to Lawrence County, Ohio). Description —Type (capitalized color terms from Ridgway, 1912, Color standards and color nomenclature): Dorsum between Sanford’s Brown and Argus Brown, overlaid with black; flanks, shoulders, cheeks, and sides of snout between Amber Brown and Tawny; belly and legs silvery 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Setzer. ) gray, washed with buff; upper surfaces of feet Hay’s Brown with a silvery cast; tail brownish above, darker than feet, whitish below, with no clear line of demarcation between the colors. Size large; ears not completely concealed by fur. Skull of light construction, somewhat angular, not noticeably convex in dorsal profile; post- orbital protuberance of squamosal - slightly developed; zygomatic arches light and parallel to one another; rostrum long and narrow; brain- case long and wide; incisive foramina long and frequently narrowed posteriorly; and anterior margin of mesopterygoid fossa variable in out- line, either U-shaped or V-shaped. Measurements (in millimeters; average followed by extremes).—Ten adults (both sexes; including type) from Eubank, Ky.: Skin—total length, 125 (118-139); tail, 23 (19-26); hind foot, (no measurements available). Skull—greatest length, 25.6 (25.1-26.6); zygomatic breadth, 15.5 (14.9- 16.6); least- interorbital width, 4.4 (4.1-4.6); nasal length (along mid-lne), 7.8 (7.7-8.0); maxillary molar series (alveolar length), 6.4 (6.2-6.7); mastoidal breadth, 13.0 (12.3-13.6); braincase length (dorsal midpoint of foramen magnum to postorbital process of squamosal), 13.3 (13.0-13.6). Comparisons —This race is characterized in all pelages by dark and bright coloration of the dorsum, a consequence of the combination of black overlay and dark hue of the subapical band. It is the darkest known American population of Pitymys. Cranially it does not appear to be well differentiated; observed variations from other races are only average and are of small magnitude. With respect to the cranium, its closest relatives seem to be P. p. auricularis and P. p. scalop- soides. In many ways it is intermediate between these two forms. Resemblances to P. p. pine- torum are fewer. Geographically remote P. p. nemoralis and P. parvulus need not be considered in this discussion. From scalopsoides the race carbonarius may be distinguished by much darker, brighter colora- tion of the dorsum, a greater amount of black on the tips of the dorsal guard hairs, less angular skull, less well developed postorbital protuberance of the squamosal, lighter zygomata, longer ros- trum, wider brainease, longer incisive foramina May 1952 with a greater tendency toward posterior con- striction. The subspecies auricularis is nearly as dark as carbonarius, but the latter is brighter and has more angular skull with a less convex dorsal profile, lighter and more parallel zygomata, longer and narrower rostrum, wider braincase, incisive foramina more frequently constricted posteriorly, and the anterior margin of the mesopterygoid fossa less constantly U-shaped. In brightness, but not in darkness, carbonarius is approached by pinetorum. However, carbo- narius has more black on the dorsal guard hairs, and has the subapical band of a darker, more intense color. Further, it is larger in all dimen- sions, and has the skull more angular and less convex in dorsal profile, the rostrum longer and narrower, the braincase longer and wider, the incisive foramina longer and more frequently constricted posteriorly, the anterior margin of the mesopterygoid fossa not so consistently V-shaped, and the auditory bullae more inflated and more pointed anteriorly. Remarks——Probably the characters of car- bonarius are best developed in the Cumberland Mountains and adjacent plateau. In outlining the geographic range of this race, two areas have given particular difficulty: The Ohio Valley in the longitude of Ohio and the northeastern portion of the Tennessee River watershed. These are areas where the characters of several races of Pitymys pinetorum merge. Bascom, Ind., is the easternmost locality along the Ohio River from which typical auricularis has been seen. Specimens from Brookville, Ind., are intermediate and nearer scalopsoides, while ones from Ripley, Ohio, are intermediate and nearer auricularis. Farther upstream, at Rome and Smokey Creek, Adams County, Ohio, material is again intermediate, but nearer scalopsoides. Still farther eastward, where the Ohio River swings nearest to the range of car- bonarius, at Lawrence County, Ohio, the darkest Ohio Pitymys are to be found. These are like auricularis, but in view of the character of the specimens from localities down stream, nearer the center of the range of auricularis, I tentatively consider the scanty Lawrence County material to be intergrades between scalopsoides and car- bonarius, but nearer the latter. The character of dark coloration may be traced farther north- eastward in the Ohio Valley to Belmont County, Ohio. Bole and Moulthrop (Sci. Publ. Cleveland HANDLEY: A NEW PINE MOUSE 153 Mus. Nat. Hist. 5: 161. 1942) identified speci- mens from Cat Run in this county as pinetorum. I have examined material from Cat Run and find it only slightly darker than typical scalopsoides from southeastern New York. It can be referred without hesitation to scalopsoides. In the Tennessee Valley, specimens from Cleve- land, Va., are intermediate between scalopsoides and carbonarius, but nearer the latter. A single individual from Watauga Valley, Tenn., is re- ferred to carbonarius, although it is paler than that race and shows intergradation toward pinetorum or scalopsoides. A series from Marshall, N. C., is somewhat darker than typical pine- torwm, showing the influence of either carbonarius or auricularis, both of which are darker than pinetorum. Specimens examined.—Specimens are in the U.S. National Museum or the U. 8. National Museum, Biological Surveys collection, except as Indicated by the following abbreviations: CMNH—Cleveland Museum of Natural His- tory; CM—Charleston [S. C.] Museum; CU— Cornell University; MGFC—Mississippi Game and Fish Commission; UMMZ—University of Michigan Museum of Zoology. I am grateful to the authorities at these institutions for the loan of specimens. P. p. auricularis.—INviaNa: Bascom, 5; Worth- ington, 1. Kenrucky: Canmer, 2; Monticello, 1. Mississippr: Copiah County, 2 (MGFC); Jones County, 1 (MGFC); Lincoln County, 2 (MGFC); Rankin County, 1 (MGFC); Washington, 4. Nora Carouina: Cherokee County, 1 (UMMZ). Onto: Ripley, 4 (CMNH). Tennessee: La Fol- lette, 1. P. p. carbonarius.—Kenrucky: Eubank, 31; Quicksand, 1 (CU). Onto: Hanging Rock, 1 (UMMZ); Symes Creek, Lawrence County, 1 (CMNH). Tennessee: High Cliff, 2; Jefferson County, 2 (CMNH); Watauga Valley, 1. Vir- GINntA: Cleveland, 2 (UMMZ); Hurricane, Wise County, 6. P. p. pinetorum.—Norru Carouina: Bent Creek. Experiment Station, Pisgah National For- est, 1; Madison County, 1 (CM); Marshall, 9 (CMNH). Sourn Carorina: Abbeville, 1 (CM); Charleston, 5 (CM); Clemson College, 3 (CM); Frogmore, 1; Georgetown, | (CM); Summerville, 1 (CM). P. p. scalopsoides.—Inviana: Brookville, 3. New York: Suffolk County, 3; Ulster County, 7. Onto: Cat Run, Belmont County, 15 (CMNH); Rome, Adams County, 7 (CMNH); Smokey Creek, Adams County, 1 (CMNH). Virerntra: Blacks burg, 2. West Vrrainra: Gilboa, 2; Raymond City, 1; White Sulphur Springs, Il. 154 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 5 MALACOLOGY.—Nomenclatural review of genera and subgenera of Chamidae. Davin Nicot,! U. 8. National Museum. Except for the excellent paper by Odhner (1919), which has not been carefully studied by most other workers, little research in systematics has been done on the Chamidae. Genera and species of this interesting pelecy- pod family have, in general, not been under- stood. Before giving a description of the family, it is necessary to point out the prin- cipal weakness of a nomenclatural review. There is always the possibility that one or more genera will be incorrectly allocated because the descriptions and figures are un- recognizable. The problem of inadequate de- scriptions and figures can be solved only by examining specimens of the type species. The Chamidae have a porcellaneous shell which may have either concentric or radial ribs, and the shell may be spinose, nodulose, or smooth. The inner ventral border may be smooth or may have small crenulations. A sulcus is commonly present at the posterior fifth of the shell. It runs from the umbos to the posterior ventral border. The shell may be attached by either valve (more commonly the left one) to the substrate during a small part of or practically all of its life. The valves may be markedly unequal or only slightly so, but the attached valve is always the larger. There is no gape for the byssus, foot, or siphons. With the exception of Echinochama, which has a lunule, neither a lunule nor an escutcheon is present. The beaks are prosogyrate and are placed in front of the parivincular ligament. This structure is external but commonly sunken. The pallial line is integripalliate, with a small indentation where it joins the posterior adductor muscle scar. In some species the pallial line joins the anterior adductor muscle scar not at the ventral margin but along the anterior margin. The anterior adductor muscle scar commonly abuts the anterior margin of the hinge plate. The adductor muscle scars are large and either elongate or ovate. The pallial line and adductor muscles commonly resemble those of the lucinids. The hinge teeth in adult shells have been greatly modified by the torsion of the beaks 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. and secondary splitting, and there is little agreement as to the number of cardinal and lateral teeth in each valve. However, the basic pattern appears to be like that of a highly modified lucinoid hinge. One large cardinal tooth is present in each valve. In the attached valve, particularly in Hchino- chama, a much smaller cardinal tooth is located above and posterior to the large cardinal tooth. A small conical posterior lat- eral tooth is sometimes seen on the attached valve. The following genera and subgenera are chamids, with type species whose morph ologi characters correspond to those of the family, and whose names are nomenclaturally valid. This does not mean that all will be accep- table when careful work on the classification of the Chamidae is completed, but these names form a basis for future taxonomic work on the family. Chama Linné, 1758, pp. 691,692. Type species (subsequent designation, Schumacher, 1817, pp. 20,123. See also Stewart, 1930, p. 33) Chama gryphoides Linné, 1758, Recent; Medi- terranean Sea. Figd., Buequoy, Dautzenberg, & Dollfus, 1892, pl. 50, figs. 1-4. Crplyella Vincent, 1930, pp. 111,112. Type spe- cies (original designation)—Chama_ pulchra Ravn, 1902, Danian, Paleocene; Denmark, Belgium. Figd., Vincent, 1930, pl. 6, fig. 12. Ciplyella is probably a chamid, although a careful study of the type species is necessary to ascertain this. Echinochama Fischer, 1887, p. 1049. Type species (monotypy)—Chama arcinella Linné, 1767, Re- cent; West Indies. Figd., Reeve, 1847, vol. 4, Chama species 26, pl. 5, fig. 26a. Eopseuma Odhner, 1919, pp. 25,75. Type species (monotypy)—Pseudochama (Eopseuma) pusilla Odhner, 1919, Recent; Strait of Macassar. Figd., Odhner, 1919, figs. 20-27. Maceris Modeer, 1793, pp. 174,182. Type species (subsequent designation, Winckworth, 1935, p. 322)—Chama lazarus Linné, 1758, Recent; East Indies. Two species were referred to in the discussion of the genus Maceris (p. 182)— Chama gryphus Linné and Chama lazarus Linné. It is not certain whether Modeer meant Chama gryphoides Linné or Anomia gryphus Linné for the first species. Figd., Reeve, 1847, vol. 4, Chama species 4, pl. 2, figs. 4a, b. May 1952 Pseudochama Odhner, 1917, pp. 28-34. Type species (subsequent designation, Prashad, 1932, p. 295)—Chama cristella Lamarck, 1819, p. 96, Recent; East Indies. Chama cristella has been considered the type species of Pseudochama by original designation and by monotypy. Neither of these ideas is correct. Odhner mentioned other species as belonging to Pseudochama in his original discussion of the genus. Figd., Reeve, 1847, vol. 4, Chama species 42, pl. 8, fig. 42. The following generic and _ subgeneric names have been associated with the Chami- dae in the past, but all of them appear to be unavailable from the evidence thus far ob- tained. Arcinella Schumacher, 1817, pp. 47,142. Type species (monotypy)—Arcinella spinosa Schu- macher, 1817 = Chama arcinella Linné, 1767. A homonym of Arcinella Oken, 1815, which is a carditid genus. Camelaea Herrmannsen, 1852, vol. 2 (supple- ment), p. 23. A genus without species. Herr- mannsen refers to a work by P. F. Gmelin which has been rejected by the International Commission of Zoological Nomenclature, Opin- ion 123. Cameola Rafinesque, 1815, p. 148. An emenda- tion of the name Chama Linné, 1758. Camostraea Deshayes, 1830, p. 178. A genus without species. Also a misinterpretation of Blainville’s definition of the genus. Chamigenus Renier, 1807, p. vil. Original refer- ence not seen. Renier’s names ending in genus have not been accepted by malacologists. For a good review of the problem, see Keen, 1951, pp. 8-15. Chamites Gmelin, 1793, p. 402. The name Cham- ites is listed as a species under the genus Helmintholithus. Neave (1939, p. 668) and Schulze (1927, p. 630) are in error in considering Chamites of Gmelin as a generic name. Cipleyella Neave, 1939, vol. 1, p. 740. Error for Ciplyella Vincent, 1930. Diceratia Oken, 1815, p. 829. Type species (mono- typy)—Chama cor Linné, 1767. Diceratia ap- pears to be a synonym of Jsocardia Lamarck, 1799, and Glossus Poli, 1795. Diceratis Paetel, 1875, p. 69. Error for Diceratia Oken, 1815. Globus Deshayes, 1832, p. 170. A genus without species and a homonym of Globus Scopoli, 1772. Goossensia Cossmann, 1885, p. 113. Type species (monotypy)—Goossensia plicatuloides Coss- mann, 1885, pp. 113-115. Probably not a NICOL: NOMENCLATURAL REVIEW OF THE CHAMIDAE 155 chamid; however, Dall’s opinion (1903, p. 1397) that the genus is based on a nepionie shell of a chamid is certainly worthy of investigation. Gryphus Gray, 1847, p. 193. A genus without species. This name is listed under Chama and Arcinella and credited to Humphrey, as a manuscript name. A homonym of Gryphus Megerle, 1811, Gryphus Oken, 1816, among others. Hellia Schafhautl, 1863, pp. 160,161. Type species (monotypy)—Hellia gryphus Schafhautl, 1863. This species has been described from poorly preserved internal casts, but it probably does not belong to the family Chamidae. The right valve is supposedly larger than the left. Jataronus Bruguiére, 1792, p. 546. A genus with- out species. It is impossible, from the brief description, to define the genus. Lacinea Sowerby, 1842, p. 168. A genus without species. Listed as a synonym of Chama La- marck. Lazarus Cuvier, 1800, table 5. A nomen nudum. Licinia Gray, 1847, p. 193. A genus without species. This name is listed under Chama and Arcinella by Gray and credited to Humphrey, 1797, as Licinia sp. A homonym of Licinia Swainson, 1820. Macerophylla Morch, 1853, p. 36. A genus with- out species. Listed as a manuscript name of Martens. Macerophyllum Herrmannsen, 1847, vol. 2, p. 1. A genus without species. Macrophyllum Gray, 1847, p. 193. A genus with- out species. Also a homonym of Macrophyllum Gray, 1888. Psiloderma Fischer, 1887, p. 1048. Error for Psilopoderma Poh, 1795. Psilopoderma Poli, 1795, pp. 253,258. Type species (monotypy)—Chama gryphoides Linné, 1758. A synonym of Psilopus Poli, 1795, and of Chama Linné, 1758. Psilopododerma Agassiz, 1846, p. 313. Emenda- tion of Psilopoderma Poli, 1795. Psilopus Poli, 1795, p. 112. Type species (mono- typy)—Chama gryphoides Linné, 1758. A syn- onym of Chama Linné, 1758. Psilotus Rafinesque, p. 146. An error for Psilopus Poli, 1795. Stola Herrmannsen, 1849, vol. 2, p. 503. A genus without species. REFERENCES Aaassiz, L. Nomenclatoris zoologict index uni- versalis, etc.: 393 pp. Soloduri, 1846. Bruauipre, J. G., LAmMARCcK, J. B., and DEsHAYES, G. P. Encyclopédie méthodique (Mollusca). Paris, 1789-1832. Bucauoy, E., DauTzENBERG, PH., and DoLirus, G. Les mollusques marins du Roussillon 2 (7): 273-320. Paris, 1892. 156 JOURNAL OF THE CossMANN, M. Description despéeces du terrain tertiaire des environs de Paris (suite). Journ. Conchyl., 3d sér., 25 (2): 106-130, pls. 4-6. 1885. Cuvisr, G. Lecons d’anatonue comparée 1: 521 pp., 9 tab. Paris, 1800. Datu, W. H. Contributions to the Tertiary fauna of Florida, etc. Trans. Wagner Free Inst. Sci. Philadelphia 3 (6): 1219-1654, pls. 48-60. 1903. FiscHper, Pauu. Manuel de conchyliologie, etc.: 1369 pp., 23 pls., 1188 text figs. Paris, 1887. GMELIN, J. F. Systema naturae, ed. 13, 3: 476 pp. Lipsiae, 1793. Gray, J. E. A list of the genera of Recent Mollusca, their synonyma and types. Proce. Zool. Soc. London 1847: 129-219. 1847. HERRMANNSEN, A. N. Indicis generwm zoorum primordia. Kassel, 1846-1852. Kkepn, A. M. Vhe molluscan names in Renier’s “Tavole.’? Nautilus 65 (1): 8-15. 1951. Linnb, Kart von. Systema naturae, ed. 10, 1: 824 pp. Holmiae, 1758. Systema naturae, ed. 12, 1: 1,327 Holmiae, 1767. Mopegr, AupoupH. [nledning til kunskapen om Maskkraken 7 allmdnhet; 5 Classen. Musslor, Cochleata. Kongl. Svenska Vet. Acad. Nya Handl. 14: 163-183. 1793. Morcg, A. O. L. Catalogus conchyliorum . etc., fase. 2: 74 pp. Hafniae, 1853. Neave, 8. A. Nomenclator zoologicus, 5 vols. Zool. Soe. London, 1939-1950. OpHNER, Nits H. Results of Dr. E. Mjébergs Swedish Scientific Expeditions to Australia 1910-1913, XVI Mollusca. Kungl. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl. 52 (16): 115 pp., 3 pls. 1917. ———. Studies on the morphology, the taxonomy and the relations of Recent Chamidae. Kungl. Sven- ska Vet.-Akad. Handl. 59 (3): 102 pp., § pls. 1919. OKEN, LORENZ. Okens Lehrbuchder Naturgeschichte. 3: Zool., 1 Abt.: 842 pp. Leipzig, Jena, 1815. malaco- pp: 5 KOE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 42, NO. 5 ParreL, F. Die bisher veréffentlichten Familien und Gattungsnamen der Mollusken, ete.: 229 pp. Berlin, 1875. Pout, G. 8. Testacea Utriusque Siciliae, etc. Par- mae, 1791-1827. PrasHaD, B. The Lamellibranchia of the Siboga Expedition, Systematic Part II. Pelecypoda (exclusive of the Pectinidae). Monograph 58c: 353 pp., 9 pls., | map. Leiden, 1932. RAFINESQUE, C. 8. Analyse de la nature ou Tableau de Vunivers et des corps organises. Palerme, 1815. Renve, L. A. Monograph of the genus Chama. Conchologia iconica 4: London, 1847. Reiner, 8. A. TFavole per servire alla classifica- zione e connoscenza degli animali. Pavova, 1807. ScuarHautTL, Kart I. Der Kressenberg und dic Siidlich von thm gelegenen Hochalpen geog- nostisch betrachtet in thren Petrefacten. Siid- Bayerns Lethaea Geognostica: 487 pp., 86 pls., 2 maps. Leipzig, 1863. Scuuuze, F. E., KUKeENTHAL, W., HempeEr, K., and Hesss, R. Nomenclator animalium generum et subgenerum. Berlin, 1926-1940. ScuumacHER, C. F. Essai d’un nouveau systéme des habitations des vers testacés: 287 pp., 22 pls. Copenhague, 1817. SownprsBy, G. B. A conchological manual, ed. 2; 313 pp., 26 pls. London, 1842. Stewart, R. B. Gabb’s California Cretaceous and Tertiary type lamellibranchs. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia Spec. Publ. 3: 314 pp., 17 pls. 1930. Stites, C. W. P. F. Gmelin’s Onomatologia Historia Naturalis Completa suppressed. Smithsonian Mise. Coll. 73 (7): 34-36 (opinion 123). 1931. VINCENT, Emiue. Htudes sur les mollusques Mon- tiens du Poudingue et du Tuffeau de Ciply. Mus. Roy. Hist. Nat. Belgique Mém. 46: 115 pp., 6 pls. 1930. Winxckwortn, R. 8. Modeer’s Genera of Mollusca. Proc. Malae. Soc. London 21: pt. 5, 321-328. 1935. ENTOMOLOGY .—A_ new carpenterworm from Florida (Lepidoptera: Cossidae). J. F. Gates Ciarke, U.S. Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine. It is seldom that so large and conspicuous a moth as that described below remains undiscovered for so long a time, especially since it inhabits a well-populated area and a region frequented by entomologists. Never- theless such is the case, and it is a further example of what yet remains to be done in many parts of the country. The larvae of this species were first reported by William Reimer, a medical student, and the type series was reared and submitted by Prof. H. F. Strohecker, Department of Zoology, University of Miami. Prionoxystus baccharidis, n. sp. Figs. 1-4b Alar expanse: Male, 34-4) mm. Female, 43-45 mm. Antenna black with strong, metallic-blue iridescence above. Labial palpus, head, thorax, and ground color of forewing sordid white to cinereous, the lighter color prevailing in the female; palpus, head, and thorax with dark- gray and black scales mixed; forewing covered with a fine, black reticulum somewhat heavier in male than in female; costal black markings May 1952 exhibiting much metallic-blue iridescence; hind- wing of male blackish fuscous except black- marked cinereous costa; hindwing of female pale cinereous with fine, somewhat obscured reticulum. Legs cimereous, banded with black, the latter color with strong, metallic-blue irridescence. Abdomen cinereous, strongly irrorate with black 3 CLARKE—NEW CARPENTERWORM FROM FLORIDA 157 and dark gray, and grayish fuscous above in male. Male genitalia.—Symmetrical. Uncus broad, triangular. Lateral elements of gnathos broadly fused distally, flattened. Harpe, anellus, and aedeagus as figured; clasper arising at base of harpe with distal end free. Fras. 1-4b.—Prionoxystus baccharidis, n. sp.: 1, Male; 2, female; 3, ventral view of female genitalia; 4. right harpe; 4a, anellus; tb, aedeagus. 158 Female genitalia.—As figured. Type.—U.S.N.M. no. 61307. Type locality —Coral Gables, Dade County, Fla. Food plant.—Baccharts sp. Remarks—Described from the type male and three male and two female paratypes from the type locality, all reared by Prof. H. F. Strohecker. All bear emergence dates of March 1951. Paratypes in the U. 8. National Museum; Department of Zoology, University of Miami, Coral Gables, Fla.; and the British Museum (Natural History). Previously the genus Prionoxystus was repre- sented in North America by only two described species, P. robiniae (Peck) (carpenterworm) and P. macmurtrei (little carpenterworm). P. bac- charidis, for which I suggest the common name “saltbush carpenterworm,”’ is nearest robiniae, but is smaller, and the yellow hindwing of robiniae is replaced by the dark hindwing in baccharidis. Of this species Professor Strohecker writes: “The specimens were bred from the trunks of the Baccharis. Roy Woodbury, of our botany department, tells me that the stand of Baccharis JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voL. 42, No. 5 from which I cut the pieces includes (my memory) four species .. . The larvae occur most frequently in the bole near ground level but some of them were found in branches not much more than an inch in diameter. All the wood cut by me was from living bushes. “The exact locality was an area near what is known locally as ‘Tahiti Beach.’ The mangrove erowth near the bay is followed inland by a growth of saltbush. I don’t know the history of this place, i. e., whether the saltbush is a ‘natural’ stand or sprang up after removal of such plants as white mangrove and buttonwood. Some of the Baccharis have trunks three or more inches in diameter but all are of low height. “Last March I went to the site where he [Mr. Reimer] had found the larvae and cut several bushes. Those with large larvae can be detected by the exudations of sawdust from the borings. The little insects are of such powerful flight when adult that they quickly damage themselves in a cage.”’ The photographs for this paper were taken by Robert Bonde, of the U. 8. Department of Agriculture. Drawings by the author. The fig- ures are of the type male and a paratype female. PALEONTOLOGY .—Two new species of Sinclairocystis. HARRELL L. STRIMPLE, Bartlesville, Okla. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) Subsequent to the finding of Sinclariocystis Bassler (1950), by Dr. G. A. Cooper and William Allen, of the U. 8S. National Mu- seum, in Ordovician rocks of southeastern Oklahoma, the author and his wife, Mrs. Melba Strimple, have collected at the type locality on several occasions and have found several interesting forms of the ‘““Cystoidea.”’ Among these are two new species of Sin- clairocystis described below. They lend con- siderable additional information concerning this unique genus. Sinclairocystis angulatus, n. sp. Fig. 5-9 Two recumbent arms are present, that to the left terminating near the columnar attachment, the right passing closely behind the anus and forming a loop to the posterior about the large posterior thecal plates and terminating high on the theca. On the antanal side of the left arm, food grooves are seen passing from the facets for the brachioles to a more or less continuous groove along. the length of the arm. The same process is present on the anal side of the right arm. One brachiole facet is present on each arm segment and no covering plates over the grooves have been observed. There are three basal plates and four plates surrounding the anus. In the anal (posterior) side of the theca, an angulation occurs to the left, forming a more or less flattened surface in what might be termed the left posterior, and is bordered to the left by the left arm. In this restricted area there are only two large plates between the basal circlet and the plates adjacent to the anus. In the lateral wall of the posterior thecal plates are small, with four or five present between the basals and the summit platform which is bordered by the right arm. The right lateral side of the theca has two series of six small plates between the basals and the right arm. The antanal (anterior) is composed of slightly larger plates than those of the right side and considerably larger plates as the left arm May 1952 STRIMPLE: TWO NEW SPECIES OF SINCLAIROCYSTIS 159 bearing ray is approached. In the first mentioned ray is composed of three large and two small area, four or five plates are present between plates, including the basal and summit plates. basals and those plates adjoining the anus and in The anal opening is covered by a low pyramid- the latter area only three. The left arm-bearing _ like circlet of five triangular shaped plates. What Figs. 1-4.—Sinclairocystis sulphurensis, n. sp., posterior side, right side, anterior side and left side, X 4; Fics. 5-9.—Sinclairocystis angulatus, n. sp., right side, left side, top view, anterior side and posterior side, X 2.5. 160 appears to bea small opening (hydropore?) occurs in the median portion of the first plate below the mouth on the antanal side of the theca and is marked by a tubercle like projection. Most thecal plates are hexagonal, byt several have five sides and a few have as many as seven sides. All except those of the anal pyramid have strongly depressed median sections and are marked by fine grooves, which are perpendicular to the sides of the plates. There is indication that near the sutures some grooves penetrate the theca. Granular ornamentation is present on all thecal plates except those of the anal pyramid. Measurements of the holotype are as follows: Maximum height of theca (including arms), 20.2 mm; maximum width, 19.1 mm; diameter of anus, 2.5 mm; length of left arm, 24.6 mm; length of right arm, 28.2 mm. Remarks.—S. angulatus is readily separable from S. praedecta Bassler (1950) in possession of more numerous thecal plates, a different shape to the theca, and the distinctive attitude of the right arm in the former species. In S. praedecta, the right arm curves down the right side of the theca with only slhght curvature toward the posterior. In the present species the right arm forms an uncompleted circular loop, terminating high on the theca in posterior position. S. sulphur- ensis has the same arm placement as S. praedecta but differs in several respects from either species. Occurrence —Blackriverian (Bromide forma- tion, near top of green shale), 1.8 miles south of Sulphur, Okla. Holotype—Collected by the author. To be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 42, No. 5 Sinclairocystis sulphurensis, n. sp. Figs. 1-4 Theca is small, rotund in outline. A portion of the left arm is preserved which shows the pro- portionately large nature of these appendages. Most thecal plates are hexagonal but several have frona five to seven sides. The larger plates are in the anterior where only two or three plates are interposed between the basals and the four plates adjoining the anus. Median portions of the thecal plates are shallowly depressed and round holes mark the sutures, particularly im the posterior and right sides of the theca. No ornamentation is present. Measurements of the holotype are as follows: Maximum height of theca (including arm), 10.2 mm; maximum width of theca (excluding arms), 6.7 mm; diameter of anal opening, 1.2 mm. Remarks.—S. sulphurensis differs from S. angu- latus and S. praedecta in outline of theca, small size, and lack of ornamentation. The small num- ber of thecal plates and the attitude of the arms indicates closer affinity to S. praedecta than to S. angulatus. The openings into the body cavity found along the sutures are not so numerous and have a circular outline as compared to the innumerable openings along the sutures of S. praedecta, which have rectangular outlines. Occurrence —Blackriverian (Bromide forma- tion, near top of green shale), 1.8 miles south of Sulphur, Okla. Holotype.—Collected by Mrs. Melba Strimple. To be deposited in the U. S. National Museum. BOTANY.—A new Nymphoides from Colombia.1 LyMan B. Situ, U.S. National Museum. The present species is one of many recent, novelties which indicate that the flora of the eastern Llanos of Colombia is still poorly known in spite of a great increase in collec- tions by local and foreign botanists. Nymphoides flaccida L. B. Smith, sp. nov. Fig. 1 Foliorum Jaminis oblongis, basi cuneatis bis cordatis, flaccidis; corolla alba, lobis fimbriatis. Plant submersed; stems elongate, 2.5 mm in diameter, bearing one to several leaves and a 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. cluster of flowers at the apex; petioles from very short on the largest leaves to 6 cm long on some of the smaller ones; blades oblong, slightly broader toward the cuneate to cordate base, broadly obtuse, flaccid with repand margins, 8 em long, 2.56 em wide, glandular; pedicels slender, 7 cm long, naked, glabrous; sepals | linear, 6 mm long; corolla white, over 2 cm in diameter, its lobes long-fimbriate; fruit un- known. Type in the Herbario Nacional Colombiano, collected in the Cafo Quenane, eastern Llanos, Territory of Meta, Colombia, January 25, 1942, by A. Dugand and R. Jaramilio M. (no. 3121). May 1952 Additional specimen examined: CoLomBta: Meta: In the Cano de Peralonso, vicinity of Villavicensio, eastern Llanos, alt. 450 m, July 24-28, 1946, Jaramillo, Mesa, Idrobo, & Fer- nandez 362 (US). PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 16] The flowers of Nymphoides flaccida are much like those of NV. humboldtiana (H.B.K.) Kuntze, but the great contrast in their leaves without any intermediate variation makes it seem fairly certain that they are distinct. Fie. 1.—Nymphoides flaccida: a. Part of the type showing the only complete flower, X1; b, part of Jaramillo et al. 362 showing variation of leaves and a well-developed umbel, <3. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 445TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 445th meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club on March 12, 1951, was called to order at 8:04 p.m. by the President, NatHan R. Situ. Also present were: W. Ram- BERG, H.S. Rappieyn, J. A. Stevenson, W. F. Fosuac, A. T. McPuerson, C. «’. W. Mursr- BECK, SARA H. Branuam, E. U. Connon, W. R. Wepet, L. H. Apams, E. H. Waker, W. A. Dayton, C. A. Brerts, L. A. Sprnpuer, A. M. Grirrin, H. W. Hempie, F. M. Derannorr, and, by invitation, Marcarrr Prrrman, J. R. SWALLeN, and G. P. Watton. A letter of resignation from the Chairman of the Committee on Membership, L. A. SPINDLER, was read. The following report of the Committee on the Encouragement of Science Talent was read and approved: This Committee judged the papers submitted from the District of Columbia schools in the Tenth Science Talent Search conducted by the Science Clubs of America. The following were selected for recommendation as winners: Pauu E. Conpon—Paper 920—Iron-Type Chemi- cal Heaters CreciLtA GREEN—Paper 1600—Potential ence in a Conducting Solution Donaup L. MitueErR—Paper 1698—Observation of Meteors Jospra M. Caupwetn, Acting Chairman Differ- The President read a letter from W. N. Fen- TON, Chairman of the Committee on the Index of the Journal, recommending appointment of a committee to consider and implement publica- tion of the index as prepared in ecard index form by Mary A Bradley. The Board voted that the President appoint a Committee on Ways and Means of Publishing the Index 162 The Board elected Martin A. Mason to be Vice-President of the Academy representing the District of Columbia Section of the American Society of Civil Engineers following the reading of a letter dated March 6 from C. J. STEvENs, President of the District of Columbia Section, that nominated Mr. Mason as its candidate. The following deaths of members of the Academy were reported: Maurice I. Smrru, on January 26, 1951 (elected May 5, 1939); OwEN B. Frencu, on February 12, 1951 (elected March 8, 1915); CuartpeL R. Barnett, on March 6, 1951 (elected June 13, 1933). A discussion of increasing the age limit beyond 40 years for nominees for Awards for Scientific Achievement and of granting more than one annual award in each of the three different cate- gories did not result in any recommendation requiring action by the Board. After discussion the Board voted to discontinue sending engraved certificates of membership to newly elected members. The President was in- structed to appoint a committee to consider costs and make recommendations to the Board on the type of certificate and preferred method of reproduction of Certificates of Merit. 446TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 446th meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club on April 16, 1951, was called to order at 8:03 p.m. by the President, Naruan R. Smiru. Also present were: W. Ram- BERG, H. S. Rappieyr, J. A. STEVENSON, Cartes Drecuster, C. L. Gazin, A. T. Mc- PHERSON, SARA E. BranHam, W. R. WEDEL, E. H. Waker, W. A. Dayton, L. A. SPINDLER, H. W. Hemete, F. M. Deranporr, AND, by in- vitation, Marcarer Pirrman, J. R. SWALLen, G. P. Watton, L. E. Yocum, and M. A. Mason. The President announced the following ap- pointments: (1) E. H. Watker, of the Smithsonian In- stitution, as Chairman of the Committee on Membership, in leu of L. A. SprnpLER, whose resignation was accepted at the last meeting. (2) Committee on Indexing of the Journal: Joun E. Grar, Chairman, Wiriu1aM N. Fenton, C. F. W. Munrsepeck, Paunt H. Onuser, J. A. STEVENSON. Chairman Pittman of the Committee on Meet- ings reported that the May meeting would be addressed by D. J. Parsons of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, on Science in crime detection. Chairman Mason of the Committee for En- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 5 couragement of Science Talent reported on the part taken by members of the Academy in judg- ing exhibits at the Annual Science Fair, and that President SmrrH would present awards to the winners at the Science Fair Awards Meeting on April 18 to be held in the evening at the Depart- ment of Commerce Auditorium. The Washington Daily News will pay expenses of the winners for a trip to the National Science Fair to be held in St. Louis on May 10, 11, and 12. The Secretary reported the death of Battny EK. Brown on March 9, 1951, and of Mrrritn BERNARD on April 13, 1951. The Treasurer reported contributions of $25 for support of publication of the Science Calendar in local newspapers. 447TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 447th meeting of the Board of Managers held in the Cosmos Club on May 14, 1951, was called to order at 8:02 p.m. by the President, NatHan R. Smirx. Also present were: H. S. Rappteyre, J. A. Stevenson, C. L. Gazin, Sara E. Brana, E. H. Waker, W. A. Day- ton, C. A. Brtrs, L. A. Spinpuer, A. M. GriFFin, F. M. Drranporr, and, by invitation, J. R. Swauten, G. P. Warton, L. E. Yocum, W. N. Fenton, and J. EH. Grar. By invitation, J. E. Grar, Chairman, and W. N. Fenton, Secretary of the special Com- mittee on Indexing the Journal, presented a preliminary report for their committee. This report was discussed in considerable detail and on motion was accepted with appreciation and referred to the Executive Committee. The Secretary reported the death of W. F. ALLEN. The Treasurer read a letter of resignation from L. R. Harsrap which was approved as of January 1, 1951. The Treasurer reported that a total of about $40 had been received from affiliated societies in support of the Science Calendar. 448TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 448th meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club June 18, 1951, was called to order at 8:00 p.m. by the President NatHan R. Smrru. Also present were: HS. Rappieye, J. A. Stevenson, H. A. REHDER, Cuas. Drecuster, A. T. McPuerson, C. F. W. Moversepeck, Sara E. Branuam, J. J. FAnEy, F. W. Poos, W. A. Dayron, L. A. SPINDLER, F. M. Deranporr, and, by invitation, Mar- GARET Pirrman, Paut H. Orusmr, G. P. WAL- May 1952 ToN, J. E. Grar, Miss Parrerson (Science Service), Mr. Wacner (Dupont Theatre), Keira JoHnson (Woodrow Wilson Jr. High School). Miss Patterson and Messrs. Johnson and Wag- ner outlined the plan of a benefit premier showing of the film Kon-Tikt. It is supposed that the Polynesian Islands may have been originally settled by Peruvians who floated on a raft con- structed of balsa wood and bamboo and event- ually drifted to those islands. Thus a Norwegian group led by Mr. Thor Heyerdahl constructed a raft and after driftmg at the mercy of the pre- vailing winds and ocean currents for 101 days eventually landed in Tahiti. This feat is con- sidered to afford some credulity in the original thesis of settlement of the Polynesians by Peru- vians. The film Kon-Tiki is based on this voyage by raft. After some discussion the Board accepted the proposal that the Washington Academy of Sciences sponsor the premier showing of the film at the Dupont Theatre in Washington for the benefit of the Science Fair Fund. The Secretary presented a report of the meet- ing of the Executive Committee that immediately preceded this Board Meeting. Minutes of this meeting are as follows: Meeting of the Executive Committee in the Cosmos Club Library was called to order at 7:30 p-m. by the President. In attendance: N. R. Smiru, H. S. Rappieys, J. A. Stevenson, F. M. DEFANDORF. President Smith reviewed details relative to the proposed publication of the Index of the Journal. He stated that an approximate cost of $6,000 for publication in addition to the $1,500 already expended for the preparation of the card file index by Miss Bradley could be expected on the basis of detailed estimate received by the Special Committee on Indexing the Journal. Ways and means of reducing the net cost of publication and other details were discussed, and as a result of the deliberation it was decided to recommend to the Board, on the basis that solici- tations for outside help would be made in order to reduce the net cost to the Academy, that the index should be published if it could be done at a total cost not to exceed $6,000. Mr. GrarF reported for the Special Committee on Indexing the Journal, and after reading a letter from Mrs. Lemma F. CuarK, Librarian of the Smithsonian Institution, telling of the value that such a printed index would be to librarians, called upon Mr. Orxnser to present firm esti- mates of the cost of printing the index. Detailed PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 163 estimates had been prepared that indicated a cost of $5,705 for 1,000 copies if printed by letter press and $6,053 if printed by offset press methods. Dr. Rrexper as Custodian presented a résumé of the inventory of complete and incomplete sets of the JouRNAL and mentioned a gift of an almost complete set from the Library of the American Optical Co. Dr. Sara EK. BraNnHAm presented a summary of thoughts in regard to the activities and re- sponsibilities of the Academy for consideration in the fall. 449TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 449th meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club on October 15, 1951, was called to order at 7:59 p.m. by the President, NarHan R. Smiru. Others in attendance were: WattTeR Ramperc, H. 8. Rappieyr, J. A. STEVENSON, CHARLES DrecustLer, C. L. Gazin, A. T. McPuerson, Miuron Harris, Sara E. BranHaAM, JosppH J. Fanny, E. H. Waker, W. A. Dayton, C. A. Brerrs, R. S. Ditn, L. A. SprinpDLER, A. M. Grirrin, H. G. Dorsry, M. A. Mason, F. M. Dreranporr, and, by invitation, Marecarer Pirrman, G. P. Watton, and L. E. Yocum. Dr. Yocum, Chairman of the Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Research, presented his com- mittee’s recommendations in a letter to the President dated October 12, 1951, as follows: Your committee on grants in aid for research submits the following report and recommends favorable action: For purchase of a curved barium titanite ultra- sonic transducer by Dr. Karl H. Langenstress and Dr. Francis E. Fox. Amount $170. For purchase of nonmetallic plastic cages for metabolism studies by Dr. Martin Rubin and Dr. M. X. Sullivan. For purchase of Bakelite and other resins for making models to study stress by a photoelastic polariscope by C. H. Walther. Amount. $75. The Board voted to approve the allotments in the amounts and for the projects recommended. Mr. Mason, Chairman of the Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent, reported that the benefit premiere performance of the film Kon-Tiki resulted in a net balance of $776.22. The Board authorized the Treasurer to turn over the proceeds to Science Service for use in connec- tion with the Science Fair activities. Dr. McPuerson reported that the 6th Annual Science Fair, to be held in Washington this year, 164 JOURNAL OF THE would make use of facilities at the Catholic Uni- versity for showing the exhibits. It is felt that this location will be satisfactory because of the ample space available for exhibits and for auto- mobile parking. President SmrrH read a memorandum from Past President Grar, Chairman of the Special Committee on Indexing the Journal, relative to incorporation of an index of the earlier Proceed- ings with the index of the Journal. The estimated additional cost is $200. President Smrrxu stated that since this matter had been brought up subsequent to the June meeting, he had polled the Executive Committee, and on the basis that they were 4 to 1 in favor of including the indexing of the Proceedings, he had ordered inclusion of this additional material. The Board voted to affirm this action of the Executive Committee. President SMiTH read a letter from Dr. Coons, a member of the Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement, outlining reasons why the age limit should be raised to 45 for such awards. Dr. Van Evers had made similar recommendations relative to the Science Teach- ing Award. It was pointed out in the latter in- stance that one teacher, now over 40, who has done remarkable work, would have received recognition earlier had the Award for Teaching of Science been established as early as the awards for other science groups. The President will ask Dr. Van Evera to attend the next meeting of the Board. 450TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 450th meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club on November 19, 1951, was called to order at 8:03 p.m. by the President, NaruHan R. Smirx. Also in attendance were: Watrer RampBerG, J. A. STEVANSON, CHARLES Drecuster, W. F. Fosuaa, C. L. Gazin, A. T. McPuerson, J. J. Fanny, F. W. Poos, E. H. Waker, W. R. Weve, F. M. Deranporr, and, by invitation, MarGarnr Prrrman, L. FE. Yocum, J. I. Horrman, and J. P. E. Morrison. Dr. Pittman announced that arrangements had been completed for Dr. Witu1am EB. Hrarr, of the Weather Bureau, to speak at the De- cember 20 meeting, on Precipitation and the water supply. President Smith read a letter and report from Mr. Grar, Chairman of the Committee on In- dexing the Journal. The following are excerpts from the report, dated November 16, 1951: WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 5 To tHE Boarp OF MANAGERS: The Committee on the Index is glad to be able to report progress on the job assigned to it by the Board of Managers—seeing through to completion the publication of the Index to the first 40 vol- umes of the Journal of the Academy. As author- ized by the Executive Committee, Volumes 1-13 of the Proceedings (the Academy’s publication antedating the Journal) have been included; the additional cards have been inserted; and the whole index, comprising 16,570 entries, is now ready to be turned over to the printer. Bids for the printing of the Index have been obtained from 4 printing firms, 3 in Baltimore and 1 in Lancaster, Pa. (1 Washington printer declined to bid.) The lowest bid, in the amount of $5,928.40, came from the Lord Baltimore Press. As this figure is only a few dollars under the amount that the Board has authorized to be spent on the Index, the Committee has decided to alter the specifications to allow use of a non- rag paper instead of a 50-percent rag stock orig- inally stipulated. This will effect a saving of $300-$400 and thus allow a little more leeway for contingencies. Contract for the printing of the book will be awarded to the Lord Baltimore Press, and it is expected that the copy will be in the printer’s hands within the next week. In authorizing the publication of the Index, at its meeting on June 18, 1951, the Board moved that ‘steps be taken to secure outside funds to minimize the net cost to the Academy.’ The Index Committee is agreed that the task of raising such funds is definitely outside its province, but feels that the Board might weleome some suggestions pertinent to the problem. In the first place, the Committee thinks that the Academy’s constituent societies should all be approached for contribu- tions, in proportion to their interest and re- sources. All these societies have a stake in the Academy, and they should be given an oppor- tunity to express in a tangible way their broader interests in Washington science, or perhaps to reaffirm such interests. In the second place, cer- tain sources outside of Washington might be explored. The Committee is placing in your hands drafts of two letters that follow up these sug- gestions. The Secretary read the report of the Nominat- ing Committee, as follows: The Nominating Committee, consisting of the Vice-Presidents of the Academy, met in the Library of the Cosmos Club on October 15, 1951. The meeting was called to order at 9:15 p.m. by Josgeru J. FaAnry, who, as Vice-President for the Washington Section, American Chemical Society, presided as chairman. Others present were: E. H. Waker, Wn. A. Dayron, C. A. Berts, R. S. Diui, L. A. Sprnpuer, A. M. Grirrin, HerBerT G. Dorssy, Martin A. Mason, F. M. Deran- DORF. The nominees selected for the offices to be filled by balloting of the membership in December were as follows: For President-Elect—F. M. Srrzurer For Secretary—F Rancis M. DEFANDORF For Treasurer—Howarb 8S. RarpLEYE For the Board of Managers: To serve from January 1952 to January 1953 to fill vacancy of H. P. Barss, resigned:—C. F. W. MvuESEBECK To serve from January 1952 to January 1954 to fill vacancy of J. A. Stevenson, resigned :— Mitton Harris To serve from January 1952 to January 1955 (two to be elected):—Rogrr G. Bares, ILorsE B. Cram, W. W. Dien, James I. HOFFMAN JosppH J. Fanny, Chairman. F. M. Deranpore, Secretary. President SMirH announced that he was re- tiring from his work in the U. 8S. Department of Agriculture on November 30, 1951, and was » leaving Washington and moving to Florida, so that he would not be present at the next meet- ing. He expressed his appreciation to members of the Board and his Committees for their co- operation and good effort on behalf of the Academy. He then declared the formal meeting adjourned at 9:15 p.m. after inviting those present to remain for refreshments he had pro- vided in the adjoiming room. 451ST MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 451st meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club on December 17, 1951, was called to order at 8:02 p.m. by President- Elect Watrer RamsBera. Others in attendance were: H.S. Rappipre, J. A. STEVENSON, CHARLES DRECHSLER, Sara EH. Branuam, W. R. WEDEL, F. W. Poos, E. H. Waker, W. A. Dayvon, L. A. SPINDLER, A. M. Grirrin, F. M. Dreranporr, and, by invitation, F. W. Houeu, Marearer Pirrman, J. R. SWALLEN, and J. P. E. Morrison. Chairman Prrrman, of the Committee on Meet- ings, discussed the Academy’s Annual Dinner Meeting to be held on January 17 and announced that Tuomas R. Henry had been chosen as speaker and would show the film The Secret Land. Dr. WALKER presented nominations for mem- bership and expressed appreciation of the work of the Committee on Membership, of which he is Chairman. He discussed what might be done to increase the active membership. The Secretary explained that the additional nomination for President-Elect of ALAN T. Wa- TERMAN appearing on the election ballot was the result of a nominating petition signed by 38 mem- bers of the Academy. The Board accepted the resignation of Capt. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 165 H. W. Hemp te as Vice-President representing the Society of Military Engineers and elected in his place Col. F. W. Houeu. The Secretary mentioned several requests for exchange of journals with other organizations, which had to be refused inasmuch as the Academy does not maintain a library of its own. The Treasurer told of the receipt of options in the case of two securities owned by the Academy and explained that no Board action was necessary. [For minutes of 452d meeting of Board of Managers, see April 1952 issue of JOURNAL, p. 135.] 453D MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 453d meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club on February 18, 1952, was called to order at 8:03 p.m. by President RampBera. Other present were: F. M. Serzuer, H.S. Rapeteys, J. A.Srmvenson, W. F. Fosuaa, . T. McPuHerson, C. F. W. Mursepeck, SARA 4. BranuaM, Miuron Harris, W. W. Dreut, A. G. McNtsu, W. R. Weprt, J. K. Taytor, F. W. Poos, L. M. Hurcuins, W. A. Dayton, C. A. Berrs, A. H. Scorr, F. W. Hoveu, H. G. Dorsry, F. M. Dreranporr, and, by invitation, EK. H. Watkrr, H. W. Wettus, W. N. Fenton, J. R. Swauten, L. E. Yocum, J. P. E. Morrt- son, W. T. Reap, N. 8S. Drakn, and W. L. ScHMIrr. The President announced appointment of the following committeemen for 1952: | pe Appointed Members of Hxecutive Committee: F. M. Serzuer, Wituram A. Dayton. Board of Editors of the Journal: Wiui1aM F. FosuaaG, Senior Editor; J. C. Ewrrs, replacing CHARLES DRECHSLER; PHILIP DRUCKER, Asso- ciate Editor for a term of 3 years, representing the Anthropological Society of Washington; J. I. HorrMan, Associate Iditor for a term of 3 years, representing the Chemical Society of Washington. Committee on Membership: E. H. Waker (Chairman), M. 8. ANpmrson, R. C. Duncan, G. T. Faust, I. B. Hansen, D. B. Jones, Dororuy Nickerson, F. A. Smrrn, Hernz Specur, H. M. TrENT, ALFRED WEISSLER. Committee on Meetings: H. W. Weuus (Chair- man), Wm. R. Campspeur, W. R. Cuariine, D. J. Davis, H. G. Dorsry, O. W. Torreson. Committee on Monographs: W. N. Frenvron (Chairman). To January 1955—W. N. FEnvron, ALAN STONE. Committee on Awards for Scientific Achieve- ment: J. R. SWALLEN, General Chairman. For the Biological Sciences: J. R. Swauven (Chairman), L. M. Hurcntns, MarGarer Prrr wan, FE. W. Poos, L. P. Scaunrz. 166 For the Engineering Sciences: R. C. Duncan (Chairman), A. C. FrrLpNER, WAYNE C. Hatt, J. W. McBurney, O. 8. Reapine, H. L. Wuirre- MORE. For the Physical Sciences: L. A. Woop (Chair- man), P. H. Apeuson, F. 8. Darr, Grorcre W. IrRvING, JR., J. H. McMILien. For the Teaching of Science: M. A. Mason (Chairman), F. E. Fox, M. H. Martin. Committee on Grants-In-Aid for Research: L. E. Yocum (Chairman), H. N. Eaton, K. F. Herz- FELD. Committee on Policy and Planning: W. A. Day- TON, Chairman. To January 1955—L. W. Parr, F. B. SILsBEE. Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent: A. T. McPuerson, Chairman. To January 1955— A. T. McPueErson, W. T. Reap. Committee of Auditors: C. L. Gazin (Chair- man), Loursr M. RussgEtu, D. R. Tate. Committee of Tellers: Grorce P. WaALton (Chairman), GEorGE H. Coons, C. L. GARNER. The President then called on Dr. A. T. Mc- PuHeEeRSON, Chairman of the Committee on En- couragement of Science Talent, who presented a report for his committee dated February 18, 1952, as follows: The Committee on the Encouragement of Science Talent presents the following nomina- tions for junior awards for scientific achievement : Wiiitiam Weston Hooker, of Anacostia High School, for studies of Pascal’s triangle. ROWLAND SANDER JOHNSON, of Coolidge High School, for studies in electronics. JoHN Erretr LANKrorp, of McKinley High School, for observations on variable stars. JoEL SuHappirio, of Woodrow Wilson High School, for studies on crystal modification. Stuart JosepH Yuri, of McKinley High School, for studies on radar equipment. RoBERT STEPHEN ZIERNICKI, Of Priory School, for studies on chemical spectroscopy. The foregoing candidates were selected from among the entries from District of Columbia Schools in the Eleventh Annual Science Talent Search of the Science Clubs of America sponsored by Westinghouse Educational Foundation and administered by Science Service. The Board approved the award of Certificates of Merit for those nominated. In the discussion it was pointed out that Chairman McPherson will take up the matter of including students of high schools in the suburban area of metropolitan Washington for consideration next year in mak- ing such awards. Arrangements will have to be worked out with the Academies in Maryland and Virginia, since under present arrangements for Science Talent Search, areas outside of the District of Columbia, in nearby Maryland and Virginia, are not grouped with the District. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 5 Chairman McPherson then expressed the con- cern of his committee with (1) the need for in- creasing the interest of students in science, (2) the need for allocation of adequate time for laboratory work in science courses, (3) the need of help that might be easily provided by members of the Academy in the form of lectures, etc., for science teachers, and (4) the need for action in encouraging teachers of science in high schools. He expressed the opinion that another committee, arranged for top-level participation, is highly desirable to take care of such a project. In order that the Board might become properly informed about the shortage of eng’neering and scientific manpower in relation to the national need for increased interest in scientific education in the high schools, Chairman McPherson introduced Dr. W. T. Reap, Chairman of the Education Committee of the D. C. Council of Engineering and Architectural Societies, and Prof. N. S. Drake, of the Council of the Chemical Society. Dr. Read spoke of the meeting of the Engineers Joint Council, Commission on Engineering Man- power, on September 28, 1951, attended by representatives from 28 States. A serious man- power shortage exists not only in engineering but also in the fields of science and mathematics upon which engineering depends. This shortage will become even more acute because student regis- tration for courses in these fields has dropped to alarmingly low numbers. This deplorable trend away from mathematics and science courses in schools in the District and in suburban Mary- land and Virginia follows the national trend. The need for cooperation of the Academy and its affiliated societies with the D. C. Council in an endeavor to improve the situation was stressed. It was suggested that continuing and concerted effort must be made to interest more capable and highgrade students to take science and mathematics courses with the view that more should enter scientific and engineering pro- fessions. The immediate need is to provide each high school in the metropolitan area with help from those in the professions who can stimulate the necessary interest. We must insure by effec- tive methods that suitable courses of instruction are made available to capable high school stu- dents. Individual engineers and scientists with ability must therefore assume additional obliga- tions in their communities to make known the needs of an adequate program. They must in- dividually enlist aid through Parent-Teachers May 1952 Associations and other civic agencies and see that they are concerned about adequate support for teachers and provision of proper facilities for instruction. In short, the seriousness of this trend of students away from the pursuit of engi- neering and scientific careers must be counter- acted. Dr. Read spoke of the effort the national engineering groups are devoting to this problem; notably as an example $10,000 has been provided by the American Society of Metals. He feels that to meet the immediate emergency the help of one engineer and one scientist in every high school this spring should be the goal. His committee is attempting to list people who are willing to work (1) by meeting and advising students; (2) by serving on committees on curricula and the standing of teachers; (3) by speaking on scientific subjects before science clubs; (4) through PTA groups where they have children in schools and can work effectively within such groups. Professor Drake concluded the discussion by emphasizing the need for excellent instruction in basic mathematics courses. He emphasized that primarily students at this age need to be taught to think and to recognize how scientific problems are approached. Students who show latent ability in science need encouragement lest they be diverted to other less exacting fields of endeavor. Thus well trained teachers are essential. The ensuing discussion by Board members helped to emphasize the lack of requirements for adequate training in mathematics and science in local high schools. On motion, the President was directed to appoint a Committee on Scientific Education, to cooperate on behalf of the Academy with the D. C. Council of Engineering and Architectural Societies in their effort to achieve in high schools in the metropolitan area adequate courses and interest among qualified students in mathematics and science. The Secretary read the Budget submitted for 1952 by the Treasurer, and recommended by the Executive Committee for submission to and adoption by the Board of Managers: OBITUARY 167 Receipts Estimated 1951 1952 INGTON Oi CUES GAG eon cove oaeoDcanooeDeoD $4244.84 $4300.00 Subscriptions to JOURNAL................. 1519.88 1600.00 Interest & dividends sales................. 2372.67 2000.00 179.89 500.00 Affiliated societies for Science Calendar . 61.09 50.00 Rotalsaee rca actasciee ence aati ce acres $8378.37 $8450.00 Disbursements JOURNAL and JOURNAL Office.............. $6500.49 $6850.00 Secretary/sioffice. 2)... ese series eciee es cues 394.67 550.00 pbreasurerjs/oficeeesreasneee ia eee Oo ale, 300.00 SEWIAC3 OL Oieorbosncsopcdos epucopodoocons 44.35 50.00 Archivisticncaccn asain 30.00 20.00 Meetings Committee....................... 256.65 500.00 Membership Committee................... — 20.00 SciencevHairmry rs cece eee ee 100.00 100.00 Science!@alendary..2'0.. 00." eae e-men see 55.00 60.00 Motels eieey esas leah: pee ysis ee $7643.28 $8450.00 This budget is the same as for 1951 except that the JourNAL allotment has been increased $350; the Archivist’s allotment has been de- creased $55; and the Science Calendar allotment increased $10. In the ensuing discussion, Senior Editor FosHaG mentioned the desirability of increasing the number of pages published in the JouRNAL, suggesting that it be increased by say four addi- tional pages in three issues per year. He also recommended that the Managing Editor, who takes care of much editorial detail, should receive increased compensation. A motion was passed to increase the compensation for work of the Managing Editor from $25 to $40 per month. The Board of Managers then voted to accept and adopt the Budget for 1952 as presented by the Treasurer. Mr. Wetts, Chairman of the Committee on Meetings, announced that the Awards meeting would be held in March. Probably one meeting will be devoted to a discussion of the problem of developing adequate scientific manpower. Afhliation of the District of Columbia Section of the Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine was unanimously approved. F. M. Deranporpr, Secretary. Obituary CLaRIBEL Rura Barnerr was born in Kent, Ohio, on March 26, 1872, the daughter of George and Lucina (Deuel) Barnett. Her father was of English birth but had come to this country as a young man. She had a happy childhood in Kent and always retained a great affection for it, often recalling the games and adventures in which she seems to have been a leader. Her education was begun in the Kent public schools, and she pre- pared for college at Western Reserve Academy 168 in Hudson, Ohio. She was graduated from the University of Michigan in 1893, with the Ph.B. degree, and later received a membership in Phi Beta Kappa from that university. In October 1893 she entered the New York State Library School at Albany, and in the spring of 1895 she took and passed the Civil Service examination for cataloger in the U.S. Department of Agriculture Library. In the year 1907 Secretary of Agriculture James Wilson appointed Miss Barnett to the position of librarian, which she held until her retirement in November 1940. Her interests were by no means limited to her own library. Cooperative under- takings made a special appeal to her, and realizing the need for greater cooperation among agricul- tural libraries she was responsible for organizing the Agricultural Libraries Section of the Ameri- ean Library Association. Another form of mutual help is found in the emphasis placed on inter- library loans. The main source of such loans to her own library was the Library of Congress, to- gether with the other special government. li- braries. The largest class of borrowers from her own library were the State agricultural colleges and experiment stations, but loans were made also to other scientific and public libraries needing them for serious work. In connection with this work Miss Barnett inaugurated a new and pioneering service, called the bibliofilm service. Its purpose was to make microfilm copies of articles to send to out-of-town borrowers instead of lending bound volumes. For some time photostat copies had been used for this purpose, but the microfilms were even more useful, especially for long articles. Miss Barnett was a prominent member of the American Library Association, and in addition to serving as second vice-president in 1921-22 she was chairman of its Oberly Memorial Fund Committee and a member of its Board of Re- sources of American Libraries. She was an elected member of the American Library Institute. She was active in library circles in Washington and was president of the District of Columbia Li- brary Association in 1929-80. The history of agriculture in this country was a subject in which she was much interested. She was a charter member of the Agricultural History Society and served as a member of the committee which organized the Washington section in the early 1920’s. For its journal, Agricultural His- tory, she wrote an article entitled “The Agri- cultural Museum, an Early Agricultural Periodi- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 5 ‘al,’ which appeared in April, 1928. As a matter of interest to herself she did much research on the lives and personalities of the early United States officials in charge of agricultural work be- fore the Department was established and corre- sponded with their descendants to get information about them. Among these were Henry L. Ells- worth (1791-1858) and Horace Capron (1804— 1885). She contributed 25 biographies of agri- culturists, including Secretary James Wilson, “Tama Jim,” to the ‘Dictionary of American Biography.” She was a member of the Library Advisory Wage Committee of the U.S. Joint Congressional Committee on Reclassification of Salaries in 1919- 20. She was a member of the Washington Acad- emy of Sciences, a fellow of the American Asso- ciation for the Advancement of Science and the Bibliographical Society of America, and a mem- ber of the American Association of University Women, Phi Beta Kappa, and Pi Gamma Mu honorary society. As a librarian, Miss Barnett’s principal aim was to give all possible service to the users of the library, especially to the scientific workers of the Department of Agriculture, and also to those of other institutions, foremcst among them the State agricultural colleges and experiment stations. Since the library has an international reputation it is visited by many workers from outside Wash- ington and even the United States. These were always welcomed mest cordially, and no trouble was spared in giving help in identifying and assembling the publications needed. One of the fellow members of the Agricultural History Society wrote of Miss Barnett at the time of her retirement in 1940: ‘Her great service was performed so modestly, so entirely beyond public notice, and was at the very root of the achievements of other workers, that it is impos- sible to estimate it.” Personally she was modest as to her own abili- ties and attainments, although firmly maintain- ing her decisions after she had thought a thing through. She was interested in other people and was well loved by her staff. She had a great capacity for friendship and possessed an unusual number of devoted friends to whom she herself was equally devoted. The last six years of her life were spent as an invalid following a stroke in 1945, and she died on March 6, 1951. She was buried in her old home town of Kent, Ohio. Eva B. Hawks Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences MAR OSUCLOTUD er cee usr a noe hei Water RamsBere, National Bureau of Standards HEC OSEOCTULEELE CLI pera aparece PE ciabatta teva F. M. Serzupr, U. 8. National Museum STARRETT] Sd cr pate once ..F. M. Deranvorr, National Bureau of Standards PP CSU Cerne. ros ctaarts rd Stee Howarp S. Rappieye, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey LURE OATES Gin eagle Io ata Be OO Ore Joun A. Stevenson, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haratp A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: pulosophical Societyron Washingtont ay... she.’ dee .cee ces nee eel. A. G. McNisa Anthropological Society of Washington........................ Watpo R. WEeDEL Bialopsicalysociety, of Washime tonics se sceneries see aeh eee Hueu T. O’ Neu @hemicalisocretyzon Washington... (ka5.08). 2. dees conc nese Joun K. Taytor Entomological Society of Washington........................ FrepERIcK W. Poos NationaliGeographicisoclietyass.084..6-4-.65. 4c sin essen: ALEXANDER WETMORE Geoloricall Society, of Washingtonie..........50-4-s. 42 see e dae: A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia........................ FRED O. Cor Wolumbiarbhistonricall Societys, «nse os ee. sole ee cee ot ee: GILBERT GROSVENOR Bovamicalusocietyaotwiashingcones sng ie: sees fee oe Les M. Hurcuins Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wiuuiam A. Dayton WiashinetoniSoctety of Pimgineers) yy) ats eiae a laden sien Cuirrorp A. Brerts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers...... A. H. Scorr Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp S. DiLu Helminthological Society of Washington.......................... L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Anaus M. GrRirFin Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Fioyp W. Houcu Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers........... Herpert G. Dorsey District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason District of Columbia Section, Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine N. R. Evuis Elected Members of the Board of Managers: phomamuanryil O53. feo 5c ce. ie hoe lane eds C. F. W. Munsepecr, A. T. McPHERSON PROM ema MO 5A nd Seria e pode ae os Sara EK. Branuam, Mitton Harris PROM Agel DOOM A ie Malas iyo cue ig dael sae seme Rocer G. Batss, W. W. Dirau EROTIC Off WIGS ae eee ee All the above officers plus the Senior Editor lsaapa! 637 IDGIORS Gpeh ZNSNGKOND THURS. seen adeoeasaebooeeon sod ve oUdar [See front cover] Executive Committee.... WALTER RAMBERG (chairman), F.M. Serzuer, H.S.Rappieye, Wiuiram A. Dayton, F. M. DeranporF Committee on Membership. .E.H. WALKER (CRED) M.S. ANpERsoN, CLARENCE Cort- tam, R. C. Duncan, JoHN Faper, G. T. Faust, I. B. HANSEN, FRANK Kracex, D. B. JONES, BE. G. REINHARD, Reece I. ‘SAILER, Leo A. SHINN, F. A. Smith, HErnz SPECHT, H.M. Trent, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings....H. W. Weuus (chairman), Wo. R. CAMPBELL, W. R. Cuap- LINE, D. J. Davis, H. ot Dorsey, O.'W. Torreson Committee on Monographs (W.N. FENTON, chairman) : TO aimee OSB INE Ae he ae RAE lie arte ree eine R. W. imuay, P. W. Oman BROMINE ODA ra sare eis mits Wie cya ete 2 HT ce at S. F. Buaks, F. C. Kracex “ACG eI eit MNCS GSS ia ong to, o cl eee Die ee Ee Scie eee W.N. Fenton, ALAN STONE Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (J. R. SwWALLEN, general chairman): For Biological Sciences............. J. R. Swauuen (chairman), L. M. Hurcuins, Maraarer Pittman, F. W. Poos, L. P. Scuuttz For Engineering Sciences............. R. C. Duncan (chairman), A. C. FirmupNER, Wayne C. Hatt, J. W. McBurney, O. S. Reavpina, H. L. Warrremore HOTA SUCOUSCUCNCES a2 see en oe ane L. A. Woop (ahefnien), P. H. ABELSON, F.S. Dart, Grorcr W. Irvine, JR., J. H. McMitten For Teaching of Science......M. A. Mason (chairman), F. If. Fox, M. H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research.......L. E. Yocum (chairman), H. N. Haron, K. F. HerzreLp Committee on Policy and Planning: ROR AMPA OOS. as Avast ovals ele ast W. A. Dayron (chairman), N. R. Smita PRomuamirany M954 a. H Ree Seek esis: psaeuee siden id t's scannizes H. B. Couutns, Jr., W. W. Ruspry Ty damier aya ais SB oblate ceed Geiser alan core tania aren L. W. Parr, F. B. SrnsBEE Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. Da anR ON chairman): ROMA AT yal Dom er Gee Gree ce. ale ctare us ee: Sabena redone beets H. CLARK, F, 2 MouLER POP ATUUT STV LO SAN, roa eweh rc vebnay a detcaeuet Gy etinay fy ol Ament iM CALDWELL, W. L. Scumirr PROPIA Tyg GOO ie eens ccc Ml uapl eet eee alee) sumneue. s/c a T. McPHERSON, we T. Reap WUCDTESETILCAEIUEN OT) © OWNCUL OfiArc Als Ate Seen sale) ee eieieieis) gs susisiy ae alee Ff, M. Serzter Committee of Auditors...... C. L. Gazin (chairman), Loviss M. Russeut, D. R. Tare Committee of Tellers. ..Grorar P. Watton (chairman), Goran H. Coons, C. lL. GARNER CONTENTS Page SysrpmMatic ZooLocy.—Nomenclature and grammar. CESARE EMILI- AUNTS ole Vahey ene ae et ah cals, so Mateh ack, Ole uot tse 137 ZooLtocy.—Adercotryma, a new Recent foraminiferal genus from the Arctic. ALFRED R. Lorsuicu, JR., and HELEN TAPPAN......... 141 Zootocy.—Buccella, a new genus of the rotalid Foraminifera. Haroup Vic ANDERSEN 4 .iia et care. eens Pele te > PU Be. eee 143 Mammartocy.—A new pine mouse (Pitymys pinetorum carbonarius) from the southern Appalachian Mountains. CHARLES O. HANDLEY, JR. 152 Maracotocy.—Nomenclatural review of genera and subgenera of Cham- idaes, Davin INICOBs sats ooo aee deen hoe. ee ee 154 Entomo.Locy.—A new carpenterworm from Florida (Lepidoptera: Cossi- dae). J.B. Garns -@LarKE. 2.5.05. ede i ee 156 PALEONTOLOGY.—Iwo new species of Sinclairocystis. HARRELL L. STREMPI) 2 ao Ages oS Stua ad aclorn agenesis. Seine Ge 158 Borany.—A new Nymphoides from Colombia. Lyman B. Smiru..... 160 PROCEEDINGS: ‘PHE ACADEMY... 2 ssc. S.aidcs. s ohn a os 161 OxniruaRry: Claribel Ruth Barnett.) 5). .4..)......0. . a eee 167 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. VoL. 42 JUNE 1952 No. 6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS Wiuuiam F. Fosuac J. P. E. Morrison JOHN C. EwERS U8. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.Ss. NATIONAL MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS Mrriam L. Bomuarp F. A. CuHace, JR. BIOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrMan R. K. Coox CHEMISTRY PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS T. P. THAYER PHILIP DRUCKER GEOLOGY ANTHROPOLOGY C. W. SaBROSKY ENTOMOLOGY PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royau & GUILFORD AVES. BaLtTimMorE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912,1t Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925 Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JouRNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices (approximate) : Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.2 $6.50 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29 .25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26 .00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the ProcEeEpines should be sent to Haraup A. RenpEr, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JoURNAL.—Per year.............1..............+. $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ _ — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... $10.00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vol. (12 numbers per vol.).......... 7.50 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 41, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $348.50. Monoarapu No. 1, ‘“‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann. $4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete......................-..+.-0- $25.00 Single ‘volumes; unbound: spas ca cits Seon tenn Oe e 2.00 Singleonumbers:.2 0M teeter see was ich os ans Shera oe hic oe eyo 25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences” and addressed to the Treasurer, H. S. Rappers, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, D.C. Exchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. - +B, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOLUME 42 June 1952 NO, BIOCHEMISTRY .—Reaction of normal and mutant plastids of Nicotiana to neote- trazohum. M. W. Woops, JANE L. SHowacre, and H. G. Du Buy,! National Microbiological Institute, National Institutes of Health. Phenyltetrazolium salts are coming into widespread use for the demonstration of sites of subcellular reducing activity, measure- ment of dehydrogenase activity 7 vitro, ete. (1, 3,4, 5,6). Du Buy etal. (2) have reported oxidative enzyme abnormalities associated with isolated mutant mitochondria and plas- tids of Nicotiana tabacum L. The present report describes the intracellular localiza- tion of differences in reducing capacity of normal and mutant plastids of Nzcotiana as demonstrated by reactions to neotetrazol- ium. The results show that in one and the same cell marked differences occur between normal and mutant plastids. Free-hand sections of leaf tissues were pre- pared as previously described (7). Neotetra- olium solution (ca. 0.1 percent) in the nu- trient salt-sucrose solution was run under the cover slip. Intact living leaf cells showed little or no reduction of the dye; however, plastids in cells injured in sectioning stained within 2 to 20 minutes. In young leaves (4 to 4 grown) the mutant plastids were pale green without well-defined grana. At this stage the phenolase (tyrosinase) activity (measured colorimetrically in leaf extracts with o-catechol as substrate) of cells with mutant plastids and mitochondria ranged from normal to slightly above normal. In mature leaves this activity was much less than in normal tissues of comparable age. In contrast to this pattern of oxidase (phe- nolase) activity application of neotetra- zolium to leaf sections demonstrated that the mutant plastids had a much lower re- ducing capacity than normal plastids. This 1 Acknowledgment is made to the Department of Botany of the University of Maryland for pro- viding facilities for growing the plants used in these studies. was true even in leaves too young to show marked dimunition in oxidase activity. Fig. 1, A, shows a living unstained pali- sade parenchyma cell containing both non- mutant (n) and mutant (m) plastids. Fig. 1, B and C, shows two similar cells killed in sectioning and immediately treated with neotetrazolium. The normal plastids (n), which appear black, have reduced the neo- tetrazolium to the insoluble purple forma- zan whereas the mutant plastids (m) are un- stained or very slightly stained. The forma- zan seems to be most concentrated about the grana as can be seen in the cell shown in Fig. 1, C. Note that the nucleus (nucl.) ap- pears unstained. The present results show that the prin- cipal reducing activity of the cell, as meas- ured by neotetrazolium, is localized in the plastids. They support previous data (du- Buy et al. (2)) which showed that in a neo- plasm resulting from the appearance of a mitochondrial mutant, the total extent of specific biochemical abnormality is a func- tion of the number of mutant mitochondria present. This is true both with respect to the total number of affected cells as well as within the cytoplasm of a single cell. REFERENCES (1) Buacx, Maurice M., anp KiLerner, IsrRAeLS. The use of triphenyltetrazelium chloride for the study of respiration. Science 110: 660-661. 1949. (2) Du Buy, H. G., Woops, M. W., anv Lackey, Mary D. Enzymatic activities of isolated nor- mal and mutant mitochondria and plastids of higher plants. Science 111: 572-574. 1950. (3) Marrson, A. M., Jensen, C. Q., ‘AND Durcuer, R. H. Triphenyltetrazolium chloride as a dye for vital tissues. Science 106: 294-295. 1947. 169 170 (4) NorpMan, Jo., NorpMAN, Roger, AND NELLE Operte GaucHERy. Determination de lacti- vité deshydrogenasigne des mitochondries a Vaide du chlorure de 2,3,5, triphenyl-tetra- zolium. Bull. Soc. Chim. Biol. (In press.) (5) Stein, Ropert A., AND GrERARDE, Horace W. Triphenyltetrazolium chloride in tissue cul- ture. Science 111: 691-692. 1950. (6) Srraus, Francis H., Cupronts, NicHouas D., JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 AND Straus, Exvizaseru. Demonstration of reducing enzyme systems in neoplasms and living mammalian tissues by triphenyltetra- zolium chloride. Science 108: 113-115. 1948. (7) Woops, M. W., anv Du Buy, H. G. The action of mutant chondriogenes and viruses on plant cells with special reference to the plastids. Amer. Journ. Bot. 38: 419-434. 1951. Fic. 1.—Nicotiana tabacum 1L., heterochondric palisade cells, Xca.2,000: A, Living unstained cell with mutant (m) and normal (n) plastids; B, heterochondrie cell after staining with neotetrazolium, normal plastids (n) colored dark purple, mutant plastids (m) very slightly stained; C, cell similar to B but normal plastids (n) less heavily stained and showing darkening of the grana; nucleus (nucl.) and mutant plastids (m) not stained. GEOLOGY .—The base of the Cambrian in the southern Appalachians.! Puitie B. Kina, U.S. Geological Survey. I must apologize for my presentation this evening in what is primarily a paleontological discussion. What I shall have to say will not be very paleontological but will be concerned largely with physical stratigraphy. I have been dealing with the Lower Cambrian rocks of the southern Appalachians off and on for the past 10 years, but I confess that I have 1 Presented orally as part of a symposium on “Base of the Cambrian System,’’ held by the Geological Society of Washington, April 11, 1951. Published by permission of the Director, U. 8. Geological Survey. yet to see a good fossil collection from these rocks. Truly, the Lower Cambrian rocks of the southern Appalachians are tough and unrewarding paleontologically. Let us bear this in mind when we come to the crucial question of the lowest fossilifer- ous rocks. There is no such thing as a level below which there are no fossils and above which fossils are abundant. Instead, there are rocks below in which no fossils are known, and rocks above in which known fossils are few and far between. JUNE 1952 KING: BASE OF CAMBRIAN Proponents regarding the base of the Cam- brian split three ways—the ultrapaleonto- logical, who would restrict the Cambrian narrowly to actual fossiliferous beds; the ultraphysical, who would extend the Cam- brian far downward until a definite, large- scale physical break is encountered; and the middle-grounders, who would look for a lower boundary somewhere in between—more or less where Federal and State surveys con- ventionally place the boundary today. I must confess at the outset that I am by predilection a middle-grounder. I have so expressed myself in a paper published several years ago.” However, as I discuss the subject with others, I can see that with a little change in viewpoint it is possible to work out favorable arguments for the other two propositions. Consequently, I shall here make my presentation as factual as possible, leaving the reader to draw his own conclu- sions, if any. SHADY DOLOMITE In describing the situation in the southern Appalachians, let us begin in the upper part of the sequence, where conclusions are rela- tively firm, and proceed downward to the area of greater disagreement. The lowest unit on which there is unanim- ity is the Shady dolomite, also known in the northeast as the Tomstown dolomite. This is a unit about 1,000 feet thick that comes to the surface at intervals along the south- east side of the Appalachian Valley from Alabama to Pennsylvania and beyond. It forms the base of the great Appalachian Valley carbonate sequence. As in all other Lower Cambrian rocks, fossils are scarce in the Shady formation, but they have been found in enough places—at Austinville, Va., for example—to fix the age of the Shady securely as Lower Cambrian. CHILHOWEE GROUP From here we pass down into a region of wider disagreement. Below the Shady is a sequence of sandy and shaly rocks known by various local formation names, but for which the general term Chilhowee group is appro- 2 Kina, P. B., The base of the Cambrian in the southern Appalachians. Amer. Journ. Sci. 247: 513-530, 622-645. 1949. IN SOUTHERN APPALACHIANS Wat priate. To fix the Chilhowee group in your minds, remember the fine exposures along the Potomac River where it transects the Blue Ridge at Harpers Ferry. These are made up of quartzites of the Chilhowee group, which separate igneous and meta- morphic rocks on the southeast from Paleo- zoic carbonate rocks on the northwest. Some of you may have noted the composition of the terrace gravels and Potomac River gray- els near Washington. Many of the cobbles are quartzite that contains worm tubes, or Scolithus. These cobbles are from the Chil- howee group. The position of the Chilhowee group at Harpers Ferry is maintained for long dis- tances along the strike of the Appalachians. This group lies along the northwest flank of the Blue Ridge from Pennsylvania to Ala- bama, although it is missing here and there, from faulting or other structural causes. The Chilhowee has a thickness ranging from 2,500 feet near the Potomac River to 7,000 feet or more in parts of Tennessee. Its top beds are nearly everywhere light-colored indurated quartzose sandstones, or quartz- ites, but lower down the quartzites are inter- bedded with much slaty shale or finely lami- nated siltstone. Downward, also, the sandy beds become less cleanly washed, and the lower sandy beds are rather arkosic and conglomeratic. In the lower part of the Chilhowee group another lithologic element, lavas and pyro- clastic rocks appears rarely. At the base over wide areas in Maryland and northern Vir- ginia is a thin layer of indurated volcanic tuff, accompanied here and there by green- stone flows. In southwestern Virginia, where the group is thicker, there are basalt flows 1,000 feet or more above the base—the amygdaloid of the Unicoi formation. Helium determinations made on the Unicoi amygda- loid indicate that it has an age of about 450 million years. On the assumption that Cam- brian time began 500 million years ago, this would place the Chilhowee group safely within the Cambrian. However, we all know that doubt exists in regard to the true age of the base of the Cambrian, as well as in regard to the accuracy of helium determina- tions. Pending further radioactive or other physi- cal determinations of age, what do the fossils show? The record of identifiable fossils in the Chilhowee group is scanty. It is true that anyone who maps a Chilhowee outcrop will have no trouble finding worm borings, or Scolithus tubes, for these occur by the billions and trillions in the sandstone beds. They are common in the upper quartzite, and they go down to about the middle of the group. These indicate the existence of some form of life during the latter half of Chil- howee time, but they have no value as index fossils. Other fossils, including Olenellus, have been found here and there, mainly in the highest beds. I would like to call attention, however, to an apparently authentic occur- rence of fossils in the Murray shale near Montvale Springs, on Chilhowee Mountain, Tennessee (King, op. cit., p. 520). These fossils are reported to be at least several hundred feet lower than the others just noted. Here I should like to make a strong plea for search for more fossils in the Chilhowee group. I have the impression that paleon- tologists are indifferent to this search. It is true that the fossils are scarce and hard to find, and do not excite much interest bio- logically when found. But surely the prospect of discovering the oldest remains of life in the Appalachian area should have great ap- peal. Nevertheless, to my knowledge, only Stose and possibly Butts among recent col- lectors have reported findings. Practically all the known fossils from the Chilhowee group were obtained more than half a cen- tury ago by Walcott and his assistants, within a space of a few years. Revists to Walcott’s old localities by such inexperienced collectors as myself have failed to reveal more. One wonders if the results might not be better if these localities were revisited by more experienced’ collectors, and if assidu- ous search in other areas might not lead to the discovery of more localities, more hori- zons, and more species than those now known. The contact between the Shady and the Chilhowee is one of the most abrupt in the Appalachians. Below are quartzites, then some shaly transition beds, then dolomite; and this sequence is duplicated in section after section. There is an intriguing possi- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 bility that dolomite and quartzite may inter- gerade along the strike, so that the contact may not everywhere be of the same age. Such relations have been proved by McKee in the Cambrian rocks of the Grand Canyon region. But for the Chilhowee and Shady contact this has never been proved, and where detailed mapping has been done all evidence is against it. For the present, we must reject the suggestion and assume that the Chilhowee-Shady contact is a time line. What, then, is the history of the Chilhowee group? Beginning with the deposition of coarse waste of ancient lands, with rare vol- canic outbursts, we pass upward into shales and more cleanly washed sands. At about mid-point we begin to find evidence of life in the form of worm tubes, and still higher, fossils of more diagnostic character. At the top, clastic deposition gives place abruptly to carbonate deposition. Surely there is little that is very extraordinary about this. It can be duplicated time and time again in trans- gressive fossiliferous rocks higher in the geo- logic column. Physical history would seem to link the Chilhowee group firmly with the Lower Cambrian, as its basal transgressive phase, even though a considerable part of its deposits are not fossiliferous. CATOCTIN GREENSTONE But let us see what is beneath the Chil- howee group, for perhaps this impression is not as secure as it seems at first. In places the Chilhowee group lies on the eroded surface of ancient plutonic rocks. I have seen such relations near Hampton in northeastern Tennessee and near Shenan- doah in northern Virginia. Similar uncon- formable basal relations are reported else- where. Here, the Chilhowee is clearly an initial transgressive deposit. But elsewhere, beds intervene between the Chilhowee group and the ancient plutonic rocks. Throughout wide areas of the Blue Ridge of northern Virginia the Chilhowee group lies on the Catoctin greenstone, a series of basaltic and andesitic lavas many thousands of feet thick. Continuing downward, we find at the bottom of the Catoctin a thin layer of coarse clastics which, like the basal Chil- howee in other places, lies on the eroded surface of ancient plutonic rocks. JUNE 1952 What does this mean? Is this the same unconformity as that at the base of the Chil- howee in other places, and, if the latter is the base of the Cambrian, is this likewise the base of the Cambrian? Or are there two unconformities—one at the base of the Chil- howee on plutonic rocks and Catoctin alike, and another and much older one at the base of the Catoctin? I have expressed a prefer- ence for the latter view (King, op. cit., pp. 527-528). In an area in northern Virginia where I studied the relation, the Catoctin wedged out below the Chilhowee, so that in one place the latter rested on the Catoctin, and a few miles away on plutonic rocks. This looked as though the Catoctin was tilted and truncated by erosion before the Chilhowee was laid down over it. Moreover, the thinning of the Chilhowee group from Tennessee into Virginia suggests that there might be a time hiatus between the Catoctin and the Chilhowee. But geologists who object to this inter- pretation have pointed out that the thinning of the Catoctin might be due to original wedging out of the mass of flows. Also, the basal bed of the Chilhowee that crosses the truneated edge of the Catoctin is not sand- stone or conglomerate but the tuffaceous layer already referred to. So the break, if any, does not lie between Cambrian-like and non-Cambrian-like rocks but within non- Cambrian-like rocks. Moreover, Robert Bloomer has made elaborate chemical and spectrographic determinations on the igneous rocks below and above the supposed break, and he finds no difference between them. Thus, instead of finding a clear-cut physical answer to our problem of the base of the Cambrian, we find only doubt and confusion. OCOEE SERIES I can not here do justice to a quite dif- ferent and much more complex set of features and relations farther southwest in the Appa- lachians—those from the Great Smoky Mountains southwestward into Georgia. In that area there are no volcanic rocks in the section, either in the Chilhowee group or in the beds beneath. The Chilhowee group is flanked on the southeast by high mountains made up of a vast pile of poorly washed clastic sedimentary rocks, the Ocoee series. KING: BASE OF CAMBRIAN IN SOUTHERN APPALACHIANS 173 I cannot discuss here all the structural com- plications—of which there are many—or the various conflicting theories that have been proposed. I will say briefly that my own observations indicate that the Chilhowee group lies on the Ocoee series, and that in places the Ocoee series, like the volcanic rocks of the Catoctin lies unconformably on the surface of deeply eroded plutonic rocks. Is the Ocoee series, then, simply a greatly expanded downward extension of the Cam- brian, or is it something distinct? Both Chil- howee and Ocoee are clastic sediments, it is true, but the two are very different in habit. The clastic rocks of the Chilhowee are of the family of quartzite and arkose, whereas those of the Ocoee are of the family of graywacke. Where the contact between them is seen it is abrupt, but we have yet to find evidence for a genuine unconformity. Unconformity or not, there seems to be an abrupt change in sedimentation at the contact, but is this change sufficient to fix the base of the Cam- brian above the Ocoee series? BROADER CONSIDERATIONS I will close with some broader philosophical speculations. Whatever we choose to call Cambrian, it is a fact that in both the Appalachian and Cordilleran geosynclines there are in places below the lowest occur- rence of Lower Cambrian fossils vast thick- nesses of rocks with no fossils, or with fossils of enigmatic character. These rocks are mainly sedimentary but partly volcanic. They were not materially deformed before Paleozoic time and consequently are the ini- tial geosynclinal deposits. The Canadian geologists tell us that these rocks in the Cordilleran geosyneline of British Columbia —the Belt and Windermere series—are 75,- 000 feet thick. In the Great Smoky Moun- tains of Tennessee observations indicate that they are at least 25,000 feet thick, and they may well be thicker. When were these deposits laid down? I do not believe that it was as long ago as Huron- ian time. The Huronian rocks are the oldest geosynclinal deposits in the Canadian Shield. After they accumulated and were deformed the shield was permanently consolidated to form the nucleus of the continent. The date of the end of Huronian time is not entirely 174 clear from the radioactive determinations that have been made. Inconclusive evidence suggests, however, that the interval between the end of the Huronian and the time of the first fossiliferous Cambrian deposits may well have been as long as the whole of Paleozoic time. This would provide ample time for great thicknesses of sediments older than JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 6 those containing recognizable Cambrian fos- sils to accumulate beyond the edges of the Canadian Shield in the primitive Appala- chian and Cordilleran geosynclines. Whether we should call these deposits Cambrian and/ or Paleozoic, or whether we should begin the Cambrian and/or the Paleozoic higher up, I will leave to the reader. PALEONTOLOGY.—A Cretaceous horseshoe crab from Colorado.' J. B. REESIDE, Jr., U.S. Geological Survey, and D. V. Harris, Colorado Agricultural and Mechanical College. The living horseshoe crabs are known along the eastern coast of North America from Maine to Honduras and in the coastal waters of southeastern Asia. Many organ- isms, both terrestrial and aquatic, follow a similar pattern of discontinuous distribu- tion; such a pattern is commonly associated with a long geologic history and a former wide and continuous distribution over the Northern Hemisphere. Though horseshoe crabs are not now living on the coast of Europe, fossil species have been described, mostly under the generic name Limulus, from the Triassic, Jurassic, Cretaceous, and middle Tertiary deposits of that continent. The American species, usually called Limu- lus polyphemus (Linnaeus), is one of the most common of the littoral marine inverte- brates, so abundant at places that it has been gathered for use as fertilizer. It 1s sur- prising, therefore, considering the history of the order and the present abundance of the American horseshoe crab, to find not a single indisputable record of the order from Amer- ican Mesozoic and Cenozoic deposits. The only suggestion of such an occurrence known to the writers is that of Wheatley (1861), who wrote of a specimen from the Triassic Newark group at Phoenixville, Pa., ““Limu- lus? Fragment of shield probably Limulus, black bituminous shales,” but the record seems very dubious. Paleozoic members of the order, such as Huproops and Paleolimu- lus (Clarke, 1913; Shimer and Shrock, 1944), are well known from American formations, but, so far as the writers know, the single specimen here described is the first unques- tionable Mesozoic horseshoe crab from this continent. Occurrence.—The specimen, a nearly complete internal impression of an abdominal carapace preserved in a very hard caleareous concretion, was found by Mr. Harris on Fossil Ridge, in the Loveland quadrangle, in the SW sec. 11, T. 6 N., R. 69 W., about 5 miles south of Fort Collins, Larimer County, Colo. The horizon of the specimen is 60 feet above the base of the sandstone member of the Pierre shale that makes Fossil Ridge. There is some difference of opinion as to the name to be applied to the sandstone unit. Five named sandstone members are recog- nized in the Pierre shale of northeastern Colo- rado (Ball, 1924; Griffitts, 1949), in upward order, the Hygiene, Terry, Rocky Ridge, Lari- mer, and Richards members. Some of the earlier workers thought that the Fossil Ridge locality belonged to the Larimer member (Mather et al., 1928), but later opinion assigns it chiefly to the Rocky Ridge member (Griffitts, 1949). Its position is about~ 5,000 feet stratigraphically below the top of the Pierre shale and about 2,000 feet stratigraphically above the base; these . figures are somewhat uncertain because of the difficult conditions of measurement. Associated fossils.—Fossil collecting at Fossil Ridge dates back to the earliest days of geologic investigation in the region, and the fauna re- corded there is abundant and varied. Henderson (1908, 1920) listed about 50 species, mostly mollusks, and Griffitts (1949) has essentially repeated his list. Fossil wood in carbonized form: is common, but repeated search has disclosed only the single specimen of horseshoe crab. It is notable that the locality yields species that are not known elsewhere in the Western Interior 1 Publication authorized by the Director, U. 8. Geological Survey. JUNE 1952 but are found in the Cretaceous of the Gulf Coastal Plain or are represented there by closely related species, for example, Ostrea fa'cata Mor- ton, Hxogyra costata Say, Capulus spangleri Henderson, and Anchura haydeni White. It is also notable that it is the type locality of a num- ber of species, including Serpula markmani Henderson, Heteropora dimissa (White), Pinna lakesi White, Inoceramus oblongus Meek, An- omia raetiformis Meek, Laternula doddsi (Hen- derson), Panope berthoudi White, Capulus spangleri Henderson, Anchura haydeni White, and Volutoderma? clatworthy: Henderson. The species of Inoceramus, Baculites, and Acan- thoscaphites serve best to tie the occurrence to other localities in the Western Interior. The horizons in Fossil Ridge are equivalent faunally to the Verendrye and the Virgin Creek members of the typical Pierre shale and most probably to the upper Campanian of the European class- ification. Taxonomy.—Van der Hoeven (1838) and Pocock (1902), among others, have discussed the living horseshoe crabs, and the following statement has been taken chiefly from their work. Linnaeus in 1758 placed under Monoculus polyphemus horseshoe crabs from America and from eastern Asia, but in 1764 he definitely used the name with a description of the American form. Gronovius in 1764 proposed to use X71- phosura for Linnaeus’s species, citing it by reference and number, though not by name, and Briinnich in 1771, Scopoli in 1777, and Meuschen in 1778 adopted Xiphosura for the genus. Miiller in 1785 ignored Gronovius’ name and proposed Limulus for the species gigas, including under that name both American and Asiatic forms. Fabricius in 1793 restricted Limu- lus to the genus typified by the species gigas, for which he used, however, the name poly- phemus, and proposed the name cyclops for another form, probably including the American species. Lamarck in 1801 proposed Polyphemus as a generic name for Linnaeus’ species, separat- ing the Asiatic species as gigas and naming the American species occidentalis. Latreille in 1802 proposed to use Xiphosura as the name for the order containing the horseshoe crabs, retained Limulus for the generic name, and distinguished under it four species, restricting the name polyphemus to the American form. Leach in 1814 proposed the name Limulus sowerbw for the American species, assuming the name poly- REESIDE AND HARRIS: CRETACEOUS HORSESHOE CRAB 175 phemus to be invalid for it. In 1819 he intro- duced the generic name Tachypleus for one of the Asiatic species, reserving Limulus for six other species, including sowerbii and an ameri- canus. Van der Hoeven in 1838 admitted four species, one American and three Asiatic, under the single generic name Limulus. There seem to have been few departures from this practice for six decades. Pocock, however, in 1902 adopted Xiphosura Gronovius as the generic name for the American species polyphemus Linnaeus; Tachypleus Leach for three Asiatic species, gigas Miller, tridentatus Leach, and a new species hoeveni; and proposed the genus Carcinoscorpius for the species rotundicauda Lamarck. Under these names he placed all the previously named living species. Pocock used the name Xiphosurae for the order and pro- posed the family Xiphosuridae, with the sub- family Xiphosurinae for Xiphosura and the subfamily Tachypleinae for Tachypleus and Carcinoscorpius. Pocock placed ‘Limulinae’’ in parentheses after ‘“‘Xiphosurinae” and was the author of both terms. In 1925 the Inter- national Commission on Zoological Nomen- clature in Opinion 89 (Stiles, pp. 27-33) rejected Gronovius (1764) as a source of systematic names, and in 1928 in Opinion 104 (Stiles, pp. 25-28) it placed the name Limulus on the Official List of genera, with ‘‘polephemus Linn.., 1758a”’ (sic), as the type species. In decisions announced in June 1950 the Commission for- mally declared the work of Meuschen (1778) unavailable (Hemming, p. 502) and the generic names of Briinnich (1771) available for nomen- clature (Hemming, pp. 3807-315). This would have the effect of reinstating Xiphosura as of Briinnich as the authorized generic name for the American horseshoe crab, but the Com- mission directed the Secretary to prepare a re- port, with recommendations, as to ‘whether the name Limulus Miller, 1785, erroneously placed on the ‘Official List of Generic Names in Zoology’ by Opinion 104 should be validated ...or removed from the ‘Official List.’ ’’ No evaluation has been made of Seopoli’s use in 1777 of Xiphosura, and at this date (January 1952) the matter is still under discussion. Most zoologists before and since Pocock’s contribu tion have used Limulidae for the family and Limulus for the American species (e.g., Parker and Haswell, 1949), and paleontologists have used Limulus almost exclusively for the Meso- 176 zoic and Tertiary species (e.g., Zittel, 1885; Clarke, 1913; Shimer and Shrock, 1944). The writers have somewhat reluctantly used Limulus rather than Xiphosura. Most of the features necessary for generic assignment—the character of the appendages of the cephalothorax (prosoma) and of the abdomen (opisthosoma), the form of the mov- able spines along the side of the abdomen, the form of the cross section of the telson—are missing in the fossil specimen here described. The proportions of the abdomen may be ob- served, however, and are believed to permit distinction between the subfamilies recognized by Pocock. Pocock (1902, p. 260) cites for his subfamily Xiphosurinae (= Limulinae) the following characters of the abdomen (opisthosoma): Opisthosoma more vaulted, not so markedly hexagonal, owing to lesser prominence of the lat- eral angle, which lies well in advance of the middle of the lateral border, making the spiniferous edge much longer than the part of the border that has no movable spines; the latter abruptly bent down- wards in the posterior two thirds of its length, the spike that it bears lying in front of its middle and much nearer to the ‘waist’ than to the spike pre- ceding the first movable spine; posterior prolonga- tion of opisthosoma more prominent, the inner edge straight and cutting the outer at an acute angle.... Lateral movable spines of opisthosoma alike in both sexes, becoming progressively shorter from before backwards, and gradually tapering from base to apex. Pocock distinguishes for his subfamily Tachy- pleinae the following characters of the abdomen (opisthosoma): Opisthesoma less vaulted, more markedly hexag- onal owing to the greater prominence of the lat- eral angle which lies near the middle of the lateral border, making its spiniferous and non-spiniferous parts subequal; the latter not so abruptly bent downwards posteriorly, the area behind its spike, which lies, if anything, farther from the waist than from the lateral angle, subparallel to the area in front of it; posterior prolongations of opistho- soma less prominent, their inner edge convex and cutting the outer at a right angle in the adult... . Lateral movable spines on opisthosoma in female short, abruptly narrowed and pointed at apex, not evenly tapering to a point. It appears to the writers that the present specimen agrees much more with the characters of the Limulinae than with those of the Tachy- pleinae, and that no characters present would JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 separate it from Limulus, the sole member of the subfamily Limulinae. It is therefore referred to that genus and for convenience of reference is given a specific name. Order XIPHOSURA Latreille Family Limuipa®e Zittel Subfamily LimuLinakz Pocock Genus Limulus Miller Limulus coffini Reeside and Harris, n. sp. Figs. 1-8 This species is represented by the internal impression of the abdominal carapace. No trace of the movable lateral spines or of the telson remains. It is 83 mm long over-all, 88 mm wide, and 30 mm high. The outline is an inverted triangle with the apex truncated and in no way suggests the hexagonal outline of the abdomen of the Tachypleinae. It is relatively high (vaulted), with a sharp median longitudinal ridge. The ridge is 60 mm long, and a blunt spine is indicated at the front end and another 32 mm behind it; there may have been a third at the posterior end, but, if so, it is not clearly shown. Anteriorly in a sharp depression on each side of the median ridge and trending toward the ridge from front to back, is a line of six pits, representing inward projections of the cara- pace, that mark off the six sezments included in the mesosomal part of the abdomen. The anterior part of the flanks of the abdominal carapace are evenly rounded; the posterior part is nearly flat and bears a strong muscle scar, presumably for attachment of the muscles of the telson. Each of the posterior lateral margins bears six subequal indentations that mark the sites of the movable spines. The anterior lateral margins are much shorter than the posterior lateral margins, and on the left side the impres- sion suggests that they were bent down. The posterior prolongations are prominent, with the inner edge straight and meeting the outer edge in an acute angle. The general character of the abdominal cara- pace indicated by the specimen is much like that of L. polyphemus (Linnaeus). It would seem to differ in the more slender spikes sepa- rating the indentations of the posterior lateral margins and in the somewhat shorter posterior prolongations. The specific name is for Prof. R. G. Coffin, Colorado Agricultural and Mechanical College, JUNE 1952 Fort Collins, Colo., an assiduous student of the geology of northeastern Colorado. The type specimen is deposited in the U. 8S. National Museum. REFERENCES Batt, M.W. Gas near Fort Collins, Colorado. Bull. Amer. Assoc. Petrol. Geol. 8(1): 84. 1924. CuaARKE, J. M. Arachnida. In Zittel-Eastman’s “Text-book of Paleontology.’’? London, 1913. REESIDE AND HARRIS: CRETACEOUS HORSESHOE CRAB 177 BEEBE, C.W. King crab. The New International Encyclopaedia, ed. 2, 13: 244-245. 1918. Brtwnicu, Z. T. Zoologiae fundamenta praelec- tionibus academicis accommodata. Copenhagen and Leipzig, 1771. Fasricius, J. C. EHntomologia systematica emen- data et aucta 2: 487-488. Copenhagen, 1793. Grirritts, M. O. Zones of Pierre formation of Colorado. Bull. Amer. Assoc. Petrol. Geol. 33 (12) : 2011-2028. 1949. eS, bh eal Fras. 1-3. —Limulus coffin iy CL Je A gt tees Ce oe. Teg. ate ? Reeside and Harris, n. sp., side, dorsal, and rear views. XL. DER Sa . 0 SE A Ee af ‘ 178 Gronovius, L. F. Zoophylacium Gronovianum, etc., fase. 2, Insecta: 220. Leyden, 1764. Hemmtinc, Francis. The official record of proceed- ings of the International Commission on Zoo- logical Nomenclature at its session held in Paris in July 1948. Bull. Zool. Nomencl. 4. June 9, 1950. , Conclusions of twelfth meeting, pp. 307-315. Conclusions of fourteenth meeting, p. 502. Henperson, Junrus. The sandstone of Fossil Ridge in northern Colorado and its fauna. Colorado Univ. Stud. 5: 179-192. 1908. The Cretaceous formations of northeastern Colorado. Colorado Geol. Survey Bull. 19: 31-32. 1920. Lamarck, J. B. Systeme des animaux sans verte- bres, etc. 1: 168. Paris, 1801. LarreILuE, P. A. Histoire naturelle générale et particuliére des crustacés et des insectes, etc. Paris, 1802. Leacn, W. E. The zoological miscellany, etc.: 84. London, 1814. . Dictionnaire des sciences naturelles 14: 537-538. Paris, 1819. LinNAEus, Carouus. Systema naturae, ed. 10: 634. Stockholm, 1758. Museum S. R. M. Ludovicae Ulricae Re- ginae, etc.: 460. Stockholm, 1764. LocuHEAb, J. H., in F. A. Brown, JR., ed. Se- lected invertebrate types: 31. New York, 1950. Maruer, K. F., Grnuuty, Jams, AND Lusk, R.G. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 Geology and oil and gas prospects of northeastern Colorado. U. 8. Geol. Surv. Bull. 796-B: 89. 1928. Mevuscuen, F. C. Museum Gronovianum, ete.: 83. Leyden, 1778. Mituier, O. F. Entomostraca seu insecta testacea, etc.: 124-126. Leipzig and Copenhagen, 1785. ParKER, T. J., AND Haswexu, W. A. A text-book of zoology, ed. 6, 1: 514. London, 1949. Pocock, R. I. The taxonomy of Recent species of Limulus. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, 9(42): 256-266. 1902. Scorou, J. A. Introductio ad historiam naturalem: 405. Prague, 1777. Suimer, H. W., AND SHrock, R. R. Index fossils of North America: 705-707. New York, 1944. Stites, C. W. Opinions rendered by the Interna- tional Commission on Zoological Nomenclature. Smithsonian Misc. Coll. 73. Opinions 82 to 90, no. 3 (Publ. 2830). Dec. 16, 1925. Opinions 98 to 104, no. 5 (Publ. 2973). Sept. 19, 1928. VAN DER HoEVEN, JAN. Recherches sur l’histoire naturelle et l’anatomie des limules. Leyden, 1838. WukatTLey, C. M. Remarks on the Mesozoic red sandstone of the Atlantic slope and notice of the discovery of a bone bed therein at Phoenix- ville, Pa. Amer. Journ. Sci., ser. 2, 32: 43. 1861. ZirTeEL, K. A. Handbuch der Palaeontologie. Abt- 1: Palaeozoologie. 2: 648-645. 1885. BOTAN Y.—New mosses from southern Brazil. Epwtn B. Bartram, Bushkill, Pa. At intervals during the past 15 years I have been receiving carefully selected and beautifully prepared specimens of mosses from Sefior Aloysio Sehnem, Colegio S. Inacio, Sao Salvador, collected in various parts of the Brazilian states of Santa Cata- rina and Rio Grande do Sul. These have been nicely supplemented by less extensive collection made by Senor P. Raulino Reitz, Herbario Barbosa Rodrigues, Itajai, from the same general area. The total number of species represented is well over 250 distrib- uted in about 120 genera. Preparatory to publishing a complete list of the collections from this interesting temperate region, it seems advisable to describe the following 18 new species that appear in the series. The types of the new species are in the author’s herbarium. FISSIDENTACEAE Fissidens (Heterocaulon) sehnemii Bartr., sp. nov. Dioicus; pusillus, dense caespitosus, viridibus. Caulis erectus, simplex, fertilis brevissimus, sterilis usque ad 3 mm altus; folia plantae sterilis ad 14 juga, late patentia, infima minuta, supe- riora sensim majora, late ovata, acuta, usque ad 0.4 mm longa/et 0.15 mm lata, integra, lamina- vera tantum limbata, prope apicem folii pro- ducta, lamina dorsalis longe ultra basin folit enata, basi attenuata; costa infra apicem folit evanida; cellulae ovali-hexagonae, laevissimae, diam. circa 10u. Folia plantae fertilis circa 3 juga, comalia multo majora, e basi ovata longe acuminata; seta 3-3.5 mm longa, rubra; theca. erecta, oblongo-cylindrica; operculum oblique conico-rostratum; dentes peristomii ad 200 » longi, filiformiter acuminati, superne irregulari- ter fissi. Rio Grande do Sul: Estacaio Sao Salvador, in terram, alt. 600 m, A. Sehnem no. 2041. Near F. antennidens C. M. as far as one can judge from the description but distinct in the leaf structure, which shows the vaginant lamina produced nearly to the apex of the leaf and indistinctly bordered only in the comal leaves. JUNE 1952 DiIcRANACEAE Campylopus (Eucampylopus) sehnemii Bartr., sp. nov. Dioicus; robustiusculus, lutescenti-viridis, Caulis erectus, ad 5 ecm altus, ubique fus- co-tomentosus, dense foliosus. Folia sicea flexuosulo-adpressa, humida erecto-patentia, subequalia, 6-6.5 mm longa, e basi oblonga subu- lato-acuminata, supra medium serrulata; costa - inferne 0.6 mm lata, cellulis ventralibus laxis, dorsalibus stereideis; cellulis laminalibus minu- tis, rhombeis, basilaribus internis laxe oblongis, parietibus tenuissimis, alaribus haud in ventrem dispositis, imternis fuscis, externis hyalinis. Seta cirea 8 mm alta, flexuoso-arcuata; theca oblongo-cylindracea, symmetrica; calyptra ig- nota. Rio Grande do Sul: Campestre Montenegro, super rupes ad rivum in sole, alt. 400 m, A. Sehnem no. 2310. A species resembling C. concolor (Hook.) Brid. to some extent but with shorter leaves, which are appressed when dry and with differ- ent alar cells. In C. sehnemw the alar group is poorly defined, brownish within and bordered on the margins with several rows of narrow colorless cells so as to appear intramarginal. POTTriacEAE Rhamphidium ovale Bartr., sp. nov. Dioicum; flos masculus terminalis, gemmi- formis. Caulis ad 2 cm altus, gracilis, simplex vel parce ramosus. Folia remota, e basi vagi- nante subulato-lanceolata, abrupte squarroso- patentia, 2-2.6 mm longa, apice rotundato- obtusa; margines superiores anguste recurvati, indistincte denticulati; costa fusca, percurrens; cellulae superiores subquadratae, inferiores sensim anguste rectangulares, pellucidae. Seta circa 12 mm longa, rubella; theca suberecta, elliptica, deoperculata 1.5 mm longa; operculum oblique tenuiter rostratum, aequilongum; dentes peristomil rubri, ad 350 yu longi, supra filiformes, dense papillosi, linea media hic illic anguste fissi. Rio Grande do Sul: Linha Campestre, Monte- negro, in declivio argiloso rivi, alt. 450 m, A. Sehnem no. 4999. Sharply distinct from R. dicranoides (C. M.) Bartr. of tropical North America in the ovoid capsules, longer stems and the leaves more abruptly contracted at the shoulders from a longer, tightly clasping base. BARTRAM: NEW MOSSES FROM BRAZIL Tortella grossiretis Bartr., sp. nov. Tenella, caespitosa, caespitibus sat densis, viridibus. Caulis usque ad 1 cm altus, dense foliosus, simplex. Folia sicca circinato-ineurva, humida erecto-patentia, 4-5 mm longa, cari- nato-concava, e basi oblonga sensim longe et anguste linearia, subulato-acuminata; margini- bus erectis, papiloso-crenulatis; costa breviter excurrente; cellulis subrotundis, grosse papillo- sis, diam. circa 15 yw, basilaribus hyalinis, rec- tangularibus, in parte infima laminae limbum angustissimum efformantibus. Caetera ignota. Rio Grande do Sul: Linha 8. Pedro, ad rupem humidam, alt. 450 m, A. Sehnem no. 405. The relatively large, very coarsely papillose, lamina cells will separate this species from any other member of the genus with which I am familiar. The border of narrow hyaline cells in the upper part of the leaf base is not conspicuous but the structure is typical of the genus. Leptodontium fuscescens Bartr., sp. nov. Dioicum; sat robustum, caespitosum, caespiti- bus densis, fuscescenti-viridibus. Caulis ad- scendens, usque ad 4 cm longus, simplex vel fureatus. Folia sicea flexuoso-adpressa, humida e basi erecta patentia, carinato-concava, 4-5 mm longa, e basi oblonga lanceolata, sensim tenuiter acuminata; marginibus longe ultra medium folii revolutis, superne grosse et irregulariter serratis; costa infra apicem folii evanida; cellu- lis laminalibus densis, subquadratis, obscuris, haud incrassatis, diam. circa 10 yu, dense pa- pillosis, basilaribus anguste rectangularibus, parietibus firmis, pellucidis. Caetera ignota. Rio Grande do Sul: Linha 8. Pedro, Monte- negro, in humo ad viam, alt. 500 m, A. Sehnem no. 415, type. Pinhal. Montenegro, super rupes in sole, alt. 450 m, A. Sehnem no. 2903. The more slenderly acuminate leaves with narrower, firmer basal cells will distinguish this species from ZL. brasiliense Mitt. It seems to be more closely allied to LZ. subgracile Ren. & Card. but differs in the more slenderly acuminate leaves with the lamina cells dense and obscure and not at all incrassate. Barbula (Helicopogon) riograndensis Bartr., sp. nov. Dioica; caespitosa, caespitibus densis, fusce- scenti-viridibus, opacis. Caulis erectus, ad 2 em foliosus. dichotome dense spiraliter imbricata, humida late longus, ramosus, Folia siee 180 patentia, cirea 2.5 mm longa, oblongo-lingulata, obtusiuscula, mucronata; marginibus fere ad apicem late revolutis, integris; cellulis laminali- bus minutis, diam. circa 10, obscuris, dense papillosis, basilaribus internis breviter rectangu- laribus, pellucidis, externis subquadratis; costa in mucronem luteum valde denticulatam ex- currente, dorso superne scabro. Rio Grande do Sul: Quilombo, super rupes, alt. 30 m, A. Sehnem no. 195, type. Pinheiral, Santa Cruz d. Sul, super rupes, alt. 100 m, A. Sehnem no. 2409. Suggestive of a small Tortula in many ways but the costa in cross section showing both dorsal and ventral stereid bands is decisive. The short, yellowish, strongly toothed mucro will distinguish this species from any of the relatively few Barbula species known from Brazil. BRYACEAE Epipterygium brasiliense Bartr., sp. nov. E. immarginato Mitt. habitu staturaque simile, sed folis angustioribus, oblongis. Rio Grande do Sul: Pinheiral, Santa Cruz, ad terram rivulik alt. 100 m., A. Sehnem no. 2350. The distinctions between this species and E. immarginatum Mitt. of Central America are not impressive, but the gap in distribution is so wide that I hesitate to combine them. In E. brasiliense the leaves are oblong, about 3 mm long, and 1.1 mm wide, while in EZ. tmmargi- natum the leaves are ovate, about 2.5 mm long, and 1.5 mm wide. The only other species re- corded from Brazil is FE. Puiggar (Geh. & Hpe.) Broth., a smaller plant with the lateral rows of leaves little differentiated from the dorsal rows. Bryum (Cladodium) riograndense Bartr., sp. nov. Dioicum; tenellum, caespitosum, caespitibus sat densis, fuscescenti-viridibus. Caulis 8-10 mm altus, inferne fusco-radiculosus, Innovationibus pluribus. Folia sicca arcte contorta, humida late patentia, 1-1.5 mm longa, late ovata, ob- tusa; marginibus inferne leniter revolutis, superne denticulatis, limbata, limbo e seriebus cellularum 3-4 formato; costa infra apicem folii evanida; cellulis teneris, late rhomboideis, circa 30u longis. Seta 8-9 mm longa; theca hori- zontalis, pyriformis, cum collo 2 mm. longa; dentes peristomii c. 375. longi, lutei, endosto- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 6 mum liberum, pallidum, processus carinati, perforati, cilia bina, nodosa, haud appendicu- lata; operculum conicum, obtusum. Rio Grande do Sul: Santa Cruz, ad rupes in rivo, alt. 80 m, A. Sehnem no. 2347. Estacao Sado Salvador Montenegro, ad rupes rivuli, alt. 400 m, A. Sehnem no. 2788, type. A neat, attractive little species evidently near B. maynense Spr. but distinct in the more broadly ovate obtuse leaves. Bryum (Eubryum) riparioides Bartr., sp. nov. Dioicum; caespitosum, caespitibus densis, sorde viridibus. Caulis 6-8 mm altus, inferne denudatus, innovationibus 5-6 mm _longis. Folia conferta, sicca laxe imbricata, humida patentia, 2-2.3 mm longa, oblongo-lanceolata, concava, elimbata; marginibus supra medium folii anguste revolutis, superne minute denticu- latis; costa crassa, in apicem folil evanida; cellulis ovali-hexagonis, parietibus firmis, in- fimis subquadratis. Seta 2—2.5 em longa, rubra; theca pendula, anguste pyriformis, cum collo 3 mm longa; dentes peristomu lutei, endosto- mium hyalinum, corona basilaris longe ultra. medium dentium producta, cilia appendiculata. Rio Grande do Sul: Vila Oliva, 8. Frane. d. Paula, alt. 600 m, A. Sehnem no. 2739, super rupem ad rivum. A species suggestive of B. pseudotriquetrum (Hedw.) Schwaegr. in some ways but quite distinct in the unbordered leaves. Rhodobryum majus Bartr., sp. nov. Habitu R. glazioviano sed robustius, olivaceo- viride vel fuscescens. Folia majora, ad 15 mm longa, 6 mm lata, obovata, breviter acuminata, limbata, limbo valido, superne e 38-4 seriebus cellularum composito, spimoso-serrato; cellulis. superioribus ad 125, longis. Fructus ignotus. Rio Grande do Sul: Serra de Rocinha, Bom- jesus, in humo in silva, alt. 1,000 m, A. Sehnem no. 4787. A more robust plant than R. glaziovianum Hpe. with larger leaves spinose-serrate on the upper margins and with much larger upper leaf cells. The lack of reddish color is also note- worthy. ORTHOTRICHACEAE Orthotrichum (Speciosa) sehnemii Bartr., sp. nov. Antoicum; pusillum, caespitosum, caespitibus densis, pallide viridibus, intus fuscescentibus- JUNE 1952 Caulis 5-6 mm. altus, dense foliosus, ramosus. Folia sicea laxe adpressa, leniter contorta, hu- mida late patentia, 2 mm longa, oblongo-ovata, carinato-concava, acuta; marginibus anguste recurvis, integris; costa infra summum apicem evanida; cellulis superioribus rotundatis, in- crassatis, papillosis, inferioribus internis brevi- ter rectangularibus. Theca breviter emersa, oblonga, 2 mm longa, stomatibus superficialis, sicca profunde 8-plicata; exostomil dentes sicca reflexi, per paria connati, pallidi, dense minu- tissime papillosi, processus 8, breviores, laevis- simi; spori 12-15y, laeves; calyptra pilosa. Rio Grande do Sul: Arroio Kruse, in arbore, alt. 10 m, A. Sehnem no. 184. Possibly near O. parvum Herz. of Bolivia, from which it differs in the strongly ribbed capsule, narrower and shorter segments of the endostome, and shorter-pointed leaves. Macromitrium nematosum Bartr., sp. nov. Caespitosum, caespitibus viridibus, intus atro-fuscescentibus. Caulis repens, ramis erectis, ad 1.5 em longis, dense foliosis. Folia ramea sicca arcte crispata, humida late patentia, c. 3 mm longa, filis articulatis fuscis, numerosis ornata, oblongo-lanceolata, breviter acuminata vel acuta; marginibus valde undulatis, superne irregulariter dentatis; costa infra summum apicem folii evanida; cellulis laminalibus ro- tundato-hexagonis, haud incrassatis, diam. c. 10x, basilaribus anguste rectangularibus, parieti- pus firmis, laevissimis. Caetera ignota. Rio Grande do Sul: Estacaéo Sao Salvador, ad arborem in silva, alt. 600 m, A. Sehnem no. QITA. Unfortunately this collection lacks fruit, so that the species cannot be accurately located, but the numerous brownish septate filaments up to 0.35 mm long, confined principally to the ventral faces of the leaves, is a curious feature without parallel in the genus as far as my experience goes. Macromitrium (Leiostoma) perfragile Bartr., sp. nov. Caespitosum, caespitibus viridibus, intus fuscescentibus. Caulis elongatus, repens, ramis erectis, ad 1.5 cm. longis. Folia ramea sicca crispatula, humida patula, anguste lanceolata, 3-3.5 mm. longa, longe subulato-acuminata, apice in cuspidem viridem, fragilimam sensim constricta; marginibus superne minute eroso- BARTRAM: NEW MOSSES FROM BRAZIL 181 denticulatis; costa in acumen evanida; cellulis minutis, diam. 6-8 y, rotundatis, mamillosis, basilaribus linearibus, incrassatis, laevissimis. Caetera ignota. Rio Grande do Sul: Fazenda S. Borja, S. Leopoldo, in arbore, alt. 50 m, A. Sehnem no. 427. Rio dos Sinos, 8. Leopoldo, alt. 10 m, A. Sehnem no. 432. Aparados, Bom Jestis, in ar- bore, alt. 100 m, A. Sehnem no. 576. Campestre Montenegro, in arbore, at. 450 m, A. Sehnem no. 2175. Vila Oliva, 8. France. d. Paul, in arbore, alt. 750 m, A. Sehnem no. 2630, type 9. Possibly near M. fragilicuspis Card. of Mexico and Guatemala but distinet in the mamillose lamina cells not in vertical rows and the smooth basal cells. NECKERACEAE Pinnatella brasiliensis Bartr., sp. nov. Gracilescens, lutescenti-viridis, opaca. Caulis primarius elongatis, lignosus. Caules secundarii numerosi, lignosi, ad 4 cm longi, stipitati, su- perne bipinnatim ramosi, stipite ad 2 cm longo, foliis pallidis, obovatis, breviter acumi- natis, plerumque destructis instructo; ramis densis late patentibus, sicca apice valde de- curvis. Folia caulina late ovata, breviter acu- minata, 2 mm longa, 1.2 mm lata; marginibus fere ad basin irregulariter serrulatis; costa crassa, longe ultra medium folii evanida; cellulis superioribus rotundato-hexagonis, diam. 10-— 15y, laevissimis, infimis linearibus, parietibus pellucidis. Folia ramea et ramulina multo mi- nora, 0.5-0.6 mm longa, orbiculari-ovata, cellu- lis superioribus incrassatis, vix unipapillosis. Catera ignota. Rio Grande do Sul: Estacio Sao Salvador, ad arborem in silva, alt. 600 m, A. Sehnem no. Did When dry the slender branches of the fronds are contracted and strongly decurved at the tips. When moist and relaxed the branches form a dense ovate frond with the pinnae decreasing in length upward. Filiform microphyllous branchlets are produced sparimgly in some of the fronds. HOooKBERIACEAE Hookeriopsis armata Bartr., sp. nov. Synoica; caespites decumbentes, purpur- ascentes. Caulis repens, parce ramosus, obtusis, complanatus, ec. 4 mm latus. Folia conferta, late 182 patentia, 2 mm longa, oblongo-ovata, breviter acuminata, humida leniter undulata; marginibus planis, superne argute serratis; costis binis, supra medium folii evanidis; cellulae superiores anguste rhomboideae, margines versus angus- tiores, basilares anguste lineares. Folia peri- chaetialia minora; seta 10-12 mm longa, rubella, apice arcuato; theca nutans, oblongo-cylindrica, deoperculata 1 mm longa; calyptra pallida, parce pilosa. Santa Catarina: Armacdo do Sul, Ilha de Santa Catarina, ad lignum putridum in silva, alt. 150 m, A. Sehnem no. 3190. Morro do Antao, Ilha de Santa Catarina, ad lignum pu- tridum in silva, alt. 250 m, A. Sehnem no. 3198, type. The short-poimted leaves coarsely serrate above seem to clearly distinguish this species from either H. rubens (C. M.) Broth. or H. lonchopelma (C. M.) Broth., which, to judge from the descriptions, are its natural allies. SEMATOPHYLLACEAB Sematophyllum reitzii Bartr., sp. nov. Autoicum; caespites decumbentes, densi, fuscescenti-virides, nitidi. Caulis repens, irregu- lariter ramosus, ramis ad 2 cm longis, parce ramulosis, saepe cuspidatis. Folia ramea erecto- patentia, conferta, laxe imbricata, oblongo- ovata, breviter acuminata, concava, integra, ecostata, 2 mm longa, 0.8 mm lata; margines erecti; cellulae superiores anguste rhomboideae, inferiores lineares, alares numerosae, auricu- latae, fuscescentes, infimae oblongae vesicu- losae, supra subquadratae. Seta rubra, c. 15 mm. longa; theca oblonga, horizontalis, de- operculata 1.5 mm. longa. Santa Catarina: Campo dos Padres, alt., 1,900 m, P. Raulino Reitz no. 2.644. A well-marked species in the sharply defined auriculate group of alar cells, which are trans- versely divided so that the lower cells in the group are oblong and the cells above sub- quadrate. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 6 Sematophyllum riparioides Bartr., sp. nov. Autoicum; caespites laxi, laete virides.Caulis repens, parce ramosus. Folia ramea sicca et humida late patentia, oblonga, concava, eco- stata, breviter et late acuta, integra, 2.6 mm longa, 0.7-0.8 mm lata; margines erecti; cellulae superiores lineari-rhomboideae, dense chloro- phyllosae, inferiores lineares, alares vix vesicu- losae, rectangulares, male definitae. Seta rubra, 10-12 mm longa; theca oblonga, horizontalis, deoperculata 1.5 mm longa. Rio Grande do Sul: 8. Francisco de Paula, in terra juxta rivulum, alt. 900 m, A. Sehnem no. 4635. The numerous transversely divided alar cells suggest some affinity with S. reitzii but the distinctions are sharply marked. Here the shorter pointed leaves are laxly spreading when dry and the alar group neither inflated nor con- spicuous and not at all auriculate. Acroporium sehnemii Bartr., sp. nov. Autoicum; caespitosum, caespitibus densis, lutescenti-viridibus. Caulis dense ramosus. Folia patentia, 2-2.5 mm longa, e basi oblonga sen- sim lanceolato-subulata, ecostata; marginibus integris vel superne minutissime denticulatis; cellulis angustissime linearibus, laevissimis, alaribus magnis, oblongis, vesiculosis, fuscis. Folia perichaetialia suberecta, in acumen in- tegrum sensim angustata; seta 5-8 mm longa, rubra, ubique laevissima; theca e collo brevi, elliptica, erecta, vix 1.5 mm longa. Rio Grande do Sul: Campestre Montenegro, in ramulis arboris viridis ad rivum, A. Sehnem no. 2266, type. Feitoria, alt. 30 m, A. Sehnem no. 106. Santa Catarina: Mata Hoffmann, epifita da mata, alt. 50 m, P. Raulino Reitz no. 3.149. Sharply distinct from the widely distributed A. pungens (Hedw.) Broth. in the autoicous influorescence, the narrower leaves, and shorter, entirely smooth setae. JUNE 1952 BAYER: NEW RECORDS OF OCTOCORALS 183 ZOOLOGY —New western Atlantic records of octocorals (Coelenterata: Anthozoa), with descriptions of three new species.! FREDERICK M. Bayer, U.S. National Museum. During the course of preparing a résumé of the octocoral fauna of the Gulf of Mexico for the symposium being assembled by Dr. Paul 8. Galtsoff, a number of new western Atlantic records of these animals came to light. They materially increase our knowl- edge of the Gulf octocoral fauna, and also provide more material for determining the origin and relationships of the Gulf fauna. These records, which include stations out- side of the Gulf proper as well as within it, are presented in the following list. The bulk of the collection was made by the U.S. Fish Commission steamer 4 /batross, but substan- tial parts were also contributed by the steamers Pelican and Fish Hawk, and by the Gulf Expedition of the University of Miami. Data for the Albatross stations cited be- low are given in a station-list on page 188. All data for other vessels and collectors are in the text. Order TELESTACEA Family TELESTIDAE Telesto favula Deichmann, 1936 South of Mobile, Ala., from Albatross stations 2387, 2388, 2389, 2390. Telesto sanguinea Deichmann, 1936 Off Palm Beach, Fla., 20-30 fathoms, April 1950: m/v Triton, Thompson and McGinty. (Previous northernmost record: Carysfort Reef, off Key Largo.) Off Fort Walton, Fla., 13-14 fathoms, June 3-4, 1947: Frank Lyman. ESE. of Destin, Fla., 13-14 fathoms, July 29-30, 1948: L. A. Burry and Frank Lyman. South of Cape St. George, Fla., Albatross station 2405. South of Cape San Blas, Fla., Albatross station 2370. South of Mobile, Ala., Albatross station 2387. (Previous northernmost record within the Gulf: west of the Dry Tortugas.) Order ALCYONACEA Family ALCYONIIDAE Nidalia occidentalis Gray, 1835 63 miles ESE. of Charleston, 8. C., Pelican station 195-7: 31° 50.5’ N., 79° 26.5’ W., 45 fathoms, March 13, 1940. Off Palm Beach, Fla., 20-40 fathoms, Febru- ary and April 1950: m/v Triton, Thompson and McGinty. Family NEPHTHYIDAE Eunephthya nigra (Pourtalés, 1868) Off Brunswick, Ga., to off Fernandina, Fla,. from Albatross stations 2415, 2416, 2667, 2668, 2669. (Not previously recorded north of the Florida Keys.) Off Daytona, Fla., Albatross station 2661. Neospongodes portoricensis (Hargitt, 1901) Off Havana, Cuba, from Albatross stations 2156, 2160, 2168, 2323, 2333. (Previously re- ‘corded only in the West Indies, from Puerto Rico southward and eastward.) Order GORGONACEA Suborder ScLERAXONIA Family BRIAREIDAE Diodogorgia nodulifera (Hargitt, 1901) Off Palm Beach, Fla., 20-60 fathoms, Janu- ary—April 1950: m/v Triton, Thompson and McGinty. Iciligorgia schrammi Duchassaing, 1870 Off Palm Beach, Fla., 20-40 fathoms, March, April, and July 1950: m/v Triton, Thompson and McGinty. Triumph Reef, off Elliott Key, Fla., 20-25 fathoms, November 28, 1949: University of Miami Marine Laboratory m/v Megalopa, F. M. Bayer. Off Havana, Cuba, from Albatross stations 2157, 2166, 2324, 2334. Suborder Houaxonta Family ACANTHOGORGIIDAE Acanthogorgia aspera Pourtalés, 1867 Off Fernandina, Fla., Albatross station 2415. (Not previously recorded north of Havana.) Family Muricerbar Bebryce cinerea Deichmann, 1936 Off Cat Cay, Bahamas, 100-150 fathoms, 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Contribution no. 69 from the Marine Laboratory, University of Miami. 184 June 1947: Mr. and Mrs. John Wentworth. (Not previously recorded north of the Virgin Islands.) Off Havana, Cuba, Albatross station 2327. Bebryce grandis Deichmann, 1936 35 miles east of Pass 4 Loutre, La., Pelican sta- tion 12: 29° 11’ N., 88° 17.5’ W., 94.5 fath- oms, February 5, 1938. Arrowsmith Bank, south of Cozumel Island, east coast of Yucatan, Albatross station 2354. (Previously recorded from Montserrat and the Barbados.) Muricea laxa Verrill, 1864 Off Havana, Cuba, Albatross station 2326. Off Anclote Keys, Fla., Fish Hawk station 7806: Anclote Light E. 1/8 8., 14 miles, 8.5 fathoms, January 11, 1913. SW. of Cedar Keys, Fla., 28° 42’ N., 83° 30’ W., 10 fathoms, 1887: Lt. J: F. Moser. SE. of Jamaica, Albatross station 2138: 17° 44’ 05” N., 75° 39 00” W., 23 fathoms, February 29, 1884. (Heretofore recorded from ‘‘Florida,” the Barbados, and as M. pendula Riess not Verrill, from Arrowsmith Bank, Yucatan.) Muricea pendula Verrill, 1868 8 miles W. by N. of Laguna Beach, Fla., 30° 16’ N., 86° 04’ W., 10 fathoms, October 24, 1948: University of Miami Marine Laboratory Gulf Explorations, J. Q. Tierney. South of Marsh Island, La., Oregon station 295: 28° 41’ N., 91° 49’ W., 17.5 fathoms, April 4, 1951. (Previously recorded only from the type lo- cality: Charleston, 8. C. The record given by Riess does not deal with this species but with M. laxa Verrill, vide supra.) Placogorgia mirabilis Deichmann, 1936 Arrowsmith Bank, south of Cozumel Island, east coast of Yucatdn, Albatross station 2354. (Previously known only from the type locality: Dry Tortugas, Florida.) Scleracis guadalupensis (Duchassaing and Michelotti, 1860) Off Palm Beach, Fla., 10?-40 fathoms, May, August 1950: m/v JT: iton, Thompson and Mce- Ginty (2 lots). (Not previously recorded north of the Florida keys.) SSE. of Mobile, Ala., Pelican station 136-5, between 29° 38’ N., 87° 39’ W. and 29° 30’ N., JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 87° 32.5’ W., 21-45 fathoms, March 1, 1939. (Previous northernmost record in the Gulf: NW. of Dry Tortugas.) Swiftia casta (Verrill, 1883) SSW. of Marsh Island, La., Pelican station 94-1: 28° 27’ N., 92° 14’ W., 29 fathoms, No- vember 13, 1938. (Not previously recorded from the northern Gulf.) Swiftia exserta (Ellis and Solander, 1786) Off Fernandina, Fla., Albatross station 2666. Off Palm Beach, Fla., 30-40 fathoms, August 1950: m/v Triton, Thompson and McGinty. Off Triumph Reef, Elliott Key, Fla., 20-25 fathoms, November 28, 1949: University of Miami Marine Laboratory m/v Megalopa, F. M. Bayer. Tongue of the Ocean, off Green Cay, Bahamas, Albatross station 2651. SSE. of Mobile, Ala., Pelican station 136-4: 29° 38’ N., 87° 39’ W., 21 fathoms, March 1, 1939. (Not previously recorded from the north- ern Gulf.) Swiftia koreni (Wright and Studer, 1889) Off Fernandina, Fla., Albatross station 2415. (Apparently not before recorded so far north in the western Atlantic.) Thesea plana Deichmann, 1936 8 miles W. by N. of Laguna Beach, Fla., 30° 16’ N., 86° 04’ W., 10 fathoms, October 24, 1948: University of Miami Marine Laboratory Gulf Explorations, J. Q. Tierney. South of Galveston Tex., Oregon station 537: 28° 06.2’ N., 99° 44.6’ W. 30 fathoms, April 15, 1952. Family PLExXAURIDAE Eunicea succinea (Pallas, 1766) Off NW. end of St. Martins Reef, Florida. Banks (south of Cedar Keys), 28° 50’ N., 83° W, 1887: Lt. J. F. Moser. Plexaura dubia Kolliker, 1864 14 miles west of Cape Romano (Florida) whistle buoy 16, 25° 40’ N., 81° 55’ W., 7% fath- oms, September 28, 1948: University of Miami Marine Laboratory Gulf Explorations, J. Q- Tierney. JUNE 1952 Plexaura porosa (P. L. 8S. Miller, 1775) 10 miles NW. by N. of New Pass (Florida) buoy, 27° 25’ N., 82° 45’ W., 5.5 fathoms, Sep- tember 24, 1948: University of Miami Marine Laboratory Gulf Explorations, J. Q. Tierney. Plexaurella kunzei Kiikenthal, 1924 14 miles west of Cape Romano (Florida) whistle buoy 16, 25° 40’ N., 81° 55’ W., 73 fathoms, September 28, 1948: University of Miami Marine Laboratory Gulf Explorations, J. Q. Tierney. Family GoRGONUDAE Antillogorgia acerosa (Pallas, 1766) NW. of Charlotte Harbor, Fla., Fish Hawk station 7796: Boca Grande Light NNE. ? E., 24.5 miles, to NE. + W., 20 miles, 7 fathoms, January 2, 1913. Southeast of Arcas Keys, Gulf of Campeche, Oregon station 436: 20° 07’ N., 91° 41.2’ W., 20 fathoms, August 24, 1951. : Antillogorgia americana (Gmelin, 1791) 9 miles west of Big Marco Pass (Florida), 25° 58’ N., 81° 55” W., 6.5 fathoms, September 26, 1948: University of Miami Marine Labora- tory Gulf Explorations, J. Q. Tierney. Pterogorgia anceps (Pallas, 1766) Clearwater Bay, Fla., February 1879: C. A. and J. S. Watson. Pterogorgia guadalupensis Duchassaing and Michelin, 1846 4 miles SW. by 8S. of Smith Shoal (Florida) Light: 24° 41’ N., 81° 58’ W., 73 fathoms, Sep- tember 29, 1948, University of Miami Marine Laboratory Gulf Explorations, J. Q. Tierney. Genus Leptogorgia H. Milne Edwards, 1857 This genus is characterized among the gor- goniids by the absence (1) of specialized types of spicules and (2) of specialized modes of branch- ing, e.g., reticulate, alate, or lamellate, and therefore is least divergent from what is consid- ered the primitive condition. At least four species in the western Atlantic belong to this genus, two of which (L. hebes, L. miniata) have been found in the Gulf of Mexico. One species usually re- ferred to Leptogorgia, namely Gorgonia virgulata Lamarck, regularly has spicules modified into disk spindles like those of the genus Hugorgia Verrill, heretofore not recorded from the Atlantic Ocean; and another, G. setacea Pallas, has less BAYER: NEW RECORDS OF OCTOCORALS 185 modified but still highly atypical sclerites. Al- though one obvious conclusion might be that Eugorgia should not be maintained separate from Leptogorgia, it seems preferable at this time to retain both genera, referring G. virgulata Lamarck to Hugorgia, and G. setacea Pallas tentatively to Leptogorgia. It is quite possible that in the future a new subgenus of Hugorgia will be required for the Atlantic forms, or even that all will be united as subgenera of Lepto- gorgua. Leptogorgia hebes Verrill, 1869 3.5 miles SW. of Longboat Pass, Sarasota, Fla., 5-6 fathoms, March 24, 1951: J. Brookes Knight. Matagorda, Tex.: John Q. Kain. Leptogorgia miniata (Valenciennes, 1855) Off Palm Beach, Fla., 20-40 fathoms, July 22 and 28, 1950: m/v Triton, Thompson and McGinty. Genus Eugorgia Verrill, 1868 The species long known as Leptogorgia virgu- lata (Lamarck) is transferred to Verrill’s genus on the basis of its spindles with fused, disklike belts of warts. Three new western Atlantic species are added to the genus. Spicules of H. ampla Verrill, the type species, are shown in Fig. 1, a-c, for comparison. Eugorgia virgulata (Lamarck, 1815), n. comb. Fig. 1, d-7 10 miles NW. by N. of New Pass (Florida) buoy, 27° 25’ N., 82° 45’ W., 5.5 fathoms, Sep- tember 24, 1948: University of Miami Marine Laboratory Gulf Explorations, J. Q. Tierney. 9 miles NE. by N. of Ochlockonee Shoal (Florida) bell buoy, 29° 59’ N, 84° 05’ W., 3.5 fathoms, October 27, 1948: University of Miami Marine Laboratory Gulf Explorations, J. Q. Tierney. 8 miles W. by N. of Laguna Beach, Fla., 30° 16’ N., 86° 04’ W., 10 fathoms, October 24, 1948: University of Miami Laboratory Gulf Explora- tions, J. Q. Tierney. South of Marsh Island, La., Oregon station 295: 28° 41’ N., 91° 49’ W., 17.5 fathoms, April 4, 1951. Remarks.—Most of the blunt spindles have their warts fused to form thick disks, as illus- trated in Fig. 1, d-g; long, simple spindles, often with the warts of one side higher and conical (Fig. 1, h, 7) are also present, in larger numbers 186 near the twig tips than lower down on the colony. There is no polyp armature regularly present, but some flat, typically ‘“gorgoniid”’ rods are sometimes found. Through the kindness of Dr. Gilbert Ranson, of the Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelle, Paris, I have examined spicules from a fragment of Lamarck’s type, which agree well with those of the specimens recorded above. Range—Jamaica? Gulf of Mexico to New York; not at present known from the east coast of Florida. Eugorgia stheno, n. sp. Fig. 1, 9-1 Off Palm Beach, Fla., 30-40 fathoms, July 28, 1950: m/v Triton, Thompson and McGinty. Off Government Cut, Miami, Fla., 40 fathoms, January 24, 1951: University of Miami Marine Laboratory: U.S.A. m/v T-19, F. M. Bayer. South of Mobile, Ala., Albatross station 2387: 29° 24’ 00” N., 88° 04’ 00” W., 32 fathoms, March 4, 1885. (Holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 49774; paratypes, nos. 49775, 49776, 49777.) Also from the following Albatross stations in the vicinity: 2388, 2389, 2390. Description —Colonies normally unattached, unbranched or with only one or two simple branches, with a growing tip at all free ends; rarely attached to small rocks or shells. Length variable, commonly 20 cm; diameter 0.4—0.75 mm, in most cases 0.5-0.6 mm, exclusive of the anthosteles. Stem round or but slightly flattened. Anthosteles bluntly conical, somewhat com- pressed in the long axis of the colony, 0.5—-0.75 mm tall; arranged biserially, a single row on each side of the stem, the individuals alternating more or less regularly; distance between zooids (mouth to mouth) 2.5 to 6 mm. On the sides between the zooid rows there is a weak longitudinal ridge, usually detectable only near the tips of the stem, which marks the path of the longitudinal stem canal beneath it. The anthocodiae are fully re- tractile but im preserved specimens they may remain exsert; beneath eeach tentacle is an en chevron field of flat rods with scalloped edges (Fig. 1, 7); in the pinnules there are delicate, slightly curved, smooth rods (Fig. 1, k). The cortical spiculation consists of short, blunt spindles with the warts more or less fused into disks, many of them perfect disk-spindles (Fig. 1, 1); and long spindles with the warts of one side taller and partly fused, proportionally more JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 numerous near the growing tips than in the mid- dle of the colony (Fig. 1, m). The axial sheath contains symmetrically sculptured spindles (Fig. 1, ). Several color phases occur: (1) uniform cream white or pale yellow; (2) white or yellow with red anthosteles; (3) uniform reddish or pinkish orange. Anthocodial spicules in phases 2 and 3 are usually yellow. Remarks.—Eugorgia stheno always has a dis- tinct anthocodial armature, unlike H. virgulata and the Pacific species of this genus. This species was taken in abundance at several stations in the northern Gulf of Mexico; the collections from the lower east coast of Florida consist of only a single specimen each. Eugorgia euryale, n. sp. Fig. 1, o-s South of Carrabelle, Fla., Albatross station 2407 : 28° 47’ 30” N., 84° 37’ 00” W., 24 fathoms, March 15, 1885. (Holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 49764; paratype, no. 49765.) Description.—Colonies attached (?) or free; similar in general appearance to H. stheno but much stouter. The type is an unbranched colony 83.5 em long which shows no evidence that it was ever attached. Near the tips the stem is about 0.9 mm in diameter, increasing to slightly more than 1.0 mm near the middle. Along the two bare sides of the stem runs a longitudinal ridge or furrow depending upon whether the longitudinal canals are distended or collapsed. Anthosteles conical, about 0.5 mm tall, 2.5 to 3.0 mm apart, near the ends of the colony ar- ranged in a single row on each side of the stem, mostly opposite; toward the middle there is an alternating double row along each side. The anthocodiae are fully retractile but may remain exsert in preservation; they have an armature of flat rods (Fig. 1, 0) arranged obscurely en chevron beneath the tentacles and parallel for a short distance on the tentacle bases; in the distal por- tion of the tentacles only smooth, curved rods are present (Fig. 1, p). The cortical sclerites include disk spindles larger than those of E. stheno, sometimes with four median disks instead of the usual two (Fig. 1, q); these grade into the long spindles which are largest and most numerous near the ends of the colony. These spicules are somewhat flat- tened, with the warts of the outside rather smooth, conical, and more or less fused together, while those on the edges and on the inner surface JUNE 1952 BAYER: NEW RECORDS OF OCTOCORALS 187 (Mace ee ESE OLY hs 7c oe vs Fig. 1.—a-c, Eugorgia ampla Verrill, spicules from a specimen identified by Prof. Verrill: a, Extreme form of disk spindle; 6, less strongly developed disk spindles; c, spindle. d-t, Eugorgia virgulata (Lamarck): d-f, Disk spindles; g, isolated disks from disk spindles; h, asymmetrical spindle; %, sym- metrical spindle. j-n, Eugorgia stheno, n. sp.: 7, Gorgoniid rods of anthocodiae; *, small rods of anthocodiae; 1, disk spindles; m, asymmetrical spindle; n, spindle of axial sheath. o-s, Hugorgia euryale, n. sp.: 0, Gorgoniid rods of anthocodiae; p, small rods of anthocodiae; g, disk spindles; r, two views of the same asymmetrical spindle; s, spindle of axial sheath. t-y, Eugorgia medusa, n. sp.: t, Gorgoniid rods of anthocodiae; vw, small rods of anthocodiae; v, disk spindles; w, long disk spindle; x, asymmetrical spindle; y, axial sheath spindle. 188 are typically complicated (Fig. 1, 7). Only by viewing these spicules from the edge can this difference between the inner and outer sculpture be seen, and since they are both flattened and bent they do not often present themselves in profile in a preparation. The axial sheath contains spindles with symmetrical belts of low warts (Fig. 1, s). The color of the colony is pinkish cream, the calyces red with a yellowish area at the summit. LIST OF ALBATROSS STATIONS REFERRED TO IN THE ACCOMPANYING TEXT Sta- fe tion Lat. N Leng. W. | & | Kind of bottom Date No. fas oieeiaer Cae IF 790'S 1884 2138} 17 44 05,|75 39 00 23) co. brk. sh. Feb. 29 2156} 23 10 35,|82 21 55. } 278) co. Apr. 30 2157/23 10 04,|82 21 O07.| 29) — Apr. 30 2160] 23 10 31,|82 20 37.| 167] co Apr. 30 2166| 23 10 36,|82 20 30.1} 196) co. May 1 2168] 23 10 36,| 82 20 20. | 122] co May 1 | 1885 2323| 23 10 51,|82 19 03. | 163) wh. br. co. Jan. 17 2324) 23 10 25,/82 20 24.| 33) co. Jan. 17 2326; 23 11 45,/82 18 54. | 194) br. co. Jan. 17 2327/23 11 45,|82 17 54. | 182] fne. br. s. Jan. 17 2333) 23 10 36,|82 19 12.| 169] fne. wh. co. Jan. 19 2334 | 23 10 42,/82 18 24 67| wh. co. Jan. 19 2354) 20 59 30,|86 28 45. | 130) co. Jan, 22 2370, 29 18 15,|/85 32 00.| 25] ers. gy. s. brk. | Feb. 7 sh. 2371; 29 17 00,/85 30 45 26| gy. s. brk. sh. Feb. 7 2379| 28 00 15,|87 42 00. |1467) yl. oz. Mar. 2 2384/28 45 00,/88 15 30. | 940) br. gy. m. Mar. 3 2387/29 24 00.) 88 04 00.| 32| s. g. brk. sh. Mar. 4 2388) 29 24 30,|/88 01 00.] 35] yl.s. bk. sp. Mar. 4 2389) 29 28 00,/87 56 00.| 27| gy. s. brk. sh. Mar. 4 2390; 29 27 30,/87 48 30 30) ers. s. bk. sp. sh.} Mar. 4 2392) 28 47 30,|87 27 00.| 724) br. gy. m. Mar. 13 2394' 28 38 30, | 87 02 00. | 420) gn. m. Mar. 13 2397) 28 42 00,) 86 36 00.) 280) gy. m. Mar. 14 2400, 28 41 00,|86 07 00. | 169] gy. m. Mar. 14 2405| 28 45 00,/85 02 00.| 30) gy.s. brk. co. | Mar. 15 2407; 28 47 30,|84 37 00.| 24] co. brk. sh. Mar. 15 2412 26 18 30,/83 O08 45.| 27) fne. gy. s. bk. | Mar. 19 | sp. brk. sh. 2415) 30 44 00,)79 26 00. | 440| co. ers. s. sh. for.) Apr. 1 2416/31 26 00,/79 07 00. | 276) co. brk. sh. Apr. 1 | 1886 2651, 24 02 00,/77 12 45 97| wh. oz. Apr. 13 2661; 29 16 30,|79 36 30. | 488) gy. s. bk. sp. May 4 2666, 30 47 30,|79 49 00.| 270] gy. s. May 5 2667) 30 53 00,|79 42 30. | 273] gy. s. bk. sp. May 5 2668 30 58 30,,79 38 30. | 294] gy. s. dd. co. May 5 2669, 31 09 00, 79 33 30. | 352) gy. s. dd. co. May 5 Abbreviations used in denoting bottom character: bk. = black fne. = fine oz. = ooze br. = brown for. = Foraminifera s. = sand brk. = broken g. = gravel sh. = shells co. = coral gn. = green sp. = specks crs. = coarse gy. = gray wh. = white dd. = dead m. = mud yl. = yellow JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 6 A paratype is present which was apparently attached at one time although no base is pre- served. The angle and curvature of the single branch, and the regeneration of the rind at the proximal end of the main stem suggest that the colony was growing in a recumbent position. Remarks.—Although E. euryale is similar in many respects to H. stheno, it seems desirable to consider both as species since no connecting in- termediates are known by which to unite them. Eugorgia medusa, n. sp. Fig. 1, Hy ESE. of Boca Grande (Florida) Light, Alba- tross station 2412: 26° 18’ 30” N., 83° 08’ 45” W.. 27 fathoms, March 19, 1885. South of Carrabelle, Fla. Albatross station 2407: 28° 47’ 30” N., 84° 37’ 00” W., 24 fathoms, March 15, 1885. (Holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 49776; paratype, no. 10464.) South of Cape San Blas, Fla., Albatross station 2371: 29° 17’ 00” N., 85° 30’ 45” W., 26 fathoms, February 7, 1885. Description.—The type is an unattached stem 44 cm long, bent at almost right angles near the middle where a single branch 18.5 cm long is given off. All three apices show regions of active growth—no base is present. Near the tips the somewhat flattened stem is 1.0-1.5 mm in diam- eter (exclusive of calyces); the low, rounded, almost contiguous calyces are arranged on either side of the stem in single rows near the apices and in alternating double rows toward the middle of the colony. They are 0.25-0.5 mm tall, 1.0- 1.5 mm broad, and 1.5-2.0 mm apart (mouth to mouth); arrangement may be alternate or op- posite. The anthocodiae are fully retractile within the anthosteles, and are armed with flat rods (Fig. 1, t) below and upon the tentacle bases. The superficial cortical layer contains numer- ous well formed disk spindles with two median disks (Fig. 1, v), spindles of greater length with 4-6 disks (Fig. 1, w), and long, pointed spindles with somewhat asymmetrical sculpture (Fig. 1, x). In the inner cortical layer (“axial sheath’’) there are perfectly symmetrical spindles (Fig. 1, y). In color the colonies are uniform pinkish buff. Remarks.—Eugorgia medusa differs from E. stheno and E. euryale in its more closely set, low calyces, in the form of the disk spindles and the presence of long spindles with 4-6 disks. JUNE 1952 Family GoRGONELLIDAB Scirpearia funiculina (Duchassaing and Michelotti, 1864) South of Mobile, Ala. from Albatross stations Family CHRYSOGORGIIDAE Chrysogorgia elisabethae F. M. Bayer, 1951 Near Havana, Cuba: Univ. of Iowa Expedition. Chrysogorgia elegans (Verrill, 1883) Off Cape San Blas, Fla., Albatross station 2397. SE. of Aransas Pass, Tex., Oregon station 548: 27° 01.4’ N., 96° 16.8’W., 200-280 fathoms, April 18, 1952; and station 549: 26° 58.5’ N., 96° 06.7’ W., 300-400 fathoms, April 18, 1952. Family IstpipaE Acanella eburnea (Pourtalés, 1868) South of Apalachicola, west of Tampa, Fla., Oregon station 489: 27° 44’ N., 85° 09’ W., 254 fathoms, September 27, 1951. From south of Choctawhatchee Bay, Fla., to south of Mobile, Ala., from Albatross stations 2384, 2392, 2294, 2397, 2400. Order PENNATULACEA Family RENILLIDAE Renilla miilleri K6lliker, 1872 6 miles off Pass 4 Loutre, La., March 13, 1931: LOEBLICH NEW FORAMINIFERAL GENERA 189 J.C. Pearson. Corpus Christi, Tex.: C. T. Reed. Family FUNICULINIDAE Funiculina quadrangularis (Pallas, 1766) South of Pensacola, Fla., Albatross station 2394. Family PRoropriLiDAE Protoptilum sp. cf. thomsoni K6lliker, 1872 South of Mobile, Ala., Oregon station 314: 29° 15.5’ N., 87° 53’ W., 175 fathoms, April 27, 1951. SE. of Pass 4 Loutre, La., Oregon station 126: 29° 02’ N., 88° 34.5’ W., 195 fathoms, September 23, 1950. Family UMBELLULIDAE Umbellula gtintheri Kolliker, 1880 South of Mobile, Ala., Albatross station 2379. Family VIRGULARIIDAE Virgularia mirabilis (Linnaeus, 1758) South of Mobile, Ala., Albatross station 2387. Off Galveston, Tex., Grampus station 10470: 29° 03’ N., 94° 26’ W., 9 fathoms, February 28, 1917. ZooLocy.—New Recent foraminiferal genera from the tropical Pacific. ALFRED R. Lorsuicy, Jr., U. 8S. National Museum. The taxonomic portion of this paper is the third of a series resulting from a projected revision of the classification of the smaller Foraminifera. Many species have question- ably been placed in well-defined genera and others have been placed in genera that have been so broadly defined as almost to con- stitute families. This latter procedure has certainly been detrimental to the study of Foraminifera, as students often wonder what system, if any, is followed in such classifications. This was admirably shown by Redmond (1949, p. 19) in a discussion as to what constitutes the genus Hponides. Redmond refigured the original illustrations of Nautilus repandus Fichtel and Moll, the genotype species of Hponides, and also several illustrations by later authors, of specimens that they referred to Hponides repandus (Fichtel and Moll). It is clearly evident from these figures that they bear little relation to the genus Hponides as defined by Montfort and based on Fichtel and Moll’s Nautilus repandus. Furthermore, a search of the literature shows that Hpon- ides, as the term is currently used, is a “waste-basket”’ genus, and so many un- related forms are included as to make it almost useless as a generic unit. In replying to Redmond’s paper, Hofker (1950, p. 15) states, ‘“The difficulty indicated by C. D. Redmond once again indicates the im- possibility of observing the rules of nomen- clature in dealing with the foraminifera.” In a description offered by Hofker (1950, p. 16) he states that the genotype of Hpon- ides may be Eponides repandus from the coast of Chile or Eponides frigidus from North America. To take up the first point by Hofker no easier path to chaos could be followed in a study of the Foraminifera, or for that matter in the study of any group, than to disregard the rules of nomen- clature. If any stability is to be maintained in classification, these rules must be adhered to. Otherwise the classification would be subject 190 to unlimited changes from day to day based on the whims of individual workers. To consider the second point made by Hofker, according to the rules of nomenclature the genotype of Hponides can only be Nautilus repandus as known to Fichtel and Moll and can not be based on specimens later studied from the coast of Chile. As to Eponides frigidus Cushman, cited as a possible geno- type by Hofker, the types of this species have never been figured. All figures of this species published by Cushman and others have been in error as none of them agree in character with the cotypes that are in the National Museum collections. Furthermore, this species could not be the genotype species of Eponides as it fits neither Montfort’s original description of Eponides nor the present concept of Eponides of the majority of authors. Actually it is more closely re- lated to Discopulvinulina Hofker. Hofker has done much to clarify the problems in the Rotaliidae by his clear description of various genera, but it is felt that his solution for the genotype of Hponides is in error. What is needed is a restudy of Fichtel and Moll’s types or redefinition based on topo- type specimens. Should this be impossible, Eponides must remain as a genus based on Nautilus repandus and the multitude of dissimilar forms referred to E’ponides should be redescribed and placed in appropriate genera. One such form is here described as a new genus, as it is completely distinct from the type figures and description of Eponides repandus and from all other forms referred to Eponides by later workers. A second new genus in the family Textulariidae is de- scribed as a result from a study of one of the peculiar forms assigned to Textularia. This has been another genus to which almost all biserial forms (regardless of apertural char- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 6 acters, wall structure, or other features) have been referred in the past. Family TeExTULARIIDAE Tawitawia Loeblich, n. gen. Genotype (type species): Textularia immensa Cushman, 1921. Test large, flattened, biserial; chambers nu- merous, low, strongly overlapping at the center of the sides; wall coarsely arenaceous, thick, with pillars projecting downward into the interior from the roof of the chambers, giving a laby- rinthine interior; aperture terminal, consisting of an elongate series of irregular slits separated completely by pillars across the opening or only partially by projections from one side, aperture does not extend as far as the inner margin of the chamber. Remarks.—This genus differs from Textularia Defrance in the labyrinthine interior and the multiple aperture which is terminal in position. It differs from Cribrostomum Moller in being flattened and in having a single row of aper- tures rather than many scattered over the ter- minal portion of the chamber. It resembles Polychasmina Loeblich and Tappan in the aper- tural character, but is biserial rather than uni- serial. Septigenerina Keijzer has vertical internal pillars but these are much fewer in number, the test has a coiled base and the aperture is typically textularian. It differs from Cribretextularia Loeblich and Tappan in having a single row of apertural slits, rather than scattered pores over the apertural surface, and in having a labyrinthic interior. The present genus is monotypic. However, Lalicker and McCulloch (1940, pl. 15, figs. 18d, e, not figs. 18a—c) figured a specimen as Textu- laria panamensis Cushman that very probably belongs to this genus as it shows a similar cham- with strongly overlapping ber arrangement Fics. la-c.—Paumotua terebra (Cushman): 1a, Dorsal view of holotype (USNM 26160) showing back- ward curving, raised, and thickened sutures; 1b, ventral view showing more direct sutures, umbilicus, apertural reentrant, and supplementary apertures in line with the aperture, increasing in size as added; lc, edge view showing low spire and aperture. X 72. Fics. 2a-5.—Tawitawia immensa (Cushman): 2a, Side view of megalospheric hypotype (USNM P. 825c) showing biserial test with final chamber tending to be centrally placed; 2b, top view showing mul- tiple aperture that does not extend to the inner margin of the final chamber, X 15; 3, sectioned hypotype (USNM P. 826) showing biserial character of test and vertical pillars projecting downward from the chamber roof into the cavity, X 33; 4a, side view of microspheric hypotype (USNM P. 825a) showing jow and broad biserially arranged and strongly overlapping chambers; 4b, top view showing linear arrangement of the multiple aperture that does not extend to the inner margin of the chamber, X 15; 5, side view of megalospherie hypotype (USNM P. 825b) showing biserial character of test, X 15. (All figures camera-lucida drawings by Sally D. Lee, scientific illustrator, Smithsonian Institution.) JUNE 1952 LOEBLICH—NEW FORAMINIFERAL GENERA 191 Fras. 1-5.—(See opposite page for legend.) 192 chambers and a linear series of apertural slits. However, as there is no evidence as to its internal structure it cannot be referred with certainty to Tawitawia. The holotype of Textularia panamensis does not show these characters, but is typically textularian. Tawitawia immensa (Cushman) Figs. 2a-5 Textularia immensa Cushman, U. 8. Nat. Mus. Bull. 100, vol. 4: 118, pl. 24, figs. 4a, b. 1921. Test free, large, broad and flattened, rhomboid in outline, quadrate in section, periphery trun- eate; chambers numerous, low and broad, bi- serially arranged, and each overlapping the pre- ceding for a considerable distance, final chamber in a few specimens tending to be central in posi- tion, chambers flat to slightly depressed centrally ; sutures distinct in the later portion of the test, slightly depressed or occasionally left raised on the flat sides of the test by a shght collapse of the chambers, marked by constrictions at the margins of the test, curved and strongly arched upwards; wall coarsely arenaceous, with large grains in a ground mass of finer material, laby- rinthic in structure with vertical pillars project- ing downward from the chamber roof into the cavity; aperture an elongate closely spaced series of irregular slits, separated by small pillars or projections from the sides, terminal in position on the final chamber. Length of holotype 6.27 mm, breadth 3.69 mm, thickness 0.57 mm, length of paratype (USNM P. 824) 5.49 mm, breadth 3.07 mm, thickness 0.62 mm. Length of paratype (USNM 12145) 2.44 mm, breadth 1.82 mm, thickness 0.29 mm. Length of hypotype of Fig. 4 (USNM P. 825a) 5.43 mm, breadth 3.80 mm, thickness 0.81 mm, length of hypotype of Fig. 5 (USNM P. 825b) 2.76 mm, breadth 1.90 mm, thickness 0.29 mm. Length of hypotype of Fig. 2 (USNM P. 825c) 2.60 mm, breadth 1.72 mm, thickness 0.31 mm. Length of unfigured hypotypes varies from 2.08 to 5.98 mm. Remarks.—According to the original descrip- tion (Cushman, 1921, p. 119) this species was based upon two specimens from two localities, and the species was described as rare. A third specimen was labeled as a paratype in his col- lection but not mentioned in the original de- scription. Examination of material from Albatross station D. 5576 (from which the original para- type was recorded) by the present writer has JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 produced 22 additional specimens which have made possible a more complete description of this species. Cushman stated (1921, p. 118): “... wall thick, of rather coarse angular sand grains imbedded in an unusually large amount of light gray cement,” but he apparently did not note its labyrinthine character, which can only be observed in thin sections, and which can be seen in the section shown here as Fig. 3.. In the original description Cushman (1921, p. 118) stated: “. . . aperture consisting of a series of small openings running from the inner margin of the apertural face to the highest point at the distal end of the test, about 20 in number.” However, examination of the holotype, 2 para- types, and 22 hypotype specimens shows the aperture to be restricted to the terminal portion of the final chamber and does not extend to the inner margin of the chamber. The labyrinthine walls and the distinctive aperture separate this form from the genus Tez- tularia. Types and occurrence.—Holotype (USNM 8502) and paratype (USNM P. 824) from Alba- tross station D. 5567, Dammi Island (N.) N.81°W. 9 miles, lat. 5°48’/00” N., long. 120°33’45 E.; from fine sand at 268 fathoms, bottom tempera- ture 52°F. Paratype (USNM 12145), figured hypotypes (USNM P. 825a-c and P. 826), and unfigured hypotypes (USNM P. 827 a) all from Albatross station D. 5576 north of Tawi Tawi, Mount Dromedario (Tawi Tawi) 8.22°W., 17.2 miles; lat. 5°25/56” N., long. 120°03’39” E.; from sand at 277 fathoms, bottom temperature Dovouls Family RovaLimDArE Paumotua Loeblich, n. gen. Genotype (type species): Hponides terebra Cushman, 1933. Test free, trochoid, planoconvex, ventral side flattened and umbilicate, dorsal side in a low spire, chambers numerous; wall calcareous, hy- aline; aperture a low arch at the front margin of the final chamber, between the periphery and umbilicus on the ventral side, supplementary apertures in a row paralleling the periphery and in line with the main aperture, on the ventral side, consisting of one or more open pores or slits which increase in size and number as cham- bers increase in size. Remarks.—This genus differs from Hponides Montfort in possessing ventral supplementary apertures. Discopulvinulina Hofker has ventral JUNE 1952 supplementary apertures in the form of an arch along the sutural margin of each chamber. Pseudoeponides Uchio has supplementary aper- tures similar to those of Discopulvinulina along the sutural margins, and in addition has slits on the central portion of each chamber, but on the dorsal side. The present genus does not have dorsal supplementary apertures, and the ventral ones are not at the sutural margins, but across the central portion of the chambers. Paumotua terebra (Cushman) Figs. la-e Eponides terebra Cushman, Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 9, pt. 4: 89, pl. 10, figs. la-ce. 1933. Test free, trochoid, planoconvex to concavo- convex, dorsal side with a low spire, periphery with a rounded keel; all of the 23 whorls visible dorsally, only the 8-10 chambers of the final whorl visible ventrally, but these do not reach the center but leave a wide open umbilicus, chambers increasing very gradually in size as added; sutures distinct, curved backward on the dorsal side, raised and thickened, more gradu- ally curved ventrally, and slightly depressed; wall calcareous, hyaline, surface smooth; aper- ture ventral, forming a reentrant about one- third the distance from the periphery to the umbilicus and one or more rounded to somewhat elongate supplementary apertures on the ventral side in line with the main aperture but away from the apertural margins of the chambers, in- creasing in size and number as the chambers en- large, and remaining open throughout. Greatest diameter of holotype 0.86 mm, least diameter 0.78 mm, height of spire 0.39 mm, KENK: FRESH-WATER TRICLADS 193. greatest diameter of paratype 0.52 mm, height of spire 0.21 mm. Greatest diameter of hypotype 0.53 mm, height of spire 0.18 mm. Remarks.—Cushman noted the peculiar sup- plementary apertures in his original description of the species, which was apparently based on the holotype and a single paratype. One ad- ditional unlabelled specimen was found in the collection, and all three specimens from two stations show identical development of these sup- plementary apertures, which could not there- fore be accidental. As this feature is not found in Hponides Montfort, the present species is re- garded as belonging to a distinct genus. Types and occurrence—Holotype (USNM 26160) from Albatross station H. 3931, Anu Anuraro Atoll, southeast 4 mile, Paumotu Islands, depth 405 fathoms, bottom temperature 42.5°F.; bottom coral sand, pteropod ooze, and manganese particles. Paratype (USNM 26161) and unfigured hypotype (USNM P. 828) from Albatress station H. 3910, southwest point Aki Aki, east 1 mile, Paumotu Islands, depth 377 fathoms; bottom temperature 43.0°; bottom coral sand. REFERENCES CusuMAN, J. A. Foraminifera of the Philippine and adjacent seas. U. 8. Nat. Mus. Bull. 100, vol. 4: 1-608, pls. 1-100. 1921. ———. Some new Recent Foraminifera from the tropical Pacific. Contr. Cushman Lab. Foram. Res. 9: 77-95, pls. 8-11. 1933. Horxer, J. What is the genus Eponides? Micro- paleontologist 4: 15-16. 1950. LauickErR, C. G., AND McCuutuocn, I. Some Textu- lariidae of the Pacific Ocean. Allan Hancock Pacific Exped. 6: 115-148, pls. 13-16. 1940. Repmonp, C. D. What is the genus Eponides? Micropaleontologist 3: 19-21. 1949. ZOOLOGY .—Fresh-water triclads (Turbellaria) of the Rocky Mountain National Park region, Colorado. RoMAN Kenxk. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) The present paper is a report on the re- sults of a brief investigation of aquatic habi- tats in the Rocky Mountain National Park region, Colorado. The short time at my disposal, one week, did not permit an inten- sive coverage of the area studied, and only places accessible by road could be visited. I am indebted to Hillory A. Tolson, John E. Doerr, David H. Canfield, and Ed Alberts, of the National Park Service, for facilitating my field work in Colorado; and to Prof. Edward G. Reinhard, Catholic University, and Dr. Doris M. Cochran, Smithsonian Institution, for kindly extending to me the use of their laboratory and office facilities in Washington, D. C. The triclad fauna of Colorado is very little known. Ward (1904: 143) reports that nu- merous immature, unidentified planarians were present in a bottom haul from Dead Lake, a small water basin south-southeast of Pikes Peak. Cockerell (1927: 242) states that a dark-colored planarian is not rare in mountain springs of Colorado and that, in 194 1922, Planaria maculata [Dugesia tigrina (Girard) | and P. dorotocephala |[Dugesia doro- tocephala (Woodworth) |] were liberated in the pond on the University of Colorado campus in Boulder. A species from Boulder was identified by Hyman (1931b: 327) as Phagocata velata (Stringer). These meager data appear to be the only records of Colo- rado triclads found in literature. My collections in the Rocky Mountain National Park region yielded only one tri- clad species, apparently identical with that observed by Cockerell, Polycelis coronata. Polycelis coronata (Girard, 1891) A summary of previous literature data on Polycelis coronata has been presented by Hyman (1931a). The species was first collected by Joseph Leidy in 1877 and was later described, apparently from Leidy’s notes and material, by Girard (1891, 1893) under the name Phagocata coronata. Hallez (1894: 179) considered the species to be possibly identical with the European Polycelis nigra (O. F. Miller). The correct taxonomic position of the species was established by Hyman (1931a), who furnished a good description of its anatomy and natural history. The present report aims to supplement Hy- man’s data and to carry out a comparison of Polycelis coronata with another, very similar, species of the same genus occurring on the North American Continent, P. borealis (cf. Kenk, in press). External characters—Mature, quietly gliding specimens measure up to 13 mm in length and up to 1.5 mm in width. Hyman saw many individ- uals 15 to 20 mm long and considers this to be the maximum length. The anterior end is truncated, with convex frontal margin, and the sides of the head project as a pair of broad, usually pointed auricles (Fig. 1). Hyman, in her figure 1, indicates that the tip of the auricles is rounded; it appears, indeed, that the shape of the auricles varies to some extent according to the physiological state of the animal. Active individuals in lively loco- motion show the tips of the auricles more dis- tinctly pointed than do less active animals mov- ing sluggishly. In quiet gliding, the auricles are held lifted obliquely above the substratum. Be- hind the auricles there is a slight narrowing of the body; posteriorly the width increases gradually until the maximum width is reached in the region of the pharynx; behind the pharynx, the lateral JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 margins of the body converge again to meet in a bluntly pointed posterior end. The eyes are numerous and are arranged in a curved zone, more than one row wide, along the frontal margin and the anterior parts of the lat- eral margins. The zone or band of eyes may be narrowed as it crosses the base of the auricles, as Hyman observed; in some individuals, however, there is no distinct narrowing of the band in that place. Behind the head, the band of eyes tapers to a single row extending backward for about one-fourth to one-third of the prepharyngeal region. The general color of the dorsal side is usually uniform, grayish brown to almost black. Occa- sionally one may see an indistinct lighter midline in the prepharyngeal part of the body and a lighter field above the pharynx. The color of the ventral side is lighter. The pharynx is inserted at, or a short distance behind, the middle of the body. It is of consider- able length, measuring from one-sixth to one- fourth the length of the body. The length of the Fre. 1.—Polycelis coronata, sketch of the living animal, x 8. JUNE 1952 postpharyngeal region varies considerably, par- ticularly in asexual animals. When the animals are in the state of asexual reproductive activity, the postpharyngeal parts of the body may be very short and all stages of regeneration of the posterior region may be seen. Polycelis coronata moves by gliding only. No “crawling” locomotion has been observed. Reproductive system—The testes occupy two short zones in the prepharyngeal region, one on each side of the anterior intestinal trunk, and are situated on the ventral side as is typical of the genus Polycelis. The copulatory organs (Fig. 2) furnish the best characters distinguishing Polycelis coronata from other species of the genus. The genital aperture leads into a small, spherical cavity, the common genital atrium (ac), which receives, from the left side, the duct of the copulatory bursa (bd) and connects anterodorsally with a wider cavity, the male atrium (am). The walls of both atria are lined with a cubical epithelium under which there are two muscular layers, one com- posed of circular and the other of longitudinal fibers. The penis consists of a large ellipsoidal bulb and a short broad papilla (pp). The penis bulb has a thick wall composed of a meshwork of muscle fibers arranged in concentrical layers and running in various directions. This muscular wall is pierced by radial canals containing the outlets of glands emptying into the cavity of the bulb. The secretion of these glands is stained very KENK: FRESH-WATER TRICLADS | vdd Fic. 2.—Polycelis coronata, diagram of the copulatory organs in sagittal section, X80. (ac, common atrium; am, male atrium; b, copulatory bursa; bd, bursa stalk; m, mouth; ode, common oviduct; pp, penis papilla; vdd, right vas deferens; vds, left vas deferens; vs, seminal vesicle.) 195 slightly with eosin. The voluminous, elongated cavity of the penis bulb, or seminal vesicle (vs), is lined with a tall epithelium of glandular nature. In fully mature specimens, the epithelium forms villuslike processes projecting into the vesicle. The two vasa deferentia, after penetrating the wall of the penis bulb, open into the seminal vesicle near its middle. Frequently, but not in all specimens, the opening of the left vas deferens (vds) is at a level posterior to the opening of the right vas deferens (vdd). The lumen of the seminal vesicle continues pos- teriorly into the wide canal of the short penis papilla. The epithelium of this canal is cubical and nonglandular. The canal could be interpreted as an ejaculatory duct, but is apparently devoid of a proper muscle coat. The outer epithelium of the papilla is cubical, contains only few nuclei (part of the nuclei may be depressed?) and has two underlying muscular layers, a circular one and a longitudinal one. The two oviducts bend dorsally and medially at the level of the penis bulb and unite at a point posterodorsal to the male atrium. The common oviduct (odc), formed by their fusion, proceeds ventrally, curving along the wall of the atrium, and opens into the atrial cavity at the junction of the male and common atria. The terminal por- tions of the paired oviducts and the common ovi- duct receive outlets of numerous eosinophilic shell glands. The copulatory bursa (b) is a large, lobed sac situated between the wall of the pharyngeal vds odc PP 196 pouch and the penis bulb. Its dorsal part con- tinues, somewhat to the left of the midline, into a wide duct with irregular outline, which runs pesteriorly on the left of the penis. At the level of the male atrium, the structure of the wall changes abruptly. The duct becomes a_ highly muscular tube (6d) running ventrally and opening, from the left side, into the common atrium. The sae of the bursa and the anterior part of its outlet have the same histological structure. The cells of their epithelial lining are large glandular cells; fine muscle fibers, such as are found in other species coating the bursa sac, coat both sections extérnally, as mentioned by Hyman. It appears, therefore, that the sac and the greater part of the duct correspond to a true bursa and that the bursa stalk is represented by the short muscular terminal part (bd) of the duct (called vagina by Hyman). The epithelium lining the terminal sec- ticn is cubical and ciliated and is marked off sharply from the secretory lining of the anterior section. The thick muscle coat consists of circu- lar and longitudinal fibers. Hcology.—Polycelis coronata is a common in- habitant of mountain streams and mountain lakes in the Rocky Mountain National Park re- gion. It was collected in about 50 percent of the suitable localities examined in the area, and its presence may have been overlooked in places where no thorough collections could be made. It is generally found attached to the undersides of stones. The temperatures of the habitats of the species ranged, in the latter part of September, from 4.4° to 10.9°C. The great majority of the animals collected were asexual. Many of the asexual specimens ex- hibited regenerating posterior ends or regenerat- ing heads, indicating that asexual reproduction by fission was taking place. The relative propor- tion between the numbers of individuals in the various reproductive phases was reflected in a collection made in Glacier Creek: of 39 speci- mens collected, 2 were sexually mature, 20 lacked sex organs but showed signs of recent fission, and 17 were asexual without evidence of reproduction. Hyman (193la: 124, 131), on the other hand, states that, when she collected the species in South Dakota in the early fall, many of the specimens secured were in full sexual maturity and that there were no indications of the occur- rence of fission. It is well known, however, that the same species of freshwater triclads may show JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 different habits of reproduction in different areas of their occurrence. Distribution —Girard’s (1891, 1893) specimens of Polycelis coronata had been collected in a spring near Fort Bridger in southwest Wyoming. Hyman (193la: 124) found the species in a stream near Deadwood and in a brook near the State Game Lodge, both in the Black Hills, 8. Dak. It appears that Hyman later obtained ma- terial from additional localities, since, in a recent paper (1951: 162), she indicates the range of the species as “Black Hills of South Dakota to the northwest Pacific coast.” In Colorado, Polycelis coronata was collected in clear, fast mountain streams in or near the Rocky Mountain National Park, on both sides of the Continental Divide. It was also taken in a clear mountain lake, Poudre Lake. The ‘habitat altitudes were between 7,000 and 10,700 feet. Thompson River: (a) East of the town of Estes Park, near junction of highways U. S. 34 and Colorado 66; (b) in Moraine Park, above bridge on Bear Lake Road. North Fork of Thompson River, 1 mile below Glen Haven (Fig. 3). One specimen, on 4 slides, U.S. N. M. no. 23679. Glacier Creek (tributary of Thompson River), near Glacier Basin camping ground. Fall River (tributary of Thompson River), where it enters the town of Estes Park. Tributaries of Fall River, crossing Fall River Road: Roaring River and Chiquita Creek. Streams of the St. Vrain Creek basin, crossing highway Colorado 7: North St. Vrain Creek, Willow Creek, Rock Creek, and Middle St. Vrain Creek. Onahu Creek (tributary of Colorado River), below bridge on highway U.S. 34. Tonohutu Creek, above its opening into Grand Lake. Poudre Lake, on Trail Ridge Road (U. S. 34), altitude 10,700 feet, water temperature near shore, 7.3°C. (Fig. 4). Miss Betty Locker, of the Rocky Mountain Laboratory, Hamilton, Mont., sent me samples of Polycelis collected in a cool spring (11°C., May) on Eastmoreland golf course in Portland, Oreg.; and on Skalkaho Pass (east of Hamilton), Ravalli County, Mont. These have been deposited in the U. 8. National Museum (nos. 23787, 23788). Though no anatomical study of the spec- imens could be made, the external characters of the preserved specimens agree with P. coronata. The species undoubtedly has a wide distribution in the western states. JUNE 1952 Taxonomic position—The absence of adeno- dactyls and of an excessively developed muscle coat of the male genital atrium identifies Polycelis coronata as a member of the subgenus Polycelis (ef. Kenk, in press). The species has a very close external resemblance to P. borealis from Alaska. The two species cannot be distinguished on the basis of external characters alone; moreover, their ecological characteristics are identical, as both inhabit mountain streams and mountain lakes. The two species are, however, clearly separated by the anatomy of their reproductive systems. P. coronata has a large, elongated penis bulb Fic. 3 (below).—North Fork of Thompson River, 1 mile below Glen Haven, Colo. Polycelis coronata on the undersides of stones. with a spacious seminal vesicle into which the vasa deferentia open from the sides, and a short papilla; in P. borealis, the bulb is spherical and less voluminous, the seminal vesicle smaller, the openings of the vasa deferentia anterolateral, and the penis papilla comparatively larger. The copu- latory bursa of P. coronata has a characteristic feature not seen in other species of the genus: the bursa extends posteriorly, without changing its histological structure, as a duct which connects with a true muscular bursa stalk at the level of the male atrium. In P. borealis, as in other species, the entire duct of the bursa is equipped with a thick coat of muscle fibers. KENK: FRESH-WATER TRICLADS 197 Zoogeographical note-—The genus Polycelis is primarily distributed over Europe and Asia where it is represented by a considerable number of species. The two North American species, P. coronata and P. borealis, are both confined to the western part of the continent, the western United States and Alaska. It appears probable that both species have, in the geological past, entered the continent from Asia, over the Alaskan land bridge (Kenk, in press). The range of distribution of either species is not fully known. Their areas may adjoin, or even overlap, in the Canadian Rockies. Fie. 4 (above).—Poudre Lake, on Trail Ridge Road, Rocky Mountain National Park, Colo. Polycelis coron- ata under stones along shore. LITERATURE CITED CocKERELL, THEODORE D. A. Zoology of Colorado, vii + 262 pp., illus. Univ. Colorado, Boulder, 1927. Grrarp, CHARLES. Dewx especes nouvelles de plan- aires américaines. Naturaliste 13: 80. 1891. ——. Recherches sur les planariés et les némer- tiens de VAmérique dw nord. Ann. Sei. Nat- (Paris), Zool. (7) 15: 145-310, pls. 3-6. 1893. Hauuez, Pau. Catalogue des rhabdocoelides, tri- clades et polyclades du nord de la France, ed. 2, 239 pp., 2 pls. Lille, 1894. Hyman, Lrppre H. Studies on the morphology, taxonomy, and distribution of North American triclad Turbellaria. TTT. On Polycelis coronata (Girard). Trans. Amer. Mier. Soe. 60: 124- 135. 19381. 198 —— IV. Recent European revisions of the triclads, and their application to American forms, with a key to the latter and new notes on distribution. 50: 316-335. 1931. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soe. . North American triclad Turbellaria. X TIT. Synopsis of the known species of fresh-water planarians of North America. Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc. 70: 154-167. 1951. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 6 Kenx, Roman. The fresh-water triclads (Tur- bellaria) of Alaska. Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. (In press.) Warp, Henry B. A biological reconnaissance of some elevated lakes in the Sierras and Rockies. Stud. Zool. Lab. Univ. Nebraska 60: 127-154, pls. 19-31. 1904. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 54TH ANNUAL MEETING The 54th Annual Meeting, concurrently with the 384th monthly meeting of the Academy, was held as a dinner meeting in the ballroom of Hotel 2400 on the evening of January 17, 1952. Vice- President J. J. Fanny presided. After the dinner Dr. Fahey called the meeting to order. The minutes of the 53d Annual Meeting were approved as published in the JourRNAL 41: No. 7, 238-244. July 1951. The Secretary read a letter. to the Board of Managers dated January 12 from President Smith, who has retired and is now living in Florida. He expressed his appreciation for the cooperation received from the members of the Academy during his term of office, and proffered his best wishes for a successful year. The following reports by officers, auditors, and tellers were presented and approved: REPORT OF THE SECRETARY During the Academy year—January 19, 1951, to January 17, 1952—62 persons were elected to regular membership, including 56 to resident and 6 to nonresident (125 were elected last year). Of these, 27 resident and 5 nonresident qualified for membership. Twenty-two resident and 5 non- resident members elected in the preceding Academy year qualified during the year just ended. Six elected to resident membership on January 14, 1952, have not yet been notified of their election. The new members were distributed among the various sciences as follows: 13 in physics, 12 in chemistry, 6 in bacteriology, 5 in pathology, 4 each in mathematics and physiol- ogy, 3 in parasitology, 2 each in botany and zoology, and 1 each in animal husbandry, en- tomology, hydrography, mammalogy, metrology, nucleonics, pomology, and soil science. Two resi- dent members, having retired from the gainful practice of their professions, were placed on the retired list entitled to privileges of active mem- bership without further payment of dues. Eleven resident and four nonresident members resigned in good standing. Two resident. members were dropped for nonpayment of dues. The deaths of the following 11 members have been reported to the Secretary: Maurice I. Smrru, Bethesda, Md., on January 26, 1951. OwerEN B. FreNcuH, Lakewood, Ohio, on February 12, 1951. CuariBEL R. Barnerr, Washington, D. C., on March 6, 1951. Henry Soion Graves, Brattleboro, Vt., on Mareh 7, 1951. BartLtey E. Brown, Washington, D. C., on March 9, 1951. WixturaM F. ALLEN, Portland, Oreg., on March 11, 1951. Merritt Bernarp, Washington, D. C., on April 13, 1951. Haru K. Fiscupr, Washington, D. C., on August 3, 1951. Danret L. Hazarp, Narragansett, R. I., on Sep- tember 21, 1951. Oscar B. Hunter, Washington, D.C., on Decem- ber 19, 1951. Rurus H. Sarcent, Washington, D C., on De- cember 28, 1951. On January 17, 1952, the status of membership was as follows: : Regular Retired Honorary Patron Tota Resident............ 589 56 0 0 645 Nonresident......... 190 33 10 0 233 Ao tales seers 779 89 10 0 878 The net changes in membership during the past year are as follows: Regular Retired Honorary Patron Total Resident......... +16 —1 0 0 +15 Nonresident. ........ +17 —1 0 0 +16 Motels cipssacsieecee +33 —2 0 0 +31 During the Academy year 1951 the Board of Managers held 9 meetings with an average at- tendance of 18. The following summarizes items of interest in connection with Board Meetings: JUNE 1952 The Managers felt that the membership would approve, as a matter of economizing, the dis- continuance of sending engraved certificates of membership to newly elected members. The supply of certificates was exhausted in April, and the issuance of certificates of membership has been discontinued. The Academy has continued to sponsor support of the Annual Science Fair and of the weekly issue of the Science Calendar in local newspapers. The Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Re- search, Dr. L. E. Yocum, Chairman, recom- mended grants from the funds allocated only for use for this purpose by the American Associa- tion for the Advancement of Science. Such funds accrue on the basis of the number of Academy members who also have membership in the AAAS. The Managers approved the recommendation of grants totaling $430 to (1) Dr. Francis E. Fox and Dr. Karl H. Lancensrrass for the purchase of materials to be used in supersonic studies; (2) Dr. Martin Rusin and Dr. M. X. Suuuivan for the purchase of materials in con- nection with metabolism studies; and (3) C. H. WaLrTHER for the purchase of materials in con- nection with photoelastic studies. The suggestion that the age limit be raised above 40 years for nominees for the Academy’s Awards for Scientific Achievement was again considered. The Managers agreed that the basis of the Award should remain one of recognition and encouragement of younger scientists, and that the age limit should not be raised. A special Committee on Indexing the JouRNAL, former president J. E. Grar, Chairman, ap- pointed to make recommendations as to the dis- position to be made of the recently completed index to the JourNAL of the Washington Academy, presented its preliminary report at the 447th meeting of the Board. After consider- able discussion at this and several other meetings of the Board, the Managers decided to publish a combined single index of the JourNAL and the earlier PROCEEDINGS. During the Academy year, 9 meetings of the Academy were held, as follows: On February 15, 1951, Francis B. SrusBeEr, chief, Electricity Division, National Bureau of Standards, delivered his retiring presidential address on Measure for measure: Some problems and paradoxes of precision (published in this JOURNAL 41: 213-226, 1951). On March 15, 1951, the 1950 Academy Awards were presented to Samurn Luvy, National PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 199 Bureau of Standards, for his work in the engi- neering sciences; Puitre H. ApeLson, Depart- ment of Terrestrial Magnetism, Carnegie Insti- tution of Washington, for work in the physical sciences, and to Davin H. Dunxktusg, U. 8S. Na- tional Museum, for work in the biological sci- ences. In their responses the recipients gave in- teresting summaries of the work on which the awards were based. The Academy also awarded Certificates of Merit to three outstanding high school students: Paut E. Connon, Crciia GREEN, and Donatp L. Mier. On April 19, 1951, Vicror H. Haas, director of the National Microbiological Institute, Na- tional Institutes of Health, gave an illustrated lecture on Disaster and disease (published in this JOURNAL 41: 277-284, 1951). On May 17, 1951, D. J. Parsons, chief of the Scientific Laboratories of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, gave an illustrated lecture on Science in crime detection. On October 18, 1951, Frank H. H. Roserrs, Jr., associate director, Bureau of American Ethnology, and director of the River Basin Surveys, gave an illustrated lecture on Archeology and the Federal River Basin program. On November 15, 1951, Drrtev W. Bronk, president of Johns Hopkins University and presi- dent of the National Academy of Sciences, gave a lecture on The impact of the emergency on funda- mental scrences. On December 20, 1951, Wiutram E. Hrarr, chief, Hydrologic Services Division, U. 8. Weather Bureau, gave a lecture on Precipitation and our water supply. The Annual Dinner meeting was held at 2400 Sixteenth Street on January 17, 1952. THomaAs R. Henry, a member of the Fourth Byrd Ant- arctic Expedition in 1946-1947, delivered a lecture on The White Continent and presented the movie entitled The Secret Land. F, M. Drranporer. REPORT OF THE TREASURER The Treasurer submits the following report concerning the finances of the Washington Academy of Sciences for the year ending De- cember 31, 1951: RECEIPTS Dressel G4 8s sae ee ree $ 6.00 NOS Oe eS Ser aces 24.00 1950 Sessa 136.00 QB axcitseeis eto 1,016.84 1952 62.00 S4, 244.84 200 Journal Subscriptions, 1950..... 42.75 O51 656 . 23 1052 Rae 805.51 1953 eae 15.39 Reprints, 1950..... 432.52 1951 701.47 ales s LOS Mi ae ve ee ieee a Interest lO a1 sore erro arene Dividends, 1950.......... 160.00 NOs soa ees: 2,104.67 Winectony os Ocede tees ees IMO ARVN MOG Ni soeockacwosscobuwsc Transferred from savings account . Transferred from invested funds. ... Annual dinner-(95i1)) 2.95 = see: Contributions for Science Calendar. . Receipts from Kon-Tiki showing... . Grants from Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sci.. OMAN GNM so ono gkoeeeeoao am oak Refund of air-mail postage.......... Motalerecerpbsse)9 olseane eee Cash book balance as of Jan. 1, 1951... Total to be accounted for....... DISBURSEMENTS 1950 1951 Secretary’s Ofticenaee ee $152.87 $321.15 Treasurer’s Oficeree eee 87.74 Subscription Manager & Custodian of Publications . 0.59 44.35 Archivist...... 30.00 Meetings Committee... 207.45 Journal Printing & mailing.... 592.90 5,369.61 Illustrations. 9.76 600.30 Reprints..... 148.84 696 .23 Office ‘Editorial NSS taser 25.00 275.00 Miscellan- eous..... 3.36 27.87 Monograph MOG Lure ee 0.89 30.14 Forty-year indexer ee 700.00 Annual dinner, LO ieee 393.72 Kon-Tiki showing Expenses. ... 408.78 Balance to Science Wairiise sane 776.22 1,519 1,133 179 268 $13 , 730 1,422 $15, 153 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 88 99 .89 00 65 53 18 Total $474 87 44. 30. 207 . 42 5,962. 610. 845. 300.0 776. 02 AA VOL. 42, No. 6 Contribution to Science IMPS ys es wae 100.00 100.00 Contribution to Science Calendar. ... 55.00 55.00 Refunds Subscrip- TONS eae 15.19 15.19 Overpay- ments..... 2.00 2.00 Collection Changes aan ear 0.15 0.15 MRotal stars $934.21 $10,140.90 $11,075.11 Cash book balance as of Deccotsl95U oeissten ees 4,078.07 Total ac- counted POM ian k oe ee ee $15,153.18 RECONCILIATION OF BANK BALANCE Cash book balance, Dec. 31, 1951..... $4,078.07 Balance as per Am. Sec. & ' Trust Co. statement OF DEC. M7, IO. coco occ $2,481.50 Receipts undeposited..... 1,715.32 $4,196.82 Checks outstanding as of Dec. 31, 1951 No. 1018 $ 5.41 1263 5.00 1509 27.79 1511 11.57 1512 64.98 1513 4.00 118.75 Total accounted for... $4,078.07 INVESTMENTS Potomac Electric Power Co. Certificate No. TAO 1977—40 shares 3.6% pref. at $41......... $1, 640.00 City of New York 3% (Transit Unifica- tion) Due June 1, 1980 Certificate No. IDE20NSGrer oe ee $ 500.00 Ca MO3Seae eee 100.00 (Cai03 9 cece 100.00 Ci WAOLOR eer kee 100.00 At $108.50 per $100. . $ 800.00 868.00 Northwestern Federal Sav- ings & Loan Association Certificate No. TOSOR se aa $4,500.00 AA 2 an er 500.00 $ 5,000.00 JUNE 1952 United States Government Series G Bonds—No. M 332990G...... 1,000.00 M 332991G....... 1,000.00 M 332992G....... 1,000.00 M 332993G....... 1,000.00 M 1808741G...... 1,000.00 M 2226088G...... 1,000.00 M 2982748G...... 1,000.00 M 4126041G...... 1,000.00 M 5141346G...... 1,000.00 M 5141347G...... 1,000.00 $10,000.00 Massachusetts Investors Trust ASD) SITES CMRA Un ao nine dae 15,573.60 Investment Company of America A00tshares at pli 95). 22250. 4,780.00 State Street Investment Corporation 100%shares at $62:00..........5..°. 6, 200.00 American Security and Trust Co. SMM SPAGCOUMG = --- 4-9 e 49. eos 161.52 ROME es ees eee ers $44 223.12 Cash book balance, Dec. 31, NO lees ire er at ee 4,078.07 PRO Vallee eee eda cecan wie $48 301.19 Total as of Dec. 31, 1951. $48,301.19 Total as of Dec. 31, 1950. 45,601.05 INOREASS , cdeses someeene $ 2,700.14 At the close of business January 5, 1952, there were 58 members of the Academy in arrears, 28 for 1 vear, 14 for 2 years, 4 for 3 vears, 3 for 4 years, 7 for 5 years, and 2 for 6 years. Howarp 8. RapPLleye. REPORT OF AUDITING COMMITTEE Your auditing committee examined the Treas- urer’s report and checked it with the account books, vouchers, canceled checks, bank state- ments, and the contents of the safe deposit box. We found the accounts correct as reported by the Treasurer, and all records very complete and in remarkably good order. N. F. BRAATEN W. J. YoupEN J. H. Martin, Chairman. REPORT OF THE ARCHIVIST The records of the Academy in possession of the Archivist have been available for consulta- tion during the year. Ten volumes of the JouRNAL were bound to bring the Archivist’s set up-to- date. No additional records were deposited during the year. Joun A. STEVENSON. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 201 REPORT OF THE BOARD OF EDITORS Volume 41 of the JourNAL, brought out during 1951, includes 404 numbered pages, together with a portrait, an unnumbered page stating the dates of publication, and the title page. In addi- tion to a 4-page index, and to Proceedings of the Academy and of the Anthropological Society aggregating 12 pages, it contains 86 papers dis- tributed among several fields of science as fol- lows: Mathematics, 4; physics, 2; astronomy, 1; geology, petrology, and paleontology, 12; botany, 7; zoology and its branches, 50; archeology and ethnology, 9; medicine, 1. Because of limited funds it was necessary to delay publication of many meritorious papers until 1942. The disbursements for the JourNAaL during 1951 were: Printing, engraving, wrapping, mailing, etc...... $6, 563.38 Reprintseeerer eee Poot AAR BOE aN oO ETBIAoE 860.68 Office—editorial assistant...................... ee 300.00 Office=postageporcen eee eee 29.40 Mo talesasey ers eee eee RE $7,753.46 Chargesitojauthorsmeceescc eee ener 1,251.97 Net cost of Volume 41 to the Academy........ $6,501.49 Help given by the officers of the Academy and by the Board of Managers is gratefully acknowl- edged. Thanks are due especially to Mr. Paun H. Oruser for his competent handling of techni- cal matters concerned in printing the Journal. CHARLES DRECHSLER WitiraAM F. FosHaG J. P. E. Morrison REPORT OF CUSTODIAN AND SUBSCRIPTION MANAGER OF PUBLICATIONS Subscriptions Nonmember subscriptions in the continental WinibedeS taesi tea nyc eye catenets Gee 141 Nonmember subscriptions in U. 8. posses- sions and foreign lands. .............. OS LDXoy il] Lae Asa ian ee aaa ayer ne SU an 209 This is a decrease of 18 subscriptions from last year’s total. Most of this loss is in the foreign list, where, because of exchange ditheulties and other disturbed conditions, several subscriptions have had to be canceled. The above total still contains some names that will have to be erossed off. 202 Inventory of stock as of December 31, 1951 Reserve sets of the Journal Complete sets, vols, 1-41.............. 2 sets Wo lume stale Capa eegee ree a eee ... 6 sets 1G = Ailey. ihe ee eine el oe tee aa 9 sets DATS Wen ny aes ona car 7 sets Total sets more or less complete........ 24 sets Back numbers of the Journal Numbers held in complete sets (2).... 1,350 Numbers held in reserve for complete BO tS eerie cee it eri ana eager an oa 8,539 Numbers held for sale separately*. . not counted Proceedings Complete sets, volumes 1-13 (1899- DIAS HY Ts enters Aen nee Aare ec) near ne cn Fea ay 48 sets (The copies of the separate articles that appeared in the Proceedings have never been counted.) Monograph No. 1 Oniginalbissues ana. eee 1,010 Copies sold or otherwise distributed... 173 Copieston handta.-. tes 837 * Tt has still not been possible to make a com- plete recount of these numbers. An improvement in the storage facilities to be made this coming year will permit counting and a rearrangement of the numbers on hand. Sales During the year 1941 the sales of the JouRNAL were considerably larger than those for 1950. Two complete sets were sold, one to the Uni- versity at Glasgow, Scotland, and the other to the Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique in Brussels. Of the numbers of the JOURNAL 258 were sold, either separately or as volumes. Fourteen numbers of the PRocrEDINGS were sold during the past year, and one copy of the 1947-48 Directory. The sales of the Monograph again fell off to some extent. Thirty-two copies were sold—5 to the author (at a 20 per cent discount), 22 to dealers (at a 10 per cent discount), and 5 directly. An advertising campaign to publicize the book was instituted last September. Five hundred double postal cards, advertising the book, were sent to libraries all over the United States and its possessions. It is rather astonishing that not one of the 500 reply postal cards was returned, even though it meant only tearing off the reply half, checking and signing it, and mailing it at no extra expense. This campaign did, however, bring about some sales, for in due time numerous orders were received destined for some of the institutions circularized. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 Some thought should be given, however, to ways and means of increasing the sales of the Monograph, even if it means reducing the price. In its first year 67 copies were sold; 47 were sold in the following year, and last year 32 were sold. At this rate it will be 15 years or more before half of the edition is sold. Once again the Academy is indebted to the members who donated back numbers of the JouRNAL to this office. We are especially grateful to Dr. Epear D. Tittyer and to Miss Mary D. Quint, librarian of the American Optical Co. of Southbridge, Mass., for sending us a set of the JOURNAL complete except for the earliest volumes and for some numbers missing here and there. The income from sales of copies of the Journal, Proceedings, and Directories was $179.89, and sales of the Monograph yielded $76.50, a total income from sales of $256.39. Expenditures Suppliesia ins aac eee $13.78 Purchase of back numbers.............. .50 Postage expended in connection with JOURNAL UG. ne viccan. oe eee 11.47 Postage expended in connection with Monographie se ae eee 4.01 Sales campaign for Monograph.......... 26.13 Nelephones sia et ee 1.22 Freight charges for shipping complete sets toiNews Yorks. wink Ones eee 9.63 Totals nec sie svn esol ee $66.74 Storage Some progress was made in the rearrangement of the storage facilities that. we have in the Smithsonian Institution Building. It is hoped that the addition of necessary lighting and an improvement in the shelving arrangement can be made this year, in which case it is expected that this project can be finished and a complete count be made of the stock. Harautp A. REHDER. REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE ON MEMBERSHIP It is the function of this Committee (1) to receive, examine, and evaluate nominations sub- mitted from various sources, (2) to recommend to the Board the names and qualifications of nominees it considers acceptable for membership, (3) to find eligible scientists who are not members of the Academy and to prepare nominations for them, and (4) to encourage and aid members of the Academy to submit nominations. JUNE 1952 Members of the Committee have been very active in searching for potential members, espe- cially in their own organizations. The committee has examined about 80 nominations during the year, and has recommended to the Board 75 for resident and 2 for nonresident membership. The recent raising of the maximum number of Academy members from 800 to 1,000 places on this committee the responsibility of reducing this gap. To aid its work there have been mimeo- graphed two supplemental lists of nominees and new members since the appearance of the last Red Book in 1948. We are surprised, on looking into the matter, to find many eminent scientists who have never been invited to become members of the Academy. Plans are being made to extend the Committee and to reach into hitherto un- touched fields. Especially, the Committee urges all Academy members to exercise their privilege of preparing and submitting nominations. A high standard will be maintained in evaluating all nominations before submitting them. to the Board. Ea@pert H. Watker, Chairman. REPORT OF COMMITTEE ON AWARDS FOR SCIENTIFIC ACHIEVEMENT At the meeting of the Board of Managers on January 14, 1952, the recommendations of the Committee and its Subcommittees on Awards for Scientific Achievement for the year 1951 were approved. The awards to be presented this year, therefore, are (1) In the Physical Sciences, to Mrnron SEYMOUR SCHECHTER, of the Bureau of Ento- mology and Plant Quarantine, in recognition of his distinguished research in insecticide chem- istry. (2) In the Engineering Sciences, to Max A. KKouuer, of the U.S. Weather Bureau in recog- nition of his distinguished investigations of rain- fall, run-off, and flood predictions. (3) In the Biological Sciences, to Epwarp Witiiam Baker, of the Bureau of Entomology and Plant Quarantine, in recognition of his dis- tinguished research on the Acarina, or mites. In lieu of a regular award with the 40-year age limitation, a special award, the first to be pre- sented for the Teaching of Science, will be granted this year. Howarp B. Owens, of Prince Georges County, Md., has been selected for this special award in recognition of his outstanding teaching and for his work in arousing the enthusiasm of students in science. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 203 The chairman wishes to express appreciation for the good work of the subcommittees and their respective chairmen, G. H. Coons, R. S. Dit, and B. D. Van Evera. Grorce P. Wauron, General Chairman. REPORT OF TH COMMITTEE ON ENCOURAGEMENT OF SCIENCE TALENT The Committee arranged the participation of the Academy in the Tenth National Science Talent Search of the Westinghouse Educational Foundation, as sponsor of the Third Annual Science Talent Search in the District of Colum- bia. Continuation of this work was assured by agreements for conducting the Fourth Search this year. Last year’s search resulted in the recom- mendation by the Committee of three local par- ticipants in the national search to the Academy’s Board of Managers for the award of a Certificate of Merit from the Academy. The awards were presented by the Academy at its Annual Honors Meeting on March 15, 1951. The Academy, through the medium of this Committee, again sponsored the Annual Science Fair for local high and junior high school stu- dents, tn cooperation with the science depart- ments of the Public Schools of the District of Columbia. The Fifth Science Fair was held April 14-19, 1951, in the lobby of the Depart- ment of Commerce Building, with 423 exhibits selected for display from about 1500 prepared in the schools. Two boy and two girl exhibitors were selected to compete in the National Science Fair held at St. Louis among 44 winners of the local fair. An unusual opportunity was seized by the Committee to arrange for the Academy to spon- sor a gala premier showing of the motion picture Kon-Tiki at the Dupont Theater for the benefit of the Science Fair. A sum of $776.22 was real- ized, which will be employed to support the Na- tional Science Fair to be held in Washington this spring. The Committee arranged for the Academy to solicit funds from its affiliated societies in sup- port of the Science Fair. A total of $4388 was received, including $100 from the Academy. The membership of the Committee during the year was: W. L. Scumirr, J. M. Caupwett, F. L. Monurr, A. H. Crarn, A. T. \icPHerson, and M. A. Mason, Chairman. The Chairman takes this opportunity to commend the excellent 204 support of these members, and particularly to express his appreciation to A. T. McPuHrERson, who has been outstanding in his leadership and enthusiasm in the work of the committee. Martin A. Mason, Chairman. Vice-President Fanny on behalf of the Acad- emy expressed appreciation (1) for the work of the Meetings Committee, Dr. Marcarprr Pirr- MAN, Chairman; (2) for the work of the Com- mittee on Grants-In-Aid for Research, Dr. L. E. Yocum, Chairman; (38) for the work of the Committee on Indexing the Journal, former presi- dent J. E. Grar, Chairman; and (4) to the Com- mittee on Monographs, J. R. Swauuen, Chair- man. After acceptance by members of the report of the Chairman of the Committee of Tellers, Vice- President Fahey declared the following elected: FRANK M. Serzumr, President-Elect Francis M. Deranporr, Secretary Howarp 8S. Rappieye, Treasurer C. F. W. Mursesecx, Board of Managers to January 1953 Miutron Harris, Board of Managers to January 1954 Rocer G. Bares and W. W. Dieu, Board of Managers to January 19565. The followmg members of the Academy, nom- inated by the Affiliated Societies, were duly elected Vice-Presidents of the Academy: Philosophical Society of Washington—ALvin G. McNisuH Anthropological Society of Washington—W apo WEDEL Biological Society of Washington—Hucu T. O’ NEILL Chemical Society of Washington—Joun K. TAYLOR Entomological Society of Washington—Frep- ERICK W. Poos National Geographic Society—ALEXANDER WETMORE Geological Society of Washington—A. NELSon SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia— FRED O. Cor : Columbia Historical Society—GriLBert Gros- VENOR Botanical Society HutcHINs Washington Section of the Society of American Foresters—Wmn. A. Dayton Washington Society of Engineers—Cuirrorp A. Betts Washington Section of the American Institute of Electrical Engineers—A. H. Scorr of Washington—LeE M. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 Washington Section of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers—R. 8S. Dinu Helminthological Society of Washington—lL. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch of the Society of American Bacteriologists—A. M. GriFrFin Washington Post of the Society of American Military Engineers—Fioyp W. Houcu Washington Section of the Institute of Radio Engineers—HerBert G. DorsEy District of Columbia Section of the American Society of Civil Engineers—Martin A. Mason Vice-President Fahey introduced the speaker, Tuomas R. Henry, a member of the Wash- ington Academy of Sciences and well known for his popular writings on scientific topics. Mr. Henry gave a graphic account of his impressions in visiting the White Continent, and then showed a movie entitled The Secret Land. This spectacular film was prepared by Metro-Gold- wyn-Mayer Pictures from the moving pictures made by the U.S. Navy. Mr. Henry described the carefully planned Naval exploratory ex- pedition of over 2,000 persons and spoke of the interesting discoveries in Antarctica made pos- sible by the full use of modern equipment. Aerial photographs of more than one million square miles of Antarctica were made using aircraft. Numerous additional photographic records and scientific studies were obtained by exploration parties that made use of dog teams and a variety of automotive propelled surface vehicles. Vice-President Fahey introduced the new President, Waurer R. Rampere, who had served as President-Elect during 1951. After appropriate remarks the new President ad- journed the meeting at 10:35 p.m. F. M. Dreranporr, Secretary. 454TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 454th meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club on March 17, 1952, was called to order at 8:02 p.m. by President Ram- BERG. Others attending were: H. 8. RAPPLEeys, J. A. Stevenson, W. F. Fosuaac, R. G. Barss, A. G. McNisu, H. T. O’Neiti, W. A. Dayton, A. H. Scorr, H. G. Dorsny, M. A. Mason, F. M. Deranporr, and, by invitation, E. H. WaAt- KER, J. R. Swauuen, L. E. Yocum, and W. T. Reap. President RaMBERG announced the appoint- ment of CLARENCE CoTraM, REECE I. SarLer, Leo A. SHINN, and Frank Kracex to the Com- mittee on Membership. JUNE 1952 The resignation of STEPHEN BRUNAUER was approved as of December 31, 1951. The Treas- urer mentioned that the grant of research funds ($170) from the American Association for the Advancement of Science made to Karu H. LANGENSTRASS and Francis E. Fox had not been used. This amount will be available for a new grant. The recommendation in the report of the Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent that the Academy should proceed with the or- ganization of a Junior Academy of Science was discussed. The Board approved a motion that the President appoint a special committee for the Consideration of the Establishing of a Junior Academy of Sciences in Washington. It was un- derstood that this committee will develop and present its detailed recommendations to the Board. The meeting adjourned at 9:20 P.M. 455TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 455th meeting of the Board of Managers held in the Cosmos Club on April-7, 1952, was called to order at 8:03 p.m. by President Ram- BERG. Others attending were: F. M. Serzurr, H. S. Rappieyn, J. A. STEVENSON, SARA E. BRran- HAM, R. G. Bares, W. W. Drext, A. G. McNtsu, J. K. Taytor, F. W. Poos, A. N. Sayre, L. M. Hurcuins, W. A. Dayton, C. A. Brerts, A. H. Scorr, A. M. Grirrin, F. W. Houan, M. A. Mason, F. M. Drranporr, and, by invitation, H. W. Wetts and A. T. McPHmrson. President Ramberg announced that he had made the following appointments to the Special Committee suggested at the last meeting of the Board to be known as the Junior Academy of Sciences Committee: Martin A. Mason, Chair- man, A. T. McPuerson, E. H. Wauxker. He also announced the appointment of Joan FaBer and Epwarp G. Rrrnuarp to the Membership Committee. The Secretary read the following minutes: An Executive Committee Meeting was held at 8:30 p.m., April 7, 1952, with Messrs. RAMBERG, Sprzipr, Dayron, and DrEranporF in attendance. There was a discussion about the part that the Washington Academy might play in sponsoring the formation of a Junior Academy of Sciences, and President RAMBERG spoke of the interest of Messrs. Mason, McPuHrerson and WALKER, whom he had appointed to serve on a special committee for this purpose in this project. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 205 In connection with the coming National Science Fair, Science Service has requested the selection of a list of about 160 interested scientists belong- ing to the Affiliated Societies who will be invited to a special early showing of the exhibits at the Fair. This group of Washington scientists and engineers will be invited to a dinner to be given in honor of the winners in their respective local Science Fairs, and it is anticipated that about 80 will be willing to support the dinner as hosts to these students. As sponsor, the Washington Acad- emy of Sciences will be asked to contribute the dinners for the student exhibitors. The cost is ex- pected to be of the order of $250. The Executive Committee agreed that this worthwhile project should receive the support of the Academy. Plans for making a suitable list of members of Affiliated Societies available to Miss Parrmrson, of Science Service, were discussed. The matter of support for publishing the Index of the JourNnat for which the page proof has been received by the Secretary was considered. H. W. Wetts, Chairman of the Meetings Com- mittee, announced that this Committee, at its last meeting, discussed objectives and wondered (1) whether the meetings should tend more toward joint meetings with the Affiliated So- cieties in order to knit them more closely to the Academy; (2) whether there should be an at- tempt to increase interest in technical meetings; (3) whether there should be regular monthly meetings to stimulate student interest; and (4) whether a fall meeting of two or three days of papers to be arranged for Affliated Society par- ticipation, similar to the National Academy meetings, with each group responsible for three to six papers, should be considered. In the ensuing discussion Dr. BraNnHam pointed out that the latter program might be effective in bringing the Affiliated Societies to- gether in a closer knit organization. Mr. SerzLer pointed out difficulties entailed in completing arrangements unless meetings are held on a reg- ular meeting date basis, and both he and Dr. Mason emphasized the work entailed in arrang- ing symposia. Dr. Mason also spoke of the nu- merous technical meetings now provided for by the various Affiliated Societies which, if partici- pated in, are adequate to exhaust the mental, physical, and financial abilities of local scientists and engineers. He suggested that one or two meetings covering the broader fields of science might help fulfill the functions of the Academy as a coordinating society and would serve to orient those members who have no idea of what the Academy is supposed to do. Mr. Srerzier 206 pointed out that according to the bylaws two meetings are stipulated: The Annual Meeting and the Presidential Address meeting. President Ramppre mentioned that a third meeting, the Awards Meeting, should certainly be assured as an annual affair. It is up to the Meetings Com- mittee to make arrangements for any additional meetings. To insure a regular meeting place and time, the Cosmos Club Auditorium is reserved for the third Thursday evening in each month. Irregular or special meetings require that special arrangements be made well in advance of the proposed meetings. In conclusion President RaMBERG requested that the Vice Presidents bring the matter before the Affiliated Societies and report any suggestions of ways in which the Academy might be helpful. For the Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent, Dr. A. T. McPuHerson, Chair- man, reported his group had been cooperating with the teachers on the Local Science Fair. The Washington Daily News will share in the responsibility for this Fair, for which most of the expenses have been assured by the Academy- sponsored showing of the film Kon-Tiki. He emphasized that teachers in the local schools want scientists who will come to answer the questions of their students about science as a career, and others who will help inspirationally by preparing and giving classroom talks. He re- ported that only one completed blank, out of those made available at the last Board meeting, had been received, namely, one filled in by Dr. A. G. McNisu. On the other hand, the Engi- neers have 60 engineers listed on similar blanks distributed through member organizations of the D. C. Council of Engineering and Architectural Societies. He deplored the unbalanced represen- tation that will exist unless able physicists, chem- ists, biologists and other scientists come forward and offer to provide the needed help. Dr. Mc- Puerson stated that personal contact of scien- tists with students is highly desirable, and men- tioned that he had blanks with him for those who might be willing to fill them in. Dr. McPuHerson explained that the aim of the Management of the National Science Fair in requesting a list of 160 scientists to participate in the Special Scientists Night was to locate those interested in, and who would be at ease with these young people—boy and girl winners of local science fairs from all over the country. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 This event entails the privilege of playing host to future scientists, and should in no way be considered a chore. In order to complete the desired list by Friday, April 11, President RamMBrERG suggested an ap- portionment of numbers among the Affiliated Societies. Vice Presidents of the Academy and Directors of local scientifie agencies will be in- cluded in this listing. On motion duly seconded the Board approved a special appropriation of a fund not to exceed $250 for providing dinners for student fair par- ticipants at the National Science Fair Dinner. The Secretary reported 337 ballots were re- ceived for election of the District of Columbia Section of the Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine to become an Affiliated Society of the Washington Academy of Sciences, confirming the earlier approval by the Board and completing the requirements for Affiliation of the District of Columbia Section of the Society of Experimental Biology and Medicine with the Washington Academy of Sciences. The following letter from President RAMBERG to the Secretary, dated April 2, was read: I am pleased to transmit to you herewith three books of records as follows: 1. Minutes of Proceedings of the Joint Com- mission of Scientific Societies of Washington from its organization February 25, 1888, to 1897, preceded by the Minutes of the organ- izing committee. 1892. 2. Minutes of Proceedings of the Joint Com- mission of Scientific Societies of Washington from 1897 to Vol. 2, 1897. 3. Directory of Scientific Societies of Washing- ton. 1889 to 1898. These records were found in cleaning out a storeroom in the Metallurgy Division of this Bureau. The Chief of the Metallurgy Division Mr. J. G. Tuompson, immediately recognized their value and turned them over to me for dis- position by the Academy. The records give a complete history of the Joint Commission which preceded the establish- ment of the Washington Academy of Sciences. They should therefore occupy a place of honor in the archives of the Academy. I suggest that you announce their recovery at the next meeting of the Board of Managers and that proper recognition be given Mr. THompson and his associates for finding them and returning them to the Academy. These interesting bound records of the incep- tion of the Washington Academy were turned over to the Archivist, J. A. Srevenson, for preservation in the Archives of the Academy. JUNE 1952 PROCEEDINGS: Treasurer RAPPLEYE read a letter of apprecia- tion from F. E. Fox returning the unused AAAS grant of $170 for purchasing equipment that he THE ACADEMY 207 fortunately was able to borrow for the comple- tion of his project. The meeting was adjourned at 9:35 P.M. F. M. Drranporr, Secretary. @bituaries THoMAS WaYLAND VAUGHAN, geologist, pale- ontologist, and oceanographer, died January 16, 1952, at the age of 81. He was born in Jonesville, Tex., on September 20, 1870. His undergraduate training was obtained at Tulane University, where he chose to major in physical science. At Tulane he took his first course in geology along with generous portions of physics, mathematics, and chemistry, and received a B.S. degree in 1889 at the age of 18 years. From 1889 to 1892 he was instructor in chemistry and physics at Mount Lebanon College in Louisiana, then went to Harvard, where he received an A.B. degree in one year, a master’s degree in another, and his doctorate in 1903. Meanwhile, in 1894, he had joined the U. 8. Geological Survey as assistant geologist. He continued in the Survey’s employ for many years, becoming geologist-in-charge of Coastal Plains investigations in 1907, at the age of 37 years. In 1903 he was appointed custodian of the madreporarian corals in the U. 8. Na- tional Museum. In 1924 he gave up governmental work in Washington and went to La Jolla, Calif., as professor of oceanography at the University of California and director of its Seripps Institu- tion of Oceanography. In this position he was very active for a dozen years and largely through his efforts Scripps evolved from a seaside bio- logical laboratory to the leading oceanographic institution of the world. During all these years he was generous in giving assistance to others, and he had the foresight to train successors in the many fields that claimed his attention. - Wayland Vaughan had every reason to be proud of his accomplishments and of the recog- nition that followed. No attempt will be made to enumerate the societies to which he was elected, both in this country and abroad, the high offices that he held in many of them, or to list the medals conferred upon him. Among others, one foreign government awarded a deco- ration, and three universities, two in this country and one in Canada, conferred honorary doctor’s degrees. One of his last honors came less than a year ago when, with impressive ceremonies, the Seripps Institution named its newest and finest building for him. Additional honors awaited him had he lived, as several volumes on geology and ecology now nearing publication have been dedi- cated to him. Dr. Vaughan commanded the respect. and ad- miration due a talented and prodigious worker who was able to pursue his career actively for a period of 60 years and to write several hundred scientific papers. This, however, is only a part of the story. He was truly unique in his ability to shift his interest and enter related or entirely new fields of investigation. Starting with investiga- tions of the geology of the Atlantic and Gulf Coastal Plains, he expanded his studies into east- ern Mexico, the West Indies, and Panama. He became the leading authority on the Mesozoic, Cenozoic, and Recent corals of these areas in- cluding their ecology, paleoecology, and _ reef- building characteristics. At a comparatively late date—about 1923, when he was 54 years old— he undertook the study of an even more difficult group, the larger Foraminifera, and wrote mono- graphic papers on these organisms. At about this same time he moved to the west coast and turned to oceanography. To this field he brought a knowledge of marine organisms and marine sediments; but it also called for a broad knowl- edge of physical oceanography, and he had to review and supplement his early studies, par- ticularly in the field of mathematics. Durimg a trip around the world in 1932-33, to survey oceanographic facilities for the National Academy of Sciences, he became interested in oriental art, a study that took up much of his spare time in the years that followed. He pursued it so assidu- ously that in California he was in even greater demand as a lecturer on oriental art than in his main fields of geology and oceanography. In 1934, at the age of 64 years, while recovering from a severe illness, he undertook the study of the Japanese language and actually attained consi- derable proficiency in this field. When he reached 65 he was automatically retired as Director of Seripps, but he could have remained at the 208 Institution as Professor of Oceanography. He chose, instead, to return to Washington to re- sume his paleontological studies at the U. 58. National Museum. In 1947, he became partly blind after a severe attack of pneumonia. This ended his scientific work, but until his last illness he maintained his interest in the scientific work of others and in the workers themselves. He was indeed an outstanding scientist, and this brief summary does not do justice to his tremendous productivity. H. S. Lapp. The passing of Dr. Waurer T. SWINGLE on January 19 last was a very heavy loss to the bo- tanical and agricultural sciences. There are, of course, hundreds of distinguished workers in these fields in the United States, but the writer can think of no one with precisely the rare com- bination of a brilliant and highly original mind with extensive and profound knowledge, that made Swingle preeminent tn these fields. To these eifts were added an unfailing kindliness and willingness to share with others his great store of learning and experience. Born in Canaan, Pa., in 1871, his boyhood was spent in Kansas where he entered the State Agricultural College at Manhattan, receiving the degrees of B.Sc. and M.Sc., in 1890 and 1896, respectively. His alma mater honored him with the degree of D.Se. in 1922. He was called to the U. 8. Department of Agriculture at the early age of 20 and remained an active member of the Department until his retirement in 1941. In 1895-96 and again in 1898 he was in Germany, studying at the Uni- versities of Bonn and Leipzig. The opportunity of working in the laboratory of so eminent a botanist as Professor Strasburger, contributed greatly to his knowledge of cytology, one of the many fields in which he gained distinction. He was the first to prove the existence of centro- somes in plant cells. During his sojourn in Germany, as previously at Manhattan and afterward in the Department of Agriculture, Swingle was closely associated with David Fairchild, an association continued, with mutual benefit, to the end of Swingle’s life. Upon his return to Washington he became en- grossed in the development of the Bureau of Plant Industry, which owes much of its useful- ness to his efforts. Many projects that are still JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 6 pursued actively in the Bureau originated in the fertile brain of Swingle. Agricultural exploration soon engaged his attention and this work took him to French North Africa and other parts of the Mediter- ranean region, and later to China, Japan, the Philippines and Brazil. Two of the outstanding results of these explorations were the first suc- cessful introduction of the caprifig wasp, upon which the prosperity of the Smyrna-type fig industry in California largely depends, and the establishment of a very flourishing date industry in that state and Arizona. His papers on date- erowing in Algeria and on the caprifig are two of his most important publications. With the late Dr. H. H. Webber, he spent several years in Florida investigating the citrus industry and making hundreds of hybrids. Per- haps the finest of these is the tangelo, which re- sulted from a cross between the tangerine and the grapefruit. This work led him into exhaustive investigations of the taxonomy of the orange subfamily. Some two dozen papers were pub- lished on this subject, and several new genera were described. The establishment of the American-Egyptian cotton industry in Arizona, in which Dr. Swingle collaborated with other members of the Bureau of Plant Industry, was another of the projects to which his fertility of ideas contributed most effectively. In collaboration with Dr. Lyman Briggs, he perfected the ultraviolet microscope, making it a most useful tool in botanical research. Dr. Swingle was a fellow and life member of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, one of the founders of the Washington Academy of Sciences, and a member of the Wash- ington Academy of Medicine, Botanical Society of America, and the Philadelphia Academy of Sciences; also an honorary life member of the National Geographic Society and a correspond- ing member of the Académie d’Agriculture de France. In 1926 he represented the U. S. Govern- ment and the National Research Council at the third Pan Pacific Science Congress, in Tokyo. He married, in 1915, Maude Kellerman, her- self the daughter of a distinguished botanist and the sister of a former associate chief of the Bureau of Plant Industry. She, and their two sons and two daughters, survive him. T. H. Kearney. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences [ERARIUS Cis oka a AOE On ite Ue eee WALTER RaMBERG, National Bureau of Standards [PROSCUEIFAIA A ane 6 Onn Ode Dee a eee F. M. Serzurr, U.S. National Museum INE CEELOI MO Gry Re Sh eter Cy F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards IE RATSUTGRs Aen ORS Soe eee Howarp S. Rappieyre, U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey PAMELLOLSLRE FOr eR See cine Seine brthcned Joun A. Stevenson, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haratp A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: bilosophicalysociety,on Washingtonee-mc seems eae ese soe ea A. G. McNisH Anthropological Society of Washington........................ Wawpo R. WEDEL Biolozicalusocietysof washingtone seen a. eeee see eee eee. Hues T. O’ NEILL Chemicalisociebyzoh Washingtone acess estore oe een JouHn K. Taytor Entomological Society of Washington........................ FREDERICK W. Poos NatronalaGeographicisocietyn...-0ssesssese 4-4 enesecu. sae ALEXANDER WETMORE Geological Society, of Washington). |......:..................... A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia........................ Frep O. Coz ColumbiashustoricalliSociety:s scaccoeea es coe nee dee eos GILBERT GROSVENOR BoraunicalusocietysotwWashimgetonte: qe. asec eee eee Les M. Hutcuins Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wiuuram A. Dayton Washington Society’ OfsHMPINEELSH ace Gee ee io eat eens CLIFFORD a Berts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers...... A. H. Scorr Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. RICE aRD S. Dit Helminthological Society Of Washing tone. Wetcn ewe lay, Miia L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Anous M. GriFFin Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Fioyp W. Houcu Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers........... HERBERT G. Dorsry District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers : Martin A. Mason District of Columbia Section, Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine N. R. Exits Elected Members of the Board of Managers: Io dainieny Ibe oon eeeaneseeoeeuuoue ss C. F. W. Musrsesecr, A. T. McPHERSON Ia UnrMnne7 OG. ooo cade ac omen eo ae ee eee Sara EH. BranuaM, Mitton Harris MOM ATT AT APL O Serene ci rosy st i rac, alice s crendvacense nies ele ienece Rocsr G. Batss, W. W. DirHu BOGKGEOPVIGHAGETSHi enti ae eee All the above officers plus the Senior Editor BOA CIOMmUCULOnSKATLOPAISSOCLatEe LL AULOTS! Asan eie ee eee [See front cover] Executive Committee....W ALTER RAMBERG (chairman), F. M. Srerzupr, H.S.Rappueye, Wiuuiam A. Dayton, F. M. DeranporF Committee on Membership..E.H. WALKER (chairman), M. 8S. ANDERSON, CLARENCE Cor- Tam, R. C. Duncan, JoHN Faser, G. T. Faust, I. B. HANSEN, FRANK Kracex, D. B. Jonss, EH. G. REINHARD, REEcE I. SatuerR, Leo A. SHINN, F. A. Smitu, Hernz Specut, H.M. Trent, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings....H. W. Weuus (chairman), Wm. R. CAMPBELL, W. R. Cuap- LINE, D. J. Davis, H. G. Dorsey, O. W. TorrEsoNn Committee on Monographs (W. N. Fenton, chairman): te dieirneneye CGB ea 5 Gels no aan eee eee eee pe aes Coa IRs Vile DeLay P. W. Oman ROM ATIUM ATR PLO DA, ek eee ite ae Ph recat elke vaya ie 8. F. Buaks, F. C. Kracex Tha UME TOS ee chee nee ee ma AS ar en Ee arr W.N. FENTON, ALAN STONE Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (J. R. SwALLEN, general chairman): For Biological Sciences............. J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), L. M. Hurtcuins, Marearet Pirrman, F. W. Poos, L. P. Scuuttrz For Engineering Sciences............. R. C. Duncan (chairman), IX C. FIELDNER, Wayne C. Hatt, J. W. McBurney, O. 8. Ravina, H. L. Warrremore HOT BEY SUCCLISCUCTUCES Sn tee eee L. A, Woop (chairman), P. H. ABELSON, F. 8S. Darr, Grorce W. Irvine, Jr., J. H. McMILLeN For Teaching of Science......M. A. Mason (chairman), F. E. Fox, M. H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research.......L. E. Yocum (chairman), H. N. Eaton, Kk. F. HerzFreLp Committee on Policy and Planning: MO AMU ATVI OSe heen cic cee creo eran wee W. A. Dayron (chairman), N. R. Smrra OMAN UAT VO G4 int, vis sencacietiye tescoe ieee ciseauas eye Jal, 133. Com Jr., W. W. RuBEY OPA UTM OD pts a eee ee Ree A aye raf aiehe aca eee . W. Parr, F. B. SrusBpEE Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. aes chairman) : ROR AIM ATL OOS Nis icici Mears OG veces sm siaiels as IXe dale CLARK, F. L. Mower OM ATU AIS QO, oketayoree tis. e5 alede Ne asp ngstenalie enone J. M. Catpwe tt, W. L. Scumitr PROV ATIU AT yell ODD Ree cee tenec pis. crkctens memtsece s eheset each viele donetons AG. NEE W. T. Reap IROOM, Om Cover! Oj Alo Ale Ale Socoocusccccbscsgcsc5e8sssonuuGee . M. Serzuer Committee of Auditors...... C. L. Gazin (chairman), Lovuiss M. ea D. R. Tarts Committee of Tellers...GrorGE P. WALTON (chairman), Grorar H. Coons, C. L. GARNER CONTENTS Page BrIocHEMISTRY.—Reaction of normal and mutant plastids of Nzcotiana to neotetrazolium. M. W. Woops, JANE L. SHowacre, and H. G. POU B Ui ee 0s iis apres ao ais ERs a eo 169 GroLocy.—The base of the Cambrian in the southern Appalachians. IPA EP ABS TAIN Girt nee ee aera eee yet a De 170 PaLEonToLoGy.—A Cretaceous horseshoe crab from Colorado. J. B. REESIDE; JR., and: D> V. HIARRIS). 0. 93s. 6-2). he 174 Botany.—New mosses from southern Brazil. Epwin B. BartraM... 178 Zootocy.—New western Atlantic records of octocorals (Coelenterata: Anthozoa), with descriptions of three new species. FREDBRICK M. BIS BR ook falas aelee titel Ga ee, rr 183 ZooLtocy.—New Recent foraminiferal genera from the tropical Pacific. ALFRED) R... LOEBLICH, JR. 5 2 6 fciosoacce oak bees es oe ee 189 Zootocy.—Fresh-water triclads (Turbellaria) of the Rocky Mountain National Park region, Colorado. Roman KENK................ 193 ProcmrepiInes: THe ACADEMY .. 2.4 Voce oo. bon i 198 OsituaRies: Thomas Wayland Vaughan; Walter T. Swingle.......... 207 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. 5O6./ Dawa: VoL. 42 Juty 1952 No. 7 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY | OF SCIENCES BOARD OF EDITORS Witiiam F, Fosuac U.8. NATIONAL MUSEUM J. P. E. Morrison Joun C. EwEers U.S. NATIONAL MUSEUM U.8. NATIONAL’ MUSEUM ASSOCIATE EDITORS F. A. Cuace, JR. Mrriam L. Bomuarp BIOLOGY BOTANY J. I. HorrmMan R. K. Coox CHEMISTRY PHYSICS AND MATHEMATICS T. P. THayEer PuILIip DRUCKER GEOLOGY ANTHROPOLOGY C. W. SaBROSKY ENTOMOLOGY \ meth tt ater, SEP 1 4 1953 LIBRARY ANY HSON/g Wy PUBLISHED MONTHLY BY THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Mount Royau & GUILFORD AVES. BaLtimorE, MARYLAND Entered as second class matter under the Act of August 24, 1912, at Baltimore, Md. Acceptance for mailing at a special rate of postage provided for in the Act of February 28, 1925 Authorized February 17, 1949 Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, publishes: (1) Short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated societies; (3) notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JournNat is issued monthly. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors. It is urgently re- quested that contributors consult the latest numbers of the JourNAL and conform their manuscripts to the usage found there as regards arrangement of title, subheads, syn- onymies, footnotes, tables, bibliography, legends for illustrations, and other matter. Manuscripts should be typewritten, double-spaced, on good paper. Footnotes should be numbered serially in pencil and submitted on a separate sheet. The editors do not assume responsibility for the ideas expressed by the author, nor can they undertake to correct other than obvious minor errors. Illustrations in excess of the equivalent (in cost) of one full-page halftone are to be paid for by the author. Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication one proof will generally be sent to authors in or near Washington. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. Unusual cost of foreign, mathematical, and tabular material, as well as alterations made in the proof by the author, may be charged to the author. Author’s Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished in accordance with the following schedule of prices Sea ee Copies 4 pp. : 12 pp. 16 pp. 20 pp. Covers 100 $3.25 $450 $ 9.75 $13.00 $16.25 $3.00 200 6.50 13.00 19.50 26.00 32.50 6.00 300 9.75 19.50 29.25 39.00 48.75 9.00 400 13.00 26 .00 39.00 52.00 65.00 12.00 Subscriptions or requests for the purchase of back numbers or volumes of the Jour- NAL or the PRocrEptInGs should be sent to Haratp A. REupER, Custodian and Sub- scription Manager of Publications, U. 8S. National Museum, Washington 25, D. C. Subscription Rates for the JouURNAL.—Per year.......................5-5+0 $7.50 Price of back numbers and volumes: Per Vol. Per Number Vol. 1 to vol. 10, incl.—not available*................ — Vol. 11 to vol. 15, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... S10. 00 $0.70 Vol. 16 to vol. 22, incl. (21 numbers per vol.)......... 8.00 0.60 Vol. 23 to current vel. (12 numbers per vol.).......... x30) 0.90 * Limited number of complete sets of the JouRNAL (vol. 1 to vol. 41, incl.) available for sale to libraries at $348.50. Mownocrapu No. 1, ‘“‘The Parasitic Cuckoos of Africa,’’ by Herbert Friedmann. $4.50 PROCEEDINGS, vols. 1-13 (1899-1911) complete............./.:.......1-+.+- $25.00 Single volumessunboundse jeans. ee eee eon nee 2.00 Simele sm wMbers ss. ger eda s eases Sac ees acer URE aie OO ee 25 Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge provided that claim is made to the Treasurer within 30 days after of following issue. Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences’? and aay to the Treasurer, H. 8. Rappiuys, 6712 Fourth Street, N.W., Washington 12, Hxchanges.—The Academy does not exchange its publications for those of other societies. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoLuME 42 July 1952 No. 7 GEOLOGY .— Lower limit of the Cambrian in the Cordilleran region.! CHESTER R. LONGWELL, Yale University. (Communicated by James 8. Williams.) Cambrian and older rocks are widely dis- tributed in the Cordilleran region, through thousands of miles in length and hundreds in width. The stratigraphic horizons of criti- cal interest to our problem are particularly well displayed, (1) in British Columbia and (2) in the Basin and Range province of the United States, the area to which my first- hand acquaintance is limited, and to which most of my comments are restricted. Current paleogeographic maps represent a Lower Cambrian seaway advancing north- eastward across much of the present Great Basin area, another southward across west- ern Canada (Deiss, 1941). Deposits that re- cord this early history are characterized by the Olenellus fauna; some earlier strata also commonly have been included. These were laid down on thick formations that com- monly are classed as Precambrian, such as the Belt series of Montana and British Co- lumbia which had been little deformed, and generally similar deposits in the Death Val- ley region that had been faulted, highly tilted, and otherwise disturbed. The concept of land areas of the time rests in part on facies relations, but in part merely on pres- ently known distribution of outcrops; for example, the western limit of the southern seaway at the Nevada-California state line is shown almost exactly on the location of the thickest known section of the fossilifer- ous Silver Peak formation. This limit is kept in Deiss’s synthetic map for all Cambrian seaways (1941, fig. 1). There is clear evi- dence of progressive overlap northward across What Deiss has called Montania, and eastward in the Colorado Plateau and Rocky Mountain areas. On the west, however, the 1 Part of a symposium on ‘“‘Base of the Cam- brian System,” held by the Geological Society of Washington, April 11, 1951. evidence on Cambrian geography is very vague indeed, since the older formations either end abruptly against plutonic masses, as at the border of the Sierra Nevada, or disappear under younger Paleozoic, Meso- zoic, and Cenozoic cover, including the wide- spread Columbia River basalt. Nolan’s sec- tions (1928) show the clear relations in western Utah and eastern Nevada, and the lack of information in northern California, where Devonian beds rest on metamorphic and voleanic rocks. We know there was early Paleozoic voleanism in the coastal belt, and probably there was orogeny also. Eardley (1947) has offered a modification of Nolan’s sections, suggesting that the Salmon and Abrams schists, of the Klamath region, may represent a westward continuation of known Cambrian and late Precambrian formations. It is not assured that continuous land bor- dered the Cordilleran geosyncline on the west. However, more tangible evidence for our purpose lies inland. Stratigraphic relations are comparatively simple in the wide area traversed by the Grand Canyon, where little-deformed Cambrian beds lie across steeply tilted strata of the Grand Canyon series, which in turn rest on Archean schist, gneiss, and granite. The unmetamorphosed but strongly deformed Grand Canyon series is by general agreement Precambrian. In the overlying, nearly horizontal beds Cambrian faunas are found throughout the length of the Grand Canyon, although the lowest for- mation, the Tapeats sandstone, is appar- ently devoid of fossils. In the eastern part of the district the lowest significant fauna, found in the Bright Angel shale 135 feet above the Tapeats sandstone, indicates Mid- dle Cambrian age. Near the mouth of the canyon the same faunal zone is more than 209 210 400 feet above the Tapeats and above thin- bedded sandstone that contains a Lower Cambrian Olenellus fauna (Mckee, 1945). Fifty mules farther west, at Frenchman Mountain in southern Nevada, the Olenellus faunal zone lies within the shale 80 feet above the Tapeats sandstone (Wheeler, 1947), which there rests on the Archean complex. From Las Vegas westward the older part of the section thickens tremendously, with addition of formations whose age is uncer- tain. In sections east of Death Valley the Olenellus fauna has been reported from only the upper 900 feet of the Wood Canyon formation (Nolan, 1929; Hazzard, 1938), be- low which le the Stirling quartzite, 4000 feet thick, the Johnnie formation, 2,500 to 4,000 feet, and the Noonday dolomite, 1500 feet. Thus in these sections 8,000 to 9,000 feet of strata, largely clastic, underlie with- out obvious angular unconformity the low- est beds now known to contain Olenellus. This thick section lies with strong angular discordance on another series, thousands of feet thick, which Noble (1934) has suggested may be related to the Upper Precambrian formations in the tilted fault blocks of the eastern part of the Grand Canyon. These formations of the Death Valley region con- sist of sandstone, shale, and carbonate beds, as free from metamorphism as the younger series that leads up to Olenellus. The struc- tural discordance, however, is emphatic, and largely on this basis a number of geologists have chosen the base of the Noonday dolo- mite as the base of the Cambrian system. The reasoning, presumably, has been about as follows: Development of an erosion sur- face across the strongly tilted and faulted sedimentary series in the Death Valley re- gion and in the Colorado Plateau, with com- plete removal of these formations in a wide intervening area, indicates long-continued emergence of western North America. Re- submergence and renewed sedimentation, with progressive onlap eastward, marks a major physical change which logically may be taken as the start of a new geologic pe- riod and era. Those who have held this view probably explain the lack of fossil record through a large thickness of the younger section by a combination of circumstances. Conditions in this region may have been un- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 7 favorable for kinds of living forms that would leave a record, or at least for preser- vation of any record. The last point applies logically to the Noonday dolomite and the Stirling quartzite, both of which have li- thology notably unfriendly to the fossil hunter. The Johnnie formation, on the other hand, consists in large part of thin shale, sandstone, and scattered carbonate beds, which theoretically should be favorable for preservation of fossils. It may be urged, however, that in most early Cambrian sec- tions fossils are not plentiful at best, and that not enough intensive work has been done in the region to warrant our writing off the Johnnie as a barren formation. This argument of course is largely negative. Let us look at the sections farther west. In the Panamint Range, according to Hop- per (1947), there is no Noonday dolomite, and a much thinned Johnnie formation rests on tilted strata that presumably are Pre- cambrian. In this part of the region, there- fore, the floor on which deposition of the higher series began was very irregular. How- ever, no evidence has been found to suggest abrupt relief—the Johnnie beds contain no coarse-grained deposits. The Inyo and Silver Peak ranges display the sections made classic by the early work of Turner (1909) and Walcott (1908). The Silver Peak series is of particular interest because fossils in relative abundance range through so large a part of its thickness. H. E. Wheeler, after a recent visit to Walcott’s Waucoba Springs locality (1948), pro- nounced the section too complex structur- ally to be used as a satisfactory standard without more comprehensive field studies. However, Knopf and Kirk (1918) found at Andrews Mountain a more complete section, apparently free from repetition by faulting. lurk states that the total thickness is 7000 feet or more, of which about a fifth consists of carbonate beds. According to Walcott the genus Olenellus ranges through nearly 5000 feet, and other forms, including the trilobite Holmia and the brachiopod Obolella, reach at least 1200 feet lower. Abundant forms reported by Walcott and Kirk as “corals” (Knopf and Kirk, 1918, p. 31)—probably archaeocyathids—suggest reef structure. In short, the thick deposit appears to be almost entirely of marine origin. Juny 1952 The Silver Peak beds overlie the Campito sandstone, a fine-grained crossbedded sand- stone, some of it quartzitic, typically in thick beds. Even in this sandstone Kirk reports numerous markings which he diag- nosed as tracks possibly made by trilobites. Walcott (1908, p. 12) reported from some Nevada localities, in the Prospect Mountain quartzite, trails that he interpreted as marks made by trilobites. On both physical and organic evidence, the Wood Canyon formation is logically cor- related with the Silver Peak beds. Wheeler draws the base of the Cambrian at the low- est horizon from which Olenellus has thus far been reported, about 350 feet above the base of the Wood Canyon formation. How- ever, in the evidence presented by [irk and Walcott there is a suggestion that arthro- pods—genus unknown—lived during depo- sition of the Campito sands, in a section much more marine in character than corre- sponding sections near Death Valley. Al- though we might assume that marine fos- sils never will be found below the base of the Wood Canyon beds, their absence could mean simply that the environment of depo- sition was inhospitable for life that existed at that time. It would indeed be remarkable to find well preserved fossils in the Stirling quartzite in which the thick beds, abundant cross beds, and commonly conglomeratic texture suggest turbulent, perhaps deltaic conditions under which remains of living forms, even if they were present, would have had little chance to be preserved. Wheeler himself (1947) notes that at Frenchman Mountain he was able to find Olenellus only in a zone 32 feet thick, 80 feet above the base of the green shale and 390 feet above the basal unconformity. Yet there he pro- nounces (with good reason) all of these barren beds Lower Cambrian, whereas he relegates to the Precambrian a smaller thick- ness of the Wood Canyon formation in the Nopah Range, solely on the ground that search in this part of the section has not as yet revealed Olenellus. Wheeler and Beesley (1948) represent dia- erammatically the concept, which has long been widely accepted, of progressive onlap from a basin of deposition across an adja- cent land. The land mass shed sediments into the basin, and was at last covered LONGWELL: LOWER LIMIT OF CAMBRIAN 211 through lowering by erosion combined with rise of the sedimentary column. Beds that carry typical Lower Cambrian fossils at Frenchman Mountain and near the mouth of the Grand Canyon look almost identical in lithology and in their relation to the basal unconformity, to beds in the eastern part of the Grand Canyon that carry a Middle Cambrian fauna. Moreover, we can endorse the suggestion of Wheeler and Beesley that near Death Valley beds lower than the Wood Canyon formation—say in the lower part of the thick Stirlng quartzite—were deposited somewhat earlier than the Lower Cambrian beds at Frenchman Mountain. But classi- fication of the Stirling quartzite as Pre- cambrian requires (1) acceptance of Ole- nellus as the sine qua non in determining Lower Cambrian age, and (2) assumption that all diagnostic fossils in this part of the section have been found. It may be sug- gested, in opposition to the ‘‘Olenellus school,” that trilobites other than Olenellus may play a part in the diagnosis of beds as Lower Cambrian. Walcott (1915) reported that at Barrel Spring, near Silver Peak, he found the genera Nevadia and Holmia at considerably lower horizons than Olenellus. Still other fossil forms conceivably may be championed as of some importance in this matter, in addition to certain physical cri- teria to be mentioned presently. It is by no means assured that the Johnnie and Noonday formations have the simple physical relationship to higher formations that ordinarily are suggested in regional dia- grams. Knopf and Kirk (1918) report that in the Inyo region deep erosion preceded deposition of the Campito sandstone, with complete removal locally of a thick forma- tion that may correlate with the Johnnie deposits. Moreover Hazzard (1938) cites some evidence for unconformity at the base of the Stirling quartzite in the Nopah Range; beds with contrasting lithologies ap- pear below the contact at outcrops not far separated, and there is a suggestion of slight angular divergence between the upper John- nie and the lower Stirling beds. We are re- minded that the contact between the Cam- brian and the Belt series of Montana was thought to be an inconspicuous discontorm- ity until regional studies demonstrated a major, even though gradual, angular dis- 212 cordance. In the structurally broken Death Valley region there is less opportunity for such a regional check. It is quite possible, then, that the Noon- day and Johnnie formations belong to an earlier episode of sedimentation, which was followed by crustal warping, erosion, and renewed basining. On the other hand the Stirlng quartzite appears to have initiated a consistent chapter of sedimentation which was remarkably uniform over a wide region. As Wheeler notes, the name Prospect Moun- tain quartzite (or sandstone) may well be applied to the initial deposit of this episode, from eastern California, through southern and central Nevada, western Arizona, west- ern and northern Utah, to southeastern Idaho. The several names Campito, Stirling, Tapeats, Prospect Mountain, Brigham have been applied to this highly siliceous accu- mulation, which presumably represents long- continued subaerial decay on a large land- mass. Encroachment of the sea brought about assortment of these weathering prod- ucts, and deposition, with progressive onlap, of the quartz sands and gravels, followed by thin beds of fine-grained clastics with spo- radic carbonate layers, muds that formed greenish shales, and finally a thick carbonate section. It would be difficult to find, in the entire geologic column, a more ideal succes- sion of strata to be termed a system. And surely the organic evidence is equally satis- factory. Fossils that have long been accepted as Lower Cambrian have been found in shaly beds near the top of the Prospect Mountain quartzite (Walcott, 1892) and equivalent units. To exclude from the Cambrian the bulk of this formation, which because of its lithology is logically barren of fossils, is to ignore completely the cogent physical rela- tionships between this clastic deposit and the beds above it. Therefore I would include in the Cambrian system all of the Prospect Mountain quartz- ite and its lithologic correlatives. This major unit in many ways constitutes an ideal basal element of the system. However, there is not yet a firm basis for drawing a definite lower boundary of the Cambrian in the Death Valley region. I believe that at present the Johnnie formation and the Noonday dolo- mite, together with the Deep Springs forma- tion and the Reed dolomite of the Inyo JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 42, No. 7 region, should be carried under the heading “age unknown.” Designation of these units as definitely Precambrian does not seem war- ranted by the evidence now available. Literature describing relationships of the Windermere series to lower and higher strati- graphic units in the northern Rocky Moun- tains suggests conditions very similar to those in the Basin and Range province dis- cussed above. However, analysis of the prob- lem for the northern Cordillera will be left to students who have firsthand acquaintance with that region. LITERATURE CITED Deiss, CHARLES. Cambrian geography and sedi- mentation in the central Cordilleran region. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 52: 1085-1116. 1941. Earpiey, A. J. Paleozoic Cordilleran geosyncline and related orogeny. Journ. Geol. 55: 309-342. 1947. Hazzarp, J. C. Paleozoic section in the Nopah and resting Springs Mountains, Inyo County, Cali- fornia. Journ. Mines and Geol. 33: 273-339. 1938. Hopper, R. H. Geologic section from the Sierra Nevada to Death Valley, California. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 58: 393-432. 1947. Knorr, A., and Krrx, E. A geologic reconnais- sance of the Inyo Range and the eastern slope of the southern Sierra Nevada, California. U.S. Geol. Sur. Prof. Paper 110: 23-31. 1918. McKer, E. D. Stratigraphy and ecology of the Grand Canyon Cambrian. Carnegie Inst. Wash- ington Publ. 563, pt. 1. 1945. Nosie, L. F. Rock formations of Death Valley, California. Science 80: 173-178. 1934. Noran, T. B. A late Paleozoic positive area in Nevada. Amer. Journ. Sci. (5) 16: 153-161. 1928. . Notes on the stratigraphy and structure of the northwest portion of Spring Mountain, Nevada. Amer. Journ. Sci. (5) 17: 461-472. 1929. TurneER, H. W. Contribution to the geology of the Silver Peak quadrangle, Nevada. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 20: 223-264. 1909. Watcorr, C. D. Systematic list of fossils of each geological formation in the Eureka District, Nevada. U. 8. Geol. Surv. Mon. 20: 319-321. 1892. . Cambrian geology and paleontology. Smith- sonian Mise. Coll. 58: 12, 185-189, 199. 1908. . The Cambrian and its problems: Problems of American geology: 205-207. 1915. WueEELER, H. E. Base of the Cambrian system. Journ. Geol. 55: 153-159. 1947. . Late pre-Cambrian-Cambrian stratigraphic cross section through southern Nevada. Univ. Nevada Bull. 42: no. 3. 1948. and Brrstey, E. M. Critique of the time- stratigraphic concept. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 59: 75-86. 1948. Juny 1952 DUNKLE AND WILSON: DEVONIAN FISHES Altes PALEONTOLOGY .—Remains of Devonian fishes from Texas. Davin H. DuNKLE, U. 8. National Museum,! and Joun A. Witson, University of Texas. Two papers on Paleozoic rocks of central Texas (Cloud, Barnes, and Warren, 1945, and Cloud and Barnes, 1948) include description of rocks of uncertain age con- taining bones which are herein identified by Dunkle as Upper Devonian. First men- tion of the bones is found in Cloud, Barnes, and Warren (1945, p. 174): ‘“‘A slab of cono- dont- and bone-bearing calcareous and phosphatic rock (16-T-33D)? was found and collected by Barnes and Warren while they were mapping the Ordovician-Carboniferous contact near Elm Pool, Blanco County, on May 14, 1942.” Somewhat later ‘three other localities were found at which similar conodont- and bone-bearing rock occurs: 167T-2-25B, 16T-1-32C, and 16T-2-27,A.’” Conodonts from the original bone-bearing slab were determined by W.-H. Hass (memorandum to H. D. Miser dated March 2, 1945) to be of both ‘Mississippian’ and “Devonian” types. Macrofossils from the third locality were recognized positively by Dr. G. A. Cooper (letter to Cloud, February 27, 1945) as of earliest Mississip- pian age. The conclusion drawn by Cloud, Barnes, and Warren (1945) was that the conodonts and macrofossils (invertebrates) dated the rocks in question as_ earliest Mississippian. The extensive report of Cloud and Barnes (1948, dated 1946), ‘The Ellenburger Group of Central Texas,” contains additional information concerning the bone-bearing beds. Cloud and Barnes (1946) elevate the Ives breccia of Plummer (Bullard and Plum- mer, 1939) to formational rank. The rela- tionship of the “bone bed” to the Ives breccia is described (Cloud and Barnes, 1 Published by permission of the Secretary, Smithsonian Institution. 2 The Bureau of Economic Geology, University of Texas, uses a system of locality numbers in which each of the 254 counties of the State is as- signed a number, Blanco County being number 16. The ‘“‘T”’ stands for Texas, and the remainder of the number designates the position within a county as recorded on aerial photographs for central Texas. 3 Locality descriptions are given in detail in Cloud, Barnes, and Warren (1945) and in Cloud and Barnes (1948). 1946, pp. 46-47) as follows: “Locally, the breccia seems to grade laterally into or to overlie or underlie a reddish-brown, olive- gray, brownish, or yellowish impure lime- stone or phosphatic rock containing cono- donts, fragments of bones, phosphatic pellets, and sand grains. Apparently more than one “bone bed” is involved, but rela- tionships are obscure.” The purpose of this paper is to present what small amount of information is ob- tainable from the bones and the implications that can be drawn from them. Dinichthys cf. terrelli Newberry The recognizable remains include six frag- ments of the dermal armor of a large placoderma- tous fish. Four of these six broken and eroded pieces of bones, all from locality 16T-2-383D, can be readily identified as characteristic por- tions of arthrodiran plates, a fragmentary left paranuchal (Fig. 1), a left suborbital (Fig. 2), a left inferognathal (Fig. 3), and a right intero- lateral (Fig. 4). Comparative examinations prompt provisional reference of the four to a form closely allied to the well-known brachy- thoracine Dinichthys terrelli Newberry. The present materials are illustrated imposed on out- lines and appropriate sections of complete ele- ments of the latter species. For the purpose of this note further description is unnecessary. Fra. 1.—Dinichthys cf. terrelli Newberry (U.T.- B.E.G. no. 40100): Left paranuchal plate fragment in internal aspect. Reproduction approx. X 2/5. 214 Ve SS gare wi Za — — = JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 7 Fie. 2.—Dinichthys cf. terrelli Newberry (U.T.B.E.G. no. 40100-3) : Left suborbital plate fragment in transverse section and lateral aspect. Reproduction approx. X 2/5. It is not possible here to make more than a tentative identification. This fact is not due alone to the fragmentary nature of the material but must be coupled with various questions concern- ing the basic status of Dinichthys terrelli and its relatives. D. terrelli, as now recognized, is re- stricted to the Upper Devonian Ohio Shales formation. It, with the species intermedius and curtus, from the same strata, comprise a series of advanced Coccosteus-like forms, which by virtue of the numerous modifications discussed by Dunkle and Bungart (1946) is quite distinct from all the other so-called dinichthyids of the Ohio Shales (that is, Dinichthys herzeri, Gor- gonichthys, Heintzichthys, and Holdenius). Though meagerly elaborated by Orvig (1951) it is possible that some of the same features noted by Dunkle and Bungart (1946) motivated Stensio’s (1945) separation of the brachythoracines into the or- ders Coccosteiformes and Pachyosteiformes. Thus, regardless of the taxonomic value placed on the recognized differences, it is necessary that all Dinichthys species from North America be examined to ascertain with which group each is related. Until the task is completed, these ma- terials from Texas can have little use in defini- tive stratigraphic correlations. Arthrodira, gen. and sp. undet. Two fragments (Fig. 5) (from locality 16T-1- 32C), presumably of the same identity, are unique in the possession of extremely large denti- cles arranged in a single row along one of their margins. Both specimens are too fragmentary for a complete description. They are, however, relatively low asymmetrical structures with robust elliptical cross sections. The teeth are re- curved, slightly compressed, indicated to be variously spaced and to vary in height from one- half to one-third the depth of the supporting Fie. 3.—Dinichthys cf. terrelli Newberry (U.T.B.E.G. no. 40100-2): Left inferognathal plate frag- ment in lateral aspect and transverse section. Reproduction approx. X 2/5. JuLY 1952 DUNKLE bone. They appear as projections from the bone, becoming dense and containing a pulp cavity dis- tally. The gross histology and over-all construction of the specimens suggest an arthrodiran mandible with teeth, rather than an ichthyodorulite. Among arthrodires with large teeth and long, low mandibles are the upper Devonian genera Diplognathus and Tracheosteus. These latter, un- fortunately, are also incompletely known and it seems best to postpone identification of the Texas material. Fie. 4—Dinichthys ef. terrelli Newberry (U.T.- B.E.G. no. 40100-1): Right interolateral plate fragment in anterolateral aspect. Reproduction approx. X 2/5. DISCUSSION If later work shows that Dzinichthys terrella and its relatives are restricted to the Upper Devonian Ohio Shales formation, then the D. cf. terrelli fragments from Texas do have significance stratigraphically. That they occur with Mississippian invertebrates and conodonts seems to be proved. Where they came from, however, has not been mentioned in the literature. If a short- lived sea of Upper Devonian age occupied the area just prior to Ives breccia time and AND WILSON: DEVONIAN FISHES 215 deposited a thin mantle of soft easily erodible material (that is, shale) in which the bones of the placoderms and the Devonian cono- donts would be the most resistant structures, then a source for the reworked bones and conodonts would be available. This hypoth- esis would not seem to conflict with the reasoning of Cloud and Barnes (1948, pp. 48-49) if the long period of weathering necessary to free the chert of the Ives breccia is assumed to have taken place prior to the invasion of the supposed sea. REFERENCES Buwwuarp, F. M., and Puummer, F. B. Paleozoi section of the Llano uplift. Guide to the Geologic Excursions Sponsored by West Texas Geol. Soc., Forth Worth Geol. Soc., Texas Acad. Sci., and Univ. Texas: 1-20, 6 illus. 1939. (Mimeographed.) Barnes, V. E., Cuoun, P. E., Jr., and WARREN, L. E. The Devonian of central Texas. Univ. Texas Publ. 4801: 161-177, pls. 9-10, figs. 42-46. 1943. . Devonian rocks of central Texas. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 58: 125-140, 1 pl., figs. 1-7. 1947. Croup, P. E., Jr., and Barnes, V. E. The Ellenburger group of central Texas. Univ. Texas Publ. 4621: 1-473, 44 pls., 8 figs., 3 tables. 1948 (dated 1946). Dunkte, D. H., and Bun@art, P. A. supragnathal of Gorgonichthys. Nov. 1316: 1-10, 4 figs. 1946. Orvic, T. Histologic studies of placoderms and fossil elasmobranchs. Ark. Zool., ser. 2, 2(2): 321-454, pls. 1-8, figs. 1-22. 1951. Srensio, E. On the heads of certain arthrodires, II. Kungl. Svenska Vet.—Akad. Handl., ser. The antero- Amer. Mus. 3, 22(1): 1-70, figs. 1-14. 1945. Fie. 5.—Arthrodira, gen. and sp. undet. (U.T.B.E.G. no. 40101): Fragments of dentate mandibular elements in transverse sections and lateral aspects. Reproduction approx. < 9/10. 216 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 42, No. 7 PALEONTOLOGY .—WNotes on Texacrinus. Harretit L. Stripe, Bartlesville, Okla. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) The author was first aware of the pres- ence of crinoids in the Francis shale of south- eastern Oklahoma with the description of Oklahomacrinus loeblichti Moore (1939). The specimen involved was somewhat fragmen- tary and did not indicate particularly lucrative collecting possibilities. Richard Alexander, at present a student at the Uni- versity of Oklahoma, called my attention to the potentialities of the horizon as exposed in the brick pit just south of Ada, Okla., which is the type locality of O. loeblichi. Before an expediton was arranged, he and Allen Graffham, of Carter Oil Co., explored the exposed zones more thoroughly. Mr. Graffham was cognizant of special techniques needed to remove shale blocks and subse- quently to expose the specimens. One fairly large pocket proved to be especially prolific in erinoid calices and crowns. It was some- what comparable to famous crinoid ‘‘nests”’ of Crawfordsville, Ind., Le Grand or Gilmore City, Iowa, or Huntsville, Ala.; however, there was no associated limestones, and pres- ervation was therefore not so perfect. Most of the material available for study was col- lected individually and collectively by Allen Graffham, Richard Alexander, Claude Bro- naugh, and the author. Considerable time and effort have been spent in excavating the shale blocks, especially from the large col- ony. A thin layer of carbonaceous vegatal material marks the top of the 3- to 4-inch crinoid zone and a jumbled mass of isolated columnals and shells mark the bottom. Other smaller “nests”? have been discovered at ‘somewhat lower horizons, but the specimens are more difficult to prepare. In the present paper an effort is made to record several new species from the Francis shale which are assigned to Texacrinus Moore and Plummer (1940), as well as two species from lower and higher horizons. Here- tofore only one species had been described, T. gracilis Moore and Plummer (1940), which is the genotype species. The holotype and only specimen known at that time was a magnificent crown from the Des Moines formation of Texas, but the cup is somewhat distorted owing to lateral compression and the. exact nature of the base is not known. It was interpreted, and probably correctly, by these authors that the cup had a slightly depressed base. The author has also collected a crown from the same horizon in Texas but unfortunately the lower portion of the cup is missing and if present would have been compressed in the same manner as the holo- type. A new form from the Des Moines of Okla- homa is presented as 7. assoczatus, n. sp. It has a broader cup with a wider basal area than normal for the genus. Three new species are presented from the Missouri: 7. interruptus, T. trradiatus, and T. compactus. The first two are robust, with unusually large columns, relatively high dor- sal cups, and IBB entirely covered by the proximal columnals. T. interruptus is dis- tinctive in having circular depressions at the angles of the plates and strong tumidity of cup plates. The presence of these depres- sions, and subsequently raised areas along the sutures, is considered by the author and others as a significant specialization which is In some instances of generic importance. T. compactus has an unusually small stem and a more compact cup than the other species from the Francis shale. One species is described as 7’. progressus from the Virgil series of northeastern Okla- homa. It discloses a progressive step toward elimination of the anal plates from the dorsal cup and is the only known representative of the genus to show any appreciable change in this respect. The author believes there is a close affinity to Haerteocrinus Moore and Plummer (1940), but this matter will be discussed at length in a later paper. Genus Texacrinus Moore and Plummer Texacrinus interruptus, n. sp. Fig. 8 Dorsal cup has the form of a medium, basally impressed globe. All sutures are impressed, and deep round depressions are found at the angles of the plates. Infrabasals (IBB) are entirely within the basal concavity and are covered by the proxi- Fries. 1-4.—Texacrinus associatus, n. sp.: Holotype from posterior, summit, base, and anterior xX 2. Fies. 5-7.—Texacrinus progressus, n. sp.: Holotype from left posterior, base, and right anterior x 2. Fia. 8.—Texacrinus interruptus, n. sp.: Holotype from the right posterior, X 2. Fras. 9, 12-15. pT “nus inradiatus 5.0 G). Layne vaya Tea Oe etl eNO 3s 19S > paratype fr exracrinus vrradvatus, n. sp.: 9, Large paratype from right posterior, X 1.8; 12-14, young paratype fro base, X 2.7, posterior and anterior, X 2; 15, holotype from right posterior (a specimen of Aesioe sp. isalsoshown), X 1.2. Fras. 10, 11, 16.—Texacrinus compactus, n. sp.: 10, 11, Holotype from posterior and base, X 2; 16, paratype from anterior, X 2.3 m is 4.0. 217 218 mal columnals. Basals (BB) are five large tumid plates which curve strongly out of the depressed base and form anappreciable portion of the lateral calyx walls. Radials (RR) are five medium plates which are tumid and have articulating facets which do not fill their distal faces. Three tumid anal plates occupy the posterior interradius (post. IR). The radianal (RA) is unusually large, rests obliquely on the upper surface of post. B, and supports anal X and RX to the right and left above. Anal X is considerably larger than RX but the upper surfaces of the two plates form a common plane, above the distal extremities of the dorsal cup. Complete arm structure is not known for this species. Axillary first primibrachials (PBrBr) are present in several rays. They are low, tumid elements. The following SBrBr are rather large and cuneiform, with well-rounded exteriors. Sixteen or more columnals are preserved and show the unusually robust nature of the stem. A thin small columnal is succeeded by, and sharply defined from, a large thick columnal. Measurements (in mm).— Holotype Widthtofedorsalicupmess ee rere eee eee eee ee he) iHeightrofedorsalvcipenc cee eer eee eee eee £1025 Diameter of expanded proximal columnals....... 3.8 eng thiotdl S posta Baar cea eae orn 7.3 Widthiofel-spost= baer rer =. Oey en rte eens 6.0 JoSraygi ey Cyr Me FaVeG IRS Codos ceaneaccuasonsascnoeeubac 5.0 Wid thvofaliepos tea Riser neg eee iret ery eer 7.9 Length of suture between BB..................... Bist Length of suture between RR.................... 2.8 * Along surface curvature. Remarks.—This species is more comparable to T. wrradiatus than other described species and is readily distinguished by the strong tumidity of the cup plates, sharp definition between the alter- natingly expanded columnals, and depressions at the angles of the cup plates. Occurrence and horizon.—Upper part of the Francis shale, Missouri series, Pennsylvanian; section 4, T.3 N., R.6 E., brick pit south of Ada, Okla. T ypes.—Holotype collected by the author. To be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. Texacrinus irradiatus, n. sp. Figs. 9, 12-15 Dorsal cup is in the form of a medium, basally impressed bowl. IBB are five small plates con- fined to the basal concavity and are almost en- tirely covered by the proximal columnals. BB are five large plates which participate strongly in the JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 42, NO. 7 lateral walls of the calyx. RR are five large pentagonal plates. The outer surface of the RR continue for a short distance into the interarticu- lating areas so that the articulating facets do not occupy the full width of the plates. Three large anal plates are present in the post. IR. RA covers the entire upper surface of post. B and is followed above by anal X to the left and RX to the right. Anal X is the larger of the two; however, it forms a common plane with RX. The latter plate occupies a considerably higher position in relation to the basal plane of the cup. All sutures between cup plates are mildly to sharply impressed. Thirty cuneiform arms are indicated. First PBrBr are axillary in all rays and are low wide elements. Second bifurcation takes place on or about the fifth SBrBr in all rays. Thereafter the outer rays remain unbranched, but a second dichotomy takes place in the inner rays. The column is round and is composed of al- ternatingly expanded columnals. No evidence of cirri has been found. Tegmen is unknown. Crown and column are devoid of ornamentation. Measurements (in mm).— Large Small figured figured Holotype paratype paratype Width of dorsal cup........... 214% 23080* Holl Height of dorsal cup. ......... 9.8 15.0 5.0 Diameter of expanded colum- MALS ery essen eo ee pee Eee, 6.5 2.3 Widthiofirsant = Bitesssetee seem Orb: 10.0 4.4 Lengthrof'rvants Bhiece sc) -20'- 8 10.2 3.0 WaidthiofansanteeRheerrn aes 10.0 12.0 4.5 Length of r. ant. Rf........... 6.5 7.4 2.6 Length of arms (as preserved) .33.2 — 18.3 Length of suture between BB. 6.0 6.9 PP) Length of suture between RR. 4.5 4.7 1.8 * Mildly distorted due to lateral compression. 7 Along curvature of plates. Remarks.—This species is the commonest rep- resentative of the genus found in the Francis shale. It is more robust than 7’. interruptus, and comparison is given under description of that species. The small figured paratype is obviously a young representative of the species in that the column remains proportionately large. The arms of the young specimen are more comparable to those of 7. gracilis in their delicate appearance. Occurrence and horizon—Upper part of the Francis shale, Missouri series, Pennsylvanian; section 4, T. 3 N., R. 6 E., brick pit south of Ada, Okla. Types.—Holotype and figured paratypes col- lected by Allen Graffham. To be deposited in the U.S. National Museum. JuLY 1952 Texacrinus compactus, n. sp. Figs. 10, 11, 16 This species is fairly abundant in the Francis shale and is characterized by the small compact nature of the cup and the comparatively small column. A complete crown has not been found but the dorsal cup is well represented and portions of the arms are known. Dorsal cup is in the form of a medium, basally impressed truncated cone. IBB are almost en- tirely covered by the proximal columnals but their outer apices are visible in the shallowly impressed basal area. BB are five rather elongated plates. RR are five pentagonal plates with width slightly greater than length. There are three plates in the post. IR; RA is the largest and separates anal X from post. B, anal X is somewhat larger than RX which is to the right and forms a common plane with anal X in upper extremities. Column is small and tapers slowly. Although the columnals are alternatingly expanded there is not the sharp differentiation between small and large segments as found in other species of the genus from the Francis shale. Measurements (in mm).— Figured Holotype paraly pe Widthvotidorsalacuiprecses icc.) 12.3 1183565 Herhuomdorsalicupmane (aes. ae. ee | On 5.8 Diameter of expanded proximal colum- 11 ee PEE nisi poe, Susie. Siew sl 1.9 Widtheotemepan te Beers fs saci oie 5.0 5.8 Wenethvotangante rere neces ae ri« cc. 5.0 5.8 Widthwotessantbeehinwses hos tee iit « 6.0 6.4 LRH ON OF Fo Hiallin 145 oa oabauessccoodon 4.0 4.2 Length of suture between BB......... Pye) 2.9 Length of suture between RR......... 1.8 2.0 * Along surface curvature. Remarks.—The compact nature of the dorsal cup and proportionately small stem distinguish this from other described species. Occurrence and horizon.—Upper part of the Francis shale, Missouri series, Pennsylvanian; section 4, T. 3 N., R. 6 E., brick pit south of Ada, Okla. Types.—Holotype collected by Richard Alex- ander. Figured paratype collected by the author. To be deposited in the U.S. National Museum. Texacrinus progressus, n. sp. Figs. 5-7 The dorsal cup has the form of a moderately high truncated globe. There are five IBB in the narrow basal invagination which extend slehtly beyond the proximal columnal. Five BB are STRIMPLE: NOTES ON TEXACRINUS 219 elongated elements forming a large portion of the outer cup walls. Five RR are wider than long. The outer surfaces carry into the interarticulating areas for a short distance along the sutures. Plates of the post. IR have an unusual arrange- ment. RA is large and reaches across the entire upper surface of post. B to make a broad contact with |. pest. R. Anal X. is moderately large and extends well above the normal height of the cup. RX is small and is entirely separated from RA by post. R. Distal faces of anal X and RX form a common plane and are each followed by single tube plates of equal size and appearance. All first PBrBr are axillary. They are mildly constricted in midsection in somewhat the same manner as those of Apographiocrinus typicalis Moore and Plummer (1940). They are of unequal length. Only a few SBrBr are preserved and were apparently cuneiform. Teegmen is unknown. Proximal columnals are round, alternatingly expanded and weil crenu- lated. Measurements (in mm).— Holotype Wish, OR Clos OID andncococococabodeooponteso duce 12.3 « Herhtiotadorsalicuppepree ce cen eee 7.0 Diameter of expanded proximal columnal......... 2.0 Widthtoferantais* ihe caaenererr cae eee Coe 5.7 KengthrofiarvanteB seen serine ac eerie 6.0 Widthyofercvant hues san on reser eenetere fe etetstel fate 6.4 enc throfinanterkGenen ecient ret etter tr 4.2 Length of suture between BB..................... 3.0 Length of suture between RR..................... PH) * Along surface curvature. Remarks.—The general appearance of this spe- cies is more comparable to 7’. compactus than to other described species. 7’. progressus is readily distinguished by the more advanced arrangement of the anal plates and the slightly elongated axillary PBrBr. Occurrence and horizon.—Nelagony formation, about 35 feet below the Wildhorse limestone member, Virgil series, Pennsylvanian; NW + sec- tion 21, T. 22 N., R. 10 E., Osage County, Okla., about 15 miles west of Skiatook. Types—Holotype collected by Richard Alex- ander. To be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. Texacrinus associatus, n. sp. Figs. 1-4 Dorsal cup has the form of a low basally im- pressed globe. All cup plates are mildly tumid principally due to the impressed sutures. Five IBB form a pentagonal disk at the bottom of the 220 shallow basal concavity, and are visible beyond the columnar sear. Five BB form a broad basal plane and curve upward to participate in the lateral cup walls. Five RR are wide pentagonal plates. The outer surfaces of RR extend into the interarticulating areas but not im a pronounced manner. Distinctive characters of the articulating facets are the unusually large outer areas where strong outer marginal ridges are found. Liga- mental pit furrows are pronounced and transverse ridges are sharp though not prominent. Muscle areas are rather small and slope slightly out- wardly. Three anal plates are present in the post. IR. RA is the larger and has firm contact with 1. post. R, anal X, RX, r. post. R, r. post. B and post. B. Anal X is rather small and extends above the distal extremities of the cup. RX is small and forms a common upper plane with anal X. Proximal columnals are not present but the cicatrix is well defined. Strong crenulations mark the perimeter of the scar and the lumen appears to be rather large and pentalobate. : Measurements (in mm).— JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 7 Holotype Widthvofédorsalicupser ssa eee Wile 7 Heightiofidorsalicupine-aceie here eee eee 5.1 Diameter of colummnar’scar.)......--- sees oe 2.0 Widthiofersant-)B tanner eee eee ee 6.0 IGengthiofirant: Beets: aos dann eee eee 6.0 Width ofsrivant: (Reise. on ee ee ee 7.0 Tengthiofirsiant Re ee ee eee eee ee eee 4.2 Length of suture between BB..................... 2.2 Length of suture between RR..................... Tad * Along surface curvature. Remarks.—The broad basal plane and low dorsal cup serves to distinguish 7’. associatus from other known species of the genus. Occurrence and horizon.—Oologah limestone (perhaps equivalent to the Altamont limestone of Kansas), Des Moines series, Pennsylvanian; Chandler Materials Company quarry, east of Tulsa, Okla. Types.—Holotype collected by the author. To be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. REFERENCES Moore, R. C. Journ. Sci. Lab., Denison Univ. Bull. 39: 261-265. 1939. — and Puiummer, F. B. Univ. Texas Publ. 3045: 143-146, pl. 15, fig. 4, pl. 21, fig. 5. 1940. ENTOMOLOGY .—The Ethiopian genera of Sarginae, with descriptions of new species. Mauricr T. JAMES, State College of Washington. The subfamily Sarginae forms a more uniform and homogenous group of flies, over a wide part of the earth’s surface, than do the other subfamilies of Stratiomyidae. Col- lections from the different continents and from major island areas appear surprisingly similar to one another. The wide distribu- tion of such genera as Microchrysa, Ptecticus, and Sargus s.s. is noteworthy. Yet speciation is occurring actively in some areas, and major geographic areas may have their en- demic genera. The Ethiopian Region is no exception in this respect. Eight valid genera have previously been recorded from the Ethiopian Region. These consist of the widely distributed Sargus, Ptecticus, Microchrysa, Cephalochrysa, and Chloromyia and the three endemic genera Sagaricera, Paraptecticus, and Otochrysa. The last mentioned genus is unknown to me ex- cept from its description (Lindner, 1938b, p. 15). Consequently I am unable to place it in the key or to remark further concerning its status. Parasargus, proposed by Lindner (1935, p. 300) for a new species, P. africanus, was later reduced by that author (Lindner, 1938b, pp. 13, 14) to the status of a subgenus of Microchrysa, and the generotype synony- mized with MJ. stigmatica Enderlein. The genus Chrysochroma (generotype Musca bi- punctata Scopoli) is at most a subgenus of Sargus, in which the ocelli are equidistant from one another. Many species previously referred to Chrysochroma belong in Cephalo- chrysa or other genera of Sarginae. Chyrso- chromoides Brunetti (1926, p. 135), proposed for C. micropunctata Brunetti 1926, is un- known to me; Brunetti says it differs from Chrysochroma only in the simple third vein. It may be a valid genus or, on the other hand, a synonym of Cephalochrysa or Sargus. KEY TO THE GENERA OF ETHIOPIAN SARGINAE 1. Eyes densely and distinctly pilose; lower squama well-developed, similar in form to the UDC TAS Cal a gene eee Chloromyia Eyes bare; lower squama reduced, either trans- verse or with a relatively slender, straplike PLOJECHONA Re ee a eee 2 Juny 1952 2. Second antennal segment, from the inner as- pect, with a fingerlike process that protrudes TEMA TUF) HS Wouteels g Pocacouvscesoonosee: 3 Second antennal segment at most moderately COMES Callllivger ce wrye weenie ena 4 3. Lower squama with a straplike process; first antennal segment longer than the second; frons of male reduced at its narrowest to less than the diameter of an ocellus; vein Rai; arising beyond r-m by at least length of TPIT, 5 on dic SUSE Oo ge cee ee ore Re Sagaricera Lower squama transverse apically, without a straplike process; first antennal segment no longer than the second; frons of male, in Ethiopian species, at its narrowest broader than the ocellar triangle; vein R»,; arising at OMMDCTONC REIMAN uae Ptecticus 4.1 Vein R2,3 arising between r-m and the apex of diseal cell; lower squama transverse apically, without a straplike process, face distinctly protruding below, the oral margin prominent; nonmetallic species............. Paraptecticus Vein Roi; arising at or beyond the apex of the diseal cell; lower squama with a straplike process; face not protruding below, the oral margin poorly developed; Ethiopian species at least jomiedlyy ew. cos cocauccosebecoce 5 5. Abdomen short and broad, usually wider than the thorax and, measured to the apex of seg- ment four, no longer than wide; eyes con- tiguous in the male and divided into definite zones of different sized facets; ocellar tri- AMelevequuillave nal issn \se teat eho ae leh oe 6 Abdomen barely if any wider than the thorax, much longer than wide; eyes usually broadly separated (contiguous in male Pedicellina) and not divided into definite zones of differ- ent sized facets; ocellar triangle equilateral (Chrysochroma, some Pedicellina) or much longer than wide (typical Sargus)....Sargus 6. Diseal cell small; posterior veins weak, evanes- cent toward wing margin; maximum width of anal cell equal to combined widths of two Dasalecellserus erie ty svete Microchrysa Diseal cell normal; posterior veins evident to wing margin; maximum width of anal cell but little greater than that of second basal cell, distinctly less than combined widths of two basal cells..............Cephalochrysa Genus Chloromyia Duncan, 1837 Chloromyia tuberculata, n.sp. To my knowledge, this is the only black species of Chloromyia that has been described. It differs from the European species, C. formosa (Secopoli) (the generotype) and C. melampogon (Zeller), in that the frons of the female is tuber- 1 Otochrysa Lindner (1938b, p. 15) should trace to this couplet, according to the description, but vein Ry,3 arises beyond the apex of the discal cell, the only known species has a yellow body, and the postocular orbit of the female is strongly de- veloped, keeled, and hairy. JAMES: ETHIOPIAN GENERA OF SARGINAE 221 culate, and from the described European, as well as the African species (C. bella (Loew), C. caeligera Lindner), in the color pattern of the legs. Female.—Head black; frontal callus and face somewhat castaneous; upper corners of frontal callus prolonged into minute ivory triangles; a castaneous glabrous triangular area above fron- tal callus at midfrontal line. Frons moderately convex, with a prominent, though not clearly defined, tubercle a little less than halfway from anterior ocellus to frontal callus; this tubercle bisected, though not deeply, by the midfrontal suture. Frons coarsely punctate, the frontal callus, face, and postocular orbits similarly though less coarsely punctate, the punctures giving rise to silvery hairs. Postocular orbits well developed above, almost evanescent below. Hyes with moderately dense, moderately long black pile. Antenna structurally much as in formosa; the first segment shorter, however (subequal to the second), and the arista more slender basally and with one or two hairs at its extreme base; first and second segments shiny, black; flagellum reddish; arista blackish. Pro- boscis yellow. Thorax black; humerus and a line from hu- merus to wing base ivory; mesonotum coarsely punctured, pleura less conspicuously so; pile silvery, short and strongly appressed on the dorsum, somewhat longer on the pleura. Coxae, trochanters, femora, and fore and mid tibia, except broadly at the knees, black; fore and mid tarsi brownish, paler at the bases of the basi- tarsi; hind tibia and tarsus yellowish, the basi- tarsus almost white, the apical half of the tibia and the apical two tarsomeres more brownish. Venation essentially as in formosa; membrane subhyaline, distinctly infuscated across the istegma and discal cell, paler at the base; veins brown, yellowish toward base. Squamae struc- tually as in formosa, pale yellow with whitish fringe. Halteres yellow, brownish on the stalk. Abdomen black; densely though more finely punctured than on the mesonotum. Dises of second, third, and fourth terga, except basally, apically, and broadly laterally, with black (reddish in certain lights) appressed pile; terga otherwise and sterna with appressed. silvery pile. Leneth, 7.5 mm. Male.—Kyes subcontiguous; postocular orbits wanting. Head with mostly black pile which, SS together with that of the eyes, is much longer than in the female. Pile of mesonotum and seutellum long and largely erect. Abdomen shining violaceous dorsally, black ventrally, clothed entirely with silvery appressed pile. Otherwise, except sexually, as in the female. Types.—Holotype, female, Mubende, Uganda, April 14, 1931 (H. Hargreaves); allotype, male, Kasenyi, Uganda, April 14, 1931 (Hargreaves) ; to be deposited in the British Museum (Nat- ural History). Paratype, female, Kilimanjaro (W. L. Abbott), U. S. N. M. no. 23656. Variation—The female paratype has the antennae wholly yellow and has some blackish pile on the front; otherwise it agrees with the holotype. Genus Sagaricera Griinberg, 1915 This genus was erected on the basis of the striking development of the antennal flagellum and was placed close to Ptecticus and Chryso- chroma. The only species that has been referred to it is the generotype, S. aenescens Grinberg, described from a male (Griinberg, 1915, p. 63) and redescribed later from a female by Lindner (1938a, p. 68). Striking as this character is, I do not feel that it is a valid basis for differentia- tion, since another species, Sargus analis Mac- quart, referred to Ptecticus by Brunetti, is in other respects morphologically much closer to Sagaricera than to Ptecticus. I am therefore re- defining Sagaricera on the basis of characters included in my generic key and am proposing the following new combination and synonymy. Sagaricera analis (Macquart), n. comb. Sargus analis Macquart, Dipt. Exot. 1: 204. 1838. Plecticus (sic!) analis (Macquart), Brunetti, Rev. Zool. Afr. 14: 124. 1926. Ptecticus cinctifrons Grinberg, Berlin 8: 61. 1915; Lindner, Mitt. Deut. Ent. Ges. 8: 68. 1938; Lindner, Bull. Mus. Roy. d’Hist. Nat. Belg. 14:6. 1938. (New synonymy.) Ptecticus opalescens Lindner, Deut. Ent. Zeit. 1934: 302. 1935. (New synonymy.) Mitt. Zool. Mus. In appearance this species resembles S. aenes- cens much more closely than it does any known species of Ptecticus. The male genitalia are of a type much different from that of any Ptecticus known to me. Macquart’s type came from an unknown lo- cality, but M. E. Séguy kindly furnished me with a specimen compared with the type, and it is on this that the present synonymy is based. 22 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 7 Genus Ptecticus Loew, 1855 As restricted here, the Ethiopian species of Ptecticus seem to form a fairly homogenous eroup, although at least two very distinct types of male genitalia occur. The body is elongated and basically yellowish; the eyes of the male are distinctly separated; the frons in both sexes is black with metallic blue reflections, but the vertex behind the ocellar triangle becomes abruptly yellow. In the species which I have examined (P. elongatus (Fabricius) and the four new species described in this paper) vein Rox; arises at or slightly before r-m and runs close to R, to its apex, the two longitudinal veins either paralleling or gradually approaching each other. Except in P. aculeatus, n.sp., the male genitalia are of a quite uniform type, though differing significantly in detail: the ninth tergite is of moderate size and distinctly emargi- nate apically; the surstylus, which possesses characters which seem to be specifically diag- nostic in this group, is separated from the ter- gite by a suture, ends in a blunt or sharp apex that extends far beyond the apex of the tergite, and is subtended dorsally by a translucent flange; the ninth sternite is arcuate apically; the dististyli tend to turn upward and inward toward the apex of the aedeagus; the aedeagus is thick, its skeletal apparatus black, heavily sclerotized, and either entire or bilobed apically. The following key will separate the known Ethiopian species of Ptecticus. Of these, P. ru- /ipes, P. mesoxanthus, and P. polyxanthus have had to be placed from the descriptions. The characters based on tarsal coloration may seem trivial, but in the species I have studied they are correlated with very definite genitalic differences. 1. Hind tarsus yellow, at most the basitarsus browDish'. 2... 4.5. .accee eee 2 Hind tarsus wholly black or black and white.3 2. Hind legs wholly yellow... . polyxanthus Speiser Hind legs with tibiae blackened basally. mesoxanthus Grinberg rufipes Lindner 3. Einditarsus) wholly, blacks. 55 .e= =e 4 Hind tarsus white at least on a large part of the second and third tarsomeres. . te 4. Hind legs practically wholly black: abdominal terga two to six inclusively conspicuously marked with black; surstylus acute apically, its flange of ee width throughout much of its length... _somerent, n.Sp. Hind legs with coxae, trochanters, femora, and parts of tibiae y ellow: abdomen without black Junty 1952 JAMES: ETHIOPIAN markings; surstylus blunt apically, its flange not of uniform width......... rhodesiae, n.sp. 5. Surstylus not separated from ninth tergite by a suture; aedeagus very slender, terminating in a long process which suggests a hymenop- HEOROUSES LIM Oo Pee at aculeatus, n.sp. Surstylus separated from ninth tergite by a suture; aedeagus thick, blunt, either entire Orig OWed neha Aris esi ro ess hee ee 6 6. Hind tarsus white beyond basitarsus; male with tergum distinctly incised apically; aedeagus bilobed; surstylus acute apically. elongatus (Fabricius) Hind tarsus with second tarsomere except its base and third tarsomere white; male ninth tergum transverse, not incised; aedeagus en- tire, not bilobed; surstylus blunt apically. bequaerti, n.sp. Ptecticus somereni, n. sp. Readily distinguished from previously de- scribed Ethiopian Ptecticus by the practically wholly black hind legs and the extensive black markings, over a yellow background, on the mesonotum and the abdominal terga. Related to P. elongatus, but the genitalia are signifi- cantly different. Male.—Occiput black except median plate which, together with vertex posterior to ocellar triangle, is pale yellow; ocellar triangle and frons to callus black with bluish reflections; GENERA OF SARGINAE 223 frontal callus and face pale yellow, almost white. Occipital orbits with conspicuous yellow tomentum and pile, occiput otherwise with inconspicuous, short, black hair; frons and vertex black-haired; face with a little pile, black and yellow intermixed, below antennal bases. First and second antennal segments yellow, with black hair; flagellum orange-yellow; arista black. Proboscis pale yellow. Thorax mainly yellow. Mesonotum with a median black stripe from the anterior margin to suture and a lateral one on each side, broadly separated from the humerus anteriorly and from the scutellum posteriorly, and narrowly inter- rupted at the suture; sternum largely blackish. Metanotum black. Pile of mesonotum largely and of scutellum wholly short, black, incon- spicuous, somewhat longer and yellow laterally and anteriorly on the mesonotum; pleural pile yellow. Front leg yellow except that the coxae and the last four tarsomeres are extensively blackish; yellow pilose except dorsally on apical four tarsomeres. Middle leg with coxa, tro- chanter, femur except apex, and last four tarso- meres blackish and black-haired, otherwise yellow and yellow-haired. Hind leg practically entirely black and black-haired; tarsus and extreme apex of tibia ventrally yellowish brown, Fras. 1-5.—1, Ptecticus somereni, n. sp.: Male hypopygium, dorsolateral view, from holotype. 2, Ptecticus elongatus (Fabricius) : Surstylus of male genitalia. 3, Plecticus rhodesiae, n. sp.: Surstylus of male genitalia. 4, Plecticus bequaerti, n. sp.: Surstylus of male genitalia. 5, Plecticus aculeatus, n. sp.: Male genitalia, lateral view, from holotype. 224 with some brown hairs. Wing lightly infuscated, noticeably more strongly so beyond discal cell. Variation essentially as in elongatus. Halteres yellow, the knobs slightly infuscated. Abdomen mainly yellow; first tergum with two small median dark spots; second with a blackish cross band, subinterrupted medially, across the middle of the segment; third to sixth inclusively mainly black, with broad posterior yellow margins; third to fifth sterna broadly discolored medially. Yellow pile on sterna, laterally on terga, and on genital surstyli; that of terga and genitalia otherwise black. Geni- talia (Fig. 1) similar to those of elongatus; ninth tergum more, deeply incised medially; cerci more robust, oval; surstylus acute apically, as in elongatus but its translucent dorsal flange almost parallel-sided ; dististylus more elongated, almost parallel-sided to apex, which is rounded. Length, 15 mm. Type.—Holotype male, Bwamba, Uganda, June 1948 (Van Someren); to be deposited in the British Museum (Natural History). Ptecticus rhodesiae, n. sp. In addition to the wholly black hind tarsus and the extensively black hind tibia, the yellow pile of the vertex and of the abdominal terga will serve to differentiate this species from at least most material of P. elongatus and the male genitalia show significant differences. Male.—Head structurally as in elongatus; occiput black except median plate which, to- gether with vertex behind the ocellar triangle, is yellow; ocellar triangle and frons to frontal callus black; frontal callus white, the face scarcely lighter in coloration. Pile of frons and face concolorous with background; that of occiput pale yellow and appressed along the orbits, otherwise black. First antennal segment whitish; second and flagellum yellow; arista mostly black. Proboscis whitish. Thorax yellow to greenish yellow; mesonotum with evidences of a divided median and two lateral stripes. Pile of mesonotum and scutellum inconspicuous, appressed; black on the disc, yellowish on the broad sides and anterior mar- gins of the mesonotum. Pleura and metanotum with pale, semierect pile. Wings slightly and uniformly infuscated; veins brown; venation essentially as in elongatus. Halteres yellow. Legs mainly yellow and yellow haired; on anterior and middle tarsi, last three tarsomeres black and last four black-haired; hind legs with tibia JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voL. 42, No. 7 except apex and tarsus wholly black and black- haired. Abdomen yellow, more reddish toward apex, immaculate or with the terga spotted; pile bright yellow. Genitalia similar to those of elongatus; the aedeagus, however, is not bilobed, and the surstyli (Fig. 3), when viewed poste- riorly, are blunt apically, and when viewed laterally, are more slender and more strongly bowed dorsally than in elongataus; as in elong- atus the surstyli are subtended dorsally by a translucent flange, but this is straight or slightly concave dorsally in rhodesiae and strongly con- vex in elongatus. Ninth tergum distinctly incised apically, reddish yellow; aedeagus blackish; genitalia otherwise pale yellow. Length, 15-16 mm. Female.—KEssentially as in the male, except for the broader frons and the sexual characters. The frons is brownish and the hair apparently pale, but this is probably due to the slightly teneral condition of the allotype. Some dark coloration on the thorax is also probably due to the condition of the specimen. Types.—Holotype male, Vumba Mountains, Southern Rhodesia, Jan. 18, 19387 (Major Drys- dale). Allotype female, Chirinda Forest, Southern Rhodesia, October 1926 (G. Arnold). Paratypes, 2 males, Vumba Mountains, Umtali Dist., Southern Rhodesia, March 1938 (A. Cuthbert- son); 1 male, 1 female, Salisbury, Southern Rho- desia, February 1929 and January 30, 1935 (Cuthbertson). Holotype, allotype, and one para- type to be deposited in British Museum (Natural History). Ptecticus aculeatus, n. sp. A species with the general appearance of P. elongatus though somewhat more slender, the most outstanding color differences being the wholly black hind tibia and the much broader whitish apex of the hind basitarsus. The geni- talia, however, are strikingly different. Male.—Head structurally and in color essen- tially as in elongatus, the frons at its narrowest perhaps very slightly wider than in that species; pile of front and vertex black. Thorax yellow, mesonotum and scutellum with short black hairs, pleura yellow-pilose. Legs mainly yellow; fore tarsus somewhat darkened beyond basi- tarsus, middle tarsus also somewhat darkened on the last two tarsomeres; hind tibia black, hind basitarsus black and black-haired to apical fourth, thence whitish and _ whitish-haired. Juny 1952 Abdomen yellow, a brownish discal spot on the fifth tergum; black-haired on terga except laterally, yellow-haired on sterna and sides of terga. Genitalia (Fig. 5) slender; ninth tergum, from dorsal view, longer than wide and trans- verse apically; surstyli apparently completely submerged into the ninth tergite, not evident even as a protruding lobe; basistyle deep, dish- like, the dististyli inserted at its apex, contigu- ous, short, broadening and blunt apically. Proctiger slender; cerci very elongated and slender, digitate; proctiger and cerei with black pile, remaining pile of terminalia yellowish. Aedeagus heavily sclerotized, black, shining, greatly elongated and drawn out to a sharp point, somewhat suggesting the sting of a hy- menopteron; the terminal part enclosed in a yellowish lightly sclerotized sheath. Length, 10 mm. Type.—Holotype male, Olokemeji, Nigeria, May 7, 1936 (Van Zwaluwenburg and Mc- Gough); U. S. N. M. no. 61459. Ptecticus bequaerti, n. sp. Ptecticus elongatus Fabricius, subspec., Lindner, British Mus. (Nat. Hist.) Ruwenzori Exped. 2(1-2): 2. 1939. Probably refers to the present species. Quite similar in appearance to P. elongatus (Fabricius) but differing in the color of the legs and in the male genitalia. The hind tibia is yellow or yellowish on most of its apical half; the hind tarsus is black and mostly black-haired on the first, fourth, fifth, and the base of the second tarsomeres (yellow-haired ventrally on the basitarsus); the second tarsomere except its base and the third tarsomere are white and white-haired. Coloration of legs and body other- wise as in elongatus; there is a roundish black spot medially on tergum 5. The ninth tergum of the male is concave but hardly incised api- cally; the surstylus (Fig. 4) is blunt apically, its flange being truncated apically; the aedeagus is not bilobed. Types.—Holotype male, Elizabethville, Bel- gian Congo (M. Bequaert). Allotype, female, same data. Paratypes: 1 male, Embu, British Kast Africa, “10-38-14, no. 123, II, G. SJ. OB”’; 1 male, Vumba Mountains, Southern Rhodesia, March 1935 (A. Cuthbertson); 1 female, Mazoe, Southern Rhodesia, Jan. 28, 1929 (W. J. Hall. Holotype and allotype, James Collection; para- types in the United States National Museum and the American Museum of Natural History. JAMES: ETHIOPIAN GENERA OF SARGINAE 225 A female, Elizabethville, which probably belongs to this species but which is not given type designation, has the hind tarsus wholly black. Genus Paraptecticus Griinberg, 1915 The generotype, P. viduatus Grimberg, is the only species I know that can be referred to this genus. It is in appearance quite Ptecticus- like, but is structurally quite different. Another species, P. luctwosus Lindner, was described in this genus, but it does not belong there. I be- lieve I have correctly identified as this species, from Lindner’s description and from notes on the type furnished me by Dr. A. Collart, a female from Bwamba (H:) Uganda, June 1948 (Van Someren), Commonwealth Institute of Entomology. P. luctuosus will run to Sargus in my generic key, except that the abdomen api- cally becomes somewhat more noticeably broader than the thorax. This species probably should be referred to a new genus, but I refrain from proposing such until males are available. Pedicellina, n. subg. Pedicella Bigot, Brauer, Denkschr. Kais. Akad. Wiss. Wien 44: 88. 1882, nec Bigot, Ann. Soc. Ent. France (8) 4: 63, 83. 1856. Macrosargus Bigot of Authors; nec Bigot, Ann. Soc. Ent. France (5) 9: 187, 225. 1879. Eyes of male contiguous or nearly so to frontal callus, which in turn forms the frontal triangle; lower ocular orbits, adjacent to the poorly developed or evanescent oral margin, well developed and prominent. Abdomen of male strongly constricted on second and some- times also on third segment, broader both basad and apicad of that area; of female some- what narrowed, sometimes definitely so, on the second segment. Subgenerotype, Sargus notatus Wiedemann. Since there are intergrading forms between this and typical Sargus, it seems better to con- sider it a subgenus rather than a genus; though among American forms, where it is best repre- sented, it represents a well defined segregate. The unavailability of the name Pedicella for this group of species has been discussed pre- viously by Aldrich (1983, p. 165) and James (1935, p. 268). Brauer’s designation of MJacro- sargus tenwiventris Bigot as the generotype of Macrosargus, and consequently of Pedicella, which Macrosargus was proposed to replace, was invalid, since this species was not included originally in either of the above genera and consequently the first valid generotype designa- tion was that of Sargus tenebrifer Walker by Aldrich. This makes Pedicella either a synonym, a subgenus, or a genus closely related to Ptecti- cus, and leaves the present group without a previously available name. Sargus (Pedicellina) tenuis (Lindner), n. comb. tenue Lindner, Bull. Mus. Roy. : 18. 1938. Chrysochroma Hist. Nat. Belgique 14(54) The following seems to be the male of Lind- ner’s species, which was described from a female. Male.—EKyes subcontiguous, separated by a linear black impression which is one-fourth the diameter of an ocellus; ocellar triangle almost equilateral. Occiput and vertical triangle black, the postocular orbits pale-yellow-pilose and somewhat white-dusted, the vertical triangle and frontal line black-pilose; frontal triangle ivory, becoming more yellowish on the face and brown toward the oral margin, with black and yellow pile intermixed; ocular orbits along oral margin well developed, as broad as the width of the first antennal segment, polished black. Antenna black and black-pilose, the flagellum tending to brownish. Proboscis yellow. Mesonotum and scutellum metallic blue-green with mostly greenish reflections, mostly black- pilose, with some erect yellowish pile laterally. Pleura mostly black, subshinng with some bluish reflections; humeri white; notopleural line yellow; metapleura white; pile of pleura white to yellow. Wings lightly infumated, paler at base; veins black, brownish toward base. Halteres yellow; knobs somewhat darker. Legs yellow with the following areas black or black- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 7 ish: all coxae except apices, apical third of front and half of middle femora; hind femur except extreme base; apical half of hind tibia; and hind tarsus from apex of basitarsus. E Abdomen with second segment very narrow, almost cylindrical, more constricted than the first; beyond the second segment gradually broadening to the fifth. Second segment mainly yellow, black on the sides of the terga and sub- apically; extreme apex of first tergum and base of third, most of first sternum and sometimes of third, yellow; abdomen otherwise black with bluish and bronze reflections, variable as to the light incidence. Genitalia small, black. Length, 9 mm. Ucanba: Two males, Bwamba Valley, July 1946 (Van Someren); male, Bwamba, July to August 1946 (Van Someren). REFERENCES Aupricu, J. M. Notes on Diptera. No. 6. Proc. Ent. Soe. Washington 35: 165-170. 1932. Brunetti, E. New Belgian Congo Stratiomyidae, with a species from British East Africa. Rev. Zool. Afr. 14: 123-136. 1926. GRUNBERG, K. Zoologische Ergebnisse der Hx- pedition des Herrn F. Tessmann nach Svidka- merun und Spanisch-Guinea. Diptera. Mitt. Zool. Mus. Berlin 8: 43-70. 1915. James, Maurice T. A review of the Nearctic Geosarginae (Diptera, Stratiomyidae). Can. Ent. 67 : 267-275. 1935. LinpNER, Erwin. Athiopische (Dipt.). Deutsche Ent. Zeitschr. 316. 1935. Aethiopische Stratiomytiden (Dipt.) ITI. Mitt. Deut. Ent. Ges. 8: 66-73. 1938a. Stratiomyiden 1934: 291- Stratiomytiden. aus dem Kongo-Gebiet (Diptera). Bul. Mus. Roy. Hist. Nat. Belgique 14(54): 1-85. 1938b. ENTOMOLOGY —New names in the Homoptera. Z. P. Mercaur, North Carolina State College. (Communicated by Herbert Friedmann.) The new names proposed herein seem to be necessary for the reasons stated. It was planned originally to publish these names in connection with the Catalogue of the Hemip- tera, but the publication of future volumes of this catalogue may be considerably de- layed. All genera are listed under the ap- propriate family, subfamily, and tribe, ac- cording to the classification which I now use in the card catalogue of the Homoptera of the World. This should enable any student. to locate these genera. Bibliographic refer- ences are given complete enough, I believe, to enable anyone to locate original sources. The references to names in the Homoptera have all been verified; for genera not in the Homoptera I have depended upon Neave’s Nomenclator zoologicus 1-5. 1939-1945. Family NOGODINIDAE Goniopsara, n. n. Pro Goniopsis Melichar, Wien 49: 292 (4). 1899. Nec Goniopsis de Haan, Fauna Japon. (Crust.): 33. 1835. Orthotype: Goniopsis mystica Melichar. Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. Juny 1952 Siopaphora, n.n. Pro Siopa Jacobi, in Voeltzkow, Reise in Ostafrika 3: 535. 1917. Nee Stopa Hendel, Wien. Ent. Zeit. 28: 253. 1909. Orthotype: Siopa fumivenosa Jacobi. Family FLATIDAE Subfamily FLATINAE Tribe Flatini Flatidissa, n. n. Pro Flatida Haglund, Ofv. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Foérh. 56: 70. 1899. Nee Flatida White, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 18: 26. 1846. Orthotype: Flatida furcigera Haglund. Tribe Ceryniini Adelidoria, n.n. Pro Hansenia Wirkaldy, Journ. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. 14: 53. 1902. Nee Hansenia Melichar, Ann. Nat. Hofmus. Wien 16; 228. 1901. Orothotype: Poekilloptera glauca Kirby. Doriana, n. n. Pro Doria Melichar, Ann. Nat. Hofmus. Wien 16: 231. 1901. Nec Doria Meigen, Syst. Beschr. Zweifl. Insekt. 7: 263. 1838. Orthotype: Poekilloptera conspersa Walker. Tribe Flatissini Phylliana, n. n. Pro Mesophylla Melichar, Ann. Nat. Hofmus. Wien 17: 53. 1902. Nec Mesophylla Thomas, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) 8: 148. 1901. Orthotype: Mesophylla inclinata Melichar. Tribe Selizini Melichitona, n. n. Pro Chitona Melichar, Genera insectorum 182: 114. 1923. Nee Chitona Schmidt, Linnaea Ent. 1: 134. 1846. Orthotype: Phalaenomorpha collaris Jacobi. Family ISSIDAE Subfamily CALISCELINAE Tribe Caliscelini Itatiayana, n. n. Pro Itatiaya Schmidt, Stettin. Ent. Zeit. 93: 48. 1932. Nee Jtatiaya Mello-Leitao, Brotéria 13: 139. 1915. Orthotype: Itatiaya banzhafi Schmidt. Ugandana, n. n. Pro Ugandella Schmidt, Stett. Ent. Zeit. 93: 43. 1932. Nee Ugandella Sjoestedt, Ark. Zool. 15 (6): 18. 1923. Orthotype: Afronaso bayont Schmidt. METCALF: NEW NAMES IN HOMOPTERA 227 Tribe Ommatidiotini Bergrothora, n. n. Pro Schmidtella Bergroth, Wien. Ent. Zeit. 29: 241.1910. Nee Schmidtella Ulrich, Amer. Geol. 10; 269. 1892. Orthotype: Bruchomorpha globosa Melichar. Subfamily HemMIspHAERIINAE Hemiphile, n. n. Pro Herophile Stal, Hemiptera Africana 4: 203. 1866. Nec Herophile Steenstrup, Overs. Danske Selsk. 1860: 121. 1860. Orthotype: Hemisphaerius latipes Stal. Darumara, n. n. Pro Daruma Matsumura, Trans. Sapporo Nat. Hist. Soc. 6: 103. 1916. Nec Daruma Jordan and Starks, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 27: 232, 241. 1904. Orthotype: Daruma nitobet Matsumura. Subfamily Issinap Tribe Hysteropterini Perissana, n. n. Pro Perissus Melichar, Abh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien 3 (4): 113. 1906. Nee Perissus Chevrolat, Mém. Soe. Sci. Liége 18: 262. 1863. Orthotype: Issus jakowlefi Puton. Tribe Issini Distiana, n. n. Pro Moniana Distant, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8) 4:76. 1909. Nec Moniana Girard, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sei. Phila- delphia 8: 199. 1856. Orthotype: Moniana andrewsi Kirby. Issella, n. n. Pro Issina Melichar, Abh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien 3 (4): 209. 1906. Nec Jssina Jousseaume, Le Naturaliste (2) 12: 22. 1898. Orthotype: Issina suluralis Melichar. Family RICANIIDAE Subfamily Rrcantinae Tribe Rieaniini Meliprivesa, n. n. Pro Neoprivesa Melichar, Genera insectorum 182: 145. 1923. Nee Neoprivesa Distant, Trans. Linn. Soe. Lon- don (2) 17: 297. 1917. Orthotype: Neoprivesa disturbata Melichar. Family LOPHOPIDAE Subfamily ACARNINAB Tribe Acarnini Meloenopia, n. n. : ; Pro Oenopia Melichar, Casopis Ceské Spol. Ent. 10: 158 (8). 1913. 228 Nec Oenopia Mulsant, Ann. Soc. Agr. Lyon (2) 2: 420. 1850. Orthotype: Oenopia princeps Melichar. Family EURYBRACHIDAE Subfamily EuRYBRACHINAE Tribe Loxocephalini Nesiana, n. n. Pro Nesis Stal, Ofv. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Forh. 18: 210. 1861. Nee Nesis Mulsant, Ann. Soc. Agr. Lyon (2) 2: 67. 1850. Orthotype: Hurybrachys tricolor Walker. Subfamily PLATYBRACHINAE Tribe Platybrachini Maeniana, n. n. Pro Maenia Jacobi, Ark. Zool. 19A (28): 6. 1928. Nec Maenia Dalton, Geol. Rec. 1877: 392. 1880. Orthotype: Maenia hirsuta Jaco). Family MACHAEROTIDAE Subfamily HinpoLiInaE Tribe Hindolini Soamachaerota, n.n. Pro Soa Jacobi, Ark. Zool. 19A (28): 46. 1928. Nec Soa Enderlein, Zool. Jahrb. (Abt. Syst.) 20: 109. 1904. Orthotype: Polychaetopyhes appendiculata Hacker. Family TOMASPIDAE Subfamily ToMAsPINAE Tribe Cosmoscartini Horvathiana, n. n. Pro Horvathiella Lallemand, Ann. Mus. Nat. Hun- garici 32: 60. 1939. Nec Horvathiella Poppius, Acta Soc. Sci. Fennica 41: 115. 1912. Orthotype: Horvathiella rubrovittata Lallemand. Family CERCOPIDAE Subfamily CERCOPINAB Tribe Ptyelini Pentacanthoides, n. n. Pro Pentacantha Lallemand, Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat. Paris 28: 64. 1922. a Nec Pentacantha Stal, Ofv. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Forh. 28: 400. 1871. Orthotype: Pentacantha brunnea Lallemand. Tribe Lepyroniini Balsana, n. n. Pro Balsa Stal, Hemiptera Africana 4: 66. 1866. Nec Balsa Walker, Can. Nat. 5: 250. 1860. Orthotype: Lepyronia obscurata Amyot and Ser- ville. Paralepyroniella, n. n. Pro ELulepyroniella Lallemand, Bull. Inst. Franc. Afrique Noire 12: 630. 1950. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 7 Nee Hulepyroniella Schmidt, Ent. Mitt. 14: 112. 1925. Orthotype: Lepyronia aethiops Distant. Family TETTIGELLIDAE Subfamily TETTIGELLINAE Tribe Tettigellini Ceratogoniella, n. n. Pro Ceratogonia Melichar, Ann. Mus. Nat. Hun- garici 23 : 350. 1926. Nee Ceratogonia Kolbe, Ent. Nachr. 25: 45. 1899. Orthotype: Tettigonia recta Fowler. Poecilocarda, n. n. Pro Poeciloscarta Melichar, Ann. Mus. Nat. Hun- garici 23: 342. 1926. Nec Poeciloscarta Stal, Hand!. Svenska Vet.-Akad. 8 (1): 73. 1869. Orthotype: Tettigonia binaria Signoret. Tribe Ciccini Cicciana, n. n. Pro Ciccus Stal, Handl. Svenska Vet.-Akad. 8 (1): 60. 1869. . Nee Ciccus Latreille, Cuvier’s Régne animal (nou- velle ed.) 5: 221. 1829. Orthotype: Ciccus latreillet Distant. The genus Ciccus was described by Latreille without any included species; however, in 1831, in the Animal Kingdom by Cuvier, translated by MecMurtrie, 4: 46, two species, Cicada adspersa Fabricius and marmorata Fabricius, were in- cluded, and in 1903 Kirkaldy, Entomologist, 36: 232, selected Ciccus adspersus Fabricius as the genotype. Later, Distant noted that the Tettigonia adspersa Burmeister [nec Fabricius], Handbuch der Entomologie 2 (1): 119, was not the same as Cicada adspersa Fabricius. He estab- lished a new name, Ciccus latreillei, for this species, which he named as the type of Ciccus. In this he was followed by later authors (Melichar, Ann. Mus. Nat. Hungarici 21: 206, 1924; Schmidt, Stett. Ent. Zeit. 89: 37, 1928; and Evans, Trans. Ent. Soc. London 98: 168, 1947). In the meantime, Stal, Handl. Svenska Vet.-Akad. 8 (1): 65, 1869, established the genus Coelopola and assigned Cicada adspersa Fabriec- ius to it. Ciccus Latreille with genotype Cicada adspersa Fabricius will stand, and the Ciccus Stal must be renamed with Ciccus latreillet Dis- tant as the genotype. Ciccus Latreille equals Coelopola Stal. Family LEDRIDAE Subfamily LepRINAE Tribe Xerophloeini Epiclinata, n. n. Pro Epiclines Amyot and Serville, Histoire na- turelle des insectes: Hémiptéres: 577. 1843. Nec Epiclines Chevrolat, Mag. Zool. 8: 40. 1838. Orthotype: Membracis planata Fabricius. Juny 1952 Family EUSCELIDAE Subfamily EuscELINAE Tribe Euscelini Oxytettigella, n. n. Pro Oxytettix Ribaut, Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Tou- louse 77 : 263. 1942. Nee Oxytetiix Rehn, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila- delphia 81: 482. 1929. © Orthotype: Jassus viridinervis Kirschbaum. Tribe Thamnotettixini Matsumuratettix, n. n. Pro Epitettiz Matsumura, Journ. Coll. Agr. Sap- poro 5: 194. 1914. Nee Epiteitix Hancock, Trans. Ent. Soc. London 1907 : 216. 1907. Orthotype: Hpitettix hiroglyphica Matsumura. Subfamily DELTOCEPHALINAE Tribe Scaphytopini Osbornitettix, n. n. Pro Calotettix Osborn, Bull. Bernice P. Bishop Mus. 114: 247. 1934. Nec Calotettizx Bruner, Biologia Centrali-Ameri- eana, Zool. Orth., 2: 309. 1908. Orthotype: Calotettiz metrosidert Osborn. Rhombopsana, n. n. Pro Rhombopsis Haupt, Bull. Palestine Agr. Exp. Stat. 8: 22. 1927. Nec Rhombopsis Gardner, Maryland Geol. Surv. Upper Cret.: 456. 1916. Orthotype: Rhombopsis virens Haupt. According to Neave, Nomenclator Zoologicus 4: 56, Gardner’s name is an unnecessary new name for Neptunella Meek, but this would not change the status of Haupt’s name. Tribe Balcluthini Lindbergana, n. n. Pro Nesotettix Lindberg, Comm. Biol. 6 (9): 6. 1936. Nec Nesotettiz Holdhaus, Denkschr. Akad. Wiss. Wien 84: 555. 1909. Orthotype: Nesotettix freyi Lindberg. Tribe Macrostelini Marquesitettix, n. n. Pro Marquesia Osborn, Bull. Bishop Mus. 114: 250. 1935. Nec Marquesia Malloch, Bull. Bishop Mus. 98: 222. 1932. Orthotype: Marquesia atra Osborn. Family COELIDIIDAE Subfamily CoELipIINaE Tribe Coelidiini Aletta, n. n. Pro Palicus Stil, Hemiptera Africana 4: 120. 1866. METCALF: NEW NAMES IN HOMOPTERA 229 Nec Palicus Philippi, Jahresb. Ver. Nat. Cassel 2: 11. 1838. Orthotype: Coelidia lineoligera Stal. Nisitrana, n. n. Pro Nisitra Walker, Journ. Linn. Soc. London, Zool., 10: 327. 1870. Nec Nisitra Walker, Cat. Dermapt. Saltat. Brit- ish Mus. 1: 91. 1869. Orthotype: Nisttra telifera Walker. Family IASSIDAE Subfamily Iasstnan Tribe Selenocephalini Discocephalana, n. n. Pro Discocephalus Kirschbaum, Naturk. Nassau 13: 356. 1858. Nec Discocephalus Ehrenberg, Sym. Phys. Phyt. Sign. c. 1831. Orthotype: Discocephalus viridis Kirschbaum. Jahrb. Ver. Doradana, n. n. Pro Dorada Melichar, Berliner Ent. Zeit. 47: 276. 1903. Nec Dorada Jarocki, Zoologia 4: 200. 1822. Orthotype: Dorada lativentris Kuhlgatz and Meli- char. Family IDIOCERIDAE Zaletta, n. n. Pro Macrocerus Evans, Trans. Roy. Soc. South Australia 65: 39. 1941. Nee Macrocerus Motschulsky, Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. Moscow 18 (1): 38. 1845. Orthotype: Macrocerus minutus Evans. Family CICADIDAE Subfamily T1BIcENINAE Tribe Tibicenini Orialella, n. n. Pro Oria Distant, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) 14: 429. 1904. Nec Oria Huebner, Verz. Bekannt. Schmett. (15) 1821: 240. 1821. Orthotype: Oria boliviana Distant. Tribe Fidicinini Dorisiana n. n. Pro Dorisia Delétang, Anal. Soe. Cient. Argentina 88: 63, 65. 1919. Nec Dorisia Moeschler, Verh. Wien 82: 351. 1883. Orthotype: Cicada semilata Walker [= Cicada viridis Olivier (nee Cicada viridis Linné, id est Tettigella viridis Linné)}. zool.-bot. Ges. Family TIBICINIDAE Subfamily T1rBiciInInar Tribe Dazini Procollina, n. n. Pro Collina Distant, Biologia Centrali-Americana 1: 142. 1905. 230 Nee Collina Bonarelli, Boll. Soc. Geol. Ital. 12 (2): 205, 207. 1893. Orthotype: Collina biolleyi Distant. Tribe Carinetini Paranistria, n. n. Pro Tympanistria Stal, Ann. Soc. Ent. France (4) 1: 619. 1862. Nee Tympanistria Reichenbach, Av. Syst. Nat. Text. 1852-53: xxv. Orthotype: T’ympanistria villosa Fabricius. Family MEMBRACIDAE Subfamily DARNINAE Tribe Hebesini Hypheodana, n. n. e Pro Hypheus Stal, Ofv. Vet.-Akad. Foérh. 24: 557. 1867. Nec Hypheus Gistel, Syst. Ins. 1 (1): 131. 1838. Orthotype: Thelia ursus Fairmaire. Subfamily CENTROTINAE Tribe Hebesini Acanthicoides, n. n. Pro Acanthicus Laporte, Ann. Soc. Ent. France 1: 227. 1832. Nec Acanthicus Spix, Pisce. Brazil. 1829: 2. 1829. Orthotype: Acanthicus stollii Laporte. Funkhouser, Genera insectorum 208: 171, states that this genus can not stand because it is based on an immature form. This, however, is contrary to the International Rules of Zoologi- cal Nomenclature, Article 27b. Tribe Uroxiphini Mesocentrina, n. n. Pro Mesocentrus Funkhouser, Philippine Journ. Sci. 18: 681. 1921. Nec Mesocentrus Szepligeti, Termés. Fuzetek 23: 56. 1900. Orthotype: Mesocentrus pyramidatus Funkhouser. Subfamily SMILIINAE Tribe Ceresini Melusinella, n. n. Pro Melusina Stal, Ofv. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Férh. 24: 552. 1867. Nee Melusina Meigen, N. Class. Mouches: 19. 1800. Orthotype: Ceresa nervosa Fairmaire. Tribe Telamonini Maturnaria, n.n. Pro Maturna Stal, Ofv. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Férh. 24: 555. 1867. Nec Maturna Koch, Uebers. Arachnidensyst. 5: 65. 1850. Orthotype: Oxygonia ephippigera Fairmaire. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 7 Superfamily *FULGOROIDEA * Mecynostomata, n. n. - Pro * Mecynostoma Brongniart, Rech. Hist. Ins. Foss. Temps Prim. 451. 1893. Nec Mecynostoma Graff, Monogr. Turbell. 1: 237. 1882. Orthotype: * Mecynostoma dorhni Brongniart. Family *FULGORIDAE * Nyktalos, n. n. Pro * Nyctophylax Scudder, Foss. Ins. 2: 279. 1890. Nec Nyctophylax Fitzinger, Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-nat. Cl., 42: 390. 1860. Orthotype: * Nyctophylax uhlert Scudder. NAMES TO BE RESTORED Cyrtoisa Fitch, Ann. Rep. State Cab. Nat. Hist. 4:49. 1851. Logotype: Cyrtoisa fenestrata Fitch. This name was spelled this way by Fitch originally. We have no way of knowing that this is a misspelling, even though Fitch gives the derivation as from the Greek xupros, curved or hump-backed. He may have been familiar with Perris’s Cyrtosia, Ann. Soc. Ent. France 8: 54, 1839, and deliberately reversed the two letters in order to avoid a homonym. Cyrtolobus Goding, Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. 19: 257, 1892, was proposed as a new name for Cyrtoisa [sic] Fitch (nec Cyrtosia Perris). Corrections in the original spelling should be avoided as indicated below under the genus Pseuwdeoscarta. Cyrtolobus Goding is therefore a synonym of Cyrtovsa Fitch. Errhomenus Fieber, Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien 16: 501. 1866. Haplotype: Errhomenus brachypterus Fieber. Puton, Catalogue des hémipterés de la faune Paléarctique, ed. 3: 79, 1886, lists Hrrhomenellus Puton and places Hrrhomenus Fieber (1866) as a synonym, and this has been followed by most subsequent authors. However, as I can find no reason for this, I restore Hrrhomenus Fieber (1866). Euides Fieber, Verh. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien 16: 519. 1866. Logotype: Delphax basilinea German. Puton, Catalogue des Hémiptéres de la faune Paléarctique, ed. 3: 72, 1886, lists Hucdella with Huides Fieber (1866) as a synonym. I can find no reason for this unless Hwides was confused * This denotes fossil forms. Juny 1952 with Hueides Huebner, Verz. bekannt. Schmett. 1816: 11. I therefore restore Huides Fieber. Eueides Kirkaldy, Entomologist.37: 175, 1904, will also be a synonym. Harmonides Kirkaldy, Entomologist 35: 316. 1902. Logotype: Darnis reticulata Fabricius (= Par- mula bistrigata Fairmaire). This name was proposed to replace Parmula Fairmaire, Ann. Soc. Ent. France (2) 4: 490, 1847, nec Parmula Heyden, Isis von Oken 1825: 589. Two years later Kirkaldy, Entomologist 37: 279, 1904, proposed Boethoos a new name, for Parmula Fairmaire. Since Harmonides is the earlier name and, so far as I can discover, has never been used before, it should be restored. Ophiola Edwards, Ent. Monthly Mag. 58: 206, 207. 1922. 1949. Logotype: Cicada striatula Fallen: Oman, Mem. Ent. Soc. Washington 3: 152, 1949, makes this a synonym of Scleroracus Van Duzee based on Van Duzee’s statement Can. Ent. 26: 136, 1894, that there is a specimen in the U. S. National Museum labeled Scleroracus anthracinus Uhler. I refuse to accept museum labels, either published or unpublished, as hav- ing any standing in nomenclature whatsoever. This, apparently, was Van Duzee’s idea, as he HARTMAN: MARINE ANNELIDS described a new species, Athysanus anthracinus, based on specimens from Iowa from Prof. Her- bert Osborn and from Colorado from Prof. C. P. Gillette, Van Duzee, Can. Ent. 26: 137, 1894, says: “Prof. Osborn’s specimen came labelled Conogonus gagates, Ashm., and in the National Museum is an example labelled Scleroracus an- thracinus, Uhler. I have adopted Mr. Uhler’s specific name as very appropriate for this deep black little Jassid, but I can find no characters to separate it generically from Athysanus.”’ I could argue from this that the genus should be called Conogonus, as this name on a museum label has line priority over Scleroracus and that the species name gagates Ashmead would re- place anthracinus Van Duzee. Pseudeoscarta Lallemand, Journ. Federated Ma- lay States Mus. 17: 375. 1933. Haplotype: Pseudeoscarta pendleburyi Lallemand. As listed by Neave, Nomenclator Zoologicus 3: 1003, Pseudoscarta is an unnecessary correc- tion for Pseudeoscarta Lallemand (1933). Lalle- mand was apparently establishing a false Hos- carta, not a false Scarta; hence the elimination of the o at the end of Pseudo to avoid three vowels following one another. Later Lallemand, Mem. Inst. Royal Sci. Nat. Belgique (2) 32: 40, 54, 1949, wrote Pseudoeoscarta. ZOOLOGY .—The marine annelids of the United States Navy Antarctic Expedition, 1947-481 OtGA Hartman, Allan Hancock Foundation, University of South- ern California. (Communicated by Fenner A. Chace, Jr.) A small though interesting collection of polychaetous annelids was collected by Comdr. David C. Nutt, USNR, during the United States Navy Antarctic Expedition, 1947-48. Twenty-nine species, including one new, Octobranchus phyllocomus, in 15 families are represented. Most of the speci- mens come from Marguerite Bay; others are from Ross Island, Knox coast, and vicinity of Peter I Island. Depths range from shore to 115 fathoms. The collections with type specimen are deposited in the United States National Museum; a partial duplicate set is at the Allan Hancock Foundation. The illus- trations were prepared by Anker Petersen. I am indebted to the Administration of the 1 Contribution 87 from the Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, Calif. Allan Hancock Foundation for permission to examine these materials. Family PoLyNompaE Barrukia cristata (Willey) Gattyana cristata Willey, 1902, p. 268, pl. 44, figs. 1-4. Barrukia cristata Bergstrom, 1916, pp. 297-299, pl. 5, figs. 7-9, 14. Localities—Marguerite Bay, 40 fathoms, water temperature 30°F., Feb. 22, 1948 (1 specimen); 85-105 fathoms, water temperature 30.2°F., Feb. 19, 1948 (1 specimen). Harmothoé spinosa Kinberg 386; Berg- 6, pl. 3, Harmothoé spinosa Winberg, 1855, p. strém, 1916, pp. 284-286, pl. 2, figs. 1-4. figs. 5, Localities —Marguerite Bay, 35 fathoms, 232 Feb. 20, 1948 (2 specimens), 40 fathoms, Feb. 22, 1948 (4 specimens). Peter I Island, 30 fathoms, Feb. 15, 1948 (7 specimens). Off Point ¥13 Island, Knox coast, 66°31’ S8., 110°26’ E. in 110 fathoms, Jan. 19, 1948 (1 specimen). Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 58 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (about 10 specimens). Notes.—Some specimens are very dark on both sides of the body, with parapodia and setae pale; others are checkered instead of dark. These variations agree with some described and shown by Ehlers (1913, pl. 26, colored). Harmothoé magellanica (McIntosh) Lagisca magellanica McIntosh, 1885, pp. 82-83, pl. 13, fig. 5, pl. 18, figs. 3, 4, pl. 7a, figs. 1, 2. Harmothoé magellanica Bergstrém, 1916, pp. 280— 282, pl. 4, figs. 1-3. Localities.—Marguerite Bay, 35 fathoms, Feb. 20, 1948 (8 specimens); 40 fathoms, Feb. 22, 1948 (about 9 specimens). Polyeunoa laevis McIntosh Polyeunoa laevis McIntosh, 1885, pp. 76-77, pl. 12, fig. 2, pl. 20, fig. 8, pl. 7a, figs. 12, 13; Bergstrom, 1916, pp. 288-291, pl. 3, fig. 7. Localities—Marguerite Bay, 35 fathoms, Feb. 20, 1948 (1 specimen); 40 fathoms, asso- ciated with arborescent aleyonarians, Feb. 22, 1948 (2 specimens). Family PHYLLODOCIDAE Anaitides patagonica (Kinberg) Carobia patagonica Kinberg, 1865, p. 242. Anaitides patagonica Bergstrém, 1914, pp. 147-149, fig. 46. Locality— Marguerite Bay, 35 fathoms, Feb. 20, 1948 (1 specimen). Genetyllis polyphylla (Ehlers) Phyllodoce polyphylla Ehlers, 1897, pp. 26-28, pl. 1, figs. 14-19. Genetyllis polyphylla Berystrom, 1914, pp. 161-163, fig. 55. Locality.—Marguerite Bay, 35 fathoms, Feb. 20, 1948 (1 specimen). Family SYLLIDAE Trypanosyllis gigantea (McIntosh) Syllis gigantea McIntosh, 1885, p. 193, pl. 30, figs. 1-3, pl. 33, fig. 4, pl. 10A, fig. 14, pl. 24A, fig. 7. Trypanosyllis gigantea Ehlers, 1901, p. 85, pl. 6, figs. 11-16. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 7 Locality Marguerite Bay, 35 fathoms, Feb. 20, 1948 (1 specimen). Syllis brachycola Ehlers Syllis brachycola Ehlers, 1897, p. 38, pl. 2, figs. 46— 47; Monro, 1930, p. 100, figs. 33 a-b. Locality —Marguerite Bay, 40 fathoms, Feb. 22, 1948 (about 15 specimens). Notes.—Some have a pigmented pattern on the dorsum of anterior 15 to 20 segments; there are dark, transverse, segmental bands alternat- ing with similar though medially broken, inter- segmental bars. Dorsal cirri are short, with 15 to 20 articles. Composite setae are distally bi- dentate. Family NEPHTYIDAE Aglaophamus macroura (Schmarda) Nephthys macroura Schmarda, 1861, p. 91, 3 figs. Aglaophamus macroura Hartman, 1950, pp. 118-120. Localities.—65°25’ S., 101°13’ E., 100 fath- oms, Jan. 14, 1948 (3 specimens). Peter I Island, 30 fathoms, Feb. 15, 1948 (1 specimen). Family NEREIDAE Nereis kerguelensis McIntosh Nereis kerguelensis McIntosh, 1885, p. 225, pl. 35, figs. 10-12, pl. 16A, figs. 17-18; Ehlers, 1897, p. 65, pl. 4, figs. 81-83. Locality Marguerite Bay, 35 fathoms, Feb. 20, 1948 (1 specimen), 40 fathoms, Feb. 22, 1948 (1 specimen). Family LuMBRINERIDAE Lumbrineris magalhaensis (Kinberg) Lumbriconereis magalhaensis Kinberg, 1865, p. 568; 1910, p. 47, pl. 18, fig. 35. Lumbrineris magalhaensis Hartman, 1948, p. 93, pl. 14, figs. 1-3. Locality.—Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 50 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (1 specimen). Family ORBINIIDAE Scoloplos (Leodamas) marginatus (Ehlers) Aricia marginata Ehlers, 1897, p. 95, pl. 6, figs. 150-156. Locality— Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 50 and 58 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (about 12 specimens). Family OPHELIIDAE Travisia lithophila Kinberg Travisia lithophila Kinberg, 1866, p. 256; 1910, p. 66, pl. 25, fig. 4. JuLY 1952 Locality.— 65°25’ S., 101°13’ E., 100 fathoms, Jan 14, 1948 (1 specimen). Ammotrypane gymnopyge Ehlers Ammotrypane gymnopyge Ehlers, 1908, p. 118, pl. 17, figs. 1-4. ; Locality.—Peter I Island, 30 fathoms, Feb. 15, 1948 (6 specimens). Family FLABELLIGERIDAE Flabelligera mundata Gravier Flabelligera mundata Gravier, 1907, pp. 37-89, pl. 4, figs. 31-32. Localities. —Marguerite Bay, 115 fathoms, Feb. 18, 1948 (1 specimen), 35 fathoms, Feb. 20, 1948 (7 specimens), 40 fathoms, Feb. 22, 1948 (2 specimens). Family ScALIBREGMIDAE Oncoscolex dicranochaetus Schmarda Oncoscolex dicranochaetus Schmarda, 1861, p. 55, 4 figs., pl. 26, fig. 206. Locality — Marguerite Bay, 40 fathoms, Feb 22, 1948 (1 specimen). Family AMPHARETIDAE Amphicteis gunneri antarctica Hessle Amphicteis gunneri antarctica Hessle, 1917, pp. 116-117, pl. 1, fig. 10. Localities.— 66°35’ S., 90°40’ E., 150 fathoms Dec. 30, 1947 (1 specimen). 65°25’ S., 101°13’ E., 100 fathoms, Jan. 14, 1948 (1 specimen). Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 58 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (1 specimen). Peter I Island, 30 fathoms, Feb. 15, 1948 (14 specimens). Family TrIcHOBRANCHIDAE Trichobranchus glacialis antarcticus Hessle Trichobranchus glacialis antarcticus Hessle, 1917, p. 132. Locality —Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 50 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (1 specimen). Notes.—There are three pairs of filiform branchiae that resemble one another. The peri- stomial ring is plain; it lacks eyespots. The body cavity is crowded with ova. Octobranchus phyllocomus, n. sp. Figs. 1-12 Type.—U.S.N.M. no. 23771. HARTMAN: MARINE ANNELIDS 233 Locality.—Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 50 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (1 specimen). The single specimen is posteriorly incomplete; it measures 20 mm long and 3.3 mm wide in front at the postbranchial region of the body. It consists of the head region, 16 thoracic and 6 abdominal setigerous segments. Preserved the body is pale or white, except for the dark eye spots that are strewn on the peristomial collar. The most striking feature concerns the foliaceous character of the branchiae, especially the second pair (Fig. 5); they resemble those in the ampharetid genus Phyllocomus Grube; hence the specific name. The thoracic uncini are long- handled, and in other respects this individual agrees with members of the family Tricho- branchidae. The oral tentacles are very numerous and filiform except for their tips, which are longi- tudinally grooved and somewhat spatulate. They form a dense tuft at the anterior end of the body. They are of varying length; the long- est are on the ventral, the shortest on the dorsal side. The membrane to which the ten- tacles are attached is U-shaped around the oral aperture; it is completely covered except for a pair of free lateral lobes at the sides of the mouth. The lateral lobes (Fig. 1) of the thorax con- sist of four well-developed pairs. All are con- tinued across the ventrum as smooth-margined, . collar membranes. The first pair is the smallest; it is ventrolateral in position and largely con- cealed by the much larger second pair. Its base can be followed dorsally to that of the first branchial pair. The second lateral lobes are the largest and most prolonged in their lateral parts; they extend across the ventrum as the longest collar membrane; their upper bases can be traced in line with the bases of the second branchial pairs. The third lateral lobes resemble the sec- ond pair but are somewhat smaller and slightly more ventral; their bases are in line with the bases of the third branchial pairs. The fourth lateral lobes are increasingly smaller and slightly ventrolateral in position; the expanded upper part is below the first notopodial fascicle and its base in line with that of the fourth branchial pair. The peristomial base is strewn with many dark eyespots, most numerous at the sides of the body; the eyes are not seen unless the large 234 lateral lobes of the second pair are pushed to one side. Branchiae are dorsal, number four pairs, and are inserted between the bases of the lateral lobes. All are similar in that each consists of a basal foliaceous part terminating distally in a slender filament. The first pair is inserted far in front of and within the others; its proportions are shown in Fig. 4. The second pair is lateral- most; it is broadest and subquadrate in its basal part (Fig. 5). The third (Fig. 6) and fourth (Fig. 7) pairs are similar to each other, but the third is the larger and terminates in a longer filament. Striking features of all branchial pais are the bilimbate character of the basal parts and the richly branched circulatory vessels which can be seen through the membranous epithelium. There are 16 thoracic setigerous segments. The first notopodia are smallest and slender- conical in shape; they are provided with a bundle of slender setae directed distally. The second notopodia are larger and heavier than the first; farther back they come to be com- pressed, triangular processes (Fig. 2) and have transverse series of setae between their presetal and postsetal lobes. Thoracic setae consist of about seven larger, broader and eight slenderer, shorter ones in a single transverse series. Thoracic uncini are first present from the fifth setigerous segment, at first arranged in a short, transverse series; farther back the row increases in length. The uncini (Fig. 8) are of a single kind and number 15 to 25 in a row. Each consists of a long handle that terminates distally in a fang surmounted by a rostrate series of transverse ridges (Figs. 9, 10). Only a few abdominal segments are present on the single specimen. Abdominal parapodia are lateral in position; each is in the form of a rectangular plaque (Fig. 3) with the uncini ar- ranged in a single series at the outer distal mar- gin. The uncini number about 30 in a row. They are all similar, avicular, lack a handle. Seen individually (Fig. 11) each consists of a thin subcircular plate with a major fang surmounted by two transverse rows of smaller teeth, the middle one with about five teeth, the distal one with about eight smaller ones (Fig. 12). The genus Octobranchus Marion and Bobret- zky is a group of few species (see Hessle, 1917, p. 134); they include O. antarcticus Monro (1936, pp. 185-187, fig. 33) from south Georgia, JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 7 O. japonicus Hessle (1917, pp. 1384-135, pl. 1, figs. 13-15) from Japan and O. lingulatus (Grube) (1863, pp. 56-57, pl. 6, fig. 1) from the Mediterranean Sea. In these the branchiae are said to be filiform (Monro, 19386, p. 185). O. phyllocomus departs from the other species in that the second pair of branchiae is conspicu- ously foliaceous. O. antarcticus Monro (1936, pp. 185-186) is known from a single, imperfect individual from Schollaert Channel, Palmer Archipelago, 278- 500 meters, mud bottom. The tentacles and all except a fourth pair of branchiae were lost when the original description was made. The lateral lobes resemble those of the present species but are less developed in their lateral parts. The first notopodia are on the last branchial seg- ment and uncini begin on the fourth setigerous segment. Family TEREBELLIDAE Terebella ehlersi Gravier Terebella ehlersi Gravier, 1907, pp. 47-50, text figs. 30-81, plate figs. 45-46. Localities—Marguerite Bay, 385 fathoms, Feb. 20, 1948 (1 specimen); 40 fathoms, Feb. 22, 1948 (several specimens). Notes.—The greatest length is about 70 mm. The peristomial ring shows no eye spots, but they are supposedly present (Hessle, 1917, p. 190). Notosetal fascicles of pointed setae are present on many (to 47) or fewer segments; the fascicles decrease in size going back and gradu- ally disappear on 20 or more posterior segments. Ventral gland shields occur on 15 segments. There are no lateral lappets. A prominent nephridial papilla is present on each side, be- tween the bases of the first and second branchiae. Notosetae are conspicuously winged at their distal ends. The tubes are thick, more or less mud-walled to irregularly covered with detritus. Pista corrientis McIntosh Pista corrientis McIntosh, 1885, pp. 457-458, pl. 48, fig. 11, pl. 27A, fig. 35; Hessle, 1917, pp. 158- 159, pl. 2, figs. 2-3. Locality.—Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 58 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (1 specimen). Lanicides vayssierei (Gravier) Terebella (Phyzelia) vayssieret Gravier, 1911, pp. 130-133, pl. 10, figs. 121-123, pl. 11, figs. 134-135. Lanicides vayssiert Hessle, 1917, pp. 166-167. HARTMAN: MARINE ANNELIDS 7 (Reductions in magnifications are made for a base line measuring 54 inches.) Fias. 1-12. Octobranchus phyllocomus, n. sp. (holotype: U. S. N. M. no. 23771): 1, Anterior end seen from the right side, X7; 2, fourteenth thoracic notopodium, X49; 3, third abdominal parapodium, X49; 4, first branchia, X17.4; 5, second branchia, 17.4; 6, third branchia, X17.4; 7, fourth branchia, X17.4; 8, thoracic uncinus, X44.3; 9, distal end of thoracic uncinus, seen from front, X1856; 10, distal end of thoracie uncinus, seen from side, X1856; 11, abdominal uncinus, seen from side, 2935; 12, abdominal uncinus, seen from front, X 2985. 236 Localities.—Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 50 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (several specimens); 58 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (many specimens). Marguerite Bay, 35 fathoms, Feb. 20, 1948 (2 specimens); 40 fathoms, Feb. 22, 1948 (many specimens in tubes). Notes.—This is a large species and forms aggregated masses of tubes. Length of the body is 75 mm or more and width is 8 mm. The tubes are considerably larger, to 120 mm long and about 13 mm across; they are composed of a smooth cylindrical lining covered over with fine mud; some have needlelike sponge spicules and other extraneous materials interwoven in the outer layers so that the tube appears irregularly spinous. Conspicuous characters of the species are the two pairs of dendritically branched branchiae, the single pair of large lateral lappets that occur on the second branchial segment, and the two pairs of nephridial papillae present on the posterior side of notopodia 3 and 4. Thoracic segments number 17 setigerous ones. Some of the specimens have the redia stage of a digenetic trematode in the posterior coelomic spaces. Leaena ?wandelensis Gravier Leaena wandelensis Gravier, 1907, pp. 50-52, pl. 5, figs. 47-48, text figs. 32-34; Benham, 1927, pp. 107-111, pl. 2, figs. 61-69, pl. 6, figs. 189-190. Localities.—Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 58 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (1 specimen with tube). 65°25’ 8., 101°13’ E., 100 fathoms, Jan. 14, 1948 (1 specimen in tube). Notes.—The larger tube measures about 80 mm long and has many needlelike sponge spicules incorporated with fine detrital materials in its external walls. The smaller tube has pro- portionately more sponge spicules. Both tubes are long, cylindrical, very slender, and closely fitting the occupant. The thorax has numerous eye spots, limited largely to the sides. There are no branchiae. The oculate area is concealed by a pair of large lateral flaps that extend forward from the next segment. The specific identity is in some doubt since the uncini differ from those originally shown. They are avicular with a main fang that is very large, surmounted by a fang of smaller size and this by several smaller den- ticles in rostrate arrangement. In this respect they are more nearly like those of Leaena areni- lega Ehlers (1918, p. 564, pl. 44, fig. 13) from Kaiser Wilhelm-II-Land, a species which Ben- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 42, No. 7 ham (1927) regards conspecific with L. wandelen- sis Gravier. Thelepus cincinnatus (Fabricius) Amphitrite cincinnata Fabricius, 1780, pp. 286-287. Thelepus cincinnatus Hessle, 1917, pp. 212-214 (with synonymy). Localities.—Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 58 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (1 specimen). Marguerite Bay, 35 fathoms, Jan. 20, 1948 (2 specimens); 40 fathoms, Jan. 22, 1948 (many specimens). Notes.—The tubes resemble those of Lanicides vayssveret (above) but have a tougher lining and are proportionately slenderer. The surface of the body is coarsely granular owing to the pres- ence of epithelial glands. Notopodial setal tufts are present on many segments and continued back to near the posterior end. Polycirrus kerguelensis (McIntosh) Ereutho kerguelensis McIntosh, 1885, p. 474, pl. 28A, figs. 20, 21. Polycirrus kerguelensis Hessle, 1917, pp. 221-224. Locality— Marguerite Bay, 40 fathoms, Feb. 22, 1948 (1 specimen). z Notes.—The single individual is about 18 mm long; it has 11 thoracic setigerous segments, as Hessle found, not 13 as described by McIntosh. There are three long, digitate nephridial lobes on each side of setigerous segments 4, 5, and 6. Family SABELLIDAE Euchone pallida Ehlers Euchone pallida Ehlers, 1908, p. 159, pl. 21, figs. 10-15, pl. 22, figs. 1-4. Localities.—Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 50 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (1 specimen) ; 58 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (3 specimens with tubes). Potamilla antarctica (Kinberg) Laonome antarctica Kinberg, 1867, p. 354. Potamilla antarctica Gravier, 1907, pp. 59-62, figs. 38-43. Localities. —Off Burton Rock, 66°15’ S., 95°20’ E., 43 fathoms, Jan. 3, 1948 (1 specimen). Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 58 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (several specimens in tubes). Off Point «13 Island, Knox coast, 66°31’ S., 110°26’ E., 110 fathoms, Jan. 19, 1948 (1 specimen). Marguerite Bay, 35 fathoms, Feb. 20, 1948 (1 specimen) ; 40 fathoms, Feb. 22, 1948 (1 specimen). Notes.—Some of the larger individuals meas- Juny 1952 ure about 160 mm long. The tubes are trans- lucent, horny, and cylindrical and measure about 200 mm long at most; they closely sur- round the occupant and taper posteriorly to a conical closed end. In the larger specimens the pygidial lobe is pale white, with few or no dark eye spots; in smaller, presumably younger in- dividuals of the same species the terminal lobe has many irregularly strewn reddish or dark eye spots. The thorax has eight setigerous and the abdomen 100 or more segments. The tentac- ular radioles are very long, numerous, 25 to 30 on a side; each terminates distally in a long, smooth tip that surpasses the length of the in- dividual filaments. The thoracic collar lacks dorsal lobes; it has lateral lobes and long, oblique ventral ends. Thoracic notosetae are of 2 kinds; the superior ones are longer and slenderer than the abruptly different, mucronated inferior ones. Family SERPULIDAE Serpula vermicularis narconensis Baird Serpula narconensis Baird, 1865, p. 21, pl. 2, figs. Uo & Serpula vermicularis Gravier, 1911, pp. 147-148, pl. 12, figs. 170-175. Localities. —66°35’ S., 90°40’ E., 150 fathoms, Dec. 30, 1947 (several tubes). Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 58 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (many tubes). Off Point #13 Island, Knox coast, 110 fathoms, Jan. 19, 1948 (2 tubes). Marguerite Bay, 115 fathoms, Feb. 18, 1948 (tube frag- ments) ; 85-105 fathoms, Feb. 19, 1948 (several tubes); 35 fathoms, Feb. 19-20, 1948 (many tubes) ; 40 fathoms, Feb. 22, 1948 (several speci- mens with tubes). Spirorbis spp. Locality.—Off Cape Royds, Ross Island, 58 fathoms, Jan. 29, 1948 (several specimens). Notes.—There are several coiled tubes, ad- herent to those of Serpula vermicularis nar- conensis (above) and algal strands. The aperture is sinistral; the upper surface has three longi- tudinal ridges. The individual coils measure | or 2 mm across. REFERENCES Barrp, W. Description of several new species and varieties of tubicolous Annelides, in the col- lection of the British Museum. Journ. Linn. Soe. Zool. London 8: 10-22, 2 pls. 1865. Benuam, W. B. Polychaeta. British Antarctic Terra Nova Expedition, 1910. Nat. Hist. Rep. Zool. 7: 47-182, 6 pls. 1927. HARTMAN: MARINE ANNELIDS 237 Berestrom, E. Zur Systematik des Polychaeten Familie der Phyllodociden. Zool. Bidr. Uppsala 3: 37-224, 81 figs. 1914. Die Polynoiden des schwedischen Siidpolar. Expedition 1901-1903. Ibid. 4: 249-304, pls. 2-5, 2 text figs. 1916. Euuers, H. Polychaeten. Hamburger Magalhaen- nischen Sammelreise, 148 pp., 9 pls. 1897. Die Polychaeten des magellanischen und chilenischen Strandes. Festschr. Ges. Wiss. Gottingen, 232 pp., 25 pls. Berlin, 1901. Wissenschaftliche Ergebnisse der deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition auf dem Dampfer Valdivia 1898-1899 16(1): 168 pp., 23 pls. 1908. Die Polychaeten-Sammlungen der deut- schen Siidpolar-Expedition 1901-03. Deutsche Sudpolar-Exped. 13(4): 397-598, pls. 26-46. 1913. Fasricius, O. Fauna Groenlandica, xvi + 452 pp. Hafniae et Lipsiae, 1780. GRAVIER, C. Sur les Annélides polychétes recueil- lies par VBxpedition Antarctique francaise, 75 pp., 5 pls., 46 text figs. Paris, 1907. Annélides polychétes recueillies par la se- conde expedition antarctique francaise (1908- 1910). Deuxieme Expedition Antarctique Fran- Gaise 1: 165 pp., 12 pls. 1911. GruBE, A. HE. Beschreibung neuer oder wenig bekannter Anneliden. Beitrag: Zahlreiche Gat- tungen. Arch. Naturg. Berlin 29(1): 37-69, 3 pls. 1863. Harrman, Ouea. The marine annelids erected by Kinberg with notes on some other types in the Swedish State Museum. Ark. Zool. Stockholm 42A : 1-137, 18 pls. 1948. Polychaetous Annelids: Goniadidae, Gly- ceridae, Nephtyidae. Allan Hancock Pacific Exped. 15: 1-181, 19 pls., 3 text figs. 1950. HessueE, C. Zur Kenntnis der terebellomorphen Polychaeten. Zool. Bidr. Uppsala 5: 39-258. 5 pls., 66 text figs. 1917. Krnpere, J. G. H. Nya sldgten och arter af An- nelider. Ofv. Vet.-Akad. Stockholm 12: 381- 388. 1855. . Annulata nova. Ibid. 21: 559-574. 1865; 22: 167-179 and 239-258. 1866; 23 : 337-357. 1867. Kongliga Svenska Fregatten Kugenies Resa omkring jorden under befdél af C.A. Virgin dren 1851-53. Zoologi, 3 Annulater, 78 pp., 29 pls. 1910. McInrosu, W. C. Report on the Annelida Poly- chaeta collected by H.M.S. Challenger during the years 1873-76. Challenger Reports 12: 1- 554, pls. 1-55 and 1A-89A. 1885. Monro, C. C. A. Polychaete worms. Discovery Reports 2: 1-222, 91 figs. 1930. Polychaete worms. IT. Ibid. 12: 59-198, 34 figs. 1986. Scumarpa, L. Neue wirbellose Thiere beobachtet und gesammelt auf einer Reise um die Erde 1853 bis 1857 1(2): 1-164, 22 pls. Leipzig, 1861. Wiuury, A. Polychaeta. Report on the collections of natural history made in the Antarctic regions during the voyage of the Southern Cross 12: 262-2838, pls. 41-46. London, 1902. 238 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 7 NEMATOLOGY .—A new roundworm, Capillaria pirangae (Nematoda: Trichinel- lidae), from the scarlet tanager, Piranga erythromelas. CHARLES G. DURBIN, U.S. Bureau of Animal Industry. (Communicated by E. W. Price.) Two males and one mature female nema- todes of the genus Capillaria were recovered from the small intestine of a scarlet tanager, Piranga erythromelas, caught at the Agri- cultural Research Center, Beltsville, Md. An examination of the specimens of Capil- laria in the U.S. National Museum Helmin- thological Collection showed no specimens that had been obtained from the scarlet tanager, and a review of the pertinent litera- ture (Cram, 1925; Teixera de Freitas and Luis de Almeida, 1934, 1935; Madsen, 1945, 1951; Lopez-Neyra, 1947) shows that, ex- cept for Read’s (1949) report, there are no records of any capillarids having been col- lected from this host. Read (loc. cit.) re- ported finding two immature female capil- larids in the small intestine of a scarlet tanager at Madison and Shawano, Wis. He was unable to determine the species because the specimens were immature. However, a study of Read’s description and illustrations shows clearly that the capillarids collected from the scarlet tanager in Wisconsin differ from those that form the subject of the present note. Capillaria pirangae, n. sp. Description.—Cuticle transversely — striated Lateral bacillary lines present. Mouth simple. Male—13 mm long, maximum width 55 up. Spicule smooth with a blunt tip, 1.55 mm long by 15 « wide; spicule sheath covered with minute spines. Lateral caudal alae absent. The tail ends in a bilobed membranous bursa, each lobe sup- portedby a stout ray (Fig. 1, B). Cloaca sub- terminal. Female.—18 mm long by 50 » wide just anterior to the vulva; maximum width 65 uw. No prevulvar notch or cuticular bosses present. Well-developed funnel shaped vulvar appendage present (Fig. 1, A). Anus subterminal. Vulva divides the body 1:2.2. Eges, 60-65 u long; 25-80 » wide; outer shell with longitudinal folds (Fig. 1, A). Host.—Piranga erythromelas. Location.—Small intestine. Locality.—Beltsville, Md. Type specimens.—Female, holotype; male, allotype U. 8S. N. M. Helm. Coll. no. 46938. Remarks.—The female most closely resembles C. quiscali Read, 1949, but differs from it in the shape of the vulvar appendage. In C. quiscali the base of the vulvar appendage is long and elevated whereas in C. pirangae the base of the appendage is narrow. The surface of the eggs of C. quiscali are roughly mammiulated whereas those of C. ptrangae have longitudinal folds. The male bears Fre. 1.—Capillaria pirangae,n. sp.; A, Female, region of vulva, egg in uterus; B, male, tail. JuLY 1952 LEVITON: NEW some resemblance to C. collaris (v. Linstow, 1873), but differs from it in the shape of the spicule and the absence of a spine on its tip. REFERENCES Cram, Evorss B. Species of Capillaria parasitic in the upper digestive tract of birds. U. 8. Dept. Agr. Techn. Bull. 516: 27 pp., pls. 1936. Loprz-Neyra, C. R. Generos y especies nuevas 0 mal conocidas de Capillariinae. Rev. Iber. Parasitol. 7 (2): 191-238. 1947. Manpsen, H. The species of Capillaria (Nematodes, Trichinelloidea) parasitic in the digestive tract of Danish gallinaceous and anatine game birds, with a revised list of species of Capillaria in birds. Danish Rev. Game Biol. 1 (1): 1-112, 21 fig. 1945. HERPETOLOGY.—A new Philippine PHILIPPINE SNAKE 239 . Notes on the species of Capillaria Zeder 1800 known from gallinaceous birds. Journ. Parasitol. 37 (3): 257-265. 1951. Reap, Crark, P. Studies on North American hel- minths of the genus Capillaria Zeder, 1800 (Nematoda): IIIl. Capillarids from the lower digestive tract of North American birds. Journ. Parasitol. 35: (38): 240-249. 1949. TerxeRA DE FRetrAs,J.F.,and LiInspr ALMeErpA, J. Sobre os Nematoda Capillariinae parasitas de esophago e papo de aves. Mem. Inst. Oswaldo Cruz 30 (2): 123-156. 1935. O genero ‘“Capillaria’? Zeder 1800 (‘““Nematoda—Trichuroidea”’) e as Capillario- ses nas aves domesticas. Rev. Dept. Nac. Prod. Animal Brasil 2 (4, 5, 6): 310-363, pls. 1935. snake of the genus Calamaria. ALAN E. Leviton, Natural History Museum, Stanford University. (Communicated by Doris M. Cochran.) Several years ago while identifying the snakes collected by Dr. Albert W. Herre during his Philippine Expedition of 1940, I noted a specimen belonging to the genus Calamaria that was not identifiable with any previously described species, and ap- peared to be a new form. I decided not to describe the new snake immediately but to wait until it would be possible to review the entire genus, rather than add to the existing confusion. Plans were outlined to study the genus as a whole, but inasmuch as comple- tion of a generic review must now be post- poned because of inadequacy of available material, it seems best to publish a descrip- tion of this snake without further delay. Calamaria zamboangensis, n. sp. Holotype.—SU reptile register no. 13476, male, collected by Dr. Albert W. Herre, at Zam- boanga, Mindanao Island, Philippine Islands, September 2, 1940, during the Herre Oriental Expedition of 1940. Paratype—SU 18477; same data as holotype except as otherwise mentioned. Diagnosis.—This species can be distinguished from all previously described forms of Calamaria by the combination of the following character- istics: Mental shield not in contact with anterior genials, diameter of eye less than its distance to mouth, frontal only twice as broad as supra- ocular, preocular and postocular shields present, anal entire. C. zamboangensis is distinguished from albopunctata by a considerably lower ventral count (201-203 V. in zamboangensis, 247 V. in albopunctata), and from quinquetaeniata by a higher ventral and lower subcaudal count (zgam- boangensis, 201-203 V., 12-13 C.; quinquetaenrata, 178 V., 26 C.). It differs from egregia in the smaller proportions of the frontal shield width vs. supra- ocular shield width, the smaller number of sub- caudal shields, five supralabials, and by the sub- equal size of the third and fourth supralabials (egregia has the frontal shield three times the width of the supraocular, 16 subcaudal shields, 6 supralabials, and the fourth upper labial smaller than the third); and from brachyura by the smaller eye and different coloration. Description —Diameter of the eye distinctly less than its distance from the mouth; rostral broader than deep; internasals absent. The frontal is slightly longer than wide, twice as broad as the supraocular, somewhat shorter than the parietals. There are five supralabials, the third and fourth entering the eye and subequal in size. The first and second upper labials in con- tact with the prefrontal, the fifth with the parietal. Nostril in a small nasal; loreal absent; 1 pre- ocular and 1 postocular; temporals absent. The mental shield is not in contact with the anterior chin shields, the first infralabial meeting its fel- low behind the mental. There are five intra- 240 labials, the first three in contact with the ante- rior chin-shield; the posterior chin-shields smaller than and in contact with the anterior shields. Ventrals 201-203 (holotype 201); subcaudals 12-13 (holotype 12); anal single; scales in 13-13- 13 rows. Fic. 1—Holotype of Calamaria zamboangensis, S.U. no. 13476. (Photograph by Antenor L. de Carvalho and the author.) Coloration (specimen preserved in formalin and then in alcohol).—The ground color is light brown; there are six dark brown stripes dorsally formed by a series of coalescing spots. These stripes are distributed as follows: One between the first and second scale rows, one on the third row, one between the fourth and fifth rows. Immediately behind the head and extending for about one fi_th of the body length there are two additional stripes (longitudinal series of spots), one on the sixth scale row and one on the eighth row, but these fade out rapidly on the body. The head is more or less uniform brown, this color extending onto the upper edges of the supra- labials; the remainder of the supralabials are yellowish brown. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, NO. 7 Ventrally the throat and anterior portion of the body are uniform light yellow-brown. About one-fifth of the body length posterior to the head the inner edges of the ventrals become darker brown while the outer edges remain a light color. This pattern extends onto the tail. There is a median dark line running down the length of the tail. Measurements (holotype)—Total length 248 mm, snout to vent 237 mm, tail length 11 mm. Remarks.—The paratype agrees with the holo- type in the color pattern, although its color has faded considerably. C. zamboangensis appears to be closely related to C. egregia Barbour but can readily be dis- tinguished from this species as shown in the diagnosis. With the accumulation of additional evidence this new species may prove to be con- specific with egregia, but unfortunately the lack of material prevents the determination of the exact relationship between these two species. There are three other species of Calamaria to which the new form bears a resemblance— everettt, virgulata, and occrpitalis. However, these three species can be distinguished from zamboangensts as follows: everetti has the diameter of the eye greater than its distance from the mouth, virgulata has the diameter of the eye equal to its distance from the mouth and a somewhat different coloration, and occipitalis which has a divided anal plate. Acknowledgments —I express my sincere thanks to Dr. Walter C. Brown, of Northwestern Uni- versity, who has been kind enough to reexamine a considerable portion of the data presented here, to Prof. George 8. Myers, of Stanford University, for reading the manuscript and offering some valuable criticisms, and to Charles M. Bogert for the loan of the entire collection of Calamaria in the American Museum of Natural History for study and comparison. BIBLIOGRAPHY BargBour, Tuomas. Two new Bornean snakes. Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington 40: 127-128. 1927. pE Roors, Neuiy. The reptiles of the Indo-Aus- tralian Archipelago 2: Ophidia: XIV + 334 pp., 117 figs. Leiden, 1917. Taytor, Epwarp Harrison. The snakes of the Philippine Islands. Philippine Bur. Sci. Publ. 16: 312 pp., 32 figs., 37 pls. 1922. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences EP OSULON EM ee Te PAIS A: CEM yeh G ya ie Water RamBercG, National Bureau of Standards IPRASUTO MGIAIAN ok cla cia AN GOS ta GH OE RU ats GORE F. M. Srerzumr, U.S. National Museum SAS 2ATT ese roms 6 BE GR oe aces F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards LE GOTSUGGRERS Ace BED. soe Howarp 8. Rappieye, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey IRA PODER od dle aye Cherciore HO TEL Oe een Joun A. STEVENSON, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haratp A. Reuper, U.S. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Societies: Philosophical Society of Washington. .°-....-.::.2.......-.-s+se- A. G. McNisu Anthropological Society of Washington........................ Waupo R. WEpEL Biological Society of Washington.........................--.-- Hueu T. O’ NEILL @hemicallSocietysof Washington) .....,2..5.45.625- 4:0. s0s seo. Joun K. Tayuor Entomological Society of Washington........................ FrREepERiIcK W. Poos WNatronalaGeorraphic Societys neo eases eee ALEXANDER WETMORE Ceolocicali society, ob Washington. ..45-s.o0sa05s cosas s soon eee A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia.................... ....FRED O. Coz Columbia HistoricaliSociety:so2-2.. 44.55 s5-0 45s. sede see ee GILBERT GROSVENOR Botanical Society of Washington...............-..00..622--006 Les M. Hurcuins Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wituiam A. Dayton Wasbingtonsociety, of Mngimeerss..: 55.5.4. oes oe aaee. Cuirrorp A. Berts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers...... A. H. Scorr Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp S. DiLu Helminthological Society of Washington.......................... L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Aneus M. GriFFIN Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Fioyp W. Houcu Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers........... HerBert G. Dorsry District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Be ’ : : Martin A. Mason District of Columbia Section, Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine N. R. Evuts Elected Members of the Board of Managers: pomdemuaryalOD Si i: a. acca cess ps ete des C. F. W. Mursesecsr, A. T. McPHERSON pRRowmeeurar arya 954 ose. 8 cpaceiats ple ewe etesse ciensueie Sara E. Brannam, Mitton Harris HOMVaNUARVAGSD 6s. reciente sag dienes bees Rocer G. Batrs, W. W. DinHu ikaind) Of ANC WUGRSs co aceaaseoeauee enn anods All the above officers plus the Senior Editor BOUiULO;ME CULO SONG ASSOCtate HQULOTS: . sess .y 06s seen dese see [See front cover] Executive Committee.... WALTER RAMBERG (chairman), F. M. Serzter, H.S.RaPPLeye, Wiuuram A. Dayton, F. M. DeranporF Committee on Membership. .E.H. WALKER (chairman), M.S. ANDERSON, CLARENCE CoT- TAM, R. C. Duncan, JoHN Faser, G. T. Faust, I. B. Hansen, FRANK Kracex, D. B. Jones, EH. G. RetnHArD, ReeEce I. Satter, Leo A. Suinn, F. A. Smite, He1nz SPecHt, H.M. Trent, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings....H. W. Weuus (chairman), Wm. R. Campspeii, W. R. CuHar- LINE, D. J. Davis, H. G. Dorsry, O. W. TorRESON Committee on Monographs (W. N. Frnron, chairman): Ne) dient MOTB} aes Sear ite cele ors oe nee nePh Be ee eee ee R. W. Imuay, P. W. Oman ‘hey dinmameynyy TORY a aie tree Cen eve pe een eee eee eee S. F. Buaxs, F. C. Kracex INO. diminiviereye WG SGs os as eee ee ee oe ree oe Gere ae W.N. Fenton, ALAN STONE Committee on Awards for Ree Reavernerd (J. R. SWALLEN, general chairman): For Biological Sciences........ .J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), L. M. Hurcarns, ‘MARGARET Pittman, F. W. Poos, L. P. Scaunrz For Engineering Sciences............. R. C. DuNcAN (chairman), A. C. FIELDNER, Wayne C. Hatt, J. W. McBurney, O. S. Reapine, H. L. Warrremore OTe ran SUC CUS CTETUCES aa eee eee L. A. Woop (chairman), P. H. ABELSON, F. 8. Dart, Grorcs W. Irvine, Jr., J. H. McMiLiten For Teaching of Science......M. A. Mason (chairman), F. E. Fox, M. H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research.......l. H. Yocum (chairman), H. N. Eaton, Kk. F. Herzrecp Committee on Policy and Planning: ILO. dem Ay WER cos seme esos an eo cH O mean W. A. Dayton (chairman), N. R. Surra Pog dam ary 9 54 eee her anes cic oeeierdieveinus fie ctor H. B. Couurns, Jr., W. W. Rusrey ROP MAM UAT MODS dc sian ashe rcoe ester cuerc ends aoe lane sia L. W. Parr, F. B. StusBEE Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. McPuErson, chairman): BIRO RU ATUTATAVPLO DSS ere yy cre cesses ea eveyd seree Che eeeetcneiai gs Je he A. H. CLARK, F. L. Mouuer Moydaniranyel Oba. isk. oe Ahern so uae amide cise s J. M. Canpwe ti, W. L. Scumirr ROM AAU aTysel Goon ape ciamiaests yamiats ia onisa aonb ALT: MaFERESO W. T. Reap Representariwveron CounculiOfiA.. AulAs Sivas: ances oe cede cee ses cecceee . M. Serzuer Committee of Auditors...... C. L. Gaztn (chairman), Loviss M. a ea D. R. Tare Committee of Tellers...GrorGE P. WALTON (chairman), Gzorar H. Coons, C. L. GARNER CONTENTS Page GroLocy.—Lower limit of the Cambrian in the Cordilleran region. CHESTER Re LONGWELLS. 9.6 6.055. on ee 209 PALEONTOLOGY.—Remains of Devonian fishes from Texas. Davin H. DunkKiE: and JOHN Aw WILSON: <.. $5 ...6%04 4. 10). 95.12 eee 213 PALEONTOLOGY.—Notes on Texacrinus. HARRELL L. STRIMPLE....... 216 Entromo.tocy.—The Ethiopian genera of Sarginae, with descriptions of new species... Mauricn’ DT. JAMES.) .004. 2 so do 220 EnToMoLocy.—New names in the Homoptera. Z. P. Mrrcatr...... 226 Zootocy.—The marine annelids of the United States Navy Antarctic Expedition, 1947-48. Otea HARTMAN.................... oh Oe 231 NemMAtToLocy.—A new roundworm, Capillaria pirangae (Nematoda: Trichinellidae), from the scarlet tanager (Piranga erythromelas). CHARLES (GAD URBIN 5 ..4.05... Zz \ | aplwojop dadayjnday9 pud | ayiwojop abpiy uaddog ‘999. 2 Q ca QN3931 Avueust 1952 STOSE: MURPHREE The ore is in thin beds, which swell to 6 inches in places. Most of the commercial ore is pulverulent pyrolusite of high grade. A limestone 55 feet thick, locally present in the lower part of the formation northwest of Oneonta, resembles limestone described by Butts (1926, p. 164) from Lauderdale County, from which he identified fossils of Burlington age. Fossils collected in this limestone in the Murphree Valley north- west of Oneonta were briefly examined by J.S. Williams of the U.S. Geological Survey, who states that they appear to be of post- Burlington age, possibly Keokuk. The Chattanooga shale, 20 to 40 feet in thickness, is chiefly black carbonaceous shale containing linguloid shells and cono- donts, which Ulrich considered to be iden- tical with forms that occur in the Sunbury shale of Ohio and therefore of Carboniferous age (Ulrich, 1911, pl. 28 and p. 527). Un- fossiliferous gray sandy beds in the lower part of the formation may be Devonian in age. The Red Mountain formation, which forms Red Mountain, lies directly beneath the Chattanooga shale and crops out near the center of the anticline. As its name implies, the formation is red, owing to the presence of hematite and red shale of Clinton age. The underlying Chickamauga limestone is largely a pure limestone and includes beds ranging in age from Maysville to ‘Stones River” (Chazyan) (Ulrich, 1911, pl. 27 and pp. 566-567). At the base are dark limestones that contain bryozoans, brachio- pods, and gastropods, which Ulrich regarded as the Stones River fauna. The Copper Ridge dolomite lies in the lowland of the valley, where it is weathered to clay and chert. No fossils were collected from it. Butts (1926) refers the formation to the Upper Cambrian. At Chepultepec (now NW SAND MTN. RED ~ = == - SECTION B-B' O L Ss VALLEY ANTICLINE 243 Allgood) on the west side of the Murphree Valley, about 5 miles southwest of Oneonta, fossils of Lower Ordovician age were collected by Ulrich from chert of the Chepultepec dolomite which overlies the Copper Ridge dolomite. The Chepultepec dolomite was not observed in the area shown in the map, Fig. 1, but is probably present. Thin-bedded limestones that are exposed near the village of Murphree Valley weather to buff and light-colored earthy shale and tripoli and closely resemble the limestones of the Elbrook formation of Virginia and farther north. These rocks are tentatively mapped as Conasauga formation. From Oneonta northeastward the fault in the Murphree Valley is on the southeast side of the anticline, and lies between the Copper Ridge dolomite on the west and the Pottsville formation on the east. At Allgood Gap in Raccoon Mountain, southeast of Oneonta, the Pottsville at the fault is vertical and the Copper Ridge dolomite is exposed in the adjacent lowland to the west. The Pottsville formation of Straight Mountain, southeast of Walnut Grove, also stands vertical at the fault, but away from the fault it rapidly assumes a gentle southeast dip. A mile and a half southeast of Aurora the fault passes into lower beds of the anti- cline and dies out in the northeast plunging end. Southwest of Oneonta the fault similarly passes into lower beds of the anticline, which here plunges southwestward, as shown on the Alabama geological map (Butts, 1926). The exposures southeast of Aurora, where the thrust passes into lower beds in the anticline, furnish the best place to study the fault. A mile south of Aurora the fault leaves the contact with the Potts- ville formation and passes into lower beds in the anticline, through Pennington shale, STRAIGHT S& MTN, RED MTN. SE NW cano ) MTN. SECTION A-A' | 2 MILES —N Fra. 2.—Cross-sections of Murphree Valley anticline on the lines A~A’ and B-B’ of Fig. 1. 244 Bangor limestone, Tuscumbia limestone, Fort Payne chert, Chattanooga shale, into the Red Mountain formation, where dis- placement dies out to the northeast. The mapping of this part of the fold on the geological map of Alabama (Butts, 1926) evidently was copied from Hayes’ mapping, and the changes shown are probably due to inaccuracies of copying and not to cor- rection by Butts. The same is probably true of the fault on the southeast side of the Murphree Valley on section B-B’ of that map, which is shown by Butts—much less steep than by Hayes. The strata exposed near the fault along and adjacent to the road northeast from Aurora (Figs. 1 and 2-AA’) are mostly vertical, and at one place the Red Mountain formation just east of the fault is over- turned and dips 45° NW. The Chickamauga limestone, which crops out northwest of the fault, is also overturned and dips 65° NW. The fault plane is nowhere exposed, but at the plunging end of the anticline the beds close to the fault are seen to be largely vertical or are overturned and dip steeply northwestward, and the fault probably has a similar steep dip. The fold and the thrust are believed by the writer to be superficial, produced by the abrupt upbowing of the Copper Ridge dolomite, which is the com- petent bed that directly underlies this part of the anticline. The Murphree Valley anticline is an up- lift in the Appalachian Plateau between the Sequatchie-Browns Valley anticline to the northwest and the Wills Valley anticline to the southeast (Fig. 3). The bordering syn- CS < =F Sequatchie JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 8 clines are nearly flat, wide folds of gently rolling Carboniferous rocks, from which the three narrow, straight anticlines rise ab- ruptly and are exposed in narrow valleys carved in the plateau surface. They he just west of the Allegheny Front and west of the Appalachian folded belt. These anti- clines are believed by the writer to have been formed by the abrupt yielding to pressure and the local upbowing of the thick Copper Ridge dolomite, the competent bed that transmitted the thrust from its source to the southeast. Each of the three anticlines is broken by a thrust fault along its trend. The rocks of the Sequatchie-Browns Valley anticline and the Wills Valley anticline have steeper dips on their northwest sides where they are broken by thrust faults dipping steeply southeastward. The Murphree Valley anticline also is broken by a thrust fault on its steeper side, which, however, is the southeast side. The Copper Ridge dolomite beneath the Carboniferous rocks of the synclines is nearly horizontal and trans- mitted the thrust in a horizontal direction. I believe that the dolomite bowed up into sharp, steep anticlines, while the underlying, nonresistant shaly Conasauga formation yielded to the pressure by crumpling. The anticlines and the thrust faults, therefore, are superficial, probably no deeper than the Copper Ridge dolomite. The vertical attitude of the beds near the fault indicates that the thrust faults are more in the nature of up- thrusts than overthrusts. Because the thrust, transmitted through the Copper Ridge dolomite beneath the synclines, has a hori- zontal direction, it yielded upward toward Murphree Valley 5 10 MILES Fic. 3.—Generalized section across Sequatchie Valley, Murphree Valley, and Wills Valley anti- clines, Alabama, showing the thrust-bearing bed (COc) beneath the broad synclines. — Aveust 1952 the surface and the upbowing of the anti- clines was practically vertical; slight varia- tion in direction of pressure might determine which limb of the anticline would be steeper. The dip of the rocks on the southeast side of the Murphree Valley may have been steeper because the Copper Ridge dolomite beneath the syncline to the southeast may have been lower than that in the syncline to the northwest, and the thrust therefore may have been transmitted lower on that side, a condition which would have produced an underthrust effect in the anticline and have caused the rocks on the southeast side to be steeper (Fig. 2). Such a condition may have been augmented by the close proximity (4 miles) of the southwest plunging end of the Wills Valley anticline, which is unbroken by a thrust fault at this end, and the Copper Ridge dolomite may have descended deeper in the intervening syncline. There is no evidence for the suggestion by J. L. Rich (1934, p. 1595) that the Sequatchie anticline may be similar to the Pine Mountain thrust. Rodgers (1950, p. 679) has shown that the Sequatchie anti- cline does not pass into tear faults at its northeast and southwest ends, as does the Pine Mountain thrust, but he supports Rich’s analogy of these thrusts by sug- gesting (his fig. 3, p. 678) their connection by deep-lying faults beneath the intervening flat-lying Carboniferous basins. These con- necting hypothetical faults are indeed ‘bizarre’ (p. 680), and there is no evidence that such faults exist, particularly the con- nection with the Murphree Valley fault which has the overthrust from the north- STRIMPLE: ARMS OF HAERTEOCRINUS DAS west, whereas the fault emanates from a thrust in the opposite direction—from the southeast. The structure at Post Oak Springs and Rhea Springs, Kingston quad- rangle, may be either younger beds in a window, as is suggested by Rodgers, or they may be explained, as they were by Hayes (1894) with other similar occurrences in the area, as sharply folded and faulted beds of these younger strata. Therefore, they may possibly be windows in the Pine Mountain overthrust like those reported by Miller in Virginia (1947, 1950). These and other suggestions must be considered in the explanation of these structures, and their solution will depend on the results of future more detailed work. REFERENCES Burts, CHarues. Geology of Alabama. Geol. Surv. Spec. Rep. 14. 1926. Hayes, C. W. Kingston quadrangle, Tenn. U. S. Geol. Surv. Geol. Atlas, Folio 4. 1894. . Pikeville quadrangle, Tenn. Ibid., Folio 21. 1895. . Gadsden 35. 1896. Miuuer, R. L., and Funuter, J. O. Rose Hill oil field, Lee County, Va. U. S. Geol. Surv. Oil and Gas Invest., Map 26. 1947. and Brosan, W. P. Jonesville district, Lee County, Va. Tbid., Map 104. 1950. Ricu, J. L. Mechanics of low-angle overthrust faulting as illustrated by Cumberland thrust block, Virginia, Kentucky, and Tennessee. Bull. Amer. Assoc. Petr. Geol. 18(12): 1584-1596. 1934. Roveers, JoHN. Mechanics of Appalachian fold- ing as illustrated by Sequatchie anticline, Tenn. and Ala. Ibid. 34(4) : 672-681. 1950. Unricu, E. O. Revision of the Paleozoic systems. Bull. Geol. Soc. Amer. 22: 281-680. 1911. Alabama Ala. quadrangle, Ibid., Folio PALEONTOLOGY .—The arms of Haerteocrinus. HARRELL L. STRIMPLE, Bartles- ville, Okla. (Communicated by Alfred R. Loeblich, Jr.) Over a period of several years the author has acquired three well-preserved specimens of the genus Haerteocrinus from the Wann formation exposure located just west of the city limits of Bartlesville, Okla. Description is given below. Haerteocrinus turbinatus, n. sp. Figs. 1-7 The dorsal cup expands evenly from the proxi- mal columnal to its upper extremity. Infrabasals (IBB) are five upflared plates, readily visible in side view of the cup. Basals (BB) are five, with height and width approximately equal. Radials (RR) are five, pentagonal, with width normally almost twice the length. The uppermost portion of the cup has a scalloped appearance when viewed from above or below due to the impres- sions between RR along the adsutural areas. This development restricts the width of the articulating facets. There are three plates in the posterior inter- 246 radius, which area is not depressed. Radianal (RA) is obliquely placed, contacting r. post. R to the right below, the right shoulder of post. B to the left below, anal plate (X) to the left above, and right anal plate (RX) directly above. Anal X is in full contact with post. B. RX is the smaller of the three and its upper surface forms a com- mon plane with X. The upper surfaces of both RX and X have muscular fossae somewhat com- parable to those of the RR. There is an outer ligament pit bordered by a transverse ridge. The outer marginal ridge and transverse ridge possess denticles, and other crenulations are found behind the muscle sear. Intermuscular notches are narrow but well defined, that of anal X being to the left of center, and of RX to the right of center. Articulating facets of RR slope mildly out- ward and do not fill the upper faces of RR. There is a small outer rim in front of the sharp outer ligamental furrow. The transverse ridge is pro- nounced and is marked with denticles. Lateral furrows are well defined and intermuscular notch is rather large. Muscle scars are shallow. First primibrachials (PBrBr) in all rays are low, axillary plates, having triangular outlines. A second branching takes place with the fourth or fifth secundibrachials (SBrBr) in all rays. Thereafter, the outer rays remain unbranched and taper slowly to their termination. In the inner rays, the arms widen slowly as a third division is approached, with or about the sixth tertibrachials (TBrBr), and subsequently formed outer rays remain unbranched to their termina- tion. There is another gradual widening of the inner rays as another bifurcation is approached, with or about the sixth quatrobrachials (QBrBr). The arms are not preserved to their termination in all rays; however, 40 robust, pinnular, elon- gated, uniserial arms are indicated. The brachials are all rather short and have well-rounded, smooth exteriors. The column is composed of round, moderately thick segments, which are pierced by a small pentalobate lumen. In the large figured para- type, the proximal columnal is seen to have a mildly pentagonal outline. The plates of the dorsal cup are rather thick, and their external surfaces have a natural sheen, as if the specimens were polished. At their distal extremities, the IBB have a thickness of 2.0 mm in the large paratype. Sutures are not impressed and there is no granular surface ornamentation. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 8 Both paratypes provided information as to the nature of the tegmen. The smaller paratype discloses the fact that the arms are considerably longer than the tegmen, which only has a length of about 35.5 mm. The tube terminates with a swollen area composed of enlarged, spinose plates. Some plates possess more than one spine, and none of the spines are extended to any great de- gree. Some pore slits are found in plates of the swollen area. Remnants of the anal tube were found intimately associated with the larger para- type. Normal tube plates have an external sheen comparable to the ‘‘polished” appearance of the exterior of the crown. Terminating tube plates are mildly spinose, show evidence of pore slits, and are considerably larger than normal tube plates. It is puzzling to note that normal tube plates show no evidence of pore slits. Measurements in mm.—As given below. All measurements are linear and are not taken along the curvature of the plates. Large Small figured figured paralype paratype Holotype Height of dorsal cup............... 19.8 IBIoite 14.0* Width of dorsaleup (maximum)..... 32.7 Pile 21.9* Diameter of proximal columnal.... 7.6 6.0 6.0 Height of IBB circlet.............. 6.3 3.8* 4.0* Length of inter IBB suture........ 4.7 2.0 2.0 Kengthiofirvants Bienes eee 10.0 6.8 7.0 Wad thioferyant- p> err een ee ree 10.7 7.0 8.1 Length of inter BB suture.......... 5.1 3.1 3.3 engthtofiryant=! Bee eee nee 7.9 5.7 6.3 \Widt hyo tenses tay eer eee 157 8.7 liek Heightiofll Sante Bras ee eee eee 6.2 4.0 5.0 Widthrofsl vant 2B ree eee eee ee een oe 7.8 9.6 * Distorted owing to lateral compression. Remarks.—There are at this time only three species assigned to Haerteocrinus. The genotype species is Haerteocrinus missouriensis Moore and Plummer, from the Missourian. In that species the plates of the posterior interradius are more advanced in their arrangement than those of H. turbinatus, in that RA has moved to a domi- nant position in the former, separating anal X from the post. B. From the illustrations given by Moore and Plummer it does not appear that distal faces of anal X and RX form a common plane, as found in H. turbinatus; however, they are of subequal height and may well have done so. H. magnus Moore and Plummer, of the Des Moines series, is based on a single partially pre- served dorsal cup, so that close comparison is not possible. From the illustrations given by Moore and Plummer there appear to be slight depres- Aveust 1952 STRIMPLE: ARMS OF HAERTEOCRINUS 247 sions at the angles of the cup plates, and anal X elongated nature of the basal plates and the is in contact with an elongated post. B. wider, more robust RX. Although plates of the « H. washburni (Beede) is most similar to the posterior interradius display considerable vari- present species. The principal difference is in the ability in some forms, all three specimens of H. Fies. 1-7.—Haerteocrinus turbinatus, n. sp.: 1-2, Holotype from anterior and posterior, X 1.5; 3-6, large paratype from anterior, base and posterior, X 1.2, and portion from summit, X 2.3; 7, paratype from left side, X 1.7. 248 turbinatus display remarkable consistency in this regard. In H. turbinatus, the RX is relatively smaller than found in H. washburn. Close affinity between H. turbinatus and Texacrinus irradiatus Strimple is indicated in the nature of the arms and many features of the dorsal cups. In both species the anal X and RX form a common upper facet which is similar to the facets of the RR. The main difference lies in the nature of the IBB circlets, which repose at JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 8 the bottom of a basal concavity in T. irradiatus but are upflared and readily visible in side view of the cup in H. turbinatus. Occurrence and horizon.—The hill, locally termed “The Mound,” just west of the city limits of Bartlesville, Okla.; crinoid facies of the Wann formation, Ochelata group, Missouri series, Pennsylvanian. Types.—To be deposited in the U. 8. National Museum. PALEONTOLOGY —Designation of the type species of Pseudochama (additional note). Davip Nico, U.S National Museum. In my recent paper on the genera and subgenera of Chamidae (Nicol, 1952), I stated that the type species of Pseudo- chama, Chama cristella Lamarck, was sub- sequently designated by Prashad (1932, p. 295). Mr. Druid Wilson, of Johns Hopkins University, has kindly shown me _ that the same species was designated as the type of Pseudochama by Gardner (1926, p. 92). REFERENCES GARDNER, JuLia. The molluscan fauna of the Alum Bluff group of Florida, Part II: Astartacea, Carditacea, Chamacea. U. S. Geol. Surv. Prof. Paper 142-B; 81-99, pls. 16, 17. 1926. Nicou, D. Nomenclatural review of genera and sub- genera of Chamidae. Journ. Washington Acad. Sci. 42 (5): 154-156. 1952. PrasHaD, B. The Lamellibranchia of the Siboga Expedition, Systematic Part IT: Pelecypoda (exclusive of the Pectinidae). Siboga Monograph 58¢: 353 pp., 9 pls., 1 map. Leiden, 1932. ENTOMOLOGY —The ant larvae of the myrmicine tribe Crematogastrini.\ GEORGE C. WHEELER and JEANETTE WHEELER, University of North Dakota. (Com- municated by C. F. W. Muesebeck.) The late Dr. W. M. Wheeler could often predict by merely looking at a stone or log what kinds of ants would be found under (or in) it. In the summer of 1924 when he and I were collecting on Barro Colorado Island, he selected a certain log as promising. But this time he had made a mistake, for as soon as we opened it he exclaimed, “Just another one of those nasty little Crematogasters!”’ I was startled—almost shocked—that one of the world’s foremost myrmecologists should speak thus dis- respectfully of any ant. It was practically blasphemy—myrmecoblasphemy, that is. To be sure, it was merely an obiter dictum. Nevertheless it did seem to express Dr. Wheeler’s general attitude toward this genus. In his introduction to the Ants of 1 The research on which this article is based was aided by a grant-in-aid from the Sigma Xi Research Fund. the Belgian Congo he said: At my request, Dr. F. Santschi kindly under- took to work up the species of Crematogaster, a genus to which he has given much attention. A glance at my catalog of the Ethiopian species will show why I despaired of adequately handling the Congo material of the group. I might have attempted it, if the Crematogaster portion of Mr. George Arnold’s monograph of the Rhodesian ants had appeared, but the World War had stopped the publication of this important work, so that even in making my catalog I had nothing to rely on except the confused mess in the existing liter- ature. Mr. Arnold nevertheless sent me some valuable comments on several of the species, to- gether with the following remarks on the genus as a whole: “The genus Crematogaster is perhaps the most troublesome of all, and for this there are several reasons. First of all, it is a very large genus, so large that authors get lost in the vast number of described forms and of their collec- tions. Secondly, the species of this genus in Africa are exceptionally liable to minute variations in all ? Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 45: 7-8. 1922. Aveust 1952 directions even over a very smali area... ., and even within the limits of the same nest... Thirdly, in the separation of species and varieties, too much emphasis has been placed on unreliable characters . . . Lastly, a good deal of confusion is due to sheer carelessness and contempt for exact methods.”’ This same distaste for Crematogaster seems to be rather general among myr- mecologists. I have certainly shared it when collecting in Oklahoma, Texas, and Central America, where it is one of the commonest genera.’ And now the study of the larvae has strengthened my distaste-—G. C. WHEELER. * * * Tribe CREMATOGASTRINI Forel The tribe Crematogastrini comprises a single genus. But what a genus! Emery in his Genera insectorum listed 274 species, which make it the fourth largest genus of ants. These species are grouped in 11 sub- genera; many of them have numerous sub- species and varieties. But all this is merely small-scale diversity. The genus as a whole —hboth adults and larvae—is remarkably homogeneous and easily recognized at a glance. But as soon as one steps inside the genus, all is confusion. It is not possible to char- acterize larval subgenera (at least with the material at hand), for the differences within a subgenus may exceed those between subgenera. In fact, the differences within a single nest may surpass those between subgenera. This brings us to the most remarkable discovery in this study: the apparent dimor- phism of the larvae of Crematogaster lineo- lata subopaca, which is fully described below and illustrated on the plates. It is certainly tempting to speculate on the cause of this phenomenon—dimorphic queens, social par- asitism, genetic segregation after hybridiza- tion, etc. But we resist temptation and simply state that we do not have enough facts even for a tentative hypothesis. Genus Crematogaster Lund Plump, chunky, and straight; practically immobile; subellipsoidal or subeylindrical; ends 3 In North Dakota the picture is entirely dif- ferent: Crematogaster is rare in the southern half of the State and apparently absent in the northern half. WHEELER AND WHEELER: ANT LARVAE 249 rounded; anterior end formed by the dorsum of the prothorax; head flattened against the ventral surface near the anterior end; no neck. Anus posteroventral. Leg vestiges present. Segmenta- tion indistinct. Spiracles unequal in diameter, the first (1.e., mesothoracic) much the largest, the remainder small and diminishing progres- sively toward the posterior end. Body hairs sparse; uncinate hairs short to moderately long; other hairs minute to short. Seven types of body hairs occur in the genus: (1) simple; (2) with the tips bifid; (3) with the tips multifid; (4) with the tips frayed; (5) with the apical portion dentic- ulate; (6) with the apical portion broad, flat and denticulate; (7) uncinate hairs, with a heavy, nearly straight shaft and a stout anchor-like tip, restricted to the dorsal surface of abdominal somites I-V or I-VI and arranged in transverse rows of 3-8 hairs, one row on each somite. A species may have two, three or four of these types; the majority have three types. Head with the dorsal and dorsolateral regions thin and depressed; mouth parts small; from each gena a sclerotized band (which is a continuation of the internal skeleton) passes out of the head and enters the prothorax. Antennae small or minute; each with 1-4 (usually 2 or 3) sensilla. Head hairs sparse; minute to short; usually shorter than body hairs; mostly simple. Labrum very small and short; breadth 3-4X length; subtrap- ezoidal or subrectangular; ventral border con- cave; anterior surface with 1—4 isolated and two agglomerated senilla on each half; posterior sur- face with 4-8 sensilla, but without spinules. Mandibles very small [ratio of head width to mandible length = 4.3 to 9.4 (average 6.7)]; short [ratio of mandible length to width at base = 1.3 to 2 (average 1.5)]; base inflated and feebly sclerotized; apex moderately sclerotized, narrowed to a sharp point and slightly curved medially; no medial teeth; no spinules. Maxillae small; apex paraboloidal and directed medially; without spinules; palp represented by a cluster of three or four agglomerated sensilla; galea represented by two agglomerated sensilla. La- bium small; without spinules; palp represented by a cluster of four agglomerated sensilla; a minute sensillum between each palp and the opening of the sericteries; the latter a short transverse slit. Palps and galea never paxilliform. No spinules seen on the hypopharynx. To most of the characters in the foregoing defi- nition there are exceptions. Nevertheless the 250 larvae of Crematogaster—like their adults—consti- tute a well defined and homogeneous group. They are readily distinguished from the larvae of other tribes by the shape of the body; the position of the head; the variation in the size of the spiracles of different somites; the paucity and small size of the hairs (except the few uncinate hairs); the depressed dorsal and dorsolateral regions of the head; the sclerotized band emerging from each gena; the reduction of the mouthparts; the reduction of the palps and galea to clusters of sensilla; the lack of spinules on the mouth parts. None of these characters would alone serve to differentiate the larvae from those of all other genera, but as a group they define the genus and tribe very well. The larvae of Crematogaster closely resemble the larvae of the subfamily Dolichoderinae in all the above characters, but they may be differen- tiated as follows: In the latter the first abdom- inal spiracle is the largest; uncinate hairs lacking (or, when present, with only one hook); dorsal and dorsolateral regions of the head not de- pressed (except in Dolichoderus); no sclerotized band emerging from each gena; spinules present on the mouth parts. The dolichoderine Azteca is the genus most easily confused with Cremato- gaster; in fact, it can be distinguished only by the presence of spinules on its mouth parts and by the shape of its uncinate hairs, which are spirally coiled and have only one hook. Also like the Dolichoderinae, the larvae of the Crematogastrini are a highly specialized group and both groups are specialized mostly through reductions and losses rather than by elaborations: body length is reduced; mobility is almost lost; hairs are few, short and simple (except the few uncinate hairs) ; mouth parts are reduced—almost vestigial; the trophorhinium is lacking; palps and galea are merely clusters of sensilla. In this article we describe the larvae of 11 species representing four subgenera. References from the literature are cited for additional spe- cies, making the total considered 16 species in five subgenera. Athias-Henriot (1947, p. 253) characterized the larvae of this genus as ‘‘évolués, simples, ... reliant [les Myrmicinés] aux [Dolichodé- rinés].”’ Bristowe, 1932: “The nests of a species of Crematogaster (called Mott dam) are collected on account of their grubs which are eaten in a curry in the Hua Hin district.” JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 42, No. 8 Gantes, 1949: “Larves immobiles” (p. 84). “Ta croissance est forte au stade IV et elle est ralentie au stade V, mais ce ralentissement est trés faible’ (p. 85). “Chez Crematogaster les poils 4 double crochet sont plus longs au stade IV qu’au stade V. Done, l’accrochage mutuel, important pour le transport des larves par les 8, est surtout possible aux stades jeunes, II 3 IV” (p. 87). “Larves trés évoluées comme Crematogaster...Ces larves sont immobiles, ont des mandibules minuscules” (p. 88). Stiircke, 1948, p. 28: ‘Body still more swollen, of a short oval or nearly globose shape, with a small head projecting on the ventral side.” Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) lineolata Say Fig. 1 (1-4) Plump, chunky, and turgid; straight and sub- ellipsoidal; diameter greatest at abdominal somite II; ends round-pointed; anterior end formed from the dorsal portion of the prothorax. Head flattened against the ventral surface near the anterior end; no neck. Anus posteroven- tral. Leg, wing, and gonopod vestiges present. Approximately a third of the larvae have one, two, or three abdominal leg vestiges (?) on somites I-III, which are larger and more conspicuous than those on the thorax. Segmen- tation indistinct. Spiracles unequal in size; the first much the largest, the remainder di- minishing gradually. Integument of the posterior somites with a few spinules which are either iso- lated or in short transverse rows. In addition, approximately half the larvae have on each lateral surface of most somites a dorsoventrally elongate patch of minute, stout spinules. Body hairs sparse, somewhat more abundant on the prothorax. Of two types: (1) simple, slightly curved, 0.009-0.036 mm, the most numerous type; (2) a row of four to six nearly straight 2-hooked uncinate hairs on the dorsal surface of each abdominal somite I-VI, about 0.14 mm long. Head moderately large; subtrapezoidal or subcordate in anterior view; narrowed ventrally; about as long as broad; extensive dorsolateral portions thin and depressed; mouth parts small. Inside the head just above the level of the mouth parts there is a slender transverse sclerotic bar; at each end of this bar a large sclerotized lobe is exposed on the surface and extends outward into the prothorax; a slender branch of the lobe extends upward inside the gena and at its end protrudes laterally for a short distance. Antennae Aueust 1952 WHEELER AND WHEELER: ANT_ LARVAE 251 Fie. 1.—Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) lineolata Say: 1, Head in anterior view, X 76; 2, two body hairs, x 185; 3, right mandible in anterior view, X 216; 4, larva in side view, X 32. 5-7, C. (A.) laeviuscula Mayr: 5, Head in anterior view, X 60; 6, left mandible in anterior view, X 216; 7, three body hairs, X 185. +» 8-10, C. (A.) menileki proserpina Santschi: 8, Head in anterior view, X 86; 9, three body hairs, X 185; 10, left mandible in anterior view, X 216. 11-18, C. (A.) auberti sordida Forel: 11, Three body hairs, X 185; 12, head in anterior view, X 76; 13, left mandible in anterior view, X 216. 14-90, C. (A.) lineolata subopaca Emery: 14, Head of type Ain anterior view, X 76; 75, head of type A in posterior view to show chitinized bar, X 76; 16, three body hairs of type A, X 185; 17, left mandible of type A in anterior view, X 216; 18, head of type B in anterior view, X 76; 19, two body hairs of type B, X 185; 20, very young larva in side view, X 32. 252 minute, each with three (rarely two or one) sensilla. Head hairs sparse, very short (0.009-— 0.035 mm), simple and slightly curved. Labrum very small; short (length one-third the width); subtrapezoidal in anterior view; narrowed ven- trally; ventral border feebly to moderately concave; anterior surface of each half with two or three isolated sensilla and two agglomerated sensilla near the ventral border; posterior sur- face with four scattered sensilla. Mandibles very small; apical two-thirds rather stout, sharp- pointed, slightly curved medially, moderately sclerotized; basal one-third feebly sclerotized and inflated. Maxillae small; apex paraboloidal and directed medially; palp a cluster of four sensilla; galea two agglomerated sensilla. La- bium small; palp a cluster of four sensilla; a minute sensillum between each palp and opening of sericteries; the latter a short transverse slit. QUEEN: Similar to worker, except that the body is relatively more voluminous and_ the head and hairs relatively smaller. (Material studied: Numerous larvae from six nests collected in Michigan, New Hampshire, New Jersey, and New York.) Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) lineolata subopaca Emery Figs. 1 (14-20), 2 WorkKemR TYPE A: Plump, chunky, and turgid; straight and subeylindrical, with the dorsal and ventral profiles nearly straight and moder- ately long, while in ventral view there is a slight constriction at abdominal somites I and II; ends round-pointed, the posterior end more narrowly so; anterior end formed from the dorsal portion of the prothorax. Head thin and flattened against the ventral surface near the anterior end; no neck. Anus posteroventral. Leg, wing and gonopod vestiges present; abdominal leg vestiges (?) very rarely present. Segmentation indistinct. Spiracles unequal in size, the first much the largest, the remainder diminishing gradually. Integument of abdominal somites VI-X spinulose, the spinules minute and _iso- lated or in short transverse rows. Body hairs sparse, somewhat more abundant on the pro- thorax. Of three types: (1) simple, very short (about 0.027 mm on the ventral surface to 0.045 mm on the dorsal surface), the most abun- dant type; (2) with the tip bifid, about 0.045 mm long, a few on the dorsal surface of each JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 8 somite, (8) nearly straight 2-hooked uncinate hairs, moderately long (about 0.14 mm), six to eight in a row across the dorsal surface of each abdominal somite I-VI. Head subtrape- zoidal in anterior view; narrowed below; slightly broader than long; dorsolateral regions thin and depressed; mouth parts small. Inside the head, just above the level of the mouth parts, there is a slender transverse sclerotic bar; each end of the bar turns upward and continues inside the gena; it finally becomes external near the dorsal corner of the cranium and extends laterally a short distance onto the prothorax. Antennae minute, each with three (rarely two) minute sensilla. Head hairs sparse, short (0.009-0.035 mm), simple and slightly curved. Labrum very small, short (length one-fourth the width), subtrapezoidal, narrowed ventrally; ventral bor- der feebly concave; anterior surface of each half with four isolated sensilla and with two agglom- erated sensilla near the ventral border; posterior surface with three sensilla on each half. Mandibles very small; apical two-thirds slender, sharp- pointed, slightly curved medially, moderately sclerotized; basal third feebly sclerotized and widely inflated. Maxillae small; apex parabo- loidal and directed medially; palp represented by a cluster of four sensilla; galea represented by a cluster of two agglomerated sensilla. Labium small; palp represented by a cluster of four sen- silla; a minute sensillum between each palp and opening of sericteries; the latter a short trans- verse slit between the tips of the maxillae. WorKER TYPE B: Plump and chunky; straight and subcylindrical; not constricted at the middle; ends round-pointed; anterior end formed from the dorsal portion of the prothorax. Head thin and flattened against the ventral surface near the anterior end; no neck. Anus posteroventral. Leg and wing vestiges present. Abdominal leg vestiges (?) on somites I-III are much larger and more conspicuous than those on the thorax; in alcoholic material they are brown and can be readily seen at a low magnification; typically three pairs are present but the number may vary from zero to six vestiges. Ten differentiated somites. Spiracles unequal in size, the first much the largest, the remainder diminishing gradually. The thoracic somites and the first seven or eight abdominal somites bear each a pair of conspicuous lateral welts; each welt is elongate dorsoventrally and narrow antero- posteriorly; it stains deeply with acid fuchsin and Aueust 1952 its surface is rugose.* On either side, between these welts and near their ventral ends, there are integumentary structure of unknown nature 4+ These welts should be compared with the lateral projections described by Eidmann and Menozzi. See our Figs. 3 and 4. WHEELER AND WHEELER: ANT LARVAE 253 and function. Integument of posterior somites spinulose, the spinules minute and_ isolated. Body hairs sparse. Of two types; (1) simple, minute (0.003-0.018 mm) fairly uniformly dis- tributed; (2) nearly straight two-hooked unci- nate hairs, moderately long (about 0.1 mm), Fig. 2.—Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) lineolata subopaca Emery: 1, Larva of type A in ventral view, X 32; 2, larva of type A in side view, X 32; 3, larva of type B in ventral view, X 32; 4, larva of type B in side view, X 32; 4, profile of worker larva, X 8; 6, profile of queen larva, X 8; 7, profile of male larva, X 8; 8, outline of male larva in ventral view, X 8. 254 three to six in a row across the dorsal surface of each abdominal somite I-V. Head subrectan- gular in anterior view, slightly broader than long; small dorsolateral areas depressed and thin; integument sclerotized, mouth parts small. At the ventrolateral corner of the head on each side a sclerotized lobose structure emerges and enters the prothorax, where it extends for a short distance; from this a narrow sclerotized bar extends dorsally inside the gena. Antennae minute, with three sensilla each. Head hairs sparse, short (about 0.027 mm), simple and slightly curved; four minute (about 0.003 mm) hairs on the clypeus. Labrum very small, short (length 4x the width), subrectangular, ventral border feebly concave; anterior surface of each half with four isolated and two agglomerated sen- silla; posterior surface with four minute sensilla. Mandibles very small; apical two-thirds slender, sharp-pointed, slightly curved medially and moderately sclerotized; basal one-third feebly sclerotized and widely inflated. Maxillae small; the apex paraboloidal and directed medially; palp represented by four agglomerated sensilla; galea represented by two agglomerated sensilla. Labium small; palp an agglomerated cluster of four sensilla; a minute sensillum between each palp and opening of sericteries; the latter a short transverse slit. Youne: Length 0.75-0.95 mm. Plump and chunky; with broad lateral longitudinal welts; dorsal profile C-shaped; ventral profile sinuate; about five somites distinct; the prothorax shows two ventrolateral bosses and a transverse ventral welt. Head on the anterior end. Anus ventral. Body hairs similar to the mature type A larva, but a little shorter. On some young larvae (about 0.95 mm long) there are one to six abdominal leg vestiges (?); presumably these would belong to Type B. QuerEN: Of two types, A and B; each type is similar to worker type A or B respectively, ex- cept that the body is much more voluminous and the head and hairs relatively smaller. Mate: More elongate; thorax swollen; ab- dominal somites I-II constricted; rest of abdo- men swollen; ends rounded, the posterior more narrowly so; anterior end formed from the dor- sal portion of the prothorax. Anus subterminal. Leg and wing vestiges present. The only distinct somites are abdominal I-III, otherwise similar to type A worker larva. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 8 (Material studied: Numerous larvae from five nests collected in Arkansas and Texas.) Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) aegyptica senegalensis Roger Gantes, 1949: “8 3 mm. Ce sont des larves évoluées, le corps est massif, la téte forme un mamelon 4 la partie antérieure; les segments sont séparés par de simples lignes blanches: 11 segments. Le corps est couvert de plusieurs sortes de poils, mais on remarque immédiatement sur le dos, des poils 4 double crochet de 0 mm. 11 de long; ils sont dressés raides sur le dos, on a cing rangs de six poils, uniquement sur les seg- ments abdominaux. Sur tout le corps on a des poils défensifs de 0 mm. 18 de long. Prés de l’anus un poil assez long, fourchu, de 0 mm. 05 et un minuscule & trois branches de 0 mm. 009. La téte est large, couverte de poils simples. Les mandibules sont trés petites, 0 mm. 032, fines et algués, elles s’insérent dans la téte par deux branches courtes: elles ressemblent 4 une lame de couteau. Le palpe proximal et le palpe labial n’ont que quatre sensilles” (p. 83). Pl. V, Fig. [X—larva in side view; hairs enlarged. Growth data are given on page 86. Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) auberti laestrygon Emery Athias-Henriot, 1947: “Sa téte mal différen- ciée (un simple mamelon buccal), son corps pres- que cylindrique, ses six segments abdominaux. Le corps est recouvert d’une fine pubescence et les segments abdominaux portent dorsalement deux énormes macrochétes fourchus et crochus” (p. 252). Internal anatomy is discussed on pages 260 and 263. Eidmann (1926, p. 726) referred to the ab- sence of lateral papillae and the presence of uncinate hairs in var. swbmaura. (Mentioned by Eidmann, 1927.) Gantes, 1949: “Ressemble beaucoup 4 [sene- galensis|, mais elle a des poils plus variés, les mandibules sont plus longues, 0 mm. 41 et plus fines. Les poils 4 double crochet en six rangs de quatre 4 partir du métathorax sont plus longs, 0 mm. 21 et se dressent rigides sans ressort. Vers le bout de l’abdomen ils sont un peu plus courts, 0 mm. 198. De plus sur le thorax nous trouvons des poils identiques, mais plus courts, 0 mm. 115. Sur tout le reste du corps on trouve des poils fourchus de 0 mm. 05 et des poils Aveust 1952 simples de 0 mm. 04” (p. 83). Pl. V, Fig. IX P9, five hairs. Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) auberti sordida Forel Fig. 1 (11-13) Subeylindrical and relatively slender. Body hairs numerous. Of three types: (1) minute (0.009 mm), simple, with apical half fine and flexible, on the ventral surface; intergrading on the lat- eral surfaces to (2) longer (0.09 mm), simple and slightly curved, on the dorsal surface; (3) a row of 4-6 nearly straight, moderately long (0.18 mm), 2-hooked uncinate hairs across the dorsal surface of each abdominal somite I-VI. Head hairs minute and exceedingly numerous (about 300). Head subhexagonal in anterior view; dorsal region thin and depressed. Antennae moderately large. Other characters apparently similar to laeviuscula. (Material studied: About 50 damaged integuments from Tunis.) Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) impressa Emery Eidmann, 1941: “Die Larven zeigen in ihrem Habitus mancherlei Besonderheiten und weichen in dieser Hinsicht von dem iiblichen Aussehen der Ameisenlarven nicht unwesentlich ab. Sie sind walzenférmig und gerade gestreckt, also nicht, wie zumeist, ventral eingekriimmt. Das Vorderende ist dadurch ausgezeichnet, dass der Kopf von dem stark entwickelten Prothorax kapuzenférmig tberragt wird. Der hintere Teil der Kopfkapsel ist weit in den Prothorax zuriick- gezogen, so dass die Mundteile senkrecht nach unten, d.h. nach der Ventralseite herausragen. Bei den jiingeren Larven ist die Vorwélbung des Prothorax weniger ausgesprochen als bei den Altlarven. Saémtliche Larven tragen auf der Dorsalseite der ersten sechs Abdominalseg- mente grosse ankerférmige Hafthaare, die in je einer Querreihe angeordnet sind. Jede dieser Querreihen besteht aus 4-7, im Durchschnitt 6 Haaren, deren Zahl von vorn nach hinten ab- nimmt. Bei dem letzten Segment sind meist nur 2-4 vorhanden, bei den jiingeren Larven weniger als bei den dlteren...Sie dienen dazu, das Aneinanderhaften der Larven zu Paketen zu erméglichen, wodurch besonders bei Junglarven der Transport durch die Arbeiter erleichtert wird, kénnen aber, wie vermutlich im vorliegen- den Fall, auch zum Anhdngen der Larven an den rauhen Wandungen der Nestkammern dienen WHEELER AND WHEELER: ANT LARVAE 255 und dadurch zu einer festen Lagerung und gleich- missigen Verteilung im Nest beitragen” (p. 214). Fig. 4 on p. 214 shows a young larva in side view, a mature larva in side view and an uncinate hair enlarged. Hidmann, 1944, p. 446: “Die Larven sind durch ihre walzenférmige, gestreckte Gestalt und den Besitz von reihenartig angeordneten, ankerformigen Oncochaeten auf der Dorsalseite der Abdominalsegmente ausgezeichnet.”’ Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) laeviuscula Mayr Fig. 1 (6-7) Plump, chunky, and turgid; straight and sub- ellipsoidal; ends narrowly rounded; diameter greatest at abdominal somite II. Head thin and flattened against the ventral surface near the anterior end; no neck. Anus posteroventral. Leg, wing, and gonopod vestiges present. No abdominal leg vestiges found. Segmentation indistinct. Spiracles unequal in size; the first much the largest, the remainder diminishing gradually. Integument of the last few somites spinulose, the spinules minute and isolated or in short transverse rows of two or three. Body hairs sparse, somewhat more abundant on the prothorax. Of three types: (1) simple, slender, slightly curved, 0.01-0.07 mm long, the most numerous type; (2) bifid, about 0.054 mm long, two to six on each of the thoracic somites and on abdominal somites I-VI; (8) nearly straight 2-hooked uncinate hairs, 0.12-0.18 mm _ long, five or six in a row on the dorsal surface of each abdominal somite I-VI. Head moderately large; subtrapezoidal in anterior view; dorsal outline frequently with a median notch; narrowed below; about as long as broad; extensive dorsolateral regions thin and depressed; mouth parts small. Inside the head just above the level of the mouth parts is a very slender sclerotized transverse bar; at either end it joins a sclerotized lobe, be- comes external and extends out for a short dis- tance into the prothorax; a slender branch from this lobe extends dorsally inside the gena and becomes external near the dorsal corner of the cranium. Antennae small, each mounted on a low convexity and bearing three (rarely two) sensilla. Head hairs sparse, short (0.01—0.35 mm), simple and slightly curved. Labrum very small, short (length a little less than one-fourth the width); subtrapezoidal, narrowed ventrally; border feebly to deeply ventral impressed ; 256 anterior surface of each half with three isolated and two agglomerated sensilla; posterior surface with two or three sensilla on each half. Mandibles very small; apical third slender, sharp-pointed, slightly curved medially, moderately sclerotized ; basal two-thirds widely inflated and _feebly sclerotized. Maxillae small; apex paraboloidal and directed medially; palp a cluster of four sensilla; galea two agglomerated sensilla. Labium small; palp a cluster of four sensilla; a minute sensillum between each palp and opening of sericteries; the latter a short transverse slit. (Material studied: Numerous larvae from two nests collected in Texas). Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) menileki proserpina Santschi Fig. 1 (8-10) Body hairs sparse, of three types: (1) Simple, minute (about 0.012 mm), with recurved tip; (2) with frayed tip, about 0.036 mm long, on the dorsal surface only; (3) nearly straight two- hooked uncinate hairs, about 0.11 mm long, about four in a row on the dorsal surface of each ab- dominal somite I-V. Head hairs minute to very short (0.006-0.018 mm), with the tip recurved. Posterior surface of labrum with two isolated sensilla on each half. Mandibles with the apical two-thirds slender, sharp-pointed, slightly curved medially and moderately sclerotized; basal one-third inflated and feebly sclerotized. In other respects apparently similar to lineolata. (Material studied: A single damaged integument from the Belgian Congo.) Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) rivai luctuosa Menozzi Fig. 3 Menozai, 1930: ‘‘La larva del primo stadio, o da pochi giorni uscita dall’uovo, ha corpo ovale, poco allungato, molto pit assottigliato all’innanzi che all’indietro, col lato dorsale, visto di fianco, convesso e quello ventrale in parte, anterior- mente concavo e poi convesso posteriormente. Ha distinti, oltre il capo, 10 segmenti, l’ultimo dei quali piuttosto ristretto all’indietro e termi- nato con una sorta di lobo pit o meno sviluppato. Tutti 1 segmenti hanno qualche peluzzo di forma semplice, inoltre 1 segmenti 4-10 sono provvisti al dorso, sulla linea mediana trasversale, di 3 0 4 lunghe setole terminate a doppio uncino. II capo visto di lato ha la forma di un cono tronco, é fornito di mandibole piccole, strette ed appun- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 8 tite. Lunghezza mm. 1,7; larghezza massima mm. 0,9. La larva del secondo stadio ha il corpo all’incirea rotondeggiante, fortemente depresso, quasi lenticolare, piano al dorso, mediocremente convesso al ventre, diviso in 12 segmenti oltre il capo. Questo é piu largo che lungo, coi lati lobiformi. I segmenti 1-8 dell’addome sono prov- visti lateralmente e in continuazione del piano dorsale di lunghe appendici pit 0 meno rettango- lari coll’apice ottusamente arrotondato; il 9° segmento (ultimo) é tribolato, cioé ha due ap- pendici laterali alquanto pit piccole di quelle dei segmenti precedenti e di forma subtriangolare e termina posteriormente, nella linea mediana, con un lobo codale a forma di cappuccio; inoltre i segmenti addominali 3-7 hanno in pit ognuno, al ventre, nella linea mediana longitudinale, un’- altra appendice di forma all’incirea eguale a quella dei lati, ma pit corta. La funzione di tali appendici, che trovano riscontro in altre con- formazioni omologhe ed analoghe di altre larve di formiche, si ritiene che sia quella di facilitare Vuscita per osmosi dei prodotti di escrezione emmessi da parecchie cellule del tessuto adiposo: infatti, ad un esame istologico, si trova che la parte distale delle dette appendici e riempita di un essudato sotto forma di liquido pit o meno nettamente granuloso, mentre nella parte pros- simale vi 6 un ammasso di numero variabile di cellule adipose o trofociti, di cui aleune, sparse pel corpo, ma quasi sempre raccolte in vicinanza Fig. 3.—Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) rivat luc- tuosa Menozzi: A, B, and C, Larvae of the first, second, and third stadia; D, longitudinal section of a lateral projection of a larva of the second sta- dium. (After Menozzi, 1930.) Auveust 1952 dell’entrata dell’appendice, contengono numerosi eristalli di urato. La chetotassi delle larve in questo stadio 6 su per gitt eguale a quella della larva precedentemente descritta e cosi dicasi anche per le setole uncinate che si trovano sul dorso dei segmenti 4-10. Lunghezza mm. 1,02; larghezza mm. 1,48. Larva matura.—In questo stadio fatte le debite proporzioni, il corpo della larva riprende la forma somigliante alquanto a quella del primo stadio, cioé ovale ma pit allungata e ancora pit fortemente ristretta in avanti. Sono distinti, oltre il capo, 12 segmenti; il 2° segmento toracico é come i precedenti coi lati arrotondati, i segmenti successivi, eccetto Vultimo, hanno le appendici che si trovano nella larva del secondo stadio, solo che esse sono ridotte in lunghezza. Lunghezza mm. 2,5; larghezza massima, presa sul 10° segmento e comprese anche le appendici laterali, mm. 1,6.” (pp. 100-102). Fig. 3 on p. 101: A, B & C— larvae in the Ist, 2nd and 3rd stadia; D— longitudinal section of a lateral appendage of a second-stadium larva. Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) scutellaris Olivier Fig. 4 Berlese, 1902, p. 239: “Il primo grande stigma, perfettamente circolare é sul secondo segmento e tutti gli altri, che sono egualmente circolari, vanno decrescendo in diametro e sono scolpiti clascuno su clascuno dei segmenti successivi, cosicché il primo e ultimo segmento del corpo non recano stigmi.” Fig. 4.—Crematogaster (Acrocoelia) scutellaris Olivier: A, Young larva in side view; B and C, older larvae in ventral view. (After Eidmann, 1926.) Eidmann, 1926: ‘‘Wie kommt es, dass die Larven nicht durch ihre Schwere nach unten fallen und sich im unteren Teil der Kammern anhaufen? Sie besitzen, um dies zu verhindern, sehr zwekmissige Anpassungen. Auf der Dorsal- seite der mittleren Segmente findet man je eine WHEELER AND WHEELER: ANT LARVAE 257 Querreihe von eigenartigen starken Haaren, wihrend der wtbrige Larvenkérper nackt ist. Bei starker Vergrésserung sieht man, dass diese Haare an ihrer Spitze héchst merkwiirdige Bil- dungen tragen. Die meisten enden in zwei Klauen, die entweder in einer Ebene liegen und dadurch wie ein Anker aussehen, oder auch nach einer Seite gerichtet sind. Die Haare der mittleren Segmente sind fast alle so gestaltet. Auf den hinteren Segmenten trifft man dagegen ganz seltsam geformte Endigungen der hier meist kirzeren Haare. Zackige, geweihartige und kronenformige Gebilde sieht man hier in allen méglichen Variationen vertreten, von denen die Abbildung eine Auswahl zeigt, und zwischen ihnen stehen hier und da kurze, starre, borsten- formige Haare. Wie ein Wald von Hellebarden und Enterhaken starren einem diese Gebilde unter dem Mikroskop von dem Riicken einer Larve entgegen. Diese Haare stellen eine aus- gezeichnete Haftvorrichtung dar, sowohl zum Anhangen der Larven an die Wande der steilen Kammern als auch zum Zusammenhangen mehre- rer Larven zu Biindeln. Selbst an totem Alkohol- material kann man die Wirkung noch beobach- ten, Wattefléckchen oder andere Fremdkérper haften ausserordentlich fest an ihnen und die zusammenhingenden Larven lassen sich nur schwer voneinander trennen. Samtliche Larven- stadien sind mit diesen Hafthaaren versehen, die dlteren Larven tragen jedoch neben diesen Haaren noch héchst merkwiirdige Bildungen an ihrem Ko6rper, die den jiingsten Stadien feh- len, und die ihnen ein ganz eigenartiges und ungewohntes Aussehen verleihen. Dies sind zwei Reihen von grossen, knopfartigen Papillen, die auf jeder Korperseite in emer Reihe hin- tereinander in der Zahl von sechs bis acht sitzen. Jedes Segment mit Ausnahme der ersten und letzten traigt links und rechts je ee solehe Auss- tiilpung. Es scheint als ob die Papillen dem Wachstum ihrer Triiger nicht folgen, denn bei alteren Larven sind sie relativ viel kleiner als bei den jiingeren Stadien. Der Zweck der Papil- len lisst nicht ohne doch nehme ich an, dass auch sie in irgendeiner Beziehung zu der Lebensweise in den hohen Nestkammern stehen. Bei Cr. submaura, die in der Erde lebt, fehlen namlich diese Bildungen und ihre Larven sehen wie jede andere Ameisen- larve aus. Sie haben zwar auch die langen, ankerformigen Hafthaare, doch ist dies keime Besonderheit, da eine Reihe anderer Ameisenar- sich weiteres erkennen, 258 ten (Pheidole, Solenopsis u. a.) gleichfalls damit versehen ist. Die Papillenreihen der Scutellaris- Larven dienen wahrscheinlich auch dazu, das Festhingen und Haften an der Wand der Kam- mern und untereinander zu gewihrleisten, vielleicht enthalten sie auch Driisen, die ein klebriges Sekret absondern, wie die Rucken- papillen der Larven von Ponera coarctata, wenngleich sich diese weder in ihrer Grdésse noch in ihrer Anordnung mit den Papillen der Scutellaris-Larven vergleichen lassen. Schhess- lich wire noch an eine dritte Méglichkeit zu denken, nimlich, dass es sich um Exsudatorgane handelt, wie sie Wheeler (1923) von verschiede- nen Arten beschrieben hat, doch kann dariiber wie uber die vorhergenannten Méglichkeiten nur die genaue Beobachtung am lebenden Objekt Autschluss geben” (pp. 724-726). (Mentioned by Hidmann, 1927; 1928, p. 237; 1936, p. 36.) Fig. 10 on p. 725, hairs; fig. 11 on p. 726, a young larva in side view, and two older larvae in ven- tral view. Crematogaster (Crematogaster) acuta (Fabricius) Fig. 5 (1-4) Body straight, elongate-subellipsoidal, and rather slender; both ends rounded, but with the terminal somites directed posteroventrally and forming a low, blunt point; belly paunchy at abdominal somites III and IV. Head applied to the ventral surface near the anterior end; no neck. Anus ventral. Leg, wing and gonopod vestiges present. Segmentation indistinct. Spi- racles unequal in size; the first much the largest, the remainder diminishing gradually. Integu- ment of the dorsal surface of the posterior somites spinulose, the spinules isolated and minute. Body hairs moderately abundant, short to moderately long and rather uniformly distributed. Of three types: (1) Simple, short (0.02-0.08 mm), longest on the prothorax, slightly curved, limited to the ventral and ventrolateral surfaces; (2) curved, with multifid tip, 0.054-0.19 mm long, limited to the dorsal and dorsolateral surfaces, the tips directed dorsally or posteriorly, those on the prothorax the longest and most strongly curved; (3) nearly straight two-hooked uncinate hairs, about 0.19 mm long, usually four on each ab- dominal somite I-VI. Head very small, sub- hexagonal in anterior view; a fourth broader than long; somewhat narrowed dorsally, ventral outline convex; integument sclerotized; from each ventrolateral corner a heavily sclerotized JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, NO. 8 structure passes into the prothorax; mouth parts small. Antennae minute raised areas, each with three sensilla. Head hairs sparse, simple, slightly curved, moderately long (0.009-0.054 mm), with stout base and flexible tip. Labrum very small, short (length one-fourth the width), subtrapezoidal, narrowed ventrally: ventral bor- der feebly concave; anterior surface with three isolated and two agglomerated sensilla on each half; posterior surface with three isolated sen- silla on each half; ventral border with a few spinules. Mandibles very small; apical three- fifths moderately sclerotized, slender, slightly curved medially and tapering to a sharp point; basal two-fifths feebly sclerotized and only slightly inflated. Maxillae small; apex parabo- loidal and directed medially; palp represented by three agglomerated sensilla; galea represented by two agglomerated sensilla. Labium small; palp represented by three agglomerated sensilla; a minute sensillum between each palp and open- ing of sericteries; the latter a short transverse slit. (Material studied: Numerous larvae from Panama Canal Zone.) Youne: Length about 1.4 mm. Similar to the adult except as follows: Posterior end of abdo- men somewhat attenuated and turned ventrally at right angles; ventral profile otherwise straight. Anus subterminal. Body hairs relatively longer and seemingly more abundant. Head relatively larger. G. C. and E. H. Wheeler have recorded (1924, p. 54) 26 larvae of this species which were para- sitized by an undetermined eulophid. Fig. 2 on page 55 is a photograph of two eulophid pupae inside one of the ant larvae. Crematogaster (Orthocrema) limata dextella Santschi Fig. 5 (9-14) Straight, subeylindrical, and rather stout; ends rounded; head and prothorax slightly bent ventrally; head anteroventral; no neck. Anus posteroventral. Leg, wing, and gonopod vestiges present. Segmentation indistinct. Spiracles un- equal in size, the first the largest, the tenth the smallest. Body hairs sparse, somewhat more abundant on the prothorax. Of three types: (1) A very few simple, minute (0.018-0.054 mm), flexible hairs on the ventral surface of the thorax; (2) hairs with denticulate tip, short (0.036-0.081 mm), generally distributed; (3) nearly straight two-hooked uncinate hairs, mod- Aveust 1952 WHEELER AND WHEELER: ANT LARVAE 259 Fic. 5.—1-5, Crematogaster (Crematogaster) acuta (Fabricius): 1, Head in anterior view, X S86; 2, left mandible in anterior view, X 216; 3, three body hairs, X 185; 4, young larva in side view, X 20; 5, mature larva in side view, X 20. 6-8, C. (Orthocrema) minutissima missourtensis Emery: 6, Head in anterior, X 95; 7, right mandible in anterior view, X 216; 8, young larva in side view (hairs omitted), x 3B. 9-14, C. (O.) limata dextella Santschi: 9, Head in anterior view, X 95; 10, left mandible in anterior view, X 216; 11, three body hairs, X 185; 12, very young larva in side view (hairs omitted), x 32; 13, young larva in side view (hairs omitted), X 382; 74, mature larva in side view, X 82. 16-17, C. (O.) brevispinosa Mayr: 15, Head in anterior view, X 167; 16, three types of body hairs, X 18d; 17, two views of the fourth type of body hair, X 185; 78, left mandible in anterior view, X 216. 19-21, C. (Physocrema) deformis F. Smith: 19, Head in anterior view, X 76; 20, left mandible in anterior view, X 216; 21, three body hairs, X 185. 260, erately long (about 0.18 mm), about four in a row across the dorsal surface of each abdominal somite I-V. Head subhexagonal in anterior view, narrowed ventrally; dorsal and ventral outlines convex; breadth about equal to length; dorsal and dorsolateral areas thin and depressed; mouth parts very small. Inside the head, just above the level of the mouth parts, there is a slender transverse sclerotic bar; each end of the bar turns upward and comes to the surface in the gena. Antennae small, with two sensilla each. Head hairs sparse, short (about 0.018 mm), simple and slightly curved. Labrum very small, short (breath 34 times length), bilobed due to a deep concave incision of the ventral border; anterior surface with four isolated and two agglomerated sensilla on each half; posterior surface with two isolated sensilla on each half; ventral border with a few spinules. Mandibles very small, moderately sclerotized, with a moderately wide base tapering to a sharp point, which is slightly curved medially. Maxillae small; apex paraboloidal and directed medially; palp represented by three agglomerated sensilla; galea represented by two agglomerated sensilla. Labium small; palp represented by three agglom- erated sensilla; a minute sensillum between each palp and opening of sericteries; the latter a short transverse slit. (Material studied: Numer- ous larvae from Panama Canal Zone.) JUST-HATCHED LARVA: Length 0.6 mm. Head on the anterior end; relatively large; apparently without hairs. Body almost hairless; the unci- nate hairs of the adult are represented by small tubercles, each surrounded by its alveolus and articular membrane. Youne LARVA: Length about 1.0 mm. Similar to the mature larva but the head relatively larger and on the anterior end; body hairs relatively longer and seemingly more abundant. Segmenta- tion distinct on the anterior half. Crematogaster (Orthocrema) brevispinosa Mayr Fig. 5 (15-18) SexuaL FrorM: Plump, chunky, and turgid; subovoidal, narrowed anteriorly; head ventral, near the anterior end. Anus _ posteroventral. Spiracles unequal in size; the first much the largest, the rest approximately equal. Integu- ment of the posterior abdominal somites spinu- lose. Body hairs sparse, of four types: (1) Simple and very slender, a few on the lateral and dorsal surfaces, 0.018-0.07 mm long; (2) with the apex JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 8 broad, flat and denticulate, minute (about 0.018 mm), a few on the ventral surface of the meso- thorax, metathorax and abdominal somites I-IX;; (3) minute (about 0.018 mm), stout, with frayed tip, on the dorsal surface of the prothorax, mesothorax and abdominal somites [IX and X, and on the ventral surface of the prothorax and abdominal somite X; (4) nearly straight two- hooked uncinate hairs, short (about 0.087 mm), three or four in a row across the dorsal surface of each abdominal somite I-V. Head subtrape- zoidal in anterior view (but with a median dorsal truncate production), narrowed below; about as long as broad; integument somewhat sclerotized. Antennae minute, with three or four sensilla. Head hairs very few minute (about 0.006 mm) and simple. Labrum very small, short (length one-third the width), bilobed due to the con- cavity of the ventral border; anterior surface with two sensilla on each half; posterior surface with eight scattered sensilla; ventral border with a few spinules. Mandibles small; moderately sclerotized; basal two-thirds slightly inflated; apical one-third slightly curved medially and tapering rapidly to a sharp point. Maxillae small; apex paraboloidal and directed medially; palp represented by four agglomerated sensilla; galea represented by two agglomerated sensilla. Labium small; palp represented by four agglom- erated sensilla; a minute sensillum between each palp and opening of sericteries; the latter a short transverse slit. (Material studied: Several larvae from Panama Canal Zone.) Crematogaster (Orthocrema) brevispinosa tumulifera Forel Similar to brevispinosa s. str. (Material studied: Several sexual larvae from Panama). Crematogaster (Orthocrema) dispar Forel Wheeler (1933, p. 89) stated that the queen larvae of a variety of this species “were nearly spherical and resembled pearls.” Crematogaster (Orthocrema) minutissima missouriensis Emery Fig. 5 (6-8) Leg and gonopod vestiges present. Spiracles unequal in size, the first much the largest, the rest diminishing gradually. Integument of the dorsal surface of the posterior somites sparsely spinulose, the spinules isolated and rather coarse. Head subcireular in anterior view, with the dor- sal region thin and depressed. A slender sclero- Aueust 1952 tized bar extends, just inside the gena, from the mandible to the level of the antennae; at its middle a stouter branch passes out and enters the prothorax. Antennae moderately large and drumlin-shaped, with three sensilla each. Labrum small, width 2.7 times the length, bilobed owing to the concavity of the ventral border; anterior surface of each half with four or five isolated and two agglomerated sensilla; posterior surface with four isolated sensilla on each half. Mandibles small, moderately sclerotized, subtriangular, with the apex slightly curved medially; medial border bearing a low, blunt tooth. Maxillae small; apex paraboloidal; palp a low knob bear- ing four or five sensilla; galea represented by two agglomerated sensilla. Labium small; palp a low knob bearing four sensilla; a minute sensil- lum between each palp and opening of sericteries; the latter a short transverse slit. Youne Larva: Length 0.77 mm. Plump and chunky, dorsal profile C-shaped, ventral profile sinuous; head ventral, near the anterior end; posterior end round-pointed. Anus ventral. Segmentation distinct on the anterior half; indistinct posteriorly. Other characters appar- ently as in the mature larva. (Material studied: One mature larva, one semipupa and a dozen young—all damaged—from Oklahoma.) Crematogaster (Orthocrema) quadriformis roveretoi Forel Eidmann, 1936, p. 42: “Die Larven sind spirlich behaart und zeigen im iibrigen keine bemerkenswerten Besonderheiten.” Crematogaster (Physocrema) deformis F. Smith Fig. 5 (19-21) Plump, chunky, and turgid; straight and sub- ellipsoidal; head flattened against the ventral surface near the anterior end. Anus ventral. Leg and gonopod vestiges present. Segmentation indistinct. Spiracles unequal in size, the first much the largest, the rest diminishing gradually. At the posterior border of each thoracic somite in the ventrolateral portion of the intersomitic groove is an integumentary structure that looks like a series of transverse folds or ridges; also in the intersomitic grooves between the thoracic and between the anterior abdominal somites are dark staining (with acid fuchsin) transverse bands on the dorsal and ventral surfaces. Body hairs exceedingly sparse, most abundant on the ventral surface of the prothorax. Of three types: WHEELER AND WHEELER: ANT LARVAE 261 (1) Simple, minute (0.009-0.018 mm); (2) stout, denticulate or with frayed tip, minute (about 0.018 mm), on the ventral surface; (3) nearly straight two-hooked uncinate hairs, about 0.09 mm long, about four in a row on the dorsal surface of each abdominal somite I-V. Head subhexagonal in anterior view; integument sclerotized; from each ventrolateral corner of the head a large sclerotized structure passes out and enters the prothorax; mouth parts small. An- tennae small, with three sensilla each. Head hairs sparse and short (0.018-0.036 mm), stout, with the tip frayed. Labrum very small, short (width 34 times the length), bilobed due to a concavity of the ventral border; each half of the anterior surface with three isolated and two agglomerated sensilla; posterior surface with one sensillum on each half. Mandibles small, sub- triangular; base broad; tapering to a long slender sharp point, which is curved medially. Maxillae small, apex paraboloidal and directed medially; palp a slightly raised cluster of four agglomerated sensilla; galea represented by two agglomerated sensilla. Labium small; palp a slightly raised cluster of four agglomerated sensilla; a minute sensillum between each palp and opening of sericteries; the latter a short transverse slit. (Material studied: Seven damaged integuments from Java.) Crematogaster (Sphaerocrema) striatula Hmery Kidmann, 1944, p. 448: “Eben geschliipfte Hilarven .. . fallen durch ihre gedrungene, kaum gekriimmte Gestalt auf, die Riickseite der Ab- dominalsegmente ist mit Reihen grosser anker- formiger Oncochiten besetzt.” LITERATURE CITED (A Bibliography of the Larvae of the Crematogastrin1) Arutas-Hpnriot, C. Recherches sur les larves de quelques fourmis d’ Algérie. Bull. Biol. France Belgique 81: 247-272, 5 figs. 1947. BerLESE, A. Osservaziont su fenoment che av- vengono durante la ninfosi degli insetti meta- bolici. Riv. Patologia Vegetale 9: 177-344, 95 figs. 1902. BristowE, W. 8S. Insects and other invertebrates for human consumption in Siam. Trans. Ent. Soc. London 80: 387-404, 1 fig. 1932. EipMann, H. Die Ameisenfauna der Balearen. Zeitschr. Morphol. Okol. Tiere 6: 694-742, 14 figs. 1926. Nest und Larve von Crematogaster scutel- laris Oliv. Ent. Mitteil. 16: 18-19. 1927. Zur Kenntnis der Biologie der Rossameise bo o> i) (Camponotus herculeanus L.). Zeitschr. An- gew. Ent. 14: 229-253, 9 figs. 1928. Okologisch-faunistische Studien an siid- brasilianischen Ameisen. Arb. Phys. Angew. Ent. Berlin-Dahlem 3: 26-48, 81-114, 1 pl., 5 text figs. 1936. Zur Kenntnis der Crematogoster im- pressa Em. (Hym. F ormicidae) und threr Gaste. Zool. Anz. 186: 207-220, 5 figs. 1941. . Die Ameisenfauna von Fernando Poo. Zool. Jahrb., Abt. Syst., 76: 413-490, 1 pl., 17 text figs. 1944. Gantes, H. Morphologie externe et croissance de quelques larves de Formicidés. Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Afrique du Nord 4: 71-97, 6 pls. 1949. ZOOLOGY.—Notes on the history and Criark, U. 8S. National Museum. Reptiles differ from mammals and birds in being cold blooded. They agree with birds in having a relatively dry skin and in being highly dependent on sunlight. More dependent on sunlight than birds, nearly all live in sunny regions, especially in more or Jess arid, though not excessively arid, regions. Nearly all reptiles lay eggs like birds, but the young emerge from the eggs in the adult form and are not tended or fed by the parents. Nearly all modern reptiles are carnivorous, largely insect- feeders, like most birds, at least when young. Except for being cold blooded, the reptiles in the broader aspects of their ecology are more similar to the birds than they are to any other vertebrates. Morphologically they have been united with the birds under the inclusive term Sauropsida. But some rep- tiles are viviparous and some are wholly aquatic, as the sea snakes. Some have horny beaks like birds, others uniform or diversi- fied teeth. In the past a number had the power of flight, their wings being essentially like those of the mammalian bats, not like those of birds. Whereas since the Eocene the mammals and birds have undergone continuous and ereat diversification with adaptations for the constantly changing conditions and are today the dominant terrestrial vertebrates, the history of the reptiles has been quite different. In the Mesozoic the reptiles had reached a high degree of development and specialization and were highly diversified. There were, among others, gigantic, chiefly herbivorous, dinosaurs, great marine rep- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 8 Menozzi,C. Formiche della Somalia italiana mert- dionale. Mem. Soc. Ent. Ital. 9: 76-130, 3 pls., 4 figs. 1930. Srarcker, A. Contribution to the biology of Myr- mica schencki Hm. Tijdschr. Ent. 91: 25-71, 50 figs. 1948. WHEELER, G. C., and WHEELER, HK. H. A new species of Schizaspidia (Hucharidae), with notes on a eulophid ant parasite. Psyche 31: 49-56, 2 figs. 1924. WHEELER, W. M. Colony-founding among ants, with an account of some primitive Australian species: x + 179 pp., 29 figs. Harvard Univ. Press, 1933. distribution of the reptiles. Austin H. tiles of various kinds, and several types of flying reptiles, together with the more famil- lar crocodiles, turtles, and snakes. The de- velopment of the reptiles reached a cul- mination in the Cretaceous, but toward the end of that period most of them disappeared. Up to the end of the Cretaceous there were 19 orders of reptiles, but since the earliest Tertiary, when there were a very few re- minders of the exceedingly rich Mesozoic fauna, only 4 of these have persisted, the Rhynchocephalia, represented only by Sphe- nodon or Hatteria, the tuatara of New Zea- land; the crocodiles, confined to tropical and subtropical regions; the turtles; and the Squamata, including the lizards and snakes. The world-wide and practically simultane- ous disappearance of most of the reptiles, including all the giant terrestrial herbivores and carnivores, the flying pterodactyls, and the large ichthyosaurs, plesiosaurs, and moso- saurs, was followed by the evolution and development from mammalian stock of a great variety of types occupying the former habitats of all the terrestrial reptiles, with the cetaceans replacing the marine types. Presumably the place of the flying reptiles was taken by certain birds. Any satisfactory explanation of the sud- den disappearance of the dominant reptiles and their rapid replacement by mammals must be applicable equally to all the con- tinents and to all the oceans as well. In view of the dependence of practically all modern reptiles, especially those with heavy skeletons or dermal scutes such as the hard shelled turtles and the crocodilians, on Aveust 1952 abundant sunlight, and the independence of sunlight characteristic of the largely noc- turnal mammals, it would seem that a radical change in the amount or character of the sun’s radiations reaching the earth may well have been the chief factor in the disappearance of the reptiles which prepared the way for the domination of the mammals. During the Cretaceous there was exten- sive inundation of the land areas by the sea, the continents were much isolated, and the climate presumably was warm and uni- form. At the end of the Cretaceous there seems to have been a great upheaval of the land in both the northern and southern hemispheres. This was accompanied by local and intermittent volcanic activity through- out the Eocene in the Rocky Mountain region, Central America, the West Indies, and southern Europe. Any marked increase in the land areas would mean a correspond- ing increase in dust in the atmosphere, inorganic dust from arid areas and pollen and other organic dust from heavily vege- tated regions. Volcanic activity would also produce a large amount of atmospheric dust. Of interest in regard to the latter is the information on the eruption of Krakatoa, between Sumatra and Java, on May 26-28, 1883. In this eruption the height of the ejected column of stones, ashes, and dust was estimated to have reached 17 miles or more. The finer particles were diffused over a large part of the earth and were carried over North and South America, Europe, Asia, South Africa, and Australia. In the Old World they spread from Scandinavia to the Cape of Good Hope. And this is the record of only a single isolated eruption. With increase in land areas and intermit- tent volcanic eruptions the illumination of the surface of the earth would be consider- ably altered. Whereas the extensive inunda- tion of the land areas during the Cretaceous would presumably clear the atmosphere, giving rise to conditions especially favorable to reptiles, increase in land areas, especially in connection with volcanic activity, would make conditions unfavorable for reptiles while at the same time permitting the rapid increase and diversification of mammals. In their present distribution the land reptiles fall into two main groups. The CLARK: HISTORY AND DISTRIBUTION OF REPTILES 263 strictly terrestrial forms, such as the lizards and most snakes, follow largely the distribu- tional pattern of the mammals except that they do not range so far north or south and, possibly because of their greater age, there are among them more striking cases of discontinuous distribution resulting from extirpation over a large portion of the orig- inal range. In the mammals examples of discontinuous distribution are the camels, originally North American but now repre- sented only by two wild species in South America, two domesticated species in South America, and two domesticated species in Asia one of which has been introduced into Africa; the tapirs once widespread but now restricted to tropical America and the Malay Peninsula, Sumatra, and Borneo; and the fresh-water dolphins of South America, India, and China; but the last may have been originally marine. In the Pleistocene many mammals spread from Asia into North America, and from North America into Asia, but apparently the connection between these continents was too far north to serve as a highway for any reptiles. Some examples of discontinuous distribution in the reptiles are, the Gila monsters (Helodermatidae), Texas, Arizona, Mexico, and Borneo; the large herbivorous iguanas, tropical America, Madagascar, and Fiji; the pythons, tropics of the Old World and western Mexico; and the burrowing Amphisbaena, South America and Africa. The true land tortoises (Testudo) are found in all tropical and warm temperate regions except Australia. The amphibious reptiles, the crocodilians and the fresh-water turtles, present a more generalized distributional picture resembling that of the amphibians rather than that of the mammals presumably owing both to their greater age than mammals and the fact that aquatic habitats are much less variable than terrestrial, the chief differential here being extratropical changes in temperature. True crocodiles (Crocodylus), appearing first in the Cretaceous, still occur throughout the tropics. The gavials and alligators ap- pear in the Miocene; the gavials are now confined to southern Asia, the alligators (with the caymans) to America, with one alligator in southern China. Among the 264 fresh-water turtles the soft-shelled type, ap- pearing first in the Cretaceous, still occurs in Asia, Africa, and America, as far north as Canada; the Pelomedusidae are found in Africa and South America; and the snake- necked turtles in South America, Australia, and New Guinea. Briefly stated, the history and present distribution of the reptiles seem to be de- pendent upon their special ecological char- JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 8 acteristics, which differ from those of any of the other vertebrates in their dependence upon certain elements of sunlight and their relative independence of a constant supply of external water. Their former distribution is most closely parallel to that of the succeed- ing mammals, while their present distribu- tion is mainly parallel to that of mammals with some forms having a distribution paral- lel to that of the amphibians. ZOOLOGY .—Poritextularia, a new Recent foraminiferal genus.! ALFRED R. LoEB- LIcH, JR., and HeLen Tappan, U.S. National Museum. During generic studies of the smaller Foraminifera, the writers have encountered numerous species that do not agree with the generic diagnosis of the genera to which they have been referred. In order that the foram- iniferal genera should be more precisely defined, the writers are excluding many such species from genera that have already been well defined. In the present paper a new generic name 1s proposed for a species in the family Textulariidae which was previously referred to Textularia panamensis Cushman. In a recent article by Loeblich (1952, p. 190) it was inferred that this species might belong to Tawitawia Loeblich as it was very similar to the genotype species of Tawitawia. At that time, no specimens of the present form were available for study, but the writers have subsequently had the opportunity of examining a suite of speci- mens of this species. Although similar ex- ternally, the two species differ in both their apertural character and internal structure. The new genus Poritextularia here described, like Tawitawia, 1s a specialized off-shoot from Textularia, that has evidently de- veloped in Recent times. The writers are indebted to Dr. Irene McCulloch, Allan Hancock Foundation, University of Southern California, for mak- ing available a fine suite of specimens for study. Family TEXTULARIIDAE Genus Poritextularia Loeblich and Tappan, n. gen. Genotype (type species): Poritextularia mezxi- cana Loeblich and Tappan, n. sp. 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. Test free, compressed, biserial throughout; wall agglutinated, interior simple; aperture con- sisting in the early stages of an elongate slit at the base of the last chamber, paralleling the sides of the test, and in the adult consists of a linear series of openings across the terminal portion of the final chamber, formed by the development of pillars across the original slit. Remarks.—This genus resembles Teztularia Defrance in the biserial agglutinated test, but differs in having a multiple aperture. It resembles Tawitawia Loeblich in the large flattened biserial test with a rather extreme overlap of chambers and multiple aperture, but differs in having a simple interior, lacking the internal pillars and labyrinthic structure of the latter genus, and in being completely biserial with no tendency to become uniserial. The aperture of Tawitawia is completely terminal and does not extend to the base of the final chamber as in Poriteztularia. Poritextularia mexicana Loeblich and Tappan, n. sp. Figs. 1-3 Textularia panamensis Cushman, Lalicker and McCulloch (not Cushman, 1918), Allan Han- cock Pacific Exped. 6 (2): 136, pl. 15, figs., 18 a-e. 1940. Test free, biserial throughout, rhomboid in out- line, much compressed, sides flat; chambers numerous, low and broad, increasing gradually in size from the rounded proloculus, very oblique, highest at the mid portion of the test and bending downward to the margins; sutures distinct, de- pressed, strongly oblique, slightly curved up- wards; wall finely arenaceous, with occasional large black mineral grains included (shown on final pair of chambers in Fig. 1 and to the right margin of Fig. 2), interior simple, not labyrinthic; aperture in the early stages consisting of an elon- | Avueust 1952 gate slit at the base of the last chamber, paral- leling the flat sides of the test, which in the adult may be bridged by pillars so that the former slit is broken up into a linear series of small pore-like openings extending from the base across the terminal_portion of the final chamber. Length of holotype (Fig. 1) 1.85 mm, breadth 1.22 mm, thickness 0.23 mm. Length of paratype of Fig. 2 1.87 mm, breadth 1.43 mm, thickness 0.23 mm. Length of paratype of Fig. 3 1.82 mm, breadth 1.20 mm, thickness, 0.23 mm. Roe This species was described and il- lustrated by Lalicker and McCulloch (1940, p. 136, pl. 15, fig. 18) but was referred to Textularia panamensis Cushman. Textularia espersoni Applin was placed in the synonymy of 7’. panamensis in this publication, but the present writers believe Applin’s species to be distinct from both Cush- man’s species and the present form. Textularia espersoni is a small, parallel-sided species with a diamond-shaped cross section, much thicker along the central zigzag suture than at the periphery. The chambers are comparatively high and pro- Frias. 1- LOEBLICH AND TAPPAN: 3.—Poritextularia mexicana Loeblich and Tappan, P. 839) showing broad flat test, strongly overlapping chambers, PORITEXTULARIA 265 duced into spines at the margins. The aperture is “a, well-arched opening at the base of the last- formed chamber.” Textularia panamensis is larger than T’. esper- sont, has a rhomboid outline, but is extremely flattened, and the chambers are very low and broad. The aperture was described as “indis- tinct,” but examination of additional specimens from the Miocene Gatun formation, near the Gatun Railroad Station, shows the aperture to consist of a well-defined triangular opening at the base of the last chamber, which does not ex- tend far up the apertural face. The species T’. panamensis Cushman, 1918, and T. espersont Applin, 1925, are both true Tezrtularia and quite distinct from the present species, which has much more strongly overlapping chambers, a larger test approximately three times as large, and the aperture varying from a very elongate slit beginning at the base of the last chamber to a multiple aperture consisting of a linear series of openings. Types and occurrence.—Holotype (USNM P. la, side view of holotype (USNM and dark mineral grains on final two n.sp.: chambers; lb, top yiew showing aperture beginning as an arch at the base of the chamber and extend- ing as a linear series of pores across the top of the final chamber (four black mineral grains are present at the mala side of the chamber nearly in line with the aperture and should not be confused with the aperture); 2a, side view of paratype (U SNM P. 840 a); 2b, top view showing long slitlike aperture inter- 3b, top view showing shorter Sally D. Lee, scientific rupted by a single pillar; 38a, side view of paratype (USNM P. S40 b); slitlike aperture uninterrupted by pillars. (All figures camera-lucida drawings by $ illustrator, Smithsonian Institution.) 266 839) figured paratypes (USNM P. 840 a-b) and unfigured paratypes (USNM P. 841 a-e) all from Allan Hancock Expedition station 2060, Point Piaxtla, Sinaloa, Mexico, lat. 23°33’ N., long. 106°46’ W., in 8 fathoms. REFERENCES Appuin, E. R., in Appin, E. R., Evitsor, A. E., and Knikxer, H. T. Subsurface stratigraphy of the coastal plain of Texas and Louisiana. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 8 Bull Amer. Assoc. Petr. Geol. Bull. 9: 79-122. 1925. CusHMaANn, J. A. The smaller fossil Foraminifera of the Panama Canal Zone. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 103: 45-87, pls. 19-33. 1918. Lauicker, C. G., and McCuttocu, I. Some Textu- lariidae of the Pacific Ocean. Allan Hancock Pacific Exped. 6: 115-148, pls. 13-16. 1940. Lorsuiicu, A. R., Jr. New Recent foraminiferal genera from the tropical Pacific. Journ. Wash- ington Acad. Sci. 42: 189-193. 1952. MALACOLOGY.—A new glycymerid from the Western Atlantic.! Davin Nicou, U.S. National Museum. While examining Glycymeris americana in the U. 8. National Museum collection, I found specimens of an undescribed species of Recent glyecymerid which had been la- beled G. undata (Linné), G. decussata (Linné), G. pennacea (Lamarck), G. lineata (Reeve), and G. americana (Defrance). These many names indicate that the Western Atlantic glycymerids are in need of a thorough study. I am greatly indebted to William’ J. Clench and T. E. Pulley, of the Museum of Comparative Zoélogy, for the loan of speci- mens for examination. Glycymeris spectralis Nicol, n. sp. Figs. 1, 2 Description.—Shell, with one exception, longer than high; ratio of convexity to height about 0.68; valve outline ovate to subtriangular, with the posterior side produced and commonly truncated; beaks opisthogyrate and located at about the posterior fourth of the ligamental area; umbos small; ligament small and short with about six ligamental chevrons which are better developed on the anterior side; hinge plate narrow; hinge teeth small, about 25 in number; radial ribs rather narrow, raised slightly, separated by narrow inter- spaces, ribs and interspaces covered by radial Fies. 1, 2.—Glycymeris spectralis Nicol, n.sp., holotype (U.S.N.M. no. 598668), Recent, from Boynton on Lake Worth, Palm Beach County, Fla.: 1, Interior, right valve; 2, exterior, left valve. Natural size. 1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. striae; periostracum well-developed, velvety; crenulations on inner ventral border large and widely spaced for the size of the shell, 6 or 7 per cm on specimens of from 20 to 25 mm in height; color pattern variable, some specimens show dis- tinct rays of reddish-brown exteriorly; interior of some specimens may be white or light to dark brown, color better developed on the posterior side of the shell. Measurements in mm.—The numbers that follow the words holotype and paratype are U. 8S. Na- tional Museum catalogue numbers. Height Length Convexity Holotype 598668 19.2 20.5 13.0 Paratype 522645 22.0 21.8 14.4 Paratype 522645a 14.0 14.8 8.8 Paratype 223632 22.0 24.7 15.8 Paratype 223632a 21.6 23.4 15.2 Paratype 223632b 16.2 18.3 11.2 Paratype 223632¢ 17.0 19.1 11.7 Paratype 223632d 17.3 19.6 12.0 Paratype 36421 21.6 24.5 14.2 Paratype 36421a 20.6 21.2 14.4 Paratype 599298 17.7 18.4 11.3 Paratype 599298a 14.9 16.6 10.1 Paratype 599298b 13.2 14.2 8.0 Paratype 486218 15.2 16.7 9.9 Paratype 486218a 14.4 16.1 9.3 Paratype 36418 21.9 23.0 14.7 Paratype 92393 21-3) 23.6 14.3 Paratype 598667 24.2 25.8 17.6 Paratype 486294 27.6 29.4 20.2 Paratype 406841 16.6 17.8 11.2 Paratype 406841la 15.2 15.9 9.2 Paratype 83135 5.2 5.9 3.6 Paratype 124780 20.5 22.8 Ler Paratype 515910 19.7 20.3 13.9 Paratype 364579 22.9 25.2 17.0 Paratype 364579a 16.9 18.1 12.3 Paratype 364706 18.8 21.4 14.6 Paratype 364706a 17.6 19.2 12.8 Paratype 364706b 8.1 9.0 5.9 Paratype 543835 22.7 25.4 15.8 Paratype 543835a 20.6 22.4 13.5 Paratype 543835b 19.2 21.9 13.2 Paratype 543835¢ 18.8 PAV 11.8 Paratype 543835d 18.8 22.2 11.9 Paratype 543835e 15.0 16.8 9.9 Paratype 543835f 14.7 16.7 9.2 Paratype 543835g¢ 13.5 14.9 8.7 Paratype 486540 16.6 18.0 Hilt Types.—Holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 598668 (Divi- sion of Mollusks). There are 37 paratypes in the Aveust 1952 NICOL: NEW GLYCYMERID U.S. National Museum collection; for catalogue numbers see under Measurements. The Museum of Comparative Zodlogy at Harvard College has 50 paratypes of Glycymeris spectralis. Comparisons.—Glycymeris spectralis can be distinguished from G. americana (Defrance) by the more prominent and narrow radial ribs, the produced and commonly truncated posterior side of the valves, and the more strongly opistho- gyrate beaks. It can be differentiated from G. undata (Linné) = G. lineata (Reeve) by the opisthogyrate beaks and the more prominent and narrow radial ribs. G. spectralis can be dis- tinguished from G. decussata (Linné) = G. pen- nacea (Lamarck) by the narrower and more prominent radial ribs and by the wider-spaced and less numerous crenulations along the interior margin. Geographic distribution—The holotype was collected at Boynton on Lake Worth, Palm Beach County, Fla. The northernmost locality for Glycymeris spectralis is Shackleford Island, which lies immediately west of Cape Lookout, N. C. Several lots were taken from around Cape MEXICO FROM WESTERN ATLANTIC 267 Fear, N. C. The species is common along the east coast of Florida as far south as Miami, but only one specimen has been noted from the west coast of Florida (Lemon Bay). There are no records of G. spectralis north of Lemon Bay and around the Gulf coast to Tampico, Mexico. At Tampico this species is common, and it occurs as far south as the Bay of Campeche. There are three lots of specimens from the north coast of Honduras and one from San Juan del Norte (Greytown), Nicaragua, in the U. 8. National Museum collection. The distribution of G. spec- tralis is plotted on a map, Fig. 3. Further collect- ing will probably fill in some of the gap between Tampico, Mexico, and Lemon Bay, Fla. G. spec- tralis has not been found in the West Indies, including the Bahama Islands; this species ap- pears to be confined to shallow water off the mainland of North and Central America. Habitat—Glycymeris spectralis has been col- lected from a sandy bottom. The most common depths from which this species has been dredged are from 16 to 18 meters, but it has been found at depths ranging from 1 to 26 meters. GWinington Charleston EAS TS Fig. 3.—Geographie distribution of Glycymeris spectralis, v.sp. 268 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voL. 42, No. 8 ICHTHYOLOGY .—Revision of the genus Talismania, with description of a new species from the Gulf of Mexico. A. E. Parr, American Museum of Natural History. (Communicated by Leonard P. Schultz.) The segregation of Nemabathytroctes from Talismania has always rested almost ex- clusively upon the presence of produced fin rays at least in the pectorals of the former. In 1951 the writer (Parr, 1951, p. 11) re- stricted Talismania to the genotype, T’. homoptera (Vaillant, not 7. homoptera of other authors), with the other species usually identified as 7’. homoptera transferred to the family Searsidae, and those referred to the genus Talismania under other specific names placed in the genera Rouleina and Bing- hamichthys. Thus restricted, Talismania agreed with Nemabathytroctes in all basic features, such as the length of the snout, lateral dentition of premaxillaries, and structure of opercular bones. But a fairly sharp distinction still existed between the two species referred to Nemabathytroctes and the only recognized species of Talismania, in regard to the size of the head, the dimensions of the jaws, the apparent form (depth) of the body, and other features (see the key on p. 269). With the type of 7. homoptera no longer giving any evidence of produced pec- toral rays, the generic identity of this genus and species with Nemabathytroctes therefore still remained unsuspected. The discovery of another new species, unquestionably representative of Nemabathy- troctes, but with heads and jaws in the pro- portions characteristic of Talismania homop- tera, and with the produced rays of pectoral fin relatively weaker and less thickened than in the other species of Nemabathytroctes, has now given new significance to Vaillant’s previously neglected description of the pec- torals of T. homoptera as being elongated so as to reach to, or even beyond, the insertion of the ventrals. It is therefore now obvious that Talismania and Nemabathytroctes are identical genera, differing only by their type species but not by any characters of generic significance. The relatively slender body measurements of T'. homoptera are governed by the dimen- sions of the soft parts only and can be largely explained by the state of the specimen, in which the stomach is missing and the other soft parts seem shrunken or in a naturally poor state of nutrition. The great over-all length of the head in T. bifurcata is largely due to the long dermal flap of the gill cover, which extends well be- yond the insertion of the anterior (upper) ray in pectoral fin. When skeletal measure- ments are used, such as the distance from the snout to top of preopercle, the differences between the various species in regard to the general size of the head become less clear and significant, and one can only say that snout to preopercle is more than (28 — .02L) percent of L in 7. longifilis, less than (28 — .O2L) but more than (25 — .02L) percent of L in the other species. A similar situation obtains in regard to the distance from snout to pectorals, which is more than (42 — .02L) percent of L in 7. longifilis, less than (41 — .02L) but more than (38 — .02L) in the others. There is undoubtedly a valid difference between 7’. bifurcata and T.. oregoni in regard to the length of the dermal flap of the gill cover, and thus also in regard to the over- all length of the head. But the size of the dermal flap of 7. homoptera can unfortu- nately not be determined with any degree of certainty in the present state of the type specimen. It is, therefore, in the dimensions of the jaws relative to each other and to the length of the specimen, rather than in the general dimensions of the head, that we find the most significant and useful proportions for the differentiation of the species, in correla- tion with other features. Genus Talismania Goode and Bean, 1895 Bathytroctes, subgenus Talismania Goode and Bean, 1895, p. 43 (partim, genotype, B. homop- terus, only); nec Norman, 1930, p. 269; nec Fowler, 1934, p. 249. Talismania Jordan and Evermann, 1896, p. 455 (T. homoptera, only); Roule, 1919, p. 6 (7. homoptera, only); Parr, 1951, pp. 5, 11; nec Koefoed, 1927, p. 55. Bathytroctes, subgenus Nemabathytroctes Fowler, 1934, p. 252. Aveust 1952 PARR: REVISION Nemabathytroctes Parr, 1937, p. 7; Parr, 1951, pp. 5, 10. Pectorals with 11-12 rays, upper ray greatly produced. Dorsal and anal fins subequal and ap- proximately opposite. Caudal fin with produced lobes (in the species in which the caudal fin has been preserved). Ventral fins mserted near the middle of the length, with 6-7 rays. Heads large, not less than (88 — .02L) percent of L. Snouts long, 10-12, or more than ? (13 — .02L) ?, percent of L. Mouth large, lower jaws more than (20 — .02L) percent of L. Premaxil- laries of normal shape but with a short external series of horizontal teeth anteriorly, well above the regular dentition at the edge of the mouth. Teeth otherwise in single series in premaxillary, maxillary, lower jaw and palatine, and in one or two transverse rows on vomer. Maxillary series as long as, or longer than that of the premaxil- lary. Two supramaxillaries, with slight or no mobility relative to maxillary. Head pointed in lateral view, with a virtually straight dorsal profile ending at a slightly promi- nent snout, marked by the upper, horizontal dentition of the premaxillaries. Gill opening wide, extending upward to, or nearly to, the level of the upper margin of orbit. Operculum moderate to large, extending well above its attachment to hyomandibular. Sub- operculum large, varying in form with the species. Interoperculum normal. Preoperculum rather wide, its upper limb subvertical. Branchiostegals 6-8. Stomach siphonal; 8-10 simple pyloric caeca. Anus near anal fin. Body scaly, head without scales. No shoulder organ. Apparently luminous organs present in orbital cavity of at least one species. Our knowledge of the genus is based upon only five specimens of the following sizes and sex: T. longifilis 116 mm L (i.e., length without caudal fin), immature. 7’. homoptera 161 mm L. Internal organs missing. 7’. bifurcata 202 mm L, mature female. 7’. oregonit 240 and 246 mm L, mature females. These dimensions should be borne in mind in evaluating the statements of relative propor- tions given in the following key by use of the expressions proposed by Parr, 1949. The condition of the type specimen of 7. homoptera leaves the exact form of the posterior margin of the subopercle in doubt. It can be OF GENUS TALISMANIA 269 definitely established only that the lower posterior corner of the suboperculum ends rather bluntly with a group of 3 or 4 very short and fine points, side by side at its tip. It is indicated that this species may not have any of the very long, widely separated, simple points higher up along the posterior margin of the subopercle, that seem characteristic of the other members of the genus, but the writer is not satisfied that this can be taken to be definitely proven by the type speci- men as observed by him. KEY TO THE GENUS TALISMANIA A. Heads large, more than (41 — .02L) percent of L. Jaws very long, upper jaws about (23 — .02L), lower jaw (24.5 — .02L) percent of L. Produced pectoral rays very strong. Indo- Pacific. 1. Scales small, 90-95 in a longitudinal series, about 35 in a transverse count. Suboperculum with three separate points. Head about (41.5 — .02L) percent of L. Gulf of Aden. longifilis (Brauer, 1902) 2. Seales larger, about 65-70 in a longi- tudinal series, about 22-23 in a trans- verse count. Suboperculum with only two long points. Head about (42.1 — .02L) percent of L. Gulf of Panama. bifurcata (Parr, 1951) B. Heads smaller, less than (40 — .02L) percent of L. Jaws much shorter, upper jaws less than (21 — .02L), lower jaw less than (21.5 — .02L) percent of L. Scales large, about 60-65 in a longitudinal series and about 20-24 in a transverse count. Produced pectoral rays not very strong. Atlantic. 1. Upper jaws extend beyond centre of eye but fall conspicuously short of reaching the vertical from the pos- terior margin of orbit, being about 2 percent of L shorter than lower jaw. Ventrals slightly behind the mid- dle of body, snout to ventrals about 17 percent of L longer than snout to pectorals. Dorsal fin with only about 19 rays, its base about 2 percent of L shorter than base of anal fin. Eastern North Atlantic. homoptera (Vaillant, 1888) 2. Upper jaws extend nearly to vertical from posterior rim of orbit, being less than 1 percent of L shorter than lower jaw. Ventrals slightly in advance of the middle of body, snout to ventrals only about 12.6 — 14.5 per cent of L longer than snout to pectorals. Dorsal fin with 23 or 24 rays, its base not more than 1 percent of L shorter than the base of anal fin. Gulf of ING SU COR rater: ..oregont, n. Sp. 270 Talismania oregoni, n. sp. Jaws relatively short, but upper jaw less than one (.5-.8) percent of L shorter than lower jaw, equivalent to (20 — .02L) percent of L. Lower jaw equivalent to (20.5 — .02L) to (21.4 — .02L) percent of L. Upper jaw extends nearly to the vertical from the posterior rim of orbit. Head moderate, with rather short dermal flap of gill- cover, equivalent to (38 — .02L) to (39.8 — .02L) percent of L. Subopercle ends posteriorly in three long separate points. Lower margin of lower sub- opercular point with minute, oblique serrations. Interorbital space flat. Ventrals inserted slightly in advance of the middle of body, their distance from the snout only 12.5-14.5 percent of L longer than the distance from snout to pectorals. The longest remaining fragment of the produced pectoral finray equals about 35 percent of L. The full length of the produced ray would undoubtedly be substantially greater, although the proximal part is not particularly strengthened and thickened. The form of the caudal fin is un- known. The bases of dorsal and anal fins are about 19-21 percent of L. The specimens show the following measure- ments and proportions, with those of the cotype given in parenthesis: Length without caudal fin: Type 240 mm (cotype 246 mm). Proportions in percent of length without caudal: Head, including dermal margin of gill cover, 35.0 (33.3). Snout 11.1 (10.2). Orbit 5.5 (5.7). Interorbital width 6.3 (5.4). Over-all length of upper jaws 15.8 (15.0). Lower Jaw to external corner of angular 16.6 (15.5). Snout to top of preopercle 21.8 (20.3). Snout to dorsal fin 62.9 (64.5). Snout to anal fin 63.6 (62.9). Snout to pectorals 35.8 (33.2). Snout to ventrals 48.3 (47.7). Base of dorsal fin 20.4 (18.9). Base of anal 20.0 (20.7). JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 42, No. 8 Greatest depth of body 22.7 (22.3). Least depth of caudal peduncle 8.5 (8.1). D. 223-244. A. 23-234. P. 12. V. 7. Br. 6-7. First gill arch with 7-8/1/17-18 gill rakers, longest only about 3.3 percent of L. Stomach siphonal; 8 or 9 simple pyloric caeca, the longest 8.7-10.6 percent of L, substantially longer than those found in 7’. longifilis and T.. bifurcata, but the significance of this difference is uncertain. About 51 pores in lateral line, about 63-64 scales in a longitudinal series immediately above, about 11 between lateral line and origin of dorsal fin, and about 12 between lateral line and anal fin. There is no clear evidence of ventral or dorsal keels, except immediately before dorsal fin. But two median ventral scales preserved in the tho- racic region suggest the presence of some kind of organ surrounded by black integument under the broad posterior point of each, while a single scale still present outside of the median shows only a narrow, black tip. No indications of whitish, luminous (?) bodies in orbits. Gulf of Mexico. Oregon station 349. 29°09’ Lat. N., 87°58’ long. W. Depth 470-500 fathoms. May 21, 1951. Holotype, U.S.N.M. no. 160482. Cotype no. ?. BIBLIOGRAPHY Braver, A. Diagnosen von neuen Tiefseefischen. Zool. Anz. 25: 277-298. 1902. Fow ter, H. W. Descripitions of new fishes obtained 1907 to 1910 chiefly in the Philippine Islands. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia 85: 233- 367. 1934. Goopk, G. B., and Bran, T. H. Oceanic ichthy- ology. U. S. Nat. Mus. Spee. Bull. 2. 1895. JorpaNn, D.S., and Evermann, B. W. The fishes of North and Middle America. Pt. I. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 47. 1896. Korrorp, E. Fishes from the sea-bottom. Rep. Sci. Res. Michael Sars N. Atlantic Exp. 1910, 4: pt. 1. 1927. Fic. 1.—Talismania oregoni, n.sp.: Supramaxillaries and opercular bones artificially exposed. Eye represented by orbit. Drawn by author. Aueustr 1952 Norman, J. R. Oceanic fishes and flatfishes collected in 1925-1927. Discovery Rep. 2: 261-370. 1930. Parr, A. E. Concluding report on fishes. (Third Oceanogr. Exp. ‘‘Pawnee’’). Bull. Bingham Oceanogr. Coll. 3: (art. 7). 1937. . An approximate formula for stating taxo- nomically significant proportions of fishes with reference to growth changes. Copeia, 1949 (1): 47-55. 1949. PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 271 . Preliminary revision of the Alepocephalidae. Amer. Mus. Noy. 1531: 1-21. 1951. Route, L. Poissons provenant des campagnes du yacht Princesse Alice et du yacht Hirondelle II. Res. Camp. Sci. Monaco, fase. 52. 1919. VaILLANT, L. L. Poissons. Exp. Sei. Travailleur et Talisman. Paris, 1888. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY 456TH MEETING OF BOARD OF MANAGERS The 456th meeting of the Board of Managers, held in the Cosmos Club on May 12, 1952, was called to order at 8:02 p.m. by President Ram- BERG. Others attending were: H. S. Rappers, J. A. STEVENSON, W. F. Fosuac, A. T. McPuHrEr- son, C. F. W. Murseseck, R. G. Bares, W. R. WepbEtL, W. A. Dayton, C. A. Berts, R. 8. Diu, F. W. Hoves, N. R. Exurs, M. A. Mason, F. M. Deranporr, and, by invitation, E. H. WaLker and J. P. E. Morrison. The President announced the appointment of Watiace R. BropE as Chairman of the new Science Education Committee, other members to be announced at a later date. A letter from the Chairman of the Committee on Meetings, Harry W. WELLS, who could not be present, was read, requesting a change in the next meeting date to the fourth Thursday in October. This change in lieu of the regular meet- ing date on the third Thursday was approved by the Board, as it will insure a joint meeting with the Anthropological Society to be addressed by Dr. C. E. Wititams. Martin A. Mason reported mentioning the desire on the part of the Academy to collaborate with its Affiliated Societies at a meeting of the Council of the Civil Engineering Society. After the meeting Colonel Hough reported that he also had taken the matter up with the Society of Military Engineers and that they would be glad to take part in a joint symposium should such be arranged. Presumably this matter will be revived for discussion when meetings of other Affiliated Societies are resumed in the fall. Mr. WALKER expressed his regrets that new members do not receive something other than a letter when they are first elected and actually know very little about the Academy and _ its aims. During the ensuing discussion by Messrs. Mason, Rappleye, Betts, Dayton, and others it was indicated that the proposed supplemental list of members since the last issue of the Red Book (no longer available for distribution), al- though of use to those owning the last Red Book, would not be especially useful or its receipt gratifying to newly elected members. In addi- tion to a complete Academy membership list, it would be desirable to have the Bylaws, some- thing of the history, objectives, and aims of the Academy, and information as to the relationship of the Affiliated Societies, in printed form. The matter of the cost and labor of preparation in- volved was mentioned. The discussion was con- cluded by approval of a motion by Mr. Mason that the matter be referred to the Policy and Planning Committee to report at the first meet- ing in the fall their recommendations as to how new members should be initiated and what they should receive. L. E. Yocum, Chairman of the Committee on Grants-in-Aid for Research, on the basis of ap- proval of his committee at a meeting on April 29, submitted a recommendation that an Amer- ican Association for the Advancement of Sci- ence grant of $200 be made to Dr. Freeman A. Wess, curator of the American Type Culture Collection, for purchase of equipment to permit an examination of the Lederberg Process of pre- serving bacterial cultures by drying on silica gel. Details of the proposal were submitted. This grant was approved by the Board. Martin A. Mason, Chairman, presented cop- ies of a report for his Committee on a Junior Academy of Sciences. This report and the ap- pended proposed Constitution and Bylaws for the Junior Academy were discussed by Messrs. Rappleye and McPherson. In view of the present Bylaws of the Academy, it was decided to sub- mit to the membership an amendment to Article I, adding to it as one of the listed objectives a section ‘9. Sponsoring the Washington Junior Academy of Sciences” and a second permissive 272 amendment, Article XI, ‘‘The Academy may establish and assist a Washington Junior Acad- emy of Sciences for the encouragement of in- terest in science among students.” It was de- cided that a ballot for these amendments should be sent out within two weeks together with ex- planatory material and, for the information of the membership, a copy of the committee’s re- port and the proposed Constitution and Bylaws for the Washington Junior Academy of Sciences. The Secretary announced the receipt of notifi- cation of the death of Dr. Gzorcze W. McCoy on April 2, 1952. The Secretary reported for Vice President A. G. McNitsu, who was unable to attend the meet- ing, that the Philosophical Society of Washington had appointed a special committee composed of WruiiaM R. Duryer (Chairman), I. C. GARDNER, and R. K. Cook to study and make recommenda- tions as to suitable projection equipment and a JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 42, No. 8 suitable public address system for equipping the new Auditorium of the Cosmos Club which is expected to be available for use in the fall. It was felt that the Academy and a number of its Affihated Societies that will make use of the Auditorium will be interested in having excellent facilities available, and may therefore be in- terested as a group in providing desirable equip- ment. After a discussion, the President suggested that the Chairman of the Meetings Committee, Harry W. Wextts, look into the matter with Mr. Duryee and express the interest of the Acad- emy in this project. J. A. Srevenson, Archivist, commented that he found the reading of the early bound records of the Academy, turned over to him at the last meeting of the Board, very rewarding and men- tioned several items of interest. The meeting adjourned at 9:35 p.m. F. M. Dreranporr, Secretary. Obituary Oscar Benwoop Hunter died suddenly at Washington, D. C., on December 19, 1951, of a heart attack. He was born in Cherrydale, Va., on January 31, 1888. He received his medical degree from the George Washington University School of Medicine in 1912. In 1916 he received an A.B. degree and the following year an A.M. degree, both from the George Washington Uni- versity. He served his alma mater as professor of bacteriology and pathology from 1916 to 1932 and assistant dean of the medical school from 1918 to 1932. He was an active member of numerous scientific societies where he served in official capacities. He was past president of the Southern Medical Association, Medical Society of the District of Columbia, the George Wash- ington University Medical Society, Washington Society of Pathologists and the American Thera- peutic Society. He was also a founding member of the College of American Pathologists and served this college as local governor. Dr. Hunter was also a member of numerous other organiza- tions, including many local clubs, the National Safety Council, Board of Trade, and the Cham- ber of Commerce of the United States. He served as major in the medical reserve corps, U. 8S. Army. At the time of his death he was vice- president of the American Medical Association. Water A. BLOEDORN. Officers of the Washington Academy of Sciences PROSTOC TE Pens Tyee: EP NE SET Water RamBerc, National Bureau of Standards PIR ESTOCTUL-CLECE Ri TAN ee ee ne Odo nes F, M. Serzisr, U. S. National Museum SOGRARUTU a aires eee F. M. Deranporr, National Bureau of Standards LOR SUIC RARE Se ee eee re Howarp S. Raprieye, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey PAPE CILLOUS UL Maerua ses estates! his Poe eas ehnce OS yale Joun A. Stevenson, Plant Industry Station Custodian and Subscription Manager of Publications Haravp A. Resper, U. 8. National Museum Vice-presidents Representing the Affiliated Socteties: iPhilosophicallsociety or Washingtone..>.44-- +... -- cease see ses « A. G. McNisuH Anthropological Society of Washington........................ Waupo R. WEpDEL Biological Society, of Washington. .5-............+.s006:5-+5 00% Hueu T. O’ NEILL ChemicallSocietysoh Washington... 4s5s4oese ses. e ee joes sea Joun K. Taytor Entomological Society of Washington........................ FrEepERIcK W. Poos NationaliGeorraphiciSociety.---08 sees acess esosssssosnea: ALEXANDER WETMORE Geoloricalésociety,of Washingtonas- ose eee eos fea A. NELSON SAYRE Medical Society of the District of Columbia........................ FrepD O. Coz ColumbrTapristoricalesocietyasnca- erratic e tore GILBERT GROSVENOR Bovanieall society, ot Washington... 50s ese ee se eees eee dee Les M. Hutcuins Washington Section, Society of American Foresters.......... Wiuiiam A. Dayton Weashinetonisociety, of Hngineers: (5+) s.ssae cesses ees cece: Cuirrorp A. Brtrts Washington Section, American Institute of Electrical Engineers...... A. H. Scorr Washington Section, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. .RicHarp 8. Diuu Helminthological Society of Washing tont dt yaae enact oer bee L. A. SPINDLER Washington Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists...... Aneus M. GrirFrin Washington Post, Society of American Military Engineers...... Fioyp W. Houcs Washington Section, Institute of Radio Engineers........... Hersert G. Dorsry District of Columbia Section, American Society of Civil Engineers Martin A. Mason District of Columbia Section, Society for Experimental Biology and Medicine N. R. Exvuis Elected Members of the Board of Managers: Momenuany; (ODS 5 sy cee os + 4ejne eles C. F. W. Musrsesecr, A. T. McPHERSON PROM MATIUTAT YODA a yasae ciietstae ctectiew slike einer Sara EH. Branuam, Mitton Harris ROMAIN Taal Qa Mee aicse coin, ted ve passe ent cilesefe eve ale ruegsoetel Rocer G. Bars, W. W. Drexu loan! Of MIGHOUCS aso 4coc0sdooesdeor ee ase All the above officers plus the Senior Editor BOUL ARO MMELCULOTSROMG VAS SOCIALE GULOTS) ene sec eee eee. [See front cover] Executive Committee....WALTER RAMBERG (chairman), F.M. Serzuer, H.S.RapPLeyeE, WiuuramM A. Dayton, F. M. DEFANDORF Committee on Membership. .E. H. WALKER (chairman), M. S. ANDERSON, CLARENCE Cort- TAM, R. C. Duncan, JoHN Fazer, G. T. Faust, I. B. Hansen, FRanK Kracex, D. B. Joneses, E. G. REINHARD, Retce I. Saiter, Leo A. Sarnn, F. A. Smita, Hernz Specut, H.M. Trent, ALFRED WEISSLER Committee on Meetings....H. W. Weuts (chairman), Wm. R. Campsretu, W. R. CHar- LINE, D. J. Davis, H. G. Dorsry, O. W. TorrESON Committee on Monographs (W. N. FENTON, chairman): FROME TNU A Tay aM GOSH wesc Sorel iehs, or evancccleasiehals ue torrets cs tens R. W. a P. W. OMAN PRO ara GAP vos os asses goteese eau istorarh cascthae iere Oren bois 8S. F. Buaks, F. C. Kracex AN) (ETE? TEE aa tnen aeeho pecan tere ei oeroIn bin ar oimee rte W.N. FENTON, ‘ALAN STONE Committee on Awards for Scientific Achievement (J. R. SWALLEN, general chairman): For Biological Sciences............. J. R. SWALLEN (chairman), L. M. Hurcuins, MareGaret Pitrman, F. W. Poos, L. P. Scuuttz For Engineering Sciences............. R. C. Duncan (chairman), A. C. FIELDNER, Wayne C. Haut, J. W. McBurney, O. 8. Reapine, H. L. Warrremore op IPhapngall SCOGRCB8.000000n00800000000% L. A. Woop Ghefianen, P. H. ABELSON, F. 8S. Dart, Grorce W. IRvina, JR., J. H. McMruuen For Teaching of Science......M. A. Mason (chairman), F. E. Fox, M. H. Martin Committee on Grants-in-aid for Research....... L. E. Yocum (chairmanis H. N. Haton, K. F. HeRzFELD Committee on Policy and Planning: MO anUanyAlOGSie.Uectied cele sesh termes + W. A. Dayton (chairman), N. R. Smira FROMIRMUATY OO scrciays is nos vias Aeiste oo elebeuseseltkecsistns Tel, 18. ore: Jr., W. W. Rusey ROP ATUAL YL OOOTE cae ssc ce reese ieceponct ates slvenere eieioncun rei teacher L. W. Parr, F. B. SILsBEE Committee on Encouragement of Science Talent (A. T. McPuErson, chairman): ROR ATIVATV EL OOo -sctlets or stlecsees iss cterte Siac cvantins ailaotyucategesauelocs A. H. CuarK, F. L. Moxnipr PROPTAIU STs LOS a a cagecne necaevtavecs eye: seeeleisiounyer sashes J. M. Cautpwe tu, W. L. Scumirr LORMAN UAT GOD wi erases secnatesesese tee salaa cs -gapeuqsersitneelstis ATL. McPuErson, W. T. Reap [ROAST OOO Oo (Chooneeds Gi) Ake Als ANG SGscaganocdceeoagdosgudoongcusacG F, M. Serzuer Committee of Auditors...... C. L. Gazin (chairman), Loutss M. Russet, D. R. Tats Committee of Tellers. ..GEORGE P. WALTON (chairman), GroraE H. Coons, C. L. GARNER CONTENTS Page GroLtocy.—The Murphree Valley anticline, Alabama. Grorcr W. ST OSB Res ea eee eeel ee attics Saaz te cutlets ee dae aR eae ee 241 PALEONTOLOGY.—Lhe arms of Haerteocrinus. HARRELL L. STRIMPLE. 245 PALEONTOLOGY.—Designation of the type species of Pseudochama (addi- tional note). | Davin Nico... 25 /05.0s..).... 22-2 oe eee 248 EntomoLocy.—The ant larvae of the myrmicine tribe Crematogastrini. GrorGE C. WHEELER and JEANETTE WHEELER................. 248 ZooLtocy.—Notes on the history and distribution of the reptiles. Avus- PEE N EES ©LAR Kilo. fags ieee enh Sienna ele aneod awe deh sie 262 ZooLocy.—Poritextularia, a new Recent foraminiferal genus. ALFRED Re eorprica and HELEN TPAPPAN (2.0. 5.5406 05-0 eee 264 Matacotoey.—A new glycymerid from the Western Atlantic. Davip INT COLO Mfrs eet oa sp Ooteven ioe aedatecgsuellekedateueea teres se eee Ct 266 IcHTHYOLOGY.—Revision of the genus Talismanza, with description of a new species from the Gulf of Mexico. A. HE. Parr.............. 268 PROCEEDINGS! THE, ACADEMY. 2)... cjec0ejcec2 sede eso ee 271 OxnITUARY,: Oscar Benwood'Hunter. -:.:-.-..-.-......-....0ee eee 272 This Journal is Indexed in the International Index to Periodicals. fo oO 9 D ce) Para